Fontespesquisa Refrigeracao PDF

APRESENTAO - GEMINI
Climatizador a Ar - GEMINI
As unidades climatizadoras GEMINI esto disponveis em:
16 Modelos
Vazes de ar que variam de 1.050 a 34.000 m3/h,
Capacidades nominais de 2 a 50 TR.
AGENDA
1. Detalhes construtvos do gabinete.

2. Movimentao de ar.
3. Transferncia de calor.
4. Indoor Air Quality- IAQ.
5. Mdulos disponveis.
6. Software de seleo.
7. Resumo.
Detalhes construtivos - GEMINI

Fabricada em perfis de alumnio extrudado,a estrutura possui
caractersticas de excelente rigidez e leveza, alm de
propriedades no corrosivas.
Detalhe do perfil estrutural

Os perfis de alumnio so fixados por meio de cantos 3D em nylon.
Detalhe do canto em nylon
Uma armao estrutural exclusiva

suporta o peso da unidade,
possibilitando uma remoo fcil e
segura dos painis para manuteno

Todos os painis so em parede dupla com ncleo isolante em poliuretano
injetado,17mm de espessura, que proporciona excelentes propriedades
trmicas, acstica e mecnica ao equipamento.
Perfil do Painel
17 mm
Ncleo de PU
Chapa
Ao Galvanizado
Diferentemente das gaxetas de fechamento, construdas de espuma de clulas

fechadas, que perdem sua resistncia com o passar do tempo, o sistema exclusivo de
vedao do GEMINI possui uma vedao resistente, para manter a sua forma e
conseqentemente a capacidade de vedao, aps ciclos repetidos de compresso.
Todo o conjunto montado sobre uma base rgida, fabricada em chapa de ao
galvanizado, que confere estabilidade e nivelamento ao equipamento, evitando assim a
necessidade de construo de base em alvenaria.
A estrutura do painel em ao laminado permite que o equipamento opere facilmente

com aplicaes de alta presso.
O GEMINI utiliza vedaes com lminas triplas, co-extrudadas que

garantem a vedao sem a necessidade da utilizao de adesivos.
3
2
1
120 mm

A interligao dos mdulos no poderia ser mais fcil, pois somente uma simples
ferramenta necessria para unir todos os mdulos, o que resulta em uma
instalao eficiente, e em economia de tempo e de dinheiro.
Movimentao de Ar - GEMINI
Tipos de Ventilador
Ventilador centrfugo de dupla aspirao com ps curvadas

para frente sirocco

para trs limit load
Ventilador de rotor duplo (dois ventiladores de dupla aspirao formando um
s conjunto com eixo de acionamento comum), por climatizador sempre que a
capacidade nominal for superior a 10 TR
Sirocco
Limit Load
Ventilador de rotor triplo (trs ventiladores de dupla aspirao formando um s
conjunto com eixo de acionamento comum), por climatizador sempre que a
capacidade nominal for superior a 35 TR (somente para Sirocco).
Sirocco
Ventiladores construdos em chapa de ao com tratamento anti-corrosivo, e

rotores balanceados esttica e dinamicamente.
Os rolamentos dos ventiladores so do tipo rgido auto-compensador de
esferas, blindados e com lubrificao permanente
Movimentao de Ar - Gemini
Motor eltrico, Standard trifsico, grau de proteo IP55, grau de isolamento classe B
e fator de servio 1,15.
Opes de motores de alto rendimento.
Caractersticas:
9A transmisso feita
por meio de polias e
correias em V
dimensionadas para
cada caso.
Benefcios:
Diversas combinaes
de polias fixas dos
ventiladores e polias
regulveis dos motores
(at 7,5 HP), proporcionando
o ajuste da rotao dos
ventiladores ao valor
selecionado.
Isolao Vibratria - Gemini

O conjunto motor e ventilador possui uma base de inrcia, que est apoiada em
amortecedores de borracha ou mola, conforme o tipo de ventilador e tamanho,
permitindo uma operao com baixo nvel de rudo e vibrao.
Ventilador Sirocco
Coxim de Borracha
Ventilador Limit-load
Mola
Nos mdulos de ventilao instalada na boca de descarga do ventilador uma
lona flexvel, de tecido plstico, para evitar as transmisso de vibrao ao duto
e vice-versa.
Lona flexvel
Lona flexvel
Ventilador Limit Load
Ventilador Sirocco
Transferncia de Calor - GEMINI
Serpentina de Resfriamento
Caractersticas:
9Tubos de cobre .
9Opes de 3, 4, 6 ou 8 filas.
9Diversas opes de tubos
por circuito e tubos em altura
Benefcios:
Permite sempre selecionar
a melhor soluo tcnica e
econmica para seu sistema.
Serpentina
Resfriamento
Espaamento entre aletas

Caractersticas:
9Opes de espaamento de 8 ou 12
aletas por polegada (FPI), fixadas por
expanso mecnica do tubo de cobre.
9Opes em aluminio ou aleta dourada
Benefcios:
Quanto maior o nmero de
FPI maior a sua capacidade,
para uma mesma rea de face
e nmero de rows, com maior
perda de presso no fluxo de ar.
Elevada eficincia na troca
trmica.
Aletas

Coletores em tubos de cobre providos de luvas soldadas em lato com rosca macho do
tipo BSP, para conexo rede hidrulica. Opo tipo NPT.
BSP = 150PSI , NPT = 300PSI
Dreno para purga de gua.
Dreno para purga de ar
Serpentina de Aquecimento
Caractersticas:
9Construda com 2 filas de
profundidade e 8 aletas por
polegada.
9Montada internamente
ao mdulo trocador de calor,
aps a serpentina de gua
gelada.
Benefcios:
Permite sempre selecionar
a melhor soluo tcnica e
econmica para seu sistema.
Posio do lado de hidrulica - GEMINI
Importante: Sempre tomar como referncia a frente da mquina,

vista pelo filtro de ar.
Lado de Hidraulica Esquerdo
Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) - GEMINI
Uma bandeja para recolhimento

de condensado, permite a
retirada total da gua
condensada, atendendo as
recomendaes da norma
ASHRAE-62.
IAQ - GEMINI
Bandeja de condensado revestida internamente em material termoplstico do tipo
ABS, e termoisolada em poliuretano expandido, espessura de 35 mm, densidade
mdia de 48 kg/m3 e coeficiente de transmisso trmica k de 0,68 W/m2.k.
ABS na face
interna
PU na face
externa
IAQ - GEMINI
A bandeja de condensado possue arestas curvas e dreno com caimento
lateral.
IAQ - GEMINI
IAQ - GEMINI
Para condicionadores acima

de 20 TR o mdulo trocador
de calor possui 2 (duas)
bandejas, com dois pontos de
drenos sendo um em cada
extremidade
Bandeja 2
Bandeja 1
IAQ - GEMINI
Conexo de dreno dimetro

1.1/4 em PVC.
IAQ - GEMINI
Caractersticas:
Mltiplas opes de filtros.
Atendem a nova Norma NBR 16401
Benefcios:
Permite timas selees em custo,
performance e Indoor Air Quality (IAQ).
Oferece uma ampla gama de eficincias de
filtragem
Alguns modelos de Filtros
G4 Porta Mantas 1
G4 Descartvel 1 ou 2
G4 Descartvel 1 + F9 Plissado 1
IAQ - GEMINI
Os filtros so montados em armaes metlicas (caixilho de filtro) de fcil
remoo e instalao.
Quando utilizado o mdulo opcional de caixa de mistura, o sistema de filtragem
de ar estar integrado a caixa de mistura.
Suporte para filtros de 1 ou 2, com opo de combinao com 2 filtros de 1
dos tipos G3 ou G4 de fibra de vidro.
Mdulos Disponveis - GEMINI
A unidade GEMINI formada por trs mdulos:
Mdulo trocador de calor
Mdulo de ventilao
Mdulo caixa de
mistura (opcional)
Mdulos Disponveis - GEMINI

Estes mdulos so pr-definidos de fbrica, optando-se pela montagem na
posio vertical ou horizontal, com diversas posies de descarga do
ventilador.
O conceito modular permite facilidade de transporte e manuseio na obra.
As posies de montagem do Ventilador esto a seguir:
Mdulos Trocador de Calor - GEMINI
O mdulo trocador de calor composto por:

Serpentina de resfriamento.
Serpentina de aquecimento (opcional).
Bandeja de dreno.
Filtros (opcional).
Mdulos Ventilador - GEMINI
O mdulo ventilao composto por:

Ventilador.
Motor.
Acionamentos (polias e correias).
Amortecedores de Vibrao
(borracha ou mola)
Mdulos Caixa de Mistura - GEMINI
As opes do mdulo caixa de mistura so:

Damper 100% + Damper 20%
- Retorno Superior + Ar Externo Esquerdo
- Retorno Superior + Ar Externo Direito
- Retorno Superior + Ar Externo Frontal
- Retorno Frontal + Ar Externo Esquerdo
- Retorno Frontal + Ar Externo Direito
- Retorno Frontal + Ar Externo Superior
Damper 100% + Damper 100%
- Frontal + Superior
Damper 100%
- Frontal
- Superior
Damper 20%
- Face Superior
- Face Frontal
- Face Esquerda
- Face Direita
Filtragem (opcional)
Retorno Frontal + Ar externo Superior
Mdulos Caixa de Mistura - GEMINI
Para os mdulos de trocador de calor e caixa de mistura esto disponveis as seguintes

opes de filtros:
- G2 Metlico lavvel 1
- G4 descartvel 1
- G4 descartvel 2
- G4 porta mantas 1
- G2 Metlico G2 lavvel 1 + G4 descartvel 1
- G3 descartvel 1 + G4 descartvel 1
- G3 descartvel 1 + G4 porta mantas 1
- G4 descartvel 1 + F9 Plissado
- G4 porta mantas1 + F9 Plissado
Sequncia de Montagem - GEMINI
MT MV
Horizontal
MM MT MV
MV
Mdulo Ventilador
MT
Mdulo Trocador
MM
Mdulo Mistura
Vertical
MT
MV
MV
MV
MT
MM MT
Software de Seleo ECLIMA - GEMINI

possvel selecionar o Climatizador GEMINI atravs do software de seleo
ECLIMA, fornecido gratuitamente pela YORK International.
Site: www.johnsoncontrols.com.br
1 Passo - Clicar em
Building Efficiency

2 Passo - Clicar em HVAC
3 Passo Clicar em
Software Eclima YORK

4 Passo Para fazer o download, clicar em Download Eclima YORK

Programa ECLIMA
Dvidas ???
Denis N. Paulon
Engenheiro de Aplicao - Sistemas HVAC
(11) 3475-7092
denis.paulon@jci.com
Johnson Controls - Brasil
Climatizador de Ar Gemini
Modelo YH
Manual Tcnico
Climatizador de Ar
Vazo de ar de 1.200 a 40.000 m3/h
..............................................
Indice
1. Descrio Geral .....................................................................................................
2. Nomenclatura do Mdulo de Ventilao .................................................................
3. Nomenclatura do Mdulo Trocador de Calor .........................................................
4. Tabela 1 - Cdigo dos Circuitos .............................................................................
5. Nomenclatura do Mdulo da Caixa de Mistura .......................................................
6. Caractersticas Tcnicas .......................................................................................
7. Software de Seleo ..............................................................................................
8. Nmero de circuitos Serpentina de Resfriamento .................................................
9. Conexes hidrulicas Serpentina de Resfriamento ..............................................
10. Configurao da Serpentina de Aquecimento- YH ...............................................
11. Disposio e Quantidade de Filtros Planos - YH .................................................
12. Motores Disponveis por Gabinete .......................................................................
13. Caractersticas Tcnicas dos Motores 60 Hz ......................................................
15. Ventiladores - Posies de Descarga ..................................................................
16. Modelos de Ventiladores - YH ...............................................................................
17. Curva de Performance do Ventilador Sirocco - Gabinete 2 e 3 ...........................
18. Curva de Performance do Ventilador Sirocco - Gabinete 4 .................................
22. Curva de Performance do Ventilador Sirocco - Gabinete 10 ...............................
28. Curva de Performance do Ventilador Sirocco - Gabinete 30 e 35 .......................
30. Curva de Performance do Ventilador Limit Load Gabinete 8 a 10 .......................
31. Curva de Performance do Ventilador Limit Load Gabinete 14 a 15 .....................
34. Dados Dimensionais - Ventilador Sirocco ...........................................................
35. Dados Dimensionais Mdulo Trocador de Calor Ventilador Sirocco ...................
36. Dados Dimensionais Mdulo Caixa de Mistura Sirocco ......................................
37. Dados Dimensionais Ventilador Limit Load .........................................................
38. Dados Dimensionais Mdulo Trocador de Calor Ventilador Limit Load ...............
39. Dados Dimensionais Mdulo Caixa de Mistura Limit Load ..................................
40. Disposio dos Mdulos - Posio Vertical .........................................................
41. Disposio dos Mdulos - YH Posio Horizontal ...............................................
42. Acstica ................................................................................................................
43. Especificaes de Engenharia ............................................................................
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
9
10
11
12
13
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
40
40
41
43
43
44
44
45
47
.....................................
1. Descrio Geral
CLIMATIZADOR GEMINI - YH
As unidades climatizadoras GEMINI esto disponveis em 16
modelos, com vazes de ar que variam de 1.200 a 40.000 m3/h,
e capacidades nominais de 2 a 50 TR.
Serpentina de Aquecimento (Opcional)

So construdas em tubos de cobre sem costura de 1/2", 8
aletas por polegada , 2 filas de profundidade e 4 tubos por
circuito. Esta instalada aps a serpentina de gua gelada, no
mdulo trocador.
As principais caractersticas da linha Gemini so:

Conceito Modular
A unidade GEMINI formada pelos seguintes mdulos:
- Mdulo trocador de calor
- Mdulo de ventilao
- Mdulo Caixa de Mistura (OPCIONAL)
Estes mdulos so definidos pelo cliente, optando-se pela
montagem na posio vertical ou horizontal, com diversas
posies de descarga do ventilador.
Gabinete em Estrutura de Alumnio
Construda em perfis de alumnio extrudado, possuem
Os perfis de alumnio so fixados por meio de cantos 3D em
nylon.
Painis em Parede Dupla
Todos os painis so em parede dupla, com ncleo isolante de
poliuretano injetado (17mm de espessura), de densidade mdia
de 40 kg/m 3, que proporcionam propriedades de resistncia
trmica e elevada rigidez mecnica ao conjunto.
O revestimento externo em ao pr-pintado e o interno em ao
galvanizado sem pintura.
Todos os painis possuem uma moldura com juntas
patenteadas co-extrudadas em PVC, proporcionando uma
construo com baixos ndices de vazamentos e livres de pontes
trmicas.
Base dos Mdulos
Todo o conjunto montado sobre uma base rgida, construda
em trilhos de chapa galvanizada alm de evitar a necessidade
de base para apoio e nivelamento dos mdulos, o transporte
seguro do mdulo at o local da instalao.
Bandeja do Condensado
A bandeja fabricada de material termoplstico do tipo ABS,
livre de corroso e isolada com poliuretano injetado.
Diversas opes de filtragem
No mdulo serpentina encontra-se o suporte para colocao de
um filtro de 1" (padro) ou 1 + 1 a 2"(opcional). So disponveis
as seguintes opes de filtros:
- G3 descartvel de 1
- Metlico G1 lavvel de 1 + G3 descartvel de 1
- G2 descartvel de 1 + G3 descartvel de 1.
Ventilador
Conforme as presses necessrias de projeto, os ventiladores
centrfugos de dupla aspirao podem ser do tipo sirocco (ps
curvadas para frente) ou do tipo Limit-Load (ps curvadas para
trs). O acionamento por polia motora regulvel (at motores
de 5 cv), e polia movida fixa.
Base Motor / Ventilador
O conjunto Motor/Ventilador possue uma base, apoiada em
amortecedores de borracha ou mola (conforme o tipo de
ventilador) permitindo uma operao com baixo nvel de rudo e
vibrao.
Mdulo Caixa de Mistura (opcional)
O mdulo caixa de mistura formado por dois dampers, onde
so feitas as fixaes dos dutos de entrada e sada de ar (tomada
de ar externo e ar de retorno) e filtros ded ar. Os dampers so
construdos em chapa de ao galvanizado, com lminas opostas
e eixo para acionamento manual ou automtico.
Motor Eltrico
Motor eltrico trifsico de 2 ou 4 plos, grau de proteo IP55, de
50 ou 60 Hz. Possui classe B de isolamento e categoria N. Podem
ser fornecidos nas tenses de 220, 380 e 440 Volts.Fator de
servio 1,15.
So construdas em tubos de cobre sem costura de 1/2", com a
opo de 8 ou 12 aletas por polegada e 3, 4, 6 ou 8 filas de
profundidade e diferentes tipos de circuitos para atender as mais
variadas necessidades de projeto. Os tubos so expandidos
mecnicamente nas aletas de alumnio. Os coletores de entrada
e sada dgua so fabricados com tubos de cobre e suas
conexes, em lato e rosca do tipo BSP. As cabeceiras dos
aletados so fabricadas com chapa de ao galvanizado. O lado
de hidrulica pode ser fornecido a esquerda ou a direita da
unidade, conforme solicitado no pedido.
.....................................
2. Nomenclatura do Mdulo de Ventilao

YH
Tamanho do gabinete
02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07, 08
09, 10, 14, 15, 18, 20,
25, 30, 35, 40 e 50
V- Mdulo de ventilao
25
AE
L
Lado de acesso ao motor
L - Esquerda
D - Direita
Embalagem
E - Exportao
B - Nacional
Acionamento
conforme selecionamento
Tipo de ventilador
F - Sirocco
B - Limit load
A - Air Foil
Arranjo x Posio de descarga

(obs.: 8)(Pg.8)
A - H1
D - V1
G - V5
B - H3
E - V2
C - H5
F - V3
Potncia do motor (CV)

A - 0,5
G-4
M - 15
B - 0,75
H-5
N - 20
C-1
J - 7,5
D - 1,5
K - 10
E-2
L - 12,5
Rendimento do motor
P - Standard
A - Alto Rendimento
H - Premiun Efficiency - NEMA
Alimentao eltrica (Obs. 1)(Pg.8)

A - 220-380V/3/60 Hz
B - 440V/3/60 Hz
C - 220-380V/3/50 Hz
D - 220-660V/3/50 Hz
E - 380-660V/3/60 Hz
F - 230V/3/60 Hz
G - 208-230-460V/3/60 Hz
Ventiladores - Opes de Descarga
123456
123456
Direita
123456
123456
123456
123456
1234567890
123456
1234567890
123456
1234567890
Esquerda
Sentido do ar
Exemplo:
YH05VFFDAPZZBR
Mdulo de ventilao, capacidade nominal 5 TR, ventilador Sirocco, posio de descarga V3, motor Standard 1,5 CV em 220-380/3/
60Hz, embalagem nacional, lado de acesso ao motor na posio direta.
OBSERVAES:
(1)
A utilizado para 220V partida direta, 220V partida estrela triangulo e 380V partida direta (60 Hz).
B utilizado para 440V partida direta
C utilizado para 220V partida direta, 220V partida estrela triangulo e 380V partida direta (50 Hz).
D utilizado para 380V partida estrela triangulo (50 Hz).
E utilizado para 380V partida estrela triangulo (60 Hz).
F e G somente para motores carcaa NEMA (USA)
(2) Quando o Climatizador for equipado com caixa de mistura, o quadro de filtragem passa a fazer parte da caixa. Neste caso selecionar a opo Z - sem filtros
para este campo.
(3) Serpentina de gua quente sempre de 2 filas, 8 aletas/polegada, 4 tubos/circuito e lado de hidrulica igual ao da serpentina de frio. Nmero mximo de rows at
20TR igual a 8, somando serpentina de resfriamento e aquecimento.
(4) A serpentina de aquecimento deve ser acompanhada de uma serpentina de gua gelada.
(5) Posio do damper 100% somente frontal e superior.
(6) No opo na Caixa de Mistura painel de acesso no mesmo lado do damper lateral.
(7) No opo na Caixa de Mistura damper nas posies de montagem superior e inferior simultaneamente
(8) Posio de descarga V5 somente fancoil at 20TR Sirocco.
.....................................
3. Nomenclatura do Mdulo Trocador de Calor

YH
Tamanho do gabinete
02, 03, 04, 05, 08, 09,
10, 14, 15, 18, 20, 25,
30, 35, 40 e 50
25
ZZ
E
Embalagem
E - Exportao
B - Nacional
No disponvel
T- Mdulo de trocador de calor
Arranjo
A - Horizontal Sirocco
B - Vertical Sirocco
C - Horizontal Limit Load
D - Vertical Limit Load
E - V5 Sirocco
Filtro (obs.2)(Pg.8)
A - Metlico G1 lavvel 1
B - G3 descartvel 1
C - G3 descartvel 2
D - Metlico G1 lavvel 1 + G3 descartvel
E - G2 descartvel 1 + G3 descartvel 1
Z - sem filtro
Nmero de rows x tubos por

circuito conforme tabela 1 pgina 7
No disponvel
Serpentina de aquecimento
(obs.: 3 e 4)(Pg.8)
0 - No
1 - Sim
Nmero de aletas por polegada / Lado

Hidrulica / Revestimento da aleta
A - 8 FPI / ESQ / AL
C - 12 FPI / ESQ / AL
D - 8 FPI / DIR / AL
F - 12 FPI / DIR / AL
G - 8 FPI / ESQ / AD
H - 12 FPI / ESQ / AD
J - 8 FPI / DIR / AD
K - 12 FPI / DIR / AD
12345
Direita
12345
12345
12345
12345
12345
1234567890
123456789012345
123456789012345
Esquerda
Exemplo:
YH05TABFA0ZZZB
Sentido do ar
Mdulo trocador de calor, capacidade nominal 5 TR, horizontal com ventilador Sirocco, filtro G3, serpentina de resfriamento de 4 filas,
8 tubos por circuito, 8 aletas por polegada, embalagem nacional
OBS.:
Quando o climatizador for equipado com caixa de mistura, o quadro de filtragem passa a fazer parte da caixa de mistura.
.....................................
4. Tabela 1 - Cdigos dos Circuitos

Tubos por circuito
Modelo
Rows
2
02
03
04
05
08
09
10
14
15
18
20
25
30
35
40
50
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
A
C
A
E
B
F
K
10
B
D
F
J
G
L
P
12
16
18
E
H
L
G
K
C
H
M
Q
20
N0
tubos
em
altura
10
D
J
12
N
R
A
B
C
D
A
E
B
H
A
E
A
C
A
D
A
D
A
C
A
D
A
C
A
C
A
D
A
C
A
B
A
B
B
F
H
N
D
H
M
B
E
H
N
B
E
H
N
D
G
L
B
E
G
L
D
G
L
D
H
M
B
E
H
M
B
E
J
N
C
J
14
E
F
C
F
J
M
D
G
K
P
D
K
G
P
G
L
N
G
K
Q
T
U
L
R
F
K
P
G
L
Q
16
M
Q
18
G
K
Q
16
L
R
M
W
V
X
20
C
J
B
E
H
M
C
H
B
E
H
M
B
E
J
N
C
F
J
N
B
D
F
J
C
D
F
C
D
F
20
F
J
P
N
F
J
M
F
N
24
K
Q
28
K
N
30
T
J
P
K
Q
K
Q
L
R
S
30
F
P
G
K
P
S
36
L
Q
E
38
H
K
38
G
38
G
.....................................
5. Nomenclatura do Mdulo Caixa de Mistura

YH
25
E
Embalagem
E - Exportao
B - Nacional
Tamanho do gabinete
02, 03, 04, 05, 08, 09,
10, 14, 15, 18, 20, 25,
30, 35, 40 e 50
Lado de remoo do filtro ou acesso

(olhando da entrada de ar (obs.6)
L - Esquerda
R - Direita
A - Ambos
OBS.: Lado de remoo no permite Damper
M- Mdulo Caixa de Mistura
Arranjo
Filtro (obs.2)
B - G3 descartvel 1
C - G3 descartvel 2
Z - sem filtro
Tamanho do Damper 1
0- sem Damper
A - 100% da vazo
B - 20% da vazo
Posio do Damper 1
(obs.: 5, 6, 7, 8 e 9)
0- sem Damper
1 - Frontal
2 - Superior
3 - Lateral esquerda
4 - Lateral direita
Posio do Damper 2
(obs.: 5, 6, 7, 8 e 9)
0- sem Damper
1 - Frontal
2 - Superior
4 - Lateral direita
Tamanho do Damper 2
0- sem Damper
A - 100% da vazo
B - 20% da vazo
Exemplo:
YH05MAA2B1BRB
1
5
Mdulo caixa de mistura, capacidade nominal 5 TR, posio horizontal com ventilador
Sirocco, Damper nmero 1-100% de vazo com posio superior, Damper nmero 2 20% de vazo com posio frontal, filtro G3 descartvel 1 com remoo direita,
embalagem nacional.
Posio dos Dampers

na caixa de mistura
Nota:
Quando o climatizador for equipado com caixa de mistura, o quadro de filtragem passa a fazer da caixa.
Neste caso no possvel a instalao de quadro de filtros no mdulo trocador de calor.
OBSERVAES:
(1)
para este campo.
.....................................
6. Caractersticas Tcnicas
A tabela abaixo permite uma rpida seleo do gabinete das unidades YH, tendo como base a rea da face, vazo de ar e velocidade
de face.
Velocidade da face (m/s)
Gabinete Modelo
rea da face (m2)
YH
Ventilador
1,8
1,9
2,1
2,2
2,3
2,4
2,5
2,6
2,7
2,8
2,9
Vazo de ar (m3/h) e Velocidade de descarga (m/s)

2
7/7
0,16
1037
1094
1152
1152
1267
1325
1382
1440
1498
1555
1613
1670
10
1728
10
7/7
0,21
1361
1436
1512
1512
1663
1739
10
1814
10
1890
11
1966
11
2041
12
2117
12
2192
13
2268
13
9/7
0,30
1944
2052
2160
2160
2376
10
2484
10
2592
11
2700
11
2808
12
2916
12
3024
13
3132
13
3240
14
10/8
0,38
2462
2599
2736
10
2736
10
3010
11
3146
11
3283
11
3420
12
3557
12
3694
13
3830
13
3967
14
4104
14
12/12
0,60
3888
4104
4320
4320
4752
10
4968
10
5184
11
5400
11
5616
12
5832
12
6048
13
6264
13
6480
14
15/11
0,68
4406
4651
4896
4896
5386
10
5630
10
5875
11
6120
11
6365
12
6610
12
6854
13
7099
13
7344
14
10
15/15
0,76
4925
5198
5472
5472
6019
6293
6566
10
6840
10
7114
10
7387
11
7661
11
7934
12
8208
12
14
2 x 12/9
0,94
6091
6430
6768
6768
7445
10
7783
10
8122
11
8460
11
8798
12
9137
12
9475
12
9814
13
10152
13
15
2 x 12/12
1,13
7322
7729
8136
8136
8950
9356
10
9763
10
10170
11
10577
11
10984
11
11390
12
11797
12
12204
13
18
2 x 15/11
1,36
8813
9302
9792
9792
10771
10
11261
10
11750
11
12240
11
12730
12
13219
12
13709
13
14198
13
14688
14
20
2 x 15/15
1,51
9785
7 10328
10872
10872
11959
12503
13046
13590
10
14134
10
14677
11
15221
11
15764
11
16308
12
25
2 x 18/13
1,89
12247
8 12928
13608
13608
10
14969
10
15649
11
16330
11
17010
11
17690
12
18371
12
19051
13
19732
13
20412
14
30
2 x 18/18
2,27
14710
8 15527
16344
16344
17978
18796
10
19613
10
20430
11
21247
11
22064
11
22882
12
23699
12
24516
13
35
2 x 18/18
2,66
17237
9 18194
19152 10 19152
10
21067
11
22025
11
22982
12
23940
12
24898
13
25855
13
26813
14
27770
14
28728
15
40
3 x 18/18
3,07
19894
7 20999
22104
22104
24314
25420
26525
27630
10
28735
10
29840
10
30946
11
32051
11
33156
11
50
3 x 18/18
3,40
22032
8 23256
24480
24480
26928
28152
10
29376
10
30600
11
31824
11
33048
11
34272
12
35496
12
36720
13
7. Software de Seleo
As unidades Gemini possuem uma ampla variedade de serpentinas, ventiladores, motores e acionamentos para atender as suas
necessidades de projeto.
O software de seleo do GEMINI permite selecionar o equipamenrto correto para a sua necessidade de projeto.
.....................................
8. Nmero de Circuitos - Serpentina de Resfriamento

Existem vrios tipos de circuitagem disponveis para as serpentinas de resfriamento a fim de ajustar a capacidade da troca de
calor com as necessidades de cada projeto. A tabela abaixo mostra as possveis circuitagens para cada tipo de serpentina.
Tubos por circuito

Modelo Rows
2
02
03
04
05
08
09
10
14
15
18
20
25
30
35
40
50
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
5
5
9
12
6
8
12
10
3
4
6
8
12
18
20
2
3
4
5
5
3
4
6
8
6
9
12
16
N0
tubos
em
altura
10
2
3
12
4
6
7
14
7
14
12
16
8
16
24
32
27
36
30
40
30
40
36
48
42
56
45
60
45
60
54
72
57
76
57
76
57
76
12
16
24
32
18
27
36
15
20
30
40
15
20
30
40
24
36
48
21
28
42
56
30
45
60
30
45
60
27
36
54
72
8
16
9
12
18
24
10
20
14
7
14
6
8
12
16
6
8
12
16
4
8
7
3
4
6
8
10
15
20
6
8
12
16
10
15
20
8
12
16
16
6
8
18
6
9
12
18
16
6
8
10
10
6
8
10
20
10
20
12
16
24
32
14
28
15
20
30
40
15
20
30
40
18
24
36
48
19
38
57
76
38
38
57
76
38
38
57
76
38
20
10
12
12
16
24
14
21
28
15
30
28
14
14
30
12
18
24
15
20
18
24
15
20
15
12
30
15
30
18
27
36
24
8
12
15
36
18
24
18
16
19
38
19
38
19
38
38
38
38
.....................................
9. Conexes hidrulicas Serpentina de Resfriamento

Tubos por circuito
Modelo Rows
2
02
03
04
05
08
09
10
14
15
18
20
25
30
35
40
50
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
1-1/4
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
10
1
1-1/4
1-1/4
1-1/2
12
18
20
1
1
1-1/4
1-1/4
1-1/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/4
1-1/2
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
16
N0
tubos
em
altura
10
1
1
12
1-1/4
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
1-1/2
2
2
2
1-1/2
2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
3
2-1/2
3
2-1/2
3
2-1/2
3
2-1/2
3
2
2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2
2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2
2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
3
1-1/2
2
1-1/2
2
2
2-1/2
1-1/2
2
14
1-1/2
2
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
2
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
2
1-1/4
1-1/2
1-1/2
1-1/2
1-1/2
1
1-1/4
1-1/4
1-1/2
1-1/2
2
2
1-1/4
1-1/4
2
2
1-1/2
2
2
1-1/2
2
2
16
1-1/4
1-1/2
18
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
16
1-1/4
1-1/2
1-1/2
1-1/2
1-1/4
1-1/2
1-1/2
1-1/2
20
1-1/2
2
2
2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2
2-1/2
2
2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2
2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2
2-1/2
2-1/2
3
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
3
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
3
2-1/2
20
1-1/2
2
2
2
2-1/2
2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2
2-1/2
28
2
2
30
2
2
2-1/2
2
2
2
2-1/2
2
2
2
30
2
2-1/2
2
2-1/2
2-1/2
24
1-1/2
2
2
36
2
2-1/2
2
38
2
2-1/2
38
2-1/2
38
2-1/2
OBS.:Opcionalmente pode-se escolher o lado das conexes hidrulicas em esquerda e direita (conforme pedido), sendo que
deve-se tomar como referncia, a frente da mquina, vista pelo filtro de ar (retorno). As conexes hidrulicas so do tipo BSP.
10
.....................................
10. Configurao da Serpentina de Aquecimento- YH

Gabinete
rea
de Face (m2)
Conexo (BSP)
Nmero de
tubos em altura
02
0,16
1-1/4
10
03
0,21
1-1/4
12
04
0,30
1-1/2
14
05
0,38
1-1/2
16
08
0,60
1-1/2
16
09
0,68
1-1/2
18
10
0,76
1-1/2
20
14
0,94
1-1/2
20
15
1,13
24
18
1,36
28
20
1,51
30
25
1,89
30
30
2,27
36
35
2,66
38
40
3,07
38
50
3,40
38
.....................................
11
11. Disposio e Quantidade de Filtros Planos

453
313
237
286
528
463
Gabinete 8 e 9
Vertical
(6x) 453 X 286
Gabinete 4 e 5
(3x) 313 X 528
Gabinete 2 e 3
(3x) 237 X 463
453
425
425
336
336
Gabinete 8 e 9 Horizontal
10 Horizontal e Vertical
(6x) 453 X 336
379
Gabinete 15
(8x) 425 X 379
Gabinete 14
(8x) 425 X 336
504
384
384
473
567
473
Gabinete 25
(12x) 384 X 473
Gabinete 30
(12x) 384 X 567
Gabinete 18 e 20
(8x) 504 X 473
384
446
644
644
Gabinete 35
(12x) 384 X 644
Gabinete 40
(12x) 446 X 644
486
644
Gabinete 50
(12x) 486 X 644
* Opcionalmente podem ser fornecidos outros tipos de filtros.
12
.....................................
12. Motores Disponveis por Gabinete

Motores disponveis
YH
Ventilador
TDA-7/7
TDA-7/7
TDA-9/7
0,50 0,75
1,5
TDA-10/8
TDA-12/12
TDA-15/11
10
TDA-15/15
7,5
10
12,5
15
20
14
2XTDA-12/9
15
2XTDA-12/12
18
2XTDA-15/11
20
2XTDA-15/15
25
2XTDA-18/13
30
2XTDA-18/18
35
2XTDA-18/18
40
3XTDA-18/18
50
3XTDA-18/18
13. Caractersticas Tcnicas dos Motores 60 Hz

Dados dos Motores Eltricos Standard - 2 plos - 60 Hz
Potncia (CV)
N0 de polos
Frequncia (Hz)
Carcaa
RPM Nominal
In (A)
220 CMO(A)
Ip/In(A)
Tenso
In (A)
(Volts)
380 CMO(A)
Ip/In(A)
In (A)
440 CMO(A)
Ip/In(A)
Fator de Potncia (CV) (100%)
0,5
0,75
1,5
63
3380
1,71
1,97
5,5
0,99
1,14
5,5
0,86
0,99
5,5
0,83
71
3430
2,39
2,75
6,2
1,38
1,59
6,2
1,2
1,38
6,2
0,85
71
3425
3
3,45
7,8
1,74
2,00
7,8
1,5
1,73
7,8
0,83
80
3350
4,3
4,95
7,5
2,49
2,86
7,5
2,15
2,47
7,5
0,86
80
3380
5,46
6,28
7,5
3,16
3,63
7,5
2,73
3,14
7,5
0,89
90S
3465
8,43
9,69
7,8
4,88
5,61
7,8
4,22
4,85
7,8
0,84
90L
3450
11
12,65
7,9
6,37
7,33
7,9
5,5
6,33
7,9
0,86
100L
3485
12,9
14,84
8
7,47
8,59
8
6,45
7,42
8
0,88
6
2
60
112M
3465
15,8
18,17
7,5
9,15
10,52
7,5
7,9
9,09
7,5
0,88
7,5
10
12,5
15
20
25
30
40
112M
3500
19,1
21,97
8
11,1
12,77
8
9,55
10,98
8
0,87
132S
3510
25,5
29,33
7
14,8
17,02
7
12,8
14,72
7
0,88
132M
3510
31
35,65
7,8
17,9
20,59
7,8
15,5
17,83
7,8
0,88
132M
3520
36,9
42,44
8,5
21,4
24,61
8,5
18,5
21,28
8,5
0,89
160M
3540
50,3
57,85
7,8
29,1
33,47
7,8
25,1
28,87
7,8
0,88
160M
3525
61,6
70,84
8
35,7
41,06
8
30,8
35,42
8
0,88
160L
3530
72,1
82,92
8,5
41,7
47,96
8,5
36
41,40
8,5
0,88
200M
3555
99
113,85
7,2
57,3
65,90
7,2
49,5
56,93
7,2
0,88
7,5
10
12,5
15
20
25
30
40
112M
1740
20
23,00
7
11,6
13,34
7
10
11,50
7
0,82
132S
1760
26,6
30,59
8
15,4
17,71
8
13,3
15,30
8
0,83
132M
1755
33,3
38,30
8,7
19,3
22,20
8,7
16,6
19,09
8,7
0,82
132M
1755
39,3
45,20
8,3
22,8
26,22
8,3
19,6
22,54
8,3
0,83
160M
1760
52,6
60,49
6,3
30,5
35,08
6,3
26,3
30,25
6,3
0,83
160L
1760
64,3
73,95
6,5
37,2
42,78
6,5
32,2
37,03
6,5
0,83
180M
1765
75,5
86,83
7,5
43,7
50,26
7,5
37,8
43,47
7,5
0,84
200M
1770
101
116,15
6,6
58,5
67,28
6,6
50,5
58,08
6,6
0,85

Potncia (CV)
N0 de polos
Frequncia (Hz)
Carcaa
RPM Nominal
In (A)
220 CMO(A)
Ip/In(A)
Tenso
In (A)
(Volts)
380 CMO(A)
Ip/In(A)
In (A)
440 CMO(A)
Ip/In(A)
0,5
0,75
1,5
71
1720
2,07
2,38
5
1,2
1,38
5
1,03
1,18
5
0,69
71
1720
2,9
3,34
5,5
1,68
1,93
5,5
1,45
1,67
5,5
0,7
80
1720
3,02
3,47
7,2
1,75
2,01
7,2
1,51
1,74
7,2
0,82
80
1720
4,43
5,09
7,8
2,56
2,94
7,8
2,21
2,54
7,8
0,82
90S
1720
6,12
7,04
6,4
3,54
4,07
6,4
3,06
3,52
6,4
0,78
90L
1730
8,7
10,01
6,8
5,04
5,80
6,8
4,35
5,00
6,8
0,8
100L
1725
11,9
13,69
7,8
6,89
7,92
7,8
5,95
6,84
7,8
0,8
100L
1715
14
16,10
7,6
8,11
9,33
7,6
7
8,05
7,6
0,81
6
4
60
112M
1720
16,4
18,86
8
9,49
10,91
8
8,2
9,43
8
0,84
Legenda:
In = Corrente nominal de operao (A)
CMO = Corrente mxima de operao (A)
.....................................
13
13. Caractersticas Tcnicas dos Motores 60 Hz (continuao)

Dados dos Motores Eltricos Alto Rendimento - 2 plos - 60 Hz
Potncia (CV)
N0 de polos
Frequncia (Hz)
Carcaa
RPM Nominal
In (A)
220 CMO(A)
Ip/In(A)
Tenso
In (A)
(Volts)
380 CMO(A)
Ip/In(A)
In (A)
440 CMO(A)
Ip/In(A)
0,5
0,75
1,5
63
3380
1,68
1,93
5,5
0,97
1,12
5,5
0,84
0,97
5,5
0,8
71
3430
2,35
2,70
6,2
1,36
1,56
6,2
1,17
1,35
6,2
0,83
71
3440
2,92
3,36
7,8
1,69
1,94
7,8
1,46
1,68
7,8
0,83
80
3390
4,02
4,62
7,5
2,33
2,68
7,5
2,01
2,31
7,5
0,87
80
3400
5,61
6,45
7,7
3,25
3,74
7,7
2,81
3,23
7,7
0,84
90S
3430
8
9,20
7,8
4,63
5,32
7,8
4
4,60
7,8
0,85
90L
3430
10,8
12,42
7,8
6,25
7,19
7,8
5,4
6,21
7,8
0,85
100L
3500
13,1
15,07
9
7,58
8,72
9
6,55
7,53
9
0,85
6
2
60
112M
3475
15,1
17,37
8
8,74
10,05
8
7,55
8,68
8
0,89
7,5
10
12,5
15
20
25
30
40
112M
3500
18,9
21,74
8
10,9
12,54
8
9,45
10,87
8
0,86
132S
3515
25
28,75
7,5
14,5
16,68
7,5
12,5
14,38
7,5
0,88
132M
3515
30,7
35,31
7,8
17,8
20,47
7,8
15,4
17,71
7,8
0,88
132M
3510
35,4
40,71
8
20,5
23,58
8
17,7
20,36
8
0,9
160M
3540
49,8
57,27
7,5
28,8
33,12
7,5
24,9
28,64
7,5
0,86
160L
3530
62,1
71,42
8,2
36
41,40
8,2
31
35,65
8,2
0,85
160L
3530
72,1
82,92
8
41,7
47,96
8
36
41,40
8
0,87
200M
3560
98,3
113,05
7,5
56,9
65,44
7,5
49,2
56,58
7,5
0,86
7,5
10
12,5
15
20
25
30
40
112M
1740
20
23,00
8
11,6
13,34
8
10
11,50
8
0,8
132S
1760
26,4
30,36
7,8
15,3
17,60
7,8
13,2
15,18
7,8
0,82
132M
1760
32
36,80
8,5
18,5
21,28
8,5
16
18,40
8,5
0,83
132M
1755
37,5
43,13
8,8
21,7
24,96
8,8
18,8
21,62
8,8
0,84
160M
1755
53,3
61,30
6,7
30,9
35,54
6,7
26,6
30,59
6,7
0,8
160L
1760
64,7
74,41
6,5
37,5
43,13
6,5
32,3
37,15
6,5
0,81
180M
1760
73,9
84,99
7
42,8
49,22
7
37
42,55
7
0,84
200M
1770
99,6
114,54
6,4
57,7
66,36
6,4
49,8
57,27
6,4
0,85

Potncia (CV)
N0 de polos
Frequncia (Hz)
Carcaa
RPM Nominal
In (A)
220 CMO(A)
Ip/In(A)
Tenso
In (A)
(Volts)
380 CMO(A)
Ip/In(A)
In (A)
440 CMO(A)
Ip/In(A)
0,5
0,75
1,5
71
1700
2,11
2,43
5
1,22
1,40
5
1,05
1,21
5
0,64
71
1700
2,83
3,25
5,5
1,64
1,89
5,5
1,41
1,62
5,5
0,68
80
1730
2,98
3,43
8
1,73
1,99
8
1,49
1,71
8
0,8
80
1700
4,32
4,97
7
2,5
2,88
7
2,16
2,48
7
0,82
90S
1760
6,17
7,10
7,8
3,57
4,11
7,8
3,09
3,55
7,8
0,76
90L
1730
8,28
9,52
7
4,79
5,51
7
4,14
4,76
7
0,82
100L
1720
11,1
12,77
7,5
6,43
7,39
7,5
5,55
6,38
7,5
0,82
100L
1720
13,8
15,87
8
7,99
9,19
8
6,9
7,94
8
0,8
6
4
60
112M
1735
16,4
18,86
6,8
9,49
10,91
6,8
8,2
9,43
6,8
0,81

Dados dos Motores Eltricos Standard 2 plos - 50 Hz
Potncia (CV)
N0 de polos
Frequncia (Hz)
Carcaa
RPM Nominal
In (A)
CMO(A)
220
Tenso
Ip/In(A)
(Volts)
In (A)
CMO(A)
380
Ip/In(A)
0,5
0,75
1,5
71
2780
1,55
1,78
5,5
0,9
1,04
5,5
0,85
71
2780
2,26
2,60
5,5
1,31
1,51
5,5
0,85
80
2770
3,04
3,50
6
1,76
2,02
6
0,85
90S
2840
4,23
4,86
6
2,45
2,82
6
0,87
90L
2850
5,65
6,50
7,5
3,27
3,76
7,5
0,86
90L
2840
8,38
9,64
7
4,85
5,58
7
0,83
100L
2890
10,6
12,19
7,3
6,14
7,06
7,3
0,88
5,5
2
50
112M
2890
14
16,10
7,6
8,11
9,33
,76
0,87
7,5
10
12,5
15
20
25
30
40
132S
2925
18,8
21,62
8
10,9
12,54
8
0,87
132M
2930
24,9
28,64
7,5
14,4
16,56
7,5
0,89
132M
2930
30,6
35,19
7,5
17,7
20,36
7,5
0,88
160M
2950
37,8
43,47
7,5
21,9
25,19
7,5
0,84
160L
2945
50,3
57,85
29,1
33,47
0
0,86
160L
2945
61,5
70,73
8,2
35,6
40,94
8,2
0,86
180L
2950
68,9
79,24
8
39,9
45,89
8
0,91
200M
2960
96,4
110,86
7,4
55,8
64,17
7,4
0,88
7,5
10
12,5
15
20
25
30
40
132S
1470
19,2
22,08
7,3
11,1
12,77
7,3
0,85
132M
1470
26,1
30,02
7,5
15,1
17,37
7,5
0,85
132M
1460
32,5
37,38
8,3
18,8
21,62
8,3
0,85
160M
1470
38,2
43,93
7
22,1
25,42
7
0,84
160L
1460
52,3
60,15
6
30,3
34,85
6
0,83
160L
1470
63,6
73,14
7
36,8
42,32
7
0,84
180L
1470
72,4
83,26
7
41,9
48,19
7
0,87
200M
1475
99,7
114,66
7
57,7
66,36
7
0,85

Potncia (CV)
N0 de polos
Frequncia (Hz)
Carcaa
RPM Nominal
In (A)
CMO(A)
220
Tenso
Ip/In(A)
(Volts)
In (A)
CMO(A)
380
Ip/In(A)
0,5
0,75
1,5
71
1390
1,88
2,16
4,4
1,09
1,25
4,4
0,7
80
1420
2,47
2,84
6,5
1,43
1,64
6,5
0,78
80
1415
3,14
3,61
6,5
1,82
2,09
6,5
0,82
90S
1440
4,75
5,46
6,5
2,75
3,16
6,5
0,79
90L
1420
5,82
6,69
7,5
3,37
3,88
7,5
0,84
100L
1420
8,48
9,75
7,5
4,91
5,65
7,5
0,82
100L
1420
11,1
12,77
7,5
6,42
7,38
7,5
0,85
5,5
4
50
112M
1430
14,6
16,79
7,5
8,45
9,72
7,5
0,84
Legenda:
In = Corrente nominal
CMO = Corrente mxima de operao
14
.....................................

Dados dos Motores Eltricos Alto Rendimento 2 plos - 50 Hz
Potncia (CV)
N0 de polos
Frequncia (Hz)
Carcaa
RPM Nominal
In (A)
CMO(A)
220
Tenso
Ip/In(A)
(Volts)
In (A)
CMO(A)
380
Ip/In(A)
0,5
0,75
1,5
71
2760
1,49
1,71
5,5
0,86
0,99
5,5
0,88
71
2750
2,14
2,46
5,7
1,24
1,43
5,7
0,88
80
2750
2,87
3,30
6
1,66
1,91
6
0,87
80
2800
4,01
4,61
7,2
2,32
2,67
7,2
0,87
90S
2845
5,37
6,18
7,3
3,11
3,58
7,3
0,87
90L
2850
7,84
9,02
8
4,54
5,22
8
0,86
100L
2880
10,3
11,85
8,2
5,95
6,84
8,2
0,88
5,5
2
50
100L
2885
13,4
15,41
8,2
7,73
8,89
8,2
0,89
7,5
10
12,5
15
20
25
30
40
132S
2930
18,3
21,05
8
10,6
12,19
8
0,87
132S
2915
24,7,
28,41
8
14,3
16,45
8
0,88
132M
2930
29,7
34,16
8,5
17,2
19,78
8,5
0,89
160M
2945
36,8
42,32
8,5
21,3
24,50
8,5
0,85
160L
2930
49,6
57,04
8,2
28,7
33,01
8,2
0,86
160L
2940
59,9
68,89
8,8
34,7
39,91
8,8
0,87
180M
2945
69,3
79,70
8,6
40,1
46,12
8,6
0,89
200L
2950
93,3
107,30
7,4
54
62,10
7,4
0,9
7,5
10
12,5
15
20
25
30
40
132S
1460
18,8
21,62
8,5
10,9
12,54
8,5
0,85
132M
1455
24,9
28,64
8,2
14,4
16,56
8,2
0,88
160M
1465
31,3
36,00
5,6
18,1
20,82
5,6
0,85
160M
1450
37,3
42,90
6
21,6
24,84
6
0,85
160L
1460
51,1
58,77
6,1
29,6
34,04
6,1
0,84
180L
1465
62
71,30
8,1
35,9
41,29
8,1
0,84
180L
1470
71
81,65
8,6
41,1
47,27
8,6
0,87
200L
1475
98,6
113,39
7
57,1
65,67
7
0,85

Potncia (CV)
N0 de polos
Frequncia (Hz)
Carcaa
RPM Nominal
In (A)
CMO(A)
220
Tenso
Ip/In(A)
(Volts)
In (A)
CMO(A)
380
Ip/In(A)
0,5
0,75
1,5
71
1370
1,87
2,15
5
1,08
1,24
5
0,7
80
1410
2,35
2,70
5,7
1,36
1,56
5,7
0,8
80
1400
2,94
3,38
5,5
1,7
1,96
5,5
0,84
90S
1450
4,47
5,14
7,5
2,59
2,98
7,5
0,77
90L
1450
5,86
6,74
7,5
3,39
3,90
7,5
0,79
100L
1420
7,81
8,98
7,4
4,52
5,20
7,4
0,86
100L
1425
10,5
12,08
8,3
6,07
6,98
8,3
0,86
5,5
4
50
112M
1440
14
16,10
6,6
8,1
9,32
6,6
0,85
Legenda:
15. Ventiladores - Posies de Descarga

Opes de descarga vertical
Opes de descarga horizontal
Descarga Vertical - H1
Descarga Vertical - V1
Descarga Horizontal - V2
Descarga Horizontal - H3
Descarga para o piso

(Down Flow) - H5
(Down Flow) - V5
Nota 1) Todos os mdulos so fabricados conforme pedido para montagem vertical ou horizontal. Uma vez definida a fabricao
(vertical ou horizontal) no possvel fazer modificao em campo.
.....................................
2) As posies de descarga V5 e H5 (Down Flow) somente esto disponveis at capacidade de 20 TR.
15
16. Modelos de Ventiladores - YH

Sirocco
Limit Load
Gabinete Modelo Tamanho
16
Modelo
Tamanho
02
TDA
7/7
LMD-Q
224
03
TDA
7/7
LMD-Q
250
04
TDA
9/7
LMD-Q
315
05
TDA
10/8
LMD-Q
355
08
TDA
12/12
RLD-Q
315
09
TDA
15/11
RLD-Q
355
10
TDA
15/15
RLD-Q
355
14
2 x TDA
12/9
RLD-Q
400
15
2 x TDA
12/12
RLD-Q
450
18
2 x TDA
15/11
RLD-Q
500
20
2 x TDA
15/15
RLD-Q
500
25
2 x TDA
18/13
2 x RLD-Q
400
30
2 x TDA
18/18
2 x RLD-Q
450
35
2 x TDA
18/18
2 x RLD-Q
500
40
3 x TDA
18/18
2 x RLD-Q
500
50
3 x TDA
18/18
2 x RLD-Q
500
.....................................
17. Curva de Performance do Ventilador Sirocco - Gabinete 2 e 3

Ventilador TDA 7 / 7
.....................................
17
18. Curva de Performance do Ventilador Sirocco - Gabinete 4

18
.....................................

.....................................
19

20
.....................................

.....................................
21

22
.....................................

Ventilador 2 x TDA 12 / 9
NOTA: Dividir a vazo de ar por 2 (Ventilador duplex)
.....................................
23

24
.....................................

.....................................
25

26
.....................................

.....................................
27

28
.....................................

NOTA: Dividir a vazo de ar por 3 (Ventilador triplex)
.....................................
29
30. Curva de Performance do Ventilador Limit Load Gabinete 8 a 10
Gabinete 8
RLD 315
Gabinete 9 e 10
RLD 355
Nota.: Curvas dos ventiladores Limit Load para os gabinetes 2 a 5 smente sob consulta.
30
.....................................
Gabinete 14
RLD 400
Gabinete 15
RLD 450
.....................................
31
Gabinete 18 e 20
RLD 500
Gabinete 25
2 x RLD 400
32
.....................................
Gabinete 30
2 x RLD 450
Gabinete 35, 40 e 50
2 x RLD 500
.....................................
33
34. Dados Dimensionais - Ventilador Sirocco

Horizontal Posio H3
YH 2 a 10 TR
Gabinete
02/03 - H3
04 - H3
05 - H3
08 - H3
09 - H3
10 - H3
A
794
1024
1024
1444
1444
1444
B
559
624
624
784
784
784
C
559
624
624
724
724
724
D
237
254
279
391
377
478
E
214
270
294
346
407
407
F
110
135
148
173
212
212
G
166
161
111
190
95
95
Gabinete
02/03 - H1
04 - H1
05 - H1
08 - H1
09 - H1
10 - H1
A
794
1024
1024
1444
1444
1444
B
559
624
624
784
784
784
C
559
624
624
724
724
724
D
237
254
279
391
377
478
E
214
270
294
346
407
407
F
110
135
148
173
212
212
G
80
80
80
80
80
80
Horizontal Posio H1
YH 2 a 10 TR
34
.....................................
34. Dados Dimensionais - Ventilador Sirocco (continuao)

Horizontal Posio V2 e V3
YH 2 a 10 TR
Gabinete
02/03
04
05
08
09
10
A
794
1024
1024
1444
1444
1444
B
559
624
624
784
784
784
C
559
624
624
724
724
724
D
237
254
279
391
377
478
E
214
270
294
346
407
407
F
110
135
148
173
212
212
G
166
161
111
190
95
95
Horizontal Posio V1
YH 2 a 10 TR
Gabinete
02/03
04
05
08
09
10
A
794
1024
1024
1444
1444
1444
B
559
624
624
784
784
784
C
559
624
624
724
724
724
D
237
254
279
391
377
478
E
214
270
294
346
407
407
F
110
135
148
173
212
212
G
80
80
80
80
80
80
.....................................
35

Horizontal Posio H3
YH 14 a 35 TR
Gabinete
14 - H3
15 - H3
18 - H3
20 - H3
25 - H3
30 - H3
35 - H3
A
1784
1784
2100
2100
2430
2430
2430
B
724
869
1059
1059
1059
1247
1400
C
724
724
814
814
904
904
904
D
314
391
377
478
433
561
561
E
346
346
407
407
485
485
485
F
173
173
212
212
457
265
265
G
191
130
372
126
246
434
434
H
250
250
376
376
452
452
452
Gabinete
14 - H1
15 - H1
18 - H1
20 - H1
25 - H1
30 - H1
35 - H1
A
1784
1784
2100
2100
2430
2430
2430
B
869
869
1059
1059
1059
1247
1400
C
724
724
814
814
904
904
904
D
314
391
377
478
433
561
561
E
346
346
407
407
485
485
485
F
173
173
212
212
457
265
265
G
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
H
250
250
376
376
452
452
452
Horizontal Posio H1
YH 14 a 35 TR
36
.....................................

YH 14 a 35 TR
Gabinete
14
15
18
20
25
30
35
A
1784
1784
2100
2100
2430
2430
2430
B
724
724
814
814
904
904
904
C
724
724
814
814
904
904
904
D
314
391
377
478
433
561
561
E
346
346
407
407
485
485
485
F
173
173
212
212
250
265
265
G
191
130
372
126
246
434
434
H
250
250
376
376
452
452
452
Horizontal Posio V1
YH 14 a 35 TR
Gabinete
14
15
18
20
25
30
35
A
1784
1784
2100
2100
2430
2430
2430
B
724
724
814
814
904
904
904
C
724
724
814
814
904
904
904
D
314
391
377
478
433
561
561
E
346
346
407
407
485
485
485
F
173
173
212
212
250
265
265
G
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
H
250
250
376
376
452
452
452
.....................................
37

Horizontal Posio H3
YH 40 e 50 TR
Gabinete
40 - H3
50 - H3
A
2800
3040
B
1400
1400
C
1100
1100
D
561
561
E
485
485
F
250
370
G
151
151
H
311
311
Horizontal Posio H1
YH 40 e 50 TR
Gabinete
40 - H1
50 - H1
38
A
2800
3040
B
1400
1400
C
1100
1100
D
561
561
E
485
485
F
250
370
G
126
126
H
311
311
.....................................

YH 40 e 50 TR
Gabinete
40
50
A
2800
3040
B
1400
1400
C
1100
1100
D
561
561
E
485
485
F
250
370
G
151
151
H
311
311
Gabinete
40
50
A
2800
3040
B
1400
1400
C
1100
1100
D
561
561
E
485
485
F
250
370
G
126
126
H
311
311
Horizontal Posio V1
YH 40 e 50 TR
.....................................
39
35. Dados Dimensionais Mdulo Trocador de Calor Ventilador Sirocco

Horizontal e Vertical
YH 2 a 50 TR
Gabinete
02
03
04
05
08 Vertical
08 Horizontal
09 Vertical
09 Horizontal
10
14
15
18
20
25
30
35
40
50
A
794
794
1024
1024
1444
1444
1444
1444
1444
1784
1784
2100
2100
2430
2430
2430
2800
3040
B
559
559
624
624
684
784
684
784
784
784
869
1059
1059
1059
1247
1400
1400
1400
C
559
559
624
624
724
724
724
724
724
724
724
814
814
904
904
904
1100
1100
36. Dados Dimensionais Mdulo Caixa de Mistura Sirocco
Gabinete
02
03
04
05
08 Vertical
08 Horizontal
09 Vertical
09 Horizontal
10
14
15
18
20
25
30
35
40
50
40
A
794
794
1024
1024
1444
1444
1444
1444
1444
1784
1784
2100
2100
2430
2430
2430
2800
3040
B
559
559
624
624
684
784
684
784
784
784
869
1059
1059
1059
1247
1400
1400
1400
C
559
559
624
624
724
724
724
724
724
724
724
814
814
904
904
904
1100
1100
D
510
510
600
600
1000
1000
1000
1000
1005
1170
1335
1400
1400
1665
1830
1600
1800
2200
E
200
200
200
200
345
345
345
345
400
400
400
510
510
600
600
840
840
840
.....................................
F
200
200
200
200
345
345
345
345
400
400
400
400
510
510
675
675
600
800
G
180
180
180
180
200
200
200
200
345
345
345
345
400
400
400
400
510
510
37. Dados Dimensionais Ventilador Limit Load

Horizontal Posio H3
YH 02 a 20 TR
Gabinete
02
03
04
05
08
09/10
14
15
18/20
A
1024
1024
1024
1237
1444
1444
1784
1784
2100
B
695
695
785
850
784
850
930
1015
1100
C
624
624
730
795
724
795
870
960
1045
D
267,5
302,5
380,5
428
478
533
604
675
755
E
162
182
226,5
252,5
317
357
403
453
503
Gabinete
02
03
04
05
08
09/10
14
15
18/20
A
1024
1024
1024
1237
1444
1444
1784
1784
2100
B
695
695
785
850
784
850
930
1015
1100
C
624
624
730
795
724
795
870
960
1045
D
267,5
302,5
380,5
428
478
533
604
675
755
E
162
182
226,5
252,5
317
357
403
453
503
Horizontal Posio H1
YH 02 a 20 TR
.....................................
41
37. Dados Dimensionais Ventilador Limit Load (continuao)

Horizontal Posio H3
YH 25 a 50 TR
Gabinete
25
30
35
40
50
A
2800
2800
2800
2800
3040
B
1059
1247
1500
1500
1500
C
870
960
1100
1100
1100
D
604
675
755
755
755
E
403
453
503
503
503
F
400
450
500
500
500
Horizontal Posio H1
YH 25 a 50 TR
Gabinete
25
30
35
40
50
42
A
2800
2800
2800
2800
3040
B
1059
1247
1500
1500
1500
C
870
960
1100
1100
1100
D
604
675
755
755
755
E
403
453
503
503
503
F
400
450
500
500
500
.....................................
38. Dados Dimensionais Mdulo Trocador de Calor Ventilador Limit Load

Horizontal
YH 02 a 50 TR
Gabinete
02
03
04
05
08
09
10
14
15
18
20
25
30
35
40
50
A
1024
1024
1024
1237
1444
1444
1444
1784
1784
2100
2100
2800
2800
2800
2800
3040
B
695
695
785
850
784
850
850
930
1015
1100
1100
1059
1247
1500
1500
1500
C
624
624
624
904
724
724
724
724
724
814
814
1100
1100
1100
1100
1100
39. Dados Dimensionais Mdulo Caixa de Mistura Limit Load
Gabinete
02
03
04
05
08
09
10
14
15
18
20
25
30
35
40
50
A
1024
1024
1024
1237
1444
1444
1444
1784
1784
2100
2100
2800
2800
2800
2800
3040
B
695
695
785
850
784
850
850
930
1015
1100
1100
1059
1247
1500
1500
1500
C
624
624
624
904
724
724
724
724
724
814
814
1100
1100
1100
1100
1100
D
510
510
600
600
1000
1000
1005
1170
1335
1400
1400
1665
1830
1600
1800
2200
E
200
200
345
345
345
345
400
400
400
510
510
600
600
840
840
840
F
200
200
200
200
345
345
400
400
400
400
510
510
675
675
600
800
G
180
180
180
180
200
200
345
345
345
345
400
400
400
400
510
510
.....................................
43
40. Disposio dos Mdulos - Posio Vertical

Os mdulos devem ser montados preferencialmente na seqncia mostrada abaixo:
MV
MV
MT
MCV
MT
41. Disposio dos Mdulos - YH Posio Horizontal
MCV
MT
MV
MT
MV
LEGENDA
MT
MV
MCV
44
Mdulo Trocador de Calor
Mdulo Ventilao
Mdulo Caixa de Mistura
.....................................
42. Acstica
A finalidade deste texto proporcionar orientaes e
recomendaes para a seleo, aplicao e instalao de
equipamento climatizador de ar de maneira a obter um
desempenho acstico satisfatrio.
Essas informaes demonstraro que a simples considerao
das caractersticas acsticas de uma central de tratamento de
ar no permitir alcanar os nveis sonoros desejados no
ambiente condicionado. Muitos fatores e critrios diferentes que
tm um efeito direto e expressivo no nvel sonoro final no espao
condicionado sero discutidos, sendo que a nfase ser dada
queles considerados como mais crticos para se alcanar as
metas de desenho acstico planejadas.
Para uma melhor compreenso deste assunto, convm salientar
o significado de alguns termos fundamentais em acstica:
-Potncia sonora representa uma caracterstica bsica de
medida do rudo emitida pela fonte sonora. uma propriedade
fsica fundamental da fonte acstica sozinha e, portanto, um
parmetro absoluto para clculos e comparaes de fontes
sonoras. O nvel de potncia sonora em si no proporciona uma
medida da intensidade do rudo no local considerado. A partir da
potncia sonora, deve-se calcular a presso sonora levando
em conta as caractersticas da instalao como um todo.
-Presso sonora deve ser determinada para cada ambiente
em particular estando relacionada distncia do observador e
sujeita influncia de diversos fatores, incluindo tamanho do
local, tipos de paredes, forros, divisrias, revestimentos, nvel
de rudo de fundo e/ou gerado por outros equipamentos. Os
mtodos de determinao de rudo esto baseados na medio
do nvel de presso sonora, em diversos pontos, mediante um
decibelmetro, associado a um analisador de bandas de oitavas,
a partir do qual se faz uma avaliao do nvel de potncia sonora.
Ambos os nveis, potncia e presso sonora, so designados
em decibis (dB), que uma unidade adimensional , expressada
como o logaritmo da relao entre o valor medido e um valor de
referncia.
O rudo produzido por um ventilador est diretamente relacionado

ao seu projeto (nmero de ps, forma das ps), vazo de ar,
presso total e principalmente a sua eficincia.
Para uma determinada vazo de ar e presso esttica, o menor
nvel de rudo possvel somente ser alcanado se selecionado
um ventilador em seu ponto de melhor rendimento sem qualquer
outra considerao. Velocidade de descarga baixa ou alta no
significa necessariamente baixo ou alto nvel de rudo.
Selees baseadas em velocidade de descarga simplesmente
limitam o tamanho mximo de um ventilador quando tomamos
como base as reas de descarga definidas pelas normas AMCA.
O nvel de rudo gerado por ventiladores aumenta com a presso
esttica, por isto, o sistema de distribuio de ar deve ser
projetado sempre para uma mnima resistncia possvel.
Se durante a operao do climatizador de ar o ventilador modificar
seu ponto de desempenho devido a filtros sujos, fechamento e
abertura de dampers, isto poder acarretar um aumento em
seu nvel de rudo.
Ms condies de aspirao ou descarga podem afetar
seriamente a performance aerodinmica e acstica de qualquer
ventilador inclusive invalidando as caractersticas de operao
fornecidas em catlogos.
Os ventiladores representam uma fonte predominante no
climatizador de ar, j que o nvel de rudo do motor eltrico no
influi significativamente no resultado.
2) Rudos originados nos dutos
O rudo do ventilador no o nico som transmitido at o espao

ocupado. O rudo do fluxo ar, gerado no sistema de dutos,
tambm enviado para o espao ocupado. O nvel acstico final
no espao ocupado o resultado dessas duas fontes acsticas
menos os fatores de atenuao, reduo acstica e outras
medidas de controle acstico que foram projetados dentro do
sistema para reduzir o rudo.
O rudo que chega ao espao ocupado viaja por um de vrios
caminhos acsticos possveis. O Manual de Fundamentos da
ASHRAE descreve 18 caminhos acsticos tpicos que devem
ser levados em considerao. Os trs caminhos de maior
interesse para unidades de tratamento de ar so descritos a
seguir:
Outra fonte de rudo no sistema de ar condicionado o sistema

de distribuio de ar que liga a unidade climatizadora de ar ao
espao condicionado. Essa fonte secundria de rudo inclui os
dutos de insuflamento e retorno, tais como cotovelos, curvas, e
outros elementos, todos os quais geram rudo como resultado
da turbulncia do ar que circula dentro deles. Em qualquer projeto
de ar condicionado, ambos os rudos do ventilador e do sistema
de distribuio devem ser tomados em considerao para poder
atender os critrios e as metas do projeto acstico.
Configuraes de dutos de descarga mal projetadas e
instaladas podem afetar negativamente o desempenho do
ventilador, geram turbulncias do ar e consequentemente rudos.
Os ventiladores so testados e classificados em laboratrio
sob condies ideais, que costumam ser diferentes das
condies reais de operao em campo. Na maioria dos
ventiladores instalados no campo no desenvolvem um perfil
de velocidade de descarga uniforme semelhante quele testado
no laboratrio. Para obter o mesmo desempenho como quando
testado, necessrio uma tubulao reta a jusante do ventilador.
Entretanto, existe raramente o espao suficiente para montar a
unidade dessa maneira. Na maioria dos casos, necessrio
recorrer a elementos de transio dentro da sala do
equipamento mecnico entre a conexo da descarga da unidade
climatizadora de ar e o tronco principal da tubulao.
1) Rudo originado pelos ventiladores
3)Vibraes
O ventilador presente na unidade de tratamento de ar uma das

principais fontes do som transmitido atravs do sistema de ar
condicionado. preciso um esforo no incio de um projeto e
instalao para minimizar a magnitude desse som. til
entender os fatores que influem sobre a magnitude do som do
ventilador, e reconhecer que, a melhor seleo do climatizador
de ar poder resultar em nveis mnimos da potncia sonora do
ventilador.
Muitos dos problemas de rudo mais comuns no tm origem

realmente na acstica, mas provm de fontes vibratrias e
podem ser evitados se tomados as devidas precaues quanto
ao correto isolamento das vibraes.
A unidade climatizadora de ar e os dutos de distribuio de ar
devem ser isolados dos pisos, tetos e paredes. O isolamento
das vibraes de uma unidade climatizadora de ar realizado
.....................................
45
42. Acstica (continuao)

atravs de vrios mtodos; o mtodo mais comum e mais efetivo
o uso de amortecedores de borracha ou molas isoladoras. O
sistema de movimentao de ar das unidades Eclipse e Gemini
so dotados de amortecedores de vibrao.
recomendvel a utilizao de um conector flexvel no ponto
onde o duto de descarga conectado unidade climatizadora
de ar. Nas unidades Eclipse e Gemini, com ventiladores do tipo
limit load , o conector flexvel j est integrado ao equipamento.
Concluso
Fica evidente, portanto que o fabricante do climatizador de ar
pode garantir bons nveis de potncia acstica de seu
equipamento, porm ele no pode garantir os nveis finais de
potncia acstica no espao a ser condicionado. Muitos fatores
que iro influir sobre o nvel sonoro final no esto sob o controle
do fabricante do equipamento. Um dos principais fatores inclui
o projeto do sistema de distribuio de ar.
De maneira a garantir que o sistema esteja em conformidade
com os critrios de potncia acstica do espao condicionado,
ser necessria uma anlise completa e detalhada de todo o
sistema de distribuio do ar. A maior parte das informaes
necessrias execuo dessa anlise apresentada no
captulo Controle de rudo e Vibraes do livro de fundamentos
da ASHRAE.
Dicas para um melhor desempenho acstico:
46
Assegure-se de que a unidade esteja isolada contra

vibraes.
Utilize conectores flexveis entre a ligao da boca de
descarga dos ventiladores aos dutos.
Cotovelos de curva so preferveis a cotovelos
quadrados. Os cotovelos devem ser orientados na
mesma direo da rotao do ventilador.
Todos os joelhos e curvas de pequeno raio devem ser
dotados de veios defletores .
Vede todas as folgas onde o duto penetra na parede.
Suspenda os dutos em ganchos isolados.
Instale um abafador de rudo antes do espao ocupado.
O espao prximo sala de mquinas do equipamento
deve ser utilizado por uma rea que no seja sensvel a
rudos.
Utilize uma parede com a perda de transmisso de
rudo apropriada.
Assegure-se de que o sistema de ar de retorno seja
adequado.
Evite todas as obstrues. Utilize conexes graduais
quando necessrio.
.....................................
43. Especificaes de Engenharia
Gabinete
Gabinete construdo em perfis de alumnio extrudado

acoplados a uma cantoneira 3D em nylon.
Painis em parede dupla, revestidos externamente com
chapa de ao pr-pintado e internamente com ao
galvanizado. Ncleo isolante em poliuretano expandido, de
17 mm de espessura, densidade mdia de 40 kg/m 3 e
coeficiente de transmisso trmica k de 0,68 W/m 0C.
Os painis possuem uma moldura de vedao com juntas
co-extrudadas em PVC.
Os painis removveis possuem fechos de fcil remoo e
fabricados em material termo-plstico a fim de evitar pontes
trmicas.
Mdulo de Ventilao
O mdulo de ventilao composto por um ou mais

ventiladores, motor de acionamento, polias e correias.
para frente sirocco ou ps curvadas para trs limit-load
ou do tipo airfoil, conforme as presses requeridas de
projeto. So construdos em chapa de ao com tratamento
anti-corrosivo, e rotores balanceados esttica e
dinamicamente.
Os rolamentos dos ventiladores so do tipo rgido autocompensador de esferas, blindados e com lubrificao
permanente.
Ventilador de rotor duplo (dois ventiladores de dupla
aspirao formando um s conjunto com eixo de
acionamento comum), por climatizador sempre que a
capacidade nominal for superior a 10 TR.
Ventilador de rotor triplo (trs ventiladores de dupla aspirao
formando um s conjunto com eixo de acionamento
comum), por climatizador sempre que a capacidade nominal
for superior a 35 TR.
Os ventiladores e respectivos motores so montados em
uma base de inrcia rgida, construda em chapa de ao
galvanizada e apoiada sobre amortecedores de borracha
ou do tipo mola, conforme o tipo de ventilador.
O acionamento por polia motora regulvel at motores de
5 CV e polia movida fixa. A correia do tipo trapezoidal.
Motor eltrico, trifsico, grau de proteo IP55, grau de
isolamento classe B e fator de servio 1,15.
O mdulo trocador de calor composto por uma serpentina

de resfriamento (e/ou quando aplicvel serpentina de
aquecimento) bandeja de dreno e sistema de filtragem de
ar.
Serpentina de resfriamento fabricada com tubos de cobre
sem costura de , com a opes de 8 ou 12 aletas por
polegada e 3, 4, 6 e 8 filas de profundidade e vrios tipos de
circuitagens disponveis.
Aletas corrugadas de alumnio, perfeitamente fixadas aos
tubos por meio de expanso hidrulica.
Cabeceiras construdas em chapas de ao galvanizado.
Coletores em tubos de cobre providos de luvas soldadas
em lato com rosca do tipo macho BSP, para conexo
rede hidrulica.
Os filtros esto montados em armaes metlicas, e

possuem fcil remoo e instalao. Quando utilizado o
mdulo caixa de mistura, o sistema de filtragem de ar estar
integrado a caixa de mistura.
Resistncias eltricas de aquecimento (quando aplicvel)
do tipo espiral com molas, fabricado em nquel-cromo (80/
20), montadas em uma estrutura de ao galvanizado e
fixadas entre isoladores de porcelana. A resistncia est
protegida por um termostato de segurana com rearme do
tipo automtico. Quando utilizada a opo de resistncia
eltrica de aquecimento as mesmas so instaladas no
mdulo trocador de calor (aps a serpentina).
Serpentina de aquecimento quando aplicvel fabricada
com tubos de cobre sem costura de e aletas corrugadas
de alumnio, perfeitamente fixadas aos tubos por meio de
expanso hidrulica e cabeceiras em chapas de ao
galvanizado . Construda com 2 (duas) filas de profundidade
e 4 tubos por circuito. Quando utilizada a opo de
serpentina de aquecimento a mesma montada aps a
serpentina de resfriamento
Mdulo Caixa de Mistura (Quando aplicvel)
Bandeja de drenagem de condensado fabricada em material

termoplstico do tipo ABS, isolada com isolamento termoacstico em poliuretano expandido, espessura de 35 mm,
densidade mdia de 48 kg/m3 e coeficiente de transmisso
trmica K de 0,68 W/m 0C. O escoamento de condensado
realizado na parte inferior da bandeja por uma conexo de
PVC com dimetro de 1.1/4". Para condicionadores acima
de 20 TR o mdulo trocador de calor possui duas bandejas,
com dois pontos de drenos sendo um em cada extremidade.
Os mdulos so apoiados por trilhos em Ude chapa de
ao galvanizado, com altura de 120 mm.
O sistema de filtragem de ar projetado e construdo para
alojar o tipo de filtro especificado na seleo do
equipamento. So disponveis as seguintes opes de
filtros:
Metlico G1 lavvel de 1".
G3 descartvel de 1".
Metlico G1 lavvel 1" + G3 descartvel 1".
G2 descartvel 1" + G3 descartvel 1".
A caixa de mistura composta de dampers de lminas

opostas, para admisso de ar externo e retorno de ar,
fabricados em chapa de ao galvanizado e eixo para
acionamento manual ou automtico.
O sistema de filtragem incorporado ao mdulo caixa de
mistura e esto disponveis as seguintes opes de filtros:
Metlico G1 lavvel de 1".
Metlico G1 lavvel de 1" + G3 descartvel de 1".
G2 descartvel de 1" + G3 descartvel de 1".
.....................................
47
PARADA DEFINITIVA, DESMONTAGEM E REMOO

Estes mdulos contm peas em movimento e componentes eltricos que podem constituir um perigo e causar danos fsicos !
Todas as operaes no mesmo devem ser efetuadas por pessoal habilitado, provido de equipamentos de proteo e em
conformidade com as regras aplicveis de segurana.
Ler o manual
Perigo de choque eltrico
Unidade acionada a distncia

Pode partir sem prevenir
1. Interromper todas as fontes de alimentao eltrica dos mdulos, assim como aquelas dos sistemas conectados com os
mesmos. Certificar-se de que todos os dispositivos de interrupo eltrica se encontrem na posio aberta. Os cabos de
alimentao podem ento ser desmontados e retirados. Para saber onde se encontram os pontos de conexo da
unidade, consultar a documentao tcnica.
2. Em regra geral, as unidades monobloco devero ser desmontadas e retiradas de uma s pea. Retirar os eventuais pinos de
fixao e levantar depois os elementos com um equipamento de manipulao de uma capacidade de carga apropriada. Consultar
as informaes da documentao tcnica no que se refere ao peso e aos procedimentos de manipulao recomendados.
Form: F-TEC007-BR(1004)
Substitui: Form: F-TEC007-BR(0904)
R Tomazina, 125 - Quadra 10
Fone: (041) 661-3300
CEP 83325-040
R Joo Tibiri, 900

Fone: (011) 3837-6700
CEP 05077-000
Cond. Portal da Serra

FAX: (041) 661-3397
Pinhais - PR
V. Anastcio
FAX: (011) 3837-6909 O fabricante se reserva no direito de proceder a qualquer modificao sem
So Paulo - S.P. prvio aviso.
Foto Ilustrativa
As unidades climatizadoras GEMINI esto dispo-
ncleo isolante em espuma de poliuretano
am de 1.300 a 34.000 m3/h, e capacidades nomi-
resistncia trmica e elevada rigidez mecnica ao
nveis em 16 modelos, com vazes de ar que varinais de 2 a 50 TR.
Conceito Modular

Mdulo de ventilao
(17mm), que proporcionam propriedades de

conjunto.
Todos os painis possuem uma moldura com juntas patenteadas co-extrudadas em PVC, proporcionando uma construo com baixos ndices de
vazamentos e livres de pontes trmicas.
Mdulo caixa de mistura (opcional)
Base
do-se pela montagem na posio vertical ou hori-
da, construda em trilhos de chapa galvanizada
Estes mdulos so definidos pelo cliente, optan-
zontal, com diversas posies de descarga do ventilador. O Conceito modular permite facilidade de
transporte e manuseio na obra.
Estrutura em Alumnio
Construda em perfis de alumnio extrudado, a
Todo o conjunto montado sobre uma base rgidobrada (perfil em U), que confere a unidade
maior estabilidade ao conjunto, alm de evitar a
necessidade de base de alvenaria e proporcionar

o transporte seguro do mdulo at o local da instalao.
estrutura possui caractersticas de excelente ri-
vas e ambientalmente corretas (100% reciclvel).
inrcia, apoiada com amortecedores de borracha
gidez e leveza, alm de propriedades no corrosi-
Os perfis de alumnio so fixados por meio de cantos em nylon.
O conjunto motor ventilador possue uma base de
ou mola (conforme o tipo de ventilador), permitindo uma operao com baixo nvel de rudo e
vibrao.
Todos os painis so em parede dupla revestidos
Motores
externamente com chapa galvanizada. Possuem o
teo IP55, de 50 ou 60 Hz.
internamente com chapa de ao pr-pintada e
Motor eltrico trifsico de 4 plos, grau de pro-
CARACTERSTICAS
TCNICAS
C L IM AT I Z A D O R GE MINI - Y H
Ventilador
tas por polegada e 3, 4, 6 ou 8 filas de profundidade e diferentes tipos de
centrfugos podem ser do tipo SIROCCO ou do tipo Limit-Load.
So construdas em tubos de cobre de 1/2, com a opo de 8 ou 12 alecircuitos para atender as mais variadas necessidades de projeto.
Conforme as presses necessrias no projeto, os ventiladores
Software de Seleo
Drenagem do Condensado
Uma bandeja para recolhimento de condensado, com caimento e dreno
inferior permite a retirada total da gua condensada, atendendo as
recomendaes da norma ASHRAE-62. A bandeja fabricada de material
termoplstico ABS, livre de corroso e isolada com poliuretano injetado.
Filtros
Suporte para filtros de 1 ou 2, ou a combinao com 2 filtros de 1 com

grau de filtragem G2 ou G3.
O software de seleo do GEMINI opera em ambiente Windows e

fornecido gratuitamente pela YORK International.
Acessrios e opcionais disponveis
Ventiladores de alta presso (Limit Load ou Air Foil).

Motores de alta eficincia.
Serpentina de aquecimento.
Mdulo caixa de mistura.
Dados do modelo com ventilador Sirocco

Capacidade Nominal
(TR)
Vazo Nominal
(m3/h)
Largura (mm)
Mdulo
Altura (mm)
Ventilao
Profundidade (mm)
Largura (mm)
Mdulo
Altura (mm)
Trocador
Profundidade (mm)
Largura (mm)
Modelo
Altura (mm)
Vertical
Profundidade (mm)
Largura (mm)
Modelo
Altura (mm)
Horizontal
Profundidade (mm)
02
1360
794
559
559
794
559
559
794
1118
559
794
559
1118
03
2040
794
559
559
794
559
559
794
1118
584
794
559
1118
04
2720
1024
624
624
1024
624
624
1024
1248
624
1024
624
1248
05
3400
1024
624
624
1024
624
624
1024
1248
624
1024
624
1248
08
5440
1444
784
724
1444
684
724
1444
1468
724
1444
784
1448
09
6120
1444
784
724
1444
684
724
1444
1468
724
1444
784
1448
10
6800
1444
784
724
1444
784
724
1444
1568
724
1444
784
1448
14
9520
1784
724
724
1784
784
724
1784
1448
724
1784
724
1448
15
10200
1784
724
724
1784
869
724
1784
1593
724
1784
869
1448
18
12240
2100
814
814
2100
1059
814
2100
1873
814
2100
1059
1628
20
13600
2100
814
814
2100
1059
814
2100
1873
814
2100
1059
1628
25
17000
2430
904
904
2430
1059
904
2430
1963
904
2430
1059
1808
30
20400
2430
904
904
2430
1247
904
2214
2151
904
2214
1247
1808
35
23800
2430
904
904
2430
1247
904
2214
2151
904
2214
1247
1808
40
27200
2800
1400
1100
2800
1400
1100
2800
2800
1100
2800
1400
2200
50
30600
3040
1400
1100
3040
1400
1100
3040
2800
1100
3040
1444
2200
Obs: Acrescentar 120mm na cota da altura (altura da base do mdulo).
FORM: R-COM013-BR(0904)
SUBSTITUI: R-COM013-BR(1103)
UNIDADE INDUSTRIAL SO PAULO - RUA JOO TIBIRI, 900 - SO PAULO - SP - CEP: 05077-000 - FONE: (11) 3837 6700 - FAX: (11) 3641 4951
UNIDADE INDUSTRIAL PINHAIS - RUA TOMAZINA, 125 - CONDOMNIO PORTAL DA SERRA - PINHAIS - PR - CEP: 83325-040 - FONE: (41) 661 3407 - FAX: (41) 661 3410
CONTATE - YORK.BRASIL@BR.YORK.COM VISITE - WWW.YORKBRASIL.COM.BR FALE CONOSCO - 0800 164 022
YH GEMINI
Especificao de Engenharia
Gabinete
Gabinete dever ser construdo em perfis de alumnio extrudado acoplados a uma
cantoneira 3D em nylon.
Painis devero ser em parede dupla, revestidos externamente com chapa de ao
pr-pintado e internamente com ao galvanizado. Ncleo isolante dever ser em
poliuretano expandido, de 17 mm de espessura, densidade mdia de 40 kg/m3 e
coeficiente de transmisso trmica K de 0,68 W/m 0C.
Os painis devero possuir uma moldura de vedao com juntas co-extrudadas em
PVC.
Os painis removveis devero possuir fechos de fcil remoo e fabricados em
material termo-plstico a fim de evitar pontes trmicas.
As caractersticas dimensionais e de capacidades, devero constar nas planilhas de
selecionamento de cada equipamento.
Mdulo de Ventilao
O mdulo de ventilao dever ser composto por um ou mais ventiladores, motor de
acionamento, polias e correias.
Ventilador centrfugo dever ser de dupla aspirao com ps curvadas para frente
sirocco ou ps curvadas para trs limit-load ou do tipo airfoil, conforme as
presses requeridas de projeto. Devero ser construdos em chapa de ao com
tratamento anti-corrosivo, e rotores balanceados esttica e dinamicamente.
Os rolamentos dos ventiladores devero ser do tipo rgido auto-compensador de
esferas, blindados e com lubrificao permanente.
Dever ser utilizado um ventilador de rotor duplo (dois ventiladores de dupla
aspirao formando um s conjunto com eixo de acionamento comum), por
climatizador sempre que a capacidade nominal for superior a 10 TR.
Dever ser utilizado um ventilador de rotor triplo (trs ventiladores de dupla
aspirao formando um s conjunto com eixo de acionamento comum), por
climatizador sempre que a capacidade nominal for superior a 35 TR.
Os ventiladores e respectivos motores devero ser montados em uma base de
inrcia rgida, construda em chapa de ao galvanizada e apoiada sobre
amortecedores de borracha ou do tipo mola (conforme o tipo de ventilador).
O acionamento dever ser por polia motora regulvel, at motores de 5 CV, e polia
movida fixa. A correia dever ser do tipo trapezoidal.
Motor eltrico, trifsico, grau de proteo IP55, grau de isolamento classe B e fator
de servio 1,15.
O mdulo trocador de calor dever ser composto por uma serpentina de
resfriamento (e/ou quando aplicvel serpentina de aquecimento) bandeja de dreno e
sistema de filtragem de ar.
Serpentina de resfriamento dever ser fabricada com tubos de cobre sem costura de
, com a opes de 8 ou 12 aletas por polegada e 3, 4, 6 e 8 filas de profundidade
e vrios tipos de circuitagens disponveis.
O nmero de filas, circuitagem, aletas por polegada e rea de face dever estar
indicado nos clculos de selecionamento do equipamento.
Aletas corrugadas de alumnio, devero ser perfeitamente fixadas aos tubos por
meio de expanso hidrulica.
Cabeceiras devero ser construdas em chapas de ao galvanizado;
Coletores em tubos de cobre devero ser providos de luvas soldadas em lato com
rosca do tipo macho BSP, para conexo rede hidrulica.
Bandeja de drenagem de condensado dever ser fabricada em material
termoplstico do tipo ABS, isolada com isolamento termo-acstico em poliuretano
expandido, espessura de 35 mm, densidade mdia de 48 kg/m3 e coeficiente de
transmisso trmica k de 0,68 W/m 0C. O escoamento de condensado dever ser
realizado pela parte inferior da bandeja por uma conexo fabricada em PVC com
dimetro de 1.1/4. Para condicionadores acima de 20 TR o mdulo trocador de
calor dever possuir duas bandejas, com dois pontos de drenos sendo um em cada
extremidade.
Os mdulos devero ser apoiados por trilhos em Ude chapa de ao galvanizado,
com altura de 120 mm.
O sistema de filtragem de ar dever ser projetado e construdo para alojar o tipo de
filtro especificado na seleo do equipamento. Devero estar disponveis as
seguintes opes de filtros:
o Metlico G1 lavvel de 1.
o G3 descartvel de 1.
o Metlico G1 lavvel 1 + G3 descartvel 1.
o G2 descartvel 1 + G3 descartvel 1.
Os filtros de ar sero de conformidade com cada tipo de ambiente e indicado nos
dados tcnicos de seleo do equipamento.
Os filtros devero estar montados em armaes metlicas, e possuir fcil remoo e
instalao. Quando utilizado o mdulo caixa de mistura, o sistema de filtragem de ar
dever estar integrado a caixa de mistura.
Resistncias eltricas de aquecimento (quando aplicvel) devero ser do tipo espiral
com molas, fabricado em Nquel-Cromo (80/20), montadas em uma estrutura de ao
galvanizado e fixadas entre isoladores de porcelana. A resistncia dever estar
protegida por um termostato de segurana com rearme automtico. Quando
utilizada a opo de resistncia eltrica de aquecimento as mesmas devero estar
instaladas no mdulo trocador de calor (aps a serpentina).
Serpentina de aquecimento (quando aplicvel) dever ser fabricada com tubos de
cobre sem costura de e aletas corrugadas de alumnio, perfeitamente fixadas aos
tubos por meio de expanso hidrulica e cabeceiras em chapas de ao galvanizado
Dever ser construda com 2 (duas) filas de profundidade e 4 tubos por circuito.
Quando utilizada a opo de serpentina de aquecimento a mesma dever ser
montada aps a serpentina de resfriamento
Mdulo Caixa de Mistura (Quando aplicvel)

A caixa de mistura dever ser composta de dampers de lminas opostas, para
admisso de ar externo e retorno de ar, e fabricados em chapa de ao galvanizado
com eixo para acionamento manual ou automtico.
O sistema de filtragem de ar dever ser projetado e construdo para alojar o tipo de

filtro especificado na seleo do equipamento. Devero estar disponveis as
seguintes opes de filtros:
o Metlico G1 lavvel de 1.
o Metlico G1 lavvel de 1 + G3 descartvel de 1.
o G2 descartvel de 1 + G3 descartvel de 1.
Os filtros de ar sero de conformidade com cada tipo de ambiente e indicado nos
dados tcnicos de seleo do equipamento.
Climatizador de Ar Gemini
Modelo YH
Manual de Instalao, Operao e Manuteno

Climatizador de Ar
Vazo de ar de 1.200 a 40.000 m3/h
..............................................
Indice
1. Descrio Geral .....................................................................................................

2. Nomenclatura do Mdulo de Ventilao .................................................................
3. Nomenclatura do Mdulo Trocador de Calor .........................................................
4. Tabela 1 - Cdigos dos Circuitos ...........................................................................
5. Nomenclatura do Mdulo Caixa de Mistura ............................................................
6. Conexes hidrulicas Serpentina de Resfriamento ...............................................
7. Configurao da Serpentina de Aquecimento - YH ...............................................
8. Disposio e Quantidade de Filtros Planos ...........................................................
9. Motores Disponveis por Gabinete .........................................................................
12. Ventiladores - Posies de Descarga ..................................................................
13. Modelos de Ventiladores - YH ...............................................................................
14. Curva de Performance do Ventilador Sirocco - Gabinete 2 e 3 ...........................
27. Curva de Performance do Ventilador Limit Load Gabinete 8 a 10 .......................
31. Disposio dos Mdulos - Posio Vertical .........................................................
32. Disposio dos Mdulos - YH Posio Horizontal ...............................................
33. Introduo .............................................................................................................
34. Manuteno ..........................................................................................................
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
32
33
35
.....................................
1. Descrio Geral - YH
As unidades climatizadoras GEMINI esto disponveis em 16
modelos, com vazes de ar que variam de 1.200 a 40.000 m3/h,
e capacidades nominais de 2 a 50 TR.
Serpentina de Aquecimento (Opcional)

So construdas em tubos de cobre sem costura de 1/2", 8
aletas por polegada , 2 filas de profundidade e 4 tubos por
circuito. Esta instalada aps a serpentina de gua gelada, no
mdulo trocador.
As principais caractersticas da linha Gemini so:

Conceito Modular
- Mdulo trocador de calor
- Mdulo de ventilao
- Mdulo Caixa de Mistura (OPCIONAL)
Estes mdulos so definidos pelo cliente, optando-se pela
montagem na posio vertical ou horizontal, com diversas
posies de descarga do ventilador.
Gabinete em Estrutura de Alumnio
Construda em perfis de alumnio extrudado, possuem
Os perfis de alumnio so fixados por meio de cantos 3D em
nylon.
Todos os painis so em parede dupla, com ncleo isolante de
poliuretano injetado (17mm de espessura), de densidade mdia
de 40 kg/m 3, que proporcionam propriedades de resistncia
trmica e elevada rigidez mecnica ao conjunto.
O revestimento externo em ao pr-pintado e o interno em ao
galvanizado sem pintura.
construo com baixos ndices de vazamentos e livres de pontes
trmicas.
Base dos Mdulos
em trilhos de chapa galvanizada alm de evitar a necessidade
de base para apoio e nivelamento dos mdulos, o transporte
seguro do mdulo at o local da instalao.
Bandeja do Condensado
A bandeja fabricada de material termoplstico do tipo ABS,
livre de corroso e isolada com poliuretano injetado.
Diversas opes de filtragem
No mdulo serpentina encontra-se o suporte para colocao de
um filtro de 1" (padro) ou 1 + 1 a 2"(opcional). So disponveis
as seguintes opes de filtros:
- Metlico G1 lavvel de 1 + G3 descartvel de 1
- G2 descartvel de 1 + G3 descartvel de 1.
Ventilador
Conforme as presses necessrias de projeto, os ventiladores
centrfugos de dupla aspirao podem ser do tipo sirocco (ps
curvadas para frente) ou do tipo Limit-Load (ps curvadas para
trs). O acionamento por polia motora regulvel (at motores
de 5 cv), e polia movida fixa.
O conjunto Motor/Ventilador possue uma base, apoiada em
amortecedores de borracha ou mola (conforme o tipo de
ventilador) permitindo uma operao com baixo nvel de rudo e
vibrao.
Mdulo Caixa de Mistura (opcional)
O mdulo caixa de mistura formado por dois dampers, onde
so feitas as fixaes dos dutos de entrada e sada de ar (tomada
de ar externo e ar de retorno) e filtros ded ar. Os dampers so
construdos em chapa de ao galvanizado, com lminas opostas
e eixo para acionamento manual ou automtico.
Motor Eltrico
Motor eltrico trifsico de 2 ou 4 plos, grau de proteo IP55, de
50 ou 60 Hz. Possui classe B de isolamento e categoria N. Podem
ser fornecidos nas tenses de 220, 380 e 440 Volts.Fator de
servio 1,15.
So construdas em tubos de cobre sem costura de 1/2", com a
opo de 8 ou 12 aletas por polegada e 3, 4, 6 ou 8 filas de
profundidade e diferentes tipos de circuitos para atender as mais
variadas necessidades de projeto. Os tubos so expandidos
mecnicamente nas aletas de alumnio. Os coletores de entrada
e sada dgua so fabricados com tubos de cobre e suas
conexes, em lato e rosca do tipo BSP. As cabeceiras dos
aletados so fabricadas com chapa de ao galvanizado. O lado
de hidrulica pode ser fornecido a esquerda ou a direita da
unidade, conforme solicitado no pedido.
.....................................
2. Nomenclatura do Mdulo de Ventilao

YH
Tamanho do gabinete
02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07, 08
09, 10, 14, 15, 18, 20,
25, 30, 35, 40 e 50
V- Mdulo de ventilao
25
AE
L
Lado de acesso ao motor
L - Esquerda
D - Direita
Embalagem
E - Exportao
B - Nacional
Acionamento
conforme selecionamento
Tipo de ventilador
F - Sirocco
B - Limit load
A - Air Foil
Arranjo x Posio de descarga

(obs.: 8)(Pg.8)
A - H1
D - V1
G - V5
B - H3
E - V2
C - H5
F - V3

A - 0,5
G-4
M - 15
B - 0,75
H-5
N - 20
C-1
J - 7,5
D - 1,5
K - 10
E-2
L - 12,5
Rendimento do motor
P - Standard
A - Alto Rendimento
H - Premiun Efficiency - NEMA
Alimentao eltrica (Obs. 1)(Pg.8)

A - 220-380V/3/60 Hz
B - 440V/3/60 Hz
C - 220-380V/3/50 Hz
D - 220-660V/3/50 Hz
E - 380-660V/3/60 Hz
F - 230V/3/60 Hz
G - 208-230-460V/3/60 Hz
Ventiladores - Opes de Descarga
123456
123456
Direita
123456
123456
123456
123456
1234567890
123456
1234567890
123456
1234567890
Esquerda
Sentido do ar
Exemplo:
YH05VFFDAPZZBR
Mdulo de ventilao, capacidade nominal 5 TR, ventilador Sirocco, posio de descarga V3, motor Standard 1,5 CV em 220-380/3/
60Hz, embalagem nacional, lado de acesso ao motor na posio direta.
OBSERVAES:
(1)
para este campo.
.....................................
3. Nomenclatura do Mdulo Trocador de Calor

YH
Tamanho do gabinete
02, 03, 04, 05, 08, 09,
10, 14, 15, 18, 20, 25,
30, 35, 40 e 50
25
ZZ
E
Embalagem
E - Exportao
B - Nacional
No disponvel
T- Mdulo de trocador de calor
Arranjo
E - V5 Sirocco
Filtro (obs.2)
B - G3 descartvel 1
C - G3 descartvel 2
Z - sem filtro
Nmero de rows x tubos por

circuito conforme tabela 1 pgina 7
No disponvel
Serpentina de aquecimento
(obs.: 3 e 4)(Pg.8)
0 - No
1 - Sim
Nmero de aletas por polegada / Lado

Hidrulica / Revestimento da aleta
A - 8 FPI / ESQ / AL
C - 12 FPI / ESQ / AL
D - 8 FPI / DIR / AL
F - 12 FPI / DIR / AL
G - 8 FPI / ESQ / AD
H - 12 FPI / ESQ / AD
J - 8 FPI / DIR / AD
K - 12 FPI / DIR / AD
12345
Direita
12345
12345
12345
12345
12345
1234567890
123456789012345
123456789012345
Esquerda
Exemplo:
YH05TABFA0ZZZB
Sentido do ar
Mdulo trocador de calor, capacidade nominal 5 TR, horizontal com ventilador Sirocco, filtro G3, serpentina de resfriamento de 4 filas,
8 tubos por circuito, 8 aletas por polegada, sem serpentina de resfriamento, embalagem nacional
OBS.:
Quando o climatizador for equipado com caixa de mistura, o quadro de filtragem passa a fazer parte da caixa de mistura.
.....................................
4. Tabela 1 - Cdigos dos Circuitos

Tubos por circuito
Modelo
Rows
2
02
03
04
05
08
09
10
14
15
18
20
25
30
35
40
50
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
A
C
A
E
B
F
K
10
B
D
F
J
G
L
P
12
16
18
E
H
L
G
K
C
H
M
Q
20
N0
tubos
em
altura
10
D
J
12
N
R
A
B
C
D
A
E
B
H
A
E
A
C
A
D
A
D
A
C
A
D
A
C
A
C
A
D
A
C
A
B
A
B
B
F
H
N
D
H
M
B
E
H
N
B
E
H
N
D
G
L
B
E
G
L
D
G
L
D
H
M
B
E
H
M
B
E
J
N
C
J
14
E
F
C
F
J
M
D
G
K
P
D
K
G
P
G
L
N
G
K
Q
T
U
L
R
F
K
P
G
L
Q
16
M
Q
18
G
K
Q
16
L
R
M
W
V
X
20
C
J
B
E
H
M
C
H
B
E
H
M
B
E
J
N
C
F
J
N
B
D
F
J
C
D
F
C
D
F
20
F
J
P
N
F
J
M
F
N
24
K
Q
28
K
N
30
T
J
P
K
Q
K
Q
L
R
S
30
F
P
G
K
P
S
36
L
Q
E
38
H
K
38
G
38
G
.....................................
5. Nomenclatura do Mdulo Caixa de Mistura

YH
25
E
Embalagem
E - Exportao
B - Nacional
Tamanho do gabinete
02, 03, 04, 05, 08, 09,
10, 14, 15, 18, 20, 25,
30, 35, 40 e 50
Lado de remoo do filtro ou acesso

(olhando da entrada de ar (obs.6)
L - Esquerda
R - Direita
A - Ambos
OBS.: Lado de remoo no permite Damper
M- Mdulo da Caixa dee Mistura
Arranjo
Filtro (obs.2)
B - G3 descartvel 1
C - G3 descartvel 2
Z - sem filtro
Tamanho do Damper 1
0- sem Damper
A - 100% da vazo
B - 20% da vazo
Posio do Damper 1
(obs.: 5, 6, 7, 8 e 9)
0- sem Damper
1 - Frontal
2 - Superior
4 - Lateral direita
Posio do Damper 2
(obs.: 5, 6, 7, 8 e 9)
0- sem Damper
1 - Frontal
2 - Superior
4 - Lateral direita
Tamanho do Damper 2
0- sem Damper
A - 100% da vazo
B - 20% da vazo
Exemplo:
YH05MAA2B1BRB
Mdulo caixa de mistura, capacidade nominal 5 TR, posio horizontal (ventilador Sirocco),
Damper 1-100% de vazo com posio superior, Damper 2 - 20% de vazo com posio
frontal, filtro G3 descartvel 1 com remoo direita, embalagem nacional.
1
5
Posio dos Dampers

na caixa de mistura
Nota:
Quando o climatizador for equipado com caixa de mistura, o quadro de filtragem passa a
fazer da caixa.
Neste caso no possvel a instalao de quadro de filtros no mdulo trocador de calor.
OBSERVAES:
(1)
para este campo.
.....................................
6. Conexes hidrulicas Serpentina de Resfriamento

Tubos por circuito
Modelo Rows
2
02
03
04
05
08
09
10
14
15
18
20
25
30
35
40
50
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
1-1/4
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
10
1
1-1/4
1-1/4
1-1/2
12
18
20
1
1
1-1/4
1-1/4
1-1/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/4
1-1/2
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
16
N0
tubos
em
altura
10
1
1
12
1-1/4
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
1-1/2
2
2
2
1-1/2
2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
3
2-1/2
3
2-1/2
3
2-1/2
3
2-1/2
3
2
2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2
2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2
2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
3
1-1/2
2
1-1/2
2
2
2-1/2
1-1/2
2
14
1-1/2
2
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
2
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
2
1-1/4
1-1/2
1-1/2
1-1/2
1-1/2
1
1-1/4
1-1/4
1-1/2
1-1/2
2
2
1-1/4
1-1/4
2
2
1-1/2
2
2
1-1/2
2
2
16
1-1/4
1-1/2
18
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
16
1-1/4
1-1/2
1-1/2
1-1/2
1-1/4
1-1/2
1-1/2
1-1/2
20
1-1/2
2
2
2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2
2-1/2
2
2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2
2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2
2-1/2
2-1/2
3
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
3
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
3
2-1/2
20
1-1/2
2
2
2
2-1/2
2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2
2-1/2
28
2
2
30
2
2
2-1/2
2
2
2
2-1/2
2
2
2
30
2
2-1/2
2
2-1/2
2-1/2
24
1-1/2
2
2
36
2
2-1/2
2
38
2
2-1/2
38
2-1/2
38
2-1/2
OBS.:Opcionalmente pode-se escolher o lado das conexes hidrulicas em esquerda e direita (conforme pedido), sendo que
deve-se tomar como referncia, a frente da mquina, vista pelo filtro de ar (retorno). As conexes hidrulicas so do tipo BSP.
.....................................
7. Configurao da Serpentina de Aquecimento- YH

Gabinete
rea
de Face (m2)
Conexo (BSP)
Nmero de
tubos em altura
02
0,16
1-1/4
10
03
0,21
1-1/4
12
04
0,30
1-1/2
14
05
0,38
1-1/2
16
08
0,60
1-1/2
16
09
0,68
1-1/2
18
10
0,76
1-1/2
20
14
0,94
1-1/2
20
15
1,13
24
18
1,36
28
20
1,51
30
25
1,89
30
30
2,27
36
35
2,66
38
40
3,07
38
50
3,40
38
.....................................
8. Disposio e Quantidade de Filtros Planos - YH

453
313
237
286
528
463
Gabinete 8 e 9
Vertical
(6x) 453 X 286
Gabinete 4 e 5
(3x) 313 X 528
Gabinete 2 e 3
(3x) 237 X 463
453
425
425
336
336
Gabinete 8 e 9 Horizontal
10 Horizontal e Vertical
(6x) 453 X 336
379
Gabinete 15
(8x) 425 X 379
Gabinete 14
(8x) 425 X 336
504
384
384
473
567
473
Gabinete 25
(12x) 384 X 473
Gabinete 30
(12x) 384 X 567
Gabinete 18 e 20
(8x) 504 X 473
384
446
644
644
Gabinete 35
(12x) 384 X 644
Gabinete 40
(12x) 446 X 644
486
644
Gabinete 50
(12x) 486 X 644
* Opcionalmente podem ser fornecidos outros tipos de filtros.
10
.....................................
9. Motores Disponveis por Gabinete

Gabinete Ventilador
Motores disponveis
0,50 0,75
1,5
TDA-7/7
TDA-7/7
TDA-9/7
7,5
TDA-10/8
TDA-12/12
TDA-15/11
10
TDA-15/15
10
12,5
15
20
14
2XTDA-12/9
15
2XTDA-12/12
18
2XTDA-15/11
20
2XTDA-15/15
25
2XTDA-18/13
30
2XTDA-18/18
35
2XTDA-18/18
40
3XTDA-18/18
50
3XTDA-18/18

Potncia (CV)
N0 de polos
Frequncia (Hz)
Carcaa
RPM Nominal
In (A)
220 CMO(A)
Ip/In(A)
Tenso
In (A)
(Volts)
380 CMO(A)
Ip/In(A)
In (A)
440 CMO(A)
Ip/In(A)
0,5
0,75
1,5
63
3380
1,71
1,97
5,5
0,99
1,14
5,5
0,86
0,99
5,5
0,83
71
3430
2,39
2,75
6,2
1,38
1,59
6,2
1,2
1,38
6,2
0,85
71
3425
3
3,45
7,8
1,74
2,00
7,8
1,5
1,73
7,8
0,83
80
3350
4,3
4,95
7,5
2,49
2,86
7,5
2,15
2,47
7,5
0,86
80
3380
5,46
6,28
7,5
3,16
3,63
7,5
2,73
3,14
7,5
0,89
90S
3465
8,43
9,69
7,8
4,88
5,61
7,8
4,22
4,85
7,8
0,84
90L
3450
11
12,65
7,9
6,37
7,33
7,9
5,5
6,33
7,9
0,86
100L
3485
12,9
14,84
8
7,47
8,59
8
6,45
7,42
8
0,88
6
2
60
112M
3465
15,8
18,17
7,5
9,15
10,52
7,5
7,9
9,09
7,5
0,88
7,5
10
12,5
15
20
25
30
40
112M
3500
19,1
21,97
8
11,1
12,77
8
9,55
10,98
8
0,87
132S
3510
25,5
29,33
7
14,8
17,02
7
12,8
14,72
7
0,88
132M
3510
31
35,65
7,8
17,9
20,59
7,8
15,5
17,83
7,8
0,88
132M
3520
36,9
42,44
8,5
21,4
24,61
8,5
18,5
21,28
8,5
0,89
160M
3540
50,3
57,85
7,8
29,1
33,47
7,8
25,1
28,87
7,8
0,88
160M
3525
61,6
70,84
8
35,7
41,06
8
30,8
35,42
8
0,88
160L
3530
72,1
82,92
8,5
41,7
47,96
8,5
36
41,40
8,5
0,88
200M
3555
99
113,85
7,2
57,3
65,90
7,2
49,5
56,93
7,2
0,88
7,5
10
12,5
15
20
25
30
40
112M
1740
20
23,00
7
11,6
13,34
7
10
11,50
7
0,82
132S
1760
26,6
30,59
8
15,4
17,71
8
13,3
15,30
8
0,83
132M
1755
33,3
38,30
8,7
19,3
22,20
8,7
16,6
19,09
8,7
0,82
132M
1755
39,3
45,20
8,3
22,8
26,22
8,3
19,6
22,54
8,3
0,83
160M
1760
52,6
60,49
6,3
30,5
35,08
6,3
26,3
30,25
6,3
0,83
160L
1760
64,3
73,95
6,5
37,2
42,78
6,5
32,2
37,03
6,5
0,83
180M
1765
75,5
86,83
7,5
43,7
50,26
7,5
37,8
43,47
7,5
0,84
200M
1770
101
116,15
6,6
58,5
67,28
6,6
50,5
58,08
6,6
0,85

Potncia (CV)
N0 de polos
Frequncia (Hz)
Carcaa
RPM Nominal
In (A)
220 CMO(A)
Ip/In(A)
Tenso
In (A)
(Volts)
380 CMO(A)
Ip/In(A)
In (A)
440 CMO(A)
Ip/In(A)
0,5
0,75
1,5
71
1720
2,07
2,38
5
1,2
1,38
5
1,03
1,18
5
0,69
71
1720
2,9
3,34
5,5
1,68
1,93
5,5
1,45
1,67
5,5
0,7
80
1720
3,02
3,47
7,2
1,75
2,01
7,2
1,51
1,74
7,2
0,82
80
1720
4,43
5,09
7,8
2,56
2,94
7,8
2,21
2,54
7,8
0,82
90S
1720
6,12
7,04
6,4
3,54
4,07
6,4
3,06
3,52
6,4
0,78
90L
1730
8,7
10,01
6,8
5,04
5,80
6,8
4,35
5,00
6,8
0,8
100L
1725
11,9
13,69
7,8
6,89
7,92
7,8
5,95
6,84
7,8
0,8
100L
1715
14
16,10
7,6
8,11
9,33
7,6
7
8,05
7,6
0,81
6
4
60
112M
1720
16,4
18,86
8
9,49
10,91
8
8,2
9,43
8
0,84
Legenda:
.....................................
11

Potncia (CV)
N0 de polos
Frequncia (Hz)
Carcaa
RPM Nominal
In (A)
220 CMO(A)
Ip/In(A)
Tenso
In (A)
(Volts)
380 CMO(A)
Ip/In(A)
In (A)
440 CMO(A)
Ip/In(A)
0,5
0,75
1,5
63
3380
1,68
1,93
5,5
0,97
1,12
5,5
0,84
0,97
5,5
0,8
71
3430
2,35
2,70
6,2
1,36
1,56
6,2
1,17
1,35
6,2
0,83
71
3440
2,92
3,36
7,8
1,69
1,94
7,8
1,46
1,68
7,8
0,83
80
3390
4,02
4,62
7,5
2,33
2,68
7,5
2,01
2,31
7,5
0,87
80
3400
5,61
6,45
7,7
3,25
3,74
7,7
2,81
3,23
7,7
0,84
90S
3430
8
9,20
7,8
4,63
5,32
7,8
4
4,60
7,8
0,85
90L
3430
10,8
12,42
7,8
6,25
7,19
7,8
5,4
6,21
7,8
0,85
100L
3500
13,1
15,07
9
7,58
8,72
9
6,55
7,53
9
0,85
6
2
60
112M
3475
15,1
17,37
8
8,74
10,05
8
7,55
8,68
8
0,89
7,5
10
12,5
15
20
25
30
40
112M
3500
18,9
21,74
8
10,9
12,54
8
9,45
10,87
8
0,86
132S
3515
25
28,75
7,5
14,5
16,68
7,5
12,5
14,38
7,5
0,88
132M
3515
30,7
35,31
7,8
17,8
20,47
7,8
15,4
17,71
7,8
0,88
132M
3510
35,4
40,71
8
20,5
23,58
8
17,7
20,36
8
0,9
160M
3540
49,8
57,27
7,5
28,8
33,12
7,5
24,9
28,64
7,5
0,86
160L
3530
62,1
71,42
8,2
36
41,40
8,2
31
35,65
8,2
0,85
160L
3530
72,1
82,92
8
41,7
47,96
8
36
41,40
8
0,87
200M
3560
98,3
113,05
7,5
56,9
65,44
7,5
49,2
56,58
7,5
0,86
7,5
10
12,5
15
20
25
30
40
112M
1740
20
23,00
8
11,6
13,34
8
10
11,50
8
0,8
132S
1760
26,4
30,36
7,8
15,3
17,60
7,8
13,2
15,18
7,8
0,82
132M
1760
32
36,80
8,5
18,5
21,28
8,5
16
18,40
8,5
0,83
132M
1755
37,5
43,13
8,8
21,7
24,96
8,8
18,8
21,62
8,8
0,84
160M
1755
53,3
61,30
6,7
30,9
35,54
6,7
26,6
30,59
6,7
0,8
160L
1760
64,7
74,41
6,5
37,5
43,13
6,5
32,3
37,15
6,5
0,81
180M
1760
73,9
84,99
7
42,8
49,22
7
37
42,55
7
0,84
200M
1770
99,6
114,54
6,4
57,7
66,36
6,4
49,8
57,27
6,4
0,85

Potncia (CV)
N0 de polos
Frequncia (Hz)
Carcaa
RPM Nominal
In (A)
220 CMO(A)
Ip/In(A)
Tenso
In (A)
(Volts)
380 CMO(A)
Ip/In(A)
In (A)
440 CMO(A)
Ip/In(A)
0,5
0,75
1,5
71
1700
2,11
2,43
5
1,22
1,40
5
1,05
1,21
5
0,64
71
1700
2,83
3,25
5,5
1,64
1,89
5,5
1,41
1,62
5,5
0,68
80
1730
2,98
3,43
8
1,73
1,99
8
1,49
1,71
8
0,8
80
1700
4,32
4,97
7
2,5
2,88
7
2,16
2,48
7
0,82
90S
1760
6,17
7,10
7,8
3,57
4,11
7,8
3,09
3,55
7,8
0,76
90L
1730
8,28
9,52
7
4,79
5,51
7
4,14
4,76
7
0,82
100L
1720
11,1
12,77
7,5
6,43
7,39
7,5
5,55
6,38
7,5
0,82
100L
1720
13,8
15,87
8
7,99
9,19
8
6,9
7,94
8
0,8
6
4
60
112M
1735
16,4
18,86
6,8
9,49
10,91
6,8
8,2
9,43
6,8
0,81
Legenda:

Potncia (CV)
N0 de polos
Frequncia (Hz)
Carcaa
RPM Nominal
In (A)
CMO(A)
220
Tenso
Ip/In(A)
(Volts)
In (A)
CMO(A)
380
Ip/In(A)
0,5
0,75
1,5
71
2780
1,55
1,78
5,5
0,9
1,04
5,5
0,85
71
2780
2,26
2,60
5,5
1,31
1,51
5,5
0,85
80
2770
3,04
3,50
6
1,76
2,02
6
0,85
90S
2840
4,23
4,86
6
2,45
2,82
6
0,87
90L
2850
5,65
6,50
7,5
3,27
3,76
7,5
0,86
90L
2840
8,38
9,64
7
4,85
5,58
7
0,83
100L
2890
10,6
12,19
7,3
6,14
7,06
7,3
0,88
5,5
2
50
112M
2890
14
16,10
7,6
8,11
9,33
,76
0,87
7,5
10
12,5
15
20
25
30
40
132S
2925
18,8
21,62
8
10,9
12,54
8
0,87
132M
2930
24,9
28,64
7,5
14,4
16,56
7,5
0,89
132M
2930
30,6
35,19
7,5
17,7
20,36
7,5
0,88
160M
2950
37,8
43,47
7,5
21,9
25,19
7,5
0,84
160L
2945
50,3
57,85
29,1
33,47
0
0,86
160L
2945
61,5
70,73
8,2
35,6
40,94
8,2
0,86
180L
2950
68,9
79,24
8
39,9
45,89
8
0,91
200M
2960
96,4
110,86
7,4
55,8
64,17
7,4
0,88
7,5
10
12,5
15
20
25
30
40
132S
1470
19,2
22,08
7,3
11,1
12,77
7,3
0,85
132M
1470
26,1
30,02
7,5
15,1
17,37
7,5
0,85
132M
1460
32,5
37,38
8,3
18,8
21,62
8,3
0,85
160M
1470
38,2
43,93
7
22,1
25,42
7
0,84
160L
1460
52,3
60,15
6
30,3
34,85
6
0,83
160L
1470
63,6
73,14
7
36,8
42,32
7
0,84
180L
1470
72,4
83,26
7
41,9
48,19
7
0,87
200M
1475
99,7
114,66
7
57,7
66,36
7
0,85

Potncia (CV)
N0 de polos
Frequncia (Hz)
Carcaa
RPM Nominal
In (A)
CMO(A)
220
Tenso
Ip/In(A)
(Volts)
In (A)
CMO(A)
380
Ip/In(A)
0,5
0,75
1,5
71
1390
1,88
2,16
4,4
1,09
1,25
4,4
0,7
80
1420
2,47
2,84
6,5
1,43
1,64
6,5
0,78
80
1415
3,14
3,61
6,5
1,82
2,09
6,5
0,82
90S
1440
4,75
5,46
6,5
2,75
3,16
6,5
0,79
90L
1420
5,82
6,69
7,5
3,37
3,88
7,5
0,84
100L
1420
8,48
9,75
7,5
4,91
5,65
7,5
0,82
100L
1420
11,1
12,77
7,5
6,42
7,38
7,5
0,85
5,5
4
50
112M
1430
14,6
16,79
7,5
8,45
9,72
7,5
0,84
Legenda:
12
.....................................

Potncia (CV)
N0 de polos
Frequncia (Hz)
Carcaa
RPM Nominal
In (A)
CMO(A)
220
Tenso
Ip/In(A)
(Volts)
In (A)
CMO(A)
380
Ip/In(A)
0,5
0,75
1,5
71
2760
1,49
1,71
5,5
0,86
0,99
5,5
0,88
71
2750
2,14
2,46
5,7
1,24
1,43
5,7
0,88
80
2750
2,87
3,30
6
1,66
1,91
6
0,87
80
2800
4,01
4,61
7,2
2,32
2,67
7,2
0,87
90S
2845
5,37
6,18
7,3
3,11
3,58
7,3
0,87
90L
2850
7,84
9,02
8
4,54
5,22
8
0,86
100L
2880
10,3
11,85
8,2
5,95
6,84
8,2
0,88
5,5
2
50
100L
2885
13,4
15,41
8,2
7,73
8,89
8,2
0,89
7,5
10
12,5
15
20
25
30
40
132S
2930
18,3
21,05
8
10,6
12,19
8
0,87
132S
2915
24,7,
28,41
8
14,3
16,45
8
0,88
132M
2930
29,7
34,16
8,5
17,2
19,78
8,5
0,89
160M
2945
36,8
42,32
8,5
21,3
24,50
8,5
0,85
160L
2930
49,6
57,04
8,2
28,7
33,01
8,2
0,86
160L
2940
59,9
68,89
8,8
34,7
39,91
8,8
0,87
180M
2945
69,3
79,70
8,6
40,1
46,12
8,6
0,89
200L
2950
93,3
107,30
7,4
54
62,10
7,4
0,9
7,5
10
12,5
15
20
25
30
40
132S
1460
18,8
21,62
8,5
10,9
12,54
8,5
0,85
132M
1455
24,9
28,64
8,2
14,4
16,56
8,2
0,88
160M
1465
31,3
36,00
5,6
18,1
20,82
5,6
0,85
160M
1450
37,3
42,90
6
21,6
24,84
6
0,85
160L
1460
51,1
58,77
6,1
29,6
34,04
6,1
0,84
180L
1465
62
71,30
8,1
35,9
41,29
8,1
0,84
180L
1470
71
81,65
8,6
41,1
47,27
8,6
0,87
200L
1475
98,6
113,39
7
57,1
65,67
7
0,85

Potncia (CV)
N0 de polos
Frequncia (Hz)
Carcaa
RPM Nominal
In (A)
CMO(A)
220
Tenso
Ip/In(A)
(Volts)
In (A)
CMO(A)
380
Ip/In(A)
0,5
0,75
1,5
71
1370
1,87
2,15
5
1,08
1,24
5
0,7
80
1410
2,35
2,70
5,7
1,36
1,56
5,7
0,8
80
1400
2,94
3,38
5,5
1,7
1,96
5,5
0,84
90S
1450
4,47
5,14
7,5
2,59
2,98
7,5
0,77
90L
1450
5,86
6,74
7,5
3,39
3,90
7,5
0,79
100L
1420
7,81
8,98
7,4
4,52
5,20
7,4
0,86
100L
1425
10,5
12,08
8,3
6,07
6,98
8,3
0,86
5,5
4
50
112M
1440
14
16,10
6,6
8,1
9,32
6,6
0,85
Legenda:
12. Ventiladores - Posies de Descarga

Opes de descarga vertical
Opes de descarga horizontal
Descarga Vertical - H1
Descarga Vertical - V1
Descarga Horizontal - H3

(Down Flow) - H5
(Down Flow) - V5
Nota 1.: Todos os mdulos so fabricados conforme pedido para montagem vertical ou horizontal. Uma vez definida a fabricao
(vertical ou horizontal) no possvel fazer modificao em campo.
.....................................
Nota 2.: OBS.: As posies de descarga V5 e H5 (Down Flow) somente esto disponveis at capacidade de 20 TR.
13
13. Modelos de Ventiladores - YH

Sirocco
Limit Load
Gabinete Modelo Tamanho
14
Modelo
Tamanho
02
TDA
7/7
LMD-Q
224
03
TDA
7/7
LMD-Q
250
04
TDA
9/7
LMD-Q
315
05
TDA
10/8
LMD-Q
355
08
TDA
12/12
RLD-Q
315
09
TDA
15/11
RLD-Q
355
10
TDA
15/15
RLD-Q
355
14
2 x TDA
12/9
RLD-Q
400
15
2 x TDA
12/12
RLD-Q
450
18
2 x TDA
15/11
RLD-Q
500
20
2 x TDA
15/15
RLD-Q
500
25
2 x TDA
18/13
2 x RLD-Q
400
30
2 x TDA
18/18
2 x RLD-Q
450
35
2 x TDA
18/18
2 x RLD-Q
500
40
3 x TDA
18/18
2 x RLD-Q
500
50
3 x TDA
18/18
2 x RLD-Q
500
.....................................

.....................................
15

16
.....................................

.....................................
17

18
.....................................

.....................................
19

20
.....................................

NOTA: Dividir a vazo de ar por 2 (Ventilador Duplex)
.....................................
21

22
.....................................

.....................................
23

24
.....................................

.....................................
25

26
.....................................

.....................................
27
28
.....................................
O desempenho mostrado para instalao tipo B - aspirao livre / descarga dutada (ANSI/AMCA Standard 210-85 figura 7).
Os dados de desempenho no incluem os efeitos ocasionados por restries, obstculos ou acessrios colocados no fluxo de ar.
A potncia absorvida (cv) no inclui as perdas da transmisso.
Gabinete 8
RLD 315
NOTA: Curvas dos ventiladores Limit Load para

os gabinetes 2 a 5 somente sob consulta
Gabinete 9 e 10
RLD 355
27. Curva de Performance do Ventilador Limit Load - Gabinete 8 e 10
.....................................
29
Gabinete 14
RLD 400
Gabinete 15
RLD 450
28. Curva de Performance do Ventilador Limit Load - Gabinete 14 e 15
30
.....................................
Gabinete 18 e 20
RLD 500
Gabinete 25
2 x RLD 400
29. Curva de Performance do Ventilador Limit Load - Gabinete 18 a 25
.....................................
31
Gabinete 30
2 x RLD 450
Gabinete 35, 40 e 50
2 x RLD 500
30. Curva de Performance do Ventilador Limit Load - Gabinete 30 a 50
31. Disposio dos Mdulos - YH Posio Vertical

Os mdulos devem ser montados preferencialmente na seqncia mostrada abaixo:
MV
MV
MT
MCV
MT
32. Disposio dos Mdulos - YH Posio Horizontal
MCV
MT
MV
MT
MV
LEGENDA
MT
32
MV
Mdulo Ventilao
MCV
Mdulo Caixa Vazia
.....................................
33. Introduo
As unidades climatizadoras de ar YH so projetados para
instalaes com insuflamento de ar atravs de sistema de dutos
em aplicaes domstica, comercial e industrial, disponveis nas
capacidades de 2 a 50 TRs.
1 - Segurana
Para maior confiabilidade de operao e validade da garantia,
este equipamento deve ser instalado e reparado por instalador
autorizado York. A instalao deve obedecer s normas aplicveis,
particularmente com relao parte eltrica (ponto de fora,
dimensionamento de cabos, seleo da chave seccionadora e
fusveis - disjuntor), mecnica (instalao, acesso para
manuteno, nvel de rudo), renovao e distribuio do ar.
Antes de iniciar os servios de manuteno, desligar a
alimentao eltrica e fixar um aviso de alerta na unidade, alm
de utilizar ferramental e equipamentos de proteo individual (EPI)
adequados.
2 - Recomendaes de transporte
Normalmente, a unidade pode ser movida para uma posio
utilizando um aparelho de iamento ou roletes (cilindros) e sob
nenhuma circunstncia deve ser empurrado sobre apenas a sua
embalagem. Os pallets no devem ser removidos at que a
unidade seja colocada na sua posio. Se a unidade for iada
por um guindaste ou uma talha, barras de proteo e
enchimentos devem ser utilizados para prevenir que as cordas,
os cabos ou as correntes causem possveis danos.
3 - Instalao
3.1. Inspeo
Assim que a unidade for recebida, deve-se inspecionar quanto
a algum dano que possa haver ocorrido durante o transporte. Se
o dano for evidente, deve-se discrimin-lo na nota de entrega da
transportadora e requerer uma inspeo por parte da mesma.
Danos ocorridos e no identificados imediatamente devem
ser reportados dentro de quinze dias aps o recebimento da
mercadoria.
Verifique o equipamento com base na relao de cargas
para verificar se todos os itens foram enviados. Quaisquer faltas
devem ser anotadas na nota de emisso de mercadorias e
reclamadas imediatamente por escrito.
Verifique se as placas de identificao do equipamento esto
em perfeitas condies de leitura.
3.2. Localizao e reas Livres
3.3. Consideraes Acsticas

Com qualquer sistema mecnico, uma certa quantidade de
rudo e vibrao gerada. Para assegurar uma instalao bem
sucedida destas unidades, o sistema de ventilao fixada com
isoladores de vibrao.
Com dutos de ar de insuflamento e de retorno, um colarinho
flexvel deve ser instalado em campo, a fim de se evitar a
transmisso de rudo e vibrao.
Deve-se ter cuidado para isolar a unidade e as tubulaes
das paredes e do teto.
Boas prticas de isolamento e atenuao acstica devem
ser empregadas no projeto da casa de mquinas, dutos de ar,
tubulaes.
3.4. Conexes e Tubulaes de gua

Todo o sistema de tubulaes deve ser instalado de acordo
com a regulamentao das normas locais.
Uma boa instalao deve incluir o seguinte:
1. Eliminadores de vibrao para reduzir a transmisso de
rudos e vibraes para a construo.
2. Vlvulas de servio para isolar a unidade do sistema de
tubulao durante os servios de manuteno.
3. Meios de manter a presso adequada de gua do sistema
(ex.: vlvula reguladora automtica).
4. Instalar indicadores de temperatura e presso na unidade
para auxiliar durante os servios e diagnstico de problemas.
5. Instalao de um filtro para remoo de partculas estranhas
da gua antes de entrar na bomba. Este filtro deve estar localizado
afastado o suficiente da suco da bomba para prevenir a
cavitao da unidade.
3.5. Conexes de Dreno

As conexes para dreno esto localizadas na bandeja inferior:
h duas de cada lado, uma da bandeja do evaporador e outra da
bandeja inferior.
Cada sada de condensado deve ter sua linha de dreno
individual com um sifo que poder ser colocado em qualquer
posio na linha, desde que haja um desnvel mnimo, como
mostrado na figura.
Linhas de dreno devero ser interligadas s tubulaes de
drenagem da construo.
A linha de dreno deve ser isolada termicamente onde houver
risco de condensao externa de gua.
A unidade projetada para a instalao numa superfcie

nivelada e lisa que deve ser capaz de suportar o peso da unidade.
As unidades so construdas para operao ao abrigo do
tempo e no aplicveis em atmosferas midas, corrosivas ou
explosivas.
Na instalao, devem estar previstos drenos de gua,
ventilao e reas para servio, incluindo a remoo de
serpentinas, filtros, ventiladores e motores.
.....................................
33
33. Introduo (continuao)

3.6. Instalao de Dutos de Insuflamento de Ar
A unidade interna YH ou YM fornecida para a instalao em
redes de duto de insuflamento. Os dutos devero ser
dimensionados e executados conforme as normas ABNT para a
distribuio do ar com o menor rudo e consumo de energia. Os
dutos devero ser isolados para reduzir ganhos de calor e evitar
a condensao externa. O isolamento deve incluir uma barreira
contra o vapor para prevenir a absoro de umidade. Em
instalaes de dutos externos, prever proteo contra os efeitos
do tempo.
O acoplamento do duto unidade dever ser feito por
elemento flexvel para reduzir a transmisso de vibrao.
O ajuste da vazo de ar em funo da perda de carga dos

dutos feito pelo ajuste da rotao do ventilador atravs de polia
regulvel.
Dados eltricos
A interligao eltrica deve estar de acordo com o ABNT
NBR 5410.
Uma chave seccionadora com fusveis ou um disjuntor
termomagntico deve ser utilizado num circuito separado do
painel de fora. Este dispositivo deve estar perto da unidade para
convenincia quando em manuteno. Os pontos de conexo de
fora encontram-se do lado direito da unidade.
4 - Operao
Antes da Partida
1. Visualmente verifique a fiao de alimentao de fora
quanto ao dimensionamento e especificao. Deve estar de
acordo com as normas ABNT e/ou locais, bem como o ponto de
fora do equipamento.
7. Verifique se o filtro de ar est perfeitamente colocado. Para

isto, retire as grelhas de retorno. No opere a unidade sem o filtro
de ar.
8. Instale todos painis aps a inspeo interna da unidade.
2. Verifique se a alimentao de energia eltrica est protegida

por chave seccionadora e fusveis.
3. Verifique se a fiao de campo compatvel com os
requerimentos de fora do ponto de alimentao da unidade.
4. Verifique a unidade visualmente quanto a vazamentos no
circuito de gua gelada.
5. Verifique o alinhamento das polias usando o mtodo dos
quatro pontos antes de ajustar a tenso das correia (veja item 5.1
quanto ao alinhamento das polias e tenso da correia).
6. Verifique o alinhamento do ventilador dentro do caracol ao
gir-lo manualmente. Se algum atrito ocorrer, faa as correes
necessrias.
34
9. Verifique se todas as tubulaes tais como a de gua de

resfriamento e de dreno esto prontas e testadas. Os sifes de
dreno devem estar instalados.
10. Verifique se as bombas de gua funcionam corretamente
e as vazes foram ajustadas.
11. Verifique se as vlvulas de servio esto abertas para a
operao apropriada.
12. Certifique-se de que os ventiladores da torre esto ligados
corretamente e que os ventiladores esto girando no sentido
correto.
.....................................
34. Manuteno
1) Generalidades:
A correta e segura manuteno de uma unidade climatizadora
de ar requer certas intervenes que devem ser executadas em
condies de segurana em relao aos equipamentos e as
pessoas.
O acesso unidade deve ocorrer somente quando o(s)
ventilador (es) parou de operar. Devem-se tomar todas as
providncias contra um eventual choque eltrico. Desligue e
trave a chave geral antes de operar de operar qualquer servio
na unidade.
As informaes descritas a seguir representam rotinas mnimas
e bsicas. O asseio do ambiente, o nmero de horas de
operao, so alguns dos fatores que determinam a freqncia
e a extenso dos procedimentos de manuteno a serem
executados. A norma NBR 13.971 da ABNT e demais cdigos de
tcnicas aplicveis devem ser obedecidas. Antes de comear
algum servio de manuteno, vale lembrar que o ventilador foi
selecionado de acordo com certas condies de vazo e
presso. Tudo quanto contribuir para alterar a presso esttica
interna, tal como a obstruo dos filtros e das serpentinas, faz a
unidade funcionar em condies diferentes das originalmente
desenhadas.
2) Transmisso (polias e correias):

Verificar bimestralmente a tenso e o desgaste das correias. Se
certas correias precisarem ser substitudas por causa de seu
desgaste, deve-se trocar o conjunto inteiro por correias com as
mesmas especificaes. Antes de instalar correias novas,
verificar se os sulcos das polias esto lisos, limpos, sem
rachaduras, salincias e livres de toro, graxa, ferrugem ou
outros corpos estranhos. Ajuste a distncia entre as polias de
maneira a poder instalar as correias sem necessidade de forar;
jamais utilize uma chave de fenda ou qualquer outro tipo de
alavanca para inserir ou retirar as correias. Tensione as correias
deslocando o motor em seu suporte e, se necessrio, ajuste o
alinhamento da polia (veja figura abaixo) antes de fixar o motor
em sua devida posio. Utilizar uma rgua ao longo das duas
polias para conferir seu alinhamento. As correias devem estar
paralelas.
3) Alinhamento do Acionamento
O alinhamento das polias do sistema de ventilao feito
pelo mtodo dos quatro pontos que consiste em verificar o
paralelismo entre a polia do ventilador e a do motor, desde que
os seus eixos tambm estejam paralelos.
1. Encoste uma rgua em ambas as polias. A rgua deve
manter contato com as extremidades das duas polias ao mesmo
tempo (fig.5).
2. Se for necessrio realinhar, libere a polia do ventilador,
permitindo que ela se mova ao longo do eixo.
Polia do
ventilador
A rgua tem que estar

paralela s polias
Parafuso de
fixao
Polia do
ventilador
Parte mvel
Parafuso de
ajuste
Rgua
Polia do
motor
Parte fixa
Polia do
motor
Alinhado
No alinhado
Alinhamento incorreto
Fig. 5 - Ajuste das Polias

3. Alinhe-a com a polia do motor utilizando a rgua e fixe-a ao
eixo do ventilador novamente.
3) Ajuste da tenso da correia:

Para o ajuste da tenso na(s) correia(s) afrouxe os parafusos de
fixao do motor na sua base de maneira que no soltem.
Com o motor deslizando sobre sua base, movimente-o at
alcanar a tenso adequada na(s) correia(s), ou seja, uma deflexo
de 15 a 20 mm para uma fora de 4 Kg aplicada no centro da
extenso da correia.
Aperte os parafusos de fixao do motor na sua base aps o
ajuste da tenso.
Importante: essencial uma boa tenso das correias. Se a
tenso for frouxa demais, as correias podero pular para fora e
sero rapidamente deterioradas por causa do aquecimento ou,
por causa de partidas bruscas, podero travar. Se a tenso for
excessiva, um excesso de carga ser exercido sobre as prprias
correias, sobre os rolamentos e sobre os eixos. Isso aumentar
a fora e reduzir vida til do conjunto de ventilao.
Deve se tomar maior ateno ao tencionamento nas 20
primeiras horas de funcionamento de correias novas. O
desgaste deve ser simtrico em ambos os flancos; caso
contrrio, o alinhamento das polias no est correto e dever
ser imediatamente corrigido. Cuide para manter as correias e
os sulcos das polias sempre limpos. No utilize adesivos ou
solventes adesivos.
4) Ajuste da rotao do ventilador do ar de insuflamento:

A velocidade de rotao (RPM) do ventilador de ar de insuflamento
depender da vazo requerida (CFM), dos acessrios da unidade
e das resistncias estticas dos sistemas de dutos de ar de
insuflamento e de retorno. Com estas informaes, a RPM para
o ventilador de insuflamento de ar pode ser determinado com
base nas curvas de performance do ventilador.
Se houver necessidade de alterao na RPM do ventilador, afrouxe
os parafusos de fixao do motor base para liberar a correia.
Ento, aproxime a parte mvel da polia regulvel em direo
parte fixa para aumentar a RPM ou vice-versa para diminu-la.
Depois que o motor do ventilador do ar de insuflamento estiver
operando, ajuste os sistemas de dutos (insuflamento e retorno)
para balancear a distribuio de ar atravs do espao
condicionado.
.....................................
35

Ler o manual

Form: F-IOM002-BR(1004)
Substitui: Form: F-IOM002-BR(0904)
Fone: (041) 661-3300
CEP 83325-040
R Joo Tibiri, 900

Fone: (011) 3837-6700
CEP 05077-000

FAX: (041) 661-3397
Pinhais - PR
V. Anastcio
Apresentao Tcnica e Comercial
Comfort Package Fan & Coil Unit - YG

Capacidades de 1.360 a 10.200 m/ h
YG - COMFORT
Introduo
Apresentao da nova linha de climatizadores de ar YG
Modelo Vertical
Comfort Package Fan & Coil Unit
Modelo Vertical com Caixa de Filtragem
YG - COMFORT
Posicionamento de Mercado
Standard (Conforto)
Foco em preo;
Acessrios Bsicos;
Aplicao: Lojas de shoppings,
edifcios comerciais,
residenciais;
YH - GEMINI
YG - COMFORT
Semi-customizado (Comercial)
Aplicao:Hospitais,aeroportos;
YM - ECLIPSE
Customizado (Especial)
Aplicao: Indstria
alimentcia, farmacutica;
Comfort ackage Fan & Coil Unit
YP - CLEANLINE
Tpicos e Programao
1.
Apresentao Tcnica YG
1.1 Gabinete ;
1.2 Movimentao de Ar ;
1.3 Transferncia de Calor ;
1.4 Indoor Air Quality ;
1.5 Acessrios e Opcionais.
YG - COMFORT
1.1 Gabinete
Ycomfort Package Fan & Coil Unit
YG - COMFORT
YG - COMFORT
Modelos Disponveis
10
12 Modelos
12
14
15
As unidades climatizadoras COMFORT , esto disponveis em 12 modelos, com

vazes de ar que variam de 1.360 a 10.200 m3/h, e capacidades nominais de 2 a
15 TR.
YG - COMFORT
Concepo do Gabinete
Mdulo nico
Os climatizadores de ar modelo YG - COMFORT so fornecidos em mdulo

nico visando oferecer ao cliente um equipamento compacto e de rpida e
simples instalao.
YG - COMFORT
Estrutura do Gabinete
Cantos em Nylon
Perfil de Alumnio Extrudado
Fabricado em perfis de alumnio extrudado, a estrutura, possui caractersticas de

excelente rigidez e leveza, alm de propriedades no corrosivas.
Os perfis de alumnio so fixados por meio de cantos em nylon.
YG - COMFORT
Espessura do Painel
Ncleo de PU
25 MM
Todos os painis so em parede dupla, com ncleo isolante em poliuretano

injetado de 25mm de espessura, que proporciona excelente rigidez mecnica e
resistncia trmica do gabinete.
Omfort Package Fan & Coil Unit
YG - COMFORT
Acabamento do Painel (Externo e Interno)

Chapa de ao pr-pintado
Excelente resistncia a
corroso
Mantm aspecto visual
agradvel
Facilidade de limpeza
Ext.
Ncleo de PU
Int.
Todos os painis so revestidos com ao galvanizado pr-pintado, tanto interna

como externamente, protegendo assim toda a unidade contra a formao da
indesejvel corroso branca.
10
YG - COMFORT
Remoo dos Painis
Painel Frontal
Parafuso de Fcil Remoo
Painel Lateral
No mnimo um painel lateral e um painel frontal so removveis.

Os mesmos esto fixados atravs de parafusos de fcil remoo e so tambm
providos de puxadores facilitando o acesso aos componentes internos do
equipamento
11
YG - COMFORT
110 mm
Base de Apoio
P de Apoio
O gabinete fornecido com ps de apoio, fabricados em chapa de ao
galvanizado, que confere estabilidade e nivelamento ao equipamento, evitando
assim a necessidade, na maioria das aplicaes, da construo de base em
alvenaria.
12
YG - COMFORT
1.2 Movimentao de Ar
13
YG - COMFORT
Ventiladores Centrfugos
O(s) ventilador(es) centrfugo(s) so de dupla aspirao, de ps curvadas para

frente do tipo sirocco, dimensionados para atender presso esttica total de at
60 mmca. So construdos em chapa de ao com tratamento anticorrosivo, e os
rotores so balanceados dinmica e estaticamente;
Os rolamentos dos ventiladores so do tipo rgido autocompensador de esferas,
auto-lubrificados e blindados com vida til mnima de 40.000 horas;
14
YG - COMFORT
Motor e Acionamento
O motor eltrico trifsico;
3 fases;
IV plos;
Grau de proteo IP55;
Grau de isolamento classe B;
Fator de servio 1,15;

Opo de motor de alto-rendimento.
O acionamento do motor e ventilador feito
atravs de polias e correias trapezoidais do tipo
V, sendo a polia do motor ajustvel para
motores de at 5 CV;
15
YG - COMFORT
Base de Inrcia do Sistema de Ventilao
O conjunto motor e ventilador possui uma base de inrcia, que est apoiada em
amortecedores de borracha, permitindo uma operao com baixo nvel de rudo e
vibrao
16
YG - COMFORT
Posies de Montagem - Vertical
V1
V2
V3
V5
4 diferentes posies de montagem na vertical.
17
YG - COMFORT
Posies de Montagem - Horizontal
H1
H2
3 diferentes posies de
montagem na horizontal.
H5
18
YG - COMFORT
1.3 Transferncia de Calor
19
YG - COMFORT
Serpentina de Resfriamento e Aquecimento

Opes:
gua gelada;
gua Quente;
Resistncia Eltrica (tipo espiral);
Nmero de Filas:
gua Gelada: 3, 4, 6 e 8
gua Quente: 2
Nmero de Aletas por Polegada: 8 e 12

Dimetro dos Tubos de Cobre:
Circuitos
Vrias opes permitem

atender a diversas
necessidades de aplicao.
Configuraes:
gua Gelada
gua Gelada + gua Quente
gua Gelada + Resistncia Eltrica
20
YG - COMFORT
Coletores
Dreno para
purga de ar
Dreno para purga

de gua.
Coletores em tubo de cobre e providos de luvas soldadas

em lato com rosca do tipo BSP.
21
YG - COMFORT
1.4 Bandeja e Filtros
22
YG - COMFORT
Bandeja de Condensado
Bandeja em ABS
PU Injetado
A bandeja de recolhimento do condensado fabricada em material termo

plstico, do tipo ABS e isolada termicamente com poliuretano expandido;
A bandeja de recolhimento do condensado possui arestas curvas com caimento
no sentido longitudinal do equipamento.
A conexo de dreno localizada na parte inferior da bandeja e possu conexo do
tipo 7/8 e adaptador solda 40mm em PVC.
23
Combinaes de Filtros oferecidas no YG
24
YG - COMFORT
YG - COMFORT
Remoo dos Filtros (Caixilho de Filtros)
Os filtros so alojados em armaes metlicas (caixilhos), de

remoo frontal sem a necessidade do uso de ferramentas.
25
YG - COMFORT
1.5 Acessrios e Opcionais
26
Acessrios e Opcionais
Serpentina de gua quente;

Resistncias eltricas do tipo U
aletado;
Mdulo caixa de filtragem com ou
sem dampers.
Obs. Na opo com dampers
estes so enviados com o
gabinete e devem ser
instalados em campo.
27
YG - COMFORT
Superior
YG - COMFORT
Mdulo Caixa de Filtragem Posio de Montagem dos Dampers
Lat. Esq.
28
Lat. Dir.
YG - COMFORT
Tabela de Dados Tcnicos

Modelo YG
TR
Altura
mm
882
932
1074
1150
Profundidade
mm
559
624
673
Largura
mm
794
1024
1263
Altura
mm
Profundidade
mm
Vertical
Horizontal
456
Modelo do Ventilador
520
580
624
910
1024
1100
7/7
9/7
10/8
Quantidade de Ventiladores
Vazo de Ar
10
12
1444
1504
1414
14
15
1500
724
1444
673
1784
743
784
1303
869
1404
12/12
15/11
15/15
12/9
12/12
m/h
1360
2040
2720
3400
4080
4760
5440
6120
6800
8160
9520
Mnima
m/h
1224
1836
2448
3060
3672
4284
4896
5508
6120
7344
8568
9180
Mxima
m/h
1496
2244
2992
3740
4488
5236
5984
6732
7480
8976
10472
11220
CV
1,5
1,5
7,5
7,5
7,5
1,29
Tenso
V/F/Hz
rea Filtros de Ar
rea de Face
Polia do Motor Regulvel at 5 CV

m
0,26
0,30
0,46
0,50
0,68
0,68
0,79
0,88
0,91
1,14
1,29
0,16
0,21
0,30
0,38
0,45
0,53
0,60
0,68
0,76
0,91
1,06
10
12
14
Tubos na Altura
16
18
Altura
0,32
0,38
0,44
Compr.
Aletado
0,50
0,56
0,68
Aletas
pol
8 e 12
Filas
3 - 4 - 6 ou 8
Tubos
10200
220 - 380 - 440 / 3 / 60
Transmisso Polia/Correia
Serpentina
7
1303
Nominal
Potncia Mxima
Motor
0,51
0,74
0,89
0,57
1,04
1,18
pol
1,13
20
24
0,64
0,76
1,19
1,19
1,43
1,39
1,49
1/2"
3 filas
3 a 15
2 a 18
7 e 21
3 a 24
4 a 24
4 a 24
3 a 24
3 a 27
3 a 30
3 a 30
3 a 36
3 a 36
4 filas
2 a 10
3 a 12
7 a 28
4 a 32
4 a 16
4 a 16
4 a 32
6 a 36
5 a 40
8 a 40
8 a 48
8 a 48
6 filas
3 a 10
3 a 12
7 a 21
4 a 24
4 a 24
4 a 24
4 a 24
6 a 27
6 a 30
6 a 30
8 a 36
8 a 36
8 filas
4 a 10
3 a 12
7 e 14
4 a 32
4 a 16
4 a 16
4 a 32
8 a 36
5 a 40
5 a 40
12 a 48
12 a 48
N de Circuitos
Conexo
Dreno (Bandeja)
Peso de Embarque
(kg)
29
pol
2 e 3 CIRC=1" 4 a 6 CIRC=1.1/4" 7 a 10 CIRC=1.1/2" 11 a 20 CIRC=2" 21 a 60 CIRC=2.1/2" Acima 60 CIRC=3"
pol
7/8"
3 filas
58
62
83
89
101
113
126
131
137
164
177
183
4 filas
62
67
85
93
107
120
134
141
148
177
188
193
6 filas
68
73
93
103
118
133
149
159
165
197
212
219
8 filas
73
79
101
112
129
146
163
177
182
217
235
244
Md. Ventilador
63
63
80
85
97
109
122
127
133
167
174
178
Md. Caixa de Mistura
42
43
64
65
79
93
107
107
112
135
142
146
Md. Trocador
YG - COMFORT
Resumo
Vazo de ar de 1.360 a 10.200 m3/h;
12 modelos disponveis;
Conceito em mdulo nico :
Menores dimenses e menor peso;
Fcil de transportar;
Rpido e fcil de instalar;
Gabinete mais estanque
Painel de parede dupla de 25mm de espessura;

Acabamento interno e externo do painel com chapa de ao prpintado;
Bandeja em ABS com PU injetado;
Diversas opes de serpentinas e filtros.
30
Comfort Package Fan Coil Unit
YG - COMFORT
Software de Seleo Eclima
O software de seleo do ECLIPSE, opera em ambiente Windows e

fornecido gratuitamente pela Johnson Controls .
31
CLIMATIZADOR DE AR MODELO YG
NDICE
1. CARACTERSTICAS TCNICAS.....................................................................2
2. NOMENCLATURA MDULO TROCADOR E VENTILADOR.....................7
3. CDIGOS DOS CIRCUITOS SERPENTINA RESFRIAMENTO....................9
4. NOMENCLATURA CAIXA DE FILTRAGEM...............................................10

5. SELEO GABINETE......................................................................................................11
6. SOFTWARE SELEO ECLIMA....................................................................11
7. TABELA DADOS TCNICOS..........................................................................12
8. DESEMPENHO TRMICO...............................................................................13
9. CIRCUITOS SERPENTINA DE RESFRIAMENTO........................................14
10.DIMETROS COLETORES SERP. RESFRIAMENTO..................................15
11.DADOS SERPENTINA DE AQUECIMENTO.................................................16
12.RESISTNCIA ELTRICA...............................................................................17
13.COMBINAO FILTROS................................................................................18
14.TIPOS E QUANTIDADES DE FILTROS.........................................................19
15.POSIES DE INSUFLAMENTO....................................................................20
16.OPES MOTORES..........................................................................................20
17.DADOS MOTORES STANDARD.....................................................................21
18.DADOS MOTORES ALTO RENDIMENTO.....................................................21
19.DESEMPENHO VENTILADOR........................................................................22
20.DADOS DIMENSIONAIS..................................................................................25
21.DISPOSIO DOS MDULOS POSIO VERTICAL.................................26
22.DISPOSIO DOS MDULOS POSIO HORIZONTAL...........................26
23.ACSTICA.........................................................................................................27
24.ESPECIFICAO TCNICA............................................................................26
1. CARACTERTICAS TCNICAS
CONCEPO
- Os climatizadores de ar modelo YG - COMFORT so fornecidos em
mdulo nico visando oferecer ao cliente um equipamento compacto e de
simples instalao.
- Esto disponveis em 12 modelos, cobrindo vazes de ar de 1.360 a
10.200 m/ h, e em sete diferentes posies de insuflamento de ar,
incluindo a posio down-flow;
PRINCIPAIS CARACTERSTICAS CONSTRUTIVAS

GABINETE
- De construo robusta, em mdulo nico, o gabinete construdo com
perfis extrudados de alumnio de auto-encaixe acoplados a cantos
especiais de material termoplstico;
-Os painis so do tipo parede dupla rgida, de 25mm de espessura,
revestidos interna e externamente com chapa de ao pr-pintado, pintados
na cor branco-gelo e o seu ncleo isolante em poliuretano expandido;
- A estanqueidade do gabinete garantida por meio de gaxetas autoadesivas de borracha esponjosa, no higroscpica;
- No mnimo um painel lateral e um painel frontal so removveis. Os
mesmos esto fixados atravs de parafusos de fcil remoo e so
tambm providos de puxadores facilitando o acesso aos componentes
internos do equipamento;
- Os mdulos so fornecidos com ps de apoio, fabricados em chapa de
ao galvanizado, com altura de 110 mm;
1. CARACTERSTICAS TCNICAS (cont.)
VENTILADOR
- O(s) ventilador (es) centrfugo(s) so de dupla aspirao, de ps
curvadas para frente do tipo sirocco, dimensionados para atender
presso esttica total de at 60 mmca. So construdos em chapa de ao
com tratamento
anticorrosivo, e os rotores so balanceados dinmica e estaticamente;
- O conjunto ventilador / motor montado sobre uma base anti-vibrante,
com coxins de borracha sinttica para ventiladores Sirocco e coxins de
mola para ventiladores Limit-load
MOTOR
- O motor eltrico, trifsico, para tenso de projeto de 60 ciclos, 3 fases, IV
plos, montado internamente ao gabinete com grau de proteo IP55, grau
de isolamento classe B, conforme Norma EB 120 da ABNT e fator de
servio 1,15.
- O acoplamento ao motor feito atravs de polias e correias trapezoidais
do tipo V, sendo a polia do motor ajustvel para motores de at 5 CV;
SERPENTINA DE RESFRIAMENTO
- A serpentina construda com tubos de cobre sem costura, de dimetro
externo de 12,7 mm;
- Os tubos so montados em arranjo triangular desencontrado com 32 mm
de distncia entre centros na vertical, tendo as fileiras de tubo na
profundidade, uma distncia de 32 mm e podem ser fabricadas com 3, 4, 6
e 8 filas;
- As aletas so corrugadas, fabricadas em alumnio e perfeitamente
fixadas aos tubos por meio de expanso hidrulica. O distanciamento entre
aletas proporcionado nos colarinhos e podem ser fabricadas nas opes
de 8 ou 12 aletas por polegada;
- As soldas das curvas, coletores e acessrios so feitas com material de
contedo mnimo de 2% de prata;
4
- As cabeceiras e requadros da serpentina so construdas em chapas de

ao galvanizado, espessura de 1,5 mm;
- Os coletores da serpentina so fabricados em tubos de cobre e providos
de luvas soldadas em lato com rosca do tipo BSP, para conexo rede
hidrulica.
- Os coletores so dotados de dispositivo de purga de ar e dreno de gua;
BANDEJA
- A bandeja de recolhimento do condensado fabricada em material termo
plstico, do tipo ABS e isolada termicamente com poliuretano expandido;
- A bandeja de recolhimento do condensado possui arestas curvas com
caimento no sentido longitudinal do equipamento. A conexo de dreno
localizada na parte inferior da bandeja e possu conexo do tipo 7/8 e
adaptador solda 40mm em PVC.
FILTROS DE AR
- Os filtros so alojados em armaes metlicas (caixilhos), de remoo
frontal sem a necessidade do uso de ferramentas.
- As armaes metlicas (caixilhos) possuem quatro diferentes opes de
espessura de filtros como segue:
Filtro de 25 mm (1);
Combinao de dois filtros de 25 mm (1);
Filtro de 50 mm (2);
Combinao de um filtro de 25 mm (1) e um filtro de 50 mm (2);
- As seguintes opes de classes de filtros esto disponveis:
Filtro do tipo metlico lavvel, classe G2, espessura de 1;

Filtro do tipo manta sinttica descartvel, classe G4, espessura de
1";

2";
1";
Porta Mantas para filtro do tipo manta sinttica lavvel, classe G4,
espessura de 1";
Filtro do tipo manta sinttica plissada, classe F5, espessura de 2";
Filtro do tipo tela de nylon, classe G1 em combinao com G4 Porta
Mantas 1"
Filtro do tipo manta sinttica descartvel, classe G4, espessura de 1"
em combinao com filtro do tipo manta sinttica plissada, classe
F5, espessura de 2";
ACESSRIOS / OPCIONAIS
Mdulo caixa de filtragem com Dampers de ar de retorno e ar
externo;
Aquecimento por serpentina de gua quente ou por resistncia
eltrica;
Ventilador limit-load;
Motor eltrico de alto rendimento;
2. NOMENCLATURA MDULO TROCADOR VENTILADOR
Digito 1 e 2
Modelo:
YG
Digito 3 e 4
Tamanho do Gabinete:
02, 03, 04,
05, 06, 07,
08, 09, 10,
12,14,15
Digito 5

com Ventilador Acoplado
U
Digito 6
Tipo de ventilador:
F - Sirocco
B - Limit Load
Digito 7
Arranjo x Posio de
descarga (obs.:8)(obs.:14):
A-H1
B-H3
*C-H5
D-V1
E-V2
F-V3
*G-V5
Digito 8
Potncia do motor (CV):

A-0,5
B-0,75
C-1
D-1,5
E-2
F-3
G-4
H-5
J-7,5
K-10
L-12,5
M-15
N-20
Digito 9
Alimentao eltrica
(obs.:1):
A-220V/380V / 3f / 60Hz
B-440V / 3f / 60Hz
C-220V/380V / 3f / 50Hz
D-380V/660V / 3f / 50Hz
E-380V/660V / 3f / 60Hz
F-230V/460V / 3f / 60Hz
Digito 10
Rendimento do motor / n.
plos:
P-Standard IEC 4 plos
A- Alto Rendimento IEC 4
plos
*H- Premium Efficiency NEMA 4 plos
D- Standard IEC 2 plos
B-Alto Rendimento IEC 2
plos
C- Premium Efficiency NEMA 2 plos
Digito 11 e 12
Acionamento:
Digito 13
Lado do motor:
L-Esquerda
R-Direita
Digito 14
Filtro (obs.:2):
A- Metlico G2 lavvel 1"
B-G4 descartvel 1"
C-G4 descartvel 2"
D- Metlico G2 lavvel
1"+G4
descartvel 1"
E-G3 descartvel 1"+G4
descartvel 1"
I - G4 Porta Mantas 1"
J- G2 Metlico 1" + G4
Porta Mantas 1"
K - G3 descartvel 1" +
G4 Porta Mantas 1"
L - F5 Plissado 2"
M - G1 + G4 Porta Mantas
1"
N - G4 descartvel 1" + F5
Plissado 2"
P - sem filtro, com caixilho
Z- Sem filtro
Digito 15
Nmero de filas x Tubos

por Circuito: (Conforme
tabela em anexo "Pasta
Tabela")
1 - DX STD(Obs.:12)
2 - DX Ciclo Reverso
3 - DX PLUS
Digito 16
Nmero de aletas por

polegadas / Lado
Hidrulica / Revestimento
da aleta:
A- 8FPI/ESQ/AL
C- 12FPI/ESQ/AL
D- 8FPI/DIR/AL
F- 12FPI/DIR/AL
G- 8FPI/ESQ/AD
H- 12FPI/ESQ/AD
J- 8FPI/DIR/AD
K- 12FPI/DIR/AD
X-DX (Obs.:12)
Digito 17
Serpentina de
Aquecimento (Obs. 3 e 4):
0- No
1- Sim
Digito 18 e 19
Resistncia eltrica:
ZZ - Sem Resistncia
2. NOMENCLATURA MDULO TROCADOR E VENTILADOR (cont.)
OBSERVAES:
(1) F somente para motores carcaa NEMA (USA);
(2) Quando o Climatizador for equipado com caixa de mistura, o quadro de filtragem passa a
fazer parte da caixa. Neste caso selecionar a opo;
(3) "Z - sem filtros" para este campo;

(4) Serpentina de gua quente sempre de 2 filas, 8 aletas/polegada, 4 tubos/circuito e lado
de hidrulica igual ao da serpentina de frio. Nmero mximo de filas at 20TR igual a 8;
(5) A serpentina de aquecimento deve ser acompanhada de uma serpentina de gua gelada
(8) No opo na Caixa de Mistura damper nas posies de montagem superior e inferior
simultaneamente
(9) Posio de descarga V5 e H5 somente climatizador at 20TR Sirocco
(10) Posio de descarga V5 e H5 somente climatizador at 20TR Sirocco
(11) No opo damper 1 e 2 na mesma posio
(12) Serpentina DX s opo para Gabinetes de tamanho 05/08/10/15
(13) Opo G e F apenas com ventilador Limit Load ou Airfoil.
(14) Quando a opo serpentina de expanso direta for selecionada no possvel utilizar a
serpentina de aquecimento
3. CDIGOS DOS CIRCUITOS SERPENTINA RESFRIAMENTO
Existem vrios tipos de circuitagem disponveis para as serpentinas de

resfriamento. A tabela abaixo mostra os cdigos para cada tipo de circuitagem das
serpentinas.
Modelo
YG
TUBOS POR CIRCUITO
ROWS
2
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
12
14
15
A
N
C
P
Q
S
H
J
R
S
A
E
A
C
A
D
A
D
A
C
A
C
A
E
B
F
K
10
B
D
F
J
12
18
20
24
32
E
H
L
K
C
H
M
Q
G
L
P
16
D
J
N
A
B
L
A
E
T
U
A
E
T
A
E
T
B
F
H
N
D
H
M
B
E
H
N
B
E
H
N
D
G
L
D
G
L
C
D
B
H
B
H
B
H
C
J
B
E
J
N
C
J
F
C
F
J
M
C
F
J
M
C
F
J
M
D
G
K
P
B
E
H
M
B
E
H
M
G
P
G
L
N
D
K
G
L
N
P
Q
D
K
G
L
N
R
S
M
Q
P
Q
U
S
G
K
Q
P
G
K
Q
C
J
F
K
P
F
V
N
F
V
N
T
U
L
R
X
G
L
Q
L
R
F
P
V
X
T
W
S
R
S
U
J
P
S
U
J
P
V
R
Q
R
K
4. NOMENCLATURA CAIXA DE FILTRAGEM
Dgitos 1 e 2
Modelo
YG
Dgitos 3 e 4
Tamanho do Gabinete:
02, 03, 04,
05, 06, 07,
08, 09, 10,
12,14,15
Dgito 5
Caixa de Filtragem
com damper
M
Dgitos 6
Arranjo:
A- Horizontal Sirocco
B-Vertical Sirocco
C-Horizontal Limit
Load
D-Vertical Limit Load
Digito 7
Tamanho do Damper
1:
0-Sem Damper
A-100% da vazo
Dgitos 8
Posio do Damper 1
(ver desenho)
(obs.:5,6,7,8 e 9):
0-Sem Damper
10
1-Frontal
2-Superior
Dgitos 9
Tamanho do Damper
2:
0-Sem Damper
A-100% da vazo
B-20% da vazo
Dgitos 10
Posio do Damper 2
(ver desenho)
(obs.:5,6,7,8 e 9):
0-Sem Damper
1-Frontal
2-Superior
*G-G4 descartvel
1"+F8 plissado (Limit
Load)
*H-G4 Porta Mantas +
F8 Plissado (Limit
Load)
I - G4 Porta Mantas 1"
J- G2 Metlico 1" + G4
Porta Mantas 1"
K - G3 descartvel 1"
+ G4 Porta Mantas 1"
L - F5 Plissado 2"
M - G1 + G4 Porta
Mantas 1"
N - G4 descartvel 1"
+ F5 Plissado 2"
Dgito 12
Lado de remoo do
filtro ou acesso
(olhando entrada de
ar) (obs. 6)
L-Esquerda
3-Lateral esquerda
4-Lateral direita
Dgito 11
Filtro (obs.:2)(obs.:13):
A- Metlico G2 lavvel
1"
B-G4 descartvel 1"
C-G4 descartvel 2"
D- Metlico G2 lavvel
1"+G4 descartvel 1"
E-G3 descartvel
1"+G4 descartvel 1"
*F-G2 Met. 1"+F8
plissado (Limit Load)
R-Direita
(Lado de remoo no
permite damper)
Dgitos 13
Embalagem:
E - Exportao
B Nacional
5. SELEO DO GABINETE
A tabela abaixo permite uma rpida seleo do gabinete da unidade YG, tendo
como base a rea de face, vazo de ar e velocidade de face.
Velocidade de face (m/s)
Gabinete
YG
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
12
14
15
1,8
2,2
2,5
2,6
2,8
VZ (m3/h) Cap.(TR) VD(m/s) VZ (m3/h) Cap.(TR) VD(m/s) VZ (m3/h) Cap.(TR) VD(m/s) VZ (m3/h) Cap.(TR) VD(m/s) VZ (m3/h) Cap.(TR) VD(m/s) VZ (m3/h) Cap.(TR) VD(m/s)
1,4
1,8
2,00
2,1
2,2
2,4
979
5,6
1.197
6,9
1.360
7,8
1.414
8,1
1.523
8,7
1.632
9,3
2,2
2,6
3,00
3,1
3,4
3,6
1.469
8,4
1.795
10,3
2.040
11,7
2.122
12,2
2.285
13,1
2.448
14,0
2,9
3,5
4,00
4,2
4,5
4,8
1.958
8,2
2.394
10,1
2.720
11,5
2.829
11,9
3.046
12,8
3.264
13,7
3,6
4,4
5,00
5,2
5,6
6,0
2.448
8,6
2.992
10,5
3.400
11,9
3.536
12,4
3.808
13,4
4.080
14,3
4,3
5,3
6,00
6,2
6,7
7,2
2.936
6,1
3.589
7,5
4.078
8,5
4.241
8,9
4.568
9,6
4.894
10,2
5,0
6,2
7,00
7,3
7,8
8,4
3.427
7,2
4.188
8,8
4.759
10,0
4.950
10,4
5.331
11,2
5.711
12,0
5,8
7,0
8,00
8,3
9,0
9,6
3.917
8,2
4.787
10,0
5.440
11,4
5.658
11,8
6.093
12,8
6.528
13,7
4.406
8,2
5.386
10,0
6.120
11,4
6.365
11,8
6.854
12,7
7.344
13,6
6,5
7,9
9,00
9,4
10,1
10,8
7,2
8,8
10,00
10,4
11,2
12,0
4.896
7,2
5.984
8,7
6.800
9,9
7.072
10,3
7.616
11,1
8.160
11,9
8,6
10,6
12,00
12,5
13,4
14,4
5.875
7,7
7.181
9,5
8.160
10,8
8.486
11,2
9.139
12,0
9.792
12,9
10,1
12,3
14,00
14,6
15,7
16,8
6.854
7,2
8.377
8,8
9.519
10,0
9.900
10,4
10.661
11,2
11.423
12,0
10,8
13,2
15,00
15,6
16,8
18,0
7.344
7,7
8.976
9,4
10.200
10,7
10.608
11,1
11.424
12,0
12.240
12,8
6. SOFTWARE SELEO ECLIMA

As unidades YG possuem uma ampla variedade de serpentinas, ventiladores, motores e acionamentos para
atender as suas necessidades de projeto. O software de seleo do ECLIPSE permite selecionar o
equipamento correto para seu projeto.
11
7. TABELA DADOS TCNICOS
Modelo YG
TR
Altura
Profundidade
Largura
mm
mm
mm
888
Altura
Profundidade
Modelo do Ventilador
Quantidade de Ventiladores
mm
mm
462
Nominal
Vazo de Ar Mnima
Mxima
Potncia
Motor
Mxima
Tenso
Transmisso Polia/Correia
rea Filtros de Ar
m/h
m/h
m/h
1360
1224
1496
2040
1836
2244
2720
2448
2992
3400
3060
3740
4080
3672
4488
4760
4284
5236
5440
4896
5984
6120
5508
6732
6800
6120
7480
8160
7344
8976
9520
8568
10472
10200
9180
11220
CV
1,5
1,5
7,5
7,5
7,5
0,88
0,68
18
0,57
0,91
0,76
1,14
0,91
1,29
1,06
1,29
1,13
1,19
1,19
1,43
1,39
1,49
Vertical
Horizontal
rea de Face
Tubos na Altura
Altura
Compr.
Aletado
Aletas
Filas
Serpentina Tubos
938
1080
571
7
1309
1156
636
806
916
7/7
586
1030
9/7
10
12
1450
1510
1456
679
1506
1796
790
1410
749
1309
12/12
15/11
15/15
875
12/12
12/9
220 - 380 - 440 / 3 / 60

Polia do Motor Regulvel at 5 CV
V/F/Hz
m
m
15
736
1275
630
1106
10/8
14
1420
685
1036
526
0,30
0,21
12
0,38
0,46
0,30
14
0,44
0,50
0,38
0,26
0,16
10
0,32
0,50
0,56
0,68
0,74
0,68
0,45
0,68
0,53
0,79
0,60
16
0,51
0,89
1,04
1,18
20
0,64
24
0,76
8 e 12
3 - 4 - 6 ou 8
1/2"
pol
n
pol
3 filas
3 a 15
2 a 18
7 e 21
3 a 24
4 a 24
4 a 24
3 a 24
3 a 27
3 a 30
3 a 30
3 a 36
3 a 36
4 filas
2 a 10
3 a 12
7 a 28
4 a 32
4 a 16
4 a 16
4 a 32
6 a 36
5 a 40
8 a 40
8 a 48
8 a 48
6 filas
3 a 10
3 a 12
7 a 21
4 a 24
4 a 24
4 a 24
4 a 24
6 a 27
6 a 30
6 a 30
8 a 36
8 a 36
8 filas
4 a 10
3 a 12
7 e 14
4 a 32
4 a 16
4 a 16
4 a 32
8 a 36
5 a 40
5 a 40
12 a 48 12 a 48
N de Circuitos
Conexo
Dreno (Bandeja)
pol
pol
3 filas
4 filas
6 filas
8 filas
Peso
de Md. Trocador
Embarque
(kg)
Md. Ventilador
Md. Caixa de Mistura
7/8"
58
62
68
73
63
42
62
67
73
79
63
43
83
85
93
101
80
64
89
93
103
112
85
65
101
107
118
129
97
79
113
120
133
146
109
93
126
134
149
163
122
107
131
141
159
177
127
107
137
148
165
182
133
112
164
177
197
217
167
135
Observaes:
1- Altura: Acrescentar 110 mm na altura devido ao p de apoio
2- Modelo de ventilador: Primeiro nmero indica o dimetro do rotor e o segundo nmero a sua
largura em polegadas
3- rea de filtragem: a rea total dos filtros de ar
4- Potncia Mxima: indica a potncia do motor eltrico prevista no dimensional do gabinete
5- Peso indicado refere-se ao mdulo com o mximo motor e a serpentina sem gua.
12
177
188
212
235
174
142
183
193
219
244
178
146
8. DESEMPENHO TRMICO
Modelo YG
Vazo de Ar Nominal (m/h)
Capacidade Total (kcal/h)
Capacidade Sensvel (kcal/h)
Fator de Calor Sensvel
Capacidade Latente (kcal/h)
Temp. Sada Blbo Seco (C)
3 Filas Temp. Sada Blbo mido (C)
Vazo de gua (m/h)
P gua (mca)
Nmero de circuitos
Velocidade da gua (m/s)
Dimetro Coletores (polegadas)
Vazo gua (m/h)
P gua (mca)
Nmero de circuitos
Vazo gua (m/h)
P gua (mca)
Nmero de circuitos
Vazo gua (m/h)
P gua (mca)
Nmero de circuitos
10
12
14
15
1.360
2.040
2.720
3.400
4.080
4.760
5.440
6.120
6.800
8.160
9.520
10.200
4.145
3.189
0,77
956
18,3
15,3
0,8
0,4
3
0,6
1"
5.828
4.215
0,72
1.614
15.6
13.4
1.1
3,5
2
1.21
1"
7.219
5.301
0,73
1.918
12.8
11.8
1.3
2.3
3
0.99
1"
8.145
5.947
0,73
2.198
11.0
10.6
1.5
1,7
4
0.84
1.1/4"
6.864
1.902
0,28
4.962
18,0
14,8
1,3
1,5
3
1,0
1"
8.297
6.163
0,74
2.135
15.9
13.8
1.5
1,2
4
0.86
1.1/4"
11.030
8.039
0,73
2.990
12.6
11.6
2.0
3,3
4
1.14
1.1/4"
12.191
8.908
0,73
3.283
11.1
10.6
2.2
1,6
6
0.84
1.1/4"
7.882
6.258
0,79
1.624
18,5
15,6
1,4
0,2
7
0,5
1.1/2"
10.438
7.983
0,76
2.455
16.2
14.2
1.9
0.5
7
0.62
1.1/2"
14.102
10.447
0,74
3.655
13.0
12.0
2.5
1,3
7
0.83
1.1/2"
16.540
12.014
0,73
4.526
10.9
10.4
3.0
2,4
7
0.98
1.1/2"
12.038
8.421
0,70
3.616
17,9
14,5
2,3
3,4
4
1,3
1.1/4"
13.300
10.081
0,76
3.219
16,1
14,0
2,4
0,6
8
0,7
1.1/2"
17.910
13.191
0,74
4.719
12,8
11,8
3,2
1,7
8
0,9
1.1/2"
20.917
15.138
0,72
5.779
10,8
10,3
3,8
3,2
8
1,1
1.1/2"
14.119
9.991
0,71
4.128
18,0
14,6
2,8
1,7
6
1,1
1.1/4"
16.591
12.320
0,74
4.272
15,9
13,8
3,0
1,2
8
0,9
1.1/2"
22.056
16.077
0,73
5.979
12,6
11,6
4,0
3,1
8
1,1
1.1/2"
23.306
17.291
0,74
6.016
11,5
11,1
4,2
0,6
16
0,6
2"
16.828
11.762
0,70
5.067
17,9
14,5
3,2
2,8
6
1,2
1.1/4"
19.849
14.556
0,73
5.293
15,8
13,6
3,6
1,9
8
1,0
1.1/2"
24.816
18.350
0,74
6.466
12,9
11,9
4,5
1,3
12
0,9
2"
27.995
20.564
0,73
7.432
11,2
10,8
5,1
1,0
16
0,7
2"
18.116
13.124
0,72
4.992
18,1
14,8
3,3
1,3
8
0,9
1.1/2"
23.130
16.746
0,72
6.384
15,7
13,4
4,2
2,9
8
1,2
1.1/2"
28.746
21.111
0,73
7.635
12,8
11,8
5,2
2,0
12
1,0
2"
32.430
23.699
0,73
8.731
11,1
10,6
5,9
1,4
16
0,8
2"
20.496
14.861
0,73
5.635
18,0
14,8
3,7
1,3
9
0,9
1.1/2"
24.882
18.476
0,74
6.406
15,9
13,8
4,5
1,1
12
0,9
2"
30.985
23.175
0,75
7.809
13,2
12,2
5,6
0,8
18
0,7
2"
36.694
26.777
0,73
9.917
11,0
10,6
6,7
1,5
18
0,9
2"
22.754
16.509
0,73
6.245
18,0
14,8
4,1
1,3
10
0,9
1.1/2"
28.977
21.018
0,73
7.959
15,7
13,4
5,2
2,9
10
1,2
1.1/2"
36.081
26.493
0,73
9.588
12,8
11,8
6,5
2,0
15
1,0
2"
41.817
30.265
0,72
11.552
10,8
10,3
7,6
3,0
16
1,1
2"
28.276
20.084
0,71
8.192
17,9
14,6
5,1
2,5
10
1,2
1.1/2"
31.779
24.131
0,76
7.648
16,1
14,1
5,8
0,5
20
0,7
2"
44.375
32.276
0,73
12.100
12,5
11,5
8,0
3,6
15
1,2
2"
49.871
36.174
0,73
13.697
10,8
10,4
9,0
2,5
20
1,0
2"
27.104
18.353
0,68
8.751
19,8
15,5
4,9
2,2
10
1,1
1.1/2"
30.956
23.232
0,75
7.724
18,0
15,0
5,6
0,5
20
0,6
2"
45.523
32.846
0,72
12.677
14,4
12,6
8,2
3,7
15
1,3
2"
52.557
38.209
0,73
14.349
12,3
11,4
9,5
2,8
20
1,1
2"
35.703
25.184
0,71
10.519
17,9
14,6
6,5
2,9
12
1,2
2"
43.148
31.405
0,73
11.743
15,7
13,5
7,8
2,3
16
1,1
2"
53.817
39.599
0,74
14.217
12,8
11,8
9,8
1,6
24
0,9
2.1/2"
62.604
45.344
0,72
17.259
10,8
10,3
11,3
2,9
24
1,1
2.1/2"
Observaes: Os valores acima tabelados tiveram como base os seguintes dados:

-Temperatura bulbo seco de entrada: 26,7 C
-Temperatura bulbo mido de entrada: 19,4 C
-Temperatura de entrada da gua: 6,7 C
-Temperatura de sada da gua: 12,2 C
-Nmero de aletas por polegada: 8
-Velocidade de face na serpentina: 2,5 m/s
13
9. CIRCUITOS SERPENTINA RESFRIAMENTO

resfriamento. A tabela abaixo mostra os possveis tipos de circuitos para cada tipo
de serpentina.
Modelo
YG
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
12
14
15
TUBOS POR CIRCUITO
ROWS
2
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
14
15
5
10
5
10
10
18
21
28
24
32
24
24
24
32
27
36
30
40
30
40
36
48
36
48
9
12
6
8
12
10
3
4
6
8
12
18
20
24
32
2
3
4
5
3
4
6
8
6
9
12
16
N DE
TUBOS
EM
ALTURA
10
2
3
4
12
7
14
21
12
16
24
32
12
16
24
12
16
24
12
16
24
32
18
27
36
15
20
30
40
15
20
30
40
24
36
48
24
36
48
7
14
8
16
8
16
8
16
8
16
9
12
18
24
10
20
14
6
8
12
16
6
8
12
16
6
8
12
16
6
8
12
16
12
16
24
32
12
16
24
32
4
8
7
3
4
6
8
16
4
8
4
6
8
16
4
4
4
8
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
16
4
4
16
4
3
6
9
12
18
10
15
20
10
20
14
10
15
20
12
18
24
12
18
24
6
8
12
16
6
8
12
16
18
6
8
3
5
10
10
5
20
6
8
10
6
8
12
16
6
8
12
16
20
6
8
3
10
5
3
24
8
12
3
8
12
24
10. DIMETRO COLETORES SERPENTINA RESFRIAMENTO

resfriamento. A tabela abaixo mostra o dimetro dos coletores para cada tipo de
circuitagem das serpentinas.
Modelo
YG
2
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
3
4
6
8
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
12
14
15
TUBOS POR CIRCUITO
ROWS
2"
1-1/4"
1-1/2"
1-1/4"
1-1/2"
1-1/2"
2"
2-1/2"
2-1/2"
2-1/2"
2-1/2"
2-1/2"
2-1/2"
2-1/2"
2-1/2"
2-1/2"
2-1/2"
2-1/2"
2-1/2"
2-1/2"
2-1/2"
2-1/2"
2-1/2"
2-1/2"
2-1/2"
1-1/2"
2"
1-1/4"
1-1/2"
2"
10
1"
1-1/4"
1-1/4"
1-1/2"
12
18
20
24
1-1/4"
1"
1"
1-1/4"
1"
1-1/4"
1"
1-1/2"
2"
2-1/2"
1-1/2"
2"
2"
2"
2-1/2"
2-1/2"
2"
2"
2-1/2"
1-1/2"
2"
2"
2-1/2"
1-1/2"
2"
2"
2-1/2"
2-1/2"
1-1/2"
2"
2-1/2"
2-1/2"
2"
2"
2-1/2"
2-1/2"
2"
2"
2-1/2"
2-1/2"
2-1/2"
2-1/2"
2-1/2"
2-1/2"
2-1/2"
2-1/2"
2"
1-1/2"
2"
2"
2"
1-1/2"
2"
2"
2-1/2"
1-1/2"
2"
1-1/2"
2"
1-1/4"
1-1/2"
2"
2"
1-1/4"
1-1/2"
2"
2"
1-1/4"
1-1/2"
2"
2"
1-1/4"
1-1/2"
2"
2"
2"
2"
2-1/2"
2-1/2"
2"
2"
2-1/2"
2-1/2"
1-1/2"
1-1/2"
1"
1-1/4"
1-1/4"
1-1/2"
1-1/4"
1-1/4"
1-1/4"
1-1/2"
1-1/4"
1-1/4"
1-1/2"
1-1/4"
1-1/4"
1-1/4"
1-1/2"
1-1/2"
1-1/4"
1-1/4"
1-1/2"
1"
1-1/4"
1-1/4"
1-1/2"
1-1/4"
1-1/4"
1-1/4"
1-1/4"
1"
1-1/2"
1-1/4"
1-1/2"
2"
2"
1-1/2"
2"
2"
1-1/2"
2"
1-1/4"
1-1/2"
2"
2"
2"
2"
2-1/2"
2"
2"
2-1/2"
1-1/4"
1-1/2"
2"
2"
1-1/4"
1-1/2"
2"
2"
1-1/4"
1-1/2"
1"
1-1/4"
1-1/2"
1-1/4"
1-1/2"
1"
1-1/2"
1-1/2"
1-1/4"
1-1/2"
1-1/2"
1-1/4"
1-1/2"
2"
2"
1-1/4"
1-1/2"
2"
2"
1-1/4"
1-1/4"
1"
1-1/2"
2"
1"
1-1/2"
2"
OBS.: Opcionalmente pode-se escolher o lado das conexes hidrulicas em esquerda e direita
(conforme pedido), sendo que deve-se tomar como referncia, a frente da mquina, vista pelo filtro
de ar (retorno). As conexes hidrulicas so do tipo BSP.
15
32
1"
1"
1-1/4"
1-1/4"
1"
1-1/4"
1-1/4"
1-1/2"
1-1/4"
1-1/2"
2"
16
11. DADOS SERPENTINA DE AQUECIMENTO
16
Modelo
YG
rea de
Face (m)
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
12
14
15
0,16
0,21
0,30
0,38
0,45
0,53
0,60
0,68
0,76
0,91
1,06
1,13
Nmero
de Filas
Tubos por
Circuito
Dimetro
Coletores
N de
Tubos na
Altura
1-1/4"
1-1/4"
1-1/2"
1-1/2"
1-1/2"
1-1/2"
1-1/2"
1-1/2"
1-1/2"
1-1/2"
2"
2"
10
12
14
16
16
16
16
18
20
20
24
24
12. RESISTNCIA ELTRICA
A tabela a seguir mostra as opes disponveis de

resistncias de aquecimento eltrico para cada modelo de
unidade.
CAPACIDADE
MODELO POTNCIA
POTNCIA
QTDE ESTGIOS
YG
TOTAL
POR ESTGIO
UNITRIA (KW)
(KW)
(KW)
03
05
06
07
08
10
12
14
15
17
3
4,5
6
6
9
13,5
6
9
13,5
9
13,5
18
9
13,5
18
12
18
24
12
18
24
15
18
30
15
18
30
3
6
6
6
6
9
6
6
9
6
9
12
6
9
12
6
12
12
6
12
12
6
12
12
6
12
12
1
2
2
2
2
3
2
2
3
2
3
2
2
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
0,75
1
1
1,5
1,5
1
1,5
1,5
1,5
1,5
1,5
1,5
1,5
1,5
2
1,5
2
2
1,5
2
2,5
1,5
2,5
2,5
1,5
2,5
3
2,25
3
3
4,5
4,5
3
4,5
4,5
4,5
4,5
9
4,5
4,5
9
6
9
12
6
9
12
7,5
9
15
7,5
9
15
13. COMBINAES DE FILTROS
Combinaes de filtros disponveis para a linha YG:

Classificao
NBR 16401
G2
G4
G4
G2 + G4
G3 + G4
G4
G2 + G4
Espessura
1"
1"
2"
1" + 1"
1" + 1"
1"
1" + 1"
G3 + G4
G1 + G4
F5
G4 + F5
G2 + F8
1" + 1"
1"
2"
1" + 2"
1" + 1"
Caractersticas
Metlico Lavvel
Manta Sinttica Descartvel
Manta Sinttica Descartvel
Metlico Lavvel + Manta Sinttica Descartvel
Fibra de vidro Descartvel + Manta Sinttica Descartvel
Porta-Mantas com Manta Sinttica Lavvel
Metlico Lavvel + Porta-Mantas com Manta Sinttica Lavvel
Fibra de vidro Descartvel + Porta-Mantas com Manta Sinttica
Lavvel
Tela Nylon Lavvel + Porta-Mantas com Manta Sinttica Lavvel
Plissado Descartvel
Manta Sinttica Descartvel + Plissado Descartvel
Metlico Lavvel + Plissado em papel de microfibra Descartvel
Manta Sinttica Descartvel + Plissado em papel de microfibra
G4 + F8
1" + 1"
Descartvel
Porta-Mantas com Manta Sinttica Lavvel + Plissado em Papel de
G4 + F8
1" + 1"
microfibra Descartvel
Nota:
Para o mdulo trocador tambm existem as opes:
- Sem filtro e com caixilho (quando filtros so fornecidos pelo cliente)
- Sem filtro e sem caixilho (quando montado com Caixa de Filtragem)
ESPECIFICAES DOS FILTROS

Norma Atual
NBR 16401
G1
G2
G3
Norma Antiga
NBR 6401
GO
G1
G2
MEIO FILTRANTE
Tela de nylon
Metlico
Fibra de vidro
CONSTRUO
Plano
Plano
Plano
TIPO
Lavvel
Lavvel
Descartvel
G3
G4
G4
G3
-
Fibra de vidro
Manta sinttica
Manta sinttica
Plano
Plano
Porta-Mantas
Descartvel
Descartvel
Lavvel
F5
F1
Plissado
Descartvel
F8
F3
Manta sinttica
Papel de
microfibra de
vidro
Plissado
Descartvel
18
14. TIPOS E QUANTIDADES DE FILTROS

Classificao
(NBR 16401)
Caractersticas
G1
Lavvel
G2
Metlico
G3
Descartvel
G4
Porta Mantas
G3
Descartvel
G4
19
Dimenses (mm)
Quantidade por Modelo
Espessura Largura Altura YG02 YG03 YG04 YG05 YG06 YG07 YG08 YG09 YG10 YG12 YG14 YG15
365
2
355
429
2
487
2
470
531
2
393
3
3
580
8
3
452
649
3
6
337
6
566
380
6
6
365
2
353
429
2
487
2
468
531
2
391
3
3
580
3
450
649
3
6
337
6
564
380
6
6
365
2
355
429
2
487
2
470
531
2
393
3
3
580
3
452
649
3
6
337
6
566
380
6
6
25
365
2
355
429
2
487
2
470
531
2
393
3
3
580
3
452
649
3
6
337
6
566
380
6
6
365
2
355
429
2
487
2
470
531
2
393
3
3
580
3
452
649
3
6
337
6
566
380
6
6
365
2
355
429
2
487
2
470
531
2
393
3
3
580
3
452
649
3
6
337
6
566
380
6
6
50
365
2
355
429
2
487
2
470
531
2
393
3
3
580
3
452
649
3
6
337
6
566
380
6
6
rea de Face (m2)
0,26 0,30 0,46 0,50 0,68 0,68 0,79 0,88 0,91 1,14 1,29 1,29
15. POSIES DE INSUFLAMENTO
- Todos os mdulos so fabricados conforme pedido para montagem

vertical ou horizontal. Uma vez definida a fabricao (vertical ou
horizontal) no possvel fazer modificao em campo.
- Posies de descarga V5 e H5 (Down Flow) somente at 20 TR e
ventilador Sirocco.
Mdulo
Vertical
Mdulo
Horizontal
16. OPES DE MOTORES

YG
VENTILADOR REA DE FACE
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
12
14
15
TDA-7/7
TDA-7/7
TDA-9/7
TDA-10/8
TDA-12/12
TDA-12/12
TDA-12/12
TDA-15/11
TDA-15/15
2xTDA-12/9
2xTDA-12/12
2xTDA-12/12
20
0,16
0,21
0,30
0,38
0,45
0,53
0,60
0,68
0,76
0,94
1,06
1,13
VAZES
MIN
MAX
1037
1728
1361
2268
1944
3240
2462
4104
2916
4860
3434
5724
3888
6480
4406
7344
4925
8208
6091
10152
6869
11448
7322
12204
MOTOR
MIN
MAX
0,5
1
0,5
1,5
0,5
2
0,5
3
0,75
3
0,75
3
0,75
4
1
4
1
5
1,5
7,5
1,5
7,5
1,5
7,5
Motores Disponveis
0,50 0,75 1,00 1,50 2,00 3,00 4,00 5,00 7,50 10,0
17. DADOS DOS MOTORES STANDARD
Potncia (CV)
N. Polos
Frequncia (Hz)
Carcaa
RPM Nominal
In(A)
220 CMO(A)
Ip/In (A)
In(A)
Tenso (Volts) 380 CMO(A)
Ip/In (A)
In(A)
440 CMO(A)
Ip/In (A)
Fator de Potncia (100%)
Potncia (CV)
N. Polos
Frequncia (Hz)
Carcaa
RPM Nominal
In(A)
220 CMO(A)
Ip/In (A)
In(A)
Ip/In (A)
In(A)
440 CMO(A)
Ip/In (A)
0,5
0,75
1,5
7,5
10
12,5
15
20
25
30
40
112M
3500
19,1
21,97
8
11,1
12,77
8
9,55
10,98
8
0,87
132S
3510
25,5
29,33
7
14,8
17,02
7
12,8
14,72
7
0,88
132M
3510
31
35,65
7,8
17,9
20,59
7,8
15,5
17,83
7,8
0,88
132M
3520
36,9
42,44
8,5
21,4
24,61
8,5
18,5
21,28
8,5
0,89
160M
3540
50,3
57,85
7,8
29,1
33,47
7,8
25,1
28,87
7,8
0,88
160M
3525
61,6
70,84
8
35,7
41,06
8
30,8
35,42
8
0,88
160L
3530
72,1
82,92
8,5
41,7
47,96
8,5
36
41,40
8,5
0,88
200M
3555
99
113,85
7,2
57,3
65,90
7,2
49,5
56,93
7,2
0,88
63
3380
1,71
1,97
5,5
0,99
1,14
5,5
0,86
0,99
5,5
0,83
71
3430
2,39
2,75
6,2
1,38
1,59
6,2
1,2
1,38
6,2
0,85
71
3425
3
3,45
7,8
1,74
2,00
7,8
1,5
1,73
7,8
0,83
80
3350
4,3
4,95
7,5
2,49
2,86
7,5
2,15
2,47
7,5
0,86
80
3380
5,46
6,28
7,5
3,16
3,63
7,5
2,73
3,14
7,5
0,89
90S
3465
8,43
9,69
7,8
4,88
5,61
7,8
4,22
4,85
7,8
0,84
90L
3450
11
12,65
7,9
6,37
7,33
7,9
5,5
6,33
7,9
0,86
100L
3485
12,9
14,84
8
7,47
8,59
8
6,45
7,42
8
0,88
2
60
112M
3465
15,8
18,17
7,5
9,15
10,52
7,5
7,9
9,09
7,5
0,88
0,5
0,75
1,5
7,5
10
12,5
15
20
25
30
40
100L
1715
14
16,10
7,6
8,11
9,33
7,6
7
8,05
7,6
0,81
4
60
112M
1720
16,4
18,86
8
9,49
10,91
8
8,2
9,43
8
0,84
112M
1740
20
23,00
7
11,6
13,34
7
10
11,50
7
0,82
132S
1760
26,6
30,59
8
15,4
17,71
8
13,3
15,30
8
0,83
132M
1755
33,3
38,30
8,7
19,3
22,20
8,7
16,6
19,09
8,7
0,82
132M
1755
39,3
45,20
8,3
22,8
26,22
8,3
19,6
22,54
8,3
0,83
160M
1760
52,6
60,49
6,3
30,5
35,08
6,3
26,3
30,25
6,3
0,83
160L
1760
64,3
73,95
6,5
37,2
42,78
6,5
32,2
37,03
6,5
0,83
180M
1765
75,5
86,83
7,5
43,7
50,26
7,5
37,8
43,47
7,5
0,84
200M
1770
101
116,15
6,6
58,5
67,28
6,6
50,5
58,08
6,6
0,85
71
1720
2,07
2,38
5
1,2
1,38
5
1,03
1,18
5
0,69
71
1720
2,9
3,34
5,5
1,68
1,93
5,5
1,45
1,67
5,5
0,7
80
1720
3,02
3,47
7,2
1,75
2,01
7,2
1,51
1,74
7,2
0,82
80
1720
4,43
5,09
7,8
2,56
2,94
7,8
2,21
2,54
7,8
0,82
90S
1720
6,12
7,04
6,4
3,54
4,07
6,4
3,06
3,52
6,4
0,78
90L
1730
8,7
10,01
6,8
5,04
5,80
6,8
4,35
5,00
6,8
0,8
100L
1725
11,9
13,69
7,8
6,89
7,92
7,8
5,95
6,84
7,8
0,8
18. DADOS MOTORES ALTO RENDIMENTO

Potncia (CV)
N. Polos
Frequncia (Hz)
Carcaa
RPM Nominal
In(A)
220 CMO(A)
Ip/In (A)
In(A)
Ip/In (A)
In(A)
440 CMO(A)
Ip/In (A)
Potncia (CV)
N. Polos
Frequncia (Hz)
Carcaa
RPM Nominal
In(A)
220 CMO(A)
Ip/In (A)
In(A)
Ip/In (A)
In(A)
440 CMO(A)
Ip/In (A)
21
0,5
0,75
1,5
7,5
10
12,5
15
20
25
30
40
112M
3500
18,9
21,74
8
10,9
12,54
8
9,45
10,87
8
0,86
132S
3515
25
28,75
7,5
14,5
16,68
7,5
12,5
14,38
7,5
0,88
132M
3515
30,7
35,31
7,8
17,8
20,47
7,8
15,4
17,71
7,8
0,88
132M
3510
35,4
40,71
8
20,5
23,58
8
17,7
20,36
8
0,9
160M
3540
49,8
57,27
7,5
28,8
33,12
7,5
24,9
28,64
7,5
0,86
160M
3530
62,1
71,42
8,2
36
41,40
8,2
31
35,65
8,2
0,85
160L
3530
72,1
82,92
8
41,7
47,96
8
36
41,40
8
0,87
200M
3560
98,3
113,05
7,5
56,9
65,44
7,5
49,2
56,58
7,5
0,86
63
3380
1,68
1,93
5,5
0,97
1,12
5,5
0,84
0,97
5,5
0,8
71
3430
2,35
2,70
6,2
1,36
1,56
6,2
1,17
1,35
6,2
0,83
71
3440
2,92
3,36
7,8
1,69
1,94
7,8
1,46
1,68
7,8
0,83
80
3390
4,02
4,62
7,5
2,33
2,68
7,5
2,01
2,31
7,5
0,87
80
3400
5,61
6,45
7,7
3,25
3,74
7,7
2,81
3,23
7,7
0,84
90S
3430
8
9,20
7,8
4,63
5,32
7,8
4
4,60
7,8
0,85
90L
3430
10,8
12,42
7,8
6,25
7,19
7,8
5,4
6,21
7,8
0,85
100L
3500
13,1
15,07
9
7,58
8,72
9
6,55
7,53
9
0,85
2
60
112M
3475
15,1
17,37
8
8,74
10,05
8
7,55
8,68
8
0,89
0,5
0,75
1,5
7,5
10
12,5
15
20
25
30
40
100L
1720
13,8
15,87
8
7,99
9,19
8
6,9
7,94
8
0,8
4
60
112M
1735
16,4
18,86
6,8
9,49
10,91
6,8
8,2
9,43
6,8
0,81
112M
1740
20
23,00
8
11,6
13,34
8
10
11,50
8
0,8
132S
1760
26,4
30,36
7,8
15,3
17,60
7,8
13,2
15,18
7,8
0,82
132M
1760
32
36,80
8,5
18,5
21,28
8,5
16
18,40
8,5
0,83
132M
1755
37,5
43,13
8,8
21,7
24,96
8,8
18,8
21,62
8,8
0,84
160M
1755
53,3
61,30
6,7
30,9
35,54
6,7
26,6
30,59
6,7
0,8
160L
1760
64,7
74,41
6,5
37,5
43,13
6,5
32,3
37,15
6,5
0,81
180M
1760
73,9
84,99
7
42,8
49,22
7
37
42,55
7
0,84
200M
1770
99,6
114,54
6,4
57,7
66,36
6,4
49,8
57,27
6,4
0,85
71
1700
2,11
2,43
5
1,22
1,40
5
1,05
1,21
5
0,64
71
1700
2,83
3,25
5,5
1,64
1,89
5,5
1,41
1,62
5,5
0,68
80
1730
2,98
3,43
8
1,73
1,99
8
1,49
1,71
8
0,8
80
1700
4,32
4,97
7
2,5
2,88
7
2,16
2,48
7
0,82
90S
1760
6,17
7,10
7,8
3,57
4,11
7,8
3,09
3,55
7,8
0,76
90L
1730
8,28
9,52
7
4,79
5,51
7
4,14
4,76
7
0,82
100L
1720
11,1
12,77
7,5
6,43
7,39
7,5
5,55
6,38
7,5
0,82
15
rpm bhp
1.078 0,19
1.088 0,21
1.110 0,23
1.135 0,26
1.160 0,29
1.190 0,32
1.220 0,36
1.253 0,40
1.262 0,41
20
rpm bhp
1.232 0,25
1.235 0,27
1.250 0,29
1.270 0,32
1.290 0,35
1.315 0,39
1.340 0,43
1.370 0,48
1.378 0,49
25
rpm bhp
930 0,23
1.368 0,34
1.375 0,36
1.390 0,40
1.405 0,43
1.425 0,47
1.445 0,51
1.473 0,56
1.480 0,57
Presso Esttica Total (mmca)

30
35
40
rpm bhp rpm bhp rpm bhp
1.020 0,28 1.105 0,33 1.190 0,38
1.500 0,41 1.625 0,48 1.750 0,56
1.500 0,43 1.615 0,51 1.730 0,59
1.510 0,48 1.620 0,55 1.730 0,63
1.520 0,52 1.625 0,60 1.730 0,67
1.535 0,55 1.638 0,64 1.740 0,72
1.550 0,59 1.650 0,68 1.750 0,77
1.575 0,64 1.670 0,74 1.765 0,83
1.582 0,66 1.676 0,75 1.771 0,84
45
rpm bhp
x
x
x
x
1.840 0,68
1.835 0,72
1.830 0,76
1.835 0,82
1.840 0,87
1.855 0,92
1.860 0,94
50
rpm bhp
x
x
x
x
1.950 0,77
1.940 0,81
1.930 0,85
1.930 0,91
1.930 0,97
1.945 1,02
1.949 1,04
55
rpm bhp
x
x
x
x
2.060 0,86
2.045 0,91
2.030 0,95
2.025 1,01
2.020 1,06
2.030 1,13
2.034 1,15
60
rpm bhp
x
x
x
x
2.170 0,95
2.150 1,00
2.130 1,05
2.120 1,11
2.110 1,16
2.115 1,23
2.118 1,25
YG03
1.400
1.500
1.600
1.700
1.900
2.000
2.100
2.200
2.300
1.030
1.065
1.100
1.135
1.210
1.250
1.290
1.330
1.375
0,22
0,25
0,28
0,32
0,41
0,45
0,50
0,56
0,63
1.160
1.190
1.220
1.253
1.320
1.355
1.393
1.430
1.473
0,29
0,32
0,36
0,40
0,49
0,54
0,60
0,66
0,73
1.290
1.315
1.340
1.370
1.430
1.460
1.495
1.530
1.570
0,35
0,39
0,43
0,48
0,57
0,63
0,69
0,76
0,83
1.405
1.425
1.445
1.473
1.528
1.555
1.588
1.620
1.658
0,43
0,47
0,51
0,56
0,67
0,72
0,79
0,85
0,93
1.520
1.535
1.550
1.575
1.625
1.650
1.680
1.710
1.745
0,52
0,55
0,59
0,64
0,76
0,81
0,88
0,95
1,03
1.625
1.638
1.650
1.670
1.715
1.740
1.768
1.795
1.825
0,60
0,64
0,68
0,74
0,85
0,91
0,98
1,06
1,14
1.730
1.740
1.750
1.765
1.805
1.830
1.855
1.880
1.905
0,67
0,72
0,77
0,83
0,95
1,01
1,09
1,16
1,25
1.830
1.835
1.840
1.855
1.890
1.910
1.933
1.955
1.980
0,76
0,82
0,87
0,92
1,05
1,11
1,19
1,27
1,36
1.930
1.930
1.930
1.945
1.975
1.990
2.010
2.030
2.055
0,85
0,91
0,97
1,02
1,15
1,22
1,30
1,39
1,48
2.030
2.025
2.020
2.030
2.055
2.070
2.088
2.105
2.128
0,95
1,01
1,06
1,13
1,26
1,33
1,41
1,50
1,59
2.130
2.120
2.110
2.115
2.135
2.150
2.165
2.180
2.200
1,05
1,11
1,16
1,23
1,37
1,44
1,53
1,61
1,71
YG04
2.000
2.200
2.400
2.600
2.700
2.800
3.000
3.200
3.240
740
770
800
840
860
880
920
960
968
0,27
0,32
0,38
0,46
0,50
0,55
0,66
0,78
0,81
850
870
900
930
945
960
990
1.030
1.038
0,32
0,39
0,46
0,55
0,59
0,63
0,74
0,85
0,88
960
970
990
1.020
1.030
1.040
1.070
1.100
1.106
0,39
0,46
0,55
0,63
0,68
0,73
0,84
0,95
0,97
1.060
1.070
1.080
1.100
1.110
1.120
1.150
1.170
1.174
0,46
0,53
0,62
0,71
0,76
0,81
0,94
1,06
1,09
1.150
1.160
1.170
1.180
1.190
1.200
1.220
1.250
1.256
0,53
0,62
0,70
0,80
0,85
0,91
1,04
1,16
1,19
1.240
1.250
1.250
1.260
1.270
1.280
1.300
1.320
1.324
0,62
0,70
0,78
0,90
0,95
1,01
1,13
1,27
1,30
1.330
1.330
1.330
1.340
1.345
1.350
1.370
1.390
1.394
0,69
0,77
0,87
0,98
1,04
1,11
1,23
1,37
1,40
1.410
1.410
1.410
1.420
1.425
1.430
1.440
1.450
1.452
0,77
0,85
0,97
1,08
1,14
1,20
1,33
1,48
1,51
1.490
1.480
1.480
1.490
1.495
1.500
1.510
1.520
1.522
0,85
0,94
1,05
1,16
1,23
1,30
1,44
1,60
1,63
1.560
1.560
1.560
1.560
1.560
1.560
1.570
1.580
1.582
0,94
1,04
1,13
1,26
1,33
1,40
1,54
1,71
1,74
1.630
1.630
1.620
1.620
1.625
1.630
1.640
1.640
1.640
1,02
1,12
1,23
1,36
1,43
1,50
1,65
1,82
1,85
2.462
2.600
2.800
3.000
3.200
3.400
3.700
3.900
4.000
676
690
710
740
760
790
830
855
870
0,30
0,34
0,39
0,46
0,53
0,60
0,74
0,84
0,90
770
780
800
825
840
865
905
928
940
0,38
0,42
0,48
0,55
0,63
0,71
0,85
0,96
1,02
863
870
890
910
920
940
980
1.000
1.010
0,47
0,50
0,57
0,64
0,73
0,81
0,97
1,08
1,13
948
955
970
985
995
1.015
1.045
1.065
1.075
0,55
0,60
0,67
0,74
0,83
0,92
1,08
1,20
1,26
1.033
1.040
1.050
1.060
1.070
1.090
1.110
1.130
1.140
0,64
0,69
0,76
0,84
0,92
1,02
1,19
1,32
1,39
1.107
1.110
1.120
1.130
1.140
1.155
1.173
1.190
1.200
0,74
0,78
0,86
0,95
1,04
1,14
1,31
1,44
1,51
1.180
1.180
1.190
1.200
1.210
1.220
1.235
1.250
1.260
0,83
0,88
0,97
1,05
1,15
1,26
1,44
1,57
1,64
1.250
1.250
1.255
1.260
1.270
1.280
1.295
1.308
1.315
0,93
0,99
1,07
1,16
1,27
1,38
1,56
1,70
1,77
1.320
1.320
1.320
1.320
1.330
1.340
1.355
1.365
1.370
1,03
1,09
1,18
1,27
1,39
1,50
1,69
1,83
1,90
1.383
1.380
1.380
1.380
1.390
1.395
1.410
1.420
1.425
1,15
1,20
1,30
1,39
1,51
1,62
1,82
1,96
2,04
1.447
1.440
1.440
1.440
1.450
1.450
1.465
1.475
1.480
1,26
1,32
1,41
1,51
1,62
1,75
1,95
2,09
2,17
YG02
10
rpm bhp
924 0,14
940 0,15
970 0,17
1.000 0,20
1.030 0,22
1.065 0,25
1.100 0,28
1.135 0,32
1.146 0,33
YG05
19. DESEMPENHO VENTILADORES
Vazo de
Ar
(m3/h)
1.036
1.100
1.200
1.300
1.400
1.500
1.600
1.700
1.728
Notas:
(1) Condies do ar: Temperatura 20 C e presso baromtrica de 760 mmHg;
(2) A pressao esttica total a soma das seguintes presses: externa requerida, perda de presso nas serpentinas e perdas nos filtros;
(3) Calor gerado pelo motor do ventilador (MBh)= 3,15 x BHP
22
Vazo de
Ar
(m3/h)
2.462
2.600
2.800
3.000
3.200
3.400
3.700
3.900
4.000
3.000
3.300
3.500
3.700
3.900
4.100
4.300
4.500
4.700
4.900
Vazo de
Ar
(m3/h)
3.500
3.800
4.100
4.400
4.700
4.800
5.000
5.300
5.600
5.700
4.000
4.300
4.600
4.900
5.200
5.500
5.800
6.100
6.400
6.480
YG08
YG07
YG06
YG05
19. DESEMPENHO VENTILADORES (cont.)

10
rpm bhp
676 0,30
690 0,34
710 0,39
740 0,46
760 0,53
790 0,60
830 0,74
855 0,84
870 0,90
15
rpm bhp
770 0,38
780 0,42
800 0,48
825 0,55
840 0,63
865 0,71
905 0,85
928 0,96
940 1,02
520
520
523
528
535
545
555
565
575
585
625
625
626
629
633
638
644
651
659
666
0,28
0,33
0,37
0,40
0,44
0,49
0,55
0,60
0,67
0,74
0,52
0,57
0,61
0,66
0,71
0,76
0,82
0,88
0,95
1,02
15
rpm bhp
626 0,49
630 0,55
638 0,63
648 0,71
659 0,81
663 0,84
670 0,91
681 1,03
693 1,16
696 1,21
20
rpm bhp
730 0,61
730 0,69
730 0,76
735 0,85
743 0,95
745 0,98
750 1,05
758 1,18
765 1,31
768 1,35
25
rpm bhp
814 0,76
810 0,83
810 0,92
813 1,01
816 1,11
818 1,14
820 1,22
828 1,34
835 1,48
838 1,53
540
555
570
585
600
615
630
653
670
674
635
644
655
666
678
689
700
719
733
736
730
733
740
748
755
763
770
785
795
797
810
811
815
819
825
833
840
851
860
862
890
890
890
890
895
903
910
918
925
927
0,74
0,82
0,91
1,02
1,13
1,26
1,40
1,56
1,73
1,78
820
816
814
811
810
810
811
814
816
819
0,67
0,72
0,76
0,81
0,86
0,92
0,98
1,04
1,11
1,18

30
35
40
1.033 0,64 1.107 0,74 1.180 0,83
1.040 0,69 1.110 0,78 1.180 0,88
1.050 0,76 1.120 0,86 1.190 0,97
1.060 0,84 1.130 0,95 1.200 1,05
1.070 0,92 1.140 1,04 1.210 1,15
1.090 1,02 1.155 1,14 1.220 1,26
1.110 1,19 1.173 1,31 1.235 1,44
1.130 1,32 1.190 1,44 1.250 1,57
1.140 1,39 1.200 1,51 1.260 1,64
10
rpm bhp
523 0,37
530 0,42
545 0,49
560 0,57
575 0,67
580 0,70
590 0,77
605 0,89
620 1,02
625 1,06
0,60
0,68
0,77
0,88
0,99
1,12
1,25
1,41
1,58
1,62
730
730
730
730
730
730
733
738
743
748
25
rpm bhp
948 0,55
955 0,60
970 0,67
985 0,74
995 0,83
1.015 0,92
1.045 1,08
1.065 1,20
1.075 1,26
910 0,81 985 0,98 1.060 1,15

903 0,88 978 1,04 1.053 1,21
898 0,92 973 1,09 1.048 1,26
893 0,96 968 1,13 1.043 1,31
890 1,01 964 1,19 1.038 1,36
890 1,07 961 1,25 1.033 1,42
890 1,14 960 1,31 1.030 1,49
890 1,20 960 1,38 1.030 1,56
890 1,27 960 1,45 1.030 1,63
890 1,35 960 1,53 1.030 1,71
30
35
40
898 0,92 973 1,09 1.048 1,26
890 0,98 965 1,16 1.040 1,33
890 1,07 961 1,25 1.033 1,42
890 1,17 960 1,35 1.030 1,53
890 1,27 960 1,45 1.030 1,63
890 1,31 960 1,49 1.030 1,67
890 1,39 960 1,57 1.030 1,75
898 1,51 964 1,70 1.030 1,90
905 1,65 968 1,85 1.030 2,04
908 1,70 969 1,90 1.030 2,09
0,47
0,55
0,63
0,74
0,85
0,97
1,11
1,25
1,42
1,47
0,40
0,45
0,49
0,53
0,58
0,63
0,68
0,74
0,81
0,88
20
rpm bhp
863 0,47
870 0,50
890 0,57
910 0,64
920 0,73
940 0,81
980 0,97
1.000 1,08
1.010 1,13
0,89
0,98
1,07
1,18
1,30
1,43
1,58
1,74
1,91
1,96
1,04
1,14
1,23
1,35
1,47
1,60
1,75
1,92
2,09
2,14
963
960
960
960
963
966
970
978
983
984
1,22
1,31
1,41
1,53
1,66
1,80
1,95
2,12
2,30
2,35
1.035
1.030
1.030
1.030
1.030
1.030
1.030
1.038
1.040
1.040
1,39
1,49
1,60
1,71
1,85
2,00
2,14
2,32
2,51
2,56
45
rpm bhp
1.250 0,93
1.250 0,99
1.255 1,07
1.260 1,16
1.270 1,27
1.280 1,38
1.295 1,56
1.308 1,70
1.315 1,77
50
rpm bhp
1.320 1,03
1.320 1,09
1.320 1,18
1.320 1,27
1.330 1,39
1.340 1,50
1.355 1,69
1.365 1,83
1.370 1,90
55
rpm bhp
1.383 1,15
1.380 1,20
1.380 1,30
1.380 1,39
1.390 1,51
1.395 1,62
1.410 1,82
1.420 1,96
1.425 2,04
60
rpm bhp
1.447 1,26
1.440 1,32
1.440 1,41
1.440 1,51
1.450 1,62
1.450 1,75
1.465 1,95
1.475 2,09
1.480 2,17
1.120
1.118
1.113
1.108
1.103
1.098
1.095
1.095
1.094
1.091
x
x
1.178
1.173
1.168
1.163
1.160
1.160
1.158
1.153
x
x
1.240
1.235
1.228
1.223
1.219
1.216
1.214
1.211
x
x
x
x
1.288
1.283
1.278
1.273
1.270
1.270
45
rpm bhp
1.113 1,45
1.105 1,53
1.098 1,62
1.095 1,73
1.094 1,84
1.093 1,88
1.090 1,96
1.090 2,10
1.090 2,25
1.090 2,31
50
rpm bhp
1.178 1,65
1.170 1,72
1.163 1,82
1.160 1,93
1.158 2,04
1.155 2,09
1.150 2,17
1.150 2,31
1.150 2,46
1.150 2,52
55
rpm bhp
1.240 1,85
1.230 1,93
1.223 2,03
1.218 2,14
1.214 2,26
1.213 2,30
1.210 2,39
1.206 2,53
1.205 2,69
1.205 2,74
60
rpm bhp
x
x
1.290 2,14
1.283 2,25
1.275 2,35
1.270 2,47
1.270 2,51
1.270 2,60
1.263 2,75
1.260 2,50
1.260 2,54
1.100
1.095
1.095
1.091
1.090
1.090
1.090
1.094
1.095
1.095
1.165
1.160
1.160
1.153
1.150
1.150
1.150
1.150
1.150
1.150
1.225
1.219
1.215
1.211
1.208
1.205
1.205
1.205
1.205
1.205
1.285
1.278
1.270
1.270
1.265
1.260
1.260
1.260
1.260
1.260
1,34
1,40
1,45
1,50
1,56
1,62
1,69
1,76
1,84
1,92
1,59
1,69
1,80
1,92
2,05
2,20
2,36
2,54
2,73
2,78
x
x
1,65
1,70
1,75
1,82
1,89
1,96
2,04
2,13
1,79
1,89
2,00
2,13
2,26
2,41
2,58
2,75
2,53
2,57
Notas:
23
x
x
1,85
1,90
1,97
2,03
2,10
2,18
2,26
2,34
2,00
2,10
2,21
2,34
2,48
2,63
2,80
2,56
2,73
2,77
x
x
x
x
2,18
2,25
2,32
2,39
2,47
2,56
1,58
2,32
2,42
2,56
2,70
2,45
2,59
2,75
2,93
2,98
10
rpm bhp
460 0,60
470 0,69
480 0,78
500 0,90
510 1,01
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
15
rpm bhp
530 0,77
540 0,85
550 0,97
560 1,08
570 1,19
580 1,33
600 1,47
610 1,64
630 1,81
x
x
20
rpm bhp
590 0,92
600 1,02
610 1,13
610 1,26
620 1,40
630 1,54
645 1,69
660 1,85
675 2,03
690 2,28
25
rpm bhp
660 1,08
660 1,19
670 1,32
670 1,46
680 1,60
690 1,75
695 1,92
710 2,09
715 2,28
730 2,51

30
35
40
720 1,23 770 1,40 830 1,57
720 1,36 770 1,54 830 1,71
720 1,50 780 1,68 830 1,86
730 1,64 780 1,82 830 2,02
730 1,79 780 1,99 830 2,18
740 1,96 780 2,16 830 2,37
745 2,14 795 2,35 840 2,57
750 2,31 800 2,55 850 2,77
765 2,51 805 2,76 850 2,56
775 2,77 820 2,59 860 2,81
45
rpm bhp
880 1,75
880 1,89
880 2,04
880 2,21
880 2,39
880 2,58
885 2,79
890 2,58
895 2,56
900 2,81
50
rpm bhp
940 1,92
930 2,07
930 2,24
930 2,41
930 2,59
930 2,79
930 2,58
930 2,77
935 2,56
940 2,81
YG10
5.100
5.400
5.700
6.000
6.300
6.600
7.000
7.400
7.800
8.200
428
435
440
440
448
455
465
475
485
500
0,57
0,62
0,68
0,76
0,83
0,92
1,04
1,18
1,32
1,48
509
513
515
515
523
528
533
540
550
563
0,76
0,83
0,89
0,97
1,05
1,14
1,28
1,42
1,58
1,75
590
590
590
590
598
600
600
605
615
625
0,96
1,03
1,11
1,19
1,27
1,37
1,51
1,66
1,83
2,01
661
660
660
660
660
660
663
668
673
680
1,18
1,26
1,34
1,43
1,52
1,63
1,77
1,93
2,11
2,30
733
730
730
730
723
720
725
730
730
735
1,40
1,48
1,57
1,67
1,77
1,88
2,04
2,21
2,39
2,58
798
793
790
790
783
780
783
785
785
788
1,66
1,75
1,84
1,93
2,04
2,16
2,32
2,50
2,69
2,48
863
855
850
850
843
840
840
840
840
840
1,91
2,01
2,10
2,20
2,31
2,44
2,60
2,79
2,56
2,75
923
915
909
905
898
893
890
890
890
890
2,19
2,29
2,39
2,49
2,61
2,73
2,91
2,66
2,84
3,03
983
975
968
960
953
945
940
940
940
940
2,46
2,56
2,67
2,79
2,90
2,60
2,76
2,93
3,11
3,31
1.080
1.028
1.080
1.010
1.080
998
993
988
985
985
2,48
2,87
2,48
3,09
2,48
2,87
3,04
3,22
3,40
3,60
1.089
1.085
1.081
1.077
1.072
1.066
1.059
1.052
1.046
1.040
2,63
2,74
2,84
2,95
3,07
3,18
3,35
3,71
3,70
3,89
YG12
6.000
6.500
7.000
7.500
8.000
8.500
9.000
9.500
10.000
530
550
560
580
600
610
630
650
670
0,70
0,81
0,95
1,09
1,26
1,46
1,65
1,89
2,14
631
639
649
661
675
690
706
724
742
0,87
1,01
1,15
1,30
1,48
1,68
1,90
2,14
2,41
710
720
720
730
740
760
770
780
800
1,09
1,23
1,39
1,57
1,76
1,97
2,20
2,46
2,73
805
805
807
812
819
827
838
849
863
1,30
1,44
1,61
1,79
1,99
2,21
2,45
2,72
3,00
870
870
870
870
880
890
900
900
920
1,53
1,68
1,86
2,06
2,28
2,52
2,77
2,62
2,88
962
956
953
952
953
957
962
969
978
1,76
1,93
2,11
2,31
2,52
2,76
2,59
2,83
3,10
1.010
1.010
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.010
1.010
1.020
1.030
1,99
2,17
2,38
2,59
2,83
2,65
2,89
3,14
3,42
1.106
1.096
1.089
1.083
1.080
1.079
1.081
1.084
1.089
2,25
2,45
2,65
2,46
2,66
2,88
3,12
3,38
3,66
1.150
1.140
1.130
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.130
1.130
2,49
2,70
2,91
2,70
2,93
3,16
3,42
3,70
4,00
1.237
1.225
1.215
1.207
1.200
1.196
1.194
1.194
1.195
2,79
2,57
2,76
2,96
3,18
3,42
3,67
3,95
4,25
1.270
1.260
1.250
1.240
1.230
1.230
1.230
1.230
1.230
2,60
2,78
2,99
3,20
3,44
3,70
3,97
4,27
4,58
YG14
7.000
7.500
8.000
8.500
9.000
9.500
10.000
10.500
11.000
11.500
550
560
570
580
590
600
610
627
643
658
0,78
0,90
1,01
1,15
1,29
1,46
1,64
1,82
2,04
2,28
660
670
670
680
680
690
700
706
718
730
1,04
1,15
1,27
1,41
1,57
1,75
1,93
2,10
2,32
2,58
760
760
770
770
770
780
780
785
793
802
1,32
1,44
1,57
1,72
1,88
2,06
2,25
2,42
2,65
2,90
860
850
850
850
860
860
860
862
867
874
1,62
1,75
1,89
2,04
2,21
2,41
2,60
2,77
3,00
3,25
940
940
940
940
940
940
940
937
940
944
1,96
2,10
2,24
2,39
2,58
2,77
2,54
2,70
2,90
3,12
1.020
1.020
1.010
1.010
1.010
1.010
1.010
1.010
1.011
1.013
2,32
2,45
2,60
2,77
2,53
2,70
2,88
3,05
3,25
3,47
1.100
1.090
1.090
1.090
1.080
1.080
1.080
1.081
1.080
1.080
2,70
2,84
2,57
2,71
2,87
3,05
3,24
3,41
3,62
3,84
1.170
1.160
1.160
1.150
1.150
1.150
1.150
1.150
1.148
1.146
2,66
2,78
2,92
3,07
3,23
3,41
3,61
3,79
4,01
4,24
1.240
1.230
1.230
1.220
1.220
1.210
1.210
1.216
1.213
1.210
3,02
3,14
3,29
3,43
3,60
3,79
3,98
4,20
4,42
4,64
1.297
1.296
1.295
1.294
1.292
1.289
1.285
1.281
1.277
1.274
3,38
3,54
3,70
3,86
4,03
4,22
4,42
4,62
4,84
5,08
1.360
1.360
1.350
1.350
1.340
1.340
1.330
1.340
1.336
1.332
3,82
3,94
4,07
4,22
4,40
4,60
4,80
5,05
5,28
5,52
YG15
19. DESEMPENHO VENTILADORES (cont.)
7.500
8.500
9.000
9.500
10.000
10.500
11.000
11.500
12.000
12.500
560
580
590
600
610
627
643
658
675
692
0,90
1,15
1,29
1,46
1,64
1,82
2,04
1,96
2,18
2,42
670
680
680
690
700
706
718
730
744
758
1,15
1,41
1,57
1,75
1,93
2,10
2,32
2,21
2,84
2,68
760
770
770
780
780
785
793
802
813
824
1,44
1,72
1,88
2,06
2,25
2,42
2,65
2,48
2,71
2,96
850
850
860
860
860
862
867
874
881
890
1,75
2,04
2,21
2,41
2,60
2,77
2,57
2,78
3,02
3,28
940
940
940
940
940
937
940
944
949
956
2,10
2,39
2,58
2,77
2,54
2,70
2,90
3,12
3,36
3,61
1.020
1.010
1.010
1.010
1.010
1.010
1.011
1.013
1.016
1.020
2,45
2,38
2,53
2,70
2,88
3,05
3,25
3,47
3,71
3,97
1.090
1.090
1.080
1.080
1.080
1.081
1.080
1.080
1.082
1.084
2,84
2,71
2,87
3,05
3,24
3,41
3,62
3,84
4,09
4,36
1.160
1.150
1.150
1.150
1.150
1.150
1.148
1.146
1.146
1.147
2,78
3,07
3,23
3,41
3,61
3,79
4,01
4,24
4,49
4,75
1.230
1.220
1.220
1.210
1.210
1.216
1.213
1.210
1.208
1.208
3,14
3,43
3,60
3,79
3,98
4,20
4,42
4,64
4,90
5,17
1.296
1.294
1.292
1.289
1.285
1.281
1.277
1.274
1.272
1.270
3,54
3,86
4,03
4,22
4,42
4,62
4,84
5,08
5,33
5,60
1.360
1.350
1.340
1.340
1.330
1.340
1.336
1.332
1.329
1.326
3,94
4,22
4,40
4,60
4,80
5,05
5,28
5,52
5,78
6,06
YG09
Vazo de
Ar
(m3/h)
4.500
4.800
5.100
5.400
5.700
6.000
6.300
6.600
6.900
7.300
55
rpm bhp
990 1,50
980 1,61
970 1,73
970 1,86
970 2,00
970 2,15
970 2,31
970 2,47
980 2,65
980 2,89
60
rpm bhp
1.030 2,30
1.030 2,45
1.020 2,63
1.020 2,81
1.020 2,58
1.010 2,77
1.010 2,96
1.020 3,17
1.020 2,56
1.020 2,81
Notas:
24
20. DADOS DIMENSIONAIS

Mdulo Trocador e Ventilador
Mdulo Trocador e Ventilador Acoplado

VERTICAL
HORIZONTAL
YG
PROF.
ALTURA
LARGURA
YG
PROF.
ALTURA
LARGURA
571
888
806
916
462
806
571
938
806
916
526
806
636
1080
1036
1030
586
1036
636
1156
1036
1106
630
1036
685
1309
1275
1309
679
1275
685
1309
1275
1309
679
1275
736
1309
1456
1410
679
1456
736
1450
1456
1410
749
1456
10
736
1510
1456
10
1410
790
1456
12
736
1420
1796
12
1410
790
1796
14
736
1506
1796
14
1410
875
1796
15
736
1506
1796
15
1410
875
1796
Mdulo Caixa de Filtragem

VERTICAL e HORIZONTAL
25
YG
PROF.
ALTURA
LARGURA
462
462
806
462
526
806
586
586
1036
586
630
1036
679
679
1275
679
679
1275
679
679
1456
679
748
1456
10
679
790
1456
12
679
790
1796
14
679
875
1796
15
679
875
1796
21. DISPOSIO DOS MDULOS POSIO VERTICAL
Os mdulos opcionais devem ser montados preferencialmente na seqncia

mostrada abaixo:
MTV
MCF
MTV
Legenda:
MTV
Mdulo Trocador e
Ventilador
MCF
22. DISPOSIO DOS MDULOS POSIO HORIZONTAL
MTV
MCF
MTV
Legenda:
MTV Mdulo Trocador e Ventilador
MCF
26
23. ACSTICA
A finalidade deste texto proporcionar orientaes e
recomendaes para a seleo, aplicao e instalao de
equipamento climatizador de ar de maneira a obter um
desempenho acstico satisfatrio.
Essas informaes demonstraro que a simples considerao
das caractersticas acsticas de uma central de tratamento de ar
no permitir alcanar os nveis sonoros desejados no ambiente
condicionado. Muitos fatores e critrios diferentes que tm um
efeito direto e expressivo no nvel sonoro final no espao
condicionado sero discutidos, sendo que a nfase ser dada
queles considerados como mais crticos para se alcanar as
metas de desenho acstico planejadas.
Para uma melhor compreenso deste assunto, convm
salientar o significado de alguns termos fundamentais em
acstica:
- Potncia sonora representa uma caracterstica bsica de
medida do rudo emitida pela fonte sonora. uma propriedade
fsica fundamental da fonte acstica sozinha e, portanto, um
parmetro absoluto para clculos e comparaes de fontes
sonoras. O nvel de potncia sonora em si no proporciona uma
medida da intensidade do rudo no local considerado. A partir da
potncia sonora, deve-se calcular a presso sonora levando em
conta as caractersticas da instalao como um todo.
Presso sonora deve ser determinada para cada ambiente em
particular estando relacionada distncia do observador e sujeita
influncia de diversos fatores, incluindo tamanho do local, tipos
de paredes, forros, divisrias, revestimentos, nvel de rudo de
fundo e/ou gerado por outros equipamentos.
Os mtodos de determinao de rudo esto baseados na
medio do nvel de presso sonora, em diversos pontos,
mediante um decibelmetro, associado a um analisador de
bandas de oitavas, a partir do qual se faz uma avaliao do nvel
de potncia sonora.
Ambos os nveis, potncia e presso sonora, so designados
em decibis (dB), que uma unidade adimensional , expressada
como o logaritmo da relao entre o valor medido e um valor de
referncia.
O rudo do ventilador no o nico som transmitido at o
espao ocupado. O rudo do fluxo ar, gerado no sistema de
dutos, tambm enviado para o espao ocupado. O nvel
acstico final no espao ocupado o resultado dessas duas
fontes acsticas menos os fatores de atenuao, reduo
acstica e outras medidas de controle acstico que foram
projetados dentro do sistema para reduzir o rudo.
O rudo que chega ao espao ocupado viaja por um de vrios
caminhos acsticos possveis. O Manual de Fundamentos da
ASHRAE descreve 18 caminhos acsticos tpicos que devem ser
levados em considerao. Os trs caminhos de maior interesse
para unidades de tratamento de ar so descritos a seguir:
1) Rudo originado pelos ventiladores
O ventilador presente na unidade de tratamento de ar uma
das principais fontes do som transmitido atravs do sistema de ar
condicionado. preciso um esforo no incio de um projeto e
instalao para minimizar a magnitude desse som.
til entender os fatores que influem sobre a magnitude do
som do ventilador, e reconhecer que, a melhor seleo do
27
climatizador de ar poder resultar em nveis mnimos da potncia

sonora do ventilador.
O rudo produzido por um ventilador est diretamente
relacionado ao seu projeto (nmero de ps, forma das ps),
vazo de ar, presso total e principalmente a sua eficincia.
Para uma determinada vazo de ar e presso esttica, o menor
nvel de rudo possvel somente ser alcanado se selecionado
um ventilador em seu ponto de melhor rendimento sem qualquer
outra considerao. Velocidade de descarga baixa ou alta no
significa necessariamente baixo ou alto nvel de rudo.
Selees baseadas em velocidade de descarga simplesmente
limitam o tamanho mximo de um ventilador quando tomamos
como base as reas de descarga definidas pelas normas AMCA.
O nvel de rudo gerado por ventiladores aumenta com a presso
esttica, por isto, o sistema de distribuio de ar deve ser
projetado sempre para uma mnima resistncia possvel.
Se durante a operao do climatizador de ar o ventilador
modificar seu ponto de desempenho devido a filtros sujos,
fechamento e abertura de dampers, isto poder acarretar um
aumento em seu nvel de rudo.
Ms condies de aspirao ou descarga podem afetar
seriamente a performance aerodinmica e acstica de qualquer
ventilador inclusive invalidando as caractersticas de operao
fornecidas em catlogos.
Os ventiladores representam uma fonte predominante no
climatizador de ar, j que o nvel de rudo do motor eltrico no
influi significativamente no resultado.
2) Rudos originados nos dutos
Outra fonte de rudo no sistema de ar condicionado o sistema
de distribuio de ar que liga a unidade climatizadora de ar ao
espao condicionado. Essa fonte secundria de rudo inclui os
dutos de insuflamento e retorno, tais como cotovelos, curvas, e
outros elementos, todos os quais geram rudo como resultado da
turbulncia do ar que circula dentro deles. Em qualquer projeto
de ar condicionado, ambos os rudos do ventilador e do sistema
de distribuio devem ser tomados em considerao para poder
atender os critrios e as metas do projeto acstico.
Configuraes de dutos de descarga mal projetadas e instaladas
podem afetar negativamente o desempenho do ventilador,
geram turbulncias do ar e conseqentemente rudos.
Os ventiladores so testados e classificados em laboratrio sob
condies ideais, que costumam ser diferentes das condies
reais de operao em campo. Na maioria dos ventiladores
instalados no campo no desenvolvem um perfil de velocidade
de descarga uniforme semelhante quele testado no laboratrio.
Para obter o mesmo desempenho como quando testado,
necessrio uma tubulao reta a jusante do ventilador.
Entretanto, existe raramente o espao suficiente para montar a
unidade dessa maneira. Na maioria dos casos, necessrio
recorrer a elementos de transio dentro da sala do
equipamento mecnico entre a conexo da descarga da unidade
climatizadora de ar e o tronco principal da tubulao.
23. ACSTICA (cont.)

3)Vibraes
Dicas para um melhor desempenho acstico:
Muitos dos problemas de rudo mais comuns no tm origem

realmente na acstica, mas provm de fontes vibratrias e podem
ser evitados se tomados as devidas precaues quanto ao
correto isolamento das vibraes.
A unidade climatizadora de ar e os dutos de distribuio de ar
devem ser isolados dos pisos, tetos e paredes. O isolamento das
vibraes de uma unidade climatizadora de ar realizado atravs
de vrios mtodos; o mtodo mais comum e mais efetivo o uso
de amortecedores de borracha ou molas isoladoras. O sistema de
movimentao de ar das unidades Eclipse e Gemini so dotados
de amortecedores de vibrao.
recomendvel a utilizao de um conector flexvel no ponto
onde o duto de descarga conectado unidade climatizadora de
ar. Nas unidades Eclipse e Gemini, com ventiladores do tipo limit
load , o conector flexvel j est integrado ao equipamento.
Assegure-se de que a unidade esteja isolada contra vibraes.

Utilize conectores flexveis entre a ligao da boca de descarga
dos ventiladores aos dutos.
Cotovelos de curva so preferveis a cotovelos quadrados. Os
cotovelos devem ser orientados na mesma direo da rotao
do ventilador.
Todos os joelhos e curvas de pequeno raio devem ser dotados
de veios defletores .
Vede todas as folgas onde o duto penetra na parede.
Suspenda os dutos em ganchos isolados.
Instale um abafador de rudo antes do espao ocupado.
O espao prximo sala de mquinas do equipamento deve
ser utilizado por uma rea que no seja sensvel a rudos.
Utilize uma parede com a perda de transmisso de rudo
apropriada.
Assegure-se de que o sistema de ar de retorno seja adequado.
Evite todas as obstrues. Utilize conexes graduais quando
necessrio.
Concluso
Fica evidente, portanto que o fabricante do climatizador de ar
pode garantir bons nveis de potncia acstica de seu
equipamento, porm ele no pode garantir os nveis finais de
potncia acstica no espao a ser condicionado. Muitos fatores
que iro influir sobre o nvel sonoro final no esto sob o controle
do fabricante do equipamento. Um dos principais fatores inclui o
projeto do sistema de distribuio de ar.
De maneira a garantir que o sistema esteja em conformidade com
os critrios de potncia acstica do espao condicionado, ser
necessria uma anlise completa e detalhada de todo o sistema
de distribuio do ar. A maior parte das informaes necessrias
execuo dessa anlise apresentada no captulo Controle de
rudo e Vibraes do livro de fundamentos da ASHRAE.
28
24. ESPECIFICAO TCNICA
YG COMFORT PACKAGE FAN & COIL UNIT

GERAL
- O climatizador dever atender s capacidades trmicas e vazo de ar que
constam nas planilhas fsicas operacionais, integrantes desta especificao.
CONCEPO
- Os climatizadores devero ser fabricados compreendendo um gabinete, de
mdulo nico, equipado com serpentina de resfriamento e desumidificao do ar,
ventilador centrfugo, bandeja de gua de condensao e uma bateria de filtros.
CARACTERSTICAS CONSTRUTIVAS
GABINETE
- O gabinete dever ser projetado e construdo de forma a reduzir a introduo,
gerao e reteno de contaminantes em seu interior, podendo ser lavados e
sanitizados;
- De construo robusta, em mdulo nico, o gabinete dever ser construdo com
perfis extrudados de alumnio de auto-encaixe acoplados a cantos especiais de
material termoplstico;
- Os painis devero ser do tipo parede dupla, com revestimento interno e externo
com chapa de ao pr-pintada, na cor branco-gelo e o seu ncleo isolante dever
ser em poliuretano expandido com 25 mm de espessura;
- Dever haver estanqueidade adequada entre painis e estrutura dos mdulos do
gabinete, garantida por meio de gaxetas auto-adesivas de borracha esponjosa,
no higroscpica; colada em todo o permetro do gabinete;
- Dever haver no mnimo um painel lateral e um painel frontal removvel. Os
painis mveis devero estar fixados atravs de parafusos de fcil remoo e
serem tambm dotados de puxadores facilitando assim o acesso aos
componentes internos do equipamento;
- O(s) mdulo(s) dever (ao) ser montado(s) com ps de apoio, fabricados em
chapa de ao galvanizado, com altura de 110 mm.
29
24. ESPECIFICAO TCNICA (cont.)
VENTILADOR
- O(s) ventilador (es) dever(ao) ser do tipo centrfugo de dupla aspirao, de ps
curvadas para frente ou para trs e dispondo de uma presso esttica capaz de
superar as perdas da serpentina, filtros e rede de dutos;
- Sero construdos em chapa de ao com tratamento anticorrosivo, de construo
robusta, e seus rotores devero ser balanceados dinmica e estaticamente,
juntamente com as polias em regime de rotao mxima;
- Seus rolamentos devero ser do tipo rgido autocompensador de esferas,
blindados e de lubrificao permanente, com vida til mnima de 40.000 horas;
- O conjunto ventilador / motor dever ser montado sobre uma base nica, de
inrcia, apoiada sobre coxins de borracha para ventiladores de ps curvadas para
frente e coxins de mola para ventiladores com ps curvadas para trs;
- O acoplamento ao motor dever ser feito atravs de polias e correias
trapezoidais do tipo V, sendo que a polia do motor dever ser ajustvel para
motores de at 5 CVs.
MOTOR
- Dever ser eltrico, trifsico, de induo, (opcional alto rendimento), para tenso
de projeto de 60 ciclos, 3 fases, IV plos, com grau de proteo IP55, grau de
isolamento classe B e fator de servio 1.15, montado sobre uma base nica que
permita uma fcil ajustagem das correias de transmisso;
- O motor do ventilador, no poder ser montado sobre os painis frontais,
posteriores ou laterais.
SERPENTINA DE RESFRIAMENTO (GUA GELADA)
- Dever ser construda com tubos de cobre sem costura, de dimetro externo de
12,7mm;
- Os tubos devero ser montados em arranjo triangular desencontrado com 32 mm
de distncia entre centros na vertical, tendo as fileiras de tubo na profundidade,
tambm uma distncia de 32 mm;
- As aletas devero ser onduladas, fabricadas em alumnio e devero ser
perfeitamente fixadas aos tubos por meio de expanso hidrulica;
- O distanciamento entre aletas dever ser proporcionado nos colarinhos e
limitado a um mximo de 12 aletas por polegada;
30
- A disposio dos tubos, no que se refere a nmero de fileiras em profundidade,

dever ser tal que sejam obedecidas s condies do ar, na entrada e sada da
serpentina, conforme condies especificadas no projeto;
- As soldas das curvas, coletores e acessrios devero ser feitas com material de
contedo mnimo de 2% de prata em sua composio;
- As cabeceiras e requadros da serpentina devero ser construdas em chapas de
ao galvanizado com espessura de 1,5 mm;
- Os coletores da serpentina devero ser fabricados em tubos de cobre e dotados
de luvas soldadas em lato, com rosca do tipo BSP, para conexo rede
hidrulica;
- Os coletores tambm devero ser dotados de dispositivo de purga de ar,
(acessvel pelo lado externo do gabinete) e dreno de gua;
- Depois de construda e devidamente lavada, a serpentina dever ser desidratada
para ser levada a teste de vazamento, imersa em tanque com gua morna
usando-se nitrognio a 20 Bares de presso interna.
BANDEJA DE GUA DE CONDENSAO
- Dever ser construda de material termo plstico, do tipo ABS e isolada
termicamente com poliuretano expandido;
- Dever possuir arestas curvas com caimento acentuado para o lado do dreno. A
conexo de dreno dever ser localizada na parte inferior da bandeja.
FILTROS DE AR
- Sero de classe G4 (ABNT 16401), com elementos removveis em mantas de
fibra sinttica descartvel, espessura 25 mm (1) montados em suportes metlicos
(caixilhos), com vedao adequada, de fcil remoo frontal sem a necessidade
do uso de ferramentas.
- Opes de filtros disponveis:
31

Filtro do tipo manta sinttica descartvel, classe G4, espessura de 1";
espessura de 1";

Filtro do tipo tela de nylon, classe G1 em combinao com G4 Porta Mantas
1"
Filtro do tipo manta sinttica descartvel, classe G4, espessura de 1" em
combinao com filtro do tipo manta sinttica plissada, classe F5,
espessura de 2";
- Os elementos dos filtros devero ser fabricados com 100% de material sinttico
que no libera partculas e com meio filtrante no cancergeno;
- A rea de face dos filtros dever equivaler, no mnimo, rea de face da
serpentina, observada a velocidade de face adequada para o filtro;
- O suporte metlico (caixilho) dever ser montado na entrada de ar dos
climatizadores.
EMBALAGEM
- O equipamento dever ser embalado de modo a garantir um transporte seguro,
em quaisquer condies e limitaes que possam ser encontradas no percurso.
OPCIONAIS E ACESSRIOS
SERPENTINA DE AQUECIMENTO (GUA QUENTE)
- Dever ser montada aps a serpentina de resfriamento;
-Dever ser fabricada com tubos de cobre sem costura de e aletas onduladas
de alumnio, perfeitamente fixadas aos tubos por meio de expanso hidrulica e
cabeceira e requadros em chapas de ao galvanizado;
- Dever ser construda com 2 (duas) filas de profundidade, 8 aletas por polegada
e 4 tubos por circuito.
MDULO CAIXA DE FILTRAGEM
- Dever ser construda com as mesmas caractersticas construtivas do gabinete;
- A juno entre os mdulos dever ser feita por um dispositivo de unio atravs
de parafusos. Entre os mdulos devero ser previstas e fornecidas juntas de
borracha esponjosa;
32
- Os dampers, para admisso de ar externo e retorno de ar, devero ser de

lminas opostas, fabricados em chapa de ao galvanizado e eixo para
acionamento manual ou automtico;
- A bateria de filtros do equipamento dever ser montada no mdulo caixa de
filtragem;
fibra sinttica descartvel, espessura 25 mm (1) montados em suportes metlicos
(caixilhos), com vedao adequada entre filtros e caixilho, de fcil remoo lateral;
- Opes disponveis:

espessura de 1";
Filtro do tipo tela de nylon, classe G1 em combinao com G4 Porta Mantas
1"
espessura de 2";
RESISTNCIA ELTRICA
- Devero ser do tipo U, aletada, trifsica, fabricada em nquel-cromo (80/20),
montada em uma estrutura de ao galvanizado e fixada entre isoladores de
porcelana;
- A resistncia dever estar protegida por um termostato de segurana com
rearme automtico;
- Sero montadas e fixadas no quadro da serpentina de resfriamento.
33
REGIO SUDESTE
SO PAULO Rua Joo Tibiri, 900 - So Paulo - SP CEP: 05077-000
Fone: (11) 3475 6700 Fax: (11) 3641 4951
CAMPINAS Rua Jos Paulino, 416 - Sala 807 - Centro Campinas - SP - CEP: 13013-000
Fone: (19) 3233 3590 Fax: (19) 3239 1082
RIO DE JANEIRO Rua Senador Alencar, 33 - So Cristovo Rio de Janeiro - RJ - CEP: 20921-430
Fone: (21) 3906 5900 Fax: (21) 3906 5850
REGIO NORDESTE
BAHIA Av. Santos Dumont, 8011 Cond. Espao 10 - Galpo 3 Bairro Porto - Lauro de Freitas BA CEP: 42700-000
Fone: (71) 2104 6100 Fax: (71) 2104 6101
PERNAMBUCO Av. Lins Petit, 320 - 5 Andar - Salas 501 e 502 Ed. Boa Vista Center - Bairro Boa
Vista Recife - PE - CEP: 50070-230
Fone: (81) 3059-5100 Fax: (81) 3059-5108
REGIO NORTE E CENTRO-OESTE
DISTRITO FEDERAL SHIS QI 11 - BL. Q - Salas 301/302 Edifcio Mirage - Bairro Lago Sul Braslia - DF CEP: 71625-205
Fone: (61) 3248-8000 Fax: (61) 3248-8004
REGIO SUL
PARAN Rua Tomazina, 125 - Qd. 10 Condomnio Portal da Serra Pinhais - PR - CEP: 83325-040
Fone: (41) 2169 3300 Fax: (41) 2169 3410
RIO GRANDE DO SUL Rua Aurora, 411 - Vila Rosa Canoas - RS - CEP: 92020-510
Fone: (51) 2102-6200 Fax: (51) 2102-6248
0800 283 9675
www.johnsoncontrols.com.br
O fabricante se reserva no direito de proceder a qualquer modificao, sem aviso prvio.
Printed in Brazil FORM: R-TEC011-BR (0609)
34
P.O. Box 423, Milwaukee, Wl 53201

Caractersticas Tcnicas
Dimenses
sistemas hvac
COMFORT PACKAGE FAN & COIL UNIT - YG

888
938
1080
571
806
462
1309
1450
1510
685
1036
526
916
1156
636
1275
586
630
1030
1106
1420
1506
736
1456
679
749
1309
1796
790
875
1410
Ventilador
Vazo de Ar
Motor
Transmisso
Filtros de Ar
Serpentina
Bandeja
Peso de Embarque
*O ECLIMA est disponvel para download em nosso site www.johnsoncontrols.com.br

Observaes:
1) Altura: Acrescentar 110 mm na altura devido ao p de apoio
2) Modelo de ventilador: Primeiro nmero indica o dimetro do rotor e o segundo nmero a sua largura em polegadas
3) rea de filtragem: a rea total dos filtros de ar
4) Potncia Mxima: indica a potncia do motor eltrico prevista no dimensional do gabinete
5) Peso indicado refere-se ao mdulo com o mximo motor e a serpentina sem gua.
REGIO SUDESTE
REGIO NORDESTE
REGIO NORTE E CENTRO-OESTE
REGIO SUL
SO PAULO
Rua Joo Tibiri, 900
So Paulo - SP
CEP: 05.077-000
Fone: (11) 3475 6700
Fax: (11) 3641 4951
BAHIA
Av. Santos Dumont, 8011
Cond. Espao 10 - Galpo 3
Bairro Porto
Lauro de Freitas - BA
CEP: 42.700-000
Fone: (71) 2104 6100
Fax: (71) 2104 6101
DISTRITO FEDERAL
SHIS QI 11 - BL. Q - Salas 301/302
Edifcio Mirage
Bairro Lago Sul
Braslia - DF
CEP: 71.625-205
Fone: (61) 3248 8000
Fax: (61) 3248 8004
PARAN
Rua Tomazina, 125 - Qd. 10
Condomnio Portal da Serra
Pinhais - PR
CEP: 83.325-040
Fone: (41) 2169 3300
Fax: (41) 2169 3410
CAMPINAS
Rua Jos Paulino, 416 - Sala 807
Centro - Campinas - SP
CEP: 13.013-000
Fone: (19) 3233 3590
Fax: (19) 3239 1082
0800 283 9675

RIO DE JANEIRO
Rua Senador Alencar, 33
So Cristovo
Rio de Janeiro - RJ
CEP: 20.921-430
Fone: (21) 3906 5900
Fax: (21) 3906 5850
PERNAMBUCO
Av. Lins Petit, 320 - 5 Andar
Salas 501 e 502
Ed. Boa Vista Center
Bairro Boa Vista
Recife - PE
CEP: 50.070-230
Fone: (81) 3059 5100
Fax: (81) 3059 5108
RIO GRANDE DO SUL

Rua Aurora, 411 - Vila Rosa
Canoas - RS
CEP: 92.020-510
Fone: (51) 2102 6200
Fax: (51) 2102 6248
O fabricante se reserva no direito de proceder a qualquer modificao, sem aviso prvio.
FORM: R-COM 023-BR (0609)
Descritivo Tcnico
Performance Trmica
Performance de Ventiladores
A tabela abaixo permite um seleo rpida da capacidade trmica dos modelos YG baseadas nas vazes de ar nominais e nos dados prestabelecidos nas observaes.
Concepo
Os climatizadores de ar modelo YG - COMFORT so
fornecidos em mdulo nico, visando oferecer ao cliente um
equipamento compacto e de simples instalao.
Esto disponveis em 12 modelos, cobrindo vazes de ar
de 1.360 a 10.200 m/h, e em sete diferentes posies de
insuflamento de ar, incluindo a posio down-flow.
Principais Caractersticas Construtivas

Gabinete
De construo robusta, em mdulo nico, o gabinete
construdo com perfis extrudados de alumnio de auto-encaixe
acoplados a cantos especiais de material termoplstico.
Os painis so do tipo parede dupla rgida, de 25mm de
espessura, revestidos interna e externamente com chapa de
ao pr-pintado, pintados na cor branco-gelo e o seu ncleo
isolante em poliuretano expandido.
A estanqueidade do gabinete garantida por meio de gaxetas
auto-adesivas de borracha esponjosa, no higroscpica.
No mnimo um painel lateral e um painel frontal so removveis.
Os mesmos esto fixados atravs de parafusos de fcil
remoo e so tambm providos de puxadores, facilitando o
acesso aos componentes internos do equipamento.
Os mdulos so fornecidos com ps de apoio, fabricados em
Ventilador
O(s) ventilador(es) centrfugo(s) so de dupla aspirao, de
ps curvadas para frente do tipo sirocco, dimensionados
para atender presso esttica total de at 60 mmca. So
construdos em chapa de ao com tratamento anticorrosivo, e
os rotores so balanceados dinmica e estaticamente.
Os rolamentos dos ventiladores so do tipo rgido
autocompensador de esferas, auto-lubrificados e blindados com
vida til mnima de 40.000 horas.
O conjunto ventilador / motor montado sobre uma base antivibrante, com coxins de borracha sinttica para ventiladores
Sirocco e coxins de mola para ventiladores Limit-load.
Motor
O motor eltrico, trifsico, para tenso de projeto de 60 ciclos, 3
fases, IV plos, montado internamente ao gabinete com grau de
proteo IP55, grau de isolamento classe B, conforme Norma
EB 120 da ABNT e fator de servio 1,15.
O acoplamento ao motor feito atravs de polias e correias
trapezoidais do tipo V, sendo a polia do motor ajustvel para
motores de at 5 CV.
A serpentina construda com tubos de cobre sem costura, de
dimetro externo de 12,7 mm.
Os tubos so montados em arranjo triangular desencontrado
com 32 mm de distncia entre centros na vertical, tendo as
fileiras de tubo na profundidade, uma distncia de 32 mm e
podem ser fabricadas com 3, 4, 6 e 8 filas.
As aletas so corrugadas, fabricadas em alumnio e
perfeitamente fixadas aos tubos por meio de expanso
hidrulica. O distanciamento entre aletas proporcionado nos
colarinhos e podem ser fabricadas nas opes de 8 ou 12 aletas
por polegada.
As soldas das curvas, coletores e acessrios so feitas com
material de contedo mnimo de 2% de prata.
As cabeceiras e requadros da serpentina so construdas em

chapas de ao galvanizado, espessura de 1,5 mm.
Os coletores da serpentina so fabricados em tubos de cobre e
providos de luvas soldadas em lato com rosca do tipo BSP,
para conexo rede hidrulica.
Os coletores so dotados de dispositivo de purga de ar e dreno
de gua.
Depois de construda e devidamente lavada, a serpentina dever
ser desidratada para ser levada a teste de vazamento, imersa
em tanque com gua morna usando-se nitrognio a 20 Bares de
presso interna.
Bandeja
A bandeja de recolhimento do condensado fabricada em
material termo plstico, do tipo ABS e isolada termicamente
com poliuretano expandido.
A bandeja de recolhimento do condensado possui arestas
curvas com caimento no sentido longitudinal do equipamento.
A conexo de dreno localizada na parte inferior da bandeja e
possu conexo do tipo 7/8 e adaptador solda 40mm em PVC.
Filtros de Ar
Os filtros so alojados em armaes metlicas (caixilhos), de
remoo frontal sem a necessidade do uso de ferramentas.
As armaes metlicas (caixilhos) possuem quatro diferentes
opes de espessura de filtros como segue:
- Filtro de 25 mm (1)
- Combinao de dois filtros de 25 mm (1)
- Filtro de 50 mm (2)
- Combinao de um filtro de 25 mm (1)
e um filtro de 50 mm (2)
As seguintes opes de classes de filtros esto disponveis:
- Filtro do tipo metlico lavvel, classe G2, espessura de 1
- Filtro do tipo manta sinttica descartvel, classe G4,
espessura de 1
espessura de 2
espessura de 1
- Porta Mantas para filtro do tipo manta sinttica lavvel,
classe G4, espessura de 1
- Filtro do tipo manta sinttica plissada, classe F5,
espessura de 2
- Filtro do tipo tela de nylon, classe G1 em combinao
com G4 Porta Mantas 1
espessura de 1 em combinao com filtro do tipo
manta sinttica plissada, classe F5, espessura de 2
O gabinete opcionalmente pode tambm ser fornecido somente
com o suporte dos filtros.
Os filtros so fabricados com 100% de material sinttico que
no libera partculas e com meio filtrante no cancergeno.
Filtros de Ar
Mdulo caixa de filtragem com Dampers de ar de retorno e ar
externo.
Aquecimento por serpentina de gua quente ou por resistncia
eltrica.
Ventilador limit-load.
Motor eltrico de alto rendimento.
Modelo YG
3 Filas
10
12
14
15
Vazo de Ar Nominal (m/h)
1.360
2.040
2.720
3.400
4.080
4.760
5.440
6.120
6.800
8.160
9.520
10.200
4.145
6.864
7.882
12.038
14.119
16.828
18.116
20.496
22.754
28.276
27.104
35.703
3.189
1.902
6.258
8.421
9.991
11.762
13.124
14.861
16.509
20.084
18.353
25.184
0,77
0,28
0,79
0,70
0,71
0,70
0,72
0,73
0,73
0,71
0,68
0,71
956
4.962
1.624
3.616
4.128
5.067
4.992
5.635
6.245
8.192
8.751
10.519

Temp. Sada Blbo mido (C)
18,3
15,3
18,0
14,8
18,5
15,6
17,9
14,5
18,0
14,6
17,9
14,5
18,1
14,8
18,0
14,8
18,0
14,8
17,9
14,6
19,8
15,5
17,9
14,6
Vazo de gua (m/h)
0,8
1,3
1,4
2,3
2,8
3,2
3,3
3,7
4,1
5,1
4,9
6,5
P gua (mca)
0,4
1,5
0,2
3,4
1,7
2,8
1,3
1,3
1,3
2,5
2,2
2,9
10
10
10
12
0,6
1,0
0,5
1,3
1,1
1,2
0,9
0,9
0,9
1,2
1,1
1,2
1"
1"
1.1/2"
1.1/4"
1.1/4"
1.1/4"
1.1/2"
1.1/2"
1.1/2"
1.1/2"
1.1/2"
2"
Nmero de circuitos
5.828
8.297
10.438
13.300
16.591
19.849
23.130
24.882
28.977
31.779
30.956
43.148
4.215
6.163
7.983
10.081
12.320
14.556
16.746
18.476
21.018
24.131
23.232
31.405
0,72
0,74
0,76
0,76
0,74
0,73
0,72
0,74
0,73
0,76
0,75
0,73
1.614
2.135
2.455
3.219
4.272
5.293
6.384
6.406
7.959
7.648
7.724
11.743
15.6
15.9
16.2
16,1
15,9
15,8
15,7
15,9
15,7
16,1
18,0
15,7
13.4
13.8
14.2
14,0
13,8
13,6
13,4
13,8
13,4
14,1
15,0
13,5
1.1
3,5
1.5
1,2
1.9
0.5
2,4
0,6
3,0
1,2
3,6
1,9
4,2
2,9
4,5
1,1
5,2
2,9
5,8
0,5
5,6
0,5
7,8
2,3
12
10
20
20
16

Vazo gua (m/h)
P gua (mca)
Nmero de circuitos
1.21
0.86
0.62
0,7
0,9
1,0
1,2
0,9
1,2
0,7
0,6
1,1
1"
1.1/4"
1.1/2"
1.1/2"
1.1/2"
1.1/2"
1.1/2"
2"
1.1/2"
2"
2"
2"

7.219
5.301
11.030
8.039
14.102
10.447
17.910
13.191
22.056
16.077
24.816
18.350
28.746
21.111
30.985
23.175
36.081
26.493
44.375
32.276
45.523
32.846
53.817
39.599
0,73
0,73
0,74
0,74
0,73
0,74
0,73
0,75
0,73
0,73
0,72
0,74
1.918
2.990
3.655
4.719
5.979
6.466
7.635
7.809
9.588
12.100
12.677
14.217
12.8
12.6
13.0
12,8
12,6
12,9
12,8
13,2
12,8
12,5
14,4
12,8
11.8
11.6
12.0
11,8
11,6
11,9
11,8
12,2
11,8
11,5
12,6
11,8
Vazo gua (m/h)
1.3
2.0
2.5
3,2
4,0
4,5
5,2
5,6
6,5
8,0
8,2
9,8
P gua (mca)
2.3
3,3
1,3
1,7
3,1
1,3
2,0
0,8
2,0
3,6
3,7
1,6
Nmero de circuitos
12
12
18
15
15
15
24

0.99
1"
1.14
1.1/4"
0.83
1.1/2"
0,9
1.1/2"
1,1
1.1/2"
0,9
2"
1,0
2"
0,7
2"
1,0
2"
1,2
2"
1,3
2"
0,9
2.1/2"
8.145
12.191
16.540
20.917
23.306
27.995
32.430
36.694
41.817
49.871
52.557
62.604
5.947
8.908
12.014
15.138
17.291
20.564
23.699
26.777
30.265
36.174
38.209
45.344

0,73
0,73
0,73
0,72
0,74
0,73
0,73
0,73
0,72
0,73
0,73
0,72
2.198
11.0
3.283
11.1
4.526
10.9
5.779
10,8
6.016
11,5
7.432
11,2
8.731
11,1
9.917
11,0
11.552
10,8
13.697
10,8
14.349
12,3
17.259
10,8
10.6
10.6
10.4
10,3
11,1
10,8
10,6
10,6
10,3
10,4
11,4
10,3
Vazo gua (m/h)
1.5
2.2
3.0
3,8
4,2
5,1
5,9
6,7
7,6
9,0
9,5
11,3
P gua (mca)
1,7
1,6
2,4
3,2
0,6
1,0
1,4
1,5
3,0
2,5
2,8
2,9
16
16
16
18
16
20
20
24
0.84
0.84
0.98
1,1
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1,1
1,0
1,1
1,1
1.1/4"
1.1/4"
1.1/2"
1.1/2"
2"
2"
2"
2"
2"
2"
2"
2.1/2"
Nmero de circuitos
Observaes:
Os valores acima tabelados tiveram como base os seguintes dados:
- Temperatura bulbo seco de entrada: 26,7C
- Temperatura bulbo mido de entrada: 19,4C
- Temperatura de entrada da gua: 6,7C
- Temperatura de sada da gua: 12,2C
- Nmero de aletas por polegada: 8
- Velocidade de face na serpentina: 2,5 m/s
Vazo
de Ar
(m/h)
rpm
1.036
1.100
1.200
1.300
1.400
1.500
1.600
1.700
1.728
10
bhp
rpm
924
940
970
1.000
1.030
1.065
1.100
1.135
1.146
0,14
0,15
0,17
0,20
0,22
0,25
0,28
0,32
0,33
1.400
1.500
1.600
1.700
1.900
2.000
2.100
2.200
2.300
1.030
1.065
1.100
1.135
1.210
1.250
1.290
1.330
1.375
2.000
2.200
2.400
2.600
2.700
2.800
3.000
3.200
3.240
15
bhp
rpm
1.078
1.088
1.110
1.135
1.160
1.190
1.220
1.253
1.262
0,19
0,21
0,23
0,26
0,29
0,32
0,36
0,40
0,41
0,22
0,25
0,28
0,32
0,41
0,45
0,50
0,56
0,63
1.160
1.190
1.220
1.253
1.320
1.355
1.393
1.430
1.473
740
770
800
840
860
880
920
960
968
0,27
0,32
0,38
0,46
0,50
0,55
0,66
0,78
0,81
2.462
2.600
2.800
3.000
3.200
3.400
3.700
3.900
4.000
676
690
710
740
760
790
830
855
870
3.000
3.300
3.500
3.700
3.900
4.100
4.300
4.500
4.700
4.900
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
bhp
rpm
bhp
rpm
bhp
rpm
bhp
rpm
bhp
rpm
bhp
rpm
bhp
rpm
bhp
rpm
1.232
1.235
1.250
1.270
1.290
1.315
1.340
1.370
1.378
0,25
0,27
0,29
0,32
0,35
0,39
0,43
0,48
0,49
930
1.368
1.375
1.390
1.405
1.425
1.445
1.473
1.480
0,23
0,34
0,36
0,40
0,43
0,47
0,51
0,56
0,57
1.020
1.500
1.500
1.510
1.520
1.535
1.550
1.575
1.582
0,28
0,41
0,43
0,48
0,52
0,55
0,59
0,64
0,66
1.105
1.625
1.615
1.620
1.625
1.638
1.650
1.670
1.676
0,33
0,48
0,51
0,55
0,60
0,64
0,68
0,74
0,75
1.190
1.750
1.730
1.730
1.730
1.740
1.750
1.765
1.771
0,38
0,56
0,59
0,63
0,67
0,72
0,77
0,83
0,84
x
x
1.840
1.835
1.830
1.835
1.840
1.855
1.860
x
x
0,68
0,72
0,76
0,82
0,87
0,92
0,94
x
x
1.950
1.940
1.930
1.930
1.930
1.945
1.949
x
x
0,77
0,81
0,85
0,91
0,97
1,02
1,04
x
x
2.060
2.045
2.030
2.025
2.020
2.030
2.034
x
x
0,86
0,91
0,95
1,01
1,06
1,13
1,15
x
x
2.170
2.150
2.130
2.120
2.110
2.115
2.118
x
x
0,95
1,00
1,05
1,11
1,16
1,23
1,25
0,29
0,32
0,36
0,40
0,49
0,54
0,60
0,66
0,73
1.290
1.315
1.340
1.370
1.430
1.460
1.495
1.530
1.570
0,35
0,39
0,43
0,48
0,57
0,63
0,69
0,76
0,83
1.405
1.425
1.445
1.473
1.528
1.555
1.588
1.620
1.658
0,43
0,47
0,51
0,56
0,67
0,72
0,79
0,85
0,93
1.520
1.535
1.550
1.575
1.625
1.650
1.680
1.710
1.745
0,52
0,55
0,59
0,64
0,76
0,81
0,88
0,95
1,03
1.625
1.638
1.650
1.670
1.715
1.740
1.768
1.795
1.825
0,60
0,64
0,68
0,74
0,85
0,91
0,98
1,06
1,14
1.730
1.740
1.750
1.765
1.805
1.830
1.855
1.880
1.905
0,67
0,72
0,77
0,83
0,95
1,01
1,09
1,16
1,25
1.830
1.835
1.840
1.855
1.890
1.910
1.933
1.955
1.980
0,76
0,82
0,87
0,92
1,05
1,11
1,19
1,27
1,36
1.930
1.930
1.930
1.945
1.975
1.990
2.010
2.030
2.055
0,85
0,91
0,97
1,02
1,15
1,22
1,30
1,39
1,48
2.030
2.025
2.020
2.030
2.055
2.070
2.088
2.105
2.128
0,95
1,01
1,06
1,13
1,26
1,33
1,41
1,50
1,59
2.130
2.120
2.110
2.115
2.135
2.150
2.165
2.180
2.200
1,05
1,11
1,16
1,23
1,37
1,44
1,53
1,61
1,71
850
870
900
930
945
960
990
1.030
1.038
0,32
0,39
0,46
0,55
0,59
0,63
0,74
0,85
0,88
960
970
990
1.020
1.030
1.040
1.070
1.100
1.106
0,39
0,46
0,55
0,63
0,68
0,73
0,84
0,95
0,97
1.060
1.070
1.080
1.100
1.110
1.120
1.150
1.170
1.174
0,46
0,53
0,62
0,71
0,76
0,81
0,94
1,06
1,09
1.150
1.160
1.170
1.180
1.190
1.200
1.220
1.250
1.256
0,53
0,62
0,70
0,80
0,85
0,91
1,04
1,16
1,19
1.240
1.250
1.250
1.260
1.270
1.280
1.300
1.320
1.324
0,62
0,70
0,78
0,90
0,95
1,01
1,13
1,27
1,30
1.330
1.330
1.330
1.340
1.345
1.350
1.370
1.390
1.394
0,69
0,77
0,87
0,98
1,04
1,11
1,23
1,37
1,40
1.410
1.410
1.410
1.420
1.425
1.430
1.440
1.450
1.452
0,77
0,85
0,97
1,08
1,14
1,20
1,33
1,48
1,51
1.490
1.480
1.480
1.490
1.495
1.500
1.510
1.520
1.522
0,85
0,94
1,05
1,16
1,23
1,30
1,44
1,60
1,63
1.560
1.560
1.560
1.560
1.560
1.560
1.570
1.580
1.582
0,94
1,04
1,13
1,26
1,33
1,40
1,54
1,71
1,74
1.630
1.630
1.620
1.620
1.625
1.630
1.640
1.640
1.640
1,02
1,12
1,23
1,36
1,43
1,50
1,65
1,82
1,85
0,30
0,34
0,39
0,46
0,53
0,60
0,74
0,84
0,90
770
780
800
825
840
865
905
928
940
0,38
0,42
0,48
0,55
0,63
0,71
0,85
0,96
1,02
863
870
890
910
920
940
980
1.000
1.010
0,47
0,50
0,57
0,64
0,73
0,81
0,97
1,08
1,13
948
955
970
985
995
1.015
1.045
1.065
1.075
0,55
0,60
0,67
0,74
0,83
0,92
1,08
1,20
1,26
1.033
1.040
1.050
1.060
1.070
1.090
1.110
1.130
1.140
0,64
0,69
0,76
0,84
0,92
1,02
1,19
1,32
1,39
1.107
1.110
1.120
1.130
1.140
1.155
1.173
1.190
1.200
0,74
0,78
0,86
0,95
1,04
1,14
1,31
1,44
1,51
1.180
1.180
1.190
1.200
1.210
1.220
1.235
1.250
1.260
0,83
0,88
0,97
1,05
1,15
1,26
1,44
1,57
1,64
1.250
1.250
1.255
1.260
1.270
1.280
1.295
1.308
1.315
0,93
0,99
1,07
1,16
1,27
1,38
1,56
1,70
1,77
1.320
1.320
1.320
1.320
1.330
1.340
1.355
1.365
1.370
1,03
1,09
1,18
1,27
1,39
1,50
1,69
1,83
1,90
1.383
1.380
1.380
1.380
1.390
1.395
1.410
1.420
1.425
1,15
1,20
1,30
1,39
1,51
1,62
1,82
1,96
2,04
1.447
1.440
1.440
1.440
1.450
1.450
1.465
1.475
1.480
1,26
1,32
1,41
1,51
1,62
1,75
1,95
2,09
2,17
520
520
523
528
535
545
555
565
575
585
0,28
0,33
0,37
0,40
0,44
0,49
0,55
0,60
0,67
0,74
625
625
626
629
633
638
644
651
659
666
0,40
0,45
0,49
0,53
0,58
0,63
0,68
0,74
0,81
0,88
730
730
730
730
730
730
733
738
743
748
0,52
0,57
0,61
0,66
0,71
0,76
0,82
0,88
0,95
1,02
820
816
814
811
810
810
811
814
816
819
0,67
0,72
0,76
0,81
0,86
0,92
0,98
1,04
1,11
1,18
910
903
898
893
890
890
890
890
890
890
0,81
0,88
0,92
0,96
1,01
1,07
1,14
1,20
1,27
1,35
985
978
973
968
964
961
960
960
960
960
0,98
1,04
1,09
1,13
1,19
1,25
1,31
1,38
1,45
1,53
1.060
1.053
1.048
1.043
1.038
1.033
1.030
1.030
1.030
1.030
1,15
1,21
1,26
1,31
1,36
1,42
1,49
1,56
1,63
1,71
1.120
1.118
1.113
1.108
1.103
1.098
1.095
1.095
1.094
1.091
1,34
1,40
1,45
1,50
1,56
1,62
1,69
1,76
1,84
1,92
x
x
1.178
1.173
1.168
1.163
1.160
1.160
1.158
1.153
x
x
1,65
1,70
1,75
1,82
1,89
1,96
2,04
2,13
x
x
1.240
1.235
1.228
1.223
1.219
1.216
1.214
1.211
x
x
1,85
1,90
1,97
2,03
2,10
2,18
2,26
2,34
x
x
x
x
1.288
1.283
1.278
1.273
1.270
1.270
x
x
x
x
2,18
2,25
2,32
2,39
2,47
2,56
3.500
3.800
4.100
4.400
4.700
4.800
5.000
5.300
5.600
5.700
523
530
545
560
575
580
590
605
620
625
0,37
0,42
0,49
0,57
0,67
0,70
0,77
0,89
1,02
1,06
626
630
638
648
659
663
670
681
693
696
0,49
0,55
0,63
0,71
0,81
0,84
0,91
1,03
1,16
1,21
730
730
730
735
743
745
750
758
765
768
0,61
0,69
0,76
0,85
0,95
0,98
1,05
1,18
1,31
1,35
814
810
810
813
816
818
820
828
835
838
0,76
0,83
0,92
1,01
1,11
1,14
1,22
1,34
1,48
1,53
898
890
890
890
890
890
890
898
905
908
0,92
0,98
1,07
1,17
1,27
1,31
1,39
1,51
1,65
1,70
973
965
961
960
960
960
960
964
968
969
1,09
1,16
1,25
1,35
1,45
1,49
1,57
1,70
1,85
1,90
1.048
1.040
1.033
1.030
1.030
1.030
1.030
1.030
1.030
1.030
1,26
1,33
1,42
1,53
1,63
1,67
1,75
1,90
2,04
2,09
1.113
1.105
1.098
1.095
1.094
1.093
1.090
1.090
1.090
1.090
1,45
1,53
1,62
1,73
1,84
1,88
1,96
2,10
2,25
2,31
1.178
1.170
1.163
1.160
1.158
1.155
1.150
1.150
1.150
1.150
1,65
1,72
1,82
1,93
2,04
2,09
2,17
2,31
2,46
2,52
1.240
1.230
1.223
1.218
1.214
1.213
1.210
1.206
1.205
1.205
1,85
1,93
2,03
2,14
2,26
2,30
2,39
2,53
2,69
2,74
x
1.290
1.283
1.275
1.270
1.270
1.270
1.263
1.260
1.260
x
2,14
2,25
2,35
2,47
2,51
2,60
2,75
2,50
2,54
4.000
4.300
4.600
4.900
5.200
5.500
5.800
6.100
6.400
6.480
540
555
570
585
600
615
630
653
670
674
0,47
0,55
0,63
0,74
0,85
0,97
1,11
1,25
1,42
1,47
635
644
655
666
678
689
700
719
733
736
0,60
0,68
0,77
0,88
0,99
1,12
1,25
1,41
1,58
1,62
730
733
740
748
755
763
770
785
795
797
0,74
0,82
0,91
1,02
1,13
1,26
1,40
1,56
1,73
1,78
810
811
815
819
825
833
840
851
860
862
0,89
0,98
1,07
1,18
1,30
1,43
1,58
1,74
1,91
1,96
890
890
890
890
895
903
910
918
925
927
1,04
1,14
1,23
1,35
1,47
1,60
1,75
1,92
2,09
2,14
963
960
960
960
963
966
970
978
983
984
1,22
1,31
1,41
1,53
1,66
1,80
1,95
2,12
2,30
2,35
1.035
1.030
1.030
1.030
1.030
1.030
1.030
1.038
1.040
1.040
1,39
1,49
1,60
1,71
1,85
2,00
2,14
2,32
2,51
2,56
1.100
1.095
1.095
1.091
1.090
1.090
1.090
1.094
1.095
1.095
1,59
1,69
1,80
1,92
2,05
2,20
2,36
2,54
2,73
2,78
1.165
1.160
1.160
1.153
1.150
1.150
1.150
1.150
1.150
1.150
1,79
1,89
2,00
2,13
2,26
2,41
2,58
2,75
2,53
2,57
1.225
1.219
1.215
1.211
1.208
1.205
1.205
1.205
1.205
1.205
2,00
2,10
2,21
2,34
2,48
2,63
2,80
2,56
2,73
2,77
1.285
1.278
1.270
1.270
1.265
1.260
1.260
1.260
1.260
1.260
1,58
2,32
2,42
2,56
2,70
2,45
2,59
2,75
2,93
2,98
4.500
4.800
5.100
5.400
5.700
6.000
6.300
6.600
6.900
7.300
460
470
480
500
510
x
x
x
x
x
0,60
0,69
0,78
0,90
1,01
x
x
x
x
x
530
540
550
560
570
580
600
610
630
x
0,77
0,85
0,97
1,08
1,19
1,33
1,47
1,64
1,81
x
590
600
610
610
620
630
645
660
675
690
0,92
1,02
1,13
1,26
1,40
1,54
1,69
1,85
2,03
2,28
660
660
670
670
680
690
695
710
715
730
1,08
1,19
1,32
1,46
1,60
1,75
1,92
2,09
2,28
2,51
720
720
720
730
730
740
745
750
765
775
1,23
1,36
1,50
1,64
1,79
1,96
2,14
2,31
2,51
2,77
770
770
780
780
780
780
795
800
805
820
1,40
1,54
1,68
1,82
1,99
2,16
2,35
2,55
2,76
2,59
830
830
830
830
830
830
840
850
850
860
1,57
1,71
1,86
2,02
2,18
2,37
2,57
2,77
2,56
2,81
880
880
880
880
880
880
885
890
895
900
1,75
1,89
2,04
2,21
2,39
2,58
2,79
2,58
2,56
2,81
940
930
930
930
930
930
930
930
935
940
1,92
2,07
2,24
2,41
2,59
2,79
2,58
2,77
2,56
2,81
990
980
970
970
970
970
970
970
980
980
1,50
1,61
1,73
1,86
2,00
2,15
2,31
2,47
2,65
2,89
1.030
1.030
1.020
1.020
1.020
1.010
1.010
1.020
1.020
1.020
2,30
2,45
2,63
2,81
2,58
2,77
2,96
3,17
2,56
2,81
5.100
5.400
5.700
6.000
6.300
6.600
7.000
7.400
7.800
8.200
428
435
440
440
448
455
465
475
485
500
0,57
0,62
0,68
0,76
0,83
0,92
1,04
1,18
1,32
1,48
509
513
515
515
523
528
533
540
550
563
0,76
0,83
0,89
0,97
1,05
1,14
1,28
1,42
1,58
1,75
590
590
590
590
598
600
600
605
615
625
0,96
1,03
1,11
1,19
1,27
1,37
1,51
1,66
1,83
2,01
661
660
660
660
660
660
663
668
673
680
1,18
1,26
1,34
1,43
1,52
1,63
1,77
1,93
2,11
2,30
733
730
730
730
723
720
725
730
730
735
1,40
1,48
1,57
1,67
1,77
1,88
2,04
2,21
2,39
2,58
798
793
790
790
783
780
783
785
785
788
1,66
1,75
1,84
1,93
2,04
2,16
2,32
2,50
2,69
2,48
863
855
850
850
843
840
840
840
840
840
1,91
2,01
2,10
2,20
2,31
2,44
2,60
2,79
2,56
2,75
923
915
909
905
898
893
890
890
890
890
2,19
2,29
2,39
2,49
2,61
2,73
2,91
2,66
2,84
3,03
983
975
968
960
953
945
940
940
940
940
2,46
2,56
2,67
2,79
2,90
2,60
2,76
2,93
3,11
3,31
1.080
1.028
1.080
1.010
1.080
998
993
988
985
985
2,48
2,87
2,48
3,09
2,48
2,87
3,04
3,22
3,40
3,60
1.089
1.085
1.081
1.077
1.072
1.066
1.059
1.052
1.046
1.040
2,63
2,74
2,84
2,95
3,07
3,18
3,35
3,71
3,70
3,89
6.000
6.500
7.000
7.500
8.000
8.500
9.000
9.500
10.000
530
550
560
580
600
610
630
650
670
0,70
0,81
0,95
1,09
1,26
1,46
1,65
1,89
2,14
631
639
649
661
675
690
706
724
742
0,87
1,01
1,15
1,30
1,48
1,68
1,90
2,14
2,41
710
720
720
730
740
760
770
780
800
1,09
1,23
1,39
1,57
1,76
1,97
2,20
2,46
2,73
805
805
807
812
819
827
838
849
863
1,30
1,44
1,61
1,79
1,99
2,21
2,45
2,72
3,00
870
870
870
870
880
890
900
900
920
1,53
1,68
1,86
2,06
2,28
2,52
2,77
2,62
2,88
962
956
953
952
953
957
962
969
978
1,76
1,93
2,11
2,31
2,52
2,76
2,59
2,83
3,10
1.010
1.010
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.010
1.010
1.020
1.030
1,99
2,17
2,38
2,59
2,83
2,65
2,89
3,14
3,42
1.106
1.096
1.089
1.083
1.080
1.079
1.081
1.084
1.089
2,25
2,45
2,65
2,46
2,66
2,88
3,12
3,38
3,66
1.150
1.140
1.130
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.120
1.130
1.130
2,49
2,70
2,91
2,70
2,93
3,16
3,42
3,70
4,00
1.237
1.225
1.215
1.207
1.200
1.196
1.194
1.194
1.195
2,79
2,57
2,76
2,96
3,18
3,42
3,67
3,95
4,25
1.270
1.260
1.250
1.240
1.230
1.230
1.230
1.230
1.230
2,60
2,78
2,99
3,20
3,44
3,70
3,97
4,27
4,58
7.000
7.500
8.000
8.500
9.000
9.500
10.000
10.500
11.000
11.500
550
560
570
580
590
600
610
627
643
658
0,78
0,90
1,01
1,15
1,29
1,46
1,64
1,82
2,04
2,28
660
670
670
680
680
690
700
706
718
730
1,04
1,15
1,27
1,41
1,57
1,75
1,93
2,10
2,32
2,58
760
760
770
770
770
780
780
785
793
802
1,32
1,44
1,57
1,72
1,88
2,06
2,25
2,42
2,65
2,90
860
850
850
850
860
860
860
862
867
874
1,62
1,75
1,89
2,04
2,21
2,41
2,60
2,77
3,00
3,25
940
940
940
940
940
940
940
937
940
944
1,96
2,10
2,24
2,39
2,58
2,77
2,54
2,70
2,90
3,12
1.020
1.020
1.010
1.010
1.010
1.010
1.010
1.010
1.011
1.013
2,32
2,45
2,60
2,77
2,53
2,70
2,88
3,05
3,25
3,47
1.100
1.090
1.090
1.090
1.080
1.080
1.080
1.081
1.080
1.080
2,70
2,84
2,57
2,71
2,87
3,05
3,24
3,41
3,62
3,84
1.170
1.160
1.160
1.150
1.150
1.150
1.150
1.150
1.148
1.146
2,66
2,78
2,92
3,07
3,23
3,41
3,61
3,79
4,01
4,24
1.240
1.230
1.230
1.220
1.220
1.210
1.210
1.216
1.213
1.210
3,02
3,14
3,29
3,43
3,60
3,79
3,98
4,20
4,42
4,64
1.297
1.296
1.295
1.294
1.292
1.289
1.285
1.281
1.277
1.274
3,38
3,54
3,70
3,86
4,03
4,22
4,42
4,62
4,84
5,08
1.360
1.360
1.350
1.350
1.340
1.340
1.330
1.340
1.336
1.332
3,82
3,94
4,07
4,22
4,40
4,60
4,80
5,05
5,28
5,52
7.500
8.500
9.000
9.500
10.000
10.500
11.000
11.500
12.000
12.500
560
580
590
600
610
627
643
658
675
692
0,90
1,15
1,29
1,46
1,64
1,82
2,04
1,96
2,18
2,42
670
680
680
690
700
706
718
730
744
758
1,15
1,41
1,57
1,75
1,93
2,10
2,32
2,21
2,84
2,68
760
770
770
780
780
785
793
802
813
824
1,44
1,72
1,88
2,06
2,25
2,42
2,65
2,48
2,71
2,96
850
850
860
860
860
862
867
874
881
890
1,75
2,04
2,21
2,41
2,60
2,77
2,57
2,78
3,02
3,28
940
940
940
940
940
937
940
944
949
956
2,10
2,39
2,58
2,77
2,54
2,70
2,90
3,12
3,36
3,61
1.020
1.010
1.010
1.010
1.010
1.010
1.011
1.013
1.016
1.020
2,45
2,38
2,53
2,70
2,88
3,05
3,25
3,47
3,71
3,97
1.090
1.090
1.080
1.080
1.080
1.081
1.080
1.080
1.082
1.084
2,84
2,71
2,87
3,05
3,24
3,41
3,62
3,84
4,09
4,36
1.160
1.150
1.150
1.150
1.150
1.150
1.148
1.146
1.146
1.147
2,78
3,07
3,23
3,41
3,61
3,79
4,01
4,24
4,49
4,75
1.230
1.220
1.220
1.210
1.210
1.216
1.213
1.210
1.208
1.208
3,14
3,43
3,60
3,79
3,98
4,20
4,42
4,64
4,90
5,17
1.296
1.294
1.292
1.289
1.285
1.281
1.277
1.274
1.272
1.270
3,54
3,86
4,03
4,22
4,42
4,62
4,84
5,08
5,33
5,60
1.360
1.350
1.340
1.340
1.330
1.340
1.336
1.332
1.329
1.326
3,94
4,22
4,40
4,60
4,80
5,05
5,28
5,52
5,78
6,06
Notas:
(1) Condies do ar: Temperatura 20C e presso baromtrica de 760 mmHg
(2) A presso esttica total a soma das seguintes presses: externa requerida, perda de presso nas serpentinas e perdas nos filtros
(3) Calor gerado pelo motor do ventilador (MBh) = 3,15 x BHP
bhp
YG COMFORT PACKAGE FAN & COIL UNIT

GERAL
- O climatizador dever atender s capacidades trmicas e vazo de ar que
constam nas planilhas fsicas operacionais, integrantes desta especificao.
CONCEPO
- Os climatizadores devero ser fabricados compreendendo um gabinete, de
mdulo nico, equipado com serpentina de resfriamento e desumidificao do
ar, ventilador centrfugo, bandeja de gua de condensao e uma bateria de
filtros.
CARACTERSTICAS CONSTRUTIVAS
GABINETE
- O gabinete dever ser projetado e construdo de forma a reduzir a introduo,
gerao e reteno de contaminantes em seu interior, podendo ser lavados e
sanitizados;
- De construo robusta, em mdulo nico, o gabinete dever ser construdo
com perfis extrudados de alumnio de auto-encaixe acoplados a cantos
especiais de material termoplstico;
- Os painis devero ser do tipo parede dupla, com revestimento interno e
externo com chapa de ao pr-pintada, na cor branco-gelo e o seu ncleo
isolante dever ser em poliuretano expandido com 25 mm de espessura;
- Dever haver estanqueidade adequada entre painis e estrutura dos mdulos
do gabinete, garantida por meio de gaxetas auto-adesivas de borracha
esponjosa, no higroscpica; colada em todo o permetro do gabinete;
- Dever haver no mnimo um painel lateral e um painel frontal removvel. Os
painis mveis devero estar fixados atravs de parafusos de fcil remoo e
serem tambm dotados de puxadores facilitando assim o acesso aos
componentes internos do equipamento;
- O(s) mdulo(s) dever (ao) ser montado(s) com ps de apoio, fabricados em
VENTILADOR
- O(s) ventilador (es) dever(ao) ser do tipo centrfugo de dupla aspirao, de
ps curvadas para frente ou para trs e dispondo de uma presso esttica capaz
de superar as perdas da serpentina, filtros e rede de dutos;
- Sero construdos em chapa de ao com tratamento anticorrosivo, de
construo robusta, e seus rotores devero ser balanceados dinmica e
estaticamente, juntamente com as polias em regime de rotao mxima;
- Seus rolamentos devero ser do tipo rgido autocompensador de esferas,
blindados e de lubrificao permanente, com vida til mnima de 40.000 horas;
- O conjunto ventilador / motor dever ser montado sobre uma base nica, de
inrcia, apoiada sobre coxins de borracha para ventiladores de ps curvadas
para frente e coxins de mola para ventiladores com ps curvadas para trs;
- O acoplamento ao motor dever ser feito atravs de polias e correias
trapezoidais do tipo V, sendo que a polia do motor dever ser ajustvel para
motores de at 5 CVs.
MOTOR
- Dever ser eltrico, trifsico, de induo, (opcional alto rendimento), para
tenso de projeto de 60 ciclos, 3 fases, IV plos, com grau de proteo IP55,
grau de isolamento classe B e fator de servio 1.15, montado sobre uma base
nica que permita uma fcil ajustagem das correias de transmisso;
- O motor do ventilador, no poder ser montado sobre os painis frontais,
posteriores ou laterais.
SERPENTINA DE RESFRIAMENTO (GUA GELADA)
- Dever ser construda com tubos de cobre sem costura, de dimetro externo
de 12,7mm;
- Os tubos devero ser montados em arranjo triangular desencontrado com 32
mm de distncia entre centros na vertical, tendo as fileiras de tubo na
profundidade, tambm uma distncia de 32 mm;
- As aletas devero ser onduladas, fabricadas em alumnio e devero ser
perfeitamente fixadas aos tubos por meio de expanso hidrulica;
- O distanciamento entre aletas dever ser proporcionado nos colarinhos e

limitado a um mximo de 12 aletas por polegada;
- A disposio dos tubos, no que se refere a nmero de fileiras em profundidade,
dever ser tal que sejam obedecidas s condies do ar, na entrada e sada da
serpentina, conforme condies especificadas no projeto;
- As soldas das curvas, coletores e acessrios devero ser feitas com material
de contedo mnimo de 2% de prata em sua composio;
- As cabeceiras e requadros da serpentina devero ser construdas em chapas
de ao galvanizado com espessura de 1,5 mm;
- Os coletores da serpentina devero ser fabricados em tubos de cobre e
dotados de luvas soldadas em lato, com rosca do tipo BSP, para conexo
rede hidrulica;
- Os coletores tambm devero ser dotados de dispositivo de purga de ar,
(acessvel pelo lado externo do gabinete) e dreno de gua;
- Depois de construda e devidamente lavada, a serpentina dever ser
desidratada para ser levada a teste de vazamento, imersa em tanque com gua
morna usando-se nitrognio a 20 Bares de presso interna.
BANDEJA DE GUA DE CONDENSAO

- Dever ser construda de material termo plstico, do tipo ABS e isolada
termicamente com poliuretano expandido;
- Dever possuir arestas curvas com caimento acentuado para o lado do dreno.
A conexo de dreno dever ser localizada na parte inferior da bandeja.
FILTROS DE AR
fibra sinttica descartvel, espessura 25 mm (1) montados em suportes
metlicos (caixilhos), com vedao adequada, de fcil remoo frontal sem a
necessidade do uso de ferramentas.
- Opes de filtros disponveis:

espessura de 1";
Mantas 1"
espessura de 2";
- Os elementos dos filtros devero ser fabricados com 100% de material sinttico
que no libera partculas e com meio filtrante no cancergeno;
- A rea de face dos filtros dever equivaler, no mnimo, rea de face da
serpentina, observada a velocidade de face adequada para o filtro;
- O suporte metlico (caixilho) dever ser montado na entrada de ar dos
climatizadores.
EMBALAGEM
- O equipamento dever ser embalado de modo a garantir um transporte seguro,
em quaisquer condies e limitaes que possam ser encontradas no percurso.
OPCIONAIS E ACESSRIOS
SERPENTINA DE AQUECIMENTO (GUA QUENTE)
- Dever ser montada aps a serpentina de resfriamento;
-Dever ser fabricada com tubos de cobre sem costura de e aletas onduladas
de alumnio, perfeitamente fixadas aos tubos por meio de expanso hidrulica e
cabeceira e requadros em chapas de ao galvanizado;
- Dever ser construda com 2 (duas) filas de profundidade, 8 aletas por
polegada e 4 tubos por circuito.
MDULO CAIXA DE FILTRAGEM

- Dever ser construda com as mesmas caractersticas construtivas do
gabinete;
- A juno entre os mdulos dever ser feita por um dispositivo de unio atravs
de parafusos. Entre os mdulos devero ser previstas e fornecidas juntas de
borracha esponjosa;
- Os dampers, para admisso de ar externo e retorno de ar, devero ser de
lminas opostas, fabricados em chapa de ao galvanizado e eixo para
acionamento manual ou automtico;
- A bateria de filtros do equipamento dever ser montada no mdulo caixa de
filtragem;
fibra sinttica descartvel, espessura 25 mm (1) montados em suportes
metlicos (caixilhos), com vedao adequada entre filtros e caixilho, de fcil
remoo lateral;
- Opes disponveis:

espessura de 1";
Mantas 1"
espessura de 2";
RESISTNCIA ELTRICA
- Devero ser do tipo U, aletada, trifsica, fabricada em nquel-cromo (80/20),
montada em uma estrutura de ao galvanizado e fixada entre isoladores de
porcelana;
- A resistncia dever estar protegida por um termostato de segurana com
rearme automtico;
- Sero montadas e fixadas no quadro da serpentina de resfriamento.
Code No. LIT-1900001

Issued July 21, 2008
M2000-500 and M9000-5xx Series Ball Valve Linkage Kits

Description
The M9000-51x Linkage
The M9000-5xx and M2000-500 Series Ball

Valve Linkage Kits are designed specifically
for mounting Johnson Controls M9104,
M9106, M9109, and M9100 Series
Non-Spring Return and M2202, M9206,
M9210, and M9220 Series Spring Return
Actuators to Johnson Controls VG1000 Series
Ball Valves in sizes 1/2 through 4 in. (DN15
through DN100). These sturdy linkage kits
provide stable actuator mounting while
preventing loading on the valve stem and
stem seals, to ensure longer life seal life.
Depending on the linkage kit you are using,

refer to either the M9000-51x Series Valve
Linkage Kits Product Bulletin (LIT-977354),
VG1000 Series Forged Brass Ball Valves
Product Bulletin (LIT-977132), or VG1000
Series Flanged Ball Valves Product Bulletin
(LIT-12011228) for important product
application information.
M9000-520 Linkage
Features
M2000-500 Linkage
thermoplastic linkage provides superior

thermal isolation between valve and
actuator, meets UL 94-5V Flame Class
Rating
compact size and multi-position setup the
user to position the actuator and linkage kit
assembly in 90 increments, relative to the
ball valve, facilitating installation in
confined locations
pointer provides an indication of valve
position
sturdy aluminum construction provides

exceptional strength and stability
multi-position setup allows the actuator
and linkage kit to be positioned in
45-degree increments, facilitating
installation in confined areas
weather shield kits available for field mount
protect actuator from extreme
environments
glass-reinforced thermoplastic resin

provides superior thermal isolation
between the valve and actuator, and meets
UL 94-5V Flame Class Rating
two-position anti-rotation slider
accommodates both spring return and
non-spring return electric actuators
multi-position setup allows the actuator
and linkage kit assembly to be positioned in
90 increments, relative to the ball valve,
facilitating installation in confined locations
manual handle for non-spring return
applications allows manual positioning of
the actuator when power is disengaged
M9000-51x Series Linkage Kits Used to

Field Mount M9000 Series Electric
Actuators to VG1000 Series Ball Valves
compact size and multi-position setup

allows the user to be position the actuator
and linkage assembly in 90 increments,
relative to the ball valve, facilitating
installation in confined locations
manual handle for non-spring return
applications allows manual positioning of
the actuator when power is disengaged
The M9000-550 Linkage
thermoplastic linkage provides superior

thermal isolation between valve and
actuator, and meets UL 94-5V Flame Class
Rating
Repair Information
If the M2000-500 or M90005xx Series Ball
Valve Linkage Kit fails to operate within its
specifications, replace the unit. For a
replacement valve, contact the nearest
Johnson Controls representative.
Selection Charts
Linkage Kits (Part 1 of 2)
Valve Size,
Valve Code Number
in. (DN)
Actuator Base Number1
Linkage Kit Code Number
Optional Weathershield
1/2 (DN15)
VA91042, VA2202
None Required
Not Available
M91042
M9000-550
3/4 (DN20)
1 (DN25)
VG1241Ax, VG1245Ax
VG1271Ax, VG1275Ax
VG1291Ax, VG1295Ax
VG1841Ax, VG1845Ax
VG1241Bx, VG1245Bx
VG1271Bx, VG1275Bx
VG1291Bx, VG1295Bx
VG1841Bx, VG1845Bx
VG1241Cx, VG1245Cx
VG1271Cx, VG1275Cx
VG1291Cx, VG1295Cx
VG1841Cx, VG1845Cx
M2202
M2000-500
M91062, M9206
M9000-520
M9108
M9000-516
M9000-330
M9210
M9000-517
M9000-340
VA91042, VA2202
None Required
Not Available
M91042
M9000-550
M2202
M2000-500
M9106* M9206
M9000-520
M9108
M9000-516
M9210
M9000-517
M9000-340
VA91042
None Required
Not Available
M91042
M9000-550
M9000-330
M2202
M2000-500
M91062, M9206
M9000-520
M9108
M9000-516
M9000-330
M9210
M9000-517
M9000-340
The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.
www.johnsoncontrols.com
Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. 2008 Johnson Controls, Inc.
1 of 3
M2000-500 and M9000-5xx Series Ball Valve Linkage Kits (Continued)
Linkage Kits (Part 2 of 2)

Valve Size,
Valve Code Number
in. (DN)
1-1/4 (DN32)
1-1/2 (DN40)
2 (DN50)
2-1/2 (DN65)
3 (DN80)
4 (DN100)
VG1241Dx, VG1245Dx
VG1841Dx, VG1845Dx
VG1241Ex, VG1245Ex
VG1841Ex, VG1845Ex
VG1241Fx, VG1245Fx
VG1841Fx, VG1845Fx
VG12A5Gx, VG18A5Gx
VG12A5Hx, VG18A5Hx
VG12A5Jx, VG18A5Jx
M91062, M9206
M9000-520
Not Available
M9108
M9000-516
M9000-330
M9210
M9000-517
M9000-340
M91062, M9206
M9000-520
Not Available
M9108
M9000-516
M9000-330
M9210
M9000-517
M9000-340
M91092
M9000-520
Not Available
M9116
M9000-516
M9000-330
M9210
M9000-517
M9000-340
M9124
M9000-518
M9000-330
M9220
M9000-519
M9000-340
M9124
M9000-518
M9000-330
M9220
M9000-519
M9000-340
M9124
M9000-518
M9000-330
M9220
M9000-519
M9000-340
1. M9104, M9106, M9109 and M9100 Series are Non-Spring Return Actuators; VA2202, M2202, M9206, M9210 and M9220 Series are Spring Return Actuators.
2. To avoid excessive wear or drive time on the motor for VA9104, M9104, M9106 and M9109 AGx models, use a controller and/or software that provides a timeout
function to remove the signal at the end of rotation (stall). The IGx and GGx models have an auto shutoff to avoid excessive wear or drive time on the motor.
Linkages for Discontinued Series Ball Valves

Valve Size, in. (DN)
Valve Code Number
Linkage Kit Code

Number
1/2 (DN15)
M9106
M9000-514
M9206
M9000-515
VG1243Ax, VG1644AB
3/4 (DN20)
VG1243Bx
M9108
M9000-516
M9106
M9000-514
M9206
M9000-515
M9108
M9000-516
VG1644BB
M9108
M9000-516
M9210
M9000-517
1 (DN25)
VG1243Cx, VG1243Dx
M9116
M9000-516
M9220
M9000-517
1-1/4 (DN32)
VG1644CB, VG1644DB
M9116
M9000-518
M9220
M9000-519
1-1/2 (DN40)
VG1243EC
M9124
M9000-518
1. M9106, M9108, M9116, and M9124 Series are Non-Spring Return Actuators; M9206, M9210, and M9220 Series are Spring Return Actuators.
Repair Parts
Linkage
Replacement Description
Replacement Part Code Number
M9000-51x
Unit Replacement
M9000-520
Anti-rotation slider, includes carriage screw, washers, and wing nut
M9000-600
M5 Mounting Screws and Nuts
M9000-601
M2000-500, M9000-550
Drive Shaft
M9000-602
Manual Handle and Mounting Screw
M9000-603
Unit Replacement
2 of 3
M2000-500 and M9000-5xx Series Ball Valve Linkage Kits (Continued)
Technical Specifications
M2000-500 and M9000-5xx Series Ball Valve Linkage Kits
Service1
Hot Water, Chilled Water, 50/50 Glycol Solutions and in some cases low pressure steam
Maximum Actuator Fluid 212F (100C)

Temperature Limits
M2000-500 Linkage: M2202 Series Spring Return Actuators
284F (140C)
M9000-550 Linkage: M9104 Series Non-Spring Return Actuators

M9000-520 Linkage: M9106 and M9109 Series Non-Spring Return Actuators
M9206 Series Spring Return Actuators
Maximum Steam
Service2
Not Rated for Steam

Service
15 psig saturated
steam
250F, (121C)
25 psig saturated
steam
267F, (130C)
-40F (-40C)

M9000-520 Linkage: M9106 and M9109 Series Non-Spring Return Actuators
Minimum Ambient
Operating Temperature

-25F (-32C)
-22F (-30C)
-4F (-20C)

Maximum Ambient
122F (50C)

125F (52C)
M9000-520 Linkage: M9106 and M9109 Series Non-Spring Return Actuator
131F (55C)

140F (60C)

Material
M9000-550, M9000-520 Glass-Reinforced Thermoplastic Resin; UL 94-5V Flame Class Rating

M9000-51x
Bracket:
Aluminum
Anti-Rotation Slider:
Shipping Weight
1018 Steel
Drive Shaft:
12L14 Steel
Standoff:
Thermoplastic Resin
Thermo-Isolator:
PTFE (Polytetrafluoroethylene)
1.5 lb (0.68 kg)
1. Refer to VDI 2035 Standard for proper water treatment.

2. In steam applications, install the valve with the stem horizontal to the piping, and wrap the valve and piping with insulation.
3 of 3

Issued March 16, 2007
M9000-3x0 Weather Shield Enclosures

Description
The M9000-3x0 Weather Shield Enclosures
are cost-effective and durable weather shields
designed to provide a degree of protection for
a single Johnson Controls M9000 Series
Electric Actuator used in control damper, ball
valve, and cast-iron flanged valve
applications. These weather shield
enclosures are manufactured to National
Electrical Manufacturers Association
(NEMA) 3R specifications, and protect the
electric actuator from corrosion, rain, freezing
rain, sleet, and snow. The enclosure can be
mounted indoors or outdoors; however, it may
not prevent externally formed ice from
restricting the motion of the rotary shaft.
Each enclosure is constructed of
impact-grade ABS plastic that provides
excellent impact resistance. The cover
features ultraviolet inhibitors that extend
service life by preventing the cover from
becoming brittle or damaged by the sun or
other environmental elements. The
transparent cover provides an unobstructed
view of the electric actuator without having to
disassemble the enclosure. An appliance cord
in the M9000-310 and M9000-330 Weather
Shield Enclosure enables installation of
control wiring, and a form-fitting seal prevents
water or moisture from entering the unit and
damaging the actuator.
Refer to the M9000-3x0 Weather Shield

Enclosures Product Bulletin (LIT-1201704) for
important product application information.
Features
durable construction provides a degree

of protection from the elements for a single
Johnson Controls M9000 Series Electric
Actuator used in control damper, ball valve,
and iron flanged valve applications
fully enclosed NEMA 3R design protects

the electric actuator from corrosion, rain,
freezing rain, sleet, and snow
impact-grade ABS plastic enclosure

provides excellent impact resistance
cover constructed using ultraviolet
inhibitors extends service life by
preventing the cover from becoming brittle
or damaged by the sun or other
environmental elements
transparent cover allows the electric
actuator to be fully viewable without having
to disassemble the enclosure
appliance cord enables installation of
control wiring (M9000-310 and M9000-330
models)
strain relief conduit fittings protect the
electric actuator from damage by preventing
tension on the electrical connection

Shown Mounted onto a Control Damper,
Flanged Ball Valve, Threaded Ball Valve,
and Flanged Cast Iron Valve
Repair Information
If the M9000-3x0 Weather Shield Enclosure
fails to operate within its specifications,
replace the unit. For a replacement enclosure,
contact the nearest Johnson Controls
representative.
Selection Chart
Code Number
M9000-310
Description
Weather Shield Enclosure for a Single Johnson Controls M9106, M9108, M9109, M9116, M9124, and M9132 Series Electric Non-Spring
Return Actuator Used in Control Damper and Iron Flanged Valve Applications
M9000-3201
Weather Shield Enclosure for a Single Johnson Controls M9210 and M9220 Series Electric Spring Return Actuator Used in Control
Damper and Iron Flanged Valve Applications
M9000-3301
Weather Shield Enclosure for a Single Johnson Controls M9108, M9116, and M9124 Series Electric Non-Spring Return Actuator Used
with VG1000 Series Ball Valves, 1/2 through 4 in.
M9000-3401
Weather Shield Enclosure for a Single Johnson Controls M9210 and M9220 Series Electric Spring Return Actuator Used with
VG1000 Series Ball Valves, 1/2 through 4 in.
1. Kit includes one enclosure base and seal assembly, one cover and gasket, and all necessary mounting hardware. One weather shield enclosure is required per
electric actuator.
1 of 2
M9000-3x0 Weather Shield Enclosures (Continued)

Materials
Enclosure
Impact-Grade ABS Plastic
Enclosure Seal
Nitrile
Cover
Transparent Impact-Grade ABS Plastic with Ultraviolet Inhibitors
Cover Gasket
Neoprene
Weather Shield Rating
NEMA 3R, IP54
Actuator Ambient
Operating
Temperature Limits
M9106 and M9109

(M9000-310 Only)
-4 to 125F (-20 to 52C)
M9108, M9116,
M9124, and M9132
-4 to 122F (-20 to 50C)
M9210 and M9220
-40 to 131F (-40 to 55C)
Weather Shield Enclosure Ambient

Storage Temperature Limits
-40 to 176F (-40 to 80C)
Electrical Connections
Strain Relief Conduit Fittings with 1/2 in. National Pipe Straight Mechanical (NPSM) Exit
Appliance Cord
6 Conductor, 18 AWG Wire Gauge, 43 in. (110 cm)
Shipping Weight
M9000-310
2.0 lb (0.9 kg)
M9000-320
3.3 lb (1.5 kg)
M9000-330
3.2 lb (1.45 kg)
M9000-340
4.2 lb (1.9 kg)
2 of 2
Controls Group 507 E. Michigan Street

P.O. Box 423, Milwaukee, WI 53202
m9106
1900118
9thcc:na
Electronics
Actuators
Rev:
021201
logo:
M9106-xGx-2 Series
left ft:
Electric Non-spring Return Actuators

60 Hz (72 seconds at 50 Hz) with a
load-independent rotation time.
The M9106-xGC-2 models are available with
integral auxiliary switches to perform
switching functions at any angle within the
selected rotation range. GGx models feature
0 to 10 VDC position feedback, and the AGF
models provide 10,000 ohm position
feedback.
35 dBA rating meets audible requirements

for open ceilings
synchronous drive provides constant
rotation time that is independent of load
direct shaft mount with single-screw
coupler simplifies installation and provides
3-point shaft gripping
The M9106-xGx-2 Series direct-mount electric magnetic clutch provides torque protection
for the damper and actuator
actuators operate on 24 VAC power and are
available for use with on-off, floating, or
field-selectable rotation time (IGx models
proportional controllers. These non-spring
only) replaces M9104, EDA-2040, and
return actuators are easily installed on a
ATP-2040 actuators and provides optimum
Variable Air Volume (VAV) box, a damper with
rotation time for the specific application
a round shaft up to 1/2 inch (13 mm) in diameter jumper-selectable rotation direction (GGx
or a square shaft up to 3/8 inch (10 mm).
models only) simplifies installation
The M9106 models have 53 lbin (6 Nm)
adjustable rotation stops allow application
running torque. They have a nominal
versatility with 30 to 90 clockwise or
60-second travel time for 90 of rotation at
counterclockwise rotation
Accessories
For more information, refer to the

M9106-xGx-2 Electric Non-spring Return
Actuators Product Bulletin, LIT-2681123 or
the M9106-xGx-2 Electric Non-spring Return
Actuators Installation Instructions,
Part No. 34-636-1085.
72 in. (1.8 m) Plenum Rated Wiring Harness

0 to 1.5 in. W.C. (0 to 375 Pa) differential pressure transmitter
To Order
Specify the code number from the following
selection chart.
Blade Pin Extension without Bracket supplied with Johnson Controls CD-1300
dampers and may be ordered separately for all direct mount applications
Selection Chart
Adjustable Blade Position Indicator Switch Kit with total switching load limited to
2000 VA for the following applications:
Pilot Duty:
24 VAC, 50 VA; 125/250/277 VAC, 125 VA
Motor Load:
125/250/277 VAC, 1/3 hp
Resistive Load: 125 VAC, 11 A; 250 VAC, 8 A; 277 VAC, 7 A (all maximum values)
M9106-xG-x-2 Series
Electric Actuator
DMPR-KR003
Sleeve Pin Kit for use with Johnson Controls round dampers with a 5/16 in. (8 mm)
shaft; furnished with the damper and may be ordered separately
On/Off Control
M9000-105
Pluggable 3-Terminal Block
M9000-106
M9000-160
Replacement anti-rotation bracket for M9106 Series actuators
M9000-200
Commissioning Tool provides a control signal to drive on/off, floating, proportional, or

resistive actuators.
DMPR-KC003
DMPR-KC010
M9000-512
(b)
53 lbin (Nm)
Floating Control
! !
! ! !
(a) Use with an M9106-AGC-2 actuator to replace an ATP-2040 actuator and an EDA-2040-102 switch kit.
Note: An external relay (not provided) is needed for line voltage auxiliary switching.
(b) Use with an M9106 actuator to replace an EDA-2040 or ATP-2040 actuator and an EDA-2040-102
switch kit, when line voltage switches are required and an external relay is not desired.
! !
! !
Proportional Control
Valve Linkage Kit for field mounting an M9106 actuator to a 1/2 in. (DN15) 2 -way
VG1000 Series ball valve
M9106-IGC-2
20 in. (0.5 m) Plenum Rated Wiring Harness
Replace the unit.
M9106-IGA-2
CBL-2000-2
DPT-2015-0
Refer to the damper or VAV box

manufacturers information to select the
proper timing for the actuator. Refer to the
appropriate application note for specific wiring
diagrams and information.
M9106-GGC-2
20 in. (0.5 m) Wiring Harness, UL accepted for plenum use, connects the M9106 and
DPT-2015 to the VAV controller
(a)
The M9106 mounts directly on the duct

surface, round damper, or small rectangular
damper with an anti-rotation bracket and two
sheet metal screws (included). Additional
linkages or couplers are not required.
Repair Parts
Description
CBL-2000-1 (a)
CBL-2000-3
The M9106 actuators are used to position

balancing, control, round, and zone dampers
in typical HVAC applications. They are also
used to position the blades in a VAV box.
M9106-GGA-2
Code Number
output position feedback provides simple,

closed-loop control with accurate position
sensing
M9106-AGF-2
Description
manual gear release simplifies setup and

field adjustments
Applications
Features
M9106-xGx-2
1/2 in. NPT threaded conduit opening

meets electrical code requirements and
allows the use of armored cable
M9106-AGC-2
m9106-2.tif
M9106-AGA-2
right ft:
standard
Sect# = 0
seQ# = 105
Feedback
10,000 ohm
Potentiometer
!
! !
0 to 10 VDC Feedback
2 Auxiliary Switches
Adjustable Rotation
Time
!
! !
The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond t hese specifications, consult the local Johnson
10/01 Johnson Controls, Inc
Controls office. Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products.
1/2

M9106-xGx-2 Series Electric Non-spring Return Actuators (Continued)

Include dimensions drawing 91062dim.doc (in Jan's M9106-2 folder on i:\ drive)
m910602p.eps
Dimensions, in./mm
Specifications
M9106-xGx-2 Series Electric Non-spring Return Actuators
Power Requirements
AGx:
IGx:
GGx:
(20 to 30 VAC) at 50/60 Hz; 2.5 VA supply, Class 2

Input Signal
AGx and IGx: 20 to 30 VAC at 50/60 Hz

GGx:
0 to 10 VDC or 0 to 20 mA
Input Signal Adjustments
AGx and IGx:

CW and COM Terminals, CW rotation; CCW and COM Terminals, CCW rotation
GGx (Voltage Input or Current Input):
Jumper Selectable:
0 (2) to 10 VDC or 0 (4) to 20 mA
Factory Setting:
0 to 10 VDC, CW rotation with signal increase
Action is jumper selectable Direct (CW) or Reverse (CCW) with signal increase.
Input Impedance
AGx: 200 ohms, nominal

IGx: 160 ohms, nominal
GGx: Voltage Input, 150,000 ohms; Current Input, 500 ohms
Feedback Signal
AGF: 10,000 ohm potentiometer, 1 W

GGx: 0 to 10 VDC or 2 to 10 VDC for 90 (10 VDC at 1 mA);
Corresponds to input signal span selection
Auxiliary Switch Rating
xGC: Two Single-Pole, Double-Throw (SPDT) switches rated at 24 VAC, 1.5 A inductive, 3.0 A resistive, 35 VA maximum per
switch, Class 2
Mechanical Output
(Running Torque)
1, 1.5, and 2 min. settings: 53 lbin (6 Nm)

5.5 and 11 min. settings:
35 lbin (4 Nm)
Cycles
100,000 full cycles; 2,500,000 repositions rated at 53 lbin (6 Nm)
Audible Noise Rating
35 dBA maximum at 1 m
Rotation Range
Adjustable from 30 to 90, CW or CCW

IGx:
Rotation Time
All Other Models:
Adjustable with switch settings (factory set for 1 min.)

60, 90, 120, 330, or 660 sec (1, 1.5, 2, 5.5 or 11 min.) at 60 Hz and
72, 108, 144, 396, or 792 sec at 50 Hz
Nominal 60 seconds at 60 Hz and 72 seconds at 50 Hz for 90
Electrical Connection
1/4 in. spade terminals (To order optional pluggable terminal blocks, see Accessories chart.)
Mechanical Connection
3/8 to 1/2 in. (10 to 12.7 mm) round shaft or 3/8 in. (10 mm) square shaft
Enclosure
NEMA 2, IP32
Ambient Operating Conditions -4 to 125F (-20 to 52C); 90% RH maximum, non-condensing

Ambient Storage Conditions
IGx:
All Other Models:
-40 to 186F (-40 to 86C); 90% RH maximum, non-condensing

Dimensions (H x W x D)
5.9 x 4.2 x 2.64 in. (150.1 x 106.5 x 67.0 mm)
Shipping Weight
2.4 lb (1.08 kg)
Agency Compliance
UL 873 Listed, File E27734, CCN XAPX

CSA C22.2 No. 139 Certified, File LR85083, Class 3221 02
CE Mark, EMC Directive 89/336/EEC
2/2

m9206s
1900027
9thcc:na
FMS
pending
M9206 Series
Rev:
020100
logo:
left ft:
Electric Spring Return Actuators

m9206new.tif
Description
The M9206 Series direct-mount, spring return
electric actuators operate on 24 VAC or VDC
power and are available for use with on/off,
floating, or proportional controllers. These
bidirectional actuators do not require a
damper linkage, and are easily installed on a
damper with a round shaft up to 1/2 in.
(12.7 mm) in diameter or a square shaft up to
3/8 in. (10 mm). They may also be mounted
to ball valves using an M9000-51x Valve
Linkage Kit.
The M9206 models deliver 53 lbin (6 Nm) of
torque. The angle of rotation is mechanically
adjustable. Integral line voltage auxiliary
switches are available to indicate end-stop
M9206
Specifications
M9206 Series Electric Spring Return Actuators
position or to perform switching functions within the

selected rotation range. Position feedback is
provided on proportional models through a
proportional DC voltage signal.
Features
automatic stroke calibration at installation
reduces field installation time and cost due to self
adjustment
0 (2) to 10 VDC, 6 to 9 VDC, or 0 (4) to 20 mA
input eliminates the need for an externally wired,
500 ohm resistor
reversible mounting design provides clockwise
(CW) or counterclockwise (CCW) return-tonormal positioning if a power loss occurs
electronic stall detection throughout entire range
increases actuator life by deactivating the
actuator motor when an overload is detected
removable coupler allows actuator stroke
adjustment and/or adapts to a shorter damper
shaft
Power
Requirements
20 to 30 VAC at 50/60 Hz or 24 VDC 10%, Class 2,

16 VA minimum at 32 to 140F (0 to 60C)
22 VA minimum at -22 to 32F (-30 to 0C)
25 VA minimum at -40 to -22F (-40 to -30C)
Input Signal
AGx: 20 to 30 VAC at 50/60 Hz or 24 VDC 10%, 4.8 mA

AGx and BGx (On/Off): 20 to 30 VAC at 50/60 Hz or 24 VDC 10%,
533 mA at 32 to 140F (0 to 60C)
733 mA at -22 to 32F (-30 to 0C)
833 mA at -40 to -22F (-40 to -30C)
GGx: 0 (2) to 10 VDC, 6 to 9 VDC, or 0 (4) to 20 mA
Input Signal
Adjustments

Factory Setting:
Switch Selectable: 0 (2) to 10 VDC, 6 to 9 VDC, or 0 (4) to 20 mA
Direction of Action: Switch selectable direct or reverse with signal increase
Input Impedance
GGx: Voltage Input, 200,000 ohms; Current Input, 500 ohms
Feedback Signal
GGx: 0 (2) to 10 VDC for 90 (10 VDC at 2mA) or 6 to 9 VDC

Corresponds to input signal selection and also rotation limits.
Power Supply Output 17 to 22 VDC at 25 mA (-2MP models)

xGC Models:
Auxiliary Switch
Rating
right ft:
standard
Sect# = 0
seQ# = 23
Two Single-Pole, Double-Throw (SPDT), double

insulated switches
Rating per Switch: 24 VAC, 50 VA pilot duty
120 VAC, 5.8 A resistive, 1/4 hp, 275 VA pilot duty
Spring Return
Direction is selectable with the mounting position of the actuator:

CCW face of the actuator away from the damper for CCW spring return;
CW face of the actuator away from the damper for CW spring return
Mechanical Output
Running Torque: 53 lbin (6 Nm)
Rotation Range
Adjustable from 34.5 to 90, mechanically limited to 93
Rotation Time
90 seconds for 93 with 0 to 53 lbin (0 to 6 Nm)
Cycles
60,000 full stroke cycles; 1,500,000 Repositons rated at 53 lbin (6 Nm)
Electrical
Connection
Actuator:
48 in. (1.2 m) cable with 20 AWG wire leads
Auxiliary Switches: 48 in. (1.2 m) cable with 18 AWG wire leads
Mechanical
Connection
3/8 to 1/2 in. (10.0 to 12.7mm) diameter round shaft

3/8 in. (10 mm) square shaft
Enclosure
NEMA 2, IP42
Ambient
Conditions
Operating:
Storage:
-40 to 140F (-40 to60C); 10 to 90% RH, non-condensing

-85 to 185F (-65 to 85C); 5 to 95% RH, non-condensing
xGC Models:
1/2 in. conduit connector with 48 in. wire leads

meets local code requirements for wiring and
allows easy field wiring on retrofit jobs
optional auxiliary switches provide adjustable
switch points with line voltage capability
optional 20 VDC at 25 mA power supply output
provides power for external devices, making the
actuator an ideal replacement for many
competing products
Applications
The M9206 actuators are designed to position
air dampers and valves in HVAC systems.
Applications include:
positioning of return air, exhaust, or outdoor air
dampers
controlling face and bypass dampers
positioning valves when used with a ball valve
linkage
Refer to the manufacturers information to properly
size the damper, valve, and/or actuator.
M9206 actuators operate on 24 VAC at 50/60 Hz or
24 VDC. They use a stepper motor with stall
detection circuitry that operates throughout the
entire stroke. The proportional actuators employ
noise-filtering techniques on the control signal to
eliminate repositioning due to line noise.
Rotation is mechanically limited to 93 by integral
end-stops. An anti-rotation bracket prevents lateral
movement of the actuator.
For more information, refer to the M9206 Series
Electric Spring Return Actuators Product Bulletin,
LIT-2681118 or the M9206 Series Electric Spring
Return Actuators Installation Instructions, Part No.
34-1280-9.
Dimensions
(H x W x D)
8.32 x 3.25 x 3.58 in. (211.3 x 82.6 x 91.0 mm)

with conduit adaptor
All Other Models: 6.98 x 3.25 x 3.58 in. (177.3 x 82.6 x 91.0 mm)
Shipping Weight
3.45 lb (1.56 kg)
To Order
Agency Compliance

CE Mark, EMC Directive 89/336/EEC, Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC
Specify the code number from the selection chart

on the following page.
1/2

M9206 Series Electric Spring Return Actuators (Continued)

Accessories
Selection Chart
Code Number
Floating Control
! ! !
M9206-GGC-2MP
(a)
M9206-GGC-2
(a)
M9206-GGA-2MP
M9206-AGC-2MP
(a)
M9206-GGA-2
M9206-AGC-2
(a)
M9206-BGC-2
M9206-AGA-2MP
On/Off Control
M9206 Series
Electric
Spring Return
Actuators
M9206-BGA-2
M9206-AGA-2
53 lb-in (6 Nm)
DMPR-KR003 (a)
Blade Pin Extension without Bracket for Johnson Controls CD-1300

DMPR-KC003 (a) direct-mount applications
M9000-156
Mounting Kit for retrofitting a number of Honeywell economizer

damper actuator installations; provides for remote mount,
linkage-driven application of M9204 and M9206 actuators with existing
linkages
M9000-157
Universal Mounting Kit provides for remote mount, linkage-driven

application of M9204 and M9206 actuators in a new or retrofit damper
and actuator assembly
M9000-161
M9000-200
Commissioning Tool provides a control signal to drive on/off, floating,

proportional, or restrictive actuators
M9000-513
Valve Linkage Kit for field mounting an M9206 actuator to 1/2 and
3/4 in. 2-way and 1/2 in. 3-way VG1000 Series ball valves.
M9206-600
Repair Kit includes a coupler, set screw, and locking clip for mounting
an M9206 actuator to a 3/8 to 1/2 in. (10.0 to 12.7 mm) round shaft or
a 3/8 in. (10 mm) square shaft
M9206-601
Repair Kit includes a coupler, set screw, and locking clip for mounting
an M9206 actuator to a 3/8 to 5/8 in. (10 to 16 mm) round shaft or a
3/8 to 9/16 in. (10 to 14 mm) square shaft
M9206-602
Locking clip for the M9206 actuator coupler (bag of 5)
Y65A13-0
40 VA Transformer, 120/24 VAC, 60 Hz
Y65S13-0
! !
! ! ! !
Feedback
0 (2) to 10 or
6 to 9 VDC
! ! ! !
! !
! !
Power Supply Outlet

20 VDC at 25 mA
(a) May be wired for two wire, on/off control
Repair Parts
Replace the unit.
Description
Sleeve Pin Kit for Johnson Controls round dampers with a 5/16 in.
(8 mm) diameter shaft
(a) Furnished with the damper and may be ordered separately.
m9206f2p.eps
Actuator and Anti-rotation Bracket dimension, in./mm
2/2

VA2202-xxx-2 Series

Description
VA2202 Series Spring Return Electric Valve
Actuators are available in 24 VAC/VDC and
120 VAC ON/OFF control, 24 VAC Floating
Control, and 2 to 10 VDC (4 to 20 mA)
Proportional Control for use in Heating,
Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC)
applications. All models provide
18 lb.in (2 N.m) of output force and feature a
NEMA 2 (IP42) housing for indoor use.
Versions with a factory-installed Single Pole,
Double Throw (SPDT) auxiliary switch are
available.
The VA2202 Series actuators are designed for
easy mounting in the field to 1/2 and 3/4 in.
Johnson Controls VG1000 Series Ball

Valves. The optional available auxiliary switch
is adjustable from 5 to 95.
Refer to the VA2202-xxx-2 Series Electric
Spring Return Valve Actuators Product
Bulletin (LIT-12011160) for important product
Features
Proportional, Floating, and On/Off control

models available
single screw, direct mounting
optional auxiliary switch available
reversible mounting design
compact design
Selection Charts
VA2202-xxx-2 Series Electric Spring Return Actuators
Code Number
Voltage
Control
Auxiliary Switch
VA2202-AGA-2
24 VAC
Floating
No
120 VAC
On/Off
No
VA2202-AGB-2
VA2202-xxx-2 Series Electric

Spring Return Actuator
Yes
VA2202-BAA-2
VA2202-BAB-2
Accessories for V2202-xxx-2 Series

Code Number Description
Yes
VA2202-BGA-2
24 VAC/VDC
M2000-500
No
VA2202-BGB-2
Yes
VA2202-GGA-2
Proportional,
2-10 VDC
VA2202-GGB-2
Linkage Kit Complete, includes

adapter plate, coupler, lock
washer, screw and pointer
No
Yes
VA2202-xxx-2 Series Actuator (Part 2 of 2)
VA2202-xxx-2 Series Actuator (Part 1 of 2)

Power
VA2202-AGx-2
Requirements VA2202-BAx-2
Input Signal
Input
Impedance
Nominal Run
Time
24 VAC 20% at 50/60 Hz, 4 VA

85 to 265 VAC at 50/60 Hz, 5 VA
VA2202-BGx-2
24 VAC 20% at 50/60 Hz,

24 VDC 10%, 5 VA
VA2202-GGx-2
24 VAC 20% at 50/60 Hz,

24 VDC 10%, 4 VA
VA2202-AGx-2
24 VAC 20% at 50/60 Hz
VA2202-Bxx-2
(See Power Requirements.)
VA2202-GGx-2
(with field furnished 500 ohm resistor)
Cycles
VA2202-AGx
1,000 ohms (0.6 W)
Enclosure
VA2202-GGx
Voltage: 100,000 ohms, (0.1 mA)
Ambient
Conditions
Current: 500 ohms (with field furnished

500 ohm 0.25 W minimum resistor)
Electrical
Connections
Powered
95 seconds maximum VA2202-AGx-2 and

VA2202-GGx-2 models
75 seconds maximum VA2202-Bxx-2
models
Spring Return
25 seconds maximum: -4 to 122F

(-20 to 50C), 60 seconds maximum
at -22F (-30C) for VA2202-AGx-2 and
VA2202-GGx-2 models; 75 seconds
maximum for VA2202-Bxx-2 models
60,000 full stroke cycles; 1,500,000
repositions rated at 16 lbin (2 Nm)
NEMA 2, IP42
Operating
-22 to 122F (-30 to 50C);

5 to 90% RH, noncondensing
Storage
-40 to 176F (-40 to 80C);

5 to 95% RH, noncondensing
VA2202-AGA-2 Plenum cable, 36 inch, 18 AWG,

VA2202-GGA-2 1/2 in. conduit connector
Valve Fluid Temperature Limits 0 to 212F (-18 to 100C)
VA2202-BxA-2
Appliance cable, 36 inch, 18 AWG,

1/2 in. conduit connector
Compliance
VA2202-BxB-2
VA2202-xGB-2
United States
UL listed acc. to
UL 60730-1, UL 60730-2-14 (XAPX)
Two appliance cables, 36 inch, 18 AWG,

1/2 in. conduit connector
Canada
cUL listed acc. to

CAN/CSA C22.2 No.24 (XAPX7)
Auxiliary
VA2202-xxB-2
Switch Rating
One SPDT, 3A @ 250 VAC,

adjustable 0 to 95
Europe
1/4 to 1/2 in. (10 to 12.7 mm) diameter

round shaft
1/4 to 5/16 in. (10 mm) square shaft
CE Mark, Low Voltage Directive

(73/23/EEC), -xAx and -xxB models only
CE Mark, EMC Directive (89/336/EEC), all
models
Output Torque
18 lbin (2 Nm) minimum
Rotation Range
Adjustable from 37 to 100%,

mechanically limited to 95
Shipping Weight
1.5 lb (0.7 kg)
Repair Information
If the VA2202-xxx-2 Series Electric Spring Return Actuator fails to
operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement
actuator, contact the nearest Johnson Controls representative.
1 of 1

Issued December 28, 2007
VA9104-xGA-2S, -3S Series
Electric Non-Spring Return Valve Actuators

Description
Features
The VA9104 Series Actuators are

direct-mount, non-spring return electric valve
actuators that operate on AC 24 V power. Use
these synchronous motor-driven actuators to
provide accurate positioning on
Johnson Controls VG1000 Series DN15,
DN20, and DN25 (1/2, 3/4, and 1 in.) ball
valves in Heating, Ventilating, and Air
Conditioning (HVAC) applications.
The VA9104 Series Electric Non-Spring

Return Actuators provide a running torque of
35 lbin (4 Nm). The nominal travel time is
60 seconds at 60 Hz (72 seconds at 50 Hz) for
90 of rotation.
Refer to the VA9104-xGA-2S, -3S Series

Electric Non-Spring Return Valve Actuators
Product Bulletin (LIT-12011050) for important
product application information.
35 dBA nominal audible noise rating

meets the audible noise requirements for
open ceiling environments: whisper quiet
operation will not disturb building
occupants
synchronous drive provides a constant
rotation time that is independent of the load
100,000 cycle rating provides years of
trouble-free service
direct mounting with single screw
reduces installation time and cost
manual override allows for manual
positioning of the valve, independent of a
power supply
plenum cable or screw terminal electrical
connections make wiring quick and easy
while allowing for ceiling plenum
applications
Internal connector on VA9104-xGA-2S
models simplifies installation and field
wiring
VA9104 Series
Electric Non-Spring Return Actuator on a
VG1000 Series Ball Valve
Repair Information
If the VA9104 Series Electric Non-Spring
Return Valve Actuator fails to operate within its
replacement electric actuator, contact the
nearest Johnson Controls representative.
Selection Chart
Code Number
Control Type
VA9104-AGA-2S
Floating without timeout AC 19.2 to 30 V, 50/60 Hz
Input Signal
VA9104-AGA-3S
Floating without timeout AC 19.2 to 30 V, 50/60 Hz
VA9104-GGA-2S
Proportional
DC 0 (2) to 10 V, or (0) 4 to 20 mA1
VA9104-GGA-3S
Proportional
VA9104-IGA-2S
Floating or On/Off
with timeout
VA9104-IGA-3S
Floating or On/Off
with timeout
Power Requirements
AC 24 V at 50/60 Hz, 2.3 VA
48 in. (1.2 m) UL 444 Type CMP Plenum Rated

cable with 19 AWG (0.75 mm2) conductors and
.25 in. (6 mm) ferrule ends
AC 24 V at 50/60 Hz, 2.3 VA
M3 Screw Terminals
AC 24 V at 50/60 Hz, 3.6 VA

DC 0 (2) to 10 V, or (0) 4 to 20 mA1
AC 24 V at 50/60 Hz, 3.6 VA
M3 Screw Terminals
AC 19.2 to 30 V, 50/60 Hz
AC 24 V at 50/60 Hz, 3.0 VA

AC 19.2 to 30 V, 50/60 Hz
AC 24 V at 50/60 Hz, 3.0 VA
M3 Screw Terminals
1. Milliamp input requires field furnished 500 ohm resistor.
Accessories (Order Separately)

Code Number
Description
M9000-550
Mounting Hardware Replacement kit
M9000-200
Commissioning Tool that Provides a Control Signal to Drive 24 V On/Off, Floating, Proportional, and/or Resistive
Electric Actuators
1 of 2
Electric Non-Spring Return Valve Actuators (Continued)

VA9104-xGA-2S, -3S Series Electric Non-Spring Return Valve Actuators
Power Requirements
Control Type
AC 24 V +25%/-20% at 50/60 Hz, 2.1 VA Supply, Class 2 or Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV)
VA9104-AGA-xS
Floating Control without Timeout
VA9104-GGA-xS
VA9104-IGA-xS
Floating or On/Off Control with Timeout
VA9104-AGA-xS
AC 24 V +25%/-20% at 50/60 Hz, Class 2 or SELV without Timeout
VA9104-GGA-xS
DC 0 (2) to 10 V or 0 (4) to 20 mA with Field Furnished 500 ohm Resistor
VA9104-IGA-xS
AC 24 V +25%/-20% at 50/60 Hz, Class 2 or SELV with Timeout
Motor Input Impedance
VA9104-AGA-xS
200 ohms Nominal
Control Input Impedance
VA9104-GGA-xS
Voltage Input: 200,000 ohms

Current Input: 500 ohms with Field Furnished 500 ohm Resistor
Input Signal
Running Torque
35 lbin (4 Nm)
Travel Time
60 Seconds at 60 Hz (72 Seconds at 50 Hz) for 90 of Rotation
Rotation Range
93 3, CW or CCW
Cycles
100,000 Full Stroke Cycles; 2,500,000 Repositions at Rated Running Torque
35 dBA Nominal at 39-13/32 in. (1 m)

48 in. (1.2 m) UL 444 Type CMP Plenum Rated cable with 19 AWG (0.75 mm2) conductors and
.25 in. (6 mm) ferrule ends and connector for 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) flexible metal conduit
VA9104-xGA-2S
VA9104-xGA-3S
M3 Screw Terminals
Enclosure
VA9104-xGA-2S
NEMA 2, IP42
VA9104-xGA-3S
NEMA 1, IP40
Ambient Conditions
Operating
-4 to 140F (-20 to 60C); 90% RH Maximum, Noncondensing
Storage
Fluid Temperature Limits

Water
(Actuator and Valve Assembly)
Compliance
VG1241 and VG1841 Series Valves:

23 to 203F(-5 to 95C)
-22 to 212F (-30 to 100C)
Steam
Not Rated for Steam Service
North America
UL Listed, File E27734, CCN XAPX (United States) and XAPX7 (Canada)
Actuator Housing is Plenum Rated per CSA C22.2 No. 236/UL 1995, Heating and Cooling
Equipment.
Shipping Weight
European Union
Australia and
New Zealand
C-Tick Mark, Australia/NZ Emissions Compliant

1.25 lb (0.55 kg)
2 of 2

VG1000 Series Flanged Ball Valves for Assembly in the Field

Description
VG1000 Series Flanged Ball Valves are

designed primarily to regulate the flow of hot
water, chilled water, and 50% glycol solutions
to the demand of a controller in Heating,
Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC)
systems. The valves come in sizes of 2-1/2, 3,
and 4 in. (DN65, DN80, and DN100). These
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
(ASME) Class 150 flanged valves come in
both two- and three-way configurations.
Johnson Controls offers valve, linkage, and
actuator assemblies for factory or field
mounting with either spring return or
non-spring return actuators.
If the VG1000 Series Flanged Ball Valve fails
to operate within its specifications, refer to the
VG1000 Series Flanged Ball Valves Product
Bulletin (LIT-12011228) for a list of repair
parts available.
Features
Closeoff Pressure Rating: 100 psi for

Two-Way Valves; 50 psi for Three-Way
Valves provides tight shutoff.
300 Stainless Steel Ball and Stem
Assembly applies to systems with high
temperature water (0 to 284F
[-18 to 140C]) or 25 psi saturated steam.
500:1 Rangeability provides accurate

control under all load conditions.
Amodel Flow Characterizing Disk
provides equal percentage flow
characteristics for best temperature
control; available in a wide array of Cv
ranges to cover a broad variety of
applications.
Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer
(EPDM) Double O-Ring Stem Seal
offers tested leak-free operation for
200,000 cycles in iron-oxide contaminated
water.
Graphite-Reinforced
Polytetrafluoroethylen (PTFE) Seats
include 15% graphite-reinforced ball seals
that last twice as long in iron-oxide
contaminated water when compared to
virgin Teflon ball seats.
PTFE Thermal Spacer provides
thermal isolation between the actuator and
the valve.
Seats Backed with EPDM O-Rings
maintain a constant seating force that
compensates for expansion, contraction,
and seat wear without increasing
operating torque.
Maintenance-Free Design performs
without failure in excess of 200,000 full
stroke cycles in iron-oxide contaminated
water.
VG1000 Series Ball Valves Shown with

Field Mounted M9000 Series Actuators
Available with Factory-Mounted M9124 or

M9220 Series Electric Actuators
reduces field installation time and cost.
M9000-330 and M9000-340
Weathershield Available for Field
Installation protect the actuator from
corrosion, rain, freezing rain, sleet, and
snow.
Repair Information
If the VG1000 Series Flanged Ball Valve fails
to operate within its specifications, replace the
unit. For a replacement valve, contact the
Selection Charts
Available Flanged Ball Valves (for Field Assembly)
Part Number
Size,
Closeoff PSIG
in. (DN)
Two-Way
Three-Way
Two-Way
Three-Way
Control
Disk
Control Port A
Control Port B
Cv (Kv)
Cv (Kv)
VG12A5GS
VG18A5GS
Yes
47 (40)
29 (25)
VG12A5GT
VG18A5GT
74 (63)
47 (40)
2-1/2 (DN65)
100
50
VG12A5GU
VG18A5GU
VG12A5HT
VG18A5HT
VG12A5HU
VG18A5HU
117 (100)
74 (63)
VG12A5HV
VG18A5HV
176 (150)
88 (75)
VG12A5HW
VG18A5HW
No
211 (180)
105 (90)
VG12A5JU
VG18A5JU
Yes
117 (100)
74 (63)
VG12A5JV
VG18A5JV
No
176 (150)
88 (75)
3 (DN80)
100
4 (DN100)
100
50
50
Yes
117 (100)
74 (63)
74 (63)
47 (40)
Available Actuators and Linkages (for Field Assembly)

Control Type
Spring Return
Switches
Actuator
Linkage
AC 24 V On/Off (Floating Control)
No
M9124-AGA-2
M9000-518
M9000-330
AC 24 V On/Off (Floating Control)
Two
M9124-AGC-2
DC 0 (2) to 10 V Proportional Control
No
M9124-GGA-2
Two
M9124-GGC-2
M9000-519
M9000-340
AC 24 V Three-Wire Floating Control
No
No
M9220-AGA-3
AC 24 V Three-Wire Floating Control
Yes
Two
M9220-AGC-3
AC 120 V On/Off Control
No
M9220-BAA-3
Two
M9220-BAC-3
No
M9220-BGA-3
Two
M9220-BGC-3
No
M9220-GGA-3
Two
M9220-GGC-3
1 of 2
VG1000 Series Flanged Ball Valves for Assembly in the Field (Continued)
VG1000 Series Flanged Ball Valves
Hot Water, Chilled Water, 50/50 Glycol Solutions, and
25 psig (172 kPa) Saturated Steam for HVAC Systems
Service1
Valve Fluid Temperature Limits
0 to 284F (-18 to 140C)
Valve Body Pressure/

Temperature Rating
Water
ASME Class 150

250 psi at -20 to 100F (29 to 38C)
235 psi at: 200F (93C)
218 psi at: 284F (140C)
Steam
Maximum Closeoff Pressure
Two-Way
100 psi (689 kPa)
Three-Way
50 psi (345 kPa)
Maximum Recommended Operating Pressure Drop
30 psi (207 kPa) for quiet service
Flow Characteristics
Two-Way
Equal Percentage
Three-Way
Equal Percentage Flow Characteristics of In-line Port or

Linear Percentage Flow Characteristics of Angle Port
Greater than 500:1
Rangeability2
Leakage
Two- or Three-Way
0.01% of Maximum Flow, Control Port, ANSI/FCI 70-2, Class 4
Three-Way
1% of Maximum Flow, Bypass Port
End Connections
ASME Class 150 Flange
Minimum Ambient Operating

Temperature
-4F (-20C)
M9124 Series Non-Spring Return Actuators
-40F (-40C)
Maximum Ambient Operating

Temperature3
122F (50C)
131F (55C)
Materials
Body
Brass
Flanges
Ductile Iron
Ball
300 Series Stainless Steel
Stem
Seats
Graphite Reinforced PTFE with EPDM O-Ring Backing
Stem Seals
EPDM O-Rings
Flow Control Disk
Amodel AS-1145HS Polyphthalamide Resin
1. Refer to VDI 2035 Standard for proper water treatment.

2. Rangeability is defined as the ratio of maximum controllable flow to minimum controllable flow.
3. In steam applications, install the valve with the stem horizontal to the piping and wrap the valve and piping with insulation.
2 of 2

Issued August 27, 2008
VG1000 Series
Forged Brass Ball Valves for Assembly in the Field
Description
VG1000 Series Ball Valves are designed to
regulate the flow of hot or chilled water and, for
some models, low pressure steam in
response to the demand of a controller in
Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning
(HVAC) systems. Available in sizes 1/2
through 2 in. (DN15 through DN50), this family
of two- and three-way forged brass valves is
factory or field mounted to Johnson Controls
VA9104, M9106, M9109, and M9100 Series
Non-Spring Return and VA2202, M9206 and
M9210 Series Spring Return Electric
Actuators for on/off, floating, or proportional
control.
Refer to the VG1000 Series Forged Brass Ball
Valves Product Bulletin (LIT-977132) for
Features
National Pipe Thread (NPT), sweat, and

press end connections provide the right
valve for a broad range of applications,
reduce installation time while reducing the
need for adapters, and increase system
reliability
300 Series stainless steel ball and stem

assembly tolerates high temperature
water or 15 psi saturated steam with fluid
temperatures of -22 to 284F
(-30 to 140C) or where a higher degree of
corrosion protection is desired
(EPDM) double O-ring steam seal
provides a leak-free seal; the packing has
been tested and is leak-free after 200,000
cycles in iron-oxide contaminated water
graphite-reinforced
Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) seats
include 15% graphite-reinforced ball seals,
providing better wear resistance
200 psi closeoff pressure rating provides
tight shutoff
500:1 rangeability provides accurate
control under all load conditions
chrome-plated brass ball and stem
assembly standard handles both chilled
and hot water applications with a fluid
temperature range of 23 to 203F
(-5 to 95C)
blowout-proof stem protects the user
from the risk of injury
VG1000 Series Ball Valves Shown with

Field Mounted VA9104 and M9000 Series
Actuators
Repair Information
If the VG1000 Series Ball Valve fails to
operate within its specifications, refer to the
following table for a list of repair parts
available.
Selection Charts
Valid Ball Valve, Electric Actuator, Linkage Kit, and Weather Shield Combinations (for Assembly in the Field) (Part 1 of 2)
Valve Size,
Valve Code Numbers
Actuator Base
Linkage Kit Code
Weather Shield
in. (DN)
Number
Number1
NPT End
Sweat End
Press End
1/2 (DN15)
3/4 (DN20)
1 (DN25)
Connection
Connection
Connection
VG1241Ax
VG1245Ax
VG1841Ax
VG1845Ax
VG1271Ax
VG1275Ax
VG1871Ax
VG1875Ax
VG1291Ax
VG1295Ax
VG1891Ax
VG1895Ax
VG1241Bx
VG1245Bx
VG1841Bx
VG1845Bx
VG1241Cx
VG1245Cx
VG1841Cx
VG1845Cx
VG1271Bx
VG1275Bx
VG1871Ax
VG1875Ax
VG1271Cx
VG1275Cx
VG1871Cx
VG1875Cx
VG1291Bx
VG1295Bx
VG1891Bx
VG1895Bx
VG1291Cx
VG1295Cx
VG1891Cx
VG1895Cx
VA91042
None Required
M91042
M9000-550
VA2202
None Required
M2202
M2000-500
M91062
M9206
M9000-520
M9108
M9000-516
M9000-330
M9210
M9000-517
M9000-340
VA91042
None Required
M91042
M9000-550
VA2202
None Required
M2202
M2000-500
M91062
M9206
M9000-520
M9108
M9000-516
M9000-330
M9210
M9000-517
M9000-340
VA91042
None Required
M91042
M9000-550
VA2202
None Required
M91062
M9206
M9000-520
M9108
M9000-516
M9000-330
M9210
M9000-517
M9000-340
1 of 4
Forged Brass Ball Valves for Assembly in the Field (Continued)

Valid Ball Valve, Electric Actuator, Linkage Kit, and Weather Shield Combinations (for Assembly in the Field) (Part 2 of 2)
Valve Size,
Valve Code Numbers
Actuator Base
Linkage Kit Code
Weather Shield
in. (DN)
Number
Number1
NPT End
Sweat End
Press End
Connection
1-1/4 (DN32)
1-1/2 (DN40)
2 (DN50)
Connection
Connection
VG1241Dx
VG1245Dx
VG1841Dx
VG1845Dx
VG1241Ex
VG1245Ex
VG1841Ex
VG1845Ex
VG1241Fx
VG1245Fx
VG1841Fx
VG1845Fx
M91062
M9206
M9000-520
M9108
M9000-516
M9000-330
M9210
M9000-517
M9000-340
M91062
M9206
M9000-520
M9108
M9000-516
M9000-330
M9210
M9000-517
M9000-340
M91092
M9000-520
M9116
M9000-516
M9000-330
M9210
M9000-517
M9000-340
1. VA9104, M9104, M9106, M9109 and M9100 Series Actuators are non-spring return, and VA2202, M2202, M9206 and M9210 Series Actuators are spring return.
Note: VA9104, M9104, VA2202, and M2202 have a maximum fluid temperature limit of 212F (100C).
2. To avoid excessive wear or drive time on the motor for VA9104, M9104, M9106, and M9109 AGx models, use a controller and/or software that provides a
timeout function to remove the signal at the end of rotation (stall). The IGx and GGx models have an automatic shutoff to avoid excessive wear or drive time on
the motor.
Available Ball Valves for Field Assembly1 (Part 1 of 2)

Size,
Closeoff
Control Control Port Bypass Port Plated Brass Ball and Stem
in. (mm)
(psig)
Disc
Cv (kv)
Cv (kv)
(23 to 203F Fluid Temperature)
(Three-Way
Only)
Two-Way
Three-Way
Stainless Steel Ball and Stem

(-22 to 284F Fluid Temperature,
15 psi saturated steam)
Two-Way
Three-Way
NPT Threaded End Connection Valves

1/2 (DN15)
3/4 (DN20)
1 (DN25)
1-1/4 (DN32)
1-1/2 (DN40)
2 (DN50)
200
200
200
200
200
200
Yes
1.2 (1.0)
0.7 (0.6)
VG1241AD
VG1841AD
VG1245AD
VG1845AD
1.9 (1.6)
1.2 (1.0)
VG1241AE
VG1841AE
VG1245AE
VG1845AE
2.9 (2.5)
1.9 (1.6)
VG1241AF
VG1841AF
VG1245AF
VG1845AF
4.7 (4.0)
2.9 (2.5)
VG1241AG
VG1841AG
VG1245AG
VG1845AG
VG1845AL
7.4 (6.3)
4.7 (4.0)
VG1241AL
VG1841AL
VG1245AL
No
11.7 (10.0)
5.8 (5.0)
VG1241AN
VG1841AN
VG1245AN
VG1845AN
Yes
4.7 (4.0)
2.9 (2.5)
VG1241BG
VG1841BG
VG1245BG
VG1845BG
7.4 (6.3)
4.7 (4.0)
VG1241BL
VG1841BL
VG1245BL
VG1845BL
No
11.7 (10.0)
5.8 (5.0)
VG1241BN
VG1841BN
VG1245BN
VG1845BN
Yes
7.4 (6.3)
4.7 (4.0)
VG1241CL
VG1841CL
VG1245CL
VG1845CL
11.7 (10.0)
5.8 (5.0)
VG1241CN
VG1841CN
VG1245CN
VG1845CN
No
18.7 (16.0)
9.4 (8.0)
VG1241CP
VG1841CP
VG1245CP
VG1845CP
Yes
11.7 (10.0)
5.8 (5.0)
VG1241DN
VG1841DN
VG1245DN
VG1845DN
18.7 (16.0)
9.4 (8.0)
VG1241DP
VG1841DP
VG1245DP
VG1845DP
No
29.2 (25.0)
14.6 (12.5)
VG1241DR
VG1841DR
VG1245DR
VG1845DR
Yes
18.7 (16.0)
9.4 (8.0)
VG1241EP
VG1841EP
VG1245EP
VG1845EP
29.2 (25.0)
14.6 (12.5)
VG1241ER
VG1841ER
VG1245ER
VG1845ER
No
46.8 (40.0)
23.4 (20.0)
VG1241ES
VG1841ES
VG1245ES
VG1845ES
Yes
29.2 (25.0)
14.6 (12.5)
VG1241FR
VG1841FR
VG1245FR
VG1845FR
46.8 (40.0)
23.4 (20.0)
VG1241FS
VG1841FS
VG1245FS
VG1845FS
No
73.7 (63.0)
36.8 (31.5)
VG1241FT
VG1841FT
VG1245FT
VG1845FT
2 of 4

Available Ball Valves for Field Assembly1 (Part 2 of 2)
Size,
Closeoff
Control Control Port Bypass Port Plated Brass Ball and Stem
in. (mm)
(psig)
Disc
Cv (kv)
Cv (kv)
(23 to 203F Fluid Temperature)
(Three-Way
Only)
Two-Way
Three-Way
Stainless Steel Ball and Stem

(-22 to 284F Fluid Temperature,
15 psi saturated steam)
Two-Way
Three-Way
Sweat End Connection Valves

1/2 (DN15)
200
Yes
No
3/4 (DN20)
1 (DN25)
200
200
Yes
1.2 (1.0)
0.7 (0.6)
VG1271AD
VG1871AD
VG1275AD
VG1875AD
1.9 (1.6)
1.2 (1.0)
VG1271AE
VG1871AE
VG1275AE
VG1875AE
2.9 (2.5)
1.9 (1.6)
VG1271AF
VG1871AF
VG1275AF
VG1875AF
4.7 (4.0)
2.9 (2.5)
VG1271AG
VG1871AG
VG1275AG
VG1875AG
7.4 (6.3)
4.7 (4.0)
VG1271AL
VG1871AL
VG1275AL
VG1875AL
11.7 (10.0)
5.8 (5.0)
VG1271AN
VG1871AN
VG1275AN
VG1875AN
4.7 (4.0)
2.9 (2.5)
VG1271BG
VG1871BG
VG1275BG
VG1875BG
7.4 (6.3)
4.7 (4.0)
VG1271BL
VG1871BL
VG1275BL
VG1875BL
No
11.7 (10.0)
5.8 (5.0)
VG1271BN
VG1871BN
VG1275BN
VG1875BN
Yes
7.4 (6.3)
4.7(4.0)
VG1271CL
VG1871CL
VG1275CL
VG1875CL
11.7 (10.0)
5.8 (5.0)
VG1271CN
VG1871CN
VG1275CN
VG1875CN
18.7 (16.0)
9.4 (8.0)
VG1271CP
VG1871CP
VG1275CP
VG1875CP
No
Press End Connection Valves

1/2 (DN15)
200
Yes
No
3/4 (DN20)
1 (DN25)
200
200
Yes
1.2 (1.0)
0.7 (0.6)
VG1291AD
VG1891AD
VG1295AD
VG1895AD
1.9 (1.6)
1.2 (1.0)
VG1291AE
VG1891AE
VG1295AE
VG1895AE
2.9 (2.5)
1.9 (1.6)
VG1291AF
VG1891AF
VG1295AF
VG1895AF
4.7 (4.0)
2.9 (2.5)
VG1291AG
VG1891AG
VG1295AG
VG1895AG
7.4 (6.3)
4.7 (4.0)
VG1291AL
VG1891AL
VG1295AL
VG1895AL
11.7 (10.0)
5.8 (5.0)
VG1291AN
VG1891AN
VG1295AN
VG1895AN
4.7 (4.0)
2.9 (2.5)
VG1291BG
VG1891BG
VG1295BG
VG1895BG
7.4 (6.3)
4.7 (4.0)
VG1291BL
VG1891BL
VG1295BL
VG1895BL
No
11.7 (10.0)
5.8 (5.0)
VG1291BN
VG1891BN
VG1295BN
VG1895BN
Yes
7.4 (6.3)
4.7 (4.0)
VG1291CL
VG1891CL
VG1295CL
VG1895CL
11.7 (10.0)
5.8 (5.0)
VG1291CN
VG1891CN
VG1295CN
VG1895CN
18.7 (16.0)
9.4 (8.0)
VG1291CP
VG1891CP
VG1295CP
VG1895CP
No
1. Before retrofitting older valves with VA9104, M9104, VA2202, or M2202 actuators be sure that the valves have a tapped hole in the center of the valve stem and
no threads in the flange holes. These direct mount actuators do not fit older valves designed without a tapped center stem hole or with threaded flange mounting
holes.
Repair Parts
Linkage
M9000-51x
Unit replacement
M9000-520
Anti-rotation slider, includes carriage screw, washers, and wing nut
M9000-600
M9000-601
Drive Shaft
M9000-602
M9000-603
M9000-550
Unit Replacement
M2000-500
Unit Replacement
3 of 4

VG1000 Series Forged Brass Ball Valves for Assembly in the Field
Service
Hot Water, Chilled Water, 50/50 Glycol Solutions, and 15 psig (103 kPa) Saturated Steam2 for
HVAC Systems
Water
VG12x1 and VG18x1 Series: 23 to 203F (-5 to 95C)

VG12x5 and VG18x5 Series: -22 to 284F (-30 to 140C)
Steam2
VG12x5 and VG1845 Series: 15 psig (103 kPa) at 250F (121C)

VG12x1 and VG1841 Series: Not Rated for Steam Service
Maximum Actuator Fluid

Temperature Limits
212F (100C)
VA2202, VA9104, M2202 with M2000-500 Linkage, M9104 with M9000-550 Linkage
284F (140C)
M9106, M9109, or M9206 with M9000-550 Linkage, M9210 with M9000-517 Linkage
Valve Body Pressure Rating
Water
VG1241, VG1245, VG1841, and VG1845 Series: 580 psig (3,999 kPa) (PN40), 464 psig
(3,196 kPa) at 284F (140C) (PN40)
VG1271, VG1275, VG1871, and VG1875 Series: 300 psig (2,067 kPa)
VG1291, VG1295, VG1891, and VG1895 Series: 300 psig (2,067 kPa)
Steam
15 psig (103 kPa) Saturated Steam
VG12x1 and VG12x5

Series:
200 psig (1,378 kPa)
VG1243 Series:
150 psig (1,034 kPa)
Maximum Recommended Operating Pressure Drop
Maximum Differential Pressure:

50 psi for Valves with Characterized Flow Control Disk
30 psi for Quiet Service Ball Valves
Two-Way
Equal Percentage
Three-Way
Equal Percentage Flow Characteristics of In-line Port (Coil) and Linear Flow Characteristics of
Angle Port (Bypass)
Greater than 500:1
Rangeability3
Temperature
Maximum Ambient
Operating Temperature2 (Limited by
the Actuator and Linkage)
-25F (-32C)
-22F (-30C)
VA2202 and M2202 Series Spring Return Actuators
-4F (-20C)
VA9104, M9104, M9106, and M9109 Series Non-Spring Return Actuators
-40F (-40C)
Direct Mount
140F (60C): VA9104 Series Non-Spring Return Actuators

122F (50C): VA2202 Series Spring Return Actuators
M9000-550 Linkage
140F (60C): M9104 Series Non-Spring Return Actuators
M9000-520 Linkage
125F (52C): M9106 and M9109 Series Non-Spring Return Actuators

140F (60C): M9206 Series Spring Return Actuators
M2000-500 Linkage
M9000-51x Series
Linkage

Leakage
0.01% of Maximum Flow per ANSI/FCI 70-2, Class 4

1% of Maximum Flow for Three-Way Bypass Port
End Connections
NPT: 1/2 through 2 in.

Sweat: 1/2 through 1 in. (DN15 through DN25)
Press (ProPress compatible): 1/2 through 1 in. (DN15 through DN25)
Materials
Body
Forged Brass
Ball
VG12x1 and VG18x1 Series: Chrome Plated Brass

VG12x5 and VG18x5 Series: 300 Series Stainless Steel
Blowout-Proof Stem
VG12x1 and VG18x1 Series: Nickel Plated Brass

Seats
Graphite-Reinforced PTFE with EPDM O-Ring Backing
Stem Seals
EPDM Double O-Rings
Characterizing Disk
AMODEL AS-1145HS Polyphthalamide Resin
1. Refer to VDI 2035 Standard for recommended proper water treatment.

2. In steam applications, install the valve with the stem horizontal to the piping and wrap the valve and piping with insulation.
3. Rangeability is defined as the ratio of maximum controllable flow to minimum controllable flow.
4 of 4
Product Bulletin
Issue Date
M9000-520
May 1, 2005
M9000-520 Ball Valve Linkage Kit
The M9000-520 Ball Valve Linkage Kit is designed

specifically for field mounting Johnson Controls
M9106 and M9109 Series Non-Spring Return, and
M9206 Series Spring Return Electric Actuators to
Johnson Controls VG1241, VG1245, VG1841, and
VG1845 Series Ball Valves. The use of
glass-reinforced thermoplastic resin provides superior
thermal isolation between the valve and actuator,
minimizing heat transfer in higher fluid temperature
applications and preventing condensation in chilled
water applications.
Figure 1: M9000-520 Ball Valve Linkage Kit Is
Used to Field Mount Johnson Controls
M9000 Series Electric Actuators to
Johnson Controls VG1000 Series Ball Valves
Features and Benefits
Glass-Reinforced
Thermoplastic Resin
Two-Position Anti-rotation
Slider
Provides superior thermal isolation between

the valve and actuator, and meets
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) 94 5V
Flame Class Rating
Allows one linkage kit to accommodate both
spring return and non-spring return electric
actuators
Multi-position Setup
Allows the actuator and linkage kit assembly

to be positioned in 90 increments, relative to
the ball valve, facilitating installation in
confined locations
Manual Handle for
Allows manual positioning of the actuator

when power is disengaged
Non-spring Return
Applications
Installation Requires
Facilitates quick and easy installation
No Special Tools
2005 Johnson Controls, Inc.

1
Linkage Kit Selection

Use the M9000-520 Valve Linkage Kit to field mount
Johnson Controls M9106 or M9109 Series Non-Spring
Return, and M9206 Series Spring Return Electric
Actuators to Johnson Controls VG1241, VG1245,
VG1841, and VG1845 Series Ball Valves. The use of
glass-reinforced thermoplastic resin and the height of
the linkage kit allow for the use of pipe insulation that
minimizes heat transfer to the actuator. In chilled water
applications, the use of thermoplastic resin also
prevents condensation. Use the manual handle
supplied with the linkage kit to manually position the
non-spring return electric actuators when power is off
and the actuator gears are disengaged.
Product Guidelines
Install the VG1000 Series Ball Valves with the actuator
at or above the centerline of the horizontal piping.
IMPORTANT:
In steam applications, install the
valve with the stem horizontal to the piping. Failure
to follow these guidelines may shorten the life of the
actuator.
To minimize heat transfer in steam applications, wrap
the valve and piping with insulation. Allow sufficient
clearance for actuator removal (as illustrated in
Figure 2 and Figure 3).
Before installing the electric actuator, use an
adjustable wrench to manually rotate the valve stem
several times. Rotating the valve stem breaks the
torque that may have built up during long-term
storage.
Wire all electrically actuated VG1000 Series Ball
Valves in accordance with applicable electrical code
requirements. Wire the input lines to the electric
actuator correctly so that the valve moves in the
proper direction.
IMPORTANT:
Protect the actuator from
dripping water, condensation, and other moisture.
Water or moisture could result in an electrical short,
which may damage or affect the operation of the
actuator.
IMPORTANT:
Do not cover the actuator with
thermal insulating material. High ambient
temperatures may damage the actuator, and a hot
water pipe, a steam pipe, or other heat source may
overheat it.
M9000-520 Ball Valve Linkage Kit Product Bulletin
On reduced port models, the flow-characterizing disk

is located in Port A. Port A must be the inlet.
Contact the local Johnson Controls representative for
compatibility concerns before using VG1000 Series
Ball Valves to control the flow of fluids other than
those outlined in the Technical Specifications table at
the end of this document.
IMPORTANT:
Take care to prevent foreign
material such as weld slag, thread burrs, metal
chips, and scale from entering the piping system.
This debris can damage or severely impede the
operation of the valve by embedding itself in the
seats, scoring the valve, and ultimately resulting in
seat leakage. If the debris become embedded in the
seats, subsequent flushing and filtering of the piping
system with the valve installed does not remedy the
problem.
For more detailed installation information, refer to the
M9000-520 Ball Valve Linkage Kit Installation
Instructions (Part No. 14-1297-5).
For proper actuator wiring and commissioning
instructions, refer to the following documentation:
M9106-xGx-2 Series Electric Non-spring Return

Actuators Installation Instructions
(Part No. 34-636-1085)
M9109 Series Electric Non-spring Return

(Part No. 34-636-1190)

Installation Instructions (Part No. 34-1280-9)
M9206-Bxx-2S Series On/Off Electric Spring

Return Actuators Installation Instructions
(Part No. 34-1280-122)
M9206-AGx-2S Series Floating Electric Spring

(Part No. 34-1280-238)
M9206-GGx-2S Series Proportional Electric

Spring Return Actuators Installation Instructions
(Part No. 34-1280-246)
Servicing the Actuator or Piping System
Table 1: Repair Parts (Order Separately)
When servicing the electric actuator or the piping

system:
Code
Number
Description
disconnect the power supply to the actuator before

servicing
M9000-600
Anti-rotation slider; includes bracket,

carriage screw, split lock washer, flat
washer, and wing nut
relieve the pressure in the piping system
M9000-601
Mounting screws and nuts; includes

four M5 (5 mm) x 16 mm machine screws
and four M5 (5 mm) serrated washer head
nuts
M9000-602
Drive shaft
M9000-603
Manual handle; includes handle and a

No. 4 thread-forming PLASTITE screw
M9206-602
M9206 hub locking clip
M9206-604
New hub designed to accommodate older

M9206 actuators to M9000-520 linkage
IMPORTANT:
Use copper conductors only.
Make all wiring connections in accordance with
local, national, and regional regulations. Do not
exceed the actuators electrical ratings.
WARNING: Risk of Electric Shock.

Disconnect power supply before making electrical
connections. Contact with components carrying
hazardous voltage can cause electric shock and
may result in severe personal injury or death.
CAUTION: Risk of Property Damage.

Do not apply power to the system before checking
all wiring connections. Short circuited or improperly
connected wires may result in permanent damage to
the equipment.
IMPORTANT:
The M9000-520 Ball Valve
Linkage Kits are intended to control saturated
steam, hot water, and chilled water flow under
normal equipment operating conditions. Where
failure or malfunction of the M9000-520 Ball Valve
Linkage Kit could lead to personal injury or property
damage to the controlled equipment or other
property, additional precautions must be designed
into the system. Incorporate and maintain other
devices such as supervisory or alarm systems or
safety or limit controls intended to warn of, or protect
against, failure or malfunction of the M9000-520 Ball
Valve Linkage Kit.
IMPORTANT:
Do not attempt to manually
rotate the drive shaft while the actuator is installed
without first releasing the actuator gears. Manually
rotating the drive shaft without releasing the actuator
gears may result in permanent damage to the
actuator.
Minimum Clearance Required

3-1/2 in. (89 mm)
4-7/32
(107)
3-29/32
(100)
7-27/32
(199)
C
B
E
D
Two-Way Valve
Two-Way Valve
Three-Way Valve
Three-Way Valve
Figure 2: Non-Spring Return M9106 or M9109 Actuated VG1241, VG1245, VG1841, and VG1845 Series Ball
Valve with M9000-520 Linkage Dimensions, in. (mm) (See Table 2.)
Table 2: M9106 or M9109 Actuated VG1241, VG1245, VG1841, and VG1845 Series Ball Valve with
M9000-520 Linkage Dimensions, in. (mm)
Valve Size,
in. (DN)*
1/2 (DN15)
6-19/64
(160)
21/32 (17)
1-7/32 (31)
6-49/64
(172)
2-33/64 (64)
11/32 (9)
1-1/4 (32)
3/4 (DN20)
6-19/64
(160)
21/32 (17)
1-7/32 (31)
6-29/32
(175)
2-51/64 (71)
11/32 (9)
1-13/32 (36)
1 (DN25)
6-3/8 (162)
3/4 (19)
1-19/64 (33)
7-13/64
(183)
3-13/32 (87)
11/32 (9)
1-11/16 (43)
1-1/4 (DN32)
6-13/16
(173)
1-1/32 (26)
1-23/32 (44)
7-15/32
(190)
3-15/16
(100)
11/32 (9)
2 (51)
1-1/2 (DN40)
6-31/32
(177)
1-9/64 (29)
1-57/64 (48)
7-43/64
(195)
4-21/64
(110)
11/32 (9)
2-1/8 (54)
2 (DN50)
7-11/64
(182)
1-15/32 (37)
2-1/16 (53)
7-59/64
(201)
4-27/32
(123)
11/32 (9)
2-9/16 (65)
On models with the flow-characterizing disk, the disk is located in Port A. Port A must be the inlet.
* Add 1-11/32 in. (34 mm)

for models with auxiliary switches.

4 in. (102 mm)
7-1/4
(184) *
3-1/4
(83)
5-3/4
(146)
A
D
B
Two-Way Valve
Three-Way Valve
Two-Way Valve
Three-Way Valve
Figure 3: Spring Return M9206 Actuated VG1241, VG1245, VG1841, and VG1845 Series Ball Valve
with M9000-520 Linkage Dimensions, in. (mm) (See Table 3.)
Table 3: M9206 Actuated VG1241, VG1245, VG1841, and VG1845 Series Ball Valve with M9000-520 Linkage
Dimensions, in. (mm)
Valve Size,
in. (DN)*
A**
1/2 (DN15)
7-13/64 (183)
21/32 (17)
1-7/32 (31)
11/32 (9)
1-1/4 (32)
2-33/64 (64)
3/4 (DN20)
7-13/64 (183)
21/32 (17)
1-7/32 (31)
11/32 (9)
1-13/32 (36)
2-51/64 (71)
1 (DN25)
7-9/32 (185)
3/4 (19)
1-19/64 (33)
11/32 (9)
1-45/64 (43)
3-13/32 (87)
1-1/4 (DN32)
7-11/16 (195)
1-1/32 (26)
1-23/32 (44)
11/32 (9)
1-31/32 (50)
3-15/16 (100)
1-1/2 (DN40)
7-7/8 (200)
1-9/64 (29)
1-57/64 (48)
11/32 (9)
2-11/64 (55)
4-21/64 (110)
*
**
For valve assemblies with M9206-xxx-2S Series Actuators, subtract 19/32 (15 mm) from Dimension A (Column A).
Product
Valid Ball Valves
All VG1241, VG1245, VG1841, and VG1845 Series Ball Valves
Valid Actuators
1/2 through 1-1/2 in. Valves:
M9106-AGx-2 On/Off Floating Control without Timeout Non-Spring Return
M9106-IGx-2 On/Off Floating Control with Timeout Non-Spring Return
M9106-GGx-2 Proportional Control Non-Spring Return
M9206-AGx-2 Floating Control Spring Return
M9206-AGx-2S Floating Control Spring Return
M9206-BGx-2S On/Off (24 VAC) Control Spring Return
M9206-BAx-2S On/Off (120 VAC) Control Spring Return
M9206-GGx-2 Proportional Control Spring Return
M9206-GGx-2S Proportional Control Spring Return
2 in. Valves:
Service*

Ambient Operating
Temperature**
-40 to 250F (-40 to 121C) for M9000-520 Linkage

-4 to 125F (-20 to 52C) for M9106 and M9109 Series Actuators
-25 to 140F (-32 to 60C) for M9206 Series Actuators
Material
Glass-Reinforced Thermoplastic Resin; UL 94 5V Flame Class Rating
Dimensions
See Table 2 and Table 3.
Shipping Weight
1.5 lb (0.68 kg)
*
**
Proper water treatment is recommended; refer to VDI 2035 Standard.

In steam applications, install the valve with the stem horizontal to the piping and wrap the valve and piping with
insulation.
The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For application at conditions beyond these
specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office. Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or
misuse of its products.
Controls Group
507 E. Michigan Street
P.O. Box 423
Milwaukee, WI 53201
Published in U.S.A.
M9000-3x0 Series Weather Shield Enclosures

Product Bulletin
Supersedes July 24, 2006
The M9000-3x0 Weather Shield Enclosures are

cost-effective and durable weather shields designed to
provide a degree of protection for a single
Johnson Controls M9000 Series Electric Actuator
used in control damper, flanged ball valve, threaded
ball valve, and iron flanged valve applications. These
weather shield enclosures are manufactured to
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
3R specifications, and protect the electric actuator from
corrosion, rain, freezing rain, sleet, and snow. The
enclosure can be mounted indoors or outdoors;
however, it may not prevent externally formed ice from
restricting the motion of the rotary shaft.
Each enclosure is constructed of impact-grade ABS
plastic that provides excellent impact resistance. The
cover features ultraviolet inhibitors that extend service
life by preventing the cover from becoming brittle or
damaged by the sun or other environmental elements.
The transparent cover provides an unobstructed view
of the electric actuator without having to disassemble
the enclosure. An appliance cord in the M9000-310
and M9000-330 Weather Shield Enclosure enables
installation of control wiring, and a form-fitting seal
prevents water or moisture from entering the unit and
damaging the actuator.
Figure 1: M9000-3x0 Weather Shield Enclosures

Shown Mounted onto a Control Damper, Flanged
Ball Valve, Threaded Ball Valve, and Flanged Cast
Iron Valve
Table 1: Features and Benefits

Feature
Benefit
Durable Construction
Provides a degree of protection from the elements for a single

Johnson Controls M9000 Series Electric Actuator used in control damper,
ball valve, and iron flanged valve applications
Fully-Enclosed NEMA 3R Design
Protects the electric actuator from corrosion, rain, freezing rain, sleet, and
snow
Impact-Grade ABS Plastic Enclosure
Provides excellent impact resistance
Cover Constructed Using Ultraviolet

Inhibitors
Extends service life by preventing the cover from becoming brittle or

damaged by the sun or other environmental elements
Transparent Cover
Allows the electric actuator to be fully visible without having to disassemble

the enclosure
Appliance Cord
Enables installation of control wiring (M9000-310 and M9000-330 models)
Strain Relief Conduit Fittings
Protect the electric actuator from damage by preventing tension on the

electrical connection
M9000-3x0 Series Weather Shield Enclosures Product Bulletin
Product Details
M9210-Bxx-3 On/Off Electric Spring Return

(Part No. 34-636-1638)
M9210-GGx-3 Proportional Electric Spring Return

(Part No. 34-636-1662)
M9220-AGx-3 Floating Electric Spring Return

(Part No. 34-636-1689)
M9220-Bxx-3 On/Off Electric Spring Return

(Part No. 34-636-1239)
M9220-GGx-3 Proportional Electric Spring Return

(Part No. 34-636-1697)
M9220-HGx-3 Proportional Electric Spring Return

(Part No. 34-636-1700)
M9106-xGx-2 Series Electric Non-Spring Return

(Part No. 34-636-1085)
M9000-51x Series Valve Linkage Kits Installation

Instructions (Part No. 14-1201-13)
M9108, M9116, M9124, and M9132 Series Electric

Non-Spring Return Actuators Installation
Instructions (Part No. 34-636-399)
M9000-53x Cast Iron Flanged Valve Linkage Kit for

Mounting a Single M9000 Series Electric Actuator
M9000-53x Series Cast Iron Flanged Valve

Linkage Kit for Tandem Mounting of M9000 Series
Electric Actuators Installation Instructions
(Part No. 14-1298-26)
The M9000-3x0 Weather Shield Enclosures are

shipped from the factory partially assembled, and
include mounting brackets for securing the unit to a
control damper or an M9000-53x Series or M9000-51x
Series Valve Linkage. The enclosures are
cost-effective and durable weather shields designed to
provide a degree of protection for a single
Johnson Controls M9000 Series Electric Actuator.
IMPORTANT: The M9000-3x0 Series Weather
Shield Enclosures only provide protection for the
Johnson Controls M9000 Series Electric Actuator
used in control damper, ball valve, and iron flanged
valve applications. To ensure proper operation,
check that all associated equipment used in the
application is suitable for the surrounding
environment.
Refer to the following documentation for more
information on electric actuators and the valve linkages
used with these actuators:
M9109 Series Electric Non-Spring Return

(Part No. 34-636-1190)
M9210-AGx-3 Floating Electric Spring Return

(Part No. 34-636-1654)
Repair Information
If the M9000-3x0 Series Weather Shield Enclosure fails
to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For
a replacement enclosure, contact the nearest
Table 2: Models and Ordering Information

Code Number
Description
M9000-3101
Weather Shield Enclosure for a Single Johnson Controls M9106, M9108, M9109, M9116, M9124,
and M9132 Series Electric Non-Spring Return Actuator Used in Control Damper and Iron Flanged
Valve Applications
M9000-3201
Weather Shield Enclosure for a Single Johnson Controls M9210 and M9220 Series Electric
Non-Spring Return Actuator Used in Control Damper and Iron Flanged Valve Applications
M9000-3301
Weather Shield Enclosure for a Single Johnson Controls M9108, M9116, and M9124 Series
Electric Non-Spring Return Actuator Used in Ball Valve Applications
M9000-3401
Weather Shield Enclosure for a Single Johnson Controls M9210 and M9220 Series Electric
Non-Spring Return Actuator Used in Ball Valve Applications
1.
Kit includes one enclosure base and seal assembly, one cover and gasket, and all necessary mounting hardware. One
weather shield enclosure is required per electric actuator.
FIG:wsdim
Dimensions
Figure 2: M9000-310 and M9000-320 Weather Shield Enclosure Dimensions, in. (mm)
(See Table 3.)
Table 3: M9000-310 and M9000-320 Weather Shield Enclosure Dimensions, in. (mm)
Dimension
Weather Shield Enclosure

M9000-310
M9000-320
7-7/8 (200)
13-3/8 (340)
4-23/32 (120)
5-29/32 (150)
3-17/32 (90)
4-23/32 (120)
4-27/32 (123)
6-1/32 (153)
5-13/32 (137)
6-9/16 (167)
FIG:dmns
Figure 3: M9000-330 and M9000-340 Weather Shield Enclosure Dimensions, in. (mm)
(See Table 4.)
Table 4: M9000-330 and M9000-340 Weather Shield Enclosure Dimensions, in. (mm)
Dimension
Weather Shield Enclosure

M9000-330
M9000-340
7-7/8 (200)
13-3/8 (340)
4-23/32 (120)
5-29/32 (150)
3-29/32 (99)
5-1/16 (129)
M9000-3x0 Series Weather Shield Enclosures
Materials
Enclosure
Impact-Grade Acrylonitrile Butadine Styrene (ABS) Plastic
Enclosure Seal
Nitrile
Cover
Transparent Impact-Grade ABS Plastic with Ultraviolet Inhibitors
Cover Gasket
Neoprene
Weather Shield Rating

Actuator Ambient
Limits
NEMA 3R, IP54

M9106 and M9109
(M9000-310 Only)
-4 to 125F (-20 to 52C)
M9108, M9116,
M9124, and M9132
-4 to 122F (-20 to 50C)
M9210 and M9220
-40 to 131F (-40 to 55C)
Weather Shield Enclosure Ambient Storage

Temperature Limits
-40 to 176F (-40 to 80C)
Strain Relief Conduit Fittings with 1/2 in. National Pipe Straight
Mechanical (NPSM) Exit
Appliance Cord
6 Conductor, 18 AWG Wire Gauge, 43 in. (110 cm)
Shipping Weight
M9000-310
2.0 lb (0.9 kg)
M9000-320
3.3 lb (1.5 kg)
M9000-330
3.2 lb (1.45 kg)
M9000-340
4.2 lb (1.9 kg)
Controls Group
Milwaukee, WI 53202

Published in U.S.A.
5
M9000-500 Valve Linkage Kit for M9116 and M9220 Series

Electric Actuators
Code No. LIT-977352
Product Bulletin
Issued June 16, 2008

Supersedes August 10, 2007
M9000-500
The M9000-500 Valve Linkage Kit provides for field

mounting of M9116 and M9220 Series Electric
Actuators to Johnson Controls 1/2 through 2 in.
(DN15 through DN50) globe style valve bodies.
Figure 1: M9000-500 Valve Linkage Kit

with M9220 Series Electric Actuator and
VG7000 Series Bronze Control Valve

Features
Benefits
Universal Mounting, Including

Adjustments for Stem Height and
Valve Strokes
One linkage kit for mounting both non-spring return (M9116 Series) and spring return
(M9220 Series) electric actuators to all Johnson Controls valves 1/2 through 2 in.
(DN15 through DN50) with the standard V-3000 bonnet design
180 lb (801 N) Minimum

Bidirectional Valve Shutoff Force
Shutoff pressures meet most commercial Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning
(HVAC) system application needs for 1/2 through 2 in. (DN15 through DN50) valves
Interchangeable Rack and Pinion

Design
Three different pitch sizes correspond to three valve stroke lengths for 1/2 through
2 in. (DN15 through DN50) valves, equalizing stem travel per degree of actuator
rotation for enhanced control resolution
Simple Pneumatic-to-Electric Field

Conversion
Simple setup procedure, minimizes installation time
Unique Proven Spring Capsule

Design
Spring coupling automatically compensates for tolerances and seat wear, in addition
to providing a minimum of 180 lb (801 N) of stem force
M9000-500 Valve Linkage Kit for M9116 and M9220 Series Electric Actuators Product
Bulletin
Application
Dimensions
Pneumatically actuated globe-style valves have been

used for many years in HVAC systems and are still
installed in many buildings. With an increasing number
of system conversions to electric control, many
pneumatically operated valves are being replaced or
retrofitted with electric actuators. The M9116 or M9220
Electric Actuator coupled with the M9000-500 Valve
Linkage Kit provides a reliable yet inexpensive way to
upgrade existing globe valves. The Johnson Controls
globe valves offer industry-leading performance and
are now available with M9116 Series Electric Actuators
for enhanced non-spring return and M9220 Series
spring return electric operation.
The M9116 or M9220 Electric Actuator coupled to the
valve body with the M9000-500 Valve Linkage Kit is
also ideally suited for new installations, especially
those applications specifically requiring electronic
spring return actuation.
IMPORTANT: Do not install this valve linkage kit
and the electric actuator in condensing, wet, or
damp environments. Moisture may cause damage to
the equipment.
The M9000-500 Valve Linkage Kit converts the rotary

motion output of the M9116 or M9220 Series Electric
Actuator into linear motion in order to operate 1/2
through 2 in. (DN15 through DN50) Johnson Controls
globe-style control valves.
A rack and pinion drive mechanism provides the linear
movement. The unit is designed to furnish a minimum
of 180 lb (801 N) of stem force in both directions. A
compression spring on the output shaft of the linkage
automatically compensates for valve tolerances and
seat wear. This spring case is also used in the Y20EBD
Valve Linkage, offering many years of proven, reliable
performance. The spring allows for 3/16 in. (5 mm) of
overtravel.
The M9000-500 Valve Linkage Kit offers a single rack
and pinion design that utilizes three different pitches.
To accommodate the nominal valve strokes of 5/16, 1/
2, and 3/4 in. (8, 13, and 19 mm), the three different
pitch sizes correspond with the three valve stroke
lengths, equalizing the percentage of stem travel per
degree of actuator rotation (enhancing control
resolution). The rack and pinion design also provides
for uniform force and timing over the entire valve
stroke. The linkage includes setup features and
indicators that fix the position of the rack and pinion
during installation, ensuring quick and accurate setup.
FIG:VLKdimensions
Operation
Figure 2: M900-500 Valve Linkage Kit

Accessories
See Table 2 for adaptor kits for different valves.
Table 2: Accessories Used in Conjunction with
the M9000-500 Valve Linkage Kit
Product
Code
Number
Description
V-9999-670
VT Adaptor Kit (for Mounting to

Johnson Controls 1/2 in. VT Series
Terminal Unit Valves)
V-9999-BC1
Barber-Colman (Siebe) Adaptor Kit (for

Mounting to Barber-Colman 1/2 Through
1-1/4 in. Globe Valves)
V-9999-HW1
Honeywell Adaptor Kit (for Mounting to

Honeywell 1/2 Through 3 in. Globe Valves)
M9000-500 Valve Linkage Kit for M9116 and M9220 Series Electric Actuators Product Bulletin
Table 3: M9000-500 Valve Linkage Kit
Compatible Actuators
M9116 Series Non-Spring Return Electric Actuators

M9220 Series Spring Return Electric Actuators
Service
Hot Water, Chilled Water, and Steam
Shutoff Force
180 lb (801 N) Minimum
Valve Stroke
5/16, 1/2, or 3/4 in. (8, 13, or 19 mm)
Ambient Operating Conditions1
Minimum -4F (-20C)

Maximum 122F (50C) for Fluid Temperatures up to 285F (141C)
110F (43C) for Fluid Temperatures Greater than 285F (141C)
Dimensions, (W x D x H)
4-31/32 x 2-11/32 x 12-11/32 in. (126 x 60 x 314 mm)
Shipping Weight
4 lb (1.8 kg)
1.
The M9000-500 valve linkage is not rated for outside use.
Building Efficiency
507 E. Michigan Street, Milwaukee, WI 53202
Metasys and Johnson Controls are registered trademarks of Johnson Controls, Inc.
All other marks herein are the marks of their respective owners. 2008 Johnson Controls, Inc.
M9000-500 Valve Linkage Kit for M9116 and M9220 Series Electric Actuators Product Bulletin
Published in U.S.A.
M9000-51x Series Valve Linkage Kits

Product Bulletin
Code No. LIT-977354
M9000-51x

Supersedes January 12, 2007
M9000-51x Series Valve Linkage Kits are designed

M9106 and M9100 Series Non-Spring Return and
M9206, M9210, and M9220 Series Spring Return
Electric Actuators to Johnson Controls VG1000 Series
Ball Valves in sizes 1/2 through 4 in. (DN15 through
DN100). These sturdy linkage kits provide stable
actuator mounting while preventing loading on the
valve stem and stem seals, to ensure longer seal life.
Figure 1: M9000-51x Series Linkage Kits Used to

Field Mount M9000 Series Electric Actuators to
VG1000 Series Ball Valves
Features
Benefits
Dual-Centering Bearing Design
Maintains accurate stem alignment eliminating side loading on the

VG1000 Series Ball Valve stem and stem seal, to ensure longer seal life.
Sturdy Aluminum Construction
Provides exceptional strength and stability.
Multi-Position Setup
Allows the actuator and linkage kit to be positioned in 45-degree

increments, facilitating installation in confined areas.
Adjustable Anti-Rotation Slider
Allows one linkage to accommodate multiple sizes of valve bodies and

electric actuators.
Index Markings on Drive Shaft and Mounting

Bracket
Allow the valve to be positioned in increments from fully open to fully

closed, providing visual indication of the current valve position during setup
and operation.
Installation Requiring No Special Tools
Facilitates quick and easy installation.
Thermal Spacer between Valve and Linkage
Reduces temperature and condensation from the valve to the actuator.
Weather Shield Kits Available for Field Mount
Protect actuator from extreme environments.
M9000-51x Series Valve Linkage Kits Product Bulletin
Product Guidelines
IMPORTANT: Protect the actuator from dripping

water, condensation, and other moisture. Water or
moisture could result in an electrical short, which
may damage or affect the operation of the actuator.

IMPORTANT: In steam applications, install the
actuator.
For detailed installation instructions, refer to the

M9000-51x Series Valve Linkage Kits Installation
IMPORTANT: Take care to prevent foreign
materials such as weld slag, thread burrs, metal
seat leakage. If the debris becomes embedded in
the seats, subsequent flushing and filtering of the
piping system with the valve installed does not
remedy the problem.

clearance to remove the actuator (as illustrated in
Figure 2 through Figure 6).
IMPORTANT: Do not cover the actuator with
overheat it.
Before installing the electric actuator, use an adjustable
wrench to manually rotate the valve stem several
times. Rotating the valve stem breaks the torque that
may have built up during long-term storage.
IMPORTANT: Do not attempt to manually rotate the
drive shaft while the actuator is installed without first
releasing the actuator gears. Manually rotating the
drive shaft without releasing the actuator gears may
result in permanent damage to the actuator.
Install VG1241, VG1245, VG1271, VG1275, VG1291,
VG1295, VG12A5, VG1841, VG1845, and
VG18A5 Series Ball Valves with Port A as the inlet from
the coil. VG1243 Series reduced port models feature a
black arrow on the bottom of the valve outlet indicating
the direction of flow for proper piping.

Ball Valves to control the flow of fluids other than those
outlined in the Technical Specifications table at the end
of this document.
system:

servicing
IMPORTANT: Wire all electrically actuated VG1000

Series Ball Valves in accordance with applicable
electrical code requirements. Wire the input lines to
the electric actuator correctly so that the valve
moves in the proper direction.
IMPORTANT: Use copper conductors only. Make
all wiring connections in accordance with local,
national, and regional regulations. Do not exceed
the actuators electrical ratings.

Disconnect power supply before making
electrical connections. Contact with
components carrying hazardous voltage
can cause electric shock and may result
in severe personal injury or death.
Do not apply power to the system before
checking all wiring connections. Short
circuited or improperly connected wires
may result in permanent damage to the
equipment.

Use the M9000-51x Series Valve Linkage Kits to field
mount Johnson Controls M9106 and M9100 Series
Non-Spring Return and M9206, M9210, and M9220
Series Spring Return Electric Actuators to
Johnson Controls VG1000 Series Ball Valves.
The dual centering bearing design of the linkage

maintains accurate stem alignment, eliminating side
loading on the valve stem and improving stem seal
positioning to ensure longer seal life. The linkage kit
venting and overall height, as well as piping insulation,
minimize heat transfer to the electric actuator in higher
temperature fluid applications.
See Table 2 for a list of valid ball valve, electric

actuator, and linkage kit combinations for assembly in
the field. See Table 3 for information about proper
linkage to discontinued valve models.
Table 2: Valid Ball Valve, Electric Actuator, and Linkage Kit Combinations for Field Assembly
Valve Size,
in. (DN)
Valve Code Number
Actuator Base
Number1
Linkage Kit Code

Number
Optional
Weathershield
1/2 (DN15)
VG1241Ax, VG1245Ax,
VG1271Ax, VG1275Ax,
VG1291Ax, VG1295Ax,
VG1841Ax, VG1845Ax
M9108
M9000-516
M9000-330
M9210
M9000-517
M9000-340
VG1241Bx, VG1245Bx,
VG1271Bx, VG1275Bx,
VG1291Bx, VG1295Bx,
VG1841Bx, VG1845Bx
M9108
M9000-516
M9000-330
M9210
M9000-517
M9000-340
VG1241Cx, VG1245Cx,
VG1271Cx, VG1275Cx,
VG1291Cx, VG1295Cx,
VG1841Cx, VG1845Cx,
M9108
M9000-516
M9000-330
M9210
M9000-517
M9000-340
VG1241Dx, VG1245Dx,
VG1841Dx, VG1845Dx
M9108
M9000-516
M9000-330
M9210
M9000-517
M9000-340
VG1241Ex, VG1245Ex,
VG1841Ex, VG1845Ex
M9108
M9000-516
M9000-330
M9210
M9000-517
M9000-340
VG1241Fx, VG1245Fx,
VG1841Fx, VG1845Fx
M9116
M9000-516
M9000-330
M9210
M9000-517
M9000-340
VG12A5Gx, VG18A5Gx
M9124
M9000-518
M9000-330
M9220
M9000-519
M9000-340
M9124
M9000-518
M9000-330
M9220
M9000-519
M9000-340
M9124
M9000-518
M9000-330
M9220
M9000-519
M9000-340
3/4 (DN20)
1 (DN25)
1-1/4 (DN32)
1-1/2 (DN40)
2 (DN50)
2-1/2 (DN65)
3 (DN80)
4 (DN100)
1.
VG12A5Hx, VG18A5Hx
VG12A5Jx, VG18A5Jx
M9100 Series are Non-Spring Return Actuators; M9210 and M9220 Series are Spring-Return Actuators.
Table 3: Linkages for Discontinued Series Ball Valves (Part 1 of 2)

Valve Code Number
Actuator Base Number
1/2 (DN15)
VG1243Ax, VG1644AB
M9106
M9000-514
M9206
M9000-515
M9108
M9000-516
3/4 (DN20)
VG1243Bx
VG1644BB
M9106
M9000-514
M9206
M9000-515
M9108
M9000-516
M9108
M9000-516
M9210
M9000-517
Table 3: Linkages for Discontinued Series Ball Valves (Part 2 of 2)

Valve Code Number
Actuator Base Number
1 (DN25)
VG1243Cx, VG1243Dx
M9116
M9000-516
M9220
M9000-517
1-1/4 (DN32)
VG1644CB, VG1644DB
M9116
M9000-518
M9220
M9000-519
M9124
M9000-518
1-1/2 (DN40)
VG1243EC
Dimensions
For dimensions, see Figure 2 for the M9100 Series
Non-Spring Return actuated VG1243 Series Two-Way
Ball Valves. See Table 4 for specific model dimensions.

Actuator Only: 3-1/2 in. (89 mm)
Actuator and Bracket Assembly: 1 in. (25 mm)
4-7/32
(107)
3-29/32
(99)
4-3/4
(121)
FIG:M9100-VG1243_Dimensions
G
E
Figure 2: Actuated Ball Valve Dimensions, in. (mm)

Table 4: M9106 Actuated VG1243 Series Ball Valve Dimensions, in. (mm)
Valve Size,
in. (DN)1
1/2 (DN15)
1.
A
7-3/16 (183)
B
21/32 (17)
1-15/32 (37)
9/32 (7)
7-1/32 (179)
1-11/32 (34)
G
2-5/8 (67)
All reduced port models feature a black arrow on the bottom of the valve outlet indicating the direction of flow for proper
piping. Pipe all other models in either direction.
For dimensions, see Figure 3 for the Non-Spring

Return M9100 Series actuated valves: the
VG1243 Series Two-Way and the VG1644 Series
Three-Way Ball Valves. See Table 5 for specific model
dimensions.

Actuator Only: 3-1/2 in. (89 mm)
E
3-29/32
(99)
5-23/32
(145)
A
D
Two-Way Valve
B
Three-Way Valve
FIG:M9100-VG1243-VG1644_Dimensions
Three-Way Valve
Two-Way Valve

Table 5: M9100 Actuated VG1243 and VG1644 Series Ball Valve Dimensions, in. (mm)
Valve Size,
in. (DN)1
1/2 (DN15)
7-3/16
(183)
21/32
(17)
1-7/16
(37)
9/32
(7)
7-1/32
(179)
1-11/32
(34)
2-5/8
(67)
2-7/8
(73)
1-7/16
(37)
25/32
(20)
3/4 (DN20)
7-1/4
(184)
25/32
(20)
1-17/32
(39)
9/32
(7)
7-5/32
(182)
1-15/32
(37)
3
(76)
3-5/32
(80)
1-9/16
(40)
7/8
(22)
1 (DN25)
7-21/32
(194)
31/32
(25)
1-15/16
(49)
11/32
(9)
7-7/32
(183)
1-1/2
(38)
3-11/32
(85)
3-3/4
(95)
1-7/8
(48)
1
(25)
1-1/4 (DN32)
7-13/16
(198)
1-5/32
(29)
2-1/16
(52)
11/32
(9)
7-9/16
(192)
1-13/16
(46)
3-21/32
(93)
4-13/32
(112)
2-3/16
(56)
1-7/32
(31)
1-1/2 (DN40)
8-3/8
(213)
1-13/32
(36)
2-21/32
(67)
7/16
(11)
7-25/32
(198)
2-3/32
(53)
4-1/8
(105)
4-7/8
(124)
2-7/16
(62)
1-15/32
(37)
1.
For dimensions, see Figure 4 for the Spring Return

M9206 Series actuated valves, which work with both
the VG1243 Series Two-Way and the VG1644 Series
Three-Way Ball Valves. See Table 6 for specific model
dimensions.

Actuator Only: 4 in. (102 mm)
E
3-1/4
(83)
A
D
G
B
Two-Way Valve
Three-Way Valve
Two-Way Valve
Three-Way Valve
FIG:-M9206-VG1243-VG1688_Dimensions

Table 6: M9206 Actuated VG1243 and VG1644 Series Ball Valve Dimensions, in. (mm)
Valve Size,
in. (DN)1
A2
E3
1/2 (DN15)
7-19/32
(193)
11/16
(17)
1-7/16
(37)
9/32
(7)
7-3/16
(183)
1-7/16
(37)
2-7/8
(73)
5-3/4
(146)
25/32
(20)
3/4 (DN20)
7-11/16
(195)
25/32
(20)
1-17/32
(39)
9/32
(7)
7-1/4
(184)
1-1/24
(38)
34
(76)
5-3/4
(146)
1.
2.
3.
4.
For valve assemblies with M9206-xxx-2S Series Actuators, subtract 19/32 in. (15 mm) from Dimension A (Column A).
Add 1-11/32 in. (34 mm) for models with auxiliary switches.
Two-way actuator and valve assemblies only.
For dimensions, see Figure 5 for the Spring Return

M9210 Series actuated valves, which work with both
the VG1241 and VG1245 Series Two-Way and the
VG1841 and VG1845 Series Three-Way Ball Valves.
See Table 7 for specific model dimensions.

4-1/2 in. (114 mm)
E
4-9/16
(116)
7-11/16
(195)
A
D
D
Two-Way Valve
Three-Way Valve
Two-Way Valve
Three-Way Valve
FIG:M9210-VG124x-VG184x_Dimensions
Figure 5: M9210 Actuated Ball Valve Dimensions, in. (mm)

Table 7: M9210 Actuated VG1241, VG1245, VG1841, and VG1845 Series Ball Valve Dimensions, in. (mm)
Valve Size,
in. (DN)1
2 (DN50)
1.
A
8-1/32
(204)
B
1-15/32
(37)
C
2-1/8
(54)
D
11/32
(9)
E
9-13/16
(249)
F
2-5/32
(55)
G
4-27/32
(123)
H
2-27/64
(62)
On models with the flow-characterizing disk, the disk is located in Port A (as indicated on the valve body). Port A must be the
inlet.
On the right-hand figure, see the combination of the

M9220 Series Spring Return Actuators with
VG12A5xx Series Two-Way Ball Valves. See Table 8
for specific model dimensions for both combinations.
A
FIG:VG12A5x-M9124
FIG:VG12A5x-M9220
For two-way valve dimensions, see Figure 6. On the

left-hand figure, see the combination of the M9124
Series Non-Spring Return Actuators with
VG12A5xx Series Two-Way Ball Valves.
B
C
Figure 6: Two-Way Ball Valves with Actuators

Table 8: VG12A5xx Series Two-Way Flanged Ball Valves with Actuators; Dimensions, in. (mm)
Valve Size,
in. (DN)
2-1/2 (DN65)
3.50 (88.9)
5.71 (145)
11.42 (290)
3 (DN80)
3.75 (95.3)
6.10 (155)
12.20 (310)
4 (DN100)
4.50 (114)
6.89 (175)
13.77 (350)
D
M9124
M9220
8.89 (226)
9.64 (245)
For two-way valve dimensions with the appropriate

field installed M9000-340 weathershields, see Figure 7.
On the left-hand figure, see the combination of the
M9124 Series Non-Spring Return Actuators with
VG12A5xx Series Two-Way Ball Valves.
On the right-hand figure, see the M9220 Series

Spring Return Actuators with the VG12A5xx Series
Two-Way Ball Valves. See Table 9 for specific model
dimensions for both combinations.
AB
AB
FIG-VG125Ax_m9220-WS
FIG-VG125Ax-M9124_WS
Figure 7: Two-Way Ball Valves with Actuators and Weathershields

Table 9: VG12A5xx Series Two-Way Flanged Ball Valve with Actuators and Weathershields;
Valve Size,
in. (DN)
2-1/2 (DN65)
3.50 (88.9)
3 (DN80)
3.75 (95.3)
6.10 (155)
12.20 (310)
4 (DN100)
4.50 (114)
6.89 (175)
13.77 (350)
10
5.71 (145)
C
11.42 (290)
D
M9124
M9220
9.07 (230)
10.25 (260)
For three-way valve dimensions, see Figure 8. On the

left-hand figure, see the combination of the M9124
Series Non-Spring Return Actuators with
VG18A5xx Series Three-Way Ball Valves.

M9220 Series Spring Return Actuators with
VG18A5xx Series Three-Way Ball Valves. See
Table 10 for specific model dimensions for both
combinations.
FIG-VG185Ax-M9220
FIG-VG185Ax-M9124
A
B
Figure 8: Three-Way Ball Valves with Non-Spring Return Actuators and Weathershields
Table 10: VG18A5xx Series Three-Way Flanged Ball Valves with Actuators; Dimensions, in. (mm)
Valve Size,
in. (DN)
D
M9124
M9220
2-1/2 (DN65)
3.50 (88.9)
5.71 (145)
11.42 (290)
3 (DN80)
3.75 (95.3)
6.10 (155)
12.20 (310)
6.26 (159)
4 (DN100)
4.50 (114)
6.89 (175)
13.77 (350)
7.05 (179)
8.89 (226)
F
9.64 (2456)
5.87 (149)
11
For three-way valves with the appropriate field installed

M9000-340 weathershield dimensions, see Figure 9.
On the left-hand figure, see the combination of the
M9124 Series Non-Spring Return Actuators with the
VG18A5xx Series Three-Way Ball Valves.
FIG:VG18A5xx-M9220_WS
FIG-VG1000-1109

M9220 Series Spring Return Actuators with the
VG18A5xx Series Three-Way Ball Valves. See
Table 11 for specific model dimensions for both
combinations.
Figure 9: Three-Way Ball Valves with Spring Return Actuators and Weathershields;
Table 11: VG18A5xx Series Two-Way Flanged Ball Valve with Weathershield Dimensions, in. (mm)
Valve Size,
in. (DN)
D
M9124
M9220
2-1/2 (DN65)
3.50 (88.9)
5.71 (145)
11.42 (290)
3 (DN80)
3.75 (95.3)
6.10 (155)
12.20 (310)
6.26 (159)
4 (DN100)
4.50 (114)
6.89 (175)
13.77 (350)
7.05 (179)
Repair Information
If the M9000-51x Series Valve Linkage Kit fails to
operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a
12
9.07 (230)
F
10.25 (260)
5.87 (149)
M9000-51x Series Ball Valve Linkage Kits
Hot Water, Chilled Water, 50/50 Glycol Solutions, and Low Pressure Steam
Service1
Maximum Actuator
Fluid Temperature
Limits
284F (140C)

Maximum Steam
Service2
Minimum Ambient
Operating
Temperature
15 psig saturated
steam
250F (121C)
25 psig saturated
steam
267F (30C)
-40F (-40C)

-22F (-30C)
-4F (-20C)

Maximum Ambient
Operating
Temperature
122F (50C)

131F (55C)
Enclosure
Material

NEMA 3R, IP32
M9000-5xx
Bracket:
Aluminum
Anti-Rotation Slider: 1018 Steel
Shipping Weight
1.
2.
Drive Shaft:
12L14 Steel
Standoff:
Thermoplastic Resin
Thermo-Isolator:
PTFE (Polytetrafluoroethylene)
1.5 lb (0.68 kg)
Refer to VDI 2035 Standard for proper water treatment.

In steam applications, install the valve with the stem horizontal to the piping, and wrap the valve and piping with insulation.
Building Efficiency

Published in U.S.A.
13
Product Bulletin
Issue Date
M9000-520
May 1, 2005
The M9000-520 Ball Valve Linkage Kit is designed

M9106 and M9109 Series Non-Spring Return, and
M9206 Series Spring Return Electric Actuators to
Johnson Controls VG1241, VG1245, VG1841, and
VG1845 Series Ball Valves. The use of
glass-reinforced thermoplastic resin provides superior
thermal isolation between the valve and actuator,
minimizing heat transfer in higher fluid temperature
applications and preventing condensation in chilled
water applications.
Figure 1: M9000-520 Ball Valve Linkage Kit Is
Used to Field Mount Johnson Controls
M9000 Series Electric Actuators to
Johnson Controls VG1000 Series Ball Valves
Glass-Reinforced
Thermoplastic Resin
Two-Position Anti-rotation
Slider
Provides superior thermal isolation between

the valve and actuator, and meets
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) 94 5V
Flame Class Rating
Allows one linkage kit to accommodate both
spring return and non-spring return electric
actuators
Multi-position Setup
Allows the actuator and linkage kit assembly

to be positioned in 90 increments, relative to
the ball valve, facilitating installation in
confined locations
Manual Handle for
Allows manual positioning of the actuator

when power is disengaged
Non-spring Return
Applications
Installation Requires
Facilitates quick and easy installation
No Special Tools

1

Use the M9000-520 Valve Linkage Kit to field mount
Johnson Controls M9106 or M9109 Series Non-Spring
Return, and M9206 Series Spring Return Electric
Actuators to Johnson Controls VG1241, VG1245,
VG1841, and VG1845 Series Ball Valves. The use of
glass-reinforced thermoplastic resin and the height of
the linkage kit allow for the use of pipe insulation that
minimizes heat transfer to the actuator. In chilled water
applications, the use of thermoplastic resin also
prevents condensation. Use the manual handle
supplied with the linkage kit to manually position the
non-spring return electric actuators when power is off
and the actuator gears are disengaged.
Product Guidelines
IMPORTANT:
In steam applications, install the
actuator.
clearance for actuator removal (as illustrated in
Figure 2 and Figure 3).
Before installing the electric actuator, use an
adjustable wrench to manually rotate the valve stem
several times. Rotating the valve stem breaks the
torque that may have built up during long-term
storage.
Wire all electrically actuated VG1000 Series Ball
Valves in accordance with applicable electrical code
requirements. Wire the input lines to the electric
actuator correctly so that the valve moves in the
proper direction.
IMPORTANT:
Protect the actuator from
dripping water, condensation, and other moisture.
Water or moisture could result in an electrical short,
which may damage or affect the operation of the
actuator.
IMPORTANT:
Do not cover the actuator with
overheat it.
On reduced port models, the flow-characterizing disk

is located in Port A. Port A must be the inlet.
Ball Valves to control the flow of fluids other than
those outlined in the Technical Specifications table at
the end of this document.
IMPORTANT:
Take care to prevent foreign
material such as weld slag, thread burrs, metal
seat leakage. If the debris become embedded in the
seats, subsequent flushing and filtering of the piping
system with the valve installed does not remedy the
problem.
For more detailed installation information, refer to the
M9000-520 Ball Valve Linkage Kit Installation
For proper actuator wiring and commissioning
instructions, refer to the following documentation:

(Part No. 34-636-1085)

(Part No. 34-636-1190)

M9206-Bxx-2S Series On/Off Electric Spring

(Part No. 34-1280-122)
M9206-AGx-2S Series Floating Electric Spring

(Part No. 34-1280-238)
M9206-GGx-2S Series Proportional Electric

Spring Return Actuators Installation Instructions
(Part No. 34-1280-246)
Servicing the Actuator or Piping System

system:
Code
Number
Description

servicing
M9000-600
Anti-rotation slider; includes bracket,

carriage screw, split lock washer, flat
washer, and wing nut
M9000-601
Mounting screws and nuts; includes

four M5 (5 mm) x 16 mm machine screws
and four M5 (5 mm) serrated washer head
nuts
M9000-602
Drive shaft
M9000-603
Manual handle; includes handle and a

No. 4 thread-forming PLASTITE screw
M9206-602
M9206 hub locking clip
M9206-604
New hub designed to accommodate older

M9206 actuators to M9000-520 linkage
IMPORTANT:
Use copper conductors only.
Make all wiring connections in accordance with
local, national, and regional regulations. Do not
exceed the actuators electrical ratings.

Disconnect power supply before making electrical
connections. Contact with components carrying
hazardous voltage can cause electric shock and
may result in severe personal injury or death.

Do not apply power to the system before checking
all wiring connections. Short circuited or improperly
connected wires may result in permanent damage to
the equipment.
IMPORTANT:
The M9000-520 Ball Valve
Linkage Kits are intended to control saturated
steam, hot water, and chilled water flow under
normal equipment operating conditions. Where
failure or malfunction of the M9000-520 Ball Valve
Linkage Kit could lead to personal injury or property
damage to the controlled equipment or other
property, additional precautions must be designed
into the system. Incorporate and maintain other
against, failure or malfunction of the M9000-520 Ball
Valve Linkage Kit.
IMPORTANT:
Do not attempt to manually
rotate the drive shaft while the actuator is installed
without first releasing the actuator gears. Manually
rotating the drive shaft without releasing the actuator
gears may result in permanent damage to the
actuator.

3-1/2 in. (89 mm)
4-7/32
(107)
3-29/32
(100)
7-27/32
(199)
C
B
E
D
Two-Way Valve
Two-Way Valve
Three-Way Valve
Three-Way Valve
Figure 2: Non-Spring Return M9106 or M9109 Actuated VG1241, VG1245, VG1841, and VG1845 Series Ball
Valve with M9000-520 Linkage Dimensions, in. (mm) (See Table 2.)
Table 2: M9106 or M9109 Actuated VG1241, VG1245, VG1841, and VG1845 Series Ball Valve with
Valve Size,
in. (DN)*
1/2 (DN15)
6-19/64
(160)
21/32 (17)
1-7/32 (31)
6-49/64
(172)
2-33/64 (64)
11/32 (9)
1-1/4 (32)
3/4 (DN20)
6-19/64
(160)
21/32 (17)
1-7/32 (31)
6-29/32
(175)
2-51/64 (71)
11/32 (9)
1-13/32 (36)
1 (DN25)
6-3/8 (162)
3/4 (19)
1-19/64 (33)
7-13/64
(183)
3-13/32 (87)
11/32 (9)
1-11/16 (43)
1-1/4 (DN32)
6-13/16
(173)
1-1/32 (26)
1-23/32 (44)
7-15/32
(190)
3-15/16
(100)
11/32 (9)
2 (51)
1-1/2 (DN40)
6-31/32
(177)
1-9/64 (29)
1-57/64 (48)
7-43/64
(195)
4-21/64
(110)
11/32 (9)
2-1/8 (54)
2 (DN50)
7-11/64
(182)
1-15/32 (37)
2-1/16 (53)
7-59/64
(201)
4-27/32
(123)
11/32 (9)
2-9/16 (65)
* Add 1-11/32 in. (34 mm)


4 in. (102 mm)
7-1/4
(184) *
3-1/4
(83)
5-3/4
(146)
A
D
B
Two-Way Valve
Three-Way Valve
Two-Way Valve
Three-Way Valve
with M9000-520 Linkage Dimensions, in. (mm) (See Table 3.)
Table 3: M9206 Actuated VG1241, VG1245, VG1841, and VG1845 Series Ball Valve with M9000-520 Linkage
Valve Size,
in. (DN)*
A**
1/2 (DN15)
7-13/64 (183)
21/32 (17)
1-7/32 (31)
11/32 (9)
1-1/4 (32)
2-33/64 (64)
3/4 (DN20)
7-13/64 (183)
21/32 (17)
1-7/32 (31)
11/32 (9)
1-13/32 (36)
2-51/64 (71)
1 (DN25)
7-9/32 (185)
3/4 (19)
1-19/64 (33)
11/32 (9)
1-45/64 (43)
3-13/32 (87)
1-1/4 (DN32)
7-11/16 (195)
1-1/32 (26)
1-23/32 (44)
11/32 (9)
1-31/32 (50)
3-15/16 (100)
1-1/2 (DN40)
7-7/8 (200)
1-9/64 (29)
1-57/64 (48)
11/32 (9)
2-11/64 (55)
4-21/64 (110)
*
**
For valve assemblies with M9206-xxx-2S Series Actuators, subtract 19/32 (15 mm) from Dimension A (Column A).
Product
Valid Ball Valves
All VG1241, VG1245, VG1841, and VG1845 Series Ball Valves
Valid Actuators
1/2 through 1-1/2 in. Valves:
M9106-IGx-2 On/Off Floating Control with Timeout Non-Spring Return
M9206-AGx-2 Floating Control Spring Return
M9206-AGx-2S Floating Control Spring Return
M9206-BGx-2S On/Off (24 VAC) Control Spring Return
M9206-BAx-2S On/Off (120 VAC) Control Spring Return
M9206-GGx-2 Proportional Control Spring Return
M9206-GGx-2S Proportional Control Spring Return
2 in. Valves:
Service*

Ambient Operating
Temperature**
-40 to 250F (-40 to 121C) for M9000-520 Linkage

-4 to 125F (-20 to 52C) for M9106 and M9109 Series Actuators
-25 to 140F (-32 to 60C) for M9206 Series Actuators
Material
Glass-Reinforced Thermoplastic Resin; UL 94 5V Flame Class Rating
Dimensions
See Table 2 and Table 3.
Shipping Weight
1.5 lb (0.68 kg)
*
**

In steam applications, install the valve with the stem horizontal to the piping and wrap the valve and piping with
insulation.
Controls Group
P.O. Box 423
Milwaukee, WI 53201
Published in U.S.A.
Product Bulletin
Issue Date
M9106-xGx-2
08/31/01

The M9106-xGx-2 Series direct-mount electric
actuators operate on 24 VAC power and are available
for use with on/off, floating, or proportional controllers.
These non-spring return actuators are easily installed
on a Variable Air Volume (VAV) box, a damper with a
round shaft up to 1/2 inch (13 mm) in diameter, or a
square shaft up to 3/8 inch (10 mm).
The M9106 models have 53 lbin (6 Nm) running
torque. They have a nominal 60-second travel time for
90 of rotation at 60 Hz (72 seconds at 50 Hz) with a
load-independent rotation time.
The M9106-xGC-2 models are available with integral
auxiliary switches to perform switching functions at any
angle within the selected rotation range. GGx models
feature 0 to 10 VDC position feedback, and the
AGF models provide 10,000 ohm position feedback.
Figure 1: M9106-xGx-2 Non-spring Return Actuator
35 dBA Rating
Meets audible requirements for open ceilings
Synchronous Drive
Provides constant rotation time independent of load
Direct Shaft Mount with
Simplifies installation and provides 3-point shaft

gripping
Single-screw Coupler
Magnetic Clutch
Provides torque protection for the damper and actuator
Field-selectable Rotation
Replaces M9104, EDA-2040, and ATP-2040 actuators

and provides optimum rotation time for the specific
application
Time (IGx Models Only)
Jumper-selectable Rotation
Simplifies installation
Direction (GGx Models Only)
Adjustable Rotation Stops
Allow application versatility with 30 to 90 Clockwise

(CW) or Counterclockwise (CCW) rotation
1/2 in. NPT Threaded
Meets electrical code requirements and allows the use

of armored cable
Conduit Opening
Manual Gear Release
Simplifies setup and field adjustments
Output Position Feedback
Provides simple, closed-loop control with accurate

position sensing

1
Application
IMPORTANT:
This device is not designed or
intended to be used in or near environments where
explosive vapors or gases could be present, or
environments where substances corrosive to the
devices internal components could be present.
A controller provides a control signal to the actuator

depending upon the desired movement of the damper
blade. This signal causes the motor to rotate in the
proper direction and the damper blade to open or
close.
The M9106 actuators are used to position balancing,

control, round, and zone dampers in typical Heating,
Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) applications.
They are also used to position the blades in a
VAV box.
Note: To avoid excessive wear or drive time on the

motor for the AGx models, use a controller and/or
software that provides a time-out function to remove
the signal at the end of rotation (stall). The GGx and
IGx models have an auto shutoff to avoid excessive
wear or drive time on the motor.
The M9106 mounts directly on the duct surface, round

damper, or small rectangular damper with an
anti-rotation bracket and two sheet metal screws
(included). Additional linkages or couplers are not
required.
Refer to the damper or VAV box manufacturers
information to select the proper timing for the actuator.
Refer to the appropriate application note for specific
wiring diagrams and information.
Operation
IMPORTANT:
The M9106-xGx-2 Series
actuator is intended to control equipment under
normal operating conditions. Where failure or
malfunction of an M9106-xGx-2 actuator could lead
to an abnormal operating condition that could cause
personal injury or damage to the equipment or other
property, other devices (limit or safety controls), or
systems (alarm or supervisory) intended to warn of,
or protect against, failure or malfunction of an
M9106-xGx-2 actuator must be incorporated into
and maintained as part of the control system.
4.0 Maximum
101.6
6.0 Maximum
152.4
Shaft
Dimensions
0.39
10
90
6 0 30 0
90
30
60
4.3
109
4.2 Maximum
106.5
Note: All dimensions are nominal
unless otherwise specified.
The actuator rotates at a nominal rate of 1.5 per

second (90 in 60 seconds) at 60 Hz input. The
actuator rotation is field adjustable from 30 to 90.
Determine the actual rotation time for actuators using
less than 90 rotation, and use that value with the
controller software. For example, 40 seconds is used
for 60 rotation.
The IGA and IGC models offer adjustable rotation
times of 1, 1.5, 2, 5.5 and 11 minutes (factory set for
1 minute). The 1-, 1.5-, and 2-minute settings are ideal
for on/off and floating applications, and replace the
M9104-xGx-2 1.5-minute models. The 5.5- and
11-minute settings are replacements for the 35 lbin
(4 Nm) EDA-2040 and the ATP-2040 models.
Dimensions
See Figure 2 for the actuator dimensions.
1.07
27.2
5.75
146
1.17
29.8
Shaft
Dimensions
0.39 to 0.50
10 to 12.7
Cover
Removal
1.7
45
2.68
68
1.75/44.45
Clearance
Required for
Cover Removal
1.88
48
2.13
54
Anti-rotation Bracket
Dimensions
Figure 2: Actuator and Anti-rotation Bracket Dimensions, in. (mm)
M9106-xGx-2 Series Electric Non-spring Return Actuators Product Bulletin
Repairs and Replacement
M9106-IGC-2
M9106-GGC-2
M9106-GGA-2
M9106-IGA-2
On/Off Control
Floating Control
Feedback
10,000 ohm Potentiometer
0 to 10 VDC Feedback
Adjustable Rotation Time
M9106-AGF-2
Contact the nearest Johnson Controls representative,

and specify the desired product code number from
Table 1 or Table 2.
M9106-xGx-2 Series
Electric Actuator
53 lbin (6 Nm)
M9106-AGC-2
Ordering Information
Table 1: Actuators
M9106-AGA-2
Field repairs must not be made. For a replacement or

an accessory, refer to the Ordering Information
section.
Table 2: Accessories
Product Code
Number
Description
CBL-2000-1*
20 in. (0.5 m) Wiring Harness, Underwriters Laboratories, Inc (UL) accepted for plenum use,
connects the M9106 and DPT-2015 to the VAV controller
CBL-2000-2
20 in. (0.5 m) plenum-rated Wiring Harness
CBL-2000-3
72 in. (1.8 m) plenum-rated Wiring Harness
DPT-2015-0*
0 to 1.5 in. W.C. (0 to 375 Pa) differential pressure transmitter
DMPR-KC003
Blade Pin Extension without Bracket supplied with Johnson Controls CD-1300 dampers and may
be ordered separately for all direct mount applications
DMPR-KC010**
Adjustable Blade Position Indicator Switch Kit with total switching load limited to 2000 VA for the
following applications:
Pilot Duty: 24 VAC, 50 VA; 125/250/277 VAC, 125 VA; Motor Load: 125/250/277 VAC, 1/3 hp;
Resistive Load: 125 VAC, 11 A; 250 VAC, 8 A; 277 VAC, 7 A (all maximum values)
DMPR-KR003
Sleeve Pin Kit for use with Johnson Controls round dampers with a 5/16 in. (8 mm) shaft; furnished
with the damper and may be ordered separately
M9000-105
M9000-106
M9000-160
M9000-200
Commissioning Tool provides a control signal to drive on/off, floating, proportional, or

resistive actuators.
M9000-512
Valve Linkage Kit for field mounting an M9106 actuator to a 1/2 in. 2-way VG1000 Series ball valve
Use with an M9106-AGC-2 actuator to replace an ATP-2040 actuator and an EDA-2040-102 switch kit.
Note: An external relay (not provided) is needed for line voltage auxiliary switching.
** Use with an M9106 actuator to replace an EDA-2040 or ATP-2040 actuator and an EDA-2040-102 switch kit when
line voltage switches are required and an external relay is not desired.
Technical Data
Product
Power Requirements
Input Signal
Input Signal Adjustments
Input Impedance
Feedback Signal

Mechanical Output
(Running Torque)
Cycles
Rotation Range
Rotation Time
Enclosure
Ambient Operating
Conditions
Ambient Storage
Conditions
Shipping Weight
Agency Compliance

AGx:
20 to 30 VAC at 50/60 Hz; 2.5 VA supply, Class 2
IGx:
GGx:
AGx and IGx:
20 to 30 VAC at 50/60 Hz
GGx:
AGx and IGx:
CW and COM Terminals, CW rotation;
CCW and COM Terminals, CCW rotation
Jumper Selectable:
0 (2) to 10 VDC or 0 (4) to 20 mA
Factory Setting:
Action is jumper selectable Direct (CW) or Reverse (CCW) with signal increase.
AGx:
200 ohms, nominal
IGx:
160 ohms, nominal
GGx:
Voltage Input, 150,000 ohms; Current Input, 500 ohms
AGF:
10,000 ohm potentiometer, 1 W
GGx:
0 to 10 VDC or 2 to 10 VDC for 90 (10 VDC at 1 mA);
xGC:
Two Single-Pole, Double-Throw (SPDT) switches rated at 24 VAC,
1.5 A inductive, 3.0 A resistive; 35 VA maximum per switch, Class 2
1-, 1.5-, and 2-minute settings:
53 lbin (6 Nm)
5.5- and 11-minute settings:
35 lbin (4 Nm)
100,000 full cycles; 2,500,000 repositions rated at 53 lbin (6 Nm)
35 dBA maximum at 1 m
Adjustable from 30 to 90, CW or CCW
IGx:
Adjustable with switch settings (Factory set for 1 minute.)
60, 90, 120, 330, or 660 seconds (1, 1.5, 2, 5.5, or 11 minutes) at 60 Hz;
and 72, 108, 144, 396, or 792 seconds
(1.2, 1.8, 2.4, 6.6, or 13.2 minutes) at 50 Hz
All Other Models: Nominal 60 seconds at 60 Hz and 72 seconds at 50 Hz for 90
1/4 in. spade terminals (To order optional pluggable terminal blocks, see Table 2.)
3/8 to 1/2 in. (10 to 12.7 mm) round shaft or 3/8 in. (10 mm) square shaft
NEMA 2, IP32
IGx:
All Other Models: -40 to 176F (-40 to 80C); 90% RH maximum, non-condensing
5.9 x 4.2 x 2.64 in. (150.1 x 106.5 x 67.0 mm)
2.4 lb (1.08 kg)
Controls Group
P.O. Box 423
Milwaukee, WI 53201
Printed in U.S.A.
Product Bulletin
Issue Date
M9206
08/31/01

The M9206 Series direct-mount, spring return electric
actuators operate on 24 VAC or VDC power and are
available for use with on/off, floating, or proportional
controllers. These bidirectional actuators do not require
a damper linkage, and are easily installed on a damper
with a round shaft up to 1/2 in. (12.7 mm) diameter or a
square shaft up to 3/8 in. (10 mm). They may also be
mounted to ball valves using an M9000-51x linkage kit.
The M9206 models deliver 53 lbin (6 Nm) of torque.
The angle of rotation is mechanically adjustable.
Integral line voltage auxiliary switches are available to
indicate end-stop position or to perform switching
functions within the selected rotation range. Position
feedback is provided on proportional models through a
proportional DC voltage signal.
Figure 1: M9206 Electric Spring Return Actuator
Automatic Stroke
Calibration at Installation
0 (2) to 10 VDC, 6 to 9 VDC,

or 0 (4) to 20 mA Input
Self adjusts, reducing installation time and

cost
Eliminates the need for an externally wired
500 ohm resistor
Reversible Mounting Design
Provides Clockwise (CW) or Counterclockwise

(CCW) return-to-normal positioning if a power
loss occurs
Electronic Stall Detection
Increases actuator life by deactivating the

actuator motor when an overload is detected
Throughout Entire Range
Removable Coupler
Allows actuator stroke adjustment and/or

adapts to a shorter damper shaft
1/2 in. Conduit Connector
Meets local code requirements for wiring and

allows easy field wiring on retrofit jobs
with 48 in. Wire Leads
Auxiliary Switches
(Optional)
20 VDC at 25 mA Power
Supply Output (Optional)

Provide adjustable switch points with line

voltage capability, including pilot duty rating
Provides power for external devices, making
the actuator an ideal replacement for many
competing products
1
Application
Operation
M9206 actuators are designed to position air dampers

and valves in Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning
(HVAC) systems. Applications include:
positioning return air, exhaust, or outdoor air

dampers
positioning valves when used with a ball valve

linkage
IMPORTANT:
The M9206 Series actuator is
intended to control equipment under normal
operating conditions. Where failure or malfunction of
an M9206 could lead to an abnormal operating
condition that could cause personal injury or damage
to the equipment or other property, other devices
(limit or safety controls) or systems (alarm or
supervisory) intended to warn of, or protect against,
failure or a malfunction of an M9206 must be
incorporated into and maintained as part of the
control system.
Refer to the manufacturers information to properly size

the damper, valve, and/or actuator.

24 VDC. They use a stepper motor with stall detection
circuitry that operates throughout the entire stroke.
The proportional actuators employ noise-filtering
techniques on the control signal to eliminate
repositioning due to line noise.
IMPORTANT:

end-stops. An anti-rotation bracket prevents lateral
movement of the actuator.
Dimensions
Refer to Figure 2 for actuator dimensions.
1.8 Set Screw
46.6 Clearance
Radius
2.82
71.6
1.24
31.4
2.55
2.50
1.27 63.6
32.2
0.96
24.3
6.98
177.3
3.03 64.8
77.0
4.91
124.6
4.25
107.9
0.64
16.3
0.10
2.6
6.13
155.6
7.36
186.9
7.83
198.8
1.34
34 Maximum
3.25
82.6
Conduit adaptor is only

present on AGC and
GGC models.
3.68
93.6
3.58
91.0
1.58
40.0
2.62
66.6
3.13
79.4
4.87
123.8
4.62
117.4
5.39
137.0
Bottom View
M9206 Series Electric Spring Return Actuators Product Bulletin
2.10
53.4
1.69
42.8
On/Off Control
Floating Control
M9206-GGC-2MP
M9206-GGC-2
M9206-GGA-2
M9206-GGA-2MP
M9206-BGA-2
M9206-BGC-2
M9206-AGC-2MP
M9206 Series
Electric Spring
Return Actuator
M9206-AGC-2

Table 1 or Table 2.
53 lbin (6 Nm)
M9206-AGA-2
Table 1: Actuators
M9206-AGA-2MP
Field repairs must not be made. To order a

replacement or an accessory, refer to the Ordering
Information section.
Feedback
0 (2) to 10 or 6 to 9 VDC
Power Supply Output

20 VDC at 25 mA
* May be wired for two-wire, on/off control.
Product Code
Number
Description
DMPR-KR003*
Sleeve Pin Kit for Johnson Controls round dampers with a 5/16 in. diameter shaft
DMPR-KC003*
Blade Pin Extension without Bracket for Johnson Controls CD-1300 direct-mount applications
M9000-156
Mounting Kit for retrofitting a number of Honeywell economizer damper actuator installations;
provides for remote-mount, linkage-driven application of M9204 and M9206 actuators with
existing linkages
M9000-157
Universal Mounting Kit provides for remote-mount, linkage-driven application of M9204 and
M9206 actuators in a new or retrofit damper and actuator assembly.
M9000-161
M9000-200
Commissioning Tool provides a control signal to drive on/off, floating, proportional, or resistive
actuators.
M9000-513
Valve Linkage Kit for field mounting an M9206 actuator to 1/2 and 3/4 in. 2-way and 1/2 in. 3-way
VG1000 Series ball valves
M9206-600
Repair Kit includes a coupler, set screw, and locking clip for mounting an M9206 actuator to a
3/8 to 1/2 in. (10.0 to 12.7 mm) round shaft or a 3/8 in. (10 mm) square shaft.
M9206-601
Repair Kit includes a coupler, set screw, and locking clip for mounting an M9206 actuator to a
3/8 to 5/8 in. (10 to 16 mm) round shaft or a 3/8 to 9/16 in. (10 to 14 mm) square shaft.
M9206-602
Locking Clip for the M9206 actuator coupler (bag of 5)
Y65A13-0
Y65S13-0
Furnished with the damper and may be ordered separately.
Technical Data
Product M9206 Series Electric Spring Return Actuators
Power Requirements 20 to 30 VAC at 50/60 Hz or 24 VDC 10%, Class 2,
16 VA supply at 32 to 140F (0 to 60C)
22 VA supply at -22 to 32F (-30 to 0C)
25 VA supply at -40 to -22F (-40 to -30C)
Input Signal AGx: 20 to 30 VAC at 50/60 Hz or 24 VDC 10%, 4.8 mA
AGx and BGx (On/Off):
20 to 30 VAC at 50/60 Hz or 24 VDC 10%,
533 mA at 32 to 140F (0 to 60C)
733 mA at -22 to 32F (-30 to 0C)
833 mA at -40 to -22F (-40 to -30C)
GGx: 0 (2) to 10 VDC, 6 to 9 VDC, or 0 (4) to 20 mA
Input Signal Adjustments GGx (Voltage Input or Current Input):
Factory Setting:
Switch Selectable: 0 (2) to 10 VDC, 6 to 9 VDC, or 0 (4) to 20 mA
Direction of Action: Switch selectable direct or reverse with signal increase
Input Impedance GGx: Voltage Input, 200,000 ohms; Current Input, 500 ohms
Feedback Signal GGx: 0 (2) to 10 VDC for 90 (10 VDC at 2 mA) or 6 to 9 VDC
Corresponds to input signal selection and also rotation limits
Power Supply Output 17 to 22 VDC at 25 mA (-2MP models)
Auxiliary Switch Rating xGC Models:
Two Single-Pole, Double-Throw (SPDT), double insulated switches
Rating per Switch: 24 VAC, 50 VA pilot duty
Spring Return Direction is selectable with the mounting position of the actuator:
CCW actuator face away from the damper for CCW spring return;
CW actuator face away from the damper for CW spring return
Mechanical Output Running Torque:
53 lbin (6 Nm)
Rotation Range Adjustable from 34.5 to 90, mechanically limited to 93
Rotation Time 90 seconds for 93 with 0 to 53 lbin (0 to 6 Nm)
Cycles 60,000 full stroke cycles; 1,500,000 repositions rated at 53 lbin (6 Nm)
Electrical Connection Actuator:
Auxiliary Switches:
Mechanical Connection 3/8 to 1/2 in. (10.0 to 12.7 mm) diameter round shaft
3/8 in. (10 mm) square shaft
Enclosure NEMA 2, IP42
Ambient Conditions Operating:
Storage:
Dimensions (H x W x D) xGC Models:
8.32 x 3.25 x 3.58 in. (211.3 x 82.6 x 91.0 mm) with conduit adaptor
All Other Models:
6.98 x 3.25 x 3.58 in. (177.3 x 82.6 x 91.0 mm)
Shipping Weight 3.45 lb (1.56 kg)
Agency Compliance UL 873 Listed, File E27734, CCN XAPX
CE Mark: EMC Directive 89/336/EEC; Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC
specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office. Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication
or misuse of its products.
Controls Group
P.O. Box 423
Milwaukee, WI 53201
Printed in U.S.A.
VA2202-xxx-2 Series Electric Spring Return Valve Actuators

Product Bulletin
Supersedes March 1, 2006
VA2202 Series Spring Return Electric Valve Actuators

are available in 24 VAC/VDC and 120 VAC ON/OFF
control, 24 VAC Floating Control, and 2 to 10 VDC
(4 to 20 mA) Proportional Control for use in Heating,
All models provide 18 lb.in (2 N.m) of output force and
feature a NEMA 2 (IP42) housing for indoor use.
Versions with a factory-installed Single Pole, Double
Throw (SPDT) auxiliary switch are available.
The VA2202 Series actuators are designed for easy
mounting in the field to 1/2 and 3/4 in.
Johnson Controls VG1000 Series Ball Valves. The
optional available auxiliary switch is adjustable from
5 to 95.
Figure 1: VA2202 Series Electric Valve Actuator

on VG1000 Series Ball Valve

Features
Benefits
Proportional, Floating and On/Off Control Models

Available
Allows the actuator to be used in wide range of applications

and optimal choice of control signal
Single Screw, Direct Mounting
Simplifies installation
Optional Auxiliary Switch Available
Provides independent verification of actuator position
Reversible Mounting Design
Simplifies setup of valve spring return position
Compact Design
Provides solution for limited-space applications
VA2202-xxx-2 Series Electric Spring Return Valve Actuators Product Bulletin
IMPORTANT: Use this VA2202 Series actuator

only as an operating control. Where failure or
malfunction of the VA2202 actuator could lead to
personal injury or property damage to the controlled
equipment or other property, additional precautions
must be designed into the control system.
Incorporate and maintain other devices such as the
supervisory or alarm systems or safety or limit
controls intended to warn of, or protect against,
failure or malfunction of the VA2202 actuator.
For CW spring return operation (see Figure 2 and

Table 3), mount the actuator so the CW face of the
actuator (gray side) is away from the valve as
illustrated in Figure 2. The actuator drives CCW and
spring returns CW.
0
Application
IMPORTANT: This device is not designed or

Counterclockwise (CCW) face

(Blue Side)
See Table 2 for information on control applications by

model.
Figure 2: Selecting the Spring-Return Direction
Table 2: Control Applications by Model

Model
Voltage
Control
Auxiliary
Switch
VA2202-AGA-2
24 VAC
Floating
No
VA2202-BAA-2
VA2202-BGB-2
VA2202-GGA-2
VA2202-GGB-2
120 VAC
On/Off
Side of Actuator Mounted away

from Valve
Blue Side
No
Gray Side
0
Yes
24 VAC/
VDC
No
Yes
Proportional,
2-10 VDC
Two-Way
Spring Return
open
Spring Return
closed
Three Way
Connect Port A
to Port C
Connect Port B to
Port C
No
Yes
Operation
For Counterclockwise (CCW) spring return operation
(see Figure 2 and Table 3), mount the actuator so the
CCW face of the actuator (blue side) is away from the
valve as illustrated in Figure 2. The actuator drives
Clockwise (CW) and spring returns CCW.
Valve Style
Yes
VA2202-BAB-2
VA2202-BGA-2
Table 3: Control Variations
VA2202-AGB -2
Clockwise (CW) Face

(Gray Side)
FIG:actuator_face
All actuators can be ordered factory assembled or

field-mounted to 1/2 and 3/4 in. VG1000 Series ball
valves.
Floating Control
VA2202-AGx-2 Series of actuators operate on 24 VAC
at 50/60 Hz. A switch on the actuator sets the direction
of travel. The actuator can be mounted to spring return
either clockwise or counterclockwise. See Table 3.
VA2202-AGx actuators have a rotation direction switch

on the cover as shown in Table 4. Switch position
indicates start point.
24 VAC Transformer
Common
BLK (1)
~
RED (2)
WHT (W3) ~
Line
Voltage
A
On/Off Control
VA2202-BGx-2 Series operate on 24 VAC at 50/60 Hz
or 24 VDC. VA2202-BAx-2 Series operate on
85 to 265 VAC at 50/60 Hz. The actuator can be
mounted to spring return either clockwise or
counterclockwise.
100 to 240 VAC
1 Neutral
Neutral - L1
ORN (W4) ~
B
Hot - L2
The indication of direction

is valid for switch position CW.
2 Hot
S1
S1
NC
NC
S2
S3
S3
NO
0o to 95o
NO
FIG:AGx_2
0o to 95o
FIG:BAx_2
S2
Auxiliary Switch
Auxiliary Switch
Figure 3: Floating Control (VA2202-AGx-2)

Table 4: Shaft Rotation with Floating Control
External
Switch
Positions
(See Figure 3)
Side of Actuator Mounted away

from Damper
Blue Side
Figure 4: On/Off Control (VA2202-BAx-2)

24 VAC Transformer
1 Common
Line
Voltage
2 + Hot
Gray Side
0
0
1
S1
NC
Position of
Rotation Direction Switch
B
(W4)
Auxiliary Switch
CCW
CCW
CW
Direction of Shaft Rotation

Open
Open
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
Closed
0o to 95o
NO
CW
Closed
S3
FIG:BGx_2
A
(W3)
S2
CCW
CW
CW
CCW
stop
stop
stop
stop
CW
CCW
CCW
CW
Figure 5: On/Off Control (VA2202-BGx-2)

VA2202-GGx-2 Series of actuators operate on 24 VAC
at 50/60 Hz or 24 VDC. The actuator can be wired to
response to either a 2 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA control
signal with a field supplied 500 ohm resistor and
position the valve in response to a control signal. The
actuator can be mounted to spring return either
clockwise or counterclockwise.
Not Recommended
Dimensions
24 VAC Transformer
WHT (3)
Y1 Input,
2 to 10V
500 ohm
0.25 W
Resistor

3-1/2 (89)
3-5/32 (80)
S1
NC
3-3/64 (77)
S2
0 to 95
NO
FIG:GGx_2
S3
Auxiliary Switch
Figure 6: Proportional Control (VA2202-GGx-2)
VA2202-GGx actuators have a rotation direction switch

on the cover as shown in Table 5. Switch position
indicates start point.
Table 5: Spring Return with Proportional Control

Signal
Side of Actuator Mounted Away

from Valve
Blue Side
Gray Side
E
Two-Way Valve
Three-Way Valve
Figure 7: Dimensions of VG1241, VG1245,

VG1841, and VG1845 Series Ball Valves
with VA2202 actuators, in. (mm), Front View
Position of
Rotation Direction Switch
D
FIG:side_dimensions
Control Signal
2 to 10 VDC
See Figure 7, Figure 8, and Table 6 for dimensions of

VG1241, VG1245, VG1841, and VG1845 Series Ball
Valves with VA2202 actuators.
BLK (1) Common

RED (2)
+ Hot
FIG:front_dimensions
Line
Voltage
6-9/32
(160)
CW
CCW
CCW
CW
Direction of Shaft Rotation

Increasing
Signal
(2 to 10 VDC or
4 to 20 mA)
Decreasing
Signal
(10 to 2 VDC or
20 to 4 mA)
CCW
CW
CW
CCW
CW
CCW
CCW
CW
E
Two-Way Valve
Three-Way Valve
Figure 8: Dimensions of VG1241, VG1245,

VG1841, and VG1845 Series Ball Valves
with VA2202 actuators, in. (mm), Side View
Table 6: Dimensions of VG1241, VG1245, VG1841,

and VG1845 Series Ball Valves
with VA2202 actuators, in. (mm)
Valve Size
in. (DN)1
1/2 (DN15)
VA2202-BAB-2
100 to 240 VAC 50/60 Hz, 2-Wire On/

Off Control, Spring Return with one
SPDT auxiliary switch
VA2202-BGA-2
24 VAC 50/60 Hz, or 24 VDC, 2-Wire

On/Off Control, Spring Return without
auxiliary switch
VA2202-BGB-2
24 VAC 50/60 Hz, or 24 VDC 2-Wire

On/Off Control, Spring Return with one
SPDT auxiliary switch
VA2202-GGA-2
2 to 10 VDC (4 to 20 mA) Proportional

Control, Spring Return without
auxiliary switch1
VA2202-GGB-2
2 to 10 VDC (4 to 20 mA) Proportional

Control, Spring Return with one SPDT
auxiliary switch*
3/4 (DN20)
4-1/4 (108)
11/16 (17)
1-1/4 (31)
6-3/4 (171)
6-13/16 (175)
2-9/16 (64)
2-13/16 (71)
3/8 (9)
1-1/4 (32)
1.
Table 7: VA2202 Series Actuator Models Available

(Part 2 of 2)
1-7/16 (36)
On models with the flow-characterizing disk, the disk is

located in Port A. Port A must be the inlet.
See Table 7 and Table 8 to order VA2202 Series
actuators and repair parts.
Table 7: VA2202 Series Actuator Models Available
(Part 1 of 2)
Code Number
Description
VA2202-AGA-2
24 VAC 3-Wire Floating Control,

Spring Return without auxiliary switch
VA2202-AGB-2
24 VAC 3-Wire Floating Control,

Spring Return with one SPDT auxiliary
switch
VA2202-BAA-2
100 to 240 VAC 50/60 Hz, 2-Wire On/

Off Control, Spring Return without
auxiliary switch
1.
Milliamp input signal requires field-furnished 500 ohm

resistor.

Code
Number
Description
M2000-500
Linkage Kit Complete, includes adapter

plate, coupler, lock washer, screw and
pointer
Table 9: VA2202 Series Electric Valve Actuators
Power Requirements
Input Signal
VA2202-AGx
24 VAC 20% at 50/60 Hz, 4 VA
VA2202-BAx
85 to 265 VAC at 50/60 Hz, 5 VA
VA2202-BGx
24 VAC 20% at 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC 10%, 5 VA
VA2202-GGx
24 VAC 20% at 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC 10%, 4 VA
VA2202-AGx-2
24 VAC 20% at 50/60 Hz
VA2202-Bxx-2
(See Power Requirements.)
VA2202-GGx-2
2 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA (with field furnished 500 ohm resistor)

Input Impedance
One SPDT, 3A @ 250 VAC, adjustable 0 to 95

VA2202-AGx
1,000 ohms (0.6 W)
VA2202-GGx
Voltage:100,000 ohms, (0.1 mA)

Current: 500 ohms (with field furnished 500 ohm 0.25 W minimum resistor)
VA2202-AGA-2
VA2202-GGA-2
Plenum cable, 36 inch, 18 AWG, 1/2 in. conduit connector
VA2202-BxA-2
Appliance cable, 36 inch, 18 AWG, 1/2 in. conduit connector
VA2202-BxB-2
VA2202-xGB-2
Two appliance cables, 36 inch, 18 AWG, 1/2 in. conduit connector

18 lb.in (2 N.m) minimum
Output Torque
Nominal Run Time
Powered
95 seconds maximum VA2202-AGx-2 and VA2202-GGx-2 models

75 seconds maximum VA2202-Bxx-2 models
Spring Return
25 seconds maximum: -4 to 122F (-20 to 50C),

60 seconds maximum at -22F (-30C) for VA2202-AGx-2 and
VA2202-GGx-2 models;
75 seconds maximum for VA2202-Bxx-2 models
Cycles
60,000 full stroke cycles; rated at 16 lb.in (2 N.m)
Enclosure
NEMA 2, IP42
Valve Fluid Temperature

Limits
0 to 212F (-18 to 100C)
Ambient Conditions
Compliance
Shipping Weight
Operating
-22 to 122F (-30 to 50C); 5 to 90% RH, noncondensing
Storage
-40 to 176F (-40 to 80C); 5 to 95% RH, noncondensing
United States
UL listed acc. to UL 60730-1, UL 60730-2-14 (XAPX)
Canada
cUL listed acc. to CAN/CSA C22.2 No.24 (XAPX7)
Europe
CE Mark, Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC), -xAx and -xxB models only
CE Mark, EMC Directive (89/336/EEC), all models
1.5 lb (0.7 kg)
Building Efficiency
Published in U.S.A.
VA9104-xGA-2S, -3S Series Electric Non-Spring Return

Valve Actuators
Product Bulletin

Supersedes May 8, 2007
The VA9104 Series Actuators are direct-mount,

non-spring return electric valve actuators that operate
on AC 24 V power. Use these synchronous
motor-driven actuators to provide accurate positioning
on Johnson Controls VG1000 Series DN15, DN20,
and DN25 (1/2, 3/4, and 1 in.) ball valves in Heating,
The VA9104 Series Electric Non-Spring Return
Actuators provide a running torque of 35 lbin (4 Nm).
The nominal travel time is 60 seconds at 60 Hz
(72 seconds at 50 Hz) for 90 of rotation.
Figure 1: VA9104 Series

Electric Non-Spring Return Actuator on VG1000
Series Ball Valve

Features
Benefits
35 dBA Nominal Audible Noise Rating
Meets the audible noise requirements for open ceiling environments:

whisper quiet operation will not disturb building occupants.
Synchronous Drive
Provides a constant rotation time that is independent of the load.
100,000 Cycle Rating
Provides years of trouble-free service.
Direct Mounting with Single Screw
Reduces installation time and cost.
Manual Override
Allows for manual positioning of the valve, independent of a power

supply.
Plenum Cable or Screw Terminal Electrical

Connections
Make wiring quick and easy while allowing for ceiling plenum
applications.
3/8 in. Flexible Metal Conduit Connector on

VA9104-xGA-2S Models
Simplifies installation and field wiring.
VA9104-xGA-2S, -3S Series Electric Non-Spring Return Valve Actuators

Product Bulletin
IMPORTANT: Use this VA9104 Series Electric

Non-Spring Return Actuator only to control
equipment under normal operating conditions.
Where failure or malfunction of the electric actuator
could lead to personal injury or property damage to
the controlled equipment or other property,
additional precautions must be designed into the
control system. Incorporate and maintain other
against, failure or malfunction of the electric
actuator.
IMPORTANT: Do not install or use this VA9104
Series Electric Non-Spring Return Actuator in or
near environments where corrosive substances or
vapors could be present. Exposure of the electric
actuator to corrosive environments may damage the
internal components of the device, and will void the
warranty.
Operation
When combined with a controller, the VA9104 Series
Electric Non-Spring Return Actuator provides reliable,
integrated ball valve control. An AC 24 V (AGx or IGx
models) or DC 0 (2) to 10 V (GGx models) input signal
from the controller to electric actuator causes the motor
to rotate in the proper direction and moves the ball
open or closed. When the controller stops sending the
input signal, the electric actuator remains in place.
motor for the AGx models, use a controller and/or
software that provides a timeout function at the end of
rotation (stall).
Repair Information
If the VA9104 Series Electric Non-Spring Return Valve
Actuator fails to operate within its specifications,
replace the unit. For a replacement electric actuator,
contact the nearest Johnson Controls representative.
IMPORTANT: Before specifying VA9104 Series

Electric Non-Spring Return Actuators for plenum
applications, verify acceptance of exposed plastic
materials in plenum areas with the local building
authority. Building codes for plenum requirements
vary by location. Some local building authorities
accept compliance to UL 1995, Heating and Cooling
Equipment, while others use different acceptance
criteria.
VA9104-xGA-2S, -3S Series Electric Non-Spring Return Valve Actuators Product Bulletin
Table 2: Electric Non-Spring Return Actuator Models
Code Number
Control Type
Input Signal
Power Requirements
VA9104-AGA-2S
Floating without
timeout
AC 19.2 to 30 V,
50/60 Hz
AC 24 V at 50/60 Hz, 2.3 VA
48 in. (1.2 m) UL 444 Type

CMP Plenum Rated cable
with 19 AWG (0.75 mm2)
conductors and .25 in.
(6 mm) ferrule ends
VA9104-AGA-3S
Floating without
timeout
AC 19.2 to 30 V,
50/60 Hz
AC 24 V at 50/60 Hz, 2.3 VA
M3 Screw Terminals
VA9104-GGA-2S
Proportional
DC 0 (2) to 10 V,
or (0) 4 to 20 mA1
AC 24 V at 50/60 Hz, 3.6 VA
48 in. (1.2 m) UL 444 Type

(6 mm) ferrule ends
VA9104-GGA-3S
Proportional
DC 0 (2) to 10 V,
or (0) 4 to 20 mA1
AC 24 V at 50/60 Hz, 3.6 VA
M3 Screw Terminals
VA9104-IGA-2S
Floating or On/Off
with timeout
AC 19.2 to 30 V,
50/60 Hz
AC 24 V at 50/60 Hz, 3.0 VA
48 in. (1.2 m) UL 444 Type

(6 mm) ferrule ends
VA9104-IGA-3S
Floating or On/Off
with timeout
AC 19.2 to 30 V,
50/60 Hz
AC 24 V at 50/60 Hz, 3.0 VA
M3 Screw Terminals
1.
Milliamp input requires field furnished 500 ohm resistor.
Table 3: Accessories (Order Separately)

Code Number
Description
M9000-200
Commissioning Tool that Provides a Control Signal to Drive 24 V On/Off, Floating, Proportional,
and/or Resistive Electric Actuators
M9000-550
Mounting Hardware Replacement kit
Dimensions
See Figure 2 for dimensions of the VA9104 Series
Actuated VG1241, VG1245, VG1841, and VG1845
Series Ball Valve. See Table 4 for specific model
linkage dimensions.

3-1/2 (89)
2-13/16
(71)
6-3/16
(157)
F
A
B
E
E
D
Two-Way Valve
Three-Way Valve
Two-Way Valve
Three-Way Valve
VA9104-xGA-2S ii02.cdr

Table 4: VA9104-xGx-xS Actuated VG1241, VG1245, VG1841, and VG1845 Series Ball Valve Dimensions,
in. (mm)
Valve Size,
in. (DN)1
1/2 (DN15)
3-7/8 (98)
21/32 (17)
1-7/32 (31)
5-7/64 (129)
2-33/64 (64)
11/32 (9)
1-1/4 (32)
3/4 (DN20)
3-7/8 (98)
21/32 (17)
1-7/32 (31)
5-7/32 (133)
2-51/64 (71)
11/32 (9)
1-13/32 (36)
1 (DN25)
3-15/16 (100)
3/4 (19)
1-19/64 (33)
5-9/16 (141)
3-13/32 (87)
11/32 (9)
1-11/16 (43)
1.
VA9104-xGA-2S, -3S Series Electric Non-Spring Return Valve Actuators (Part 1 of 2)
Power Requirements
Control Type
AC 24 V +25%/-20% at 50/60 Hz, 2.1 VA Supply, Class 2 or

Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV)
VA9104-AGA-xS
VA9104-GGA-xS
VA9104-IGA-xS
VA9104-xGA-2S, -3S Series Electric Non-Spring Return Valve Actuators (Part 2 of 2)

Input Signal
VA9104-AGA-xS
AC 24 V +25%/-20% at 50/60 Hz, Class 2 or SELV without Timeout
VA9104-GGA-xS
DC 0 (2) to 10 V or 0 (4) to 20 mA with Field Furnished 500 ohm Resistor
VA9104-IGA-xS
AC 24 V +25%/-20% at 50/60 Hz, Class 2 or SELV with Timeout
VA9104-AGA-xS
200 ohms Nominal
Control Input Impedance
VA9104-GGA-xS

Current Input: 500 ohms with Field Furnished 500 ohm Resistor
Running Torque
35 lbin (4 Nm)
Travel Time
Rotation Range
93 3, CW or CCW
Cycles
100,000 Full Stroke Cycles;

2,500,000 Repositions at Rated Running Torque


VA9104-xGA-2S
48 in. (1.2 m) UL 444 Type CMP Plenum Rated cable with 19 AWG
(0.75 mm2) conductors and .25 in. (6 mm) ferrule ends and connector for
3/8 in. (9.5 mm) flexible metal conduit
VA9104-xGA-3S
M3 Screw Terminals
VA9104-xGA-2S
NEMA 2, IP42
VA9104-xGA-3S
NEMA 1, IP40
Operating
Storage

(Actuator and Valve
Assembly)
Water

Steam
Not Rated for Steam Service
Compliance
North America
UL Listed, File E27734, CCN XAPX (United States) and

XAPX7 (Canada)
Enclosure
Ambient Conditions
23 to 203F (-5 to 95C)

-22 to 212F (-30 to 100C)
Actuator Housing is Plenum Rated per CSA C22.2 No. 236/UL 1995,
Heating and Cooling Equipment.
Shipping Weight
European Union
Australia and
New Zealand

1.25 lb (0.55 kg)
Controls Group
Milwaukee, WI 53202
Metasys is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.

All other marks herein are the marks of their respective owners.
Published in U.S.A.
5

Product Bulletin
VG1xA5x

The VG1000 Series Flanged Ball Valves are designed

primarily to regulate the flow of hot water, chilled water,
and 50% glycol solutions to the demand of a controller
in Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC)
systems. The valves come in sizes of 2-1/2, 3, and 4 in.
(DN65, DN80, and DN100). These American Society of
Mechanical Engineers (ASME) Class 150 flanged
valves come in both two- and three-way configurations.
Johnson Controls offers valve, linkage, and actuator
assemblies for factory or field mounting with either
spring return or non-spring return actuators.
Figure 1: VG1000 Series Ball Valves Shown with
Field Mounted M9000 Series Actuators
Features
Benefits
Closeoff Pressure Rating:

100 psi for Two-Way Valves
50 psi for Three-Way Valves
Provides tight shutoff.
300 Stainless Steel Ball and Stem

Assembly
Applies to systems with high temperature water (0 to 284F [-18 to 140C]) or

25 psi saturated steam.
500:1 Rangeability
Provides accurate control under all load conditions.
Provides equal percentage flow characteristics for best temperature control;

available in a wide array of Cv ranges to cover a broad variety of applications.

(EPDM) Double O-Ring Stem Seal
Offers tested leak-free operation for 200,000 cycles in iron-oxide contaminated

water.
Graphite-Reinforced
Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) Seats
Include 15% graphite-reinforced ball seals that last twice as long in iron-oxide
contaminated water when compared to virgin Teflon ball seats.
PTFE Thermal Spacer
Provides thermal isolation between the actuator and the valve.
Seats Backed with EPDM O-Rings
Maintain a constant seating force that compensates for expansion, contraction,

and seat wear without increasing operating torque.
Maintenance-Free Design
Performs without failure in excess of 200,000 full stroke cycles in iron-oxide

contaminated water.
Available with Factory-Mounted M9124

or M9220 Series Electric Actuators
Reduces field installation time and cost.
M9000-330 and M9000-340

Weathershields Available for Field
Installation
Protect the actuator from corrosion, rain, freezing rain, sleet, and snow.
VG1000 Series Flanged Ball Valves Product Bulletin
Table 2: Ordering Data
V G
Valve Global
1 2 1
Product Family
Forged Brass Ball Valve
Body Type and

Flow
Characteristic
2
8
Flange Type
ASME Class 150
Trim
Stainless Steel Ball and Stem, 300 Series
GS
Size and
Maximum Cv
Size
7 8
(kv = [Cv x 0.857]) GS =

GT =
GU =
3
2
4
A
=
=
Two-Way, with Equal Percentage Flow Characteristics

Three-Way Mixing with Equal Percentage In-line Port Flow
Characteristics and Linear Angle Port Flow Characteristics
5
5
6
HT
HU
HV
HW
Control Control Port Bypass Port Cv (kv)

Disk
Cv (kv)
(Three-Way Only)
=
=
=
=
JU =
JV =
+
Actuator
Mounting
9
9
2-1/2 in. (DN65) Yes

2-1/2 in. (DN65) Yes
2-1/2 in. (DN65) Yes
47 (40)
74 (63)
117 (100)
29 (25)
47 (40)
74 (63)
3 in. (DN80)
3 in. (DN80)
3 in. (DN80)
3 in. (DN80)
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
74 (63)
117 (100)
176 (150)
211 (180)
47 (40)
74 (63)
88 (75)
105 (90)
4 in. (DN100)
4 in. (DN100)
Yes
No
117 (100)
176 (150)
74 (63)
88 (75)
+ = Factory-Mounted Actuator
(Leave Fields 9 through 15 blank for valve without factory-mounted actuator)
Actuator Type
924 = M9124-xGx-2 Non-Spring Return
(Refer to Actuator 92N = M9220-xxx-3 Spring Opens
94N = M9220-xxx-3 Spring Closes
Bulletin)
10 11 12
G
Control Type
A
B
G
=
=
=
Floating, AC 24 V or DC 24 V Input
On/Off
Proportional: DC 0 (2) to 10 V or 0 (4) to 20 mA with field-furnished
500 ohm resistor
Supply Voltage
A
G
=
=
AC 120 V M9220-BAx-3 Only

AC 24 V
C Auxiliary Switch
= No Auxiliary Switch (all Models)

Feedback: DC 0(2) to 10 V (M9xxx-GGA Models Only)
= Two Auxiliary Switches
Feedback: DC 0(2) to 10 V (M9xxx-GGC Models Only)
13
G
14
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 = Field
V G1 2 A 5 GS + 9
Valve
N G G C
+ Actuator
Example: Ball valve, 2-1/2 in. (DN65), 47 Cv two-way, ASME Class 150 Flange,
stainless steel trim, with factory-mounted M9220-GGC-3 actuator, proportional (prop.)
control, AC 24 V supply, with feedback and two-way auxiliary switches.
Table 3: Flanged Stainless Steel Trim Ball Valves with Non-Spring Return Electric Actuators
Valve
Size,
in.
Cv
Closeoff
PSIG
AC 24 V
Without Switches
With Two Auxiliary Switches
On/Off (Floating)
DC 0 to 10 V Prop.
On/Off (Floating)
DC 0 to 10 V Prop.
M9124-AGA-2
M9124-GGA-2
M9124-AGC-2
M9124-GGC-2
VG12A5GS+924AGA
VG12A5GS+924GGA
VG12A5GS+924AGC
VG12A5GS+924GGC
Two-Way Non-Spring Return

VG12A5GS
2-1/2
47
100
VG12A5GT
74
VG12A5GT+924AGA
VG12A5GT+924GGA
VG12A5GT+924AGC
VG12A5GT+924GGC
VG12A5GU
117
VG12A5GU+924AGA
VG12A5GU+924GGA
VG12A5GU+924AGC
VG12A5GU+924GGC
VG12A5HT+924AGA
VG12A5HT+924GGA
VG12A5HT+924AGC
VG12A5HT+924GGC
VG12A5HT
74
100
VG12A5HU
117
VG12A5HU+924AGA
VG12A5HU+924GGA
VG12A5HU+924AGC
VG12A5HU+924GGC
VG12A5HV
176
VG12A5HV+924AGA
VG12A5HV+924GGA
VG12A5HV+924AGC
VG12A5HV+924GGC
VG12A5HW
211
VG12A5HW+924AGA
VG12A5HW+924GGA
VG12A5HW+924AGC
VG12A5HW+924GGC
VG12A5JU+924AGA
VG12A5JU+924GGA
VG12A5JU+924AGC
VG12A5JU+924GGC
VG12A5JV+924AGA
VG12A5JV+924GGA
VG12A5JV+924AGC
VG12A5JV+924GGC
VG18A5GS+924AGA
VG18A5GS+924GGA
VG18A5GS+924AGC
VG18A5GS+924GGC
VG12A5JU
VG12A5JV
117
100
176
Three-Way Non-Spring Return

VG18A5GS
2-1/2
47 / 29
50
VG18A5GT
74 / 47
VG18A5GT+924AGA
VG18A5GT+924GGA
VG18A5GT+924AGC
VG18A5GT+924GGC
VG18A5GU
117 / 74
VG18A5GU+924AGA
VG18A5GU+924GGA
VG18A5GU+924AGC
VG18A5GU+924GGC
VG18A5HT
VG18A5HT+924AGA
VG18A5HT+924GGA
VG18A5HT+924AGC
VG18A5HT+924GGC
VG18A5HU
117 / 74
VG18A5HU+924AGA
VG18A5HU+924GGA
VG18A5HU+924AGC
VG18A5HU+924GGC
VG18A5HV
176 / 88
VG18A5HV+924AGA
VG18A5HV+924GGA
VG18A5HV+924AGC
VG18A5HV+924GGC
VG18A5HW
211 / 105
VG18A5HW+924AGA
VG18A5HW+924GGA
VG18A5HW+924AGC
VG18A5HW+924GGC
VG18A5JU+924AGA
VG18A5JU+924GGA
VG18A5JU+924AGC
VG18A5JU+924GGC
VG18A5JV+924AGA
VG18A5JV+924GGA
VG18A5JV+924AGC
VG18A5JV+924GGC
VG18A5JU
VG18A5JV
74 / 47
117 / 74
50
50
176 / 88
Table 4: Flanged Stainless Steel Trim Ball Valves with Spring Return Electric Actuators (Part 1 of 2)
Valve
Size,
in.
Cv
Closeoff
PSIG
AC 24 V
AC 120 V
Floating
DC 0 to 10 V Prop.
On/Off
On/Off
M9220-AGA-3
M9220-GGA-3
M9220-BGA-3
M9220-BAA-3
Two-Way Spring Return Valve Open (Normally Open) without Switches

VG12A5GS
2-1/2
47
100
VG12A5GS+92NAGA
VG12A5GS+92NGGA
VG12A5GS+92NBGA
VG12A5GS+92NBAA
VG12A5GT
74
VG12A5GT+92NAGA
VG12A5GT+92NGGA
VG12A5GT+92NBGA
VG12A5GT+92NBAA
VG12A5GU
117
VG12A5GU+92NAGA
VG12A5GU+92NGGA
VG12A5GU+92NBGA
VG12A5GU+92NBAA
VG12A5HT
VG12A5HT+92NAGA
VG12A5HT+92NGGA
VG12A5HT+92NBGA
VG12A5HT+92NBAA
VG12A5HU
117
VG12A5HU+92NAGA
VG12A5HU+92NGGA
VG12A5HU+92NBGA
VG12A5HU+92NBAA
VG12A5HV
176
VG12A5HV+92NAGA
VG12A5HV+92NGGA
VG12A5HV+92NBGA
VG12A5HV+92NBAA
VG12A5HW
211
VG12A5HW+92NAGA
VG12A5HW+92NGGA
VG12A5HW+92NBGA
VG12A5HW+92NBAA
VG12A5JU+92NAGA
VG12A5JU+92NGGA
VG12A5JU+92NBGA
VG12A5JU+92NBAA
VG12A5JV+92NAGA
VG12A5JV+92NGGA
VG12A5JV+92NBGA
VG12A5JV+92NBAA
VG12A5JU
VG12A5JV
74
117
176
100
100
Table 4: Flanged Stainless Steel Trim Ball Valves with Spring Return Electric Actuators (Part 2 of 2)
Valve
Size,
in.
Cv
Closeoff
PSIG
AC 24 V
AC 120 V
Floating
DC 0 to 10 V Prop.
On/Off
On/Off
M9220-AGA-3
M9220-GGA-3
M9220-BGA-3
M9220-BAA-3
VG12A5GS+94NBGA
VG12A5GS+94NBAA
Two-Way Spring Return Valve Closed (Normally Closed) without Switches

VG12A5GS
VG12A5GT
47
100
VG12A5GS+94NAGA
VG12A5GS+94NGGA
74
VG12A5GT+94NAGA
VG12A5GT+94NGGA
VG12A5GT+94NBGA
VG12A5GT+94NBAA
VG12A5GU
117
VG12A5GU+94NAGA
VG12A5GU+94NGGA
VG12A5GU+94NBGA
VG12A5GU+94NBAA
VG12A5HT
74
VG12A5HT+94NAGA
VG12A5HT+94NGGA
VG12A5HT+94NBGA
VG12A5HT+94NBAA
VG12A5HU+94NAGA
VG12A5HU+94NGGA
VG12A5HU+94NBGA
VG12A5HU+94NBAA
2-1/2
VG12A5HU
100
117
3
VG12A5HV
VG12A5HW
VG12A5JU
176
VG12A5HV+94NAGA
VG12A5HV+94NGGA
VG12A5HV+94NBGA
VG12A5HV+94NBAA
211
VG12A5HW+94NAGA
VG12A5HW+94NGGA
VG12A5HW+94NBGA
VG12A5HW+94NBAA
VG12A5JU+94NAGA
VG12A5JU+94NGGA
VG12A5JU+94NBGA
VG12A5JU+94NBAA
VG12A5JV+94NAGA
VG12A5JV+94NGGA
VG12A5JV+94NBGA
VG12A5JV+94NBAA
117
4
VG12A5JV
100
176
Three-Way Spring Return Counterclockwise Port A (Coil) Open to Port AB (Common) without Switches
VG18A5GS
2-1/2
47 / 29
50
VG18A5GS+92NAGA
VG18A5GS+92NGGA
VG18A5GS+92NBGA
VG18A5GS+92NBAA
VG18A5GT
74 / 47
VG18A5GT+92NAGA
VG18A5GT+92NGGA
VG18A5GT+92NBGA
VG18A5GT+92NBAA
VG18A5GU
117 / 74
VG18A5GU+92NAGA
VG18A5GU+92NGGA
VG18A5GU+92NBGA
VG18A5GU+92NBAA
VG18A5HT
VG18A5HT+92NAGA
VG18A5HT+92NGGA
VG18A5HT+92NBGA
VG18A5HT+92NBAA
VG18A5HU
117 / 74
VG18A5HU+92NAGA
VG18A5HU+92NGGA
VG18A5HU+92NBGA
VG18A5HU+92NBAA
VG18A5HV
176 / 88
VG18A5HV+92NAGA
VG18A5HV+92NGGA
VG18A5HV+92NBGA
VG18A5HV+92NBAA
VG18A5HW
211 / 105
VG18A5HW+92NAGA
VG18A5HW+92NGGA
VG18A5HW+92NBGA
VG18A5HW+92NBAA
VG18A5JU+92NAGA
VG18A5JU+92NGGA
VG18A5JU+92NBGA
VG18A5JU+92NBAA
VG18A5JV+92NAGA
VG18A5JV+92NGGA
VG18A5JV+92NBGA
VG18A5JV+92NBAA
VG18A5JU
VG18A5JV
74 / 47
117 / 74
50
50
176 / 88
Three-Way Spring Return Clockwise Port B (Bypass) Open to Port AB (Common) without Switches
VG18A5GS
2-1/2
47 / 29
50
VG18A5GS+94NAGA
VG18A5GS+94NGGA
VG18A5GS+94NBGA
VG18A5GS+94NBAA
VG18A5GT
74 / 47
VG18A5GT+94NAGA
VG18A5GT+94NGGA
VG18A5GT+94NBGA
VG18A5GT+94NBAA
VG18A5GU
117 / 74
VG18A5GU+94NAGA
VG18A5GU+94NGGA
VG18A5GU+94NBGA
VG18A5GU+94NBAA
VG18A5HT+94NAGA
VG18A5HT+94NGGA
VG18A5HT+94NBGA
VG18A5HT+94NBAA
VG18A5HU+94NGGA
VG18A5HU+94NBGA
VG18A5HU+94NBAA
VG18A5HT
74 / 47
50
VG18A5HU
117 / 74
VG18A5HU+94NAGA
VG18A5HV
176 / 88
VG18A5HV+94NAGA
VG18A5HV+94NGGA
VG18A5HV+94NBGA
VG18A5HV+94NBAA
VG18A5HW
211 / 105
VG18A5HW+94NAGA
VG18A5HW+94NGGA
VG18A5HW+94NBGA
VG18A5HW+94NBAA
VG18A5JU+94NAGA
VG18A5JU+94NGGA
VG18A5JU+94NBGA
VG18A5JU+94NBAA
VG18A5JV+94NAGA
VG18A5JV+94NGGA
VG18A5JV+94NBGA
VG18A5JV+94NBAA
VG18A5JU
VG18A5JV
117 / 74
176 / 88
50
Table 5: Flanged Stainless Steel Trim Ball Valves with Spring Return Electric Actuators with Two Switches
(Part 1 of 2)
Valve
Size,
in.
Cv
Closeoff
PSIG
AC 24 V
AC 120 V
Floating
DC 0 to 10 V Prop.
On/Off
On/Off
M9220-AGC-3
M9220-GGC-3
M9220-BGC-3
M9220-BAC-3
Two-Way Spring Return Valve Open (Normally Open) with Two Auxiliary Switches
VG12A5GS
VG12A5GS+92NAGC
VG12A5GS+92NGGC
VG12A5GS+92NBGC
VG12A5GS+92NBAC
VG12A5GT
74
VG12A5GT+92NAGC
VG12A5GT+92NGGC
VG12A5GT+92NBGC
VG12A5GT+92NBAC
VG12A5GU
117
VG12A5GU+92NAGC
VG12A5GU+92NGGC
VG12A5GU+92NBGC
VG12A5GU+92NBAC
VG12A5HT+92NAGC
VG12A5HT+92NGGC
VG12A5HT+92NBGC
VG12A5HT+92NBAC
VG12A5HT
2-1/2
47
74
100
100
VG12A5HU
117
VG12A5HU+92NAGC
VG12A5HU+92NGGC
VG12A5HU+92NBGC
VG12A5HU+92NBAC
VG12A5HV
176
VG12A5HV+92NAGC
VG12A5HV+92NGGC
VG12A5HV+92NBGC
VG12A5HV+92NBAC
VG12A5HW
211
VG12A5HW+92NAGC
VG12A5HW+92NGGC
VG12A5HW+92NBGC
VG12A5HW+92NBAC
VG12A5JU+92NAGC
VG12A5JU+92NGGC
VG12A5JU+92NBGC
VG12A5JU+92NBAC
VG12A5JV+92NAGC
VG12A5JV+92NGGC
VG12A5JV+92NBGC
VG12A5JV+92NBAC
VG12A5JU
VG12A5JV
117
100
176
Two-Way Spring Return Valve Closed (Normally Closed) with Two Auxiliary Switches
VG12A5GS
2-1/2
VG12A5GT
100
74
VG12A5GU
VG12A5HT
47
117
3
74
100
VG12A5GS+94NAGC
VG12A5GS+94NGGC
VG12A5GS+94NBGC
VG12A5GS+94NBAC
VG12A5GT+94NAGC
VG12A5GT+94NGGC
VG12A5GT+94NBGC
VG12A5GT+94NBAC
VG12A5GU+94NAGC
VG12A5GU+94NGGC
VG12A5GU+94NBGC
VG12A5GU+94NBAC
VG12A5HT+94NAGC
VG12A5HT+94NGGC
VG12A5HT+94NBGC
VG12A5HT+94NBAC
VG12A5HU
117
VG12A5HU+94NAGC
VG12A5HU+94NGGC
VG12A5HU+94NBGC
VG12A5HU+94NBAC
VG12A5HV
176
VG12A5HV+94NAGC
VG12A5HV+94NGGC
VG12A5HV+94NBGC
VG12A5HV+94NBAC
VG12A5HW+94NAGC
VG12A5HW+94NGGC
VG12A5HW+94NBGC
VG12A5HW+94NBAC
VG12A5JU+94NAGC
VG12A5JU+94NGGC
VG12A5JU+94NBGC
VG12A5JU+94NBAC
VG12A5JV+94NAGC
VG12A5JV+94NGGC
VG12A5JV+94NBGC
VG12A5JV+94NBAC
VG12A5HW
VG12A5JU
211
4
VG12A5JV
117
100
176
Three-Way Spring Return Counterclockwise Port A (Coil) Open to Port AB (Common) with Two Auxiliary Switches
VG18A5GS
VG18A5GS+92NAGC
VG18A5GS+92NGGC
VG18A5GS+92NBGC
VG18A5GS+92NBAC
VG18A5GT
74 / 47
VG18A5GT+92NAGC
VG18A5GT+92NGGC
VG18A5GT+92NBGC
VG18A5GT+92NBAC
VG18A5GU
117 / 74
VG18A5GU+92NAGC
VG18A5GU+92NGGC
VG18A5GU+92NBGC
VG18A5GU+92NBAC
VG18A5HT+92NAGC
VG18A5HT+92NGGC
VG18A5HT+92NBGC
VG18A5HT+92NBAC
VG18A5HT
2-1/2
47 / 29
74 / 47
50
50
VG18A5HU
117 / 74
VG18A5HU+92NAGC
VG18A5HU+92NGGC
VG18A5HU+92NBGC
VG18A5HU+92NBAC
VG18A5HV
176 / 88
VG18A5HV+92NAGC
VG18A5HV+92NGGC
VG18A5HV+92NBGC
VG18A5HV+92NBAC
VG18A5HW
211 / 105
VG18A5HW+92NAGC
VG18A5HW+92NGGC
VG18A5HW+92NBGC
VG18A5HW+92NBAC
VG18A5JU+92NAGC
VG18A5JU+92NGGC
VG18A5JU+92NBGC
VG18A5JU+92NBAC
VG18A5JV+92NAGC
VG18A5JV+92NGGC
VG18A5JV+92NBGC
VG18A5JV+92NBAC
VG18A5JU
VG18A5JV
117 / 74
50
176 / 88
Three-Way Spring Return Clockwise Port B (Bypass) Open to Port AB (Common) with Two Auxiliary Switches
VG18A5GS
2-1/2
47 / 29
50
VG18A5GS+94NAGC
VG18A5GS+94NGGC
VG18A5GS+94NBGC
VG18A5GS+94NBAC
VG18A5GT
74 / 47
VG18A5GT+94NAGC
VG18A5GT+94NGGC
VG18A5GT+94NBGC
VG18A5GT+94NBAC
VG18A5GU
117 / 74
VG18A5GU+94NAGC
VG18A5GU+94NGGC
VG18A5GU+94NBGC
VG18A5GU+94NBAC
Table 5: Flanged Stainless Steel Trim Ball Valves with Spring Return Electric Actuators with Two Switches
(Part 2 of 2)
Valve
Size,
in.
VG18A5HT
Cv
Closeoff
PSIG
74 / 47
50
AC 24 V
AC 120 V
Floating
DC 0 to 10 V Prop.
On/Off
On/Off
M9220-AGC-3
M9220-GGC-3
M9220-BGC-3
M9220-BAC-3
VG18A5HT+94NAGC
VG18A5HT+94NGGC
VG18A5HT+94NBGC
VG18A5HT+94NBAC
VG18A5HU
117 / 74
VG18A5HU+94NAGC
VG18A5HU+94NGGC
VG18A5HU+94NBGC
VG18A5HU+94NBAC
VG18A5HV
176 / 88
VG18A5HV+94NAGC
VG18A5HV+94NGGC
VG18A5HV+94NBGC
VG18A5HV+94NBAC
VG18A5HW
211 / 105
VG18A5HW+94NAGC
VG18A5HW+94NGGC
VG18A5HW+94NBGC
VG18A5HW+94NBAC
VG18A5JU+94NAGC
VG18A5JU+94NGGC
VG18A5JU+94NBGC
VG18A5JU+94NBAC
VG18A5JV+94NAGC
VG18A5JV+94NGGC
VG18A5JV+94NBGC
VG18A5JV+94NBAC
VG18A5JU
117 / 74
VG18A5JV
50
176 / 88
Table 6: Shipping Weights, lb (kg)1

Valve
Code Number
Description
Shipping
Weight, lb (kg)
VG12A5Gx
2-1/2 in. (DN65) Two-Way Flanged Ball Valve, ASME 150 Flanged End Connections
34 (15.4)
VG12A5Hx
3 in. (DN80) Two-Way Flanged Ball Valve, ASME 150 Flanged End Connections
36 (16.3)
VG12A5Jx
4 in. (DN100) Two-Way Flanged Ball Valve, ASME 150 Flanged End Connections
44 (20.0)
VG18A5Gx
2-1/2 in. (DN65) Three-Way Flanged Ball Valve, ASME 150 Flanged End Connections
43 (19.5)
VG18A5Hx
3 in. (DN80) Three-Way Flanged Ball Valve, ASME 150 Flanged End Connections
49 (22.2)
VG18A5Jx
4 in. (DN100) Three-Way Flanged Ball Valve, ASME 150 Flanged End Connections
62 (28.1)
1.
For M9100 actuated non-spring return valve assemblies, add 4.4 lb (2.0 kg); for M9220 actuated valve assemblies, add
9.1 lb (4.1 kg).
Table 7: Valid Ball Valve, Electric Actuator, Linkage, and Weathershield Combinations (for Field
Assembly)
Valve Code Number
Actuator Base
Number
Link Kit
Code Number
Optional
Weathershield
Code Number
2-1/2 (DN65)
VG12A5Gx, VG18A5Gx
M9124
M9000-518
M9000-330
M9220
M9000-519
M9000-340
M9124
M9000-518
M9000-330
M9220
M9000-519
M9000-340
M9124
M9000-518
M9000-330
M9220
M9000-519
M9000-340
3 (DN80)
VG12A5Hx, VG18A5Hx
4 (DN100)
VG12A5Jx, VG18A5Jx
Product Details
Available in sizes 2-1/2 to 4 in. (DN65 to DN100),
VG1000 Series Flanged Ball Valves are designed
specifically for automated commercial HVAC service.
These valves feature a 300 Series stainless steel ball
and stem for high temperature water to 284F (140C)
and saturated steam to 25 psi.
Port A
Coil
Port B Bypass
Figure 2: VG18A5 Series Three-Way Ball Valve

(Coil Port A Open to Common Port AB)
Electric Actuator Control Signal Action

Two-way VG1000 Series Ball Valves are fully open
when the electric actuator is fully Counterclockwise
(CCW) and fully closed when the electric actuator is
fully Clockwise (CW).
For three-way valves, Coil Port A and Common
Port AB are fully open when the electric actuator is fully
CCW, as shown in Figure 2. Bypass Port B and
Common Port AB are fully open when the actuator is
fully CW, as shown in Figure 3.
For non-spring return and spring-to-open proportional
control models in the direct-acting mode, a minimum
control signal drives the electric actuator to the fully
CCW position, while a maximum control signal drives
the electric actuator to the fully CW position.
Port A
Coil
Port AB
Common
Port B Bypass
FIG03-VG18A5_BypassPortB-to-ComPortAB
VG1000 Series Flanged Ball Valves are designed for

factory or field mounting to Johnson Controls M9124
Non-Spring Return and M9220 Spring Return Series
Electric Actuators, which are ideally suited for on/off,
floating, or proportional HVAC service. To field-couple
an actuator to a valve, use an M9000-518 Linkage Kit
for M9124 actuators or an M9000-519 Linkage Kit for
M9220 actuators. The cost-effective, reliable design
makes the VG1000 Series Ball Valves
maintenance-free.
IMPORTANT: The VG1000 Series Valves are
intended to control saturated steam, hot water, and
chilled water flow under normal equipment operating
conditions. Where failure or malfunction of the valve
system. Incorporate and maintain other devices
such as supervisory or alarm systems or safety or
limit controls intended to warn of, or protect against,
failure or malfunction of the valve.
Port AB
Common
FIG-VG18A5_CoilPortA-to-ComPortAB
The stem and mounting flange, combined with an

innovative double O-ring stem seal, provide quick and
easy electric actuator field mounting while ensuring
long life and leak-free valve performance. The specially
engineered, graphite-reinforced PTFE seat with flexible
PTFE seat design (backed with EPDM O-rings)
significantly reduces the operating torque, allowing the
smallest possible electric actuator available to provide
the force required for each specific application.
Two-Way valve assemblies provide 100 psig
(689 kPa), and three-way assemblies provide 50 psi
(345 kPa) closeoff pressure while ensuring operation
after long idle periods.
Figure 3: VG18A5 Series Three-Way Ball Valve

(Bypass Port B Open to Common Port AB)
For spring-to-close proportional control models in the
direct-acting mode, a minimum control signal drives the
electric actuator to the fully CW position, whereas a
maximum control signal drives the electric actuator to
the fully CCW position. For more information on these
electric actuator series, as well as details on models
available, refer to the following documentation:

Non-spring Return Actuators Product Bulletin
(LIT-2681058)
M9220-xxx-3 Electric Spring Return Actuators

Product Bulletin (LIT-12011057)
Repair Information
If the VG1000 Series Flanged Ball Valve fails to
Piping
FIG-VG1000-Piping
See Figure 4 for typical piping configurations:
VG124x Two-Way Valve
Port A
Port B
Return
Supply
Typical Two-Way Ball Valve Application

VG184x Three-Way Valve
Figure 4: Typical VG1000 Series Flanged Ball Valve Piping Application

Note: Mount the valve downstream from the coil to minimize heat transfer to the actuator.
Dimensions
Figure 5 depicts VG12A5xx Two-Way Series Flanged
Ball Valves combined with the M9124 Series Actuators,
identifying the dimensions listed in Table 8. See
Figure 6 for corresponding information for the
VG18A5xx Three-Way Series Flanged Ball Valves
combined with the M9124 Series Actuators.

Ball Valves combined with the M9220 Series Actuators,
identifying the dimensions listed in Table 8. See
Figure 8 for corresponding information for the
VG18A5xx Three-Way Series Flanged Ball Valves
combined with the M9220 Series Actuators.
D
5.17
(131.4)
A
B
C
FIG:VG1000-M9220_no_WS
FIG:VG12A5xx-M9124-No_WS
5.17
(131)
A
B
C
Figure 5: M9124 Series Actuated VG12A5xx

Two-Way Series Ball Valves, in. (mm)

Two-Way Series Ball Valves, in. (mm)
FIG:VG18A5xx-M9220
FIG:VG18A5xx-M9124_NoWS
A
B
Figure 6: M9124 Series Actuated

VG18A5xx Three-Way Series Ball Valves

Table 8: VG1xA5xx Series Ball Valves Dimensions, in. (mm)

Valve Size
in. (DN)
M91241
M92201
8.89 (226)
9.64 (245)
2-1/2 (DN65)
3.50 (89)
5.71 (145)
11.42 (290)
3 (DN80)
3.75 (95)
6.10 (155)
12.20 (310)
6.26 (159)
4 (DN100)
4.50 (114)
6.89 (175)
13.77 (350)
7.05 (179)
1.
5.87 (149)
Allow a minimum of 4 in. clearance above the shaft to remove the actuator.

Ball Valves combined with the M9124 Series
Non-Spring Return Actuators, identifying the
dimensions listed in Table 9. See Figure 10 for
corresponding information for the VG18A5xx
Three-Way Series Flanged Ball Valves combined with
the M9124 Series Non-Spring Return Actuators. Each
drawing includes dimensions for the field-installed
M9000-330 Weathershield.

Ball Valves combined with the M9220 Series
Spring Return Actuators identifying the dimensions
listed in Table 9. See Figure 12 for corresponding
information for the VG18A5xx Three-Way Series
Flanged Ball Valves combined with the M9220 Series
Spring Return Actuators dimensions. Each drawing
includes dimensions for the field-installed M9000-340
Weathershield.
D
5.17
(131)
5.17
(131.4)
AB
A
B
C
AB
FIG:VG12A5xx_Act_w-WS
A
B

Two-Way Series Ball Valves with M9000-330
Weathershield Dimensions, in. (mm)

Two-Way Series Ball Valves with M9000-340
Weathershield Dimensions, in. (mm)

with M9000-330 Weathershield

with M9000-340 Weathershield
Table 9: VG12A5x and VG18A5xx Ball Valves with Weathershield Dimensions, in. (mm)
Valve Size
in (DN)
D
M9124
M9220
9.07 (230)
10.25 (260)
2-1/2 (DN65)
3.50 (89)
5.71 (145)
11.42 (290)
3 (DN80)
3.75 (95)
6.10 (155)
12.20 (310)
6.26 (159)
4 (DN100)
4.50 (114)
6.89 (175)
13.77 (350)
7.05 (179)
10
5.87 (149)
Hot Water, Chilled Water, 50/50 Glycol Solutions, and 25 psig
(172 kPa) Saturated Steam for HVAC Systems
Service1
Valve Fluid Temperature Limits
0 to 284F (-18 to 140C)
Valve Body Pressure/

Temperature Rating
Water
ASME Class 150

250 psi at -20 to 100F (29 to 38C)
235 psi at: 200F(93C)
218 psi at: 284F(140C)
Steam
Maximum Closeoff
Pressure
Two-Way
100 psi (689 kPa)
Three-Way
50 psi (345 kPa)
Maximum Recommended Operating Pressure

Drop
30 psi (207 kPa) for quiet service
Two-Way
Equal Percentage
Three-Way
Equal Percentage Flow Characteristics of In-line Port or

Linear Percentage Flow Characteristics of Angle Port
Greater than 500:1
Rangeability2
Leakage
Two- or Three-Way
0.01% of Maximum Flow, Control Port, ANSI/FCI 70-2, Class 4
Three-Way
1% of Maximum Flow, Bypass Port
End Connections
ASME Class 150 Flange
Minimum Ambient
-4F (-20C)
-40F (-40C)
Maximum Ambient
Operating Temperature3
122F (50C)
131F (55C)
Materials
Body
Brass
Flanges
Ductile Iron
Ball
Stem
Seats
Graphite Reinforced PTFE with EPDM O-Ring Backing
Stem Seals
EPDM O-Rings
Flow Control Disk
1.
2.
3.
Refer to VDI 2035 Standard for proper water treatment.

Rangeability is defined as the ratio of maximum controllable flow to minimum controllable flow.
In steam applications, install the valve with the stem horizontal to the piping and wrap the valve and piping with insulation.
Building Efficiency

Published in U.S.A.
11
VG1000 Series Forged Brass Ball Valves

Product Bulletin
Code No. LIT-977132
Supersedes October 22, 2007
VG1000 Series Ball Valves are designed to regulate

the flow of hot or chilled water and, for some models,
low pressure steam in response to the demand of a
controller in Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning
(HVAC) systems. Available in sizes 1/2 through 2 in.
(DN15 through DN50), this family of two- and
three-way forged brass valves is factory or field
mounted to Johnson Controls VA9104, M9106,
M9109, and M9100 Series Non-Spring Return and
VA2202, M9206, and M9210 Series Spring Return
Electric Actuators for on/off, floating, or proportional
control. For sweat and press end connection valves
supplied with an actuator, the actuator is not mounted
to the valve to allow access to the end connections.
Figure 1: VG1000 Series Ball Valves Shown with

Factory-Mounted M9000 Series Electric
Actuators
Table 1: Features and Benefits (Part 1 of 2)
Features
Benefits
National Pipe Thread (NPT), Sweat, and

Press End Connections
Provide the right valve for a broad range of applications, reduce installation
time while reducing the need for adapters, and increase system reliability.
Forged Brass Body
Provides 580 psig static pressure rating.
Maintains equal percentage flow characteristics for best temperature

control, available in a wide variety of Cvs to cover a broad range of
applications.
200 psi Closeoff Pressure Rating
Provides tight shutoff.
Chrome-Plated Brass Ball and Stem

Assembly Standard
Handles both chilled and hot water applications with a fluid temperature
range of 23 to 203F (-5 to 95C).
300 Series Stainless Steel Ball and Stem

Assembly
Tolerates high temperature water or 15 psi saturated steam with fluid

temperatures of -22 to 284F (-30 to 140C) or where a higher degree of
corrosion protection is desired.
500:1 Rangeability
Provides accurate control under all load conditions.
Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer (EPDM)

Double O-Ring Stem Seal
Provides a leak-free seal; the packing has been tested and is leak-free
after 200,000 cycles in iron-oxide contaminated water.
VG1000 Series Forged Brass Ball Valves Product Bulletin

Features
Benefits
Graphite-Reinforced Polytetrafluoroethylene
(PTFE) Seats
Include 15% graphite-reinforced ball seals, providing better wear

resistance.
Blowout-Proof Stem
Protects the user from the risk of injury.
Maintenance-Free Design
Performs without failure in excess of 200,000 full stroke cycles in

iron-oxide contaminated water.
Wide Selection of Styles for a Variety of

Applications
Offers various valve configurations including two- and three-way full port
and reduced port models in chrome-plated brass and stainless steel trim.
Factory-Mounted VA9104, M9106, M9109,

VA2202, M9206, or M9210 Series Electric
Actuators
Reduce installation time, thus reducing overall installation cost.
M9000-520 Linkage Kit Available for Field

Mounting to M9106, M9109, or M9206 Series
Electric Actuators
Reduces installation time, thus reducing overall installation cost; and

provides superior thermal isolation between the valve and actuator.
M9000-550 Linkage Kit Available for Field

Mounting to M9104 Series Electric Actuators
Lowers both space requirements and total cost by providing high thermal
isolation in a compact size.
Table 2: Ordering Data1
V G
Valve Global
1 2 1
Product
1 = Forged Brass Ball Valve
Family
2
4
4
Body Type
and Flow
Characteristic
2 = Two-Way, with Equal Percentage Flow Characteristics
End Connection
4 = Threaded - NPT Taper
8 = Three-Way Mixing, with Equal Percentage Flow Characteristics of In-line

Port and Linear Flow Characteristics of Angle-Port
7 = Sweat (1/2 to 1 in. Sizes)

9 = Press (ProPress Fitting Compatible, 1/2 to 1 in. Sizes)
Press End Connections are designed to work with RIDGID Pressing Tools.
1
Trim
1 = Chrome-Plated Brass Ball and Nickel-Plated Brass Stem
A E
Size and
Maximum Cv
5 = Stainless Steel Ball and Stem, 300 Series

Size
Control
Control Port
Disk
Cv (kv)
7 8
(kv = Cv x 0.857) AD = 1/2 in. (DN15)
Yes
1.2 (1.0)
0.7 (0.6)
AE = 1/2 in. (DN15)
Yes
1.9 (1.6)
1.2 (1.0)
6
Bypass Port Cv (kv)
(Three-Way Only)
AF = 1/2 in. (DN15)
Yes
2.9 (2.5)
1.9 (1.6)
AG = 1/2 in. (DN15)
Yes
4.7 (4.0)
2.9 (2.5)
AL = 1/2 in. (DN15)
Yes
7.4 (6.3)
4.7 (4.0)
AN = 1/2 in. (DN15)2
No
11.7 (10.0)
5.8 (5.0)
BG = 3/4 in. (DN20)
Yes
4.7 (4.0)
2.9 (2.5)
BL = 3/4 in. (DN20)
Yes
7.4 (6.3)
4.7 (4.0)
BN = 3/4 in. (DN20)2
No
11.7 (10.0)
5.8 (5.0)
CL = 1 in. (DN25)
Yes
7.4 (6.3)
4.7 (4.0)
CN = 1 in. (DN25)
Yes
11.7 (10.0)
7.4 (6.3)
CP = 1 in. (DN25)2
No
18.7 (16.0)
9.4 (8.0)
DN = 1-1/4 in. (DN32)
Yes
11.7 (10.0)
7.4 (6.3)
DP = 1-1/4 in. (DN32)
Yes
18.7 (16.0)
11.7 (10.0)
DR = 1-1/4 in. (DN32)
No
29.2 (25.0)
14.6 (12.5)
EP = 1-1/2 in. (DN40)
Yes
18.7 (16.0)
11.7 (10.0)
ER = 1-1/2 in. (DN40)
Yes
29.2 (25.0)
18.7 (16.0)
ES = 1-1/2 in. (DN40)2
No
46.8 (40.0)
23.4 (20.0)
FR = 2 in. (DN50)
Yes
29.2 (25.0)
18.7 (16.0)
FS = 2 in. (DN50)
Yes
46.8 (40.0)
29.2 (25.0)
No
73.7 (63.0)
36.8 (31.5)
FT = 2 in. (DN50)
+
Actuator
Mounting
(Leave Fields 9 through 15 blank for valve without factory-mounted actuator.)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 = Field
V G1 2 4 1 A E +
Valve
1.
2.
+ Actuator
Example: Forged brass ball valve, two-way, threaded (NPT), brass trim, equal %,
1/2 in. (DN15) 1.9 Cv.
Before retrofitting older valves with VA9104, M9104, VA2202, or M2202 actuators, be sure that the valves have a tapped
hole in the center of the valve stem and no threads in the flange holes. These direct mount actuators do not fit older valves
designed without a tapped center stem hole or with threaded flange mounting holes.
Indicates model without characterizing disk.
See Table 3 to determine the correct factory-mounted

actuator, where needed.
Table 3: Ordering Data Adding a Factory-Mounted Electric Actuator1
V G1 2 4 1 A E +
Actuator
Mounting
(Leave Fields 9 through 15 blank for valve without factory-mounted actuator.)
Actuator
9 = Direct Acting M9000 or VA9000 Series Actuator
10
Direction
2 = Direct Acting VA2000 Series Actuator

2
11 12
Actuator Size
06 = M9106-xGx-2 (1/2, 3/4, 1, 1-1/4, and 1-1/2 in. NPT Valves)
09 = M9109-xGx-2 (2 in. Valves Only)

36 = M9206-xGx-2x Spring Opens (1/2, 3/4, 1, 1-1/4, and 1-1/2 in.
NPT Valves)
56 = M9206-xGx-2x Spring Closes (1/2, 3/4, 1, 1-1/4, and 1-1/2 in.
NPT Valves)
2J = M9210-xGx-2 Spring Opens (All 2 in. Valves)
4J = M9210-xGx-2 Spring Closes (All 2 in. Valves)
2T = VA2202-xxx-2 Spring Opens (All 1/2, 3/4, and 1 in. Valves)
4T = VA2202-xxx-2 Spring Closes (All 1/2, 3/4, and 1 in. Valves)
A4 = VA9104-xGA-2S, Non-Spring Return, 48 in. Cable
(All 1/2, 3/4, and 1 in. Valves)
T4 = VA9104-xGA-3S, Non-Spring Return, Screw Terminals
(All 1/2, 3/4, and 1 in. Valves)
Control Type
13
A = Floating, AC/DC 24 V Input (VA9104, VA2202, M9106, M9109, M9206,

M9116, M9210, and M9124)
B = On/Off (VA2202, M9206, and M9210 Only)
G = Prop. DC 0 (2) to 10 V or 0 (4) to 20 mA (M9106, M9109, M9116, M9124,
M9206, M9210, and VA9104); DC 2 to 10 V or 4 to 20 mA (VA2202)
I = On/Off Floating with Timeout (VA9104, M9106, and M9109)
Supply
14
A = AC 120 V (VA2202, M9206BAx, and M9210BAx Only)

(VA2202 Is Rated AC 100 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz)
Voltage
G = 24 VAC (All Models)
C Feedback
A = No Auxiliary Switch (All models);

Feedback: DC 0 (2) to 10 V (M9xxx-GGA and VA9104-GGA-2S Models Only)
15
B = One Auxiliary Switch, No Feedback (Factory Assembled with Sweat and

Press End Connection Not Available)
C = Two Auxiliary Switches (M9106, M9206-AGC, M9206-GGC,
M9210 Models Only);
Feedback: DC 0 (2) to 10 V (M9xxx-GGC Models Only)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 = Field
V G1 2 4 1
Valve
1.
2.
E + 9
+ Actuator
G G C
Example: Forged brass ball valve, two-way, threaded (NPT), brass trim, equal %, 1/2 in.
(DN15) 1.9 Cv, factory-mounted direct acting M9106-GGC-2 Actuator, non-spring
return, proportional control, AC 24 V supply (with feedback), and two-way auxiliary
switches
Before retrofitting older valves with VA9104, M9104, VA2202, or M2202 actuators be sure that the valves have a tapped
hole in the center of the valve stem and no threads in the flange holes. These direct mount actuators do not fit older valves
designed without a tapped center stem hole or with threaded flange mounting holes.
Refer to actuator product bulletin for detailed information.
Table 4: Two-Way Plated Brass Trim Ball Valves, Electric Actuators without Switches, Spring Return
Open
Closeoff: 200 psig
End
Valve
Connection
NPT
Sweat
Press
1.
VG1241AD
VG1241AE
VG1241AF
VG1241AG
VG1241AL
VG1241AN
VG1241BG
VG1241BL
VG1241BN
VG1241CL
VG1241CN
VG1241CP
VG1241DN
VG1241DP
VG1241DR
VG1241EP
VG1241ER
VG1241ES
VG1241FR
VG1241FS
VG1241FT
VG1271AD
VG1271AE
VG1271AF
VG1271AG
VG1271AL
VG1271AN
VG1271BG
VG1271BL
VG1271BN
VG1271CL
VG1271CN
VG1271CP
VG1291AD
VG1291AE
VG1291AF
VG1291AG
VG1291AL
VG1291AN
VG1291BG
VG1291BL
VG1291BN
VG1291CL
VG1291CN
VG1291CP
Size, Cv
in.
1/2
3/4
1-1/4
1-1/2
1/2
3/4
1/2
3/4
1.21
1.91
2.91
4.71
7.41
11.7
4.71
7.41
11.7
7.41
11.71
18.7
11.71
18.71
29.2
18.71
29.21
46.8
29.21
46.81
73.7
1.21
1.91
2.91
4.71
7.41
11.7
4.71
7.41
11.7
7.41
11.71
18.7
1.21
1.91
2.91
4.71
7.41
11.7
4.71
7.41
11.7
7.41
11.71
18.7
AC 24 V
DC 0 to 10 V
Proportional
VA2202-AGA-2 VA2202-GGA-2
M9206-AGA-2S M9206-GGA-2S
M9210-AGA-3
M9210-GGA-3
Floating
VG1241AD+22TAGA
VG1241AE+22TAGA
VG1241AF+22TAGA
VG1241AG+22TAGA
VG1241AL+22TAGA
VG1241AN+22TAGA
VG1241BG+22TAGA
VG1241BL+22TAGA
VG1241BN+22TAGA
VG1241CL+22TAGA
VG1241CN+22TAGA
VG1241CP+22TAGA
VG1241DN+936AGA
VG1241DP+936AGA
VG1241DR+936AGA
VG1241EP+936AGA
VG1241ER+936AGA
VG1241ES+936AGA
VG1241FR+92JAGA
VG1241FS+92JAGA
VG1241FT+92JAGA
VG1271AD+22TAGA
VG1271AE+22TAGA
VG1271AF+22TAGA
VG1271AG+22TAGA
VG1271AL+22TAGA
VG1271AN+22TAGA
VG1271BG+22TAGA
VG1271BL+22TAGA
VG1271BN+22TAGA
VG1271CL+22TAGA
VG1271CN+22TAGA
VG1271CP+22TAGA
VG1291AD+22TAGA
VG1291AE+22TAGA
VG1291AF+22TAGA
VG1291AG+22TAGA
VG1291AL+22TAGA
VG1291AN+22TAGA
VG1291BG+22TAGA
VG1291BL+22TAGA
VG1291BN+22TAGA
VG1291CL+22TAGA
VG1291CN+22TAGA
VG1291CP+22TAGA
VG1241AD+22TGGA
VG1241AE+22TGGA
VG1241AF+22TGGA
VG1241AG+22TGGA
VG1241AL+22TGGA
VG1241AN+22TGGA
VG1241BG+22TGGA
VG1241BL+22TGGA
VG1241BN+22TGGA
VG1241CL+22TGGA
VG1241CN+22TGGA
VG1241CP+22TGGA
VG1241DN+936GGA
VG1241DP+936GGA
VG1241DR+936GGA
VG1241EP+936GGA
VG1241ER+936GGA
VG1241ES+936GGA
VG1241FR+92JGGA
VG1241FS+92JGGA
VG1241FT+92JGGA
VG1271AD+22TGGA
VG1271AE+22TGGA
VG1271AF+22TGGA
VG1271AG+22TGGA
VG1271AL+22TGGA
VG1271AN+22TGGA
VG1271BG+22TGGA
VG1271BL+22TGGA
VG1271BN+22TGGA
VG1271CL+22TGGA
VG1271CN+22TGGA
VG1271CP+22TGGA
VG1291AD+22TGGA
VG1291AE+22TGGA
VG1291AF+22TGGA
VG1291AG+22TGGA
VG1291AL+22TGGA
VG1291AN+22TGGA
VG1291BG+22TGGA
VG1291BL+22TGGA
VG1291BN+22TGGA
VG1291CL+22TGGA
VG1291CN+22TGGA
VG1291CP+22TGGA
On/Off
AC 120 V
On/Off
VA2202-BGA-2
M9206-BGA-2S
M9210-BGA-3
VA2202-BAA-2
M9206-BAA-2S
M9210-BAA-3
VG1241AD+22TBGA
VG1241AE+22TBGA
VG1241AF+22TBGA
VG1241AG+22TBGA
VG1241AL+22TBGA
VG1241AN+22TBGA
VG1241BG+22TBGA
VG1241BL+22TBGA
VG1241BN+22TBGA
VG1241CL+22TBGA
VG1241CN+22TBGA
VG1241CP+22TBGA
VG1241DN+936BGA
VG1241DP+936BGA
VG1241DR+936BGA
VG1241EP+936BGA
VG1241ER+936BGA
VG1241ES+936BGA
VG1241FR+92JBGA
VG1241FS+92JBGA
VG1241FT+92JBGA
VG1271AD+22TBGA
VG1271AE+22TBGA
VG1271AF+22TBGA
VG1271AG+22TBGA
VG1271AL+22TBGA
VG1271AN+22TBGA
VG1271BG+22TBGA
VG1271BL+22TBGA
VG1271BN+22TBGA
VG1271CL+22TBGA
VG1271CN+22TBGA
VG1271CP+22TBGA
VG1291AD+22TBGA
VG1291AE+22TBGA
VG1291AF+22TBGA
VG1291AG+22TBGA
VG1291AL+22TBGA
VG1291AN+22TBGA
VG1291BG+22TBGA
VG1291BL+22TBGA
VG1291BN+22TBGA
VG1291CL+22TBGA
VG1291CN+22TBGA
VG1291CP+22TBGA
VG1241AD+22TBAA
VG1241AE+22TBAA
VG1241AF+22TBAA
VG1241AG+22TBAA
VG1241AL+22TBAA
VG1241AN+22TBAA
VG1241BG+22TBAA
VG1241BL+22TBAA
VG1241BN+22TBAA
VG1241CL+22TBAA
VG1241CN+22TBAA
VG1241CP+22TBAA
VG1241DN+936BAA
VG1241DP+936BAA
VG1241DR+936BAA
VG1241EP+936BAA
VG1241ER+936BAA
VG1241ES+936BAA
VG1241FR+92JBAA
VG1241FS+92JBAA
VG1241FT+92JBAA
VG1271AD+22TBAA
VG1271AE+22TBAA
VG1271AF+22TBAA
VG1271AG+22TBAA
VG1271AL+22TBAA
VG1271AN+22TBAA
VG1271BG+22TBAA
VG1271BL+22TBAA
VG1271BN+22TBAA
VG1271CL+22TBAA
VG1271CN+22TBAA
VG1271CP+22TBAA
VG1291AD+22TBAA
VG1291AE+22TBAA
VG1291AF+22TBAA
VG1291AG+22TBAA
VG1291AL+22TBAA
VG1291AN+22TBAA
VG1291BG+22TBAA
VG1291BL+22TBAA
VG1291BN+22TBAA
VG1291CL+22TBAA
VG1291CN+22TBAA
VG1291CP+22TBAA
Cv has a characterizing disk.
Table 5: Two-Way Plated Brass Trim Ball Valves, Electric Actuators without Switches, Spring Return
Closed
Closeoff: 200 psig
End
Valve
Connection
Size, Cv
in.
NPT
1/2
Sweat
Press
1.
VG1241AD
VG1241AE
VG1241AF
VG1241AG
VG1241AL
VG1241AN
VG1241BG
VG1241BL
VG1241BN
VG1241CL
VG1241CN
VG1241CP
VG1241DN
VG1241DP
VG1241DR
VG1241EP
VG1241ER
VG1241ES
VG1241FR
VG1241FS
VG1241FT
VG1271AD
VG1271AE
VG1271AF
VG1271AG
VG1271AL
VG1271AN
VG1271BG
VG1271BL
VG1271BN
VG1271CL
VG1271CN
VG1271CP
VG1291AD
VG1291AE
VG1291AF
VG1291AG
VG1291AL
VG1291AN
VG1291BG
VG1291BL
VG1291BN
VG1291CL
VG1291CN
VG1291CP
3/4
1-1/4
1-1/2
1/2
3/4
1/2
3/4
1.21
1.91
2.91
4.71
7.41
11.7
4.71
7.41
11.7
7.41
11.71
18.7
11.71
18.71
29.2
18.71
29.21
46.8
29.21
46.81
73.7
1.21
1.91
2.91
4.71
7.41
11.7
4.71
7.41
11.7
7.41
11.71
18.7
1.21
1.91
2.91
4.71
7.41
11.7
4.71
7.41
11.7
7.41
11.71
18.7
Floating
VA2202-AGA-2
M9206-AGA-2S
M9210-AGA-3
AC 24 V
DC 0 to 10 V Prop.
VA2202-GGA-2
M9206-GGA-2S
M9210-GGA-3
On/Off
VA2202-BGA-2
M9206-BGA-2S
M9210-BGA-3
AC 120 V
On/Off
VA2202-BAA-2
M9206-BAA-2S
M9210-BAA-3
VG1241AD+24TAGA
VG1241AE+24TAGA
VG1241AF+24TAGA
VG1241AG+24TAGA
VG1241AL+24TAGA
VG1241AN+24TAGA
VG1241BG+24TAGA
VG1241BL+24TAGA
VG1241BN+24TAGA
VG1241CL+24TAGA
VG1241CN+24TAGA
VG1241CP+24TAGA
VG1241DN+956AGA
VG1241DP+956AGA
VG1241DR+956AGA
VG1241EP+956AGA
VG1241ER+956AGA
VG1241ES+956AGA
VG1241FR+94JAGA
VG1241FS+94JAGA
VG1241FT+94JAGA
VG1271AD+24TAGA
VG1271AE+24TAGA
VG1271AF+24TAGA
VG1271AG+24TAGA
VG1271AL+24TAGA
VG1271AN+24TAGA
VG1271BG+24TAGA
VG1271BL+24TAGA
VG1271BN+24TAGA
VG1271CL+24TAGA
VG1271CN+24TAGA
VG1271CP+24TAGA
VG1291AD+24TAGA
VG1291AE+24TAGA
VG1291AF+24TAGA
VG1291AG+24TAGA
VG1291AL+24TAGA
VG1291AN+24TAGA
VG1291BG+24TAGA
VG1291BL+24TAGA
VG1291BN+24TAGA
VG1291CL+24TAGA
VG1291CN+24TAGA
VG1291CP+24TAGA
VG1241AD+24TGGA
VG1241AE+24TGGA
VG1241AF+24TGGA
VG1241AG+24TGGA
VG1241AL+24TGGA
VG1241AN+24TGGA
VG1241BG+24TGGA
VG1241BL+24TGGA
VG1241BN+24TGGA
VG1241CL+24TGGA
VG1241CN+24TGGA
VG1241CP+24TGGA
VG1241DN+956GGA
VG1241DP+956GGA
VG1241DR+956GGA
VG1241EP+956GGA
VG1241ER+956GGA
VG1241ES+956GGA
VG1241FR+94JGGA
VG1241FS+94JGGA
VG1241FT+94JGGA
VG1271AD+24TGGA
VG1271AE+24TGGA
VG1271AF+24TGGA
VG1271AG+24TGGA
VG1271AL+24TGGA
VG1271AN+24TGGA
VG1271BG+24TGGA
VG1271BL+24TGGA
VG1271BN+24TGGA
VG1271CL+24TGGA
VG1271CN+24TGGA
VG1271CP+24TGGA
VG1291AD+24TGGA
VG1291AE+24TGGA
VG1291AF+24TGGA
VG1291AG+24TGGA
VG1291AL+24TGGA
VG1291AN+24TGGA
VG1291BG+24TGGA
VG1291BL+24TGGA
VG1291BN+24TGGA
VG1291CL+24TGGA
VG1291CN+24TGGA
VG1291CP+24TGGA
VG1241AD+24TBGA
VG1241AE+24TBGA
VG1241AF+24TBGA
VG1241AG+24TBGA
VG1241AL+24TBGA
VG1241AN+24TBGA
VG1241BG+24TBGA
VG1241BL+24TBGA
VG1241BN+24TBGA
VG1241CL+24TBGA
VG1241CN+24TBGA
VG1241CP+24TBGA
VG1241DN+956BGA
VG1241DP+956BGA
VG1241DR+956BGA
VG1241EP+956BGA
VG1241ER+956BGA
VG1241ES+956BGA
VG1241FR+94JBGA
VG1241FS+94JBGA
VG1241FT+94JBGA
VG1271AD+24TBGA
VG1271AE+24TBGA
VG1271AF+24TBGA
VG1271AG+24TBGA
VG1271AL+24TBGA
VG1271AN+24TBGA
VG1271BG+24TBGA
VG1271BL+24TBGA
VG1271BN+24TBGA
VG1271CL+24TBGA
VG1271CN+24TBGA
VG1271CP+24TBGA
VG1291AD+24TBGA
VG1291AE+24TBGA
VG1291AF+24TBGA
VG1291AG+24TBGA
VG1291AL+24TBGA
VG1291AN+24TBGA
VG1291BG+24TBGA
VG1291BL+24TBGA
VG1291BN+24TBGA
VG1291CL+24TBGA
VG1291CN+24TBGA
VG1291CP+24TBGA
VG1241AD+24TBAA
VG1241AE+24TBAA
VG1241AF+24TBAA
VG1241AG+24TBAA
VG1241AL+24TBAA
VG1241AN+24TBAA
VG1241BG+24TBAA
VG1241BL+24TBAA
VG1241BN+24TBAA
VG1241CL+24TBAA
VG1241CN+24TBAA
VG1241CP+24TBAA
VG1241DN+956BAA
VG1241DP+956BAA
VG1241DR+956BAA
VG1241EP+956BAA
VG1241ER+956BAA
VG1241ES+956BAA
VG1241FR+94JBAA
VG1241FS+94JBAA
VG1241FT+94JBAA
VG1271AD+24TBAA
VG1271AE+24TBAA
VG1271AF+24TBAA
VG1271AG+24TBAA
VG1271AL+24TBAA
VG1271AN+24TBAA
VG1271BG+24TBAA
VG1271BL+24TBAA
VG1271BN+24TBAA
VG1271CL+24TBAA
VG1271CN+24TBAA
VG1271CP+24TBAA
VG1291AD+24TBAA
VG1291AE+24TBAA
VG1291AF+24TBAA
VG1291AG+24TBAA
VG1291AL+24TBAA
VG1291AN+24TBAA
VG1291BG+24TBAA
VG1291BL+24TBAA
VG1291BN+24TBAA
VG1291CL+24TBAA
VG1291CN+24TBAA
VG1291CP+24TBAA
Table 6: Two-Way Plated Brass Trim Ball Valves, Electric Actuators with Switches
Closeoff: 200 psig
End
Valve
Connection
Size, Cv
in.
Floating
VA2202-AGB-2
M9206-AGC-2
M9210-AGC-3
AC 24 V
DC 0 to 10 V
Proportional
VA2202-GGB-2
M9206-GGC-2
M9210-GGC-3
On/Off
AC 120 V
On/Off
VA2202-BGB-2
M9206-BGB-2S
M9210-BGC-3
VA2202-BAB-2
M9206-BAB-2S
M9210-BAC-3
VG1241AD+22TGGB
VG1241AE+22TGGB
VG1241AF+22TGGB
VG1241AG+22TGGB
VG1241AL+22TGGB
VG1241AN+22TGGB
VG1241BG+22TGGB
VG1241BL+22TGGB
VG1241BN+22TGGB
VG1241CL+22TGGB
VG1241CN+22TGGB
VG1241CP+22TGGB
VG1241DN+936GGC
VG1241DP+936GGC
VG1241DR+936GGC
VG1241EP+936GGC
VG1241ER+936GGC
VG1241ES+936GGC
VG1241FR+92JGGC
VG1241FS+92JGGC
VG1241FT+92JGGC
VG1241AD+22TBGB
VG1241AE+22TBGB
VG1241AF+22TBGB
VG1241AG+22TBGB
VG1241AL+22TBGB
VG1241AN+22TBGB
VG1241BG+22TBGB
VG1241BL+22TBGB
VG1241BN+22TBGB
VG1241CL+22TBGB
VG1241CN+22TBGB
VG1241CP+22TBGB
VG1241DN+936BGB
VG1241DP+936BGB
VG1241DR+936BGB
VG1241EP+936BGB
VG1241ER+936BGB
VG1241ES+936BGB
VG1241FR+92JBGC
VG1241FS+92JBGC
VG1241FT+92JBGC
VG1241AD+22TBAB
VG1241AE+22TBAB
VG1241AF+22TBAB
VG1241AG+22TBAB
VG1241AL+22TBAB
VG1241AN+22TBAB
VG1241BG+22TBAB
VG1241BL+22TBAB
VG1241BN+22TBAB
VG1241CL+22TBAB
VG1241CN+22TBAB
VG1241CP+22TBAB
VG1241DN+936BAB
VG1241DP+936BAB
VG1241DR+936BAB
VG1241EP+936BAB
VG1241ER+936BAB
VG1241ES+936BAB
VG1241FR+92JBAC
VG1241FS+92JBAC
VG1241FT+92JBAC
VG1241AD+24TGGB
VG1241AE+24TGGB
VG1241AF+24TGGB
VG1241AG+24TGGB
VG1241AL+24TGGB
VG1241AN+24TGGB
VG1241BG+24TGGB
VG1241BL+24TGGB
VG1241BN+24TGGB
VG1241CL+24TGGB
VG1241CN+24TGGB
VG1241CP+24TGGB
VG1241DN+956GGC
VG1241DP+956GGC
VG1241DR+956GGC
VG1241EP+956GGC
VG1241ER+956GGC
VG1241ES+956GGC
VG1241FR+94JGGC
VG1241FS+94JGGC
VG1241FT+94JGGC
VG1241AD+24TBGB
VG1241AE+24TBGB
VG1241AF+24TBGB
VG1241AG+24TBGB
VG1241AL+24TBGB
VG1241AN+24TBGB
VG1241BG+24TBGB
VG1241BL+24TBGB
VG1241BN+24TBGB
VG1241CL+24TBGB
VG1241CN+24TBGB
VG1241CP+24TBGB
VG1241DN+956BGB
VG1241DP+956BGB
VG1241DR+956BGB
VG1241EP+956BGB
VG1241ER+956BGB
VG1241ES+956BGB
VG1241FR+94JBGC
VG1241FS+94JBGC
VG1241FT+94JBGC
VG1241AD+24TBAB
VG1241AE+24TBAB
VG1241AF+24TBAB
VG1241AG+24TBAB
VG1241AL+24TBAB
VG1241AN+24TBAB
VG1241BG+24TBAB
VG1241BL+24TBAB
VG1241BN+24TBAB
VG1241CL+24TBAB
VG1241CN+24TBAB
VG1241CP+24TBAB
VG1241DN+956BAB
VG1241DP+956BAB
VG1241DR+956BAB
VG1241EP+956BAB
VG1241ER+956BAB
VG1241ES+956BAB
VG1241FR+94JBAC
VG1241FS+94JBAC
VG1241FT+94JBAC
Spring Return Open Valve Normally Open

NPT
VG1241AD
VG1241AE
VG1241AF
VG1241AG
VG1241AL
VG1241AN
VG1241BG
VG1241BL
VG1241BN
VG1241CL
VG1241CN
VG1241CP
VG1241DN
VG1241DP
VG1241DR
VG1241EP
VG1241ER
VG1241ES
VG1241FR
VG1241FS
VG1241FT
1/2
3/4
1-1/4
1-1/2
1.21
1.91
2.91
4.71
7.41
11.7
4.71
7.41
11.7
7.41
11.71
18.7
11.71
18.71
29.2
18.71
29.21
46.8
29.21
46.81
73.7
VG1241AD+22TAGB
VG1241AE+22TAGB
VG1241AF+22TAGB
VG1241AG+22TAGB
VG1241AL+22TAGB
VG1241AN+22TAGB
VG1241BG+22TAGB
VG1241BL+22TAGB
VG1241BN+22TAGB
VG1241CL+22TAGB
VG1241CN+22TAGB
VG1241CP+22TAGB
VG1241DN+936AGC
VG1241DP+936AGC
VG1241DR+936AGC
VG1241EP+936AGC
VG1241ER+936AGC
VG1241ES+936AGC
VG1241FR+92JAGC
VG1241FS+92JAGC
VG1241FT+92JAGC
Spring Return Valve Closed Valve Normally Closed

NPT
1.
VG1241AD
VG1241AE
VG1241AF
VG1241AG
VG1241AL
VG1241AN
VG1241BG
VG1241BL
VG1241BN
VG1241CL
VG1241CN
VG1241CP
VG1241DN
VG1241DP
VG1241DR
VG1241EP
VG1241ER
VG1241ES
VG1241FR
VG1241FS
VG1241FT
1/2
3/4
1-1/4
1-1/2
1.21
1.91
2.91
4.71
7.41
11.7
4.71
7.41
11.7
7.41
11.71
18.7
11.71
18.71
29.2
18.71
29.21
46.8
29.21
46.81
73.7
VG1241AD+24TAGB
VG1241AE+24TAGB
VG1241AF+24TAGB
VG1241AG+24TAGB
VG1241AL+24TAGB
VG1241AN+24TAGB
VG1241BG+24TAGB
VG1241BL+24TAGB
VG1241BN+24TAGB
VG1241CL+24TAGB
VG1241CN+24TAGB
VG1241CP+24TAGB
VG1241DN+956AGC
VG1241DP+956AGC
VG1241DR+956AGC
VG1241EP+956AGC
VG1241ER+956AGC
VG1241ES+956AGC
VG1241FR+94JAGC
VG1241FS+94JAGC
VG1241FT+94JAGC
Table 7: Two-Way Plated Brass Trim Ball Valves, Non-Spring Return Electric Actuators without Switches
Closeoff: 200 psig
AC 24 V
On/Off (Floating)
DC 0 to 10 V
End
Valve
Size, Cv
On/Off (Floating)
with Timeout
Proportional
Connection
in.
without Timeout1
VA9104-AGA-xS
VA9104-IGA-xS
VA9104-GGA-xS
M9106-AGx-2
M9106-IGx-2
M9106-GGx-2
M9109-AGx-2
M9109-IGx-2
M9109-GGx-2
NPT
Sweat
Press
1.
2.
3.
VG1241AD
VG1241AE
VG1241AF
VG1241AG
VG1241AL
VG1241AN
VG1241BG
VG1241BL
VG1241BN
VG1241CL
VG1241CN
VG1241CP
VG1241DN
VG1241DP
VG1241DR
VG1241EP
VG1241ER
VG1241ES
VG1241FR
VG1241FS
VG1241FT
VG1271AD
VG1271AE
VG1271AF
VG1271AG
VG1271AL
VG1271AN
VG1271BG
VG1271BL
VG1271BN
VG1271CL
VG1271CN
VG1271CP
VG1291AD
VG1291AE
VG1291AF
VG1291AG
VG1291AL
VG1291AN
VG1291BG
VG1291BL
VG1291BN
VG1291CL
VG1291CN
VG1291CP
1/2
3/4
1-1/4
1-1/2
1/2
3/4
1/2
3/4
1.22
1.92
2.92
4.72
7.42
11.7
4.72
7.42
11.7
7.42
11.72
18.7
11.72
18.72
29.2
18.72
29.22
46.8
29.22
46.82
73.7
1.22
1.92
2.92
4.72
7.42
11.72
4.72
7.42
11.7
7.42
11.72
18.7
1.22
1.92
2.92
4.72
7.42
11.72
4.72
7.42
11.7
7.42
11.72
18.7
VG1241AD+9T4AGA3
VG1241AE+9T4AGA3
VG1241AF+9T4AGA3
VG1241AG+9T4AGA3
VG1241AL+9T4AGA3
VG1241AN+9T4AGA3
VG1241BG+9T4AGA3
VG1241BL+9T4AGA3
VG1241BN+9T4AGA3
VG1241CL+9T4AGA3
VG1241CN+9T4AGA3
VG1241CP+9T4AGA3
VG1241DN+906AGA
VG1241DP+906AGA
VG1241DR+906AGA
VG1241EP+906AGA
VG1241ER+906AGA
VG1241ES+906AGA
VG1241FR+909AGA
VG1241FS+909AGA
VG1241FT+909AGA
VG1271AD+9T4AGA3
VG1271AE+9T4AGA3
VG1271AF+9T4AGA3
VG1271AG+9T4AGA3
VG1271AL+9T4AGA3
VG1271AN+9T4AGA3
VG1271BG+9T4AGA3
VG1271BL+9T4AGA3
VG1271BN+9T4AGA3
VG1271CL+9T4AGA3
VG1271CN+9T4AGA3
VG1271CP+9T4AGA3
VG1291AD+9T4AGA3
VG1291AE+9T4AGA3
VG1291AF+9T4AGA3
VG1291AG+9T4AGA3
VG1291AL+9T4AGA3
VG1291AN+9T4AGA3
VG1291BG+9T4AGA3
VG1291BL+9T4AGA3
VG1291BN+9T4AGA3
VG1291CL+9T4AGA3
VG1291CN+9T4AGA3
VG1291CP+9T4AGA3
VG1241AD+9T4IGA3
VG1241AE+9T4IGA3
VG1241AF+9T4IGA3
VG1241AG+9T4IGA3
VG1241AL+9T4IGA3
VG1241AN+9T4IGA3
VG1241BG+9T4IGA3
VG1241BL+9T4IGA3
VG1241BN+9T4IGA3
VG1241CL+9T4IGA3
VG1241CN+9T4IGA3
VG1241CP+9T4IGA3
VG1241DN+906IGA
VG1241DP+906IGA
VG1241DR+906IGA
VG1241EP+906IGA
VG1241ER+906IGA
VG1241ES+906IGA
VG1271AD+9T4IGA3
VG1271AE+9T4IGA3
VG1271AF+9T4IGA3
VG1271AG+9T4IGA3
VG1271AL+9T4IGA3
VG1271AN+9T4IGA3
VG1271BG+9T4IGA3
VG1271BL+9T4IGA3
VG1271BN+9T4IGA3
VG1271CL+9T4IGA3
VG1271CN+9T4IGA3
VG1271CP+9T4IGA3
VG1291AD+9T4IGA3
VG1291AE+9T4IGA3
VG1291AF+9T4IGA3
VG1291AG+9T4IGA3
VG1291AL+9T4IGA3
VG1291AN+9T4IGA3
VG1291BG+9T4IGA3
VG1291BL+9T4IGA3
VG1291BN+9T4IGA3
VG1291CL+9T4IGA3
VG1291CN+9T4IGA3
VG1291CP+9T4IGA3
VG1241AD+9T4GGA3
VG1241AE+9T4GGA3
VG1241AF+9T4GGA3
VG1241AG+9T4GGA3
VG1241AL+9T4GGA3
VG1241AN+9T4GGA3
VG1241BG+9T4GGA3
VG1241BL+9T4GGA3
VG1241BN+9T4GGA3
VG1241CL+9T4GGA3
VG1241CN+9T4GGA3
VG1241CP+9T4GGA3
VG1241DN+906GGA
VG1241DP+906GGA
VG1241DR+906GGA
VG1241EP+906GGA
VG1241ER+906GGA
VG1241ES+906GGA
VG1241FR+909GGA
VG1241FS+909GGA
VG1241FT+909GGA
VG1271AD+9T4GGA3
VG1271AE+9T4GGA3
VG1271AF+9T4GGA3
VG1271AG+9T4GGA3
VG1271AL+9T4GGA3
VG1271AN+9T4GGA3
VG1271BG+9T4GGA3
VG1271BL+9T4GGA3
VG1271BN+9T4GGA3
VG1271CL+9T4GGA3
VG1271CN+9T4GGA3
VG1271CP+9T4GGA3
VG1291AD+9T4GGA3
VG1291AE+9T4GGA3
VG1291AF+9T4GGA3
VG1291AG+9T4GGA3
VG1291AL+9T4GGA3
VG1291AN+9T4GGA3
VG1291BG+9T4GGA3
VG1291BL+9T4GGA3
VG1291BN+9T4GGA3
VG1291CL+9T4GGA3
VG1291CN+9T4GGA3
VG1291CP+9T4GGA3
To avoid excessive wear or drive time on the motor for the AGx models, use a controller or software that provides a timeout
function to remove the signal at the end of rotation (stall).
Code numbers shown are for a VA9104-xGA-3S actuator with M3 screw terminals. To specify a 48-in. plenum-rated cable,
change the 9T4 to 9A4 in the code number for a VA9104-xGA-2S actuator. Example: VG1241AD+9T4AGA becomes
VG1241AD+9A4AGA.
Table 8: Two-Way Plated Brass Trim Ball Valves, Electric Actuators with Switches, Non-Spring Return
Closeoff: 200 psig
End
Valve
Connection
NPT
1.
2.
VG1241AD
VG1241AE
VG1241AF
VG1241AG
VG1241AL
VG1241AN
VG1241BG
VG1241BL
VG1241BN
VG1241CL
VG1241CN
VG1241CP
VG1241DN
VG1241DP
VG1241DR
VG1241EP
VG1241ER
VG1241ES
VG1241FR
VG1241FS
VG1241FT
Size, Cv
in.
1/2
3/4
1-1/4
1-1/2
1.22
1.92
2.92
4.72
7.42
11.7
4.72
7.42
11.7
7.42
11.72
18.7
11.72
18.72
29.2
18.72
29.22
46.8
29.22
46.82
73.7
On/Off (Floating)
without Timeout1
M9106-AGC-2
M9109-AGC-2
VG1241AD+906AGC
VG1241AE+906AGC
VG1241AF+906AGC
VG1241AG+906AGC
VG1241AL+906AGC
VG1241AN+906AGC
VG1241BG+906AGC
VG1241BL+906AGC
VG1241BN+906AGC
VG1241CL+906AGC
VG1241CN+906AGC
VG1241CP+906AGC
VG1241DN+906AGC
VG1241DP+906AGC
VG1241DR+906AGC
VG1241EP+906AGC
VG1241ER+906AGC
VG1241ES+906AGC
VG1241FR+909AGC
VG1241FS+909AGC
VG1241FT+909AGC
AC 24 V
On/Off (Floating)
with Timeout
DC 0 to 10 V
Proportional
M9106-IGC-2
M9106-GGC-2
M9109-GGC-2
VG1241AD+906IGC
VG1241AE+906IGC
VG1241AF+906IGC
VG1241AG+906IGC
VG1241AL+906IGC
VG1241AN+906IGC
VG1241BG+906IGC
VG1241BL+906IGC
VG1241BN+906IGC
VG1241CL+906IGC
VG1241CN+906IGC
VG1241CP+906IGC
VG1241DN+906IGC
VG1241DP+906IGC
VG1241DR+906IGC
VG1241EP+906IGC
VG1241ER+906IGC
VG1241ES+906IGC
VG1241AD+906GGC
VG1241AE+906GGC
VG1241AF+906GGC
VG1241AG+906GGC
VG1241AL+906GGC
VG1241AN+906GGC
VG1241BG+906GGC
VG1241BL+906GGC
VG1241BN+906GGC
VG1241CL+906GGC
VG1241CN+906GGC
VG1241CP+906GGC
VG1241DN+906GGC
VG1241DP+906GGC
VG1241DR+906GGC
VG1241EP+906GGC
VG1241ER+906GGC
VG1241ES+906GGC
VG1241FR+909GGC
VG1241FS+909GGC
VG1241FT+909GGC
function to remove the signal at the end of rotation.
Table 9: Three-Way Plated Brass Trim Ball Valves, Electric Actuators without Switches, Spring Return
Counterclockwise, Port A (Coil) Open
Closeoff: 200 psig
End
Valve
Connection
NPT
Sweat
Press
1.
10
VG1841AD
VG1841AE
VG1841AF
VG1841AG
VG1841AL
VG1841AN
VG1841BG
VG1841BL
VG1841BN
VG1841CL
VG1841CN
VG1841CP
VG1841DN
VG1841DP
VG1841DR
VG1841EP
VG1841ER
VG1841ES
VG1841FR
VG1841FS
VG1841FT
VG1871AD
VG1871AE
VG1871AF
VG1871AG
VG1871AL
VG1871AN
VG1871BG
VG1871BL
VG1871BN
VG1871CL
VG1871CN
VG1871CP
VG1891AD
VG1891AE
VG1891AF
VG1891AG
VG1891AL
VG1891AN
VG1891BG
VG1891BL
VG1891BN
VG1891CL
VG1891CN
VG1891CP
Size, Cv
in.
1/2
3/4
1-1/4
1-1/2
1/2
3/4
1/2
3/4
1.21
1.91
2.91
4.71
7.41
11.7
4.71
7.41
11.7
7.41
11.71
18.7
11.71
18.71
29.2
18.71
29.21
46.8
29.21
46.81
73.7
1.21
1.91
2.91
4.71
7.41
11.7
4.71
7.41
11.7
7.41
11.7
18.7
1.21
1.91
2.91
4.71
7.41
11.7
4.71
7.41
11.7
7.41
11.71
18.7
VA2202-AGA-2
M9206-AGA-2S
M9210-AGA-3
AC 24 V
0 to 10 VDC
Proportional
VA2202-GGA-2
M9206-GGA-2S
M9210-GGA-3
VG1841AD+22TAGA
VG1841AE+22TAGA
VG1841AF+22TAGA
VG1841AG+22TAGA
VG1841AL+22TAGA
VG1841AN+22TAGA
VG1841BG+22TAGA
VG1841BL+22TAGA
VG1841BN+22TAGA
VG1841CL+22TAGA
VG1841CN+22TAGA
VG1841CP+22TAGA
VG1841DN+936AGA
VG1841DP+936AGA
VG1841DR+936AGA
VG1841EP+936AGA
VG1841ER+936AGA
VG1841ES+936AGA
VG1841FR+92JAGA
VG1841FS+92JAGA
VG1841FT+92JAGA
VG1871AD+22TAGA
VG1871AE+22TAGA
VG1871AF+22TAGA
VG1871AG+22TAGA
VG1871AL+22TAGA
VG1871AN+22TAGA
VG1871BG+22TAGA
VG1871BL+22TAGA
VG1871BN+22TAGA
VG1871CL+22TAGA
VG1871CN+22TAGA
VG1871CP+22TAGA
VG1891AD+22TAGA
VG1891AE+22TAGA
VG1891AF+22TAGA
VG1891AG+22TAGA
VG1891AL+22TAGA
VG1891AN+22TAGA
VG1891BG+22TAGA
VG1891BL+22TAGA
VG1891BN+22TAGA
VG1891CL+22TAGA
VG1891CN+22TAGA
VG1891CP+22TAGA
VG1841AD+22TGGA
VG1841AE+22TGGA
VG1841AF+22TGGA
VG1841AG+22TGGA
VG1841AL+22TGGA
VG1841AN+22TGGA
VG1841BG+22TGGA
VG1841BL+22TGGA
VG1841BN+22TGGA
VG1841CL+22TGGA
VG1841CN+22TGGA
VG1841CP+22TGGA
VG1841DN+936GGA
VG1841DP+936GGA
VG1841DR+936GGA
VG1841EP+936GGA
VG1841ER+936GGA
VG1841ES+936GGA
VG1841FR+92JGGA
VG1841FS+92JGGA
VG1841FT+92JGGA
VG1871AD+22TGGA
VG1871AE+22TGGA
VG1871AF+22TGGA
VG1871AG+22TGGA
VG1871AL+22TGGA
VG1871AN+22TGGA
VG1871BG+22TGGA
VG1871BL+22TGGA
VG1871BN+22TGGA
VG1871CL+22TGGA
VG1871CN+22TGGA
VG1871CP+22TGGA
VG1891AD+22TGGA
VG1891AE+22TGGA
VG1891AF+22TGGA
VG1891AG+22TGGA
VG1891AL+22TGGA
VG1891AN+22TGGA
VG1891BG+22TGGA
VG1891BL+22TGGA
VG1891BN+22TGGA
VG1891CL+22TGGA
VG1891CN+22TGGA
VG1891CP+22TGGA
Floating
On/Off
AC 120 V
On/Off
VA2202-BGA-2
M9206-BGA-2S
M9210-BGA-3
VA2202-BAA-2
M9206-BAA-2S
M9210-BAA-3
VG1841AD+22TBGA
VG1841AE+22TBGA
VG1841AF+22TBGA
VG1841AG+22TBGA
VG1841AL+22TBGA
VG1841AN+22TBGA
VG1841BG+22TBGA
VG1841BL+22TBGA
VG1841BN+22TBGA
VG1841CL+22TBGA
VG1841CN+22TBGA
VG1841CP+22TBGA
VG1841DN+936BGA
VG1841DP+936BGA
VG1841DR+936BGA
VG1841EP+936BGA
VG1841ER+936BGA
VG1841ES+936BGA
VG1841FR+92JBGA
VG1841FS+92JBGA
VG1841FT+92JBGA
VG1871AD+22TBGA
VG1871AE+22TBGA
VG1871AF+22TBGA
VG1871AG+22TBGA
VG1871AL+22TBGA
VG1871AN+22TBGA
VG1871BG+22TBGA
VG1871BL+22TBGA
VG1871BN+22TBGA
VG1871CL+22TBGA
VG1871CN+22TBGA
VG1871CP+22TBGA
VG1891AD+22TBGA
VG1891AE+22TBGA
VG1891AF+22TBGA
VG1891AG+22TBGA
VG1891AL+22TBGA
VG1891AN+22TBGA
VG1891BG+22TBGA
VG1891BL+22TBGA
VG1891BN+22TBGA
VG1891CL+22TBGA
VG1891CN+22TBGA
VG1891CP+22TBGA
VG1841AD+22TBAA
VG1841AE+22TBAA
VG1841AF+22TBAA
VG1841AG+22TBAA
VG1841AL+22TBAA
VG1841AN+22TBAA
VG1841BG+22TBAA
VG1841BL+22TBAA
VG1841BN+22TBAA
VG1841CL+22TBAA
VG1841CN+22TBAA
VG1841CP+22TBAA
VG1841DN+936BAA
VG1841DP+936BAA
VG1841DR+936BAA
VG1841EP+936BAA
VG1841ER+936BAA
VG1841ES+936BAA
VG1841FR+92JBAA
VG1841FS+92JBAA
VG1841FT+92JBAA
VG1871AD+22TBAA
VG1871AE+22TBAA
VG1871AF+22TBAA
VG1871AG+22TBAA
VG1871AL+22TBAA
VG1871AN+22TBAA
VG1871BG+22TBAA
VG1871BL+22TBAA
VG1871BN+22TBAA
VG1871CL+22TBAA
VG1871CN+22TBAA
VG1871CP+22TBAA
VG1891AD+22TBAA
VG1891AE+22TBAA
VG1891AF+22TBAA
VG1891AG+22TBAA
VG1891AL+22TBAA
VG1891AN+22TBAA
VG1891BG+22TBAA
VG1891BL+22TBAA
VG1891BN+22TBAA
VG1891CL+22TBAA
VG1891CN+22TBAA
VG1891CP+22TBAA
Table 10: Three-Way Plated Brass Trim Ball Valves, Electric Actuators without Switches, Spring Return
Clockwise, Port B (Bypass) Open
Closeoff: 200 psig
End
Valve
Connection
NPT
Sweat
Press
1.
VG1841AD
VG1841AE
VG1841AF
VG1841AG
VG1841AL
VG1841AN
VG1841BG
VG1841BL
VG1841BN
VG1841CL
VG1841CN
VG1841CP
VG1841DN
VG1841DP
VG1841DR
VG1841EP
VG1841ER
VG1841ES
VG1841FR
VG1841FS
VG1841FT
VG1871AD
VG1871AE
VG1871AF
VG1871AG
VG1871AL
VG1871AN
VG1871BG
VG1871BL
VG1871BN
VG1871CL
VG1871CN
VG1871CP
VG1891AD
VG1891AE
VG1891AF
VG1891AG
VG1891AL
VG1891AN
VG1891BG
VG1891BL
VG1891BN
VG1891CL
VG1891CN
VG1891CP
Size, Cv
in.
1/2
3/4
1-1/4
1-1/2
1/2
3/4
1/2
3/4
1.21
1.91
2.91
4.71
7.41
11.7
4.71
7.41
11.7
7.41
11.71
18.7
11.71
18.71
29.2
18.71
29.21
46.8
29.21
46.81
73.7
1.21
1.91
2.91
4.71
7.41
11.7
4.71
7.41
11.7
7.41
11.71
18.7
1.21
1.91
2.91
4.71
7.41
11.7
4.71
7.41
11.7
7.41
11.71
18.7
VA2202-AGA-2
M9206-AGA-2S
M9210-AGA-3
AC 24 V
0 to 10 VDC
Proportional
VA2202-GGA-2
M9206-GGA-2S
M9210-GGA-3
VG1841AD+24TAGA
VG1841AE+24TAGA
VG1841AF+24TAGA
VG1841AG+24TAGA
VG1841AL+24TAGA
VG1841AN+24TAGA
VG1841BG+24TAGA
VG1841BL+24TAGA
VG1841BN+24TAGA
VG1841CL+24TAGA
VG1841CN+24TAGA
VG1841CP+24TAGA
VG1841DN+956AGA
VG1841DP+956AGA
VG1841DR+956AGA
VG1841EP+956AGA
VG1841ER+956AGA
VG1841ES+956AGA
VG1841FR+94JAGA
VG1841FS+94JAGA
VG1841FT+94JAGA
VG1871AD+24TAGA
VG1871AE+24TAGA
VG1871AF+24TAGA
VG1871AG+24TAGA
VG1871AL+24TAGA
VG1871AN+24TAGA
VG1871BG+24TAGA
VG1871BL+24TAGA
VG1871BN+24TAGA
VG1871CL+24TAGA
VG1871CN+24TAGA
VG1871CP+24TAGA
VG1891AD+24TAGA
VG1891AE+24TAGA
VG1891AF+24TAGA
VG1891AG+24TAGA
VG1891AL+24TAGA
VG1891AN+24TAGA
VG1891BG+24TAGA
VG1891BL+24TAGA
VG1891BN+24TAGA
VG1891CL+24TAGA
VG1891CN+24TAGA
VG1891CP+24TAGA
VG1841AD+24TGGA
VG1841AE+24TGGA
VG1841AF+24TGGA
VG1841AG+24TGGA
VG1841AL+24TGGA
VG1841AN+24TGGA
VG1841BG+24TGGA
VG1841BL+24TGGA
VG1841BN+24TGGA
VG1841CL+24TGGA
VG1841CN+24TGGA
VG1841CP+24TGGA
VG1841DN+956GGA
VG1841DP+956GGA
VG1841DR+956GGA
VG1841EP+956GGA
VG1841ER+956GGA
VG1841ES+956GGA
VG1841FR+94JGGA
VG1841FS+94JGGA
VG1841FT+94JGGA
VG1891AD+24TGGA
VG1871AE+24TGGA
VG1871AF+24TGGA
VG1871AG+24TGGA
VG1871AL+24TGGA
VG1871AN+24TGGA
VG1871BG+24TGGA
VG1871BL+24TGGA
VG1871BN+24TGGA
VG1871CL+24TGGA
VG1871CN+24TGGA
VG1871CP+24TGGA
VG1891AD+24TGGA
VG1891AE+24TGGA
VG1891AF+24TGGA
VG1891AG+24TGGA
VG1891AL+24TGGA
VG1891AN+24TGGA
VG1891BG+24TGGA
VG1891BL+24TGGA
VG1891BN+24TGGA
VG1891CL+24TGGA
VG1891CN+24TGGA
VG1891CP+24TGGA
Floating
On/Off
AC 120 V
On/Off
VA2202-BGA-2
M9206-BGA-2S
M9210-BGA-3
VA2202-BAA-2
M9206-BAA-2S
M9210-BAA-3
VG1841AD+24TBGA
VG1841AE+24TBGA
VG1841AF+24TBGA
VG1841AG+24TBGA
VG1841AL+24TBGA
VG1841AN+24TBGA
VG1841BG+24TBGA
VG1841BL+24TBGA
VG1841BN+24TBGA
VG1841CL+24TBGA
VG1841CN+24TBGA
VG1841CP+24TBGA
VG1841DN+956BGA
VG1841DP+956BGA
VG1841DR+956BGA
VG1841EP+956BGA
VG1841ER+956BGA
VG1841ES+956BGA
VG1841FR+94JBGA
VG1841FS+94JBGA
VG1841FT+94JBGA
VG1871AD+24TBGA
VG1871AE+24TBGA
VG1871AF+24TBGA
VG1871AG+24TBGA
VG1871AL+24TBGA
VG1871AN+24TBGA
VG1871BG+24TBGA
VG1871BL+24TBGA
VG1871BN+24TBGA
VG1871CL+24TBGA
VG1871CN+24TBGA
VG1871CP+24TBGA
VG1891AD+24TBGA
VG1891AE+24TBGA
VG1891AF+24TBGA
VG1891AG+24TBGA
VG1891AL+24TBGA
VG1891AN+24TBGA
VG1891BG+24TBGA
VG1891BL+24TBGA
VG1891BN+24TBGA
VG1891CL+24TBGA
VG1891CN+24TBGA
VG1891CP+24TBGA
VG1841AD+24TBAA
VG1841AE+24TBAA
VG1841AF+24TBAA
VG1841AG+24TBAA
VG1841AL+24TBAA
VG1841AN+24TBAA
VG1841BG+24TBAA
VG1841BL+24TBAA
VG1841BN+24TBAA
VG1841CL+24TBAA
VG1841CN+24TBAA
VG1841CP+24TBAA
VG1841DN+956BAA
VG1841DP+956BAA
VG1841DR+956BAA
VG1841EP+956BAA
VG1841ER+956BAA
VG1841ES+956BAA
VG1841FR+94JBAA
VG1841FS+94JBAA
VG1841FT+94JBAA
VG1871AD+24TBAA
VG1871AE+24TBAA
VG1871AF+24TBAA
VG1871AG+24TBAA
VG1871AL+24TBAA
VG1871AN+24TBAA
VG1871BG+24TBAA
VG1871BL+24TBAA
VG1871BN+24TBAA
VG1871CL+24TBAA
VG1871CN+24TBAA
VG1871CP+24TBAA
VG1891AD+24TBAA
VG1891AE+24TBAA
VG1891AF+24TBAA
VG1891AG+24TBAA
VG1891AL+24TBAA
VG1891AN+24TBAA
VG1891BG+24TBAA
VG1891BL+24TBAA
VG1891BN+24TBAA
VG1891CL+24TBAA
VG1891CN+24TBAA
VG1891CP+24TBAA
11
Table 11: Three-Way Plated Brass Trim Ball Valves, Spring Return Electric Actuators with Switches1
Closeoff: 200 psig
End
Valve
Connection
Size, Cv
in.
Floating
VA2202-AGB-2
M9206-AGC-2S
M9210-AGC-3
AC 24 V
0 to 10 VDC
Proportional
VA2202-GGB-2
M9206-GGC-2S
M9210-GGC-3
On/Off
AC 120 V
On/Off
VA2202-BGB-2
M9206-BGB-2S
M9210-BGC-3
VA2202-BAB-2
M9206-BAB-2S
M9210-BAC-3
VG1841AD+22TGGB
VG1841AE+22TGGB
VG1841AF+22TGGB
VG1841AG+22TGGB
VG1841AL+22TGGB
VG1841AN+22TGGB
VG1841BG+22TGGB
VG1841BL+22TGGB
VG1841BN+22TGGB
VG1841CL+22TGGB
VG1841CN+22TGGB
VG1841CP+22TGGB
VG1841DN+936GGC
VG1841DP+936GGC
VG1841DR+936GGC
VG1841EP+936GGC
VG1841ER+936GGC
VG1841ES+936GGC
VG1841FR+92JGGC
VG1841FS+92JGGC
VG1841FT+92JGGC
VG1841AD+22TBGB
VG1841AE+22TBGB
VG1841AF+22TBGB
VG1841AG+22TBGB
VG1841AL+22TBGB
VG1841AN+22TBGB
VG1841BG+22TBGB
VG1841BL+22TBGB
VG1841BN+22TBGB
VG1841CL+22TBGB
VG1841CN+22TBGB
VG1841CP+22TBGB
VG1841DN+936BGB
VG1841DP+936BGB
VG1841DR+936BGB
VG1841EP+936BGB
VG1841ER+936BGB
VG1841ES+936BGB
VG1841FR+92JBGC
VG1841FS+92JBGC
VG1841FT+92JBGC
VG1841AD+22TBAB
VG1841AE+22TBAB
VG1841AF+22TBAB
VG1841AG+22TBAB
VG1841AL+22TBAB
VG1841AN+22TBAB
VG1841BG+22TBAB
VG1841BL+22TBAB
VG1841BN+22TBAB
VG1841CL+22TBAB
VG1841CN+22TBAB
VG1841CP+22TBAB
VG1841DN+936BAB
VG1841DP+936BAB
VG1841DR+936BAB
VG1841EP+936BAB
VG1841ER+936BAB
VG1841ES+936BAB
VG1841FR+92JBAC
VG1841FS+92JBAC
VG1841FT+92JBAC
VG1841AD+24TGGB
VG1841AE+24TGGB
VG1841AF+24TGGB
VG1841AG+24TGGB
VG1841AL+24TGGB
VG1841AN+24TGGB
VG1841BG+24TGGB
VG1841BL+24TGGB
VG1841BN+24TGGB
VG1841CL+24TGGB
VG1841CN+24TGGB
VG1841CP+24TGGB
VG1841DN+956GGC
VG1841DP+956GGC
VG1841DR+956GGC
VG1841EP+956GGC
VG1841ER+956GGC
VG1841ES+956GGC
VG1841FR+94JGGC
VG1841FS+94JGGC
VG1841FT+94JGGC
VG1841AD+24TBGB
VG1841AE+24TBGB
VG1841AF+24TBGB
VG1841AG+24TBGB
VG1841AL+24TBGB
VG1841AN+24TBGB
VG1841BG+24TBGB
VG1841BL+24TBGB
VG1841BN+24TBGB
VG1841CL+24TBGB
VG1841CN+24TBGB
VG1841CP+24TBGB
VG1841DN+956BGB
VG1841DP+956BGB
VG1841DR+956BGB
VG1841EP+956BGB
VG1841ER+956BGB
VG1841ES+956BGB
VG1841FR+94JBGC
VG1841FS+94JBGC
VG1841FT+94JBGC
VG1841AD+24TBAB
VG1841AE+24TBAB
VG1841AF+24TBAB
VG1841AG+24TBAB
VG1841AL+24TBAB
VG1841AN+24TBAB
VG1841BG+24TBAB
VG1841BL+24TBAB
VG1841BN+24TBAB
VG1841CL+24TBAB
VG1841CN+24TBAB
VG1841CP+24TBAB
VG1841DN+956BAB
VG1841DP+956BAB
VG1841DR+956BAB
VG1841EP+956BAB
VG1841ER+956BAB
VG1841ES+956BAB
VG1841FR+94JBAC
VG1841FS+94JBAC
VG1841FT+94JBAC
Spring Return Counterclockwise Port A (Coil) Open

NPT
VG1841AD
VG1841AE
VG1841AF
VG1841AG
VG1841AL
VG1841AN
VG1841BG
VG1841BL
VG1841BN
VG1841CL
VG1841CN
VG1841CP
VG1841DN
VG1841DP
VG1841DR
VG1841EP
VG1841ER
VG1841ES
VG1841FR
VG1841FS
VG1841FT
1/2
3/4
1-1/4
1-1/2
1.2/0.72
1.9/1.22
2.9/1.92
4.7/2.92
7.4/4.72
11.7/5.8
4.7/2.92
7.4/4.72
11.7/5.8
7.4/4.72
11.7/7.42
18.7/9.4
11.7/7.42
18.7/11.72
29.2/14.6
18.7/11.72
29.2/18.72
46.8/23.4
29.2/18.72
46.8/29.22
73.7/36.8
VG1841AD+22TAGB
VG1841AE+22TAGB
VG1841AF+22TAGB
VG1841AG+22TAGB
VG1841AL+22TAGB
VG1841AN+22TAGB
VG1841BG+22TAGB
VG1841BL+22TAGB
VG1841BN+22TAGB
VG1841CL+22TAGB
VG1841CN+22TAGB
VG1841CP+22TAGB
VG1841DN+936AGC
VG1841DP+936AGC
VG1841DR+936AGC
VG1841EP+936AGC
VG1841ER+936AGC
VG1841ES+936AGC
VG1841FR+92JAGC
VG1841FS+92JAGC
VG1841FT+92JAGC
Spring Return Clockwise Port B (Bypass) Open

NPT
1.
2.
12
VG1841AD
VG1841AE
VG1841AF
VG1841AG
VG1841AL
VG1841AN
VG1841BG
VG1841BL
VG1841BN
VG1841CL
VG1841CN
VG1841CP
VG1841DN
VG1841DP
VG1841DR
VG1841EP
VG1841ER
VG1841ES
VG1841FR
VG1841FS
VG1841FT
1/2
3/4
1-1/4
1-1/2
1.2/0.72
1.9/1.22
2.9/1.92
4.7/2.92
7.4/4.72
11.7/5.8
4.7/2.92
7.4/4.72
11.7/5.8
7.4/4.72
11.7/7.42
18.7/9.4
11.7/7.42
18.7/11.72
29.2/14.6
18.7/11.72
29.2/18.72
46.8/23.4
29.2/18.72
46.8/29.22
73.7/36.8
VG1841AD+24TAGB
VG1841AE+24TAGB
VG1841AF+24TAGB
VG1841AG+24TAGB
VG1841AL+24TAGB
VG1841AN+24TAGB
VG1841BG+24TAGB
VG1841BL+24TAGB
VG1841BN+24TAGB
VG1841CL+24TAGB
VG1841CN+24TAGB
VG1841CP+24TAGB
VG1841DN+956AGC
VG1841DP+956AGC
VG1841DR+956AGC
VG1841EP+956AGC
VG1841ER+956AGC
VG1841ES+956AGC
VG1841FR+94JAGC
VG1841FS+94JAGC
VG1841FT+94JAGC
VA2202-xxB and M9206-BxB have a single end switch. M9206-xGC and M9210-xGC-3 have two end switches.
Table 12: Three-Way Plated Brass Trim Ball Valves, Non-Spring Return Electric Actuators without
Switches
Closeoff: 200 psig
End
Valve
Connection
NPT
Sweat
Press
1.
2.
VG1841AD
VG1841AE
VG1841AF
VG1841AG
VG1841AL
VG1841AN
VG1841BG
VG1841BL
VG1841BN
VG1841CL
VG1841CN
VG1841CP
VG1841DN
VG1841DP
VG1841DR
VG1841EP
VG1841ER
VG1841ES
VG1841FR
VG1841FS
VG1841FT
VG1871AD
VG1871AE
VG1871AF
VG1871AG
VG1871AL
VG1871AN
VG1871BG
VG1871BL
VG1871BN
VG1871CL
VG1871CN
VG1871CP
VG1891AD
VG1891AE
VG1891AF
VG1891AG
VG1891AL
VG1891AN
VG1891BG
VG1891BL
VG1891BN
VG1891CL
VG1891CN
VG1891CP
Size, Cv
in.
1/2
3/4
1-1/4
1-1/2
1/2
3/4
1/2
3/4
1.2/0.72
1.9/1.22
2.9/1.92
4.7/2.92
7.4/4.72
11.7/5.8
4.7/2.92
7.4/4.72
11.7/5.8
7.4/4.72
11.7/7.42
18.7/9.4
11.7/7.42
18.7/11.72
29.2/14.6
18.7/11.72
29.2/18.72
46.8/23.4
29.2/18.72
46.8/29.22
73.7/36.8
1.2/0.72
1.9/1.22
2.9/1.92
4.7/2.92
7.4/4.72
11.7/5.8
4.7/2.92
7.4/4.72
11.7/5.8
7.4/4.72
11.7/7.42
18.7/9.4
1.2/0.7
1.9/1.22
2.9/1.92
4.7/2.92
7.4/4.72
11.7/5.8
4.7/2.92
7.4/4.72
11.7/5.8
7.4/4.72
11.7/7.42
18.7/9.4
On/Off (Floating)
without Timeout1
VA9104-AGA-xS
M9106-AGA-2
M9109-AGA-2
VG1841AD+9T4AGA3
VG1841AE+9T4AGA3
VG1841AF+9T4AGA3
VG1841AG+9T4AGA3
VG1841AL+9T4AGA3
VG1841AN+9T4AGA3
VG1841BG+9T4AGA3
VG1841BL+9T4AGA3
VG1841BN+9T4AGA3
VG1841CL+9T4AGA3
VG1841CN+9T4AGA3
VG1841CP+9T4AGA3
VG1841DN+906AGA
VG1841DP+906AGA
VG1841DR+906AGA
VG1841EP+906AGA
VG1841ER+906AGA
VG1841ES+906AGA
VG1841FR+906AGA
VG1841FS+906AGA
VG1841FT+906AGA
VG1871AD+9T4AGA3
VG1871AE+9T4AGA3
VG1871AF+9T4AGA3
VG1871AG+9T4AGA3
VG1871AL+9T4AGA3
VG1871AN+9T4AGA3
VG1871BG+9T4AGA3
VG1871BL+9T4AGA3
VG1871BN+9T4AGA3
VG1871CL+9T4AGA3
VG1871CN+9T4AGA3
VG1871CP+9T4AGA3
VG1891AD+9T4AGA3
VG1891AE+9T4AGA3
VG1891AF+9T4AGA3
VG1891AG+9T4AGA3
VG1891AL+9T4AGA3
VG1891AN+9T4AGA3
VG1891BG+9T4AGA3
VG1891BL+9T4AGA3
VG1891BN+9T4AGA3
VG1891CL+9T4AGA3
VG1891CN+9T4AGA3
VG1891CP+9T4AGA3
AC 24 V
On/Off (Floating)
with Timeout
0 to 10 VDC
Proportional
VA9104-IGA-xS
M9106-IGA-2
VA9104-GGA-xS
M9106-GGA-2
M9109-GGA-2
VG1841AD+9T4IGA3
VG1841AE+9T4IGA3
VG1841AF+9T4IGA3
VG1841AG+9T4IGA3
VG1841AL+9T4IGA3
VG1841AN+9T4IGA3
VG1841BG+9T4IGA3
VG1841BL+9T4IGA3
VG1841BN+9T4IGA3
VG1841CL+9T4IGA3
VG1841CN+9T4IGA3
VG1841CP+9T4IGA3
VG1841DN+906IGA
VG1841DP+906IGA
VG1841DR+906IGA
VG1841EP+906IGA
VG1841ER+906IGA
VG1841ES+906IGA
VG1871AD+9T4IGA3
VG1871AE+9T4IGA3
VG1871AF+9T4IGA3
VG1871AG+9T4IGA3
VG1871AL+9T4IGA3
VG1871AN+9T4IGA3
VG1871BG+9T4IGA3
VG1871BL+9T4IGA3
VG1871BN+9T4IGA3
VG1871CL+9T4IGA3
VG1871CN+9T4IGA3
VG1871CP+9T4IGA3
VG1891AD+9T4IGA3
VG1891AE+9T4IGA3
VG1891AF+9T4IGA3
VG1891AG+9T4IGA3
VG1891AL+9T4IGA3
VG1891AN+9T4IGA3
VG1891BG+9T4IGA3
VG1891BL+9T4IGA3
VG1891BN+9T4IGA3
VG1891CL+9T4IGA3
VG1891CN+9T4IGA3
VG1891CP+9T4IGA3
VG1841AD+9T4GGA3
VG1841AE+9T4GGA3
VG1841AF+9T4GGA3
VG1841AG+9T4GGA3
VG1841AL+9T4GGA3
VG1841AN+9T4GGA3
VG1841BG+9T4GGA3
VG1841BL+9T4GGA3
VG1841BN+9T4GGA3
VG1841CL+9T4GGA3
VG1841CN+9T4GGA3
VG1841CP+9T4GGA3
VG1841DN+906GGA
VG1841DP+906GGA
VG1841DR+906GGA
VG1841EP+906GGA
VG1841ER+906GGA
VG1841ES+906GGA
VG1841FR+906GGA
VG1841FS+906GGA
VG1841FT+906GGA
VG1871AD+9T4GGA3
VG1871AE+9T4GGA3
VG1871AF+9T4GGA3
VG1871AG+9T4GGA3
VG1871AL+9T4GGA3
VG1871AN+9T4GGA3
VG1871BG+9T4GGA3
VG1871BL+9T4GGA3
VG1871BN+9T4GGA3
VG1871CL+9T4GGA3
VG1871CN+9T4GGA3
VG1871CP+9T4GGA3
VG1891AD+9T4GGA3
VG1891AE+9T4GGA3
VG1891AF+9T4GGA3
VG1891AG+9T4GGA3
VG1891AL+9T4GGA3
VG1891AN+9T4GGA3
VG1891BG+9T4GGA3
VG1891BL+9T4GGA3
VG1891BN+9T4GGA3
VG1891CL+9T4GGA3
VG1891CN+9T4GGA3
VG1891CP+9T4GGA3
To avoid excessive wear or drive time on the motor for the AGx models use a controller or software that provides a timeout
13
3.
change the 9T4 to 9A4 in the code number for a VA9104-xGA-2S actuator. For example, VG1841AD+9T4AGA becomes
VG1841AD+9A4AGA.
Table 13: Three-Way Plated Brass Trim Ball Valves, Non-Spring Return Electric Actuators with Switches
Closeoff: 200 psig
End
Valve
Connection
NPT
1.
2.
14
VG1841AD
VG1841AE
VG1841AF
VG1841AG
VG1841AL
VG1841AN
VG1841BG
VG1841BL
VG1841BN
VG1841CL
VG1841CN
VG1841CP
VG1841DN
VG1841DP
VG1841DR
VG1841EP
VG1841ER
VG1841ES
VG1841FR
VG1841FS
VG1841FT
Size, Cv
in.
1/2
3/4
1-1/4
1-1/2
1.2/0.72
1.9/1.22
2.9/1.92
4.7/2.92
7.4/4.72
11.7/5.8
4.7/2.92
7.4/4.72
11.7/5.8
7.4/4.72
11.7/7.42
18.7/9.4
11.7/7.42
18.7/11.72
29.2/14.6
18.7/11.72
29.2/18.72
46.8/23.4
29.2/18.72
46.8/29.22
73.7/36.8
On/Off (Floating)
without Timeout1
M9106-AGC-2
M9109-AGC-2
VG1841AD+906AGC
VG1841AE+906AGC
VG1841AF+906AGC
VG1841AG+906AGC
VG1841AL+906AGC
VG1841AN+906AGC
VG1841BG+906AGC
VG1841BL+906AGC
VG1841BN+906AGC
VG1841CL+906AGC
VG1841CN+906AGC
VG1841CP+906AGC
VG1841DN+906AGC
VG1841DP+906AGC
VG1841DR+906AGC
VG1841EP+906AGC
VG1841ER+906AGC
VG1841ES+906AGC
VG1841FR+909AGC
VG1841FS+909AGC
VG1841FT+909AGC
AC 24 V
On/Off (Floating)
with Timeout
0 to 10 VDC
Proportional
M9106-IGC-2
M9106-GGC-2
M9109-GGC-2
VG1841AD+906IGC
VG1841AE+906IGC
VG1841AF+906IGC
VG1841AG+906IGC
VG1841AL+906IGC
VG1841AN+906IGC
VG1841BG+906IGC
VG1841BL+906IGC
VG1841BN+906IGC
VG1841CL+906IGC
VG1841CN+906IGC
VG1841CP+906IGC
VG1841DN+906IGC
VG1841DP+906IGC
VG1841DR+906IGC
VG1841EP+906IGC
VG1841ER+906IGC
VG1841ES+906IGC
VG1841AD+906GGC
VG1841AE+906GGC
VG1841AF+906GGC
VG1841AG+906GGC
VG1841AL+906GGC
VG1841AN+906GGC
VG1841BG+906GGC
VG1841BL+906GGC
VG1841BN+906GGC
VG1841CL+906GGC
VG1841CN+906GGC
VG1841CP+906GGC
VG1841DN+906GGC
VG1841DP+906GGC
VG1841DR+906GGC
VG1841EP+906GGC
VG1841ER+906GGC
VG1841ES+906GGC
VG1841FR+909GGC
VG1841FS+909GGC
VG1841FT+909GGC
To avoid excessive wear or drive time on the motor for the AGx models use a controller or software that provides a timeout
Table 14: Two-Way Stainless Steel Trim Ball Valves, Electric Actuators without Switches, Spring Return
Open
Closeoff: 200 psig
End
Valve
Connection
NPT
Sweat
Press
1.
2.
VG1245AD
VG1245AE
VG1245AF
VG1245AG
VG1245AL
VG1245AN
VG1245BG
VG1245BL
VG1245BN
VG1245CL
VG1245CN
VG1245CP
VG1245DN
VG1245DP
VG1245DR
VG1245EP
VG1245ER
VG1245ES
VG1245FR
VG1245FS
VG1245FT
VG1275AD
VG1275AE
VG1275AF
VG1275AG
VG1275AL
VG1275AN
VG1275BG
VG1275BL
VG1275BN
VG1275CL
VG1275CN
VG1275CP
VG1295AD
VG1295AE
VG1295AF
VG1295AG
VG1295AL
VG1295AN
VG1295BG
VG1295BL
VG1295BN
VG1295CL
VG1295CN
VG1295CP
Size, Cv
in.
1/2
3/4
1-1/4
1-1/2
1/2
3/4
1/2
3/4
1.22
1.92
2.92
4.72
7.42
11.7
4.72
7.42
11.7
7.42
11.72
18.7
11.72
18.72
29.2
18.72
29.22
46.8
29.22
46.82
73.7
1.22
1.92
2.92
4.72
7.42
11.7
4.72
7.42
11.7
7.42
11.72
18.7
1.22
1.92
2.92
4.72
7.42
11.7
4.72
7.42
11.7
7.42
11.72
18.7
Floating
AC 24 V
0 to 10 VDC
Proportional
On/Off
AC 120 V
On/Off
VA2202-AGA-21 VA2202-GGA-21
M9210-AGA-3
M9210-GGA-3
VA2202-BGA-21 VA2202-BAA-21
M9206-BGA-2S M9206-BAA-2S
M9210-BGA-3
M9210-BAA-3
VG1245AD+22TAGA
VG1245AE+22TAGA
VG1245AF+22TAGA
VG1245AG+22TAGA
VG1245AL+22TAGA
VG1245AN+22TAGA
VG1245BG+22TAGA
VG1245BL+22TAGA
VG1245BN+22TAGA
VG1245CL+22TAGA
VG1245CN+22TAGA
VG1245CP+22TAGA
VG1245DN+936AGA
VG1245DP+936AGA
VG1245DR+936AGA
VG1245EP+936AGA
VG1245ER+936AGA
VG1245ES+936AGA
VG1245FR+92JAGA
VG1245FS+92JAGA
VG1245FT+92JAGA
VG1275AD+22TAGA
VG1275AE+22TAGA
VG1275AF+22TAGA
VG1275AG+22TAGA
VG1275AL+22TAGA
VG1275AN+22TAGA
VG1275BG+22TAGA
VG1275BL+22TAGA
VG1275BN+22TAGA
VG1275CL+22TAGA
VG1275CN+22TAGA
VG1275CP+22TAGA
VG1295AD+22TAGA
VG1295AE+22TAGA
VG1295AF+22TAGA
VG1295AG+22TAGA
VG1295AL+22TAGA
VG1295AN+22TAGA
VG1295BG+22TAGA
VG1295BL+22TAGA
VG1295BN+22TAGA
VG1295CL+22TAGA
VG1295CN+22TAGA
VG1295CP+22TAGA
VG1245AD+22TBGA
VG1245AE+22TBGA
VG1245AF+22TBGA
VG1245AG+22TBGA
VG1245AL+22TBGA
VG1245AN+22TBGA
VG1245BG+22TBGA
VG1245BL+22TBGA
VG1245BN+22TBGA
VG1245CL+22TBGA
VG1245CN+22TBGA
VG1245CP+22TBGA
VG1245DN+936BGA
VG1245DP+936BGA
VG1245DR+936BGA
VG1245EP+936BGA
VG1245ER+936BGA
VG1245ES+936BGA
VG1245FR+92JBGA
VG1245FS+92JBGA
VG1245FT+92JBGA
VG1275AD+22TBGA
VG1275AE+22TBGA
VG1275AF+22TBGA
VG1275AG+22TBGA
VG1275AL+22TBGA
VG1275AN+22TBGA
VG1275BG+22TBGA
VG1275BL+22TBGA
VG1275BN+22TBGA
VG1275CL+22TBGA
VG1275CN+22TBGA
VG1275CP+22TBGA
VG1295AD+22TBGA
VG1295AE+22TBGA
VG1295AF+22TBGA
VG1295AG+22TBGA
VG1295AL+22TBGA
VG1295AN+22TBGA
VG1295BG+22TBGA
VG1295BL+22TBGA
VG1295BN+22TBGA
VG1295CL+22TBGA
VG1295CN+22TBGA
VG1295CP+22TBGA
VG1245AD+22TGGA
VG1245AE+22TGGA
VG1245AF+22TGGA
VG1245AG+22TGGA
VG1245AL+22TGGA
VG1245AN+22TGGA
VG1245BG+22TGGA
VG1245BL+22TGGA
VG1245BN+22TGGA
VG1245CL+22TGGA
VG1245CN+22TGGA
VG1245CP+22TGGA
VG1245DN+936GGA
VG1245DP+936GGA
VG1245DR+936GGA
VG1245EP+936GGA
VG1245ER+936GGA
VG1245ES+936GGA
VG1245FR+92JGGA
VG1245FS+92JGGA
VG1245FT+92JGGA
VG1275AD+22TGGA
VG1275AE+22TGGA
VG1275AF+22TGGA
VG1275AG+22TGGA
VG1275AL+22TGGA
VG1275AN+22TGGA
VG1275BG+22TGGA
VG1275BL+22TGGA
VG1275BN+22TGGA
VG1275CL+22TGGA
VG1275CN+22TGGA
VG1275CP+22TGGA
VG1295AD+22TGGA
VG1295AE+22TGGA
VG1295AF+22TGGA
VG1295AG+22TGGA
VG1295AL+22TGGA
VG1295AN+22TGGA
VG1295BG+22TGGA
VG1295BL+22TGGA
VG1295BN+22TGGA
VG1295CL+22TGGA
VG1295CN+22TGGA
VG1295CP+22TGGA
VG1245AD+22TBAA
VG1245AE+22TBAA
VG1245AF+22TBAA
VG1245AG+22TBAA
VG1245AL+22TBAA
VG1245AN+22TBAA
VG1245BG+22TBAA
VG1245BL+22TBAA
VG1245BN+22TBAA
VG1245CL+22TBAA
VG1245CN+22TBAA
VG1245CP+22TBAA
VG1245DN+936BAA
VG1245DP+936BAA
VG1245DR+936BAA
VG1245EP+936BAA
VG1245ER+936BAA
VG1245ES+936BAA
VG1245FR+92JBAA
VG1245FS+92JBAA
VG1245FT+92JBAA
VG1275AD+22TBAA
VG1275AE+22TBAA
VG1275AF+22TBAA
VG1275AG+22TBAA
VG1275AL+22TBAA
VG1275AN+22TBAA
VG1275BG+22TBAA
VG1275BL+22TBAA
VG1275BN+22TBAA
VG1275CL+22TBAA
VG1275CN+22TBAA
VG1275CP+22TBAA
VG1295AD+22TBAA
VG1295AE+22TBAA
VG1295AF+22TBAA
VG1295AG+22TBAA
VG1295AL+22TBAA
VG1295AN+22TBAA
VG1295BG+22TBAA
VG1295BL+22TBAA
VG1295BN+22TBAA
VG1295CL+22TBAA
VG1295CN+22TBAA
VG1295CP+22TBAA
The VA2202 Series Actuator has a 212F (100C) fluid temperature limit. For fluid temperatures higher than 212F, use an
M9206 Series Actuator. For NPT end connection valves, you can specify a factory-mounted M9206 actuator by changing the
22T or 24T in the code number to 936 or 956. For example, VG1245AD+22TBGA becomes VG1245AD+936BGA.
15
Table 15: Two-Way Stainless Steel Trim Ball Valves, Electric Actuators without Switches, Spring Return
Closed
Closeoff: 200 psig
End
Valve
Connection
NPT
Sweat
Press
1.
2.
16
VG1245AD
VG1245AE
VG1245AF
VG1245AG
VG1245AL
VG1245AN
VG1245BG
VG1245BL
VG1245BN
VG1245CL
VG1245CN
VG1245CP
VG1245DN
VG1245DP
VG1245DR
VG1245EP
VG1245ER
VG1245ES
VG1245FR
VG1245FS
VG1245FT
VG1275AD
VG1275AE
VG1275AF
VG1275AG
VG1275AL
VG1275AN
VG1275BG
VG1275BL
VG1275BN
VG1275CL
VG1275CN
VG1275CP
VG1295AD
VG1295AE
VG1295AF
VG1295AG
VG1295AL
VG1295AN
VG1295BG
VG1295BL
VG1295BN
VG1295CL
VG1295CN
VG1295CP
Size, Cv
in.
1/2
3/4
1-1/4
1-1/2
1/2
3/4
1/2
3/4
1.22
1.92
2.92
4.72
7.42
11.7
4.72
7.42
11.7
7.42
11.72
18.7
11.72
18.72
29.2
18.72
29.22
46.8
29.22
46.82
73.7
1.22
1.92
2.92
4.72
7.42
11.7
4.72
7.42
11.7
7.42
11.72
18.7
1.22
1.92
2.92
4.72
7.42
11.7
4.72
7.42
11.7
7.42
11.72
18.7
Floating
AC 24 V
0 to 10 VDC
Proportional
On/Off
AC 120 V
On/Off
VA2202-AGA-21 VA2202-GGA-21
M9210-AGA-3
M9210-GGA-3
VA2202-BGA-21 VA2202-BAA-21
M9210-BGA-3
M9210-BAA-3
VG1245AD+24TAGA
VG1245AE+24TAGA
VG1245AF+24TAGA
VG1245AG+24TAGA
VG1245AL+24TAGA
VG1245AN+24TAGA
VG1245BG+24TAGA
VG1245BL+24TAGA
VG1245BN+24TAGA
VG1245CL+24TAGA
VG1245CN+24TAGA
VG1245CP+24TAGA
VG1245DN+956AGA
VG1245DP+956AGA
VG1245DR+956AGA
VG1245EP+956AGA
VG1245ER+956AGA
VG1245ES+956AGA
VG1245FR+94JAGA
VG1245FS+94JAGA
VG1245FT+94JAGA
VG1275AD+24TAGA
VG1275AE+24TAGA
VG1275AF+24TAGA
VG1275AG+24TAGA
VG1275AL+24TAGA
VG1275AN+24TAGA
VG1275BG+24TAGA
VG1275BL+24TAGA
VG1275BN+24TAGA
VG1275CL+24TAGA
VG1275CN+24TAGA
VG1275CP+24TAGA
VG1295AD+24TAGA
VG1295AE+24TAGA
VG1295AF+24TAGA
VG1295AG+24TAGA
VG1295AL+24TAGA
VG1295AN+24TAGA
VG1295BG+24TAGA
VG1295BL+24TAGA
VG1295BN+24TAGA
VG1295CL+24TAGA
VG1295CN+24TAGA
VG1295CP+24TAGA
VG1245AD+24TBGA
VG1245AE+24TBGA
VG1245AF+24TBGA
VG1245AG+24TBGA
VG1245AL+24TBGA
VG1245AN+24TBGA
VG1245BG+24TBGA
VG1245BL+24TBGA
VG1245BN+24TBGA
VG1245CL+24TBGA
VG1245CN+24TBGA
VG1245CP+24TBGA
VG1245DN+956BGA
VG1245DP+956BGA
VG1245DR+956BGA
VG1245EP+956BGA
VG1245ER+956BGA
VG1245ES+956BGA
VG1245FR+94JBGA
VG1245FS+94JBGA
VG1245FT+94JBGA
VG1275AD+24TBGA
VG1275AE+24TBGA
VG1275AF+24TBGA
VG1275AG+24TBGA
VG1275AL+24TBGA
VG1275AN+24TBGA
VG1275BG+24TBGA
VG1275BL+24TBGA
VG1275BN+24TBGA
VG1275CL+24TBGA
VG1275CN+24TBGA
VG1275CP+24TBGA
VG1295AD+24TBGA
VG1295AE+24TBGA
VG1295AF+24TBGA
VG1295AG+24TBGA
VG1295AL+24TBGA
VG1295AN+24TBGA
VG1295BG+24TBGA
VG1295BL+24TBGA
VG1295BN+24TBGA
VG1295CL+24TBGA
VG1295CN+24TBGA
VG1295CP+24TBGA
VG1245AD+24TGGA
VG1245AE+24TGGA
VG1245AF+24TGGA
VG1245AG+24TGGA
VG1245AL+24TGGA
VG1245AN+24TGGA
VG1245BG+24TGGA
VG1245BL+24TGGA
VG1245BN+24TGGA
VG1245CL+24TGGA
VG1245CN+24TGGA
VG1245CP+24TGGA
VG1245DN+956GGA
VG1245DP+956GGA
VG1245DR+956GGA
VG1245EP+956GGA
VG1245ER+956GGA
VG1245ES+956GGA
VG1245FR+94JGGA
VG1245FS+94JGGA
VG1245FT+94JGGA
VG1275AD+24TGGA
VG1275AE+24TGGA
VG1275AF+24TGGA
VG1275AG+24TGGA
VG1275AL+24TGGA
VG1275AN+24TGGA
VG1275BG+24TGGA
VG1275BL+24TGGA
VG1275BN+24TGGA
VG1275CL+24TGGA
VG1275CN+24TGGA
VG1275CP+24TGGA
VG1295AD+24TGGA
VG1295AE+24TGGA
VG1295AF+24TGGA
VG1295AG+24TGGA
VG1295AL+24TGGA
VG1295AN+24TGGA
VG1295BG+24TGGA
VG1295BL+24TGGA
VG1295BN+24TGGA
VG1295CL+24TGGA
VG1295CN+24TGGA
VG1295CP+24TGGA
VG1245AD+24TBAA
VG1245AE+24TBAA
VG1245AF+24TBAA
VG1245AG+24TBAA
VG1245AL+24TBAA
VG1245AN+24TBAA
VG1245BG+24TBAA
VG1245BL+24TBAA
VG1245BN+24TBAA
VG1245CL+24TBAA
VG1245CN+24TBAA
VG1245CP+24TBAA
VG1245DN+956BAA
VG1245DP+956BAA
VG1245DR+956BAA
VG1245EP+956BAA
VG1245ER+956BAA
VG1245ES+956BAA
VG1245FR+94JBAA
VG1245FS+94JBAA
VG1245FT+94JBAA
VG1275AD+24TBAA
VG1275AE+24TBAA
VG1275AF+24TBAA
VG1275AG+24TBAA
VG1275AL+24TBAA
VG1275AN+24TBAA
VG1275BG+24TBAA
VG1275BL+24TBAA
VG1275BN+24TBAA
VG1275CL+24TBAA
VG1275CN+24TBAA
VG1275CP+24TBAA
VG1295AD+24TBAA
VG1295AE+24TBAA
VG1295AF+24TBAA
VG1295AG+24TBAA
VG1295AL+24TBAA
VG1295AN+24TBAA
VG1295BG+24TBAA
VG1295BL+24TBAA
VG1295BN+24TBAA
VG1295CL+24TBAA
VG1295CN+24TBAA
VG1295CP+24TBAA
M9206 Series Actuator. For NPT end connection valves, you can specify a factory-mounted M9206 actuator by changing the
22T or 24T in the code number to 936 or 956. For example, VG1245AD+22TBGA becomes VG1245AD+936BGA. For M9206
actuators on Sweat or Press fitting end connection valves, field assembly is required using a M9000-520 linkage.
Table 16: Two-Way Stainless Steel Trim Ball Valves, Electric Actuators with Switches1
Closeoff: 200 psig
End
Valve
Connection
Size, Cv
in.
Floating
AC 24 V
0 to 10 VDC
Proportional
VA2202-AGB-22 VA2202-GGB-22
M9206-AGC-2
M9206-GGC-2S
M9210-AGC-3
M9210-GGC-3
Spring Return Open Valve Normally Open
VG1245AD
1/2
1.23
VG1245AD+22TAGB VG1245AD+22TGGB
NPT
VG1245AE
VG1245AF
VG1245AG
VG1245AL
VG1245AN
VG1245BG
VG1245BL
VG1245BN
VG1245CL
VG1245CN
VG1245CP
VG1245DN
VG1245DP
VG1245DR
VG1245EP
VG1245ER
VG1245ES
VG1245FR
VG1245FS
VG1245FT
3/4
1-1/4
1-1/2
1.93
2.93
4.73
7.43
11.7
4.73
7.43
11.7
7.43
11.73
18.7
11.73
18.73
29.2
18.73
29.23
46.8
29.23
46.83
73.7
VG1245AE+22TAGB
VG1245AF+22TAGB
VG1245AG+22TAGB
VG1245AL+22TAGB
VG1245AN+22TAGB
VG1245BG+22TAGB
VG1245BL+22TAGB
VG1245BN+22TAGB
VG1245CL+22TAGB
VG1245CN+22TAGB
VG1245CP+22TAGB
VG1245DN+936AGC
VG1245DP+936AGC
VG1245DR+936AGC
VG1245EP+936AGC
VG1245ER+936AGC
VG1245ES+936AGC
VG1245FR+92JAGC
VG1245FS+92JAGC
VG1245FT+92JAGC
VG1245AE+22TGGB
VG1245AF+22TGGB
VG1245AG+22TGGB
VG1245AL+22TGGB
VG1245AN+22TGGB
VG1245BG+22TGGB
VG1245BL+22TGGB
VG1245BN+22TGGB
VG1245CL+22TGGB
VG1245CN+22TGGB
VG1245CP+22TGGB
VG1245DN+936GGC
VG1245DP+936GGC
VG1245DR+936GGC
VG1245EP+936GGC
VG1245ER+936GGC
VG1245ES+936GGC
VG1245FR+92JGGC
VG1245FS+92JGGC
VG1245FT+92JGGC
Spring Return Closed Valve Normally Closed

VG1245AD
1/2
1.23
VG1245AD+24TAGB VG1245AD+24TGGB
NPT
VG1245AE
VG1245AF
VG1245AG
VG1245AL
VG1245AN
VG1245BG
VG1245BL
VG1245BN
VG1245CL
VG1245CN
VG1245CP
VG1245DN
VG1245DP
VG1245DR
VG1245EP
VG1245ER
VG1245ES
VG1245FR
VG1245FS
VG1245FT
1.
2.
3.
3/4
1-1/4
1-1/2
1.93
2.93
4.73
7.43
11.7
4.73
7.43
11.7
7.43
11.73
18.7
11.73
18.73
29.2
18.73
29.23
46.8
29.23
46.83
73.7
VG1245AE+24TAGB
VG1245AF+24TAGB
VG1245AG+24TAGB
VG1245AL+24TAGB
VG1245AN+24TAGB
VG1245BG+24TAGB
VG1245BL+24TAGB
VG1245BN+24TAGB
VG1245CL+24TAGB
VG1245CN+24TAGB
VG1245CP+24TAGB
VG1245DN+956AGC
VG1245DP+956AGC
VG1245DR+956AGC
VG1245EP+956AGC
VG1245ER+956AGC
VG1245ES+956AGC
VG1245FR+94JAGC
VG1245FS+94JAGC
VG1245FT+94JAGC
VG1245AE+24TGGB
VG1245AF+24TGGB
VG1245AG+24TGGB
VG1245AL+24TGGB
VG1245AN+24TGGB
VG1245BG+24TGGB
VG1245BL+24TGGB
VG1245BN+24TGGB
VG1245CL+24TGGB
VG1245CN+24TGGB
VG1245CP+24TGGB
VG1245DN+956GGC
VG1245DP+956GGC
VG1245DR+956GGC
VG1245EP+956GGC
VG1245ER+956GGC
VG1245ES+956GGC
VG1245FR+94JGGC
VG1245FS+94JGGC
VG1245FT+94JGGC
On/Off
AC 120 V
On/Off
VA2202-BGB-22 VA2202-BAB-22
M9206-BGB-2S M9206-BAB-2S
M9210-BGC-3
M9210-BAC-3
VG1245AD+22TBGB
VG1245AE+22TBGB
VG1245AF+22TBGB
VG1245AG+22TBGB
VG1245AL+22TBGB
VG1245AN+22TBGB
VG1245BG+22TBGB
VG1245BL+22TBGB
VG1245BN+22TBGB
VG1245CL+22TBGB
VG1245CN+22TBGB
VG1245CP+22TBGB
VG1245DN+936BGB
VG1245DP+936BGB
VG1245DR+936BGB
VG1245EP+936BGB
VG1245ER+936BGB
VG1245ES+936BGB
VG1245FR+92JBGC
VG1245FS+92JBGC
VG1245FT+92JBGC
VG1245AD+22TBAB
VG1245AE+22TBAB
VG1245AF+22TBAB
VG1245AG+22TBAB
VG1245AL+22TBAB
VG1245AN+22TBAB
VG1245BG+22TBAB
VG1245BL+22TBAB
VG1245BN+22TBAB
VG1245CL+22TBAB
VG1245CN+22TBAB
VG1245CP+22TBAB
VG1245DN+936BAB
VG1245DP+936BAB
VG1245DR+936BAB
VG1245EP+936BAB
VG1245ER+936BAB
VG1245ES+936BAB
VG1245FR+92JBAC
VG1245FS+92JBAC
VG1245FT+92JBAC
VG1245AD+24TBGB
VG1245AE+24TBGB
VG1245AF+24TBGB
VG1245AG+24TBGB
VG1245AL+24TBGB
VG1245AN+24TBGB
VG1245BG+24TBGB
VG1245BL+24TBGB
VG1245BN+24TBGB
VG1245CL+24TBGB
VG1245CN+24TBGB
VG1245CP+24TBGB
VG1245DN+956BGB
VG1245DP+956BGB
VG1245DR+956BGB
VG1245EP+956BGB
VG1245ER+956BGB
VG1245ES+956BGB
VG1245FR+94JBGC
VG1245FS+94JBGC
VG1245FT+94JBGC
VG1245AD+24TBAB
VG1245AE+24TBAB
VG1245AF+24TBAB
VG1245AG+24TBAB
VG1245AL+24TBAB
VG1245AN+24TBAB
VG1245BG+24TBAB
VG1245BL+24TBAB
VG1245BN+24TBAB
VG1245CL+24TBAB
VG1245CN+24TBAB
VG1245CP+24TBAB
VG1245DN+956BAB
VG1245DP+956BAB
VG1245DR+956BAB
VG1245EP+956BAB
VG1245ER+956BAB
VG1245ES+956BAB
VG1245FR+94JBAC
VG1245FS+94JBAC
VG1245FT+94JBAC
VA2202-xxB and M9206-xxB have a single end switch. M9210-xGC-3 has two end switches.
M9206 Series Actuator. For NPT end connection valves, you can specify a factory-mounted M9206 actuator by changing
22T or 24T in the code number to 936 or 956. For example, VG1245AD+22TBGB becomes VG1245AD+936BGB. For
M9206 actuators on Sweat or Press fitting end connection valves, field assembly is required using a M9000-520 linkage.
17
Table 17: Two-Way Stainless Steel Trim Ball Valves, Electric Actuators without Switches, Non-Spring
Return (Part 1 of 2)
Closeoff: 200 psig
End
Valve
Connection
NPT
Sweat
18
VG1245AD
VG1245AE
VG1245AF
VG1245AG
VG1245AL
VG1245AN
VG1245BG
VG1245BL
VG1245BN
VG1245CL
VG1245CN
VG1245CP
VG1245DN
VG1245DP
VG1245DR
VG1245EP
VG1245ER
VG1245ES
VG1245FR
VG1245FS
VG1245FT
VG1275AD
VG1275AE
VG1275AF
VG1275AG
VG1275AL
VG1275AN
VG1275BG
VG1275BL
VG1275BN
VG1275CL
VG1275CN
VG1275CP
Size, Cv
in.
1.23
1.93
2.93
4.73
7.43
11.7
3/4
4.73
7.43
11.7
1
7.43
11.73
18.7
1-1/4 11.73
18.73
29.2
1-1/2 18.73
29.23
46.8
2
29.23
46.83
73.7
1/2
1.23
1.93
2.93
4.73
7.43
11.7
3/4
4.73
7.43
11.7
1
7.43
11.73
18.7
1/2
On/Off (Floating)
without Timeout1
AC 24 V
On/Off (Floating) with 0 to 10 VDC
Timeout
Proportional
VA9104-AGA-xS2
M9106-AGA-2
M9109-AGA-2
VA9104-IGA-xS2
M9106-IGA-2
VA9104-GGA-xS2
M9106-GGA-2
M9109-GGA-2
VG1245AD+9T4AGA4
VG1245AE+9T4AGA4
VG1245AF+9T4AGA4
VG1245AG+9T4AGA4
VG1245AL+9T4AGA4
VG1245AN+9T4AGA4
VG1245BG+9T4AGA4
VG1245BL+9T4AGA4
VG1245BN+9T4AGA4
VG1245CL+9T4AGA4
VG1245CN+9T4AGA4
VG1245CP+9T4AGA4
VG1245DN+906AGA
VG1245DP+906AGA
VG1245DR+906AGA
VG1245EP+906AGA
VG1245ER+906AGA
VG1245ES+906AGA
VG1245FR+909AGA
VG1245FS+909AGA
VG1245FT+909AGA
VG1275AD+9T4AGA4
VG1275AE+9T4AGA4
VG1275AF+9T4AGA4
VG1275AG+9T4AGA4
VG1275AL+9T4AGA4
VG1275AN+9T4AGA4
VG1275BG+9T4AGA4
VG1275BL+9T4AGA4
VG1275BN+9T4AGA4
VG1275CL+9T4AGA4
VG1275CN+9T4AGA4
VG1275CP+9T4AGA4
VG1245AD+9T4IGA4
VG1245AE+9T4IGA4
VG1245AF+9T4IGA4
VG1245AG+9T4IGA4
VG1245AL+9T4IGA4
VG1245AN+9T4IGA4
VG1245BG+9T4IGA4
VG1245BL+9T4IGA4
VG1245BN+9T4IGA4
VG1245CL+9T4IGA4
VG1245CN+9T4IGA4
VG1245CP+9T4IGA4
VG1245DN+906IGA
VG1245DP+906IGA
VG1245DR+906IGA
VG1245EP+906IGA
VG1245ER+906IGA
VG1245ES+906IGA
VG1275AD+9T4IGA4
VG1275AE+9T4IGA4
VG1275AF+9T4IGA4
VG1275AG+9T4IGA4
VG1275AL+9T4IGA4
VG1275AN+9T4IGA4
VG1275BG+9T4IGA4
VG1275BL+9T4IGA4
VG1275BN+9T4IGA4
VG1275CL+9T4IGA4
VG1275CN+9T4IGA4
VG1275CP+9T4IGA4
VG1245AD+9T4GGA4
VG1245AE+9T4GGA4
VG1245AF+9T4GGA4
VG1245AG+9T4GGA4
VG1245AL+9T4GGA4
VG1245AN+9T4GGA4
VG1245BG+9T4GGA4
VG1245BL+9T4GGA4
VG1245BN+9T4GGA4
VG1245CL+9T4GGA4
VG1245CN+9T4GGA4
VG1245CP+9T4GGA4
VG1245DN+906GGA
VG1245DP+906GGA
VG1245DR+906GGA
VG1245EP+906GGA
VG1245ER+906GGA
VG1245ES+906GGA
VG1245FR+909GGA
VG1245FS+909GGA
VG1245FT+909GGA
VG1275AD+9T4GGA4
VG1275AE+9T4GGA4
VG1275AF+9T4GGA4
VG1275AG+9T4GGA4
VG1275AL+9T4GGA4
VG1275AN+9T4GGA4
VG1275BG+9T4GGA4
VG1275BL+9T4GGA4
VG1275BN+9T4GGA4
VG1275CL+9T4GGA4
VG1275CN+9T4GGA4
VG1275CP+9T4GGA4
Table 17: Two-Way Stainless Steel Trim Ball Valves, Electric Actuators without Switches, Non-Spring
Return (Part 2 of 2)
Closeoff: 200 psig
End
Valve
Connection
Press
1.
2.
3.
4.
VG1295AD
VG1295AE
VG1295AF
VG1295AG
VG1295AL
VG1295AN
VG1295BG
VG1295BL
VG1295BN
VG1295CL
VG1295CN
VG1295CP
Size, Cv
in.
1/2
3/4
1.23
1.93
2.93
4.73
7.43
11.7
4.73
7.43
11.7
7.43
11.73
18.7
On/Off (Floating)
without Timeout1
AC 24 V
Timeout
Proportional
VA9104-AGA-xS2
M9106-AGA-2
M9109-AGA-2
VA9104-IGA-xS2
M9106-IGA-2
VA9104-GGA-xS2
M9106-GGA-2
M9109-GGA-2
VG1295AD+9T4AGA4
VG1295AE+9T4AGA4
VG1295AF+9T4AGA4
VG1295AG+9T4AGA4
VG1295AL+9T4AGA4
VG1295AN+9T4AGA4
VG1295BG+9T4AGA4
VG1295BL+9T4AGA4
VG1295BN+9T4AGA4
VG1295CL+9T4AGA4
VG1295CN+9T4AGA4
VG1295CP+9T4AGA4
VG1295AD+9T4IGA4
VG1295AE+9T4IGA4
VG1295AF+9T4IGA4
VG1295AG+9T4IGA4
VG1295AL+9T4IGA4
VG1295AN+9T4IGA4
VG1295BG+9T4IGA4
VG1295BL+9T4IGA4
VG1295BN+9T4IGA4
VG1295CL+9T4IGA4
VG1295CN+9T4IGA4
VG1295CP+9T4IGA4
VG1295AD+9T4GGA4
VG1295AE+9T4GGA4
VG1295AF+9T4GGA4
VG1295AG+9T4GGA4
VG1295AL+9T4GGA4
VG1295AN+9T4GGA4
VG1295BG+9T4GGA4
VG1295BL+9T4GGA4
VG1295BN+9T4GGA4
VG1295CL+9T4GGA4
VG1295CN+9T4GGA4
VG1295CP+9T4GGA4
9T4 in the code number to 906. For example, VG1245AD+9T4IGA becomes VG1245AD+906IGA. For M9206 actuators on
Sweat or Press fitting end connection valves, field assembly is required using a M9000-520 linkage.
change 9T4 to 9A4 in the code number for a VA9104-xGA-2S actuator. For example, VG1241AD+9T4AGA becomes
VG1241AD+9A4AGA.
19
Table 18: Two-Way Stainless Steel Trim Ball Valves, Electric Actuators with Switches, Non-Spring Return
Closeoff: 200 psig
End
Valve
Connection
NPT
1.
2.
20
VG1245AD
VG1245AE
VG1245AF
VG1245AG
VG1245AL
VG1245AN
VG1245BG
VG1245BL
VG1245BN
VG1245CL
VG1245CN
VG1245CP
VG1245DN
VG1245DP
VG1245DR
VG1245EP
VG1245ER
VG1245ES
VG1245FR
VG1245FS
VG1245FT
Size, Cv
in.
1.22
1.92
2.92
4.72
7.42
11.7
3/4
4.72
7.42
11.7
1
7.42
11.72
18.7
1-1/4 11.72
18.72
29.2
1-1/2 18.72
29.22
46.8
2
29.22
46.82
73.7
1/2
On/Off (Floating)
without Timeout1
M9106-AGC-2
M9109-AGC-2
VG1245AD+906AGC
VG1245AE+906AGC
VG1245AF+906AGC
VG1245AG+906AGC
VG1245AL+906AGC
VG1245AN+906AGC
VG1245BG+906AGC
VG1245BL+906AGC
VG1245BN+906AGC
VG1245CL+906AGC
VG1245CN+906AGC
VG1245CP+906AGC
VG1245DN+906AGC
VG1245DP+906AGC
VG1245DR+906AGC
VG1245EP+906AGC
VG1245ER+906AGC
VG1245ES+906AGC
VG1245FR+909AGC
VG1245FS+909AGC
VG1245FT+909AGC
AC 24 V
Timeout
Proportional
M9106-IGC-2
M9106-GGC-2
M9109-GGC-2
VG1245AD+906IGC
VG1245AE+906IGC
VG1245AF+906IGC
VG1245AG+906IGC
VG1245AL+906IGC
VG1245AN+906IGC
VG1245BG+906IGC
VG1245BL+906IGC
VG1245BN+906IGC
VG1245CL+906IGC
VG1245CN+906IGC
VG1245CP+906IGC
VG1245DN+906IGC
VG1245DP+906IGC
VG1245DR+906IGC
VG1245EP+906IGC
VG1245ER+906IGC
VG1245ES+906IGC
VG1245AD+906GGC
VG1245AE+906GGC
VG1245AF+906GGC
VG1245AG+906GGC
VG1245AL+906GGC
VG1245AN+906GGC
VG1245BG+906GGC
VG1245BL+906GGC
VG1245BN+906GGC
VG1245CL+906GGC
VG1245CN+906GGC
VG1245CP+906GGC
VG1245DN+906GGC
VG1245DP+906GGC
VG1245DR+906GGC
VG1245EP+906GGC
VG1245ER+906GGC
VG1245ES+906GGC
VG1245FR+909GGC
VG1245FS+909GGC
VG1245FT+909GGC
Table 19: Three-Way Stainless Steel Trim Ball Valves, Electric Actuators without Switches, Spring Return
Counterclockwise, Port A (Coil) Open
Closeoff: 200 psig
End
Valve
Connection
NPT
Sweat
Press
1.
2.
VG1845AD
VG1845AE
VG1845AF
VG1845AG
VG1845AL
VG1845AN
VG1845BG
VG1845BL
VG1845BN
VG1845CL
VG1845CN
VG1845CP
VG1845DN
VG1845DP
VG1845DR
VG1845EP
VG1845ER
VG1845ES
VG1845FR
VG1845FS
VG1845FT
VG1875AD
VG1875AE
VG1875AF
VG1875AG
VG1875AL
VG1875AN
VG1875BG
VG1875BL
VG1875BN
VG1875CL
VG1875CN
VG1875CP
VG1895AD
VG1895AE
VG1895AF
VG1895AG
VG1895AL
VG1895AN
VG1895BG
VG1895BL
VG1895BN
VG1895CL
VG1895CN
VG1895CP
Size, Cv
in.
1/2
3/4
1-1/4
1-1/2
1/2
3/4
1/2
3/4
1.22
1.92
2.92
4.72
7.42
11.7
4.72
7.42
11.7
7.42
11.72
18.7
11.72
18.72
29.2
18.72
29.22
46.8
29.22
46.82
73.7
1.22
1.92
2.92
4.72
7.42
11.7
4.72
7.42
11.7
7.42
11.72
18.7
1.22
1.92
2.92
4.72
7.42
11.7
4.72
7.42
11.7
7.42
11.72
18.7
Floating
AC 24 V
0 to 10 VDC
Proportional
On/Off
AC 120 V
On/Off
VA2202-AGA-21 VA2202-GGA-21
M9206-AGC-2
M9206-GGA-2S
M9209-AGC-2
M9210-GGA-3
VA2202-BGA-21 VA2202-BAA-21
M9210-BGA-3
M9210-BAA-3
VG1845AD+22TAGA
VG1845AE+22TAGA
VG1845AF+22TAGA
VG1845AG+22TAGA
VG1845AL+22TAGA
VG1845AN+22TAGA
VG1845BG+22TAGA
VG1845BL+22TAGA
VG1845BN+22TAGA
VG1845CL+22TAGA
VG1845CN+22TAGA
VG1845CP+22TAGA
VG1845DN+936AGA
VG1845DP+936AGA
VG1845DR+936AGA
VG1845EP+936AGA
VG1845ER+936AGA
VG1845ES+936AGA
VG1845FR+92JAGA
VG1845FS+92JAGA
VG1845FT+92JAGA
VG1875AD+22TAGA
VG1875AE+22TAGA
VG1875AF+22TAGA
VG1875AG+22TAGA
VG1875AL+22TAGA
VG1875AN+22TAGA
VG1875BG+22TAGA
VG1875BL+22TAGA
VG1875BN+22TAGA
VG1875CL+22TAGA
VG1875CN+22TAGA
VG1875CP+22TAGA
VG1895AD+22TAGA
VG1895AE+22TAGA
VG1895AF+22TAGA
VG1895AG+22TAGA
VG1895AL+22TAGA
VG1895AN+22TAGA
VG1895BG+22TAGA
VG1895BL+22TAGA
VG1895BN+22TAGA
VG1895CL+22TAGA
VG1895CN+22TAGA
VG1895CP+22TAGA
VG1845AD+22TBGA
VG1845AE+22TBGA
VG1845AF+22TBGA
VG1845AG+22TBGA
VG1845AL+22TBGA
VG1845AN+22TBGA
VG1845BG+22TBGA
VG1845BL+22TBGA
VG1845BN+22TBGA
VG1845CL+22TBGA
VG1845CN+22TBGA
VG1845CP+22TBGA
VG1845DN+936BGA
VG1845DP+936BGA
VG1845DR+936BGA
VG1845EP+936BGA
VG1845ER+936BGA
VG1845ES+936BGA
VG1845FR+92JBGA
VG1845FS+92JBGA
VG1845FT+92JBGA
VG1875AD+22TBGA
VG1875AE+22TBGA
VG1875AF+22TBGA
VG1875AG+22TBGA
VG1875AL+22TBGA
VG1875AN+22TBGA
VG1875BG+22TBGA
VG1875BL+22TBGA
VG1875BN+22TBGA
VG1875CL+22TBGA
VG1875CN+22TBGA
VG1875CP+22TBGA
VG1895AD+22TBGA
VG1895AE+22TBGA
VG1895AF+22TBGA
VG1895AG+22TBGA
VG1895AL+22TBGA
VG1895AN+22TBGA
VG1895BG+22TBGA
VG1895BL+22TBGA
VG1895BN+22TBGA
VG1895CL+22TBGA
VG1895CN+22TBGA
VG1895CP+22TBGA
VG1845AD+22TGGA
VG1845AE+22TGGA
VG1845AF+22TGGA
VG1845AG+22TGGA
VG1845AL+22TGGA
VG1845AN+22TGGA
VG1845BG+22TGGA
VG1845BL+22TGGA
VG1845BN+22TGGA
VG1845CL+22TGGA
VG1845CN+22TGGA
VG1845CP+22TGGA
VG1845DN+936GGA
VG1845DP+936GGA
VG1845DR+936GGA
VG1845EP+936GGA
VG1845ER+936GGA
VG1845ES+936GGA
VG1845FR+92JGGA
VG1845FS+92JGGA
VG1845FT+92JGGA
VG1875AD+22TGGA
VG1875AE+22TGGA
VG1875AF+22TGGA
VG1875AG+22TGGA
VG1875AL+22TGGA
VG1875AN+22TGGA
VG1875BG+22TGGA
VG1875BL+22TGGA
VG1875BN+22TGGA
VG1875CL+22TGGA
VG1875CN+22TGGA
VG1875CP+22TGGA
VG1895AD+22TGGA
VG1895AE+22TGGA
VG1895AF+22TGGA
VG1895AG+22TGGA
VG1895AL+22TGGA
VG1895AN+22TGGA
VG1895BG+22TGGA
VG1895BL+22TGGA
VG1895BN+22TGGA
VG1895CL+22TGGA
VG1895CN+22TGGA
VG1895CP+22TGGA
VG1845AD+22TBAA
VG1845AE+22TBAA
VG1845AF+22TBAA
VG1845AG+22TBAA
VG1845AL+22TBAA
VG1845AN+22TBAA
VG1845BG+22TBAA
VG1845BL+22TBAA
VG1845BN+22TBAA
VG1845CL+22TBAA
VG1845CN+22TBAA
VG1845CP+22TBAA
VG1845DN+936BAA
VG1845DP+936BAA
VG1845DR+936BAA
VG1845EP+936BAA
VG1845ER+936BAA
VG1845ES+936BAA
VG1845FR+92JBAA
VG1845FS+92JBAA
VG1845FT+92JBAA
VG1875AD+22TBAA
VG1875AE+22TBAA
VG1875AF+22TBAA
VG1875AG+22TBAA
VG1875AL+22TBAA
VG1875AN+22TBAA
VG1875BG+22TBAA
VG1875BL+22TBAA
VG1875BN+22TBAA
VG1875CL+22TBAA
VG1875CN+22TBAA
VG1875CP+22TBAA
VG1895AD+22TBAA
VG1895AE+22TBAA
VG1895AF+22TBAA
VG1895AG+22TBAA
VG1895AL+22TBAA
VG1895AN+22TBAA
VG1895BG+22TBAA
VG1895BL+22TBAA
VG1895BN+22TBAA
VG1895CL+22TBAA
VG1895CN+22TBAA
VG1895CP+22TBAA
21
Table 20: Three-Way Stainless Steel Trim Ball Valves, Electric Actuators without Switches, Spring Return
Clockwise, Port B (Bypass) Open
Closeoff: 200 psig
End
Valve
Connection
NPT
Sweat
Press
1.
2.
22
VG1845AD
VG1845AE
VG1845AF
VG1845AG
VG1845AL
VG1845AN
VG1845BG
VG1845BL
VG1845BN
VG1845CL
VG1845CN
VG1845CP
VG1845DN
VG1845DP
VG1845DR
VG1845EP
VG1845ER
VG1845ES
VG1845FR
VG1845FS
VG1845FT
VG1875AD
VG1875AE
VG1875AF
VG1875AG
VG1875AL
VG1875AN
VG1875BG
VG1875BL
VG1875BN
VG1875CL
VG1875CN
VG1875CP
VG1895AD
VG1895AE
VG1895AF
VG1895AG
VG1895AL
VG1895AN
VG1895BG
VG1895BL
VG1895BN
VG1895CL
VG1895CN
VG1895CP
Size, Cv
in.
1/2
3/4
1-1/4
1-1/2
1/2
3/4
1/2
3/4
1.22
1.92
2.92
4.72
7.42
11.7
4.72
7.42
11.7
7.42
11.72
18.7
11.72
18.72
29.2
18.72
29.22
46.8
29.22
46.82
73.7
1.22
1.92
2.92
4.72
7.42
11.7
4.72
7.42
11.7
7.42
11.72
18.7
1.22
1.92
2.92
4.72
7.42
11.7
4.72
7.42
11.7
7.42
11.72
18.7
Floating
AC 24 V
0 to 10 VDC
Proportional
On/Off
AC 120 V
On/Off
VA2202-AGA-21 VA2202-GGA-21
M9206-AGC-2
M9206-GGA-2S
M9209-AGC-2
M9210-GGA-3
VA2202-BGA-21 VA2202-BAA-21
M9210-BGA-3
M9210-BAA-3
VG1845AD+24TAGA
VG1845AE+24TAGA
VG1845AF+24TAGA
VG1845AG+24TAGA
VG1845AL+24TAGA
VG1845AN+24TAGA
VG1845BG+24TAGA
VG1845BL+24TAGA
VG1845BN+24TAGA
VG1845CL+24TAGA
VG1845CN+24TAGA
VG1845CP+24TAGA
VG1845DN+956AGA
VG1845DP+956AGA
VG1845DR+956AGA
VG1845EP+956AGA
VG1845ER+956AGA
VG1845ES+956AGA
VG1845FR+94JAGA
VG1845FS+94JAGA
VG1845FT+94JAGA
VG1875AD+24TAGA
VG1875AE+24TAGA
VG1875AF+24TAGA
VG1875AG+24TAGA
VG1875AL+24TAGA
VG1875AN+24TAGA
VG1875BG+24TAGA
VG1875BL+24TAGA
VG1875BN+24TAGA
VG1875CL+24TAGA
VG1875CN+24TAGA
VG1875CP+24TAGA
VG1895AD+24TAGA
VG1895AE+24TAGA
VG1895AF+24TAGA
VG1895AG+24TAGA
VG1895AL+24TAGA
VG1895AN+24TAGA
VG1895BG+24TAGA
VG1895BL+24TAGA
VG1895BN+24TAGA
VG1895CL+24TAGA
VG1895CN+24TAGA
VG1895CP+24TAGA
VG1845AD+24TBGA
VG1845AE+24TBGA
VG1845AF+24TBGA
VG1845AG+24TBGA
VG1845AL+24TBGA
VG1845AN+24TBGA
VG1845BG+24TBGA
VG1845BL+24TBGA
VG1845BN+24TBGA
VG1845CL+24TBGA
VG1845CN+24TBGA
VG1845CP+24TBGA
VG1845DN+956BGA
VG1845DP+956BGA
VG1845DR+956BGA
VG1845EP+956BGA
VG1845ER+956BGA
VG1845ES+956BGA
VG1845FR+94JBGA
VG1845FS+94JBGA
VG1845FT+94JBGA
VG1875AD+24TBGA
VG1875AE+24TBGA
VG1875AF+24TBGA
VG1875AG+24TBGA
VG1875AL+24TBGA
VG1875AN+24TBGA
VG1875BG+24TBGA
VG1875BL+24TBGA
VG1875BN+24TBGA
VG1875CL+24TBGA
VG1875CN+24TBGA
VG1875CP+24TBGA
VG1895AD+24TBGA
VG1895AE+24TBGA
VG1895AF+24TBGA
VG1895AG+24TBGA
VG1895AL+24TBGA
VG1895AN+24TBGA
VG1895BG+24TBGA
VG1895BL+24TBGA
VG1895BN+24TBGA
VG1895CL+24TBGA
VG1895CN+24TBGA
VG1895CP+24TBGA
VG1845AD+24TGGA
VG1845AE+24TGGA
VG1845AF+24TGGA
VG1845AG+24TGGA
VG1845AL+24TGGA
VG1845AN+24TGGA
VG1845BG+24TGGA
VG1845BL+24TGGA
VG1845BN+24TGGA
VG1845CL+24TGGA
VG1845CN+24TGGA
VG1845CP+24TGGA
VG1845DN+956GGA
VG1845DP+956GGA
VG1845DR+956GGA
VG1845EP+956GGA
VG1845ER+956GGA
VG1845ES+956GGA
VG1845FR+94JGGA
VG1845FS+94JGGA
VG1845FT+94JGGA
VG1875AD+24TGGA
VG1875AE+24TGGA
VG1875AF+24TGGA
VG1875AG+24TGGA
VG1875AL+24TGGA
VG1875AN+24TGGA
VG1875BG+24TGGA
VG1875BL+24TGGA
VG1875BN+24TGGA
VG1875CL+24TGGA
VG1875CN+24TGGA
VG1875CP+24TGGA
VG1895AD+24TGGA
VG1895AE+24TGGA
VG1895AF+24TGGA
VG1895AG+24TGGA
VG1895AL+24TGGA
VG1895AN+24TGGA
VG1895BG+24TGGA
VG1895BL+24TGGA
VG1895BN+24TGGA
VG1895CL+24TGGA
VG1895CN+24TGGA
VG1895CP+24TGGA
VG1845AD+24TBAA
VG1845AE+24TBAA
VG1845AF+24TBAA
VG1845AG+24TBAA
VG1845AL+24TBAA
VG1845AN+24TBAA
VG1845BG+24TBAA
VG1845BL+24TBAA
VG1845BN+24TBAA
VG1845CL+24TBAA
VG1845CN+24TBAA
VG1845CP+24TBAA
VG1845DN+956BAA
VG1845DP+956BAA
VG1845DR+956BAA
VG1845EP+956BAA
VG1845ER+956BAA
VG1845ES+956BAA
VG1845FR+94JBAA
VG1845FS+94JBAA
VG1845FT+94JBAA
VG1875AD+24TBAA
VG1875AE+24TBAA
VG1875AF+24TBAA
VG1875AG+24TBAA
VG1875AL+24TBAA
VG1875AN+24TBAA
VG1875BG+24TBAA
VG1875BL+24TBAA
VG1875BN+24TBAA
VG1875CL+24TBAA
VG1875CN+24TBAA
VG1875CP+24TBAA
VG1895AD+24TBAA
VG1895AE+24TBAA
VG1895AF+24TBAA
VG1895AG+24TBAA
VG1895AL+24TBAA
VG1895AN+24TBAA
VG1895BG+24TBAA
VG1895BL+24TBAA
VG1895BN+24TBAA
VG1895CL+24TBAA
VG1895CN+24TBAA
VG1895CP+24TBAA
Table 21: Three-Way Stainless Steel Trim Ball Valves, Electric Actuators with Switches, Spring Return1
Closeoff: 200 psig
End
Valve
Connection
Size, Cv
in.
Floating
AC 24 V
0 to 10 VDC
Proportional
VA2202-AGB-22
M9206-AGC-2
M9210-AGC-3
VA2202-GGB-22 VA2202-BGB-22
M9206-GGC-2S M9206-BGB-2S
M9210-GGC-2
M9210-BGC-2
VA2202-BAB-22
M9206-BAB-2S
M9210-BAC-2
VG1845AD+22TGGB
VG1845AE+22TGGB
VG1845AF+22TGGB
VG1845AG+22TGGB
VG1845AL+22TGGB
VG1845AN+22TGGB
VG1845BG+22TGGB
VG1845BL+22TGGB
VG1845BN+22TGGB
VG1845CL+22TGGB
VG1845CN+22TGGB
VG1845CP+22TGGB
VG1845DN+936GGC
VG1845DP+936GGC
VG1845DR+936GGC
VG1845EP+936GGC
VG1845ER+936GGC
VG1845ES+936GGC
VG1845FR+92JGGC
VG1845FS+92JGGC
VG1845FT+92JGGC
VG1845AD+22TBGB
VG1845AE+22TBGB
VG1845AF+22TBGB
VG1845AG+22TBGB
VG1845AL+22TBGB
VG1845AN+22TBGB
VG1845BG+22TBGB
VG1845BL+22TBGB
VG1845BN+22TBGB
VG1845CL+22TBGB
VG1845CN+22TBGB
VG1845CP+22TBGB
VG1845DN+936BGB
VG1845DP+936BGB
VG1845DR+936BGB
VG1845EP+936BGB
VG1845ER+936BGB
VG1845ES+936BGB
VG1845FR+92JBGC
VG1845FS+92JBGC
VG1845FT+92JBGC
VG1845AD+22TBAB
VG1845AE+22TBAB
VG1845AF+22TBAB
VG1845AG+22TBAB
VG1845AL+22TBAB
VG1845AN+22TBAB
VG1845BG+22TBAB
VG1845BL+22TBAB
VG1845BN+22TBAB
VG1845CL+22TBAB
VG1845CN+22TBAB
VG1845CP+22TBAB
VG1845DN+936BAB
VG1845DP+936BAB
VG1845DR+936BAB
VG1845EP+936BAB
VG1845ER+936BAB
VG1845ES+936BAB
VG1845FR+92JBAC
VG1845FS+92JBAC
VG1845FT+92JBAC
VG1845AD+24TGGB
VG1845AE+24TGGB
VG1845AF+24TGGB
VG1845AG+24TGGB
VG1845AL+24TGGB
VG1845AN+24TGGB
VG1845BG+24TGGB
VG1845BL+24TGGB
VG1845BN+24TGGB
VG1845CL+24TGGB
VG1845CN+24TGGB
VG1845CP+24TGGB
VG1845DN+956GGC
VG1845DP+956GGC
VG1845DR+956GGC
VG1845EP+956GGC
VG1845ER+956GGC
VG1845ES+956GGC
VG1845FR+94JGGC
VG1845FS+94JGGC
VG1845FT+94JGGC
VG1845AD+24TBGB
VG1845AE+24TBGB
VG1845AF+24TBGB
VG1845AG+24TBGB
VG1845AL+24TBGB
VG1845AN+24TBGB
VG1845BG+24TBGB
VG1845BL+24TBGB
VG1845BN+24TBGB
VG1845CL+24TBGB
VG1845CN+24TBGB
VG1845CP+24TBGB
VG1845DN+956BGB
VG1845DP+956BGB
VG1845DR+956BGB
VG1845EP+956BGB
VG1845ER+956BGB
VG1845ES+956BGB
VG1845FR+94JBGC
VG1845FS+94JBGC
VG1845FT+94JBGC
VG1845AD+24TBAB
VG1845AE+24TBAB
VG1845AF+24TBAB
VG1845AG+24TBAB
VG1845AL+24TBAB
VG1845AN+24TBAB
VG1845BG+24TBAB
VG1845BL+24TBAB
VG1845BN+24TBAB
VG1845CL+24TBAB
VG1845CN+24TBAB
VG1845CP+24TBAB
VG1845DN+956BAB
VG1845DP+956BAB
VG1845DR+956BAB
VG1845EP+956BAB
VG1845ER+956BAB
VG1845ES+956BAB
VG1845FR+94JBAC
VG1845FS+94JBAC
VG1845FT+94JBAC

VG1845AD 1/2
1.2/0.73
VG1845AD+22TAGB
NPT
VG1845AE
VG1845AF
VG1845AG
VG1845AL
VG1845AN
VG1845BG
VG1845BL
VG1845BN
VG1845CL
VG1845CN
VG1845CP
VG1845DN
VG1845DP
VG1845DR
VG1845EP
VG1845ER
VG1845ES
VG1845FR
VG1845FS
VG1845FT
3/4
1-1/4
1-1/2
1.9/1.23
2.9/1.93
4.7/2.93
7.4/4.73
11.7/5.8
4.7/2.93
7.4/4.73
11.7/5.8
7.4/4.73
11.7/7.43
18.7/9.4
11.7/7.43
18.7/11.73
29.2/14.6
18.7/11.73
29.2/18.73
46.8/23.4
29.2/18.73
46.8/29.23
73.7/36.8
VG1845AE+22TAGB
VG1845AF+22TAGB
VG1845AG+22TAGB
VG1845AL+22TAGB
VG1845AN+22TAGB
VG1845BG+22TAGB
VG1845BL+22TAGB
VG1845BN+22TAGB
VG1845CL+22TAGB
VG1845CN+22TAGB
VG1845CP+22TAGB
VG1845DN+936AGC
VG1845DP+936AGC
VG1845DR+936AGC
VG1845EP+936AGC
VG1845ER+936AGC
VG1845ES+936AGC
VG1845FR+92JAGC
VG1845FS+92JAGC
VG1845FT+92JAGC
Spring Return Clockwise Port B (Bypass) Open

VG1845AD 1/2
1.2/0.73
VG1845AD+24TAGB
NPT
VG1845AE
VG1845AF
VG1845AG
VG1845AL
VG1845AN
VG1845BG
VG1845BL
VG1845BN
VG1845CL
VG1845CN
VG1845CP
VG1845DN
VG1845DP
VG1845DR
VG1845EP
VG1845ER
VG1845ES
VG1845FR
VG1845FS
VG1845FT
1.
2.
3/4
1-1/4
1-1/2
1.9/1.23
2.9/1.93
4.7/2.93
7.4/4.73
11.7/5.8
4.7/2.93
7.4/4.73
11.7/5.8
7.4/4.73
11.7/7.43
18.7/9.4
11.7/7.43
18.7/11.73
29.2/14.6
18.7/11.73
29.2/18.73
46.8/23.4
29.2/18.73
46.8/29.23
73.7/36.8
VG1845AE+24TAGB
VG1845AF+24TAGB
VG1845AG+24TAGB
VG1845AL+24TAGB
VG1845AN+24TAGB
VG1845BG+24TAGB
VG1845BL+24TAGB
VG1845BN+24TAGB
VG1845CL+24TAGB
VG1845CN+24TAGB
VG1845CP+24TAGB
VG1845DN+956AGC
VG1845DP+956AGC
VG1845DR+956AGC
VG1845EP+956AGC
VG1845ER+956AGC
VG1845ES+956AGC
VG1845FR+94JAGC
VG1845FS+94JAGC
VG1845FT+94JAGC
On/Off
AC 120 V
On/Off
VA2202-xxB and M9206-xxB have a single end switch. M9210-xGC-3 has two end switches.
M9206 Series Actuator. For NPT end connection valves, you can specify a factory-mounted M9206 actuator by changing 9T4
in the code number to 906. For example, VG1245AD+9T4IGA becomes VG1245AD+906IGA. For M9206 actuators on Sweat or
Press fitting end connection valves, field assembly is required using a M9000-520 linkage.
23
3.
Table 22: Three-Way Stainless Steel Trim Ball Valves, Electric Actuators without Switches, Non-Spring
Return
Closeoff: 200 psig
End
Valve
Connection
Size, Cv
in.
On/Off (Floating)
without Timeout1
VA9104-AGA-xS2
M9106-AGA-2
M9109-AGA-3

VG1845AD 1/2
1.2/0.73
VG1845AD+9T4AGA4
NPT
Sweat
Press
24
VG1845AE
VG1845AF
VG1845AG
VG1845AL
VG1845AN
VG1845BG
VG1845BL
VG1845BN
VG1845CL
VG1845CN
VG1845CP
VG1845DN
VG1845DP
VG1845DR
VG1845EP
VG1845ER
VG1845ES
VG1845FR
VG1845FS
VG1845FT
VG1875AD
VG1875AE
VG1875AF
VG1875AG
VG1875AL
VG1875AN
VG1875BG
VG1875BL
VG1875BN
VG1875CL
VG1875CN
VG1875CP
VG1895AD
VG1895AE
VG1895AF
VG1895AG
VG1895AL
VG1895AN
VG1895BG
VG1895BL
VG1895BN
VG1895CL
VG1895CN
VG1895CP
3/4
1-1/4
1-1/2
1/2
3/4
1/2
3/4
1.9/1.2
2.9/1.93
4.7/2.93
7.4/4.73
11.7/5.8
4.7/2.93
7.4/4.73
11.7/5.8
7.4/4.73
11.7/7.43
18.7/9.4
11.7/7.43
18.7/11.73
29.2/14.6
18.7/11.73
29.2/18.73
46.8/23.4
29.2/18.73
46.8/29.23
73.7/36.8
1.2/0.73
1.9/1.23
2.9/1.93
4.7/2.93
7.4/4.73
11.7/5.8
4.7/2.93
7.4/4.73
11.7/5.8
7.4/4.73
11.7/7.43
18.7/9.4
1.2/0.73
1.9/1.23
2.9/1.93
4.7/2.93
7.4/4.73
11.7/5.8
4.7/2.93
7.4/4.73
11.7/5.8
7.4/4.73
11.7/7.43
18.7/9.4
VG1845AE+9T4AGA
VG1845AF+9T4AGA4
VG1845AG+9T4AGA4
VG1845AL+9T4AGA4
VG1845AN+9T4AGA4
VG1845BG+9T4AGA4
VG1845BL+9T4AGA4
VG1845BN+9T4AGA4
VG1845CL+9T4AGA4
VG1845CN+9T4AGA4
VG1845CP+9T4AGA4
VG1845DN+906AGA
VG1845DP+906AGA
VG1845DR+906AGA
VG1845EP+906AGA
VG1845ER+906AGA
VG1845ES+906AGA
VG1845FR+909AGA
VG1845FS+909AGA
VG1845FT+909AGA
VG1875AD+9T4AGA4
VG1875AE+9T4AGA4
VG1875AF+9T4AGA4
VG1875AG+9T4AGA4
VG1875AL+9T4AGA4
VG1875AN+9T4AGA4
VG1875BG+9T4AGA4
VG1875BL+9T4AGA4
VG1875BN+9T4AGA4
VG1875CL+9T4AGA4
VG1875CN+9T4AGA4
VG1875CP+9T4AGA4
VG1895AD+9T4AGA4
VG1895AE+9T4AGA4
VG1895AF+9T4AGA4
VG1895AG+9T4AGA4
VG1895AL+9T4AGA4
VG1895AN+9T4AGA4
VG1895BG+9T4AGA4
VG1895BL+9T4AGA4
VG1895BN+9T4AGA4
VG1895CL+9T4AGA4
VG1895CN+9T4AGA4
VG1895CP+9T4AGA4
AC 24 V
On/Off (Floating)
with Timeout
0 to 10 VDC
Proportional
VA9104-IGA-xS2
M9106-IGA-2
VA9104-GGA-xS2
M9106-GGA-2
M9109-GGA-2
VG1845AD+9T4IGA4
VG1845AE+9T4IGA4
VG1845AF+9T4IGA4
VG1845AG+9T4IGA4
VG1845AL+9T4IGA4
VG1845AN+9T4IGA4
VG1845BG+9T4IGA4
VG1845BL+9T4IGA4
VG1845BN+9T4IGA4
VG1845CL+9T4IGA4
VG1845CN+9T4IGA4
VG1845CP+9T4IGA4
VG1845DN+906IGA
VG1845DP+906IGA
VG1845DR+906IGA
VG1845EP+906IGA
VG1845ER+906IGA
VG1845ES+906IGA
VG1875AD+9T4IGA4
VG1875AE+9T4IGA4
VG1875AF+9T4IGA4
VG1875AG+9T4IGA4
VG1875AL+9T4IGA4
VG1875AN+9T4IGA4
VG1875BG+9T4IGA4
VG1875BL+9T4IGA4
VG1875BN+9T4IGA4
VG1875CL+9T4IGA4
VG1875CN+9T4IGA4
VG1875CP+9T4IGA4
VG1895AD+9T4IGA4
VG1895AE+9T4IGA4
VG1895AF+9T4IGA4
VG1895AG+9T4IGA4
VG1895AL+9T4IGA4
VG1895AN+9T4IGA4
VG1895BG+9T4IGA4
VG1895BL+9T4IGA4
VG1895BN+9T4IGA4
VG1895CL+9T4IGA4
VG1895CN+9T4IGA4
VG1895CP+9T4IGA4
VG1845AD+9T4GGA4
VG1845AE+9T4GGA4
VG1845AF+9T4GGA4
VG1845AG+9T4GGA4
VG1845AL+9T4GGA4
VG1845AN+9T4GGA4
VG1845BG+9T4GGA4
VG1845BL+9T4GGA4
VG1845BN+9T4GGA4
VG1845CL+9T4GGA4
VG1845CN+9T4GGA4
VG1845CP+9T4GGA4
VG1845DN+906GGA
VG1845DP+906GGA
VG1845DR+906GGA
VG1845EP+906GGA
VG1845ER+906GGA
VG1845ES+906GGA
VG1845FR+909GGA
VG1845FS+909GGA
VG1845FT+909GGA
VG1875AD+9T4GGA4
VG1875AE+9T4GGA4
VG1875AF+9T4GGA4
VG1875AG+9T4GGA4
VG1875AL+9T4GGA4
VG1875AN+9T4GGA4
VG1875BG+9T4GGA4
VG1875BL+9T4GGA4
VG1875BN+9T4GGA4
VG1875CL+9T4GGA4
VG1875CN+9T4GGA4
VG1875CP+9T4GGA4
VG1895AD+9T4GGA4
VG1895AE+9T4GGA4
VG1895AF+9T4GGA4
VG1895AG+9T4GGA4
VG1895AL+9T4GGA4
VG1895AN+9T4GGA4
VG1895BG+9T4GGA4
VG1895BL+9T4GGA4
VG1895BN+9T4GGA4
VG1895CL+9T4GGA4
VG1895CN+9T4GGA4
VG1895CP+9T4GGA4
1.
2.
3.
4.
9T4 in the code number to 906. For example, VG1245AD+9T4IGA becomes VG1245AD+906IGA. For M9206 actuators on
Sweat or Press fitting end connection valves, field assembly is required using a M9000-520 linkage.
change 9T4 to 9A4 in the code number for a VA9104-xGA-2S actuator. For example, VG1845AD+9T4AGA becomes
VG1845AD+9A4AGA.
Table 23: Three-Way Stainless Steel Trim Ball Valves, Electric Actuators with Switches, Non-Spring Return
Closeoff: 200 psig
End
Valve
Connection
Size, Cv
in.
On/Off (Floating)
without Timeout1
M9106-AGC-2
M9109-AGC-2

NPT
VG1845AD 1/2
1.2/0.72
VG1845AD+906AGC
VG1845AE
1.9/1.22
VG1845AE+906AGC
VG1845AF
2.9/1.92
VG1845AF+906AGC
VG1845AG
4.7/2.92
VG1845AG+906AGC
VG1845AL
7.4/4.72
VG1845AL+906AGC
VG1845AN
11.7/5.8 VG1845AN+906AGC
VG1845BG 3/4
4.7/2.92
VG1845BG+906AGC
VG1845BL
7.4/4.72
VG1845BL+906AGC
VG1845BN
11.7/5.8 VG1845BN+906AGC
VG1845CL 1
7.4/4.72
VG1845CL+906AGC
VG1845CN
11.7/7.42 VG1845CN+906AGC
VG1845CP
18.7/9.4 VG1845CP+906AGC
VG1845DN 1-1/4 11.7/7.42 VG1845DN+906AGC
VG1845DP
18.7/11.72 VG1845DP+906AGC
VG1845DR
29.2/14.6 VG1845DR+906AGC
VG1845EP 1-1/2 18.7/11.72 VG1845EP+906AGC
VG1845ER
29.2/18.72 VG1845ER+906AGC
VG1845ES
46.8/23.4 VG1845ES+906AGC
VG1845FR 2
29.2/18.72 VG1845FR+909AGC
VG1845FS
46.8/29.22 VG1845FS+909AGC
VG1845FT
73.7/36.8 VG1845FT+909AGC
1.
2.
AC 24 V
On/Off (Floating)
with Timeout
0 to 10 VDC
Proportional
M9106-IGC-2
M9106-GGC-2
M9109-GGC-2
VG1845AD+906IGC
VG1845AE+906IGC
VG1845AF+906IGC
VG1845AG+906IGC
VG1845AL+906IGC
VG1845AN+906IGC
VG1845BG+906IGC
VG1845BL+906IGC
VG1845BN+906IGC
VG1845CL+906IGC
VG1845CN+906IGC
VG1845CP+906IGC
VG1845DN+906IGC
VG1845DP+906IGC
VG1845DR+906IGC
VG1845EP+906IGC
VG1845ER+906IGC
VG1845ES+906IGC
VG1845AD+906GGC
VG1845AE+906GGC
VG1845AF+906GGC
VG1845AG+906GGC
VG1845AL+906GGC
VG1845AN+906GGC
VG1845BG+906GGC
VG1845BL+906GGC
VG1845BN+906GGC
VG1845CL+906GGC
VG1845CN+906GGC
VG1845CP+906GGC
VG1845DN+906GGC
VG1845DP+906GGC
VG1845DR+906GGC
VG1845EP+906GGC
VG1845ER+906GGC
VG1845ES+906GGC
VG1845FR+909GGC
VG1845FS+909GGC
VG1845FT+909GGC
25
Table 24: Shipping Weights, lb (kg)1

Valve Code
Number
Description
Shipping
Weight, lb (kg)
VG12xxAx
1/2 in. (DN15) Two-Way Forged Brass Ball Valve, Threaded (NPT) End Connections
0.8 (0.36)
VG12xxBx
3/4 in. (DN20) Two-Way Forged Brass Ball Valve, Threaded (NPT) End Connections
1.0 (0.45)
VG12xxCx
1 in. (DN25) Two-Way Forged Brass Ball Valve, Threaded (NPT) End Connections
0.8 (0.36)
VG12xxDx
1-1/4 in. (DN32) Two-Way Forged Brass Ball Valve, Threaded (NPT) End Connections
2.3 (1.04)
VG12xxEx
1-1/2 in. (DN40) Two-Way Forged Brass Ball Valve, Threaded (NPT) End Connections
3.8 (1.73)
VG12xxFx
2 in. (DN50) Two-Way Forged Brass Ball Valve, Threaded (NPT) End Connections
5.0 (2.3)
VG18xxAx
1/2 in. (DN15) Three-Way Forged Brass Ball Valve, Threaded (NPT) End Connections
1.25 (0.57)
VG18xxBx
3/4 in. (DN20) Three-Way Forged Brass Ball Valve, Threaded (NPT) End Connections
1.5 (0.68)
VG18xxCx
1 in. (DN25) Three-Way Forged Brass Ball Valve, Threaded (NPT) End Connections
2.75 (1.25)
VG18xxDx
1-1/4 in. (DN32) Three-Way Forged Brass Ball Valve, Threaded (NPT) End
Connections
4.25 (1.93)
VG18xxEx
1-1/2 in. (DN40) Three-Way Forged Brass Ball Valve, Threaded (NPT) End
Connections
6.25 (2.84)
VG18xxFx
2 in. (DN50) Three-Way Forged Brass Ball Valve, Threaded (NPT) End Connections
8.2 (3.7)
1.
For VA9104 Series Actuated Non-Spring Return Valve Assemblies, add 2.0 lb (0.9 kg); for M9106 and M9109 Series
Actuated Non-Spring Return Valve Assemblies, add 3.4 lb (1.5 kg); for VA2202 Series Actuated Spring Return Valve
Assemblies, add 2.0 lb (0.9 kg); for M9206 Series Actuated Spring Return Valve Assemblies, add 4.5 lb (2.0 kg); for M9100
Series Actuated Non-Spring Return Valve Assemblies, add 4.4 lb (2.0 kg); for M9210 Series Actuated Valve Assemblies, add
7.9 lb (3.6 kg).
Table 25: Repair Parts

Linkage
M9000-51x
Unit replacement
M9000-520
Anti-rotation slider, includes carriage screw, washers, and

wing nut
M9000-600
M9000-601
Drive Shaft
M9000-602
M9000-603
M9000-550
Unit replacement
M2000-500
Unit replacement
Application Overview
Available in sizes 1/2 through 2 in. (DN15 through
DN50), VG1000 Series Ball Valves are designed
specifically for automated commercial HVAC service.
These valves feature a forged brass body with either a
chrome-plated brass ball for water or glycol solutions to
203F (95C), or a 300 Series stainless steel ball for
high temperature water to 284F (140C) and saturated
steam to 15 psi. The Amodel Flow Characterizing Disk
maintains equal percentage Flow Characteristics for
optimum temperature control, as shown in Figure 2.
26
The blowout-proof stem and mounting flange,

combined with an innovative double O-ring stem seal
and self-centering stem bushing design (shown in
Figure 7) provide quick and easy electric actuator field
mounting while ensuring long life and leak-free valve
performance. The specially engineered,
graphite-reinforced PTFE seat with flexible PTFE seat
design (backed with EPDM O-rings) significantly
reduces the operating torque, allowing the smallest
possible electric actuator available to provide the force
required for the specific application. All valve and
actuator assemblies provide 200 psig (1,379 kPa)
closeoff pressure while ensuring operation after long
idle periods.
Valve End Connection
VG1000 Series Ball Valves are designed for factory

or field mounting to Johnson Controls VA9104,
M9104 (field mounting only), M9106, M9109, M9116,
and M9124 Series Non-Spring Return Electric
Actuators and VA2202, M2202 (field mounting only),
M9206, and M9210 Series Spring Return Electric
Actuators. All of these actuators are ideally suited for
on/off, floating, or proportional HVAC service. Field
actuator-to-valve coupling requires an M9000-5xx or
M2000-500 Valve Linkage Kit. See Table 26 for valid
valve, actuator, and linkage combinations for assembly
in the field. Because of their cost-effective, reliable
design, VG1000 Series Ball Valves are maintenance
free.
VG1000 Series 1/2, 3/4, and 1 in. valves are available

in one of three end connections: NPT pipe connections,
sweat end connections for use with copper tubing, and
press end connections for use with copper tubing.
These valves are designed for installation using
RIDGID Pressing Tool Technology manufactured by
the Ridge Tool Corporation for use with the ProPress
fitting system. Press end connections afford significant
installation savings. Additional information on these
tools can be found at www.ridgid.com.
120
% of Rated Flow
100
80
60
40
20
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50 55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
Rotation Angle (%)
FIG:VG1000typcdf
Figure 2: Typical Two-Way VG1000 Series Ball Valve with Characterizing Disk Flow
27
See Figure 3 for typical VG1000 internal composition.

Blowout-Proof
Valve Stem
(Square-Head)
Centering
Bushing
EPDM
Double O-Ring
Stem Seals
Actuator
Mounting Flange
Thrust
Washer
Graphite-Reinforced
PFTE Seats
EPDM
O-Rings
Inlet Port
(Port A)
Outlet
Port
FIG:VG1000_int
Characterizing
Disc
Ball
Figure 3: Internal View of a Typical VG1000 Series Ball Valve
28
See Figure 4 for typical piping applications.

VG184x Three-Way Valve
Port C
Port A
Return
Port
B
Supply
Typical Three-Way Ball Valve Application
VG124x Two-Way Valve
Port A
Port B
Return
Typical Two-Way Ball Valve Application

Note: Mount the valve downstream from the coil to minimize heat transfer to the actuator.
FIG:VG1000_typpip
Supply
Figure 4: Typical VG1000 Piping
29
Port B Bypass
Figure 6: VG1841 or VG1845 Series

Three-Way Ball Valve
(Port B Connected to Port C)
Electric Actuator Control Signal Action
Common
Port
Normally
Open Port
Normally
Closed Port
FIG:VG1644_CCW
Two-way VG1000 Series Ball Valves are fully open

when the electric actuator is fully Counterclockwise
(CCW) and fully closed when the electric actuator is
fully Clockwise (CW). For three-way valves, the Port A
and common port are fully open when the electric
actuator is fully CCW, as shown in Figure 5. Port B and
common port are fully open when the actuator is fully
CW, as shown in Figure 6.
Port C
Common
Port A
Coil
FIG:VG4145_3wayBC
IMPORTANT: The VG1000 Series Valves are

intended to control saturated steam, hot water, and
chilled water flow under normal equipment operating
conditions. Where failure or malfunction of the
VG1000 Series Valve could lead to personal injury
or property damage to the controlled equipment or
other property, additional precautions must be
designed into the system. Incorporate and maintain
other devices such as supervisory or alarm systems
or safety or limit controls, intended to warn of or
protect against failure or malfunction of the VG1000
Series Valve.
Figure 7: Top View of VG1644 Series

Three-Way Ball Valve (Actuator Fully CCW)
Port B Bypass
FIG:VG4145_3wayAC
Port C
Common
Port A
Coil
Figure 5: VG1841 or VG1845 Series

Three-Way Ball Valve
(Port A Connected to Port C)
Note: VG1841 and VG1845 three-way ball valves
have a different port configuration (as shown in
Figure 5 and Figure 6) from the older VG1644 Series
three-way ball valves (Figure 7), and you must change
the piping to convert them to the new series of valves.
For non-spring return and spring-to-open proportional
control models in the direct-acting mode, a minimum
control signal drives the electric actuator to the fully
CCW position, whereas a maximum control signal
drives the electric actuator to the fully CW position.
For spring-to-close proportional control models in the
direct-acting mode, a minimum control signal drives the
electric actuator to the fully CW position, whereas a
maximum control signal drives the electric actuator to
the fully CCW position.
30
For non-spring return floating or on/off (floating) control

models, a control signal to Terminal 2 (or wire 2) of a
VA9104 or an M91xx Series Actuator drives the electric
actuator to the fully CW position. Likewise, a control
signal to Terminal 3 (or wire 3) of a VA9104 or an
M91xx Series Actuator drives the electric actuator to
the fully CCW position.
For spring return floating control VA2202 models that
have the actuator mounted with the blue housing facing
away from the valve (actuator spring returns fully
CCW) and the direction of the rotation switch in the CW
position, a control signal to the Orange Wire drives the
electric actuator to the fully CW position. Likewise, a
control signal to the White Wire drives the valve to the
fully CCW position.
If the VA2202 actuator is reversed so the gray housing
is away from the valve (actuator spring returns fully
CW) and the direction of the rotation switch is in the
CCW position, then a control signal to the Orange Wire
drives the electric actuator to the fully CCW position.
Likewise, a control signal to the White Wire drives the
valve to the fully CW position.
A control signal to Wire 3 of a CCW-face (mounted

away from the valve) M9206 Series or M9210 Series
actuated spring-to-open valve assembly drives the
electric actuator to the fully CW position. Likewise, a
control signal to Wire 4 of a floating CCW-face
M9206 Series or M9210 Series Actuator, or removal of
the control signal from Wire 3 of an on/off CCW-face
M9206 Series or M9210 Series actuated
spring-to-open valve assembly, drives the electric
actuator to the fully CCW position.
A control signal to Wire 3 of a CW-face (mounted away
from the valve) M9206 Series or M9210 Series
actuated spring-to-close valve assembly drives the
electric actuator to the fully CCW position. Likewise, a
control signal to Wire 4 of a floating CW-face
M9206 Series or M9210 Series Actuator, or removal of
the control signal from Wire 3 of an on/off CW-face
M9206 Series or M9210 Series actuated
spring-to-close valve assembly, drives the electric
actuator to the fully CW position.
VA2202-xxx-2 Series Electric Spring Return Valve

Actuators Product Bulletin (LIT-12011160)
M2202-xxx-2 Series Electric Spring Return




M9206-xxx-2S Series Electric Spring Return


Non-Spring Return Actuators Product Bulletin
(LIT-2681058)
M9210-xxx-3 Electric Spring Return Actuators

Electric Actuator Selection
Linkage Kit and Weather Shield Selection
VG1000 Series Ball Valves are designed for factory

or field mounting to Johnson Controls VA9104,
M9104 (field mounting only), M9106, M9109, and
M9100 Series Non-Spring Return Electric Actuators;
and VA2202, M2202, M9206, and M9210 (field
mounting only) Series Spring Return Electric Actuators.
Field actuator-to-valve coupling requires an
M2000-500, M9000-51x, M9000-520, or M9000-550
Valve Linkage Kit except for the direct mount VA9104
and VA2202 actuators. See Table 26 for valid valve,
actuator, and linkage combinations.
The M9000-51x, M9000-520, M9000-550, and

M2000-500 Valve Linkage Kits and M9000-330 and
M9000-340 Weather Shields are designed specifically
for field mounting Johnson Controls M9104, M9106,
M9109, and M9100 Series Non-Spring Return, and
M2202, M9206, and M9210 Series Spring Return
Electric Actuators to VG1000 Series Ball Valves. See
Table 26 for valid valve, actuator, linkage, and weather
shield combinations.

motor for VA9104, M9104, M9106, and M9109 AGx
models, use a controller and/or software that provides
a timeout function to remove the signal at the end of
rotation (stall). The IGx and GGx models have an auto
shutoff to avoid excessive wear or drive time on the
motor.
For more information on these electric actuator series
as well as details on models available, refer to the
following documents:
VA9104-xGA-2S, -3S Series Electric Non-Spring

Return Valve Actuators Product Bulletin
(LIT-12011050)
M9102-AGA-2S, -3S and M9104-xGA-2S, -3S
Series Electric Non-Spring Return Actuators
For more information on the M9000-520 Linkage Kit,

refer to the M9000-520 Ball Valve Linkage Kit Product
Bulletin (LIT-1201547) or the M9000-520 Ball Valve
Linkage Kit Installation Instructions
(Part No. 14-1297-5).
For more information on the M9000-51x Valve Linkage
Kits, refer to the M9000-51x Series Valve Linkage Kits
Product Bulletin (LIT-977354) or the M9000-51x Series
Valve Linkage Kits Installation Instructions
(Part No. 14-1201-13).
refer to the M9000-550 Ball Valve Linkage
Kit Installation Instructions (Part No. 34-636-1816).
refer to the M2000-500 Ball Valve Linkage
Kit Installation Instructions (Part No. 14-1343-7).
31
For more information on the M9000-330 and

M9000-340 Weather Shields, refer to the M9000-330
and M9000-340 Series Weather Shield Enclosures
Installation Instructions (Part No. 14-1330-26).
Table 26: Valid Ball Valve, Electric Actuator, Linkage Kit, and Weather Shield Combinations (for Assembly
in the Field)
Valve Size,
in. (DN)
1/2 (DN15)
Valve Code Numbers

NPT End
Connection
Sweat End
Connection
Press End
Connection
VG1241Ax
VG1245Ax
VG1841Ax
VG1845Ax
VG1271Ax
VG1275Ax
VG1871Ax
VG1875Ax
VG1291Ax
VG1295Ax
VG1891Ax
VG1895Ax
Actuator
Base
Number1
Linkage Kit
Code Number
VA91042
None Required
M9104
M9000-550
VA2202
None Required
M2202
M2000-500
2
3/4 (DN20)
1 (DN25)
VG1241Bx
VG1245Bx
VG1841Bx
VG1845Bx
VG1241Cx
VG1245Cx
VG1841Cx
VG1845Cx
VG1271Bx
VG1275Bx
VG1871Bx
VG1875Bx
VG1271Cx
VG1275Cx
VG1871Cx
VG1875Cx
VG1291Bx
VG1295Bx
VG1891Bx
VG1895Bx
VG1291Cx
VG1295Cx
VG1891Cx
VG1895Cx
Weather Shield
M9106
M9206
M9000-520
M9108
M9000-516
M9000-330
M9210
M9000-517
M9000-340
VA91042
None Required
M91042
M9000-550
VA2202
None Required
M2202
M2000-500
M91062
M9206
M9000-520
M9108
M9000-516
M9000-330
M9210
M9000-517
M9000-340
VA91042
None Required
M91042
M9000-550
VA2202
None Required
M91062
M9000-520
M9206
1-1/4
(DN32)
1-1/2
(DN40)
2 (DN50)
32
M9108
M9000-516
M9000-330
M9210
M9000-517
M9000-340
VG1241Dx
VG1245Dx
VG1841Dx
VG1845Dx
M91062
M9000-520
VG1241Ex
VG1245Ex
VG1841Ex
VG1845Ex
VG1241Fx
VG1245Fx
VG1841Fx
VG1845Fx
M9206
M9108
M9000-516
M9000-330
M9210
M9000-517
M9000-340
M91062
M9206
M9000-520
M9108
M9000-516
M9000-330
M9210
M9000-517
M9000-340
M91092
M9000-520
M9116
M9000-516
M9000-330
M9210
M9000-517
M9000-340
1.
2.
VA9104, M9104, M9106, M9109 and M9100 Series Actuators are non-spring return; and VA2202, M2202, M9206 and
M9210 Series Actuators are spring return. Note: VA9104, M9104, VA2202, and M2202 have a maximum fluid temperature
limit of 212F (100C).
To avoid excessive wear or drive time on the motor for VA9104, M9104, M9106, and M9109 AGx models, use a controller
and/or software that provides a timeout function to remove the signal at the end of rotation (stall). The IGx and GGx models
have an automatic shutoff to avoid excessive wear or drive time on the motor.
33
See Figure 8 for dimension drawings of the Non-Spring

Return VA9104 Series Actuated VG1241, VG1245,
VG1841, and VG1845 Series NPT End Connection
Ball Valves. See Table 27 for specific model linkage
dimensions.

3-1/2 (89)
2-13/16 (71)
5-1/2 (140)
F
A
C
B
E
D
Two-Way Valve
Three-Way Valve
Three-Way Valve
Two-Way Valve
FIG:VA9104_dmns
Figure 8: VA9104 Actuated VG1241, VG1245, VG1841, and VG1845 Series Ball Valve
with NPT End Connections Dimensions, in. (mm)
Table 27: VA9104 Actuated VG1241, VG1245, VG1841, and VG1845 Series Ball Valve with NPT End
Connections Dimensions, in. (mm)
Valve Size,
in. (DN)1
1/2 (DN15)
3-7/8 (98)
21/32 (17)
1-7/32 (31)
5-7/64 (129)
2-33/64 (64)
11/32 (9)
1-1/4 (32)
3/4 (DN20)
3-7/8 (98)
21/32 (17)
1-7/32 (31)
5-7/32 (133)
2-51/64 (71)
11/32 (9)
1-13/32 (36)
1 (DN25)
3-11/16
(100)
3/4 (19)
1-19/64 (33)
5-9/16 (141)
3-13/32 (87)
11/32 (9)
1-11/16 (43)
1.
34
FIG:va9104_swt
See Figure 9 for dimensions of the Non-Spring Return

VA9104 Series Actuated VG1271, VG1275, VG1871,
and VG1875 Series Sweat End Connection Ball
Valves. See Table 28 for specific model dimensions.

3-1/2 in. (89 mm)
2-25/32
(71)
5-1/2
(140)
C
B
E
D
Two-Way
Three-Way
Three-Way
Two-Way
Figure 9: VA9104 Actuated VG1271, VG1275, VG1871, and VG1875 Series Ball Valve with Sweat End
Table 28: VA9104 Actuated VG1271, VG1275, VG1871, and VG1875 Series Ball Valve with Sweat End
Valve Size,
in. (DN)1
1/2 (DN15)
3-7/8 (98)
21/32 (17)
1-7/32 (31)
5-45/64 (145)
3-25/32 (96)
2-13/16 (55)
3/4 (DN20)
3-7/8 (98)
21/32 (17)
1-7/32 (31)
5-57/64 (150)
4-3/32 (104)
2-15/32 (62)
1 (DN25)
3-15/16 (100)
3/4 (19)
1-19/64 (33)
6-1/8 (156)
4-41/64 (118)
2-27/32 (72)
1.
35
FIG:va9104_prs

and VG1895 Series Press End Connection Ball Valves.

3-1/2 in. (89 mm)
5-1/2
(140)
2-25/32
(71)
C
B
E
D
Two-Way
Three-Way
Two-Way
Three-Way
Figure 10: VA9104 Actuated VG1291, VG1295, VG1891, and VG1895 Series Ball Valve with Press End
Table 29: VA9104 Actuated VG1291, VG1295, VG1891, and VG1895 Series Ball Valve with Press End
Valve Size,
in. (DN)1
1/2 (DN15)
3-7/8 (98)
21/32 (17)
1-7/32 (31)
5-45/64 (145)
3-25/32 (96)
2-13/16 (55)
3/4 (DN20)
3-7/8 (98)
21/32 (17)
1-7/32 (31)
5-57/64 (150)
4-3/32 (104)
2-15/32 (62)
1 (DN25)
3-11/16 (100)
3/4 (19)
1-19/64 (33)
6-1/8 (156)
4-41/64 (118)
2-27/32 (72)
1.
36
See Figure 11 for dimension drawings of the Spring

Return VA2202 Actuated VG1241, VG1245, VG1841,
and VG1845 Series NPT End Connection Ball Valve.
See Table 30 for specific model linkage dimensions.

3-1/2 in. (89 mm)
3-5/32 in.
(80 mm)
6-9/32 in.
(160 mm)
3-3/64 in.
(77 mm)
F
A
B
B
G
E
D
Two-Way Valve
Three-Way Valve
Two-Way Valve
Three-Way Valve
FIG:VA2202_dmns
Figure 11: VA2202 Actuated VG1241, VG1245, VG1841, and VG1845 Series Ball Valve with NPT End
Table 30: VA2202 Actuated VG1241, VG1245, VG1841, and VG1845 Series Ball Valve with NPT End
Valve Size,
in. (DN)1
1/2 (DN15)
4-1/4 (108)
21/32 (17)
1-7/32 (31)
6-23/32 (171)
2-33/64 (64)
11/32
(9)
1-1/4 (32)
3/4 (DN20)
4-1/4 (108)
21/32 (17)
1-7/32 (31)
6-7/8 (175)
2-51/64 (71)
11/32
(9)
1-13/32 (36)
1 (DN25)
4-9/32 (109)
3/4 (19)
1-19/64 (33)
7-7/64 (180)
3-13/32 (87)
11/32
(9)
1-45/64 (43)
1.
37
See Figure 12 for dimensions of the Spring Return

and VG1875 Series Sweat End Connection Ball
Valves. See Table 31 for specific model dimensions.
6-9/32
(160)
FIG:va2202_swt
3-5/32
(80)
3-2/32
(78)
C
B
E
D
Two-Way
Three-Way
Two-Way
Three-Way
Figure 12: VA2202 Actuated VG1271, VG1275, VG1871, and VG1875 Series Ball Valve with Sweat End
Table 31: VA2202 Actuated VG1271, VG1275, VG1871, and VG1875 Series Ball Valve with Sweat End
Valve Size,
in. (DN)1
1/2 (DN15)
4-1/4 (108)
21/32 (17)
1-7/32 (31)
7-23/64 (187)
3-25/32 (96)
2-13/16 (55)
3/4 (DN20)
4-1/4 (108)
21/32 (17)
1-7/32 (31)
7-33/64 (191)
4-3/32 (104)
2-15/32 (62)
1 (DN25)
4-21/64 (110)
3/4 (19)
1-19/64 (33)
7-51/64 (198)
4-41/64 (118)
2-27/32 (72)
1.
38

and VG1895 Series Press End Connection Ball Valves.
3-5/32
(80)
6-9/32
(160)
3-2/32
(78)
D
Two-Way
Three-Way
Two-Way
Three-Way
FIG:va2202_prs
B
E
Figure 13: VA2202 Actuated VG1291, VG1295, VG1891, and VG1895 Series Ball Valve with Press End
Connection Dimensions, in. (mm)
Table 32: VA2202 Actuated VG1291, VG1295, VG1891, and VG1895 Series Ball Valve with Press End
Valve Size,
in. (DN)1
1/2 (DN15)
4-1/4 (108)
21/32 (17)
1-7/32 (31)
7-23/64 (187)
3-25/32 (96)
2-13/16 (55)
3/4 (DN20)
4-1/4 (108)
21/32 (17)
1-7/32 (31)
7-33/64 (191)
4-3/32 (104)
2-15/32 (62)
1 (DN25)
4-21/64 (110)
3/4 (19)
1-19/64 (33)
7-26/32 (198)
4-41/64 (118)
2-27/32 (72)
1.
39

M9106 or M9109 Actuated VG1241, VG1245, VG1841,
and VG1845 Series Ball Valve with M9000-520
Linkage. See Table 33 for specific model linkage
dimensions.

3-1/2 in. (89 mm)
4-7/32
(107)
3-29/32
(100)
7-27/32
(199)
C
B
E
D
Two-Way Valve
Two-Way Valve
Three-Way Valve
Three-Way Valve
FIG:M9106-9_dmns
Figure 14: Non-Spring Return M9106 or M9109 Actuated VG1241, VG1245, VG1841, and VG1845 Series
Ball Valve with M9000-520 Linkage Dimensions, in. (mm)
Table 33: M9106 and M9109 Actuated VG1241, VG1245, VG1841, and VG1845 Series Ball Valve with
Valve Size,
in. (DN)1
1/2 (DN15)
6-19/64 (160)
21/32 (17)
1-7/32 (31)
6-49/64 (172)
2-33/64 (64)
11/32 (9)
1-1/4 (32)
3/4 (DN20)
6-19/64 (160)
21/32 (17)
1-7/32 (31)
6-29/32 (175)
2-51/64 (71)
11/32 (9)
1-13/32 (36)
1 (DN25)
6-3/8 (162)
3/4 (19)
1-19/64 (33)
7-13/64 (183)
3-13/32 (87)
11/32 (9)
1-11/16 (43)
1-1/4 (DN32)
6-13/16 (173)
1-1/32 (26)
1-23/32 (44)
7-15/32 (190)
3-15/16 (100)
11/32 (9)
2 (51)
1-1/2 (DN40)
6-31/32 (177)
1-9/64 (29)
1-57/64 (48)
7-43/64 (195)
4-21/64 (110)
11/32 (9)
2-1/8 (54)
2 (DN50)
7-11/64 (182)
1-15/32 (37)
2-1/16 (53)
7-59/64 (201)
4-27/32 (123)
11/32 (9)
2-9/16 (65)
1.
40

M9206 Actuated VG1241, VG1245, VG1841, and
VG1845 Series Ball Valve with M9000-520 Linkage.
* Add 1-11/32 in. (34 mm)


4 in. (102 mm)
7-1/4
(184) *
3-1/4
(83)
5-3/4
(146)
A
D
B
Two-Way Valve
Three-Way Valve
Two-Way Valve
Three-Way Valve
FIG:M9206_dmns
Figure 15: Spring Return M9206 Actuated VG1241, VG1245, VG1841, and VG1845 Series Ball Valve with
Table 34: M9206 Actuated VG1241, VG1245, VG1841, and VG1845 Series Ball Valve with M9000-520
Linkage Dimensions, in. (mm)
Valve Size,
in. (DN)1
A2
1/2 (DN15)
7-13/64 (183)
3/4 (DN20)
7-13/64 (183)
1 (DN25)
7-9/32 (185)
1-1/4 (DN32)
1-1/2 (DN40)
1.
2.
21/32 (17)
1-7/32 (31)
21/32 (17)
1-7/32 (31)
11/32 (9)
1-1/4 (32)
2-33/64 (64)
11/32 (9)
1-13/32 (36)
2-51/64 (71)
3/4 (19)
1-19/64 (33)
11/32 (9)
1-45/64 (43)
3-13/32 (87)
7-11/16 (195)
1-1/32 (26)
1-23/32 (44)
11/32 (9)
1-31/32 (50)
3-15/16 (100)
7-7/8 (200)
1-9/64 (29)
1-57/64 (48)
11/32 (9)
2-11/64 (55)
4-21/64 (110)
For valve assemblies with M9206-xxx-2S Series Actuators, subtract 19/32 in. (15 mm) from Dimension A (column A).
41

M9210 Actuated VG1241, VG1245, VG1841, and
VG1845 Series Ball Valve with M9000-517 Linkage.

4-1/2 in. (114 mm)
E
4-9/16
(116)
7-11/16
(195)
A
D
C
C
Two-Way Valve
Three-Way Valve
G
Two-Way Valve
Three-Way Valve
FIG:srm9210
with M9000-517 Linkage Dimensions, in. (mm)
Table 35: Spring Return M9210 Actuated VG1241, VG1245, VG1841, and VG1845 Series Ball Valve with
Valve Size,
in. (DN)1
2 (DN50)
8-25/32
(223)
1-15/32
(37)
2-1/8
(54)
11/32
(9)
10-5/16
(262)
2-13/32
(61)
4-27/32
(123)
2-27/64
(62)
1.
42

M91xx Series Actuated VG1241, VG1245, VG1841,
Linkage and Field Installed M9000-330 Weather Shield
Dimensions.

M9210 Series Actuated VG1241, VG1245, VG1841,
Linkage and Field Installed M9000-340 Weather
Shield. See Table 36 for specific model linkage
dimensions.
9-17/32
(242)
4-23/32
(120)
7-3/32
(181)
FIG:m91xx_m9000-330ws
Figure 17: Non-Spring Return M91xx Series Actuated VG1241, VG1245, VG1841, and VG1845 Series Ball
Valve with M9000-516 Linkage and Field Installed M9000-330 Weather Shield Dimensions, in. (mm)
43
14-17/32
(369)
10-7/16
(265)
9-17/32
(242)
FIG:m9210_m9000-340ws
Figure 18: Spring Return M9210 Series Actuated VG1241, VG1245, VG1841, and VG1845 Series Ball Valve
with M9000-517 Linkage and Field Installed M9000-340 Weather Shield Dimensions, in. (mm)
Table 36: M9000 Series Actuated VG1241, VG1245, VG1841, and VG1845 Series Ball Valve with
Weather Shield Dimensions, in. (mm)
A
M91xx
M9210
1/2 (DN15)
7-3/8 (187)
8-17/32 (217)
3/4 (DN20)
7-3/8 (187)
8-17/32 (217)
1 (DN25)
7-7/16 (189)
8-5/8 (219)
1-1/4 (DN32)
7-7/8 (200)
9-1/16 (230)
1-1/2 (DN40)
8-1/32 (204)
9-7/32 (234)
2 (DN50)
8-7/32 (209)
9-13/32 (239)
44
VG1000 Series Forged Brass Ball Valves (Part 1 of 2)
Service1
Maximum Actuator Fluid

Temperature Limits
Water
VG12x1 and VG18x1 Series: 23 to 203F (-5 to 95C)

VG12x5 and VG18x5 Series: -22 to 284F (-30 to 140C)
Steam
VG12x5 Series: 15 psig (103 kPa) at 250F (121C)

VG12x1 Series: Not Rated for Steam Service
212F (100C)
VA2202
VA9104
M9104 with M9000-550 Linkage
284F (140C)
M9106 or M9109 with M9000-520 Linkage

Valve Body
Pressure/Temperature Rating
Water
VG1241, VG1245, VG1841, and VG1845 Series:

580 psig (3,996 kPa) at 203F (95C) (PN40)
464 psig (3,196 kPa) at 284F (140C) (PN40)
300 psig (2,067 kPa)
300 psig (2,067 kPa)
Steam
15 psig (103 kPa) Saturated Steam
200 psig (1,378 kPa)
Maximum Recommended Operating Pressure

Drop
50 psi Maximum Differential Pressure for Valves with Characterized

Flow Control Disk and 30 psi Maximum for Quiet Service Ball Valves
Two-Way
Equal Percentage
Three-Way
Equal Percentage Flow Characteristics of In-line Port A (Coil) and

Linear Flow Characteristics of Angle Port B (Bypass)
Greater than 500:1
Rangeability2
Temperature
Maximum Ambient
Operating Temperature3
(Limited by the Actuator and
Linkage)
-4F (-20C)
VA9104 and M9104 Series Non-Spring Return Actuators
-22F (-30C)
VA2202 and M2202 Series Spring Return Actuators
-4F (-20C)
M9106 and M9109 Series Non-Spring Return Actuators
-25F (-32C)
-40F (-40C)
M9210 and M9220 Series Spring Return Actuators
Direct Mount
140F (60C): VA9104 Series Non-Spring Return Actuators

122F (50C): VA2202 Series Spring Return Actuators
M9000-550
Linkage
M2000-500
Linkage
M9000-520
Linkage
125F (52C): M9106 and M9109 Series Non-Spring Return

Actuators
M9000-51x
Series Linkage

45
VG1000 Series Forged Brass Ball Valves (Part 2 of 2)

Leakage

(Two- and Three-Way Control Port)
1% of Maximum Flow for Three-Way Bypass Port
End Connections
National Pipe Thread (NPT): 1/2 to 2 in. (DN15 to DN50)

Sweat: 1/2 to 1 in. (DN15 to DN25)
Use a low melting point solder.
Press (ProPress compatible): 1/2 to 1 in. (DN15 to DN25)
(Press end connections are designed to work with RIDGID pressing
tools.)
Materials
1.
2.
3.
Body
Forged Brass
Ball
VG12x1 and VG18x1 Series: Chrome Plated Brass

Blowout-Proof
Stem
VG12x1 and VG18x1 Series: Nickel Plated Brass

Seats
Graphite-Reinforced PTFE with Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer

(EPDM) O-Ring Backing
Stem Seals
EPDM Double O-Rings
Characterizing
Disk
Proper water treatment is recommended; refer to the VDI 2035 Standard.

Rangeability is defined as the ratio of maximum controllable flow to minimum controllable flow.
In steam applications, install the valve with the stem horizontal to the piping and wrap the valve and piping with insulation.
Building Efficiency
46
Published in U.S.A.
SISTEMA ACQUALINE
NOMENCLATURA
YRH C 122 A 25 P C K
RESFRIADOR
DE LQUIDO
HORIZONTAL
K: GOLD FIN
C: R22
C: S FRIO
P: Com kit hidrnico

S: Sem kit hidrnico
090: 7,5 TR
122: 10 TR
25: 220 V / 3 / 60 Hz
40: 380 V / 3 / 60 Hz
A: 1 GERAO
SISTEMA ACQUALINE
O Sistema Acqualine composto por um Resfriador de
Lquido YRHC com capacidade nominal de 7,5 e 10TR e uma
completa linha de unidades climatizadoras com diferentes
designs e capacidades, de acordo com a sua necessidade:
Essenciale
Premier
Elegance
Harmonic
Autentic
INSTALAO
SISTEMA ACQUALINE
Sistema de gua Gelada.

Capacidade do Sistema: 7,5 e 10TR.
Um verstil sistema de ar condicionado para mltiplos ambientes.
Conforto individual para cada usurio.
LIMITES DE OPERAO
Temperatura de sada da gua: 5 a 15C

Diferena de temperatura no trocador de calor: 3 a 8C
Mxima temperatura de entrada do ar: 43C
ALTA TECNOLOGIA
Compressor(es) Scroll,
Evaporador do tipo placas que oferece
excelente performance e ocupa pouco
espao no equipamento.
KIT HIDRNICO
Flexibilidade na instalao
Opo do kit incorporado: bomba e tanque de expanso;

Facilita a instalao e economiza espao.
KIT HIDRNICO
Tanque de expanso: 18 litros,
Bomba: Centrfuga, com 25mca de altura manomtrica
total disponvel.
FCIL INSTALAO E MANUTENO
Trs painis removveis com

puxadores para facilitar o acesso
aos componentes.
FCIL INSTALAO E MANUTENO
Fcil acesso a purga de ar e a

pressurizao do tanque (do lado
de fora da mquina)
CONFIABILIDADE
Equipamentos testados em fbrica.
Componentes de alta qualidade.
Quadro eltrico completo.
Circuito frigorfico com filtro secador, visor de lquido.
Vlvula de servio do tipo tanque e pressostato.
Circuito hidrulico com filtro Y e chave de fluxo.
GABINETE COMPACTO
Insuflamento horizontal (permite instalao em

apartamentos),
Largura pequena o suficiente para passar em portas
(menor que 80cm) facilita o transporte em aplicaes
residenciais.
APLICAES
Ar condicionado,
Plantas Qumicas,
Laticnios,
Alimentos,
Embalagem de carnes,
Pistas de gelo,
Sorvete,
Derretimento de neve,
Outras aplicaes.
INSTALAO
CONTROLADOR MICROPROCESSADO
Controlador de alta performance.

Software dedicado especialmente ao produto.
Gerenciamento dos compressores, da bomba, controles de
alarme e protees.
CONTROLADOR MICROPROCESSADO
Fcil operao,
3 nveis de acesso:
Usurio Final (ajuste de set-point),
Servios (ajuste de parmetros),
Restrito (ajuste de parmetros adicionais ou restrito).
Climatizadores
Hidrnicos
Vrias opes
de design e
capacidade
Capacidade dos Climatizadores
Essenciale
Premier
Elegance
Harmonic
Autentic
10
15
20
25
Btu/h
30
35
40
45
50
High Wall Essenciale
- Para instalar na parede,

- 4 capacidades,
- Controle remoto sem fio,
- Air Sweep,
- Design atrativo
Console Ceiling Premier e Elegance

- Para instalar no piso ou no teto.
- 4 capacidades.
- Controle remoto sem fio.
- Air Sweep (exceto no modelo 45).
- Design atrativo.
Cassete Harmonic
- Para instalar embutido no teto,

- 3 capacidades,
- Air Sweep,
- Controle remoto sem fio.
Cassete Harmonic
- Design atrativo,
- Tomada de ar externo,
- Insuflamento pelos 4 lados.
Cassete Harmonic
Possibilidade de sistema misto (condicionamento de uma sala adjacente).
Fan & Coil Autentic

- Tipo Ceiling embutido com filtro e Plenum de retorno traseiro.
- 8 capacidades.
- Baixo nvel de rudo.
- Seguro e confivel..
Indice
1. Introduo .............................................................................................................................
2. Nomenclatura .......................................................................................................................
3. Dados Tcnicos ...................................................................................................................
4. Dados Eltricos ....................................................................................................................
5. Circuitos Frigorficos ............................................................................................................
6. Dimenses ............................................................................................................................
7. reas Livres ..........................................................................................................................
8. Recomendaes de Instalao ...........................................................................................
9. Esquemas Eltricos ..............................................................................................................
13
10. Guia Bsico de Operao do Controlador FX-05 .........................................................
17
11. Funes de Controle............................................. .........................................................
18
12. Gerenciamento de Alarmes............................................................................................
22
13. Parmetros de Configurao .........................................................................................
23
14. Controlador LP-000 C.....................................................................................................
26
15. Display ............................................................................................................................
27
16. Pontos de Rede................................................................................................................ 37
..................................
1. Introduo
A YORK est lanando o Minichiller YRHC de fabricao
nacional nas capacidades de 7,5 e 10TR. Estes Minichillers
trabalham em conjunto com as unidades climatizadoras da
YORK. As unidades esto disponveis em 220 e 380Volts.
Possuem compressor Scroll, descarga horizontal, quadro

eltrico incorporado e controlador eletrnico programvel. O
YRHC oferece a opo do Kit hidrnico, composto de bomba
e tanque de expanso.
Foto ilustrativa
2. Nomenclatura
YRH
122
25
K
K - Gold Fin
Resfriador de lquido
Horizontal
C - R22
C - S frio
P - com conjunto Hidrnico
S - sem conjunto Hidrnico
Capacidade nominal
090 - 7.5 TR
122 - 10 TR
25 - 220 V / 3 / 60 Hz
40 - 380 V / 3 / 60 Hz
A - 1 a gerao
..................................
3. Dados Tcnicos
Segue abaixo a tabela com os dados eltricos da mquina.
Modelo
YRHC122
YRHC090
Capacidade nominal*
Fludo circuito hidrulico
Nmero de estgios de capacidade
Nmero de circuitos frigorficos
Refrigerante
Compressor
Evaporador
Bomba
Condensador
Ventilador do
condensador
Tanque de expanso - Volume
Largura
Dimenses
Profundidade
Altura
120.000
90.000
Btu/h
gua ou Brine
2
2
1
1
Tipo
Quantidade
litros
mm
mm
mm
R-22
Scroll - Hermtico
Placas soldadas
Centrfuga
Tubo de cobre e aletas de alumnio
Axial
2
1
18
2215
790
950
1915
690
950
Dados sujeitos a alterao
4. Dados Eltricos
Modelo
YRHC090
Alimentao eltrica
Consumo total (kW)
Corrente nominal total (A)
Ponto de fora (A)
YRHC122
220V/3/60Hz / 380V/3/60Hz
kW
A
A
8,34
26,6 / 17,1
31 / 20
12,73
40,6 / 25,7
44 / 28
Dados sujeitos a confirmao
..................................
5. Circuitos Frigorficos
1 - Diagrama funcional (com kit hidrnico) Resfriador de lquido 7,5 TR - YRHC090
SENSOR DE
ENTRADA DE GUA
M
TROCADOR DE PLACAS
MANMETRO DE PRESSO DIFERENCIAL

(OPCIONAL)
CHAVE DE FLUXO
PURGA DE AR
VLVULA
TANQUE
SADA
SENSOR DE
SADA DE GUA
VLVULA
TANQUE
DE GUA
TOMADA DE PRESSO
PRESSURIZAO
EQUALIZADOR
VLVULA
TANQUE
PB
DO TANQUE
TANQUE DE
EXPANSO
18 L
VLVULA
EXPANSO
ESFERA
VLVULA
VLVULA
ACESSO
ALIMENTAO
PA
DE GUA
VLVULA GLOBO
VISOR DE
LQUIDO
VLVULA
ESFERA
CONDENSADOR
BOMBA
COMP. 1
RETORNO GUA
FILTRO Y
VLVULA
TANQUE
VLVULA
ACESSO
DRENAGEM
2 - Diagrama funcional (sem kit hidrnico) Resfriador de lquido 7,5 TR - YRHC090

SENSOR DE
ENTRADA DE GUA
M
TROCADOR DE PLACAS

(OPCIONAL)
CHAVE DE FLUXO
PURGA DE AR
VLVULA
TANQUE
SADA
SENSOR DE
SADA DE GUA
VLVULA
TANQUE
DE GUA
TOMADA DE PRESSO
EQUALIZADOR
VLVULA
TANQUE
PB
VLVULA
EXPANSO
VLVULA
ACESSO
PA
VISOR DE
LQUIDO
CONDENSADOR
COMP. 1
RETORNO GUA
FILTRO Y
VLVULA
TANQUE
VLVULA
ACESSO
DRENAGEM
..................................
5. Circuitos Frigorficos (continuao)

3 - Diagrama funcional (com kit hidrnico) Resfriador de lquido 10 TR - YRHC122
SENSOR DE
ENTRADA DE GUA

(OPCIONAL)
CHAVE DE FLUXO
M
TROCADOR DE PLACAS
PURGA DE AR
VLVULA
TANQUE
SADA
SENSOR DE
SADA DE GUA
VLVULA
TANQUE
DE GUA
TOMADA DE PRESSO
PRESSURIZAO
EQUALIZADOR
VLVULA
TANQUE
DO TANQUE
VLVULA
TANQUE
PB
PB
TANQUE DE
EXPANSO
18 L
VLVULA
EXPANSO
ESFERA
VLVULA
VLVULA
ACESSO
ALIMENTAO
VLVULA
ACESSO
PA
DE GUA
VLVULA GLOBO
PA
VISOR DE
LQUIDO
VLVULA
ESFERA
CONDENSADOR
FILTRO
VLVULA
TANQUE
BOMBA
SECADOR
COMP. 2
COMP. 1
RETORNO GUA
VLVULA
ACESSO
FILTRO Y
VLVULA
ACESSO
VLVULA
TANQUE
DRENAGEM
4 - Diagrama funcional (sem kit hidrnico) Resfriador de lquido 10 TR - YRHC122

SENSOR DE
ENTRADA DE GUA
M
TROCADOR DE PLACAS

(OPCIONAL)
CHAVE DE FLUXO
PURGA DE AR
VLVULA
TANQUE
SADA
SENSOR DE
SADA DE GUA
VLVULA
TANQUE
DE GUA
TOMADA DE PRESSO
EQUALIZADOR
VLVULA
TANQUE
PB
VLVULA
TANQUE
PB
VLVULA
EXPANSO
VLVULA
ACESSO
PA
VLVULA
ACESSO
PA
VISOR DE
LQUIDO
CONDENSADOR
VLVULA
TANQUE
FILTRO
SECADOR
COMP. 1
COMP. 2
RETORNO GUA
VLVULA
ACESSO
VLVULA
TANQUE
FILTRO Y
VLVULA
ACESSO
DRENAGEM
..................................
6. Dimenses
VISTA LATERAL
159
447
VISTA POSTERIOR
113
155
370
E
A
,5
VISTA SUPERIOR
957
VISTA FRONTAL
NOTAS:
G - ENTRADA DE ALIMENTAO DE FORA
H - ALIMENTAO DE GUA 3/4" BSP, FMEA
I - RETORNO 1 1/2" BSP, FMEA
J - SADA DO COOLER 1 1/2" BSP, FMEA
K - PRESSURIZAO TANQUE EXPANSO - 1/4"NPT
L - PURGA DE AR TUBULAO DE GUA GELADA
M - DRENAGEM
F
-DIMENSES EM MILIMETROS
YRHC090
YRHC122
A
1860
2160
B
228
278
C
645
745
D
441
541
E
685
785
F
1913
2213
..................................
1500 (DESCARGA DE AR)
7. reas Livres
REA DE MANUTENO
X
600
300
Y
300
600
600
OPO A:
OPO B:
300
500
VISTA C
..................................
8. Recomendaes de Instalao
Com Kit Hidrnico
Opo A:
Vlvula de balanceamento + Vlvula duas vias
OBS.: ___ . ___ Os acessrios no fazem parte do equipamento.
..................................
8. Recomendaes de Instalao - (continuao)

Com Kit Hidrnico
Opo B:
Vlvula de balanceamento 3 vias
..................................
3
10

Sem Kit Hidrnico
Opo A:
Vlvula de balanceamento + Vlvula de duas vias
PRESSURIZAO
DE AR DO TANQUE
TANQUE
EXPANSO
18 L
ESFERA
VLVULA
VLVULA GLOBO
ALIMENTAO
DE GUA
BOMBA
VLVULA
ESFERA
..................................
3
11

Sem Kit Hidrnico
Opo B:
Vlvula de balanceamento 3 vias
PRESSURIZAO
DE AR DO TANQUE
TANQUE
EXPANSO
18 L
ESFERA
VLVULA
VLVULA GLOBO
ALIMENTAO
DE GUA
BOMBA
VLVULA
ESFERA
..................................
3
12
9. Esquemas Eltricos
LEGENDA:
= BORNES DE ALIMENTAO DE FORA
= BORNES DE COMANDO 24V
= TERMINAIS DO CONTROLADOR JOHNSON
CP = CAPACITOR DO MOTOR DO CONDENSADOR
F
= FUSVEL DE COMANDO
CFA = CHAVE DE FLUXO DE GUA
KB = CONTATOR DA BOMBA DE GUA
KC = CONTATOR DO COMPRESSOR
PA = PRESSOSTATO DE ALTA
PB = PRESSOSTATO DE BAIXA
RB = REL TRMICO DA BOMBA DE GUA
RSF = REL DE SEQNCIA E FALTA DE FASES
STR = SENSOR DE TEMPERATURA DE RETORNO
STS = SENSOR DE TEMPERATURA DE SADA
TR = TRANSFORMADOR DE COMANDO
F1-2A
(T)
( 15 )
COM
24V
RSF
F3-6A
( 14 )
( 13 )
11
14
(1)
(1)
+
24V
(2)
(2)
24V
(3)
(3)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(9)
( 10 )
10
( 10 )
11
( 11 )
12
( 12 )
13
( 20 )
14
( 21 )
15
( 22 )
TR
DO
COM
1_2
DO
COM
3_4
F2-2A
(S)
( 16 )
(2)
220V
A1
KC1
A2
DO1
COM
RB
(R)
KC1
13
14
RC1
( 17 )
A1
WHT
(S)
KB
A2
96
95
(5)
BRN
MOTOR
DO
COND.1
PA1
(6)
RSF
S
T
R
ALIMENTAO ELTRICA
220V-3-60HZ
(R)
(S)
(T)
(R)
(S)
(T)
RB
KB
1
KB
3
KB
5
BOMBA
DE
GUA
RB
6
(8)
KC1
1
DI3
CFA
2
RB
4
DI2
BLK
(9)
DO4
PB1
L1
STR
DI4
DI
COM
AI1
KC1
3
COMPR.1
L2
KC1
5
STS
6
( 11 )
L3
( 12 )
AI2
TERRA
AI
COM
AO
COM
VER NOTA 4
DO3
VER NOTA 5
NOTAS:
INSTRUES PARA A INSTALAO DO COMANDO REMOTO:
1- COMPRIMENTO MXIMO DOS CABOS DE COMANDO = 50 m
2- BITOLA MNIMA DOS CABOS DE COMANDO = 0,75 mm
3- EVITAR A PROXIMIDADE ENTRE OS CABOS DE COMANDO E FORA
4- LMPADA PARA SINALIZAO DE ALARME = 24V 2W
5- COMANDO LIGA/DESLIGA REMOTO: REMOVER O JUMPER ENTRE OS
BORNES 13 E 15, E UTILIZAR UM CONTATO SPST LIVRE DE TENSO
DI1
YRHC060/090A25PC
035B00310 000B
..................................
3
13
9. Esquemas Eltricos (continuao)
LEGENDA:
F
= FUSVEL DE COMANDO
F1-2A
(T)
( 15 )
24V
COM
RSF
F3-6A
( 14 )
( 13 )
11
14
(1)
(1)
+
24V
(2)
(2)
24V
(3)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(9)
( 10 )
10
( 10 )
11
( 11 )
12
( 12 )
13
( 20 )
14
( 21 )
15
( 22 )
TR
( 16 )
(2)
220V
(R)
A2
KC1
A1
A2
KC2
A1
KC1
13
14
CP1
( 17 )
(4)
BRN
MOTOR
DO
COND.1
KC2
13
14
CP2
( 17 )
A2
KB
A1
96
95
PA1
PB1
PA2
PB2
(5)
R
S
T
(S)
(T)
(R)
(S)
(T)
TERRA
(R)
(S)
(T)
NOTAS:
(8)
BOMBA
DE
GUA
RB
6
STR
( 11 )
STS
KC1
1
(7)
RB
KB
5
2
4
DI3
DI4
DI
COM
AI1
AI2
L1
KC1
3
DI2
CFA
RB
KB
3
MOTOR
DO
COND.2
BLK
KB
DO4
BRN
WHT
(S)
DO2
RB
(6)
(R)
DO1
COM
WHT
(R)
RSF
DO
COM
3_4
F2-2A
(S)
BLK
ALIMENTAO ELTRICA
220V-3-60HZ
DO
COM
1_2
( 12 )
COMPR.1
L2
AI
COM
KC1
5
L3
KC2
1
L1
KC2
3
COMPR.2
L2
KC2
5
AO
COM
VER NOTA 4
L3
DO3
VER NOTA 5
DI1
YRHC122A25PC
035B00300 000B
..................................
3
14
LEGENDA:
F
= FUSVEL DE COMANDO
F1-2A
(T)
( 15 )
24V
COM
RSF
F3-6A
( 14 )
( 13 )
11
14
(1)
(1)
+
24V
(2)
(2)
24V
(3)
(3)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(9)
( 10 )
10
( 10 )
11
( 11 )
12
( 12 )
13
( 20 )
14
( 21 )
15
( 22 )
TR
DO
COM
1_2
DO
COM
3_4
F2-2A
(S)
(2)
( 16 )
380V
A1
KC1
A2
DO1
COM
RB
(R)
KC1
13
14
CP1
( 17 )
A1
KB
A2
96
95
(5)
BRN
WHT
(N)
MOTOR
DO
COND.1
PA1
(6)
RSF
S
T
(R)
(S)
(T)
KB
1
RB
2
KB
3
5
BOMBA
DE
GUA
RB
KB
RB
6
(R)
(8)
(S)
(T)
STR
KC1
1
DI3
CFA
2
N
ALIMENTAO ELTRICA
380V-3-60HZ + NEUTRO
DI2
BLK
(9)
DO4
PB1
DI4
DI
COM
AI1
L1
KC1
3
COMPR.1
L2
STS
( 11 )
AI2
KC1
5
L3
( 12 )
TERRA
AI
COM
AO
COM
VER NOTA 4
DO3
VER NOTA 5
NOTAS:
DI1
YRHC060/090A40PC
035B00311 000B
..................................
3
15
LEGENDA:
F
= FUSVEL DE COMANDO
F1-2A
(T)
( 15 )
24V
COM
RSF
F3-6A
( 14 )
( 13 )
11
14
(1)
(1)
+
24V
(2)
(2)
24V
(3)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(9)
( 10 )
10
( 10 )
11
( 11 )
12
( 12 )
13
( 20 )
14
( 21 )
15
( 22 )
TR
( 16 )
(2)
380V
(R)
A1
KC1 A2
A1
KC2 A2
KC1
13
14
CP1
( 17 )
(4)
BRN
MOTOR
DO
COND.1
BLK
KC2
13
14
CP2
( 17 )
A1
KB
A2
96
95
PA1
PB1
PA2
PB2
(5)
WHT
R
S
T
(S)
(T)
MOTOR
DO
COND.2
(7)
BOMBA
DE
GUA
RB
KB
5
(8)
RB
KB
RB
6
STR
( 11 )
STS
N
R
(R)
(S)
(T)
DI2
DI3
CFA
BLK
DO4
BRN
(N)
KB
DO2
RB
(6)
(R)
DO1
COM
WHT
(R)
RSF
DO
COM
3_4
F2-2A
(S)
(N)
ALIMENTAO ELTRICA
380V-3-60HZ + NEUTRO
DO
COM
1_2
DI4
DI
COM
AI1
AI2
KC1
1
L1
( 12 )
KC1
3
COMPR.1
L2
AI
COM
KC1
5
L3
AO
COM
VER NOTA 4
(R)
TERRA
(S)
(T)
NOTAS:
KC2
1
L1
KC2
3
COMPR.2
L2
KC2
5
L3
DO3
VER NOTA 5
DI1
YRHC122A40PC
035B00301 000B
..................................
3
16
10. Guia Bsico de Operao do Controlador Fx06

10.
1. Descrio da Unidade
_________________________________________________________________________________
A unidade pode ser controlada atravs da sua interface local (display) e tambm por comandos remotos provenientes de :
Rede (N2Open, com carto de comunicao opcional)
Relgio de Tempo Real (Programao Horria)
Entrada Digital
A figura 1 ilustra as formas de comando do controlador.
Comando vias Redes

Liga/Desliga
Controlador
Comando vias Entradas Digitais Remotas

Liga/Desliga
Setpoint
Comando vias Interface Local
Relgio em Tempo Real
Liga/Desliga
Liga/Desliga
Setpoint
Figura 1: Opes de Comando
10.
2. Comando Liga/Desliga
_________________________________________________________________________________
O Comando Liga/Desliga pode ser executado atravs da interface local (display); ou
O Comando Liga/Desliga pode ser executado atravs da entrada digital, relgio de tempo real ou rede de comunicao.
Nota: Uma vez que a unidade ligada pela interface local, este estado mantido mesmo aps uma falha de energia.
Com a unidade desligada, h duas condies que sobrepoem a ao de comando Desliga:
Alarme de anti-congelamento (a bomba ligada); ou
Anti-travamento da bomba (a bomba ligada de acordo com o ciclo programado).
10.
3. Setpoint Efetivo
_________________________________________________________________________________
O setpoint efetivo usado no algoritmo de controle o resultado de um clculo. Este valor pode vir da rede ou de um
parmetro de configurao local.
O setpoint efetivo sempre se refere temperatura de sada de gua embora o algoritmo de controle possa trabalhar com as
duas temperaturas (entrada ou sada de gua).
Se o setpoint selecionado for referente temperatura de entrada, um diferencial (BIAS) adicionado.
Um OFFSET adicionado/subtrado se o setpoint ajustado pelo usurio.
..................................
3
17
11. Funes de Controle

11.1. Compressores
_________________________________________________________________________________
A temperatura da gua comparada com o setpoint efetivo e um loop de controle tipo ON/OFF ativado.
A|1 - Sensor de Entrada
A|2 - Sensor de Sada
Hormetro
Alarmes
Temporizao
DO 1 / 2 - Compressor
Nr. Max de Ciclos
Min. Tempo Ligado
Min. Tempo Desligado
Figura 4: Controle dos compressores
Controle Liga/Desliga dos Compressores

Controle do Modo Mono-compressor
Set Point Efetivo
..................................
3
18
Controle no Modo Bi-compressor
Set Point Efetivo
A sequncia de operao dada abaixo:

Carga 0% (=setpoint): todos os estgios desligados
Carga 100% (setpoint +/- hysteresis): todos os estgios ligados
Carga 50%: somente o estgio 1 ligado
A seqncia de acionamento, quando a carga vai de 0 a 100%, estgio 1 e depois estgio 2. O
acionamento do estgio 2 retardado em 30 segundos do estgio 1.
A seqncia de desligamento, quando a carga vai de 100 a 0%, estgio 2 e depois estgio 1. No existe
retardo entre estgios nesta seqncia de operao.
Temporizao dos Compressores
O gerenciamento dos compressores inclue trs temporizadores que tem a funo de proteger o
compressor de um nmero excessivo de manobras nos compressores que poderiam danificar o mesmo.
Estes temporizadores so descritos na Figura 9.
Tempo Mnimo Ligado: o compressor permanece ligado no mnimo por este tempo.
Tempo Mnimo Desligado: o compressor fica desligado no mnimo por este tempo.
Nmero mx. de ciclos por hora: este parmetro limita o nmero mximo de manobras no
compressor no perodo de uma hora (valor fixado em 12 manobras/hora).
Comando
Estado do
Compressor
Tempo Mn
Ligado
Tempo Mn
Desligado
..................................
3
19
Intertravamentos do Compressor
Os compressores ficam intertravados de acordo com :
Atividade das bombas: o comando do compressor retardado aps a bomba ser ligada.
Unidade desligada : assim que a Unidade desligada os compressores so desligados.
Alarmes dos compressores:
Alarme de Presso (Alta ou Baixa);
Alarme de Falta de Fluxo;
Alarme de Anti-congelamento;
Sensor de Temperatura de sada de gua fora da faixa de operao (unreliable).
11. 2 Bomba
_________________________________________________________________________________
Sempre que a unidade comandada para Ligar, a bomba ativada e um timer
disparado para a partida em delay do compressor (fixada em 30 segundos). Quando a
unidade comadada para Desligar, a bomba desliga, aps um delay.
Alarmes de
Bombas
Timer de Ciclo
Desligado
Delay de Partida do Compressor
DO4 - Bombas
Timer de Ciclo Desligado
Ciclos Anti-Adeso
Quando a unidade comandada para Desligar, a bomba acionada periodicamente e de forma automtica para um
ciclo anti-adeso. Perodo e durao destes ciclos so ajustados pelo usurio.
Essa funo vem desabilitada de fbrica (ajuste de durao igual a 0)
Alarmes
As bombas so foradas a Desligar se algum dos seguintes alarmes ocorrerem:
Falta de Fluxo
Sensor de Temperatura de sada de gua fora da faixa de operao (unreliable).
Se algum destes alarmes estiver ativo, os ciclos de anti-adeso so desabilitados
11.
3 Anti-Congelamento
_________________________________________________________________________________
A condio de anti-congelamento ativa a bomba, mostra um cdigo de alarme e energiza o rel de output de
alarme. De acordo com a configurao da mquina, a rotina de anti-congelamento desliga o(s) compressor(es).
AntiCongelamento
Setpoint
Anti-Congelamento
Diferencial
Temperatura de sada de gua
..................................
3
20
AutoReset do Alarme de Anti-Congelamento

Um autoreset de alarme associado ao controle de anti-congelamento. Este alarme est configurado para
permitir no mximo 3 resets automticos por hora, aps o que, um reset manual necessrio para colocar
a unidade em funcionamento novamente. A bomba desligada se a temperatura retorna condio normal.
..................................
3
21
12. Gerenciamento de Alarmes

Trs tipos de alarmes so gerenciados, os quais so descritos na Tabela 1
Tabela 1: Tipos de Alarmes
Nota:(*) A funo de autoreset permite trs resets automticos por hora antes de requerer um reset manual.
Estes alarmes so descritos na tabela 2
Tabela 2: Tabela de Alarmes
Nota: Caso haja alguns dos alarmes citados acima, o display do controladaor ficar na cor
vermelha e mostrar o cone .
..................................
3
22
13. Parmetros de Configurao
SET
Setpoint Efetivo
definido como o rel de corte do
compressor. O setpoint efetivo de
trabalho o resultado do seguinte
clculo:
Se Pr1 = 1 (sensor de gua de entrada)

Eff. Setpoint = CLG + dt
Se Pr1 = 0 (sensor de gua de sada)
Eff. Setpoint = CLG
CP1
Quando o compressor parte, deve

permanecer ligado por no mnimo o
tempo definido por este parmetro.
CP2
PP1
Exemplo:
Setpoint Resfr.= 7C
Diferencial = 2 K.
O co mpressor comandado
para Ligar quando a
temperatura ult rapassar 9C, e
desligado quando a
temperatura abaixar a 7C.
Histerese
Setpoint Resfriam.
dt
PP2
Este valor automaticamente adicionado /

subtrado ao setpoint quando o sensor ativo
selecionado for o de entrada de gua.
Durao do Ciclo Desligado da Bomba

Sempre que a unidade desligada, a
bomba executa automaticamente ciclos
anti-adeso
Esta a durao do ciclo anti-adeso.
PP3
Delay de Desligamento da bomba

Quando a unidade comandade para
Desligar, a bomba desligada aps o
transcurso deste delay.
AF1
Setpoint Anti-Congelamento
Previne contra condies de baixa
temperatura da gua, pelo acionamento
da funo anti-congelamento.
T C
Compensao de Setpoint
Perodo do Ciclo Desligado da Bomba

Sempre que a unidade desligada, a
bomba executa automaticamente ciclos
anti-adeso.
Este o tempo entre dois ciclos antiadeso sucessivos.
Histerese
a diferena entre a temperatura em
que o output do compressor
comandado para desligar e a
temperatura em que o output
comandade para Ligar. um valor
absoluto, relacionado ao setpoint.
Tempo mnimo de Compressor Desligado

Quando o compressor pra, deve
permanecer desligado por no mnimo o
tempo definido por este parmetro.
Veja definies para dt e Pr1 abaixo

Hy
Tempo mnimo de Compressor Ligado
AF2
Diferencial Anti-Congelamento
O alarme de anti-congelamento ser
resetado quando a temperatura da gua
exceder o valor do setpoint anticongelamento (AF1) + o diferencial anticongelamento (AF2)
..................................
3
23
LP1
Delay do Alarme de Baixa Pressao
rC1
Durao do Procedimento de Reverso

Atravs desse parmetro possvel
ajustar a durao do procedimento de
reverso.
Tempo entre a deteo de um alarme de

baixa presso e a ativao da funo do
alarme.
FS1
Delay do Alarme da Chave de Fluxo
Typ
Permite selecionar o tipo de mquina,

entre:
Tempo entre a deteo de um alarme da

chave de fluxo a ativao da funo do
alarme.
Pr1
Pr3
1 = Somente chiller, mono circuito

2 = Somente Chiller bi circuito
Seletor do Sensor de Temperatura Ativo

Este parmetro seleciona o sensor a ser
usado para controle de temperatura de
gua.
0 = Sensor de temp. sada chiller (AI2)
1 = Sensor de temp. entrada chiller
(AI1)
Seletor do Tipo de Mquina
SNS
Seletor do tipo de sensor

6 = A99
8 = Nickel 1000
Nota: Aps efetuar a muda na,

necessrio re inicia r o controlador
Seletor Modo Local/Remoto

Este parmetro permite trabalhar
apenas em modo local. Neste modo,
todos os comandos remotos (Rede ou
contatos remotos) so ignorados e a
unidade comandada apenas pelo
display local.
0 = Modo remoto
1 = Modo Local
..................................
3
24
Parmetros de Rede
Add
Endereo Serial
Este o endereo serial da unidade,
caso ela seja conectada
em uma rede serial.
..................................
3
25
14. Controlador LP-000C

O sistema de controle composto pelo controlador LP-FX06P01-000C. O display do controlador do
tipo LCD 2X4 e composto por 9 Leds e 4 teclas em sua lateral. Segue abaixo, uma imagem do
controlador.
Abaixo segue um detalhamento referente s teclas frontais do controlador:
Teclas
Descrio
Confirma as alteraes efetuadas nos parmetros, confirma a escolha de telas no menu,
confirma a senha e habilita a edio dos parmetros ajustveis.
Cancela as alteraes efetuadas nos parmetros, porm, no se deve pressionar a tecla
OK antes. Retorna tela inicial, acessa o menu.
Navega entre as telas, incrementa valores numricos a parmetros ajustveis.
Navega entre as telas, decrementa valores numricos a parmetros ajustveis.
Abaixo, segue funes especiais das teclas:

Teclas
Perodo Press iona do

3 segundos
3 segundos
+
+
3 segundos
3 segundos
Descrio
Mostra o parmetro SET (Set Point de Refrigerao) para
eventuais ajustes
Efetua o reset dos alarmes gerados pelos pressostatos, chave
de fluxo e temperatura alta
Comando Liga/ Desliga em modo local
Efetua o reset manual do alarme de anti-congelamento
..................................
3
26
Os cones que aparecem no display possuem um significado conforme abaixo:
cones
Descrio
Pisca quando gerado um alarme de anti-congelamento
Pisca quando gerado um alarme de temperatura alta
Sem funo
Acende quando o compressor (Circuito 01) estiver sendo comandado
Acende quando o compressor (Circuito 02) estiver sendo comandado
Acende quando o sistema estiver habilitado
Sem funo
Sem funo
Sem funo
15. Display
15.1. Tela Inicial
_________________________________________________________________________________
Assim que o controlador for energizado e o programa carregado , o controlador apresentar a Janela
de Introduo.
TEMP ENT: Valor da temperatura de Entrada de gua.

TEMP SAIDA: Valor da temperatura de Sada de gua; e
DIF TEMP: Diferena entre as duas temperaturas.
..................................
3
27
15.2. Mudana do Valor do Set Point de Refrigerao
Mantendo o boto
pressionado por 3 segundos a seguinte tela aparecer:
SET: Valor do Setpoint de Refrigerao
15.3. Menu de Acesso
Na Janela de Introduo, pressione o boto

itens:
EVENTOS
CONTAS
, voc ser encaminhado para o menu contendo os
EVENTOS: Exibem quais so as falhas que esto ocorrendo no sistema de automao.

CONTAS: Permite que o usurio entre com a sua senha para permisso dos ajustes dos parmetros.
Pressione o boto
no menu CONTAS e ser solicitada uma senha.
1-AJ
Senha:1111
Permisso: Alterar todos os parmetros que se encontram no sistema de automao.
Aps validar o acesso com a senha, um novo menu aparecer, conforme abaixo:
AJUSTES
HORMETRO
DATA/HORA
PROG HOR
EVENTOS
CONTAS
..................................
3
28
HY:Valor da histerese
DT: Valor da compensao do setpoint
CP1:Valor do tempo mnimo do compressor ligado
CP2:Valor do tempo mnimo do compressor desligado
PP1:Valor do perodo do ciclo desligado da bomba
PP2:Valor da durao do ciclo desligado da bomba
PP3:Valor do delay de desligamento da bomba
AF1:Valor do setpoint anti-congelamento
AF2:Valor do diferencial anti-congelamento
LP1:Valor do delay do alarme de baixa presso
FS1:Valor do delay do alarme da chave de fluxo
HT1:Valor do tempo de alarme em temperatura alta
PR1:Seletor do sensor de entrada ou sada
PR3:Seletor do modo LOCAL/REMOTO
EQU:Habiltao da Equalizao de Horas dos Compressores
ADD:Valor do Endereo SERIAL
TYP:Seletor do Tipo de Mquina
SNS:Tipo do Sensor
..................................
3
30
1-MENU AJUSTES
O menu AJUSTES contm os seguintes itens:
..................................
3
29
2-HORMETRO
A seguir so apresentados os itens do menu HORMETRO.
HORAS TRAB: Quantidade de horas trabalhadas do respectivo compressor

QTD RST HORAS TRAB: Quantidade de resets das horas trabalhadas, ou seja, quantas vezes as
mesmas foram zeradas por contar de exceder o valor de 9999 em sua contagem.
..................................
3
31
3-DATA/HORA
DIA: Parmetro para ajustar o dia;

MES: Parmetro para ajustar o ms;
ANO: Parmetro para ajustar o ano;
HORA: Parmetro para ajustar a hora; e
MINUTO: Parmetro para ajustar o minuto.
Nota: importante que o controlador tenha sempre a sua data / hora ajustadas corretamentes para
que possa efetuar o registro dos alarmes e trabalhar de maneira correta com a programao horria.
..................................
3
32
4- PROGRAMAO HORRIA
Para ajustar ou visualizar a programao horria, deve-se seguir os seguintes procedimentos:
1) Ao acessar o item PROG HOR, aparecer opo ON / OFF SCHEDULER, pressione o boto
, aparecer a tela abaixo:
-01ENTE
Perceba que aparecer uma numerao acima da frase ENTER TO VIEW/EDIT, isto significa que pode
ser feita a escolha de um dos eventos, ou seja, possvel criar 21 eventos com horrios diferentes a
serem seguidos pelo sistema de automao.
2) Escolha o evento e pressione o boto
, aparecer a tela abaixo:
00:00
FROM
Esta tela tem como utilidade definir o horrio de acionamento do sistema de automao, para alterar o
horrio, pressione o boto
3) Pressionando a tecla
e ajuste o horrio pelas teclas
, aparecer a seguinte tela:
00:00
TO
Esta tela tem a funo de definir o horrio de desligamento do sistema de automao, para alterar o
horrio, o procedimento o mesmo descrito na tela anterior.
..................................
3
33
1) Pressionando a tecla
, aparecer a seguinte tela:
SUN
WEEK
Esta tela serve para habilitar o dia da semana que ser valido para o horrio ajustado, para habilitar o
respectivo dia da semana pressione a tecla
, perceba que ao habilitar, o respectivo dia f icar com
um asterisco (*) na tela, conforme abaixo.
SUN*
WEEK
..................................
3
34
Parmetros de Configurao
Funo
Range
Default
Janela de Introduo
Status do boto liga/desliga
Sensor de temp. de entrada de
gua
Sensor de temp. de sada de gua
Nvel 1: Usurio
Liga/Desliga
Somente Leitura
SET
-40C a 35C
Setpoint efetivo
Somente Leitura
12
Nvel 2: Comissionamento
Hy
Parmetros de Controle de Temperatura a Gerenciamento dos Compressores

Histerese
0,5K a 10K
dt
Offset do setpoint
4K a 10K
LL
Limite inferior do setpoint de

resfriamento
-40C a 30C
HL
Limite superior do setpoint de

aquecimento
30C a 93C
CP1
Tempo mnimo ligado do

compressor
30 a 180 segundos
CP2
Tempo mnimo desligado do

compressor
60 a 300 segundos
PP1
Perodo do ciclo bomba desligada
1 a 24 horas
PP2
Durao do ciclo bomba desligada
0 a 999 segundos
PP3
Delay de desligamento da bomba
0 a 999 segundos
AF1
Parmetros Anti-congelamento e de Alarmes Gerais

Setpoint anti-congelamento
-20C to 20C
AF2
Diferencial anti-congelamento
0.5K to 10K
LP1
Delay de alarme de baixa presso
0 a 999 segundos
FS1
Delay de alarme de chave de fluxo
0 a 999 segundos
Pr1
Seletores de Funes Opcionais

Seletor do controle de temperatura LT = Sensor sada
de gua
RT = Sensor entrada
Pr3
Seletor do modo Local/Remoto
2
5
6
50
90
180
Atividade de Bomba
RE = Modo remoto
LC = Modo local
24
0
30
4
2
30
5
rt
Lc
..................................
3
35
SNS
Seletor do tipo de sensor
NICK = Nickel 1000

A99 = A99
a99
Parmetros de RedeNetwork parameters

Add
Typ
Endereo serial
Tipo de mquina
1 a 255
Tipo do Equipamento
1 = Somente Chiller, mono-circuito
2 = Somente Chiller, bi-circuito
255
1
..................................
3
36
16. Pontos de Rede
Protocolo
Velocida de (Baud Rate)
Endereo
N2 Open
9600
Ajustado via Display (De fault #255)
Descrio
Temperatura de Entrada de gua
Temperatura de Sada de gua
Set point Efetivo
Diferena de Temperatura
Diferena de Temperatura
Set point Anti-Congelamento
Diferencial do Anti-Congelamento
Tempo de Desligamento da Bomba
Tempo de Durao de Ciclo AntiAdeso
Tempo de Verif icao de Alarme de
Falta de Fluxo Dgua
Tempo de Verif icao de Alarme de
Falha de Pressostato
Set point de Refrigerao
Histerese
Tempo
Mnimo
de
Compressor
Desligado
Tempo Mnimo de Compressor Ligado
Perodo do Ciclo Desligado da Bomba
Tempo de Verif icao de Temperatura
Alta
Horas Trabalhadas do Compressor
(Circuito 01)
Horas Trabalhadas do Compressor
(Circuito 02)
Pressostato do Compressor (Circuito
01)
Unidade de Medida
Segundos
Tipo
ADF
ADF
ADF
ADF
ADF
ADF
ADF
ADF
ADF
Endereo
1
2
3
9
14
15
16
17
18
Segundos
ADF
19
Segundos
ADF
20
ADF
ADF
ADF
21
22
23
Minutos
ADF
ADI
ADI
24
1
2
Horas
ADI
Horas
ADI
BD
BD
BD
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
Segundos
C
Segundos
Segundos
Horas
0-C ontato Pressostato

Aberto (anormal)
Fechado (normal)
Pressostato do Compressor (Circuito

02)

Aberto (anormal)
Fechado (normal)
Chave de Fluxo
0-Sem Fluxo de gua

1-C om Fluxo de gua
..................................
3
37
Falha no sensor de temperatura de

entrada de gua gelada
0-Alarme Desativado
Falha no sensor de temperatura de

sada de gua gelada
0-Alarme Desativado
Status do Sistema
BD
BD
BD
BD
BD
BD
10
BD
11
BD
12
BD
13
BD
14
BD
16
BD
17
BD
18
1-Falha no Sensor
1-Falha no Sensor
0-Sistema Desabilitado
1-Sistema Habilitado
Comando da Bomba
0-C omando da Bomba

Desligado
1-C omando da Bomba
Funcionando
Alarme Anti-Congelamento
0-Alarme Desativado
1-Alarme de AntiCongelamento Ativado
Alarme do Pressostato de alta/baixa

do Compressor (Circuito 01)
0-Alarme Desativado
Alarme do Pressostato de alta/baixa

do Compressor (Circuito 02)
0-Alarme Desativado
Alarme de Falta de Fluxo de gua
0-Alarme Desativado
1- Alarme Ativo
1- Alarme Ativo
1- Alarme Ativo
Comando do Compressor (Circuito 01)
0-C omando do
Compressor Inativo
1-C omando do
Compressor Ativo
Comando do Compressor (Circuito 02)
0-C omando do
Compressor Inativo
1-C omando do
Compressor Ativo
Alarme de Temperatura Alta
0-Alarme Desativado
1-Temperatura Alta
Ativado
Comando Remoto
0-C omando Remoto

Inativo
1-C omando Remoto Ativo
Sistema Local/Remoto
0-Sistema Habilitado para

Local
1-Sistema Habilitado para
Remoto
..................................
3
38
Reset de Todos os Alarmes
0-Alarmes No Resetados
BD
22
BD
23
BD
24
BD
25
1-Todos os Alarmes
Resetados
Tipo do equipamento
0-Modo Mono-Compressor
1-Modo Bi-Compressor
Habilitar Sistema de Equalizao
0-Sistema de Equalizao
Inabilitado
1-Sistema de Equalizao
Habilitado
Configurao
dos
Entradas Analgicas
Sensores
das
6-C onfigurado para Sensor

A99
8-C onfigurado para Sensor
Nickel 1000
Legenda
Ponto de Leitura / Escrita
Ponto de Leitura
..................................
3
39
DADOS FSICOS DO RESFRIADOR DE LQUIDOS

MODELOS
YRHC090B25PCK
YRHC090B40PCK
YRHC122B25PCK
YRHC122B40PCK
Nmero de estgios de capacidade
Nmero de circuitos frigorficos
Refrigerante
Compressor
Evaporador (expanso direta)
Tipo
R22
Quantidade
Tipo
Scroll hermtico
Tipo
Placas soldadas
Tipo
Tubo de cobre e aletas de alumnio
Nmero de filas
Aletas por polegada (FPI)
12
Condensador
rea de face
m2
1,47
1,47
Dimetro dos tubos
(Condensador)
Nmero de circuitos
Nmero de ventiladores
Tipo
Axial/4 ps
Axila/3 ps
Tipo
Bomba
(opcional)
Tanque de
expanso (opcional)
Dimenses
1,9
Centrfuga
Vazo de gua nominal
m3/h
4,1
4,1
A.M.T. disponvel na vazo nominal
mca
25
Volume
litros
18
Presso admissvel em operao
bar/kPa
Pr-carga
bar/kPa
5,5
5,5
7/700
1,5/150
Largura
mm
1915
1915
2215
2215
Profundidade
mm
690
690
790
790
Altura
mm
220/3/60
380/3/60
Entrada do fluido
Vision
Harmonic
1-1/2 BSP
Sada do fluido
1-1/2 BSP
V//Hz
220/3/60
380/3/60
Ponto de fora
31
20
44
28
Corrente total
26,6
17,1
40,6
25,7
Potncia total
kW
8,34
8,34
12,73
12,73
FORM: M-COM015-BR(0107)
SUBSTITUI: M-COM015-BR(1103)
Premier
950
Conexes
Alimentao eltrica
Atlas
Unidade industrial So Paulo - Rua Joo Tibiri, 900 - So Paulo - SP - CEP: 05077-000 - Fone: (11) 3475 6700 - Fax: (11) 3834 3192
Unidade industrial Pinhais - Rua Tomazina, 125 - Condomnio Portal da Serra - Pinhais - PR - CEP: 83325-040 - Fone: (41) 3661 3407 - Fax: (41) 3661 3410
contate - york.brasil@br.york.com visite - www.yorkbrasil.com.br fale conosco - 0800 164 022
SISTEMA ACQUALINE
Ventilador
1,9
3/8
A SOLUO NA MEDIDA CERTA
Sistema de gua gelada

Capacidade do sistema: de 7,5 e 10TR
Compressor Scroll
Controle microprocessado
Opo de bomba e tanque incorporado
Vrias opes de fan coils hidrnicos
Resfriador de lquido de
fabricao nacional
Autentic
Vrias opes para utilizao com o Acqualine
As unidades internas podem ser com insuflamento atravs de dutos, ou diretamente no ambiente, com vrias opes de
designs, sem comprometer o ambiente. Com o sistema Acqualine possvel atender simultaneamente vrios ambientes,
com controles remoto* totalmente individuais.
Atlas
Premier
Vision
Harmonic
Autentic
SISTEMA ACQUALINE
*As unidades com insuflamento direto no ambiente acompanham controle remoto sem fio.
Caractersticas
Kit hidrnico
O Acqualine um sistema de gua gelada composto de um resfri-
Opcionalmente os resfriadores de lquido so equipados com bomba
ador de lquido e vrias unidades de fan coils hidrnicos para clima-
e tanque de expanso, facilitando a instalao e economizando
tizar diversos ambientes, de pequeno e mdio porte. O sistema est
espao. Todas as mquinas (com ou sem o kit hidrnico) possuem
disponveis nas capacidades de 7,5 e 10TR.
filtro Y e chave de fluxo.
Alta Tecnologia
Fcil instalao e manuteno
O sistema Acqualine utiliza tecnologia de ponta em seus compo-
A unidade externa possui trs painis removveis com puxadores
nentes. A unidade externa possui um evaporador do tipo placas
para facilitar o acesso aos componentes. O acesso a purga de ar
que oferece uma excelente performance ocupando um pequeno
e a pressurizao do tanque feita do lado de fora da mquina, no
espao na mquina. Alm disso, o resfriador de lquido conta com
precisando retirar os painis para acess-los.
a tecnologia do compressor Scroll, que contribui para uma tima
Controle microprocessado
eficincia do sistema.
Gabinete compacto
Equipado com controlador de alta performance
A unidade externa foi projetada com insuflamento horizontal que
produto, proporcionando o gerenciamento do(s) compressor(es),
permite a instalao em apartamentos. Sua largura pequena o
da atividade da bomba, dos controles de alarme e das protees.
suficiente para passar em portas (menor que 80 cm), o que torna

fcil sua instalao em residncias.
Confiabilidade
Todos os equipamentos so testados em fbrica. As unidades possuem quadro eltrico completo, circuito frigorfico com filtro secador,
visor de lquido, vlvula de servio do tipo tanque, pressostato e
A SOLUO NA MEDIDA CERTA
circuito hidrulico com filtro Y e chave de fluxo.
com software dedicado especialmente para o
ESPECIFICAO RESFRIADOR SCROLL (YRHC)

DESCRIO DO SISTEMA
Resfriador de lquido de condensao a ar, constitudo por compressores do tipo
scroll, refrigerante R-22 ou R-407C, circuito(s) independente(s) de refrigerante,
filtro secador, visor de liquido, vlvula de servio do tipo tanque, pressostato,
circuito hidrulico com filtro Y, chave de fluxo e controle microprocessado.
PRODUTOS / EQUIPAMENTO
COMPRESSORES
Compressores do tipo scroll hermtico
COMPONENTES DO CIRCUITO DE REFRIGERANTE

As unidades possuem quadro eltrico completo, circuito frigorfico com filtro
secador, visor de liquido, vlvula de servio do tipo tanque, pressostato e circuito
hidrulico com filtro Y, chave de fluxo e completa carga operacional de
refrigerante R-22 e leo do compressor.
TROCADORES DE CALOR
Evaporador/Condensador/Ventilador
Evaporador do tipo placas, ocupando um pequeno espao na maquina.
Condensador com tubos de cobre e aletas de alumnio.
Ventilador de baixo rudo do tipo axial, dinamicamente e estaticamente

balanceados, com acionamento direto.
EXIGNCIAS DE FORA E ELTRICAS

Quadro eltrico/Controle:
Quadro eltrico fornecido completo de fabrica.
Controle microprocessado equipado com controlador de alta performance com

software
dedicado
especialmente
para
produto,
proporcionando
gerenciamento do(s) compressor(es), atividade da bomba, dos controles de

alarme e das protees.
Acessrios
Kit Hidrnico
Opcionalmente os resfriadores de lquidos so equipados com bomba e tanque
de expanso, facilitando a instalao e economizando espao. Todos os
resfriadores (com ou sem kit hidrnico) possuem filtro Y e chave de fluxo.
Johnson Controls
BUILDING EFFICIENCY
Por Um Mundo Mais Confortvel, Seguro e Sustentvel
Split System Gemini - YEDX
Portflio HVAC
Split System para Dutos

Split System Gemini
Split System Gemini

Evaporador S Frio
Capacidades Disponveis:
YEDX060 60.000 Btu/h (5 TR)
YEDX090 90.000 Btu/h (7.5 TR)
YEDX122 120.000 Btu/h (10 TR)
YEDX182 180.000 Btu/h (15 TR)
YEDX242 240.000 Btu/h (20 TR)
YEDX302 300.000 Btu/h (25 TR)
YEDX362 360.000 Btu/h (30 TR)
YEDX482 480.000 Btu/h (40 TR)
Split System Gemini

Evaporador Quente Frio
YEDX060 60.000 Btu/h (5 TR)
YEDX090 90.000 Btu/h (7.5 TR)
YEDX122 120.000 Btu/h (10 TR)
YEDX182 180.000 Btu/h (15 TR)
YEDX242 240.000 Btu/h (20 TR)
YEDX303 300.000 Btu/h (25 TR)
YEDX363 360.000 Btu/h (30 TR)
YEDX484 480.000 Btu/h (40 TR)

Conceito modular composto por dois mdulos:
- Mdulo ventilador
- Mdulo trocador
- Sete posies de montagem disponveis
Obs.: Opo V5 Disponvel at 20 TR

Nomenclatura Mdulo Ventilador:
60.000 a 480.000 Btu/h

Nomenclatura Mdulo Trocador de Calor:
60.000 a 480.000 Btu/h

Caractersticas Tcnicas:
- Ciclos S Frio ou Quente-Frio;
- Fluido refrigerante R22 ou R407c;
- Gabinete construdo em perfil de alumnio extrudado e cantos em nylon, garantindo
excelente rigidez e leveza;
- Painis de PVC parede dupla emoldurados com juntas co-extrudadas em PVC,
proporcionando uma construo prova de vazamentos de ar e uma ampla gama de
presses;
- Isolamento trmico constituido de espuma de poliuretano expandido com expessura
17 mm aumentando tambm a rigidez mecnica, o revestimento dos painis
constituido de chapa de ao galvanizado de 0,5 mm e pr-pintado na parte externa;
- Base rgida construda em trilhos de chapas de ao;
- A bandeja de dreno de condensado inclinada com sada lateral e fabricada em
material termoplstica ABS revestida com composto impermeabilizante e anticorrosivo atendendo ASHRAE 62-2001.
9
10

- Ventilador:
Com ps voltadas para a frente do tipo Sirocco com presso esttica de 15 mmca (opo
de alta presso sob consulta).
11

- Motor:
Motor eltrico trifsico de quatro plos, grau de proteo IP55 e isolamento classe B.
12

- Acionamento:
Acionamento por correias em V e polias com ajuste de tenso.
13

- Filtro plano descartvel classificao ABNT-G3 de 1 com elemento filtrante de
manta sinttica, dupla filtragem ou 2 sob consulta.
14

- Serpentina
Constitudas de 4 filas de tubos de cobre para capacidade de 30 TR e 3 filas
para as demais capacidades, expandidas contra aletas de alumnio com espaamento
de 14 aletas por polegada e dimetro de 3/8 para equipamentos de at 20 TR e 12
aletas por polegada e dimetro de para equipamentos de 25 a 40 TR.
15

Proteo:
- Pressostatos de alta e de baixa presso;
- Fusvel de comando;
- CLO;
Dispositivo de proteo contra ciclagem automtica do compressor, quando interrompido
por outros dispositivos de proteo.
- Comando 24 v.
Termostatos
- Eletrnico;
- Termostato microprocessado 7 dias (opcional);

- Termostato microprocessado 365 dias (opcional).
16
Split System Gemini

Condensadoras
17
Split System Gemini

Condensadoras
Compressor Scroll
- Alta eficincia;
- Refrigerante fluindo atravs do compressor;
- Grande volume livre na suco;
- Grande reservatrio de leo;
- Suco na parte inferior refrigerando 100% do
motor do compressor;
- Isolamento de vibrao e baixo nvel de rudo.
18
Split System Gemini

Condensadoras S Frio
19
Split System Gemini - YXDA

Nomenclatura
60.000 Btu/h
20
Split System Gemini - YXDA

- Unidade externa;
- Capacidade 5 TR;
- Fluido refrigerante R22;
- Serpentina com tratamento Gold-Tech anti-corroso e ao galvnica;
- Ventilador axial com acionamento direto e hlices de alumnio;
- Descarga horizontal;
- Compressor scroll;
- Tenses disponveis: 220-380/3/60Hz;
- Tenso eltrica de comando 24 V.
21
Split System Gemini - HBC

Nomenclatura
90.000 Btu/h
120.000 Btu/h
22
Split System Gemini - HBC

- Unidade externa;
- Capacidades 7.5 e 10 TR;
- Fluido refrigerante R22 ou R407c ;
- Tenses disponveis: 220-380-440/3/60Hz ou 380/3/50Hz;
23
Split System Gemini - HCE

Nomenclatura
180.000, 240.000 e 300.000 Btu/h
24
Split System Gemini - HCE

- Unidade externa;
- Capacidades 15, 20 e 25 TR;
- Descarga vertical;
- Tenses disponveis: 220-380-440/3/60Hz;
25
Split System Gemini - HTC

Nomenclatura
180.000 Btu/h
240.000 Btu/h
26
Split System Gemini - HTC

- Unidade externa;
- Capacidades 15 e 20 TR;
- Ventilador centrifugo de acionamento por polias e correias com hlices metlicas em
ao galvanizado;
27
Split System Gemini

Condensadoras Quente Frio
28
Split System Gemini - YXJA

Nomenclatura
60.000 Btu/h
29
Split System Gemini - YXJA

- Unidade externa;
- Capacidade 5 TR;
- Tenses disponveis: 220-380/3/60Hz;
30
Split System Gemini - HUH

Nomenclatura
90.000 Btu/h
120.000 Btu/h
31
Split System Gemini - HUH

- Unidade externa;
- Capacidade 7,5 e 10 TR;
32
Split System Gemini

Opcionais Condensadoras (HBC, HCE e HUH)
- Visor de lquido com indicao de umidade;
- Rel de sequncia e falta de fase;
- Capacitor para correo do fator de potncia ;
- Vlvula de servio de bloqueio nas linhas de suco, lquido e descarga;
- Todos instalados em campo.
Opcionais Evaporadora
- Termostato microprocessado TEC para interligao em rede possibilitando monitorao e controle
via web.
33
Split System Gemini

Combinaes
34
Split System Gemini

Combinaes
S Frio
EVAPORADORA
CONDENSADORA
YEDX060
YXDA60
YEDX090
HBC090
YEDX122
HBC122
2x HBC090
YEDX182
HCE182
HTC182
YEDX242
HCE242
YEDX302
HCE302
YEDX362
2x HCE180
YEDX482
35
2x HBC120
2x HCE240
2x HTC240
Split System Gemini

Combinaes
Quente-Frio
36
EVAPORADORA
CONDENSADORA
YEDX060
YXJA60
YEDX090
HUH090
YEDX122
HUH122
YEDX182
2x HUH090
YEDX242
2x HUH120
YEDX303
2x HUH090 + HUH120
YEDX363
3x HUH120
YEDX484
4x HUH120
Split System Gemini
Especificao
Os condicionadores de ar tipo Split Sytem Gemini para dutos, YEDX, so
projetados para instalaes com insuflamento de ar atravs de sistema de dutos em
aplicaes domstica, comercial e industrial disponveis para ciclos s-frio ou quentefrio. As unidades possuem um, dois ou quatro compressores hermticos com circuitos de
refrigerao independentes. Cada circuito de refrigerao composto por um
condensador a ar (axial horizontal, axial vertical ou centrfugo), um filtro secador de linha
de lquido para interligao frigorfica (um por circuito), uma vlvula de expanso
termosttica, um distribuidor de lquido, um evaporador, pressostatos de alta e de baixa,
tomadas de presso e um compressor. As unidades evaporadora + condensadora so
fornecidas pressurizadas com gs refrigerante e Nitrognio respectivamente.
Gabinetes
Gabinete construdo em perfis de alumnio extrudado compostos por painis de
parede dupla constitudo de chapa de ao galvanizado (0,5 mm) e pr-pintado na parte
exterior, isolados com poliuretano expandido com espessura de 17 mm emoldurados por
juntas co-extrudadas em PVC a fim de impedir a condensao e ganhos de calor. Os
painis do gabinete so removveis com fechos de fcil remoo no necessitando chaves
especiais e permitindo amplo acesso para manuteno.
A bandeja de dreno fabricada em material termoplstico ABS, anti-corroso,
isolada em poliuretano injetado e inclinada com sada lateral no permitindo o acmulo
de gua de condensado, evitando a profilerao de microorganismos atendendo a
ASHRAE 62-2001.
Conceito Modular
A unidade evaporadora YEDX formada por dois mdulos, um mdulo trocador
de calor e um mdulo ventilador, possibilitando a montagem na posio vertical ou
horizontal com vrias opes de descarga do ventilador.
Mdulo Ventilador
O ventilador centrfugo de dupla aspirao com ps voltadas para frente do tipo
Sirocco, os ventiladores tm performance certificada pelo AMCA, e so selecionados
para trabalhar em regies de alta eficincia. Balanceados esttica e dinamicamente, os
rotores apiam-se sobre rolamentos de lubrificao permanente, e so firmemente
posicionados e alinhados por buchas cnicas, evitando empenamento e desgaste do eixo.
A transmisso feita por polia motora regulvel, correia em V e polia volante.
Mdulo Trocador
As serpentinas so constitudas de 4 filas de tubos de cobre para capacidade de 30
TR e 3 filas para as demais capacidades, expandidas contra aletas de alumnio com
espaamento de 14 aletas por polegada e dimetro de 3/8 para equipamentos de at 20
TR e 12 aletas por polegada e dimetro de para equipamentos de 25 a 40 TR.
A cabeceira fabricada em ao galvanizado minimizado de 0.95 mm de
espessura, com perfil que facilita a manuteno e limpeza.
Compressores
Os compressores so do tipo Scroll de alta eficincia e so protegidos
internamente por sensores de temperatura aliados a pressostatos de alta e baixa presso
com rearme automtico, controle anti-reciclagem e temporizao de partida,
proporcionando a proteo necessria ao bom funcionamento do equipamento.
Unidade Condensadora S-Frio

Para condensadoras axiais e horizontais, a serpentina constituda de 2 filas com
tubos de cobre de 3/8 expandidos contra aletas de alumnio com 16 aletas por polegada,
para condensadoras centrifugas, a serpentina constituda de 4 filas com tubos de cobre
de 3/8 expandidos contra aletas de alumnio com 13 aletas por polegada, com
subresfriador de liquido.
Unidade Condensadora Quente-Frio

Para condensadora de 5 TR, a serpentina constituda de 2 filas com tubos de
cobre expandidos contra aletas de alumnio com espaamento de 16 aletas por polegadas,
para condensadoras de 7,5 e 10 TR, a serpentina constituda de 2 filas com tubos de
cobre de 3/8 expandidos contra aletas de alumnio com espaamento de 12 aletas por
polegada e subresfriador de lquido.
Filtro de Ar
do tipo grosso classificao ABNT: G3 com elemento filtrante de manta sinttica
de 1 de espessura. Os filtros so instalados atrs das grelhas frontais, antes da serpentina
evaporadora.
Quadro Eltrico
O quadro eltrico montado internamente na seo inferior do gabinete no painel
ao lado do motor e constitudo de um contator, um rel de sobre carga para o motor do
evaporador, fusveis de comando, rgua de bornes e transformador de tenso para

combinaes com condensadora HBC.
Circuito de Refrigerao
Os Componentes do circuito frigorgeno so interligados por tubos de cobre sem
costura, isolados e suportados em pequenos intervalos. O circuito dispem de vlvulas de
expanso termosttica, distribuidor de lquido, pressostato de alta, pressostato de baixa e
tomadas de presso.
Controle
O equipamento equipado com um controle eletrnico de simples ou duplo
estgios de refrigerao e aquecimento conforme o nmero de compressores para
unidades de 5 TR 440v. Para unidades de 5 TR 220 ou 380v e para as demais
capacidades, poder ser usado, alm do termostato eletrnico, um termostato
microprocessado, que dispe de capacidade de programao (7 ou 365 dias) para dois
estgios de refrigerao e trs de aquecimento ou vice e versa ou termostato
microprocessado TEC para interligao em rede.
Localizao e reas Livres

A instalao dever ser feita numa superfcie nivelada e lisa que deve ser capaz de
suportar o peso da unidade. As unidades so construdas para operao ao abrigo do
tempo e no aplicveis em atmosferas midas, corrosivas ou explosivas. Em instalaes
onde a(s) condesadora(s) possa(m) ser exposta(s) a baixas temperaturas externas, a
proteo anticongelamento ser de responsabilidade do cliente. Na instalao, devem
estar previstos drenos de gua, ventilao e reas para servio a fim de possibilitar a
remoo do(s) compressor(es) e do condensador.
Consideraes Acsticas
Para assegurar uma instalao bem sucedida destas unidades, os compressores so
fixados sobre isoladores de vibrao. Com dutos de ar de insuflamento e de retorno, um
colarinho flexvel dever ser instalado em campo, a fim de se evitar a transmisso de
rudo e vibrao.
Conexes de Dreno
Cada sada de condensado deve ter sua linha de dreno individual com um sifo de
desnvel mnimo de 2. Linhas de dreno devero ser interligadas s tubulaes de
drenagem da construo. A linha de dreno deve ser isolada termicamente onde houver
Interligaes Eltricas
As unidades evaporadoras e as unidades condensadoras so fornecidas com as
tenses conforme anexo 1. O sistema de controle dever incluir proteo contra
sobrecarga no motor do evaporador por rel, sensores de temperatura internos no motor
do condensador e para o compressor, sensores internos tipo line break para corrente e
temperatura, bem como pressostatos de alta e baixa. A interligao eltrica est de acordo
com a ABNT NBR 5410.
Srie Plus
Os equipamentos da srie plus dispem de visor de lquido com indicao de umidade,
aletas com tratamento Gold-Tech, vlvula de servio de bloqueio nas linhas de suco,
lquido e descarga na condensadora, rel de falta e inverso de fases e capacitor para
correo do fator de potncia (0,92).
Anexo 1: Tabela de dados tcnicos
Evaporadoras
Modelos
Capacidade Nominal
Vazo Nominal
Gs Refrigerante
Ventilador
Presso Esttica
Externa na Vazo Nominal
Filtros de ar
Motor
Alimentao eltrica
Nmero de filas
Aletas por polegadas
rea de face
Serpentina
Dimetro dos tubos
Tipo
Nmero de circuitos
Altura
Montagem
Largura
Vertical
Profundidade
Dimenses
Altura
Montagem
Largura
Horizontal
Profundidade
Linha de Lquido (Solda)
Conexes
Linha de Suco (Solda)
Peso
Btu/h
TR
m/h
YEDX060
60000
5
3400
YEDX090
90000
7.5
5100
YEDX122
120000
10
6800
YEDX182
180000
15
10200
mmca
CV
YEDX242
240000
20
13600
YEDX302
300000
25
17000
R22 / R407c
Sirocco
YEDX303
300000
25
17000
YEDX362
360000
30
20400
YEDX363
360000
30
20400
YEDX482
480000
40
27200
YEDX484
480000
40
27200
7.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
3
12
2.27
1/2
4
12
2.27
1/2
3
12
3.07
1/2
4
12
3.07
1/2
2
2271
2214
904
1367
2214
1808
(2x) 5/8
(2x) 1 1/8
420
3
2271
2214
904
1367
2214
1808
(3x) 5/8
(3x) 1 1/8
420
2
2920
2800
1100
1520
2800
2200
(2x) 7/8
(2x) 1 5/8
460
4
2920
2800
1100
1520
2800
2200
(4x) 5/8
(4x) 1 1/8
610
15
1
1.5
V//Hz
G3 descartvel 1" de espessura

4
5
5
220/3/60 - 380/3/60 - 440/3/60
m
in
3
14
0.38
3/8
3
14
0.58
3/8
3
14
0.74
3/8
3
14
1.18
3/8
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
in
in
kg
1
1368
1024
624
744
1024
1248
1/2
7/8
140
1
1588
1444
724
904
1444
1448
5/8
1 1/8
180
2
1688
1444
724
904
1444
1448
(2x) 1/2
(2x) 7/8
215
2
1713
1784
724
989
1784
1448
(2x) 5/8
(2x) 1 1/8
225
3
3
3
14
12
12
1.51
1.89
1.89
3/8
1/2
1/2
Tubos de cobre e aletas de alumnio
2
2
3
1993
2083
2083
2100
2430
2430
814
904
904
1179
1179
1179
2100
2430
2430
1628
1808
1808
(2x) 5/8
(2x) 5/8
(3x) 5/8
(2x) 1 1/8
(2x) 1 1/8
(3x) 1 1/8
270
370
370
Condensadoras S Frio
Modelos
Capacidade Nominal
Gs Refrigerante
Ventilador
Vazo Nominal
Presso Esttica
Tipo
Compressor
Qrd total
Motor
Alimentao eltrica
Serpentina
Dimenses
Conexes
YXDA060
60000
5
m/h
1970
mmca
CV
V//Hz
Nmero de filas
rea de face
Dimetro dos tubos
Tipo
Nmero de circuitos
Altura
Largura
Profundidade
Linha de Lquido
Linha de Suco
Tipo
Peso
Btu/h
TR
m
in
mm
mm
mm
in
in
kg
HBC090
90000
7.5
HBC120
120000
10
Axial horizontal
7650
10200
-
1
3/4
220/3/60
380/3/60
2
16
0.61
3/8
HBC122
120000
10
HCE180
180000
15
HCE182
180000
15
R22 / R407c
10200
18360
1
3/4
2
(2x) 1/2
2
(2x) 1/2
HCE240
240000
20
HCE242
240000
20
HCE302
300000
25
18360
Axial vertical
19210
19210
30000
10
2
(2x) 3/4
Scroll
2
(2x) 3/4
4
(2x) 3/4
4
(2x) 3/4
4
(2x) 2
2
4
4
4
220/3/60 - 380/3/60 - 440/3/60
1
960
1105
340
3/8
3/4
Rosca
74
2
16
1.18
3/8
2
16
1.7
3/8
2
16
1.7
3/8
1
1070
963
543
1/2
7/8
1
1560
1038
543
1/2
7/8
2
1560
1038
543
(2x) 1/2
(2x) 7/8
110
194
194
HTC240
240000
20
Centrfugo
15300
20400
220/3/60 - 380/3/60 - 440/3/60

2
2
2
16
16
16
2.52
2.52
3.4
3/8
3/8
3/8
1
2
1
1142
1142
1142
1953
1953
1953
1013
1013
1013
3/4
(2x) 1/2
7/8
1 3/8
(2x) 7/8
1 5/8
Solda
295.5
296
388.5
HTC182
180000
15
220/3/60 - 380/3/60
2
16
3.4
3/8
2
16
5.1
3/8
4
13
1.92
3/8
4
13
1.92
3/8
2
1142
1953
1013
(2x) 3/4
(2x) 1 3/8
2
1685
1953
1013
(2x) 3/4
(2x) 1 3/8
2
1830
1716
640
(2x) 1/2
(2x) 7/8
1
2040
2010
760
3/4
1 5/8
388.5
448
350
510
Condensadoras Quente/Frio
Modelos
Capacidade Nominal
Gs Refrigerante
Ventilador
Vazo Nominal
Presso Esttica
Tipo
Compressor
Qrd total
Motor
Btu/h
TR
YXJA060
60000
5
m/h
1970
mmca
HUH090 HUH120
90000
120000
7.5
10
R22 / R407c
Axial horizontal
7850
10200
-
HUH122
120000
10
10200
-
Scroll
1
1
2
2
CV
3/4
3/4
2x 1/2
2x 1/2
220/3/60
V//Hz
Alimentao eltrica
220/3/60 - 380/3/60
380/3/60
2
Nmero de filas
2
2
2
16
12
12
12
0.61
1.47
1.9
1.9
rea de face
m
Serpentina
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
Dimetro dos tubos
in
Tipo
1
Nmero de circuitos
1
1
2
Altura
mm
960
950
950
950
Dimenses
1714
1944
1944
Largura
mm
1105
572
755
755
Profundidade
mm
340
Linha de Lquido (Rosca) in
3/8
1/2
1/2
(2x) 1/2
Conexes
Linha de Suco (Rosca) in
3/4
7/8
7/8
(2x) 3/4
Peso
169
258
258
kg
96
Combinaes S Frio
Evaporadora
YEDX060
YEDX090
YEDX122
YEDX182
YEDX242
Condensadora
YXDA060
HBC090
HBC122
(2x) HBC090
HCE182
HTC182
(2x) HBC120
HCE242
Capacidade *
15
20
TR
5
7.5
10
Consumo a 100% *
kW
6.9
8.84
14.6
17.5
17.5
18.6
27.99
27.6
1.38
1.18
1.46
1.17
1.17
1.24
1.40
1.38
kw/TR *
TR
5
7.5
5
Capadicade / circuito
7.5
10
Bitola
1/2
5/8
(2x) 1/2
in
(2x) 5/8
(2x) 5/8
Linha de lquido
Comp. Equivalente
15
21
15
m
21
15
Tubulao**
Bitola
7/8
1 1/8
(2x) 7/8
in
(2x) 1 1/8
(2x) 1 1/8
Linha de suco
Comp. Equivalente
9
18
9
m
18
12
Desnvel mximo entre as unidades
m
10
10
10
10
10
(*) Valores Nominais
(**) Comprimento equivalente calculado para bitola da tubulao da evaporadora. Para comprimentos equivalentes superiores, favor consultar a Eng. de Aplicao - So Paulo
YEDX302
HCE302
25
32.3
1.29
12.5
(2x) 3/4
18
(2x) 1 3/8
15
10
YEDX362
YEDX482
(2x) HCE180 (2x) HCE240 (2x) HTC240
40
30
35.9
54.27
57.1
1.20
1.36
1.43
15
20
(2x) 3/4
(2x) 7/8
18
24
(2x) 1 3/8
(2x) 1 5/8
15
21
10
10
Combinaes Quente/Frio
Evaporadora
YEDX060
YEDX090
YEDX122
YEDX182
YEDX242
YEDX303
YEDX363
YEDX484
Condensadora
YXJA060
HUH090
HUH122
(2x) HUH090 (2x) HUH120 HUH120+(2x) HUH090 (3x) HUH120 (4x) HUH120
Capacidade *
TR
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
Consumo a 100% *
kw
6.9
8.8
14.2
17.5
28.4
31.5
43.5
55.9
1.38
1.17
1.42
1.17
1.42
1.26
1.45
1.40
kw/TR *
TR
5
7.5
5
7.5
10
12.5
15
20
Capadicade / circuito
Bitola
1/2
5/8
(2x) 1/2
in
(2x) 5/8
(2x) 5/8
(2x) 3/4
(2x) 3/4
(2x) 7/8
Linha de lquido
Comp. Equivalente
15
21
15
m
21
15
18
18
24
Tubulao**
Bitola
7/8
1 1/8
(2x) 7/8
(2x) 1 1/8
(2x) 1 1/8
(2x) 1 3/8
(2x) 1 3/8
(2x) 1 5/8
in
Linha de suco
Comp. Equivalente
9
18
9
18
12
15
15
21
m
m
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
(**) Comprimento equivalente calculado para bitola da tubulao da evaporadora. Para comprimentos equivalentes superiores, favor consultar a Eng. de Aplicao - So Paulo
Climatizador de Ar do tipo Split
Unidade Condensadora
Modelo HTC
Unidade Evaporadora
Modelo YEDX
Unidade Condensadora
Modelo HUC / HUH
Manual de Instalao, Operao e Manuteno

Sistema Split de Refrigerao e Aquecimento
Modelos 60.000 a 480.000 Btu/h
..............................................
.....................................
Indice
1. Nomenclatura .........................................................................................................................
2. Combinaes de fornecimentos possveis ......................................................................
3. Caractersticas tcnicas .......................................................................................................
4. Dados dimensionais .............................................................................................................
5. Descrio Geral .....................................................................................................................
10
5. Descrio Geral das Unidades Srie Plus ........................................................................
11
6. Recebimento e Inspeo ......................................................................................................
11
7. Segurana ..............................................................................................................................
12
8. Iamento e manuseio ...........................................................................................................
12
9. Local de instalao ...............................................................................................................
13
10. reas livres .........................................................................................................................
14
11. Posicionamento e montagem dos mdulos do evaporador ..........................................
14
12. Conexes de refrigerante ..................................................................................................
14
13. Tubulao .............................................................................................................................
15
14. Carga de gs e balanceamento do sistema ....................................................................
15
15. Dreno ....................................................................................................................................
16
16. Alimentao eltrica ...........................................................................................................
16
17. Diagramas de interligao eltrica ...................................................................................
20
18. Preparao para partida inicial .........................................................................................
21
18. Partida inicial .......................................................................................................................
21
19. Acionamento do ventilador do evaporador ......................................................................
21
20. Manuteno ..........................................................................................................................
22
.....................................
1. Nomenclatura
Mdulo de ventilao da unidade evaporadora
YEDX
09
60
V1
S
S - Srie
S - Srie Plus
SE - Srie Plus com termostato eletrnico
em branco - Srie Padro
Capacidade nominal
06 - 60.000 Btu/h
09 - 90.000 Btu/h
12 - 120.000 Btu/h
18 - 180.000 Btu/h
24 - 240.000 Btu/h
30 - 300.000 Btu/h
36 - 360.000 Btu/h
48 - 480.000 Btu/h
Nmero de circuitos
0 - 1 circuito
2 - 2 circuitos
3 - 3 circuitos
4 - 4 circuitos
Posio de montagem
Ver figura abaixo
Alimentao eltrica
60 - 220-380V/3/60 Hz
50 - 380V/3/50 Hz (exportao)
25 - 220V/3/60 Hz (Srie Plus)
40 - 380V/3/60 Hz (Srie Plus)
Gerao
A - 1a gerao
(*) A posio de montagem V5 no disponvel para os equipamentos de capacidade acima de 240.000 Btu/h
Mdulo trocador de calor da unidade evaporadora
YEDX
09
MT
S
S - Srie
S - Srie Plus
Capacidade nominal
06 - 60.000 Btu/h
09 - 90.000 Btu/h
12 - 120.000 Btu/h
18 - 180.000 Btu/h
24 - 240.000 Btu/h
30 - 300.000 Btu/h
36 - 360.000 Btu/h
48 - 480.000 Btu/h
Posio de montagem
V - Vertical
H - Horizontal
Nmero de circuitos
0 - 1 circuito
2 - 2 circuitos
3 - 3 circuitos
4 - 4 circuitos
Gerao
A - 1a gerao
Unidades Condensadoras
H
Tipo de ventilador
U - Ventilador axial
T - Ventilador centrfugo
Tipo de operao
C - s frio
H - quente / frio
Capacidade nominal
09 - 90.000 Btu/h
12 - 120.000 Btu/h
18 - 180.000 Btu/h
24 - 240.000 Btu/h
09
25
S
S - Srie
S - Srie Plus
Alimentao eltrica
50 - 380V/3/50 Hz (exportao)
25 - 220V/3/60 Hz (Srie Plus)
40 - 380V/3/60 Hz (Srie Plus)
Gerao
A - 1a gerao
Nmero de circuitos
0 - 1 circuito
2 - 2 circuitos
.....................................
2. Combinaes de Fornecimentos Possveis

Srie padro - S frio - Ventilador do condensador axial
Alimentao
eltrica
220V/3/60Hz
Capacidade
nominal
Mdulo de
ventilao
Mdulo Trocador
de calor
60.000 Btu/h
YEDX060A60**
90.000 Btu/h
YEDX090A60**
120.000 Btu/h
Unidade
Condensadora
Termostato
Kit eltrico
YEDX060AMT*
CHC55A27
025B48001 000
025B00027 000
YEDX090AMT*
HUC090A25
025B48001 000
025B00028 000
YEDX122A60**
YEDX122AMT*
HUC122A25
025B48002 000
025B00029 000
180.000 Btu/h
YEDX182A60**
YEDX182AMT*
(2x) HUC090A25
025B48002 000
025B00030 000
240.000 Btu/h
YEDX242A60**
YEDX242AMT*
(2x) HUC120A25
025B48002 000
025B00033 000
300.000 Btu/h
YEDX303A60**
YEDX303AMT*
(2x) HUC090A25
025B48002 000
025B00031 000
(1x) HUC120A25
380V/3/60Hz
360.000 Btu/h
YEDX363A60**
YEDX363AMT*
(3x) HUC120A25
025B48002 000
025B00032 000
480.000 Btu/h
YEDX484A60**
YEDX484AMT*
(4x) HUC120A25
025B48002 000
025B00032 000
60.000 Btu/h
YEDX060A60**
YEDX060AMT*
CHC55A37
025B48001 000
025B00026 000
90.000 Btu/h
YEDX090A60**
YEDX090AMT*
HUC090A40
025B48001 000
025B00027 000
120.000 Btu/h
YEDX122A60**
YEDX122AMT*
HUC122A40
025B48002 000
025B00028 000
180.000 Btu/h
YEDX182A60**
YEDX182AMT*
(2x) HUC090A40
025B48002 000
025B00028 000
240.000 Btu/h
YEDX242A60**
YEDX242AMT*
(2x) HUC120A40
025B48002 000
025B00029 000
300.000 Btu/h
YEDX303A60**
YEDX303AMT*
(2x) HUC090A40
025B48002 000
025B00030 000
(1x) HUC120A40
360.000 Btu/h
YEDX363A60**
YEDX363AMT*
(3x) HUC120A40
025B48002 000
025B00033 000
480.000 Btu/h
YEDX484A60**
YEDX484AMT*
(4x) HUC120A40
025B48002 000
025B00033 000
Srie padro - Quente/Frio - Ventilador do condensador axial

Alimentao
eltrica
220V/3/60Hz
380V/3/60Hz
Capacidade
nominal
Mdulo de
ventilao
Mdulo Trocador
de calor
60.000 Btu/h
YEDX060A60**
90.000 Btu/h
YEDX090A60**
120.000 Btu/h
Unidade
Condensadora
Termostato
Kit eltrico
Kit vlvula
de reteno
YEDX060AMT*
CHH55A27
025B48003 000
025B00027 000
085B05600 002
YEDX090AMT*
HUH090A25
025B48003 000
025B00028 000
085B05600 002
YEDX122A60**
YEDX122AMT*
HUH122A25
025B48003 000
025B00029 000
(2x) 085B05600 002
180.000 Btu/h
YEDX182A60**
YEDX182AMT*
(2x) HUH090A25
025B48004 000
025B00030 000
(2x) 085B05600 002
240.000 Btu/h
YEDX242A60**
YEDX242AMT*
(2x) HUH120A25
025B48004 000
025B00033 000
(2x) 085B05600 001
60.000 Btu/h
YEDX060A60**
YEDX060AMT*
CHH55A37
025B48003 000
025B00026 000
085B05600 002
90.000 Btu/h
YEDX090A60**
YEDX090AMT*
HUH090A40
025B48003 000
025B00027 000
085B05600 002
120.000 Btu/h
YEDX122A60**
YEDX122AMT*
HUH122A40
025B48003 000
025B00028 000
(2x) 085B05600 002
180.000 Btu/h
YEDX182A60**
YEDX182AMT*
(2x) HUH090A40
025B48004 000
025B00028 000
(2x) 085B05600 002
240.000 Btu/h
YEDX242A60**
YEDX242AMT*
(2x) HUH120A40
025B48004 000
025B00029 000
(2x) 085B05600 001
Srie padro - S frio - Ventilador do condensador centrfugo

Alimentao
eltrica
Capacidade
nominal
Mdulo de
ventilao
Mdulo Trocador
de calor
220V/3/60Hz
180.000 Btu/h
YEDX182A60**
480.000 Btu/h
YEDX484A60**
180.000 Btu/h
480.000 Btu/h
380V/3/60Hz
Unidade
Condensadora
Termostato
Kit eltrico
YEDX182AMT*
HTC182A25
025B48006 000
025B00030 001
YEDX482AMT*
(2x) HTC240A25
025B48006 000
025B00032 001
YEDX182A60**
YEDX182AMT*
HTC182A40
025B48006 000
025B00028 001
YEDX484A60**
YEDX482AMT*
(2x) HTC240A40
025B48006 000
025B00033 001
.....................................
2. Combinaes de Fornecimentos Possveis (continuao)

Srie Plus - S Frio - Ventilador do condensador axial
Capacidade
nominal
Mdulo de
ventilao
Mdulo trocador
de calor
Unidade
condensadora
90.000 Btu/h
120.000 Btu/h
180.000 Btu/h
240.000 Btu/h
300.000 Btu/h
YEDX090A60**S/SE
YEDX122A60**S/SE
YEDX182A60**S/SE
YEDX242A60**S/SE
YEDX303A60**S/SE
YEDX090AMT*S
YEDX122AMT*S
YEDX182AMT*S
YEDX242AMT*S
YEDX303AMT*S
360.000 Btu/h
480.000 Btu/h
90.000 Btu/h
120.000 Btu/h
180.000 Btu/h
240.000 Btu/h
300.000 Btu/h
YEDX363A60**S/SE
YEDX484A60**S/SE
YEDX090A60**S/SE
YEDX122A60**S/SE
YEDX182A60**S/SE
YEDX242A60**S/SE
YEDX303A60**S/SE
YEDX363AMT*S
YEDX484AMT*S
YEDX090AMT*S
YEDX122AMT*S
YEDX182AMT*S
YEDX242AMT*S
YEDX303AMT*S
360.000 Btu/h
480.000 Btu/h
YEDX363A60**S/SE
YEDX484A60**S/SE
YEDX363AMT*S
YEDX484AMT*S
HUC090A25S
HUC122A25S
(2x) HUC090A25S
(2x) HUC120A25S
(2x) HUC090A25S
(1x) HUC120A25S
(3x) HUC120A25S
(4x) HUC120A25S
HUC090A40S
HUC122A40S
(2x) HUC090A40S
(2x) HUC120A40S
(2x) HUC090A40S
(1x) HUC120A40S
(3x) HUC120A40S
(4x) HUC120A40S
Tipo
220V/3/60Hz
380V/3/60Hz
* Posio de montagem V para vertival

H para horizontal
** Posio de descarga do ventilador do evaporador -
V1, V2, V3, V4, H1, H3 e H5 para todos os modelos;

V5 apenas para os equipamentos at 240.000 Btu/h
3. Caractersticas Tcnicas
YEDX060
YEDX090
YEDX122
YEDX182
YEDX242
YEDX303
YEDX363
YEDX482
YEDX484
Capacidade nominal (Btu/h)
60.000
90.000
120.000
180.000
240.000
300.000
360.000
480.000
480.000
Vazo de ar nominal (m3/h)
3.400
5.440
6.800
10.200
13.600
17.000
20.400
27.200
27.200
Unidade evaporadora
Presso esttica disponvel na vazo nom.(mmca)
15
Serpentina
Filtros de ar (classificao ABNT/Tipo)
G3 / Descartvel
Nmero de filas
Aletas por polegada
14
14
14
14
14
12
12
12
12
rea da face (m2)
0,38
0,58
0,74
1,18
1,51
1,89
2,27
3,07
3,07
Dimetro dos tubos (pol.)
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
Tipo
1
Largura (mm)
1024
1444
1444
1784
2100
2430
2214
2800
2800
Altura (mm)
1368
1588
1688
1713
1993
2083
2271
2920
2920
Profundidade (mm)
624
724
724
724
814
904
904
1100
1100
Largura (mm)
1024
1444
1444
1784
2100
2430
2214
2800
2800
Nmero de circuitos
Dimenso Dimenso
horizontal vertical
Altura (mm)
744
904
904
989
1179
1179
1367
1520
1520
Profundidade (mm)
1248
1448
1448
1448
1628
1808
1808
2200
2200
140
180
215
225
270
370
420
460
610
1,5
7,5
7,5
7,5
0,94
1,44
1,82
2,71
3,59
4,34
6,27
6,27
6,27
Corrente - 220 V (A)
3,00
4,53
6,42
8,86
11,90
14,10
20,00
20,00
20,00
Corrente - 380 V (A)
1,74
2,62
3,72
5,13
6,89
8,16
11,60
11,60
11,60
Condensadora axial
CHC/H55
4xHUC120
2xHTC240
Peso (kg)
Consumo (kW)
Alimentao eltrica
220 / 380 V - 3 - 60 Hz
HUC/H090 HUC/H122 2xHUC/H090 2xHUC/H120 2xHUC/H090 3xHUC120

+ HUC120
Condensadora centrfuga
HTC182
.....................................
3. Caractersticas Tcnicas (continuao)
Serpentina
Unidade condensadora
HUC/H090
HUC/H120
HTC182
HUC/H122
HTC240
Nmero de filas
Aletas por polegada
12
12
12
13
13
rea da face (m2)
1,47
1,9
1,9
1,65
1,92
Dimetro dos tubos (pol.)
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
Tipo
1,0
Nmero de circuitos
2,0
2,0
1,0
1,0
Axial com transmisso direta
Ventilador (tipo)
Presso esttica dispon. na vazo nom. (mmca)
Compressor (tipo)
Consumo total (kW)
Centrfugo
7650
10200
10200
15300
10
Scroll
Scroll / (tandem)
Scroll
Scroll
Scroll / (tandem)
6,94
10,84
10,84
15,84
25,3
Freqncia (Hz)
20400
60
Voltagem (V)
220
380
220
380
220
380
220
380
220
380
Corrente total (A)
22
14,4
34,6
22,2
34,6
22,2
46,6
24,13
81,20
46,90
Monofsico
Dimenses Compressor
Motor
Alimentao eltrica
Trifsico
3/4
2 x 1/2
2 x 1/2
Consumo (kW)
660
2 x 425
2 x 425
2700
3.600
Corrente (A)
3,1
2 x 1,9
6,28
Consumo (kW)
Corrente (A)
2 x 1,9
8,86
5,13
13
7,5
Trifsico
Alimentao eltrica
2 x 5,00
11,3
18,9
2 x 9,2
2 x 15,4
2 x 5,00
2 x 9,2
2 x 15,4
2 x 9,5
2 x 10,85
2 x 19,7
2 x 34,1
Line break + Rel trmico
Line break interno
Tipo de proteo
2 x 6,57
2 x 18,9
Altura (mm)
950
950
950
1716
2040
Largura (mm)
1714
1944
1944
1829
2003
Profundidade (mm)
572
755
755
640
755
169
258
258
350
467
Peso (kg)
Obs.:
- Para os equipamentos HUC/H srie padro a tenso de comando de 220V;
- Para os equipamentos HUC/H srie plus e equipamentos HTC a tenso de comando de 24V;
.....................................
4. Dados Dimensionais
Montagem Vertical da Unidade Evaporadora
Modelo
YEDX060
YEDX090
YEDX122
YEDX182
YEDX242
YEDX303
YEDX363
YEDX484
1368
1588
1688
1713
1993
2083
2271
2920
1024
1444
1444
1784
2100
2430
2214
2800
624
724
724
724
814
904
904
1100
Montagem Horizontal da Unidade Evaporadora

Modelo
YEDX060
YEDX090
YEDX122
YEDX182
YEDX242
YEDX303
YEDX363
YEDX484
744
904
904
989
1179
1179
1367
1520
1024
1444
1444
1784
2100
2430
2214
2800
1248
1448
1448
1448
1628
1808
1808
2200
Insuflamento de Ar das Unidades Evaporadoras
Modelo
YEDX060
YEDX090
YEDX122
YEDX182
YEDX242
YEDX303
YEDX363
YEDX484
289
402
402
341
402
480
480
480
326
473
473
386
473
556
556
556
---255
381
457
457
316
---386
473
556
556
556
-------316
-------556
.....................................
4. Dados Dimensionais (continuao)

Unidades condensadoras (medidas em mm)
Unidades condensadoras HTC 182 / 240
A
F
V2
S1
V1
V2
1
D
H4
100
S2
H5
H6
H1
H2
H3
C3
C1
C2
C
Dimensional
Modelo
S1
S2
V1
V2
HTC182
HTC240
1716
2000
1830
2040
640
755
1400
1500
380
444
1067
1067
1547
1800
408
492
476
568
Modelo
D1
D2
C1
C2
C3
H1
H2
H3
H4
H3
H4
HTC182
HTC240
1716
2000
1830
2040
640
755
1400
1500
380
444
1067
1067
1547
1800
408
492
476
568
408
492
476
568
Instalao
Unidade condensadora HUC/H 090
Unidade condensadora HUC/H 120/122
553
950
950
744
191
781
781
191
755
215
642
642
1944
20
572
215
20
75 65
75
24
140
205*
270*
24
1714
.....................................
5. Descrio Geral
As unidades condicionadoras do tipo Split so formadas por uma unidade evaporadora interna (YEDX), uma ou mais unidades
condensadoras externas (HUC/H ou HTC) e um kit eltrico.
Unidades Evaporadoras
A evaporadora YEDX projetada para instalao interna. Seu gabinete composto por painis de parede dupla, isolados com
poliuretano expandido, com espessura de 17 mm. O revestimento dos painis constitudo de chapa de ao galvanizado (0,5 mm)
e pr-pintado na parte externa.
1. Conceito Modular
A unidade evaporadora YEDX formada basicamente por dois
mdulos:
-Mdulo Trocador de calor
-Mdulo de Ventilao
Estes mdulos so definidos no pedido pelo cliente, podendose optar pela montagem na posio vertical ou horizontal, com
diversas opes de posies de descarga do ventilador.
2. Gabinete em AlumnioConstruda em perfis de alumnio
extrudado, possuem caractersticas de excelente rigidez e
leveza, alm de propriedades no corrosivas e ambientalmente
correto (100% reciclvel).
Os perfis de alumnio so fixados por meio de cantos em nylon,
material caracterizado por sua extrema dureza, rigidez e
elasticidade, com reforo de fibra de vidro.
3. Painis
construo prova de vazamentos de ar a uma ampla gama de
presses.
4. Base
em trilhos de chapa galvanizada dobrada (perfil em U), que
confere a unidade maior estabilidade ao conjunto alm de evitar
a necessidade de base de alvenaria no local da instalao.
5. Base do Motor e VentiladorO conjunto motor ventilador
possuem uma base de inrcia nica, apoiada com

amortecedores de borracha, constituindo uma operao com
baixo nvel de rudo e vibrao, alm de eliminar a necessidade
de isolamento da unidade.
6. Motores
Motor eltrico trifsico de 4 plos, grau de proteo IP55, de 50
ou 60 Hz.
7. Serpentina de Resfriamento
Fabricadas com tubos de cobre e aletas corrugadas de alumnio
fixadas por expanso mecnica. A bitola do tubo de cobre, o
nmero de aletas por polegada e o nmero de filas variam com
a capacidade do equipamento, veja tabela de dados tcnicos
(pgina 7) para obter os dados.
8. Drenagem do Condensado
Uma bandeja de dreno inclinada com dreno inferior permite a
retirada total de condensado, atendendo as normas da ASHRAE
62-2001. A bandeja fabricada de material termoplstico ABS,
livre de corroso e isolada em poliuretano injetado.
9. Filtros
Os equipamentos saem de fbrica com filtros planos
descartveis com 1 de espessura e de classe G3.
10.Ventilador
Os equipamentos possuem ventiladores centrfugos de dupla
aspirao, com rotor de ps curvadas para frente (tipo sirocco).
Unidades Condensadoras HUC/H

A condensadora HUC/H projetada para instalao externa. A unidade composta por:
- Gabinete de chapa de ao galvanizado e pintado;
- Compressores do tipo Scroll;
- Serpentina condensadora com tubos de cobre 3/8 e
aletas de alumnio corrugadas;
- Ventiladores axiais;
- Motores monofsicos do ventilador do condensador;
- Conjunto de restritores (unidade Quente / Frio);
- Vlvula de servio de bloqueio na linha de suco e na linha
de lquido;
-
Pressostatos de alta e baixa;

Contatores para o acionamento dos compressores;
Capacitores para os motores das condensadoras;
A unidade fornecida com carga parcial de R-22.
10
As vlvulas de servio simplificam o processo de instalao,

possibilitando fazer a limpeza e desidratao apenas das linhas
de cobre e do evaporador.
O kit para interligao eltrica da YEDX e HUC/H composto por
um contator e um rel trmico para o motor do evaporador, fusvel
de comando, rgua de bornes e um informativo tcnico com os
esquemas eltricos e procedimentos para inter
.....................................
5. Descrio Geral (continuao)

Unidades Condensadoras HTC
A condensadora HTC projetada para instalao externa. A unidade composta por:
- Gabinete de chapa de ao galvanizado e pintado;
- Compressores do tipo Scroll;
- Serpentina condensadora com tubos de cobre 3/8 e aletas
de alumnio corrugadas;
- Ventilador centrfugo do tipo Sirocco, balanceados esttica
e dinamicamente;
- Motor o motor eltrico utilizado do tipo TEFC, classe B e
grau de isolamento IP-55, trifsico, montado sobre
rolamentos de esferas pr-lubrificados e selados
(rolamentos blindados);
- Polia motora regulvel e polia movida fixa.
- Vlvula de servio do tipo tanque nas linhas de suco e
lquido;
- Pressostatos de alta e baixa;
- A unidade fornecida com presso positiva de Nitrognio.
Quadro eltrico com contatores para o acionamento dos

compressores e ventilador, rel de sobrecarga para o ventilador,
placa CLO (compressor lockout) para proteo contra ciclagem
dos compressores e borneiras de fora e comando.
O kit para interligao eltrica do YEDX e a HTC composto
por um contator para a evaporadora, rel de sobrecarga,
transformador para 24V e esquemas de interligao eltrica.
Unidades Srie Plus

O conjunto Splito padro Plus possui alguns acessrios adicionais j instalados em fbrica.
1- Serpentina da condensadora padro Gold Fin, ou seja,
serpentinas com tubos de cobre e aletas de alumnio com
tratamento contra corroso galvnica;
6- Capacitores para correo do fator de potncia (0,92);

7- Opo para controlador microprocessado com display de
cristal lquido e programao semanal;
2- Visor de lquido com indicao da umidade;

3- Filtro secador na linha de lquido dentro do evaporador;
8- Vlvula de servio de bloqueio nas linhas de suco, lquido

e descarga;
4- Quadro eltrico incorporado ao evaporador;
9- Tenso de comando 24 Volts.
5- Rel de falta e inverso de fases;
6. Recebimento e Inspeo
Deve-se verificar se todos os volumes recebidos (equipamentos
e acessrios) esto de acordo com a nota fiscal. Tambm
necessrio inspecionar a unidade de possveis danos causados
durante o transporte. Caso a unidade possua alguma

irregularidade, deve-se avisar imediatamente a transportadora
e a YORK.
.....................................
11
7. Segurana
As operaes de instalao, partida a ajuste do equipamento
podem gerar riscos e perigos se no forem levados em
considerao certos fatores inerentes ao sistema implicado,
tais como altas presses de operao, componentes eltricos
de alta tenso e local de trabalho (tetos, terraos ou estruturas
situadas em altura).
A instalao e a manuteno deste equipamento de climatizao
devem ser encarregadas a um pessoal treinado e qualificado
obedecendo todos os regulamentos e cdigos de segurana,
como a utilizao de equipamentos de proteo individual
(culos, luvas e sapatos de segurana).
Utilizar os equipamentos de iamento e transporte com a
capacidade apropriada.
Conexes eltricas
ATENO
Antes de qualquer interveno no equipamento, verificar se a
alimentao eltrica est desligada.
- Verifique se a alimentao eltrica disponvel compatvel

com o valor indicado na placa de dados dos equipamentos.
- Use proteo adequada contra sobrecarga e curto-circuito
na alimentao de energia eltrica.
- O equipamento dever ser obrigatoriamente aterrado.
- Toda a instalao deve respeitar as normas da ABNT e/ou as
normas locais aplicveis.
As operaes de manuteno devem ser efetuadas

regularmente para preservar as caractersticas de operao.
8. Iamento e Manuseio
Os equipamentos so cobertos por um filme plstico destinado
a proteo das unidades. Conserve as embalagens para evitar
danos at o momento da instalao.
Empilhadeira
- Todas os equipamentos devem ser movidos e deslocados
com a ajuda de uma empilhadeira.
Iamento
- Todo o iamento deve ser executado por meio de cintas.
As cintas devem ser colocadas por debaixo do estrado de
madeira.
- Colocar barras espaadores entre as cintas na parte
superior das sees para no danificar o mdulo (veja a
etiqueta afixada na unidade).
- Posicionar a empilhadeira debaixo do centro de gravidade,

de maneira a garantir um bom equilbrio e uma boa
segurana.
- Certificar-se que a capacidade do dispositivo de iamento

esteja compatvel com o peso da seo a ser iada.
- Conferir se a capacidade de iamento da empilhadeira

est compatvel com o peso dos componentes.
Nota 1: No momento de colocar as cintas, verificar se as conexes

de cobre esto devidamente protegidas contra choques.
Nota 2: A unidade evaporadora transportada em mdulos que
sero montados no local da sua instalao. Jamais faa o
iamento dos mdulos depois de conectados.
12
.....................................
9. Local de Instalao
Siga as seguintes recomendaes para selecionar a melhor localizao para estas unidades:
1) A unidade condensadora projetada somente para instalao
externa. Os ventiladores da condensadora HUC so do tipo
axial e no so adaptados para trabalhar com dutos. Os
ventiladores da condensadora HTC so centrfugos e
possuem presso esttica para trabalhar com dutos. Os
valores esto indicados na tabela de caractersticas tcnicas
(pagina 7);
5) Nunca instale uma unidade condensadora com insuflamento

direto no retorno de outra condensadora.
2) As condensadoras e evaporadoras devem ser instaladas de

forma que as linhas de refrigerao tenham o menor nmero
de curvas. As unidades devem estar localizadas as mais
prximas possveis;
3) As unidades devem ser instaladas em bases niveladas e
que suportem o peso dos equipamentos. Veja o peso dos
equipamentos na tabela de caractersticas tcnicas;
4) A unidade condensadora no deve ser instalada em reas
sensveis a rudos. Em instalaes na laje ou no solo, calos
de borracha podem ser aplicados para minimizar a
transmisso de vibrao;
6) Instale o termostato a aproximadamente 1,5m acima do piso,

numa rea de boa circulao de ar. Evite lugares que possam
afetar o termostato, como:
Em pontos mortos atrs de portas, cantos e frestas;
Prximo ao insuflamento de ar;
Chamins e dutos de ar;
Prximo a janelas ou lugares com incidncia de raios

solares.
10. reas Livres

Veja abaixo o mnimo de reas livres que devem ser respeitadas para no comprometer o desempenho e facilitar a manuteno:
Unidade Evaporadora YEDX
2000
600
500
600
CONEXO DE
REFRIGERANTE
MANUTENO
400
600
TOMADA DE AR
DA SERPENTINA
TOMADA DE AR
DA SERPENTINA
MANUTENO
DESCARGA LIVRE DE AR
Unidade Condensadora HTC
1500
DESCARGA DE AR
Unidade Condensadora HUC/H
500
300
TOMADA DE AR
DA SERPENTINA
TOMADA DE AR
DA SERPENTINA
.....................................
600
MANUTENO
13
11. Posicionamento e Montagem dos Mdulos do Evaporador

Para a montagem dos mdulos da unidade evaporadora, adote
o seguinte procedimento:
d.
a.
Posicionar os mdulos conforme a ordem estabelecida e

conforme a direo do fluxo de ar.
Aproximar os mdulos um do outro.
Posicionar os ts de montagem nos quatro cantos da
unidade e apert-los atarraxando os parafusos de fixao.
b.
c.
(Para as unidades de grande porte, dados adicionais esto

fornecidos em cada chassis dos mdulos).
Confira o alinhamento de todas as sees aps apertar
todos os parafusos de fixao.
Observao: cada unidade entregue com a quantidade

apropriada de parafusos, isolamento e ts de ligao, de acordo
com o tipo de montagem.
12. Conexes de Refrigerante

Existe a opo de sada das conexes de refrigerante por ambos
os lados para as unidades evaporadora YEDX e condensadora
HTC.
est localizada do lado direito da unidade (olhando para a

descarga de ar). Na tabela a baixo esto as bitolas das conexes
dos equipamentos:
A conexo de refrigerante das unidades condensadoras HUC/H

Unidades Condensadoras
HUC/H 090
HUC/H 120
HUC/H 122
HUC/H 182
HUC/H 240
Linha de lquido
1/2
1/2
2 x 1/2
2 x 1/2
3/4
Linha de suco
7/8
7/8
2 x 3/4
2 x 7/8
1 5/8
Modelo
Unidades Evaporadoras
YEDX 060 YEDX 090
Modelo
YEDX 122
YEDX 182
YEDX 242 YEDX 303
YEDX 363
YEDX 484 YEDX 482
Linha de lquido
1/2
5/8
2 x 1/2
2 x 5/8
2 x 5/8
3 x 5/8
3 x 5/8
4 x 5/8
2 x 7/8
Linha de suco
7/8
1 1/8
2 x 7/8
2 x 1 1/8
2 x 1 1/8
3 x 1 1/8
3 x 1 1/8
4 x 1 1/8
2 x 1 5/8
13. Tubulao
- A interligao frigorfica deve ser feita por instalador
credenciado;
- Nas linhas de suco e lquido devem ser usados tubos de
cobre apropriados para refrigerao;
- Curvas acentuadas devem ser evitadas;
- Nas linhas de suco ascendente deve ser instalado um
sifo de leo a cada 3 metros, e tambm na base do tubo de
subida;
Linha de liquido
1/2
Circuito
5 TR
7,5 TR
10 TR
15 TR
20 TR
15
6
#
#
#
Linha de suco
7/8
Circuito
5 TR
7,5 TR
10 TR
15 TR
20 TR
14
9
#
#
#
#
- Todas as linhas de refrigerante devem ser isoladas e

suportadas por uma presilha ou braadeira em pequenos
intervalos;
- O desnvel entre as unidades evaporadora e condensadora(s)
no deve ultrapassar 10 metros;
- A baixo est uma tabela com o comprimento equivalente
mximo para cada bitola em cada capacidade.
Dimetro nominal da tubulao de cobre

5/8
3/4
7/8
Comprimento equivalente mximo (m)
30
#
#
21
30
#
15
30
#
6
18
30
#
9
24
1 1/8
1 3/8
1 5/8
30
#
#
18
30
#
12
30
#
#
15
30
#
9
21
.....................................
1 1/8
#
#
#
#
30
2 1/8
#
#
#
#
30
14. Carga de Gs e Balanceamento do Sistema

- Teste de vazamento
6C < Sub-resfriamento < 10C
Carga de gs est correta
Sub-resfriamento < 6C
Adicionar R-22
Sub-resfriamento > 10C
Retirar R-22
Aps o sistema ser instalado, todo o circuito deve ser testado

contra vazamento.
- Isolao das Linhas de Refrigerante

Toda a linha de suco deve ser isolada. Se a linha de lquido
ficar exposta diretamente ao sol ou a alta temperatura, tambm
deve ser isolada (a temperatura normal da linha de lquido
entre 35 e 40C). Nunca solde as linhas de lquido e suco
juntas. Elas podem ser presas juntas, mas devem ser
completamente isoladas uma da outra.
- Vcuo no Sistema
Conecte a bomba de vcuo na tomada de presso nas vlvulas
de servio das linhas de lquido e suco at que o valor medido
no vacumetro situe-se em torno de 300 mHg.
- Ajuste da carga de Refrigerante

Para verificar se a carga de refrigerante est correta necessrio
medir o sub-resfriamento do sistema antes de ajustar o
superaquecimento com o equipamento operando em condies
estabilizadas. O sub-resfriamento a diferena entre
temperatura de saturao correspondente presso de
descarga (temperatura de condensao saturada) e a
temperatura da linha de lquido o mais prximo da sada do
condensador (antes do filtro secador). Para se medir a
temperatura na linha de lquido, utilize um termmetro de bulbo
ou eletrnico com sensor de temperatura, fixando-o na tubulao
e isolando-o para evitar o contato com o ambiente. Instalando
um manmetro de alta na descarga do compressor, leia a
presso e obtenha a correspondente temperatura saturada
numa tabela de presso versus temperatura do gs refrigerante
R-22.
Presso de descarga convertida
Temperatura da linha de lquido
Sub-resfriamento
- Regulagem da vlvula de expanso

Depois de ajustado o sub-resfriamento e as condies de
operao do equipamento estabilizarem, deve ser verificado o
superaquecimento. O superaquecimento calculado como a
diferena entre a temperatura do refrigerante na sada do
evaporador (temperatura de suco) e a temperatura
correspondente presso de suco (temperatura de
evaporao saturada). Para se medir a temperatura de suco,
utilize um termmetro de bulbo ou eletrnico com sensor de
temperatura, fixando-o na parte superior (precauo contra
leituras falsas) da tubulao de sada do evaporador, o mais
prximo possvel do bulbo da vlvula de expanso e isolando-o
para evitar o contato com o ambiente. Instalando um manmetro
de baixa na suco do compressor, leia a presso e obtenha a
correspondente temperatura saturada numa tabela de presso
versus temperatura para R-22.
Temperatura da linha de suco
Presso de suco convertida
Sub-resfriamento
Se este valor estiver entre 8 e 12C, a regulagem da vlvula de

expanso est correta. Se o valor estiver menor do que 8C a
vlvula dever ser fechada. Se estiver acima de 12C dever ser
aberta.
8C < Superaquecimento < 12C
Ajuste da vlvula de
expanso est correto
Superaquecimento < 8C
Fechar a vlvula
de expanso
Superaquecimento > 12C
Abrir a vlvula
de expanso
O valor de sub-resfriamento deve estar entre 6 e 10C. Se o valor

estiver abaixo ser necessrio adicionar refrigerante, e se estiver
acima remover o refrigerante. Mea o sub-resfriamento
novamente.
15. Dreno
- O acesso ao dreno fica na parte inferior do mdulo trocador de calor;
- A conexo de PVC com rosca BSP 1;
- O dimetro dos tubos da linha de drenagem deve ser no mnimo
25mm;
- A linha deve ser isolada se os respingos poderem causar algum dano
ao local atingido;
- Deve ser instalado um sifo na linha de dreno para evitar o acumulo de
gua na bandeja de recolhimento de condensado, conforme exemplo
ao lado:
.....................................
15
16. Alimentao Eltrica

Ateno
O acesso aos componentes, controles e fontes eltricos deve
ser permitido somente s pessoas qualificadas e treinadas.
Recomenda-se desligar e travar todas as fontes de eletricidade
antes de qualquer interveno nos equipamentos eltricos da
unidade.
deve situar-se numa faixa de 10% da voltagem indicada na

placa de identificao. O desequilbrio entre fases no deve
exceder 2%.
Dimensionamento dos componentes
Deve ser instalada uma chave seccionadora tripolar com fusveis
ou disjuntor com caractersticas de ruptura similar para cada
conjunto.
O dimensionamento do ponto de fora, condutores e protees
devem estar de acordo com a norma NBR5410 da ABNT.
Tenso de alimentao eltrica

As caractersticas da alimentao eltrica devem corresponder
s indicadas na placa de identificao da unidade. A voltagem
Corrente total (A)
Modelo
MCA (A)
220 V
380 V
220 V
380 V
Potncia
total (kW)
YEDX060 + CHC/H55
23,0
12,4
27,5
14,6
7,78
YEDX090 + HUC/H090
26,5
17,0
31,3
19,8
8,38
YEDX122 + HUC/H122
41,0
25,9
44,9
28,2
12,66
YEDX182 + 2 x HUC/H090
52,9
33,9
57,6
36,8
16,59
YEDX182 + HTC182
55,5
29,3
60,2
32,1
18,55
81,1
51,3
88,8
55,9
25,27
YEDX303 + 2 x HUC/H090 + HUC120
92,7
59,2
100,4
63,8
29,06
123,8
78,2
139,2
87,4
38,79
YEDX482 + 2 x HTC240
182,4
105,4
199,5
115,3
56,87
158,4
100,4
173,8
109,6
49,63
Voltagem
MCA - Mnima Amperagem por Circuito para dimensionamento dos condutores eltricos
17. Diagramas de Interligao Eltrica

YEDX060 + CHC/H55
ATENO
L1
L2
L3
N
TERMOSTATO SCE
Nota 1: Os equipamentos com alimentao em

380V/3/60Hz, devem receber o neutro no borne "N".
Para equipamentos 220V/3/60Hz, o borne "N"
dever receber a mesma fase "L2" que alimenta os
equipamentos.
Nota 2: Todos os evaporadores saem de fbrica
com o motor ligado para 380V/3/60Hz como
indicado no esquema ao lado. Para equipamentos
220V3/60Hz, o fechamento do motor dever ser
alterado como indicado abaixo:
5 11 12
220V
16 2
4 35
MVE
YEDX060
3
CVE
B G
R S
Nota 3: O esquema eltrico est representando a

interligao entre unidades quente/frio. Para
equipamentos s frio, desconsiderar as ligaes do
o borne "12" do termostato com borne "O" da
unidade condensadora e entre os bornes "3" e "11"
do termostato.
Nota 4: Veja abaixo a tabela de equivalncia dos
bornes do termostato:
TVCPI111
KIT ELTRICO
CHC55
ALIMENTAO DO
TERMOSTATO
VENTILAO
COMPRESSOR 1
AQUECIMENTO
1
2
3
5
12
SIMBOLOGIA
1
- BORNES DE COMANDO
3 4 56
- BORNES DO CONTATOR
CVE
MVE
YEDX060
16
- CONTATOR DO MOTOR DO EVAPORADOR
CCP1
- CONTATOR DO COMPRESSOR
MVE
- MOTOR DO VENTILADOR DO EVAPORADOR
035B20002 000B
.....................................
17. Diagramas de Interligao Eltrica (continuao)

YEDX090 + HUC/H090
ATENO
L1
L2
L3
N
TERMOSTATO SCE

equipamentos.
5 11 12
220V
16 2
4 35
MVE
YEDX090
R B G
CVE
B1 Y O

do termostato.
CCP1

TVCPI111
KIT ELTRICO
ALIMENTAO DO
TERMOSTATO
HUH090
VENTILAO
COMPRESSOR 1
AQUECIMENTO
1
2
3
5
12
380V
1
SIMBOLOGIA
3 4 56
- BORNES DE COMANDO
CVE
MVE
YEDX090
CCP1
MVE
035B20003 000B
YEDX122 + HUC/H122
ATENO
L1
L2
L3
N
TERMOSTATO SCE
6 11 12

equipamentos.
220V
16 2
4 35
MVE
YEDX122
3
CVE
R B G
B1 Y1 Y2 O
3
CCP1

do termostato.
TVCPI122
KIT ELTRICO
HUH122
ALIMENTAO DO
TERMOSTATO
1
2
VENTILAO
COMPRESSOR 1
COMPRESSOR 2
AQUECIMENTO
3
5
6
12
380V
1
SIMBOLOGIA
3 4 56
- BORNES DE COMANDO
MVE
CVE
CCP1
MVE
YEDX122
035B20004 000B
.....................................
17

YEDX182 + 2 x HUC/H090 e YEDX242 + 2 x HUC/H120
ATENO
L1
L2
L3
N
TERMOSTATO SCE

equipamentos.
6 11 12
220V
16 2
CVE
B G
B1 Y O
CCP1
B1 Y O
MVE
CCP1
4 35
YEDX182/242
KIT ELTRICO
HUH090/120
HUH090/120

do termostato.
380V
1
3 4 56

TVCPI122
1
2
3
5
6
12
MVE
ALIMENTAO DO
TERMOSTATO
YEDX182/242
VENTILAO
COMPRESSOR 1
COMPRESSOR 2
AQUECIMENTO
035B20005 000B
YEDX303 + 2 x HUC090 + HUC120 E YEDX363 + 3 x HUC120
L1
L2
L3
N
TERMOSTATO SCE
CVE
B G
B1 Y
3
CCP1
B1 Y
CCP1
B1 Y
CCP1
6
KIT ELTRICO
HUC120
HUC090/120
380V
1
ATENO
3 4 56
MVE
YEDX303/363
SIMBOLOGIA
HUC090/120

220V
16 2
CVE
18
MVE

MVE

ALIMENTAO DO
TERMOSTATO
VENTILAO
COMPRESSOR 1
COMPRESSOR 2
4 35
- BORNES DE COMANDO
CCP1

equipamentos.
YEDX303/363
TVCPI102
1
2
3
5
6
035B20006 000B
.....................................

YEDX484 + 4 x HUC120
L1
L2
L3
N
TERMOSTATO SCE
CVE
B G
B1 Y
CCP1
B1 Y
3
CCP1
B1 Y
3
CCP1
B1 Y
CCP1
6
KIT ELTRICO
HUC120
HUC120
HUC120
HUC120
ATENO
380V
3 4 56
1 2

220V
MVE
16 2
YEDX484
MVE
- BORNES DE COMANDO
TVCPI102
VENTILAO
1
2
3
COMPRESSOR 1
COMPRESSOR 2
5
6
CVE

ALIMENTAO DO
TERMOSTATO
4 35
SIMBOLOGIA

equipamentos.
CCP1
MVE
035B20007 000B
YEDX484
YEDX182 + HTC182
ATENO
L1
L2
L3

TERMOSTATO SZ1022YP
220V
R +24 -24 G Y1 Y2
16 2
4 35
MVE
YEDX182
Nota 2: O conjunto de comando do YSMX sai de
fbrica ligado para alimentao 380V. Para
equipamentos 220V, o primrio do transformador de
comando dever ser alterado de 380V para 220V.
CVE
B +24 -24 G
Y1 Y2 B
CCP1

ALIMENTAO DO
TERMOSTATO
6
KIT ELTRICO
SZ1022YP
+24
TVCPI102
1
-24
VENTILAO
COMPRESSOR 1
Y1
COMPRESSOR 2
Y2
5
6
HTC182
SIMBOLOGIA
- BORNES DE COMANDO
380V
1
3 4 56
CVE
CCP1
MVE
MVE
YEDX182
035B20008 000B
.....................................
19

YEDX482 + 2 x HTC240
ATENO
L1
L2
L3

TERMOSTATO SZ1022YP
220V
R +24 -24 G Y1 Y2
16 2
4 35
MVE
YEDX482
Nota 2: O conjunto de comando do YSMX sai de
fbrica ligado para alimentao 380V. Para
equipamentos 220V, o primrio do transformador de
comando dever ser alterado de 380V para 220V.
3
CVE
B +24 -24 G
CCP1
CCP1

ALIMENTAO DO
TERMOSTATO
VENTILAO
COMPRESSOR 1
COMPRESSOR 2
KIT ELTRICO
HTC240
SZ1022YP
+24
-24
G
Y1
Y2
TVCPI102
1
2
3
5
6
HTC240
SIMBOLOGIA
- BORNES DE COMANDO
380V
1
CVE
3 4 56
CCP1
MVE
MVE
YEDX482
035B20009 000B
18. Preparao para Partida Inicial

Procedimento de preparao para a partida
Cuidado! No tente dar partida a unidade sem ter previamente verificado os tens descritos a seguir, servio esse a ser
efetuado por uma pessoa qualificada e treinada.
1. Certifique-se de que a unidade esteja isolada de
5. Confira o tensionamento e o alinhamento das correias.
quaisquer fontes eltricas. Abra, trave e sinalize o

disjuntor da chave geral da unidade.
6. Verificar se no h nenhum corpo estranho

2. Verifique se todos os mdulos do evaporador foram
montadas corretamente e se as juntas entre as sees
foram vedadas com espuma.
3. Verifique se os parafusos e porcas dos elementos
(embalagens, ferramentas, parafusos, gesso, etc...) no

duto de aspirao suscetvel de obstruir a entrada de ar
nos filtros.
7. Feche os painis de acesso de maneira a evitar

qualquer vazamento de ar.
rotativos tais como os ventiladores, motores e polias,

esto corretamente apertados.
8. Verifique se os drenos esto corretamente conectados

4. Gire manualmente o (s) ventilador (es) para verificar se
gira (m) livremente. Certifique-se de que nenhum corpo
estranho (ferramentas, gua, cimento) tenha entrado
na voluta do ventilador.
20
e livres de obstrues
9. Verifique o aperto dos parafusos das conexes e

componentes eltricas.
.....................................
19. Partida Inicial

Uma vez executada a preparao para a partida, a unidade est
pronta para entrar em operao. A partida deve sempre ser dada
por pessoas qualificadas e treinadas.
Verifique a direo da rotao dos ventiladores (indicada

por uma seta nas volutas do prprio ventilador).
Verifique se a corrente eltrica do motor do evaporador
no est maior que o valor nominal.
Verifique os valores de vazo do evaporador ou rotao
do ventilador esto dentro do especificado no projeto
da instalao. Os equipamentos saem de fbrica com

polias e correias ajustadas para atender a vazo
nominal com presso esttica de 15 mmca
Caso o compressor apresentar um rudo elevado e no
existir o diferencial de presso entre descarga e suco,
verificar a seqncia das fases de alimentao eltrica.
Verifique o bom funcionamento dos sifes e drenos.
Certifique-se que no existe vazamento no circuito de
refrigerante.
Ajuste a carga de gs se necessrio.
20. Acionamento do Ventilador do Evaporador

A velocidade de rotao (RPM) do ventilador do evaporador ver
ser ajustada de acordo com a vazo requerida (m/h) e das
resistncias estticas dos sistemas de dutos de ar de
insuflamento e de retorno. Para os equipamentos que possuem
polias regulveis, se houver necessidade de alterao na RPM
Modelo
YEDX-060
YEDX-090
YEDX-122
YEDX-182
YEDX-242
YEDX-303
YEDX-363
YEDX-482/484
Motor (CV) rpm motor

1
1,5
2
3
4
5
7,5
7,5
1720
1720
1720
1730
1725
1715
1740
1740
Polia motora
Dimetro
Furo
79-104 mm
19H7
79-104 mm
19H7
79-104 mm
24H7
91-119 mm
24H7
91-119 mm
28H7
118-142 mm
28H7
140 mm
28H7
140 mm
28H7
do ventilador, afrouxe os parafusos de fixao do motor base

para liberar a correia. Ento, aproxime a parte mvel da polia
regulvel em direo parte fixa para aumentar a RPM ou viceversa para diminu-la.
Polia movida
Dimetro
Furo
6
19.05G9
8
25.4G9
8
25.4G9
7
25.4G9
9
25.4G9
13
30G9
350 mm
30G9
350 mm
30G9
Canais da
polia
1A
1A
1B
1B
2B
2B
2B
2B
rpm ventilador
Mnimo
Mximo
854
1149
633
852
633
852
844
1130
647
866
584
712
670
670
Curva de performance do ventilador

YEDX
(kBtu/h)
Vazo de ar
(m/h)
10
Presso esttica disponvel (mmca)

15
20
25
RPM
60.000
2.720
3.400
4.250
4.080
5.100
6.375
5.440
6.800
7.300
8.160
10.200
12.750
10.880
13.600
17.000
13.600
17.000
18.300
16.320
20.400
24.600
21.760
27.200
30.600
680
760
870
480
510
580
500
570
640
670
770
880
530
600
680
460
510
560
500
550
620
480
530
580
770
840
860
920
950
990
1030
1060
1100
570
580
650
580
640
700
770
850
650
660
720
730
800
790
860
650
700
760
850
920
710
760
780
840
930
990
1010
1080
610
660
680
730
750
790
820
880
530
570
620
560
600
590
630
670
610
670
650
680
720
670
700
710
730
760
720
750
770
790
550
590
670
610
670
670
700
730
780
90.000
120.000
180.000
240.000
300.000
360.000
480.000
30
.....................................
OBS.: Para atingir os valores de rpm em itlico, necessrio substituir em campo a polia movida.
21
21. Manuteno
1) Generalidades:
A correta e segura manuteno de uma unidade condicionadora
de ar requer certas intervenes que devem ser executadas em
condies de segurana em relao aos equipamentos e as
pessoas.
O acesso unidade deve ocorrer somente quando o(s)
ventilador (es) parou de operar. Devem-se tomar todas as
providncias contra um eventual choque eltrico. Desligue e
trave a chave geral antes de operar de operar qualquer servio
na unidade.
As informaes descritas a seguir representam rotinas mnimas
e bsicas. O asseio do ambiente, o nmero de horas de
operao, so alguns dos fatores que determinam a freqncia
e a extenso dos procedimentos de manuteno a serem
executados. A norma NBR 13.971 da ABNT e demais cdigos
de tcnicas aplicveis devem ser obedecidas. Antes de comear
algum servio de manuteno, vale lembrar que o ventilador foi
selecionado de acordo com certas condies de vazo e
presso. Tudo quanto contribuir para alterar a presso esttica
interna, tal como a obstruo dos filtros e das serpentinas, faz a
unidade funcionar em condies diferentes das originalmente
desenhadas.
2) Transmisso (polias e correias):

Verificar bimestralmente a tenso e o desgaste das correias. Se
certas correias precisarem ser substitudas por causa de seu
desgaste, deve-se trocar o conjunto inteiro por correias com as
mesmas especificaes. Antes de instalar correias novas,
verificar se os sulcos das polias esto lisos, limpos, sem
rachaduras, salincias e livres de toro, graxa, ferrugem ou
outros corpos estranhos. Ajuste a distncia entre as polias de
maneira a poder instalar as correias sem necessidade de forar;
jamais utilize uma chave de fenda ou qualquer outro tipo de
alavanca para inserir ou retirar as correias. Tensione as correias
deslocando o motor em seu suporte e, se necessrio, ajuste o
alinhamento da polia (veja figura abaixo) antes de fixar o motor
em sua devida posio. Utilizar uma rgua ao longo das duas
polias para conferir seu alinhamento. As correias devem estar
paralelas.
Polia do
ventilador

paralela s polias
Parafuso de
fixao
Polia do
ventilador
Parafuso de
ajuste
Rgua
Polia do
motor
Alinhado
Deve se tomar maior ateno ao tencionamento nas 20

primeiras horas de funcionamento de correias novas. O
desgaste deve ser simtrico em ambos os flancos; caso
contrrio, o alinhamento das polias no est correto e dever
ser imediatamente corrigido. Cuide para manter as correias e
os sulcos das polias sempre limpos. No utilize adesivos ou
solventes adesivos.
3) Filtro:
difcil determinar a exata freqncia com que um filtro deve ser
limpo ou substitudo, pois a mesma depende essencialmente
do ambiente. Ainda assim, recomenda-se efetuar uma inspeo
mensal. A contar da partida, os filtros correm o risco de ficar
rapidamente obstrudos devido ao acmulo das poeiras nos
dutos durante sua instalao (cimento, gesso). Para a limpeza
dos filtros, recomenda-se sacudi-los e soprar um ar levemente
comprimido sobre as clulas (contra o fluxo). Os filtros devem
ser substitudos quando a diferena de presso atravs deles
for duas vezes a do filtro limpo. Cuide para respeitar a orientao
dos filtros, a qual indicada no alojamento do filtro. O ar deve
entrar do lado oposto grade que contm o meio do filtro.
4) Limpeza da serpentina:
A limpeza das aletas de serpentina deve ser conferida
bimestralmente. Aletas sujas tendem a restringir o fluxo de ar e
a desestabilizar o funcionamento da unidade. Alm disso,
serpentinas sujas levam a uma menor eficincia na
transferncia do calor e, conseqentemente, mais energia ser
utilizada para alcanar a refrigerao ou o aquecimento
desejado. Adicionalmente, serpentinas dos evaporadores sujas
representam um perigo para a sade. Assim sendo, mantenhaas limpas.
Para a limpeza das serpentinas, no utilize nem vapor, gua
quente ou jato de gua com presso. No caso de aletas ficarem
significativamente deformadas em sua superfcie frontal,
possvel endireit-las com um pente com inrvalo de dentes
igual ao das aletas.
5) Bandeja de dreno:
Inspecione bimestralmente o funcionamento da bandeja de
dreno e do sifo para evitar o acumulo de gua. Limpe se
necessrio.
Polia do
motor
22
Parte mvel
Importante: essencial uma boa tenso das correias. Se a

tenso for frouxa demais, as correias podero pular para fora e
sero rapidamente deterioradas por causa do aquecimento ou,
por causa de partidas bruscas, podero travar. Se a tenso for
excessiva, um excesso de carga ser exercido sobre as prprias
correias, sobre os rolamentos e sobre os eixos. Isso aumentar
a fora e reduzir vida til do conjunto de ventilao.
No alinhado
Parte fixa
.....................................
21. Manuteno (continuao)

6) Conexes eltricas:
7) Circuito Frigorfico:
Mensalmente, verifique se a tenso e corrente eltrica dos

motores e compressores trifsicos esto balanceadas e aperte
todos os parafusos dos contatores, rguas de borne e demais
conexes eltricas. Acompanhe as condies operacionais e o
consumo eltrico das unidades.
Mea bimestralmente as temperaturas e presses de operao,

verificando a presena de vazamentos e se existe a necessidade
de ajustar o superaquecimento e sub-resfriamento (ver pgina
15).
.....................................
23

Ler o manual

Form: M-IOM004-BR(1204)
Substitui: Form: M-IOM004-BR(0304)
Fone: (041) 661-3300
CEP 83325-040
R Joo Tibiri, 900

Fone: (011) 3837-6700
CEP 05077-000

FAX: (041) 661-3397
Pinhais - PR
V. Anastcio
tec2000 series
network
thermostat
controllers
Network
Thermostat
Controllers
Easy-to-read, aesthetically pleasing backlit
LCD display
Two configurable binary inputs for
advanced functions
Over 20 configurable parameters enable
the thermostat to be customized for any
application
The TEC2000 Series Thermostat controllers from Johnson

Controls meet your need for a cost-effective networked
small equipment controller by providing more N2, BACnet
MS/TP and LonWorks communicating options. ZigBee
Wireless TECs are available and operate in conjunction
with a BACnet MS/TP or BACnet IP Coordinator. It offers
equipment control from a single product: thermostat,
controller and temperature sensor.
Easy to install by consolidating into one

device; control strategies, temperature and
humidity sensing, and thermostat control
The TEC Series staged controllers can be used with

rooftop units (with and without economizers), heat pumps
and single- and multi-stage heating/cooling equipment.
BACnet, ZigBee, LonMark and N2

communications
The TEC2x45, TEC2xx6 and TEC2xx7 Series controllers

are available for commercial and hospitality applications,
including cabinet unit heaters, perimeter heating/cooling,
zoning and fan coil units. They provide control of various
two- and four-pipe fan coil equipment, and have options
for one- to three-speeds of fan control. They offer additional
application flexibility by providing advanced control signals
proportional 0 to 10 VDC, on/off, or floating and
dehumidification capabilities.
tec2000 series NETWORK THERMOSTAT CONTROLLERS
Application
and Data Server
TEC20-3C-2
Coordinator
TEC
Ethernet Network
TEC20-6C-2
Coordinator
NAE
Optional N2
or LonWorks
TEC
TEC2x45-2
TEC2xx6-2
TEC2xx7-2
NAE
BACnet MS/TP
NAE
Optional N2,
BACnet MS/TP
or LonWorks
TEC
VMA
Optional N2,
BACnet MS/TP
or LonWorks
Network
Sensor
Wireless Connection
IOM
Hardwired Network or Bus

Ethernet
TEC
TEC
TEC
Product code
control
fan control
model type
application
Commercial two-pipe equipment, cabinet unit
heaters, and perimeter heating/cooling
TEC2x45-2
One Output Proportional 0 to 10 VDC
One-Speed
TEC2x16-2
Two Outputs On/Off
1, 2 or 3-Speed
TEC2x26-2
Two Outputs On/Off or Floating
TEC2x36-2

and Dehumidification
TEC2x46-2
Two Outputs Proportional
TEC2x56-2
Two Outputs Proportional and Dehumidification
TEC2x16H-2
Two Outputs On/Off
TEC2x26H-2
TEC2x36H-2

and Dehumidification
TEC2x46H-2
TEC2x56H-2
Two Outputs Proportional and Dehumidification
TEC2x27-2
TEC2x47-2
*TEC2x01-3
Single Stage
*TEC2x02-3
Heat Pump
Heat pump with up to 3 heating/2 cooling stages
*TEC2x03-3
Multi Stage
Multi-staged packaged heating/cooling stages
*TEC2x04-3
Economizer
Packaged rooftop units with economizers
TEC2261-3
Single Stage
TEC2262-3
Heat Pump
TEC2263-3
Multi Stage
Multi-staged packaged heating/cooling stages
TEC2264-3
Economizer
Packaged rooftop units with economizers
Commercial
Two or four-pipe fan coil equipment
Hospitality
None
Commercial
Nonprogrammable
Two or four-pipe equipment, hydronic reheat

valve control, and pressure dependent VAV with
or without local reheat
Fan coil unit, unit heaters, and single-stage
packaged heating/cooling equipment
On, Off or Auto
Commercial
LonWorks
Programmable
Fan coil unit, unit heaters, and single-stage

packaged heating/cooling equipment
Heat pump with up to 3 heating/2 cooling stages
Note: x = 0 for ZigBee wireless communication (Note: A TEC Coordinator will be needed to operate wireless TECs)
x = 1 for N2 open communication

x = 2 for LonWorks communication
x = 6 for BACnet MS/TP communication
* For BACnet MS/TP these product code numbers end with 2, not 3.

LonWorks is a registered trademark of Echelon Corporation.
BACnet is a registered trademark of the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE).
ZigBee is a registered trademark of the ZigBee Alliance.
Printed on recycled paper.
2008 Johnson Controls, Inc. P.O. Box 423, Milwaukee, WI 53201 Printed in USA PUBL-5160

VG7000 Series
Bronze Globe Valves for Assembly in the Field

Description
The VG7000 Series Bronze Valves accurately

regulate the flow of water or steam in response
to the demand of a controller in heating,
ventilating, and air conditioning systems.
These valves are available in normally open,
normally closed, and three-way mixing
configurations. Both electric and pneumatic
actuators are available.
every valve tested for tight shutoff,

ensuring occupant comfort and energy
conservation
uses standard Johnson Controls ring
pack packing, providing industry-leading
reliability and operating life
complete actuator interchangeability,

allowing easy field retrofit or mounting using
standardized mounting kits
Refer to the VG7000 Series Bronze Control

important product application informaiton.
all valve sizes available with brass trim or

stainless steel trim for use in saturated
steam applications up to 100 psig
Features
Repair Information
If the VG7000 Valve fails to operate within its

specifications, refer to the VG7000 Series
Bronze Control Valves Product Bulletin (LIT977140) for repair information.
valves available in 1/2 through 2 in. sizes

with several styles of electric and
pneumatic actuators offers a broad
selection to choose from
complies with ANSI Class 250 (pressure/
temperature) standard
To Order
Specify the code number from the selection
charts on the following pages.
Selection Charts
VG7000 Series Valve Bodies (Part 1 of 2)
Valve
Cv
Size, in.
NPT
Union
Sweat
End Connections1
Union
Sweat
(3/8 in.
Copper
Tubing)
Union
Sweat
(3/4 in.
Copper
Tubing)
Union
Globe
Union
Angle
NPT
Two-Way Push-Down-to-Close
Brass Trim
Stainless
Steel Trim
1/2
0.73
VG7241CT
VG7281CT
VG7271CT
VG7291CT
VG7251CT
VG7551CT
1/2
1.8
VG7241ET
VG7281ET
VG7271ET
VG7291ET
VG7251ET
VG7551ET
VG7243ET
1/2
4.6
VG7241GT
VG7281GT
VG7271GT
VG7291GT
VG7251GT
VG7551GT
VG7243GT
3/4
7.3
VG7241LT
VG7281LT
---
---
VG7251LT
VG7551LT
VG7243LT
11.6
VG7241NT
VG7281NT
---
---
VG7251NT
VG7551NT
VG7243NT
1-1/4
18.5
VG7241PT
VG7281PT
---
---
VG7251PT
VG7551PT
VG7243PT
1-1/2
28.9
VG7241RT
VG7281RT
---
---
VG7251RT
VG7551RT
VG7243RT
46.2
VG7241ST
VG7281ST
---
---
---
---
1-1/2
28.9
46.2
3/8 in. M Stem Only Available in 1-1/2 and 2 in. NPT Stainless Steel Trim
VG7243CT
VG7243ST
VG7243RM
VG7243SM
Two-Way Push-Down-to-Open
Brass Trim
Stainless
Steel Trim
1/2
0.73
VG7441CT
VG7481CT
VG7471CT
VG7491CT
VG7451CT
---
1/2
1.8
VG7441ET
VG7481ET
VG7471ET
VG7491ET
VG7451ET
---
VG7443ET
1/2
4.6
VG7441GT
VG7481GT
VG7471GT
VG7491GT
VG7451GT
---
VG7443GT
3/4
7.3
VG7441LT
VG7481LT
---
---
---
---
VG7443LT
11.6
VG7441NT
VG7481NT
---
---
---
---
VG7443NT
1-1/4
18.5
VG7441PT
VG7481PT
---
---
---
---
VG7443PT
1-1/2
28.9
VG7441RT
VG7481RT
---
---
---
---
VG7443RT
46.2
VG7441ST
VG7481ST
---
---
---
---
1-1/2
28.9
46.2
VG7443CT
VG7443ST
VG7443RM
VG7443SM
1 of 6
Bronze Globe Valves for Assembly in the Field (Continued)

Valve
Cv
Size, in.
NPT
Union
Sweat
End Connections1
Union
Sweat
(3/8 in.
Copper
Tubing)
Union
Sweat
(3/4 in.
Copper
Tubing)
Union
Globe
Union
Angle
NPT
Three-Way Mixing
Brass Trim
Stainless
Steel Trim
1/2
0.73
VG7842CT
VG7882CT
VG7872CT
VG7892CT
---
---
1/2
1.8
VG7842ET
VG7882ET
VG7872ET
VG7892ET
---
---
VG7844CT
VG7844ET
1/2
4.6
VG7842GT
VG7882GT
VG7872GT
VG7892GT
---
---
VG7844GT
3/4
7.3
VG7842LT
VG7882LT
---
---
---
---
VG7844LT
11.6
VG7842NT
VG7882NT
---
---
---
---
VG7844NT
1-1/4
18.5
VG7842PT
VG7882PT
---
---
---
---
VG7844PT
1-1/2
28.9
VG7842RT
VG7882RT
---
---
---
---
VG7844RT
46.2
VG7842ST
VG7882ST
---
---
---
---
1-1/2
28.9
46.2
VG7844ST
VG7844RM
VG7844SM
1. All actuators except MP84 Series use the 1/4 in. T stem. The MP84 Series pneumatic actuators require the 3/8 in. M stem.
Pneumatic Actuators for VG7000 Series Brass Trim Valve Bodies (Part 1 of 2)
Actuator
V-3801-8001
V-3000-8011
Code
Exposed Spring
Number
V-3000-8003
Enclosed Spring1
Temperature
Range
Spring Range
35 to 248F (2 to 120C),
15 psig Saturated Steam
3 to 6
4 to 8
35 to 284F (2 to 140C),
9 to 13
3 to 6
4 to 8
Valve Size
1 and
1-1/4 in.
MP823C00 (3 to 7)
MP823D00 (4 to 8)
MP823E00 (9 to 13)
1-1/2
and 2 in.
35 to 284F (2 to 140C),
9 to 13
3 to 7
4 to 8
---
---
9 to 13
Mounting Kit
1/2 and 3/4 in.
VG70001010
VG70001011
VG70001012
VG70001001
VG70001002
VG70001003
1 and 1-1/4 in.
---
---
---
VG70001004
VG70001005
VG70001006
1-1/2 and 2 in.
---
---
---
VG70001007
VG70001008
VG70001009
Positioner
Size, in.
MP822C00 (3 to 7)
MP822D00 (4 to 8)
MP822E00 (9 to 13)
Not Available
MP8000-6702
V-9502-90 (V-3000-8011 Only)
Cv
---
V-9502-95
Closeoff Pressure
Two-Way Normally Open
1/2
0.73
186
157
84
365
339
191
---
---
---
1/2
1.8
186
157
84
365
339
191
---
---
---
1/2
4.6
105
89
48
225
192
108
---
---
---
3/4
7.3
67
56
30
144
122
69
---
---
--148
11.6
---
---
---
90
76
42
279
257
1-1/4
18.5
---
---
---
55
47
26
170
157
90
1-1/2
28.9
---
---
---
35
30
16
109
100
58
46.2
---
---
---
22
19
11
70
64
37
Two-Way Normally Closed

1/2
0.73
37
57
158
100
142
348
---
---
---
1/2
1.8
37
57
158
100
142
348
---
---
---
1/2
4.6
18
28
76
49
68
168
---
---
---
3/4
7.3
11
16
45
29
41
100
---
---
---
11.6
---
---
---
17
25
65
70
96
223
1-1/4
18.5
---
---
---
10
14
37
40
55
128
1-1/2
28.9
---
---
---
23
25
34
79
2 of 6

Actuator
V-3801-8001
V-3000-8011
Code
Exposed Spring
Number
V-3000-8003
Enclosed Spring1
Temperature
Range
Spring Range
35 to 248F (2 to 120C),
3 to 6
4 to 8
9 to 13
35 to 284F (2 to 140C),
3 to 6
4 to 8
Valve Size
1-1/2
and 2 in.
35 to 284F (2 to 140C),
3 to 7
4 to 8
---
---
VG70001011
VG70001012
VG70001001
VG70001002
VG70001003
1 and 1-1/4 in.
---
---
---
VG70001004
VG70001005
VG70001006
1-1/2 and 2 in.
---
---
---
VG70001007
VG70001008
VG70001009
Positioner
Not Available
9 to 13
---
MP8000-6702
V-9502-90 (V-3000-8011 Only)
Cv
46.2
MP823C00 (3 to 7)
MP823D00 (4 to 8)
MP823E00 (9 to 13)
9 to 13
VG70001010
1 and
1-1/4 in.
Mounting Kit
1/2 and 3/4 in.
Size, in.
MP822C00 (3 to 7)
MP822D00 (4 to 8)
MP822E00 (9 to 13)
V-9502-95
Closeoff Pressure
---
---
---
14
16
21
50
---
Three-Way Mixing
1/2
0.73
186 / 37
157 / 57
84 / 158
365 / 100
339 / 142
191 / 348
---
---
1/2
1.8
186 / 37
157 / 57
84 / 158
365 / 100
339 / 142
191 / 348
---
---
---
1/2
4.6
105 / 18
89 / 28
48 / 76
225 / 49
192 / 68
108 / 168
---
---
---
3/4
7.3
67 / 11
56 / 16
30 / 45
144 / 29
122 / 41
69 / 100
---
---
---
11.6
---
---
---
90 / 17
76 / 25
42 / 65
279 / 70
257 / 96
148 / 223
1-1/4
18.5
---
---
---
55 / 10
47 / 14
26 / 37
170 / 40
157 / 55
90 / 128
1-1/2
28.9
---
---
---
35 / 6
30 / 9
16 / 23
109 / 25
100 / 34
58 / 79
46.2
---
---
---
22 / 4
19 / 6
11 / 14
70 / 16
64 / 21
37 / 50
1. V-3000-8003 Actuators with enclosed springs are used in applications where the valve is exposed to the public, to prevent pinched fingers. Typical applications
include control of hot water or steam radiators.
Pneumatic Actuators for VG7000 Series Stainless Steel Trim Valve Bodies (Part 1 of 2)
Actuator
V-3000-8011
MP821C00 (3 to 7)
1/2 and
Code
Exposed Spring
MP821D00 (4 to 8)
3/4 in.
Number
V-3000-8003
MP821E00 (9 to 13)
Enclosed Spring1
MP822C00 (3 to 7)
1 and
MP822D00 (4 to 8)
1-1/4 in.
MP822E00 (9 to 13)
MP823C00 (3 to 7)
MP823D00 (4 to 8)
MP823E00 (9 to 13)
Temperature
Range
Spring Range
35 to 338F (2 to 170C),
3 to 6
4 to 8
9 to 13
3 to 6
4 to 8
VG70001001
VG70001002
VG70001003
MP8000-6701
1 and 1-1/4 in.
VG70001004
VG70001005
VG70001006
MP8000-6702
1-1/2 and 2 in.
VG70001007
VG70001008
VG70001009
Positioner
9 to 13
35 to 338F (2 to 140C),
3 to 7
4 to 8
9 to 13
Mounting Kit
1/2 and 3/4 in.
Size, in.
1-1/2
and 2 in.
1-1/2
and 2 in.
35 to 338F (2 to 170C),
Valve Size
MP843C00 (3 to 7)
MP843D00 (4 to 8)
MP843E00 (9 to 13)
Not Recommended
MP8000-6703
V-9502-90 (V-3000-8011 Only)
V-9502-95
Cv
V-9502-95
Closeoff Pressure
1/2
0.73
299
255
143
308
308
308
---
---
---
1/2
1.8
299
255
143
308
308
308
---
---
---
1/2
4.6
169
144
81
308
308
275
---
---
---
3/4
7.3
108
92
52
304
304
175
---
---
---
3 of 6
Actuator
V-3000-8011
MP821C00 (3 to 7)
1/2 and
Code
Exposed Spring
MP821D00 (4 to 8)
3/4 in.
Number
V-3000-8003
MP821E00 (9 to 13)
Enclosed Spring1
MP822C00 (3 to 7)
1 and
MP822D00 (4 to 8)
1-1/4 in.
MP822E00 (9 to 13)
MP823C00 (3 to 7)
MP823D00 (4 to 8)
MP823E00 (9 to 13)
Temperature
Range
Spring Range
35 to 338F (2 to 170C),
3 to 6
4 to 8
9 to 13
3 to 6
4 to 8
VG70001001
VG70001002
VG70001003
MP8000-6701
1 and 1-1/4 in.
VG70001004
VG70001005
VG70001006
MP8000-6702
1-1/2 and 2 in.
VG70001007
VG70001008
VG70001009
Positioner
9 to 13
35 to 338F (2 to 140C),
3 to 7
4 to 8
9 to 13
Mounting Kit
1/2 and 3/4 in.
Size, in.
1-1/2
and 2 in.
1-1/2
and 2 in.
35 to 338F (2 to 170C),
Valve Size
MP843C00 (3 to 7)
MP843D00 (4 to 8)
MP843E00 (9 to 13)
Not Recommended
MP8000-6703
V-9502-90 (V-3000-8011 Only)
V-9502-95
Cv
V-9502-95
Closeoff Pressure
11.6
67
57
32
209
193
111
---
---
---
1-1/4
18.5
41
35
19
128
118
68
---
---
---
1-1/2
28.9
---
---
---
82
75
43
165
152
88
46.2
---
---
---
52
48
28
106
97
56

1/2
0.73
75
106
261
280
308
308
---
---
---
1/2
1.8
75
106
261
280
308
308
---
---
---
1/2
4.6
36
51
126
135
183
308
---
---
---
3/4
7.3
22
31
75
81
109
252
---
---
---
11.6
13
19
49
53
72
168
---
---
---
1-1/4
18.5
11
28
30
41
96
---
---
---
1-1/2
28.9
---
---
---
19
25
59
39
53
121
46.2
---
---
---
12
16
37
24
33
76
Three-Way Mixing
1/2
0.73
299 / 75
255 / 106
143 / 261
308 / 280
308 / 308
308 / 308
---
---
---
1/2
1.8
299 / 75
255 / 106
143 / 261
308 / 280
308 / 308
308 / 308
---
---
---
1/2
4.6
169 / 36
144 / 51
81 / 126
308 / 135
308 / 183
275 / 308
---
---
---
3/4
7.3
108 / 22
92 / 31
52 / 75
304 / 81
304 / 109
175 / 252
---
---
---
11.6
67 / 13
57 / 19
32 / 49
209 / 53
193 / 72
111 / 168
---
---
---
1-1/4
18.5
41 / 7
35 / 11
19 / 28
128 / 30
118 / 41
68 / 96
---
---
---
1-1/2
28.9
---
---
---
82 / 19
75 / 25
43 / 59
165 / 39
152 / 53
88 / 121
46.2
---
---
---
52 / 12
48 / 16
28 / 37
106 / 24
97 / 33
56 / 76
4 of 6
Electric Actuators for VG7000 Series Brass Trim and Stainless Steel Trim Valve Bodies
Actuator
VA-7150-1001
VA-7200-1001
M9220-BGA-3
Code
On/Off (Floating)
On/Off (Floating)
On/Off (Floating)
Number
VA-7152-1001
VA-7202-1001
M9220-GGA-3
0 to 10 VDC Proportional
VA-7153-1001
On/Off (Floating)
w/Feedback
VA-7203-1001
On/Off (Floating)
w/Feedback
Style
Spring Return
Brass Trim: 35 to 284F (2 to 140C), 38 psig Saturated Steam

Stainless Steel Trim: 35 to 338F (2 to 170C), 100 psig Saturated Steam
Linkage
None
None
Stem Type
VA-4233-BGA-2
On/Off
VA-4233-GGA-2
Proportional
Non-Spring Return
Temperature
Range
Size, in.
VA-4233-AGA-2
Floating
Brass or Stainless Steel

Trim:
35 to 250F (2 to 121C)
M9000-500
None
Requires T Stem
Cv
Closeoff Pressure
Brass
Trim
Stainless
Steel Trim
Brass
Trim
Stainless
Steel Trim
Brass
Trim
Stainless
Steel Trim
Brass
Trim
Stainless
Steel Trim
1/2
0.73
345
239
---
308
345
308
345
230
1/2
1.8
345
239
---
308
345
308
345
230
130
1/2
4.6
216
135
---
278
345
283
208
3/4
7.3
138
86
---
177
289
180
132
82
11.6
86
54
179
112
182
114
63
39
24
1-1/4
18.5
52
33
109
68
111
70
38
1-1/2
28.9
34
21
70
44
71
45
46.2
21
13
45
28
46
28
1/2
0.73
345
308
---
308
345
308
345
224
1/2
1.8
345
308
---
308
345
308
345
224
108
1/2
4.6
257
161
---
308
345
308
173
3/4
7.3
153
96
---
197
321
194
103
64
11.6
100
63
209
131
213
131
66
41
24
1-1/4
18.5
57
36
120
75
122
75
38
1-1/2
28.9
36
22
74
46
76
46
46.2
22
14
46
29
47
29
1/2
0.73
345 / 345
239 / 308
---
308 / 308
345 / 345
308 / 308
345 / 345
230 / 224
1/2
1.8
345 / 345
239 / 308
---
308 / 308
345 / 345
308 / 308
345 / 345
230 / 224
1/2
4.6
216 / 257
135 / 161
---
278 / 308
345 / 345
283 / 308
208 / 173
130 / 108
3/4
7.3
138 / 153
86 / 96
---
177 / 197
289 / 321
180 / 194
132 / 103
82 / 64
11.6
86 / 100
54 / 63
179 / 209
112 / 131
182 / 213
114 / 131
63 / 66
39 / 41
1-1/4
18.5
52 / 57
33 / 36
109 / 120
68 / 75
111 / 122
70 / 75
38 / 38
24 / 24
1-1/2
28.9
34 / 36
21 / 22
70 / 74
44 / 46
71 / 76
45 / 46
46.2
21 / 22
13 / 14
45 / 46
28 / 29
46 / 47
28 / 29
Three-Way Mixing
5 of 6
VG7000 Series Valve Bodies, Two-Way and Three-Way
Service
Valve Body Sizes

Available
Steam, Hot Water, and Chilled Water with up to 50% Glycol Solution (Proper water treatment is
recommended for long service life; refer to standard VDI 2035.)
1/2 in. (DN15)
Cv
Kv
0.73, 1.8, 4.6
0.63, 1.6, 4
3/4 in. (DN20)
7.3
6.3
1 in. (DN25)
11.6
10
1-1/4 in. (DN32)
18.5
16
1-1/2 in. (DN40)
28.9
25
2 in. (DN50)
46.2
Stem Travel
1 and 1-1/4 in.
1-1/2 and 2 in.
5/16 in.
1/2 in.
3/4 in.
Two-Way and Three-Way

Brass Trim
End Connections
40
1/2 and 3/4 in.
Stainless Steel Trim
NPT, Union Sweat, Globe & Angle
NPT
Body
Cast Bronze C84400
Cast Bronze C83600
Stem
Stainless Steel
Stainless Steel
Plug
Brass
Stainless Steel
Seat
3/4 through 2 in.: Machined from Body

1/2 in.: Brass Seat
Stainless Steel
Replaceable Seat
Disk
EPDM
Stainless Steel
Packing
Self-Adjusting EPT U-Cups
Spring-Loaded PTFE
Flow
Characteristic
Two-Way
Equal Percentage
Equal Percentage
Three-Way
Linear
Linear
Ratings
Body
ANSI Class 2501
ANSI Class 2502
Materials
Leakage (Percent of Maximum 0.01%

Flow)
0.05%
Fluid Temperature, Body Only 35 to 284F (2 to 140C)
35 to 338F (2 to 170C)
Maximum Steam Pressure,

Saturated Steam
38 psig (262 kPa)
100 psig (690 kPa)
Maximum Pressure Drop,

Valve Open
35 psig
35 psig
1. 400 psig (2,756 kPa) for fluid temperatures between 35 and 150F (2 and 66C); decreasing to 365 psig (2,515 kPa) at 248F (120C).
3. See recommended actuator tables for ambient limitations due to the actuator.
6 of 6

VG7000 Series
Bronze Globe Valves for Assembly in the Field

Description
The VG7000 Series Bronze Valves accurately

regulate the flow of water or steam in response
to the demand of a controller in heating,
ventilating, and air conditioning systems.
These valves are available in normally open,
normally closed, and three-way mixing
configurations. Both electric and pneumatic
actuators are available.
every valve tested for tight shutoff,

ensuring occupant comfort and energy
conservation
uses standard Johnson Controls ring
pack packing, providing industry-leading
reliability and operating life
complete actuator interchangeability,

allowing easy field retrofit or mounting using
standardized mounting kits
Refer to the VG7000 Series Bronze Control

important product application informaiton.
all valve sizes available with brass trim or

stainless steel trim for use in saturated
steam applications up to 100 psig
Features
Repair Information
If the VG7000 Valve fails to operate within its

specifications, refer to the VG7000 Series
Bronze Control Valves Product Bulletin (LIT977140) for repair information.
valves available in 1/2 through 2 in. sizes

with several styles of electric and
pneumatic actuators offers a broad
selection to choose from
complies with ANSI Class 250 (pressure/
temperature) standard
To Order
charts on the following pages.
Selection Charts
Valve
Cv
Size, in.
NPT
Union
Sweat
End Connections1
Union
Sweat
(3/8 in.
Copper
Tubing)
Union
Sweat
(3/4 in.
Copper
Tubing)
Union
Globe
Union
Angle
NPT
Brass Trim
Stainless
Steel Trim
1/2
0.73
VG7241CT
VG7281CT
VG7271CT
VG7291CT
VG7251CT
VG7551CT
1/2
1.8
VG7241ET
VG7281ET
VG7271ET
VG7291ET
VG7251ET
VG7551ET
VG7243ET
1/2
4.6
VG7241GT
VG7281GT
VG7271GT
VG7291GT
VG7251GT
VG7551GT
VG7243GT
3/4
7.3
VG7241LT
VG7281LT
---
---
VG7251LT
VG7551LT
VG7243LT
11.6
VG7241NT
VG7281NT
---
---
VG7251NT
VG7551NT
VG7243NT
1-1/4
18.5
VG7241PT
VG7281PT
---
---
VG7251PT
VG7551PT
VG7243PT
1-1/2
28.9
VG7241RT
VG7281RT
---
---
VG7251RT
VG7551RT
VG7243RT
46.2
VG7241ST
VG7281ST
---
---
---
---
1-1/2
28.9
46.2
VG7243CT
VG7243ST
VG7243RM
VG7243SM
Brass Trim
Stainless
Steel Trim
1/2
0.73
VG7441CT
VG7481CT
VG7471CT
VG7491CT
VG7451CT
---
1/2
1.8
VG7441ET
VG7481ET
VG7471ET
VG7491ET
VG7451ET
---
VG7443ET
1/2
4.6
VG7441GT
VG7481GT
VG7471GT
VG7491GT
VG7451GT
---
VG7443GT
3/4
7.3
VG7441LT
VG7481LT
---
---
---
---
VG7443LT
11.6
VG7441NT
VG7481NT
---
---
---
---
VG7443NT
1-1/4
18.5
VG7441PT
VG7481PT
---
---
---
---
VG7443PT
1-1/2
28.9
VG7441RT
VG7481RT
---
---
---
---
VG7443RT
46.2
VG7441ST
VG7481ST
---
---
---
---
1-1/2
28.9
46.2
VG7443CT
VG7443ST
VG7443RM
VG7443SM
1 of 6

Valve
Cv
Size, in.
NPT
Union
Sweat
End Connections1
Union
Sweat
(3/8 in.
Copper
Tubing)
Union
Sweat
(3/4 in.
Copper
Tubing)
Union
Globe
Union
Angle
NPT
Three-Way Mixing
Brass Trim
Stainless
Steel Trim
1/2
0.73
VG7842CT
VG7882CT
VG7872CT
VG7892CT
---
---
1/2
1.8
VG7842ET
VG7882ET
VG7872ET
VG7892ET
---
---
VG7844CT
VG7844ET
1/2
4.6
VG7842GT
VG7882GT
VG7872GT
VG7892GT
---
---
VG7844GT
3/4
7.3
VG7842LT
VG7882LT
---
---
---
---
VG7844LT
11.6
VG7842NT
VG7882NT
---
---
---
---
VG7844NT
1-1/4
18.5
VG7842PT
VG7882PT
---
---
---
---
VG7844PT
1-1/2
28.9
VG7842RT
VG7882RT
---
---
---
---
VG7844RT
46.2
VG7842ST
VG7882ST
---
---
---
---
1-1/2
28.9
46.2
VG7844ST
VG7844RM
VG7844SM
1. All actuators except MP84 Series use the 1/4 in. T stem. The MP84 Series pneumatic actuators require the 3/8 in. M stem.
Actuator
V-3801-8001
V-3000-8011
Code
Exposed Spring
Number
V-3000-8003
Enclosed Spring1
Temperature
Range
Spring Range
35 to 248F (2 to 120C),
3 to 6
4 to 8
35 to 284F (2 to 140C),
9 to 13
3 to 6
4 to 8
Valve Size
1 and
1-1/4 in.
MP823C00 (3 to 7)
MP823D00 (4 to 8)
MP823E00 (9 to 13)
1-1/2
and 2 in.
35 to 284F (2 to 140C),
9 to 13
3 to 7
4 to 8
---
---
9 to 13
Mounting Kit
1/2 and 3/4 in.
VG70001010
VG70001011
VG70001012
VG70001001
VG70001002
VG70001003
1 and 1-1/4 in.
---
---
---
VG70001004
VG70001005
VG70001006
1-1/2 and 2 in.
---
---
---
VG70001007
VG70001008
VG70001009
Positioner
Size, in.
MP822C00 (3 to 7)
MP822D00 (4 to 8)
MP822E00 (9 to 13)
Not Available
MP8000-6702
V-9502-90 (V-3000-8011 Only)
Cv
---
V-9502-95
Closeoff Pressure
1/2
0.73
186
157
84
365
339
191
---
---
---
1/2
1.8
186
157
84
365
339
191
---
---
---
1/2
4.6
105
89
48
225
192
108
---
---
---
3/4
7.3
67
56
30
144
122
69
---
---
--148
11.6
---
---
---
90
76
42
279
257
1-1/4
18.5
---
---
---
55
47
26
170
157
90
1-1/2
28.9
---
---
---
35
30
16
109
100
58
46.2
---
---
---
22
19
11
70
64
37

1/2
0.73
37
57
158
100
142
348
---
---
---
1/2
1.8
37
57
158
100
142
348
---
---
---
1/2
4.6
18
28
76
49
68
168
---
---
---
3/4
7.3
11
16
45
29
41
100
---
---
---
11.6
---
---
---
17
25
65
70
96
223
1-1/4
18.5
---
---
---
10
14
37
40
55
128
1-1/2
28.9
---
---
---
23
25
34
79
2 of 6

Actuator
V-3801-8001
V-3000-8011
Code
Exposed Spring
Number
V-3000-8003
Enclosed Spring1
Temperature
Range
Spring Range
35 to 248F (2 to 120C),
3 to 6
4 to 8
9 to 13
35 to 284F (2 to 140C),
3 to 6
4 to 8
Valve Size
1-1/2
and 2 in.
35 to 284F (2 to 140C),
3 to 7
4 to 8
---
---
VG70001011
VG70001012
VG70001001
VG70001002
VG70001003
1 and 1-1/4 in.
---
---
---
VG70001004
VG70001005
VG70001006
1-1/2 and 2 in.
---
---
---
VG70001007
VG70001008
VG70001009
Positioner
Not Available
9 to 13
---
MP8000-6702
V-9502-90 (V-3000-8011 Only)
Cv
46.2
MP823C00 (3 to 7)
MP823D00 (4 to 8)
MP823E00 (9 to 13)
9 to 13
VG70001010
1 and
1-1/4 in.
Mounting Kit
1/2 and 3/4 in.
Size, in.
MP822C00 (3 to 7)
MP822D00 (4 to 8)
MP822E00 (9 to 13)
V-9502-95
Closeoff Pressure
---
---
---
14
16
21
50
---
Three-Way Mixing
1/2
0.73
186 / 37
157 / 57
84 / 158
365 / 100
339 / 142
191 / 348
---
---
1/2
1.8
186 / 37
157 / 57
84 / 158
365 / 100
339 / 142
191 / 348
---
---
---
1/2
4.6
105 / 18
89 / 28
48 / 76
225 / 49
192 / 68
108 / 168
---
---
---
3/4
7.3
67 / 11
56 / 16
30 / 45
144 / 29
122 / 41
69 / 100
---
---
---
11.6
---
---
---
90 / 17
76 / 25
42 / 65
279 / 70
257 / 96
148 / 223
1-1/4
18.5
---
---
---
55 / 10
47 / 14
26 / 37
170 / 40
157 / 55
90 / 128
1-1/2
28.9
---
---
---
35 / 6
30 / 9
16 / 23
109 / 25
100 / 34
58 / 79
46.2
---
---
---
22 / 4
19 / 6
11 / 14
70 / 16
64 / 21
37 / 50
Actuator
V-3000-8011
MP821C00 (3 to 7)
1/2 and
Code
Exposed Spring
MP821D00 (4 to 8)
3/4 in.
Number
V-3000-8003
MP821E00 (9 to 13)
Enclosed Spring1
MP822C00 (3 to 7)
1 and
MP822D00 (4 to 8)
1-1/4 in.
MP822E00 (9 to 13)
MP823C00 (3 to 7)
MP823D00 (4 to 8)
MP823E00 (9 to 13)
Temperature
Range
Spring Range
35 to 338F (2 to 170C),
3 to 6
4 to 8
9 to 13
3 to 6
4 to 8
VG70001001
VG70001002
VG70001003
MP8000-6701
1 and 1-1/4 in.
VG70001004
VG70001005
VG70001006
MP8000-6702
1-1/2 and 2 in.
VG70001007
VG70001008
VG70001009
Positioner
9 to 13
35 to 338F (2 to 140C),
3 to 7
4 to 8
9 to 13
Mounting Kit
1/2 and 3/4 in.
Size, in.
1-1/2
and 2 in.
1-1/2
and 2 in.
35 to 338F (2 to 170C),
Valve Size
MP843C00 (3 to 7)
MP843D00 (4 to 8)
MP843E00 (9 to 13)
Not Recommended
MP8000-6703
V-9502-90 (V-3000-8011 Only)
V-9502-95
Cv
V-9502-95
Closeoff Pressure
1/2
0.73
299
255
143
308
308
308
---
---
---
1/2
1.8
299
255
143
308
308
308
---
---
---
1/2
4.6
169
144
81
308
308
275
---
---
---
3/4
7.3
108
92
52
304
304
175
---
---
---
3 of 6
Actuator
V-3000-8011
MP821C00 (3 to 7)
1/2 and
Code
Exposed Spring
MP821D00 (4 to 8)
3/4 in.
Number
V-3000-8003
MP821E00 (9 to 13)
Enclosed Spring1
MP822C00 (3 to 7)
1 and
MP822D00 (4 to 8)
1-1/4 in.
MP822E00 (9 to 13)
MP823C00 (3 to 7)
MP823D00 (4 to 8)
MP823E00 (9 to 13)
Temperature
Range
Spring Range
35 to 338F (2 to 170C),
3 to 6
4 to 8
9 to 13
3 to 6
4 to 8
VG70001001
VG70001002
VG70001003
MP8000-6701
1 and 1-1/4 in.
VG70001004
VG70001005
VG70001006
MP8000-6702
1-1/2 and 2 in.
VG70001007
VG70001008
VG70001009
Positioner
9 to 13
35 to 338F (2 to 140C),
3 to 7
4 to 8
9 to 13
Mounting Kit
1/2 and 3/4 in.
Size, in.
1-1/2
and 2 in.
1-1/2
and 2 in.
35 to 338F (2 to 170C),
Valve Size
MP843C00 (3 to 7)
MP843D00 (4 to 8)
MP843E00 (9 to 13)
Not Recommended
MP8000-6703
V-9502-90 (V-3000-8011 Only)
V-9502-95
Cv
V-9502-95
Closeoff Pressure
11.6
67
57
32
209
193
111
---
---
---
1-1/4
18.5
41
35
19
128
118
68
---
---
---
1-1/2
28.9
---
---
---
82
75
43
165
152
88
46.2
---
---
---
52
48
28
106
97
56

1/2
0.73
75
106
261
280
308
308
---
---
---
1/2
1.8
75
106
261
280
308
308
---
---
---
1/2
4.6
36
51
126
135
183
308
---
---
---
3/4
7.3
22
31
75
81
109
252
---
---
---
11.6
13
19
49
53
72
168
---
---
---
1-1/4
18.5
11
28
30
41
96
---
---
---
1-1/2
28.9
---
---
---
19
25
59
39
53
121
46.2
---
---
---
12
16
37
24
33
76
Three-Way Mixing
1/2
0.73
299 / 75
255 / 106
143 / 261
308 / 280
308 / 308
308 / 308
---
---
---
1/2
1.8
299 / 75
255 / 106
143 / 261
308 / 280
308 / 308
308 / 308
---
---
---
1/2
4.6
169 / 36
144 / 51
81 / 126
308 / 135
308 / 183
275 / 308
---
---
---
3/4
7.3
108 / 22
92 / 31
52 / 75
304 / 81
304 / 109
175 / 252
---
---
---
11.6
67 / 13
57 / 19
32 / 49
209 / 53
193 / 72
111 / 168
---
---
---
1-1/4
18.5
41 / 7
35 / 11
19 / 28
128 / 30
118 / 41
68 / 96
---
---
---
1-1/2
28.9
---
---
---
82 / 19
75 / 25
43 / 59
165 / 39
152 / 53
88 / 121
46.2
---
---
---
52 / 12
48 / 16
28 / 37
106 / 24
97 / 33
56 / 76
4 of 6
Electric Actuators for VG7000 Series Brass Trim and Stainless Steel Trim Valve Bodies
Actuator
VA-7150-1001
VA-7200-1001
M9220-BGA-3
Code
On/Off (Floating)
On/Off (Floating)
On/Off (Floating)
Number
VA-7152-1001
VA-7202-1001
M9220-GGA-3
VA-7153-1001
On/Off (Floating)
w/Feedback
VA-7203-1001
On/Off (Floating)
w/Feedback
Style
Spring Return
Brass Trim: 35 to 284F (2 to 140C), 38 psig Saturated Steam

Stainless Steel Trim: 35 to 338F (2 to 170C), 100 psig Saturated Steam
Linkage
None
None
Stem Type
VA-4233-BGA-2
On/Off
VA-4233-GGA-2
Proportional
Non-Spring Return
Temperature
Range
Size, in.
VA-4233-AGA-2
Floating
Brass or Stainless Steel

Trim:
35 to 250F (2 to 121C)
M9000-500
None
Requires T Stem
Cv
Closeoff Pressure
Brass
Trim
Stainless
Steel Trim
Brass
Trim
Stainless
Steel Trim
Brass
Trim
Stainless
Steel Trim
Brass
Trim
Stainless
Steel Trim
1/2
0.73
345
239
---
308
345
308
345
230
1/2
1.8
345
239
---
308
345
308
345
230
130
1/2
4.6
216
135
---
278
345
283
208
3/4
7.3
138
86
---
177
289
180
132
82
11.6
86
54
179
112
182
114
63
39
24
1-1/4
18.5
52
33
109
68
111
70
38
1-1/2
28.9
34
21
70
44
71
45
46.2
21
13
45
28
46
28
1/2
0.73
345
308
---
308
345
308
345
224
1/2
1.8
345
308
---
308
345
308
345
224
108
1/2
4.6
257
161
---
308
345
308
173
3/4
7.3
153
96
---
197
321
194
103
64
11.6
100
63
209
131
213
131
66
41
24
1-1/4
18.5
57
36
120
75
122
75
38
1-1/2
28.9
36
22
74
46
76
46
46.2
22
14
46
29
47
29
1/2
0.73
345 / 345
239 / 308
---
308 / 308
345 / 345
308 / 308
345 / 345
230 / 224
1/2
1.8
345 / 345
239 / 308
---
308 / 308
345 / 345
308 / 308
345 / 345
230 / 224
1/2
4.6
216 / 257
135 / 161
---
278 / 308
345 / 345
283 / 308
208 / 173
130 / 108
3/4
7.3
138 / 153
86 / 96
---
177 / 197
289 / 321
180 / 194
132 / 103
82 / 64
11.6
86 / 100
54 / 63
179 / 209
112 / 131
182 / 213
114 / 131
63 / 66
39 / 41
1-1/4
18.5
52 / 57
33 / 36
109 / 120
68 / 75
111 / 122
70 / 75
38 / 38
24 / 24
1-1/2
28.9
34 / 36
21 / 22
70 / 74
44 / 46
71 / 76
45 / 46
46.2
21 / 22
13 / 14
45 / 46
28 / 29
46 / 47
28 / 29
Three-Way Mixing
5 of 6
VG7000 Series Valve Bodies, Two-Way and Three-Way
Service
Valve Body Sizes

Available
Steam, Hot Water, and Chilled Water with up to 50% Glycol Solution (Proper water treatment is
recommended for long service life; refer to standard VDI 2035.)
1/2 in. (DN15)
Cv
Kv
0.73, 1.8, 4.6
0.63, 1.6, 4
3/4 in. (DN20)
7.3
6.3
1 in. (DN25)
11.6
10
1-1/4 in. (DN32)
18.5
16
1-1/2 in. (DN40)
28.9
25
2 in. (DN50)
46.2
Stem Travel
1 and 1-1/4 in.
1-1/2 and 2 in.
5/16 in.
1/2 in.
3/4 in.
Two-Way and Three-Way

Brass Trim
End Connections
40
1/2 and 3/4 in.
Stainless Steel Trim
NPT, Union Sweat, Globe & Angle
NPT
Body
Cast Bronze C84400
Cast Bronze C83600
Stem
Stainless Steel
Stainless Steel
Plug
Brass
Stainless Steel
Seat
3/4 through 2 in.: Machined from Body

1/2 in.: Brass Seat
Stainless Steel
Replaceable Seat
Disk
EPDM
Stainless Steel
Packing
Self-Adjusting EPT U-Cups
Spring-Loaded PTFE
Flow
Characteristic
Two-Way
Equal Percentage
Equal Percentage
Three-Way
Linear
Linear
Ratings
Body
ANSI Class 2501
ANSI Class 2502
Materials
Leakage (Percent of Maximum 0.01%

Flow)
0.05%
Fluid Temperature, Body Only 35 to 284F (2 to 140C)
35 to 338F (2 to 170C)
Maximum Steam Pressure,

Saturated Steam
38 psig (262 kPa)
100 psig (690 kPa)
Maximum Pressure Drop,

Valve Open
35 psig
35 psig
3. See recommended actuator tables for ambient limitations due to the actuator.
6 of 6
VG7000 Series Bronze Control Valves

Product Bulletin
Code No. LIT-977140
VG7000 Series

Supersedes March 2001
VG7000 Series Bronze Control Valves are designed

primarily to regulate the flow of water and steam in
response to the demand of a controller in HVAC
systems. These valves are available in Normally Open
(N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.), and three-way mixing
configurations. Both electric and pneumatic actuators
are available for factory or field mounting.
Figure 1: VG7000 Series Bronze Control Valves

Features
Benefits
Complete Family of 1/2 through

2 in. Bronze Valves, Brass and
Stainless Steel Trim, with Several
Styles of Electric and Pneumatic
Actuators
Offers a broad selection to choose from, including electric spring return actuators, a
true 1-1/4 in. valve body, a 3/4 in. valve with small oval top actuator, and Stainless
Steel (SS) trim capable of 100 psig saturated steam.
Flexible Features and Options

Ordering Matrix
Engineer to suit your specific application from thousands of easy-to-select,

factory-assembled combinations.
Uses Standard Johnson Controls

Ring Pack Packings
Provides industry-leading reliability and operating life.
Every Valve Tested for Tight

Shutoff
Provides energy conservation and ensures occupant comfort.
Standard Bonnet and Stem Design
Allows easy field retrofit, easy field mounting, and interchangeability of actuators with
the use of standardized mounting kits.
VG7000 Series Bronze Control Valves Product Bulletin
Ordering Data
Table 2: Ordering Data VG7000 Series Bronze Control Valves1
V G
Valve Global
1 2 7
Product Family
7 = Cast Bronze
Body Type
2 = Two-Way, Normally Open/Push-Down-to-Close
3 2
4
4 = Two-Way, Normally Closed/Push-Down-to-Open

5 = Two-Way Angle, Normally Open/Push-Down-to-Close
8 = Three-Way Mixing
4
End
4 = Threaded (NPT)
Connections
5 = Union Globe/Union Angle (1/2 through 1-1/2 in. Body

Sizes, PDTC Only)
7 = Union Sweat, 3/8 in. Tubing (1/2 in. Body Size Only)
8 = Union Sweat, Standard Tubing
Trim and Flow

Characteristics
1 = Brass Equal Percentage (All Two-Way and 1/2 in.

Three-Way)
2 = Brass Linear (Three-Way Only)
3 = Stainless Steel Equal Percentage (Two-Way Only)
4 = Stainless Steel Linear (Three-Way Only)
Size and
C = 1/2 in., 0.73 Cv (0.63 Kv)
Cv (Kv)
E = 1/2 in., 1.8 Cv (1.6 Kv)

G = 1/2 in., 4.6 Cv (4.0 Kv)
L = 3/4 in., 7.3 Cv (6.3 Kv)
N = 1 in., 11.6 Cv (10.0 Kv)
P = 1-1/4 in., 18.5 Cv (16.0 Kv)
R = 1-1/2 in., 28.9 Cv (25.0 Kv)
S = 2 in., 46.2 Cv (40.0 Kv)
Stem Type
T = Standard Threaded Stem (All Except V-3801, MP84,

VA-8x2x)
S = Slotted Stem and Small Bonnet (Factory-Mounted
V-3801, VA-8x2x Only)
M = Large Threaded Stem (Factory-Mounted MP84 Only)
Actuator
+ = Factory-Mounted Actuator (See Table 3 and Table 4.)
Mounting
(Leave Fields 9 through 15 blank for valve without

factory-mounted actuator. Valve without factory-mounted
actuator is available with standard threaded stem only.)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11
12
13
V G 7 2 4 1 L T +
Valve
1.
Actuator
14
15
= Field
Example: Cast bronze valve, two-way, normally open/push-down-to-close,
threaded (NPT) end connections, brass trim, equal percentage,
3/4 in., 7.3 Cv, standard threaded stem.
See Table 3 when adding a factory-mounted pneumatic actuator to a valve body. See Table 4 when adding a
factory-mounted electric actuator to a valve body. For valid valve and actuator combinations, see Table 17 and
Table 18.
Table 3: Ordering Data Adding a Factory-Mounted Pneumatic Actuator1

V G 7 2 4 3 L T + 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11
12
13
V-3000/V-3801
Pneumatic
Actuator2
3801 = V-3801-8001 Small Oval Top (Slotted Stem Only)

3008 = V-3000-8011 Exposed
3003 = V-3000-8003 Enclosed
Spring Range
(V-3000/V-3801)
14
B = 3 to 6 psig (Suggested for N.O. Valves with Positioner)

D = 4 to 8 psig (Suggested for Three-Way Valves with
Positioner)
E = 9 to 13 psig (Suggested for N.C. Valves with
Positioner)
Accessories
(V-3000/V-3801)
15
8
10
11
P = V-9502 Positioner (Not Avail. with V-3801-8001 or

V-3000-8003)
Blank = None
MP8000 Series
Pneumatic
Actuator2
82 = MP82, 25 sq in. Spring-Return-Up (SS or Brass Trim)

84 = MP84, 50 sq in. Spring-Return-Up (SS Trim Only)
(Only spring-return-up models of MP8000 Series
Pneumatic Actuators are available factory-mounted to
VG7000 Series Bronze Control Valves.)
Stroke
(MP8000
Series)
12
1 = 5/16 in. (1/2 or 3/4 in. Valves with MP82 Actuator Only)
2 = 1/2 in. (1 or 1-1/4 in. Valves with MP82 Actuator Only)
3 = 3/4 in. (1-1/2 or 2 in. Valves with MP82 or MP84
Actuator)
Spring Range
(MP8000
Series)
13
C = 3 to 7 psig (Suggested for N.O. Valves with Positioner)

Positioner)
Positioner)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11
V G 7 2 4 3 L T + 8
Valve
14
15
Accessories
(MP8000
Series)
= Field
12
13
14
15
Actuator
00 = None
01 = V-9502 Positioner
Example: Cast bronze valve, two-way, normally open, threaded (NPT) end
connections, stainless steel trim, equal percentage, 3/4 in., 7.3 Cv, standard
threaded stem, MP82 Series Pneumatic Actuator, 5/16 in. stroke, 3 to 7 psig
spring range, with factory-mounted V-9502 Positioner.
1.
See Table 2 when ordering a valve body only. See Table 4 when adding a factory-mounted electric actuator to
a valve body. For valid valve and actuator combinations, see Table 17 and Table 18.
2.
Refer to the Actuator Product Bulletin or Product/Technical Bulletin.

V G 7 2 4 1 L T + 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11
12
13
VA-7150/
VA-7200
Electric
Actuator2, 3
7150 = VA-7150-1001 On/Off (Floating)

7152 = VA-7152-1001 Proportional, 0-10 VDC
7153 = VA-7153-1001 On/Off (Floating), Feedback
G
14
15
4
10
11
12
A
13
14
15
Voltage
(VA-7150/
VA-7200)
G = 24 VAC
Accessories
(VA-7150/
VA-7200)
Blank = None
VA-4233
Electric
Actuator2
Spring Return Up
Features
(VA-4233)4
423 = VA-4233-xGx-2, 24 VAC/VDC

AGA = Floating
AGC = Floating, 2 Aux. Sw.
BGA = On/Off
BGC = On/Off, 2 Aux. Sw.
GGA = Prop., 0-10 VDC, Feedback
GGC = Prop., 0-10 VDC, Feedback, 2 Aux. Sw.
10
11
12
M9116/M9220
Electric
Actuator2
Non-Spring Return
916 = M9116-xxx-2, 24 VAC/VDC
Spring Return (Available NPT Only)
92N = M9220-xxx-3, Spring-to-Open (Up), 24 VAC/VDC
94N = M9220-xxx-3, Spring-to-Close (Down), 24 VAC/VDC
13
14
15
Features
(M9116/M9220)
AGA = On/Off (Floating)

AGC = On/Off (Floating), 2 Aux. Sw.
GGA = Proportional., 0-10 VDC, Feedback
GGC = Proportional., 0-10 VDC, Feedback, 2 Aux. Sw.
10
11
12
13
G
14
15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11
12
13
14
V G 7 2 4 1 L T + 8
Valve
1.
2.
3.
4.
Actuator
15
VA-8x2x
Electric
Actuator2, 3
8020 = VA-8020-1, On/Off (Floating)
Voltage
(VA-8x2x)
G = 24 VAC
Accessories
(VA-8x2x)
Blank = None
8122 = VA-8122-1, Proportional
= Field
Example: Cast bronze valve, two-way, push-down-to-close, threaded (NPT)
end connections, brass trim, equal percentage, 3/4 in., 7.3 Cv, standard
threaded stem, VA-8020-1 On/Off (Floating) Electric Actuator, 24 VAC supply.
See Table 2 when ordering a valve body only. See Table 3 when adding a factory-mounted pneumatic actuator to a valve
body. For valid valve and actuator combinations, see Table 17 and Table 18.
Available for PDTC Two-Way and Three-Way body styles only.
Available for NPT (threaded) and Union Sweat End Connections body style only.
IMPORTANT: The VG7000 Series Bronze Control
Valves are intended to control saturated steam, hot
water, and chilled water flow under normal
equipment operating conditions. Where failure or
malfunction of the VG7000 Series Valve could lead
to personal injury or property damage to the
controlled equipment or other property, additional
precautions must be designed into the control
limit controls, intended to warn of or protect against
failure or malfunction of the VG7000 Series Valve.
VG7000 Series Bronze Control Valves feature brass
and stainless steel trim, and are available in two-way
configurations with Push-Down-to-Close (PDTC
normally open if pneumatic or spring return) or
Push-Down-to-Open (PDTO normally closed if
pneumatic or spring return) with threaded (NPT), union
sweat, union globe, and union angle end connections.
The valve can be ordered with a variety of pneumatic
actuators: V-3000-8011 (exposed, with or without a
factory-mounted positioner), V-3000-8003 (enclosed),
V-3801-8001 (oval top), and higher force MP8000
Series Actuators (with or without a factory-mounted
pneumatic positioner).
VG7000 Series Valves can also be ordered with any of
the following series electric actuators: VA-4233,
VA-7150, VA-7200, VA-8x2x, M9116, or M9216. All
electric actuators are fully compatible with
Johnson Controls controllers, reducing installation
costs. Valves without actuators can be ordered with the
standard bonnet and stem design, allowing easy
interchangeability of actuators with the use of
standardized mounting kits. See Table 2 through
Table 4 for ordering data and additional details. For
valid valve and actuator combinations, see Table 17
and Table 18. (Buy American factory-mounted valve
and actuator combinations are no longer available.)
The modulating valve plug of VG7000 Series Valves
provides an equal percentage flow characteristic for
two-way valves, and equal percentage or linear for
three-way valves. Tight shutoff is ensured using a
molded elastomeric disk in valves with brass trim, and
a precisely machined metal-to-metal seat for valves
with stainless steel trim. An arrow is cast on one side of
the valve body indicating the direction of flow for proper
piping.
Pneumatic Actuator Selection

(See Table 9, Table 11, Table 12, and Table 17.)
Note: The V-3000-8011, V-3000-8003, and
V-3801-8001 Pneumatic Actuators should not be
confused with the V-3000-1, V-3000-2, and V-3802-1
Pneumatic Actuators. Refer to the V-3000-8011
(Exposed) and V-3000-8003 (Enclosed) Pneumatic
Valve Actuator Product/Technical Bulletin (LIT-977252)
for specifics regarding interchangeability. The
V-3801-8001 is not a direct replacement for the
V-3802-1, since V-3802-1 is not compatible with
VG7000 Series Valves.
V-3801-8001 Pneumatic Actuator

The V-3801-8001 is a low force, oval top actuator
designed specifically for 1/2 and 3/4 in. valves where
mounting space is restricted. The V-3801-8001 has
sufficient force to handle most seating pressures, and
the molded diaphragm design provides a constant
effective area (4 sq. in.) throughout the valve stem
stroke. Due to the simplicity of the design, it is more
economical to replace the actuator than repair it. The
actuator assembly can be removed or repositioned by
loosening a single set screw without disturbing the rest
of the valve assembly.
Because the V-3801-8001 uses a unique slotted valve
stem for factory assembly (see the Stem Type section
in Table 2), the spring kits available are for field
mounting to standard threaded stem valves. See
Table 9 for mounting kit code numbers.

The V-3000-8011 is a versatile, medium-force
pneumatic actuator that can be used in most HVAC
applications, including sequential control of valves. See
Table 11 and Table 12 for actuator sizing and selection.
The permanently captured, molded rolling diaphragm
of the V-3000-8011 provides a constant effective area
(8 sq. in.) throughout the valve stem stroke. Like the
V-3801-8001, it is more economical to replace the
actuator than to repair it due to the simplicity of the
design. The actuator assembly can be removed or
repositioned by loosening a single set screw without
disturbing the rest of the valve assembly.
The V-9502 Pneumatic Positioner is also available for
factory or field mounting to the V-3000-8011.
The V-3000-8003, operationally similar to the

V-3000-8011, is designed for enclosed installation in a
location where the actuator might be subjected to
tampering. Unlike the V-3000-8011, this model has a
replaceable molded diaphragm design.
Factory-mounted electric actuators are available on

two-way PDTC and three-way mixing valve
configurations only. Actuators can be easily field
reversed if required. The actuators can be field
mounted on PDTO valves if desired. All proportional
electric actuator assemblies are factory calibrated for
nominal 0 to 10 VDC operation, to drive down with an
increase in signal. The VA-4233 is available on all
valve styles: PDTO, PDTC, and three-way.
MP8000 Series Pneumatic Actuators

The higher force MP82 (25 sq. in. effective diaphragm
area) and MP84 (50 sq. in. effective diaphragm area)
Pneumatic Actuators are used where higher maximum
closeoff pressures are required, such as 1-1/2 and 2 in.
brass trim valves and 1/2 through 2 in. stainless steel
trim valves.
These actuators are equipped with a molded synthetic
rubber diaphragm contained in a sturdy, carbon-steel
housing that protects it against dirt and damage. The
actuator can be easily removed to perform inline
servicing to all parts of the valve. The MP8000
Actuators are available factory mounted or are easily
field mounted to VG7000 Series Valves. See Table 9
for the appropriate mounting kit.
The MP8000 Actuators are designed to allow for
reversing the action of the actuators in the field. If
desired, the action of the MP8000 on Normally Open
(N.O.) valves can be reversed from spring-return-up to
spring-return-down or vice versa. To field reverse the
actuator, refer to the MP8000 Pneumatic Valve
Actuators Technical Bulletin (LIT-977258).
factory or field mounting to MP8000 Series Pneumatic
Valve Actuators.
T-3000 Valve Top Thermostat Actuators

The T-3111 and T-3311 Series Valve Top Thermostat
Actuators are available for field mounting to all VG7000
Series Valves (N.O., N.C., and three-way). The valve
top thermostats are a combination of a pneumatic
thermostat and a pneumatic valve actuator. The T-3111
and T-3311 are available in both direct and reverse
acting models with various features and options. Refer
to the T-3111 Integral Thermostat and Piston Top Valve
Actuator Single Temperature, Single Pressure Product/
Technical Bulletin (LIT-7171137) and the T-3311
Integral Thermostat and Piston Top Valve Actuator
Dual Temperature, Dual Pressure Product/Technical
Bulletin (LIT-7171152) for specifications and ordering
information.
Note: A mounting kit is required to field mount T-3111
or T-3311 Valve Top Thermostats to a valve. See
Table 9 for the appropriate mounting kit code number.
VA-4233 Series Electric Actuators

The VA-4233 Series Electric Actuators use a stepper
motor to accurately position the valve. In the event of a
power failure, a spring in the actuator automatically
returns the valve to the full stem-up position. These
direct-mount, spring return electric actuators provide a
minimum 61 lb force output for floating, on/off, or
proportional control, and can be factory mounted to
1/2 through 1-1/4 in. valve bodies with NPT (threaded)
and union sweat end connections.
Integral auxiliary switches are available for indicating
end stop position or to perform switching functions. On
proportional models, position feedback is also available
through a proportional DC voltage signal. All models
feature a hand crank for manual positioning of the
valve, independent of a power supply.

The VA-7150 Series Actuators use a reversible
synchronous motor and magnetic clutch to accurately
position the valve. This non-spring return actuator has
a 90 lb force output. The magnetic clutch maintains a
constant load at the end of travel, ensuring tight valve
shutoff and automatically compensating for seat wear.
This actuator is available in three models: floating
three-wire (VA-7150), floating with 0 to 2000 ohm
feedback (VA-7153), or 0 to 10 VDC proportional
control (VA-7152).

synchronous motor and a magnetic clutch to accurately
constant load at the end of travel, which ensures tight
shutoff and automatically compensates for seat wear.
feedback (VA-7203), or 0 to 10 VDC (0 to 20 mA)
proportional control (VA-7202).
VA-8x2x Series Electric Actuators
The VA-8x2x Series Actuators are synchronous

motor-driven, force sensor limited, non-spring return
actuators that feature a 22 lb seating force in a
compact design. The VA-8020 accepts floating control
from a three-wire, 24 VAC control signal. The VA-8122
typically accepts proportional control from a 0 to
10 VDC control signal; however, it can be field adjusted
to accept signals up to 20 VDC. In addition, the
VA-8122 features an input signal reversing feature that
allows it to be used in both heating and cooling
applications.
The M100 Series is a rotary actuator used to position

valves in HVAC and industrial applications. When
coupled with a VG7000-M1x0 Series Valve Mounting
Kit, the rotary motion of the M100 Series Actuator is
converted to linear movement. The mounting kit
includes an overtravel spring, which determines the
maximum seating pressure in conjunction with actuator
selection.
Note: The VA-8x2x is only available factory mounted

on 1/2 and 3/4 in. valves. Because the VA-8x2x
requires a unique slotted valve stem for factory
assembly, it is necessary to select the S option in the
Stem Type section of Table 2.

The M9116 Series is a line of motor driven, non-spring
return actuators that operate on 24 VAC or VDC power
and are available for use with floating or proportional
controllers. When coupled with the M9000-500 Valve
Mounting, the rotary motion of this actuator is
converted into linear motion that will operate
1/2 through 2 in. VG7000 Series Valves. The actuator
and mounting deliver a minimum stem force of 180 lb in
both directions. A compression spring on the output
shaft of the mounting automatically compensates for
seat wear. Integral auxiliary switches are available for
indicating end stop position or to perform switching
functions. Position feedback is available via switches, a
potentiometer, or a 0 (2) to 10 VDC signal.

The M9220 Series is a line of motor driven, spring
and are available for use with on/off, floating, or
proportional controllers. When coupled with the
M9000-500 Valve Mounting, the rotary motion of this
actuator is converted into linear motion that operates
1/2 through 2 in. VG7000 Series Valves.
The actuator and mounting deliver a minimum stem
force of 180 lb in both directions. A compression spring
on the output shaft of the mounting automatically
compensates for seat wear. Integral auxiliary switches
are available for indicating end stop position or to
perform switching functions. Position feedback is
available via switches, a potentiometer, or a 0 (2) to
10 VDC signal.
The M110, M120, M130, M140, and M150 Actuators

are only available for field mounting to VG7000 Series
Valves. See Table 5 for ordering information and
additional details. Kits are available to field mount all
M100 models; see Table 5, Table 8, and Table 10 for
detailed information.
Table 5: M100 Actuator Mounting Kits
Actuator
Seating Force (lb)
Mounting Kit
M110
40
VG7000-M110
M120/M130
100
VG7000-M130
M140
150
VG7000-M140
M150
270
VG7000-M150
The M120, M140, and M150 are non-spring return

actuators that will hold their position when
de-energized. The M110 and M130 are spring return
actuators that return the valve to its normal operating
position when the power is disconnected. A braking
mechanism keeps the return spring from driving the
motor actuator toward its return position during normal
reversible operation. The gear train and motor are
housed in an oil-filled compartment designed for
extended life.
The M100 provides the appropriate interface for a
variety of electronic controllers through selection of
factory-installed circuit boards. The M100 Series
Actuator is compatible with all Johnson Controls
controllers. The M100 can provide proportional,
floating, potentiometer, or on/off control, as well as
control by direct digital input from zone bus controllers.
The M100 Actuator requires a 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz power
supply; however, transformer options are available.
The actuator can be mounted for stem-up or
stem-down operation. On three-way valves, the seating
force can be applied on both the up and the down
stroke.
Shipping Weights
Table 6: Shipping Weights for Brass Trim Valves1
Actuator
Valve Size, in.

1/2
3/4
1-1/4
1-1/2
V-3801-8001
2.5
3.1
---
---
---
---
V-3000-8011
3.1
4.2
6.2
6.1
11.8
16.9
V-3000-8003
3.2
4.3
6.3
6.2
11.9
17.0
MP82
---
---
14.0
16.0
19.0
24.0
MP84
---
---
---
---
---
---
VA-4233
5.3
6.4
8.4
8.3
---
---
VA-7150
3.9
5.0
7.0
6.9
12.6
17.7
VA-7200
---
---
7.5
7.4
13.1
18.2
VA-8x2x
4.6
5.9
---
---
---
---
M9220
8.6
9.7
11.7
11.6
17.3
22.4
1.
Weights are approximate and based on the heaviest valve. Add 2 lb (0.9 kg) for pneumatic assemblies with a positioner.
Table 7: Shipping Weights for Stainless Steel Trim Valves1

Actuator
Valve Size, in.

1/2
3/4
1-1/4
1-1/2
V-3000-8011
3.4
4.2
6.6
8.6
---
---
V-3000-8003
3.5
4.2
6.7
8.7
---
---
MP82
11.0
12.0
14.0
16.0
19.0
24.0
MP84
---
---
---
---
32.0
37.0
VA-4233
5.3
5.6
8.0
10.0
---
---
VA-7150
3.9
4.2
6.6
8.6
12.6
17.7
VA-7200
4.7
5.5
7.9
9.9
13.1
18.2
M9220
8.6
9.7
12.1
14.1
17.3
22.4
1.
Mounting Kits
Field Mounting
The Y20EBE-11 Valve Mounting Adaptor Kit is

designed to adapt current Y20EBD-x Mounting Kits to
field mount M100 Series Actuators on VG7000 Series
Valves. See Table 8 for the appropriate mounting kit
code number.
A standard bonnet/stem design allows for easy field

mounting of actuators. See Table 2 to order valves
without actuators, Table 8, Table 9, and Table 10 to
order the appropriate mounting kits, and Table 17 and
Table 18 to identify compatible actuators. Refer to the
appropriate actuator product bulletin for specific
actuator code number information.
Table 8: M100 Mounting Kits (Includes Linkage and Adaptor)

Mounting Kit
Adaptor Kit
Mounting Kit Code Number
Y20EBD-2
Y20EBE-11
VG7000-M140
Y20EBD-3
Y20EBE-11
VG7000-M150
Y20EBD-5
Y20EBE-11
VG7000-M110
Y20EBD-6
Y20EBE-11
VG7000-M130
Table 9: Field Mounting Kits for Pneumatic Actuators1

Actuator Style
Valve Size in. (DN)2
Spring Range psig (kPa)
Mounting Kit
Code Number
T-3x11
V-3000-8011
V-3000-8003
1/2 or 3/4 (DN15 or DN20)

5/16 in. (8 mm) Stroke
3 to 6 (21 to 41)
VG7000-10013
4 to 8 (28 to 55)
VG7000-10023
9 to 13 (62 to 90)
VG7000-10033
3 to 6 (21 to 41)
VG7000-10043
4 to 8 (28 to 55)
VG7000-10053
9 to 13 (62 to 90)
VG7000-10063
3 to 6 (21 to 41)
VG7000-10073
4 to 8 (28 to 55)
VG7000-10083
9 to 13 (62 to 90)
VG7000-10093
3 to 6 (21 to 41)
VG7000-10103
4 to 8 (28 to 55)
VG7000-10113
9 to 13 (62 to 90)
VG7000-10123
T-3x11
V-3000-8011
V-3000-8003
T-3x11
V-3000-8011
V-3000-8003
V-3801-8001
1 or 1-1/4 (DN25 or DN32)

1-1/2 or 2 (DN40 or DN50)

1/2 or 3/4 (DN15 or DN20)

V-3801-8001
1/2 or 3/4 (DN15 or DN20)

Kit with Three Springs:

3 to 6, 4 to 8, and 9 to 13 (Includes
hardware to adapt one valve only.)
VG7000-10153
MP82/MP83
1/2 or 3/4 (DN15 or DN20) with Stainless

Steel Trim
Not Applicable
MP8000-67014
MP82/MP83
1 through 2 (DN25 through DN50) with 1/4 in.

Stem and Stainless Steel or Brass Trim
Not Applicable
MP8000-67024
MP84/MP85
1-1/2 through 2 (DN40 through DN50) with

3/8 in. Stem and Stainless Steel Trim
Not Applicable
MP8000-67035
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
All mounting kits are for use with valves with standard threaded stem design only.
DN is the European designation for body size in metric units (mm).
The mounting kits include: upper spring seat, spring, stem extension, stem locking screw (or set screw), and a
bonnet adaptor for the V-3801-8001.
The mounting kits include: stem nut (1), stem extender nuts (2), stem extender (1), and yoke nut (1).
The mounting kit includes: stem nuts (2) and yoke nut (1).
Table 10: Field Mounting Kits for Electric Actuators1

Actuator Style
Valve Size in. (DN)
M110
1/2 through 2 (DN15 through DN50)
VG7000-M110
M120/M130
VG7000-M130
M140
VG7000-M140
M150
VG7000-M150
VA-4233
1/2 through 1-1/4 in. (DN15 through DN32)
None Required
VA-715x
None Required
VA-720x
1 through 2 (DN25 through DN50)
None Required
VA-8x2x
Not available for field mounting.
M9x16
N.C.
(PDTO)
N.O.
(PDTC)
Stem Up Position
With the stem in the up position,
the lower port (N.O.) is open
to the Common port (C).
N.C.
(PDTO)
N.O.
(PDTC)
Stem Down Position

With the stem in the down position,
the inline port (N.C.) is open
Figure 2: Three-Way Mixing Valves Fluid Flow Direction and Port Designation
10
FIG:VG7FG02P
1.
M9000-500
Table 11: Brass Trim Maximum Closeoff Pressures, psig (kPa) for Pneumatically Actuated Valves
Actuator
Style
V-3801-8001
(248F
[120C])3
V-3000-8011
(284F
[140C])
and
V-3000-8003
(248F
[120C])3
MP82
(284F
[140C])3
1.
2.
3.
Valve Size
in. (DN)
Brass Trim
Maximum
Cv (Kv)
Factor
Two-Way Normally Open or

Three-Way N.O. Port
(With 20 psig Supply)
Spring Range (psig)1
Two-Way Normally Closed or

Three-Way N.C. Port
3 to 62
(21 to 41)
4 to 8
(28 to 55)
9 to 13
(62 to 90)
3 to 62
(21 to 41)
4 to 8
(28 to 55)
9 to 13
(62 to 90)
0.73
(0.63)
186
(1,282)
157
(1,082)
84
(579)
37
(255)
57
(393)
158
(1,089)
1.8
(1.6)
186
(1,282)
157
(1,082)
84
(579)
37
(255)
57
(393)
158
(1,089)
4.6
(4.0)
105
(723)
89
(613)
48
(331)
18
(124)
28
(193)
76
(524)
3/4
(DN20)
7.3
(6.3)
67
(462)
56
(386)
30
(207)
11
(76)
16
(110)
45
(310)
1/2
(DN15)
0.73
(0.63)
365
(2,515)
339
(2,336)
191
(1,316)
100
(689)
142
(978)
348
(2,398)
1.8
(1.6)
365
(2,515)
339
(2,336)
191
(1,316)
100
(689)
142
(978)
348
(2,398)
4.6
(4.0)
225
(1,550)
192
(1,323)
108
(744)
49
(338)
68
(469)
168
(1,158)
3/4
(DN20)
7.3
(6.3)
144
(992)
122
(841)
69
(475)
29
(200)
41
(282)
100
(689)
1
(DN25)
11.6
(10)
90
(620)
76
(524)
42
289)
17
(117)
25
(172)
65
(448)
1-1/4
(DN32)
18.5
(16)
55
(379)
47
(324)
26
(179)
10
(69)
14
(96)
37
(255)
1-1/2
(DN40)
28.9
(25)
35
241)
30
(207)
16
(110)
6
(41)
9
(62)
23
(158)
2
(DN50)
46.2
(40)
22
(152)
19
(131)
11
(76)
4
(28)
6
(41)
14
(96)
1
(DN25)
11.6
(10)
279
(1,924)
257
(1,772)
148
(1,020)
70
(483)
96
(662)
223
(1,536)
1-1/4
(DN32)
18.5
(16)
170
(1,172)
157
(1,082)
90
(621)
40
(276)
55
(379)
128
(883)
1-1/2
(DN40)
28.9
(25)
109
(752)
100
(689)
58
(400)
25
(172)
34
(234)
79
(545)
2
(DN50)
46.2
(40)
70
(483)
64
(441)
37
(255)
16
(110)
21
(145)
50
(345)
1/2
(DN15)
The recommended spring ranges for use with a V-9502 Positioner are: 3 to 6 psig (21 to 41 kPa) and 3 to 7 psig
(21 to 48 kPa) for N.O. valves, 9 to 13 psig (62 to 90 kPa) for N.C. valves, and 4 to 8 psig (28 to 55 kPa) for three-way valves.
3 to 7 psig (21 to 48 kPa) for MP82 Actuators.
The maximum valve fluid temperature is as follows:
Actuator Style
Water
Saturated Steam
V-3801-8001
248F (120C)
15 psig (103 kPa)
V-3000-8011
284F (140C)
38 psig (262 kPa)
V-3000-8003
248F (120C)
15 psig (103 kPa)
MP82
284F (140C)
38 psig (262 kPa)
11
Table 12: Stainless Steel Trim Maximum Closeoff Pressure, psig (kPa) for Pneumatically Actuated Valves
Actuator
Style
V-3000-8011
and
V-3000-8003
(338F
[170C])3
MP82
(338F
[170C])3
MP84
(338F
[170C])3
1.
2.
3.
12
Valve Size
in. (DN)
SS Trim
Maximum
Cv (Kv)
Factor

Three-Way N.O. Port

Three-Way N.C. Port
3 to 62
(21 to 41)
4 to 8
(28 to 55)
9 to 13
(62 to 90)
3 to 62
(21 to 41)
4 to 8
(28 to 55)
9 to 13
(62 to 90)
0.73
(0.63)
299
(2,060)
255
(1,757)
143
(985)
75
(517)
106
(730)
261
(1,798)
1.8
(1.6)
299
(2,060)
255
(1,757)
143
(985)
75
(517)
106
(730)
261
(1,798)
4.6
(4.0)
169
(1,164)
144
(992)
81
(558)
36
(248)
51
(351)
126
(868)
3/4
(DN20)
7.3
(6.3)
108
(744)
92
(634)
52
(358)
22
(152)
31
(214)
75
(517)
1
(DN25)
11.6
(10)
67
(462)
57
(393)
32
(220)
13
(90)
19
(131)
49
(338)
1-1/4
(DN32)
18.5
(16)
41
(282)
35
(241)
19
(131)
7
(48)
11
(76)
28
(193)
1/2
(DN15)
0.73
(0.63)
308
(2,124)
308
(2,124)
308
(2,124)
280
(1,929)
308
(2,124)
308
(2,124)
1.8
(1.6)
308
(2,124)
308
(2,124)
308
(2,124)
280
(1,929)
308
(2,124)
308
(2,124)
4.6
(4.0)
308
(2,124)
308
(2,124)
275
(1,895)
135
(930)
183
(1,261)
308
(2,124)
3/4
(DN20)
7.3
(6.3)
308
(2,124)
304
(2,095)
175
(1,206)
81
(558)
109
(751)
252
(136)
1
(DN25)
11.6
(10)
209
(1,440)
193
(1,330)
111
(765)
53
(365)
72
(496)
168
(1,158)
1-1/4
(DN32)
18.5
(16)
128
(882)
118
(813)
68
(469)
30
(207)
41
(282)
96
(661)
1-1/2
(DN40)
28.9
(25)
82
(565)
75
(517)
43
(296)
19
(131)
25
(172)
59
(407)
2
(DN50)
46.2
(40)
52
(358)
48
(331)
28
(193)
12
(83)
16
(110)
37
(255)
1-1/2
(DN40)
28.9
(25)
165
(1,137)
152
(1,047)
88
(606)
39
(269)
53
(365)
121
(834)
2
(DN50)
46.2
(40)
106
(730)
97
(668)
56
(386)
24
(154)
33
(227)
76
(524)
1/2
(DN15)
The recommended ranges for use with a V-9502 Positioner are: 3 to 6 psig (21 to 41 kPa) and 3 to 7 psig (21 to 48 kPa) for
N.O. valves, 9 to 13 psig (62 to 90 kPa) for N.C. valves, and 4 to 8 psig (28 to 55 kPa) for three-way valves.
3 to 7 psig (21 to 48 kPa) for MP82 and MP84 Actuators.
The maximum closeoff pressure listed is limited to the maximum allowable ANSI valve body rating corresponding to the
maximum temperature rating (308 psig [2,122 kPa] at 338F [170C]) of the valve.
Table 13: Brass Trim Maximum Closeoff Pressures, psig (kPa) for PDTC Two-Way and PDTC Port for
Three-Way Electrically Actuated Valves1
284F (140C) Maximum Fluid Temperature2
Valve
Size,
in. (DN)
1/2
(DN15)
3/4
(DN20)
1
(DN25)
1-1/4
(DN32)
1-1/2
(DN40)
2
(DN50)
Maximum
Cv (Kv)
Factor
0.73
(0.63)
1.8
(1.6)
4.6
(4.0)
7.3
(6.3)
11.6
(10.0)
18.5
(16.0)
28.9
(25.0)
46.2
(40.0)
VA-715x
345
(2,377)
345
(2,377)
216
(1,488)
138
(951)
86
(593)
52
(358)
34
(234)
21
(145)
VA-720x
---
---
---
---
179
(1,233)
109
(751)
70
(482)
45
(310)
VA-4233
345
(2,377)
345
(2,377)
208
(1,433)
132
(909)
63
(434)
38
(262)
---
---
M9116 or
M9220
345
(2,377)
345
(2,377)
345
(2,377)
289
(1,991)
182
(1,254)
111
(765)
71
(489)
46
(317)
144
(992)
144
(992)
82
(565)
52
(358)
31
(214)
19
(131)
12
(83)
8
(55)
M120 and
M1303
345
(2,377)
345
(2,377)
221
(1,523)
141
(971)
88
(606)
54
(372)
34
(234)
22
(152)
M1403
345
(2,377)
345
(2,377)
337
(2,322)
215
(1,481)
135
(930)
82
(565)
53
(365)
34
(234)
M1503
345
(2,377)
345
(2,377)
345
(2,377)
392
(2,701)
248
(1,709)
152
(1,047)
97
(668)
62
(427)
112
(772)
80
(551)
45
(310)
29
(200)
---
---
---
---
M1103
VA-8x2x
1.
2.
3.
maximum temperature rating (345 psig [2,377 kPa] at 281F [138C]) of the valve, except for VA-8x2x Actuators that are
limited to 195F (91C) maximum temperature and 381 psig (2,625 kPa) pressure rating.
The maximum closeoff pressures listed are for actuators coupled to the appropriate mounting kits listed in Table 8 and
Table 10. See Table 17 and Table 18 for valid factory-mounted combinations, and Table 8 and Table 10 for available field
mounting kits.
The maximum fluid temperature is 284F (140C) water to 38 psig (262 kPa) saturated steam except for the following:
VA-4233 Actuators are limited to 35 to 250F (2 to 121C) water to 15 psig (103 kPa) saturated steam.
VA-8x2x Actuators are limited to 195F (91C) water, and are not rated for steam applications.
The M110, M120, M130, M140, and M150 Actuators are not available factory coupled to the valve body. The maximum
closeoff pressure values are provided because these actuators can be field mounted to the VG7000 valve body using the
mounting kits listed in Table 8 and Table 10.
13
Table 14: Brass Trim Maximum Closeoff Pressures, psig (kPa) for PDTO Two-Way and PDTO Port for
Not Available Factory Coupled for PDTO Two-Way Field Mounting Only
Valve
Size,
in. (DN)
1/2
(DN15)
3/4
(DN20)
1
(DN25)
1-1/4
(DN32)
1-1/2
(DN40)
2
(DN50)
Maximum
Cv (Kv)
Factor
0.73
(0.63)
1.8
(1.6)
4.6
(4.0)
7.3
(6.3)
11.6
(10.0)
18.5
(16.0)
28.9
(25.0)
46.2
(40.0)
VA-715x
345
(2,377)
345
(2,377)
257
(1,171)
153
(1,054)
100
(690)
57
(393)
36
(248)
22
(152)
VA-720x
---
---
---
---
209
(1,440)
120
(827)
74
(510)
46
(317)
VA-4233
345
(2,377)
345
(2,377)
173
(1,192)
103
(710)
66
(455)
38
(262)
---
---
M9116
or M9220
345
(2,377)
345
(2,377)
345
(2,377)
321
(2,212)
213
(1,468)
122
(841)
76
(524)
47
(324)
M1103
200
(1,378)
200
(1,378)
97
(668)
58
(400)
36
(248)
21
(145)
13
(90)
8
(55)
M120 and
M1303
345
(2,377)
345
(2,377)
262
(1,805)
156
(1,075)
103
(710)
59
(407)
36
(248)
23
(158)
M1403
345
(2,377)
345
(2,377)
345
(2,377)
239
(1,647)
158
(1,089)
90
(620)
56
(386)
35
(241)
M1503
345
(2,377)
345
(2,377)
345
(2,377)
345
(2,377)
291
(2,005)
167
(1,151)
103
(710)
64
(441)
VA-8x2x
345
(2,377)
112
(772)
54
(372)
32
(220)
---
---
---
---
1.
2.
3.
14
mounting kits.
Table 15: Stainless Steel Trim Maximum Closeoff Pressures, psig (kPa) for PDTC Two-Way and PDTC
Port for Three-Way Electrically Actuated Valves1
Valve
Size,
in. (DN)
1/2
(DN15)
3/4
(DN20)
1
(DN25)
1-1/4
(DN32)
1-1/2
(DN40)
2
(DN50)
Maximum
Cv (Kv)
Factor
0.73
(0.63)
1.8
(1.6)
4.6
(4.0)
7.3
(6.3)
11.6
(10.0)
18.5
(16.0)
28.9
(25.0)
46.2
(40.0)
VA-715x
239
(1,647)
239
(1,647)
135
(930)
86
(593)
54
(372)
33
(227)
21
(145)
13
(90)
VA-720x
308
(2,122)
308
(2,122)
278
(1,915)
177
(1,220)
112
(772)
68
(469)
44
(303)
28
(193)
VA-4233
230
(1,585)
230
(1,585)
130
(896)
82
(565)
39
(269)
24
(165)
---
---
M9116 or
M9220
308
(2,122)
308
(2,122)
283
(1,950)
180
(1,240)
114
(785)
70
(482)
45
(310)
28
(193)
90
(620)
90
(620)
51
(351)
32
(220)
19
(131)
12
(83)
8
(55)
5
(34)
M120 and
M1303
308
(2,122)
244
(1,681)
138
(951)
88
(606)
55
(379)
33
(227)
21
(145)
14
(96)
M1403
308
(2,122)
308
(2,122)
211
(1,454)
134
(923)
84
(579)
52
(358)
33
(227)
21
(145)
M1503
308
(2,122)
308
(2,122)
308
(2,122)
245
(1,688)
155
(1,068)
95
(655)
61
(420)
39
(269)
M1103
1.
2.
3.
mounting kits.
15
Table 16: Stainless Steel Trim Maximum Closeoff Pressures, psig (kPa) for PDTO Two-Way and PDTO
Valve
Size,
in. (DN)
1/2
(DN15)
3/4
(DN20)
1
(DN25)
1-1/4
(DN32)
1-1/2
(DN40)
2
(DN50)
Maximum
Cv (Kv)
Factor
0.73
(0.63)
1.8
(1.6)
4.6
(4.0)
7.3
(6.3)
11.6
(10.0)
18.5
(16.0)
28.9
(25.0)
46.2
(40.0)
VA-715x
308
(2,122)
308
(2,122)
161
(1,109)
96
(661)
63
(434)
36
(248)
22
(152)
14
(97)
VA-720x
308
(2,122)
308
(2,122)
308
(2,122)
197
(1,357)
131
(903)
75
(517)
46
(317)
29
(200)
VA-4233
224
(1,543)
224
(1,543)
108
(744)
64
(441)
41
(282)
24
(165)
---
---
M9116 or
M9220
308
(2,122)
308
(2,122)
308
(2,122)
201
(1,385)
133
(916)
76
(524)
47
(324)
30
(207)
125
(861)
125
(861)
61
(420)
36
(248)
23
(158)
13
(90)
8
(55)
5
(34)
M120 and
M1303
308
(2,122)
308
(2,122)
164
(1,130)
98
(675)
64
(441)
37
(255)
23
(158)
14
(96)
M1403
308
(2,122)
308
(2,122)
250
(1,723)
149
(1,027)
99
(682)
57
(393)
35
(241)
22
(152)
M1503
308
(2,122)
308
(2,122)
308
(2,122)
273
(1,881)
182
(1,254)
104
(717)
64
(441)
40
(276)
M1103
1.
2.
3.
16
mounting kits.
Table 17: Pneumatic Actuated Valves Available Factory-Mounted Combinations1 (Part 1 of 2)

Actuator
Spring
Range
V-3801-8001
3-6
4-8
Valve Size,
in. (DN)
9-13
V-3000-80112
3-6
4-8
9-13
V-3000-8003
3-6
4-8
9-13
P822
3-6
4-8
MP842
9-13
3-6
4-8
9-13
VG7241, VG7441, and VG7842 Valves Brass Trim, NPT End Connections
1/2 in.
(DN15)
---
---
---
---
---
---
3/4 in.
(DN20)
---
---
---
---
---
---
1 in.
(DN25)
---
---
---
---
---
---
1-1/4 in.
(DN32)
---
---
---
---
---
---
1-1/2 in.
(DN40)
---
---
---
---
---
---
2 in.
(DN50)
---
---
---
---
---
---
Valve Size,
in. (DN)
VG7243, VG7443, and VG7844 Valves Stainless Steel Trim, NPT End Connections
1/2 in.
(DN15)
---
---
---
---
---
---
3/4 in.
(DN20)
---
---
---
---
---
---
1 in.
(DN25)
---
---
---
---
---
---
1-1/4 in.
(DN32)
---
---
---
---
---
---
1-1/2 in.
(DN40)
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
2 in.
(DN50)
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Valve Size,
in. (DN)
VG7281, VG7481, and VG7882 Valves Brass Trim, Union Sweat End Connections
1/2 in.
(DN15)
---
---
---
---
---
---
3/4 in.
(DN20)
---
---
---
---
---
---
1 in.
(DN25)
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
1-1/4 in.
(DN32)
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
1-1/2 in.
(DN40)
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
2 in.
(DN50)
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Valve Size,
in. (DN)
1/2 in.
(DN15)
VG7271, VG7291, VG7872, and VG7892 Valves Brass Trim, Union Sweat End Connections
X
---
---
---
---
---
---
17

Actuator
Spring
Range
V-3801-8001
3-6
4-8
Valve Size,
in. (DN)
9-13
V-3000-80112
3-6
4-8
9-13
V-3000-8003
3-6
4-8
9-13
P822
3-6
4-8
MP842
9-13
3-6
4-8
9-13
VG7251, VG7451 (1/2 in. Only), and VG7551 Valves Brass Trim, Union Globe
and Union Angle End Connections (No Factory-Mounted Positioners Available)
1/2 in.
(DN15)
---
---
---
---
---
---
3/4 in.
(DN20)
---
---
---
---
---
---
1 in.
(DN25)
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
1-1/4 in.
(DN32)
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
1-1/2 in.
(DN40)
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
1.
2.
18
Stainless steel trim is available only with NPT (internal) end connections.
Items shown as --- are not available factory mounted, and not recommended for field assembly.
Available with or without a positioner.
Table 18: Electrically Actuated Valves Available Factory-Mounted Combinations1

Non-Spring Return
Actuator
VA-7150-1001
VA-7152-1001
VA-7153-1001
Valve Size,
in. (DN)
VA-7200-1001
VA-7202-1001
VA-7203-1001
Spring Return2
VA-8020-1
VA-8122-1
VA-4233-AGA-2
VA-4233-AGC-2
VA-4233-BGA-2
VA-4233-BGC-2
VA-4233-GGA-2
VA-4233-GGC-2
M9116-AGx-2
M9116-GGx-2
M9220-AGx-3
M9220-GGx-3
VG7241 and VG7842 Valves Brass Trim, NPT End Connections
1/2 in. (DN15)
---
3/4 in. (DN20)
---
1 in. (DN25)
---
1-1/4 in. (DN32)
---
1-1/2 in. (DN40)
---
---
2 in. (DN50)
---
---
Valve Size,
in. (DN)
VG7243 and VG7844 Valves Stainless Steel Trim, NPT End Connections
1/2 in. (DN15)
---
3/4 in. (DN20)
---
1 in. (DN25)
---
1-1/4 in. (DN32)
---
1-1/2 in. (DN40)
---
---
2 in. (DN50)
---
---
Valve Size,
in. (DN)
VG7281 and VG7882 Valves Brass Trim, Union Sweat End Connections
1/2 in. (DN15)
---
---
3/4 in. (DN20)
---
---
1 in. (DN25)
---
---
1-1/4 in. (DN32)
---
---
1-1/2 in. (DN40)
---
---
---
2 in. (DN50)
---
---
---
Valve Size,
in. (DN)
1/2 in. (DN15)
Valve Size,
in. (DN)
1/2 in. (DN15)
X
---
---
VG7251 and VG7551 Valves Brass Trim, Union Globe and Union Angle End Connections
X
---
---
---
---
3/4 in. (DN20)
---
---
---
---
1 in. (DN25)
---
---
---
1-1/4 in. (DN32)
---
---
---
1-1/2 in. (DN40)
---
---
---
1.
2.
Items shown as --- are not available factory mounted, and not recommended for field assembly. Electric actuators are
available on two-way PDTC and three-way mixing valves only (except the VA-4233-xGx-2 Series, which is available on all
body styles).
The VA-4233 Series is available with spring return stem-up only.
19
Operation
VA-8x2x Series Electric Valve Actuators
V-3000, V-3801-8001, and MP8000 Series

Pneumatic Actuators
The VA-8x2x Series Actuators operate on 24 VAC, and

are available for on/off, floating, or proportional control.
The signal drives the actuator motor, causing the valve
stem to move in the desired direction. Once the valve
stem reaches the end of travel, a shutoff force builds
up. When the force reaches its maximum, a lever within
the actuator trips a force sensor, which stops the
motor.
Air pressure from a pneumatic controller is applied to

the diaphragm of the actuator, which moves the piston
against the forces of the internal spring and the fluids.
The piston will move the valve plugs to a position
where the diaphragm pressure and the spring force
balance against the fluid forces. These fluid forces will
cause the operating ranges to shift from the nominal
spring range. Reducing the air pressure to the
diaphragm of the actuator allows the spring to return
the valve plug to its normal position.
For applications requiring stable, accurate control and
sequencing, the V-3000-8011, MP82, and MP84 are
available with a V-9502 Pneumatic Positioner. The
V-9502 Pneumatic Positioner will compensate for the
spring range shift, and the valve will operate within the
published range. Refer to the Operation section of the
V-9502 Pneumatic Valve Actuator Positioner Product
Bulletin (LIT-977265) for more details.
To ensure installed performance quality and optimal
maximum closeoff pressure when using the positioner,
the following spring ranges are recommended:
Normally Open Valve:
3 to 6 psig
(3 to 7 psig for MP82/MP84)
Normally Closed Valve:
9 to 13 psig
Three-Way Mixing Valve:
4 to 8 psig
Positioners are factory calibrated to match the nominal

spring range of the actuator and valve assembly.
VA-715x and VA-720x Series Electric Valve

Actuators
The VA-715x and VA-720x Series Actuators operate
on 24 VAC, and are available for on-off/floating control
action or proportional control. A reversible synchronous
motor and a magnetic clutch are used to accurately
position the valve. The actuator maintains position
even if power to the actuator is removed. The magnetic
clutch maintains a constant load at the end of travel,
which ensures tight valve shutoff and compensates for
seat wear. Refer to the appropriate electric valve
actuator literature in the for specifications and available
options.
Proportional models include an AUTO stroke
calibration feature that enables the actuator to redefine
the selected input signal and feedback proportionally
across the actual valve stroke. Initial application of a
power signal will drive the actuator and valve assembly
20
Field calibration of the force sensor is not required. The

actuator maintains the shutoff force even if power to
the controller is lost. Valve stem positioning can be
accomplished manually by turning the adjustment knob
on the lower right portion of the actuator. Rotating the
adjustment knob counterclockwise moves the valve
stem up. Refer to the appropriate electric valve
options.
M9116/M9220 Series Electric Actuators

The M9116/M9220 Series Actuators operate on
24 VAC or VDC power, and are available for use with
floating or proportional controllers. When coupled with
the M9000-500 Valve Mounting, the rotary motion of
this actuator is converted into linear motion that will
operate 1/2 through 2 in. VG7000 Series Valves.
A compression spring on the output shaft of the
mounting automatically compensates for seat wear.
On three-way valves, the preset spring load is applied
at both ends of travel. On loss of power, the spring
return M9220 Actuator returns to its normal position.
Refer to the appropriate electric actuator literature or
the M9000-500 Valve Linkage Kit for M9116 and
M9220 Series Electric Actuators Product Bulletin
(LIT-977352) in the for specifications and available
options.

The VA-4233 Series Electric Actuators operate on
on/off, floating, or proportional controllers. These
actuators incorporate a stepper motor to accurately
position the valve. In the event of a power failure, a
spring in the actuator automatically returns the valve to
the full stem-up position. All models feature a hand
crank for manual positioning of the valve, independent
of a power supply.
to the full stem-up position and then the full stem-down
position, and will store these positions in nonvolatile
memory (retains data when power is lost or removed).
The actuator will then drive to the position determined
by the applied control signal.

The M100 Series Actuators operate on 24 VAC, and
are available for on-off/floating or proportional control.
movement. The rack assembly contains a spring that
maintains valve closeoff when compressed by
overtravel of the actuator. On three-way valves, this
seating force is applied on both the up and the down
stroke. The actuator has an adjustable travel limit that
provides the desired overtravel. On loss of power, the
spring return actuator will return to its normal position.
Refer to the M100 Series Motor Actuator Product
Bulletin (LIT-2681059P) and/or the VG7000 Valve
Linkage for M100 Series Motor Actuators Technical
Bulletin (LIT-977355) in the for specifications and
available options.
Installation and Servicing

It is recommended that the VG7000 Series Valves be
mounted in an upright position in a conveniently
accessible location. Sufficient clearance must be
allowed for actuator removal. (Refer to the Dimensions
section for more details.) The valve must be piped with
the flow in the direction indicated by the arrow, so that
the plug seats against the flow.
On electrically actuated valve assemblies, input lines to
the actuator must be wired correctly for the valve to
move in the proper direction.
water pipe, steam pipe, or other heat source may
overheat it.
Note: VG7000 Series Valves should not be used for
fluid service other than those indicated in the Technical
Specifications section.
IMPORTANT: Take care to prevent foreign material

such as weld slag, thread burrs, metal chips, and
scale from entering the piping system. This debris
can damage or severely impede the operation of the
valve by embedding itself in the seats, scoring the
valve, and ultimately resulting in seat leakage. If the
debris becomes embedded in the seats, subsequent
flushing and filtering of the piping system with the
valve installed does not remedy the problem.
Before servicing a VG7000 Series Bronze Control
Valve, please isolate or disconnect the pneumatic
supply or electrical power to the actuator, allow
sufficient clearance for actuator removal from the
valve, and note the following:

Disconnect each of multiple power
supplies before making electrical
connections. More than one disconnect
may be required to completely de
energize equipment. Contact with
IMPORTANT: Make all wiring connections in

accordance with local, national, and regional
regulations. Do not exceed the electrical ratings of
the VG7000 Series Bronze Control Valve.
!
!

equipment.
WARNING: Risk of Personal Injury.
Shut off the liquid supply and relieve
pressure in the line before servicing the
valve. Contents of liquid lines could be
under pressure and the release of liquid
under pressure may cause severe
personal injury.
21
Dimensions
Clearance Needed
for Actuator Mounting
and Removal
Valve + Actuator
C
Valve + Actuator
C
Inlet
Outlet
N.C.
(PDTC)
Fig:VG7000
N.O.
(PDTC)
A
Figure 3: Two-Way and Three-Way Valve Dimensions

Table 19: National Pipe Thread (Internal NPT) Valve Dimensions, in. (mm)1
N.O., N.C., and

Three-Way
N.O.
N.C.
Three-Way
1/2 (DN15)
3 (76)
13/16 (21)
1-9/16 (39)
1-13/16 (46)
3/4 (DN20)
3-7/32 (81)
15/16 (24)
1-5/8 (41)
2-1/8 (54)
1 (DN25)
4-1/8 (104)
1-5/32 (29)
1-3/4 (44)
2-9/16 (65)
1-1/4 (DN32)
4-23/32 (119)
1-11/32 (34)
2 (51)
2-25/32 (70)
1-1/2 (DN40)
5-1/8 (130)
2-5/32 (55)
2-3/4 (70)
3-3/8 (85)
5-29/32 (150)
2-1/8 (53)
2-27/32 (72)
3-3/4 (95)
2 (DN50)
1.
22
See Table 23 for overall assembly height C and clearance D dimensions.
Fig:unionglobe
Figure 4: Two-Way Union Globe Valve Dimensions
Table 20: Two-Way Union Globe Valve Dimensions, in. (mm)1

E
1/2 (DN15) N.O./PDTC
1-1/2 (38)
2-21/32 (68)
13/16 (20)
1/2 (DN15) N.C./PDTO
1-1/2 (38)
2-21/32 (68)
1-17/32 (39)
Sizes Greater than 1/2 in. (DN15) are Available in N.O./PDTC Only
1-9/16 (40)
3-3/32 (79)
15/16 (24)
1 (DN25) N.O./PDTC
2-1/16 (53)
4-1/32 (102)
1-5/32 (29)
1-1/4 (DN32) N.O./PDTC
2-3/8 (60)
4-19/32 (117)
1-11/32 (34)
1-1/2 (DN40) N.O./PDTC
2-9/16 (65)
4-27/32 (123)
2-5/32 (55)
Fig:unionangle
1.
Figure 5: Two-Way Union Angle Valve Dimensions
23
Table 21: Two-Way Union Angle Valve Dimensions, in. (mm)1

1-23/32 (44)
2-21/32 (68)
1-7/8 (48)
1-9/16 (40)
3-3/32 (79)
2-1/8 (54)
1 (DN25) N.O./PDTC
2-1/16 (53)
4-1/32 (102)
2-9/16 (65)
1-1/4 (DN32) N.O./PDTC
2-3/8 (60)
4-19/32 (117)
2-25/32 (70)
1-1/2 (DN40) N.O./PDTC
2-9/16 (65)
4-27/32 (123)
3-3/8 (85)
1.
Fig:unionsweat
Figure 6: Union Sweat Valve Dimensions

Table 22: Union Sweat Valve Dimensions, in. (mm)1
B
Two-Way N.O./
PDTC
Two-Way N.C./
PDTO
Three-Way
Mixing
4-3/16 (106)
13/16 (20)
1-17/32 (39)
2-17/32 (64)
1/2 (DN15), 1/2 in. Tubing
4-3/16 (106)
13/16 (20)
1-17/32 (39)
2-17/32 (64)
1/2 (DN15), 3/4 in. Tubing
4-25/32 (122)
13/16 (20)
1-17/32 (39)
2-17/32 (64)
3/4 (DN20)
5-1/16 (129)
15/16 (24)
1-9/16 (40)
3-1/4 (82)
1 (DN25)
6-3/32 (155)
1-5/32 (29)
1-3/4 (44)
3-23/32 (94)
1-1/4 (DN32)
7-9/32 (185)
1-11/32 (34)
2 (51)
4-3/32 (104)
1-1/2 (DN40)
8-19/32 (218)
2-5/32 (55)
2-3/4 (70)
4-29/32 (125)
2 (DN50)
9-7/16 (240)
2-1/8 (53)
2-27/32 (72)
5-19/32 (142)
1/2 (DN15), 3/8 in. Tubing
1.
24
See to Table 23 for overall assembly height C and clearance D dimensions.
Table 23: Valve Assembly Dimensions, in. (mm)

Actuator
Type
C1
1/2 in.
(DN15)
D1
3/4 in.
(DN20)
1 in.
(DN25)
1-1/4 in.
(DN32)
1-1/2 in.
(DN40)
2 in.
(DN50)
Brass Trim Valve Assemblies

V-3000-8011
4-3/4
(120)
4-3/4
(120)
5-31/32
(151)
5-7/8
(149)
5-13/16
(147)
6-3/16
(157)
3-9/16
(90)
V-3000-8003
5-11/32
(135)
5-11/32
(135)
6-9/16
(166)
6-19/32
(167)
6-13/32
(162)
6-13/16
(172)
3-9/16
(90)
V-3801-8001
4
(102)
4
(102)
---
---
---
---
2-3/8
(60)
MP82xx,
MP83xx
---
---
12-23/32
(323)
12-27/32
(326)
13-13/32
(341)
13-13/16
(351)
3-1/2
(89)
VA-4233
8
(203)
8
(203)
9-7/32
(234)
9-7/32
(234)
---
---
1-1/2
(38)
VA-715x
7-11/16
(195)
7-11/16
(195)
8-5/8
(219)
8-5/8
(219)
9-5/32
(233)
9-5/32
(233)
2-1/2
(64)
VA-720x
---
---
9-19/32
(244)
9-5/8
(244)
9-15/16
(252)
10-3/4
(273)
4-1/2
(114)
VA-802x
6-7/16
(164)
6-7/16
(164)
---
---
---
---
1-1/2
(38)
M9116,
M9220
14
(356)
14
(356)
15-7/32
(386)
15-7/32
(386)
15-1/16
(382)
15-15/32
(392)
---
10-13/16
(274)
10-13/16
(274)
12-1/32
(305)
12-1/32
(305)
11-7/8
(301)
12-1/4
(311)
---
M1xx
Stainless Steel Trim Valve Assemblies2

V-3000-8011
5-7/16
(138)
5-7/16
(138)
6
(152)
6-1/4
(158)
---
---
3-9/16
(90)
V-3000-8003
6-1/16
(153)
6-1/4
(158)
6-19/32
(167)
6-27/32
(173)
---
---
3-9/16
(90)
MP82xx
12-3/4
(324)
13-17/64
(337)
13-39/64
(346)
13-27/32
(352)
14-1/32
(356)
14-15/64
(361)
3-1/2
(89)
MP83xx
12-21/64
(313)
12-35/64
(319)
12-7/8
(327)
13-1/8
(333)
13-19/64
(338)
13-1/2
(343)
3-1/2
(89)
MP84xx
---
---
---
---
17-7/32
(437)
17-27/64
(443)
3-1/2
(89)
MP85xx
---
---
---
---
15-61/64
(405)
16-5/32
(410)
3-1/2
(89)
VA-4233
8-23/32
(221)
8-15/16
(227)
9-9/32
(236)
9-13/16
(249)
---
---
1-1/2
(38)
VA-715x
8-13/32
(214)
8-5/8
(219)
8-31/32
(228)
9-7/32
(234)
9-13/32
(239)
9-5/8
(244)
2-1/2
(64)
VA-720x
9-3/32
(231)
9-5/16
(236)
9-21/32
(245)
9-7/8
(251)
10-3/32
(256)
10-9/32
(261)
4-1/2
(114)
14-11/16
(373)
14-29/32
(378)
15-1/4
(387)
15-1/2
(393)
15-23/32
(399)
15-7/8
(403)
---
11-1/2
(292)
11-23/32
(297)
12-1/16
(306)
12-5/16
(312)
12-1/2
(318)
12-11/16
(322)
---
M9116,
M9220
M1xx
1.
2.
Dimension C is the overall height above the centerline of the valve body and dimension D is the clearance required for
actuator removal (as illustrated in Figure 3).
An extended bonnet comes as standard equipment on VG7000 Series Bronze Control Valves with stainless steel trim,
to allow for higher fluid temperatures (100 psig [689 kPa] saturated steam at 338F [170C]).
25
Repair Information
Maintenance and Accessories
If the VG7000 Series Bronze Control Valve fails to

operate within its specifications, see the Maintenance
and Accessories and Reconditioning Kits sections for a
list of repair parts and reconditioning kits available. For
a replacement valve, contact the nearest
The maintenance parts available for the

VG7000 Series Valves are listed in Table 24. See
Table 25 for a list of available accessories.
Table 24: Maintenance Parts (Order Separately)

Code Number
Description
VG7000-6001
Ring Pack Packing Kits for Brass Trim Valves:

Single Pack for 1/4 in. Stem (1/2 or 3/4 in. Valves)
Kit Includes: two ring packs (U-cup with installed O-ring), one stem wiper, one insertion/
removal tool, one bullet, one grease tube, and one 3 in. (76 mm) strip of crocus cloth
VG7000-6002
VG7000-6003
Single Pack for 3/8 in. Stem (1 through 2 in. Valves)

Kit includes: two ring packs (U-cup with installed O-ring), one stem wiper, one stem guide, one
insertion/removal tool, one sleeve packing installer, one grease tube, and one 3 in. (76 mm)
strip of crocus cloth
10 Pack for 1/4 in. Stem (1/2 or 3/4 in. Valves)
Kit Includes: twenty ring packs (U-cup with installed O-ring), ten stem guides, one insertion/
removal tool, one bullet, two grease tubes, and one 24 in. (610 mm) strip of crocus cloth
VG7000-6004
10 Pack for 3/8 in. Stem (1 through 2 in. Valves)

Kit includes: twenty ring packs (U-cup with installed O-ring), ten stem wipers, ten stem guides,
one insertion/removal tool, one sleeve packing installer, two grease tubes, and a 24 in. (610
mm) strip of crocus cloth
VG7000-6011
PTFE V-Ring Packing Kits for Stainless Steel Trim Valves:

Single Pack for 1/4 in. Stem, SS Trim (1/2 or 3/4 in. Valves)
Kit includes: two Teflon V-rings, one rubber V-ring, two Teflon stem wipers, one Teflon stem
guide, one Teflon bushing, one steel washer, one spring, one insertion/removal tool, one
bullet, one grease tube, and one 3 in. (76 mm) strip of crocus cloth
VG7000-6012
Single Pack for 3/8 in. Stem, SS Trim (1 through 2 in. Valves)
sleeve packing installer, one grease tube, and one 3 in. (76 mm) strip of crocus cloth
26
Table 25: Accessories (Order Separately)1

Code Number
Description
---
For specific actuator code numbers, refer to appropriate product bulletins.
---
For mounting and linkage kits, refer to Tables 6, 7, 8, and 9 in this bulletin.
EP-8000-1
EP Transducer, Low Volume, 0.5 to 9 VDC
EP-8000-2
EP Transducer, High Volume, 0.25 to 9.5 VDC
EP-8000-3
EP Transducer, Low Volume, 4 to 20 mA DC
EP-8000-4
EP Transducer, High Volume, 4 to 20 mA DC
EP-8000-101
EP-8000 Electro-Pneumatic Transducer Mounting Kit
R-3710
0.007 in. Restrictor (Required for Low Volume EP-8000 Models)
A-4000-1037
Inline Air Filter (Required for all EP-8000 Models)
JC 5361
Hypodermic Needle Test Probe Assembly
G-2010
0 to 30 psig (0 to 207 kPa) Gauge
VA-8000-102
Valve Position Indicator for Electrically Actuated Valves with VA-805x Actuators Only
VG7000-1016
Bonnet Adaptor for V-3000 Style Linkages on 1 through 2 in. VG7000 Series Valves
(Required when Converting from an M100 Series Actuator to an M9x16, VA-4233, VA-715x,
or VA-720x Series Actuator)
V-9502-90
V-9502-91
Positioners for V-3000-8001 and V-3000-8011:

Pneumatic Positioner (Less Spring) for V-3000-8011
V-9502-6801
V-9502-6802
V-9502-6801
V-9502-6802
V-9502-6801
V-9502-6803
Positioner Feedback Springs for V-3000-8001 and V-3000-8011:

5/16 in. (8 mm) Stroke for 1/2 or 3/4 in. Valve 3 psig (21 kPa) Span
5/16 In. (8 mm) Stroke for 1/2 or 3/4 in. Valve 8 psig (55 kPa) Span
1/2 in. (13 mm) Stroke for 1 or 1-1/4 in. Valve 5 psig (34 kPa) Span
3/4 in. (19 mm) Stroke for 1-1/2 or 2 in. Valve 10 psig (69 kPa) Span
V-9502-95
MP8000-6002
EPP-1000-8
MP8000-6003
Positioners and Positioner Accessories for MP8000 Series Actuators:

Pneumatic Positioner (Less Spring and Mounting Hardware)
V-9502 Pneumatic Positioner Mounting Kit with Springs
Electro-Pneumatic Positioner (Less Mounting Hardware)
EPP-1000 Electro-Pneumatic Positioner Mounting Kit
V-9502-76
V-9502-8100
V-9502-8102
V-9502-8106
Positioner and Feedback Springs for V-400 and V-500 Actuators:

Pneumatic Positioner (Less Spring)
5/16 in. (8 mm) Stroke for 1/2 or 3/4 in. Valve Adjustable 3 to 12 psig (21 to 83 kPa) Span
1/2 in. (13 mm) Stroke for 1 or 1-1/4 in. Valve Adjustable 3 to 12 psig (21 to 83 kPa) Span
3/4 in. (19 mm) Stroke for 1-1/2 or 2 in. Valve Adjustable 3 to 12 psig (21 to 83 kPa) Span
1.
Positioner accessory kits include positioner and all the appropriate mounting hardware, excluding the positioner feedback
spring that must be ordered separately.
27
Reconditioning Kits
Table 26: Ordering Data VG7000 Series Reconditioning Kits
V G
Valve Global
1 2 7
3
Product Family
7 = Cast Bronze
Body Type

K
Reconditioning
K = Inner Valve Reconditioning Kits
Kits
(Includes: bonnet, bonnet nut, packing, stem, plug, disk, and seat; replaceable
seat is available for stainless steel trim valves only.)
Trim and Flow
1 = Brass Equal Percentage (All Two-Way and 1/2 in. Three-Way)
Characteristic
2 = Brass Linear (Two-Way Union Angle and All Three-Way)

Size and
C = 1/2 in., 0.73 Cv (0.63 Kv)
Cv (Kv)
E = 1/2 in., 1.8 Cv (1.6 Kv)

G = 1/2 in., 4.6 Cv (4.0 Kv)
L = 3/4 in., 7.3 Cv (6.3 Kv)
N = 1 in., 11.6 Cv (10.0 Kv)
P = 1-1/4 in., 18.5 Cv (16.0 Kv)
R = 1-1/2 in., 28.9 Cv (25.0 Kv)
S = 2 in., 46.2 Cv (40.0 Kv)
Stem Type
T = Standard Threaded Stem (All Except V-3801, V-500, MP84, VA-8x2x)

S = Slotted Stem and Small Bonnet (Factory-Mounted V-3801, VA-8x2x) Only)
L = Large Threaded Stem (Factory-Mounted V-500 Only)
Optional
+ = Lower Body Option (For 1-1/2 and 2 in. Bodies Only)
Lower Body
(Leave Fields 9 and 10 blank for 1/2 through 1-1/4 in. kits and for 1-1/2 and 2
in. kits without lower body.)
N.C. Valve
W = Two-Way Bottom Cap
10
Bottom Cap
(For 1-1/2 and 2 in. valves, it is recommended that a new bottom cap is ordered
with the reconditioning kit.)
Three-Way
4 = NPT
10
Lower Body
(For 1-1/2 and 2 in. valves, it is recommended that a lower body with matching
end connection is ordered with the reconditioning kit.)
1 2 3
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
V G 7
4 K 1 R T + 4
Reconditioning Kit
28
= Field
Example: Cast bronze valve, two-way, normally closed/push-down-to-open,

brass trim, equal percentage, 1-1/2 in., 28.9 Cv, standard threaded stem, with a
three-way lower body.
1-1/2 or 2 in. Bottom Cap/

Lower Body
The reconditioning kits for VG7000 Series Valves

include all the components necessary to return a valve
to near new condition. These kits are available
according to the convenient features and options
format shown in Table 26. A descriptive list of the
components in each kit is given below. Note that
1-1/2 and 2 in. two-way N.C. and three-way valves
incorporate a stem guide in the bottom body of the
valve.
The stem guide is integral for N.C./PDTO valves and
the lower body for three-way valves. Depending on the
wear condition of this part, it may or may not need to be
replaced. While replacement is always recommended,
these parts are available as an optional component
included in the kit or ordered separately. The code
numbers for these parts are listed in Table 27.
For N.C./PDTO and three-way valves with stainless

steel trim, the kit contains:
stem and plug assembly
stainless steel seat (two for three-way valves)
all packing components
bonnet
bottom cap/lower body (optional for 1-1/2 and 2 in.

valves only)
Table 27: Lower Body Kits
For N.O./PDTC valves with brass trim, the kit contains

the bonnet, packing, and stem and plug assembly.
For N.C./PDTO and three-way valves with brass trim,
the kit contains:
Code Number
Valve Type
End
Connection
VG7000-6101
1-1/2 in. Brass,

N.C./PDTO
Bottom Cap
VG7000-6105
1-1/2 in. Brass,

Three-Way
NPT
VG7000-6106
2 in. Brass,
N.C./PDTO
Bottom Cap
VG7000-6110
2 in. Brass,
Three-Way
NPT
VG7000-6111
1-1/2 in. Stainless

Steel, N.C./PDTO
Bottom Cap
bonnet
VG7000-6115
1-1/2 in. Stainless

Steel, Three-Way
NPT

valves only)
VG7000-6116
2 in. Stainless
Steel, N.C./PDTO
Bottom Cap
VG7000-6120
2 in. Stainless
Steel, Three-Way
NPT
For N.O./PDTC valves with stainless steel trim, the kit

contains:
preassembled bonnet, packing, and stem and plug

assembly
stainless steel seat
VG7000 Series Bronze Control Valves1 (Part 1 of 3)
Hot Water, Chilled Water, 50/50 Glycol Solutions, or Steam for HVAC
Systems (Fluid Group 1 According to 67/548/EEC)
Service2
Valve Body Size/Cv (kv)
Valve Stroke
1/2 in.
0.73 (0.63), 1.8 (1.6), and 4.6 (4.0)
3/4 in.
7.3 (6.3)
1 in.
11.6 (10)
1-1/4 in.
18.5 (16)
1-1/2 in.
28.9 (25)
2 in.
46.2 (40)
5/16 in. (8 mm) for 1/2 or 3/4 in. Valves
1/2 in. (13 mm) for 1 and 1-1/4 in. Valves
3/4 in. (19 mm) for 1-1/2 and 2 in. Valves
Valve Body Rating
Meets requirements of ANSI B16.15, Class 250 (EN 12360).
29

Valve Ambient Operating
Temperature Limits
Valve Assembly Maximum
Allowable Pressure/
Temperature
35 to 150F (2 to 65C)
Steam
Brass Trim: 35 psig (241 kPa) Saturated Steam at 281F (138C)

SS Trim: 100 psig (690 kPa) Saturated Steam at 338F (170C)
Water
Brass Trim: 400 psig (2,756 kPa) up to 150F (66C), Decreasing to

365 psig (2,515 kPa) at 248F (120C)
SS Trim: 400 psig (2,756 kPa) up to 150F (66C), Decreasing to
308 psig (2,122 kPa) at 338F (170C)
Leakage
Inherent Flow Characteristics
Brass Trim
SS Trim
0.05% of Maximum Flow
Two-Way
Valves
Equal Percentage
Three-Way
Mixing
Valves
Linear
Rangeability3
25:1 for All Sizes (EN 60534-2-4)
Spring Range Pneumatic

Actuators
3 to 6 psig (21 to 41 kPa) for All Except MP8000;

3 to 7 psig (21 to 48 kPa) for MP8000 Only;
4 to 8 psig (28 to 55 kPa);
9 to 13 psig (62 to 90 kPa)
Maximum Recommended
Operating Pressure Drop
Steam
Brass Trim: 15 psig (103 kPa) for All Valve Sizes
Water
Brass and SS Trim: 35 psig (241 kPa) for 1/2 through 1-1/4 in. Valves;
30 psig (207 kPa) for 1-1/2 and 2 in. Valves
SS Trim: 100 psig (690 kPa) for All Valve Sizes
Maximum Actuator Supply

Pressure (Pneumatically
Actuated Valves Only)
25 psig (172 kPa) Maximum
Materials
Body: Cast Bronze

Bonnet: Brass
Brass Trim
Stem: Stainless Steel

Plug: Brass
Seat: Brass Against Molded Elastomeric Disk
Packing: Self-Adjusting Ethylene Propylene Rubber (EPR) Ring Pack
U-Cups
SS Trim

Plug: Stainless Steel
Seat: Stainless Steel
Packing: Spring Loaded Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) and
Elastomer V-Rings
30

Valve Fluid Operating
Temperature Limits
Brass Trim
Valve with
Pneumatic
Actuator
For V-3801-8001 and V-3000-8003 Actuators:

35 to 248F (2 to 120C) Water; 15 psig (103 kPa) Saturated Steam
Brass Trim
Valve with
Electric
Actuator
For VA-8x2x Actuators:

195F (91C) Maximum Water; Actuators are not rated for steam.
For MP82 and V-3000-8011 Actuators:

For VA-4233-xGx-2 Actuators:

For All Other Electric Actuators:
SS Trim
Valve with
Pneumatic
Actuator
All Pneumatic Actuators:

SS Trim
Valve with
Electric
Actuator

Actuator Ambient Operating

Temperature Limits
Compliance
1.
2.
3.

For M9116/M9220 Series Electric Actuators:
The maximum ambient operating temperature is limited to 110F (43C)
for fluid operating temperatures greater than 285F (141C).
For All Other Actuators:
Refer to the appropriate actuator or linkage kit product bulletin. Ambient
operating temperature or other service limitations vary by selected
actuator.
1/2, 3/4, and

1 in. Valves
Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) 97/23/EC:

Paragraph 3, Comma 3 (CE Marking is not applicable.)
1-1/4, 1-1/2,
and 2 in.
Valves

Category 1, Mod. A (Subject to CE Marking)
For models and ordering data, see Table 2, Table 3, and Table 4.
For maximum closeoff pressures, see Table 11 through Table 16.
For accessories (order separate), see Table 25.
Rangeability is defined as the ratio of maximum flow to minimum controllable flow.
Building Efficiency

Published in U.S.A.
31
VG7000 Series Bronze Control Valves

Product Bulletin
Code No. LIT-977140
VG7000 Series

Supersedes March 2001
VG7000 Series Bronze Control Valves are designed

primarily to regulate the flow of water and steam in
response to the demand of a controller in HVAC
systems. These valves are available in Normally Open
(N.O.), Normally Closed (N.C.), and three-way mixing
configurations. Both electric and pneumatic actuators
are available for factory or field mounting.
Figure 1: VG7000 Series Bronze Control Valves

Features
Benefits
Complete Family of 1/2 through

2 in. Bronze Valves, Brass and
Stainless Steel Trim, with Several
Styles of Electric and Pneumatic
Actuators
Offers a broad selection to choose from, including electric spring return actuators, a
true 1-1/4 in. valve body, a 3/4 in. valve with small oval top actuator, and Stainless
Steel (SS) trim capable of 100 psig saturated steam.
Flexible Features and Options

Ordering Matrix
Engineer to suit your specific application from thousands of easy-to-select,

factory-assembled combinations.
Uses Standard Johnson Controls

Ring Pack Packings
Provides industry-leading reliability and operating life.
Every Valve Tested for Tight

Shutoff
Provides energy conservation and ensures occupant comfort.
Standard Bonnet and Stem Design
Allows easy field retrofit, easy field mounting, and interchangeability of actuators with
the use of standardized mounting kits.
Ordering Data
Table 2: Ordering Data VG7000 Series Bronze Control Valves1
V G
Valve Global
1 2 7
Product Family
7 = Cast Bronze
Body Type
3 2
4

4
End
4 = Threaded (NPT)
Connections
5 = Union Globe/Union Angle (1/2 through 1-1/2 in. Body

Sizes, PDTC Only)
8 = Union Sweat, Standard Tubing
Trim and Flow

Characteristics
1 = Brass Equal Percentage (All Two-Way and 1/2 in.

Three-Way)
2 = Brass Linear (Three-Way Only)
Size and
C = 1/2 in., 0.73 Cv (0.63 Kv)
Cv (Kv)
E = 1/2 in., 1.8 Cv (1.6 Kv)

G = 1/2 in., 4.6 Cv (4.0 Kv)
L = 3/4 in., 7.3 Cv (6.3 Kv)
N = 1 in., 11.6 Cv (10.0 Kv)
P = 1-1/4 in., 18.5 Cv (16.0 Kv)
R = 1-1/2 in., 28.9 Cv (25.0 Kv)
S = 2 in., 46.2 Cv (40.0 Kv)
Stem Type
T = Standard Threaded Stem (All Except V-3801, MP84,

VA-8x2x)
S = Slotted Stem and Small Bonnet (Factory-Mounted
V-3801, VA-8x2x Only)
Actuator
+ = Factory-Mounted Actuator (See Table 3 and Table 4.)
Mounting
(Leave Fields 9 through 15 blank for valve without

factory-mounted actuator. Valve without factory-mounted
actuator is available with standard threaded stem only.)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11
12
13
V G 7 2 4 1 L T +
Valve
1.
Actuator
14
15
= Field
Example: Cast bronze valve, two-way, normally open/push-down-to-close,
threaded (NPT) end connections, brass trim, equal percentage,
3/4 in., 7.3 Cv, standard threaded stem.
See Table 3 when adding a factory-mounted pneumatic actuator to a valve body. See Table 4 when adding a
factory-mounted electric actuator to a valve body. For valid valve and actuator combinations, see Table 17 and
Table 18.
Table 3: Ordering Data Adding a Factory-Mounted Pneumatic Actuator1

V G 7 2 4 3 L T + 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11
12
13
V-3000/V-3801
Pneumatic
Actuator2
3801 = V-3801-8001 Small Oval Top (Slotted Stem Only)

3008 = V-3000-8011 Exposed
3003 = V-3000-8003 Enclosed
Spring Range
(V-3000/V-3801)
14
B = 3 to 6 psig (Suggested for N.O. Valves with Positioner)

Positioner)
Positioner)
Accessories
(V-3000/V-3801)
15
8
10
11
P = V-9502 Positioner (Not Avail. with V-3801-8001 or

V-3000-8003)
Blank = None
MP8000 Series
Pneumatic
Actuator2
82 = MP82, 25 sq in. Spring-Return-Up (SS or Brass Trim)

84 = MP84, 50 sq in. Spring-Return-Up (SS Trim Only)
(Only spring-return-up models of MP8000 Series
Pneumatic Actuators are available factory-mounted to
VG7000 Series Bronze Control Valves.)
Stroke
(MP8000
Series)
12
1 = 5/16 in. (1/2 or 3/4 in. Valves with MP82 Actuator Only)
2 = 1/2 in. (1 or 1-1/4 in. Valves with MP82 Actuator Only)
3 = 3/4 in. (1-1/2 or 2 in. Valves with MP82 or MP84
Actuator)
Spring Range
(MP8000
Series)
13
C = 3 to 7 psig (Suggested for N.O. Valves with Positioner)

Positioner)
Positioner)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11
V G 7 2 4 3 L T + 8
Valve
14
15
Accessories
(MP8000
Series)
= Field
12
13
14
15
Actuator
00 = None
01 = V-9502 Positioner
Example: Cast bronze valve, two-way, normally open, threaded (NPT) end
connections, stainless steel trim, equal percentage, 3/4 in., 7.3 Cv, standard
threaded stem, MP82 Series Pneumatic Actuator, 5/16 in. stroke, 3 to 7 psig
spring range, with factory-mounted V-9502 Positioner.
1.
See Table 2 when ordering a valve body only. See Table 4 when adding a factory-mounted electric actuator to
a valve body. For valid valve and actuator combinations, see Table 17 and Table 18.
2.

V G 7 2 4 1 L T + 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11
12
13
VA-7150/
VA-7200
Electric
Actuator2, 3

G
14
15
4
10
11
12
A
13
14
15
Voltage
(VA-7150/
VA-7200)
G = 24 VAC
Accessories
(VA-7150/
VA-7200)
Blank = None
VA-4233
Electric
Actuator2
Spring Return Up
Features
(VA-4233)4
423 = VA-4233-xGx-2, 24 VAC/VDC

AGA = Floating
AGC = Floating, 2 Aux. Sw.
BGA = On/Off
BGC = On/Off, 2 Aux. Sw.
GGA = Prop., 0-10 VDC, Feedback
GGC = Prop., 0-10 VDC, Feedback, 2 Aux. Sw.
10
11
12
M9116/M9220
Electric
Actuator2
Non-Spring Return
916 = M9116-xxx-2, 24 VAC/VDC
Spring Return (Available NPT Only)
92N = M9220-xxx-3, Spring-to-Open (Up), 24 VAC/VDC
94N = M9220-xxx-3, Spring-to-Close (Down), 24 VAC/VDC
13
14
15
Features
(M9116/M9220)
AGA = On/Off (Floating)

AGC = On/Off (Floating), 2 Aux. Sw.
GGA = Proportional., 0-10 VDC, Feedback
GGC = Proportional., 0-10 VDC, Feedback, 2 Aux. Sw.
10
11
12
13
G
14
15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11
12
13
14
V G 7 2 4 1 L T + 8
Valve
1.
2.
3.
4.
Actuator
15
VA-8x2x
Electric
Actuator2, 3
8020 = VA-8020-1, On/Off (Floating)
Voltage
(VA-8x2x)
G = 24 VAC
Accessories
(VA-8x2x)
Blank = None
8122 = VA-8122-1, Proportional
= Field
Example: Cast bronze valve, two-way, push-down-to-close, threaded (NPT)
end connections, brass trim, equal percentage, 3/4 in., 7.3 Cv, standard
threaded stem, VA-8020-1 On/Off (Floating) Electric Actuator, 24 VAC supply.
See Table 2 when ordering a valve body only. See Table 3 when adding a factory-mounted pneumatic actuator to a valve
body. For valid valve and actuator combinations, see Table 17 and Table 18.
Available for PDTC Two-Way and Three-Way body styles only.
Available for NPT (threaded) and Union Sweat End Connections body style only.
IMPORTANT: The VG7000 Series Bronze Control
Valves are intended to control saturated steam, hot
water, and chilled water flow under normal
equipment operating conditions. Where failure or
malfunction of the VG7000 Series Valve could lead
to personal injury or property damage to the
limit controls, intended to warn of or protect against
failure or malfunction of the VG7000 Series Valve.
VG7000 Series Bronze Control Valves feature brass
and stainless steel trim, and are available in two-way
configurations with Push-Down-to-Close (PDTC
normally open if pneumatic or spring return) or
Push-Down-to-Open (PDTO normally closed if
pneumatic or spring return) with threaded (NPT), union
sweat, union globe, and union angle end connections.
The valve can be ordered with a variety of pneumatic
actuators: V-3000-8011 (exposed, with or without a
factory-mounted positioner), V-3000-8003 (enclosed),
V-3801-8001 (oval top), and higher force MP8000
Series Actuators (with or without a factory-mounted
pneumatic positioner).
VG7000 Series Valves can also be ordered with any of
the following series electric actuators: VA-4233,
VA-7150, VA-7200, VA-8x2x, M9116, or M9216. All
electric actuators are fully compatible with
Johnson Controls controllers, reducing installation
costs. Valves without actuators can be ordered with the
standard bonnet and stem design, allowing easy
interchangeability of actuators with the use of
standardized mounting kits. See Table 2 through
Table 4 for ordering data and additional details. For
valid valve and actuator combinations, see Table 17
and Table 18. (Buy American factory-mounted valve
and actuator combinations are no longer available.)
The modulating valve plug of VG7000 Series Valves
provides an equal percentage flow characteristic for
two-way valves, and equal percentage or linear for
three-way valves. Tight shutoff is ensured using a
molded elastomeric disk in valves with brass trim, and
a precisely machined metal-to-metal seat for valves
with stainless steel trim. An arrow is cast on one side of
the valve body indicating the direction of flow for proper
piping.
Pneumatic Actuator Selection

(See Table 9, Table 11, Table 12, and Table 17.)
Note: The V-3000-8011, V-3000-8003, and
V-3801-8001 Pneumatic Actuators should not be
confused with the V-3000-1, V-3000-2, and V-3802-1
Pneumatic Actuators. Refer to the V-3000-8011
(Exposed) and V-3000-8003 (Enclosed) Pneumatic
Valve Actuator Product/Technical Bulletin (LIT-977252)
for specifics regarding interchangeability. The
V-3801-8001 is not a direct replacement for the
V-3802-1, since V-3802-1 is not compatible with
VG7000 Series Valves.

The V-3801-8001 is a low force, oval top actuator
designed specifically for 1/2 and 3/4 in. valves where
mounting space is restricted. The V-3801-8001 has
sufficient force to handle most seating pressures, and
the molded diaphragm design provides a constant
effective area (4 sq. in.) throughout the valve stem
stroke. Due to the simplicity of the design, it is more
economical to replace the actuator than repair it. The
actuator assembly can be removed or repositioned by
loosening a single set screw without disturbing the rest
of the valve assembly.
Because the V-3801-8001 uses a unique slotted valve
stem for factory assembly (see the Stem Type section
in Table 2), the spring kits available are for field
mounting to standard threaded stem valves. See
Table 9 for mounting kit code numbers.

The V-3000-8011 is a versatile, medium-force
pneumatic actuator that can be used in most HVAC
applications, including sequential control of valves. See
Table 11 and Table 12 for actuator sizing and selection.
The permanently captured, molded rolling diaphragm
of the V-3000-8011 provides a constant effective area
(8 sq. in.) throughout the valve stem stroke. Like the
V-3801-8001, it is more economical to replace the
actuator than to repair it due to the simplicity of the
design. The actuator assembly can be removed or
repositioned by loosening a single set screw without
disturbing the rest of the valve assembly.
factory or field mounting to the V-3000-8011.
The V-3000-8003, operationally similar to the

V-3000-8011, is designed for enclosed installation in a
location where the actuator might be subjected to
tampering. Unlike the V-3000-8011, this model has a
replaceable molded diaphragm design.
Factory-mounted electric actuators are available on

two-way PDTC and three-way mixing valve
configurations only. Actuators can be easily field
reversed if required. The actuators can be field
mounted on PDTO valves if desired. All proportional
electric actuator assemblies are factory calibrated for
nominal 0 to 10 VDC operation, to drive down with an
increase in signal. The VA-4233 is available on all
valve styles: PDTO, PDTC, and three-way.
MP8000 Series Pneumatic Actuators

The higher force MP82 (25 sq. in. effective diaphragm
area) and MP84 (50 sq. in. effective diaphragm area)
Pneumatic Actuators are used where higher maximum
closeoff pressures are required, such as 1-1/2 and 2 in.
brass trim valves and 1/2 through 2 in. stainless steel
trim valves.
These actuators are equipped with a molded synthetic
rubber diaphragm contained in a sturdy, carbon-steel
housing that protects it against dirt and damage. The
actuator can be easily removed to perform inline
servicing to all parts of the valve. The MP8000
Actuators are available factory mounted or are easily
field mounted to VG7000 Series Valves. See Table 9
for the appropriate mounting kit.
The MP8000 Actuators are designed to allow for
reversing the action of the actuators in the field. If
desired, the action of the MP8000 on Normally Open
(N.O.) valves can be reversed from spring-return-up to
spring-return-down or vice versa. To field reverse the
actuator, refer to the MP8000 Pneumatic Valve
Actuators Technical Bulletin (LIT-977258).
factory or field mounting to MP8000 Series Pneumatic
Valve Actuators.
T-3000 Valve Top Thermostat Actuators

The T-3111 and T-3311 Series Valve Top Thermostat
Actuators are available for field mounting to all VG7000
Series Valves (N.O., N.C., and three-way). The valve
top thermostats are a combination of a pneumatic
thermostat and a pneumatic valve actuator. The T-3111
and T-3311 are available in both direct and reverse
acting models with various features and options. Refer
to the T-3111 Integral Thermostat and Piston Top Valve
Actuator Single Temperature, Single Pressure Product/
Technical Bulletin (LIT-7171137) and the T-3311
Integral Thermostat and Piston Top Valve Actuator
Dual Temperature, Dual Pressure Product/Technical
Bulletin (LIT-7171152) for specifications and ordering
information.
Note: A mounting kit is required to field mount T-3111
or T-3311 Valve Top Thermostats to a valve. See
Table 9 for the appropriate mounting kit code number.

The VA-4233 Series Electric Actuators use a stepper
motor to accurately position the valve. In the event of a
power failure, a spring in the actuator automatically
returns the valve to the full stem-up position. These
direct-mount, spring return electric actuators provide a
minimum 61 lb force output for floating, on/off, or
proportional control, and can be factory mounted to
1/2 through 1-1/4 in. valve bodies with NPT (threaded)
and union sweat end connections.
Integral auxiliary switches are available for indicating
end stop position or to perform switching functions. On
proportional models, position feedback is also available
through a proportional DC voltage signal. All models
feature a hand crank for manual positioning of the
valve, independent of a power supply.

synchronous motor and magnetic clutch to accurately
constant load at the end of travel, ensuring tight valve
shutoff and automatically compensating for seat wear.
feedback (VA-7153), or 0 to 10 VDC proportional
control (VA-7152).

synchronous motor and a magnetic clutch to accurately
constant load at the end of travel, which ensures tight
shutoff and automatically compensates for seat wear.
feedback (VA-7203), or 0 to 10 VDC (0 to 20 mA)
proportional control (VA-7202).
VA-8x2x Series Electric Actuators
The VA-8x2x Series Actuators are synchronous

motor-driven, force sensor limited, non-spring return
actuators that feature a 22 lb seating force in a
compact design. The VA-8020 accepts floating control
from a three-wire, 24 VAC control signal. The VA-8122
typically accepts proportional control from a 0 to
10 VDC control signal; however, it can be field adjusted
to accept signals up to 20 VDC. In addition, the
VA-8122 features an input signal reversing feature that
allows it to be used in both heating and cooling
applications.
The M100 Series is a rotary actuator used to position

valves in HVAC and industrial applications. When
coupled with a VG7000-M1x0 Series Valve Mounting
Kit, the rotary motion of the M100 Series Actuator is
converted to linear movement. The mounting kit
includes an overtravel spring, which determines the
maximum seating pressure in conjunction with actuator
selection.
Note: The VA-8x2x is only available factory mounted

on 1/2 and 3/4 in. valves. Because the VA-8x2x
requires a unique slotted valve stem for factory
assembly, it is necessary to select the S option in the
Stem Type section of Table 2.

The M9116 Series is a line of motor driven, non-spring
and are available for use with floating or proportional
controllers. When coupled with the M9000-500 Valve
Mounting, the rotary motion of this actuator is
converted into linear motion that will operate
1/2 through 2 in. VG7000 Series Valves. The actuator
and mounting deliver a minimum stem force of 180 lb in
both directions. A compression spring on the output
shaft of the mounting automatically compensates for
seat wear. Integral auxiliary switches are available for
indicating end stop position or to perform switching
functions. Position feedback is available via switches, a
potentiometer, or a 0 (2) to 10 VDC signal.

The M9220 Series is a line of motor driven, spring
and are available for use with on/off, floating, or
proportional controllers. When coupled with the
M9000-500 Valve Mounting, the rotary motion of this
actuator is converted into linear motion that operates
1/2 through 2 in. VG7000 Series Valves.
The actuator and mounting deliver a minimum stem
force of 180 lb in both directions. A compression spring
on the output shaft of the mounting automatically
compensates for seat wear. Integral auxiliary switches
are available for indicating end stop position or to
perform switching functions. Position feedback is
available via switches, a potentiometer, or a 0 (2) to
10 VDC signal.
The M110, M120, M130, M140, and M150 Actuators

are only available for field mounting to VG7000 Series
Valves. See Table 5 for ordering information and
additional details. Kits are available to field mount all
M100 models; see Table 5, Table 8, and Table 10 for
detailed information.
Table 5: M100 Actuator Mounting Kits
Actuator
Seating Force (lb)
Mounting Kit
M110
40
VG7000-M110
M120/M130
100
VG7000-M130
M140
150
VG7000-M140
M150
270
VG7000-M150
The M120, M140, and M150 are non-spring return

actuators that will hold their position when
de-energized. The M110 and M130 are spring return
actuators that return the valve to its normal operating
position when the power is disconnected. A braking
mechanism keeps the return spring from driving the
motor actuator toward its return position during normal
reversible operation. The gear train and motor are
housed in an oil-filled compartment designed for
extended life.
The M100 provides the appropriate interface for a
variety of electronic controllers through selection of
factory-installed circuit boards. The M100 Series
Actuator is compatible with all Johnson Controls
controllers. The M100 can provide proportional,
floating, potentiometer, or on/off control, as well as
control by direct digital input from zone bus controllers.
The M100 Actuator requires a 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz power
supply; however, transformer options are available.
The actuator can be mounted for stem-up or
stem-down operation. On three-way valves, the seating
force can be applied on both the up and the down
stroke.
Shipping Weights
Table 6: Shipping Weights for Brass Trim Valves1
Actuator
Valve Size, in.

1/2
3/4
1-1/4
1-1/2
V-3801-8001
2.5
3.1
---
---
---
---
V-3000-8011
3.1
4.2
6.2
6.1
11.8
16.9
V-3000-8003
3.2
4.3
6.3
6.2
11.9
17.0
MP82
---
---
14.0
16.0
19.0
24.0
MP84
---
---
---
---
---
---
VA-4233
5.3
6.4
8.4
8.3
---
---
VA-7150
3.9
5.0
7.0
6.9
12.6
17.7
VA-7200
---
---
7.5
7.4
13.1
18.2
VA-8x2x
4.6
5.9
---
---
---
---
M9220
8.6
9.7
11.7
11.6
17.3
22.4
1.
Table 7: Shipping Weights for Stainless Steel Trim Valves1

Actuator
Valve Size, in.

1/2
3/4
1-1/4
1-1/2
V-3000-8011
3.4
4.2
6.6
8.6
---
---
V-3000-8003
3.5
4.2
6.7
8.7
---
---
MP82
11.0
12.0
14.0
16.0
19.0
24.0
MP84
---
---
---
---
32.0
37.0
VA-4233
5.3
5.6
8.0
10.0
---
---
VA-7150
3.9
4.2
6.6
8.6
12.6
17.7
VA-7200
4.7
5.5
7.9
9.9
13.1
18.2
M9220
8.6
9.7
12.1
14.1
17.3
22.4
1.
Mounting Kits
Field Mounting
The Y20EBE-11 Valve Mounting Adaptor Kit is

designed to adapt current Y20EBD-x Mounting Kits to
field mount M100 Series Actuators on VG7000 Series
Valves. See Table 8 for the appropriate mounting kit
code number.
A standard bonnet/stem design allows for easy field

mounting of actuators. See Table 2 to order valves
without actuators, Table 8, Table 9, and Table 10 to
order the appropriate mounting kits, and Table 17 and
Table 18 to identify compatible actuators. Refer to the
appropriate actuator product bulletin for specific
actuator code number information.
Table 8: M100 Mounting Kits (Includes Linkage and Adaptor)

Mounting Kit
Adaptor Kit
Y20EBD-2
Y20EBE-11
VG7000-M140
Y20EBD-3
Y20EBE-11
VG7000-M150
Y20EBD-5
Y20EBE-11
VG7000-M110
Y20EBD-6
Y20EBE-11
VG7000-M130
Table 9: Field Mounting Kits for Pneumatic Actuators1

Actuator Style
Valve Size in. (DN)2
Spring Range psig (kPa)
Mounting Kit
Code Number
T-3x11
V-3000-8011
V-3000-8003
1/2 or 3/4 (DN15 or DN20)

3 to 6 (21 to 41)
VG7000-10013
4 to 8 (28 to 55)
VG7000-10023
9 to 13 (62 to 90)
VG7000-10033
3 to 6 (21 to 41)
VG7000-10043
4 to 8 (28 to 55)
VG7000-10053
9 to 13 (62 to 90)
VG7000-10063
3 to 6 (21 to 41)
VG7000-10073
4 to 8 (28 to 55)
VG7000-10083
9 to 13 (62 to 90)
VG7000-10093
3 to 6 (21 to 41)
VG7000-10103
4 to 8 (28 to 55)
VG7000-10113
9 to 13 (62 to 90)
VG7000-10123
T-3x11
V-3000-8011
V-3000-8003
T-3x11
V-3000-8011
V-3000-8003
V-3801-8001
1 or 1-1/4 (DN25 or DN32)

1-1/2 or 2 (DN40 or DN50)

1/2 or 3/4 (DN15 or DN20)

V-3801-8001
1/2 or 3/4 (DN15 or DN20)

Kit with Three Springs:

3 to 6, 4 to 8, and 9 to 13 (Includes
hardware to adapt one valve only.)
VG7000-10153
MP82/MP83
1/2 or 3/4 (DN15 or DN20) with Stainless

Steel Trim
Not Applicable
MP8000-67014
MP82/MP83
1 through 2 (DN25 through DN50) with 1/4 in.

Stem and Stainless Steel or Brass Trim
Not Applicable
MP8000-67024
MP84/MP85
1-1/2 through 2 (DN40 through DN50) with

3/8 in. Stem and Stainless Steel Trim
Not Applicable
MP8000-67035
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
DN is the European designation for body size in metric units (mm).
The mounting kits include: upper spring seat, spring, stem extension, stem locking screw (or set screw), and a
bonnet adaptor for the V-3801-8001.
The mounting kits include: stem nut (1), stem extender nuts (2), stem extender (1), and yoke nut (1).
The mounting kit includes: stem nuts (2) and yoke nut (1).
Table 10: Field Mounting Kits for Electric Actuators1

Actuator Style
Valve Size in. (DN)
M110
VG7000-M110
M120/M130
VG7000-M130
M140
VG7000-M140
M150
VG7000-M150
VA-4233
1/2 through 1-1/4 in. (DN15 through DN32)
None Required
VA-715x
None Required
VA-720x
1 through 2 (DN25 through DN50)
None Required
VA-8x2x
Not available for field mounting.
M9x16
N.C.
(PDTO)
N.O.
(PDTC)
Stem Up Position
With the stem in the up position,
the lower port (N.O.) is open
N.C.
(PDTO)
N.O.
(PDTC)
Stem Down Position

With the stem in the down position,
the inline port (N.C.) is open
Figure 2: Three-Way Mixing Valves Fluid Flow Direction and Port Designation
10
FIG:VG7FG02P
1.
M9000-500
Table 11: Brass Trim Maximum Closeoff Pressures, psig (kPa) for Pneumatically Actuated Valves
Actuator
Style
V-3801-8001
(248F
[120C])3
V-3000-8011
(284F
[140C])
and
V-3000-8003
(248F
[120C])3
MP82
(284F
[140C])3
1.
2.
3.
Valve Size
in. (DN)
Brass Trim
Maximum
Cv (Kv)
Factor

Three-Way N.O. Port

Three-Way N.C. Port
3 to 62
(21 to 41)
4 to 8
(28 to 55)
9 to 13
(62 to 90)
3 to 62
(21 to 41)
4 to 8
(28 to 55)
9 to 13
(62 to 90)
0.73
(0.63)
186
(1,282)
157
(1,082)
84
(579)
37
(255)
57
(393)
158
(1,089)
1.8
(1.6)
186
(1,282)
157
(1,082)
84
(579)
37
(255)
57
(393)
158
(1,089)
4.6
(4.0)
105
(723)
89
(613)
48
(331)
18
(124)
28
(193)
76
(524)
3/4
(DN20)
7.3
(6.3)
67
(462)
56
(386)
30
(207)
11
(76)
16
(110)
45
(310)
1/2
(DN15)
0.73
(0.63)
365
(2,515)
339
(2,336)
191
(1,316)
100
(689)
142
(978)
348
(2,398)
1.8
(1.6)
365
(2,515)
339
(2,336)
191
(1,316)
100
(689)
142
(978)
348
(2,398)
4.6
(4.0)
225
(1,550)
192
(1,323)
108
(744)
49
(338)
68
(469)
168
(1,158)
3/4
(DN20)
7.3
(6.3)
144
(992)
122
(841)
69
(475)
29
(200)
41
(282)
100
(689)
1
(DN25)
11.6
(10)
90
(620)
76
(524)
42
289)
17
(117)
25
(172)
65
(448)
1-1/4
(DN32)
18.5
(16)
55
(379)
47
(324)
26
(179)
10
(69)
14
(96)
37
(255)
1-1/2
(DN40)
28.9
(25)
35
241)
30
(207)
16
(110)
6
(41)
9
(62)
23
(158)
2
(DN50)
46.2
(40)
22
(152)
19
(131)
11
(76)
4
(28)
6
(41)
14
(96)
1
(DN25)
11.6
(10)
279
(1,924)
257
(1,772)
148
(1,020)
70
(483)
96
(662)
223
(1,536)
1-1/4
(DN32)
18.5
(16)
170
(1,172)
157
(1,082)
90
(621)
40
(276)
55
(379)
128
(883)
1-1/2
(DN40)
28.9
(25)
109
(752)
100
(689)
58
(400)
25
(172)
34
(234)
79
(545)
2
(DN50)
46.2
(40)
70
(483)
64
(441)
37
(255)
16
(110)
21
(145)
50
(345)
1/2
(DN15)
The recommended spring ranges for use with a V-9502 Positioner are: 3 to 6 psig (21 to 41 kPa) and 3 to 7 psig
(21 to 48 kPa) for N.O. valves, 9 to 13 psig (62 to 90 kPa) for N.C. valves, and 4 to 8 psig (28 to 55 kPa) for three-way valves.
3 to 7 psig (21 to 48 kPa) for MP82 Actuators.
The maximum valve fluid temperature is as follows:
Actuator Style
Water
Saturated Steam
V-3801-8001
248F (120C)
15 psig (103 kPa)
V-3000-8011
284F (140C)
38 psig (262 kPa)
V-3000-8003
248F (120C)
15 psig (103 kPa)
MP82
284F (140C)
38 psig (262 kPa)
11
Table 12: Stainless Steel Trim Maximum Closeoff Pressure, psig (kPa) for Pneumatically Actuated Valves
Actuator
Style
V-3000-8011
and
V-3000-8003
(338F
[170C])3
MP82
(338F
[170C])3
MP84
(338F
[170C])3
1.
2.
3.
12
Valve Size
in. (DN)
SS Trim
Maximum
Cv (Kv)
Factor

Three-Way N.O. Port

Three-Way N.C. Port
3 to 62
(21 to 41)
4 to 8
(28 to 55)
9 to 13
(62 to 90)
3 to 62
(21 to 41)
4 to 8
(28 to 55)
9 to 13
(62 to 90)
0.73
(0.63)
299
(2,060)
255
(1,757)
143
(985)
75
(517)
106
(730)
261
(1,798)
1.8
(1.6)
299
(2,060)
255
(1,757)
143
(985)
75
(517)
106
(730)
261
(1,798)
4.6
(4.0)
169
(1,164)
144
(992)
81
(558)
36
(248)
51
(351)
126
(868)
3/4
(DN20)
7.3
(6.3)
108
(744)
92
(634)
52
(358)
22
(152)
31
(214)
75
(517)
1
(DN25)
11.6
(10)
67
(462)
57
(393)
32
(220)
13
(90)
19
(131)
49
(338)
1-1/4
(DN32)
18.5
(16)
41
(282)
35
(241)
19
(131)
7
(48)
11
(76)
28
(193)
1/2
(DN15)
0.73
(0.63)
308
(2,124)
308
(2,124)
308
(2,124)
280
(1,929)
308
(2,124)
308
(2,124)
1.8
(1.6)
308
(2,124)
308
(2,124)
308
(2,124)
280
(1,929)
308
(2,124)
308
(2,124)
4.6
(4.0)
308
(2,124)
308
(2,124)
275
(1,895)
135
(930)
183
(1,261)
308
(2,124)
3/4
(DN20)
7.3
(6.3)
308
(2,124)
304
(2,095)
175
(1,206)
81
(558)
109
(751)
252
(136)
1
(DN25)
11.6
(10)
209
(1,440)
193
(1,330)
111
(765)
53
(365)
72
(496)
168
(1,158)
1-1/4
(DN32)
18.5
(16)
128
(882)
118
(813)
68
(469)
30
(207)
41
(282)
96
(661)
1-1/2
(DN40)
28.9
(25)
82
(565)
75
(517)
43
(296)
19
(131)
25
(172)
59
(407)
2
(DN50)
46.2
(40)
52
(358)
48
(331)
28
(193)
12
(83)
16
(110)
37
(255)
1-1/2
(DN40)
28.9
(25)
165
(1,137)
152
(1,047)
88
(606)
39
(269)
53
(365)
121
(834)
2
(DN50)
46.2
(40)
106
(730)
97
(668)
56
(386)
24
(154)
33
(227)
76
(524)
1/2
(DN15)
The recommended ranges for use with a V-9502 Positioner are: 3 to 6 psig (21 to 41 kPa) and 3 to 7 psig (21 to 48 kPa) for
N.O. valves, 9 to 13 psig (62 to 90 kPa) for N.C. valves, and 4 to 8 psig (28 to 55 kPa) for three-way valves.
3 to 7 psig (21 to 48 kPa) for MP82 and MP84 Actuators.
Table 13: Brass Trim Maximum Closeoff Pressures, psig (kPa) for PDTC Two-Way and PDTC Port for
Valve
Size,
in. (DN)
1/2
(DN15)
3/4
(DN20)
1
(DN25)
1-1/4
(DN32)
1-1/2
(DN40)
2
(DN50)
Maximum
Cv (Kv)
Factor
0.73
(0.63)
1.8
(1.6)
4.6
(4.0)
7.3
(6.3)
11.6
(10.0)
18.5
(16.0)
28.9
(25.0)
46.2
(40.0)
VA-715x
345
(2,377)
345
(2,377)
216
(1,488)
138
(951)
86
(593)
52
(358)
34
(234)
21
(145)
VA-720x
---
---
---
---
179
(1,233)
109
(751)
70
(482)
45
(310)
VA-4233
345
(2,377)
345
(2,377)
208
(1,433)
132
(909)
63
(434)
38
(262)
---
---
M9116 or
M9220
345
(2,377)
345
(2,377)
345
(2,377)
289
(1,991)
182
(1,254)
111
(765)
71
(489)
46
(317)
144
(992)
144
(992)
82
(565)
52
(358)
31
(214)
19
(131)
12
(83)
8
(55)
M120 and
M1303
345
(2,377)
345
(2,377)
221
(1,523)
141
(971)
88
(606)
54
(372)
34
(234)
22
(152)
M1403
345
(2,377)
345
(2,377)
337
(2,322)
215
(1,481)
135
(930)
82
(565)
53
(365)
34
(234)
M1503
345
(2,377)
345
(2,377)
345
(2,377)
392
(2,701)
248
(1,709)
152
(1,047)
97
(668)
62
(427)
112
(772)
80
(551)
45
(310)
29
(200)
---
---
---
---
M1103
VA-8x2x
1.
2.
3.
mounting kits.
13
Table 14: Brass Trim Maximum Closeoff Pressures, psig (kPa) for PDTO Two-Way and PDTO Port for
Valve
Size,
in. (DN)
1/2
(DN15)
3/4
(DN20)
1
(DN25)
1-1/4
(DN32)
1-1/2
(DN40)
2
(DN50)
Maximum
Cv (Kv)
Factor
0.73
(0.63)
1.8
(1.6)
4.6
(4.0)
7.3
(6.3)
11.6
(10.0)
18.5
(16.0)
28.9
(25.0)
46.2
(40.0)
VA-715x
345
(2,377)
345
(2,377)
257
(1,171)
153
(1,054)
100
(690)
57
(393)
36
(248)
22
(152)
VA-720x
---
---
---
---
209
(1,440)
120
(827)
74
(510)
46
(317)
VA-4233
345
(2,377)
345
(2,377)
173
(1,192)
103
(710)
66
(455)
38
(262)
---
---
M9116
or M9220
345
(2,377)
345
(2,377)
345
(2,377)
321
(2,212)
213
(1,468)
122
(841)
76
(524)
47
(324)
M1103
200
(1,378)
200
(1,378)
97
(668)
58
(400)
36
(248)
21
(145)
13
(90)
8
(55)
M120 and
M1303
345
(2,377)
345
(2,377)
262
(1,805)
156
(1,075)
103
(710)
59
(407)
36
(248)
23
(158)
M1403
345
(2,377)
345
(2,377)
345
(2,377)
239
(1,647)
158
(1,089)
90
(620)
56
(386)
35
(241)
M1503
345
(2,377)
345
(2,377)
345
(2,377)
345
(2,377)
291
(2,005)
167
(1,151)
103
(710)
64
(441)
VA-8x2x
345
(2,377)
112
(772)
54
(372)
32
(220)
---
---
---
---
1.
2.
3.
14
mounting kits.
Table 15: Stainless Steel Trim Maximum Closeoff Pressures, psig (kPa) for PDTC Two-Way and PDTC
Valve
Size,
in. (DN)
1/2
(DN15)
3/4
(DN20)
1
(DN25)
1-1/4
(DN32)
1-1/2
(DN40)
2
(DN50)
Maximum
Cv (Kv)
Factor
0.73
(0.63)
1.8
(1.6)
4.6
(4.0)
7.3
(6.3)
11.6
(10.0)
18.5
(16.0)
28.9
(25.0)
46.2
(40.0)
VA-715x
239
(1,647)
239
(1,647)
135
(930)
86
(593)
54
(372)
33
(227)
21
(145)
13
(90)
VA-720x
308
(2,122)
308
(2,122)
278
(1,915)
177
(1,220)
112
(772)
68
(469)
44
(303)
28
(193)
VA-4233
230
(1,585)
230
(1,585)
130
(896)
82
(565)
39
(269)
24
(165)
---
---
M9116 or
M9220
308
(2,122)
308
(2,122)
283
(1,950)
180
(1,240)
114
(785)
70
(482)
45
(310)
28
(193)
90
(620)
90
(620)
51
(351)
32
(220)
19
(131)
12
(83)
8
(55)
5
(34)
M120 and
M1303
308
(2,122)
244
(1,681)
138
(951)
88
(606)
55
(379)
33
(227)
21
(145)
14
(96)
M1403
308
(2,122)
308
(2,122)
211
(1,454)
134
(923)
84
(579)
52
(358)
33
(227)
21
(145)
M1503
308
(2,122)
308
(2,122)
308
(2,122)
245
(1,688)
155
(1,068)
95
(655)
61
(420)
39
(269)
M1103
1.
2.
3.
mounting kits.
15
Table 16: Stainless Steel Trim Maximum Closeoff Pressures, psig (kPa) for PDTO Two-Way and PDTO
Valve
Size,
in. (DN)
1/2
(DN15)
3/4
(DN20)
1
(DN25)
1-1/4
(DN32)
1-1/2
(DN40)
2
(DN50)
Maximum
Cv (Kv)
Factor
0.73
(0.63)
1.8
(1.6)
4.6
(4.0)
7.3
(6.3)
11.6
(10.0)
18.5
(16.0)
28.9
(25.0)
46.2
(40.0)
VA-715x
308
(2,122)
308
(2,122)
161
(1,109)
96
(661)
63
(434)
36
(248)
22
(152)
14
(97)
VA-720x
308
(2,122)
308
(2,122)
308
(2,122)
197
(1,357)
131
(903)
75
(517)
46
(317)
29
(200)
VA-4233
224
(1,543)
224
(1,543)
108
(744)
64
(441)
41
(282)
24
(165)
---
---
M9116 or
M9220
308
(2,122)
308
(2,122)
308
(2,122)
201
(1,385)
133
(916)
76
(524)
47
(324)
30
(207)
125
(861)
125
(861)
61
(420)
36
(248)
23
(158)
13
(90)
8
(55)
5
(34)
M120 and
M1303
308
(2,122)
308
(2,122)
164
(1,130)
98
(675)
64
(441)
37
(255)
23
(158)
14
(96)
M1403
308
(2,122)
308
(2,122)
250
(1,723)
149
(1,027)
99
(682)
57
(393)
35
(241)
22
(152)
M1503
308
(2,122)
308
(2,122)
308
(2,122)
273
(1,881)
182
(1,254)
104
(717)
64
(441)
40
(276)
M1103
1.
2.
3.
16
mounting kits.

Actuator
Spring
Range
V-3801-8001
3-6
4-8
Valve Size,
in. (DN)
9-13
V-3000-80112
3-6
4-8
9-13
V-3000-8003
3-6
4-8
9-13
P822
3-6
4-8
MP842
9-13
3-6
4-8
9-13
VG7241, VG7441, and VG7842 Valves Brass Trim, NPT End Connections
1/2 in.
(DN15)
---
---
---
---
---
---
3/4 in.
(DN20)
---
---
---
---
---
---
1 in.
(DN25)
---
---
---
---
---
---
1-1/4 in.
(DN32)
---
---
---
---
---
---
1-1/2 in.
(DN40)
---
---
---
---
---
---
2 in.
(DN50)
---
---
---
---
---
---
Valve Size,
in. (DN)
VG7243, VG7443, and VG7844 Valves Stainless Steel Trim, NPT End Connections
1/2 in.
(DN15)
---
---
---
---
---
---
3/4 in.
(DN20)
---
---
---
---
---
---
1 in.
(DN25)
---
---
---
---
---
---
1-1/4 in.
(DN32)
---
---
---
---
---
---
1-1/2 in.
(DN40)
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
2 in.
(DN50)
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Valve Size,
in. (DN)
VG7281, VG7481, and VG7882 Valves Brass Trim, Union Sweat End Connections
1/2 in.
(DN15)
---
---
---
---
---
---
3/4 in.
(DN20)
---
---
---
---
---
---
1 in.
(DN25)
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
1-1/4 in.
(DN32)
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
1-1/2 in.
(DN40)
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
2 in.
(DN50)
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Valve Size,
in. (DN)
1/2 in.
(DN15)
X
---
---
---
---
---
---
17

Actuator
Spring
Range
V-3801-8001
3-6
4-8
Valve Size,
in. (DN)
9-13
V-3000-80112
3-6
4-8
9-13
V-3000-8003
3-6
4-8
9-13
P822
3-6
4-8
MP842
9-13
3-6
4-8
9-13
VG7251, VG7451 (1/2 in. Only), and VG7551 Valves Brass Trim, Union Globe
and Union Angle End Connections (No Factory-Mounted Positioners Available)
1/2 in.
(DN15)
---
---
---
---
---
---
3/4 in.
(DN20)
---
---
---
---
---
---
1 in.
(DN25)
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
1-1/4 in.
(DN32)
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
1-1/2 in.
(DN40)
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
1.
2.
18
Stainless steel trim is available only with NPT (internal) end connections.
Items shown as --- are not available factory mounted, and not recommended for field assembly.
Available with or without a positioner.
Table 18: Electrically Actuated Valves Available Factory-Mounted Combinations1

Non-Spring Return
Actuator
VA-7150-1001
VA-7152-1001
VA-7153-1001
Valve Size,
in. (DN)
VA-7200-1001
VA-7202-1001
VA-7203-1001
Spring Return2
VA-8020-1
VA-8122-1
VA-4233-AGA-2
VA-4233-AGC-2
VA-4233-BGA-2
VA-4233-BGC-2
VA-4233-GGA-2
VA-4233-GGC-2
M9116-AGx-2
M9116-GGx-2
M9220-AGx-3
M9220-GGx-3
VG7241 and VG7842 Valves Brass Trim, NPT End Connections
1/2 in. (DN15)
---
3/4 in. (DN20)
---
1 in. (DN25)
---
1-1/4 in. (DN32)
---
1-1/2 in. (DN40)
---
---
2 in. (DN50)
---
---
Valve Size,
in. (DN)
VG7243 and VG7844 Valves Stainless Steel Trim, NPT End Connections
1/2 in. (DN15)
---
3/4 in. (DN20)
---
1 in. (DN25)
---
1-1/4 in. (DN32)
---
1-1/2 in. (DN40)
---
---
2 in. (DN50)
---
---
Valve Size,
in. (DN)
VG7281 and VG7882 Valves Brass Trim, Union Sweat End Connections
1/2 in. (DN15)
---
---
3/4 in. (DN20)
---
---
1 in. (DN25)
---
---
1-1/4 in. (DN32)
---
---
1-1/2 in. (DN40)
---
---
---
2 in. (DN50)
---
---
---
Valve Size,
in. (DN)
1/2 in. (DN15)
Valve Size,
in. (DN)
1/2 in. (DN15)
X
---
---
VG7251 and VG7551 Valves Brass Trim, Union Globe and Union Angle End Connections
X
---
---
---
---
3/4 in. (DN20)
---
---
---
---
1 in. (DN25)
---
---
---
1-1/4 in. (DN32)
---
---
---
1-1/2 in. (DN40)
---
---
---
1.
2.
Items shown as --- are not available factory mounted, and not recommended for field assembly. Electric actuators are
available on two-way PDTC and three-way mixing valves only (except the VA-4233-xGx-2 Series, which is available on all
body styles).
The VA-4233 Series is available with spring return stem-up only.
19
Operation
VA-8x2x Series Electric Valve Actuators
V-3000, V-3801-8001, and MP8000 Series

Pneumatic Actuators
The VA-8x2x Series Actuators operate on 24 VAC, and

are available for on/off, floating, or proportional control.
The signal drives the actuator motor, causing the valve
stem to move in the desired direction. Once the valve
stem reaches the end of travel, a shutoff force builds
up. When the force reaches its maximum, a lever within
the actuator trips a force sensor, which stops the
motor.
Air pressure from a pneumatic controller is applied to

the diaphragm of the actuator, which moves the piston
against the forces of the internal spring and the fluids.
The piston will move the valve plugs to a position
where the diaphragm pressure and the spring force
balance against the fluid forces. These fluid forces will
cause the operating ranges to shift from the nominal
spring range. Reducing the air pressure to the
diaphragm of the actuator allows the spring to return
the valve plug to its normal position.
For applications requiring stable, accurate control and
sequencing, the V-3000-8011, MP82, and MP84 are
available with a V-9502 Pneumatic Positioner. The
V-9502 Pneumatic Positioner will compensate for the
spring range shift, and the valve will operate within the
published range. Refer to the Operation section of the
V-9502 Pneumatic Valve Actuator Positioner Product
To ensure installed performance quality and optimal
maximum closeoff pressure when using the positioner,
the following spring ranges are recommended:
Normally Open Valve:
3 to 6 psig
(3 to 7 psig for MP82/MP84)
Normally Closed Valve:
9 to 13 psig
Three-Way Mixing Valve:
4 to 8 psig
Positioners are factory calibrated to match the nominal

spring range of the actuator and valve assembly.
VA-715x and VA-720x Series Electric Valve

Actuators
The VA-715x and VA-720x Series Actuators operate
on 24 VAC, and are available for on-off/floating control
action or proportional control. A reversible synchronous
motor and a magnetic clutch are used to accurately
position the valve. The actuator maintains position
even if power to the actuator is removed. The magnetic
clutch maintains a constant load at the end of travel,
which ensures tight valve shutoff and compensates for
seat wear. Refer to the appropriate electric valve
options.
Proportional models include an AUTO stroke
calibration feature that enables the actuator to redefine
the selected input signal and feedback proportionally
across the actual valve stroke. Initial application of a
power signal will drive the actuator and valve assembly
20
Field calibration of the force sensor is not required. The

actuator maintains the shutoff force even if power to
the controller is lost. Valve stem positioning can be
accomplished manually by turning the adjustment knob
on the lower right portion of the actuator. Rotating the
adjustment knob counterclockwise moves the valve
stem up. Refer to the appropriate electric valve
options.
M9116/M9220 Series Electric Actuators

The M9116/M9220 Series Actuators operate on
floating or proportional controllers. When coupled with
the M9000-500 Valve Mounting, the rotary motion of
this actuator is converted into linear motion that will
operate 1/2 through 2 in. VG7000 Series Valves.
A compression spring on the output shaft of the
mounting automatically compensates for seat wear.
On three-way valves, the preset spring load is applied
at both ends of travel. On loss of power, the spring
return M9220 Actuator returns to its normal position.
Refer to the appropriate electric actuator literature or
the M9000-500 Valve Linkage Kit for M9116 and
M9220 Series Electric Actuators Product Bulletin
(LIT-977352) in the for specifications and available
options.

The VA-4233 Series Electric Actuators operate on
on/off, floating, or proportional controllers. These
actuators incorporate a stepper motor to accurately
position the valve. In the event of a power failure, a
spring in the actuator automatically returns the valve to
the full stem-up position. All models feature a hand
crank for manual positioning of the valve, independent
of a power supply.
to the full stem-up position and then the full stem-down
position, and will store these positions in nonvolatile
memory (retains data when power is lost or removed).
The actuator will then drive to the position determined
by the applied control signal.

The M100 Series Actuators operate on 24 VAC, and
are available for on-off/floating or proportional control.
movement. The rack assembly contains a spring that
maintains valve closeoff when compressed by
overtravel of the actuator. On three-way valves, this
seating force is applied on both the up and the down
stroke. The actuator has an adjustable travel limit that
provides the desired overtravel. On loss of power, the
spring return actuator will return to its normal position.
Refer to the M100 Series Motor Actuator Product
Bulletin (LIT-2681059P) and/or the VG7000 Valve
Linkage for M100 Series Motor Actuators Technical
Bulletin (LIT-977355) in the for specifications and
available options.
Installation and Servicing

It is recommended that the VG7000 Series Valves be
mounted in an upright position in a conveniently
accessible location. Sufficient clearance must be
allowed for actuator removal. (Refer to the Dimensions
section for more details.) The valve must be piped with
the flow in the direction indicated by the arrow, so that
the plug seats against the flow.
On electrically actuated valve assemblies, input lines to
the actuator must be wired correctly for the valve to
move in the proper direction.
water pipe, steam pipe, or other heat source may
overheat it.
Note: VG7000 Series Valves should not be used for
fluid service other than those indicated in the Technical
Specifications section.
IMPORTANT: Take care to prevent foreign material

such as weld slag, thread burrs, metal chips, and
scale from entering the piping system. This debris
can damage or severely impede the operation of the
valve by embedding itself in the seats, scoring the
valve, and ultimately resulting in seat leakage. If the
debris becomes embedded in the seats, subsequent
flushing and filtering of the piping system with the
valve installed does not remedy the problem.
Before servicing a VG7000 Series Bronze Control
Valve, please isolate or disconnect the pneumatic
supply or electrical power to the actuator, allow
sufficient clearance for actuator removal from the
valve, and note the following:

Disconnect each of multiple power
supplies before making electrical
connections. More than one disconnect
may be required to completely de
energize equipment. Contact with

accordance with local, national, and regional
regulations. Do not exceed the electrical ratings of
the VG7000 Series Bronze Control Valve.
!
!

equipment.
WARNING: Risk of Personal Injury.
Shut off the liquid supply and relieve
pressure in the line before servicing the
valve. Contents of liquid lines could be
under pressure and the release of liquid
under pressure may cause severe
personal injury.
21
Dimensions
Clearance Needed
for Actuator Mounting
and Removal
Valve + Actuator
C
Valve + Actuator
C
Inlet
Outlet
N.C.
(PDTC)
Fig:VG7000
N.O.
(PDTC)
A
Figure 3: Two-Way and Three-Way Valve Dimensions

Table 19: National Pipe Thread (Internal NPT) Valve Dimensions, in. (mm)1
N.O., N.C., and

Three-Way
N.O.
N.C.
Three-Way
1/2 (DN15)
3 (76)
13/16 (21)
1-9/16 (39)
1-13/16 (46)
3/4 (DN20)
3-7/32 (81)
15/16 (24)
1-5/8 (41)
2-1/8 (54)
1 (DN25)
4-1/8 (104)
1-5/32 (29)
1-3/4 (44)
2-9/16 (65)
1-1/4 (DN32)
4-23/32 (119)
1-11/32 (34)
2 (51)
2-25/32 (70)
1-1/2 (DN40)
5-1/8 (130)
2-5/32 (55)
2-3/4 (70)
3-3/8 (85)
5-29/32 (150)
2-1/8 (53)
2-27/32 (72)
3-3/4 (95)
2 (DN50)
1.
22
Fig:unionglobe
Figure 4: Two-Way Union Globe Valve Dimensions
Table 20: Two-Way Union Globe Valve Dimensions, in. (mm)1

E
1-1/2 (38)
2-21/32 (68)
13/16 (20)
1/2 (DN15) N.C./PDTO
1-1/2 (38)
2-21/32 (68)
1-17/32 (39)
Sizes Greater than 1/2 in. (DN15) are Available in N.O./PDTC Only
1-9/16 (40)
3-3/32 (79)
15/16 (24)
1 (DN25) N.O./PDTC
2-1/16 (53)
4-1/32 (102)
1-5/32 (29)
1-1/4 (DN32) N.O./PDTC
2-3/8 (60)
4-19/32 (117)
1-11/32 (34)
1-1/2 (DN40) N.O./PDTC
2-9/16 (65)
4-27/32 (123)
2-5/32 (55)
Fig:unionangle
1.
Figure 5: Two-Way Union Angle Valve Dimensions
23
Table 21: Two-Way Union Angle Valve Dimensions, in. (mm)1

1-23/32 (44)
2-21/32 (68)
1-7/8 (48)
1-9/16 (40)
3-3/32 (79)
2-1/8 (54)
1 (DN25) N.O./PDTC
2-1/16 (53)
4-1/32 (102)
2-9/16 (65)
1-1/4 (DN32) N.O./PDTC
2-3/8 (60)
4-19/32 (117)
2-25/32 (70)
1-1/2 (DN40) N.O./PDTC
2-9/16 (65)
4-27/32 (123)
3-3/8 (85)
1.
Fig:unionsweat
Figure 6: Union Sweat Valve Dimensions

Table 22: Union Sweat Valve Dimensions, in. (mm)1
B
Two-Way N.O./
PDTC
Two-Way N.C./
PDTO
Three-Way
Mixing
4-3/16 (106)
13/16 (20)
1-17/32 (39)
2-17/32 (64)
1/2 (DN15), 1/2 in. Tubing
4-3/16 (106)
13/16 (20)
1-17/32 (39)
2-17/32 (64)
1/2 (DN15), 3/4 in. Tubing
4-25/32 (122)
13/16 (20)
1-17/32 (39)
2-17/32 (64)
3/4 (DN20)
5-1/16 (129)
15/16 (24)
1-9/16 (40)
3-1/4 (82)
1 (DN25)
6-3/32 (155)
1-5/32 (29)
1-3/4 (44)
3-23/32 (94)
1-1/4 (DN32)
7-9/32 (185)
1-11/32 (34)
2 (51)
4-3/32 (104)
1-1/2 (DN40)
8-19/32 (218)
2-5/32 (55)
2-3/4 (70)
4-29/32 (125)
2 (DN50)
9-7/16 (240)
2-1/8 (53)
2-27/32 (72)
5-19/32 (142)
1/2 (DN15), 3/8 in. Tubing
1.
24
See to Table 23 for overall assembly height C and clearance D dimensions.
Table 23: Valve Assembly Dimensions, in. (mm)

Actuator
Type
C1
1/2 in.
(DN15)
D1
3/4 in.
(DN20)
1 in.
(DN25)
1-1/4 in.
(DN32)
1-1/2 in.
(DN40)
2 in.
(DN50)
Brass Trim Valve Assemblies

V-3000-8011
4-3/4
(120)
4-3/4
(120)
5-31/32
(151)
5-7/8
(149)
5-13/16
(147)
6-3/16
(157)
3-9/16
(90)
V-3000-8003
5-11/32
(135)
5-11/32
(135)
6-9/16
(166)
6-19/32
(167)
6-13/32
(162)
6-13/16
(172)
3-9/16
(90)
V-3801-8001
4
(102)
4
(102)
---
---
---
---
2-3/8
(60)
MP82xx,
MP83xx
---
---
12-23/32
(323)
12-27/32
(326)
13-13/32
(341)
13-13/16
(351)
3-1/2
(89)
VA-4233
8
(203)
8
(203)
9-7/32
(234)
9-7/32
(234)
---
---
1-1/2
(38)
VA-715x
7-11/16
(195)
7-11/16
(195)
8-5/8
(219)
8-5/8
(219)
9-5/32
(233)
9-5/32
(233)
2-1/2
(64)
VA-720x
---
---
9-19/32
(244)
9-5/8
(244)
9-15/16
(252)
10-3/4
(273)
4-1/2
(114)
VA-802x
6-7/16
(164)
6-7/16
(164)
---
---
---
---
1-1/2
(38)
M9116,
M9220
14
(356)
14
(356)
15-7/32
(386)
15-7/32
(386)
15-1/16
(382)
15-15/32
(392)
---
10-13/16
(274)
10-13/16
(274)
12-1/32
(305)
12-1/32
(305)
11-7/8
(301)
12-1/4
(311)
---
M1xx
Stainless Steel Trim Valve Assemblies2

V-3000-8011
5-7/16
(138)
5-7/16
(138)
6
(152)
6-1/4
(158)
---
---
3-9/16
(90)
V-3000-8003
6-1/16
(153)
6-1/4
(158)
6-19/32
(167)
6-27/32
(173)
---
---
3-9/16
(90)
MP82xx
12-3/4
(324)
13-17/64
(337)
13-39/64
(346)
13-27/32
(352)
14-1/32
(356)
14-15/64
(361)
3-1/2
(89)
MP83xx
12-21/64
(313)
12-35/64
(319)
12-7/8
(327)
13-1/8
(333)
13-19/64
(338)
13-1/2
(343)
3-1/2
(89)
MP84xx
---
---
---
---
17-7/32
(437)
17-27/64
(443)
3-1/2
(89)
MP85xx
---
---
---
---
15-61/64
(405)
16-5/32
(410)
3-1/2
(89)
VA-4233
8-23/32
(221)
8-15/16
(227)
9-9/32
(236)
9-13/16
(249)
---
---
1-1/2
(38)
VA-715x
8-13/32
(214)
8-5/8
(219)
8-31/32
(228)
9-7/32
(234)
9-13/32
(239)
9-5/8
(244)
2-1/2
(64)
VA-720x
9-3/32
(231)
9-5/16
(236)
9-21/32
(245)
9-7/8
(251)
10-3/32
(256)
10-9/32
(261)
4-1/2
(114)
14-11/16
(373)
14-29/32
(378)
15-1/4
(387)
15-1/2
(393)
15-23/32
(399)
15-7/8
(403)
---
11-1/2
(292)
11-23/32
(297)
12-1/16
(306)
12-5/16
(312)
12-1/2
(318)
12-11/16
(322)
---
M9116,
M9220
M1xx
1.
2.
Dimension C is the overall height above the centerline of the valve body and dimension D is the clearance required for
actuator removal (as illustrated in Figure 3).
An extended bonnet comes as standard equipment on VG7000 Series Bronze Control Valves with stainless steel trim,
to allow for higher fluid temperatures (100 psig [689 kPa] saturated steam at 338F [170C]).
25
Repair Information
Maintenance and Accessories
If the VG7000 Series Bronze Control Valve fails to

operate within its specifications, see the Maintenance
and Accessories and Reconditioning Kits sections for a
list of repair parts and reconditioning kits available. For
a replacement valve, contact the nearest
The maintenance parts available for the

VG7000 Series Valves are listed in Table 24. See
Table 25 for a list of available accessories.
Table 24: Maintenance Parts (Order Separately)

Code Number
Description
VG7000-6001

Single Pack for 1/4 in. Stem (1/2 or 3/4 in. Valves)
Kit Includes: two ring packs (U-cup with installed O-ring), one stem wiper, one insertion/
removal tool, one bullet, one grease tube, and one 3 in. (76 mm) strip of crocus cloth
VG7000-6002
VG7000-6003
Single Pack for 3/8 in. Stem (1 through 2 in. Valves)

Kit includes: two ring packs (U-cup with installed O-ring), one stem wiper, one stem guide, one
insertion/removal tool, one sleeve packing installer, one grease tube, and one 3 in. (76 mm)
strip of crocus cloth
10 Pack for 1/4 in. Stem (1/2 or 3/4 in. Valves)
Kit Includes: twenty ring packs (U-cup with installed O-ring), ten stem guides, one insertion/
removal tool, one bullet, two grease tubes, and one 24 in. (610 mm) strip of crocus cloth
VG7000-6004
10 Pack for 3/8 in. Stem (1 through 2 in. Valves)

Kit includes: twenty ring packs (U-cup with installed O-ring), ten stem wipers, ten stem guides,
one insertion/removal tool, one sleeve packing installer, two grease tubes, and a 24 in. (610
mm) strip of crocus cloth
VG7000-6011
PTFE V-Ring Packing Kits for Stainless Steel Trim Valves:

Single Pack for 1/4 in. Stem, SS Trim (1/2 or 3/4 in. Valves)
bullet, one grease tube, and one 3 in. (76 mm) strip of crocus cloth
VG7000-6012
Single Pack for 3/8 in. Stem, SS Trim (1 through 2 in. Valves)
sleeve packing installer, one grease tube, and one 3 in. (76 mm) strip of crocus cloth
26
Table 25: Accessories (Order Separately)1

Code Number
Description
---
For specific actuator code numbers, refer to appropriate product bulletins.
---
For mounting and linkage kits, refer to Tables 6, 7, 8, and 9 in this bulletin.
EP-8000-1
EP Transducer, Low Volume, 0.5 to 9 VDC
EP-8000-2
EP Transducer, High Volume, 0.25 to 9.5 VDC
EP-8000-3
EP Transducer, Low Volume, 4 to 20 mA DC
EP-8000-4
EP Transducer, High Volume, 4 to 20 mA DC
EP-8000-101
EP-8000 Electro-Pneumatic Transducer Mounting Kit
R-3710
0.007 in. Restrictor (Required for Low Volume EP-8000 Models)
A-4000-1037
Inline Air Filter (Required for all EP-8000 Models)
JC 5361
Hypodermic Needle Test Probe Assembly
G-2010
0 to 30 psig (0 to 207 kPa) Gauge
VA-8000-102
Valve Position Indicator for Electrically Actuated Valves with VA-805x Actuators Only
VG7000-1016
Bonnet Adaptor for V-3000 Style Linkages on 1 through 2 in. VG7000 Series Valves
(Required when Converting from an M100 Series Actuator to an M9x16, VA-4233, VA-715x,
or VA-720x Series Actuator)
V-9502-90
V-9502-91
Positioners for V-3000-8001 and V-3000-8011:

V-9502-6801
V-9502-6802
V-9502-6801
V-9502-6802
V-9502-6801
V-9502-6803
Positioner Feedback Springs for V-3000-8001 and V-3000-8011:

5/16 in. (8 mm) Stroke for 1/2 or 3/4 in. Valve 3 psig (21 kPa) Span
5/16 In. (8 mm) Stroke for 1/2 or 3/4 in. Valve 8 psig (55 kPa) Span
V-9502-95
MP8000-6002
EPP-1000-8
MP8000-6003
Positioners and Positioner Accessories for MP8000 Series Actuators:

Pneumatic Positioner (Less Spring and Mounting Hardware)
V-9502 Pneumatic Positioner Mounting Kit with Springs
Electro-Pneumatic Positioner (Less Mounting Hardware)
EPP-1000 Electro-Pneumatic Positioner Mounting Kit
V-9502-76
V-9502-8100
V-9502-8102
V-9502-8106
Positioner and Feedback Springs for V-400 and V-500 Actuators:

Pneumatic Positioner (Less Spring)
5/16 in. (8 mm) Stroke for 1/2 or 3/4 in. Valve Adjustable 3 to 12 psig (21 to 83 kPa) Span
1/2 in. (13 mm) Stroke for 1 or 1-1/4 in. Valve Adjustable 3 to 12 psig (21 to 83 kPa) Span
3/4 in. (19 mm) Stroke for 1-1/2 or 2 in. Valve Adjustable 3 to 12 psig (21 to 83 kPa) Span
1.
Positioner accessory kits include positioner and all the appropriate mounting hardware, excluding the positioner feedback
spring that must be ordered separately.
27
Reconditioning Kits
Table 26: Ordering Data VG7000 Series Reconditioning Kits
V G
Valve Global
1 2 7
3
Product Family
7 = Cast Bronze
Body Type

K
Reconditioning
K = Inner Valve Reconditioning Kits
Kits
(Includes: bonnet, bonnet nut, packing, stem, plug, disk, and seat; replaceable
seat is available for stainless steel trim valves only.)
Trim and Flow
1 = Brass Equal Percentage (All Two-Way and 1/2 in. Three-Way)
Characteristic
2 = Brass Linear (Two-Way Union Angle and All Three-Way)

Size and
C = 1/2 in., 0.73 Cv (0.63 Kv)
Cv (Kv)
E = 1/2 in., 1.8 Cv (1.6 Kv)

G = 1/2 in., 4.6 Cv (4.0 Kv)
L = 3/4 in., 7.3 Cv (6.3 Kv)
N = 1 in., 11.6 Cv (10.0 Kv)
P = 1-1/4 in., 18.5 Cv (16.0 Kv)
R = 1-1/2 in., 28.9 Cv (25.0 Kv)
S = 2 in., 46.2 Cv (40.0 Kv)
Stem Type
T = Standard Threaded Stem (All Except V-3801, V-500, MP84, VA-8x2x)

S = Slotted Stem and Small Bonnet (Factory-Mounted V-3801, VA-8x2x) Only)
L = Large Threaded Stem (Factory-Mounted V-500 Only)
Optional
+ = Lower Body Option (For 1-1/2 and 2 in. Bodies Only)
Lower Body
(Leave Fields 9 and 10 blank for 1/2 through 1-1/4 in. kits and for 1-1/2 and 2
in. kits without lower body.)
N.C. Valve
W = Two-Way Bottom Cap
10
Bottom Cap
(For 1-1/2 and 2 in. valves, it is recommended that a new bottom cap is ordered
with the reconditioning kit.)
Three-Way
4 = NPT
10
Lower Body
(For 1-1/2 and 2 in. valves, it is recommended that a lower body with matching
end connection is ordered with the reconditioning kit.)
1 2 3
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
V G 7
4 K 1 R T + 4
Reconditioning Kit
28
= Field
Example: Cast bronze valve, two-way, normally closed/push-down-to-open,

brass trim, equal percentage, 1-1/2 in., 28.9 Cv, standard threaded stem, with a
three-way lower body.
1-1/2 or 2 in. Bottom Cap/

Lower Body
The reconditioning kits for VG7000 Series Valves

include all the components necessary to return a valve
to near new condition. These kits are available
according to the convenient features and options
format shown in Table 26. A descriptive list of the
components in each kit is given below. Note that
1-1/2 and 2 in. two-way N.C. and three-way valves
incorporate a stem guide in the bottom body of the
valve.
The stem guide is integral for N.C./PDTO valves and
the lower body for three-way valves. Depending on the
wear condition of this part, it may or may not need to be
replaced. While replacement is always recommended,
these parts are available as an optional component
included in the kit or ordered separately. The code
numbers for these parts are listed in Table 27.
For N.C./PDTO and three-way valves with stainless

steel trim, the kit contains:
stainless steel seat (two for three-way valves)
bonnet

valves only)
Table 27: Lower Body Kits
For N.O./PDTC valves with brass trim, the kit contains

the bonnet, packing, and stem and plug assembly.
For N.C./PDTO and three-way valves with brass trim,
the kit contains:
Code Number
Valve Type
End
Connection
VG7000-6101
1-1/2 in. Brass,

N.C./PDTO
Bottom Cap
VG7000-6105
1-1/2 in. Brass,

Three-Way
NPT
VG7000-6106
2 in. Brass,
N.C./PDTO
Bottom Cap
VG7000-6110
2 in. Brass,
Three-Way
NPT
VG7000-6111
1-1/2 in. Stainless

Steel, N.C./PDTO
Bottom Cap
bonnet
VG7000-6115
1-1/2 in. Stainless

Steel, Three-Way
NPT

valves only)
VG7000-6116
2 in. Stainless
Steel, N.C./PDTO
Bottom Cap
VG7000-6120
2 in. Stainless
Steel, Three-Way
NPT
For N.O./PDTC valves with stainless steel trim, the kit

contains:
preassembled bonnet, packing, and stem and plug

assembly
stainless steel seat
Hot Water, Chilled Water, 50/50 Glycol Solutions, or Steam for HVAC
Systems (Fluid Group 1 According to 67/548/EEC)
Service2
Valve Body Size/Cv (kv)
Valve Stroke
1/2 in.
0.73 (0.63), 1.8 (1.6), and 4.6 (4.0)
3/4 in.
7.3 (6.3)
1 in.
11.6 (10)
1-1/4 in.
18.5 (16)
1-1/2 in.
28.9 (25)
2 in.
46.2 (40)
5/16 in. (8 mm) for 1/2 or 3/4 in. Valves
1/2 in. (13 mm) for 1 and 1-1/4 in. Valves
3/4 in. (19 mm) for 1-1/2 and 2 in. Valves
Valve Body Rating
Meets requirements of ANSI B16.15, Class 250 (EN 12360).
29

Valve Ambient Operating
Temperature Limits
Valve Assembly Maximum
Allowable Pressure/
Temperature
35 to 150F (2 to 65C)
Steam
Brass Trim: 35 psig (241 kPa) Saturated Steam at 281F (138C)

SS Trim: 100 psig (690 kPa) Saturated Steam at 338F (170C)
Water
Brass Trim: 400 psig (2,756 kPa) up to 150F (66C), Decreasing to

365 psig (2,515 kPa) at 248F (120C)
SS Trim: 400 psig (2,756 kPa) up to 150F (66C), Decreasing to
308 psig (2,122 kPa) at 338F (170C)
Leakage
Inherent Flow Characteristics
Brass Trim
SS Trim
0.05% of Maximum Flow
Two-Way
Valves
Equal Percentage
Three-Way
Mixing
Valves
Linear
Rangeability3
25:1 for All Sizes (EN 60534-2-4)
Spring Range Pneumatic

Actuators
3 to 6 psig (21 to 41 kPa) for All Except MP8000;

3 to 7 psig (21 to 48 kPa) for MP8000 Only;
4 to 8 psig (28 to 55 kPa);
9 to 13 psig (62 to 90 kPa)
Maximum Recommended
Operating Pressure Drop
Steam
Brass Trim: 15 psig (103 kPa) for All Valve Sizes
Water
Brass and SS Trim: 35 psig (241 kPa) for 1/2 through 1-1/4 in. Valves;
30 psig (207 kPa) for 1-1/2 and 2 in. Valves
SS Trim: 100 psig (690 kPa) for All Valve Sizes
Maximum Actuator Supply

Pressure (Pneumatically
Actuated Valves Only)
Materials
Body: Cast Bronze

Bonnet: Brass
Brass Trim

Plug: Brass
Seat: Brass Against Molded Elastomeric Disk
Packing: Self-Adjusting Ethylene Propylene Rubber (EPR) Ring Pack
U-Cups
SS Trim

Plug: Stainless Steel
Seat: Stainless Steel
Packing: Spring Loaded Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) and
Elastomer V-Rings
30

Valve Fluid Operating
Temperature Limits
Brass Trim
Valve with
Pneumatic
Actuator
For V-3801-8001 and V-3000-8003 Actuators:

Brass Trim
Valve with
Electric
Actuator
For VA-8x2x Actuators:

195F (91C) Maximum Water; Actuators are not rated for steam.
For MP82 and V-3000-8011 Actuators:


SS Trim
Valve with
Pneumatic
Actuator
All Pneumatic Actuators:

SS Trim
Valve with
Electric
Actuator

Actuator Ambient Operating

Temperature Limits
Compliance
1.
2.
3.

For M9116/M9220 Series Electric Actuators:
The maximum ambient operating temperature is limited to 110F (43C)
for fluid operating temperatures greater than 285F (141C).
For All Other Actuators:
Refer to the appropriate actuator or linkage kit product bulletin. Ambient
operating temperature or other service limitations vary by selected
actuator.
1/2, 3/4, and

1 in. Valves

Paragraph 3, Comma 3 (CE Marking is not applicable.)
1-1/4, 1-1/2,
and 2 in.
Valves

Category 1, Mod. A (Subject to CE Marking)
For models and ordering data, see Table 2, Table 3, and Table 4.
For maximum closeoff pressures, see Table 11 through Table 16.
For accessories (order separate), see Table 25.
Rangeability is defined as the ratio of maximum flow to minimum controllable flow.
Building Efficiency

Published in U.S.A.
31

Issued July 1, 2006
A99B Series
Temperature Sensor
Description
Features
The A99B Series Temperature Sensors are

passive PTC (Positive Temperature
Coefficient) sensors. The A99B sensors are
splashproof and are designed to measure
temperature in a variety of refrigeration
applications. Several accessories allow easy
tailoring of the temperature sensor to various
mounting configurations.
Applications include temperature sensing for

freezers and coolers, as well as in defrost
termination sensing, space and return air
temperature sensing, and condenser fan
cycling.
variety of lead lengths available to

encompass most application requirements
and simplify wiring sensors
an assortment of mounting hardware
provides configurations for many
applications
exceptional accuracy of sensing element
provides excellent performance in a wide
variety of control applications
stainless steel sensing bulb allows use in
more applications than other types of bulbs
without corrosion
lead length may be extended up to 800 ft
A99B Temperature Sensors
Selection Chart
Applications
Code Number
Description
A99BA-200C
PTC Silicon Sensor with Shielded Cable;

Cable length 6-1/2 ft (2 m);
Range: -40 to 212F (-40 to 100C)
The A99B temperature sensor line offers an economical solution for a

wide variety of temperature sensing needs in refrigeration and HVAC
applications.
A99BB-25C
PTC Silicon Sensor with PVC Cable;

Cable length 9-3/4 in. (0.25 m);
Range: -40 to 212F (-40 to 100C)
Typical temperature sensing applications and environments include:
freezers
display cases
walk-in coolers
reach-in coolers
defrost termination temperature sensing
condenser fan cycling
space and return air temperature sensing
outdoor air sensing
process cooling and heating
A99BB-200C

Range: -40 to 212F (-40 to 100C)
A99BB-300C

Range: -40 to 212F (-40 to 100C)
A99BB-500C

Range: -40 to 212F (-40 to 100C)
A99BB-600C

Range: -40 to 212F (-40 to 100C)
A99BC-25C
PTC Silicon Sensor with High Temperature Silicon Cable;

Cable length 9-3/4 in. (0.25 m);
Range: -40 to 248F (-40 to 120C)
Sensing Range

Range: -40 to 248F (-40 to 120C)
Reference Resistance
1035 ohms at 77F (25C)
Accuracy

Range: -40 to 248F (-40 to 120C)
0.9F ( 0.5C)
between 5 and 167F (-15 and 75C)
Sensor Construction
Stainless Steel Probe
Sensor Lead
Wire Insulation
A99BA
Shielded PVC Cable
A99BB
PVC Cable
A99BC
High Temperature Silicon Cable
A99BC-300C
A99BC-500C
A99BC-1500C

Cable length 49 ft (15 m);
Range: -40 to 248F (-40 to 120C)
Accessories
Code Number
Description
A99-CLP-1
Surface Mounting Clip for the A99B Temperature Sensor
ADP11A-600R
1/2 in. diameter EMT Conduit Adapter (box of 10) for use
with BOX10A-600R
BOX10A-600R
PVC Enclosure
SHL10A-600R
Sun Shield for Single Sensor
SHL10A-603R
Sun Shield for Two Sensors
WEL11A-601R
Immersion Well
A99B Series Temperature Sensor

A99BA
A99BB
-40 to 212F (-40 to 100C)
A99BC
-40 to 248F (-40 to 120C)
Lead Wire Gauge
22 AWG
Maximum Allowable
Bulb Temperature
257F (125C)
Ambient
Operating
Conditions
A99BA
A99BB
-40 to 212F (-40 to 100C);

0 to 100% RH, Condensing
A99BC
-40 to 248F (-40 to 120C);

Ambient
Storage
Conditions
A99BA
A99BB
40 to 221F (-40 to 105C);

A99BC
-40 to 266F (-40 to 130C);

1 of 1

Issued July 1, 2006
Y350R
Power Module
Description
Features
The Y350R Power Module is used to supply

Class 2, unfiltered 24 VDC power to
System 350 controls.
5-pin, plug-together connector

surface or DIN rail mounting
Application
Use to provide unfiltered 24 VDC power to
System 350 Controls.
Module
Connector
Module
Connector
Selection Chart
Code Number
Desciption
Y350R-1C
Y350 Power Module
240 VAC
COM
120 VAC
Power Input Terminals
y350pow.eps
Y350R
Interior of Y350R
0.1 45 Mounting Slot

3.6 8 For #6 Screws
0.5
13
Y350R Power Module

Case and Cover Material
NEMA 1, high-impact thermoplastic
Input Voltage
120/240 VAC 50/60 Hz
Output Voltage
Class 2, 24 VDC unfiltered,

10 VA maximum
Ambient Temperature Operating
-30 to 150F (-34 to 66C)
Shipping
Humidity
5 .00
127
2.94
75
-40 to 185F (-40 to 85C)
Y350
0 to 95% RH non-condensing
1.56
40
0 .42
11
2 .40
61
D IN Ra il
M o u nt
1 .20
31
0 .85
22
0 .8 75 Conduit
22 Hole
accesdim.eps
2.40
61
Y350R Dimensions, in. (mm)
1 of 1
FANs 125, 121, 930, 930.5

Product/Technical Bulletin A99
Issue Date 0699
A99B Series Temperature Sensors
The A99B Series Temperature Sensors are passive

PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient) sensors.
The A99B sensors are splashproof and are
designed to measure temperature in a variety of
refrigeration applications. Several accessories allow
easy tailoring of the temperature sensor to various
mounting configurations.
Applications include temperature sensing for
freezers and coolers, as well as in defrost
termination sensing, space and return air
temperature sensing, and condenser fan cycling.
Figure 1: A99B Temperature Sensors

Variety of Lead Lengths
Encompasses most application requirements

and simplifies wiring sensors
Assortment of Mounting
Hardware Available
Provides configuration for many

applicationscustomizable
Very Accurate Sensing

Element
Provides excellent performance in a wide

variety of control applications
Stainless Steel Sensor Bulb
Allows use in more applications than other

types of bulbs; no corrosion

Part No. 24-7664-1636, Rev.
Code No. LIT-125186
1
A pplication Overview
IMPORTANT:
All A99B Series Sensors are

designed for use only with
operating controls. Where an
operating control failure would
result in personal injury and/or
loss of property, it is the
responsibility of the installer to
add devices (safety, limit controls)
or systems (alarm, supervisory)
that protect against, or warn of,
control failure.
freezers
display cases
walk-in coolers
reach-in coolers
defrost termination temperature sensing
space and return air temperature sensing
outdoor air sensing
process cooling and heating
Sensor
Sensor
Sensor
To Controller
Figure 2: 4-Sensor Averaging Wiring
The A99B temperature sensor line offers an

economical solution for a wide variety of
temperature sensing needs in refrigeration and
HVAC applications. Typical temperature sensing
applications and environments include:
Sensor
Sensor
Sensor
Sensor
Sensor
Sensor
Sensor
Sensor
Sensor
Sensor
To Controller

Sensor
Sensor
Sensor
Sensor
Sensor
Sensor
Sensor
Sensor
Sensor
Sensor
Sensor
Sensor
Sensor
Sensor
Sensor
Sensor
S ensor Temperature Averaging

Multiple sensors may be wired in a series parallel
arrangement to provide an average temperature
reading in an area when one sensor cannot provide
a representative temperature reading. This can be
accomplished with 4, 9, 16, etc., (22, 32, 42, etc.)
sensors.
In a series parallel arrangement, there must always
be the same number of parallel-connected sensors
as there are series connected sensors.
In Figures 2-4, each parallel leg is represented as a
column of sensors and each series leg as a row of
sensors.
To Controller

2
A99B Series Temperature Sensors Product/Technical Bulletin
D imensions
O peration
The A99B sensor incorporates a PTC silicon sensing
element whose resistance increases with an increase in
temperature. The sensor has a reference resistance of
1035 ohms at 77F (25C). Each element is calibrated
according to a standard graph, as shown in Table 2.
1/4 (6)
2 (50)
The A99B series sensors are typically used with

Johnson Controls/PENN System 350 controls, MR
Defrost controls MS Multi-Stage controls, and A419
Electronic Temperature controls.
Figure 5: A99B Sensor, in. (mm)
A ccessories
A99B series accessories include the following:
9 1/8
(229)
1 11/16
(42)
1 3/4
(44)
1 3/8
(35)
The A99B sensors can also be used with

Johnson Controls System 27 NOVA; A255 fan speed
control modules; and R78, DX-9100, XP-9102, XPA-4x1,
and XPA-8x1 products.
M ounting
Sun Shield
SHL10A-603R
4 1/2
(113.5)
Mounting Considerations
4 5/16
(110)
EMT
Conduit
Adapter
1/2
(13) ADP11A-600R
1
(25.4)
1/4 (6)
1
(25.4)
The A99B sensor may be mounted in virtually any

position. To ensure proper operation of the A99B Series
sensors, observe the following guidelines:
PVC Enclosure
BOX10A-600R
4 3/4
(119)
7/8
(23)
3
(76)
Dia.
3/8
(9.3)
Mount sensors in areas where they are exposed to

representative temperature conditions and sufficient
air mixing. Avoid mounting the sensors where air
stratification exists.
Avoid areas subject to excessive mechanical

vibration or electrical noise.
For outdoor applications, avoid areas where the

sensor will be exposed to direct sunlight because
this causes the sensor to read a higher temperature.
The north side of the building is preferred for outdoor
sensors. If not possible, install a sun shield.
Use a thermally conductive paste where appropriate

to improve the thermal contact with the sensor.
Do not subject silicon cable (A99BC) to any siliconbased fluids, as this will degrade the cable.
Surface Mount Clip

A99-CLP-1
Figure 6: Available Accessories, in. (mm)
Mounting Using an Immersion Well
Mounting with a PVC Enclosure
1. Select the mounting location in the pipe line.

A 1/2 in., 14 NPT, opening is required to
properly install the immersion well (WEL11A601R). The pipes diameter must be greater
than the length of the well probe.
The PVC enclosure can be mounted in a variety of

ways. See Figure 6 for mounting dimensions. When
mounting the PVC enclosure, refer to the Mounting
Considerations section, as well as the following:
To minimize false readings caused by air movement

through the conduit hole, seal that part of the
enclosure after the sensor has been inserted.
If a conduit connection is required, snap the conduit

adapter into the bottom opening of the enclosure
and tighten the adapters set screw.
2. Insert an appropriate amount of thermally

conductive paste in the well.
3. Install the immersion well. Tighten hex nut
securely using a wrench.
Tighten
with Wrench
1. Loosen the two PVC enclosure screws and remove

the front plate.
1/2 inch 14 NPT

Opening
Sensor
Clip
Front
Plate
PVC Enclosure
Screws
Figure 7: Installing the Immersion Well

4. Using a straight slot screwdriver, loosen the set
screw at top of the immersion well.
5. Thread the spring, then the bushing, onto the
sensor lead.
Sensor
Figure 9: PVC Enclosure

2. Thread the sensor through the bottom opening and
snap the sensor in the sensor clip inside the PVC
enclosure.
3. Replace the front plate on the PVC enclosure and
firmly tighten the screws.
Figure 8: Insert Sensor, Spring, and Bushing
6. Insert sensor, spring, and bushing into well, so
that at least one-half of the bushing is inserted
into the well, as shown in Figure 8 (bushing will
compress spring).
7. Tighten the set screw against the bushing.
W iring
!
C heckout Procedure
WARNING: Shock Hazard. Disconnect all

power to the controller that the
sensor is connected to before
wiring or servicing.
Troubleshooting
For wiring, follow the instructions below:
Make sure all wiring conforms to the National

Electric Code and local regulations.
Run high and low voltage wiring in separate

conduits. For applications in critical industrial
environments, use a sensor with a shielded
cable (A99BA).
If wire is added to the sensor leads, additional

resistance may affect the sensor reading.
Longer wires increase resistance, which causes
a shift in the sensor temperature reading.
Note:
At the wire lengths listed in Table 1, the

error in the sensed temperature is less
than 1F (0.5C).
Table 1: Maximum Sensor Wire Lengths

(for less than 1F error)
Wire Gauge
Before applying power, make sure installation and wiring

connections are according to job specifications. After
necessary adjustments and electrical connections have
been made, operate the system and observe at least
three complete cycles before leaving the installation.
Wire Length
AWG
Feet
Meters
14 AWG
800
244
16 AWG)
500
152
18 AWG
310
94
20 AWG
200
61
22 AWG
124
38
Check the sensor for proper resistance:

1. Disconnect the sensor from the control.
2. Take a temperature reading at the sensor location.
Be sure to let the thermometer stabilize before
taking a reading.
3. Use the temperature reading from Step 2 to
determine the expected sensor resistance from
Table 2.
4. Using an ohmmeter, measure the actual resistance
across the two sensor leads.
5. Compare the expected resistance to the actual
resistance.
6. If the sensor's actual resistance deviates
substantially from the expected resistance found in
Table 2, replace the sensor.
Shielded Cable Models (A99BA) Only: For all

controls, including the Johnson Controls/PENN
System 350, MR, MS, and A419, connect the
sensor cable shield to the controller per the
controllers instructions.
Temperature (F)
Table 2: Resistance vs. Temperature

260
240
220
200
180
160
140
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
-20
-40
500
700
900
F (C)
Resistance
in Ohms
F (C)
Resistance
in Ohms
-40 (-40)
613
113 (45)
1195
-31 (-35)
640
122 (50)
1237
-22 (-30)
668
131 (55)
1279
-13 (-25)
697
140 (60)
1323
-4 (-20)
727
149 (65)
1368
5 (-15)
758
158 (70)
1413
14 (-10)
789
167 (75)
1459
23 (-5)
822
176 (80)
1506
32 (0)
855
185 (85)
1554
41 (5)
889
194 (90)
1602
50 (10)
924
203 (95)
1652
59 (15)
960
212 (100)
1702
68 (20)
997
221 (105)
1753
77 (25)
1035
230 (110)
1804
86 (30)
1074
239 (115)
1856
95 (35)
1113
248 (120)
1908
104 (40)
1153
1100 1300 1500 1700 1900 2100
Resistance in Ohms
Figure 10: Resistance Scale for

Fahrenheit Temperatures
120
Temperature (C)
100
80
60
40
20
0
-20
-40
500
700
900
1100 1300 1500 1700 1900 2100
Resistance in Ohms
Sensor accuracy is within 0.9F (0.5C) between

5 and 167F (-15 and 75C). Tolerance increases at
temperatures outside this range, as shown in Figure 12.
Figure 11: Resistance Scale for

Celsius Temperatures
Error from Nominal F (C)
2.7 (1.50)
1.8 (1.00)
0.9 (0.50)
0.00
-0.9 (-0.50)
-1.8 (-1.00)
-2.7 (-1.50)
-40
-4
(-40) (-20)
32
(0)
68
(20)
104
(40)
140
(60)
176 212 248

(80) (100) (120)
Temperature F (C)
Figure 12: Sensor Accuracy
R epairs and Replacement

Field repairs or calibration must not be made.
For replacement sensors, contact your nearest
Johnson Controls/PENN representative.
When contacting the supplier, state the model number of

the sensor. The sensor model is printed on the yellow
label wrapped around the sensor cable.
O rdering Information
Table 3: Sensors
Product
Code Number
Description
A99BA-200C
PTC Silicon Sensor with Shielded Cable; Cable length 6-1/2 ft (2 m); Range: -40 to 212F (-40 to 100C)
A99BB-25C
PTC Silicon Sensor with PVC Cable; Cable length 9-3/4 in. (0.25 m); Range: -40 to 212F (-40 to 100C)
A99BB-200C
PTC Silicon Sensor with PVC Cable; Cable length 6-1/2 ft (2 m); Range: -40 to 212F (-40 to 100C)
A99BB-200D
PTC Silicon Sensor with PVC Cable Bulk Pack; contains 100 A99BB-200 sensors.
Individual sensor cable length 6-1/2 ft (2 m); Range: -40 to 212F (-40 to 100C)
A99BB-300C
A99BB-500C
A99BB-600C
A99BC-25C
PTC Silicon Sensor with High Temperature Silicon Cable

Cable length 9-3/4 in. (0.25 m); Range: -40 to 248F (-40 to 120C)
A99BC-300C

Cable length 9-3/4 ft (3 m); Range: -40 to 248F (-40 to 120C)
A99BC-1500C

Cable length 49 ft (15 m); Range: -40 to 248F (-40 to 120C)
Table 4: Accessories (See Figure 6 for illustration of accessories.)

Product
Code Number
Description
A99-CLP-1
Surface Mounting Clip for the A99B Temperature Sensor
ADP11A-600R
1/2 in. diameter EMT Conduit Adapter (box of 10) for use with BOX10A-600R
BOX10A-600R
PVC Enclosure
SHL10A-603R
Sun Shield
WEL11A-601R
Immersion Well
S pecifications
Product
Sensing Range
Reference Resistance
Accuracy
Sensor Construction
A99B Series Silicon Temperature Sensors

Model A99BA and A99BB: -40 to 212F (-40 to 100C)
Model A99BC:
-40 to 248F (-40 to 120C)
1035 ohms at 77F (25C)
0.9F ( 0.5C) between 5 and 167F (-15 and 75C). See Figure 12 for accuracy outside of
this range.
Probe: Stainless Steel
Sensor Lead Wire

Insulation
Model A99BA:
Model A99BB:
Model A99BC:
Lead Wire Gauge
22 AWG
Shielded PVC Cable

PVC Cable
High Temperature Silicon Cable
Ambient Operating
Conditions
Model A99BA and A99BB: -40 to 212F (-40 to 100C); 0 to 100% RH, Condensing
Model A99BC:
-40 to 248F (-40 to 120C); 0 to 100% RH, Condensing
Ambient Storage
Conditions
Model A99BA and A99BB: -40 to 221F (-40 to 105C); 0 to 100% RH, Condensing
Model A99BC:
-40 to 266F (-40 to 130C); 0 to 100% RH, Condensing
Shipping Weight
1.4 oz (41 g) for 6 1/2 ft (2 m) sensor
Accessories
See Table 4.
specifications, consult Johnson Controls/Penn Application Engineering at (414) 274-5535. Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for
damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products.
Controls Group
P.O. Box 423
Milwaukee, WI 53201
Printed in U.S.A.
System 350 Product Guide

Add-On Modules Section
Product/Technical Bulletin
Issue Date
930
D350
0200
Display Modules
System 350
The D350, D351, and D352 Display Modules are

TM
designed for use with System 350 temperature,
humidity, and pressure controls to provide a digital
readout of sensor or setpoint valuesat the push of a
button.
As are all System 350 products, the display modules
are housed in a NEMA 1 high-impact thermoplastic
enclosure. The modular design provides easy,
plug-together connections for quick installation and
future expandability.
Figure 1: System 350 Display Module

Modular Design
Enables control, stage, and display modules

to be purchased and installed as necessary
Plug-together Connectors
Eliminates wiring between modules and

reduces installation costs
and 35 mm DIN Rail

Mounting
Various Models Display

Temperatures (F and C),
Humidity Levels
(0 to 100%), or
Pressures (in psi or in. W.C.)
Continuous Readout of
Sensor Value; Front Access
Button Can Be Pushed to
Display Setpoint
Can be Remote Mounted

Using WHA29A Cable
Assemblies

Part No. 24-7664-206, Rev. H
Code No. LIT-930070
Provides visual sensor and setpoint indication

for System 350 controls
Permits use as a monitoring device and/or a

setup tool
Extends monitoring capabilities up to 50 ft

(15.2 m)
1
I nstallation
System 350 Display Modules can be permanently

installed in a System 350 control system or used for
remote setup or troubleshooting.
All adjustments to the system can be made accurately
by using the display modules during setup. For
applications where a display module will not be
permanently mounted, the service technician can use
an optional extension cable (WHA29A-600R) to
temporarily connect a display module to the system to
verify the sensor reading and setpoint.
Module
Connector
3-Digit
LCD Display
Module
Connector
D350
WARNING: Risk of Electrical Shock.

Disconnect power supply before
making electrical connections to
avoid possible electrical shock or
equipment damage.
The display modules are housed in a compact NEMA 1

plastic enclosure designed for standard 35 mm DIN rail
mounting. The modules are not position sensitive, but
they should be mounted for convenient wiring and
adjustment. Four key-slot mounting holes on the back
of the control case are provided for surface mounting
when required.
The display modules plug into the control and other
System 350 add-on modules via 5-pin connectors
located on either side of each module.
PRESS FOR SETPOINT
Setpoint
Button
System 350 modules can be arranged in any order;

external wiring is not required to interconnect
components. (For optimal system accuracy, mount the
D350 series modules at the far right end of the
system.) The system becomes operational as soon as
power is applied.
Five wire cable assemblies in various lengths are
available for remote mount applications. See Table 3.
Figure 2: Display Module Features
D imensions
Mounting Slots
for No. 6 Screws
O peration
1/2 (13)
The display modules receive their power, sensor, and

setpoint information from a System 350 control
module. A 3-digit LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) provides
continuous readout of the sensor value.
To view the setpoint reading, press the PRESS FOR
SETPOINT button located on the face of the module.
The button must be pressed and held for
approximately three seconds.
IMPORTANT:
3/16 (4)
The D350, D351, and D352

Display Modules are matched to
the A350, W351, and P352
controls, respectively. If an
incorrect display module is used
on a system, the display provides
inaccurate readings. See Table 2
for more information on choosing
the correct D350 display module.
2-15/16
(75)
1-9/16
(40)
7/16 (11)
5
(127)
DIN Rail
Mounts
D350
PRESS FOR SETPOINT
2-3/8 (61)
1-3/16
(31)
2-3/8
(61)
7/8 (22)
7/8 (22)
Conduit
Hole
Figure 3: Module Dimensions, in. (mm)
Add-On ModulesSystem 350 Display Modules Product/Technical Bulletin
C heckout Procedure
Before applying power, make certain that the
installation and wiring connections are according to job
specifications. After necessary adjustments and
electrical connections have been made, put the system
into operation and observe at least three complete
operating cycles before leaving the installation.
Table 1: Out-of-Range Values

Display
Module
Model
Out-of-Range
Setpoint Value
Out-of-Range
Sensor Value
D350AA-1
Greater than
260F or 130C
Greater than 300F or

150C
T roubleshooting
D351AA-1
Greater than
95% RH
Greater than
100% RH
Before troubleshooting the display module, verify that

the system control is functioning properly. Consult the
appropriate System 350 bulletin for operating
specifications and troubleshooting instructions.
D352AA-2
Greater than
700 psi
Greater than 750 psi
D352CA-1
Greater than
5.20 in. W.C.
none
D352CA-2
Greater than
0.260 in. W.C.
Greater than
0.520 in. W.C.
If the control is functioning properly, use the following

procedure to troubleshoot the display module.
1. Measure the temperature, pressure, or humidity
with an instrument that is at least as accurate as
the sensor in the system, and compare this with
the readout on the display module.
a. If these values do not match within a
reasonable range (for example, 0.5F), check
the sensor for proper wiring and performance.
Refer to the appropriate sensor bulletin for
information on sensor troubleshooting.
b. If the sensor is wired and operating correctly
and the display reading is incorrect, the display
module must be replaced.
2. Press the PRESS FOR SETPOINT button on the
front of the display module. If the value displayed
on the LCD is out of range, replace the display
module. Refer to Table 1 for out-of-range values
for the various display modules.
3. If pressing the PRESS FOR SETPOINT button
results in a reading other than the expected
setpoint value, check the setpoint dial setting and
correct if necessary. If the display continues to
read an incorrect value, replace the display
module.
Table 2: Controls and Related Display

Modules
Control Module
Models
Display Module
Models
A350A/B, A350E, A350P,

A350R, A350S
D350
W351, W351P
D351
P352AB-2, P352AB-3,
P352AB-4, P352PN-2,
P352PN-3, P352PN-4
D352AA-2
P352PQ-1
D352CA-1
P352PQ-2
D352CA-2

For replacement modules, contact the nearest
Table 3: Ordering Information
Product Code Number
Description
D350AA-1C
Temperature Display Module with Fahrenheit Scale
D350BA-1C
Temperature Display Module with Celsius Scale
D351AA-1C
Humidity Display Module with Percent RH Scale
D352AA-2C
Pressure Display Module with 0 to 750 psi Scale
(Not interchangeable with D352AA-1C)
D352CA-1C
Pressure Display Module with 0 to 9.99 in. W.C. Scale
D352CA-2C
Pressure Display Module with 0 to 0.999 in. W.C. Scale
WHA29A-600R
3 ft (0.9 m) Cable, 5-wire
WHA29A-603R
25 ft (7.6 m) Cable, 3-wire; Requires Y350R at D350 Location
WHA29A-604R
50 ft (15.2 m) Cable, 3-wire; Requires Y350R at D350 Location
S pecifications
Product
System 350 Display Modules
Readout
3-digit LCD Continuous Display
Supply Voltage
Current Draw
Mounting
Ambient Temperature
Ambient Humidity
Material
Agency Listings
D350
D351
D352AA-1;
D352AA-2;
D352CA-1;
D352CA-2:
Provided by the A350 Temperature Control Module

Provided by the W351 Humidity Control Module
Provided by the P352 Pressure Control Module
4 mA (typical)
Surface or DIN Rail
Operating:
Shipping:
-30 to 150F (-34 to 66C)

-40 to 167F (-40 to 75C)
Case, Cover: NEMA 1 High-impact Thermoplastic
UL CNN XAPX
UL Listed for Canada, CNN XAPX7, File E27734 (all models)
specifications, consult Johnson Controls/PENN Application Engineering at (414) 274-5535. Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for
damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products or misuse of its products.
Controls Group
P.O. Box 423
Milwaukee, WI 53201
FAN 930
Printed in U.S.A.
FANs 930, 125

Issue Date
S350
0300
System 350
S350A Temperature, S351A Humidity,
and S352A Pressure Stage Modules
The S350A, S351A, and S352A Stage Modules are

intended to be used with System 350 controls. Each
of these stage modules plugs into the respective
control module to add multiple-stage capability. These
stage modules have Single-Pole, Double-Throw
(SPDT) relay output with Light-Emitting Diode (LED)
indication.
As are all System 350 products, the stage modules are
housed in NEMA 1, high-impact thermoplastic
enclosures. The modular design provides easy,
Figure 1: System 350 Stage Module

Modular Design
Permits system to be configured to

equipment, with convenient, future expansion
made easy

and 35 mm DIN Rail

Mounting
Selectable Mode of
Operation
Provides independent relay energization,

either above or below setpoint, for
cooling/heating (S350A),
dehumidification/humidification (S351A), or
direct acting/reverse acting (S352A)
Adjustable Differential
Enables user to match the range of

temperature, humidity, or pressure stage
modules to specific application requirements
Adjustable Offset
Allows multiple stage sequencing of 1-30F

(0.5-17C) (S350A), 2-30% RH (S351A), or
2-50 psi (S352AA-2)

Part No. 24-7664-1, Rev. D
Code No. LIT-930080
1
A pplication
The S350A, S351A, and S352A Stage Modules
receive power, setpoint, and sensor input from the
respective System 350 control modules. When
connected, the individual modules act as a multistage
control system.
The maximum number of stages that can be used in a
system varies with the control module type
(temperature, humidity, or pressure) and stage module
design.
Refer to Table 1 or Table 2 to determine the maximum
number of stages that may be used with each control
module. When mixing stage module designs, always
use the lower number.
Note:
When using an external transformer, the

Y65 Series or other 40 VA Class 2
transformers are recommended.
Table 1: Maximum Number of Add-on

Modules when Powered by a Y350R
Power Module
Control
Module
Stage
Module
No.
A350A
A350B
A350E
9
6
4
Control
Module
A350A
A350B
A350E
No.
S350As or S350Cs
S350As or S350Cs
with 1 S350P
S350As or S350Cs
with 2 S350Ps
Stage
Module
A350P
Model
Numbers
No.
9
8
S350As or S350Cs
S350As or S350Cs
with 1 S350P
S350As or S350Cs
with 2 S350Ps
D350
S350As or S350Cs
S350As or S350Cs
with 1 S350P
S350As or S350Cs
with 2 S350Ps
D350
S350As or S350Cs
S350As or S350Cs
with 1 S350P
S350As or S350Cs
with 2 S350Ps
D350s
9
8
7
A350R
A350S
Display
Module
No.
9
8
Display
Module
Model
Number
Model
Number
W351A
S351As
D351
D350
W351P
S351As
D351
P352AB
S352As
D352A
P352PN
S352As
D352A
A350P
4
2
S350As or S350Cs
S350As or S350Cs
with 1 S350P
D350
A350R
A350S
9
6
S350As or S350Cs
S350As or S350Cs
with 1 S350P
S350As or S350Cs
with 2 S350Ps
D350s
Model
Numbers

Modules when Powered by an External
Transformer
W351A
S351As
D351
W351P
S351As
D351
P352AB
S352As
D352A
P352PN
S352As
D352A
Notes: This bulletin only refers to the S350A, S351A,

and S352A Stage Modules.
For information on the S350C refer to the
TM
System 350 S350C Temperature Slave
Stage Module Product/Technical Bulletin
(LIT-930084).
For information on the S350P refer to the
TM
System 350 S350P Proportional Plus
Integral Temperature Stage Module
Product/Technical Bulletin (LIT-930086).
For information on the D350, D351 and D352
TM
refer to the System 350 D350 Display
Modules Product/Technical Bulletin
(LIT-930070).
S350A Temperature, S351A Humidity, and S352A Pressure Stage Modules Product/Technical Bulletin
O peration
The S350A, S351A, and S352A Stage Modules
provide SPDT relay output. A front panel LED lights to
indicate when the relay is energized.
IMPORTANT:
The System 350 Stage Modules

are intended to control
equipment under normal
operating conditions. Where
failure or malfunction of the
System 350 Stage Modules
could lead to an abnormal
operating condition that could
cause personal injury or damage
to the equipment or other
property, other devices (limit or
safety controls) or systems
(alarm or supervisory systems)
intended to warn of or protect
against failure or malfunction of
the System 350 Stage Modules
must be incorporated into and
maintained as part of the control
system.
With the jumpers positioned vertically, the stage

module is set for Heating (S350A), Humidification
(S351A), or Reverse Acting (RA) (S352A) operation. In
this mode, the relay and LED indicator de-energize
when the sensed temperature, humidity, or pressure
rises to the setpoint minus offset value.
Note:
The S350A, S351A, and S352A Stage

Modules are configured with the jumpers in
the horizontal position at the factory.
Refer to Figures 6, 7, and 8 for examples of S350A,

S351A, and S352A applications.
D imensions
Mounting Slots
For No. 6 Screws
1/8 (4)
2-15/16
(75)
S350
5 (127)
ON
JOHNSON
O
CONTROLS
Offset Adjustment
1-1/2
(40)
The offset adjustment determines the amount of offset

from the control module setpoint at which the stage
module relay de-energizes.
7/16
(11)
DIN Rail
Mount
2-3/8
(61)
1-3/16
(31)
2-3/8
(61)
Differential Adjustment
7/8 (22)
Differential is defined as the difference in degrees,

% RH, or psi between energization and
de-energization of the stage modules relay.
Conduit
Hole
7/8 (22)
Figure 2: System 350 Stage Module

Operation Mode Selection

The S350A, S351A, and S352A utilize jumpers (at
jumper terminal J2) to select the operation mode. (See
Adjustments section and Figures 3, 4, and 5.)
With the jumpers positioned horizontally, the stage
module is set for Cooling (S350A), Dehumidification
(S351A), or Direct Acting (DA) (S352A) operation. In
this mode the relay and LED indicator de-energize
when the sensed temperature, humidity, or pressure
drops to the setpoint plus offset value.
M ounting
Each System 350 Stage Module is housed in a
compact NEMA 1 plastic enclosure designed for
standard 35 mm DIN rail mounting. Four key-slot
mounting holes on the back of the control case are
provided for surface mounting. (See Figure 2.) The
modules are not position sensitive, but should be
mounted for convenient access to wiring and
adjustments.
Note:
When mounting any System 350 module to

rigid conduit, attach the hub to the conduit
before securing the hub to the control
enclosure.
A djustments
Refer to the following steps for adjusting stage module
settings. (See Figures 3, 4, and 5.)

Disconnect power supply to
equipment damage. More than
one disconnect may be required
to completely de-energize
equipment.
2. Remove the stage module cover by loosening the

four captive cover screws.
3. Set the mode of operation by positioning the
jumpers (at jumper terminal J2) for Cooling,
Dehumidification, or Direct Acting mode. Position
the jumpers vertically for Heating, Humidification,
or Reverse Acting mode.
Note: The S350A, S351A, and S352A Stage
Modules are configured with the jumpers in
the horizontal position at the factory.
4. Adjust the differential using the potentiometer
marked DIFF to the desired setting (the difference
in degrees, % RH, or psi between energization
and de-energization of the stage modules relay).
5. Adjust the offset using the potentiometer marked
OFFSET to the number of degrees, % RH, or psi
from the System 350 controls setpoint at which
the stage relay de-energizes (above setpoint with
Cooling, Dehumidification, or Direct Acting mode
selected, or below setpoint with Heating,
Humidification, or Reverse Acting mode selected).
6. Replace the cover on the stage module and fasten
in place with screws.
7. Restore power to system.
Module
Connector
Module
Connector
Jumper
Position at J2
Relay Energized
LED Indicator
Heating
Relay
Cooling
Cover Screw
1 of 4
N.C.
Relay
1. Ensure all power to system is off.

Each stage module may be receiving separate
power sources. Make sure all power sources to
each stage module are off.
Differential
Potentiometer
Offset
Potentiometer
COM
Output
N.O.
Terminals
Figure 3: Interior View of S350A Stage Module

Offset
Potentiometer
Differential
Potentiometer
Module
Connector
Module
Connector
Jumper
Position at J2
Relay Energized
LED Indicator
Humidification
Relay
Dehumidification
Cover Screw
1 of 4
N.C. COM
N.O.
Relay Output Terminals

Offset
Potentiometer
Differential
Potentiometer
Module
Connector
Module
Connector
Jumper
Position at J2
Relay Energized
LED Indicator
Relay
Cover Screw
1 of 4
N.C.
Relay
COM
Output
Reverse
Acting
Direct
Acting
N.O.
Terminals
Higher
Temperature
OFF
OFFSET
OFF
Figure 6: Example of a Heating/Cooling

Application Using One A350 and Four S350As
ON
P352AB S352A
Stage 1 Stage 2
Direct
Differential
OFFSET
OFF
OFFSET
Differential
Differential
!
ON
S351
Stage 2
Dehumidify
Reverse
For information on connecting to an external

transformer refer to the applicable control
bulletin.
OFF
ON
W351
Stage 1
S352A
Stage 4
Figure 8: Example of a Reverse Acting/Direct

Acting Application Using One P352AB
and Three S352As
Note:
OFF
Lower
Humidity
S352A
Stage 3
Refer to the following guidelines and wiring diagrams

for proper wiring and terminal designations (See
Figures 9, 10, and 11.)
OFF
OFFSET
ON = Energized
OFF = De-energized
ON
W iring
Differential
ON
ON
Lower
Pressure
Differential
ON
S350A S350A S350A
Stage 3 Stage 4 Stage 5
Heating
Higher
Humidity
ON = Energized
OFF = De-energized
Differential
ON
A350 S350A
Stage 1 Stage 2
Cooling
OFF
OFFSET
OFFSET
OFF
OFF
OFF
Differential
ON
OFF
OFFSET
OFFSET
Differential
Lower
Temperature
Differential
ON = Energized
OFF = De-energized
Setpoint
Pressure
OFFSET
Differential
ON
OFF
OFFSET
OFF
Setpoint
Relative
Humidity
ON
Differential
Differential
Differential
ON
Setpoint
Temperature
Higher
Pressure
ON
S351
S351
Stage 3 Stage 4
Humidify
Figure 7: Example of a
Humidification/Dehumidification Application
Using One W351 and Three S351As

Disconnect power to avoid
possible electrical shock or
equipment.
IMPORTANT:
Make all wiring connections in

accordance with the National
Electrical Code and all local
regulations. Use copper
conductors only. Do not exceed
the controls electrical ratings.
The stage modules plug into the control and other

add-on modules via 5-pin connectors located on either
side of each module. Wiring is made at the Normally
Open (N.O.)/Normally Closed (N.C.) relay terminal
strip. (See Figures 3, 4, and 5.)
SEN
COM
Shield (Connect
only to COM on A350)
A350
Y350R
Sensor
Isolate and tape. (Do not ground
this end of cable shield.)
S350A
S350A
S350A
Load
Load
Load
D350
Wire
Terminal
Block
24V
COM
VDC
SEN
120 VAC
Load
Figure 9: Typical Multistage Temperature Control System Using 120 VAC Power Supply
Transmitter
SEN
VDC
COM
Shield (Connect
only to COM on W351)
W351
Y350R

S351A
S351A
S351A
Load
Load
Load
D351
Wire
Terminal
Block
24V
COM
VDC
SEN
120 VAC
Load
Figure 10: Typical Multistage Humidity Control System Using 120 VAC Power Supply
Wiring Harness
SEN
VDC
COM
Shield (Connect
only to COM on P352AB)
P352AB
Y350R
S352A
P399 Transducer

S352A D352A
S352A
Wire
Terminal
Block
24V
COM
VDC
SEN
120 VAC
Load
Load
Load
Load
Figure 11: Typical Multistage Pressure Control System Using 120 VAC Power Supply
6
C heckout Procedure
Before applying power, make sure installation and
wiring connections are according to job specifications.
After necessary adjustments and electrical
connections have been made, put the system in
operation and observe at least three complete
Table 4: S351A Relay Troubleshooting

Operation
Mode
LED
N.O.
Relay
Status
Setpoint Dial
Setting
Dehumidify
On
Closed
(RHT)* -offset
- differential
Dehumidify
Off
Open
(RHT) - offset
T roubleshooting
Humidify
On
Closed
(RHT) + offset
+ differential
If the control system does not function properly, first

verify that the control, power, and display modules are
all operating correctly (refer to the respective
literature). Then inspect the stage modules for proper
operation.
Humidify
Off
Open
(RHT) + offset
*(RHT) = actual relative humidity at transducer
Check that the proper operating mode

(Cooling/Heating, Dehumidification/Humidification, or
Direct Acting/Reverse Acting) has been selected on
each stage module. (See Adjustments section and
Figures 3, 4, and 5.) Then perform the following
procedures to determine the problem.
Operation
Mode
LED
N.O.
Relay
Status
Setpoint Dial
Setting
Direct
On
Closed
(psiT)*- offset differential
Direct
Off
Open
(psiT) - offset
1. Verify the system has power.
Reverse
On
Closed
2. Note the offset and differential settings on the

stage module.
(psiT) + offset +
differential
Reverse
Off
Open
(psiT) + offset
3. Turn the setpoint dial on the control module to

minimum.
4. Increase the setpoint by slowly adjusting the
setpoint dial until the stage relay LEDs turn On
and Off as shown in Tables 3, 4, or 5.

Operation
Mode
LED
N.O.
Relay
Status
Setpoint Dial
Setting
Cooling
On
Closed
(Ts)* - offset
- differential
Cooling
Off
Open
Heating
On
Closed
(Ts) offset
(Ts) + offset
+ differential
Heating
Off
Open
(Ts) + offset
*(Ts) = sensed temperature
*(psiT) = actual pressure at transducer
5. If the relays do not perform as indicated in

Tables 3, 4, or 5, adjust the stage modules
differential and offset potentiometers to minimum
and repeat Steps 1 through 3.
6. If the relays still do not turn on and off, replace the
defective stage modules.
Note:
There is the unlikely possibility that a defect in

one stage module could cause defective
symptoms in all modules. Plug each stage into
the control individually and check the
performance of each as explained above.

Do not make field repairs or perform calibration.
Sensors and replacement controls are available
through your local Johnson Controls representative.
Item
Product Code
Number
Description
S350A Temperature Stage

Module
S350AA-1C
Temperature Stage Module with Fahrenheit Scale
S350AB-1C
Temperature Stage Module with Celsius Scale
S351A Humidity Stage Module
S351AA-1C
Humidity Stage Module with percent RH Scale
S352A Pressure Stage Module
S352AA-2C
Pressure Stage Module with psi Scale
S pecifications
Product
S350AA:
S350AB:
S351AA:
S352AA-2:
Temperature Stage Module with Fahrenheit Scale

Temperature Stage Module with Celsius Scale
Humidity Stage Module with Percent RH Scale
Pressure Stage Module with psi Scale
Input Voltage
S350AA:
S351AB:
S352AA-2:
Provided by the A350

Provided by the W351
Provided by the P352AB
Power Consumption
1.0 VA maximun
Output Relay Electrical

Ratings
SPDT Enclosed Relays

10 Ampere Non-inductive, 125 VA Pilot Duty, 24/240 VAC
1/2 hp 120/240 VAC
Range
S350AA:
S350AB:
S351AA:
S352AA-2:
1 to 30F
0.5 to 17C
2 to 10% RH
2 to 50 psi
Offset Range
S350AA:
S350AB:
S351AA:
S352AA-2:
1 to 30F
0.6 to 16.7C
2 to 30% RH
2 to 50 psi
Ambient Temperature
Operating:
Shipping:
-30 to 150F (-34 to 66C)

-40 to 185F (-40 to 85C)
Ambient Humidity
Material
Mounting
Agency Listing
0 to 95% RH (Non-condensing)
Case, Cover: NEMA 1 High Impact Thermoplastic
Wall or DIN Rail
UL Listed, CCN XAPX, File E27734
UL Listed for Canada, CCN XAPX7, File E27734
Controls Group
P.O. Box 423
Milwaukee, WI 53201
Printed in U.S.A.
FANs 930, 930.5, 125

Product/Technical Bulletin Y350R
Issue Date 0598
System 350 Y350R Power Module
The Y350R is a rectified Class 2, 24 VAC power

supply module designed specifically for use with
System 350 Modular Control Systems.
As with all System 350 products, the Y350R is housed
in a compact NEMA 1, high-impact plastic enclosure.
The modular design provides easy, plug-in
connections for quick installation and future
expandability.
Figure 1: Y350R Power Module

Modular Design
Enables stage, display, and power modules to be

purchased and installed as necessary
Plug-in Connectors and
Eliminates wiring between modules and reduces

installation costs
35 mm DIN Rail Mounting
Accepts Input Voltages of

120 or 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz

Part No. 24-7664-214, Rev. D
Code No. LIT-930090
Reduces inventory by encompassing the primary

voltage requirements
A pplication
The Y350R Power Module provides the power
necessary to operate all System 350 controls and
add-on modules. For system capabilities, see Table 1.
IMPORTANT:
All Series Y350R Power Modules

are designed for use only in
conjunction with operating
controls. Where an operating
control failure would result in
personal injury and/or loss of
property, it is the responsibility of
the installer to add devices
(safety, limit controls) that protect
against, or systems (alarm,
supervisory systems) that warn
of, control failure.

Modules when Powered by a Y350R
Control
Module
A350A
A350B
A350E
Stage Module
9
6
S350As or S350Cs
S350As or S350Cs with
1 S350P
2 S350Ps
1 D350
4
2
S350As or S350Cs
1 S350P
1 D350
9
6
S350As or S350Cs
1 S350P
2 S350Ps
2 D350
4
A350P
A350R
A350S
Display
Module
3 .6 8 M ou ntin g S lot (4 )
0 .14 5 fo r N o . 6 S cre w s
13
0 .5
1 27
5 .00
75
2 .94
W351A
S351s
1 D351
W351P
S351s
1 D351
P352A
S352s
1 D352
P352P
No additional stages available
R353
S353s
D imensions
1 D352
40
1 .56
0 .42
D IN R ail
M ou nt
No
display
available
All System 350 add-on modules snap on to a DIN rail

and plug into the control and to each other via 5-pin
connectors. Add-on modules can be arranged in any
order and there is no wiring required to interconnect
the System 350 components.
Y 3 50
31
1 .20
61
2 .40
61
2 .40
2 1.6
0 .85
C o nd uit
H o le
22
0 .87 5
Figure 2: Y350R Dimensions, mm/in.
O peration
I nstallation and Wiring
The Y350R operates from 240 VAC or 120 VAC

power. A 24 VAC, Class 2, step-down transformer
brings the voltage to a level which the System 350
modules will accept. There are no adjustments for the
power module.
The Y350R case has provisions for mounting to a

standard 35 mm DIN rail, or can be mounted using the
four key slot mounting holes located in the rear of the
case.
Y350R Power Module Product/Technical Bulletin
Mount System 350 modules in any convenient location

using either the DIN rail mounts or the mounting holes
located on the back of the control case. The
components are not position sensitive, but should be
mounted so they can be easily wired and adjusted.
C heckout Procedure
IMPORTANT:
All wiring must be installed to

conform to the National Electrical
Code and local regulations.
1. Secure the module to the DIN rail, wall, or panel.
WARNING: Electrical Shock Hazard.

modules are interconnected and
wiring connections are made to
damage to the equipment.
2. Connect input wiring to the Y350R power module.

Strip approximately 3/8 inch from the wire
insulation, insert the wire under each terminal
screw, and tighten. (See Figure 3.)
Note:
If conduit is used when installing System 350

components, be sure to connect the hub to the
conduit before the hub is secured to the
enclosure.
M od ule
C o nn ecto r
M od ule
C o nn ecto r

T roubleshooting
If the control system does not function properly and
the Y350R is suspect, proceed as follows:
1. Connect a Digital Voltmeter (DVM) between the
24V (+) and COM (-) terminals located on the
control modules left-side connector. (Terminal
designations are marked on the control module.)
2. Select DC volts on the DVM and verify that the
voltage is between 16 and 38 VDC. If the DVM
reading is within range, the Y350R is functioning
properly.
Note:
Consult the Troubleshooting section of the

appropriate control bulletin for a complete
system troubleshooting procedure.
3. If the DVM reading is not within the indicated

voltage range, check wiring and correct if
necessary. If the wiring is correct and the reading
remains out of range, replace the Y350R.

Replacement modules are available through the
nearest Johnson Controls representative. (See Table
2.)
2 40 VA C C O M 12 0 VA C
P o w er In pu t Term ina ls
Figure 3: Interior of the Y350R Power

Module
Table 2: Product Available
Item
Power Module
Product Code
Y350R-1C
Description
Rectified, Class 2, 24 VAC Power Supply
S pecifications
Product
Input Voltage
Output Voltage
Material
Ambient Temperature
Ambient Humidity
Mounting
Agency Listing
Y350R Power Module

120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Rectified 24 VAC, 10 VA, Class 2
Case and cover: NEMA 1 high-impact plastic
Operating: -34 to 66C (-30 to 150F)
Shipping: -40 to 85C (-40 to 185F)
Wall or DIN rail
UL Guide No. XAPX, File E27734
CUL Guide No. XAPX7, File E27734
CSA Class No. 4813 02, File LR948
The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For application at conditions beyond these specifications,
consult the local Johnson Controls office. Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products.
Controls Group
P.O. Box 423
Milwaukee, WI 53201
Printed in U.S.A.
BANDEJA ABS ECLIPSE e GEMINI
Dez motivos para a escolha de bandejas em ABS, utilizadas nos

climatizadores Eclipse e Gemini.
Motivo N 1
O ABS imune a oxidao e corroso:

Como comparao, a resistncia a corroso dos aos inoxidveis, depende basicamente da
composio qumica e da microestrutura do ao.
De um modo geral, dependendo do tipo de ao inoxidvel e das condies de meio ambiente a
corroso evitada, ou ento, se manifesta de forma rpida e destrutiva.
A solda de fechamento dos cantos da bandeja e fixao do dreno, em bandejas de ao inox,
representam potenciais pontos de oxidao
Motivo N 2
O ABS apresenta baixssima condutibilidade

trmica:
Parte Interna
T2
O ABS possui uma condutibilidade trmica na faixa de 0,15

a 0,5 W/m.K enquanto o ao de 17 a 50 W/m.K
h2
T1
Q&
T1,s
h1
T2,s
Melhora a eficincia trmica do equipamento
Parte Externa
Motivo N 2
O ABS permite uma perfeita adeso ao
poliuretano expandido, utilizado como isolamento
trmico da bandeja:
O poliuretano expandido possui as seguintes
caractersticas:
Espessura de 35 mm.
Densidade mdia de 48 kg/m3.
Coeficiente de transmisso trmica k de 0,68 W/m2.k.
Melhora a eficincia trmica do equipamento.
Evita pontes trmicas e sudao do gabinete.
Poliuretano expandido
Motivo N 3
O ABS possui uma baixa densidade e

uma grande resistncia estrutural:
Permite fabricar bandejas leves:
Facilidade de manuseio e instalao do
equipamento.
Permite a manuteno da bandeja, sem

danificar a estrutura da mesma, devido ao peso
do pessoal de manuteno.
Motivo N 4
O ABS comercializado sob as mais diversas cores:

A bandeja fabricada na cor branca, que aliada ao excelente brilho superficial, proporcionado a propriedade do
material (ABS) permitem a perfeita visualizao do grau de limpeza da mesma.
Bandeja na cor branca
Motivo N 5
O ABS um termoplstico aplicado

especificamente para peas tcnicas:
Permite o projeto de bandejas com geometrias
complexas, que visam o perfeito escoamento do
condensado.
Motivo N 6
O ABS uma resina termoplstica, de fcil processamento, podendo ser usada em processos de
termoformagem (processo utilizado na fabricao das bandejas).
Permite a fabricao de peas complexas e com ngulos de sada sem cantos vivos:
Permite a limpeza da bandeja, sem ocasionar quaisquer danos fsicos ao pessoal de manuteno.
No forma pontos de acumulao de gua.
Motivo N 7
O ABS possue contrao de moldagem muito baixa, associada a uma grande estabilidade
dimensional:
Permite a fabricao de bandejas com perfeito encaixe ao gabinete, diminuindo assim problemas com vazamentos de ar.
Motivo N 8
O ABS possue excelente resistncia ao calor, apresentando valores de HDT a 1,82 MPa entre 105 e 120C.
Motivo N 9
O ABS no absorve umidade.
Motivo N 10
Uma bandeja para recolhimento de

condensado, permite a retirada total da
gua condensada, atendendo as
recomendaes da norma ASHRAE-62.
Motivo N 10
Recomendao ASHRAE:
Geometria da bandeja com caimento de no mnimo 10 mm
por metro.
Permite o total escoamento do condensado.
Motivo N 10
Recomendao ASHRAE:
O dreno localizado no ponto mais baixo da bandeja.
No permite a acumulao de gua condensada.
Dreno Inferior
Caimento
Sentido
do Fluxo
Tpicos de Hoje.
Estratgia de Marketing para Unidades de
Tratamento de Ar
Indstria Farmacutica Brasileira
Noes Bsicas de Salas Limpas
Estratgia de Marketing
Unidades de Tratamento de Ar
Projetar nossos produtos e servios

para segmentos especficos.
Fundamenta-se na idia de que todo
mercado consiste de grupos (segmentos) de
clientes com necessidades e anseios um
tanto diferentes.
Concentrar em cada cliente
individualmente,adaptando a ele nossos
produtos e servios e nossa comunicao.
Standard (conforto)
Aplicao: Lojas de shoppings centers,
edifcios comerciais, residenciais;
O usurio deseja baixo custo

inicial e rpido prazo de
entrega;
Movimentao de ar;
Ar frio e / ou ar quente;
Eficincia mnima de filtragem;
Mnimos conceitos de limpeza
interna.
YH - Gemini
Semi-customizado (comercial)
Aplicao:Hospitais,aeroportos;
Cliente precisa um pouco mais

que s ar frio.
Aumenta a nfase em IAQ;
Regulamentos e cdigos;
Flexvel bastante para
acomodar caractersticas
adicionais;
Boa performance em rudo.
YM - Eclipse
Customizado (especial)
Aplicao: Indstria alimentcia,
farmacutica;
Preocupao com produto final

em termos de qualidade e
propriedades trmicas.
nfase total em IAQ;
Regulamentos e cdigos;
Exigncias de estanqueidade.
Total flexibilidade para
acomodar caractersticas
adicionais;
YP - CleanLine
Standard
Baixo
Semi-Customizado
Preo/Flexibilidade
Customizado
Alto
Indstria Farmacutica Brasileira

Negcio de US$ 7 bilhes;
Emprega 50 mil trabalhadores diretos e 200 mil indiretos
na cadeia produtiva;
Tpicos de Hoje.
Noes Bsicas de Salas Limpas
Introduo
Fundamentao Terica
Aplicaes de Salas Limpas
Norma ISO 14644
Classificao de Salas Limpas
Aspectos Construtivos em Salas Limpas
Zonas de Controle de Contaminao
Fluxos de Ar em Salas Limpas
Ar Condicionado e Ventilao em Salas Limpas
Introduo
Produtos cada vez menores e sensveis
demandam processos produtivos altamente
controlados do ponto de vista de contaminantes
presentes no ar, assim como microorganismos,
rudo e iluminao;
Os aspectos construtivos do ambiente e o ar
condicionado, configura-se como fator
altamente relevante no desempenho de salas
limpas
Fundamentao Terica
Conceito de sala limpa:
rea na qual a concentrao de partculas em
suspenso no ar controlada; construda e utilizada
de maneira a minimizar a introduo, gerao e
reteno de partculas dentro da sala, na qual outros
parmetros relevantes, como por exemplo,
temperatura, umidade e presso, so controlados
conforme necessrio. (NBR ISO 14644-1)
Fundamentao Terica
Evitar a introduo de
contaminantes
Ambiente externo
Sala limpa
-Operadores
-Equipamentos
Ncleo do
processo
Contaminao:
Todo e qualquer material, substncia ou
energia no desejada no ambiente
ASHRAE
Fundamentao Terica
Mistura
70.481.600 partculas
352 partculas
0,3um/m
Filtro Fino
n 95%
Filtro HEPA
n 99,99%
Gerao de partculas
Controle das fontes externas
20% ar exterior
352.000.000 partculas
Sala limpa ISO Classe 6

102.000 partculas 0,3 um/m
80% ar de retorno
102.000 partculas
Sobrepresso
Em geral, as fontes de contaminao em uma sala limpa so classificadas em dois

grandes grupos : fontes externas e fontes internas
Aplicaes de Salas Limpas

Grupos principais de
atividade:
Indstria
Farmacutica/Biotecnolgia
Indstria
Eletrnica/Semicondutores
Indstria Aeroespacial
Indstria Alimentcia
Hospitais/Salas de Cirurgia
Outras aplicaes: Indstria
Automotiva, tica, Pesquisa
de Materiais de Alta
Tecnologia.
Norma ISO 14644

Parte 1:Classificao da
limpeza do ar
Parte 2:Especificaes para
teste e monitoramento para
provar contnua validao
Parte 3:Metrologia e mtodos
de teste
Parte 4:Projeto, construo e
operao
Parte 5:Operao
Parte 6:Termos e definies
Parte 7:Dispositivos
separadores
Parte 8:Contaminao
molecular
Classificao das salas limpas

Classe
NBR/ISSO
14.644-1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Nmero mximo de partculas por m de ar

>0,1 um >0,3 um
10
100
10
1.000
102
10.000
1.020
100.000
10.200
1.000.000 102.000
>0,5 um
>1 um
4
35
8
352
83
3.520
832
35.200
8.320
352.000
83.200
3.520.000 832.000
35.200.000 8.320.000
>5 um
29
293
2.930
29.300
293.000
Classificao Salas Limpas

Classe
Descrio dos Produtos
Produtos estries, solues

parenterais, injetveis prA (100) ISO 5
esterelizados
Hormnios
Indstria eltro-eletrnica, semi
B (1.000)
condutores
Produtos injetveis para
esterilizao posterior
C (10.000) ISO 7 Lquidos e slidos orais
Cremes e pomadas, suspenses
e emulses
Nanotecnologia, produo de
D (100.000) ISO 8
chips
Aspectos construtivos das salas limpas

Para que se atinja os nveis de limpeza do
ar requeridos para uma determinada
atividade, as salas limpas:
Devem ser projetadas e construdas de forma
a minimizar a gerao ou entrada de
contaminantes em seu interior.
Observncia de aspectos como materiais
utilizados na construo, fluxos de ar,
disposio de equipamento e movimentao
de pessoal e material, entre outros.

Materiais de construo
Materiais devem levar em conta a classe de
limpeza da sala limpa, efeitos de abraso ou
impacto, mtodos de limpeza e ataques
qumicos e biolgicos.
Acabamento interno deve conter o mnimo de
reentrncias e cantos, devendo ser de fcil
limpeza.
As paredes, teto e junes devem ser
selados.

Central de Tratamento de Ar
Filtro Grosso
CF
Filtro Fino
Filtragem do ar Estgios de filtros

Classe da Sala - ISO
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Classe de Filtro ABNT

terminal
em dutos ou central
G3
F3
A3
ULPA
G3
F3
A3
ULPA
G3
F3
A3
G3
F3
A3
G3
F3
A3
G3
F3
A3
G3
F3
Filtro HEPA
Terminal
Sala Limpa

Telhado
2a3m
Unidade de Tratamento de Ar
Estrutura auxiliar
Duto
Retorno
Forro Transitvel
Sala Limpa
Duto
Insufl.
2m
3m
Corte da instalao
Zonas de controle de contaminao
rea de Acesso ISO 8
rea de Preparao ISO 7
rea de Envase ISO 5
Fluxos de ar em salas limpas

Pr-filtro
Fluxos de ar
AHU
Filtro principal
Turbulento
Unidirecional
Turbulento
Ar Condicionado e Ventilao em Salas Limpas
O projeto HVAC em salas limpas devem

levar em conta:
O sistema de segregao do ambiente limpo
Conforto trmico
Caractersticas dos produtos processados na
sala limpa
Conservao de energia
Movimentao
Umidificao
Desumidificao
Aquecimento
Resfriamento
Filtragem
Ar Externo
Renovao
Processos de Tratamento do Ar
CF
Insuflamento
Ambiente Condicionado
Ar de Retorno
Despressurizao

LITIssued July 1, 2006
W351 Series
Electronic On/Off Humidity Control

Description
Features
The W351 Electronic On/Off Humidity Control

is an electronic humidity control with SPDT
relay output and LED indication. This control is
used in conjunction with the HE-67S3-0N0BT
or HE-67S3-0N00P series of humidity
transmitters to stage humidification and
dehumidification equipment. The control
covers a range of 10 to 90% RH and has
adjustments for setpoint, differential, and
mode (humidification or dehumidification).
The S351 Stage Module, D351 Display

Module, and the Y350R Power Modules can
be used with the W351.
field selectable humidification or

dehumidification mode
adjustable differential and setpoint
5-pin connectors eliminate wiring between
modules
Applications
computer rooms
clean room
pharmaceutical manufacturing process
space humidity
humidity monitoring and display

high/low humidity alarm indication
W351
Selection Chart
Code
Number
Setpoint
Range
(% RH)
Differential
(%RH)
W351AB-2C
Humidity
Transmitter
sensor not included
W351AA-1C
10 to 90% RH
2 to 10% RH
includes duct sensor

HE-67S3-0N00P
9300060fig2.eps
W351AA-2C
includes room sensor

HE-67S3-0N0BT
Interior of W351
W351 Electronic Humidity Control
Supply
Voltage 1
Transformer 20 to 30 VAC, 50/60 Hz, Class 2

Y350R
120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
VDC Power Supply
12 VDC provided to power humidity

transmitter
Power Consumption
1.8 VA Maximum
Relay
SPDT enclosed relay, contacts rated at

10 amp, 1/2 hp 120/240 VAC
Ambient
Temperature
Operating
-30 to 150F (-34 to 66C)
Shipping
-40 to 185F (-40 to 85C)
Humidity
1. Only one voltage source may be used.
Relay Contact Ratings

Voltage, AC
120
Full Load Amp
9.8
4.9
Locked Rotor Amp
58.8
29.4
930060fig4.eps
208/240
Non-Inductive Amp 10 at 24/240 VAC
W351 Dimensions, in. (mm)
Pilot Duty 125 VA at 24/240 VAC
1 of 1

W351P Series
Electronic Proportional Plus Integral Humidity Control

Description
The W351P Electronic Humidity Control series
has proportional outputs of 0 to 10 VDC and
0 to 20 mA. Proportional plus integral (PI)
control is an option to hold setpoint regardless
of load shifts on a system. The control covers
a range of 10 to 90% RH and has adjustments
for setpoint, integration constant, throttling
.
range, minimum output, and mode

(humidification or dehumidification). This
control is used in conjunction with the
HE-67S3-0N0BT or HE-67S3-0N00P series of
humidity transmitters. The S351 Stage
Module, Y350R Power Module, and D351
Display Module can be used with the W351P.
W351P
Features
9300062fig2.eps
Interior of W351P
Selection Chart
Code
Number
Output
Humidity Throttling Humidity

Range
Range
Transmitter
W351PP-1C
Proportional
Voltage:
0 to 10 VDC and
Proportional
Current:
0 to 20 mA
10 to 90%
RH
W351PN-1C
W351PN-2C
2 to 20% RH none
field selectable proportional only or

proportional plus integral control
ten segment LED displays percent of
output signal
field selectable humidification or
dehumidification mode
minimum output adjustment
modules
Applications
Use for modulating steam valves for
humidification.
HE-67S3-0N0BT
(included)
HE-67S3-0N00P
(included)
Note: Order the corresponding humidity transmitter separately. Staging,

power, and display modules can be ordered optionally, if required.
W351P Electronic Proportional Plus
Integral Static Pressure Control
Supply
Voltage1

Y350R 120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
0 to 10 VDC, corresponding to 0 to 100% RH
Proportional Output
0 to 10 VDC (550 ohm load minimum) and

0 to 20 mA (600 ohm load maximum).
Minimum Output
Adjustable to 0 to 60% of full output span
Output Indication
A ten segment LED bar graph indicates

percentage of output
Control Action
Direct or reverse action is jumper selectable
Power Consumption
3.2 VA maximum
Integration Constant
Three selectable rates Fast, Medium, Slow,

and Off position
Ambient
Temperature
9300062fig7.eps
Sensor Input Range
Operating -30 to 150F (-34 to 66C)

Shipping -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C)
Ambient Humidity
NEMA 1 high-impact thermoplastic
W351P Dimensions, in. (mm)
1. Only one input voltage source may be used.
1 of 1
Product/Technical Bulletin W351P

Issue Date 0601
System 350
W351P Electronic Proportional Plus Integral Humidity Control

The W351P control is an electronic, proportional plus
integral humidity control with analog 0-10 VDC and
0-20 mA outputs. The W351P control has three
user-selectable integration constants, a wide setpoint
range of 10-90% RH, and an adjustable throttling
range of 2-20% RH.
The W351P control is designed to work with an
HE-67S3-0N0BT Room Sensor Humidity Transmitter
or HE-67S3-0N00P Duct Sensor Humidity Transmitter.
Like all System 350 products, the W351P control
housing is a NEMA 1, high-impact plastic enclosure.
The modular design provides easy, plug-together
expandability.
Figure 1: W351P Electronic Proportional Plus

Integral Humidity Control

Modular Design
Provides the flexibility to add up to four S351 Stage Modules, a

D351 Humidity Display Module, and a Y350R Power Module
Plug-together Connectors and
Eliminates wiring between modules and reduces installation costs
35 mm DIN Rail Mounting
Adjustable Setpoint Range of

10-90% RH
Reduces inventory by covering the humidity range required to

support most humidity applications
Adjustable Minimum Output Signal
Allows the user to adjust the minimum output between 0-60% of

the output signal voltage; can also be used to set minimum valve
position
Adjustable Throttling
Enables user to match the amount of control (maximum to

minimum) to application requirements
Range of 2-20% RH
Humidification or Dehumidification
Modes of Operation
Three Selectable Integration

Constants
Interchangeable Humidity
Works in a variety of humidification or dehumidification

applications
Allows user to adjust system recovery rate to setpoint humidity at
Slow, Medium, or Fast to meet application requirements
Increases versatility and serviceability
Transmitters
Part No. 24-7664-478, Rev. B
Code No. LIT-930062
1
A pplication Requirements
selectable integration constant
selectable humidification/dehumidification mode of

operation
Integration
DIP Switch
Setpoint
Potentiometer
J1
Throttling Range
Potentiometer
Minimum Output
Potentiometer
The W351P Humidity Control can operate as a

standalone device or in conjunction with add-on
modules. With the addition of S351 Stage Modules,
the humidity system can control a variety of single or
multiple-stage humidity applications.
Mode of
Operation
Jumpers
VDC
C
24V
All System 350 controls are

intended to control equipment
under normal equipment
failure or malfunction of
System 350 controls could lead
to an abnormal operating
condition that could cause
personal injury or damage to the
equipment or other property,
other devices (limit or safety
controls) or systems (alarm or
supervisory) intended to warn of,
or protect against, failure or
malfunction of the
System 350 controls must be
incorporated into and maintained
as part of the control system.
IMPORTANT:
Percent of Output
LED Indicator Lights
Figure 2: Interior View Showing W351P Control

Features
A typical application for the W351P control is

modulating steam valves for humidification.
A typical System 350 humidity control scheme
includes the following:
W351P Humidity Control
Y350R Power Module (or 24 VAC transformer)
up to four S351 On/Off Stage Modules
D351 Digital Humidity Display Module
HE-67S3-0N0BT Wall Mount or

HE-67S3-0N00P Duct Mount Humidity Transmitter
O peration
The W351P control operates on 24 VAC/VDC and
provides two simultaneous analog outputs:
0 to 10 VDC and 0 to 20 mA.
A ten-segment front panel Light-Emitting Diode (LED)
indicates percentage of output. Features include:
adjustable setpoint
adjustable minimum output
adjustable throttling range (proportional band)
Proportional-only Controls
Proportional-only controls work by continuously
adjusting the magnitude of the controls output signal
in proportion to the difference (input-error) between the
controls setpoint value and the actual value sensed in
the controlled system. As the load on a system
increases, the input-error to the control increases. The
control reacts by increasing the magnitude of the
output signal, driving the controlled device to respond
to the increased load. (See Figure 3.)
Proportional-only controls are easy to set up and
adjust, and they provide good stability and rapid
response to changing load conditions.
Proportional-only controls cannot maintain a system
process at the exact control setpoint. A proportional
offset (or droop) is always present when there is a
steady load on the controlled system. (See Figure 3.)
The result is that a proportional-only control maintains
a system process at a control-point (setpoint plus the
proportional offset) instead of the desired setpoint. The
greater the load on the system, the greater the
proportional offset, and the further the control-point is
from the system setpoint.
2 System 350 W351P Electronic Proportional Plus Integral Humidity Control Product/Technical Bulletin
A proportional-only control cannot adjust the output

signal to drive a system process from the control-point
to the desired setpoint. (See Figure 3.)
Systems with proportional-only controls and large
loads or highly variable load conditions may operate at
control-points that vary significantly from the desired
setpoint.
Proportional Plus Integral Controls

The W351P Electronic Proportional Plus Integral
Humidity Control incorporates integral (or reset)
control action along with the proportional-only control
action. The addition of the integral (or reset) design
effectively eliminates proportional offset.The control
can adjust the output signal to match a steady load on
the system, and drive the system process toward
setpoint.
On a properly-sized system with steady load
conditions, a proportional plus integral control can
maintain the system process very close to the setpoint.
(See Figure 3.)
The speed at which the proportional plus integral
control drives the system process to setpoint (recovery
rate) is determined by the systems capacity, the size
of the load, and the integration constant set on the
control.
The integration constant establishes the rate at which

the control re-adjusts to the load as it drives the
process towards setpoint. The faster the integration
constant, the faster the control re-adjusts the
magnitude of the output signal, and the faster the
recovery rate of a properly sized and set-up system.
On traditional proportional plus integral controls, the
rate of re-adjustment can become too large if the
process load exceeds the capacity of the equipment.
When the controlled equipment is at full capacity and
the setpoint still cannot be reached, traditional
proportional plus integral controls continue to adjust
the magnitude of the output signal. The result is called
integral windup.
The W351P proportional plus integral controls avoid
integral windup with a patented circuit that puts a
dynamic ceiling on the integrator. This allows the
process to recover from an out-of-range condition
without experiencing a long overshoot period.
Proportional plus integral controls might not be
suitable for all applications. Improperly applied
proportional plus integral controls may be unstable and
overshoot the setpoint.
Also, proportional plus integral controls require two
separate adjustments that are dependent on each
other. The system must be properly sized to handle
the maximum process load, and close observation is
necessary when the proportional plus integral controls
are initially set up and checked out. On proper
applications, proportional plus integral controls provide
superior accuracy and continuous setpoint control.
Proportional-only Control
Humidity
System Load
Proportional
Offset
Load Change
Throttling
Range
Error
Control Point
Follows the Load
Setpoint
Time
Proportional Plus Integral Control
Humidity
System Load
Proportional
Offset = 0
Setpoint
Load Change
Error
Integration adjusts the

proportional output to
bring the process to
setpoint regardless of load.
Time
Figure 3: Operation of Proportional-only vs. Proportional Plus Integral Control
System 350 W351P Electronic Proportional Plus Integral Humidity Control Product/Technical Bulletin
Minimum Output Adjustment

The minimum output adjustment sets the minimum
signal output (in VDC or mA) that the W351P control
provides to the controlled device. The minimum output
can be set between 0 to 60% of the output range (up
to 6 VDC or up to 12 mA).
Example: For a controlled device that responds to a
4 to 20 mA output signal, the minimum output must be
4 mA or 20% of the output range. (See Figure 4.)
Adjust the MIN OUTPUT potentiometer, located on the
lower circuit board to the right of the throttling range
potentiometer. One LED segment will light on the front
of the control for each 10% increase in range. The first
segment lights at 10%, the second segment at 20%
and so on, until the sixth segment lights at 60%.
Output 20
Signal
Range
(in mA)
10
Minimum
Output
4
0
2
Setpoint
Humidity
8 10 12 14 16 18 20
Throttling Range (% RH)
Adjust the throttling range by turning the THROT

RANGE potentiometer located on the center of the
circuit board under the control cover.
The throttling range is adjustable from 2-20% RH.
(See Figure 4.) Make adjustments using the
potentiometer marked THROT RANGE located on the
lower circuit board to the left of the MIN OUTPUT
potentiometer. (See Figure 2.)
Depending on the application, the W351P humidity
control operates as a proportional-only control or a
proportional plus integral control. Refer to sections
Proportional-only Controls and Proportional Plus
Integral Controls.
The W351P control has three available integration
constants, which allow setup for optimum recovery
rate for an application. Use the Integration DIP switch
block (see Figure 5) and the guidelines below to set
the control for proportional-only or to set the
integration constant for proportional plus integral
control.
Off: Switch 1 to On position, all others Off

provides proportional-only operation. In open loop
(without feedback) applications, select Off for
proportional-only operation. (See Figure 5.)
Slow (C3): Switch 2 to On position, all others

Off is the slowest integration constant and is
suitable for most proportional plus integral
applications. Slow is the recommended initial
setting.
Medium (C2): Switch 3 to On position, all

others Off provides a faster integration constant.
If the rate of system recovery to setpoint is
sluggish with the control set to Slow and the
system has enough capacity to drive the process
to setpoint at a faster rate, the Medium setting
may be used.
Fast (C1): Switch 4 in On position, all others

Off is the fastest integration constant. Fast should
be used only in instances where the rate of
change at the transmitter is extremely rapid and
system capacity is sufficient to compensate for
rapid load changes.
Figure 4: Minimum Output Set to 20% (4 mA)

and Throttling Range Set to 20% RH
Throttling Range (Proportional Band)

On proportional-only controls, the throttling range or
proportional band setting establishes how far the
system humidity must deviate from the W351P control
setpoint to generate a 100% output signal from the
control.
For example, on a proportional-only control with a
throttling range of 10% Relative Humidity (RH), the
output signal (VDC or mA) is 0% when the system
humidity equals the setpoint humidity. The output
signal increases to 100% (10 VDC or 20 mA) when the
system humidity rises 10% RH above the setpoint in
Dehumidification mode or drops 10% RH below the
setpoint in Humidification mode.
When setting up the controls for proportional plus
integral operation, start with the integration constant
Off (in the proportional only mode), and set the
throttling range (or proportional band) to a wide setting
(60% or more of the total throttling range) to assure a
stable control loop. Then set the integration constant
as slow as possible. (Refer to Integration Constant.)
D imensions
2 3 4
DIP Switch Positions
for Number 6 Screws

1/2
1/8
(13)
(4)
Fast (C1)
Medium (C2)
Slow (C3)
Off (Proportional Only)
N
O
2-15/16
(75)
5
(127)
4
Proportional-Only (no integration constant)

setting shown.
Mode of Operation
Jumper Positions
1-9/16
(40)
3/8
DIN Rail
Mount
1-3/16
(31)
W351
ON
2-3/8
(61)
Humidification
3
(76)
Dehumidification
2-3/8
(61)
7/8
(22)
Figure 5: Integration Constant and Mode of

Operation Settings
1/2 in.
Trade Size
Conduit Hole
Figure 7: W351P Control Dimensions, in./mm
Mode of Operation
When Dehumidification Mode is selected, the analog
output signal magnitude increases as the humidity
rises.
M ounting
When Humidification Mode is selcted, the analog

output signal increases as the humidity drops.
(See Figure 6.) The control is factory set for
humidification.
The W351P control housing is a compact NEMA 1

plastic enclosure designed for standard 35-mm DIN
rail mounting. Four key-slot mounting holes on the
back of the control case are provided for surface
mounting.
Humidification
-20
mA
20
VDC
10
10
10
Setpoint
% RH Throttling Range
Dehumidification
10
20+
Setpoint
% RH Throttling Range
Figure 6: Humidification or Dehumidification

Proportional Bands Shown in Proportional-Only
Mode (Shaded area shows throttling range
possibilities from minimum to maximum.)
The W351P control is not position sensitive but should

be mounted for convenient wiring and adjustment.
Note:
When mounting the W351P control (or any

System 350 module) to rigid conduit, attach
the hub to the conduit before securing the hub
to the control enclosure.

making electrical connections.
More than one disconnect may
be required to completely
de-energize equipment. Failure
to follow these precautions may
result in electrical shock or
equipment damage.
W iring
Install all wiring to conform to the National Electrical
Code and local regulations. For maximum electrical
rating of control, refer to the label inside the control
cover. Terminals will accept 12 to 26 AWG wire. Use
only copper conductors.
Shielded cable is not generally required for transmitter

wiring on runs of less than 50 feet. When using
shielded cable, isolate and tape the shield at the
transmitter. Connect the shield to the C terminal on the
W351P control.
1. Use a 1/8-in.- (3.2 mm) wide-blade screwdriver to

push the clamp arm down. (See Figure 8.)
The maximum recommended length of 22 AWG 3-wire

shielded transmitter cable is 250 feet (76 meters).
2. Insert the appropriate wire into the opening. (See

Figure 9 for terminal designations.)
W351P Humidity Control
3. Release the clamp arm to secure the wire.

The W351P control can output a variable
signal from 0-10 VDC or 0-20 mA. (Both
outputs can be used simultaneously.)
Connection can be made to both the V and I
terminals, allowing the W351P control to drive
two outputs from the same Humidification or
Dehumidification ramp simultaneously. This
feature can be used to drive motor actuators
of several different types in a single
application.
SN
VDC
C
24V
J1
Note:
Humidity
Transmitter
0 to 10 VDC
Output
PWR
COM
OUT
0 to 20 mA
Output
0 to 10
VDC
Figure 8: Cage Clamp Terminal Block
Transmitter Wiring
The W351P Humidity Control uses a HE-67S3-0N0BT
or a HE-67S3-0N00P Humidity Transmitter, which is
powered by the 12 VDC power supply of the W351P
control. Connect the transmitter to the 6-conductor
terminal block located at the bottom of the lower circuit
board. (See Figure 2.) See TRUERH Series HE-67xx
Humidity Element with Temperature Sensor
Installation Instructions (Part No. 24-9527-7 Rev. A)
for more information.
PWR
COM
OUT
HE-67S3-0N00P
Duct Mount Humidity Transmitter
HE-67S3-0N00P
Wall Mount Humidity Transmitter
0 to 10
VDC
PWR
COM
OUT
Figure 9: Transmitter Wiring
Use the 0-10 VDC output of the HE-67S3-0N0BT or

HE-67S3-0N00P humidity transmitter as the input to
the W351P control.
A dd-on Modules
The S351 Stage Modules, D351 Digital Humidity
Display Module, and Y350R Power Module connect
together and plug into the W351P control via a
connector on its right side. The recommended order of
the modules is (from left to right) control module,
power module, stage module(s), and display module.
S351 Humidity Stage Modules

The S351 Stage Modules receive their power,
setpoint, and transmitter input from the W351P
Humidity Control. Only the W351P control output is
integrated (not the transmitter and setpoint signals)
when an integration constant of Slow, Medium, or Fast
is selected.
Up to four additional S351 modules can be plugged
into a W351P Humidity Control and set for
humidification, dehumidification, or a combination of
humidification and dehumidification. See
System 350 S350A Temperature, S351A Humidity,
and S352A Pressure Stage Modules
Product/Technical Bulletin (LIT-930080) for more
information.
D351 Humidity Display Module
A djustments
!
WARNING:Risk of Electrical Shock.

To perform the following
procedures it is necessary to
power the control and the
controlled equipment while the
control cover is removed. Do not
touch any exposed metal
components with anything other
than properly insulated tools or
insulated probes of the digital
voltage meter. Failure to use
properly insulated tools and
probes can result in severe
electrical shock if live line voltage
parts are contacted.
W351P Control
1. Remove W351P control cover by loosening the
2. Position the jumpers on jumper block J1 vertically
for humidification or horizontally for
dehumidification. (See Figure 2.) The jumpers are
factory-set for humidification.
The D351 module receives its power, sensor and

setpoint information from the W351P control. A 3-digit,
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) gives continuous display
of the sensed humidity. Press the PRESS FOR
SETPOINT button to display the setpoint of the
adjoining W351P control. See System 350 Display
Modules Product/Technical Bulletin (LIT-930070) for
more information.
3. Adjust the throttling range potentiometer to desired

setting. Rotate the potentiometer clockwise to
increase the throttling range.
Y350R Power Module
4. Set the minimum output potentiometer to the

desired position if minimum output is required.
Output can be read with a voltmeter or can be
adjusted using the ten segment LED on the front
of the control.
The Y350R module provides a convenient method of

powering System 350 Modules from a 120 or 240 VAC
power source. The Y350R module supplies power to
one W351P control, one D351 module, and up to four
S351 stage modules. See System 350 Power
Module Product/Technical Bulletin (LIT-930090) for
more information.
If the W351P control is to be used in proportional

plus integral mode, do not set the initial throttling
range adjustment below 10% RH. A narrow
throttling range used in conjunction with the
integration may result in unstable control.
Note: Before setting the minimum output

potentiometer, be sure the control is not
generating an analog output signal.
For each 10% increase in range, one segment will
light on the LED, up to six LED segments (60% is
the upper limit of the minimum output adjustment).
In a milliampere application, each segment equals
2 mA. In a voltage application, each segment
equals 1 volt. (See Figure 3 for a milliampere
example.)
Example: To set the W351P control for a minimum

output of 4 mA, turn the minimum output
potentiometer clockwise until the second LED
segment lights. Slowly turn the potentiometer
counterclockwise until the second segment just
goes out.
3. Adjust the differential potentiometer to the desired

offset from the setpoint of the W351P control. (See
Figure 11 for a sample multistage application if
needed.)
High
Humidity
On
Stage 2
Differential
5. Make sure the system is stable before selecting

integration. Refer to the Checkout section of this
bulletin.
On
6. Replace the cover, tighten the four captive cover

screws, and adjust the control to the desired
setpoint.
Note: The W351P control setpoint is factory
calibrated at midscale to a tolerance of
1% RH. The setpoint tolerance at the
extreme ends of the setpoint scale may be
2.5% RH. The D351 display module is
unaffected by this tolerance shift. Use the
D351 module for the most accurate
setpoint selection. Press and hold the
setpoint button on the D351 module while
rotating the setpoint dial.
S351 Stage Module

When the W351P control is used in conjunction with
one or more S351 modules, the following adjustments
must be made to each S351 module. Additional
information about adjusting the stage module is
available in the S350 Temperature, S351 Humidity,
and S352 Pressure Stage Modules Product/Technical
Bulletin (LIT-930080). (See Figure 10 for adjustment
locations.)
1. Remove the S351 module cover by loosening the
four cover screws.
2. Set the humidification/dehumidification jumper
blocks to the desired mode of operation.
Offset
Potentiometer
Differential
Potentiometer
Module
Connector
Module
Connector
Jumper Block
Position
Humidification
Dehumidification
Figure 10: S351 Stage Module
Off
Stage 1
Differential
Off
W351P
Setpoint
Stage 2
Offset
Stage 1
Offset
50%
100%
System Capacity
Low
Humidity
Figure 11: On/Off Dehumidification Using Two

S351 Stage Modules
4. Adjust the offset potentiometer to the % RH from
the W351P control setpoint (above setpoint with
dehumidification mode selected or below setpoint
with humidification mode selected) so that the
stage relay will de-energize.
5. Replace the cover and fasten in place with the
four screws.
T roubleshooting
Checkout
1. Before applying power, make sure that the
installation and wiring connections are according
to job specifications.
2. After making necessary adjustments and electrical
connections, put the system in operation and
observe at least three complete operating cycles
before leaving the installation to determine that the
system is stable.
3. If integration is required, select the Fast, Medium,
or Slow integration constant. Slow is the
recommended initial setting. (Refer to the
Integration Constant section.)
4. Put the system back into operation. Observe
system operation and make any additional
adjustments to obtain stable control (if necessary).

If the control system does not function properly, verify

that the proper mode is selected on each module
(humidification/dehumidification) and then use the
following procedures to determine the cause of the
problem.
1. Check for proper voltages on the W351P Humidity
Control:
a. Connect a Digital Voltmeter (DVM) between
the 24V (+) and C (-) terminals located on the
W351P controls terminal block (Figure 2).
If an external transformer is used, select

AC volts on the DVM and verify that the
voltage is 20-30 VAC.
If a Y350R Power Module is used, select

DC volts on the DVM and verify that the
voltage is 16-38 VDC.
If an external DC power supply is used,

select DC volts on the DVM and verify that
the voltage is 22-29 VDC.
If the DVM voltage is below 11.9 VDC,

then disconnect the humidity transmitter
completely and check the voltage again.
-
If the DVM voltage rises to

11.9-12.1 VDC, replace the transmitter.
If the DVM voltage is still below

11.9 VDC, replace the W351P control.
2. Check humidity transmitter for proper output

voltage:
a. Disconnect the transmitter OUT wire from the
W351P controls SN terminal.
b. Take a humidity reading with a
properly-calibrated, accurate humidity
measuring device. This reading is the actual
humidity.
c.
Connect a DC voltmeter between the

transmitter OUT wire and the control C
terminal. Using Figure 12, convert the voltage
to % RH. This is the humidity reading at the
transmitter (RHT).
Note:
A transmitter output of 0-10 VDC

should correspond to a humidity of
0-100% RH (see Figure 12).
If the RHT is close to the actual humidity,

proceed to Step 3.
If the RHT deviates substantially from the

actual humidity, replace the transmitter.
10
Transmitter
Output
VDC
b. If the DVM reading is within the indicated

voltage range, select DC volts on the DVM
(DVM must be accurate to 0.1 VDC) and
connect the (+) lead to the VDC terminal and
the (-) lead to the C terminal.
If the DVM voltage is 11.9-12.1 VDC,

proceed to Step 2.
If the DVM voltage is above 12.1 VDC,

replace the W351P control.
00
50
100
RHT Humidity (% RH)
Figure 12: Transmitter Voltage vs. Humidity
3. Check the W351P Humidity Control for proper

operation:
Note: Perform steps 1 and 2 first.
a. Reconnect the transmitter OUT wire to the
W351P controls SN terminal. Select the
minimum throttling range and a minimum
output equal to zero by turning both
potentiometers counterclockwise. Switch the
integration off and select the Humidification
mode.
d. If the sensor voltage is below 9 V, adjust the

setpoint to match the RHT. (See Figure 11.)
The output terminal V should be less than
0.1 VDC and all segments in the LED should
be off.
Note:
b. Connect the DVM (+) lead to the W351P

controls SN terminal and the (-) lead to the
C terminal.
c.
Increase the setpoint by 2% RH.
As the setpoint is increased, the W351P

controls V output voltage should go from
0 to 10 VDC, the I output current should
go from 0 to 20 mA, and the LED
segments should come on one at a time
from left to right.
If the LED segments do not turn on or the

V or I outputs do not change as described
above, replace the W351P control.
If the sensor voltage is less than 9 V, go to

Step 3d. If the voltage is greater than 9 V, then
adjust the setpoint to 80% RH.
The output terminal V should be less than

0.1 VDC and all segments in the LED
should be off. If not, replace the W351P
control.
Adjust the minimum output to the
maximum by turning the potentiometer
clockwise. As the potentiometer is turned
clockwise, the segments in the LED
should come on from left to right until the
fifth or sixth segment is on. If not, replace
the W351P control.
Adjust the minimum output to zero again

and select the Dehumidification mode.
If the right most segment in the LED is on

(V terminal = 10 VDC; I terminal = 20 mA),
go to Step 3e. If not, replace the W351P
control.
Some tolerance error is present

between the setpoint scale and the
setpoint knob pointer. See the
Adjustments section.
e. Re-adjust the W351P control back to the

desired control settings.
4. Check the S351 Stage Modules for proper
operation (if applicable):
IMPORTANT:
There is a possibility that a defect

in one S351 module could cause
defective symptoms in all
modules. Plug each S351
module into the W351P control
individually and check its
performance as outlined in
Step 4.
Note: Steps 1, 2, and 3 must be performed first.

a. Turn the W351P controls setpoint dial to
minimum.
b. Increase the setpoint by slowly turning the dial
until the S351 modules relay and LED turn On
or Off as shown in Table 1.
c.
Decrease the setpoint slowly until the S351

modules relay and LED turn Off or On as
described in Table 1.
d. If the relay does not perform as indicated in

Table 1, adjust the differential and offset
potentiometers to minimum and try again.
e. If the relay still does not turn on and off,
replace the defective S351 module(s).
b. If the D351 module does not show the correct

RHT, replace the D351 module.
Table 1: S351 Module Relay

Troubleshooting
Mode of
Operation
LED
Status
Normally
Open
Relay
Status
c.
Setpoint Dial
Setting*
Humidify
On
Closed
(RHT) + offset +
differential
Humidify
Off
Open
(RHT) + offset
Dehumidify
On
Closed
(RHT) - offset differential
Dehumidify
Off
Open
(RHT) - offset
Press the setpoint button on the display

module to read the selected setpoint.
d. If the D351 module displays a reading other

than the expected setpoint value, check the
setpoint potentiometer setting and correct if
necessary. If the display continues to read an
incorrect or out-of-range value (>100% RH),
replace the D351 module.
* See Figure 11 for RHT vs. Humidity illustration.
5. Check the D351 Display Module (if applicable).

Note: Perform Steps 1 through 4 first.
Do not calibrate or make field repairs.

HE-67S3-0N0BT and HE-67S3-0N00P humidity
transmitters and replacement controls are available
through local Johnson Controls representatives or
wholesale distributors.
a. Check the RHT as determined in Step 2c. The

display should show the same humidity
reading.

Item
W351P Proportional Plus
Integral Humidity Control
Product Code
Number
Description
W351PP-1C
Without transmitter, Range: 10-90% RH;

Throttling: 2-20% RH
W351PN-1C
With room RH transmitter (HE-67S3-0N0BT),

Range: 10-90% RH;
W351PN-2C
With duct RH transmitter (HE-67S3-0N00P),

Range: 10-90% RH;
Display Module
D351AA-1C
Digital Humidity Display Module
Stage Module
S351AA-1C
Humidity Stage Model with % RH Scale
Power Module
Y350R-1C
120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz Input
Humidity Transmitters
HE-67S3-0N0BT
All-polymer, Wall Mount Humidity Transmitter
HE-67S3-0N00P
All-polymer, Duct Mount Humidity Transmitter
Conduit Adapter
ADP11A-600R
1/2-in. Snap-fit EMT Conduit Adapter (box of 10)
DIN Rail Sections
BKT287-1R
35 x 7.5 mm, 0.305 m (12 in.) long
BKT287-2R
35 x 7.5 mm, 1.0 m (39.4 in.) long
DIN Rail End Clamps
PLT344-1R
Consists of Two End Clamps
Cable for Remote Mounting

of D351 Display Module
WHA29A-600R
(0.9 m) 3 ft*
WHA29A-603R
(7.6 m) 25 ft
WHA29A-604R
(15.2 m) 50 ft
* WHA29A-600R can also be used to daisy chain S351 Stage Modules together.
11
S pecifications
Product
Sensor Input Range
Setpoint Range
W351P Electronic Proportional Plus Integral Humidity Control

0-10 VDC; corresponding to 0-100% RH
10-90% RH
Throttling Range
2-20% RH
Supply Voltage*
AC Supply:
DC Supply:
Analog Output
Minimum Output
Output Indication
Control Action
20-30 VAC Class 2, 50/60 Hz, or a Y350R Power Module:

See Add-on Modules.
22-29 VDC @ 150 mA Maximum
0-10 VDC (550 ohm Load Minimum) and 0-20 mA (600 ohm Load Maximum)
Both outputs are designed to withstand short circuits to COM and 24 VAC.
Adjustable from 0-60% of the Output
A ten-segment LED indicates percentage of output.
Dehumidification or Humidification action is jumper selectable.
Power Consumption
3.2 VA Maximum
Three Selectable Rates (Slow, Medium, Fast), and an Off Position
Ambient Temperatures
Operating:
Shipping:
Humidity (all modules)
0-95% RH Non-condensing; Maximum Dew Point: 85F (29C)
Material
Agency Listing
Transmitter
Add-on Modules:
-30 - 150F (-34 - 66C)

-40 - 185F (-40 - 85C)

UL Listed, File E27734, CCN XAPX
cUL Listed, File E27734, CCN XAPX7
HE-67S3-0N0BT All-Polymer, Wall-mount Humidity Transmitter; 0-10 VDC, 0-100% RH
HE-67S3-0N00P All-Polymer, Duct-mount Humidity Transmitter; 0-10 VDC, 0-100% RH
S351
Input Power:
OFFSET:
DIFF:
Provided by the W351P control

2-30% RH
2-10% RH
Y350R
Supply Voltage:
120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
D351
Display Range:
10-90% RH
* Only one input voltage source may be used.

specifications, consult Johnson Controls/PENN Application Engineering at 1-(800)-275-5676. Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for
Controls Group
P.O. Box 423
Milwaukee, WI 53201
Printed in U.S.A.
Product/Technical Bulletin W351

Issue Date 0601
System 350
W351 Electronic On/Off Humidity Control
The W351 Electronic Humidity Control is an On/Off

humidity control. The control output is a Single-Pole,
Double-Throw (SPDT) relay with Light-Emitting Diode
(LED) indication. It features humidification and
dehumidification modes of operation and an adjustable
differential.
The W351 control is designed to work with an
HE-67S3-0N0BT Room Sensor Humidity Transmitter
or HE-67S3-0N00P Duct Sensor Humidity Transmitter.
As with all System 350 products, the W351 control
housing is a compact NEMA 1, high-impact plastic
Figure 1: W351 Electronic On/Off Humidity Control

Modular Design
Provides the flexibility to add up to five S351

Humidity Stage Modules (nine with a 24 VAC
transformer), a D351 Humidity Display
Module, and a Y350R Power Module

Adjustable Setpoint Range
Reduces inventory by covering the humidity

range required to support most humidity
applications
Wide Adjustable Differential
Enables the user to match the equipment

cycle rate and sequencing for a given
application
Humidification or
Works in a variety of humidification or

dehumidification applications
Interchangeable Humidity
and 35 mm DIN Rail

Mounting
of 10-90% RH
of 2-10% RH
Dehumidification Modes of
Operation
Transmitters

Part No. 24-7664-36, Rev. C
Code No. LIT-930060
1
A pplication
IMPORTANT:
O peration
intended to control equipment
under normal equipment
failure or malfunction of
System 350 controls could lead
to an abnormal operating
condition that could cause
personal injury or damage to the
equipment or other property,
other devices (limit or safety
controls) or systems (alarm or
supervisory) intended to warn of,
malfunction of the System 350
controls must be incorporated
into and maintained as part of the
control system.
The W351 Electronic On/Off Humidity Control can be

used as a standalone device or in conjunction with
System 350 Add-On Modules to control a wide variety
of single or multiple stage humidity applications.
Typical W351 control applications include humidity
control for:
clean rooms
computer rooms
pharmaceutical manufacturing
fruit storage/ripening
indoor swimming pools
greenhouses
The W351 control has an external range scale and

setpoint dial, a front panel LED indicating when the
relay is energized, and a SPDT relay output.
(See Figure 2.) Features include:
adjustable setpoint
adjustable differential
selectable mode of operation

(humidification/dehumidification)
Setpoint Adjustment
Setpoint is the % RH at which the relay de-energizes.
With the operation mode jumpers in either the
humidification or dehumidification position, the relay
de-energizes when the % RH at the transmitter
reaches the setpoint.
Differential is the change in % RH at the transmitter
required to energize and de-energize the relay. The
differential is adjustable between 2-10% RH.
Setpoint Dial
Differential
Potentiometer
J1
Mode of
Operation
Jumper Positions:
Dehumidification
Humidification
A typical System 350 Humidity Control scheme

W351 Humidity Control
up to five S351 Humidity Stage Modules
HE-67S3-0N0BT Wall Mount or HE-67S3-0N00P

System 350 W351 Electronic On/Off Humidity Control Product/Technical Bulletin
Figure 2: W351 Electronic On/Off Humidity

Control; Setpoint and Differential Adjustments;
Humidification and Dehumidification Modes
D imensions
Mode of Operation
When the dehumidification mode is selected, the
differential is above the setpoint. When the humidity
rises to the setpoint plus the differential setting, the
relay energizes and the LED lights. When the humidity
drops to the setpoint, the relay and LED indicator
de-energize. (See Figure 3.)
When the humidification mode is selected, the
differential is below the setpoint. When the humidity
drops to the setpoint minus the differential setting, the
relay energizes and the LED lights. When the humidity
rises to the setpoint, the relay and LED indicator
de-energize. (See Figure 3.)
1/2
(13)
1/8
(4)
2-15/16
(75)
1-9/16
3/8
(11)
(40)
Mounting Slot
for No. 6 Screws
5
(127)
4
(102)
DIN Rail
Mount
3
(76)
1-3/16
(31)
W351
ON
2-3/8
(61)
2-3/8
(61)
(+)
7/8
(22)
Dehumidification
On
Differential
Setpoint
Relative
Humidity
On = Relay & LED Energized

Off = Relay & LED De-energized
1/2 in.
Trade Size
Conduit Hole
Figure 4: W351 Control Dimensions, in./mm
Off
Off
Differential
On
Humidification
(-)
Figure 3: Modes of Operation
M ounting
The W351 Electronic Humidity Control housing is a
provided for surface mounting.
The W351 control is not position sensitive but should
be mounted for convenient wiring and adjustment.
Note:
When mounting the W351 control (or any

System 350 module) to rigid conduit, attach

making electrical connections.
More than one disconnect may
be required to completely
de-energize equipment. Failure
to follow these precautions may
result in electrical shock or
equipment damage.
W iring
Code and to local regulations. For maximum electrical
cover. Use only copper conductors.
Connect the transmitter to the W351 control at the

four-conductor screw terminal block, located at the
upper left of the circuit board. (See Figures 5 and 6.)
Note:
See Figures 5 and 6 for proper wiring and terminal

designations.
Transmitter Wiring
The W351 Humidity Control uses an HE-67S3-0N0BT
or HE-67S3-0N00P Humidity Transmitter, which is
powered by the 12 VDC power supply from the W351
control. See TRUERH Series HE-67xx Humidity
Element with Temperature Sensor Installation
Instructions (Part No. 24-9527-7 Rev. A) for more
information.

transmitter. Connect the shield to the Communications
Port (COM) terminal on the W351 control.
The maximum recommended length of 22 AWG 3-wire
shielded transmitter cable is 250 feet (76 meters).
HE-67S3-0N00P
0 to 10
VDC
Humidity Transmitter
PWR
COM
OUT
W351
Y350R
Humidity Control Power Module
PWR
COM
OUT
0 to 10
VDC
PWR
COM
OUT
HE-67S3-0N00P
Set the output jumpers on the

HE-67S3-0N0BT and HE-67S3-0N00P
humidity transmitters for 0 to 10 VDC output.
S351
Stage Module
S351
Stage Module
D351
Display Module
J1
24V
COM
VDC
SEN
120 VAC
Load
Load
Load
Figure 5: W351 Humidity Control (Dehumidification Mode) Powered by an External Transformer

with the Humidity Transmitter Less Than 50 Feet from the W351 Control
HE-67S3-0N00P
0 to 10
VDC
PWR
COM
OUT
PWR
COM
OUT
0 to 10
VDC
PWR
COM
OUT
HE-67S3-0N00P
Isolate and Tape
Shield
W351
Y350R
Humidity Control Power Module
S351
Stage Module
S351
Stage Module
D351
Display Module
24V
COM
VDC
SEN
120 VAC
Load
Load
Load
Figure 6: System 350 Modules Powered by a Y350R Power Module

with the Humidity Transmitter 50-250 Feet from the W351 Control
A dd-On Modules
The S351 Stage Modules, D351 Digital Humidity
Display Modules, and Y350R Power Modules plug
together and connect to the W351 Electronic Humidity
Control via connectors on the sides of each add-on
module. The recommended order of the modules is
shown in Figures 5 and 6.
See System 350 S350A Temperature, S351A

Humidity, and S352A Pressure Stage Modules
Product/Technical Bulletin (LIT-930080) for more
information.
S351 Humidity Stage Modules
The D351 Display Module receives its power, sensor,

and setpoint information from the W351 control. A
3-digit Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) gives a continuous
display of the sensed humidity. Press the button to
display the setpoint of the adjoining W351 control. See
System 350 Display Modules Product/Technical
Bulletin (LIT-930070) for more information.
The S351 Stage Modules receive their power,

setpoint, and sensor input from the W351 Electronic
Humidity Control.
When using a Y350R module, up to five additional
S351 Stage Modules can be plugged into a W351
Humidity Control. When using an external 24 VAC
(40 VA minimum) transformer, up to nine additional
S351 Stage Modules can be plugged in.
Y350R Power Module
W351 Control
The Y350R Power Module provides a convenient

method of powering System 350 modules from a
120 or 240 VAC power source.
1. Remove the W351 control cover by loosening the

Plug the Y350R power module into the right side of the
W351 Electronic Humidity Control. The Y350R power
supplies power for a W351 control, a D351 Display
Module, and up to five S351 Stage Modules.
See System 350 Power Module Product/Technical
Bulletin (LIT-930090) for more information.
A djustments
!

2. Position the jumpers on jumper block J1 vertically

for humidification, or horizontally for
dehumidification. (See Figure 2.) The jumpers are
factory-set for humidification.
3. Adjust the differential by rotating the differential
potentiometer to the desired setting.
(See Figure 2.) Rotate the potentiometer
clockwise to increase the differential.
4. Replace the cover, tighten the four captive cover
screws, and adjust the setpoint by rotating the
setpoint dial to the desired % RH setpoint.
(See Figure 2.)
Note:
Use the D351 Display Module for the most

accurate setpoint selection.
If using the D351 Display Module, press
and hold the button on the D351 module
while rotating the setpoint dial.
S351 Stage Module

When the W351 control is used in conjunction with one
or more S351 modules, the following adjustments
must be made to each S351 module. Additional
information about adjusting the stage module is
available in the S350 Temperature, S351 Humidity,
and S352 Pressure Stage Modules Product/Technical
Bulletin (LIT-930080).
1. Remove the S351 module cover by loosening the

Verify that the humidification
dehumidification operation mode
jumpers are in the proper
position before powering
System 350 components. If the
operation mode jumpers on the
control or the staging modules
are left in the wrong position, the
device will activate the relay in
response to the opposite signal.
The humidifying or dehumidifying
equipment may remain energized
until the error is corrected.
2. Set the humidification/dehumidification operation

mode jumpers to the desired mode of operation.
Select dehumidification mode for offset and

differential above setpoint.
(See Figures 7 and 8.)
Select humidification mode for offset and

differential below setpoint.
3. Adjust the S351 stage modules offset

potentiometer to the desired offset value. The
offset value is the difference in humidity from the
W351 control modules setpoint that is required for
the S351 stage modules relay to de-energize.
T roubleshooting
4. Adjust the differential potentiometer to the desired
differential value. The differential value is the
difference in humidity from the offset that is
required for the S351 stage modules relay to
energize. (See Figures 7 and 8.)
5. Reinstall the cover onto the enclosure base and
secure the cover to the enclosure base with the
four cover screws.
Setpoint Dial
Differential
Potentiometer
After making necessary adjustments and electrical

connections, put the system into operation and
observe at least three complete operating cycles
before leaving the installation.
Checkout
Mode of
Operation
Jumper Positions:
J1

Dehumidification
Humidification
Figure 7: S351 Stage Module Adjustment and

Potentiometer Locations
(+)
On
On Differential
On = Energized
Off = De-energized
Differential Off
Setpoint
Relative
Humidity
Offset
Off
Off
Offset

that the proper mode is selected on each module (e.g.,
humidification/dehumidification) and then use the
following procedures to determine the cause of the
problem:
Offset
1. Check for proper voltage applied to the

W351 Humidity Control:
Off
Differential
Differential
On
(-)
On
W351
Humidity
Control
S351
Stage
Module
S351
Stage
Module
S351
Stage
Module
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Stage 4
Dehumidify


the 24 V (+) and COM (-) terminals located on
the W351 controls left-side terminal block.
Humidify
Figure 8: Typical Multistage

Humidification/Dehumidification Application

AC volts on the DVM and verify that the
voltage is between 20-30 VAC.
If a Y350R Power Module is used, select

DC volts on the DVM and verify that the
voltage is between 16-38 VDC.
b. Proceed to Step 2 if the DVM reading is within

the indicated voltage range.
c.
If the DVM reading is not within the indicated

voltage range, check wiring, then replace the
Y350R power module or the external
transformer.
10
Table 1: W351 Control Relay

Troubleshooting
Mode of
Operation
LED
Status
Normally
Open Relay
Status
Setpoint
Dial
Setting*
Humidify
On
Closed
(RHT) +
differential
Humidify
Off
Open
(RHT)
Dehumidify
On
Closed
(RHT) differential
Dehumidify
Off
Open
(RHT)
Transmitter
Output
VDC
00

2. Check humidity transmitter for proper output
voltage:
a. Disconnect the transmitter OUT wire from the
W351 control SEN terminal.
b. Take a humidity reading with a
properly-calibrated, accurate humidity
measuring device. This reading is the actual
humidity.
c.
Connect a DC voltmeter between the

transmitter OUT wire and the control COM
terminal. Using Figure 9, convert the voltage
to % RH. This is the humidity reading at the
transmitter (RHT).
Note:
A transmitter output of 0-10 VDC

should correspond to a humidity of
0-100% RH (see Figure 9).
If the RHT is close to the actual humidity,

proceed to Step 2d.
If the RHT deviates substantially from the

actual humidity, replace the transmitter.
50
RHT Humidity (% RH)
Figure 9: Transmitter Voltage vs. Humidity

3. Check the W351 Electronic Humidity Control for
proper operation:
Note:
Perform Steps 1 and 2 first.
a. Adjust the setpoint dial to at least 20% RH

below the voltage conversion to % RH (RHT)
as determined in Step 2.
b. Increase the setpoint by slowly adjusting the
dial until the W351 controls relay and LED
turn On and Off as shown in Table 1.
c.
If the relay performs as expected, continue to

Step 4.
d. If the relay does not perform as indicated in

Table 1, replace the W351 control.
d. Reconnect the transmitter OUT wire to the

W351 control SEN terminal.
100
4. Check the S351 Stage Modules for proper

Note:
Perform Steps 1, 2, and 3 first.
IMPORTANT:
There is a possibility that a defect

in one stage module could cause
defective symptoms in all
modules. Plug each S351
module into the W351 control
individually and check its
performance as outlined in
Step 4.
5. Check the D351 Display Module for proper

Note:
Perform Steps 1 through 4 first.
a. Compare the voltage conversion to % RH at

the transmitter (RHT) (as determined in Step 2)
with the display readout.
b. If the D351 module does not read the correct
transmitter RH (RHT), replace the
D351 module.
c.
Press the button on the D351 module to

display the setpoint.
a. Turn the setpoint dial on the W351 control to

10% RH (the extreme counterclockwise
position).
d. If pressing the button results in an

out-of-range reading (greater than 100% RH),
replace the D351 module.
b. Increase the setpoint by slowly adjusting the

dial until the S351 modules relay and LED
turn On and Off as shown in Table 2.
e. If pressing the button results in a reading other

than the expected setpoint value, check the
setpoint dial setting on the W351 control and
correct if necessary. If the display continues to
show an incorrect value, replace the display
module.
c.
If the relay does not perform as indicated in

Table 2, adjust the S351 modules differential
and offset potentiometers to their minimum
settings and try again.
d. If the relay still does not turn On and Off,

replace the defective S351 Stage Module(s).
Table 2: S351 Module Relay

Troubleshooting
Mode of
Operation
LED
Status
Normally
Open
Relay
Status
Setpoint Dial
Setting*
Humidify
On
Closed
(RHT) + offset +
differential
Humidify
Off
Open
(RHT) + offset
Dehumidify
On
Closed
(RHT) - offset differential
Dehumidify
Off
Open
(RHT) - offset
Note:
If the W351 control and add-on modules

all appear to be operating properly, but the
field device still does not turn On and Off
as expected, check the wiring from the
W351 control or S351 module to the field
device.

Do not calibrate or make field repairs.
HE-67S3-0N0BT and HE-67S3-0N00P humidity
transmitters and replacement controls are available
through local Johnson Controls representatives or
wholesale distributors.
Item
Product Code
Number
Description
Electronic Humidity Control
W351AB-2C
Setpoint Range: 10-90% RH

Differential:
2-10% RH
(sensor not included)
W351AA-1C

Differential:
2-10% RH
(includes Wall Mount Sensor HE-67S3-0N0BT)
W351AA-2C

Differential:
2-10% RH
(includes Duct Mount Sensor HE-67S3-0N00P)
HE-67S3-0N0BT
All-polymer, Wall Mount Humidity Transmitter
HE-67S3-0N00P
All-polymer, Duct Mount Humidity Transmitter
Display Module
D351AA-1C
Digital Humidity Display Module
Stage Module
S351AA-1C
Humidity Stage Module with % RH Scale
Power Module
Y350R-1C
Rectified, Class 2, 24 VAC from 120/240 VAC Source
Conduit Adapter
ADP11A-600R
1/2-in. Snap-fit Connector (box of 10)
DIN Rail Sections
BKT287-1R
35 x 7.5 mm, 0.305 m (12 in.) long
BKT287-2R
35 x 7.5 mm, 0.914 m (36 in.) long
DIN Rail End Clamps
PLT344-1R
Cable for Remote Mounting

WHA29A-600R
(0.9 m) 3 ft*
WHA29A-603R
(7.6 m) 25 ft
WHA29A-604R
(15.2 m) 50 ft
* WHA29A-600R can also be used to daisy chain S351 Stage Modules together.
10
S pecifications
Product
W351 Electronic On/Off Humidity Control
Humidity Setpoint Range
10-90% RH
Differential Range
2-10% RH
Input Signal
0-10 VDC Corresponding to 0-100% RH
VDC Power Supply
12 VDC Provided to Power the Humidity Transmitter
Supply Voltage*
20-30 VAC Class 2; 50/60 Hz (or a Y350R Power Module: See Add-On Modules section)
Power Consumption
1.8 VA maximum
Relay Electrical Ratings
Horsepower:
1/2 (120/240 VAC)
Full Load Amperes:
9.8 (120 VAC)
4.9 (208/240 VAC)
Locked Rotor Amperes: 58.8 (120 VAC) 29.4 (208/240 VAC)
Non-inductive Amperes: 10 at 24/240 VAC
Pilot Duty:
125 VA at 24/240 VAC
Ambient Temperature
Operating:
Shipping:
Ambient Humidity
0-95% RH Non-Condensing; Maximum Dewpoint 85F (29C)
Material
Case, Cover:
Agency Listing
UL Listed, File E27734, CCN XAPX

cUL Listed, File E27734, CCN XAPX7
Transmitter
HE-67S3-0N0BT: All-Polymer, Wall-Mount Humidity Transmitter; 0 to 10 VDC,

0 to 100% RH
HE-67S3-0N00P: All-Polymer, Duct-Mount Humidity Transmitter; 0 to 10 VDC,
0 to 100% RH
Add-On Modules
-30-150F (-34-66C)
-40-185F (-40-85C)
NEMA 1 High-impact Thermoplastic
S351
Supply Voltage:
DIFF and OFFSET:
Provided by the W351 control

2-10% RH Differential; 2-30% RH Offset
Y350R
Supply Voltage:
Provided by the W351 control
D351
Display Range:
10-90% RH
* Only one input voltage source may be used.

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable inductry standards. For application at conditions beyond these
specifications, consult Johnson Controls/PENN Application Engineering at 1-800-275-5676. Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for
Controls Group
P.O. Box 423
Milwaukee, WI 53201
Printed in U.S.A.
11
CHILLER SAZ
RESUMO DOS PADRES DE
FORNECIMENTO PARA PROTEO
ANTI CORROSO
TEMOS 3 TIPOS DE FORNECIMENTO.

BASEADO NESTA INFORMAO, DEVE
ELABORAR QUANDO VAI RECEBER O PEDIDO.
O QUE ENCONTRADO NO CAMPO (5 ANOS):

SITUAO AMBIENTE
NO AGRESSIVO :
MANUTENO DEFICIENTE :
SITUAO
DAS ALETAS
MANUTENO DEFICIENTE :
RESDUOS APS
LIMPEZA CORRETA (*)
SITUAO DA
ESTRUTURA
(*)
OS RESDUOS SO SAL E ALUMNIO DECOMPOSTO.
OS CONDENSADORES J ESTAVAM PERDIDOS COM ~3 ANOS DE USO.
AS ESTRUTURAS AINDA PODEM SER RECUPERADAS OU TROCADAS.
INFORMAES ADICIONAIS :
LOCAL RECEBE VENTO DIRETO DO MAR
LOCAL NO RECEBE VENTO DIRETO DO MAR
VENTO MARINHO
VENTO MARINHO
MAR
MAR
TIPO
500m
500 ~ 1000m
> 1000m
TIPO
500m
500 ~ 1000m
> 1000m
STANDARD
STANDARD
MEDIA
MEDIA
PESADA
PESADA
Local que recebe vento DIRETO do mar:
Local que NO recebe vento DIRETO do mar:
Locais abertos onde o Chiller ficar

exposto.
Seguir as orientaes do Manual para
proteo no entorno do Chiller.
Locais protegidos por outras edificaes

onde o Chiller no ficar exposto.
Seguir as orientaes do Manual para
proteo no entorno do Chiller.
1 CHILLER PADRO > PROTEO LEVE (STD)

MOTOR CONVENCIONAL
CAMADA TINTA
MNIMA 50
(100% DOS
PAINIS PINTADOS)
RESFRIADOR E
TB SUO S/
PROTEO
MECNICA
GRADES VENT. S/ PINTURA

CONDENSADOR
GOLD COATED
GRADES OPCIONAIS S/
PINTURA
CPR S/ GABINETE
COMPONENTES DO
Q.E. SO STD
PARAF. ZINC. E
BICROMATIZADOS (TODOS)
TUBOS DE COBRE S/ PROTEO
(SOLDA PRATA EM 100% DOS TBs)
BASE CHAPA PRETA

TRATADA E PINTADA
OUTRAS PEAS INT. E

EXT. DE CHAPA GROSSA
TRATADAS E PINTADAS
2 CHILLER PROTEO MDIA

MOTOR ESP. PONTA EIXO INOX
CAMADA TINTA
MNIMA 70
(100% DOS
PAINIS PINTADOS)
RESFRIADOR E
TB SUCO C/
PROTEO
MECNICA EM
AL C/ VERNIZ
GRADES VENT. C/ PINTURA

CONDENSADOR GOLD COATED+
VERNIZ ESP. 10
CAMADA
GRADES OPCIONAIS C/
PINTURA
CPR C/ GABINETE
COMPONENTES DO
Q.E. SO STD
PARAF. EXT. AO INOX 304

PARAF. AUTO
ATARRACHANTES ZINC. E
BICROMATIZADOS
TUBOS DE COBRE C/ VERNIZ ESP.
10
CAMADA (SOLDA PRATA EM 100%
DOS TBs)
BASE CHAPA PRETA

GALVANIZADA TRATADA
E PINTADA C/ CAMADA
MNIMA 100
OUTRAS PEAS INT. E

GALVANIZADAS TRATADAS
E PINTADAS
3 CHILLER PROTEO PESADA

MOTOR ESP. PONTA EIXO INOX
CAMADA TINTA
MNIMA 100
(100% DOS
PAINIS PINTADOS)
RESFRIADOR E
TB SUCO C/
PROTEO
MECNICA EM
AL C/ VERNIZ
GRADES VENT. C/ PINTURA

CONDENSADOR ALETAS DE
COBRE
GRADES OPCIONAIS C/
PINTURA
CPR C/ GABINETE
COMPONENTES DO
Q.E. SO STD
PARAF. EXT. AO INOX 304

PARAF. AUTO
ATARRACHANTES ZINC. E
BICROMATIZADOS
TUBOS DE COBRE C/ VERNIZ ESP.
10
CAMADA (SOLDA PRATA EM 100%
DOS TBs)
BASE CHAPA PRETA

GALVANIZADA TRATADA
E PINTADA C/ CAMADA
MNIMA 100
OUTRAS PEAS INT. E

GALVANIZADAS TRATADAS
E PINTADAS
INFORMAES ADICIONAIS:
CUSTO:
ESTO INDICADOS NA CPPV. LEMBRANDO QUE PARA COBRE x COBRE
SOMENTE APS CONSULTA DE DISPONIBILIDADE.
INSTALAO:
O CHILLER NO PODE FICAR DIRETAMENTE EXPOSTO VENTOS,
MANTER O CHILLER PROTEGIDO, COBERTO, DURANTE O PROCESSO DE
INSTALAO,
MANUTENO:
SEGUIR RIGOROSAMENTE OS PLANOS DE MANUTENO.
(REFERENTE PARA PROTEO LEVE (STD), MDIA E PESADA)
GARANTIA:
CONTINUAM OS MESMOS TERMOS DE GARANTIA ESTABELECIDOS NO
CERTIFICADO PADRO SALVO ACORDO PREVIAMENTE DEFINIDO E
REGISTRADO COM EMISSO DE CERTIFICADO ESPECIAL.
INFORMAO INTERNA IMPORTANTE:

COMO IDENTIFICAR AS NECESSIDADES DE CADA INSTALAO?
DURANTE A NEGOCIAO, O CML DEVE INVESTIGAR A NECESSIDADE DE
PROTEO E INFORMAR A IMPORTNCIA AO CLIENTE.
COMO TRANSFERIR A INFORMAO PARA CML / INSTALADORES?
VAMOS INCLUIR A INFORMAO SOBRE DISTNCIA IDEAL PARA INSTALAO
NO CT E .
COMO PREVENIR A HAPB QUANTO A AES FUTURAS DO CLIENTE?
VAMOS ELABORAR CHECK LIST DE START UP IDENTIFICANDO:
A SITUAO GERAL DO CHILLER
A SITUAO GERAL DA INSTALAO.
O OBJETIVO ESTABELECER NA VENDA OU NO MOMENTO DO START UP UMA
RELAO ENTRE:
ESPECIFICAO DO CLIENTE
VENDA (COM DESVIOS REGISTRADOS)
FORNECIMENTO (COMO FOI PRODUZIDO E ENTREGUE)
NECESSIDADE DO CLIENTE. (VERIFICADO EM CAMPO)
IDENTIFICAO
LOCAL DA INSTALAO: LOJA LEADER NEW YORK
EQUIPAMENTO: 30RBA SCROLL CHILLER
MODELO: 30RBA150226 220 VOLTS
N DE SRIE: 4606B39791
ESTADO DO CONDENSADOR
1)
2)
3)
CONSIDERAES: Em todos os mdulos identifica-se o elevado estado de degradao

do condensador, devido a ao da salinidade provada pela incidncia direta do vento
marinho.
Cabe ressaltar que o equipamento no resistir a uma manuteno, considerando que
se encontra na condio de destruio ao simples toque (conforme foto 01).
ESTADO DO QUADRO ELTRICO DA CAG

1)
2)
CONSIDERAES: Observa-se no quadro que o mesmo j foi objeto de diversas

intervenes e quando da contratao dos servios de instalao dever ser revisado
contemplando teste de comando e de operao das seguranas (fluxostato).
:: SSC Sistema de Seleo de Chillers - HITACHI ::
Page 1 of 1
Chiller Condensao a Ar - Srie RCU_SAZ - Compressor Parafuso - R407C

Cliente:
Local:
Obra:
Empresa projetista:
Empresa instaladora:
Contato:
LOJAS LEADER
RJ - BARRA DA TIJUCA - SHOPP. N. YORK
CAG
SUBSTITUIO
A DEFINIR
Otvio C. da S. Alves
Data:
09/09/2011
DADOS DE ENTRADA (PROJETO)

Capacidade efetiva:
Temperatura Sada do Fludo a ser Resfriado:
T do Fludo a ser Resfriado:
Temperatura Entrada de Ar no Condensador:
Tipo de Ventilador:
DADOS DE SADA (SELEO)

Caractersticas Gerais
Modelo:
Vazo de gua a Ser Aquecida:

Temperatura Entrada da gua a ser Aquecida:
Tenso:
Frequncia:
Refrigerante:
70.0 TR
6.7 C
5.5K
35.0 C
Padro
Dimenses
RCU070SAZ4A
69.1 TR
208.897 kcal/h
242.9 kW
Capacidade de Resfriamento:
Profundidade:
Largura:
Altura:
Nvel de Rudo
1,5 m de Altura e 1,0m de Distncia:
1,5 m de Altura e 10,0m de Distncia:
Compressor
Tipo:
Qtd. / Modelo:
Controle:
Rotao / N Plos:
Peso
2348 mm Peso em Lquido:
1891 mm Peso em Operao:
2254 mm N de Ciclos:
Controle de Capacidade
Faixa Padro:
Possvel Extenso
75 dB(A)
64 dB(A)
Circuito Frigorfico
Tipo Refrigerante:
Carga de Refrigerante:
Tipo Vlvula Expanso:
Ciclos c/ Economizer:
R407C
58 kg
TERMOSTTICA
S
Tubular de cobre com aletas de

alumnio
HITACHI
4 X C-60SAZ
Ventilador
Tipo:
Quantidade:
Motor / Proteo:
Rotao / N de Polos:
Axial
4
TFVE / IPW55
1130
Fabricante:
Qtd. / Modelo:
Vazo de Ar:
1875 kg
1953 kg
1
13.0% a 100.0%
0.0% a 0.0%
Parafuso Semi-Hermtico
1 X 60ASC-Z (E)
LINEAR - FAIXA 15 A 100%
3.470 RPM / 2 polos
Condensador
Tipo:
220 V
60 Hz
R407C
1.175.0 m3/min
Resfriador
Tipo:
Fabricante:
Qtd. / Modelo:
SHELL & TUBE

HITACHI
1 X R-060SAZ
Temperatura de Entrada:
Temperatura de Sada:
Vazo de gua:
Isolamento Trmico:
Fator de Incrustao:
Poliuretano
0.000016 m.C/W
Perda de Carga:
Conexes:
Quadro Eltrico
Grau de Proteo:
12.2 C
6.7 C
38.0 m3/h ou 10.6 l/s

6.19 mca ou 60.68 kPa
CONTRA FLANGE - Interno = 80.9mm
ANSI B 16.5 - # 150 PSI - 3"
Qtd. de Pontos de Alimentao Circuito de Fora e Comando:
IP45
Dados Eltricos
Corrente de Operao >
Consumo >
CPR 1
221.7 A
78.4 kW
Corrente Nominal 100% > 245.7 A
CPR 2
-
Cap
TR
100
69.1
62.2
90
55.3
80
48.4
70
41.4
60
34.5
50
27.6
40
20.7
30
Ponto Operacional:
IPLV
0.89 kW/TR
3.85 kW/kW
13.13 Btu/h.W
Cons.
kW
84.8
68.1
56.6
47.8
40.7
34.8
30.1
26.4
CPR 4
-
Corrente de Partida > 474.0 A
Part Load
%
CPR 3
-
CPR 5
-
CPR 6
-
VENT.
24.0 A
6.4 kW
Mxima Corrente Op. > 330.0 A
TOTAL
245.7 A
84.8 kW
COS > 90.6 %
Notas:
h
COP
kW/TR
kW/kW
1.23
2.9
1.10
3.2
1.02
3.4
0.99
3.6
0.98
3.6
1.01
3.5
1.09
3.2
1.28
2.8
100.0 %
NPLV
0.89 kW/TR
3.85 kW/kW
13.13 Btu/h.W
1 - IPLV DE ACORDO COM A ARI STANDARD 550 / 590-03.

2 - AS PROTEES ELTRICAS DEVEM SER DIMENSIONADAS PELA
MXIMA CORRENTE DE OPERAO.
3 - NVEL DE RUDO INDICADO NA FACE FRONTAL DO EQUIPAMENTO.
4 - TENSO DE COMANDO 220V / 60Hz.
5 - SEMPRE UTILIZAR O MANUAL DE INSTALAO PARA CORRETA
INSTALAO DO CHILLER E SUAS PROTEES.
6 - OS CONTRA FLANGES DAS CONEXES DO RESFRIADOR ESTO
INCLUSOS.
7 - A PRESSO DE TRABALHO DO LADO DA GUA NO RESFRIADOR NO
DEVER ULTRAPASSAR 10.5kgf/cm.
8 - OS MODELOS APARTIR DO RCU300SAZ. TERO 2 PONTOS DE
ALIMENTAO ELTRICA.
9 - OS MODELOS APARTIR DO RCU300SAZ. SERO FORNECIDOS EM 2
(DOIS) MDULOS. ESTES DEVERO SER INSTALADOS CONFORME
INSTRUO CONTDA NO CATLOGO TCNICO DO EQUIPAMENTO.
10 - A HITACHI NO FORNECE OS BARRILETES DE INTERLIGAO
HIDRULICA DOS RESFRIADORES.
http://10.0.2.2:8080/ssc/page.php?page=ac/selecao&style=style_branco.css&cliente=...
09/09/2011
Johnson Controls
BUILDING EFFICIENCY
TEC Automao para Split System

Opes de Estgios
- 1 Estgio (Quente/Frio);
- Multi estgios (2 Quentes/2 Frios);
- Multi estgios com bomba de calor (3 Quentes/2 Frios);
- Lgica embarcada para o controle de compressores;
- Ajuste de banda morta;
- Opo de sensor remoto e ar externo;
- Ajuste de tempo de liga/desliga (0-5min);
- Trs nveis de bloqueio de teclado;
- Ventilao inteligente;
- Proteo anti congelamento;
- 2 contatos auxiliares (pressostatos diferenciais/rels de
corrente, etc.);
- Ajuste de ciclos de operao por hora (3 a 8 aquecimento
& 3 a 4 refrigerao).

- Memria no voltil em caso de falta de alimentao;
- Acesso remoto via rede de automao disponvel nos
protocolos: N2, LonWorks ou BACnet MS/TP (de
acordo com o modelo);
Nomenclatura
TEC2x0y-3
Definio de protocolo:
x
1 = N2 Open
2 = LonWorks
3 = BacNet (MS/TP)
Capacidades:
y
1 = 1 Estgio
2 = 2 Estgios (3Q/2F)
3 = Multi Estgios (2Q/2F)

FLUXOGRAMA DE PROCESSO - SPLIT SYSTEM
AlmFan
StComp01
StFan
StComp02
CmFan
ModoOp
SpTemp
TeAmb
INSUFLAMENTO
RETORNO
OBS.:
NA - Normalmente Aberto
Tabela 1
Ttul o do Desenho
Legenda e Componentes Fornecidos:

Abre viao
StFan
CmFan
StComp01
StComp02
TeAmb
SpTemp
Modo
AlmFan
Termostato
Funo do Com pone nte
Estado Funcionamento
Comando doVentilador
Estado Compressor 01
Estado Compressor 02
Temperatura Ambiente
Setpoint de Temperatura
Modo de Operao
Resumo de Alarmes
-x-
Cdigo do Com ponente
-x -x -x -x -x -x -x -x TEC2103-3
Des crio do Componente
Informao fornecida pelo

Termostato Programvel
Termostato
Termostato
Termostato
Termostato
Termostato
Termostato
Termostato
Termostato
SPLIT SYSTEM / SELF CONTAINED

FLUXOGRAMA DE PROCESSO
YEDX / YEBX
Automao Predial
Ttul o do Proj eto
PROJETO PADRO
JOHNSONCONTROLS
DESENHODE REFERNCIA
Eng. Vendas
Gerente De Projeto
EMISSO INICIAL
NO.
LOCAL DA REVISO
Eng. DeApli c a o
ECN
DESENHO
POR
ED
DadosDa Fil ial
DATA
20/06/08
20/06/ 08
ED
DATA
POR
APROVADO
POR
DATA
NMERODOCONTRAT O
SO PAULO
R. Joo Ti bi ri , 900
V.Anastcio-CEP04551-010
NMERODODESENHO
So Paul o-SP
Fone: (11)3475-6700
SPLITO
Interface Grfica Acessada Via Web Rede composta por FX40 gerenciando TECs

Pontos Disponveis para Automao
S Monitorar
Controlar / Monitorar
Temperatura Ambiente
Setpoint Mnimo de Aquecimento
Sensor de Temperatura Remoto
Setpoint Mximo de Refrigerao
Setpoint de Aquecimento
1Estgio de Aquecimento
Setpoint de Refrigerao
2Estgio de Aquecimento
Setpoint de Refrigerao modo Desocupado
1Estgio de Refrigerao
Setpoint de Aquecimento modo Desocupado
2Estgio de Refrigerao
Setpoint Mximo de Aquecimento
Estado do Ventilador
Setpoint Mnimo de Refrigerao
Over ride de Ocupao
Comando do Ventilador
Alarme de Temperatura
Modo de Operao
Entrada Binria 1
Modo de Ocupao
Entrada Binria 2
Unidades de Temperatura
Obs.: Pontos dependentes do modelo do Termostato
FXZAN Controle de Zona
Montagem Integrada
Controlador de campo FX05;
Atuador sem retorno por mola M9104;
Conectores de terminais eltricos
Pacote comercial do Facility Explorer zoneamento;
Este pacote consiste de uma gerenciadora FX16,
controladores de zona FXZAN (at 15) e opcionalmente
um MUI (interface).
Controlador escravo;
Dampers de controle de zona e aquecimento auxiliar.
Pacote de controle de zona comercial

Controlador Mestre FX16
Controles do RTU
Controle de Presso Esttica
Gerenciamento de Zona
Controladores de zona FXZAN

Dampers de Controle de zona
Controle de aquecimento auxiliar
FX Builder Express: Plug-In de Configurao
FORM 145.05-EG1 (0804)
B U I L D I N G AU TO M AT I O N S YS T E M I N T E R FA C E
B A C n e t
MS /TP c o n n e c tio n is a v a ila b le .
COMMON ALARM OUTPUT

Th is b in a ry o u tp u t s ig n a l is u s e d to in d ic a te a n a la rm s ig n a l. W h e n th e u n it c o n tro lle r h a s p ro c e s s e d a n a la rm c o n d itio n , th e n o rm a lly c lo s e d d ry c o n ta c ts s h a ll o p e n . W h e n th e a la rm h a s
b e e n c le a re d , th e c o n ta c ts s h a ll re tu rn to th e n o rm a l c lo s e d p o s itio n .
O U T D O O R A I R DA M P E R O U T P U T
Th is a n a lo g (0 to 10 v o lts D C ) o u tp u t s ig n a l is u s e d to c o n tro l th e o u td o o r a ir d a m p e r. 0 v o lts
c o rre s p o n d s w ith a c lo s e d d a m p e r a n d 10 v o lts w ith a fu lly o p e n d a m p e r.
FA N O N
Th is b in a ry o u tp u t s ig n a l is u s e d to in d ic a te th a t th e s u p p ly fa n is a b o u t to b e e n e rg iz e d . Th is
p ro v id e s a tim e d e la y b e fo re th e fa n is s ta r te d . Th e n o rm a lly o p e n c o n ta c ts s h a ll c lo s e w h e n th e
u n it e n te rs th e s ta r t-u p m o d e . Th e fa n s h a ll b e e n e rg iz e d a fte r th e s ta r t-u p m o d e tim e r h a s
e x p ire d . Th u s , a n y d e v ic e c o n n e c te d to th is o u tp u t s h a ll h a v e th e s ta r t-u p m o d e tim e r to d o w h a t
is h a s to d o b e fo re th e fa n is e n e rg iz e d . Th is o u tp u t is e n e rg iz e d u n til th e fa n is d e -e n e rg iz e d .
V o lta g e fo r th e d e v ic e (s ) c o n n e c te d to th e o u tp u t n e e d s to b e p ro v id e d fro m a n o th e r s o u rc e .
VAV B OX / H E AT
Th is b in a ry o u tp u t s ig n a l is u s e d to p u t th e V AV b o x in a h e a tin g o r c o o lin g m o d e . W h e n th e n o rm a lly o p e n c o n ta c ts a re c lo s e d , th is re p re s e n ts a h e a tin g m o d e , a n d th e V AV b o x s h o u ld b e a t
th e m a x im u m p o s itio n . W h e n th e n o rm a lly o p e n c o n ta c ts a re o p e n , th is re p re s e n ts a c o o lin g
m o d e , a n d th e V AV b o x s h o u ld b e in th e c o o lin g m o d e a n d m a in ta in in g th e s p a c e /z o n e te m p e ra tu re . V o lta g e fo r th e d e v ic e (s ) c o n n e c te d to th e o u tp u t n e e d s to b e p ro v id e d fro m a n o th e r
s o u rc e .
E X T E R N A L S TO P ( FA N S TO P )
Th is b in a ry in p u t s ig n a l is u s e d to s h u t th e u n it d o w n in a n e m e rg e n c y. W h e n th e s ig n a l is o p e n ,
th e u n it is in th e s h u t d o w n e m e rg e n c y m o d e . Th u s , th e u n it is in th e u n o c c u p ie d m o d e . W h e n
th e s ig n a l is c lo s e d , th e u n it s h a ll b e o p e ra tin g in th e ty p ic a l. Afte r th e u n it h a s b e e n in th e e m e rg e n c y m o d e , w h e n th e s ig n a l is c lo s e d , th e u n it s h a ll b e c o n tro lle d in th e n o rm a l m a n n e r. Re s e t
is n o t n e e d e d u n le s s a n a la rm c o n d itio n h a s o c c u rre d .
C O O L / H E AT E N A B L E
Th e k e y p a d s h a ll b e u s e d to e n a b le o r d is a b le c o o lin g a n d h e a tin g a n d a llo w th e u n it to b e in th e
fa n o n m o d e . In th e fa n o n m o d e fo r V AV u n its , th e u n it s h a ll c o n tro l d u c t s ta tic p re s s u re . W h e n
th e in p u t is c lo s e d , c o o lin g a n d h e a tin g s h a ll b e e n a b le d . W h e n th e in p u t is o p e n , c o o lin g a n d
h e a tin g s h a ll b e d is a b le d .
46
YORK INTERNATIONAL

js_2wayclosed
1900093
9thcc:na
Valves
Rev:
101500
logo:
J Series
left ft:
Two-Way Spring Closed (Normally Closed)

Electric Zone Valves, On/Off Control
right ft:
standard
Sect# = 0
seQ# = 1
j93high.tif
j93stand.tif
400 psig static pressure rating

buna-N (standard temperature) or nitrile
disk (high temperature) provides tight
closeoff
1/2, 3/4, and 1 line sizes
sweat, NPT, or inverted flare end
connections
actuator can be factory or field installed
actuator snaps in place for easy removal
and assembly during installation
Standard Closeoff
High Closeoff
forged brass body and hard chrome-plated

brass stem
For complete details, refer to Product Bulletin

LIT-977282.
provides economical control of hot or

chilled water for fan coil, baseboard
radiator, and VAV reheat applications
On/Off control from a two-wire thermostat
300 psig system operating pressure
To Order
chart.
Selection Chart
Actuator Model Number
G Style Actuators have Standard Pressure Closeoff
H Style Actuators have High Pressure Closeoff
Valve Model Number
Standard Temperature Rating:

200F (93C) Fluid,
104F (40C) Ambient
High Temperature Rating:

250F (121C) Fluid, 15 psig Steam,
169F (76C) Ambient
24 VAC, 60 Hz
120 VAC, 60 Hz
24 VAC, 60 Hz
120 VAC, 60 Hz
JG13A020
JH13A020
JG13B020
JH13B020
JG14A020
JH14A020
JG14B020
JH14B020
JT2211G13B020
JS2211G14A020
JS2211G14B020
JT2212G13B020
JS2212G14A020
JS2212G14B020
JT2213G13A020
JT2213G13B020
JS2213G14A020
JS2213G14B020
40
JT2312G13A020
JT2312G13B020
JS2312G14A020
JS2312G14B020
3.5
25
JT2313G13A020
JT2313G13B020
JS2313G14A020
JS2313G14B020
8.0
17
JT2417G13A020
JT2417G13B020
JS2417G14A020
JS2417G14B020
JS2517
1-1/4
8.0
17
JT2517G13A020
JT2517G13B020
JS2517G14A020
JS2517G14B020
JT2221
JS2221
1/2
1.0
60
JT2221G13A020
JT2221G13B020
JS2221G14A020
JS2221G14B020
JT2222
JS2222
1/2
2.5
40
JT2222G13A020
JT2222G13B020
JS2222G14A020
JS2222G14B020
JT2223
JS2223
1/2
3.5
25
JT2223G13A020
JT2223G13B020
JS2223G14A020
JS2223G14B020
JT2322
JS2322
3/4
2.5
40
JT2322G13A020
JT2322G13B020
JS2322G14A020
JS2322G14B020
JT2323
JS2323
3/4
3.5
25
JT2323G13A020
JT2323G13B020
JS2323G14A020
JS2323G14B020
JT2427
JS2427
8.0
17
JT2427G13A020
JT2427G13B020
JS2427G14A020
JS2427G14B020
JT2343
JS2343
3/4
3.5
25
JT2211
JS2211
1/2
1.0
75
JT2211H13A020
JT2212
JS2212
1/2
2.5
50
JT2212H13A020
JT2213
JS2213
1/2
3.5
30
JT2312
JS2312
3/4
2.5
JT2313
JS2313
3/4
JT2417
JS2417
JT2517
JS2517
Std.
Temp
High
Temp
Size
Cv
Closeoff
JT2211
JS2211
1/2
1.0
60
JT2211G13A020
JT2212
JS2212
1/2
2.5
40
JT2212G13A020
JT2213
JS2213
1/2
3.5
25
JT2312
JS2312
3/4
2.5
JT2313
JS2313
3/4
JT2417
JS2417
JT2517
Sweat Connections Standard Pressure Closeoff
NPT Connections Standard Pressure Closeoff
Inverted Flare Connections Standard Pressure Closeoff

JT2343G13A020
JT2343G13B020
JS2343G14A020
JS2343G14B020
JT2211H13B020
JS2211H14A020
JS2211H14B020
JT2212H13B020
JS2212H14A020
JS2212H14B020
JT2213H13A020
JT2213H13B020
JS2213H14A020
JS2213H14B020
50
JT2312H13A020
JT2312H13B020
JS2312H14A020
JS2312H14B020
3.5
30
JT2313H13A020
JT2313H13B020
JS2313H14A020
JS2313H14B020
8.0
20
JT2417H13A020
JT2417H13B020
JS2417H14A020
JS2417H14B020
1-1/4
8.0
20
JT2517H13A020
JT2517H13B020
JS2517H14A020
JS2517H14B020
Sweat Connections High Pressure Closeoff
1/2

J Series Two-Way Spring Closed (Normally Closed) Electric Zone Valves, On/Off
Selection Chart (Continued)
Valve Model Number

200F (93C) Fluid,
104F (40C) Ambient

169F (76C) Ambient
24 VAC, 60 Hz
120 VAC, 60 Hz
24 VAC, 60 Hz
120 VAC, 60 Hz
JG13A020
JH13A020
JG13B020
JH13B020
JG14A020
JH14A020
JG14B020
JH14B020
JT2221H13B020
JS2221H14A020
JS2221H14B020
JT2222H13B020
JS2222H14A020
JS2222H14B020
JT2223H13A020
JT2223H13B020
JS2223H14A020
JS2223H14B020
50
JT2322H13A020
JT2322H13B020
JS2322H14A020
JS2322H14B020
3.5
30
JT2323H13A020
JT2323H13B020
JS2323H14A020
JS2323H14B020
8.0
20
JT2427H13A020
JT2427H13B020
JS2427H14A020
JS2427H14B020
3/4
3.5
30
Std.
Temp
High
Temp
Size
Cv
Closeoff
JT2221
JS2221
1/2
1.0
75
JT2221H13A020
JT2222
JS2222
1/2
2.5
50
JT2222H13A020
JT2223
JS2223
1/2
3.5
30
JT2322
JS2322
3/4
2.5
JT2323
JS2323
3/4
JT2427
JS2427
JT2343
JS2343
NPT Connections High Pressure Closeoff
Inverted Flare Connections High Pressure Closeoff

JT2343H13A020
JT2343H13B020
Description
JS2343H14B020
Repair Parts
Inverted Flare Fittings (Order Separately)

Code
Number
JS2343H14A020
Available repair parts for J Series Electric

Zone Valves include replacement valve
bodies, replacement actuators, and the
end connections included in the Inverted
Flare Fittings chart. No other field repairs
should be attempted.
Length, in. (mm)
J647-601
For 1/2 in. (5/8 in. O.D.) Copper Tubing
15/16 (24)
J647-602
1-11/16 (43)
J647-603
3 (76)
J647-604
1-27/32 (47)
J647-605
1-15/16 (49)
J647-606
For 1 in. (1-1/8 in. O.D.) Copper Tubing
2-3/8 (60)
J647-607
Inverted Flare Nut
-----
jvalve5.tif
J647-601
J647-602
J647-603 J647-604
J647-605
J647-606 J647-607
Inverted Flare Fittings
2/2

js_3way
1900095
9thcc:na
Valves
Rev:
101500
logo:
J Series
left ft:
Three-Way Spring Return Electric Zone Valves, On/Off

Control
j95high.tif
j95stand.tif
can be piped for mixing or diverting

configuration
buna-N (standard temperature) or nitrile
disk (high temperature) provides tight
closeoff
1/2, 3/4, and 1 line sizes
sweat, NPT, or inverted flare end
connections
actuator can be factory or field installed
Standard Closeoff
actuator snaps in place for easy removal

High Closeoff
forged brass body and hard chrome-plated

brass stem
On/Off control from a two-wire thermostat
provides economical control of hot or

chilled water for fan coil, baseboard
For complete details, refer to Product Bulletin

LIT-977282.
300 psig system operating pressure
To Order

chart.
Selection Chart
Valve Model Number

200F (93C) Fluid,
104F (40C) Ambient

169F (76C) Ambient
24 VAC, 60 Hz
120 VAC, 60 Hz
24 VAC, 60 Hz
120 VAC, 60 Hz
JG23A020
JH23A020
JG23B020
JH23B020
JG24A020
JH24A020
JG24B020
JH24B020
JT3213G13B020
JS3213G14A020
JS3213G14B020
JT3315G13B020
JS3315G14A020
JS3315G14B020
JT3417G13A020
JT3417G13B020
JS3417G14A020
JS3417G14B020
JT3517G13A020
JT3517G13B020
JS3517G14A020
JS3517G14B020
Std.
Temp
High
Temp
Size
Cv
Closeoff
JT3213
JS3213
1/2
4.0
25
JT3213G13A020
JT3315
JS3315
3/4
5.0
20
JT3315G13A020
JT3417
JS3417
8.0
17
JT3517
JS3517
1-1/4
8.0
17
Sweat Connections Standard Pressure Closeoff
NPT Connections Standard Pressure Closeoff

JT3223
JS3223
1/2
4.0
25
JT3223G13A020
JT3223G13B020
JS3223G14A020
JS3223G14B020
JT3325
JS3325
3/4
5.0
20
JT3325G13A020
JT3325G13B020
JS3325G14A020
JS3325G14B020
JT3427
JS3427
8.0
17
JT3427G13A020
JT3427G13B020
JS3427G14A020
JS3427G14B020
JS3343G14A020
JS3343G14B020
Inverted Flare Connections Standard Pressure Closeoff

JT3343
JS3343
3/4
4.0
25
JT3343G13A020
JT3343G13B020
Sweat Connections High Pressure Closeoff

JT3213
JS3213
1/2
4.0
30
JT3213H13A020
JT3213H13B020
JS3213H14A020
JS3213H14B020
JT3315
JS3315
3/4
5.0
25
JT3315H13A020
JT3315H13B020
JS3315H14A020
JS3315H14B020
JT3417
JS3417
8.0
20
JT3417H13A020
JT3417H13B020
JS3417H14A020
JS3417H14B020
JT3517
JS3517
1-1/4
8.0
20
JT3517H13A020
JT3517H13B020
JS3517H14A020
JS3517H14B020
NPT Connections High Pressure Closeoff

JT3223
JS3223
1/2
4.0
30
JT3223H13A020
JT3223H13B020
JS3223H14A020
JS3223H14B020
JT3325
JS3325
3/4
5.0
25
JT3325H13A020
JT3325H13B020
JS3325H14A020
JS3325H14B020
JT3427
JS3427
8.0
20
JT3427H13A020
JT3427H13B020
JS3427H14A020
JS3427H14B020
JS3343H14A020
JS3343H14B020
Inverted Flare Connections High Pressure Closeoff

JT3343
Note:
JS3343
3/4
4.0
30
JT3343H13A020
JT3343H13B020
Three-way valves are shipped from the factory in the normally closed configuration; for normally open configuration,
simply turn the valve around during installation.
1/2
right ft:
standard
Sect# = 0
seQ# = 1

J Series Three-Way Spring Return Electric Zone Valves, On/Off Control (Continued)
Repair Parts
Inverted Flare Fittings (Order Separately)

Code
Number
Description
Available repair parts for J Series Electric

Zone Valves include replacement valve
bodies, replacement actuators, and the
end connections included in the Inverted
Flare Fittings chart. No other field repairs
should be attempted.
Length, in. (mm)
J647-601
15/16 (24)
J647-602
1-11/16 (43)
J647-603
3 (76)
J647-604
1-27/32 (47)
J647-605
1-15/16 (49)
J647-606
For 1 in. (1-1/8 in. O.D.) Copper Tubing
2-3/8 (60)
J647-607
Inverted Flare Nut
-----
jvalve5.tif
J647-601
J647-602
J647-603 J647-604
J647-605
J647-606 J647-607
Inverted Flare Fittings
2/2
J Series Electric Zone Valves

Product Bulletin
Code No. LIT-977282
Supersedes November 15, 2002
J Series Electric Zone Valves accurately control the

flow of saturated steam, hot water, or chilled water
through coils and heat exchangers of all types, in a
wide range of Heating, Ventilating, and Air
Conditioning (HVAC) applications. The synchronous
motor design has been proven reliable in millions of
installations worldwide. The actuator can be removed
from the valve body quickly and easily, simplifying
installation and servicing. No special linkage kit or
commissioning is required.
Figure 1: J Series Electric Zone Valves

Features
Benefits
Quick and Simple Actuator Removal
Eases installation and provides quick actuator replacement during

service.
Bubble-Tight Shutoff
Conserves energy and accurately controls zone temperature for

increased comfort.
High Closeoff Pressure Actuator Option

Available
Satisfies demanding requirements of high-rise buildings and

high-pressure pumping systems.
Interchangeable Actuators
Allow field conversion from normally open to normally closed without

re-piping.
Choice of End Connections
Provides increased versatility and replacement capability.
Choice of Control Signals (On/Off, Floating, or

0-10 VDC/0-20 mA Signals)
Meets the needs of most applications.
J Series Electric Zone Valves Product Bulletin
J Series Electric Zone Valves control the flow of
saturated steam, hot water, and chilled water through
coils and heat exchangers of all types, in a wide range
of HVAC applications. A variety of models handle all
water system control needs as well as saturated steam
applications of 15 psig (103 kPa) or lower. The J Series
valves are designed to withstand the high moisture
conditions found in many concealed fan coil
installations.
Valve Body Features

The J Series valve body features an integral seat, and
is available in normally open, normally closed, and
three-way mixing/diverting styles. The one-piece body
design permits high pressure ratings of 300 psig
(2,067 kPa).
High Temperature Rating for chilled water, hot water

up to 250F (121C) in an ambient temperature of
169F (76C), and saturated steam 250F at 15 psig
(121C at 103 kPa).
JM Series Modulating Electric Zone Valves
JM Series Modulating Electric Zone Valves are
available in a single temperature range:
Standard Temperature Rating for chilled water (up to
50% glycol) and hot water from 32 to 200F
(0 to 93C), in an ambient temperature of 32 to 125F
(0 to 52C).
Manual Operating Lever

All J Series Electric Zone Valves (except normally open
two-way models) are equipped with a manual operating
lever. This lever:
The valves are available with the following end

connections:
allows the valve to be opened for system flushing

before it is put into operation
1/2, 3/4, 1, and 1-1/4 in. OD sweat (solder joints for

copper tubing)
1/2, 3/4, and 1 in. internal threaded (NPT)
prevents damage to the paddle on three-way

valves, and allows flushing of the system by
maintaining the valve in the mid-position
inverted flare fittings (copper tubing with a flare nut

for union connections)
resets to normal position the first time the valve is

cycled
Valve Action
JT and JS Series On/Off Electric Zone Valves are
operated by a hysteresis synchronous motor. When the
thermostat is satisfied, a spring returns the valve to the
normal position. On two-way valves, the paddle
assembly closes against the flow as illustrated in
Figure 2. For three-way valves, see Figure 3.
JM Series Modulating Electric Zone Valves feature a
magnetic clutch to extend the life of the motor and gear
train, a manual operating lever/position indicator, and
easy-to-use terminal blocks. All floating models come
with a time-out feature, which automatically cuts off the
control signal after 3 minutes of continuous operation.
Proportional models are provided with jumper
selectable operating range and action. All units are
shipped with the action jumper in the Direct Acting (DA)
position.
Temperature Ratings
JS and JT On/Off Series Electric Zone Valves
JS and JT On/Off Series Electric Zone Valves are
available in two temperature ranges:
Standard Temperature Rating for chilled water (up to
50% glycol) and hot water from 32 to 200F
(0 to 93C), in an ambient temperature of 32 to 104F
(0 to 40C).
Note: The manual lever cannot be used to close the

bypass port on three-way valves.
End Connections for Inverted Flare Valves

Inverted flare fittings must be ordered separately to
adapt inverted flare J Series Electric Zone Valves to
1/2, 3/4, and 1 in. copper piping. See Table 58 for a list
of fittings available. This style of end connection
eliminates the need for precision-cut lengths of copper
tubing. These close-quarter fittings make installation
easy without the use of tube benders or flaring tools.
The inverted flare fittings are sweated onto the copper
tubing; valve installation consists of simple wrench
connections.
Advantages of the inverted flare construction include:
installation with no possibility of heat damage

during the soldering operation
easy removal, if necessary, to clean the system or

make repairs
fittings that can withstand the high temperatures of

silver soldering
labor savings when used for replacement work,

because the old valve can be removed using the
fittings, rather than cutting or unsweating
Flow Diagrams
Installation
JS and JT Series Zone valves may be piped in mixing

or diverting applications. See Figure 2 and Figure 3.
All wiring must comply with local, regional, and national

electrical code requirements. The actuator housing
must be protected from moisture. In horizontal piping
applications, we recommend that the valve be mounted
within 85 degrees of the upright position. When
mounted in vertical piping, the valve must be protected
from moisture.
JM Series Modulating Electric Zone Valves must be

piped in a mixing configuration only. See Figure 4 and
Figure 5.
Solder connections require a lead- or tin-based solder

with a melting point below 600F (316C). Avoid
overheating the end connections.
Power
Off
Normally Closed
Normally Open
Coil
FIG:2wayOnOff
Coil
Power
Off
Coil
Coil
Power
Off
Power
Off
Normally Closed
Normally Closed
Coil
Power
Off
Power
Off
Normally Closed
Normally Closed
Coil
FIG:3wayOnOff
Figure 2: Flow Diagrams for Two-Way JT and JS Series On/Off Electric Zone Valves
Figure 3: Flow Diagrams for Three-Way JS and JT Series On/Off Electric Zone Valves
FIG:Jseries2way
Closed
Open
Coil
Coil
Closed
Open
Coil
Coil
FIG:Jseries3way
Figure 4: Flow Diagrams for Two-Way JM Series Modulating Electric Zone Valves
Figure 5: Flow Diagrams for Three-Way JM Series Modulating Electric Zone Valves
Dimensions
Figure 6 and Table 2 provide information on
dimensions for JM Series valves.
3-7/8
(98)
Note: A minimum of 3/4 in. (19 mm)

clearance is required for
actuator removal.
3-3/16
(81)
2-15/16
(75)
15/16
(24)
7/8
(22)
7/8
(22)
3/4
(19)
2-1/2
(64)
3-5/16
(84)
B
Two-Way
2-1/8
(54)
C
Three-Way
A
FIG:JS_JT_dim
Inverted Flare
Figure 6: JT and JS Series On/Off Electric Zone Valve Dimensions, in. (mm)
Table 2: JT and JS Series On/Off Electric Zone Valve Dimensions, in. (mm)
Valve Size
B
(Two-Way
Models)
C
(Three-Way
Models)
D
(Standard
Closeoff Models)
D
(High
Closeoff Models)
1/2 in. Sweat
1-5/16 (33)
15/16 (24)
1-5/16 (33)
3-5/16 (84)
3-5/8 (92)
3/4 in. Sweat
1-3/8 (35)
15/16 (24)
1-11/16 (43)
3-3/8 (86)
3-3/4 (95)
1 in. Sweat
1-11/16 (43)
15/16 (24)
1-11/16 (43)
3-5/8 (92)
4 (102)
1-1/4 in. Sweat
1-7/8 (48)
1 (25)
1-13/16 (46)
3-11/16 (94)
4-1/8 (105)
1/2 in. Threaded (NPT)
1-3/8 (35)
15/16 (24)
1-5/16 (33)
3-3/8 (86)
3-5/8 (92)
1-11/16 (43)
15/16 (24)
1-7/16 (37)
3-5/8 (92)
4 (102)
1 in. Threaded (NPT)
1-7/8 (48)
1 (25)
1-11/16 (43)
3-11/16 (94)
4-1/8 (105)
3/4 in. Inverted Flare
1-3/8 (35)
15/16 (24)
1-5/16 (33)
4-1/8 (105)
4-1/8 (105)
Figure 7, Figure 8, and Table 3 provide information on

dimensions for JM Series valves.
actuator removal.
4-1/4
(107)
3 13/16
(98)
3/16
(4)
1/8
(2)
2-1/4
(57) 3 1/16
(78)
1-5/8
(41)
FIG:JMS_NSR
B
Two-Way C
Three-Way
A
1-9/16
(39)
2
(51)
1-3/16
(31)
Figure 7: JM Series Non-Spring Return Modulating Electric Zone Valve Dimensions, in. (mm)

actuator removal.
4-1/4
(107)
3-7/8
(98)
1/16
(1)
3-11/16
(93)
4-1/2
(114)
1-9/16
(40)
A
2
(51)
1-9/16
(39)
1-3/16
(31)
FIG:JMS_SR
B
Two-Way C
Three-Way
Figure 8: JM Series Spring Return Modulating Electric Zone Valve Dimensions, in. (mm)
Table 3: JM Series Modulating Electric Zone Valve Dimensions, in. (mm)

Valve Size
1/2 in. Sweat
1-5/16 (33)
15/16 (24)
1-5/16 (33)
3/4 in. Sweat
1-3/8 (35)
15/16 (24)
1-11/16 (43)
1 in. Sweat
1-11/16 (43)
15/16 (24)
1-11/16 (43)
1-1/4 in. Sweat
1-7/8 (48)
1 (25)
1-13/16 (46)
1-3/8 (35)
15/16 (24)
1-5/16 (33)
1-11/16 (43)
15/16 (24)
1-7/16 (37)
1 in. Threaded (NPT)
1-7/8 (48)
1 (25)
1-11/16 (43)
See Valve Configurations for possible valve and actuator configurations. See Available Factory Assemblies for
available factory assemblies. See Valid Combinations for Field Assembly for valid combinations of valves and
actuators that may be field-assembled.
Valve Configurations
Use Table 4 and Table 5 to select the desired valve configuration.
Table 4: Ordering Data, J Series Electric Zone Valves
J
1
Electric Zone Valve

T
Valve Type and
T = On/Off, Standard Temperature
Temperature Rating
S = On/Off, High Temperature

M = Modulating, Standard Temperature
Valve Configuration
2 = Two-Way
Valve Size
2 = 1/2 in.
3 = Three-Way Mixing/Diverting
3
4
3 = 3/4 in.
4 = 1 in.
5 = 1-1/4 in.
1
Valve End
1 = Sweat: 1/2, 3/4, 1, and 1-1/4 in.
Connections
2 = Threaded (NPT): 1/2, 3/4, and 1 in.

4 = Inverted Flare: 3/4 in. Only
(On/Off Valves Only)
Note: Inverted flare fittings are sold separately;
refer to Table 2 for ordering details.
Cv
Valve Size
Two-Way
Three-Way
(Kv = Cv x 0.857)
On/Off Valve Types

1/2 in. Threaded
and Sweat Only
1 = 1.0
2 = 2.5
3 = 3.5
3 = 4.0
3/4 in. Threaded

and Sweat Only
2 = 2.5
3 = 3.5
5 = 5.0
3/4 in. Inverted

Flare Only
3 = 3.5
3 = 4.0
1 in. Sweat Only
7 = 8.0
7 = 8.0
1 in. Threaded
Only, and 1-1/4 in.
Sweat Only
7 = 8.0
7 = 8.0
Modulating Valve Types
Valve
10
11
12
13
Field
Actuator
1/2 in. Threaded

and Sweat Only
1 = 1.0
2 = 2.0
3 = 4.0
1 = 1.0
2 = 2.0
3 = 4.0
3/4 in. Threaded

and Sweat Only
2 = 2.0
3 = 4.0
7 = 7.5
2 = 2.0
3 = 4.0
7 = 7.5
1 in. Threaded
and Sweat Only
3 = 4.0
7 = 8.0
3 = 4.0
7 = 8.0
1-1/4 in. Sweat

Only
7 = 8.0
7 = 8.0
Example: Electric zone valve, On/Off, standard temperature, two-way,

3/4 in. sweat ends, 3.5 Cv
Table 5: Ordering Data Adding a Factory Mounted Electric Actuator

J
T 2
Actuator Type
and Pressure
Rating
G = Standard Closeoff Pressure

(On/Off Valve Types Only)
H = High Closeoff Pressure
(On/Off Valve Types Only)
T = Three Wire Floating
(Modulating Valve Types Only)
P = Proportional
Spring Action
1 = Spring Return Normally Closed

(Two-Way and Three-Way Valves)
2 = Spring Return Normally Open
(Two-Way Valves Only)
3 = Non-Spring Return
Note: Three-way spring return valves
are shipped from the factory in
the normally closed configuration
(Port B closed); for normally open
configuration, simply turn the
valve around.
Actuator
Temperature
3 = Standard Temp (JT and JM Series

Valves Only)
Rating
4 = High Temp (JS Series Valves Only)
Voltage
A = 24 VAC, 60 Hz (All Valve Types)
A
10
B = 120 VAC, 60 Hz (On/Off Valve Types

Only)
0
Electrical
02 = 18 in. Wire Leads (On/Off Valves

Only)
11
12
Leads
00 = No Leads (Modulating Valves Only)
Options
0 = None
0
13
10
11
12
13
T 2
G 1
Valve
Actuator
T = Three-Wire Signal Time-out

(Non-Spring Modulating Valve Types
Only)
= Field
Example: Electric zone valve, On/Off, standard temperature,

two-way, 3/4 in. sweat ends, 3.5 Cv, standard closeoff
pressure spring return electric actuator, normally closed,
24 VAC, 60 Hz, 18 in. wire leads.
When ordering an actuator only, add a J to the

beginning of the actuator code. To order only the
actuator shown in the example in Table 5, use
JG13A020.
Available Factory Assemblies

See Table 6 through Table 38 for available factory
assemblies of valves and actuators.
Two-Way, Spring Return, On/Off Control
Standard Closeoff Pressure Valves
Standard Temperature
Standard temperature valves operate at 32 to 200F
fluid temperature and 32 to 104F ambient
temperature. For information on these valve and
actuator assemblies, see Table 6 through Table 8.
Two-Way, Spring Return, On/Off Control Standard

Closeoff Pressure Valves are available in
standard-temperature and high-temperature versions.
Table 6: Sweat End Connections
Valve
Spring Return Closed
Spring Return Open
24 VAC
120 VAC
24 VAC
120 VAC
JT2211G13A020
JT2211G13B020
JT2211G23A020
JT2211G23B020
JT2212G13A020
JT2212G13B020
JT2212G23A020
JT2212G23B020
JT2213G13A020
JT2213G13B020
JT2213G23A020
JT2213G23B020
40
JT2312G13A020
JT2312G13B020
JT2312G23A020
JT2312G23B020
3.5
25
JT2313G13A020
JT2313G13B020
JT2313G23A020
JT2313G23B020
8.0
17
JT2417G13A020
JT2417G13B020
JT2417G23A020
JT2417G23B020
8.0
17
JT2517G13A020
JT2517G13B020
JT2517G23A020
JT2517G23B020
Size,
in.
Cv
JT2211
1/2
60
JT2212
1/2
2.5
40
JT2213
1/2
3.5
25
JT2312
3/4
2.5
JT2313
3/4
JT2417
JT2517
1-1/4
1.
Closeoff
psig1
Closeoff Pressures listed are for units date coded 0301 or later. For dated codes 0252 and earlier, see Table 62.
Table 7: NPT End Connections

Valve
Size,
in.
Cv
Closeoff
psig1
Spring Return Open
24 VAC
120 VAC
24 VAC
120 VAC
JT2221
1/2
60
JT2221G13A020
JT2221G13B020
JT2221G23A020
JT2221G23B020
JT2222
1/2
2.5
40
JT2222G13A020
JT2222G13B020
JT2222G23A020
JT2222G23B020
JT2223
1/2
3.5
25
JT2223G13A020
JT2223G13B020
JT2223G23A020
JT2223G23B020
JT2322
3/4
2.5
40
JT2322G13A020
JT2322G13B020
JT2322G23A020
JT2322G23B020
JT2323
3/4
3.5
25
JT2323G13A020
JT2323G13B020
JT2323G23A020
JT2323G23B020
JT2427
8.0
17
JT2427G13A020
JT2427G13B020
JT2427G23A020
JT2427G23B020
1.
Table 8: Inverted Flare End Connections

Valve
Size,
in.
Cv
JT2343
3/4
JS2322
3/4
JS2323
JS2427
1.
10
Closeoff
psig1
Spring Return Open
24 VAC
120 VAC
24 VAC
120 VAC
3.5
25
JT2343G13A020
JT2343G13B020
JT2343G23A020
JT2343G23B020
2.5
40
JS2322G14A020
JS2322G14B020
JS2322G24A020
JS2322G24B020
3/4
3.5
25
JS2323G14A020
JS2323G14B020
JS2323G24A020
JS2323G24B020
8.0
17
JS2427G14A020
JS2427G14B020
JS2427G24A020
JS2427G24B020
High Temperature
High temperature valves operate at 32 to 250F fluid
temperature, 15 psi steam, and 32 to 169F ambient
Valve
Size,
in.
Cv
Closeoff
psig1
Spring Return Open
24 VAC
120 VAC
24 VAC
120 VAC
JS2211
1/2
60
JS2211G14A020
JS2211G14B020
JS2211G24A020
JS2211G24B020
JS2212
JS2213
1/2
2.5
40
JS2212G14A020
JS2212G14B020
JS2212G24A020
JS2212G24B020
1/2
3.5
25
JS2213G14A020
JS2213G14B020
JS2213G24A020
JS2213G24B020
JS2312
3/4
2.5
40
JS2312G14A020
JS2312G14B020
JS2312G24A020
JS2312G24B020
JS2313
3/4
3.5
25
JS2313G14A020
JS2313G14B020
JS2313G24A020
JS2313G24B020
JS2417
8.0
17
JS2417G14A020
JS2417G14B020
JS2417G24A020
JS2417G24B020
JS2517
1-1/4
8.0
17
JS2517G14A020
JS2517G14B020
JS2517G24A020
JS2517G24B020
1.

Valve
Size,
in.
Cv
JS2221
1/2
60
JS2221G14A020
JS2221G14B020
JS2221G24A020
JS2221G24B020
JS2222
1/2
2.5
40
JS2222G14A020
JS2222G14B020
JS2222G24A020
JS2222G24B020
JS2223
1/2
3.5
25
JS2223G14A020
JS2223G14B020
JS2223G24A020
JS2223G24B020
JS2322
3/4
2.5
40
JS2322G14A020
JS2322G14B020
JS2322G24A020
JS2322G24B020
JS2323
3/4
3.5
25
JS2323G14A020
JS2323G14B020
JS2323G24A020
JS2323G24B020
JS2427
8.0
17
JS2427G14A020
JS2427G14B020
JS2427G24A020
JS2427G24B020
1.
Closeoff
psig1
Spring Return Open
24 VAC
24 VAC
120 VAC
120 VAC
Table 11: Inverted Flare Connections

Valve
JS2343
1.
Size,
in.
Cv
3/4
3.5
Closeoff
psig1
Spring Return Open
24 VAC
120 VAC
24 VAC
120 VAC
25
JS2343G14A020
JS2343G14B020
JS2343G24A020
JS2343G24B020
11
Two-Way, Spring Return, On/Off Control High

Closeoff Pressure Valves
Two-Way, Spring Return, On/Off Control High
Closeoff Pressure valves are available in

Valve
Size,
in.
Cv
Closeoff
psig
Spring Return Open
24 VAC
120 VAC
24 VAC
120 VAC
JT2211
1/2
75
JT2211H13A020
JT2211H13B020
JT2211H23A020
JT2211H23B020
JT2212
1/2
2.5
50
JT2212H13A020
JT2212H13B020
JT2212H23A020
JT2212H23B020
JT2213
1/2
3.5
30
JT2213H13A020
JT2213H13B020
JT2213H23A020
JT2213H23B020
JT2312
3/4
2.5
50
JT2312H13A020
JT2312H13B020
JT2312H23A020
JT2312H23B020
JT2313
3/4
3.5
30
JT2313H13A020
JT2313H13B020
JT2313H23A020
JT2313H23B020
JT2417
8.0
20
JT2417H13A020
JT2417H13B020
JT2417H23A020
JT2417H23B020
JT2517
1-1/4
8.0
20
JT2517H13A020
JT2517H13B020
JT2517H23A020
JT2517H23B020

Valve
Size,
in.
Cv
Closeoff
psig
Spring Return Open
24 VAC
120 VAC
24 VAC
120 VAC
JT2221
1/2
75
JT2221H13A020
JT2221H13B020
JT2221H23A020
JT2221H23B020
JT2222
JT2223
1/2
2.5
50
JT2222H13A020
JT2222H13B020
JT2222H23A020
JT2222H23B020
1/2
3.5
30
JT2223H13A020
JT2223H13B020
JT2223H23A020
JT2223H23B020
JT2322
3/4
2.5
50
JT2322H13A020
JT2322H13B020
JT2322H23A020
JT2322H23B020
JT2323
3/4
3.5
30
JT2323H13A020
JT2323H13B020
JT2323H23A020
JT2323H23B020
JT2427
8.0
20
JT2427H13A020
JT2427H13B020
JT2427H23A020
JT2427H23B020

Valve
Size,
in.
Cv
Closeoff
psig

24 VAC
120 VAC
24 VAC
120 VAC
JT2343
3/4
3.5
30
JT2343H13A020
JT2343H13B020
JT2343H23A020
JT2343H23B020
12
Spring Return Open
High Temperature
Valve
Size,
in.
Cv
Closeoff
psig
Spring Return Open
24 VAC
120 VAC
24 VAC
120 VAC
JS2211
1/2
75
JS2211H14A020
JS2211H14B020
JS2211H24A020
JS2211H24B020
JS2212
JS2213
1/2
2.5
50
JS2212H14A020
JS2212H14B020
JS2212H24A020
JS2212H24B020
1/2
3.5
30
JS2213H14A020
JS2213H14B020
JS2213H24A020
JS2213H24B020
JS2312
3/4
2.5
20
JS2312H14A020
JS2312H14B020
JS2312H24A020
JS2312H24B020
JS2313
3/4
3.5
30
JS2313H14A020
JS2313H14B020
JS2313H24A020
JS2313H24B020
JS2417
8.0
20
JS2417H14A020
JS2417H14B020
JS2417H24A020
JS2417H24B020
JS2517
1-1/4
8.0
20
JS2517H14A020
JS2517H14B020
JS2517H24A020
JS2517H24B020

Valve
Size,
in.
Cv
Closeoff
psig
Spring Return Open
24 VAC
120 VAC
24 VAC
120 VAC
JS2221
1/2
75
JS2221H14A020
JS2221H14B020
JS2221H24A020
JS2221H24B020
JS2222
1/2
2.5
50
JS2222H14A020
JS2222H14B020
JS2222H24A020
JS2222H24B020
JS2223
1/2
3.5
30
JS2223H14A020
JS2223H14B020
JS2223H24A020
JS2223H24B020
JS2322
3/4
2.5
50
JS2322H14A020
JS2322H14B020
JS2322H24A020
JS2322H24B020
JS2323
3/4
3.5
30
JS2323H14A020
JS2323H14B020
JS2323H24A020
JS2323H24B020
JS2427
8.0
20
JS2427H14A020
JS2427H14B020
JS2427H24A020
JS2427H24B020

Valve
JS2343
Size,
in.
Cv
3/4
3.5
Closeoff
psig
Spring Return Open
24 VAC
120 VAC
24 VAC
120 VAC
30
JS2343H14A020
JS2343H14B020
JS2343H24A020
JS2343H24B020
13
Three-Way, Spring Return, On/Off Control

Standard Closeoff Pressure Valves
Three-Way, Spring Return, On/Off Control Standard
Closeoff Pressure valves are available in

Valve
Size, in.
Cv
Closeoff
psig1
Spring Return Port B Closed

24 VAC
120 VAC
JT3213
1/2
4.0
25
JT3213G13A020
JT3213G13B020
JT3315
3/4
5.0
20
JT3315G13A020
JT3315G13B020
JT3417
8.0
17
JT3417G13A020
JT3417G13B020
JT3517
1-1/4
8.0
17
JT3517G13A020
JT3517G13B020
1.
Closeoff Pressures listed are for units date coded 0301 or later. For date codes 0252 and earlier, see Table 62.

Valve
Size, in.
Cv
Closeoff
psig1

24 VAC
120 VAC
JT3223
1/2
4.0
25
JT3223G13A020
JT3223G13B020
JT3325
3/4
5.0
20
JT3325G13A020
JT3325G13B020
JT3427
8.0
17
JT3427G13A020
JT3427G13B020
1.

Valve
JT3343
1.
14
Size, in.
3/4
Cv
4.0
Closeoff
psig1

24 VAC
120 VAC
25
JT3343G13A020
JT3343G13B020
High Temperature
actuator assemblies, see Table 21 though Table 23.
Valve
Size, in.
Closeoff
psig1

24 VAC
120 VAC
25
JS3213G14A020
JS3213G14B020
Cv
JS3213
1/2
JS3315
3/4
5.0
20
JS3315G14A020
JS3315G14B020
JS3417
8.0
17
JS3417G14A020
JS3417G14B020
JS3517
1-1/4
8.0
17
JS3517G14A020
JS3517G14B020
1.
4.0

Valve
Size, in.
Cv
Closeoff
psig1

24 VAC
120 VAC
JS3223
1/2
4.0
25
JS3223G14A020
JS3223G14B020
JS3325
3/4
5.0
20
JS3325G14A020
JS3325G14B020
JS3427
8.0
17
JS3427G14A020
JS3427G14B020
1.

Valve
JS3343
1.
Size, in.
3/4
Cv
4.0
Closeoff
psig1

24 VAC
120 VAC
25
JS3343G14A020
JS3343G14B020
15
Three-Way, Spring Return, On/Off Control High

Closeoff Pressure Valves
Three-Way, Spring Return, On/Off Control High
Closeoff Pressure Valves are available in

Valve
Size, in.
Cv
Closeoff
psig

24 VAC
120 VAC
JT3213
1/2
4.0
30
JT3213H13A020
JT3213H13B020
JT3315
3/4
5.0
25
JT3315H13A020
JT3315H13B020
JT3417
8.0
20
JT3417H13A020
JT3417H13B020
JT3517
1-1/4
8.0
20
JT3517H13A020
JT3517H13B020
Closeoff
psig

24 VAC
120 VAC

Valve
Size, in.
Cv
JT3223
1/2
4.0
30
JT3223H13A020
JT3223H13B020
JT3325
3/4
5.0
25
JT3325H13A020
JT3325H13B020
JT3427
8.0
20
JT3427H13A020
JT3427H13B020

Valve
JT3343
16
Size, in.
3/4
Cv
4.0
Closeoff
psig

24 VAC
120 VAC
30
JT3343H13A020
JT3343H13B020
High Temperature
Valve
Size, in.
Cv
Closeoff
psig

24 VAC
120 VAC
JS3213H14B020
JS3213
1/2
4.0
30
JS3213H14A020
JS3315
3/4
5.0
25
JS3315H14A020
JS3315H14B020
JS3417
8.0
20
JS3417H14A020
JS3417H14B020
JS3517
1-1/4
8.0
20
JS3517H14A020
JS3517H14B020
Closeoff
psig

24 VAC
120 VAC

Valve
Size, in.
Cv
JS3223
1/2
4.0
30
JS3223H14A020
JS3223H14B020
JS3325
3/4
5.0
25
JS3325H14A020
JS3325H14B020
JS3427
8.0
20
JS3427H14A020
JS3427H14B020
Closeoff
psig

24 VAC
120 VAC
30
JS3343H14A020
JS3343H14B020

Valve
JS3343
Size, in.
3/4
Cv
4.0
17
Non-Spring Return, Modulating Control Valves

Non-Spring Return, Modulating Control Valves are
available in standard-temperature and
high-temperature versions.
Table 30: Two-Way Sweat End Connections

Valve
Size, in.
Cv
Closeoff
psig
24 VAC
Three Wire Floating
Proportional
JM2211
1/2
1.0
50
JM2211T33A00T
JM2211P33A000
JM2212
1/2
2.0
50
JM2212T33A00T
JM2212P33A000
JM2213
1/2
4.0
35
JM2213T33A00T
JM2213P33A000
JM2312
3/4
2.0
50
JM2312T33A00T
JM2312P33A000
JM2313
3/4
4.0
35
JM2313T33A00T
JM2313P33A000
JM2317
3/4
7.5
35
JM2317T33A00T
JM2317P33A000
JM2413
4.0
35
JM2413T33A00T
JM2413P33A000
JM2417
8.0
35
JM2417T33A00T
JM2417P33A000
JM2517
1-1/4
8.0
35
JM2517T33A00T
JM2517P33A000
Table 31: Two Way NPT End Connections

Valve
Size, in.
Cv
Closeoff
psig
24 VAC
Three Wire Floating
Proportional
JM2221
1/2
1.0
50
JM2221T33A00T
JM2221P33A000
JM2222
1/2
2.0
50
JM2222T33A00T
JM2222P33A000
JM2223
1/2
4.0
35
JM2223T33A00T
JM2223P33A000
JM2322
3/4
2.0
50
JM2322T33A00T
JM2322P33A000
JM2323
3/4
4.0
35
JM2323T33A00T
JM2323P33A000
JM2327
3/4
7.5
35
JM2327T33A00T
JM2327P33A000
JM2427
8.0
35
JM2427T33A00T
JM2427P33A000
JM3223
1/2
4.0
35
JM3223T33A00T
JM3223P33A000
JM3322
3/4
2.0
50
JM3322T33A00T
JM3322P33A000
JM3323
3/4
4.0
35
JM3323T33A00T
JM3323P33A000
JM3327
3/4
7.5
35
JM3327T33A00T
JM3327P33A000
JM3427
8.0
35
JM3427T33A00T
JM3427P33A000
18
Table 32: Three Way Sweat End Connections1

Valve
Size, in.
Cv
Closeoff
psig
24 VAC
Three Wire Floating
Proportional
JM3211
1/2
1.0
50
JM3211T33A00T
JM3211P33A000
JM3212
1/2
2.0
50
JM3212T33A00T
JM3212P33A000
JM3213
1/2
4.0
35
JM3213T33A00T
JM3213P33A000
JM3312
3/4
2.0
50
JM3312T33A00T
JM3312P33A000
JM3313
3/4
4.0
35
JM3313T33A00T
JM3313P33A000
JM3317
3/4
7.5
35
JM3317T33A00T
JM3317P33A000
JM3413
4.0
35
JM3413T33A00T
JM3413P33A000
JM3417
8.0
35
JM3417T33A00T
JM3417P33A000
JM3517
1-1/4
8.0
35
JM3517T33A00T
JM3517P33A000
1.
JM Series Modulating Three-Way Electric Zone Valves must be piped in a mixing configuration only.
Table 33: Three Way NPT End Connections 1

Valve
Size, in.
Cv
Closeoff
psig
24 VAC
Three Wire Floating
Proportional
JM3221
1/2
1.0
50
JM3221T33A00T
JM3221P33A000
JM3222
1/2
2.0
50
JM3222T33A00T
JM3222P33A000
JM3223
1/2
4.0
35
JM3223T33A00T
JM3223P33A000
JM3322
3/4
2.0
50
JM3322T33A00T
JM3322P33A000
JM3323
3/4
4.0
35
JM3323T33A00T
JM3323P33A000
JM3327
3/4
7.5
35
JM3327T33A00T
JM3327P33A000
JM3427
8.0
35
JM3427T33A00T
JM3427P33A000
1.
19
Spring Return Closed, Modulating Control Valves

Spring Return Closed, Modulating Control Valves are
Table 34: Two-Way Sweat End Connections Spring Return Closed

Valve
Size,
in.
Cv
Closeoff (psig)
Operating/Power Failure
24 VAC
Three Wire Floating
Proportional
JM2211
1/2
1.0
50/50
JM2211T13A000
JM2211P13A000
JM2212
JM2213
1/2
2.0
50/20
JM2212T13A000
JM2212P13A000
1/2
4.0
35/20
JM2213T13A000
JM2213P13A000
JM2312
3/4
2.0
50/20
JM2312T13A000
JM2312P13A000
JM2313
3/4
4.0
35/20
JM2313T13A000
JM2313P13A000
JM2317
3/4
7.5
35/15
JM2317T13A000
JM2317P13A000
JM2413
4.0
35/20
JM2413T13A000
JM2413P13A000
JM2417
8.0
35/15
JM2417T13A000
JM2417P13A000
JM2517
1-1/4
8.0
35/15
JM2517T13A000
JM2517P13A000
Table 35: Two Way NPT End Connections Spring Return Closed
Valve
Size,
in.
Cv
Closeoff (psig)
24 VAC
Three Wire Floating
Proportional
JM2221
1/2
1.0
50/50
JM2221T13A000
JM2221P13A000
JM2222
JM2223
1/2
2.0
50/20
JM2222T13A000
JM2222P13A000
1/2
4.0
35/20
JM2223T13A000
JM2223P13A000
JM2322
3/4
2.0
50/20
JM2322T13A000
JM2322P13A000
JM2323
3/4
4.0
35/20
JM2323T13A000
JM2323P13A000
JM2327
3/4
7.5
35/15
JM2327T13A000
JM2327P13A000
JM2427
8.0
35/15
JM2427T13A000
JM2427P13A000
20
Table 36: Three Way Sweat End Connections Spring Return Port B Closed 1
Valve
Size,
in.
Cv
Closeoff (psig)
24 VAC
Three Wire Floating
Proportional
JM3211
1/2
JM3212
1/2
1.0
50/50
JM3211T13A000
JM3211P13A000
2.0
50/20
JM3212T13A000
JM3212P13A000
JM3213
1/2
4.0
35/20
JM3213T13A000
JM3213P13A000
JM3312
3/4
2.0
50/20
JM1312T13A000
JM1312P13A000
JM3313
3/4
4.0
35/20
JM1313T13A000
JM1313P13A000
JM3317
3/4
7.5
35/15
JM1317T13A000
JM1317P13A000
JM3413
4.0
35/20
JM3413T13A000
JM3413P13A000
JM3417
8.0
35/15
JM3417T13A000
JM3417P13A000
JM3517
1-1/4
8.0
35/15
JM3517T13A000
JM3517P13A000
1.
Table 37: Three Way NPT End Connections Spring Return Port B Closed1
Valve
Size,
in.
Cv
Closeoff (psig)
24 VAC
Three Wire Floating
Proportional
JM3221
1/2
1.0
50/50
JM3221T13A000
JM3221P13A000
JM3222
1/2
2.0
50/20
JM3222T13A000
JM3222P13A000
JM3223
1/2
4.0
35/20
JM3223T13A000
JM3223P13A000
JM3322
3/4
2.0
50/20
JM1322T13A000
JM1322P13A000
JM3323
3/4
4.0
35/20
JM1323T13A000
JM1323P13A000
JM3327
3/4
7.5
35/15
JM1327T13A000
JM1327P13A000
JM3427
8.0
35/15
JM3427T13A000
JM3427P13A000
1.
21
Spring Return Open, Modulating Control Valves

Spring Return Open, Modulating Control valves are
actuator assemblies, see Table 38 and Table 39.
Table 38: Two-Way Sweat End Connections Spring Return Open

Valve
Size, in.
Cv
Closeoff, psig
24 VAC
Three Wire Floating
Proportional
JM2211
1/2
1.0
50
JM2211T23A000
JM2211P23A000
JM2212
1/2
2.0
50
JM2212T23A000
JM2212P23A000
JM2213
1/2
4.0
35
JM2213T23A000
JM2213P23A000
JM2312
3/4
2.0
50
JM2312T23A000
JM2312P23A000
JM2313
3/4
4.0
35
JM2313T23A000
JM2313P23A000
JM2317
3/4
7.5
35
JM2317T23A000
JM2317P23A000
JM2413
4.0
35
JM2413T23A000
JM2413P23A000
JM2417
8.0
35
JM2417T23A000
JM2417P23A000
JM2517
1-1/4
8.0
35
JM2517T23A000
JM2517P23A000
Table 39: Two Way NPT End Connections Spring Return Open
Valve
Size, in.
Cv
Closeoff, psig
24 VAC
Three Wire Floating
Proportional
JM2221
1/2
1.0
50
JM2221T23A000
JM2221P23A000
JM2222
1/2
2.0
50
JM2222T23A000
JM2222P23A000
JM2223
1/2
4.0
35
JM2223T23A000
JM2223P23A000
JM2322
3/4
2.0
50
JM2322T23A000
JM2322P23A000
JM2323
3/4
4.0
35
JM2323T23A000
JM2323P23A000
JM2327
3/4
7.5
35
JM2327T23A000
JM2327P23A000
JM2427
8.0
35
JM2427T23A000
JM2427P23A000
22
Valid Combinations for Field Assembly

Use Table 40 through Table 57 to determine valid
combinations for assembly in the field.
J Series On/Off Valves Standard Closeoff Valves
J Series On/Off Valves Standard Closeoff Valves are

Table 40: Two-Way, Spring Closed
Size,
in.
Cv
1/2
3/4
Close
off
psig
Valve End Connections
Actuators
NPT
Inverted
Flare
AC 24 V
AC 120 V
AC 208 V
AC 230 V
60
JT2221
JT2211
JG13A020
JG13B020
JG13D020
JG13U020
2.5
40
JT2222
JT2212
3.5
25
JT2223
JT2213
2.5
40
JT2322
JT2312
Sweat
3.5
25
JT2323
JT2313
JT2343
17
JT2427
JT2417
1-1/4
17
JT2515
Table 41: Two-Way, Spring Open

Size,
in.in.
Cv
Close
off
psig
Actuators
NPT
Sweat
Inverted
Flare
AC 24 V
AC 120 V
AC 208 V
AC 230 V
1/2
60
JT2221
JT2211
JG23A020
JG23B020
JG23D020
JG23U020
2.5
40
JT2222
JT2212
3.5
25
JT2223
JT2213
2.5
40
JT2322
JT2312
3.5
25
JT2323
JT2313
JT2343
17
JT2427
JT2417
1-1/4
17
JT2515
3/4
Table 42: Three-Way, Spring Return Port B Closed

Size,
in.
Cv
Close
off
psig
Actuators
NPT
Inverted
Flare
AC 24 V
AC 120 V
AC 208 V
AC 230 V
1/2
3/4
30
JT3223
JT3213
JG13A020
JG13B020
JG13D020
JG13U020
25
JT3325
JT3315
JT3343
20
JT3427
JT3417
1-1/4
20
JT3517
Sweat
23
High Temperature
Size,
in.
Cv
1/2
3/4
Close
off
psig
Actuators
NPT
Sweat
Inverted
Flare
AC 24 V
AC 120 V
AC 208 V
AC 230 V
60
JS2221
JS2211
JG14A020
JG14B020
JG14D020
JG14U020
2.5
40
JS2222
JS2212
3.5
25
JS2223
JS2213
2.5
40
JS2322
JS2312
3.5
25
JS2323
JS2313
JT2343
17
JS2427
JS2417
1-1/4
17
JS2515

Size,
in.
Cv
Close
off
psig
Actuators
NPT
Sweat
Inverted
Flare
AC 24 V
AC 120 V
AC 208 V
AC 230 V
1/2
60
JS2221
JS2211
JG24A020
JG24B020
JG24D020
JG24U020
2.5
40
JS2222
JS2212
3.5
25
JS2223
JS2213
2.5
40
JS2322
JS2312
3.5
25
JS2323
JS2313
JT2343
17
JS2427
JS2417
1-1/4
17
JS2515
3/4

Size,
in.
Cv
1/2
3/4
25
JS3325
JS3315
JT3343
20
JS3427
JS3417
1-1/4
20
JS3517
24
Close
off
psig
Actuators
NPT
Sweat
Inverted
Flare
AC 24 V
AC 120 V
AC 208 V
AC 230 V
30
JS3223
JS3213
JG14A020
JG14B020
JG14D020
JG14U020
J Series On/Off Valves High Closeoff

J Series On/Off Valves High Closeoff are available in

Size, in.
1/2
Cv
Closeoff
psig

NPT
Sweat
Actuators
Inverted
Flare
AC 24 V
AC 120 V
JH13A020
JH13B020
75
JT2221
JT2211
2.5
50
JT2222
JT2212
3.5
30
JT2223
JT2213
3/4
2.5
50
JT2322
JT2312
3.5
30
JT2323
JT2313
JT2343
20
JT2427
JT2417
1-1/4
20
JT2515

Size, in.
Closeoff
psig

NPT
Sweat
Inverted
Flare
AC 24 V
AC 120 V
75
JT2221
JT2211
JH23A020
JH23B020
2.5
50
JT2222
JT2212
3.5
30
JT2223
JT2213
2.5
50
JT2322
JT2312
3.5
30
JT2323
JT2313
JT2343
20
JT2427
JT2417
1-1/4
20
JT2515
1/2
3/4
Cv
Actuators

Size, in.
Cv
Closeoff
psig
Actuators
NPT
Sweat
Inverted
Flare
AC 24 V
AC 120 V
JH13A020
JH13B020
1/2
30
JT3223
JT3213
3/4
25
JT3325
JT3315
JT3343
20
JT3427
JT3417
1-1/4
20
JT3517
25
High Temperature
Size, in.
1/2
Cv
3/4
Closeoff
psig
Actuators
NPT
Sweat
Inverted
Flare
AC 24 V
AC 120 V
75
JS2221
JS2211
JH14A020
JH14B020
2.5
50
JS2222
JS2212
3.5
30
JS2223
JS2213
2.5
50
JS2322
JS2312
3.5
30
JS2323
JS2313
JT2343
20
JS2427
JS2417
1-1/4
20
JS2515

Size, in.
1/2
3/4
Cv
Closeoff
psig
Actuators
NPT
Sweat
Inverted
Flare
AC 24 V
AC 120 V
75
JS2221
JS2211
JH24A020
JH24B020
2.5
50
JS2222
JS2212
3.5
30
JS2223
JS2213
2.5
50
JS2322
JS2312
3.5
30
JS2323
JS2313
JT2343
20
JS2427
JS2417
1-1/4
20
JS2515

Size, in.
Cv
Closeoff
psig
Actuators
NPT
Sweat
Inverted
Flare
AC 24 V
AC 120 V
JS3223
JS3213
JH14A020
JH14B020
1/2
30
3/4
25
JS3325
JS3315
JT3343
20
JS3427
JS3417
1-1/4
20
JS3517
26
Spring Return J Series Modulating Valves
Two-Way
Two-way valves are available in spring-return open and
spring-return closed varieties. For information on these
valve and actuator assemblies, see Table 52 and
Table 53.
Spring Return J Series Modulating Valves are available

in two-way and three-way spring-return varieties.
Table 52: Two-Way Spring Return Open J Series Modulating Valves

Size,
in.
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/4
Cv
Valves End
Connections
Actuators
NPT
Sweat
Closeoff psig
AC 24 V
Floating Control
DC 0 10 V
Proportional
JM2221
JM2211
50
JT23A000
JP23A000
JM2222
JM2212
50
JM2223
JM2213
35
JM2322
JM2312
50
JM2323
JM2313
35
7.5
JM2327
JM2317
35
JM2413
35
JM2427
JM2417
35
JM2517
35
Table 53: Two-Way Spring Return Closed J Series Modulating Valves

Size, in.
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/4
Cv
Valves End Connections
Actuators
NPT
Sweat
Closeoff psig
(Operating/
Power Failure)
AC 24 V
Floating
Control
DC 0 10 V
Proportional
JM2221
JM2211
50/50
JT13A000
JP13A000
JM2222
JM2212
50/20
JM2223
JM2213
35/20
JM2322
JM2312
50/20
JM2323
JM2313
35/20
7.5
JM2327
JM2317
35/15
JM2413
35/20
JM2427
JM2417
35/15
JM2517
35/15
27
Three-Way
Three-way valves are available in spring-return open
and spring-return closed varieties. For information on
these valve and actuator assemblies, see Table 54 and
Table 55.
Table 54: Three-Way Spring Return Open J Series Modulating Valves
Size, in.
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/4
Cv
Actuators
NPT
Sweat
Closeoff psig
AC 24 V
Floating
Control
DC 0 10 V
Proportional
JM3221
JM3211
50
JT23A000
JP23A000
JM3222
JM3212
50
JM3223
JM3213
35
JM3322
JM3312
50
JM3323
JM3313
35
7.5
JM3327
JM3317
35
JM3413
35
JM3427
JM3417
35
JM3517
35
Table 55: Three-Way Spring Return Closed J Series Modulating Valves

Size, in.
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/4
28
Cv
Actuators
Closeoff psig
(Operating/
Power Failure)
AC 24 V
Floating
Control
DC 0 10 V
Proportional
JM3211
50/50
JT13A000
JP13A000
JM3222
JM3212
50/20
JM3223
JM3213
35/20
JM3322
JM3312
50/20
JM3323
JM3313
35/20
7.5
JM3327
JM3317
35/15
JM3413
35/20
NPT
Sweat
JM3221
JM3427
JM3417
35/15
JM3517
35/15
Non Spring Return J Series Modulating Valves

Non Spring Return J Series Modulating Valves are
available in two-way and three-way versions. For
information on these valve and actuator assemblies,
see Table 56 through Table 57.
Table 56: Two-Way Non Spring Return J Series Modulating Valves
Size, in.
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/4
Cv
Non-Spring Return
NPT
Sweat
Closeoff
psig
AC 24 V
Floating
Control
DC 0 10 V
Proportional
JM2221
JM2211
50
JT33A00T
JP33A000
JM2222
JM2212
50
JM2223
JM2213
35
JM2322
JM2312
50
JM2323
JM2313
35
7.5
JM2327
JM2317
35
JM2413
35
JM2427
JM2417
35
JM2517
35
Table 57: Three-Way Non Spring Return J Series Modulating Valves

Size, in.
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/4
Cv
Non-Spring Return
NPT
Sweat
Closeoff
psig
AC 24 V
Floating
Control
DC 0 10 V
Proportional
JM3221
JM3211
50
JT33A00T
JP33A000
JM3222
JM3212
50
JM3223
JM3213
35
JM3322
JM3312
50
JM3323
JM3313
35
7.5
JM3327
JM3317
35
JM3413
35
JM3427
JM3417
35
JM3517
35
29
Repair Information
Available repair parts for J Series electric zone valves
include replacement valve bodies, replacement
actuators, and the inverted flare fitting end connections
included in Table 58. No other field repairs should be
attempted.
1/2 inch Tube

3/4 inch Tube
1 inch Tube
To order a replacement valve body only, create the

required code number using fields 1 through 6 from
Table 4. To order a replacement actuator only, create
the required code number using fields 7 through 13
from Table 5, and add the letter J to the front of the
resulting code number.
FIG:inflare
Flow
Approx.
5-7/8 inch
Union Nuts
Inlet
Solder Joints
Table 58: Inverted Flare Fitting End Connections

(Order Separately)
Description
Length,
in. (mm)
J647-601
For 1/2 in. (5/8 in. O.D.)

Copper Tubing
15/16 (24)
J647-602
For 1/2 in. (5/8 in. O.D.)

Copper Tubing
1-11/16 (43)
J647-603
For 1/2 in. (5/8 in. O.D.)

Copper Tubing
3 (76)
J647-604
For 3/4 in. (7/8 in. O.D.)

Copper Tubing
1-27/32 (47)
J647-605
For 1/2 in. (5/8 in. O.D.)

Copper Tubing
1-15/16 (49)
J647-606
For 1 in. (1-1/8 in. O.D.)

Copper Tubing
2-3/8 (60)
J647-607
Inverted Flare Nut
-----
Outlet
Figure 9: Installation of Inverted Flare J Series

Electric Zone Valves
FIG:inflarefit
Product
Code
Number
J647-601
J647-602
J647-603
J647-604
J647-605
Figure 10: Inverted Flare Fittings (Order Separately)
30
J647-606
J647-607
Maximum Closeoff Pressures by Date Code

Date codes use the format WWYY, where WW is the
week of the year and YY indicates the year. For
example, a date code of 2603 indicates the item was
produced on the 26th week of 2003.
JT and JS Series On/Off Zone Valves (Date Code

0301 or Later)
Table 59 through Table 61 give maximum closeoff
pressures for JT and JS Series On/Off zone valves with
date codes 0301 or later.

Valve Size
1/2 in.
3/4 in.
Two-Way
Three-Way
Cv (Kv)
Close Off
psig (kPa)
Cv (Kv)
Close Off
psig (kPa)
1.0 (0.9)
60 (413)
4.0 (3.4)
25 (172)
2.5 (2.2)
40 (275)
3.5 (3.0)
25 (172)
5.0 (4.3)
20 (138)
2.5 (2.2)
40 (275)
3.5 (3.0)
25 (172)
1 in.
8.0 (7.5)
17 (117)
8.0 (7.5)
17 (117)
1-1/4 in.
8.0 (7.5)
17 (117)
8.0 (7.5)
17 (117)
Table 60: Threaded (NPT) End Connections

Valve Size
1/2 in.
3/4 in.
1 in.
Two-Way
Three-Way
Cv (Kv)
Close Off
psig (kPa)
Cv (Kv)
Close Off
psig (kPa)
1.0 (0.9)
60 (413)
4.0 (3.4)
25 (172)
2.5 (2.2)
40 (275)
3.5 (3.0)
25 (172)
2.5 (2.2)
40 (275)
5.0 (4.3)
20 (138)
3.5 (3.0)
25 (172)
8.0 (7.5)
17 (117)
8.0 (7.5)
17 (117)

Valve Size
3/4 in.
Two-Way
Three-Way
Cv (Kv)
Close Off
psig (kPa)
Cv (Kv)
Close Off
psig (kPa)
3.5 (3.0)
25 (172)
4.0 (3.4)
25 (172)
31
JT and JS Series On/Off Electric Zone Valves

Standard Closeoff (Date Code 0252 or earlier)
Table 62 through Table 64 give maximum closeoff
pressures for JT and JS Series On/Off electric zone
valves with standard closeoff and date codes 0252 or
earlier.
Valve Size
1/2 in.
3/4 in.
Two-Way
Three-Way
Cv (Kv)
Close Off
psig (kPa)
Cv (Kv)
Close Off
psig (kPa)
1.0 (0.9)
50 (350)
4.0 (3.4)
20 (137)
2.5 (2.2)
30 (210)
3.5 (3.0)
20 (137)
5.0 (4.3)
13 (90)
2.5 (2.2)
30 (210)
3.5 (3.0)
20 (137)
1 in.
8.0 (7.5)
15 (103)
8.0 (7.5)
15 (103)
1-1/4 in.
8.0 (7.5)
15 (103)
8.0 (7.5)
15 (103)

Valve Size
1/2 in.
3/4 in.
1 in.
Two-Way
Three-Way
Cv (Kv)
Close Off
psig (kPa)
Cv (Kv)
Close Off
psig (kPa)
1.0 (0.9)
50 (350)
4.0 (3.4)
20 (137)
2.5 (2.2)
30 (210)
3.5 (3.0)
20 (137)
2.5 (2.2)
30 (210)
5.0 (4.3)
13 (90)
3.5 (3.0)
20 (138)
8.0 (7.5)
15 (103)
8.0 (7.5)
15 (103)

Valve Size
3/4 in.
32
Two-Way
Three-Way
Cv (Kv)
Close Off
psig (kPa)
Cv (Kv)
Close Off
psig (kPa)
3.5 (3.0)
20 (137)
4.0 (3.4)
20 (140)
JT and JS Series On/Off Electric Zone Valves

High Closeoff
Table 65 through Table 67 gives maximum closeoff
pressures for JT and JS Series On/Off electric zone
valves with high closeoff.
Valve Size
1/2 in.
3/4 in.
Two-Way
Three-Way
Cv (Kv)
Close Off
psig (kPa)
Cv (Kv)
Close Off
psig (kPa)
1.0 (0.9)
75 (525)
4.0 (3.4)
30 (210)
2.5 (2.2)
50 (350)
3.5 (3.0)
30 (210)
5.0 (4.3)
25 (172)
2.5 (2.2)
50 (350)
3.5 (3.0)
30 (210)
1 in.
8.0 (7.5)
20 (137)
7.0 (6.0)
15 (103)
1-1/4 in.
8.0 (7.5)
20 (137)
7.5 (6.5)
20 (137)

Valve Size
1/2 in.
3/4 in.
1 in.
Two-Way
Three-Way
Cv (Kv)
Close Off
psig (kPa)
Cv (Kv)
Close Off
psig (kPa)
1.0 (0.9)
75 (525)
4.0 (3.4)
30 (210)
2.5 (2.2)
50 (350)
3.5 (3.0)
30 (210)
2.5 (2.2)
50 (350)
5.0 (4.3)
25 (172)
3.5 (3.0)
30 (210)
8.0 (7.5)
20 (137)
8.0 (7.5)
20 (137)

Valve Size
3/4 in.
Two-Way
Three-Way
Cv (Kv)
Close Off
psig (kPa)
Cv (Kv)
Close Off
psig (kPa)
3.5 (3.0)
20 (137)
4.0 (3.4)
20 (137)
33
JM Series Modulating Electric Zone Valves

Table 68 through Table 70 gives maximum closeoff
pressure for JM Series modulating electric valves.
Table 68: JM Series Modulating Electric Zone Valves Non-Spring Return
Valve
Size
1/2 in.
3/4 in.
1 in.
1-1/4 in.
Sweat End Connections

Cv (Kv)
Threaded (NPT) End Connections

Closeoff psig (kPa)
Cv (Kv)
Closeoff psig (kPa)
Two-Way
ThreeWay
Operating Mode
Two-Way
ThreeWay
Operating Mode
1.0 (0.9)
1.0 (0.9)
50 (344)
1.0 (0.9)
1.0 (0.9)
1.0 (0.9)
2.0 (1.8)
2.0 (1.8)
50 (344)
2.0 (1.8)
2.0 (1.8)
2.0 (1.8)
4.0 (3.5)
4.0 (3.5)
35 (242)
4.0 (3.5)
4.0 (3.5)
4.0 (3.5)
2.0 (1.8)
2.0 (1.8)
50 (344)
2.0 (1.8)
2.0 (1.8)
2.0 (1.8)
4.0 (3.5)
4.0 (3.5)
35 (242)
4.0 (3.5)
4.0 (3.5)
4.0 (3.5)
7.5 (6.4)
7.5 (6.4)
35 (242)
7.5 (6.4)
7.5 (6.4)
7.5 (6.4)
4.0 (3.4)
4.0 (3.4)
35 (242)
8.0 (7.5)
8.0 (7.5)
8.0 (6.9)
8.0 (7.5)
8.0 (7.5)
35 (242)
N/A
N/A
N/A
8.0 (7.5)
8.0 (7.5)
35 (242)
N/A
N/A
N/A
Table 69: JM Series Modulating Electric Zone Valves Spring Return Closed
Valve
Size
1/2 in.
3/4 in.
1 in.
1-1/4 in.

Cv (Kv)

Closeoff psig (kPa)
Cv (Kv)
Closeoff psig (kPa)
Two-Way
ThreeWay
Operating Mode/
Power Failure Mode
Two-Way
ThreeWay
Operating Mode/
Power Failure Mode
1.0 (0.9)
1.0 (0.9)
50 (344)/50 (344)
1.0 (0.9)
1.0 (0.9)
50 (344)/50 (344)
2.0 (1.8)
2.0 (1.8)
50 (344)/20 (137)
2.0 (1.8)
2.0 (1.8)
50 (344)/20 (137)
4.0 (3.5)
4.0 (3.5)
35 (240)/20 (137)
4.0 (3.5)
4.0 (3.5)
35 (240)/20 (137)
2.0 (1.8)
2.0 (1.8)
50 (344)/20 (137)
2.0 (1.8)
2.0 (1.8)
50 (344)/20 (137)
4.0 (3.5)
4.0 (3.5)
35 (240)/20 (137)
4.0 (3.5)
4.0 (3.5)
35 (240)/20 (137)
7.5 (6.4)
7.5 (6.4)
35 (240)/15 (103)
7.5 (6.4)
7.5 (6.4)
35 (240)/15 (103)
4.0 (3.4)
4.0 (3.4)
35 (240)/20 (137)
8.0 (7.5)
8.0 (7.5)
35 (240)/15 (103)
8.0 (7.5)
8.0 (7.5)
35 (240)/15 (103)
N/A
N/A
N/A
8.0 (7.5)
8.0 (7.5)
35 (240)/15 (103)
N/A
N/A
N/A
Table 70: JM Series Modulating Electric Zone Valves Spring Return Open (Part 1 of 2)
Valve
Size
1/2 in.
34
Cv (Kv)
Closeoff psig (kPa)
Cv (Kv)
Closeoff psig (kPa)
Two-Way
Operating Mode
Two-Way or
Three-Way
Operating Mode
1.0 (0.9)
50 (344)
1.0 (0.9)
50 (344)
2.0 (1.8)
50 (344)
2.0 (1.8)
50 (344)
4.0 (3.5)
35 (240)
4.0 (3.5)
35 (240)
Table 70: JM Series Modulating Electric Zone Valves Spring Return Open (Part 2 of 2)
Valve
Size
3/4 in.
1 in.
1-1/4 in.
Cv (Kv)
Closeoff psig (kPa)
Cv (Kv)
Closeoff psig (kPa)
Two-Way
Operating Mode
Two-Way or
Three-Way
Operating Mode
2.0 (1.8)
50 (344)
2.0 (1.8)
50 (344)
4.0 (3.5)
35 (240)
4.0 (3.5)
35 (240)
7.5 (6.4)
35 (240)
7.5 (6.4)
35 (240)
4.0 (3.4)
35 (240)
8.0 (7.5)
35 (240)
8.0 (7.5)
35 (240)
N/A
N/A
8.0 (7.5)
35 (240)
N/A
N/A
J Series Electric Zone Valves (Part 1 of 2)
Service1
Hot Water, Chilled Water, 50% Glycol Solutions, and

End Connections
Threaded (NPT), Sweat (all Models)

Inverted Flare (JT and JS On/Off Series Only)
Standard JT Series
32 to 200F (0 to 93C) Water in an Ambient Temperature of 32 to 104F (0 to 40C)
Standard JM Series
32 to 200F (0 to 93C) Water in an Ambient Temperature of 32 to 125F (0 to 52C)
High JS Series
32 to 250F (0 to 121C) Water in an Ambient Temperature of 32 to 169F (0 to 76C) or
15 psig (103 kPa) Steam at 250F (121C)
Valve Body
Pressure Rating
300 psig (2,067 kPa) System Operating Pressure
Valve Cv (Kv) and

Closeoff Pressure Ratings
JT and JS On/Off: See Table 59.

JM Modulating: See Table 68.
Cycle Times
JT and JS Series: Power Stroke: 9 to 11 Seconds, Spring Return: 4 to 5 Seconds

JM Series: Full Open to Full Close: 150 Seconds
Leakage
JT and JS Series: Bubble-Tight Shutoff

JM Series: 0.01% of Maximum Flow per ANSI/FCI 70-2 Class IV
Materials
Body: Forged Brass

Stem: Brass (Hard Chrome Plated)
Base Plate and Bearing Plate: Stainless Steel
Actuator Housing (JT and JS Series): Stainless Steel
Actuator Cover (JT and JS Series): Aluminum
Actuator Housing (JM Series): High Temperature Plastic
Valve Operating Paddle (JT and JS Series):
Standard Temperature Models - Buna-N Rubber,
High Temperature Models - Saturated Nitrile
Valve Plug/Paddle (JM Series): High Temperature Thermoplastic/Rubber
Stem Assembly O-Ring Seals: Viton
35
J Series Electric Zone Valves (Part 2 of 2)

Control Signal
JT and JS On/Off:
AC 24, 120, 208, or 230 V, Two-wire On/Off
JM Modulating:
T Type, Three-Wire Floating, 24 VAC at 60 Hz
P Type Proportional Control
Factory Setting: 0 to 10 VDC (1 to 9 VDC Actual),
0 to 5 VDC, 5 to 10 VDC jumper selectable
Control Action
JM Modulating: P Type Proportional Control

Factory Setting: Direct Acting valve opens port B as signal increases. Jumper selectable
Input Impedance
JM Modulating: P Type Proportional Control

Current Input: 300 ohms
Compliance
JT and JS Series
All actuators UL listed, File E6688 or E27734
CNN XAPX (U.S.) XAPX7 (Canada), CE Mark
JM Series
Actuator UL Listed, CE Mark
Power Requirements
JT and JS Series:
AC 24 V, 60 Hz (6.5 W), 7 VA
AC 120 V, 60 Hz (6.5 W), 7 VA
AC 208 V, 60 Hz (6.5 W), 7 VA
AC 230 V, 60 Hz (6.5 W), 7 VA
JM Series:
AC 24 V, 60 Hz, 1.6 VA
JT and JS Series: 18 in. (457 mm) Wire Leads

JM Series: Terminal Block
Shipping Weight
JT and JS Series: 1.0 lbs (454 g), maximum, actuator and valve body
JM Series: 1.9 lbs (860 g), maximum, actuator and valve body
1.
Use proper water treatment; refer to VDI 2035 Standard.
Controls Group
Milwaukee, WI 53202
36

Published in U.S.A.
Ordering Guide
J Series Electric Zone Valve Assemblies Two-Position On/Off Control

Z o n e Va l v e s
J SERIES
Size,
inches
Cv
Closeoff
24 VAC, 60 Hz
JG13A020 Standard Temperature
JG14A020 High Temperature
Provides economical control of hot or chilled water for fan coil,

baseboard radiator, and VAV reheat applications
On/Off control from two-wire thermostat
Forged brass body 300 psig static pressure rating
Buna-N (Standard Temperature) or Nitrile Disk (High
Temperature) provides tight shutoff
PopTop Actuator snaps in place for easy removal and assembly
during installation
Product Bulletin LIT-977282
Provides economical control of hot or chilled water and 15 psig

steam for fan coil, baseboard radiator, and VAV reheat applications
during installation
Actuator
Actuator
120 VAC, 60 Hz
JG13B020 Standard Temperature
JG14B020 High Temperature
Valve
Size,
inches
Cv
Closeoff
24 VAC, 60 Hz
120 VAC, 60 Hz
Sweat Connections Standard Temperature: 32 to 200F Fluid Temperature, 32 to 104F Ambient

JT2211
1/2
1
60
JT2211G13A020
JT2211G13B020
JT2212
1/2
2.5
40
JT2212G13A020
JT2212G13B020
JT2213
1/2
3.5
25
JT2213G13A020
JT2213G13B020
JT2312
3/4
2.5
40
JT2312G13A020
JT2312G13B020
JT2313
3/4
3.5
25
JT2313G13A020
JT2313G13B020
JT2417
1
8
17
JT2417G13A020
JT2417G13B020
JT2517
1-1/4
8
17
JT2517G13A020
JT2517G13B020
Threaded NPT Connections Standard Temperature: 32 to 200F Fluid Temperature, 32 to 104F Ambient
JT2221
1/2
1
60
JT2221G13A020
JT2221G13B020
JT2222
1/2
2.5
40
JT2222G13A020
JT2222G13B020
JT2223
1/2
3.5
25
JT2223G13A020
JT2223G13B020
JT2322
3/4
2.5
40
JT2322G13A020
JT2322G13B020
JT2323
3/4
3.5
25
JT2323G13A020
JT2323G13B020
JT2427
1
8
17
JT2427G13A020
JT2427G13B020
Inverted Flare Connections Standard Temperature: 32 to 200F Fluid Temperature, 32 to 104F Ambient
25
JT2343G13A020
JT2343G13B020
JT2343
3/4
3.5
Sweat Connections High Temperature: 32 to 250F Fluid Temperature, 15 psig Steam, 32 to 169F Ambient
JS2211
1/2
1
60
JS2211G14A020
JS2211G14B020
JS2212
1/2
2.5
40
JS2212G14A020
JS2212G14B020
JS2213
1/2
3.5
25
JS2213G14A020
JS2213G14B020
JS2312
3/4
2.5
40
JS2312G14A020
JS2312G14B020
JS2313
3/4
3.5
25
JS2313G14A020
JS2313G14B020
JS2417
1
8
17
JS2417G14A020
JS2417G14B020
JS2517
1-1/4
8
17
JS2517G14A020
JS2517G14B020
Threaded NPT Connections High Temperature: 32 to 250F Fluid Temperature, 15 psig Steam, 32 to 169F Ambient
JS2221
1/2
1
60
JS2221G14A020
JS2221G14B020
JS2222
1/2
2.5
40
JS2222G14A020
JS2222G14B020
JS2223
1/2
3.5
25
JS2223G14A020
JS2223G14B020
JS2322
3/4
2.5
40
JS2322G14A020
JS2322G14B020
JS2323
3/4
3.5
25
JS2323G14A020
JS2323G14B020
JS2427
1
8
17
JS2427G14A020
JS2427G14B020
Inverted Flare Connections High Temperature: 32 to 250F Fluid Temperature, 15 psig Steam, 32 to 169F Ambient
JS2343
3/4
3.5
25
JS2343G14A020
JS2343G14B020

JT2211
1/2
1
60
JT2211G23A020
JT2211G23B020
JT2212
1/2
2.5
40
JT2212G23A020
JT2212G23B020
JT2213
1/2
3.5
25
JT2213G23A020
JT2213G23B020
JT2312
3/4
2.5
40
JT2312G23A020
JT2312G23B020
JT2313
3/4
3.5
25
JT2313G23A020
JT2313G23B020
JT2417
1
8
17
JT2417G23A020
JT2417G23B020
JT2517
1-1/4
8
17
JT2517G23A020
JT2517G23B020
JT2221
1/2
1
60
JT2221G23A020
JT2221G23B020
JT2222
1/2
2.5
40
JT2222G23A020
JT2222G23B020
JT2223
1/2
3.5
25
JT2223G23A020
JT2223G23B020
JT2322
3/4
2.5
40
JT2322G23A020
JT2322G23B020
JT2323
3/4
3.5
25
JT2323G23A020
JT2323G23B020
JT2427
1
8
17
JT2427G23A020
JT2427G23B020
JT2343
3/4
3.5
25
JT2343G23A020
JT2343G23B020
JS2211
1/2
1
60
JS2211G24A020
JS2211G24B020
JS2212
1/2
2.5
40
JS2212G24A020
JS2212G24B020
JS2213
1/2
3.5
25
JS2213G24A020
JS2213G24B020
JS2312
3/4
2.5
40
JS2312G24A020
JS2312G24B020
JS2313
3/4
3.5
25
JS2313G24A020
JS2313G24B020
JS2417
1
8
17
JS2417G24A020
JS2417G24B020
JS2517
1-1/4
8
17
JS2517G24A020
JS2517G24B020
JS2221
1/2
1
60
JS2221G24A020
JS2221G24B020
JS2222
1/2
2.5
40
JS2222G24A020
JS2222G24B020
JS2223
1/2
3.5
25
JS2223G24A020
JS2223G24B020
JS2322
3/4
2.5
40
JS2322G24A020
JS2322G24B020
JS2323
3/4
3.5
25
JS2323G24A020
JS2323G24B020
JS2427
1
8
17
JS2427G24A020
JS2427G24B020
JS2343
3/4
3.5
25
JS2343G24A020
JS2343G24B020
Note: JG13-style actuators can only be used with JT series valves; JG14-style actuators can only be used with JS series valves.
Actuators and valve bodies can be ordered separately using the actuator and valve code numbers shown.
Note: JG23-style actuators can only be used with JT series valve; JG24-style actuators can only be used with JS series valves.
Valve
Size,
inches
Cv
Closeoff
24 VAC, 60 Hz
120 VAC, 60 Hz

JT3213
1/2
4
25
JT3213G13A020
JT3315
3/4
5
20
JT3315G13A020
JT3417
1
8
17
JT3417G13A020
JT3517
1-1/4
8
17
JT3517G13A020
JT3223
1/2
4
25
JT3223G13A020
JT3325
3/4
5
20
JT3325G13A020
JT3427
1
8
17
JT3427G13A020
25
JT3343G13A020
JT3343
3/4
4
Sweat Connections High Temperature: 32 to 250F Fluid Temperature, 32 to 169F Ambient
JS3213
1/2
4
25
JS3213G14A020
JS3315
3/4
5
20
JS3315G14A020
JS3417
1
8
17
JS3417G14A020
JS3517
1-1/4
8
17
JS3517G14A020
Threaded NPT Connections High Temperature: 32 to 250F Fluid Temperature, 32 to 169F Ambient
JS3223
1/2
4
25
JS3223G14A020
JS3325
3/4
5
20
JS3325G14A020
JS3427
1
8
17
JS3427G14A020
Inverted Flare Connections High Temperature: 32 to 250F Fluid Temperature, 32 to 169F Ambient
JS3343
3/4
4
25
JS3343G14A020
Note: JG13-style actuators can only be
used with JT series valves; JG14-style
actuators can only be used with JS
series valves.
Actuators and valve bodies can be
ordered separately using the actuator
and valve code numbers shown.
JT3213G13B020
JT3315G13B020
JT3417G13B020
JT3517G13B020
JT3223G13B020
JT3325G13B020
JT3427G13B020
JT3343G13B020
JS3213G14B020
JS3315G14B020
JS3417G14B020
JS3517G14B020
JS3223G14B020
JS3325G14B020
JS3427G14B020
JS3343G14B020
Inverted Flare Copper Sweat Fittings

Code Number
J647-601
J647-602
J647-603
J647-604
J647-605
J647-606
J647-607
Description
Adapter, Elbow, 15/16 inches long, for 1/2 inch (5/8 inch O.D.) Copper Tubing
Adapter, Straight, 1-11/16 inches long, for 1/2 inch (5/8 inch O.D.) Copper Tubing
Adapter, Straight, 3 inches long, for 1/2 inch (5/8 inch O.D.) Copper Tubing
Adapter, Elbow, 1-15/16 inches long, for 1/2 inch (5/8 inch O.D.) Copper Tubing
Adapter, Straight, 2-3/8 inches long, for 1 inch (1-1/8 inch O.D.) Copper Tubing
Inverted Flare Nut
J Series Electric Zone Valve Assemblies

Two-Postion On/Off Control
Provides economical control of hot or chilled water and

15 psig steam for fan coil, baseboard radiator, and VAV
reheat applications
PopTop Actuator snaps in place for easy removal and
assembly during installation
Actuator
Valve
Three-Way Spring Closed,

Standard Closeoff
Two-Way Spring Open,

Standard Closeoff
Two-Way Spring Closed,

Standard Closeoff
Ordering Guide

Z o n e Va l v e s
J SERIES
Size,
inches
Cv
Closeoff
24 VAC, 60 Hz

during installation

during installation
Actuator
Actuator
120 VAC, 60 Hz
Valve
Size,
inches
Cv
Closeoff
24 VAC, 60 Hz
120 VAC, 60 Hz

JT2211
1/2
1
60
JT2211G13A020
JT2211G13B020
JT2212
1/2
2.5
40
JT2212G13A020
JT2212G13B020
JT2213
1/2
3.5
25
JT2213G13A020
JT2213G13B020
JT2312
3/4
2.5
40
JT2312G13A020
JT2312G13B020
JT2313
3/4
3.5
25
JT2313G13A020
JT2313G13B020
JT2417
1
8
17
JT2417G13A020
JT2417G13B020
JT2517
1-1/4
8
17
JT2517G13A020
JT2517G13B020
JT2221
1/2
1
60
JT2221G13A020
JT2221G13B020
JT2222
1/2
2.5
40
JT2222G13A020
JT2222G13B020
JT2223
1/2
3.5
25
JT2223G13A020
JT2223G13B020
JT2322
3/4
2.5
40
JT2322G13A020
JT2322G13B020
JT2323
3/4
3.5
25
JT2323G13A020
JT2323G13B020
JT2427
1
8
17
JT2427G13A020
JT2427G13B020
25
JT2343G13A020
JT2343G13B020
JT2343
3/4
3.5
JS2211
1/2
1
60
JS2211G14A020
JS2211G14B020
JS2212
1/2
2.5
40
JS2212G14A020
JS2212G14B020
JS2213
1/2
3.5
25
JS2213G14A020
JS2213G14B020
JS2312
3/4
2.5
40
JS2312G14A020
JS2312G14B020
JS2313
3/4
3.5
25
JS2313G14A020
JS2313G14B020
JS2417
1
8
17
JS2417G14A020
JS2417G14B020
JS2517
1-1/4
8
17
JS2517G14A020
JS2517G14B020
JS2221
1/2
1
60
JS2221G14A020
JS2221G14B020
JS2222
1/2
2.5
40
JS2222G14A020
JS2222G14B020
JS2223
1/2
3.5
25
JS2223G14A020
JS2223G14B020
JS2322
3/4
2.5
40
JS2322G14A020
JS2322G14B020
JS2323
3/4
3.5
25
JS2323G14A020
JS2323G14B020
JS2427
1
8
17
JS2427G14A020
JS2427G14B020
JS2343
3/4
3.5
25
JS2343G14A020
JS2343G14B020

JT2211
1/2
1
60
JT2211G23A020
JT2211G23B020
JT2212
1/2
2.5
40
JT2212G23A020
JT2212G23B020
JT2213
1/2
3.5
25
JT2213G23A020
JT2213G23B020
JT2312
3/4
2.5
40
JT2312G23A020
JT2312G23B020
JT2313
3/4
3.5
25
JT2313G23A020
JT2313G23B020
JT2417
1
8
17
JT2417G23A020
JT2417G23B020
JT2517
1-1/4
8
17
JT2517G23A020
JT2517G23B020
JT2221
1/2
1
60
JT2221G23A020
JT2221G23B020
JT2222
1/2
2.5
40
JT2222G23A020
JT2222G23B020
JT2223
1/2
3.5
25
JT2223G23A020
JT2223G23B020
JT2322
3/4
2.5
40
JT2322G23A020
JT2322G23B020
JT2323
3/4
3.5
25
JT2323G23A020
JT2323G23B020
JT2427
1
8
17
JT2427G23A020
JT2427G23B020
JT2343
3/4
3.5
25
JT2343G23A020
JT2343G23B020
JS2211
1/2
1
60
JS2211G24A020
JS2211G24B020
JS2212
1/2
2.5
40
JS2212G24A020
JS2212G24B020
JS2213
1/2
3.5
25
JS2213G24A020
JS2213G24B020
JS2312
3/4
2.5
40
JS2312G24A020
JS2312G24B020
JS2313
3/4
3.5
25
JS2313G24A020
JS2313G24B020
JS2417
1
8
17
JS2417G24A020
JS2417G24B020
JS2517
1-1/4
8
17
JS2517G24A020
JS2517G24B020
JS2221
1/2
1
60
JS2221G24A020
JS2221G24B020
JS2222
1/2
2.5
40
JS2222G24A020
JS2222G24B020
JS2223
1/2
3.5
25
JS2223G24A020
JS2223G24B020
JS2322
3/4
2.5
40
JS2322G24A020
JS2322G24B020
JS2323
3/4
3.5
25
JS2323G24A020
JS2323G24B020
JS2427
1
8
17
JS2427G24A020
JS2427G24B020
JS2343
3/4
3.5
25
JS2343G24A020
JS2343G24B020
Valve
Size,
inches
Cv
Closeoff
24 VAC, 60 Hz
120 VAC, 60 Hz

JT3213
1/2
4
25
JT3213G13A020
JT3315
3/4
5
20
JT3315G13A020
JT3417
1
8
17
JT3417G13A020
JT3517
1-1/4
8
17
JT3517G13A020
JT3223
1/2
4
25
JT3223G13A020
JT3325
3/4
5
20
JT3325G13A020
JT3427
1
8
17
JT3427G13A020
25
JT3343G13A020
JT3343
3/4
4
JS3213
1/2
4
25
JS3213G14A020
JS3315
3/4
5
20
JS3315G14A020
JS3417
1
8
17
JS3417G14A020
JS3517
1-1/4
8
17
JS3517G14A020
JS3223
1/2
4
25
JS3223G14A020
JS3325
3/4
5
20
JS3325G14A020
JS3427
1
8
17
JS3427G14A020
JS3343
3/4
4
25
JS3343G14A020
series valves.
JT3213G13B020
JT3315G13B020
JT3417G13B020
JT3517G13B020
JT3223G13B020
JT3325G13B020
JT3427G13B020
JT3343G13B020
JS3213G14B020
JS3315G14B020
JS3417G14B020
JS3517G14B020
JS3223G14B020
JS3325G14B020
JS3427G14B020
JS3343G14B020

Code Number
J647-601
J647-602
J647-603
J647-604
J647-605
J647-606
J647-607
Description
Inverted Flare Nut


reheat applications
Actuator
Valve

Standard Closeoff

Standard Closeoff

Standard Closeoff
Ordering Guide

Z o n e Va l v e s
J SERIES
Size,
inches
Cv
Closeoff
24 VAC, 60 Hz

during installation

during installation
Actuator
Actuator
120 VAC, 60 Hz
Valve
Size,
inches
Cv
Closeoff
24 VAC, 60 Hz
120 VAC, 60 Hz

JT2211
1/2
1
60
JT2211G13A020
JT2211G13B020
JT2212
1/2
2.5
40
JT2212G13A020
JT2212G13B020
JT2213
1/2
3.5
25
JT2213G13A020
JT2213G13B020
JT2312
3/4
2.5
40
JT2312G13A020
JT2312G13B020
JT2313
3/4
3.5
25
JT2313G13A020
JT2313G13B020
JT2417
1
8
17
JT2417G13A020
JT2417G13B020
JT2517
1-1/4
8
17
JT2517G13A020
JT2517G13B020
JT2221
1/2
1
60
JT2221G13A020
JT2221G13B020
JT2222
1/2
2.5
40
JT2222G13A020
JT2222G13B020
JT2223
1/2
3.5
25
JT2223G13A020
JT2223G13B020
JT2322
3/4
2.5
40
JT2322G13A020
JT2322G13B020
JT2323
3/4
3.5
25
JT2323G13A020
JT2323G13B020
JT2427
1
8
17
JT2427G13A020
JT2427G13B020
25
JT2343G13A020
JT2343G13B020
JT2343
3/4
3.5
JS2211
1/2
1
60
JS2211G14A020
JS2211G14B020
JS2212
1/2
2.5
40
JS2212G14A020
JS2212G14B020
JS2213
1/2
3.5
25
JS2213G14A020
JS2213G14B020
JS2312
3/4
2.5
40
JS2312G14A020
JS2312G14B020
JS2313
3/4
3.5
25
JS2313G14A020
JS2313G14B020
JS2417
1
8
17
JS2417G14A020
JS2417G14B020
JS2517
1-1/4
8
17
JS2517G14A020
JS2517G14B020
JS2221
1/2
1
60
JS2221G14A020
JS2221G14B020
JS2222
1/2
2.5
40
JS2222G14A020
JS2222G14B020
JS2223
1/2
3.5
25
JS2223G14A020
JS2223G14B020
JS2322
3/4
2.5
40
JS2322G14A020
JS2322G14B020
JS2323
3/4
3.5
25
JS2323G14A020
JS2323G14B020
JS2427
1
8
17
JS2427G14A020
JS2427G14B020
JS2343
3/4
3.5
25
JS2343G14A020
JS2343G14B020

JT2211
1/2
1
60
JT2211G23A020
JT2211G23B020
JT2212
1/2
2.5
40
JT2212G23A020
JT2212G23B020
JT2213
1/2
3.5
25
JT2213G23A020
JT2213G23B020
JT2312
3/4
2.5
40
JT2312G23A020
JT2312G23B020
JT2313
3/4
3.5
25
JT2313G23A020
JT2313G23B020
JT2417
1
8
17
JT2417G23A020
JT2417G23B020
JT2517
1-1/4
8
17
JT2517G23A020
JT2517G23B020
JT2221
1/2
1
60
JT2221G23A020
JT2221G23B020
JT2222
1/2
2.5
40
JT2222G23A020
JT2222G23B020
JT2223
1/2
3.5
25
JT2223G23A020
JT2223G23B020
JT2322
3/4
2.5
40
JT2322G23A020
JT2322G23B020
JT2323
3/4
3.5
25
JT2323G23A020
JT2323G23B020
JT2427
1
8
17
JT2427G23A020
JT2427G23B020
JT2343
3/4
3.5
25
JT2343G23A020
JT2343G23B020
JS2211
1/2
1
60
JS2211G24A020
JS2211G24B020
JS2212
1/2
2.5
40
JS2212G24A020
JS2212G24B020
JS2213
1/2
3.5
25
JS2213G24A020
JS2213G24B020
JS2312
3/4
2.5
40
JS2312G24A020
JS2312G24B020
JS2313
3/4
3.5
25
JS2313G24A020
JS2313G24B020
JS2417
1
8
17
JS2417G24A020
JS2417G24B020
JS2517
1-1/4
8
17
JS2517G24A020
JS2517G24B020
JS2221
1/2
1
60
JS2221G24A020
JS2221G24B020
JS2222
1/2
2.5
40
JS2222G24A020
JS2222G24B020
JS2223
1/2
3.5
25
JS2223G24A020
JS2223G24B020
JS2322
3/4
2.5
40
JS2322G24A020
JS2322G24B020
JS2323
3/4
3.5
25
JS2323G24A020
JS2323G24B020
JS2427
1
8
17
JS2427G24A020
JS2427G24B020
JS2343
3/4
3.5
25
JS2343G24A020
JS2343G24B020
Valve
Size,
inches
Cv
Closeoff
24 VAC, 60 Hz
120 VAC, 60 Hz

JT3213
1/2
4
25
JT3213G13A020
JT3315
3/4
5
20
JT3315G13A020
JT3417
1
8
17
JT3417G13A020
JT3517
1-1/4
8
17
JT3517G13A020
JT3223
1/2
4
25
JT3223G13A020
JT3325
3/4
5
20
JT3325G13A020
JT3427
1
8
17
JT3427G13A020
25
JT3343G13A020
JT3343
3/4
4
JS3213
1/2
4
25
JS3213G14A020
JS3315
3/4
5
20
JS3315G14A020
JS3417
1
8
17
JS3417G14A020
JS3517
1-1/4
8
17
JS3517G14A020
JS3223
1/2
4
25
JS3223G14A020
JS3325
3/4
5
20
JS3325G14A020
JS3427
1
8
17
JS3427G14A020
JS3343
3/4
4
25
JS3343G14A020
series valves.
JT3213G13B020
JT3315G13B020
JT3417G13B020
JT3517G13B020
JT3223G13B020
JT3325G13B020
JT3427G13B020
JT3343G13B020
JS3213G14B020
JS3315G14B020
JS3417G14B020
JS3517G14B020
JS3223G14B020
JS3325G14B020
JS3427G14B020
JS3343G14B020

Code Number
J647-601
J647-602
J647-603
J647-604
J647-605
J647-606
J647-607
Description
Inverted Flare Nut


reheat applications
Actuator
Valve

Standard Closeoff

Standard Closeoff

Standard Closeoff
Ordering Guide

High Closeoff
Z o n e Va l v e s
J SERIES


reheat applications
Buna-N (Standard Temperature) or Nitrile Disk
(High Temperature) provides tight shutoff
PopTop Actuator snaps in place for easy removal
Provides economical control of hot or chilled water and 15 psig steam

for fan coil, baseboard radiator, and VAV reheat applications
Buna-N (Standard Temperature) or Nitrile Disk (High Temperature)
provides tight shutoff
during installation
Size,
inches
Cv
Closeoff
24 VAC, 60 Hz
JH13A020 Standard Temperature
JH14A020 High Temperature

during installation
Actuator
Actuator
Actuator
Valve

High Closeoff

High Closeoff
120 VAC, 60 Hz
JH13B020 Standard Temperature
JH14B020 High Temperature

JT2211
1/2
1
75
JT2211H13A020
JT2211H13B020
JT2212
1/2
2.5
50
JT2212H13A020
JT2212H13B020
JT2213
1/2
3.5
30
JT2213H13A020
JT2213H13B020
JT2312
3/4
2.5
50
JT2312H13A020
JT2312H13B020
JT2313
3/4
3.5
30
JT2313H13A020
JT2313H13B020
JT2417
1
8
20
JT2417H13A020
JT2417H13B020
JT2517
1-1/4
8
20
JT2517H13A020
JT2517H13B020
JT2221
1/2
1
75
JT2221H13A020
JT2221H13B020
JT2222
1/2
2.5
50
JT2222H13A020
JT2222H13B020
JT2223
1/2
3.5
30
JT2223H13A020
JT2223H13B020
JT2322
3/4
2.5
50
JT2322H13A020
JT2322H13B020
JT2323
3/4
3.5
30
JT2323H13A020
JT2323H13B020
JT2427
1
8
20
JT2427H13A020
JT2427H13B020
30
JT2343H13A020
JT2343H13B020
JT2343
3/4
3.5
JS2211
1/2
1
75
JS2211H14A020
JS2211H14B020
JS2212
1/2
2.5
50
JS2212H14A020
JS2212H14B020
JS2213
1/2
3.5
30
JS2213H14A020
JS2213H14B020
JS2312
3/4
2.5
50
JS2312H14A020
JS2312H14B020
JS2313
3/4
3.5
30
JS2313H14A020
JS2313H14B020
JS2417
1
8
20
JS2417H14A020
JS2417H14B020
JS2517
1-1/4
8
20
JS2517H14A020
JS2517H14B020
JS2221
1/2
1
75
JS2221H14A020
JS2221H14B020
JS2222
1/2
2.5
50
JS2222H14A020
JS2222H14B020
JS2223
1/2
3.5
30
JS2223H14A020
JS2223H14B020
JS2322
3/4
2.5
50
JS2322H14A020
JS2322H14B020
JS2323
3/4
3.5
30
JS2323H14A020
JS2323H14B020
JS2427
1
8
20
JS2427H14A020
JS2427H14B020
JS2343
3/4
3.5
30
JS2343H14A020
JS2343H14B020
Note: JH13-style actuators can only be used with JT series valves; JH14-style actuators can only be used with JS series valves.
Valve
Size,
inches
Cv
Closeoff
24 VAC, 60 Hz
JH23A020 Standard Temperaure
120 VAC, 60 Hz

JT2211
1/2
1
75
JT2211H23A020
JT2211H23B020
JT2212
1/2
2.5
50
JT2212H23A020
JT2212H23B020
JT2213
1/2
3.5
30
JT2213H23A020
JT2213H23B020
JT2312
3/4
2.5
50
JT2312H23A020
JT2312H23B020
JT2313
3/4
3.5
30
JT2313H23A020
JT2313H23B020
JT2417
1
8
20
JT2417H23A020
JT2417H23B020
JT2517
1-1/4
8
20
JT2517H23A020
JT2517H23B020
JT2221
1/2
1
75
JT2221H23A020
JT2221H23B020
JT2222
1/2
2.5
50
JT2222H23A020
JT2222H23B020
JT2223
1/2
3.5
30
JT2223H23A020
JT2223H23B020
JT2322
3/4
2.5
50
JT2322H23A020
JT2322H23B020
JT2323
3/4
3.5
30
JT2323H23A020
JT2323H23B020
JT2427
1
8
20
JT2427H23A020
JT2427H23B020
30
JT2343H23A020
JT2343H23B020
JT2343
3/4
3.5
JS2211
1/2
1
75
JS2211H24A020
JS2211H24B020
JS2212
1/2
2.5
50
JS2212H24A020
JS2212H24B020
JS2213
1/2
3.5
30
JS2213H24A020
JS2213H24B020
JS2312
3/4
2.5
50
JS2312H24A020
JS2312H24B020
JS2313
3/4
3.5
30
JS2313H24A020
JS2313H24B020
JS2417
1
8
20
JS2417H24A020
JS2417H24B020
JS2517
1-1/4
8
20
JS2517H24A020
JS2517H24B020
JS2221
1/2
1
75
JS2221H24A020
JS2221H24B020
JS2222
1/2
2.5
50
JS2222H24A020
JS2222H24B020
JS2223
1/2
3.5
30
JS2223H24A020
JS2223H24B020
JS2322
3/4
2.5
50
JS2322H24A020
JS2322H24B020
JS2323
3/4
3.5
30
JS2323H24A020
JS2323H24B020
JS2427
1
8
20
JS2427H24A020
JS2427H24B020
30
JS2343H24A020
JS2343H24B020
JS2343
3/4
3.5
Valve
Size,
inches
Cv
Closeoff
24 VAC, 60 Hz
120 VAC, 60 Hz

JT3213
1/2
4
30
JT3213H13A020
JT3315
3/4
5
25
JT3315H13A020
JT3417
1
8
20
JT3417H13A020
JT3517
1-1/4
8
20
JT3517H13A020
JT3223
1/2
4
30
JT3223H13A020
JT3325
3/4
5
25
JT3325H13A020
JT3427
1
8
20
JT3427H13A020
30
JT3343H13A020
JT3343
3/4
4
JS3213
1/2
4
30
JS3213H14A020
JS3315
3/4
5
25
JS3315H14A020
JS3417
1
8
20
JS3417H14A020
JS3517
1-1/4
8
20
JS3517H14A020
JS3223
1/2
4
30
JS3223H14A020
JS3325
3/4
5
25
JS3325H14A020
JS3427
1
8
20
JS3427H14A020
JS3343
3/4
4
30
JS3343H14A020
JT3213H13B020
JT3315H13B020
JT3417H13B020
JT3517H13B020
JT3223H13B020
JT3325H13B020
JT3427H13B020
JT3343H13B020
JS3213H14B020
JS3315H14B020
JS3417H14B020
JS3517H14B020
JS3223H14B020
JS3325H14B020
JS3427H14B020
JS3343H14B020
Contact customer service at:

1 (800) ASK JNSN
1 (800) 275 5676

Printed in USA PUBL-3510
Ordering Guide

High Closeoff
Z o n e Va l v e s
J SERIES


reheat applications

during installation
Size,
inches
Cv
Closeoff
24 VAC, 60 Hz

during installation
Actuator
Actuator
Actuator
Valve

High Closeoff

High Closeoff
120 VAC, 60 Hz

JT2211
1/2
1
75
JT2211H13A020
JT2211H13B020
JT2212
1/2
2.5
50
JT2212H13A020
JT2212H13B020
JT2213
1/2
3.5
30
JT2213H13A020
JT2213H13B020
JT2312
3/4
2.5
50
JT2312H13A020
JT2312H13B020
JT2313
3/4
3.5
30
JT2313H13A020
JT2313H13B020
JT2417
1
8
20
JT2417H13A020
JT2417H13B020
JT2517
1-1/4
8
20
JT2517H13A020
JT2517H13B020
JT2221
1/2
1
75
JT2221H13A020
JT2221H13B020
JT2222
1/2
2.5
50
JT2222H13A020
JT2222H13B020
JT2223
1/2
3.5
30
JT2223H13A020
JT2223H13B020
JT2322
3/4
2.5
50
JT2322H13A020
JT2322H13B020
JT2323
3/4
3.5
30
JT2323H13A020
JT2323H13B020
JT2427
1
8
20
JT2427H13A020
JT2427H13B020
30
JT2343H13A020
JT2343H13B020
JT2343
3/4
3.5
JS2211
1/2
1
75
JS2211H14A020
JS2211H14B020
JS2212
1/2
2.5
50
JS2212H14A020
JS2212H14B020
JS2213
1/2
3.5
30
JS2213H14A020
JS2213H14B020
JS2312
3/4
2.5
50
JS2312H14A020
JS2312H14B020
JS2313
3/4
3.5
30
JS2313H14A020
JS2313H14B020
JS2417
1
8
20
JS2417H14A020
JS2417H14B020
JS2517
1-1/4
8
20
JS2517H14A020
JS2517H14B020
JS2221
1/2
1
75
JS2221H14A020
JS2221H14B020
JS2222
1/2
2.5
50
JS2222H14A020
JS2222H14B020
JS2223
1/2
3.5
30
JS2223H14A020
JS2223H14B020
JS2322
3/4
2.5
50
JS2322H14A020
JS2322H14B020
JS2323
3/4
3.5
30
JS2323H14A020
JS2323H14B020
JS2427
1
8
20
JS2427H14A020
JS2427H14B020
JS2343
3/4
3.5
30
JS2343H14A020
JS2343H14B020
Valve
Size,
inches
Cv
Closeoff
24 VAC, 60 Hz
120 VAC, 60 Hz

JT2211
1/2
1
75
JT2211H23A020
JT2211H23B020
JT2212
1/2
2.5
50
JT2212H23A020
JT2212H23B020
JT2213
1/2
3.5
30
JT2213H23A020
JT2213H23B020
JT2312
3/4
2.5
50
JT2312H23A020
JT2312H23B020
JT2313
3/4
3.5
30
JT2313H23A020
JT2313H23B020
JT2417
1
8
20
JT2417H23A020
JT2417H23B020
JT2517
1-1/4
8
20
JT2517H23A020
JT2517H23B020
JT2221
1/2
1
75
JT2221H23A020
JT2221H23B020
JT2222
1/2
2.5
50
JT2222H23A020
JT2222H23B020
JT2223
1/2
3.5
30
JT2223H23A020
JT2223H23B020
JT2322
3/4
2.5
50
JT2322H23A020
JT2322H23B020
JT2323
3/4
3.5
30
JT2323H23A020
JT2323H23B020
JT2427
1
8
20
JT2427H23A020
JT2427H23B020
30
JT2343H23A020
JT2343H23B020
JT2343
3/4
3.5
JS2211
1/2
1
75
JS2211H24A020
JS2211H24B020
JS2212
1/2
2.5
50
JS2212H24A020
JS2212H24B020
JS2213
1/2
3.5
30
JS2213H24A020
JS2213H24B020
JS2312
3/4
2.5
50
JS2312H24A020
JS2312H24B020
JS2313
3/4
3.5
30
JS2313H24A020
JS2313H24B020
JS2417
1
8
20
JS2417H24A020
JS2417H24B020
JS2517
1-1/4
8
20
JS2517H24A020
JS2517H24B020
JS2221
1/2
1
75
JS2221H24A020
JS2221H24B020
JS2222
1/2
2.5
50
JS2222H24A020
JS2222H24B020
JS2223
1/2
3.5
30
JS2223H24A020
JS2223H24B020
JS2322
3/4
2.5
50
JS2322H24A020
JS2322H24B020
JS2323
3/4
3.5
30
JS2323H24A020
JS2323H24B020
JS2427
1
8
20
JS2427H24A020
JS2427H24B020
30
JS2343H24A020
JS2343H24B020
JS2343
3/4
3.5
Valve
Size,
inches
Cv
Closeoff
24 VAC, 60 Hz
120 VAC, 60 Hz

JT3213
1/2
4
30
JT3213H13A020
JT3315
3/4
5
25
JT3315H13A020
JT3417
1
8
20
JT3417H13A020
JT3517
1-1/4
8
20
JT3517H13A020
JT3223
1/2
4
30
JT3223H13A020
JT3325
3/4
5
25
JT3325H13A020
JT3427
1
8
20
JT3427H13A020
30
JT3343H13A020
JT3343
3/4
4
JS3213
1/2
4
30
JS3213H14A020
JS3315
3/4
5
25
JS3315H14A020
JS3417
1
8
20
JS3417H14A020
JS3517
1-1/4
8
20
JS3517H14A020
JS3223
1/2
4
30
JS3223H14A020
JS3325
3/4
5
25
JS3325H14A020
JS3427
1
8
20
JS3427H14A020
JS3343
3/4
4
30
JS3343H14A020
JT3213H13B020
JT3315H13B020
JT3417H13B020
JT3517H13B020
JT3223H13B020
JT3325H13B020
JT3427H13B020
JT3343H13B020
JS3213H14B020
JS3315H14B020
JS3417H14B020
JS3517H14B020
JS3223H14B020
JS3325H14B020
JS3427H14B020
JS3343H14B020

1 (800) ASK JNSN
1 (800) 275 5676

Ordering Guide

High Closeoff
Z o n e Va l v e s
J SERIES


reheat applications

during installation
Size,
inches
Cv
Closeoff
24 VAC, 60 Hz

during installation
Actuator
Actuator
Actuator
Valve

High Closeoff

High Closeoff
120 VAC, 60 Hz

JT2211
1/2
1
75
JT2211H13A020
JT2211H13B020
JT2212
1/2
2.5
50
JT2212H13A020
JT2212H13B020
JT2213
1/2
3.5
30
JT2213H13A020
JT2213H13B020
JT2312
3/4
2.5
50
JT2312H13A020
JT2312H13B020
JT2313
3/4
3.5
30
JT2313H13A020
JT2313H13B020
JT2417
1
8
20
JT2417H13A020
JT2417H13B020
JT2517
1-1/4
8
20
JT2517H13A020
JT2517H13B020
JT2221
1/2
1
75
JT2221H13A020
JT2221H13B020
JT2222
1/2
2.5
50
JT2222H13A020
JT2222H13B020
JT2223
1/2
3.5
30
JT2223H13A020
JT2223H13B020
JT2322
3/4
2.5
50
JT2322H13A020
JT2322H13B020
JT2323
3/4
3.5
30
JT2323H13A020
JT2323H13B020
JT2427
1
8
20
JT2427H13A020
JT2427H13B020
30
JT2343H13A020
JT2343H13B020
JT2343
3/4
3.5
JS2211
1/2
1
75
JS2211H14A020
JS2211H14B020
JS2212
1/2
2.5
50
JS2212H14A020
JS2212H14B020
JS2213
1/2
3.5
30
JS2213H14A020
JS2213H14B020
JS2312
3/4
2.5
50
JS2312H14A020
JS2312H14B020
JS2313
3/4
3.5
30
JS2313H14A020
JS2313H14B020
JS2417
1
8
20
JS2417H14A020
JS2417H14B020
JS2517
1-1/4
8
20
JS2517H14A020
JS2517H14B020
JS2221
1/2
1
75
JS2221H14A020
JS2221H14B020
JS2222
1/2
2.5
50
JS2222H14A020
JS2222H14B020
JS2223
1/2
3.5
30
JS2223H14A020
JS2223H14B020
JS2322
3/4
2.5
50
JS2322H14A020
JS2322H14B020
JS2323
3/4
3.5
30
JS2323H14A020
JS2323H14B020
JS2427
1
8
20
JS2427H14A020
JS2427H14B020
JS2343
3/4
3.5
30
JS2343H14A020
JS2343H14B020
Valve
Size,
inches
Cv
Closeoff
24 VAC, 60 Hz
120 VAC, 60 Hz

JT2211
1/2
1
75
JT2211H23A020
JT2211H23B020
JT2212
1/2
2.5
50
JT2212H23A020
JT2212H23B020
JT2213
1/2
3.5
30
JT2213H23A020
JT2213H23B020
JT2312
3/4
2.5
50
JT2312H23A020
JT2312H23B020
JT2313
3/4
3.5
30
JT2313H23A020
JT2313H23B020
JT2417
1
8
20
JT2417H23A020
JT2417H23B020
JT2517
1-1/4
8
20
JT2517H23A020
JT2517H23B020
JT2221
1/2
1
75
JT2221H23A020
JT2221H23B020
JT2222
1/2
2.5
50
JT2222H23A020
JT2222H23B020
JT2223
1/2
3.5
30
JT2223H23A020
JT2223H23B020
JT2322
3/4
2.5
50
JT2322H23A020
JT2322H23B020
JT2323
3/4
3.5
30
JT2323H23A020
JT2323H23B020
JT2427
1
8
20
JT2427H23A020
JT2427H23B020
30
JT2343H23A020
JT2343H23B020
JT2343
3/4
3.5
JS2211
1/2
1
75
JS2211H24A020
JS2211H24B020
JS2212
1/2
2.5
50
JS2212H24A020
JS2212H24B020
JS2213
1/2
3.5
30
JS2213H24A020
JS2213H24B020
JS2312
3/4
2.5
50
JS2312H24A020
JS2312H24B020
JS2313
3/4
3.5
30
JS2313H24A020
JS2313H24B020
JS2417
1
8
20
JS2417H24A020
JS2417H24B020
JS2517
1-1/4
8
20
JS2517H24A020
JS2517H24B020
JS2221
1/2
1
75
JS2221H24A020
JS2221H24B020
JS2222
1/2
2.5
50
JS2222H24A020
JS2222H24B020
JS2223
1/2
3.5
30
JS2223H24A020
JS2223H24B020
JS2322
3/4
2.5
50
JS2322H24A020
JS2322H24B020
JS2323
3/4
3.5
30
JS2323H24A020
JS2323H24B020
JS2427
1
8
20
JS2427H24A020
JS2427H24B020
30
JS2343H24A020
JS2343H24B020
JS2343
3/4
3.5
Valve
Size,
inches
Cv
Closeoff
24 VAC, 60 Hz
120 VAC, 60 Hz

JT3213
1/2
4
30
JT3213H13A020
JT3315
3/4
5
25
JT3315H13A020
JT3417
1
8
20
JT3417H13A020
JT3517
1-1/4
8
20
JT3517H13A020
JT3223
1/2
4
30
JT3223H13A020
JT3325
3/4
5
25
JT3325H13A020
JT3427
1
8
20
JT3427H13A020
30
JT3343H13A020
JT3343
3/4
4
JS3213
1/2
4
30
JS3213H14A020
JS3315
3/4
5
25
JS3315H14A020
JS3417
1
8
20
JS3417H14A020
JS3517
1-1/4
8
20
JS3517H14A020
JS3223
1/2
4
30
JS3223H14A020
JS3325
3/4
5
25
JS3325H14A020
JS3427
1
8
20
JS3427H14A020
JS3343
3/4
4
30
JS3343H14A020
JT3213H13B020
JT3315H13B020
JT3417H13B020
JT3517H13B020
JT3223H13B020
JT3325H13B020
JT3427H13B020
JT3343H13B020
JS3213H14B020
JS3315H14B020
JS3417H14B020
JS3517H14B020
JS3223H14B020
JS3325H14B020
JS3427H14B020
JS3343H14B020

1 (800) ASK JNSN
1 (800) 275 5676

Ordering Guide
J Series Electric Zone Valve Assemblies Modulating Control
JZ o nSERIES
e Va l v e s
Economical control of hot or chilled water

(up to 50% glycol) for fan coil, baseboard
0 to 10 VDC proportional and three-wire floating control
32 to 200F (0 to 93C) fluid temperature rating
32 to 125F (0 to 52C) ambient temperature rating
20 to 30 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Forged brass body
Size,
inches
Cv
Closeoff
Three-Wire Floating
JT33A00T
Actuator
Closeoff
JP33A000
Economical control of hot or chilled water (up to 50% glycol) for

fan coil, baseboard radiator, and VAV reheat applications
20 to 30 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Forged brass body

20 to 30 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Forged brass body
Actuator
Valve
Spring Return Open
Non-Spring Return
Valve
Size,
inches
Cv
(Operating
/Power
Failure)
Three-Wire Floating
JT13A000
Actuator
JP13A000
Two-Way Sweat Connections: 32 to 200F Fluid Temperature, 32 to 125F Ambient

JM2211
1/2
1
50 / 50
JM2211T13A000
JM2211P13A000
JM2212
1/2
2
50 / 20
JM2212T13A000
JM2212P13A000
JM2213
1/2
4
35 / 20
JM2213T13A000
JM2213P13A000
JM2312
3/4
2
50 / 20
JM2312T13A000
JM2312P13A000
JM2313
3/4
4
35 / 20
JM2313T13A000
JM2313P13A000
JM2317
3/4
7.5
35 / 15
JM2317T13A000
JM2317P13A000
JM2413
1
4
35 / 20
JM2413T13A000
JM2413P13A000
JM2417
1
8
35 / 15
JM2417T13A000
JM2417P13A000
JM2517
1-1/4
8
35 / 15
JM2517T13A000
JM2517P13A000
Two-Way Threaded NPT Connections: 32 to 200F Fluid Temperature, 32 to 125F Ambient
JM2221
1/2
1
50 / 50
JM2221T13A000
JM2221P13A000
JM2222
1/2
2
50 / 20
JM2222T13A000
JM2222P13A000
JM2223
1/2
4
35 / 20
JM2223T13A000
JM2223P13A000
JM2322
3/4
2
50 / 20
JM2322T13A000
JM2322P13A000
JM2323
3/4
4
35 / 20
JM2323T13A000
JM2323P13A000
JM2327
3/4
7.5
35 / 15
JM2327T13A000
JM2327P13A000
JM2427
1
8
35 / 15
JM2427T13A000
JM2427P13A000
Three-Way Sweat Connections: 32 to 200F Fluid Temperature, 32 to 125F Ambient - Mixing Configuration Only
JM3211
1/2
1
50 / 50
JM3211T13A000
JM3211P13A000
JM3212
1/2
2
50 / 20
JM3212T13A000
JM3212P13A000
JM3213
1/2
4
35 / 20
JM3213T13A000
JM3213P13A000
JM3312
3/4
2
50 / 20
JM3312T13A000
JM3312P13A000
JM3313
3/4
4
35 / 20
JM3313T13A000
JM3313P13A000
JM3317
3/4
7.5
35 / 15
JM3317T13A000
JM3317P13A000
JM3413
1
4
35 / 20
JM3413T13A000
JM3413P13A000
JM3417
1
8
35 / 15
JM3417T13A000
JM3417P13A000
JM3517
1-1/4
8
35 / 15
JM3517T13A000
JM3517P13A000
Three-Way Threaded NPT Connections: 32 to 200F Fluid Temperature, 32 to 125F Ambient - Mixing Configuration Only
JM3221
1/2
1
50 / 50
JM3221T13A000
JM3221P13A000
JM3222
1/2
2
50 / 20
JM3222T13A000
JM3222P13A000
JM3223
1/2
4
35 / 20
JM3223T13A000
JM3223P13A000
JM3322
3/4
2
50 / 20
JM3322T13A000
JM3322P13A000
JM3323
3/4
4
35 / 20
JM3323T13A000
JM3323P13A000
JM3327
3/4
7.5
35 / 15
JM3327T13A000
JM3327P13A000
JM3427
1
8
35 / 15
JM3427T13A000
JM3427P13A000
Size,
inches
Cv
Closeoff
Three-Wire Floating
JT23A000
JP23A000

JM2211
1/2
1
50
JM2211T23A000
JM2212
1/2
2
50
JM2212T23A000
JM2213
1/2
4
35
JM2213T23A000
JM2312
3/4
2
50
JM2312T23A000
JM2313
3/4
4
35
JM2313T23A000
JM2317
3/4
7.5
35
JM2317T23A000
JM2413
1
4
35
JM2413T23A000
JM2417
1
8
35
JM2417T23A000
JM2517
1-1/4
8
35
JM2517T23A000
JM2221
1/2
1
50
JM2221T23A000
JM2222
1/2
2
50
JM2222T23A000
JM2223
1/2
4
35
JM2223T23A000
JM2322
3/4
2
50
JM2322T23A000
JM2323
3/4
4
35
JM2323T23A000
JM2327
3/4
7.5
35
JM2327T23A000
JM2427
1
8
35
JM2427T23A000

1 (800) ASK JNSN
1 (800) 275 5676
JM2211P23A000
JM2212P23A000
JM2213P23A000
JM2312P23A000
JM2313P23A000
JM2317P23A000
JM2413P23A000
JM2417P23A000
JM2517P23A000
JM2221P23A000
JM2222P23A000
JM2223P23A000
JM2322P23A000
JM2323P23A000
JM2327P23A000
JM2427P23A000
Series Butterfly
Valves
JVFSeries
Electric
Zone
Valve Assemblies
Low
PressureControl
Pneumatic Actuated
Modulating

JM2211
1/2
1
50
JM2211T33A00T
JM2211P33A000
JM2212
1/2
2
50
JM2212T33A00T
JM2212P33A000
JM2213
1/2
4
35
JM2213T33A00T
JM2213P33A000
JM2312
3/4
2
50
JM2312T33A00T
JM2312P33A000
JM2313
3/4
4
35
JM2313T33A00T
JM2313P33A000
JM2317
3/4
7.5
35
JM2317T33A00T
JM2317P33A000
JM2413
1
4
35
JM2413T33A00T
JM2413P33A000
JM2417
1
8
35
JM2417T33A00T
JM2417P33A000
JM2517
1-1/4
8
35
JM2517T33A00T
JM2517P33A000
JM2221
1/2
1
50
JM2221T33A00T
JM2221P33A000
JM2222
1/2
2
50
JM2222T33A00T
JM2222P33A000
JM2223
1/2
4
35
JM2223T33A00T
JM2223P33A000
JM2322
3/4
2
50
JM2322T33A00T
JM2322P33A000
JM2323
3/4
4
35
JM2323T33A00T
JM2323P33A000
JM2327
3/4
7.5
35
JM2327T33A00T
JM2327P33A000
JM2427
1
8
35
JM2427T33A00T
JM2427P33A000
JM3211
1/2
1
50
JM3211T33A00T
JM3211P33A000
JM3212
1/2
2
50
JM3212T33A00T
JM3212P33A000
JM3213
1/2
4
35
JM3213T33A00T
JM3213P33A000
JM3312
3/4
2
50
JM3312T33A00T
JM3312P33A000
JM3313
3/4
4
35
JM3313T33A00T
JM3313P33A000
JM3317
3/4
7.5
35
JM3317T33A00T
JM3317P33A000
JM3413
1
4
35
JM3413T33A00T
JM3413P33A000
JM3417
1
8
35
JM3417T33A00T
JM3417P33A000
JM3517
1-1/4
8
35
JM3517T33A00T
JM3517P33A000
JM3221
1/2
1
50
JM3221T33A00T
JM3221P33A000
JM3222
1/2
2
50
JM3222T33A00T
JM3222P33A000
JM3223
1/2
4
35
JM3223T33A00T
JM3223P33A000
JM3322
3/4
2
50
JM3322T33A00T
JM3322P33A000
JM3323
3/4
4
35
JM3323T33A00T
JM3323P33A000
JM3327
3/4
7.5
35
JM3327T33A00T
JM3327P33A000
JM3427
1
8
35
JM3427T33A00T
JM3427P33A000
Valve
Ordering Guide
JZ o nSERIES
e Va l v e s

20 to 30 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Forged brass body
Size,
inches
Cv
Closeoff
Three-Wire Floating
JT33A00T
Actuator
Closeoff
JP33A000

20 to 30 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Forged brass body

20 to 30 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Forged brass body
Actuator
Valve
Spring Return Open
Non-Spring Return
Valve
Size,
inches
Cv
(Operating
/Power
Failure)
Three-Wire Floating
JT13A000
Actuator
JP13A000

JM2211
1/2
1
50 / 50
JM2211T13A000
JM2211P13A000
JM2212
1/2
2
50 / 20
JM2212T13A000
JM2212P13A000
JM2213
1/2
4
35 / 20
JM2213T13A000
JM2213P13A000
JM2312
3/4
2
50 / 20
JM2312T13A000
JM2312P13A000
JM2313
3/4
4
35 / 20
JM2313T13A000
JM2313P13A000
JM2317
3/4
7.5
35 / 15
JM2317T13A000
JM2317P13A000
JM2413
1
4
35 / 20
JM2413T13A000
JM2413P13A000
JM2417
1
8
35 / 15
JM2417T13A000
JM2417P13A000
JM2517
1-1/4
8
35 / 15
JM2517T13A000
JM2517P13A000
JM2221
1/2
1
50 / 50
JM2221T13A000
JM2221P13A000
JM2222
1/2
2
50 / 20
JM2222T13A000
JM2222P13A000
JM2223
1/2
4
35 / 20
JM2223T13A000
JM2223P13A000
JM2322
3/4
2
50 / 20
JM2322T13A000
JM2322P13A000
JM2323
3/4
4
35 / 20
JM2323T13A000
JM2323P13A000
JM2327
3/4
7.5
35 / 15
JM2327T13A000
JM2327P13A000
JM2427
1
8
35 / 15
JM2427T13A000
JM2427P13A000
JM3211
1/2
1
50 / 50
JM3211T13A000
JM3211P13A000
JM3212
1/2
2
50 / 20
JM3212T13A000
JM3212P13A000
JM3213
1/2
4
35 / 20
JM3213T13A000
JM3213P13A000
JM3312
3/4
2
50 / 20
JM3312T13A000
JM3312P13A000
JM3313
3/4
4
35 / 20
JM3313T13A000
JM3313P13A000
JM3317
3/4
7.5
35 / 15
JM3317T13A000
JM3317P13A000
JM3413
1
4
35 / 20
JM3413T13A000
JM3413P13A000
JM3417
1
8
35 / 15
JM3417T13A000
JM3417P13A000
JM3517
1-1/4
8
35 / 15
JM3517T13A000
JM3517P13A000
JM3221
1/2
1
50 / 50
JM3221T13A000
JM3221P13A000
JM3222
1/2
2
50 / 20
JM3222T13A000
JM3222P13A000
JM3223
1/2
4
35 / 20
JM3223T13A000
JM3223P13A000
JM3322
3/4
2
50 / 20
JM3322T13A000
JM3322P13A000
JM3323
3/4
4
35 / 20
JM3323T13A000
JM3323P13A000
JM3327
3/4
7.5
35 / 15
JM3327T13A000
JM3327P13A000
JM3427
1
8
35 / 15
JM3427T13A000
JM3427P13A000
Size,
inches
Cv
Closeoff
Three-Wire Floating
JT23A000
JP23A000

JM2211
1/2
1
50
JM2211T23A000
JM2212
1/2
2
50
JM2212T23A000
JM2213
1/2
4
35
JM2213T23A000
JM2312
3/4
2
50
JM2312T23A000
JM2313
3/4
4
35
JM2313T23A000
JM2317
3/4
7.5
35
JM2317T23A000
JM2413
1
4
35
JM2413T23A000
JM2417
1
8
35
JM2417T23A000
JM2517
1-1/4
8
35
JM2517T23A000
JM2221
1/2
1
50
JM2221T23A000
JM2222
1/2
2
50
JM2222T23A000
JM2223
1/2
4
35
JM2223T23A000
JM2322
3/4
2
50
JM2322T23A000
JM2323
3/4
4
35
JM2323T23A000
JM2327
3/4
7.5
35
JM2327T23A000
JM2427
1
8
35
JM2427T23A000

1 (800) ASK JNSN
1 (800) 275 5676
JM2211P23A000
JM2212P23A000
JM2213P23A000
JM2312P23A000
JM2313P23A000
JM2317P23A000
JM2413P23A000
JM2417P23A000
JM2517P23A000
JM2221P23A000
JM2222P23A000
JM2223P23A000
JM2322P23A000
JM2323P23A000
JM2327P23A000
JM2427P23A000
Series Butterfly
Valves
JVFSeries
Electric
Zone
Valve Assemblies
Low
PressureControl
Pneumatic Actuated
Modulating

JM2211
1/2
1
50
JM2211T33A00T
JM2211P33A000
JM2212
1/2
2
50
JM2212T33A00T
JM2212P33A000
JM2213
1/2
4
35
JM2213T33A00T
JM2213P33A000
JM2312
3/4
2
50
JM2312T33A00T
JM2312P33A000
JM2313
3/4
4
35
JM2313T33A00T
JM2313P33A000
JM2317
3/4
7.5
35
JM2317T33A00T
JM2317P33A000
JM2413
1
4
35
JM2413T33A00T
JM2413P33A000
JM2417
1
8
35
JM2417T33A00T
JM2417P33A000
JM2517
1-1/4
8
35
JM2517T33A00T
JM2517P33A000
JM2221
1/2
1
50
JM2221T33A00T
JM2221P33A000
JM2222
1/2
2
50
JM2222T33A00T
JM2222P33A000
JM2223
1/2
4
35
JM2223T33A00T
JM2223P33A000
JM2322
3/4
2
50
JM2322T33A00T
JM2322P33A000
JM2323
3/4
4
35
JM2323T33A00T
JM2323P33A000
JM2327
3/4
7.5
35
JM2327T33A00T
JM2327P33A000
JM2427
1
8
35
JM2427T33A00T
JM2427P33A000
JM3211
1/2
1
50
JM3211T33A00T
JM3211P33A000
JM3212
1/2
2
50
JM3212T33A00T
JM3212P33A000
JM3213
1/2
4
35
JM3213T33A00T
JM3213P33A000
JM3312
3/4
2
50
JM3312T33A00T
JM3312P33A000
JM3313
3/4
4
35
JM3313T33A00T
JM3313P33A000
JM3317
3/4
7.5
35
JM3317T33A00T
JM3317P33A000
JM3413
1
4
35
JM3413T33A00T
JM3413P33A000
JM3417
1
8
35
JM3417T33A00T
JM3417P33A000
JM3517
1-1/4
8
35
JM3517T33A00T
JM3517P33A000
JM3221
1/2
1
50
JM3221T33A00T
JM3221P33A000
JM3222
1/2
2
50
JM3222T33A00T
JM3222P33A000
JM3223
1/2
4
35
JM3223T33A00T
JM3223P33A000
JM3322
3/4
2
50
JM3322T33A00T
JM3322P33A000
JM3323
3/4
4
35
JM3323T33A00T
JM3323P33A000
JM3327
3/4
7.5
35
JM3327T33A00T
JM3327P33A000
JM3427
1
8
35
JM3427T33A00T
JM3427P33A000
Valve
Ordering Guide
JZ o nSERIES
e Va l v e s

20 to 30 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Forged brass body
Size,
inches
Cv
Closeoff
Three-Wire Floating
JT33A00T
Actuator
Closeoff
JP33A000

20 to 30 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Forged brass body

20 to 30 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Forged brass body
Actuator
Valve
Spring Return Open
Non-Spring Return
Valve
Size,
inches
Cv
(Operating
/Power
Failure)
Three-Wire Floating
JT13A000
Actuator
JP13A000

JM2211
1/2
1
50 / 50
JM2211T13A000
JM2211P13A000
JM2212
1/2
2
50 / 20
JM2212T13A000
JM2212P13A000
JM2213
1/2
4
35 / 20
JM2213T13A000
JM2213P13A000
JM2312
3/4
2
50 / 20
JM2312T13A000
JM2312P13A000
JM2313
3/4
4
35 / 20
JM2313T13A000
JM2313P13A000
JM2317
3/4
7.5
35 / 15
JM2317T13A000
JM2317P13A000
JM2413
1
4
35 / 20
JM2413T13A000
JM2413P13A000
JM2417
1
8
35 / 15
JM2417T13A000
JM2417P13A000
JM2517
1-1/4
8
35 / 15
JM2517T13A000
JM2517P13A000
JM2221
1/2
1
50 / 50
JM2221T13A000
JM2221P13A000
JM2222
1/2
2
50 / 20
JM2222T13A000
JM2222P13A000
JM2223
1/2
4
35 / 20
JM2223T13A000
JM2223P13A000
JM2322
3/4
2
50 / 20
JM2322T13A000
JM2322P13A000
JM2323
3/4
4
35 / 20
JM2323T13A000
JM2323P13A000
JM2327
3/4
7.5
35 / 15
JM2327T13A000
JM2327P13A000
JM2427
1
8
35 / 15
JM2427T13A000
JM2427P13A000
JM3211
1/2
1
50 / 50
JM3211T13A000
JM3211P13A000
JM3212
1/2
2
50 / 20
JM3212T13A000
JM3212P13A000
JM3213
1/2
4
35 / 20
JM3213T13A000
JM3213P13A000
JM3312
3/4
2
50 / 20
JM3312T13A000
JM3312P13A000
JM3313
3/4
4
35 / 20
JM3313T13A000
JM3313P13A000
JM3317
3/4
7.5
35 / 15
JM3317T13A000
JM3317P13A000
JM3413
1
4
35 / 20
JM3413T13A000
JM3413P13A000
JM3417
1
8
35 / 15
JM3417T13A000
JM3417P13A000
JM3517
1-1/4
8
35 / 15
JM3517T13A000
JM3517P13A000
JM3221
1/2
1
50 / 50
JM3221T13A000
JM3221P13A000
JM3222
1/2
2
50 / 20
JM3222T13A000
JM3222P13A000
JM3223
1/2
4
35 / 20
JM3223T13A000
JM3223P13A000
JM3322
3/4
2
50 / 20
JM3322T13A000
JM3322P13A000
JM3323
3/4
4
35 / 20
JM3323T13A000
JM3323P13A000
JM3327
3/4
7.5
35 / 15
JM3327T13A000
JM3327P13A000
JM3427
1
8
35 / 15
JM3427T13A000
JM3427P13A000
Size,
inches
Cv
Closeoff
Three-Wire Floating
JT23A000
JP23A000

JM2211
1/2
1
50
JM2211T23A000
JM2212
1/2
2
50
JM2212T23A000
JM2213
1/2
4
35
JM2213T23A000
JM2312
3/4
2
50
JM2312T23A000
JM2313
3/4
4
35
JM2313T23A000
JM2317
3/4
7.5
35
JM2317T23A000
JM2413
1
4
35
JM2413T23A000
JM2417
1
8
35
JM2417T23A000
JM2517
1-1/4
8
35
JM2517T23A000
JM2221
1/2
1
50
JM2221T23A000
JM2222
1/2
2
50
JM2222T23A000
JM2223
1/2
4
35
JM2223T23A000
JM2322
3/4
2
50
JM2322T23A000
JM2323
3/4
4
35
JM2323T23A000
JM2327
3/4
7.5
35
JM2327T23A000
JM2427
1
8
35
JM2427T23A000

1 (800) ASK JNSN
1 (800) 275 5676
JM2211P23A000
JM2212P23A000
JM2213P23A000
JM2312P23A000
JM2313P23A000
JM2317P23A000
JM2413P23A000
JM2417P23A000
JM2517P23A000
JM2221P23A000
JM2222P23A000
JM2223P23A000
JM2322P23A000
JM2323P23A000
JM2327P23A000
JM2427P23A000
Series Butterfly
Valves
JVFSeries
Electric
Zone
Valve Assemblies
Low
PressureControl
Pneumatic Actuated
Modulating

JM2211
1/2
1
50
JM2211T33A00T
JM2211P33A000
JM2212
1/2
2
50
JM2212T33A00T
JM2212P33A000
JM2213
1/2
4
35
JM2213T33A00T
JM2213P33A000
JM2312
3/4
2
50
JM2312T33A00T
JM2312P33A000
JM2313
3/4
4
35
JM2313T33A00T
JM2313P33A000
JM2317
3/4
7.5
35
JM2317T33A00T
JM2317P33A000
JM2413
1
4
35
JM2413T33A00T
JM2413P33A000
JM2417
1
8
35
JM2417T33A00T
JM2417P33A000
JM2517
1-1/4
8
35
JM2517T33A00T
JM2517P33A000
JM2221
1/2
1
50
JM2221T33A00T
JM2221P33A000
JM2222
1/2
2
50
JM2222T33A00T
JM2222P33A000
JM2223
1/2
4
35
JM2223T33A00T
JM2223P33A000
JM2322
3/4
2
50
JM2322T33A00T
JM2322P33A000
JM2323
3/4
4
35
JM2323T33A00T
JM2323P33A000
JM2327
3/4
7.5
35
JM2327T33A00T
JM2327P33A000
JM2427
1
8
35
JM2427T33A00T
JM2427P33A000
JM3211
1/2
1
50
JM3211T33A00T
JM3211P33A000
JM3212
1/2
2
50
JM3212T33A00T
JM3212P33A000
JM3213
1/2
4
35
JM3213T33A00T
JM3213P33A000
JM3312
3/4
2
50
JM3312T33A00T
JM3312P33A000
JM3313
3/4
4
35
JM3313T33A00T
JM3313P33A000
JM3317
3/4
7.5
35
JM3317T33A00T
JM3317P33A000
JM3413
1
4
35
JM3413T33A00T
JM3413P33A000
JM3417
1
8
35
JM3417T33A00T
JM3417P33A000
JM3517
1-1/4
8
35
JM3517T33A00T
JM3517P33A000
JM3221
1/2
1
50
JM3221T33A00T
JM3221P33A000
JM3222
1/2
2
50
JM3222T33A00T
JM3222P33A000
JM3223
1/2
4
35
JM3223T33A00T
JM3223P33A000
JM3322
3/4
2
50
JM3322T33A00T
JM3322P33A000
JM3323
3/4
4
35
JM3323T33A00T
JM3323P33A000
JM3327
3/4
7.5
35
JM3327T33A00T
JM3327P33A000
JM3427
1
8
35
JM3427T33A00T
JM3427P33A000
Valve
Sizing JM Series Water Valves
JS and JT Series Two-Position On/Off Valves
JS Series Two-Position On/Off Valves
To provide adequate valve authority for good control, the valve should be sized to provide the required GPM at a pressure drop of one
to two times the pressure drop across the coil at design flow.
Valves are normally sized to the pipe size with the largest Cv possible that will meet the closeoff requirements. The sum of the pressure
drop across the valve and the pressure drop across the coil at design flow must be less than the total pressure drop available between
the supply and the return.
Steam valves for On/Off service are normally sized to be the same as the pipe with the largest Cv available.
The table below provides the maximum Btu/H output for a given Cv and steam inlet pressure.
Solution: From the table below, a 2 Cv valve will provide 6 GPM

with a pressure drop across the valve of 9 psig. The 2 Cv valve
should be selected as the pressure drop across the valve (9 psig)
is between 1 and 2 times the pressure drop across the coil
(5 psig) at the required flow of 6 GPM.
Flow Rate in GPM (Gallons Per Minute)
Pressure
Drop
psig
1.0 Cv
2.0 Cv
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
1.0
1.4
1.7
2.0
2.2
2.4
2.6
2.8
3.0
3.2
3.3
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.9
4.0
4.1
4.2
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
5.0
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
2.0
2.8
3.5
4.0
4.5
4.9
5.3
5.7
6.0
6.3
6.6
6.9
7.2
7.5
7.7
8.0
8.2
8.5
8.7
8.9
9.2
9.4
9.6
9.8
10.0
10.2
10.4
10.6
10.8
11.0
4.0 Cv
4.0
5.7
6.9
8.0
8.9
9.8
10.6
11.3
12.0
12.6
13.3
13.9
14.4
15.0
15.5
16.0
16.5
17.0
17.4
17.9
18.3
18.8
19.2
19.6
20.0
20.4
20.8
21.2
21.5
21.9
Note: JM Series valves cannot be used with steam systems.
Example: A coil requires 6 GPM of chilled water at design conditions to provide rated cooling output. At 6 GPM, the pressure drop
across the coil is 5 psig. The total pressure drop between the supply and the return at the coil is 30 psig. 1/2" pipe is being used to
pipe the coil between the supply and the return.
Solution: A 2.5 Cv valve will supply 6.1 GPM at a
pressure drop of 6 psig. The 2.5 Cv valve has a
closeoff rating of 30 psig and therefore meets the
needs of this application.
JM Series Modulating Valve Sizing Table
Low Pressure Pneumatic Actuated
Sizing JS Series Steam Valves
JM Series Modulating Valves
Example: Coil requirements 6 GPM @ 5 psig pressure drop.

The valve should be selected to provide 6 GPM with a pressure
drop between 5 and 10 psig (1 to 2 times the pressure drop
across the coil).
SeriesElectric
Butterfly
Valves
JVFSeries
Zone
Valve Assemblies
VF Series Butterfly
Valve
VFModulating
Series
Butterfly
Valves
Low Pressure
Pneumatic Actuated
Control
Sizing JS and JT Series Water Valves
7.5 Cv
8.0 Cv
7.5
10.6
13.0
15.0
16.8
18.4
19.8
21.2
22.5
23.7
24.9
26.0
27.0
28.1
29.0
30.0
30.9
31.8
32.7
33.5
34.4
35.2
36.0
36.7
37.5
38.2
39.0
39.7
40.4
41.1
8.0
11.3
13.9
16.0
17.9
19.6
21.2
22.6
24.0
25.3
26.5
27.7
28.8
29.9
31.0
32.0
33.0
33.9
34.9
35.8
36.7
37.5
38.4
39.2
40.0
40.8
41.6
42.3
43.1
43.8
Two temperature ratings are available:

9.0
12.7
15.6
18.0
20.1
22.0
23.8
25.5
27.0
28.5
29.8
31.2
32.4
33.7
34.9
36.0
37.1
38.2
39.2
40.2
41.2
42.2
43.2
44.1
45.0
45.9
46.8
47.6
48.5
49.3
JT (standard temperature ratings) ambient

temperature 32 to 104F, fluid temperature
32 to 200F
JS (high temperature ratings) ambient
32 to 250F
JS and JT Series On/Off Valve Sizing Table

Pressure
Drop
psig
1.0 Cv
2.5 Cv
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
1.0
1.4
1.7
2.0
2.2
2.4
2.6
2.8
3.0
3.2
3.3
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.9
4.0
4.1
4.2
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
5.0
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
2.5
3.5
4.3
5.0
5.6
6.1
6.6
7.1
7.5
7.9
8.3
8.7
9.0
9.4
9.7
10.0
10.3
10.6
10.9
11.2
11.5
11.7
12.0
12.2
12.5
12.7
13.0
13.2
13.5
13.7
3.5 Cv
3.5
4.9
6.1
7.0
7.8
8.6
9.3
9.9
10.5
11.1
11.6
12.1
12.6
13.1
13.6
14.0
14.4
14.8
15.3
15.7
16.0
16.4
16.8
17.1
17.5
17.8
18.2
18.5
18.8
19.2
8.0 Cv
8.0
11.3
13.9
16.0
17.9
19.6
21.2
22.6
24.0
25.3
26.5
27.7
28.8
29.9
31.0
32.0
33.0
33.9
34.9
35.8
36.7
37.5
38.4
39.2
40.0
40.8
41.6
42.3
43.1
43.8
Steam Sizing Table (Maximum 15 psig) - Maximum Btu/H

Steam
Pressure
psig
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
15
1.0 Cv
2.5 Cv
3.5 Cv
8.0 Cv
11,310
16,470
20,710
24,560
28,110
31,550
34,810
38,020
41,140
44,230
47,250
50,220
59,070
28,280
41,180
51,760
61,390
70,270
78,870
87,020
95,060
102,840
110,570
118,120
125,540
147,670
39,600
57,660
72,470
85,940
98,380
110,410
121,830
133,080
143,980
154,790
165,360
175,760
206,740
90,510
131,780
165,650
196,440
224,880
252,370
278,470
304,180
329,090
353,810
377,970
401,730
472,550
Note: JT amd JM series valves cannot be used with steam systems.


Pressure
Drop
psig
1.0 Cv
2.0 Cv
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
1.0
1.4
1.7
2.0
2.2
2.4
2.6
2.8
3.0
3.2
3.3
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.9
4.0
4.1
4.2
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
5.0
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
2.0
2.8
3.5
4.0
4.5
4.9
5.3
5.7
6.0
6.3
6.6
6.9
7.2
7.5
7.7
8.0
8.2
8.5
8.7
8.9
9.2
9.4
9.6
9.8
10.0
10.2
10.4
10.6
10.8
11.0
4.0 Cv
4.0
5.7
6.9
8.0
8.9
9.8
10.6
11.3
12.0
12.6
13.3
13.9
14.4
15.0
15.5
16.0
16.5
17.0
17.4
17.9
18.3
18.8
19.2
19.6
20.0
20.4
20.8
21.2
21.5
21.9

across the coil).
SeriesElectric
Butterfly
Valves
JVFSeries
Zone
Valve Assemblies
VF Series Butterfly
Valve
VFModulating
Series
Butterfly
Valves
Low Pressure
Pneumatic Actuated
Control
7.5 Cv
8.0 Cv
7.5
10.6
13.0
15.0
16.8
18.4
19.8
21.2
22.5
23.7
24.9
26.0
27.0
28.1
29.0
30.0
30.9
31.8
32.7
33.5
34.4
35.2
36.0
36.7
37.5
38.2
39.0
39.7
40.4
41.1
8.0
11.3
13.9
16.0
17.9
19.6
21.2
22.6
24.0
25.3
26.5
27.7
28.8
29.9
31.0
32.0
33.0
33.9
34.9
35.8
36.7
37.5
38.4
39.2
40.0
40.8
41.6
42.3
43.1
43.8

9.0
12.7
15.6
18.0
20.1
22.0
23.8
25.5
27.0
28.5
29.8
31.2
32.4
33.7
34.9
36.0
37.1
38.2
39.2
40.2
41.2
42.2
43.2
44.1
45.0
45.9
46.8
47.6
48.5
49.3

32 to 200F
32 to 250F

Pressure
Drop
psig
1.0 Cv
2.5 Cv
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
1.0
1.4
1.7
2.0
2.2
2.4
2.6
2.8
3.0
3.2
3.3
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.9
4.0
4.1
4.2
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
5.0
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
2.5
3.5
4.3
5.0
5.6
6.1
6.6
7.1
7.5
7.9
8.3
8.7
9.0
9.4
9.7
10.0
10.3
10.6
10.9
11.2
11.5
11.7
12.0
12.2
12.5
12.7
13.0
13.2
13.5
13.7
3.5 Cv
3.5
4.9
6.1
7.0
7.8
8.6
9.3
9.9
10.5
11.1
11.6
12.1
12.6
13.1
13.6
14.0
14.4
14.8
15.3
15.7
16.0
16.4
16.8
17.1
17.5
17.8
18.2
18.5
18.8
19.2
8.0 Cv
8.0
11.3
13.9
16.0
17.9
19.6
21.2
22.6
24.0
25.3
26.5
27.7
28.8
29.9
31.0
32.0
33.0
33.9
34.9
35.8
36.7
37.5
38.4
39.2
40.0
40.8
41.6
42.3
43.1
43.8

Steam
Pressure
psig
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
15
1.0 Cv
2.5 Cv
3.5 Cv
8.0 Cv
11,310
16,470
20,710
24,560
28,110
31,550
34,810
38,020
41,140
44,230
47,250
50,220
59,070
28,280
41,180
51,760
61,390
70,270
78,870
87,020
95,060
102,840
110,570
118,120
125,540
147,670
39,600
57,660
72,470
85,940
98,380
110,410
121,830
133,080
143,980
154,790
165,360
175,760
206,740
90,510
131,780
165,650
196,440
224,880
252,370
278,470
304,180
329,090
353,810
377,970
401,730
472,550


Pressure
Drop
psig
1.0 Cv
2.0 Cv
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
1.0
1.4
1.7
2.0
2.2
2.4
2.6
2.8
3.0
3.2
3.3
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.9
4.0
4.1
4.2
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
5.0
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
2.0
2.8
3.5
4.0
4.5
4.9
5.3
5.7
6.0
6.3
6.6
6.9
7.2
7.5
7.7
8.0
8.2
8.5
8.7
8.9
9.2
9.4
9.6
9.8
10.0
10.2
10.4
10.6
10.8
11.0
4.0 Cv
4.0
5.7
6.9
8.0
8.9
9.8
10.6
11.3
12.0
12.6
13.3
13.9
14.4
15.0
15.5
16.0
16.5
17.0
17.4
17.9
18.3
18.8
19.2
19.6
20.0
20.4
20.8
21.2
21.5
21.9

across the coil).
SeriesElectric
Butterfly
Valves
JVFSeries
Zone
Valve Assemblies
VF Series Butterfly
Valve
VFModulating
Series
Butterfly
Valves
Low Pressure
Pneumatic Actuated
Control
7.5 Cv
8.0 Cv
7.5
10.6
13.0
15.0
16.8
18.4
19.8
21.2
22.5
23.7
24.9
26.0
27.0
28.1
29.0
30.0
30.9
31.8
32.7
33.5
34.4
35.2
36.0
36.7
37.5
38.2
39.0
39.7
40.4
41.1
8.0
11.3
13.9
16.0
17.9
19.6
21.2
22.6
24.0
25.3
26.5
27.7
28.8
29.9
31.0
32.0
33.0
33.9
34.9
35.8
36.7
37.5
38.4
39.2
40.0
40.8
41.6
42.3
43.1
43.8

9.0
12.7
15.6
18.0
20.1
22.0
23.8
25.5
27.0
28.5
29.8
31.2
32.4
33.7
34.9
36.0
37.1
38.2
39.2
40.2
41.2
42.2
43.2
44.1
45.0
45.9
46.8
47.6
48.5
49.3

32 to 200F
32 to 250F

Pressure
Drop
psig
1.0 Cv
2.5 Cv
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
1.0
1.4
1.7
2.0
2.2
2.4
2.6
2.8
3.0
3.2
3.3
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.9
4.0
4.1
4.2
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
5.0
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
2.5
3.5
4.3
5.0
5.6
6.1
6.6
7.1
7.5
7.9
8.3
8.7
9.0
9.4
9.7
10.0
10.3
10.6
10.9
11.2
11.5
11.7
12.0
12.2
12.5
12.7
13.0
13.2
13.5
13.7
3.5 Cv
3.5
4.9
6.1
7.0
7.8
8.6
9.3
9.9
10.5
11.1
11.6
12.1
12.6
13.1
13.6
14.0
14.4
14.8
15.3
15.7
16.0
16.4
16.8
17.1
17.5
17.8
18.2
18.5
18.8
19.2
8.0 Cv
8.0
11.3
13.9
16.0
17.9
19.6
21.2
22.6
24.0
25.3
26.5
27.7
28.8
29.9
31.0
32.0
33.0
33.9
34.9
35.8
36.7
37.5
38.4
39.2
40.0
40.8
41.6
42.3
43.1
43.8

Steam
Pressure
psig
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
15
1.0 Cv
2.5 Cv
3.5 Cv
8.0 Cv
11,310
16,470
20,710
24,560
28,110
31,550
34,810
38,020
41,140
44,230
47,250
50,220
59,070
28,280
41,180
51,760
61,390
70,270
78,870
87,020
95,060
102,840
110,570
118,120
125,540
147,670
39,600
57,660
72,470
85,940
98,380
110,410
121,830
133,080
143,980
154,790
165,360
175,760
206,740
90,510
131,780
165,650
196,440
224,880
252,370
278,470
304,180
329,090
353,810
377,970
401,730
472,550

Johnson Controls
BUILDING EFFICIENCY
Self Contained Embassy BAX/BWX
Portflio HVAC

Self Contained Embassy

Condensao a Ar
BAX05 60.000 Btu/h (5 TR)
BAX07 90.000 Btu/h (7.5 TR)
BAX10 120.000 Btu/h (10 TR)
BAX12 150.000 Btu/h (12.5 TR)
BAX15 180.000 Btu/h (15 TR)
BAX22 270.000 Btu/h (22.5 TR)

Condensao a gua
BWX05 60.000 Btu/h (5 TR)
BWX07 90.000 Btu/h (7.5 TR)
BWX10 120.000 Btu/h (10 TR)
BWX12 150.000 Btu/h (12.5 TR)
BWX15 180.000 Btu/h (15 TR)
BWX22 270.000 Btu/h (22.5 TR)

Nomenclatura:
Self Contained Embassy - BAX/BWX

- Fluido refrigerante: R22 ou R407c;
- Gabinete em chapa de ao galvanizado com pintura polister a p;
- Painel isolado com manta de polietileno expandido aluminizado com 10 mm de
espessura, garantindo bom isolamento trmico;
- A bandeja de dreno de condensado inclinada com sada lateral e revestida com
composto impermeabilizante e anti-corrosivo.

- Ventilador:
Com ps voltadas para a frente do tipo Sirocco com as seguintes presses estticas
disponveis:
- 5 e 7.5 TR, 15 mmca;
- 10, 12.5, 15 e 22.5 TR, 20 mmca;.

- Motor:
Motor eltrico trifsico de quatro plos, grau de proteo IP55 e isolamento classe B.

- Fltro lavvel tipo tela de nylon classificao ABNT-G0.
10

- Serpentina
Constitudas de 4 filas de tubos de cobre 3/8 expandidos contra aletas de
alumnio com espaamento de 13 aletas por polegada e cabeceira fabricada em ao
galvanizado minimizado de 0.95 mm de espessura.
11

Compressor Scroll
- Alta eficincia;
- Refrigerante fluindo atravs do compressor;
- Grande volume livre na suco;
- Grande reservatrio de leo;
- Suco na parte inferior refrigerando 100% do
motor do compressor;
- Isolamento de vibrao e baixo nvel de rudo.
12

Proteo:
- Pressostatos de alta e de baixa presso;
- Fusvel de comando;
- CLO;
Dispositivo de proteo contra ciclagem automtica do compressor, quando interrompido
por outros dispositivos de proteo.
- Comando 24 v.
Termostatos
- Eletrnico;
- Termostato microprocessado 7 dias (opcional);

- Termostato microprocessado 365 dias (opcional).
13

Condensao a Ar
14
Self Contained Embassy - REM

Nomenclatura
15
Self Contained Embassy - REM

- Unidade externa;
- Capacidade 5 e 7.5 TR;
- Visor de lquido com indicao de umidade;
- Tenses disponveis: 220/3/60Hz;

- Tenso de comando 24 V.
16

Condensao a gua
17

Condensador Shell & Tube
Condensador a gua Shell & Tube
18

Opcionais
Opcionais Condensadoras a Ar
- Rel de seqncia e falta de fase;
- Capacitor para correo do fator de potncia ;
- Vlvula de servio de bloqueio nas linhas de suco, lquido e descarga.
Opcionais Evaporadora
- Filtro descartvel classificao ABNT : G3;
- Termostato microprocessado TEC para interligao em rede possibilitando monitorao e controle
via web.
19

Combinaes - BAX+REM
20

Combinaes
21
EVAPORADORA
CONDENSADORA
BAX05
REM05
BAX07
REM07
BAX10
2 x REM05
BAX12
REM05 + REM07
BAX15
2 x REM07
BAX22
3 x REM07
Fotos Ilustrativas
SELF
Verso s frio
Condensao a ar com
condensador remoto ou gua
Compressor Scroll
Capacidade de 5 a 22,5 TR
CARACTERSTICAS
TCNICAS
SELF EMBAS SY
SELF CONTAINED CONDENSADOR A GUA
Compressor
TR
Alimentao (V--Hz)
Corrente Nominal (A)
Potncia Nominal (W)
Tipo
Quantidade
Nmero de Estgios
Nmero de Circuitos
Evaporador
Ventilador
Tipo
Tipo
Presso Est. Disp. (mmca)
Motor Ventilador
CV
Condensador
Tipo
Vazo de gua nominal (m3/h)
Perda de carga nominal (mca)
Dimenses
Altura (mm)
Largura (mm)
Profundidade (mm)
Peso das unidades (srie Padro)**
(Kg)
BWX05
5
19,08/11,47
5770
1
1
1
3400
15
1
3,4
10
1758
1000
510
183
BWX07
7,5
BWX10
BWX12
BWX15
10
12,5
15
220 ou 380/3/60
25,37/15,23
38,47/23,13
43,47/26,15
46,37/27,95
8070
11540
13790
15340
Scroll - Hermtico
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
Aletas de Alumnio Corrugadas e Tubos de Cobre
Centrfugo Tipo Sirocco
5100
6800
8500
10200
15
20
20
20
2
2
3
3
T&T (Srie Padro)
5,2
6,9
8,6
10,3
12
11
12
12
1758
2022
2022
2022
1000
1195
1195
1195
510
700
700
700
232
307
377
401
BWX22
22,5
70,50/42,46
23410
3
2
3
14960
20
5
15,5
9
2022
1960
700
486
* Corrente e potncia incluindo os condensadores remotos.

** Considerando o peso das unidades em funcionamento: Peso da unidade + carga refrigerante de gs + condensadores de gua totalmente cheios.
SELF CONTAINED CONDENSADOR A AR REMOTO

Modelos
Capacidade Nominal
Dados Eltricos *
Compressor
TR
Alimentao (V--Hz)
Potncia Nominal (W)
Tipo
Quantidade
Nmeros de Estgios
Nmeros de Circuitos
Evaporador
Ventilador
Tipo
Tipo
Presso Est. Disp. (mmca)
Motor Ventilador
CV
Dimenses
Altura (mm)
Largura (mm)
Profundidade (mm)
Peso das Unidades
(kg)
Condensador remoto na condio nominal
BAX05
5
21,08/13,47
6370
1
1
1
3400
15
1
1758
1000
510
165
1 REM05
BAX07
7,5
BAX10
BAX12
BAX15
10
12,5
15
220 ou 380/3/60
28,97/18,83
42,47/27,13
49,07/31,75
53,57/35,15
8892
12740
15212
16984
Scroll - Hermtico
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
Aletas de Alumnio Corrugadas e Tubos de Cobre
Centrfugo Tipo Sirocco
5100
6800
8500
10200
15
20
20
20
2
2
3
3
1758
2022
2022
2022
1000
1195
1195
1195
510
700
700
700
205
275
335
350
1 REM07
2 REM05
REM05 + REM07
2 REM07
BAX22
22,5
81,30/53,26
25876
3
2
3
14960
20
5
2022
1960
700
410
3 REM07
* Corrente e potncia incluindo os condensadores remotos.
CONDENSADOR A AR REMOTO
MODELOS
Dados eltricos
REM05
REM07
220-1-60
Alimentao ( V--Hz)
Potncia Nominal (Kw)
0,6
0,82
2
3,6
Condensador
Tipo Aletas de Alumnio Corrugado- tubos de cobre
Ventilador
Tipo
Axial
6800
10200
Motor
CV
1/2
3/4
Dimenses
Altura (mm)
950
950
Largura (mm)
1025
1395
Profundidade (mm)
390
568
Peso das unidades embaladas
kg
79
117
FORM: U-COM002-BR (0706)

SUBSTITUI: U-COM002-BR (1204)
Unidade industrial So Paulo - Rua Joo Tibiri, 900 - So Paulo - SP - CEP: 05077-000 - Fone: (11) 3837 6700 - Fax: (11) 3837 6909
Unidade industrial Pinhais - Rua Tomazina, 125 - Condomnio Portal da Serra - Pinhais - PR - CEP: 83325-040 - Fone: (41) 3661 3407 - Fax: (41) 3661 3410
contate - york.brasil@br.york.com visite - www.yorkbrasil.com.br fale conosco - 0800 164 022
Obs: A York Brasil se reserva o direito de, a qualquer momento, alterar as informaes aqui contidas, sem prvio aviso, tendo em vista a atualizao do produto.
MODELOS
Capacidade Nominal
Dados Eltricos*
Guia de Especificao
Os condicionadores de ar tipo self contained BAX / BWX so projetados para instalaes
com insuflamento de ar atravs de sistema de dutos em aplicaes domstica, comercial e
industrial. As unidades devem possuir um, dois ou trs compressores hermticos com
circuitos de refrigerante independentes. Cada circuito de refrigerante composto por um
condensador (a ar ou a gua), um filtro secador, um visor de lquido, uma vlvula de
expanso termosttica, um distribuidor de lquido, um evaporador, vlvulas de servio na
linha de alta e na linha de lquido (srie padro) e na linha de suco (srie plus),
pressostatos de alta e baixa, tomadas de presso e um compressor. Para aplicaes com
condensao a gua, empregado um trocador tipo Casco e Tubo. Os BAX / BWX so
testados quanto estanqueidade, evacuados, desidratados, sendo as unidades BWX
fornecidas com a carga de refrigerante (R22 ou R407c) completa e as unidades BAX +
REM devero ser fornecidas pressurizadas com refrigerante (R22 ou R407c) e Nitrognio
respectivamente.
Gabinete
construdo integralmente em chapa de ao galvanizado com pintura polister a
p polimerizados em estufa a 180C, o que confere a toda a estrutura excelente resistncia
a corroso. Todos os painis so revestidos internamente com manta de polietileno
expandido de 10 mm de espessura no propagante. A bandeja de dreno de condensado
inclinada com sada lateral e revestida com composto impermeabilizante e anti-corrosivo.
Compressores
So compressores Scroll de alta eficincia protegidos internamente por sensores de
temperatura aliados a pressostatos de alta e baixa presso com rearme automtico,
controle anti-reciclagem e temporizao de partida, proporcionam a certeza que seu
equipamento apresentar um menor custo de manuteno.
Serpentinas dos evaporadores

Possuem 4 filas de tubos de cobre 3/8, expandidos contra aletas de alumnio de
espaamento de 13 aletas por polegada, com perfil que facilita a manuteno e limpeza,
sendo testados a uma presso de 420 psig.
Condensador a ar remoto
Possuem 2 filas de tubos de cobre de 3/8, expandidos contra aletas de alumnio com 14
aletas por polegadas, com subresfriador de liquido e sendo testadas quanto resistncia e
vazamentos a 420 psig.
Condensador a gua
O condensador do tipo Shell & Tube com um circuito de refrigerao para capacidades
de 5 e 7,5 TR, dois circuitos de refrigerao para capacidades de 10, 12,5 e 15 TR, trs
circuitos de refrigerao para capacidade de 22,5 TR e um circuito de gua.
Ventilador do evaporador
O ventilador do tipo centrfugo de dupla aspirao com ps voltadas para frente, estes
tem performance certificado pelo AMCA, e so selecionados para trabalhar em regies de
alta eficincia. Balanceados esttica e dinamicamente, os rotores apiam-se sobre
rolamentos, e so firmemente posicionados e alinhados por buchas cnicas, evitando
empenamento e desgaste do eixo. A transmisso feita por polia motora regulvel,
correia em V e polia volante.
Filtro de Ar
O elemento filtrante constitudo de tela de nylon lavvel, com classificao G0
instalada atrs das grelhas frontais antes da serpentina evaporadora.
Quadro Eltrico
Montado internamente na seo inferior do gabinete, de fcil acesso e possui todos os
elementos necessrios ao perfeito funcionamento do condicionador.
Circuito de refrigerao
Os Componentes do circuito frigorfico devero ser interligados por tubos de cobre sem
costura. O circuito dispoem de vlvulas de expanso termosttica, distribuidor de liquido,
pressostato de alta e baixa presso, vlvulas de servio e tomadas de presso.
Controle
O equipamento dever vir equipado com um controle eletrnico de simples ou duplo
estgios de refrigerao e aquecimento conforme o nmero de compressores para
unidades de 5 15 TR. Para unidade de 22,5 TR ou como opcional para as demais
unidades, pode ser usado o termostato microprocessado, modelo SZ1022YP, que dispe
de capacidade de programao para dois estgios de refrigerao e trs de aquecimento,
ou trs de refrigerao e dois de aquecimento. Quando utilizado em rede, o SZ1022YP
permite a formao de um anel de controle.
Localizao e reas Livres
A unidade dever ser projetada para a instalao numa superfcie nivelada e lisa que deve
ser capaz de suportar o peso da unidade. As unidades devero ser construdas para
operao ao abrigo do tempo e no aplicveis em atmosferas midas, corrosivas ou
explosivas. Em instalaes onde a unidade ou a torre de resfriamento possam ser expostas
a baixas temperaturas externas, a proteo anticongelamento dever ser de
responsabilidade do cliente. Na instalao, devem estar previstos drenos de gua,
ventilao e reas para servio, incluindo a remoo de compressor(es) e de condensador.
Consideraes Acsticas
Para assegurar uma instalao bem sucedida destas unidades, os compressores devero
ser fixados sobre isoladores de vibrao. Com dutos de ar de insuflamento e de retorno,
um colarinho flexvel deve ser instalado em campo, a fim de se evitar a transmisso de
rudo e vibrao.
Conexes de Dreno
Cada sada de condensado deve ter sua linha de dreno individual com um sifo com um
desnvel mnimo de 2. Linhas de dreno devero ser interligadas s tubulaes de
drenagem da construo. A linha de dreno deve ser isolada termicamente onde houver
Interligaes Eltricas
As unidades devero ser fornecidas para uso em 220V/3/60Hz e o sistema de controle
dever incluir proteo contra sobrecarga no motor do evaporador por rel, sensores de
temperatura internos no motor do condensador e para o compressor sensores internos tipo
line break para corrente e temperatura, bem como pressostatos de alta e baixa. A
interligao eltrica deve estar de acordo com o ABNT NBR 5410.
Srie Plus
A srie plus de equipamentos dispem de filtro descartvel de manta sinttica
classificao ABNT:G3, Vlvula de servio de bloqueio nas linhas de suco, banco de
capacitores para correo do fator de potncia (0,92), rel de falta e inverso de fases e
para BAX serpentina do condensador com tratamento Gold-Tech.
Evaporadoras
BAX05
Modelos
Vazo Nominal
Presso Esttica
Tipo
Filtros de ar
Dimenses
Motor
BWX05
BAX07
60000
5
3400
Btu/h
TR
m/h
Capacidade Nominal
BWX07
BAX10
90000
7,5
5100
mmca
BWX10
120000
10
6800
BAX12
BWX12
150000
12,5
8500
15
BAX15
BWX15
180000
15
10200
20
809x466
1
mm
CV
825x720
2
962x762
2
1028x900
3
1028x900
3
Scroll Hermtico
2
3500
1
rpm
2,12
2,12
2x 2,12
3
2x 2,12
2x 2,12
3x 2,12
0,92
3/8
1,43
3/8
4
13
0,41
3/8
m
in
0,63
3/8
1
mm
mm
mm
in
in
in
in
in
kg
1758
1000
510
1758
1000
510
1758
1000
510
1758
1000
510
2022
1195
700
5/8
5/8
165
1 1/2
5/8 / 1/2
183
5/8
5/8
205
1 1/2
3/4 / 1/2
232
5/8
5/8
275
0,92
0,74
3/8
3/8
2
2
2022
2022
2022
1195
1195
1195
700
700
700
2x 3/4
1 1/2
2
5/8 / 1/2
5/8 / 1/2
5/8
5/8
307
335
377
2022
1195
700
2022
1195
700
2022
1195
700
2022
1195
700
5/8
5/8
350
2
3/4 / 1/2
401
5/8
5/8
410
2 1/2
1 3/4
486
Condensadoras
Modelos
REM05
60000
5
6800
Btu/h
TR
m/h
Capacidade Nominal
Vaso Nominal
Presso Esttica
Nmero de circuitos
Motor
mmca
CV
Alimentao eltrica
Linha de Descarga
Linha de Lquido
Peso
REM07
90000
7,5
10200
1
1/2
1
3/4
220/1/60
V//Hz
Altura
Largura
Profundidade
mm
mm
mm
in
in
kg
950
1025
390
5/8
5/8
79
950
1395
568
5/8
5/8
117
Combinaes
Self Contained - Remoto
Evaporadora
Condensadora
Capacidade *
Consumo a 100% *
kw/TR *
TR
kw
Capacidade / circuito
Bitola
Comp. Equivalente
Bitola
Linha de Lquido
Comp. Equivalente
Linha de Descarga
Tubulao**
TR
in
m
in
m
m
BAX05
REM05
5
6,97
1,39
5
3/4
15
5/8
30
10
BAX07
REM07
7,5
9,71
1,29
7,5
3/4
12
5/8
21
10
BAX10
BAX12
BAX15
BAX22
(2x) REM05 REM05+REM07 (2x) REM07 (3x) REM07
10
12,5
15
22,5
13,94
16,63
18,62
28,33
1,39
1,33
1,24
1,26
5
5 / 7,5
7,5
7,5
(2x) 3/4
(2x) 3/4
(2x) 3/4
(3x) 3/4
15
15 / 12
12
12
(2x) 5/8
(2x) 5/8
(2x) 5/8
(3x) 5/8
30
30 / 21
21
21
10
10
10
10

(**) Comprimento equivalente calculado para bitola de tubulao recomendada. Para comprimentos equivalentes superiores, favor consultar a Eng. de Aplicao - So Paulo
Self Contained - Cond. a gua

Evaporadora
Capacidade *
Consumo a 100% *
kw/TR *
TR
kw
2x 844x810
5
220/3/60 - 380/3/60 - 440/3/60
V//Hz
Tipo
Quantidade
Compressor
Rotao
Carga de leo por circuito
Nmero de filas
rea de Face
Serpentina
Dimetro dos tubos
Tipo
Nmero de circuitos
Altura
Dimenses Largura
Profundidade
Sada do dreno (Rosca BSP)
gua
Conexes Refrigerante E/S
Linha de descarga
Linha de lquido
Peso
Conexes
BWX22
270000
22,5
14960
G0 Lavvel
Alimentao eltrica
Dimenses
BAX22
BWX05
5
5,77
1,15
BWX07
7,5
8,07
1,08
BWX10
10
11,54
1,15
BWX12
12,5
13,79
1,10
BWX15
15
15,34
1,02
BWX22
22,5
23,41
1,04
CONDICIONADOR DE AR CENTRAL
Self Contained - BAX / BWX
REM
BAX/BWX
MANUAL DE INSTALAO, OPERAO E MANUTENO

Condicionador de Ar Central tipo Self Contained
Modelos BAX/BWX 05 a 22
...............................................
* Fotos Ilustrativas
......................................
Indice
Indice ...............................................................................................................................
Nomenclaturas ..................................................................................................................
Introduo ..........................................................................................................................
3
4
5
1. Segurana .....................................................................................................................
2. Recomendaes de Transporte .......................................................................................
3. Instalao .....................................................................................................................
3.1. Inspeo .............................................................................................................
3.2. Localizao e reas livres ....................................................................................
3.3. Consideraes Acsticas .....................................................................................
3.4. Conexes e Tubulaes de Refrigerante (BAX) ......................................................
3.5. Conexes e Tubulaes de gua (BWX) ...............................................................
3.6. Conexes de Dreno ............................................................................................
3.7. Instalao de Dutos de Insuflamento de Ar .............................................................
3.8. Interligaes Eltricas .........................................................................................
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
7
7
4. Instalao do Termostato ...............................................................................................
5. Operao .....................................................................................................................
5.1. Antes da Partida .................................................................................................
5.2. Modos de Operao .............................................................................................
5.3. Guia de Soluo de Problemas .............................................................................
8
8
8
9
6. Manuteno ..................................................................................................................
6.1. Alinhamento do Acionamento ..............................................................................
6.2. Ajuste da Rotao do Ventilador do Ar de Insuflamento ...........................................
6.3. Lubrificao dos Motores e Ventiladores ................................................................
6.4. Inspeo dos Filtros de Ar ....................................................................................
6.5. Condensadores a Ar ............................................................................................
6.6. Condensadores a gua ........................................................................................
6.7. Rotinas de Manuteno Preventiva .......................................................................
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
ANEXO I - Caractersticas Fsicas .....................................................................................

ANEXO II - Dados Dimensionais .........................................................................................
ANEXO III - Dados Eltricos ................................................................................................
ANEXO IV - Performance dos ventiladores ..........................................................................
ANEXO V - Ajuste do sub-resfriamento e superaquecimento ................................................
ANEXO VI - Espaos recomendados para instalao ..........................................................
12
13
15
16
17
18
......................................
Nomenclaturas
BWX
05
25
S
S - Srie Plus
BWX - Condensao a gua

BAX - Condensao a ar remoto
Alimentao Eltrica (V / / Hz)

25 - 220/3/60
40 - 380/3/60
Capacidade Nominal (TR)

05 - 5TR
07 - 7,5TR
10 - 10TR
12 - 12,5TR
15 - 15TR
22 - 22,5TR
Verso
B - 2a gerao
REM
REM - Unidade condensadora

05 - 5TR
07 - 7,5TR
05
06
S
S - Srie Plus
Alimentao Eltrica (V / / Hz)
06 - 220/1/60
Verso
A - 1a gerao
......................................
Introduo
Os condicionadores de ar tipo self contained BAX / BWX so
projetados para instalaes com insuflamento de ar atravs de
sistema de dutos em aplicaes domstica, comercial e industrial,
disponveis nas capacidades de 5 a 22,5 TRs.
As unidades possuem um, dois ou trs compressores
hermticos com circuitos de refrigerante independentes. Cada
circuito de refrigerante composto por um condensador (a ar ou
a gua), um filtro secador, um visor de lquido, uma vlvula de
expanso termosttica, um distribuidor de lquido, um evaporador,
vlvulas de servio na linha de alta e na linha de lquido (srie
padro) e na linha de suco (srie plus), pressostatos de alta e
1 - Segurana
Para maior confiabilidade de operao e validade da garantia,
este equipamento deve ser instalado e reparado por instalador
autorizado York. A instalao deve obedecer s normas aplicveis,
particularmente com relao parte eltrica (ponto de fora,
dimensionamento de cabos, seleo da chave seccionadora e
fusveis - disjuntor), mecnica (instalao, acesso para
manuteno, nvel de rudo), renovao e distribuio do ar.
Antes de iniciar os servios de manuteno, desligar a
alimentao eltrica e fixar um aviso de alerta na unidade, alm de
utilizar ferramental e equipamentos de proteo individual (EPI)
adequados.
baixa, tomadas de presso e um compressor. Para aplicaes

com condensao a gua, emprega-se um trocador tipo Tubo e
Tubo (srie padro) e tipo Casco e Tubo (srie plus).
Os BAX / BWX so testados quanto estanqueidade,
evacuados, desidratados, sendo as unidades BWX fornecidas com
a carga de refrigerante R-22 completa e as unidades BAX +REM
so fornecidas pressurizadas com refrigerante R-22 e Nitrognio
respectivamente.
3.2. Localizao e reas Livres

A unidade projetada para a instalao numa superfcie nivelada
e lisa que deve ser capaz de suportar o peso da unidade.
As unidades so construdas para operao ao abrigo do tempo
e no aplicveis em atmosferas midas, corrosivas ou explosivas.
Em instalaes onde a unidade ou a torre de resfriamento
possam ser expostas a baixas temperaturas externas, a proteo
anticongelamento de responsabilidade do cliente.
Na instalao, devem estar previstos drenos de gua, ventilao
e reas para servio, incluindo a remoo de compressor(es) e de
condensador. reas mnimas recomendadas so mostradas no
anexo VII.
2 - Recomendaes de transporte
Normalmente, a unidade pode ser movida para uma posio
utilizando um aparelho de iamento ou roletes (cilindros) e sob
nenhuma circunstncia deve ser empurrado sobre apenas a sua
embalagem. Os pallets no devem ser removidos at que a unidade
seja colocada na sua posio. Se a unidade for iada por um
guindaste ou uma talha, barras de proteo e enchimentos devem
ser utilizados para prevenir que as cordas, os cabos ou as correntes
causem possveis danos (fig. 1).
Realizar o transporte e o manuseio da unidade mantendo-a
em posio vertical; no inclinar (Veja anexo I quanto aos pesos
das unidades).
3 - Instalao
3.1. Inspeo
Assim que a unidade for recebida, deve-se inspecionar quanto
a algum dano que possa haver ocorrido durante o transporte. Se o
dano for evidente, deve-se discrimin-lo na nota de entrega da
transportadora e requerer uma inspeo por parte da mesma.
Danos ocorridos e no identificados imediatamente devem ser
reportados dentro de quinze dias aps o recebimento da mercadoria.
Verifique o equipamento com base na relao de cargas para
verificar se todos os itens foram enviados. Quaisquer faltas devem
ser anotadas na nota de emisso de mercadorias e reclamadas
imediatamente por escrito.
Verifique se as placas de identificao do equipamento esto
em perfeitas condies de leitura.
Figura 1 - Iamento
......................................
3.3. Consideraes Acsticas
3.5. Conexes e Tubulaes de gua (somente

para unidades BWX)
Com qualquer sistema mecnico, uma certa quantidade de

rudo e vibrao gerada. Para assegurar uma instalao bem
sucedida destas unidades, os compressores so fixados sobre
isoladores de vibrao.
Com dutos de ar de insuflamento e de retorno, um colarinho
flexvel deve ser instalado em campo, a fim de se evitar a
transmisso de rudo e vibrao.
Deve-se ter cuidado para isolar a unidade e as tubulaes das
paredes e do teto.
Boas prticas de isolamento e atenuao acstica devem ser
empregadas no projeto da casa de mquinas, dutos de ar,
tubulaes de refrigerante e unidades externas.
3.4. Conexes e Tubulaes de Refrigerante

(somente para unidades BAX)
As linhas de descarga e de lquido possuem pontos para
conexo no lado direito da unidade; opcionalmente, podero ser
esquerda. A localizao destes pontos, assim como suas bitolas
encontram-se no anexo II. Os pontos para conexo so providos
de vlvulas de servio.
A figura 2 mostra os desnveis mximos admissveis e outras
informaes para a execuo das tubulaes de refrigerante.
Linha de descarga
Linha de descarga
Evaporador
para o
condensador
5m
e compressor
Fig. 2
As bitolas recomendadas para as tubulaes esto nas tabelas
a seguir:
Tubulao da linha de lquido

Circuito
5 TR
7,5 TR
2. Vlvulas de servio para isolar a unidade do sistema de

tubulao durante os servios de manuteno.
3. Meios de manter a presso adequada de gua do sistema
(ex.: vlvula reguladora automtica).
4. Instalar indicadores de temperatura e presso na unidade
para auxiliar durante os servios e diagnstico de problemas.
5. Instalao de um filtro para remoo de partculas estranhas
da gua antes de entrar na bomba. Este filtro deve estar localizado
afastado o suficiente da suco da bomba para prevenir a cavitao
da unidade.
Tubulao de gua de condensao

As conexes para entrada e sada de gua de condensao
esto localizadas no lado direito da unidade com acesso pela tampa
lateral direita. possvel inverter o lado das conexes para o
esquerdo, caso for necessrio.
Para a localizao e bitolas dos furos na tampa, consultar o
anexo II.
3.6. Conexes de Dreno

Linha de
liquido
10 m
para o
condensador
Linha de lquido
1. Eliminadores de vibrao para reduzir a transmisso de rudos

e vibraes para a construo.
e compressor
Linha de
liquido
Evaporador
Todo o sistema de tubulaes deve ser instalado de acordo

com a regulamentao das normas locais.
Uma boa instalao deve incluir o seguinte:

1/2
5/8
3/4
15
30
#
6
21
30
As conexes para dreno esto localizadas na bandeja inferior:

h duas de cada lado, uma da bandeja do evaporador e outra da
bandeja inferior.
Cada sada de condensado deve ter sua linha de dreno individual
com um sifo que poder ser colocado em qualquer posio na
linha, desde que haja um desnvel mnimo de 2, como mostrado
na fig. 4. Instale as linhas de dreno apenas de um lado da unidade,
mantendo fechadas as conexes do lado oposto.
Para garantir a sada de condensado pelo lado escolhido da
unidade, recomenda-se manter um desnvel de 5 a 10mm.
Linhas de dreno devero ser interligadas s tubulaes de
drenagem da construo.
A linha de dreno deve ser isolada termicamente onde houver
Tubulao da linha de descarga

Linha de descarga
Circuito
5 TR
7,5 TR

3/4
7/8
1 1/8
18
30
#
9
15
30
2 min
Conexo da unidade
de condensao
Sifo
As linhas horizontais tem que estar
na direo da sada de dreno
Fig. 4 - Sifo do Dreno de Condensado
......................................
3.7. Instalao de Dutos de Insuflamento de Ar
3.8. Interligaes Eltricas
A unidade interna BAX/BWX fornecida para a instalao em

redes de duto de insuflamento. Os dutos devero ser
dimensionados e executados conforme as normas ABNT para a
distribuio do ar com o menor rudo e consumo de energia. Os
dutos devero ser isolados para reduzir ganhos de calor e evitar a
condensao externa. O isolamento deve incluir uma barreira contra
o vapor para prevenir a absoro de umidade. Em instalaes de
dutos externos, prever proteo contra os efeitos do tempo.
O acoplamento do duto unidade dever ser feito por elemento
flexvel para reduzir a transmisso de vibrao.
O ajuste da vazo de ar em funo da perda de carga dos dutos
feito pelo ajuste da rotao do ventilador atravs de polia regulvel.
Geral
As unidades so fornecidas para uso em 220V ou 380V/3/
60Hz e o sistema de controle inclui proteo contra sobrecarga no
motor do evaporador por rel, sensores de temperatura internos
no motor do condensador e para o compressor sensores internos
tipo line break para corrente e temperatura, bem como
pressostatos de alta e baixa.
Dados eltricos
A interligao eltrica deve estar de acordo com o ABNT NBR
5410.
Uma chave seccionadora com fusveis ou um disjuntor
termomagntico deve ser utilizado num circuito separado do painel
de fora. Este dispositivo deve estar perto da unidade para
convenincia quando em manuteno. Os pontos de conexo de
fora encontram-se do lado direito da unidade.
Diagramas eltricos de comando e fora so mostrados no
anexo IV. Os dados eltricos so mostrados no anexo III.
NOTA : Os diagramas eltricos esto sujeitos a alteraes
sem prvio aviso.
4 - Instalao do Termostato
Existem 3 opes de termostatos que podem ser fornecidos para comandar os equipamentos. Abaixo segue uma tabela com as
principais caractersticas de cada modelo:
PRINCIPAIS CARACTERSTICAS DOS TERMOSTATOS
Cdigo
Tenso de
Nmero Mximo
Tipo de
Programao
Comunicao
York
Alimentao
de Estgios
Aquecimento
Horria
em Rede
025B48006 000
025B48006 000
24V
SZ1022YP
025 00062 000
24V
resistncia eltrica
p/ 7 dias
RS485
SZ1041YP
025 00063 000
24V
resistncia eltrica
p/ 365 dias
RS485
Cdigo
Obs. Para obter detalhes sobre as caractersticas, a instalao e

a programao dos termostatos SZ, consultar o manual de
instalao form: C-IOM002-BR; Maiores informaes sobre a
ligao em rede dos termostatos podem ser encontradas no
manual tcnico form: C-TEC001-BR.
Instale o termostato no ambiente que ser condicionado, em uma
rea de boa circulao de ar e a uma altura de aproximadamente
1,5m acima do piso. Evite lugares que possam afetar o termostato,
como:
Em pontos mortos atrs de portas, cantos e frestas;
Prximos ao insuflamento de ar;
Chamins e dutos de ar;
Prximos a janelas ou lugares com incidncia de raios

solares.
no possui
O termostato deve ser ligado na rgua de bornes do quadro eltrico

da unidade interna utilizando cabos de cobre flexveis com bitola
mnima de 1,5 mm e com comprimento mximo de 30m. Evite
que os cabos de interligao sejam instalados prximos ou no
mesmo eletroduto do circuito de fora. Consulte os esquemas
eltricos no ANEXO IV e ANEXO V para maiores detalhes da
interligao.
......................................
5 - Operao
5.1. Antes da Partida
1. Visualmente verifique a fiao de alimentao de fora quanto
ao dimensionamento e especificao. Deve estar de acordo com
as normas ABNT e/ou locais, bem como o ponto de fora do
equipamento.
2. Verifique se a alimentao de energia eltrica est protegida
por chave seccionadora e fusveis.
5.2.
Partida Inicial
Depois do operador ter se familiarizado com a seqncia de

operao da unidade e todas as verificaes realizadas, a unidade
pode ser colocada em operao. Proceda como se segue:
1. Energize a bomba de gua de resfriamento e os ventiladores da
torre (somente unidades BWX).
2. Coloque a chave do ventilador na posio ON.
3. Verifique se a fiao de campo compatvel com os

requerimentos de fora do ponto de alimentao da unidade.
4. Nos modelos BAX faa vcuo na interligao com a unidade
condensadora. Este dever ser feito por dois pontos, um do lado
de alta outro do lado de baixa presso, com conexes e mangueiras
de no mnimo dimetro de 3/8 pol, at atingir no mnimo 300mmHg,
o teste de vazamento ou de qualidade do vcuo feito pelo
fechamento da bomba de vcuo e a leitura no poder aumentar
de 200mmHg aps 15 minutos. O sensor de vcuo dever estar
instalado na mquina, afastado do ponto de tomada do vcuo.
3. Verifique a vazo de ar comparando-a de projeto. Ajuste se

necessrio conforme tabela.
4. Ligue o compressor. Nas unidades BAX certifique-se que os
ventiladores do condensador tambm foram ligados.
5. Caso existam condies adversas ou rudos anormais, desligue
a unidade e investigue a causa. Caso contrrio, continue a
operao.
6. Preencha a ficha tcnica de partida com todos os valores.
5. Os equipamentos so entregues com carga de refrigerante

nos modelos BWX, entretanto nos modelos BAX+REM necessrio
completar a carga de refrigerante conforme informado no ANEXO
VI. Esta operao deve ser feita sempre com refrigerante gasoso,
pela linha de suco, atravs da tomada de presso apropriada.
A carga de refrigerante ser considerada completa quando os
valores de superaquecimento e sub-resfriamento estiverem dentro
das faixas recomendadas e sem borbulhas no visor.
7. Ajuste o termostato para valor de projeto.

8. Orientao e treinamento do usurio final.
6. Verifique a unidade visualmente quanto a vazamentos no

circuito de refrigerante.
7. Verifique o alinhamento das polias usando o mtodo dos
quatro pontos antes de ajustar a tenso das correia (veja item 5.1
quanto ao alinhamento das polias e tenso da correia).
8. Verifique o alinhamento do ventilador dentro do caracol ao
gir-lo manualmente. Se algum atrito ocorrer, faa as correes
necessrias.
9. Verifique se o filtro de ar est perfeitamente colocado. Para
isto, retire as grelhas de retorno. No opere a unidade sem o filtro
de ar.
10. Instale todos painis aps a inspeo interna da unidade.
11. Verifique se todas as tubulaes tais como a de gua de
resfriamento e de dreno esto prontas e testadas. Os sifes de
dreno devem estar instalados.
12. Verifique se as bombas de gua funcionam corretamente e
as vazes foram ajustadas.
13. Verifique se as vlvulas de servio esto abertas para a
operao apropriada.
14. Certifique-se de que os ventiladores da torre esto ligados
corretamente e que os ventiladores esto girando no sentido
correto.
......................................
5 - Operao (continuao)
5.3. Guia de Soluo de Problemas
PROBLEMA
CAUSA PROVVEL
1. Compressor defeituoso ou falta de compresso.
2. Temperatura de entrada do ar no evaporador muito alta.
3. Evaporador ou condensador incrustado.
4. Baixa carga de refrigerante.
5. Vlvula de expanso termosttica desregulada ou com
defeito.
6. Vazo incorreta de ar no evaporador.
7. Termostato no operando corretamente.
Falta
de
resfriamento
AO
1. Verificar a presso de descarga de acordo com a compresso.
Inspecionar o compressor e substitu-lo, se necessrio.
2. Inspecionar a instalao quanto a infiltraes e vazamentos de
ar.
3. Inspecionar e limpar.
4. Reparar os vazamentos de refrigerante e completar a carga.
5. Ajustar o superaquecimento (anexo VI) ou substituir o componente
de alimentao.
6. Determinar a vazo e ajustar a tenso da correia.
7. Inspecionar o termostato e substitu-lo, se necessrio.
A. Devido ao pressostato de baixa

1. Vazo reduzida de ar no evaporador.
2. Baixa carga de refrigerante.
3. Capilar da vlvula de expanso quebrado.
4. Linha de refrigerante restringida.
5. Pressostato de baixa com defeito ou com ajuste incorreto.
1. Inspecionar a superfcie e limpar. Verificar o acionamento do

ventilador do evaporador.
2. Reparar os vazamentos de refrigerante e completar a carga.
3. Substituir a cabea da vlvula.
4. Determinar a causa da restrio e reparar.
5. Substituir.
B. Devido ao pressostato de alta

Desarme
de
compressor(es)
1. Ar no sistema de refrigerante.
2. Excesso de refrigerante.
3. Pressostato de alta com defeito ou com ajuste incorreto.
1. Re-evacuar o sistema de refrigerante e colocar uma nova carga.

2. Purgar o excesso de refrigerante.
3. Substituir.
C. Devido proteo interna

1. Sobrecorrente do compressor .
Rudo excessivo
quando o
ventilador parte.
2. Presso de descarga excessiva.

3. Superaquecimento do compressor devido baixa carga de
refrigerante.
4. Motor do compressor com um enrolamento em curto circuito.
1. Verificar a alimentao eltrica, contatoras, interligaes eltricas

e reparar a falha.
2. Veja a seo B acima.
3. Verificar a carga de refrigerante. Reparar os a vazamentos e
completar a carga, se necessrio.
4. Substituir o compressor.
1. Polias desalinhadas.
2. Tenso da correia incorreta.
1. Realinhar o conjunto (mtodo dos quatro pontos).

2. Reajustar a tenso da correia.
Nota: Esta condio de servio deve ser apenas atendida por pessoal qualificado. Contactar o seu representante York mais prximo.
......................................
6 - Manuteno
6.1. Alinhamento do Acionamento
6.4. Inspeo dos Filtros de Ar
O alinhamento das polias do sistema de ventilao feito pelo

mtodo dos quatro pontos que consiste em verificar o paralelismo
entre a polia do ventilador e a do motor, desde que os seus eixos
tambm estejam paralelos.
1. Encoste uma rgua em ambas as polias. A rgua deve manter
contato com as extremidades das duas polias ao mesmo tempo
(fig.5).
2. Se for necessrio realinhar, libere a polia do ventilador,
permitindo que ela se mova ao longo do eixo.
Polia do
ventilador

paralela s polias
Parafuso de
fixao
Polia do
ventilador
Parte mvel
Parafuso de
ajuste
Rgua
Polia do
motor
Polia do
motor
Alinhado
No alinhado
Parte fixa
Fig. 5 - Ajuste das Polias

3. Alinhe-a com a polia do motor utilizando a rgua e fixe-a ao
eixo do ventilador novamente.
Ajuste da tenso da correia

Para o ajuste da tenso na(s) correia(s) afrouxe os parafusos
de fixao do motor na sua base de maneira que no soltem.
Com o motor deslizando sobre sua base, movimente-o at
alcanar a tenso adequada na(s) correia(s), ou seja, uma deflexo
de 15 a 20 mm para uma fora de 4 Kg aplicada no centro da
extenso da correia.
Aperte os parafusos de fixao do motor na sua base aps o
ajuste da tenso.
6.2. Ajuste da Rotao do Ventilador do Ar de

Insuflamento
A velocidade de rotao (RPM) do ventilador de ar de
insuflamento depender da vazo requerida (CFM), dos acessrios
da unidade e das resistncias estticas dos sistemas de dutos de
ar de insuflamento e de retorno. Com estas informaes, a RPM
para o ventilador de insuflamento de ar pode ser determinado com
base nas curvas de performance do ventilador.
Se houver necessidade de alterao na RPM do ventilador,
afrouxe os parafusos de fixao do motor base para liberar a
correia. Ento, aproxime a parte mvel da polia regulvel em direo
parte fixa para aumentar a RPM ou vice-versa para diminu-la.
Depois que o motor do ventilador do ar de insuflamento estiver
operando, ajuste os sistemas de dutos (insuflamento e retorno)
para balancear a distribuio de ar atravs do espao condicionado.
6.3. Lubrificao dos Motores e Ventiladores

No necessria a lubrificao dos motores e ventiladores por
possurem rolamentos com lubrificao permanente.
10
Os filtros de ar, instalados atrs das grelhas frontais e antes da

serpentina evaporadora, devem ser inspecionados e limpos
regularmente (ver Rotinas de Manuteno), no podendo a unidade
operar sem eles.
6.5. Condensadores a Ar
A limpeza da serpentina deve ser feita com escovas macias, ar
comprimido ou aspirador de p. Para a correo de possveis
amassamentos, utilize um pente de aletas.
6.6. Condensadores a gua

Verifique atentamente o sistema para certificar-se que a
incrustao est realmente causando o problema. A alta presso
de condensao por si s no indica que o condensador est
incrustado.
A operao correta das torres de resfriamento aumentar o
intervalo entre limpezas consideravelmente. A taxa de reposio
de gua da torre deve ser verificada freqentemente. Se uma torre
for operada com insuficiente gua de compensao, a
concentrao mineral resultante na gua pode causar uma grande
e rpida incrustao nos tubos do condensador. Esta condio
necessitar limpeza freqente e poder conduzir uma corroso
severa.
Aditivos qumicos, incluindo aqueles para evitar algas e
organismos vivos, devem ser fornecidos por um fornecedor confivel
e utilizados especificamente de acordo com as instrues.
As seguintes possibilidades devem ser sempre verificadas
antes de se proceder com a limpeza:
1. Excesso de refrigerante;
2. Ar no sistema ou medidas erradas de presso de
condensao (verifique as presses comparando s tabelas de
vapor);
3. Vlvula reguladora de gua incorretamente ajustada ou
defeituosa (verifique o seu ajuste e a sua operao);
4. Altas temperaturas de entrada de gua de condensao
(verifique o ventilador da torre e o sistema).
Em condensadores a gua tipo Casco e Tubo, para limpeza
retire as tampas do condensador e proceda com a remoo de
incrustaes utilizando escovas de ao apropriadas para limpeza
interna dos tubos.
Em condensadores a gua tipo Tubo e Tubo, para sua limpeza
utilize uma soluo qumica diluda em gua e aplicada no sistema
com bomba dgua em contra fluxo at a eliminao total das
incrustaes, sendo imprescindvel a retirada.
6.7. Rotinas de Manuteno Preventiva

Na partida inicial e periodicamente durante a operao, ser
necessrio executar determinados servios de rotina para
assegurar que a unidade funcione corretamente.
Os procedimentos de manuteno preventiva devem obedecer
a norma NBR13971 e demais cdigos tcnicos aplicveis.
......................................
6 - Manuteno (continuao)
A manuteno preventiva deve incluir as seguintes rotinas:
FREQNCIA
TEM
ROTINAS DE MANUTENO
Inspecionar e limpar o filtro de ar lavvel semanalmente, para a srie Padro de equipamento.

Inspecione mensalmente o filtro de ar descartvel para a srie Plus de equipamento,
verificando mensalmente a necessidade da troca.
Medir as temperaturas e presses de operao, verificando e ajustando o
superaquecimento e o sub-resfriamento (anexo VI).
Medir a tenso e a corrente do(s) compressor(es).
Verificar os desbalanceamentos de tenso e corrente.
Verificar o aperto dos bornes e das conexes eltricas.
Limpar o painel de fora/controle.
Verificar a operao de todos os dispositivos de controle e de segurana.
Verificar a vlvula de expanso quanto correta operao.
Verificar a tenso e o desgaste da correia e apertar ou substituir, se necessrio.
Verificar o alinhamento das polias.
Medir a tenso e a corrente do motor do ventilador.
Verificar os rolamentos.
Inspecionar a unidade quanto a rudos e vibraes anormais.
Inspecionar a unidade quanto a vazamentos.
Inspecionar o isolamento trmico da unidade.
Limpar a serpentina e a bandeja do evaporador, se necessrio.
Limpar a serpentina e a bandeja do condensador, se necessrio (unidades BAX).
Limpar o condensador a gua, se necessrio (Ver recomendaes anteriores).
Verificar os drenos de condensado e limp-los, se necessrio.
Eliminar os pontos de ferrugem da unidade.
Limpar toda a unidade.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
BIM
SEM
ANUAL
......................................
11
Anexo I - Caractersticas Fsicas

05
Caractersticas Gerais
Alimentao de fora (V//Hz)
Alimentao de comando (V//Hz)
N. de circuitos frigorgenos / N. de estgios
Fludo refrigerante
Carga de HCFC-22 (Kg)*
Peso da unidade srie Padro (Kg)**
Peso da unidade srie Plus (Kg)**
Dreno N. - Diam. Tipo
C
Tipo
o
Quantidade
m
p
Rotao (rpm)
r
Carga de leo por circuito (1)
e
s.
leo recomendado
A
rea de face (m2)
E
l
N. de filas
e
t
Aletas por polegada
v
a
Tipo
d
N. de circuitos
o
a
Centrfugo tipo Siroco
V
e
Caractersticas construtivas
p
n
Vazo nominal (m3/h)
t
Faixa de presso disponvel
o
i
l
na vazo nominal (mmca)
a
r
Faixa de vazo (m3/h)
d
o
Rotao (rpm) na vazo nom.
r
a
e P.E.D. mxima
M
Quantidade
o
d
t
Carcaa N de plos
o
Potncia (CV)
r
o
Tm
Correia V tipo
r i
Diam. Polia ventilador (mm)
a s
r
n s
Diam. Polia motor (mm)
s
- o
N de voltas por regulagem
Tipo
Srie do equipamento
Vazo de gua nom. (m3/h)

Perda de carga nom. (mca)
g
Conexes
- Diam. (pol)
u
de gua
- Tipo
- N. ent/sada
a
C
Conexes
- Diam. (pol)
de refrigerante
- Tipo
o
- N. ent/sada
n
Tipo
Srie do equipamento
d
Vazo de gua nom. (m3/h)

e
Perda de carga nom. (mca)
g
n
Conexes
- Diam. E/S (pol)
u
de gua
- Tipo
s
- N. ent/sada
a
a
Conexes
- Diam. E/S (pol)
de refrigerante
- Tipo
d
- N. ent/sada
o
C - Linha de descarga N.
o
r
n - Diam. (pol)
A
e - Tipo
x - Linha de lquido N.
r
e - Diam. (pol)
s - Tipo
S
Pressostato automtico alta (psig)
e
baixa (psig)
g
u
Fusvel de Comando (A)
r
a
Vlvula de Segurana
n
do Condensador (psig)
a
Srie do equipamento
Normal
Tipo
F
Classificao
i
Dimenses (mm)
l
t
Srie do equipamento
Especial
r
Tipo
o
Classificao
Dimenses (mm)
Quantidade x (L x A x E)
Srie Padro
Termostato
Srie Plus
15
12
22
BAX
BWX
BAX
BWX
BAX
BWX
BAX
10.0
15.0
15.0
12.5
12.5
22.5
22.5
220 ou 380/3/60
Padro: 220/1/60; Plus: 24/1/60
1/1
3/2
1/1
2/2
2/2
2/2
HCFC-22
19
7
9
14
4,5
11,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
486
232
307
401
183
377
165
205
275
350
410
335
734
297
409
539
235
487
165
205
275
350
410
335
2 - 3/4 BSP
Scroll - Hermtico
2
1
3
3500
2,12
2,12
3 x 2,12
2 x 2,12
2 x 2,12
2 x 2,12
Zerol 150T (Viscosity 150@ 10QF)
0,41
0,63
1,43
0,74
0,92
0,92
4
13
Aletas de Alumnio corrugadas e Tubos de Cobre
14
8
12
12
14
21
15x 15
9x 9
10x 10
12x 12
15x 15
2 x 12x 12
1 rotor dupla asp. 1 rotor dupla asp. 1 rotor dupla asp. 1 rotor dupla asp. 1 rotor dupla asp. 2 rotor dupla asp.
10200
3400
5100
6800
8500
14960
0-20
0-15
0-15
0-20
0-20
0-20
BWX
5.0
10
07
BAX
5.0
2680 a 4046
1190
BWX
7.5
BAX
7.5
4429 a 6687
1080
BWX
10.0
5396 a 7332
920
13629 a 17937
1000
3
A36
229
90-119
3,5
-T&T
Padro
10,3
12
1 1/2
BSP
1/1
5/8
solda
2/2
S&T
Plus
10,3
5,0
2
BSP
1/1
3/4/ 1/2
solda
2/2
2
5/8
solda
2
5/8
solda
5
2 x B36
229
110-142
3,5
T&T
-Padro
15,5
9,0
1 1/2
BSP
1/1
5/8
solda
3/3
S&T
Plus
15,5
5,0
2 1/2
BSP
1/1
1/ 3/4
solda
3/3
3
5/8
solda
3
5/8
solda
1
IP55 - 4 plos
1
A25
127
71-104
3,5
T&T
-Padro
3,4
10
1
BSP
1/1
5/8
solda
1/1
S&T
Plus
3,4
4,0
1 1/2
BSP
1/1
5/8/ 1/2
solda
1/1
1
5/8
solda
1
5/8
solda
2
2
A25
A34
127
203
71-104
90-119
3,5
3,5
T&T
T&T
--Padro
Padro
5,2
6,9
12
11
1
1
BSP
BSP
1/1
1/1
5/8
5/8
solda
solda
1/1
2/2
S&T
S&T
Plus
Plus
5,2
6,9
4,0
6,0
1 1/2
1 1/2
BSP
BSP
1/1
1/1
3/4/ 1/2
5/8/ 1/2
solda
solda
1/1
2/2
1
2
5/8
5/8
solda
solda
1
2
5/8
5/8
solda
solda
3
A36
229
90-119
3,5
T&T
-Padro
8,6
12
1 1/2
BSP
1/1
5/8
solda
2/2
S&T
Plus
8,6
5,0
2
BSP
1/1
5/8/ 1/2
solda
2/2
2
5/8
solda
2
5/8
solda
Condensao a ar desarme = 410 (+/-10), rearme = 300 (+/-10), Condensao a gua desarme = 275, rearme = 195 (+/-10)
Condensao a ar /gua desarme = 35 (+/-5), rearme = 80 (+/-5)
310
809 x 466
310
825 x 720
3 x (300 x 600 x 25)

1 estgio / TVCPI 101 - SCE
2 x 2,0 (220V) + 1 x 2,0 (380V)

310
310
Padro
Lavvel - tela de nylon
G0 (ABNT)
962 x 762
1028 x 900
Plus
Descartvel / Filtro plissado
G3 (ABNT)
2 x (500 x 600 x 25)
310
1028 x 900
2 estgios / TVCPI 102 - SCE

Multi estgios microprocessado / SZ1022 YP
* A unidade BWX vem com a carga completa.

A unidade BAX vem pressurizada com R-22 na carga indicada nesta tabela e paracompletar a carga, veja o anexo VI.
** Considerado peso das unidades em funcionamento: Peso da unidade + carga de gs e refrigerante + condensadores a gua totalmente cheios (BWX).
12
8670 a 11770
760
6742 a 9152
730
......................................
310
2 x 844 x 810
3 x (500x600x25)
1 x (300x600x25)
Anexo II - Dados Dimensionais

Unidades Self Contained de 5 a 22,5 TR
R3
R1
Q
R
R2
P
O
T1
S1
R4
U
V
MOD.
DIM.
A
F
E
J
B
07
10
12
15
22
1000
1195
1195
1195
1960
510
510
700
700
700
700
1758
1758
2022
2022
2022
2022
333
320
400
303
303
353
298
326
386
473
473
386
----
----
----
----
----
255
----
----
----
----
----
386
355
341
409
419
419
579
49
22
35
24
24
34
265
289
341
402
402
341
468
468
573
573
573
573
670
670
670
670
670
670
620
620
779
779
779
779
189
189
189
189
189
189
94
94
94
94
94
94
346
346
396
396
396
254
1 x 72
1 x 72
3 x 72
3 x 72
3 x 72
5 x 72
95
95
80
80
80
80
R1
210
210
----
----
----
---241
R2
80
80
160
210
210
R3
165
165
----
----
----
----
R4
80
80
160
195
195
241
05
1000
----
----
286
314
380
380
S1
----
----
326
296
296
352
85
85
110
170
170
170
T1
385
385
171
196
196
226
163
163
259
259
259
260
239
239
335
335
335
337
1 1/4
1 1/2
1 1/2
2 1/2
1 1/4
1 1/2
1 1/2
2 1/2
Y
Z
2 x 1/2 2 x 1/2 4 x 1/2 4 x 1/2 4 x 1/2 6 x 1/2
......................................
Dimenses em milmetros
13
Anexo II - Dados Dimensionais (continuao)
MODELO
REM05
REM07
A
1025
1395
B
365
543
C
520
890
D
390
568
E
528
565
F
5/8
5/8
G
5/8
5/8
Dimenses em milmetros
14
......................................
Anexo III - Dados Eltricos

Self a Ar - Unidade Evaporadora - BAX
Modelo
Ponto de
fora (A)
Corrente
total (A)
Potncia
total (W)
BAX05 - 220 V
BAX05 - 380 V
BAX07 - 220 V
BAX07 - 380 V
BAX10 - 220 V
BAX10 - 380 V
BAX12 - 220 V
BAX12 - 380 V
BAX15 - 220 V
BAX15 - 380 V
BAX22 - 220 V
BAX22 - 380 V
25
16
34
22
46
30
53
34
58
38
86
56
21,08
13,47
28,97
18,83
42,47
27,13
49,07
31,75
53,57
35,15
81,30
53,26
6370
6370
8892
8892
12740
12740
15212
15212
16984
16984
25876
25876
Compressor 3
M. Evaporador
Compressor 2
Compressor 1
Corrente
Potncia
Corrente
Potncia
Corrente
Potncia
Corrente
Potncia
nominal (A) nominal (W) nominal (A) nominal (W) nominal (A) nominal (W) nominal (A) nominal (W)
16,0
9,7
18,9
11,5
16,0
9,7
16,0
9,7
18,9
11,5
18,9
11,5
5020
5020
6570
6570
5020
5020
5020
5020
6570
6570
6570
6570
16,0
9,7
18,9
11,5
18,9
11,5
18,9
11,5
5020
5020
6570
6570
6570
6570
6570
6570
18,9
11,5
6570
6570
3,08
1,77
6,47
3,73
6,47
3,73
8,57
4,95
8,57
4,95
13,80
7,96
750
750
1500
1500
1500
1500
2200
2200
2200
2200
3700
3700
Self a Ar - Unidade Condensadora - REM

Modelo
BAX05 - 220 V
BAX05 - 380 V
BAX07 - 220 V
BAX07 - 380 V
BAX10 - 220 V
BAX10 - 380 V
BAX12 - 220 V
BAX12 - 380 V
BAX15 - 220 V
BAX15 - 380 V
BAX22 - 220 V
BAX22 - 380 V
Combinao
BAX + REM
01 REM05
01 REM05
01 REM07
01 REM07
02 REM05
02 REM05
01 REM 05
01 REM 07
01 REM 05
01 REM 07
02 REM07
02 REM07
03 REM07
03 REM07
M. Cond. 3
M. Cond. 2
M. Cond. 1
Corrente
Corrente
Potncia
Potncia
Corrente
Potncia
nominal (A) nominal (W) nominal (A) nominal (W) nominal (A) nominal (W)
2,0
2,0
3,6
3,6
2,0
2,0
2,0
600
600
822
822
600
600
600
2,0
600
3,6
3,6
3,6
3,6
822
822
822
822
2,0
2,0
600
600
3,6
822
3,6
3,6
3,6
3,6
3,6
822
822
822
822
822
3,6
3,6
822
822
Self a gua - Unidade Evaporadora - BWX

Modelo
Ponto de
fora (A)
Corrente
total (A)
Potncia
total (W)
BWX05 - 220 V
BWX05 - 380 V
BWX07 - 220 V
BWX07 - 380 V
BWX10 - 220 V
BWX10 - 380 V
BWX12 - 220 V
BWX12 - 380 V
BWX15 - 220 V
BWX15 - 380 V
BWX22 - 220 V
BWX22 - 380 V
23
14
30
18
42
26
47
29
51
31
75
45
19,08
11,47
25,37
15,23
38,47
23,13
43,47
26,15
46,37
27,95
70,50
42,46
5770
5770
8070
8070
11540
11540
13790
13790
15340
15340
23410
23410
Compressor 3
M. Evaporador
Compressor 2
Compressor 1
Corrente
Potncia
Corrente
Corrente
Potncia
Corrente
Potncia
Potncia
nominal (A) nominal (W) nominal (A) nominal (W) nominal (A) nominal (W) nominal (A) nominal (W)
16,0
9,7
18,9
11,5
16,0
9,7
16,0
9,7
18,9
11,5
18,9
11,5
5020
5020
6570
6570
5020
5020
5020
5020
6570
6570
6570
6570
16,0
9,7
18,9
11,5
18,9
11,5
18,9
11,5
5020
5020
6570
6570
6570
6570
6570
6570
18,9
11,5
6570
6570
3,08
1,77
6,47
3,73
6,47
3,73
8,57
4,95
8,57
4,95
13,80
7,96
750
750
1500
1500
1500
1500
2200
2200
2200
2200
3700
3700
Para modelos BWX no foram considerados os valores de corrente eltrica das bombas e torres de resfriamento.
......................................
15
16
22
15
12
10
07
05
BAX/
BWX
2550
2860
3180
3510
3850
3900
4390
4879
5364
5849
5032
5661
6290
6919
7548
6242
7022
7803
8583
9364
7099
7986
8874
9759
10645
10064
11322
12580
13838
15096
Vazo
de Ar
(m3/h)
721
755
792
829
848
820
934
983
1035
778
826
875
928
625
658
691
727
662
700
740
781
778
826
875
928
985
705
760
815
873
557
595
632
672
599
648
687
733
781
705
760
815
873
934
687
717
747
848
890
934
983
1025
1085
1147
949
1014
1080
1149
867
937
1015
1080
1131
1177
1234
910
949
989
1034
1082
772
804
838
873
741
768
796
911
949
989
1094
1148
1206
1221
1262
RPM
RPM
774
851
927
1006
1083
629
692
754
818
884
483
528
572
618
664
533
583
635
687
739
629
692
754
818
884
1030
1082
1145
RPM
20
15
920
979
1050
1121
RPM
RPM
10
801
872
953
1034
Presso Esttica Disponvel (mmca)
971
1005
1042
1083
821
850
883
793
817
843
971
1005
1042
1161
1210
1264
1308
1343
RPM
25
Anexo IV - Performance dos Ventiladores
......................................
Anexo V - Ajuste do sub-resfriamento e do superaquecimento

O sub-resfriamento deve ser sempre verificado quando se estiver carregando o sistema com refrigerante e/
ou antes de ajustar o superaquecimento.
O sub-resfriamento a diferena entre temperatura de saturao correspondente presso de descarga
(temperatura de condensao saturada) e a temperatura da linha de lquido na sada do condensador (antes do
filtro secador). Para se medir a temperatura na linha de lquido, utilize um termmetro de bulbo ou eletrnico
com sensor de temperatura, fixando-o na tubulao e isolando-o para evitar o contato com o ambiente. Instalando
um manifold na descarga do compressor, leia a presso e obtenha a correspondente temperatura saturada
numa tabela de presso versus temperatura para R-22.
Exemplo:
Presso de descarga ( ___ psig)
convertida para temperatura
Temperatura da linha de lquido
Sub-resfriamento
6C < Sub-resfriamento < 10C
Sub-resfriamento < 6C
Sub-resfriamento > 10C
__________C
- __________C
=__________C
Carga de R-22 est correta.
Adicionar R-22.
Retirar R-22.
Obs.: Para ajustar o sub-resfriamento, o equipamento deve estar operando em condies estabilizadas.
O superaquecimento deve ser verificado apenas depois que o equipamento estiver em condio de operao
estabilizada e o sub-resfriamento estiver ajustado.
O superaquecimento calculado como a diferena entre a temperatura do refrigerante na sada do evaporador
(temperatura de suco) e a temperatura correspondente presso de suco (temperatura de evaporao
saturada). Para se medir a temperatura de suco, utilize um termmetro de bulbo ou eletrnico com sensor de
temperatura, fixando-o na parte superior (precauo contra leituras falsas) da tubulao de sada do evaporador,
o mais prximo possvel do bulbo da vlvula de expanso e isolando-o para evitar o contato com o ambiente.
Instalando um manifold na suco do compressor, leia a presso e obtenha a correspondente temperatura
saturada numa tabela de presso versus temperatura para R-22.
Exemplo:
Temperatura de suco
Presso de suco (___psig)
convertida para temperatura
Superaquecimento
8C < Superaquecimento < 12C
Superaquecimento < 8C
Superaquecimento > 12C
__________C
- __________C
= __________C
Ajuste correto da vlvula de expanso.
Fechar a vlvula de expanso.
Abrir a vlvula de expanso.
......................................
17
Anexo VI - Espaos Recomendados para Instalao
V
AA
BB
BB
V
CC
V
Modelo
BAX 05/07
BAX 10/12/15/22
BWX 05/07
BWX 10/12/15/22
BWX 05/07 Plus
BWX 10/12/15/22 Plus
AA
600
600
600
600
600
600
CC
0
0
0
0
1000
1500
BB
700
700
700
700
700
700
Cotas em mm
Estas cotas so consideradas com sada de tubulaes pelo lado direito. Caso a opo de sada das
tubulaes for do lado esquerdo, substituir as cotas AA por CC.
AA
BB
~~
AA
AA
~
AA
BB
18
05
300
1000
......................................
07
300
1000
......................................
19

Ler o manual

Brasil
Form: U-IOM001-BR(1204)
Substitui: Form: U-IOM001-BR(0402)
YORK INTERNATIONAL
Fone: (041) 661-3300
CEP 83325-040

FAX: (041) 661-3397
Pinhais - PR
O fabricante se reserva no direito de proceder a qualquer modificao sem

prvio aviso.

Issued July 1, 2006
A350A/B Series
Electronic On/Off Temperature Control

Description
Features
The A350A/B Series are On/Off temperature

controls with a SPDT relay output and LED
indication. These controls are used in
conjunction with the A99B Series (PTC silicon)
Temperature Sensors.
Accessories
Applications
frozen/refrigerated food cases

space temperature control
cooling tower control
beverage coolers
chiller staging
The base silicon sensor (A99BC-25C, not

immersible) is included with each A350A/B
Control.
24V
COM
VDC
Selection Chart
Code
Number
Output
A350AA-1C
A350
Range
Adj. Diff.
Offset
Sensor
(Included)
Setpoint
Dial
SEN
Module
Connector
-30 to 130F
A350AA-2C
90 to 250F
SPDT
Relay
A350AA-3C1
1 to 30F
1 to 30F
-30 to 130F
A350BA-1C
-35 to 55C
A350BA-2C
30 to 121C
A99BC-25C
0.5 to 17C 0.5 to 17C
1. Concealed setpoint, only adjustable by removing cover.
Differential
Potentiometer
Relay
Energized
LED Indicator
J um per Bloc k
Pos it ion
Relay
He at i ng
Co ol in g
Note: Specify code number from this selection chart, along with additional
staging, display, and power modules, and temperature sensing enclosures,
if required.
N.C.
COM
N.O.
a350bd.eps.eps
Two basic models cover a temperature range

of -30 to 250F with an adjustable differential
of 1 to 30F. A350A controls incorporate
Fahrenheit scales; the A350B models have
Celsius scales. The S350 Stage,
D350 Display, and Y350R Power Modules can
be used with the A350A/B.
field selectable heat/cool mode

adjustable setpoint and differential
LED indication of relay status
modules
Interior of A350A/B
0.145 Mounting Slot

3.68 For #6 Screws
0.5
13
A350 Series ON/OFF Temperature Control

Product
A350AA
A350BA
On/Off Temperature Control with Fahrenheit scale

On/Off Temperature Control with Celsius scale
Temperature Range
-30 to 130F (-35 to 55C); 90 to 250F (30 to 121C)
Differential Range
1 to 30F (0.5 to 17C)
Supply
Voltage 1
Transformer
20 to 30 VAC, 50/60 Hz, Class 2
Y350R
120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Relays
SPDT enclosed relays, contacts rated at 10 amp, noninductive (resistive), 1/2 hp 120/240 VAC
Power Consumption
1.4 VA Maximum
Ambient
Operating
Temperature Shipping
-30 to 150F (-34 to 66C)
Humidity
2.94
75
1.56
40
-40 to 185F (-40 to 85C)
DIN
Rail
5.00
127
4.00
102
A350
ON
2.40
61
0.42
11
1.20
31
120
208/240
Full Load Amp
9.8
4.9
Locked Rotor Amp
58.8
29.4
2.40
61
0.85
22
0.85
22
0.875 Conduit
22
Hole
a350a2.eps
3.00
76
Relay Ratings
Voltage AC
A350A/B Dimensions, in. (mm)
Pilot Duty --125 VA at 24/240 VAC
1 of 1

A350P Series
Electronic Proportional Plus Integral Temperature Control

.
The A350P Electronic Proportional Plus

Integral Temperature Control Series has two
proportional outputs of 0 to 10 VDC and 0 to
20 mA. This control is used in conjunction with
the A99B Series (PTC silicon) Temperature
Sensors. Two controls cover a temperature
range from -30 to 250F with an adjustable
throttling range (proportional band) of
2 to 30F.
Cov er Sc rews (Quant ity = 4)
M od ule
Co nn ecto r
O
N
Se tpoint
Dial
Fast (C1)
Medium (C2)
Slow (C3)
Off
2 3 4
Description
Thr ottling Ra nge

Po te ntiom et er
Int egrat ion DI P Switch

(shown in proportional only position)
MIN
THROT
RANGE OUTPUT
M in i m u m
Ou tp ut
Po ten tio met er
Re ve r se
Act in g
Direct
Act in g
LED I ndicat or
(Percent of Ou tput)
Proportional plus integral (PI) control is an

option to hold setpoint regardless of load shifts
on the system. A temperature sensor
(A99BC-25C) is included with each A350P
control. The S350 Staging Module, D350
Display Module, and Y350R Power Module
can be used with the A350P.
a350p.eps
Op er ation Mo de
Ju mpe r Positio ns
24 V (2 4 VAC) ( +)
(0 -10 VDC Out pu t) V

(0 -20 mA O utp ut) I
C (Common) (-)
(Sen sor ) (+) SN
VDC (+5 VDC)
A350P
Interior of A350P
Features
field-selectable proportional only or

plug-together connectors and 35 mm DIN
rail mounting eliminate wiring between
models and reduce installation costs
ten segment LED displays percent of output
signal
field-selectable reverse or direct-acting
mode
minimum output adjustable from 0 to 60%
two models cover a wide setpoint range of
-30 to 250F (-35 to 121C)
Selection Chart
Code
Number
Output
Signal
Range
A350PS-1C
A350PT-1C
A350PS-2C
Proportional Voltage: 0 to 10 VDC

and
Proportional Current: 0 to 20 mA
-30 to 130F
-35 to 55C
90 to 250F
30 to 121C
Throttling
Range
Sensor
(Included)
A99BC-25C
2 to 30F
1 to 17C
None
A99BC-25C
Note: Specify code number from this selection chart, along with additional staging, display,
and power modules, and temperature sensing enclosures, if required.
Applications
modulating heating and cooling valves
maintain mixed air duct temperature via
damper modulation
0.145 Mounting Slot

3.68 For #6 Screws
0.5
13
A350P Electronic Temperature Control with Proportional Output

Supply
Voltage 1

Y350R
120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Proportional Output
0 to 10 VDC (550 ohm load minimum) and 0 to

20 mA. (600 ohm load maximum).
Minimum Output
Adjustable from 0 to 60% of the output span
Output Indication
A ten segment LED indicates percentage of

output
Control Action
Power Consumption
3.2 VA
Three selectable rates fast, medium, slow and

an Off position
Ambient
Operating
-30 to 150F (-34 to 66C)
Humidity
2.94
75
1.56
40
5.00
127
4.00
102
DIN
Rail
2.40
61
1.20
31
0.42
11
-40 to 185F (-40 to 85C)
3.00
76
A350P
2.40
61
0.85
22
0.875 Conduit
22
Hole
a350pdim.eps
A350P Dimensions, in. (mm)

1 of 1

Issued July 1, 2006
D350 Series
Temperature Display Module

Description
The D350 Digital Display Module is used in
conjunction with the A350, A350E, A350P,
and A350R series temperature controls. A
3-digit LCD display provides continuous
read-out of the actual space temperature.
3-Digit
LCD Display
Module
Connector
Module
Connector
D3 50
By pressing and holding the setpoint button for

three seconds, the actual setpoint can also be
displayed.
P RE SS F O R SE T POI NT
Setpoint
Button
.Features
display of actual space temperature and

setpoint
remote display mounting with WHA29A
cable (up to 50 ft)
snap-together, 5-pin connector for easy
installation
d3501.eps
D350
Interior of D350
Applications
Use for temperature indication (local or
remote) in conjunction with any A350 .
Accessories
Selection Chart
Code Number
Display Range (F/C)
D350AA-1C
-30 to 250F
D350BA-1C
-34 to 121C
Display Character
For remote mounting of the D350 display module, specify the code
number (cable length).
0.35 in. LCD
Code Number
Cable Length
WHA29A-600R
3 ft (0.9 m)
WHA29A-603R
25 ft (7.6 m)
WHA29A-604R
50 ft (15.2 m)
0.145 Mounting Slot

3.68 For #6 Screws
0.5
13
D350 Series Temperature Display Module

Product
D350AA
Temperature module with Fahrenheit scale
D350BA
Temperature module with Celsius scale
Read-out
3-digit LCD (Liquid Crystal) continuous display
Supply Voltage
5 VDC provided by the temperature control
Ambient
Operating
-30 to 140F (-34 to 60C)
Humidity
Mounting
Surface or DIN rail
5.00
127
2.94
75
D350
PRESS FOR SETPOINT
-40 to 167F (-40 to 75C)
1.56
40
0.42
11
2.40
61
DIN Rail
Mount
1.20
31
0.85
22
0.875 Conduit
22 Hole
d3502.eps
2.40
61
D350 Dimensions, in. (mm)
1 of 1

S350A Series
Temperature Stage Module

Description
Features
The S350 Stage Module is used in conjunction

with the A350, A350E, A350P, and A350R
series temperature controls to add multiple
stage capability. The S350 module has an
SPDT output relay and three adjustments
including offset (de-energize stage action from
setpoint), heating or cooling mode, and
differential.
Using a Y350R, up to nine S350As can be

added to the A350, A350E, and A350R via the
5-pin, plug-together connector. Using a Y350R
with an A350P, up to four S350As can be
added. Using a 40 VA or greater external
transformer with an A350P, up to nine S350As
can be added.
heating or cooling mode, field-selectable

jumper
adjustable differential and offset
5-pin connector eliminates wiring between
modules
Applications
multiple staging of boilers or chillers

staging of refrigeration compressors
multiple fan staging for cooling tower
S350
.
Offset
Potentiometer
Differential
Potentiometer
Module
Connector
Module
Connector
Selection Chart
Code Number
Jumper Block
Position
S350AA-1C
Heating
Relay
COM
Output
N.O.
Terminals
1 to 30F
1 to 30F
0.5 to 17C
0.5 to 17C
0.1 45 Mounting Slot

3. 68 for No. 6 Screws
Interior of S350A
0. 5
13
2. 94
75
S350AA
Temperature module with Fahrenheit scale
S350AB
Temperature module with Celsius scale
Supply Voltage
24 volt power supply provided by A350 or Y350R
Power Consumption
1 VA Maximum
Ambient
Temperature
Operating
-30 to 150F (-34 to 66C)
Shipping
-40 to 185F (-40 to 85C)
5. 00
12 7
DIN Rail
Mo un t
S350 Series Temperature Stage Module

Product
SPDT Relay
Offset
Adjustment
Cooling
s3501.eps
N.C.
Relay
S350AB-1C
Differential
Adjustment
1. 56
40
S350
ON
2. 40
61
0. 42
11
1. 20
31
Humidity
Relay
SPDT enclosed relays. Contacts rated at 10 amp

non-inductive, 1/2 hp, 120/240 VAC
Mounting
Wall or DIN rail
2. 40
61
Relay Ratings
Voltage AC
120
208/240
Full Load Amp
9.8
4.9
Locked Rotor Amp
58.8
29.4
0. 85
22
0.8 75 Conduit
22
H ol e
s350.eps
Relay Energized
LED Indicator
Output
S350 Dimensions, in. (mm)
1 of 1
FANs 930, 930.5, 125, 121

Issue Date
A350
0899
System 350
A350A/B Electronic Temperature Control
The A350A/B Series is an on/off electronic
temperature control with a Single-Pole, Double-Throw
(SPDT) relay output and a Light-Emitting Diode (LED)
relay status indicator. Designed to operate with both
heating and cooling equipment, this control includes an
adjustable differential and an interchangeable
temperature sensor.
As are all System 350 products, the A350A/B is
housed in a NEMA 1, high-impact plastic enclosure.
expandability.
Figure 1: A350 Series Electronic

Temperature Control
Modular Design
Enables stage, display, and power modules to

be purchased and installed as needed
and 35 mm DIN Rail
Mounting

Two Standard Models

Cover Wide Setpoint
Ranges
-30 to 130F (-34 to 55C) or
90 to 250F (32 to 121C)
Reduces inventory by encompassing

temperature ranges required to support the
majority of Heating, Ventilation, Air
Conditioning, and Refrigeration (HVAC/R)
applications
Wide Adjustable Differential

of 1 to 30F (0.6 to 16.7C)
Enables the user to match equipment cycle

rate and/or sequencing for a given application
Field-Selectable Mode
Jumpers
Operates in both heating and cooling

applications
Available with Either

External or Concealed
Setpoint
Helps deter accidental and unauthorized

adjustments
Interchangeable
Temperature Sensors

Part No. 24-7664-44, Rev. C
Code No. LIT-930010
1
A pplication
The A350A/B Temperature Control can be used as
a standalone device or in conjunction with other
System 350 plug-together modules to control single or
multiple-stage HVAC or refrigeration equipment.
Typical applications include:
Setpoint Adjustment
Setpoint is defined as the temperature at which the
A350A/Bs relay de-energizes. Use the Setpoint Dial on
the front of the A350A/B to adjust setpoint. See
Figure 2.
frozen/refrigerated food cases
cooling tower control
beverage/milk coolers
chiller staging
space temperature control
Differential is defined as the change in sensor

temperature between energization and de-energization
of the relay. Adjustment of the A350A/B differential is
made using the potentiometer marked DIFF. See
Figure 2 for its location. Refer to Table 5 for
adjustment ranges.
A typical System 350 Temperature Control

arrangement includes the following:
A350A/B Temperature Control
S350 Stage Modules
D350 Digital Temperature Sensor/Setpoint Display

Module
Y350R Power Module (or Class 2

24 VAC transformer)
24V
COM
VDC
SEN
Setpoint
Dial
Module
Connector
DIFF
(Differential
Potentiometer)
Relay
LED Indicator
Jumper Block
Position
Heating
Relay
Cooling
O peration
NC
The A350A/B Temperature Control operates on

24 VAC and provides an SPDT relay output. A front
panel LED lights to indicate when the relay is
energized. Adjustable features include:
setpoint
differential
heating/cooling mode
IMPORTANT:
NO
Figure 2: A350A/B Board Layout and

Terminal Locations
Heating/Cooling Mode Adjustment
All System 350 Controls are

designed for use only as
responsibility of the installer to add
devices (safety, limit controls) that
protect against, or systems
(alarm, supervisory systems) that
warn of, control failure.
With Heating mode selected, the differential is below

setpoint. The relay and LED indicator will de-energize
as the temperature rises to the setpoint. As the
temperature drops to the setpoint minus the differential
setting, the relay will energize and the LED illuminates.
Refer to Figure 6.
With Cooling mode selected, the differential is above
setpoint. The relay and LED indicator will de-energize
as the temperature drops to setpoint. As the
temperature rises to the setpoint plus differential
setting, the relay will energize and the LED illuminates.
As shipped from the factory, the heating/cooling
jumper blocks are installed in the horizontal (cooling)
position. See Figure 2.
System 350 A350A/B Electronic Temperature Control Product/Technical Bulletin
A dd-On Modules
The S350 Stage Modules, D350 Digital Temperature
Display Module, and Y350R Power Module connect
together and plug into the A350 via a connector on its
right side. The maximum number of add-on modules is
listed in Table 1.
Table 1: Maximum Number of S350 Stage

Modules per A350A/A350B
Number
of S350A
or S350C
Modules
Allowed
Number
of S350A
or S350C
Modules
(with
1 S350P)
Allowed
Number of
S350A or
S350C
Modules
(with
2 S350P)
Allowed
Y350R
External
Class 2
Transformer
Power
Source
Note:
For each S350P added, the number of S350A

or S350C Stage Modules that can be used
with a Y350R decreases by two. If an external
transformer is used, the number of S350A and
S350C Stage Modules used decreases by
one for each additional S350P.
S350A On-Off Stage Modules

S350A On-Off Stage Modules receive power, setpoint,
and sensor input from the A350 control. S350A Stage
Modules perform switching functions based upon the
A350s setpoint and sensor information, with the offset
and differential selected at the S350A.
For more information on these modules, refer to the
System 350 S350 Temperature, S351 Humidity, and
S352 Pressure On/Off Stage Modules
S350C Slave Stage Modules

S350C Slave Stage Modules receive power and
sensor input from the A350 control. S350C Slave
Stage Modules perform switching functions based
upon the A350s sensor information. (Setpoint and
differential are selected independently at the S350C.)
TM
System 350 S350C Temperature Slave Stage
Module Product/Technical Bulletin (LIT-930084).
S350P Proportional Stage Modules

S350P Proportional Stage Modules receive power,
setpoint, and sensor input from the A350 control.
The S350P responds with an analog 0-10 VDC and
0-20 mA output signal. This is based upon the A350s
setpoint and sensor information, with the offset,
throttling range, and minimum output selected at the
S350P.
TM
System 350 S350P Proportional Plus Integral
Temperature Stage Module Product/Technical Bulletin
(LIT-930086).
D350 Temperature Sensor/Setpoint

Display Module
The D350 receives power, sensor, and setpoint
information from the A350. A 3-digit Liquid Crystal
Diode (LCD) gives continuous read-out of the sensed
temperature. Pushing the PRESS FOR SETPOINT
button on the front of the D350 causes the setpoint of
the adjoining A350 to be displayed.
Y350R Power Module

The Y350R provides a convenient method of powering
System 350 modules from a 120 or 240 VAC power
source. The Y350R supplies power to the modules.
See Figure 5 for a typical wiring diagram where a
Y350R is used to power the A350.
For more information on this module, refer to
TM
System 350 Y350R Power Module
D imensions
Mounting Slots
for No. 6 Screws
3/16 (4)
1/2 (13)
2 15/16
(75)
5 (127)
4 (102)
1 9/16
(40)
2 3/8 (61)
DIN Rail
Mount
7/16 (11)
1 3/16 (31)
Sensor
Conduit
Hole
3 (76)
1/4 (6)
2 3/8 (61)
9 3/4 (248)
7/8
(22)
7/8
(22)
Figure 3: A350A/B Control Dimensions, in. (mm)

The A350A/B Temperature Control is housed in a
standard 35 mm DIN rail mounting. The A350A/B is not
position sensitive but should be mounted for convenient
wiring and adjustment. Four key-slot mounting holes on
the back of the control case are provided for surface
mounting. Add-on modules must plug into the right side
of the A350A/B control.
Note: When mounting the System 350 modules to rigid
conduit, attach the hub to the conduit before
securing the hub to the control enclosure.
All wiring must conform to the National Electrical

Code and/or local regulations.
Note:

wiring connections are made to
avoid electrical shock or damage
to equipment.
For maximum electrical rating of control, see

label inside the control cover or Specifications
section. Use copper conductors only.
Consult the typical wiring diagrams (Figures 4 and 5)

for proper wiring and terminal designations.
Sensor
Note: If sensor is mounted less than 50 ft
(15.2 m) from the A350A/B,
shielded cable is not required.
A350A/B
L1
S350A
D350
24
VAC
24V
COM
VDC
SEN
L1
2
Load
Load
Figure 4: Typical Wiring Diagram for A350A/B

Powered by an External 10 VA Transformer
Sensor Connection
Shielded cable is not generally required for sensor
wiring on runs of less than 50 ft (15.2 m), but is
recommended for lengths greater than 50 ft (15.2 m).
When using shielded cable, isolate and tape the shield
at the sensor. Connect the shield to the COM sensor
terminal on the A350A/B. (See Figure 2 for terminal
location.) The A99BA-200C sensor, which includes
shielded cable, is available if needed.
Note:
Table 3: Sensors Included With A350A/B

Controls
Control
Table 2: Recommended Maximum Sensor

Cable Lengths
Meters
14 AWG
800
244
16 AWG
500
152
18 AWG
310
94
20 AWG
200
61
22 AWG
124
38
* Values provided are for 2-wire stranded cable.
A350AA-1C
A99BB-25C; Range: -40 to 212F

(-40 to 100C)
A350AA-2C
A99BC-25C; Range: -40 to 248F

(-40 to 120C)
A350AA-3C

(-40 to 100C)
A350AB-1C
No Sensor Included
A350AB-2C
No Sensor Included
A350AB-5C
No Sensor Included
A350BA-1C

(-40 to 100C)
A350BA-2C
A99BC-25; Range: -40 to 248F

(-40 to 120C)
A350BB-1C
No Sensor Included
Shielded Cable Length*

Feet
Various A99B Series Temperature Sensors and

mounting hardware are available for use with A350
Series Controls. See Tables 3 and 6. The sensor
must be connected to the COM and SEN terminals
on the four-position terminal strip located at the top
left of the printed circuit board (Refer to Figures 2,
4, and 5.). The sensors are not polarity sensitive.
Sensor Included
Sensor lead length is 9-3/4 in. (0.25 m)
At the maximum cable lengths listed in Table 2,

no more than 1F (0.6C) error in the sensed
temperature will result due to wire resistance.
Wire
Gauge
The sensor must be mounted so that it can

accurately sense the temperature of the controlled
medium.
For more information regarding sensor options and

installation, refer to the A99B Series Temperature
Sensors Product/Technical Bulletin (LIT-125186).
Sensor
Shield (Connect
to COM on A350)
A350A/B
Y350R
S350A
S350A
S350A
Load
Load
Load
D350
120 VAC
Load
Figure 5: System 350 Powered by Y350R Module

A djustments
Follow this procedure to set up the A350A/B for the
desired operation.
Note:
1. Remove the A350 cover by loosening the

2. Set the heating/cooling jumper blocks to the
desired mode of operation. Position the jumper
blocks vertically for heating or horizontally for
cooling. (See Figure 2.)
IMPORTANT:
Verify that the heating/cooling

jumper blocks are in the proper
position before powering the
System 350 modules. If the
jumper blocks on the control or
staging modules are installed in
the wrong position, the device will
activate the relay in response to
the opposite signal. The heating
or cooling equipment will remain
energized until the error is
corrected.
3. Adjust the differential potentiometer (DIFF) on the

A350 as needed. (Figure 6 is an example of a
multistage application.) The stage modules offset
and differential can be set independently.
(+)
OFF
Differential
OFFSET
3. Put the system in operation and observe at least

three complete operating cycles before leaving the
installation.
T roubleshooting
that the proper mode is selected on each module
(Heat/Cool, Direct Acting/Reverse Acting). Proceed as
follows to determine the cause of the problem:
ON
OFFSET
If an external transformer is used, select AC

volts on the DVM and verify that the voltage is
between 20 and 30 VAC.
OFF
ON
OFF
A350
S350A S350A S350A S350A
Stage 1 Stage 2 Stage 3 Stage 4 Stage 5
Cooling
Heating
ON
Jumper Set To
Figure 6: Typical Multistage

Heating/Cooling Application
4. Replace the cover, and secure in place with the
four captive screws. Move the setpoint dial to the
desired position.
6
1. Make sure installation and wiring connections are

according to job specifications before applying
power. (Refer to Figure 6 for an example of a
multistage application.)
2. Make the necessary adjustments and electrical
connections.
If a Y350R Power Module is used, select DC

volts on the DVM and verify that the voltage is
between 16 and 38 VDC.
Differential
(-)
Follow this procedure to verify that the A350A/B is

connected and functioning properly.
a. Connect a digital voltmeter (DVM) between

the 24V and COM terminals located on the
controls left side terminal block (See Figure 2.)
OFFSET
OFF
ON = Energized
OFF= De-energized
C heckout Procedure
1. Make sure proper voltage is applied to the A350

control.
OFF
OFFSET
Differential
Setpoint
Temperature
Differential
ON
Differential
ON
The A350A/B setpoint is factory calibrated at

midscale to a tolerance of +/- 1F (0.6C).
Setpoint tolerance at the extreme ends of the
setpoint ranges in relation to the printed scale
can be +/- 3F (1.7C). The D350 Display
Module is unaffected by this tolerance shift.
Use the D350 for the most accurate setpoint
selection.

voltage range, proceed to Step 2.
c.
If the DVM reading is not within the indicated

voltage range, correct the wiring, replace the
Y350R, or replace the external transformer.
2. Check temperature sensor for proper resistance.

a. Take an accurate, independent temperature
reading at the sensor location.
3. Check the A350 for proper operation.

Note:
a. Adjust the setpoint dial to at least 40F (22C)

below the sensor temperature determined in
Step 2.
b. Disconnect the sensor from the control. Using

an ohmmeter, measure the resistance across
the two sensor leads. Consult Figure 7 to verify
sensor conformance.
Temperature
Resistance (Ohms)
Figure 7: Temperature vs. Resistance
Chart for the A99B Series Sensor
c. If the resistance varies substantially from the
optimal resistance for that temperature, the
sensor or wiring must be replaced.
Note:
b. Increase setpoint by slowly turning the dial until

the control relay and LED turn On and Off.
260
120
240
220
100
200
180
80
160
140
60
120
40
100
80
20
60
40
0
20
0
-20
-20
-40
-40
500 700 900 1100 1300 1500 1700 1900 2100
The sensor reading indicated by the D350 may

differ from thermometer readings due to sensor
tolerances, time constants, accuracy of
thermometer, and other factors.
Steps 1 and 2 must be performed first.
c.
If the relay does not perform as indicated in

Table 4, replace the A350.
Table 4: A350 Relay Troubleshooting

N.O. Contact
Status
Setpoint
Dial Setting*
Action
LED
Heating
On
Closed
(Ts) = Sp - Diff
Heating
Off
Open
(Ts) = Sp
Cooling
On
Closed
(Ts) = Sp + Diff
Cooling
Off
Open
(Ts) = Sp
*(Ts) is sensed temperature, and (Sp) is setpoint

temperature.

Replacement controls and A99B Temperature Sensors
are available through the nearest Johnson Controls
representative. See Tables 5 and 6 for ordering
information.
O rdering
Table 5: System 350 Products
Item
Product Code
Number
Description
A350 Temperature Controls A350AA-1C

(With Temperature Sensors) A350AA-2C
A350AA-3C
A350BA-1C
A350BA-2C
Range: -30 to 130F; Adjustable Differential: 1 to 30F

Range: 90 to 250F; Adjustable Differential: 1 to 30F
Range: -30 to 130F; Adjustable Differential: 1 to 30F (concealed setpoint)
Range: -35 to 55C; Adjustable Differential: 0.5 to 17C
Range: 30 to 120C; Adjustable Differential: 0.5 to 17C
A350 Controls Without

Sensors

A350AB-5C
A350AB-1C
A350AB-2C
A350BB-1C
Digital Temperature Setpoint D350AA-1C

Display Modules
D350BA-1C
Fahrenheit Scale
Celsius Scale
On/Off Stage Modules
S350AA-1C
S350AB-1C
Fahrenheit Scale
Celsius Scale
Slave Stage Modules
S350CC-1C
Dual Scale (F and C)
Proportional Stage Modules S350PQ-1C
Power Module
120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz Input; Rectified Class 2, 24 VAC Output
Y350R-1C
Table 6: System 350 Accessories

Item
Product Code Description

Number
Enclosure
Wall Mount Plate
Cover
Mounting Clip
Duct Mounting
Duct Mounting
Conduit Adaptor
Immersion Well
Sun Shield
DIN Rail Sections
BOX10A-600R
TE-6001-4
T-4000-2644
A99-CLP-1
TE-6001-1
TE-6001011
ADP11A-600R
WEL11A-601R
SHL10A-603R
BKT287-1R
BKT287-2R
DIN Rail End Clamp
PLT344-1R
Cables for Remote Mounting WHA29A-600R
WHA29A-603R
WHA29A-604R
Outdoor PVC sensor enclosure; includes wire nuts

Includes sensor mounting clip
For wall mount plate
Surface mounting clip for the A99B Temperature Sensor
Duct-mounting hardware with handy box for A99B sensor
Duct-mounting hardware without handy box for A99B sensor
1/2 in. Snap-fit EMT conduit adaptor (box of 10)
For liquid sensing applications
For use with outside sensors in sunny locations
12 in. (0.3 m) long
39-1/3 in.(1.0 m) long
Consists of two end clamps
3 ft (0.9 m) This can also be used to daisy chain S350 Stage Modules together.
25 ft (7.6 m)
50 ft (15.2 m)
S pecifications
Product
Supply Voltage
Power Consumption
Ambient Temperatures
Humidity
Setpoint Adjustment Range
Differential Adjustment Range
SPDT Relay Output
Sensor
Material
Agency Listings
A350A/B Electronic Temperature Control

Y350R Power Module:
Input:
120/240 VAC 50/60 Hz
Output: 24 VDC, unfiltered, 10 VA, Class 2
External Source:
24 VAC, 50/60 Hz Class 2 (20-30 VAC)
Note: Only one supply voltage source may be used.
1.4 VA
Operating: -30 to 150F (-34 to 66C)
Shipping:
-40 to 185F (-40 to 85C)
0 to 95% RH non-condensing; maximum dew point: 85F (29C)
See Table 5.
See Table 5.
120V
208 to 240V
Horsepower:
1/2
1/2
Full Load:
9.8A
4.9A
Locked Rotor:
58.8A
29.4A
Non-Inductive:
10A at 24 to 240 VAC
Pilot Duty:
125 VA at 24 to 240 VAC
Replaceable positive temperature coefficient sensor
Reference resistance: 1035 ohms at 77F (25C)
Case and cover: NEMA 1 high-impact thermoplastic
specifications, consult Johnson Controls Application Engineering at (414) 274-5535. Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages
resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products.
Controls Group
P.O. Box 423
Milwaukee, WI 53201
Printed in U.S.A.
FANs 930, 930.5, 125, 121

Product/Technical Bulletin A350P
Issue Date 0899
System 350TM A350P Electronic Proportional Plus Integral

Temperature Control
The A350P is an electronic, proportional plus integral
temperature control with analog 0 to 10 VDC and
0 to 20 mA outputs. The control is equipped with
three user-selectable time integration constants and
an adjustable throttling range of 2 to 30F (1 to 17C).
Two models cover a setpoint range of -30 to 130F
(-35 to 55C) and 90 to 250F (32 to 121C).
As are all System 350 products, the A350P control
is housed in a NEMA 1, high-impact plastic enclosure.
expandability.
Figure 1: A350P Electronic Proportional Plus
Integral Temperature Control

Modular Design
Enables stage, display, and power modules to

be purchased and installed as needed
Plug-Together Connectors
Eliminates wiring between modules, which

and 35 mm DIN Rail

Mounting
Two Models Cover a Wide

Setpoint Range of -30 to
250F (-35 to 121C)
Minimum Output Adjustable

from 0 to 60%
Adjustable Throttling
Range of 2 to 30F (1 to 17C)
Field-selectable Reverse
Reduces inventory by encompassing

temperature ranges required to support the
majority of Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning,
and Refrigeration (HVAC/R) applications
Tailors the output to the requirements of the
controlled device; can be used to set minimum
valve or damper position
Enables the user to tune the system for optimum
stable performance
Works in heating or cooling applications
or Direct Acting Mode
Three User-Selectable
Integration Time Constants
Interchangeable
Provides selection of the integration constant for

applications requiring proportional plus integral
control
Increase versatility and serviceability
Temperature Sensors
Part No. 24-7664-192, Rev. F
Code No. LIT-930020
1
A pplication
O peration
The A350P Temperature Control can be used as a

standalone device or in conjunction with plug-together
accessory modules. The addition of S350 Stage
Modules allows for the control of multiple stage
HVAC/R applications. Typical application for the
A350P includes:
The A350P control operates on 24 VAC/VDC and

provides two simultaneous analog outputs:
0 to 10 VDC and 0 to 20 mA. A cover-mounted,
10-segment Light-Emitting Diode (LED) bar graph
indicates percentage of output.
Features include:
proportional heating control with staged direct

expansion cooling
adjustable setpoint
simple temperature control for air handling units
adjustable minimum output
modulating damper actuators for mixed air control
adjustable throttling range (proportional band)
simple proportional mixed air control
selectable integration time constant
selectable Reverse Acting (RA) or Direct Acting

(DA) mode of operation
A typical System 350 Temperature Control setup

A350P Temperature Control
Y350R Power Module (or 24 VAC Class 2

transformer)
S350 Stage Modules
D350 Digital Temperature Display Module
IMPORTANT:

designed for use only as
responsibility of the installer to
add devices (safety, limit controls)
or systems (alarm, supervisory
systems) that protect against, or
warn of, control failure.
Integration
DIP Switch
Fast
Medium
Slow
Off
On
1 2 3 4
Module
Connector
Cover Screw
(One of Four)
Setpoint
Dial
Throttling Range
Potentiometer
Integration DIP switch is

shown in proportional-only position.
THROT
MIN
RANGE OUTPUT
Minimum Output
Potentiometer
LED Indicator
(Percent of Output)
V
I
SN
VDC
C
24V
Reverse
Acting (RA)
Direct
Acting (DA)
Operation Mode
Jumper Positions
V: 0-10 VDC Output
I: 0-20 mA Output
SN: Sensor Input
24V: 24 VAC (+)

C: Common (-)
VDC: +5 VDC (not used)
Figure 2: Interior View Showing A350P Controls Features

2 System 350 A350P Electronic Proportional Plus Integral Temperature Control Product/Technical Bulletin
The minimum output adjustment sets the minimum

voltage or milliampere output provided by the A350P
control. It can be adjusted from 0 to 60% (0 to 6 VDC
or 0 to 12 mA) of the output range.
The throttling range is the range over which a control

is active. Throttling range for the A350P control can be
adjusted from 2 to 30F (1 to 17C). Make the
adjustment at the throttling range potentiometer
marked THROT RANGE (see Figure 2).
Example:
A controlled device responding to a 4-20 mA output
would require the minimum output to be adjusted to
20% or 4 mA. (See Figure 3.) The minimum output
adjustment may also be used to set valves or dampers
to minimum positions.
0%
20%
50%
20
Output 10
(mA)
4
Throttling Range
0
0
8 10 12 14 16 18 20
Deviation Above Setpoint (F)
Integration Function
Proportional-only controls cannot hold a process at the
exact setpoint. A proportional offset is always present
because the control output is 0% at setpoint. Any load
on the system will cause the control point to be offset
from the setpoint. The greater the load on the system,
the further the control point will be offset from the
setpoint. (This is commonly referred to as proportional
offset, and under maximum load this error will
approach the throttling range.)
Some proportional-only controls are designed with
their setpoint located midway through the proportional
band to help compensate for this offset. This results in
a plus/minus error from the setpoint rather than a
single-ended error. Refer to Figure 4.
Figure 3: Output vs. Deviation from

Setpoint for: Minimum Output = 0, 20, and
50%, Throttling Range = 20F (DA)
Make the adjustment at the minimum output
potentiometer marked as MIN OUTPUT.
(See Figure 2.) For each 10% increase in output, the
next bar on the LED indicator will light (only one bar is
lit at any time).
Note:
Before setting the minimum output

potentiometer, verify that the control reads
zero output (that is, no LEDs are lit).
System 350 A350P Electronic Proportional Plus Integral Temperature Control Product/Technical Bulletin 3
Temperature
Proportional Only Control

System Load
Proportional
Offset
Load Change
Control Point
Follows the Load
Throttling
Range
Setpoint
Time

Temperature
Proportional
Offset = 0
System Load
Load Change

Setpoint
Time
Figure 4: Comparison Between Proportional Only and Proportional Plus Integral Control
The A350P control has an integration feature that
forces the control point to match the setpoint. Over
time, the A350P will control the heating/cooling
equipment to balance the system load at the control
setpoint. (See Figure 4.)
The A350P control has three field-selectable

integration constants and an off position. The
integration DIP switch selects the integration constant.
(See Figure 2 for location.)

amount of correction will become too large if the
system load exceeds the capacity of the equipment.
When the actuated device (valve or damper) is fully
open or closed and the setpoint still cannot be
reached, the integration error continues to grow. The
result is called integral windup.
The A350P control avoids integral windup with a

patented circuit that puts a dynamic ceiling on the
integrator. This resets the integration error when the
sensor goes just above the setpoint plus the throttling
range (in DA mode) or just below the setpoint minus
the throttling range (in RA mode). This allows the
process to recover from an out-of-range condition
without a large overshoot.
The field-selectable integration constants include:

OFF: Switch 1 to On position, all others Off
provides proportional-only operation.
Note:
In open-loop (without feedback) applications,

select OFF (proportional-only) operation.
Slow (C3): Switch 2 to On position, all others

Off is the slowest integration constant (26 minute),
and is suitable for most proportional plus integral
applications. Slow is the recommended initial
setting.
Medium (C2): Switch 3 to On position, all

others Off selects a 13-minute integration
constant. If the rate of system recovery to setpoint
is sluggish with the control set to slow, and if the
system has enough capacity to drive the process
to setpoint at a faster rate, the medium setting
may be used.
Fast (C1): Switch 4 in On position, all

others Off is the fastest integration constant
(6.5 minutes). Use fast only in instances where the
rate of change at the sensor is extremely rapid
and system capacity can compensate for that
rapid change.
Reverse or Direct Acting Operation

With the operation jumpers in the Reverse Acting (RA)
position, the analog output increases as the
temperature drops below setpoint. (See Figure 5.)
With the operation jumpers in the Direct Acting (DA)
position, the analog output will increase as the
temperature rises above the setpoint.
Select the RA/DA mode by positioning the operation
jumpers vertically or horizontally. (See Figure 2.)
Position the operation jumpers vertically for RA and
horizontally for DA.
The RA/DA operation jumpers are installed in the RA
mode at the factory.
Note: Dashed areas show throttling range possibilities
from minimum to maximum.
Reverse Acting
20 10
VDC mA
mA VDC
RA
-
10
10
30 25 20 15 10 5F
Setpoint
Throttling Range
DA
+
5 10 15 20 25 30F
Setpoint
Throttling Range
Figure 5: RA and DA Proportional Bands Shown in

Proportional-Only Mode
A dd-on Modules
The maximum number of add-on modules is listed in
Table 1.
Table 1: Maximum Number of S350 Stage

Modules per A350P
Number of
Number
S350A or
of S350A
S350C
or S350C
Modules
Stage
(with
Modules
Allowed One S350P)
Allowed
Power
Source
S350A On-Off stage modules receive power, setpoint,

and sensor input from the A350P control. S350A stage
modules perform switching functions based on the
controls setpoint and sensor information, as well as
the offset and differential selected at the S350A stage
module.
TM
System 350 S350 Temperature, S351 Humidity,
and S352 Pressure On/Off Stage Modules
S350C Slave Stage Module
S350C slave stage modules receive power and sensor
input from the A350P control. S350C slave stage
modules perform switching functions based upon the
controls sensor information, as well as the setpoint
and differential selected at the S350C stage module.
Direct Acting
10 20
S350A On-Off Stage Modules

TM
System 350 S350C Temperature Slave Stage
Module Product/Technical Bulletin (LIT-930084).
S350P Proportional Stage Modules
S350P proportional stage modules receive power,
setpoint, and sensor input from the A350P control. The
S350P stage module responds with an analog 0 to
10 VDC and 0 to 20 mA output signal. This is based
upon the controls setpoint and sensor information, as
well as the offset, throttling range, and minimum output
selected at the S350P stage module.
TM
System 350 S350P Proportional Plus Integral
Temperature Stage Module Product/Technical Bulletin
(LIT-930086).
Number of
S350A or
S350C
Modules
(with
Two S350Ps)
Allowed
Y350R
External
Class 2
Transformer
D imensions
3/16 (4)
Mounting Slots
for No. 6 Screws
1/2 (13)
5 (127)
2 15/16
(75)
A350P
4 (102)
1 9/16
(40)
2 3/8 (61)
DIN
Rail Mount
7/16 (11)
1 3/16 (31)
3 (76)
Sensor
1/4 (6)
9 3/4 (248)
2 3/8 (61)
2 (50)
7/8 (22)
Conduit
Hole
7/8
(22)
Figure 6: A350P Control and Sensor Dimensions, in. (mm)

Celsius Scale Conversion
A Celsius scale throttling range decal is included with
the A350P control. If the Celsius scale is desired:
1. Locate the throttling range and minimum output
potentiometers on the main PC board.
(See Figure 2.) Carefully remove the knobs and
the existing decal.
2. Apply the Celsius scale decal in the same place as
the original decal.
The A350P Temperature Control is housed in a

provided should surface mounting be required. If a
Y350R is used, it should be mounted immediately to
the right of the control. Any S350 modules would
follow on the right, with the D350 being the last module
mounted, also on the right.
Note:
3. Rotate both knob stems completely

counterclockwise (CCW).
4. Reinstall the potentiometer knobs so the arrows
point to the minimum values.
When mounting any System 350 module to

rigid conduit, attach the hub to the conduit
before securing the hub to the control
enclosure.

equipment damage.
Wiring Terminals
Sensor Connection

Code and local regulations. For maximum electrical
cover. Terminals will accept 12 to 26 AWG wire. Use
only copper conductors.
Shielded cable is not generally required for sensor

sensor. Connect the shield to Terminal C on the
A350P control.
1. Use a 1/8 in. (3 mm) flat-blade screwdriver to push

the clamp arm down.
Refer to Table 3 for the maximum recommended cable

lengths for particular sizes of wire.
2. Insert the appropriate wire into the opening.

Refer to Table 2 for terminal designations.
Table 3: Maximum Recommended

Sensor Cable Lengths
3. Release the clamp arm to secure the wire.

See Figure 7.
0 to 10 VDC output
0 to 20 mA output
SN
Temperature sensor input
14 AWG
800
244
16 AWG
500
152
18 AWG
310
94
20 AWG
200
61
22 AWG
124
38
The sensor must be mounted so that it can

accurately sense the temperature of the controlled
medium.
Table 4: A350P Controls And Sensors

Control
Sensor Included
Sensor Lead Length is 9-3/4 in. (0.25 m)
A350PS-1C

(-40 to 100C)
Common for power supply,

temperature sensor, and outputs
A350PS-1CM

(-40 to 100C)
24 Volts AC
A350PS-2C
A99BC-25; Range: -40 to 248F

(-40 to 120C)
A350PS-2CM
A99BC-25; Range: -40 to 248F

(-40 to 120C)
A350PT-1C
No Sensor Included
A350BA-2C
A99BC-25; Range: -40 to 248F

(-40 to 120C)
VDC
5 VDC power supply (not used)
C
24V
Note:
Description
Meters
The sensor must be connected to Terminals SN

and C. (See Figure 2.) The sensors are not
polarity sensitive.
Table 2: Terminal Designations

Terminal
Feet
Various A99B Series Temperature Sensors and

mounting hardware are available for use with
A350P Series controls.
SN VDC
Figure 7: Cage Clamp Terminal Block
Shielded Cable Length
Wire
Gauge
Output signals from the A350P control vary

from 0 to 10 VDC and 0 to 20 mA. (Both
outputs can be used simultaneously.)
Connections can be made to both the V and
I terminals, allowing the control to drive
two outputs from the same RA or DA ramp
simultaneously. This feature can be used to
drive motor actuators of different types in a
single application.
For more information regarding sensor options

and installation, refer to the A99B Series
Temperature Sensors Product/Technical Bulletin
(LIT-125186).
A djustments
Follow this procedure to set up the A350P control for
the types of operation desired.
1. Remove its cover by loosening the four captive
cover screws. (See Figure 2.)
2. Set the RA/DA operation jumpers to the desired
mode of operation. Position the operation jumpers
vertically for RA (Reverse Acting) or horizontally
for DA (Direct Acting). (See Figure 2.)
3. Adjust the throttling range potentiometer to desired
setting. Rotate Clockwise (CW) to increase the
throttling range.
5.
Make sure the system is stable in the proportional

mode before selecting integration. Refer to the
Checkout Procedure section.
6.
Reinstall the cover and secure in place with the

7.
Adjust the setpoint dial to the desired setpoint.

If using the D350 Display Module, press and hold
the setpoint button on the D350 while rotating the
setpoint dial.
Note:
Notes: Included with the control is a Celsius scale

throttling range decal. If the Celsius scale is
desired, refer to the Celsius Scale Conversion
section for decal installation instructions.
If the A350P is to be used in proportional plus
integral control, the initial throttling range
adjustment is seldom set below 6F (3C).
A narrow proportional band used in
conjunction with the integration may result in
unstable control.
4. If minimum output is required, set the minimum
output potentiometer (see Figure 2) to the desired
position. The 10-segment front LED panel or a
voltmeter can be used to read the minimum
output. (The minimum setting for the control is
designated by the 0 on the decal.)
Notes: Before adjusting the minimum output
potentiometer, verify that the control reads
zero output (that is, no LEDs are lit).
For each 10% increase in output, the next
bar will light on the LED bar graph (only
one bar is lit at anytime). In a milliampere
application, each bar equals 2 mA. In a
voltage application, each bar equals 1 VDC.
(Refer to Figure 3.)
Example:
To set the control for a minimum output of
4 mA, turn the minimum output potentiometer
clockwise until the second LED segment just
lights.
The controls setpoint is factory calibrated at

midscale to a tolerance of 1F (0.6C). The
setpoint tolerance at the extreme ends of the
setpoint scale may be 4F (2.2C). The
D350 Display Module is unaffected by this
tolerance shift. Use the D350 for the most
accurate setpoint selection.
C heckout Procedure
Follow this procedure to verify the A350P control is
connected and functioning properly.
1.
Before applying power, make sure that the

installation and wiring connections are according
to job specifications.
2.
Set up the system for proportional mode

(Integration = OFF), and make any necessary
adjustments to the setpoint, throttling range, and
minimum output. Then select Reverse or Direct
Acting mode.
3.
After making adjustments and electrical

connections, apply power to the system, and
observe it for stable operation.
4.
If integration is required, select the fast (C1),

medium (C2), or slow (C3) integration constant.
Slow is the recommended initial setting. (Refer to
the Integration Function section.)
5.
Put the system back into operation. If instability

occurs, consider increasing the throttling range.
T roubleshooting
that the proper operation mode is selected on each
module (DA or RA), and perform the following
procedures to determine the cause of the problem:
1. Check for proper voltages on the A350P control.
a. Connect a digital voltmeter (DVM) between
Terminals 24V (+) and C (-) located on the
A350Ps terminal block. (See Figure 2.)
If an external transformer is used, select AC
volts on the DVM. Verify that the voltage is
between 20 and 30 VAC.
If a Y350R Power Module is used, select DC
volts on the DVM. Verify that the voltage is
If an external DC power supply is used, select
DC volts on the DVM. Verify that the voltage is
(DVM must be accurate to +/-0.01 VDC), and
connect the (+) lead to Terminal VDC and the
(-) lead to Terminal C.
2. Check sensor for proper resistance at a given

temperature. (The resistance across the sensor
changes with the temperature of the sensor.)
a. Disconnect power from the A350P control.
b. Disconnect the sensor from the control and
measure the resistance across sensor leads.
c.
d. Refer to Figure 8 to determine the optimal

resistance for the measured temperature.
e. If the measured resistance varies substantially
from the optimal resistance for that
temperature, the sensor or wiring must be
replaced.
f.
If the sensors resistance conforms to the

chart in Figure 8, reconnect the sensor to the
control.
g. Reconnect power to the control.

Note:
If the DVM voltage is between 4.9 and

5.1 VDC, proceed to Step 2.
If the DVM voltage is above 5.1 VDC, replace
the A350P.
c.
If the DVM voltage is below 4.9 VDC, check

the control using the following procedure.
Disconnect all loads from the A350P control.
(If in Direct Acting mode with power on, the
system will go to full output when the sensor is
disconnected. Thus, ensure that any loads are
disconnected before disconnecting the
temperature sensor.)
Disconnect the temperature sensor
completely, and recheck the DVM voltage.
If the DVM voltage rises to a value between
4.9 and 5.1 VDC, replace the sensor.
If the DVM voltage is still below 4.9 VDC,
replace the A350P control.
When measuring the sensors resistance, use

an accurate thermometer to measure the
temperature at the sensor.
The sensor reading indicated by the D350

may differ somewhat from thermometer
readings due to sensor tolerances, time
constants, thermometer accuracy, and other
factors.
Temperature
260
120
240
220
100
200
180
80
160
140
60
120
40
100
80
20
60
40
0
20
0
-20
-20
-40
-40
500 700 900 1100 1300 1500 1700 1900 2100
Resistance (Ohms)
Figure 8: Temperature vs. Resistance Chart for the
A99B Series Sensor
3. Check the A350P control for proper operation.

Note:
Perform Steps 1 and 2 first.
a. Reconnect the sensor to the control and

re-apply power.
b. Turn the throttling range and the minimum
output to minimum by turning both
potentiometers counterclockwise.
c.
Switch off the integration.
d. Select the RA mode.

e. Connect the DVM (+) lead to the A350P
controls Terminal SN and the (-) lead to
Terminal C.
If the sensor voltage is less than 1.8 VDC on
model A350PS-1C or less than 2.3 VDC on
model A350PS-2C, go to Step 3g.
f.
If the voltage is greater than 1.8 VDC on

model A350PS 1C or greater than 2.3 VDC on
model A350PS-2C, adjust the setpoint to
120F (49C) on model A350PS-1C or 240F
(116C) on model A350PS-2C.
The output Terminal V should be less than
0.1 VDC, and all LEDs in the bar graph display
should be off. If not, replace the A350P.
1. Adjust the minimum output to the
maximum by turning the potentiometer
CW. As the potentiometer is turned CW,
the LEDs in the bar graph should turn on
from left to right until the fifth or sixth bar is
on. If not, replace the A350P control.
2. Adjust the minimum output to zero again,
and select the DA mode.
g. If the sensor voltage is above 1.1 VDC

on A350PS-1C or above 1.6 VDC on
A350PS-2C, adjust the setpoint to match the
actual temperature (Ts). The output Terminal
V should be less than 0.1 VDC, and all LEDs
in the bar graph should be off.
Note:
Some tolerance error is present between the

setpoint scale and the setpoint knob pointer.
Refer to the Adjustments section.
1. Make sure the A350P control is in RA
mode.
2. Increase the setpoint in increments of 2F
(1C).
3. As the setpoint is increased, the controls
Terminal V output voltage should go from
0 to 10 VDC, the Terminal I output current
should go from 0 to 20 mA, and the LEDs
should turn on, one at a time from left to
right.
4. If the LEDs do not turn on and if the
outputs of terminals V and I do not change
as described above, replace the control.
h. Readjust the A350P control to the desired

control settings.

A99B Temperature Sensors and replacement controls
are available through the nearest Johnson Controls
representative. (See Tables 5 and 6 for ordering
information.)
3. If the right most LED in the bar graph is on

(Terminal V = 10 VDC, Terminal I = 20 mA),
go to Step 3h. If the LED is not on, replace
the A350P.
Item
Product Code Number
A350P Proportional Plus Integral

Temperature Controls
Description
A350PS-1C
Range:
-30 to 130F (-35 to 55C)
Throttling Range: 2 to 30 F (1 to 17C)
(Includes the A99BC-25C Temperature Sensor)
A350PS-2C
Range:
90 to 250F (30 to 120C)
Throttling Range: 2 to 30 F (1 to 17C)
(Includes the A99BC-25C Temperature Sensor)
A350PT-1C
Range:
-30 to 130F (-35 to 55C)
Throttling Range: 2 to 30F (1 to 17C)
(Sensor not included)
Display Modules
D350AA-1C
D350BA-1C
Digital Temperature Display Module (Fahrenheit Scale)

Digital Temperature Display Module (Celsius Scale)
On/Off Stage Modules
S350AA-1C
S350AB-1C
Fahrenheit Scale
Celsius Scale
Slave Stage Module
S350CC-1C
Proportional Stage Module
S350PQ-1C
Power Module
Y350R-1C
120 or 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz Input, Rectified Class 2,

24 VAC Output

Item
Product Code Number
Description
Wall Mount Plate
TE-6001-4
Includes sensor mounting clip
Cover
T-4000-2644
For wall mount plate
Mounting Clip
A99-CLP-1
Surface mounting clip for the A99B Temperature Sensor
Duct Mounting
TE-6001-1
Duct-mounting hardware with handy box
Duct Mounting
TE-6001-11
Duct-mounting hardware without handy box
Conduit Adaptor
ADP11A-600R
1/2 in. snap-fit EMT conduit adaptor (box of 10)
Immersion Well
WEL11A-601R
For liquid sensing applications
Sun Shield
SHL10A-603R
For use with outside sensors in sunny locations
DIN Rail Sections
BKT287-1R
BKT287-2R
12 in. (0.3 m) long

39-1/3 in. (1.0 m) long
DIN Rail End Clamp
PLT344-1R
Cables for Remote Mounting of

D350 Display Module
WHA29A-600R*
WHA29A-603R
WHA29A-604R
3 ft (0.9 m)
25 ft (7.6 m)
50 ft (15.2 m)
*WHA29A-600R may be used to daisy chain S350 modules together.
Specifications
Product
Supply Voltage
Power Consumption
A350P Proportional Plus Time Integral Temperature Control

Y350R Power Module:
Input:
120/240 VAC 50/60 Hz
Output: 24 VDC, unfiltered, 10 VA
External Source:
24 VAC, 50/60 Hz, Class 2 (20-30 VAC)
Note: Only one supply voltage source may be used.
3.2 VA maximum
Ambient Temperature
Operating:
Shipping:
Humidity (all modules)
0 to 95% RH non-condensing; maximum dew point 85F (29C)
Setpoint Adjustment Range
Throttling Adjustment
Range
Analog Outputs
A350PS-1C:
A350PS-2C:
A350PT-1C:
-30 to 150F (-34 to 66C)

-40 to 185F (-40 to 85C)
-30 to 130F (-35 to 55C)
90 to 250F (30 to 120C)
-30 to 130F (-35 to 55C)
2 to 30F (1 to 17C)
0 to 10 VDC (550 ohm load minimum) and 0 to 20 mA (600 ohm load maximum)
Minimum Output
Adjustable from 0 to 60% of the output
Output Indication
A ten segment LED bar graph indicates percentage of output.
Control Action
Sensor
Material
Agency Listing
Direct or reverse action is jumper selectable.

Four selectable rates: fast, medium, slow, and off
Replaceable positive temperature coefficient sensor
Reference resistance 1035 ohms at 77F (25C)
Case and cover:
NEMA 1 high-impact thermoplastic

consult Johnson Controls Application Engineering at (414) 274-5535. Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication
Controls Group
P.O. Box 423
Milwaukee, WI 53201
Printed in U.S.A.

Issued November 18, 2008
D352 Series
Pressure Display Module

Description
The D352 Display Module is used in
conjunction with the P352 and P352P Series
Pressure Controls. A 3-digit LCD display
provides continuous readout of the actual
pressure sensed by the P499 or
DPT2640 Transmitter. By pressing and
holding the setpoint button for three seconds,
the pressure setpoint will be displayed.
Module
Connector
3-Digit
LCD Display
Module
Connector
D352
PRESS FOR SETPOINT
Setpoint
Button
Features
display of actual system pressure and

setpoint
remote display mounting with WHA29A
cable (up to 50 ft)
5-pin connector simplifies wiring between
modules
d3521.eps
Interior of D352
D352
Applications
Use for pressure indication (local or remote) in
conjunction with P352 and P352P Pressure
Controls.
Accessories
For remote mounting of the D351 display module, specify the code
number (cable length).
Selection Chart
Code Number
Display Range
D352CA-1C
0 to 9.99 in. W.C.
D352CA-2C
0 to 0.999 in. W.C.
D352AA-2C
0 - 750 psi
Display Characters
3-digit 0.35 in LCD
Code Number
Cable Length
WHA29A-600R
3 ft (0.9 m)
WHA29A-603R
25 ft (7.6 m)
WHA29A-604R
50 ft (15.2 m)
0.145 Mounting Slot

3.68 For #6 Screws
0.5
13
D352 Pressure Module with psig or in. W.C. Scale
Read-out
3-digit LCD (Liquid Crystal) continuous display
Input
Voltage
D352AA-2C
5 VDC provided by the P352 Pressure Control
D352CA-1C
D352CA-2C
14 VDC provided by the P352 Pressure Control
Ambient
Operating
-30 to 150F (-34 to 66C)
Ambient Humidity
Mounting
Surface or DIN rail
2.94
75
DIN
Rail
5.00
127
-40 to 167F (-40 to 75C)
1.56
40
2.40
61
1.20
31
0.42
11
0.85
22
0.875 Conduit
22
Hole
d3512_1.eps
2.40
61
D352 Dimensions, in. (mm)
1 of 1

LITIssued
S352
Pressure Stage Module

Description
Features
The S352 Stage Module is used in conjunction reverse or direct acting mode, field
with the P352 On/Off Pressure Control to add
selectable
multi-stage capability. Using a Y350R, up to
adjustable differential and offset
five S352s can be added to the P352 via the 5- 5-pin connector for easy installation
pin plug-together connector. Using a 40 VA or
greater external transformer, up to nine S352s Applications
can be added.
Use for multiple staging of condenser fans.
The S352 has a SPDT output relay and three
adjustments including offset (stage setpoint),
differential and mode (reverse or direct acting)
.
Offset
Potentiometer
Differential
Potentiometer
Module
Connector
Module
Connector
Relay Energized
LED Indicator
S352
Jumper Block
Position
Reverse Action
Selection Chart
Direct Action
Code
Number
Output
Differential
Adjustment
Offset
Adjustment
S352AA-2C
SPDT Relay
2 to 50 psi
2 to 50 psi
N.C.
Relay
COM
Output
s3521.eps
Relay
N.O.
Terminals
0.145
3.68
Mounting Slot
for No. 6 Screws
Interior of S352
0.5
13
2.94
75
S352AA-2C Pressure Stage Module

Differential Range
2 to 50 psi
Offset Range
2 to 50 psi
Supply Voltage
24 volt power supply provided by P352 or Y350R

1 VA Maximum
Ambient
Temperature
Operating
-30 to 150F (-34 to 66C)
Shipping
-40 to 185F (-40 to 85C)

1.56
40
Humidity
Relay
SPDT enclosed relays. Contacts rated at 10 amp

non-inductive, 1/2 hp, 120/240 VAC
Mounting
Wall or DIN Rail

Voltage AC
120
Full Load Amp
9.8
4.9
58.8
29.4
2.40
61
0.42
11
1.20
31
2.40
61
208/240
Locked Rotor
Amp
S352
ON
0.85
22
0.875 Conduit
22
Hole

s3522.eps
Power Consumption
5.00
127
DIN Rail
Mount
S352 Dimensions, in. (mm)
1 of 1

P352AB
Electronic On/Off Pressure Control

.
Description
24V
COM
VDC
SEN
Concealed Setpoint
Adjustment Dial
Module
Connector
Jumper Block
Position
Differential
Potentiometer
The P352AB control can be used as a

standalone device or in conjunction with
accessory modules to control a wide variety of
single and multi-stage HVAC and refrigeration
applications.
Reverse Action
Relay Energized
LED Indicator
The Y350 Power Module, S352 Stage Module,

and D352 Display Module can be used with
the P352AB.
N.C.
Relay
Features
Direct Action
Relay
COM
Output
p3521.eps
The P352AB Electronic On/Off Pressure

Control features SPDT relay output and LED
indication. This control is used in conjunction
with a pressure transducer and wiring
harness. The pressure range is 0 to 600 psig
with adjustable differential and offset ranges.
N.O.
Terminals
P352
Interior of P352
field selectable reverse/direct acting mode

adjustable setpoint, differential, and offset
capabilities
wall or DIN rail mounting
stage (S352), display (D352), and
power (Y350R) modules plug-together via
5-pin connectors
Applications

compressor unloading
high pressure indication
Selection Chart
Code Number
Output
P352AB-2C
Pressure Range (psig)
Differential (psi)
0 to 100
SPDT
Relay
P352AB-3C
P352AB-4C
2 to 50
90 to 250
10 to 100
240 to 600
Pressure Transducer and Cable

P499RAP-105K or P499RCP-105K
0.145
3.68
P352AB Electronic On/Off Pressure Control

Transformer
20 to 30 VAC, 50/60 Hz, Class 2
Y350R
120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz

2.3 VA Maximum
DC Power
Supply
5 VDC provided to pressure transducer
2.94
75
5.00
127
DIN Rail
Mount
P352
ON
SPDT enclosed relay, contacts rated at 10 amp

non-inductive 1/2 hp 120/240 VAC
Ambient
Temperature
Operating
-30 to 150F (-34 to 66C)
Shipping
-40 to 185F (-40 to 85C)
Ambient Humidity
1.56
40
2.40
61
0.42
11
1.20
31

Voltage AC
120
Full Load Amp
9.8
4.9
Locked Rotor Amp
58.8
29.4
208/240
2.40
61

0.85
22
0.875 Conduit
22
Hole
p3522.eps
Relay
Mounting Slot
for No. 6 Screws
0.5
13
Power Consumption
P352AB-2C
P352AB-3C
P352AB-4C
D352AA-2C
Supply
Voltage 1
Display
P352 Dimensions, in. (mm)

1 of 1

P352P Series
Electronic Proportional Plus Integral Pressure Controls:

Static Pressure (W.C.) and PSI Series
.
Description
Cov er Sc rews (Quant ity = 4)
O
N
Thr ottling Ra nge

Po te ntiom et er
M in i m u m
Ou tp ut
Po ten tio met er
Two models cover the pressure ranges of 0.5

to 5 in. W.C. and 0.025 to 0.25 in. W.C., and
use the DPT2640 Pressure Transmitters.
Three models cover the pressure ranges of
0-100 psi, 90-250 psi, and 240-600 psi, and
use the P499 Pressure Transducers. (See
Selection Chart). All P352P models can use
the Y350R Power Module.
Re ve r se
Act in g
Op er ation Mo de
Ju mpe r Positio ns
24 V (2 4 VAC) ( +)
(0 -10 VDC Out pu t) V

(0 -20 mA O utp ut) I
C (Common) (-)
VDC (+5 VDC)
a350p.eps.eps
Direct
Act in g
(Sen sor ) (+) SN
field selectable proportional only or

surface of DIN rail mounting
ten segment LED displays percent of
output signal
field selectable reverse/direct acting mode
minimum output adjustment
modules
Int egrat ion DI P Switch

(shown in proportional only position)
MIN
THROT
RANGE OUTPUT
LED I ndicat or
(Percent of Ou tput)
Features
Fast (C1)
Medium (C2)
Slow (C3)
Off
Se tpoint
Dial
2 3 4
M od ule
Co nn ecto r
The P352P Electronic Proportional Plus

Integral Pressure Control Series has two
proportional outputs of 0 to 10 VDC and
0 to 20 mA. Proportional Plus Integral (PI)
control is an option to hold setpoint, regardless
of load shifts on a system.
P352P
Interior of P352P
Applications
dual static pressure control

building pressurization
condenser fan speed control
damper positioning
flow valve positioning
Selection Chart
Output
P352PQ-1C
0.5 to 5 in. W.C.

Proportional Voltage:
0.025 to 0.25 in. W.C.
0 to 10 VDC
and
0 - 100 psi
5 - 50 psi
Proportional Current: 90 - 250 psi
0 to 20 mA
10 - 100 psi
240 - 600 psi
P352PQ-2C
P352PN-2C
P352PN-3C
P352PN-4C
Setpoint
Range
Throttling
Range
Pressure Sensor
(Order Separately)
Sensor Input
Range
DPT2640-010D
0 to 10 in. W.C.
(No Stage Module) D352CA-1C
DPT2640-0R5D
0 to 0.5 in. W.C.
(No Stage Module) D352CA-2C
0 - 100 psi
0 - 500 psi
0 - 750 psi
Note: Order the pressure sensor separately. If required, power,

stage, and display modules may also be ordered separately.
0.5
13
P352P Electronic Proportional Plus

Integral Static Pressure Control
Transformer
20 to 30 VAC, 50/60 Hz, Class 2
Y350R
120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
2.94
75
0 to 10 VDC (550 ohm load minimum) and

0 to 20 mA (600 ohm load maximum).
Minimum Output
Adjustable to 0 to 60% of full output span
Output Indication
A ten segment LED bar graph indicates

percentage of output
Control Action
Power Consumption
3.2 VA
Three selectable rates C1, C2, C3, and Off

position
Ambient
Temperature
Operating
-30 to 150F (-34 to 66C)
Shipping
-40 to 185F (-40 to 85C)

NEMA 1, High-impact thermoplastic
5.00
127
DIN Rail
Mount
Proportional Output
Ambient Humidity
S352AA-2C, D352AA-2C
0.145 Mounting Slot

3.68 for No. 6 Screws
Supply
Voltage 1
Associated Stage and

Display Modules
1.56
40
P352P
2.40
61
0.42
11
1.20
31
2.40
61
0.85
22
0.875 Conduit
Hole
22
p352p_2.eps.eps
Code
Number
P352P Dimensions, in. (mm)

1 of 1

Basic Controls Section
Issue Date
930
P352AB
0200
System 350
P352AB Electronic Pressure Control Series
The P352AB controls are On/Off electronic pressure
controls with Single-Pole, Double-Throw (SPDT) relay
output and Light-Emitting Diode (LED) indication. The
P352AB controls are designed with Reverse or Direct
Acting mode of operation, adjustable differential, and
an interchangeable pressure transducer. The P352AB
control will accept S352A Stage Modules to control
stages of Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning
(HVAC) and/or refrigeration equipment.
Three models cover the ranges of 0-100 psi,
90-250 psi, and 240-600 psi, covering most common
refrigeration and air conditioning applications.
As are all System 350 products, the P352AB control
is housed in a NEMA 1 high-impact thermoplastic
snap-together connections for quick installation and
Figure 1: P352AB Electronic Pressure Control

Modular Design
Provides the flexibility to add S352A Stage

Modules, D352 Display Module, and Y350R
Power Module

and 35 mm DIN Rail

Mounting
Three Models Available

with Adjustable Setpoint
Ranges of 0-100 psi,
90-250 psi, and 240-600 psi
Models Available with

Adjustable Differential from
2-50 psi and 10-100 psi
Field-selectable Direct or
Reverse Acting Mode
Interchangeable Pressure
Handles pressures required for most fan

cycling and compressor unloading
applications
Enables user to match the equipment cycle
rate and/or sequencing for a given application
Energizes relay output on either an increase
or a decrease in pressure
Transducer

Part No. 24-7664-1903, Rev.
Code No. LIT-930038
1
A pplication
The P352AB Electronic Pressure Control can be used
as a standalone device or in conjunction with
System 350 plug-together accessory modules for
single or multiple stage refrigeration and HVAC
pressure control applications. Typical applications
include:
compressor cycling and unloading

IMPORTANT: The System 350 controls are
intended to control equipment under
normal operating conditions. Where
System 350 controls could lead to an
abnormal operating condition that
could cause personal injury or
damage to the equipment or other
safety controls) or systems (alarm or
supervisory systems) intended to
warn of, or protect against, failure or
malfunction of the System 350
controls must be incorporated into
and maintained as part of the control
system.
A typical System 350 pressure control setup includes

the following:
IMPORTANT: The P352AB controls use an input

signal from the P399 Electronic
Pressure Transducer to determine
pressure in psi (pounds per square
inch). The P399 transducer uses a
sealed-reference of one atmosphere
to determine 0 psi. For more
information on interpreting control
pressure readings, refer to the
P399 Electronic Pressure Transducer
Product/Technical Bulletin,
LIT-125515.
Setpoint
Setpoint is defined as the pressure at which the relay
de-energizes. The setpoint is adjustable between
0 to 100, 90 to 250, and 240 to 600 psi, depending on
the model ordered. (See Table 1.)
Table 1: Setpoint Adjustment Range

P352AB Model No.
Setpoint Range
P352AB-2
0 to 100 psi
P352AB-3
90 to 250 psi
P352AB-4
240 to 600 psi
P352AB Electronic Pressure Control
Differential
S352A Stage Modules
D352 Digital Display Module
P399 Electronic Pressure Transducer
Differential is defined as the difference in pressure

between energization and de-energization of the
output relay. The differential is adjustable between
2 to 50 and 10 to 100 psi, depending on the control
model. (See Table 2.)
Table 2: Differential Adjustment Range
O peration
The P352AB Electronic Pressure Control operates on
24 VAC and has an SPDT relay output. A front panel
LED lights to indicate when the relay is energized.
P352AB Model No.
Differential Range
P352AB-2
2 to 50 psi
P352AB-3
10 to 100 psi
P352AB-4
10 to 100 psi
The P352AB controls are used with the P399

Electronic Pressure Transducers, which are available
in several pressure ranges, and provide a ratiometric
analog signal (0.5 to 4.5 VDC), based on the sensed
pressure.
Basic ControlsSystem 350 P352AB Electronic Pressure Control Series Product/Technical Bulletin
Direct/Reverse Acting Mode

The P352AB controls utilize jumpers (at Jumper
Terminal J1) to select the operation mode. (See
Adjustments (P352AB Control) section and Figure 3.)
When in Direct Acting (DA) mode, the relay
de-energizes when the pressure drops below the
setpoint. When the pressure rises above the setpoint
plus the differential, the relay energizes and the ON
LED illuminates.
When in Reverse Acting (RA) mode, the relay

de-energizes when the sensed pressure rises above
the setpoint. When the pressure drops below the
setpoint minus the differential, the relay energizes and
the ON LED illuminates.
Note:
The P352AB controls are configured for DA

mode at the factory.
Refer to Figure 5 for an example of a typical Direct

Acting/Reverse Acting application.
D imensions
Mounting Slots
For No. 6 Screws
1/8 (4)
P352
2-15/16 (75)
5 (127)
ON
JOHNSON
O
O
CONTROLS
1-1/2
(40)
7/16
(11)
DIN Rail
Mount
2-3/8
(61)
1-3/16
Wiring Harness
6-1/2 ft
(2.0 m)
or
13 ft
(4.0 m)
2-1/4 (57)
2-3/8 (61)
P399 Transducer
7/8 (22)
Conduit
Hole
7/8 (22)
Figure 2: P352AB Control Dimensions, in. (mm)
M ounting
The P352AB Electronic Pressure Control is housed in
a compact NEMA 1 plastic enclosure designed for
standard 35 mm DIN-rail mounting. Four key-slot
provided for surface mounting. (See Figure 2.)
Note:
When mounting the P352AB control (or any

System 350 Module) to rigid conduit, attach
A djustments (P352AB Control)

jumpers (at Jumper Terminal J1) horizontally for
Direct Acting or vertically for Reverse Acting.
Perform the following steps to adjust the P352AB

control settings. (See Figure 3.) Refer to Figure 5 for
an example of the P352AB control in a typical Direct
Acting/Reverse Acting application.
Note: The P352AB controls are configured in the

DA mode at the factory.

equipment.

marked DIFF ADJUST to the desired setting.
Clockwise rotation increases the differential.
5. Adjust the setpoint using the setpoint adjustment
dial to the desired setting.
After power is applied to the control, a more
accurate setting of the setpoint can be made by
utilizing the D352A Pressure Display Module.
6. Replace the cover on the control and fasten in
place with screws.
2. Remove the P352AB control cover by loosening

the four captive cover screws.

Wire
Terminal
Block
24V
COM
VDC
SEN
Concealed Setpoint
Adjustment Dial
Module
Connector
Jumper
Position at J1
Differential
Potentiometer
Relay Energized
LED Indicator
Reverse Acting
Relay
Direct Acting
Cover Screw
(One of Four)
N.C. COM
N.O.
Figure 3: Interior View and Typical Wiring of the P352AB Control
A dd-On Modules
The Y350R Power Module, D352 Digital Pressure
Display, and S352A Stage Modules snap together and
plug into the P352AB Electronic Pressure Control via
connectors on both sides of each add-on module.
Y350R Power Module

The Y350R Power Module provides a convenient
method of powering System 350 modules from a
120 or 240 VAC power source.
The Y350R Power Module can be plugged into the

right side of the P352AB controls or any of the add-on
modules. The Y350R Power Module is capable of
providing power to a P352AB control, a D352 Display
Module, and up to five S352A Stage Modules. (Refer
TM
to the System 350 Y350R Power Module
Product/Technical Bulletin, LIT-930090, for more
information.)
D352 Digital Pressure Display Module

The D352 Display Module receives power, sensor, and
setpoint information from the P352AB control. A
three digit Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) gives a
continuous readout of the sensed pressure. Pushing
the PRESS FOR SETPOINT button displays the
setpoint of the adjoining P352AB control. The button
must be pressed for approximately three seconds.
TM
(Refer to the System 350 Display Modules
Product/Technical Bulletin, LIT-930070, for more
information.)

equipment.
S352A Pressure Stage Modules

The S352A Stage Modules receive power, setpoint,
and sensor input from the P352AB controls. As many
as five S352A Stage Modules can plug into the
P352AB controls when powered by the Y350R Power
Module. When powered by an external transformer,
the P352AB controls can use up to nine S352A Stage
TM
Modules. (Refer to the System 350 S350A
Temperature, S351A Humidity, and S352A Pressure
Stage Modules Product/Technical Bulletin,
LIT-930080, for more information.)
Note:
When using an external transformer, the

Y65 Series or other 40 VA Class 2
transformers are recommended.
CAUTION: Verify that the jumpers are in the

proper position before powering
System 350 components. If the
jumpers on the P352AB control
or the S352A Stage Module are
in the wrong position, the device
will activate the relay in response
to the opposite signal. The
DA/RA relay will remain
energized until the error is
corrected.
A djustments (S352A Stage Module)

Perform the following steps to adjust the S352A stage
module settings. (See Figure 4.) Refer to Figure 5 for
an illustration of the S352A Stage Modules in a typical
Direct Acting/Reverse Acting application.
Each stage module may be receiving separate

power sources. Make sure all power sources to
each stage module are off.
2. Remove the stage module cover by loosening the
jumpers (at Jumper Terminal J2) horizontally for
Direct Acting or vertically for Reverse Acting.
marked DIFF to the desired setting.
5. Adjust the offset using the potentiometer marked
OFFSET to the desired pressure from the P352AB
control setpoint at which the stage relay will
de-energize (above setpoint with Direct Acting
mode selected or below setpoint with Reverse
Acting mode selected).
6. Replace the S352A stage module cover and
tighten the captive cover screws.
Offset
Potentiometer
Differential
Potentiometer
Module
Connector
Module
Connector
Jumper
Position at J2
Relay Energized
LED Indicator
Reverse Acting
Relay
Direct Acting
Cover Screw
(One of Four)
N.O.
N.C. COM
Figure 4: Interior View and Typical Wiring

of the S352A Stage Module
Higher
Pressure
ON
Differential
Setpoint
Pressure
Differential
ON
OFF
OFFSET
OFF
OFFSET
OFFSET
OFF
Differential
OFF
Differential
ON = Energized
OFF = De-energized
ON
Lower
Pressure
ON
P352AB
Stage
1
S352A
Stage
2
S352A
Stage
4
Reverse
Direct
Figure 5: Typical Direct Acting/Reverse Acting Application

Using One P352AB Control and Three S352A Stage Modules
W iring
Refer to the following guidelines and wiring diagrams
for proper wiring and terminal designations.
(See Table 3 and Figures 6 and 7.)

equipment.
IMPORTANT:
Make all wiring connections in

regulations. Use copper
conductors only. Do not exceed
the controls electrical ratings.
Transducer Wiring
The P352AB control supplies 5 VDC power to the
P399 Electronic Pressure Transducer. The transducer
is wired to three of the four connectors at the terminal
block, located at the upper left of the circuit board.
The transducer wiring harness has a shielded cable.
Any additional length of cable should also be shielded
cable. Connect the cable shield to the COM terminal
on the P352AB control. Do not connect the other end
of the cable shield.
Table 3: Connecting the Transducer

to the P352AB Control
P352AB Control
Terminal
Designations
P399 Electronic
Pressure Transducer
Wire Colors
COM
Black (Common and Shield)
SEN
White (Output Signal)
VDC
Red (5 VDC Supply)
Wiring Harness
P399 Transducer
White-SEN
Red-VDC
Black-COM
Shield (Connect
24
VAC
Isolate and tape. Do not ground

this end of cable shield.
P352AB
S352A
Load
Load
D352A
Wire
Terminal
Block
24V
COM
VDC
SEN
COM
N.C.
Output N.O.
Relay
Terminals
120 VAC
Figure 6: System 350 Powered by an External Transformer Using 120 VAC Power Supply
Wiring Harness
P399 Transducer
White-SEN
Red-VDC
Black-COM
Shield (Connect
P352AB
Y350R
Isolate and tape. Do not ground

this end of cable shield.
S352A
S352A
S352A
D352A
Wire
Terminal
Block
24V
COM
VDC
SEN
COM
N.O.
N.C. Output
Terminals
Relay
120 VAC
Load
Load
Load
Load
Figure 7: System 350 Powered by a Y350R Power Module Using 120 VAC Power Supply
C heckout Procedure
T roubleshooting
If the System 350 control modules do not appear to
function properly, verify that the proper mode (DA or
RA) has been selected on each control module. Then
perform the following procedures to determine the
problem.
IMPORTANT:
The control and the controlled

equipment must be powered and
operating at a stable pressure to
perform many of the following
procedures.
Equipment Needed:
A reliable pressure gauge connected near the

transducer.
A reliable and accurate Digital Voltmeter (DVM)

capable of measuring AC voltage and DC voltages
down to 0.1 VDC in the 0 to 10 VDC range.

1. Check for proper supply voltage to the Control.
c.
With the DVM, check the voltage between the

24V and the COM terminals on the terminal
block on the upper left side of the control.
If an external 24 VAC transformer powers
the control, select AC volts on the DVM. The
voltage must be between 20 and 30 VAC.
If a Y350R Power Module powers the
control, select DC volts on the DVM. The
voltage must be between 16 and 38 VDC.
d. If the DVM reading is within the indicated

voltage range, proceed to Step 2.
e. If the DVM reading is not within the indicated
voltage ranges, replace the external
transformer or the Y350R Power Module, and
recheck for proper supply voltage.
2. Check for proper supply voltage to the
pressure transducer.
a. Select DC volts on the DVM and measure the
voltage (VDCS) between VDC and the COM
terminals on the terminal block on the upper
left side of the control.
The voltage must be 5.0 VDC ( 0.1 VDC).
If the voltage is in this range proceed to
Step 3.
b. If the voltage is out of this range, power down
the controlled equipment and disconnect it
from the control. Disconnect the transducer
from the control. With the control powered,
measure the voltage (VDCS) between VDC
and the COM terminals on the terminal block
on the upper left side of the control.
The voltage must be 5.0 VDC ( 0.1 VDC).
If the voltage is in this range, replace the
transducer. If the voltage is out of range,
replace the control.
3. Check pressure transducer for proper output
signal voltage.
a. Measure and record the voltage (Vo) between
the SEN and the COM terminals on the control
terminal block.
b. At the same time, observe and record the
pressure reading (psiT) on the gauge.
a. Before powering control and equipment, check

that all of the wiring is correct and all of the
connections are tight.
b. Apply power to the control.
8
psi T = ( Voo -
VDCS
1.25 x Pmax
x
)
10
VDCS
psiT = Pressure measured at transducer

Vo = Transducer output signal voltage (VDC)
VDCS = Supply voltage to the transducer
(measured in step 2a).
Pmax = Transducer pressure range maximum
Output Voltage
(% of Power Supply)
4.5 VDC
(90%)
-2
The transducer output signal voltage (Vo)

increases proportionally to an increase in the
pressure at the transducer (psiT). Use the
graph in Figure 8 to compare the measured
signal voltage to the measured pressure or
use the formula below to compare the voltage
and pressure values.
2.5 VDC
(50%)
Pressure (psi)
P352AB Model
P399 Transducer
100 psi
P352AB-2
P399A
500 psi
P352AB-3
P399B
Figure 8: Pressure vs. Output Voltage
The measured pressure at the gauge is

approximately 245 psi (psiT), the measured
transducer output voltage is 2.5 VDC (Vo), the
measured supply voltage to the transducer is
5.03 VDC (VDCS), and the transducers rated
range is 0 to 500 psi (Pmax). Use the formula
above to calculate the pressure you would
expect from the measured voltage.
= 248.1 psi
Since the measured pressure of 245 psi (psiT)

is close to the pressure calculated from the
measured voltage of 248.1 psi, the transducer
output voltage is considered within the desired
range.
Note:
3
-4
BAB
52
2A
3
5
P
P3
0.5 VDC
(10%)
Example:
x 500
(2.5 - 5.03
) x 1.255.03
10
P35
2AB
c.
Depending on the accuracy of the

instrumentation used to measure the
actual pressure at the transducer
(psiT) and the transducer output
voltage (Vo), the actual and calculated
pressure may not exactly agree.
4. Check the control for proper operation.

Perform Steps 1-3 first.
Note: When the LED is lit, the N.O. contacts are
closed.
a. Determine and record if the control is
in the DA or RA mode of operation.
b. Determine the differential setting.
c.
Observe and record the system

pressure at the gauge.
d. If the control is in the DA mode, adjust the

setpoint setting to a value lower than the
observed gauge pressure. If the LED is not lit,
turn the setpoint adjustment knob
counterclockwise until the LED lights
e. With the LED lit, slowly turn the setpoint
adjustment knob clockwise (to increase the
setpoint setting) until the LED goes off.
Observe the gauge pressure, which should be
the same as the setpoint setting when the LED
goes off.
f.
Next turn the setpoint adjustment slowly

counterclockwise until the LED lights again.
Observe the gauge pressure, which should be
equal to the differential setting plus the
setpoint setting when the LED lit.
g. If the control is in the RA mode, adjust the

setpoint setting to a value higher than the
observed gauge pressure. If the LED is not lit,
turn the setpoint adjustment knob clockwise
until the LED lights.
e. Use the procedure outlined in Steps 4a-4i to

determine if the stage module is operating
properly. Use Table 4 to determine what the
On and Off setpoint pressure values are for
each module.
h. With the LED lit, slowly turn the setpoint

adjustment knob counterclockwise (to
decrease the setpoint setting) until the LED
goes off. Observe the gauge pressure, which
should be the same as the setpoint setting
when the LED went off.
f.
i.
g. If a stage module still does not perform

properly, replace the stage module.
Next turn the setpoint adjustment slowly

clockwise until the LED lights again. Observe
the gauge pressure, which should be equal to
the setpoint setting minus the differential
setting.
6. Check the display module for proper

operation.
5. Check the stage modules for proper operation.

If there is no display module in the system, skip

this step.
a. Check the gauge pressure (psi) at the
transducer.
If stage modules are not used, proceed to Step 6.
b. If the display module does not display the

(approximate) pressure measured at the
gauge, replace the display module.
a. Determine and record if the stage module

is in the DA or RA mode of operation.
b. Determine the differential setting.
c.
If a stage module LED and relay do not

perform as expected, adjust the differential
and offset potentiometers to their minimum
value and repeat the previous checks.
c.
Observe and record the offset setting.
d. Observe and record the system

pressure at the gauge.
Pressing the button on the display module

should display the current setpoint setting.
If the displayed setpoint is out of the controls

setpoint pressure range (check scale-plate at the
setpoint knob for controls pressure range),
replace the control.
Table 4: S352A Stage Module Relay Troubleshooting

Operating Mode
LED
N.O. Contact
Position
Setpoint Setting Equals

Approximately
Direct Acting (DA)
On
Closed
(psi reading) - offset - differential
Direct Acting (DA)
Off
Open
(psi reading) - offset
Reverse Acting (RA)
On
Closed
(psi reading) + offset + differential
Reverse Acting (RA)
Off
Open
(psi reading) + offset

Replacement controls and pressure transducers are
available through your local Johnson Controls
representative.
10
Item
Product Code
Number
Description
P352AB Electronic Pressure

Control Series
P352AB-2C*
SPDT Relay with LED Indication

Setpoint Adjustment Range:
0-100 psi
Differential Adjustment Range: 2-50 psi
P352AB-3C*
SPDT Relay with LED indication

90-250 psi
Differential Adjustment Range: 10-100 psi
P352AB-4C*
SPDT Relay with LED indication

240-600 psi
Differential Adjustment Range: 10 to 100 psi
Electronic Pressure Transducers

for the P352AB-2
P399AAA-1C*
P399AAC-1C*
0 to 100 psis; 1/8 in. NPT male pressure connection

0 to 100 psis; 1/4 in. SAE female flare pressure connection

for the P352AB-3
P399BAA-1C*
P399BAC-1C*


for the P352AB-4
P399CAA-1C*
P399CAC-1C*

Wiring Harness
WHA-P399-400C*
WHA-P399-200C*
13.1 ft (4.0 m) length

6.6 ft (2.0 m) length
Display Module
D352AA-2C
Digital Pressure Display Module
Stage Module
S352AA-2C
Pressure Stage Module Used with P399 Pressure Transducer
Power Module
Y350R-1C
Rectified 24 VAC from 120/240 VAC Source
* Electronic Pressure Transducer and Wiring Harness must be ordered separately.

Item
Product Code
Number
Description
Conduit Adaptor
ADP11A-600R
1/2 in. snap-fit EMT conduit adaptor (box of 10)
DIN Rail Sections
BKT287-1R
BKT287-2R
12 in. (0.3 m) long

39-1/3 in. (1.0 m) long
DIN Rail End Clamp
PLT344-1R
Cables for Remote Mounting of

D352 Display Module
WHA29A-600R*
WHA29A-603R
WHA29A-604R
3 ft (0.9 m)
25 ft (7.6 m)
50 ft (15.2 m)
* WHA29A-600R may be used to link S352A Stage Modules together.
11
S pecifications
Product
Pressure Setpoint Range
Differential Range
Supply Voltage*
DC Power Supply Output
Output Relay
Power Requirement
Input Signal
Electrical Ratings
Ambient Temperature
Ambient Humidity
Material
Agency Listing
P352AB Electronic Pressure Control Series

P352AB-2: 0 to 100 psi
P352AB-3: 90 to 250 psi
P352AB-4: 240 to 600 psi
P352AB-2: 2 to 50 psi
P352AB-3: 10 to 100 psi
P352AB-4: 10 to 100 psi
Y350R Power Module or
Class 2 Transformer, 20-30 VAC; 50/60 Hz
5 VDC to power the P399 Electronic Pressure Transducer
SPDT Enclosed Relay
1.8 VA maximum
0.5 to 4.5 VDC Ratiometric Signal from P399 Electronic Pressure Transducer
Full Load Amperes:
Locked Rotor Amperes:
Non-Inductive Amperes:
Pilot Duty:
Operating:
Shipping:
9.8 (120 VAC)

4.9 (208/240 VAC)
58.8 (120 VAC)
29.4 (208/240 VAC)
10 at 24/240 VAC
125 VA at 24/240 VAC
-30 to 150F (-34 to 66C)

-40 to 185F (-40 to 85C)
Case, Cover: NEMA 1 High Impact Thermoplastic
* Only one voltage source may be used.
Add-on Modules:
S352A
Y350R
D352
Relay Contacts:
DIFF and OFFSET:
Input Voltage:
Display Range:
SPDT, 10 Amperes Non-inductive, 1/2 hp 120/240 VAC

2 to 50 psi Differential; 2 to 50 psi Offset
120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
0 to 750 psi
Controls Group
P.O. Box 423
Milwaukee, WI 53201
12
FAN 930
Printed in U.S.A.
FANs 930, 930.5, 125

Product/Technical Bulletin P352P
Issue Date 0296
System 350TM
P352P Electronic Proportional Plus Integral
Static Pressure Controls
The P352P is an electronic proportional only or

proportional plus integral static pressure control with
0 to 10 VDC and 0 to 20 mA anolog outputs. The P352P is
also equipped with three user-selectable integration
constants, as well as a wide adjustable throttling range.
Two models cover the ranges of
0.5 to 5 in. W.C. and 0.025 to 0.25 in. W.C.
Like all System 350 products, the P352P is housed
in a NEMA 1 high-impact thermoplastic enclosure. The
modular design provides easy, snap-together connections
for quick installation and future expandability.
Figure 1: P352P Electronic Proportional Plus Integral
Pressure Control

Modular Design
Provides the flexibility to add a D352 Pressure Display Module and a

Y350R Power Module
Plug-in Connectors and 35 mm DIN

Rail Mountability
Eliminates wiring between modules and reduces installation costs
Two Models Cover a Wide Setpoint

Range of 0.5 to 5 in. W.C. or 0.025
to 0.25 in. W.C.
Reduces inventory by encompassing pressure ranges required to

support most static pressure control applications
Minimum Output Adjustable from 0

to 60%
Tailors the output to the requirements of the controlled equipment
Adjustable Throttling Range of 0.5

to 5 in. W.C. or
0.025 to 0.25 in. W.C.
Enables user to match the amount of control (maximum to

minimum) required for a given application
Field-selectable Reverse or Direct

Acting Mode
Works in a variety of pressure applications
Three User-selectable Integration

Constants
Adjusts output to bring process to setpoint regardless of system load
Interchangeable Pressure
Transmitters

Part No. 24-7664-486, Rev.
Code No. LIT-930042
O peration
The P352P Pressure Controls can be used as stand alone

devices or in conjunction with plug-in accessory modules to
control variable speed drives, motor actuators, or other
devices. The P352P Static Pressure Controls are not
typically used with staging modules. Consult Johnson
Controls Application Engineering for specific information
if a question regarding a specific application arises.
Typical applications include:
duct static pressure control
building pressurization
A typical System 350 static pressure control scheme
P352P Pressure Control
D352CA Digital Pressure Display Module
(in. W.C.)
DPT-2640 Pressure Transmitter
IMPORTANT: All System 350 Controls are designed

for use only as operating controls.
Where an operating control failure
would result in personal injury and/or
loss of property, it is the responsibility of
the installer to add devices (safety, limit
controls) or systems (alarm, supervisory
systems) that protect against or warn of
control failure.
The P352P operates on 24 VAC/VDC and provides two
simultaneous analog outputs: 0 to 10 VDC and
0 to 20 mA. A ten segment front panel LED bar graph
indicates percentage of output. Adjustable features include:
setpoint
minimum output
throttling range (proportional band)
integration constant
reverse or direct acting mode of operation
Module Connector
Setpoint Potentiometer
Minimum Output Potentiometer
Operational
Mode Jumper
Positions
Throttling Range Potentiometer
Reverse Action
Direct Action
V
I
SN
VDC
C
24V
Integration
DIP Switch
Positions
Percent of Output LED Indicator Lights
O
N
1 2 3 4
C1
Setpoint Potentiometer
C2
C3
Off
DPT-2640*
OUT
0 to 10 VDC Output
EXC
0 to 20 mA Output
COM
Figure 2: Interior View Showing P352P Features
2 System 350 P352P Electronic Proportional Plus Integral Static Pressure Controls
* Use the 0-5 V output

of the DPT-2640
as the input to the
P352P.

This adjustment is used to set the minimum voltage or
milliampere (mA) output that the P352P will provide. It
can be set from 0 to 60% (up to 6 VDC or up to
12 mA).
Example: A controlled device that responds to a
4 to 20 mA output would require that the minimum output
be adjusted to 20% or 4 mA (see Figure 3).
The MIN OUTPUT adjustment is located on the lower
circuit board to the right of the throttling range
potentiometer. One bar will light on the bar graph LED
(front of control) for each 10% increase in range.
mA
20
10
Minimum
Output
4
0
Setpoint
(P352PQ-1C)
1
2
3
0.05
0.1
0.15 (P352PQ-2C)
Throttling Range
(in. W.C.)
Figure 3: Minimum Output Set to 20% (4 mA) and

Throttling Range Set to 3 in. W.C. (P352PQ-1C) or
0.15 in. W.C. (P352PQ-2C)

The throttling range can be adjusted from
0.5 to 5 in. W.C. (P352PQ-1C) or
0.025 to 0.25 in. W.C. (P352PQ-2C) (see Figure 3).
Adjustment is made using the potentiometer marked
THROT RANGE located on the lower printed circuit
board to the left of the MIN OUTPUT potentiometer.
Proportional controls cannot hold a process at the exact
setpoint. A proportional offset is always present and is due
to the fact that the control output reaches 0% at setpoint.
Any load on the system will cause the point of control to be
offset from the setpoint. The greater the load on the
system, the further the control point will be offset from the
setpoint (this is commonly referred to as proportional
offset).
Some proportional only controls are designed with their

setpoint located midway through the proportional band to
help compensate for this offset, but a fixed 50% controlled
device action at setpoint does not necessarily match the
system load. Depending on the load, the control point can
still be held some distance from setpoint. This results in a
plus/minus error from the setpoint rather than a singleended error.
The P352P has an integration feature, which measures the
control points distance from setpoint and automatically
adjusts the amount of control output. Over a period of
time, the P352Ps output is brought into balance with the
system load at setpoint
(see Figure 4). The rate of correction automatically
increases as the process deviates further from setpoint.
amount of correction is sometimes in danger of becoming
too large. When the output of the actuated device (valve or
damper) is fully open or closed and the setpoint still cannot
be reached, the integration error continues to grow. The
result is called
integral windup. The P352P avoids integral windup
with a patented circuit that puts a dynamic ceiling on the
integrator. This resets the integration error when the
sensor goes just above the setpoint plus the throttling range
(in DA [Direct Action] mode) or just below the setpoint
minus the throttling range (in RA
[Reverse Action] mode). This will allow the process to
recover from an out-of-range condition without a long
period of overshoot.
The P352P has three field-selectable integration constants
as well as an off position. The DIP switch block that
selects the integration constant is located on the lower
circuit board next to the RA/DA mode jumper blocks (see
Figure 2). The field-selectable integration constants
include:
OFF (Switch 1 to On position, all others Off)
provides proportional only operation.
Note: In open-loop (without feedback) applications,
select OFF proportional only operation.
C3 (Switch 2 to On position, all others Off)is the
slowest integration constant (equal to 9 min.) and is
suitable for most proportional plus integral
applications. It is recommended that C3 be the initial
setting.
System 350 P352P Electronic Proportional Plus Integral Static Pressure Controls
C2 (Switch 3 to On position, all others Off)selects a

five minute integration constant. If the rate of system
recovery to setpoint is sluggish with the control set to
C3 and it is determined that the system has enough
capacity to drive the process to setpoint at a faster rate,
the C2 setting may be used.
C1 (Switch 4 to On position, all others Off)is the

fastest integration constant (equal to 2.5 min.). C1
should be used only in instances where the rate of
change at the transmitter is extremely rapid and system
capacity can compensate for that rapid change.
Proportional Only Control

Load Change
System Load
Pressure
Proportional
Offset
Setpoint
Throttling
Range
Control Point
Follows the Load
Error
Time
Proportional
Offset = 0
Pressure
System Load
Setpoint
Load Change
Error
Time
Figure 4: Operation of Proportional Only vs. Proportional Plus Integral Control
Mode of Operation (Direct or Reverse)

Output
20
10
mA
RA
10
DA
5
VDC
The RA/DA mode is selected by the jumper blocks located

on the lower circuit board just to the right of the integration
constant DIP switch block. Position the jumper blocks
vertically for reverse action and horizontally for direct
action.
With the jumper blocks in the RA position, the analog
output increases as the pressure drops (see Figure 5).
With the jumper blocks in the DA position, the
proportional output will increase as the pressure rises.
As shipped from the factory, the RA/DA jumper blocks are
installed in the reverse acting mode.
0
Maximum
Throttling
Range
Setpoint
Throttling Range
(in. W.C.)
0
Maximum
Throttling
Range
Throttling Range
(in. W.C.)
Setpoint
Figure 5: Direct or Reverse Acting Proportional Bands

Shown in Proportional Only Mode
(Shaded Area Shows Throttling Range Possibilities from
Minimum to Maximum)
D imensions
0.145 Mounting Slot
3.68 for No. 6 Screws
0.5
13
2.94
75
5.00
127
DIN Rail
Mount
1.56
40
P352P
2.40
61
0.42
11
1.20
31
2.40
61
0.85
22
0.875 Conduit
Hole
22
Figure 6: P352P Dimensions, in./mm

The P352P is housed in a compact NEMA 1 plastic
enclosure designed for standard 35 mm DIN rail
mounting. The P352P is not position sensitive but
should be mounted for convenient wiring and adjustment.
Four key-slot mounting holes on the back of the control
case are provided should surface mounting be required.
Note: When mounting the P352P (or any
System 350 Module) to rigid conduit, attach the
hub to the conduit before securing the hub to the
control enclosure.
WARNING: Shock hazard. Disconnect

power supply before wiring
connections are made to avoid
possible electrical shock or
damage to equipment.
All wiring must be installed to conform to the

National Electrical Code and local regulations. For
maximum electrical rating of control, see label
inside the control cover. Use copper conductors only.
The P352P can output a variable signal from
0 to10 VDC or 0 to 20 mA. (Both outputs can be
used simultaneously.) Connections are made to the
terminal block located in the wiring compartment at
the bottom of the case.
Connection can be made to both the voltage and
milliampere outputs, allowing the P352P to drive
two outputs simultaneously (off the same RA or DA
ramp). This feature can be used to drive different
types of motor actuators or variable speed drives.
Table 1: Terminal Designations

Terminal
Designation
Terminal
Description
0 to 10 VDC output
0 to 20 mA output
SN
0-5 VDC input from the pressure

transmitter (in. W.C.)
VDC
14 VDC power supply for

the pressure transmitter
Power supply common for the

pressure transmitter
24V
24 volts AC or DC
Transmitter Connection
The P352P pressure control is used with a
DPT-2640 Differential Pressure Transmitter, which is
powered by the 14 VDC power supply of the P352P. The
transmitter is connected to the P352P at the
6-conductor terminal block located at the bottom of the
lower circuit board.
wiring on runs of less than 50 feet. When using shielded
cable, isolate and tape the shield at the transmitter.
Connect the shield to the
C terminal on the P352P.
The maximum recommended length of
14 to 22 AWG shielded transmitter cable is
1,000 feet (305 meters).
Table 2: Transmitter Connections

Terminal Designations
P352P
DPT-2460-3
DPT-2640-7
SN
OUT
VDC
EXC
COM
A dd-on Modules
The D352 Digital Pressure Display Module and Y350R
Power Module are designed to connect together and plug
into the P352P, via a connector on its right side. The
preferred order of the modules is (from left to right)
control module, power module, and display module.
4.
D352 Pressure Display Module

The D352 receives its power, pressure, and setpoint
information from the P352P. A three-digit
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) gives continuous
read-out of the sensed pressure. Pushing the PRESS
FOR SETPOINT button will cause the setpoint of the
adjoining P352P to be displayed.
Y350R Power Module

The Y350R provides a convenient method of powering
System 350 Modules from a
120 or 240 VAC power source. The Y350R supplies 24
VDC unfiltered to the modules.
A djustments
P352P
1.
2.
3.
Remove P352P cover by loosening the

Set the RA/DA jumper blocks to the desired mode of
operation. Position the jumper blocks vertically for
RA (Reverse Acting) or horizontally for DA (Direct
Acting) (see Figure 2).
Adjust the throttling range potentiometer to desired
setting. Clockwise rotation increases the throttling
range.
If the P352P is to be used in proportional plus
integral mode, the initial throttling range adjustment
should not be set below 3 in. W.C. for the P352PQ1C and 0.15 in. W.C. for the P352PQ-2C. A narrow
proportional band used in conjunction with the
integration may result in unstable control.
5.
6.
If minimum output is required, set the minimum

output potentiometer to the desired position. Output
can be read with a voltmeter or can be adjusted using
the ten segment, front panel LED.
Note: Before setting the minimum output
potentiometer, be sure the control is not
generating an analog output signal.
For each 10% increase in range, one bar will light on
the front panel LED. In a milliampere application,
each bar equals 2 mA. In a voltage application, each
bar equals 1 volt. (See
Figure 3 for an example.)
Example: To set the P352P for a minimum output of
4 mA, turn the minimum output potentiometer
clockwise until the second LED segment lights.
Slowly back off the potentiometer counter-clockwise
until the second segment just goes out.
Make sure the system is stable before selecting
integration. Refer to Checkout Procedure.
Adjust the control to the desired setpoint and replace
cover.
Note: The P352PQ-1C setpoint at mid scale is
factory calibrated to a tolerance of
+/- 0.05 in. W.C. (The P352PQ-2C has a
midscale calibration tolerance of
+/- 0.0025 in. W.C.)
The setpoint tolerance at the extreme ends
of the setpoint scale can be
+/- 0.15 in. W.C. for the
P352PQ-1C model (+/- 0.0075 in. W.C. for
the P352PQ-2C).
The D352 Display Module is unaffected by
this tolerance shift. Use the D352 to
achieve the most accurate setpoint selection.
C heckout Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.

wiring connections are according to job
specifications.
operating cycles to determine that the system is
stable.
If integration is required, select the C1, C2, or C3
integration constant. C3 is the recommended initial
setting. (Refer to the Integration Constantsection.)
Put the system back into operation. Observe system
operation and make additional adjustments to obtain
stable control (if necessary).
T roubleshooting
that the proper mode is selected on each module (e.g.,
RA/DA) and then use the following procedures to
determine the cause of the problem:
1. Check for the proper voltage source applied to the
P352P Control.
the 24 V (+) and C (-) terminals located on
the P352Ps terminal block (Figure 2).
AC volts on the DVM and verifythat the
voltage is between
20 and 30 VAC.
If a Y350R Power Module is used,
select DC volts on the DVM and verify
that the voltage is between
16 and 38 VDC.
If an external DC power supply is used,
select DC volts on the DVM and verify
that the voltage is between
22 and 29 VDC.
(DVM must be accurate to +/- 0.1 VDC)
Connect the (+) lead to the VDC terminal and
the (-) lead to the C terminal.
c.
If the DVM voltage is between

13.9 and 14.1 VDC, proceed to Step 2.
If the DVM voltage is above 14.1 VDC,
replace the P352P.
If the DVM voltage is below 13.9 VDC, then
disconnect the pressure transmitter completely
and disconnect power to the main blower.
IMPORTANT: Removing the sensor will either turn

the blower off or on, depending on
mode selected on the P352P.
d.
2.
Check the voltage again.

If the DVM voltage rises to a value
between 13.9 and 14.1 VDC, then replace
the transmitter.
If the DVM voltage is still below
13.9 VDC, then replace the P352P.
Check the P352P for proper operation.
Note: Step 1 must be performed first.
a. Select the RA mode.
b. Adjust the setpoint until it equals the throttling
range.
Note: The right-most LED in the bar graph
should be on.
c. Adjust the setpoint to minimum (turn
completely counter-clockwise).
Note: The illuminated LED should move
from right to left, two or more
positions.
d. Select DA mode.
Note: All LEDs should be off and the VDC
output should be 0.1 VDC.
3.
Transmitter "OUT" Voltage (VDC)
Adjust the minimum output from 0 to 60% by

turning the potentiometer completely clockwise.
Note: As the potentiometer is adjusted in the
clockwise direction, the P352Ps V
output voltage should go from
0 to 6 VDC and the I output current
should go from 0 to 12 mA. The LEDs
should turn on, one at a time, from left
to right (until LED 6 is on).
If the LEDs do not come on or the V
or I outputs do not change as
described above, replace the P352P.
Check pressure transmitter for proper output
voltage.
a. Re-adjust the P352P back to the desired control
settings (see the Adjustments section); then
reconnect the pressure transmitter and energize
the blower.
b. Connect the DC voltmeter (+) lead to the P352P
SN terminal and the (-) lead to the C
terminal; then, using Figure 7, convert the
voltage to pressure (PT).
Note: A transmitter output of 0 to 5 VDC
should correspond to a pressure of
0 to 0.5 in. W.C. for the DPT-2640-3 or
to a pressure of 0 to 10 in. W.C. for the
DPT-2640-7 (see Figure 7).
If the voltage conversion to
pressure (PT) deviates substantially from
the actual, replace the transmitter.
If the voltage conversion to pressure at
the transmitter (PT) is close to the actual
pressure, then:
If the proportional plus integration

control is selected, wait for the
system to stabilize, then verify that
the transmitter pressure (PT) is very
close to the selected setpoint
pressure.
If the proportional only control is

selected, make sure the transmitter
pressure is above the setpoint (for
DA mode) or below the setpoint (for
RA mode).
e.
2.5
0
0
0.25
5
PT Pressure (in. W.C.)
0.5 (DPT-2640-3)
10 (DPT-2640-7)
Figure 7: Transmitter Voltage vs. Pressure

4.
Check the D352 Display Module.

If there is no D352 in the system, skip this step.
Note:
Steps 1 through 3 must be
performed first.
a. Check pressure at the transmitter. The display
should read the same pressure.
b. If the D352 does not read the correct transmitter
pressure (PT), replace the D352.
c. Press the setpoint button on the display module
to read the selected setpoint.
d. If the D352 displays a reading other than the
expected setpoint value, check the setpoint
potentiometer setting and correct if necessary. If
the display continues to read an incorrect or outof-range (>0.520 in. W.C. for the P352PQ-2C)
value, replace the D352.
Note:
If the control and add-on modules all appear to

be operating properly, but the field device still
does not turn on and off as expected, check the
wiring from the P352P to the field device.
replacement controls are available through local Johnson

Controls representatives.
epairs and Replacement
Do not make field repairs or perform calibration. The

DPT-2640 Differential Pressure Transmitter and

Item
Product Code
Number
Description
P352P Proportional Plus

Integral Pressure Control
P352PQ-1C
P352PQ-2C
Setpoint Range: 0.5 to 5 in. W.C.; Throttling Range: 0.5 to 5 in. W.C.
Setpoint Range: 0.025 to 0.25 in. W.C.; Throttling Range: 0.025 to 0.25 in. W.C.
Display Module
D352CA-1C
D352CA-2C
Digital Pressure Display Module: 0 to 9.99 in. W.C.

Digital Pressure Display Module: 0 to 0.999 in. W.C.
Power Module
Y350R-1C
120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz input
Pressure Transmitter
DPT-2640-7
DPT-2640-3
0 to 10 in. W.C. (use with P352PQ-1C)

0 to 0.5 in. W.C. (use with P352PQ-2C)
Conduit Adapter
ADP11A-600R
1/2 in. Snap-fit EMT Conduit Adapter (box of 10)
DIN Rail Section
BKT287-1R
BKT287-2R
35 x 7.5 mm, 0.305 m (12 in.) long

35 x 7.5 mm, 0.914 m (36 in.) long
DIN Rail End Clamps
PLT344-1R
Cable for Remote Mounting WHA29A-600R

of
WHA29A-603R
D352 Display Module
WHA29A-604R
3 ft (0.9 m)
25 ft (7.6 m)
50 ft (15.2 m)
Notes
11
S pecifications
Product
Sensor Input Range
Setpoint and
Throttling Range
Supply Voltage*
Analog Output
P352P Electronic Proportional Plus Integral Static Pressure Controls

P352PQ-1C: 0 to 10 in. W.C. corresponding to 0 to 5 VDC
P352PQ-2C: 0 to 0.5 in. W.C. corresponding to 0 to 5 VDC
P352PQ-1C: 0.5 to 5 in. W.C.
P352PQ-2C: 0.025 to 0.25 in. W.C.
AC Supply: 20-30 VAC Class 2, 50/60 Hz, 5 VA max.
Y350R Power Module: See Add-on Modules below.
DC Supply: 22 to 29 VDC at 50 mA max.
0 to 10 VDC (550 ohm Load Minimum) and 0 to 20 mA (600 ohm Load Maximum)
Both outputs are designed to withstand short circuits to COM and 24 VAC.
Minimum Output
Adjustable from 0 to 60% of Full Output
Output Indication
A ten segment LED bar graph indicates percentage of output.
Control Action
Power Requirement
Ambient Temperature
Ambient Humidity
(all modules)
Transmitters
Material
Agency Listings
Direct or reverse action is jumper selectable.

3.2 VA
Three Selectable Rates C1, C2, C3 and an OFF Position
Operating:
Shipping:
-30 to 150F (-34 to 66C)

-40 to 185F (-40 to 85C)
0 to 95% RH Non-condensing; Maximum Dew Point: 85F (29C)

P352PQ-1C uses a DPT-2640-7; 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 in. W.C. range.
P352PQ-2C uses a DPT-2640-3; 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 0.5 in. W.C. range.
UL Guide No. XAPX and cUL Guide No. XAPX7, File E27734
*Only one input voltage source may be used.
Add-on Modules:
Y350R
D352
Input Voltage:
120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Display Range: See Table 3.
Controls Group
P.O. Box 423
Milwaukee, WI 53201
Printed in U.S.A.
SISTEMAS HVAC
FAN & COIL AUTENTIC G1

Srie YGFC MDE
CATLOGO TCNICO E IOM

Unidades Condicionadoras de Ar para gua Gelada
Modelos YGFC 04-14
Vazo de Ar mxima de 732 a 2399 m/h
Capacidade de 0,6 a 3,1 TR
ndice
1. Nomenclatura............................................................................................................ 3
2. Dados Tcnicos......................................................................................................... 3
3. Capacidade de Resfriamento..................................................................................... 4
4. Dimenses................................................................................................................. 10
5. Diagrama Eltrico..................................................................................................... 10
6. Acessrios Opcionais................................................................................................ 11
7. Instalao................................................................................................................... 11
8. Operao.................................................................................................................... 13
9. Manuteno............................................................................................................... 14
10. Guia de Especificao............................................................................................... 14
11. Certificado de Garantia............................................................................................. 15
1. Nomenclatura
YGFC 02 ST CB
L
Lado da hidrulica
R - Direita
Unidade Fan & Coil
L - Esquerda
Tamanho do gabinete
A: IP20 60Hz
B: IP54 60Hz
04, 06, 08,

10, 12, 14
Filtro 25mm - Aluminio

ST - Standard
E: Bandeja estendida
CB: Ceiling de
embutir com plenum
de retorno traseiro
3: 3 Filas Resfriamento
2. Dados Tcnicos
04
3 Filas - Padro
06
08
10
12
14
Capacidade de
Resfriamento (kW)
Temp. de sada
do Ar (C)
Total
Sensvel
BS
BU
Vazo
de gua
(m/h)
Alta
732
4,55
3,27
13,70
12,60
0,78
21,50
75
41,80
Mdia
691
4,39
3,14
13,50
12,40
0,76
18,50
66
39,30
Baixa
499
3,33
2,38
12,80
12,00
0,57
13,20
50
32,10
Alta
1133
6,65
4,84
14,30
13,00
1,15
37,70
125
47,90
Mdia
1081
6,35
4,64
14,30
13,00
1,09
36,20
120
46,10
Baixa
773
5,13
3,64
13,00
12,10
0,88
24,90
101
38,40
YGFC
Modelo
Vazo de Ar
(m/h)
Perda de
Carga
(kPa)
Potncia
do Motor
(W)
Nvel de
Rudo
(dB)
Alta
1415
8,07
5,99
14,40
13,20
1,39
32,90
146
46,40
Mdia
1349
7,71
5,74
14,40
13,10
1,33
29,40
139
45,30
Baixa
1007
6,40
4,64
13,30
12,40
1,10
23,50
115
37,70
Alta
1714
9,20
6,97
14,90
13,50
1,58
15,30
204
50,00
Mdia
1599
8,69
6,58
14,80
13,50
1,50
13,70
202
47,90
Baixa
1176
7,20
5,28
13,70
12,70
1,24
10,70
183
40,80
Alta
2037
10,97
8,27
14,90
13,50
1,89
22,50
226
50,80
Mdia
1899
10,46
7,85
14,70
13,40
1,80
21,30
214
49,10
Baixa
1340
8,42
6,10
13,50
12,50
1,45
15,20
183
40,30
Alta
2399
14,00
10,17
14,40
13,00
2,41
39,00
266
51,60
Mdia
2222
12,95
9,48
14,30
13,00
2,23
35,50
257
49,20
Baixa
1548
10,23
7,27
13,10
12,10
1,76
22,80
229
40,60
Obs.:
1 Temperatura de entrada do Ar TBS=27C e TBU=19C;

2 Temperatura de entrada de gua 7,0C com um 5 C.
Tipo de Ventilador
Centrfugo com as ps para frente
Tipo do Motor
Monofsico 220V/60Hz
Dimetro da Tubulao de
entrada e sada da gua
3/4"
Maxima Presso de Trabalho
1,6MPa
Dimetro do Dreno
3/4"
Corrente
(A)
Peso
(kg)
0,31
23,40
0,56
27,40
0,68
38,70
0,92
40,30
1,09
45,80
1,23
56,50
3 Capacidade de Resfriamento
Condies:
- Temp. de Entrada do Ar (BS = 24C / BU = 18C)
- Temp. de Entrada da gua (5C)
- Temp. de Sada da gua (15C)
Modelo
Velocidade
Alta
YGFC 04
Mdia
Baixa
Alta
YGFC 06
Mdia
Baixa
Alta
YGFC 08
Mdia
Baixa
Alta
YGFC 10
Mdia
Baixa
Alta
YGFC 12
Mdia
Baixa
Alta
YGFC 14
Mdia
Baixa
Presso
Esttica
(Pa)
Vazo de
Ar (m/h)
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
717
613
474
674
561
428
490
381
268
1111
999
854
1060
943
783
764
666
534
1368
1160
951
1315
1130
902
989
813
598
1497
1245
1566
1389
1140
1160
1024
848
1708
1401
1838
1581
1302
1318
1129
895
2327
2034
1678
2154
1846
1498
1528
1337
1083
Capacidade de
Resfriamento (kW)
Total
2,01
2,30
1,95
2,44
2,17
1,82
1,86
1,59
1,29
4,01
3,77
3,44
3,83
3,58
3,22
3,10
2,87
2,53
4,85
4,40
3,92
4,66
4,26
3,75
3,86
3,46
2,86
3,78
4,19
3,84
3,54
3,91
3,94
2,89
3,24
5,72
5,12
5,93
5,43
4,88
4,86
4,39
3,77
8,39
7,74
6,92
7,79
7,11
6,30
6,19
5,74
5,09
Sensvel
1,92
1,87
1,54
2,01
1,75
1,42
1,53
1,26
0,97
3,25
3,01
2,69
3,12
2,87
2,51
2,44
2,21
1,88
4,00
3,54
3,07
3,85
3,45
2,93
3,10
2,69
2,13
3,97
3,61
3,86
3,69
3,35
3,40
2,82
2,68
4,86
4,22
5,12
4,58
3,99
4,01
3,56
2,97
6,77
6,14
5,35
6,32
5,65
4,86
4,87
4,42
3,79
Temp. Sada do
ar (C)
BS
16,1
14,9
14,4
15,1
14,7
14,1
14,7
14,2
13,3
15,3
15,0
14,6
15,3
15,0
14,5
14,5
14,2
13,5
15,3
14,9
14,4
15,3
14,9
14,4
14,7
14,2
13,4
16,1
15,4
16,7
16,1
15,3
15,3
15,8
14,6
15,6
15,1
15,7
15,4
14,9
15,0
14,6
14,2
15,4
15,0
14,5
15,3
14,9
14,4
14,5
14,2
13,6
BU
15,2
14,1
13,7
14,3
14,0
13,6
14,1
13,7
12,9
14,3
14,1
13,8
14,3
14,1
13,7
13,8
13,5
13,0
14,4
14,1
13,7
14,4
14,1
13,7
14,0
13,6
13,0
15,5
14,6
15,6
15,4
14,5
14,5
15,2
14,1
14,6
14,3
14,7
14,5
14,2
14,2
14,0
13,6
14,3
14,1
13,7
14,3
14,0
13,6
13,8
13,5
13,1
Vazo de
gua
(m/h)
Perda de
Carga
(kPa)
Potncia
(W)
0,173
0,198
0,168
0,210
0,186
0,157
0,160
0,137
0,111
0,345
0,325
0,297
0,330
0,309
0,277
0,267
0,247
0,218
0,418
0,379
0,338
0,401
0,367
0,323
0,332
0,298
0,246
0,325
0,361
0,330
0,305
0,336
0,339
0,249
0,279
0,493
0,441
0,511
0,467
0,420
0,418
0,378
0,324
0,722
0,667
0,596
0,670
0,612
0,542
0,533
0,494
0,438
1,6
2,0
1,5
2,0
1,6
1,2
1,5
1,2
0,9
4,3
3,9
3,3
4,2
3,7
3,1
3,0
2,6
2,1
4,0
3,4
2,8
3,6
3,1
2,5
3,0
2,5
1,8
1,3
1,5
1,3
1,2
1,4
1,5
1,0
1,1
2,5
2,2
2,8
2,4
2,1
2,1
1,8
1,5
5,0
4,4
3,7
4,7
4,1
3,4
3,2
2,8
2,4
75
72
69
66
63
59
50
47
43
124
118
110
119
111
102
100
92
81
144
136
127
138
130
120
114
105
94
188
172
199
184
165
181
162
142
209
194
210
195
180
181
166
148
262
245
226
252
230
206
227
206
179
3 Capacidade de Resfriamento (cont.)

Condies:
Modelo
Velocidade
Alta
YGFC 04
Mdia
Baixa
Alta
YGFC 06
Mdia
Baixa
Alta
YGFC 08
Mdia
Baixa
Alta
YGFC 10
Mdia
Baixa
Alta
YGFC 12
Mdia
Baixa
Alta
YGFC 14
Mdia
Baixa
Presso
Esttica
(Pa)
Vazo de
Ar (m/h)
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
717
613
474
674
561
428
490
381
268
1111
999
854
1060
943
783
764
666
534
1368
1160
951
1315
1130
902
989
813
598
1677
1497
1245
1566
1389
1140
1160
1024
848
1970
1708
1401
1838
1581
1302
1318
1129
895
2327
2034
1678
2154
1846
1498
1528
1337
1083
Capacidade de
Resfriamento (kW)
Total
3,19
2,92
2,51
3,08
2,77
2,35
2,39
2,04
1,61
5,19
4,80
4,33
4,92
4,54
4,03
3,88
3,57
3,11
6,20
5,54
4,88
5,91
5,36
4,66
4,82
4,28
3,50
6,37
5,95
5,35
6,02
5,61
5,01
5,06
4,71
4,21
7,95
7,21
6,39
7,52
6,82
6,07
6,05
5,53
4,79
10,88
9,88
8,69
10,03
8,98
7,86
7,73
7,14
6,26
Sensvel
2,35
2,11
1,76
2,25
1,98
1,63
1,73
1,44
1,10
3,70
3,40
3,03
3,53
3,23
2,82
2,74
2,48
2,11
4,50
3,98
3,44
4,33
3,87
3,28
3,47
3,01
2,39
5,00
4,61
4,04
4,73
4,34
3,77
3,82
3,49
3,05
6,04
5,42
4,70
5,71
5,10
4,44
4,46
3,99
3,37
7,71
6,96
6,03
7,17
6,37
5,47
5,47
4,97
4,26
Temp. Sada do
ar (C)
BS
14,3
13,8
13,0
14,1
13,5
12,7
13,5
12,8
11,8
14,1
13,9
13,5
14,1
13,8
13,3
13,4
12,9
12,3
14,2
13,8
13,3
14,2
13,8
13,2
13,6
13,0
12,1
15,1
14,9
14,4
15,0
14,7
14,2
14,2
13,9
13,3
14,9
14,6
14,0
14,8
14,4
13,9
14,0
13,5
12,8
14,2
13,8
13,3
14,1
13,8
13,2
13,4
13,0
12,3
BU
13,4
13,0
12,4
13,2
12,8
12,2
12,9
12,3
11,5
13,1
13,0
12,6
13,1
13,0
12,6
12,6
12,3
11,7
13,3
13,0
12,6
13,3
13,0
12,5
12,9
12,4
11,7
14,1
13,9
13,5
14,0
13,8
13,4
13,5
13,2
12,8
13,8
13,6
13,2
13,8
13,5
13,1
13,2
12,9
12,3
13,1
12,9
12,5
13,1
12,9
12,4
12,7
12,3
11,8
Vazo de
gua
(m/h)
Perda de
Carga
(kPa)
Potncia
(W)
0,392
0,359
0,308
0,379
0,341
0,289
0,294
0,252
0,198
0,639
0,591
0,533
0,605
0,558
0,495
0,477
0,439
0,382
0,763
0,681
0,601
0,727
0,659
0,573
0,592
0,527
0,431
0,783
0,731
0,658
0,740
0,690
0,617
0,623
0,579
0,517
0,978
0,887
0,786
0,924
0,839
0,746
0,744
0,680
0,589
1,338
1,215
1,068
1,234
1,105
0,966
0,951
0,878
0,770
6,3
5,4
4,1
5,4
4,5
3,4
4,1
3,1
2,1
13,0
11,3
9,4
12,3
10,6
8,6
8,2
7,1
5,5
11,3
9,2
7,4
10,1
8,5
6,7
7,9
6,4
4,6
4,8
4,4
3,7
4,4
3,9
3,3
3,6
3,2
2,7
7,4
6,3
5,2
7,0
5,9
4,9
5,1
4,4
3,5
14,0
11,9
9,6
12,7
10,6
8,5
8,0
7,0
5,7
75
72
69
66
63
59
50
47
43
124
118
110
119
111
102
100
92
81
144
136
127
138
130
120
114
105
94
201
188
172
199
184
165
181
162
142
222
209
194
210
195
180
181
166
148
262
245
226
252
230
206
227
206
179

Condies:
- Temp. de Sada da gua (12,5C)
Modelo
Velocidade
Alta
YGFC 04
Mdia
Baixa
Alta
YGFC 06
Mdia
Baixa
Alta
YGFC 08
Mdia
Baixa
Alta
YGFC 10
Mdia
Baixa
Alta
YGFC 12
Mdia
Baixa
Alta
YGFC 14
Mdia
Baixa
Presso
Esttica
(Pa)
Vazo de
Ar (m/h)
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
717
613
474
674
561
428
490
381
268
1111
999
854
1060
943
783
764
666
534
1368
1160
951
1315
1130
902
989
813
598
1677
1497
1245
1566
1389
1140
1160
1024
848
1970
1708
1401
1838
1581
1302
1318
1129
895
2327
2034
1678
2154
1846
1498
1528
1337
1083
Capacidade de
Resfriamento (kW)
Total
3,40
3,09
2,64
3,27
2,93
2,47
2,52
2,15
1,68
5,33
4,99
4,53
5,08
4,73
4,23
4,07
3,73
3,21
6,42
5,79
5,13
6,15
5,61
4,87
5,06
4,44
3,62
6,89
6,36
5,67
6,46
5,97
5,31
5,37
4,98
4,44
8,56
7,78
6,79
8,15
7,30
6,42
6,40
5,82
5,03
11,14
10,24
9,09
10,33
9,37
8,25
8,12
7,45
6,47
Sensvel
2,44
2,18
1,81
2,33
2,04
1,68
1,79
1,48
1,13
3,75
3,48
3,11
3,59
3,30
2,90
2,81
2,54
2,15
4,59
4,08
3,54
4,42
3,96
3,37
3,56
3,08
2,44
5,20
4,76
4,16
4,90
4,47
3,88
3,94
3,60
3,14
6,27
5,64
4,85
5,95
5,29
4,58
4,60
4,11
3,46
7,81
7,10
6,19
7,28
6,52
5,63
5,62
5,09
4,35
Temp. Sada do
ar (C)
BS
13,9
13,5
12,7
13,7
13,2
12,4
13,2
12,5
11,5
14,0
13,7
13,2
13,9
13,6
13,0
13,1
12,7
12,0
14,0
13,6
13,0
14,0
13,6
12,9
13,3
12,8
11,9
14,8
14,6
14,1
14,7
14,4
13,9
13,9
13,6
13,0
14,6
14,2
13,7
14,4
14,1
13,6
13,6
13,2
12,5
14,0
13,6
13,0
14,0
13,5
12,9
13,1
12,7
12,1
BU
13,0
12,7
12,0
12,9
12,5
11,8
12,6
12,0
11,2
13,0
12,7
12,4
13,0
12,7
12,3
12,3
12,0
11,5
13,1
12,7
12,3
13,1
12,8
12,3
12,6
12,2
11,5
13,8
13,6
13,3
13,7
13,5
13,1
13,2
12,9
12,5
13,5
13,2
12,9
13,4
13,2
12,8
12,9
12,5
12,0
13,0
12,7
12,2
13,0
12,6
12,1
12,4
12,1
11,6
Vazo de
gua
(m/h)
Perda de
Carga
(kPa)
Potncia
(W)
0,533
0,484
0,414
0,512
0,458
0,387
0,395
0,336
0,264
0,834
0,781
0,709
0,795
0,740
0,662
0,637
0,583
0,503
1,006
0,906
0,802
0,963
0,877
0,762
0,792
0,695
0,566
1,078
0,996
0,887
1,011
0,935
0,831
0,840
0,780
0,695
1,340
1,218
1,063
1,276
1,142
1,005
1,003
0,911
0,787
1,743
1,603
1,423
1,617
1,467
1,292
1,272
1,166
1,014
10,7
9,0
6,8
9,2
7,6
5,6
6,8
5,2
3,4
21,0
18,7
15,7
20,2
17,7
14,4
13,7
11,7
9,0
18,4
15,3
12,3
16,5
14,0
10,9
13,1
10,4
7,3
8,1
7,1
5,9
7,2
6,3
5,3
5,7
5,1
4,2
12,5
10,6
8,5
11,8
9,8
8,0
8,2
7,0
5,6
22,0
19,0
15,5
20,2
17,1
13,7
13,0
11,2
8,9
75
72
69
66
63
59
50
47
43
124
118
110
119
111
102
100
92
81
144
136
127
138
130
120
114
105
94
201
188
172
199
184
165
181
162
142
222
209
194
210
195
180
181
166
148
262
245
226
252
230
206
227
206
179

Condies:
- Temp. de Entrada do Ar (BS = 27C / BU = 19,5C)
Modelo
Velocidade
Alta
YGFC 04
Mdia
Baixa
Alta
YGFC 06
Mdia
Baixa
Alta
YGFC 08
Mdia
Baixa
Alta
YGFC 10
Mdia
Baixa
Alta
YGFC 12
Mdia
Baixa
Alta
YGFC 14
Mdia
Baixa
Presso
Esttica
(Pa)
Vazo de
Ar (m/h)
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
717
613
474
674
561
428
490
381
268
1111
999
854
1060
943
783
764
666
534
1368
1160
951
1315
1130
902
989
813
598
1497
1245
1566
1389
1140
1160
1024
848
1970
1708
1401
1838
1581
1302
1318
1129
895
2327
2034
1678
2154
1846
1498
1528
1337
1083
Capacidade de
Resfriamento (kW)
Total
3,40
3,12
2,70
3,29
2,96
2,52
2,57
2,18
1,72
5,42
5,08
4,63
5,17
4,82
4,32
4,16
3,85
3,37
6,54
5,91
5,26
6,26
5,72
5,02
5,18
4,62
3,80
6,34
5,71
6,41
5,99
5,37
5,42
5,07
4,47
8,39
7,69
6,84
7,97
7,29
6,50
6,47
5,92
5,17
11,40
10,42
9,29
10,51
9,55
8,44
8,30
7,69
6,77
Sensvel
2,67
2,39
1,99
2,56
2,24
1,84
1,97
1,62
1,23
4,13
3,82
3,42
3,96
3,64
3,19
3,10
2,81
2,39
5,07
4,49
3,90
4,89
4,38
3,72
3,94
3,42
2,71
5,25
4,60
5,40
4,95
4,29
4,35
3,98
3,44
6,84
6,16
5,33
6,48
5,80
5,04
5,06
4,53
3,82
8,63
7,80
6,80
8,03
7,17
6,18
6,19
5,62
4,81
Temp. Sada do
ar (C)
BS
15,9
15,4
14,5
15,7
15,1
14,3
15,1
14,4
13,4
16,0
15,6
15,1
15,9
15,6
14,9
15,0
14,5
13,7
16,0
15,5
14,8
16,0
15,5
14,8
15,2
14,5
13,6
16,6
16,0
16,8
16,4
15,8
15,9
15,5
15,0
16,7
16,3
15,7
16,5
16,1
15,5
15,6
15,1
14,3
16,0
15,6
15,0
15,9
15,5
14,8
15,0
14,5
13,8
BU
14,8
14,5
13,8
14,7
14,2
13,6
14,3
13,8
13,0
14,7
14,5
14,1
14,7
14,4
14,0
14,1
13,7
13,1
14,8
14,5
14,0
14,8
14,5
13,9
14,3
13,8
13,0
15,4
15,0
15,5
15,3
14,9
14,9
14,6
14,3
15,4
15,1
14,7
15,3
15,0
14,6
14,7
14,3
13,7
14,7
14,4
14,0
14,7
14,4
13,9
14,1
13,7
13,2
Vazo de
gua
(m/h)
Perda de
Carga
(kPa)
Potncia
(W)
0,293
0,269
0,233
0,283
0,255
0,217
0,222
0,187
0,148
0,467
0,437
0,398
0,445
0,415
0,372
0,358
0,331
0,290
0,563
0,508
0,453
0,539
0,493
0,432
0,446
0,398
0,328
0,546
0,492
0,552
0,516
0,463
0,467
0,437
0,385
0,722
0,662
0,589
0,686
0,628
0,559
0,557
0,510
0,445
0,981
0,897
0,799
0,905
0,822
0,727
0,715
0,662
0,583
3,8
3,3
2,6
3,3
2,8
2,1
2,5
1,9
1,3
7,4
6,6
5,6
7,1
6,3
5,2
4,9
4,3
3,4
6,6
5,6
4,6
6,0
5,1
4,1
4,8
4,0
2,9
2,8
2,4
2,8
2,5
2,2
2,3
2,1
1,8
4,6
4,0
3,3
4,3
3,8
3,2
3,3
2,8
2,3
8,3
7,2
5,9
7,6
6,5
5,3
5,0
4,4
3,6
75
72
69
66
63
59
50
47
43
124
118
110
119
111
102
100
92
81
144
136
127
138
130
120
114
105
94
188
172
199
184
165
181
162
142
222
209
194
210
195
180
181
166
148
262
245
226
252
230
206
227
206
179

Condies:
Modelo
Velocidade
Alta
YGFC 04
Mdia
Baixa
Alta
YGFC 06
Mdia
Baixa
Alta
YGFC 08
Mdia
Baixa
Alta
YGFC 10
Mdia
Baixa
Alta
YGFC 12
Mdia
Baixa
Alta
YGFC 14
Mdia
Baixa
Presso
Esttica
(Pa)
Vazo de
Ar (m/h)
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
717
613
474
674
561
428
490
381
268
1111
999
854
1060
943
783
764
666
534
1368
1160
951
1315
1130
902
989
813
598
1677
1497
1245
1566
1389
1140
1160
1024
848
1970
1708
1401
1838
1581
1302
1318
1129
895
2327
2034
1678
2154
1846
1498
1528
1337
1083
Capacidade de
Resfriamento (kW)
Total
4,22
3,84
3,28
4,06
3,63
3,07
3,13
2,67
2,09
6,63
6,21
5,64
6,32
5,89
5,27
5,07
4,64
4,00
7,99
7,21
6,37
7,65
6,98
6,05
6,30
5,53
4,51
8,53
7,88
7,04
8,00
7,41
6,58
6,66
6,18
5,52
10,67
9,64
8,42
10,13
9,05
7,97
7,95
7,23
6,25
13,86
12,75
11,33
12,85
11,67
10,29
10,13
9,27
8,06
Sensvel
2,98
2,66
2,21
2,84
2,50
2,06
2,18
1,81
1,38
4,58
4,25
3,81
4,39
4,04
3,55
3,45
3,11
2,64
5,61
4,99
4,33
5,41
4,85
4,12
4,36
3,76
2,99
6,34
5,81
5,09
5,97
5,47
4,74
4,81
4,40
3,84
7,67
6,88
5,93
7,27
6,46
5,59
5,62
5,02
4,24
9,55
8,68
7,58
8,90
7,98
6,89
6,88
6,23
5,32
Temp. Sada do
ar (C)
BS
14,7
14,1
13,1
14,5
13,8
12,8
13,8
12,9
11,7
14,7
14,4
13,8
14,7
14,3
13,6
13,6
13,1
12,3
14,8
14,2
13,5
14,8
14,3
13,5
13,9
13,3
12,2
15,8
15,5
14,9
15,7
15,3
14,7
14,7
14,3
13,6
15,4
15,0
14,4
15,3
14,9
14,3
14,3
13,8
13,0
14,8
14,3
13,6
14,7
14,2
13,3
13,6
13,2
12,4
BU
13,6
13,1
12,4
13,4
12,9
12,1
13,0
12,3
11,3
13,5
13,2
12,7
13,5
13,2
12,6
12,7
12,3
11,7
13,6
13,2
12,6
13,6
13,2
12,6
13,0
12,5
11,6
14,5
14,3
13,8
14,4
14,2
13,7
13,7
13,4
12,9
14,1
13,8
13,4
14,0
13,8
13,3
13,4
13,0
12,3
13,5
13,1
12,6
13,5
13,1
12,4
12,7
12,4
11,8
Vazo de
gua
(m/h)
Perda de
Carga
(kPa)
Potncia
(W)
0,519
0,472
0,404
0,499
0,447
0,378
0,385
0,329
0,258
0,815
0,764
0,694
0,778
0,724
0,648
0,624
0,570
0,492
0,983
0,887
0,784
0,941
0,859
0,744
0,775
0,680
0,554
1,049
0,970
0,865
0,984
0,912
0,810
0,819
0,760
0,679
1,312
1,186
1,036
1,246
1,113
0,980
0,978
0,890
0,769
1,705
1,568
1,393
1,581
1,435
1,265
1,246
1,140
0,991
10,2
8,6
6,6
8,8
7,3
5,4
6,5
5,0
3,3
20,2
18,0
15,1
19,4
17,0
13,9
13,3
11,3
8,6
17,7
14,7
11,8
15,9
13,5
10,5
12,6
10,0
7,0
7,7
6,8
5,7
6,9
6,1
5,1
5,5
4,9
4,1
12,1
10,2
8,2
11,4
9,4
7,7
7,9
6,8
5,4
21,2
18,3
15,0
19,4
16,5
13,3
12,6
10,8
8,6
75
72
69
66
63
59
50
47
43
124
118
110
119
111
102
100
92
81
144
136
127
138
130
120
114
105
94
201
188
172
199
184
165
181
162
142
222
209
194
210
195
180
181
166
148
262
245
226
252
230
206
227
206
179

Condies:
- Temp. de Sada da gua (12,5C)
Modelo
Velocidade
Alta
YGFC 04
Mdia
Baixa
Alta
YGFC 06
Mdia
Baixa
Alta
YGFC 08
Mdia
Baixa
Alta
YGFC 10
Mdia
Baixa
Alta
YGFC 12
Mdia
Baixa
Alta
YGFC 14
Mdia
Baixa
Presso
Esttica
(Pa)
Vazo de
Ar (m/h)
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
0
30
60
717
613
474
674
561
428
490
381
268
1111
999
854
1060
943
783
764
666
534
1368
1160
951
1315
1130
902
989
813
598
1677
1497
1245
1566
1389
1140
1160
1024
848
1970
1708
1401
1838
1581
1302
1318
1129
895
2327
2034
1678
2154
1846
1498
1528
1337
1083
Capacidade de
Resfriamento (kW)
Total
4,53
4,09
3,46
4,36
3,85
3,23
3,30
2,81
2,18
6,66
6,28
5,76
6,37
5,98
5,41
5,21
4,76
4,12
8,07
7,35
6,54
7,75
7,13
6,22
6,46
5,68
4,60
9,15
8,53
7,53
8,65
8,01
7,01
7,10
6,56
5,82
10,97
10,05
8,88
10,46
9,49
8,42
8,40
7,61
6,51
13,92
12,88
11,58
12,94
11,86
10,54
10,39
9,52
8,29
Sensvel
3,09
2,76
2,28
2,96
2,58
2,12
2,25
1,87
1,42
4,60
4,28
3,85
4,41
4,08
3,60
3,50
3,16
2,69
5,64
5,04
4,39
5,44
4,91
4,18
4,42
3,83
3,03
6,57
6,06
5,27
6,21
5,69
4,91
4,98
4,54
3,96
7,79
7,04
6,10
7,39
6,62
5,77
5,79
5,17
4,34
9,57
8,73
7,68
8,94
8,05
6,99
6,99
6,33
5,42
Temp. Sada do
ar (C)
BS
14,2
13,6
12,7
14,0
13,3
12,3
13,4
12,4
11,3
14,7
14,3
13,6
14,7
14,2
13,3
13,4
12,9
12,1
14,8
14,1
13,3
14,7
14,1
13,2
13,7
13,0
12,0
15,4
15,0
14,4
15,2
14,8
14,2
14,3
13,8
13,1
15,3
14,8
14,1
15,1
14,6
13,8
14,0
13,4
12,6
14,8
14,3
13,4
14,7
14,1
13,1
13,4
12,9
12,1
BU
13,1
12,7
11,9
12,9
12,4
11,6
12,6
11,8
10,9
13,5
13,1
12,6
13,4
13,1
12,4
12,5
12,1
11,4
13,6
13,1
12,4
13,6
13,1
12,4
12,8
12,3
11,4
14,1
13,8
13,4
14,0
13,7
13,3
13,3
13,0
12,4
13,9
13,6
13,1
13,8
13,4
12,9
13,0
12,6
12,0
13,5
13,1
12,4
13,4
13,0
12,2
12,5
12,1
11,5
Vazo de
gua
(m/h)
Perda de
Carga
(kPa)
Potncia
(W)
0,709
0,640
0,541
0,683
0,603
0,506
0,517
0,440
0,342
1,042
0,983
0,902
0,998
0,935
0,846
0,815
0,746
0,645
1,264
1,151
1,023
1,213
1,117
0,973
1,011
0,890
0,720
1,432
1,336
1,178
1,354
1,254
1,098
1,111
1,026
0,911
1,718
1,574
1,390
1,637
1,486
1,319
1,316
1,192
1,019
2,178
2,016
1,812
2,025
1,857
1,650
1,626
1,491
1,298
17,9
14,9
11,0
15,4
12,3
9,0
10,9
8,2
5,3
31,7
28,5
24,3
30,5
27,1
22,6
21,5
18,3
14,0
27,7
23,4
18,9
25,0
21,5
16,8
20,1
16,0
11,0
12,9
11,5
9,3
11,6
10,2
8,2
8,9
7,9
6,5
19,1
16,4
13,3
18,0
15,3
12,5
12,9
10,9
8,4
32,5
28,4
23,5
29,9
25,7
20,9
19,8
17,0
13,4
75
72
69
66
63
59
50
47
43
124
118
110
119
111
102
100
92
81
144
136
127
138
130
120
114
105
94
201
188
172
199
184
165
181
162
142
222
209
194
210
195
180
181
166
148
262
245
226
252
230
206
227
206
179
4 Dimenses
Modelo
Largura ( C )
Profund. (J)
Altura ( L )
Dimenso do Colarinho de
insuflamento
YGFC 04
685
715
693
1040
560
245
685 x 130
YGFC 06
905
935
913
1260
560
245
905 x 130
YGFC 08
1205
1235
1213
1560
560
245
1205 x 130
YGFC 10
1305
1335
1313
1660
560
245
1305 x 130
YGFC 12
1505
1535
1513
1860
560
245
1505 x 130
YGFC 14
1805
*Valores em milmetros
1835
1813
2160
560
245
1805 x 130
1. Para definir a posio da hidrulica, olhar para a descarga de Ar.

2. A unidade possui uma bandeja estendida com espao para conexo das vlvulas.
3. Retorno por trs do Plenum.
5 Diagrama Eltrico
Ateno: Conecte a fiao corretamente, caso contrrio, causar danos ao motor.

Notas: 1. Unidades Fan & Coils no podem ser controladas por uma nica chave
2. O Cabo de fora e o Cabo neutro no podem ser conectados erradamente
10
6 Acessrios Opcionais
Vlvula Motorizada
Tipo
Modelo Nmero
Tamanho
APC-VLV-2151V1
1/2"
APC-VLV-2201V1
3/4"
APC-VLV-3151V1
1/2"
APC-VLV-3201V1
3/4"
2 Vias
3 Vias
Kit Padro
Modelo Nmero
Termostato
APC-TMS2100DA-TRL
Controle Remoto
APC-TMS-RMT
Termostatos
Opcionais
Modelo
nmero
Somente
resfriamento
APC-TMS1000C
Resfriamento e
Aquecimento
APC-TMS1000D
7 Instalao
PROVIDNCIAS DE INSTALAO
Durante a fase de instalao, devem ser tomadas providncias
especficas nos seguintes itens:
TUBULAO
2. As instalaes tpicas envolvem a fiao e conexes eltricas da

fiao. A energia eltrica deve ser desligada ao executar toda a
atividade que envolva eletricidade. Verifique todo o equipamento
antes de energizar qualquer fonte de eletricidade.
A tubulao deve ser instalada de acordo com os cdigos de

aplicao. Toda a tubulao deve ser mantida to simples quanto
possvel, para diminuir a queda de presso. Consulte as
especificaes e desenhos dimensionais durante os estgios da
montagem.
3. Reveja o diagrama de fiao em cada unidade para a

informao da voltagem adequada e controle da aplicao. A
operao eltrica de cada unidade determinada pelos
componentes e pela fiao da unidade e pode variar de unidade
para unidade.
CUIDADO: Toda a tubulao externa do equipamento enviada

pela YORK deve ser limpos e retirados todos os resduos, antes
da conexo unidade Fan Coil.
4. Quando o ventilador est operando, diversos componentes

esto girando em velocidades elevadas.
ELTRICO
Toda a fiao deve estar de acordo com os cdigos e as normas
locais. Verifique os diagramas eltricos antes que as conexes
sejam feitas.
DUTOS
A instalao aceita prticas, de acordo com os cdigos de
montagem local aplicveis que devem ser utilizados.
Em instalaes tpicas podem ser usados tamanhos de dutos
indicados pelo tamanho da conexo da unidade Fan Coil YORK
que no se responsabiliza pelo mau uso do equipamento.
Instalaes originais, itens adicionais e/ou o comprimento dos
dutos a ser usado deve ser determinado por um profissional local.
SERVIO
Todo o equipamento mecnico requer a inspeo e/ou o servio
de manuteno periodicamente. A preparao do local, assim
como desobstrues de paredes, limpeza, etc, devem ser feitas
antes da instalao do equipamento.
MONTAGEM
A estrutura na qual o equipamento ser montado, deve ser
adequada para suportar os pesos encontrados. Os suportes de
montagem para o equipamento que ficar suspenso devem ser
corretamente colocados e do tipo adequado para garantir uma
instalao segura e durvel.
PRECAUES DE SEGURANA
A maioria dos procedimentos de instalao requer o treinamento
especfico para assegurar uma instalao apropriada, assim como
a segurana do instalador. Abaixo esto algumas das precaues
necessrias numa instalao tpica:
1. Use sempre o equipamento apropriado.
11
AVISO: No verifique sua operao tocando estes componentes

com nenhum objeto. Danifica o equipamento e pode causar
ferimento ao instalador!
5. As unidades devem ser instaladas niveladas para assegurar a
drenagem e a operao apropriadas.
6. As unidades devem ser montadas de modo que a gua
condensada flua para a conexo do dreno. Um dreno de excesso
pode ser requerido para proteger um eventual dreno primrio
entupido. A YORK no responsvel por exigncias locais.
7. Certifique-se que a rea do dreno esteja limpa de qualquer
resduo, antes de iniciar a operao.
8. As conexes do duto s unidades (onde aplicvel) no devem
exceder a presso esttica externa da unidade.
LOCAL
1. A estrutura deve ser adequada para suportar o peso de
operao do equipamento.
2. Os suportes de montagem (se aplicvel) devem ser feitos sob
medida e mantidos na estrutura para assegurar a sustentao
adequada.
3. A estrutura deve ser em nvel ou o nivelamento do equipamento
deve ser feito.
4. Muitos locais tm limitaes especiais quando o equipamento
colocado em determinadas reas. Verifique as exigncias locais
antes de instalar a unidade fan coil.
7 Instalao (cont.)
MONTAGEM DO EQUIPAMENTO
Assegure-se que a unidade esteja nivelada. Use calos se
necessrio para obter o nivelamento adequado. O condensado
fluir naturalmente para o dreno quando o equipamento estiver na
posio correta. Faa as conexes da tubulao e instale o
conjunto da vlvula como solicitado.
CONEXO DA TUBULAO
LADO DE HIDRULICA
Quando de frente para a sada de ar da parte frontal da unidade (ar
soprado em seu rosto), sua mo direita ser o lado da mo direita
da unidade e da sua mo esquerda, o lado da mo esquerda da
unidade.
CONEXES DO MESMO LADO (2 tubos)

Todas as conexes no mesmo lado da unidade. As conexes
eltricas e de controle, estaro no lado oposto das conexes de
tubulao.
A TUBULAO DETERMINA O LADO DA HIDRULICA

DA UNIDADE
- Conecte toda a tubulao de acordo com os padres aceitos para

montagem e observe todas as normas de instalao do sistema de
tubulao.
- De acordo com a concluso das conexes da tubulao, um teste
de presso do sistema obrigatrio. Repare todos os vazamentos
nas juntas soldadas, aperte delicadamente quaisquer parafusos de
vlvula vazando, e acessrios da tubulao, se necessrio. Note
que muitos componentes no esto projetados para manter o ar
pressurizado. Os sistemas Hidrnicos devem ser testados com
gua.
PURGA DA SERPENTINA
Esta fase do procedimento de instalao melhor executada sem o
fluxo da gua da bomba. A presso do sistema geralmente
adequada para executar esta funo. Feche a vlvula da linha de
retorno para desligar a gua. A maioria das serpentinas circuitada
como drenagem para uma a semi-drenagem; todo o ar preso na
serpentina subir. Isto pode demorar algum tempo. Cada serpentina
dentro da unidade tem o sangramento manual do ar.
Esta purga est localizada na parte superior do cabeote. A vlvula
projetada para liberar o ar preso na serpentina, girando a cabea
do parafuso localizado na parte dianteira da unidade. O parafuso
no tem que ser removido inteiramente e isto no recomendado.
Duas ou trs voltas so suficientes permitir a sada do ar.
Inicialmente, somente a gua localizada na vlvula da linha de
retorno poder ser liberada. Continue purgando por alguns minutos.
A sada da gua/mistura de ar direcionada para a serpentina e
dreno da gua. Quando um fluxo contnuo de gua obtido outra
vez, a ventilao est completa. Feche a purga e aperte-o
delicadamente at que o fluxo da gua pare. Os assentos de
vlvula neste dispositivo so macios bastante de modo que
somente um torque moderado seja requerido.
ISOLAO DA TUBULAO
Aps ter sido verificado que o sistema est livre de vazamento,
todas as linhas e vlvulas de controle devem ser isolados como
especificados nas plantas de instalao.
PRECAUES ELTRICAS
- Faa conexes eltricas por projeto, de acordo com o diagrama
eltrico.
- Todas as conexes eltricas devem estar do acordo com as
exigncias do cdigo local.
- A voltagem apropriada de alimentao da unidade mostrada na
placa de identificao da unidade.
PRECAUES DA TUBULAO
TUBULAO DA SERPENTINA
- Todas as serpentinas so divididas para a gua fria e a gua
quente. Se for utilizar gua quente, compare as temperaturas de
gua do sistema com o determinado na placa de identificao da
unidade.
- Compare o atual sistema de presso de operao, com o
determinado na placa de identificao da unidade.
- Toda a tubulao feita em campo, deve considerar espao
adequado para qualquer instalao eltrica que possa ser
requerida. O espaamento para isolar as linhas mais tarde, deve
ser considerado antes do trabalho ser comeado.
- Serpentinas so testadas com presso de 300 psi e a presso de
trabalho de 150psi, conexo tipo BSP
12
1. Toda montagem aceita prticas que podem ser aplicadas.

2. Esteja ciente de que a isolao interna da tubulao do duto
diminui a eficcia da rea aberta do duto.
3. A tubulao do duto deve ser fixada individualmente.
4. Remova o painel de acesso da serpentina e proteja os
componentes internos dos resduos e do metal durante o processo
de instalao.
5. Reveja a placa de identificao da unidade para toda a
informao adicional a respeito das limitaes da presso esttica.
6. Nas reas onde a vibrao e o som so incmodos, recomendase o uso de conexes flexveis no duto.
EXIGNCIAS DA TUBULAO DO DUTO

Todo duto de trabalho deve ter condies de prevenir a formao
de condensao.. A condensao pode se formar durante a
operao de resfriamento, mesmo quando o duto formado por
dimetros de encaixe diferentes, uma pea de conexo fornecida
em campo requerida.
8 Operao
VERIFICAO DE PARTIDA INICIAL
FILTROS
1. A voltagem(s) de alimentao est confirmada na placa de

identificao de dados.
2. A unidade est aterrada corretamente.
3. Com a energia desligada, o ventilador gira livre e
silenciosamente.
4. Foram testadas a presso da(s) serpentina(s), vlvulas e
tubulao(es) e isoladas como necessrio.
5. O ar foi retirado da serpentina e da tubulao.
6. Instale todos os filtros que possam ter sido removidos durante o
processo da instalao.
A resistncia do fluxo de ar do filtro aumentar com o acmulo da

poeira e o fluxo de ar, conseqentemente, ser reduzido. O filtro
deve ser mantido to limpo quanto possvel antes do start-up.
A freqncia atual de troca do filtro determinada pela
concentrao da poeira do ar.
AVISO - Sempre utilize culos de proteo. Quando FAN COIL

est em operao, alguns componentes esto girando em altas
velocidades. Danos pessoais podem ocorrer se tocar um destes
itens com algum objeto.
-Todos os painis eltricos e de servio de acesso devem ser
recolocados e fixados em seu lugar apropriado.
- Mantenha as reas ao redor da unidade de ferramentas,
equipamentos e resduos.
- Verifique a unidade inteira para certificar-se que ela esteja limpa.
INSPEO E LIMPEZA
Antes do start-up todos os componentes devem ser verificados
completamente. Para uma operao segura e permanente, este
equipamento requer limpeza constante. Freqentemente, aps a
instalao deste equipamento, outras atividades de construo
adicionais, ocorrem. Durante estas fases de construo, devem ser
tomados cuidados para proteger o equipamento de todo e qualquer
resduo. O revestimento interno dos modelos verticais
particularmente propenso a este perigo.
AVISO - A YORK NO D GARANTIA aos equipamentos
submetidos a mau uso, partculas de metal, poeira, fita adesiva,
pintura com spray, etc. podendo anular garantias e
responsabilidades quanto falha de equipamento, ferimento
pessoal e danos propriedade.
VENTILADOR
O ventilador deve ser inspecionado e limpo, em conjunto com a
manuteno do motor e dos rolamentos. importante manter o
ventilador limpo para evitar o desequilbrio e a vibrao.
MOTOR
Verifique a conexo para os terminais. Certifique-se que as
conexes foram feitas de acordo com o diagrama de fiao.
Certifique-se de que o motor gire no sentido correto.
SERPENTINA
A poeira acumulada nas superfcies de transferncia de calor
interfere no fluxo de ar e prejudica a transferncia de calor. A
serpentina deve ser mantida limpa por alguns dos mtodos listados
abaixo:
- Limpeza com o ar comprimido de baixa presso
- Lavar ou enxaguar com gua (um detergente aconselhvel para
superfcies gordurosas. Antes do start-up do sistema de gua e de
balanceamento, os sistemas de gua de quente/frio devem ser
nivelados para eliminar a sujeira e os restos que acumularam
durante a construo. Todas as vlvulas de servio da unidade
devem ser fechadas no momento da lavagem.
- Filtros devem ser instalados na tubulao principal para impedir
que este material entre para a unidade durante a operao normal.
CUIDADO: Certifique-se de que todas as vlvulas esto
posicionadas corretamente para o start-up.
13
PARTIDA ELTRICA
A placa de identificao da unidade lista as caractersticas eltricas
da unidade, tais como a tenso de alimentao, ventilador e
capacidade requerida do circuito. O diagrama de fiao da unidade
mostra toda a fiao da unidade e do campo eltrico. Sendo que
cada projeto pode ser diferente, o instalador deve se familiarizar
com o diagrama eltrico e placa de identificao na unidade,
ANTES de comear qualquer fiao.
Todas as conexes eltricas devem ser feitas de acordo com os
cdigos e normas locais.
BALANCEAMENTO DO SISTEMA DE GUA

NOTA - Antes de ter a instalao do sistema de gua
completamente balanceado, o rudo do fluxo da gua e, em alguns
casos, poder ocorrer abertura e o fechamento da vlvula com
desligamento. Estas aes so corrigidas aps o balanceamento
correto do sistema.
1. O sistema deve estar completo e todos os componentes devem
estar em condies de operao, antes de comear operaes
balanceamento do sistema de gua.
2. Um conhecimento completo do sistema da gua e de seus
componentes essencial para o balanceamento apropriado do
sistema de gua. Este procedimento deve somente ser executado
pelo pessoal de servio qualificado. Todos os aspectos do sistema
e seus componentes devem estar em condio de operao, antes
de comear este processo.
3. O sistema de balanceamento da gua envolve ajuste do fluxo de
gua, pela diferena da temperatura entre a tubulao de entrada e
retorno, ou medindo a queda de presso da serpentina.
4. Cada sistema hidrnico tem diferentes caractersticas de
operao, dependendo dos dispositivos e controles no sistema. A
atual tcnica de balanceamento pode variar de um sistema para
outro.
5. Muitas unidades so equipadas com as vlvulas de
balanceamento para controlar o fluxo da gua na unidade e para
balancear a unidade com o sistema inteiro. A combinao entre a
vlvula de parada/balanceamento ajustada manualmente,
Quando a alavanca estiver paralela tubulao, a vlvula est
aberta. Quando a alavanca estiver perpendicular tubulao, a
vlvula estar fechada.
6. Verifique os projetos do sistema para a taxa de fluxo ou
diferenas de temperatura. Esta informao a base para
balanceamento.
BALANCEAMENTO DO SISTEMA DE AR
A parte do sistema de ar tem muitas das mesmas caractersticas
que o sistema da gua. Balanceamento de ar envolve o sistema de
dutos. Cada unidade individual um sistema de ar individual.
Balanceamento de ar deve somente ser executado por pessoas
treinadas.
9 Manuteno
DRENO DA TUBULAO
SUBSTITUIO DE PEAS
O dreno deve sempre ser:

Conectado ou conduzido a um ponto aceitvel de disposio
Inclinado distante da unidade, pelo menos 1/8 de polegada por p.
Verificado antes da operao do vero comea.
A inspeo peridica deve ser feita durante a operao do vero.
NOTA: Um filtro pode ser requerido por cdigos locais e/ou para
controle do odor.
As peas de reposio so originais de fbrica.

A compra de peas de reposio pode ser feita diretamente na
YORK.
Qualquer modificao no autorizada pela YORK pode resultar em
ferimento ao instalador e danos unidade e pode anular todas as
garantias de fbrica.
Ao requisitar as peas, as seguintes informaes devem ser
fornecidas para assegurar a identificao exata:
1. Nmero completo do modelo da unidade
2. Nmero de srie da unidade
3. Mo da unidade (direito ou esquerdo)
4. A descrio completa
10 Guia de especificao
GABINETE
- As caractersticas dimensionais e de capacidades, devero
constar na planilha de selecionamento de cada equipamento.
- A serpentina dever possuir um suporte nico metlico nas

conexes de entrada e sada de gua, com a funo de evitar
danos serpentina no momento da unio das conexes a hidrulica
do sistema.
- Painis construdos em chapa de ao galvanizado.

- As unidades do tipo embutida devem possuir um flange metlico
para conexo ao duto de distribuio de ar.
- As unidades devem possuir uma defletora metlica, localizada no
insuflamento da unidade, com a funo de evitar qualquer arraste
de gua ao sistema de distribuio de ar.
SERPENTINA
- Serpentina com aletas de alumnio e tubos de cobre com
dimetro de 3/8 externo, dever possuir 3 filas de resfriamento
e/ou 3+1 filas sendo de resfriamento e aquecimento simultneo, de
alta eficincia.
VENTILADOR E MOTOR
- O ventilador dever ser do tipo centrfugo de dupla aspirao com
ps curvadas para frente, acionamento direto, do tipo sirocco de
baixa ou alta presso esttica (conforme indicado no clculo de
selecionamento do equipamento).
- O rotor do ventilador dever ser fabricado em alumnio, evitando o
problema de deformao causado pela ao do tempo, tpico
problema de equipamentos com rotores de plstico.
- O mancal dever ser do tipo esfera com auto-lubrificao
permanentemente.
- A Serpentina dever ser testada a uma presso de 2420 kPa e

no ser submetida a uma presso de trabalho superior a 1600 kPa.
- Motor eltrico dever possuir trs velocidades, com proteo de

sobrecarga interna, reset do tipo automtico.
- O nmero de aletas dever compreender um espaamento

mnimo de 2,3 mm e espessura da aleta de alumnio mnimo de
0,115 mm.
- O motor dever ser fabricado com Classe de isolamento E e grau

de proteo IP20.
- Conexes de entrada e sada de gua devero ser fabricados em

lato, BSP e podem ser a direita ou a esquerda da unidade
(conforme pedido).
- O motor dever possuir capacitor permanente bi-partido,

rolamentos auto-lubrificantes. O eixo central do motor dever
possuir tratamento trmico e anticorrosivo.
- Alimentao do equipamento dever ser em 220 V / 1 / 60 HZ.
- Bandeja de dreno dever ser fabricada em ao galvanizado com

tratamento anti-corrosivo, isoladas termicamente na face inferior
em polietileno expandido com material de acordo com a B5476
parte 6 e 7 classe 1. Dreno com dimetro de localizado na
lateral do equipamento com o caimento necessrio para total
escoamento do condensado.
- A bandeja de dreno dever ser padro j extendida para
recolhimento de gua condensada proveniente das vlvulas de
controle de vazo.
14
- A presso esttica disponvel mxima dever ser de no mnimo 30

kPa na vazo mxima.
FILTROS DE AR
- Os filtros de ar devero ser do tipo manta de Fibra sinttica,
fabricados com moldura de papel com Eficincia Gravimtrica
mnimia de 90% conforme a ABNT NBR 16401 Classe G1.
11 Certificado de Garantia
15
11 Certificado de Garantia (cont.)
16

Esta unidade contm peas em movimento e componentes eltricos que podem constituir um perigo e causar danos fsicos!
1) Interromper todas as fontes de alimentao eltrica dos equipamentos, assim como aquelas dos sistemas conectados
com os mesmos. Certificar-se de que todos os dispositivos de interrupo eltrica se encontrem na posio aberta. Os cabos
de alimentao podem ento ser desmontados e retirados. Para saber onde se encontram os pontos de conexo da unidade,
consultar a documentao tcnica.
2) Em regra geral, as unidades devero ser desmontadas e retiradas de uma s pea. Retirar os eventuais pontos de
fixao e levantar depois os elementos com um equipamento de manipulao de uma capacidade de carga apropriada.
Consultar as informaes da documentao tcnica no que se refere ao peso.
R. Tomazina, 125 Quadra 10 Cond. Portal da Serra

Fone: (41) 2169-3300 Fax (41) 2169-3410
CEP: 83325-040 Pinhais PR
FORM: F-TEC006-BR (05-09)

Substitui: F-TEC006-BR (01-06)
R. Joo Tibiri, 900 Vila Anastcio

Fone: (11) 3475-6700 Fax: (11) 3641 4951
CEP: 05077-000 So Paulo SP
0800 283 9675

O fabricante se reserva no direito de proceder a qualquer modificao sem prvio aviso
17
SISTEMAS HVAC
FAN & COIL AUTENTIC G1

Srie YGFC MDE
Nova Verso com Filtro G1 (ABNT NBR 16401)
Vazo de Ar mxima de 732 a 2399 m/h

Capacidade de 0,6 a 3,1 TR
Serpentina com 3 rows
Baixo nvel de rudo
Aplicaes em seguimentos Comerciais (Hotis, Hospitais, Indstrias)
FAN & COIL AUTENTIC G1 - Srie YGFC MDE
3 Filas - Padro
YGFC Modelo
Vazo
de Ar
(m/h)
04
06
08
10
12
14
732
1133
1415
1714
2037
2399
Capacidade de
Resfriamento
(kW)
Total Sensvel
4,55
6,65
8,07
9,20
10,97
14,00
3,27
4,84
5,99
6,97
8,27
10,17
Vazo de
gua
(m/h)
Perda
de
Carga
(kPa)
Potncia
do Motor
(W)
Corrente
(A)
Nvel de
Rudo
(dB)
Peso
(kg)
0,78
1,15
1,39
1,58
1,89
2,41
21,50
37,70
32,90
15,30
22,50
39,00
75
125
146
204
226
266
0,31
0,56
0,68
0,92
1,09
1,23
41,80
47,90
46,40
50,00
50,80
51,60
23,40
27,40
38,70
40,30
45,80
56,50
1 As informaes da tabela acima foram obtidas para a vazo mxima de Ar;

2 Temperatura de entrada do Ar TBS=27C e TBU=19C;
3 Temperatura de entrada de gua 7,0C com um 5 C.
Tipo de Ventilador
Centrfugo com as ps para frente
Tipo do Motor
Monofsico 220V/60Hz
Diametro da Tubulao de
entrada e sada da agua
3/4"
Mxima Presso de Trabalho
1,6MPa
Diametro do Dreno
3/4"
1 - Para definir a posio da hidrulica, olhar para a descarga de ar

2 - O YGFC j vem com plenum de retorno, podendo ser alterado
conforme instalao (para trs)
3 - O YGFC vem com bandeja estendida em ao tratato e pintado com
anti-corrosivo, isolada em baixo com elastmero de clula fechada
4 - Motores com classe de isolamento E e IP20
Modelo
Largura
Profund.
Altura
Dimenso do Colarinho de
insuflamento
02
840
560
245
485 x 130
04
1040
560
245
685 x 130
06
1260
560
245
905 x 130
08
1560
560
245
1205 x 130
10
1660
560
245
1305 x 130
12
1860
560
245
1505 x 130
14
2160
560
245
1805 x 130
* Valores em milmetros
Vlvula Motorizada
Tipo
Modelo Nmero
Kit Padro
Tamanho
APC-VLV-2151V1
1/2"
2 Vias
3 Vias
APC-VLV-2201V1
3/4"
APC-VLV-3151V1
1/2"
APC-VLV-3201V1
3/4"
R. Tomazina, 125 Quadra 10 Cond. Portal da Serra

Fone: (41) 2169-3300 Fax (41) 2169-3410
CEP: 83325-040 Pinhais PR
Modelo Numero
Termostato
APC-TMS2100DA-TRL
Controle Remoto
APC-TMS-RMT
FORM: B-COM006-BR (0509)

Substitui: FORM: B-COM006-BR (1005)
R. Joo Tibiri, 900 Vila Anastcio

Fone: (11) 3475-6700 Fax: (11) 3641 4951
CEP: 05077-000 So Paulo SP
0800 283 9675
O fabricante se reserva no direito de proceder a qualquer modificao sem prvio aviso
Termostato
Opcionais
Modelo
numero
Somente
resfriamento
APC-TMS1000C
Resfriamento e
Aquecimento
APC-TMS1000D
YGFC Autentic
Gabinete
As caractersticas dimensionais e de capacidades, devero constar na

planilha de selecionamento de cada equipamento.
Painis construdos em chapa de ao galvanizado.
As unidades do tipo embutida devem possuir um flange metlico para
conexo ao duto de distribuio de ar.
As unidades devem possuir uma defletora metlica, localizada no
insuflamento da unidade, com a funo de evitar qualquer arraste de
gua ao sistema de distribuio de ar.
Serpentina
Serpentina com aletas de alumnio e tubos de cobre com dimetro de 3/8

externo, dever possuir 3 filas de resfriamento e/ou 3+1 filas sendo de
resfriamento e aquecimento simultneo, de alta eficincia.
A Serpentina dever ser testada a uma presso de 2420 kPa e no ser
submetida a uma presso de trabalho superior a 1600 kPa.
O nmero de aletas dever compreender um espaamento mnimo de 2,3
mm e espessura da aleta de alumnio mnimo de 0,115 mm.
Conexes de entrada e sada de gua devero ser fabricados em lato,
BSP e podem ser a direita ou a esquerda da unidade (conforme
pedido).
Bandeja de dreno dever ser fabricada em ao galvanizado com
tratamento anti-corrosivo, isoladas termicamente na face inferior em
polietileno expandido com material de acordo com a B5476 parte 6 e 7
classe 1. Dreno com dimetro de localizado na lateral do equipamento
com o caimento necessrio para total escoamento do condensado.
A bandeja de dreno dever ser padro j extendida para recolhimento de
gua condensada proveniente das vlvulas de controle de vazo.
A serpentina dever possuir um suporte nico metlico nas conexes de
entrada e sada de gua, com a funo de evitar danos serpentina no
momento da unio das conexes a hidrulica do sistema.
Ventilador e motor
O ventilador dever ser do tipo centrfugo de dupla aspirao com ps

curvadas para frente, acionamento direto, do tipo sirocco de baixa ou alta
presso esttica (conforme indicado no clculo de selecionamento do
equipamento).
O rotor do ventilador dever ser fabricado em alumnio, evitando o
problema de deformao causado pela ao do tempo, tpico problema
de equipamentos com rotores de plstico.
O mancal dever ser do tipo esfera com auto-lubrificao
permanentemente.
Motor eltrico dever possuir trs velocidades, com proteo de
sobrecarga interna, reset do tipo automtico.
O motor dever ser fabricado com Classe de isolamento E e grau de

proteo IP20.
O motor dever possuir capacitor permanente bi-partido, rolamentos autolubrificantes. O eixo central do motor dever possuir tratamento trmico e
anticorrosivo.
Alimentao do equipamento dever ser em 220 V / 1 / 60 HZ.
A presso esttica disponvel mxima dever ser de no mnimo 30 kPa na
vazo mxima.
Filtros de ar
Os filtros de ar devero ser do tipo manta de Fibra sinttica, fabricados
com moldura de papel com Eficincia Gravimtrica mnimia de 90%

conforme a ABNT NBR 16401 Classe G4.

dpt2015s
whole
1922485
9thcc:2-139
Electric
Transducers
DPT-2015 Series
Differential Pressure Transmitter for VAV Box Applications

dpt2015.tif
(See the M9104-AGx-2N Electric Non-spring

Return Product Bulletin, LIT-2681117 or the
M9106-AGx-2N0x Series Electric Non-spring
Return Actuators Product Bulletin,
LIT-2681126 and the Variable Air Volume
Controller Technical Bulletin, LIT-6363040 for
more information on these products.)
Features
DPT-2015
Description
The DPT-2015 Differential Pressure
Transmitter senses differential pressure in
pressure independent Variable Air Volume
(VAV) applications. It sends an analog signal
that is proportional to velocity pressure to a
VAV controller. The DPT-2015 is avalable
mounted to an M9104 or M9106 Electric
Non-spring Return Actuator, or to the Johnson
Controls VAV controller for reliable damper
positioning in closed-loop applications.
The DPT-2015 may also be mounted alone as
an independent pressure transmitter or used
for damper positioning in other VAV systems.
integral pressure transmitter with

dead-ended input ports eliminates inline
filter and maintenance and prevents sensor
contamination
0 to 1.5 in. W.C. sensor range satisfies the
requirements for virtually all terminal box
applications
0.5 to 4.5 VDC output is compatible with a
wide variety of HVAC controllers
no warmup period allows for immediate
commissioning after powering up
capacitive sensor technology provides
long-term stability and accuracy
4 VDC output span replaces DPT-2000-2
when used as recommended
Accessories
Code Number
Applications
The DPT-2015 is used to measure differential
pressure to determine the air velocity for
calculating airflow. It measures differential
pressure and generates a proportional
voltage signal. The voltage signal from the
DPT-2015 is read by the VAV controller and
converted to airflow in cubic feet per minute
(cfm). The DPT-2015 is available factory
mounted to an M9104 or M9106 actuator, or
factory mounted to a Johnson Controls
VAV controller as an AS-VAVDPT.
Calibration is not required other than zero
calibration, which is performed within the
controller.
For more information, refer to the DPT-2015
Series Differential Pressure Transmitter for
VAV Box Applications Product Bulletin,
LIT-216200X, or the DPT-2015 Series
Differential Pressure Transmitter for VAV Box
Applications Installation Instructions,
Part No. 24-7547-18.
Repair Parts
Replace the unit.
To Order
Description

selection chart.
CBL-2000-1
20 in. (0.5 m) wiring harness, accepted by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) for
plenum use, is included with the M9104-AGS-2N or M9106-AGS-2N02 and may be
ordered separatedly; connects the DPT-2015 and actuator to the VAV controller.
CBL-2000-2
20 in. (0.5 m) plenum rated wiring harness connects the DPT-2015 and M9104-AGS-2N
or M9106-AGS-2N02 to the VAV controller.
CBL-2000-3
72 in. (1.8 m) plenum rated wiring harness connects the DPT-2015 and M9104-AGS-2N
or M9106-AGS-2N02 to the VAV controller.
DPT-2015-0
0 to 1.5 in. W.C. (0 to 374 Pa)

differential pressure transmitter
DPT-2015-MNT
Mounting kit for DPT-2015 used to replace the DPT-2000 or retrofit to the EDA-2040
without mounting bosses (date code prior to 9540)
DPT-2015-1
DPT-2015-0 with
DPT-2015-MNT Mounting Kit
DPT-2015 Differential Pressure Transmitter for VAV Box Applications

Power Requirements
15 VDC (14.5 to 17 VDC) unregulated; 15 mA maximum
Pressure Range
0 to 1.5 in. W.C. (0 to 374 Pa) maximum
Overpressure Limit
15 in. W.C.(3.74 kPa)
Output Voltage
Replace the unit.
1922485 dpt-dms.eps
0.5 to 4.5 VDC into load impedance of 25,000 ohms minimum

Repeatability/Hysterisis 0.05% full span maximum
Zero Shift 0.1 VDC maximum
Span Shift 0.05 VDC maximum
Stability
(One Year)
Span Shift 2% full span
Power
Supply
Effects (a)
Description
Linearity 1.0% full span maximum
Position
Effects
Temperature
Effects
Code Number
Repair Parts
Specifications
Accuracy
Selection Chart
Zero Shift 0.5% full span
Zero Shift
0.06% of full span per F maximum over 60 to 120F

(15.6 to 49.0C) range
Span Shift
1.5% of full span maximum over 60 to 120F

(15.6 to 49.0C) range
Zero Shift 0.01 VDC maximum

Span Shift +0.02, -0.04 VDC maximum
1/2
Rev:
05/15/01
logo:
JCI
left ft:
elec
right ft:
standard
Sect# = 2
seQ# = 317

DPT-2015 Series Differential Pressure Transmitter for VAV Box Applications

(Continued)
Specifications (Continued)
Terminals
1/4 in. male spade terminals with 8 in. (203 mm) wire length
Pressure Connections
6 in. (152 mm) length of silicone tubing with barbed fittings for
1/4 in. (6.35 mm) O.D. tubing
Ambient Operating Conditions
32 to 140F (0 to 60C); 90% RH maximum, non-condensing
1.00 x 2.71 x 2.5 in. (254 x 68.8 x 63.5 mm)
Agency Compliance
UL 916 Listed , File 107041, CCN PAZX

CSA C22.2, No. 205 Certified, File LR68965, Class 4812 05
(a) For power supply changes of 14.5 to 17.1 VDC, referenced to 15.0 VDC.
2/2
Commercial Refrigeration
The European Product Catalogue 2007

Description
Pressure Transducers
The P499 Series is a new global Pressure Transducer

with an excellent price performance ratio.
The P499 exceeds the latest industrial CE/UL
requirements including surge protection, and is over
voltage protected in both positive and reverse polarity.
The P499 is designed to produce a linear analogue signal
based on the sensed pressure.
The pressure port is machined from a solid piece
of 17-4PH stainless steel. There are no O-rings or welds
that are exposed to the pressure media.
This results in a leak proof ,all metal sealed pressure
system which withstand more than 10 million pressure
cycles without failure.
P499 Heavy Duty Pressure Transducer
Features
Single-piece machined steel pressure port
Environmentally Sealed Electronics
Reliable, Repeatable Performance and
Long Operating Life
Slender Body Design
Available in several pressure ranges up to 50 bar.
P499
Heavy Duty Pressure Transducer
Shielded cable Female

Dimensions in mm (inches)
Hirchman Female
Packard Female
2M cable Connections Models - Selection Table

Range (bar)
Output
Supply (DC)
-1 to 8
0 to 30
-1 to 8
0 to 30
Maximum (short) overpressure:

Range -1 to 8 bar: 16 bar
Range 0 to 30 bar: 60 bar
Range 0 to 50 bar: 100 bar
4.75 V - 5.25 V
Female
-1 to 8
-1 to 8
P499-ACS-401C
Male
0 to 30
0 to 30
P499-ABS-404C
Female
DC 0.5 V - 4.5 V
Can be used with all media which are

compatible with stainless steel type 17-4PH
Accuracy:
+/- 0.25% FS BFSL
Total Error: +/- 1%
FS
Male
DC 0 V - 10 V
Ordering Codes
P499-ABS-401C
9 V - 32 V
-1 to 8
-1 to 8
Additional Features
Male
0.4 to 20 mA
0 to 30
0 to 30
Press. Connection
P499-ACS-404C
P499-RBS-401C
P499-RBS-404C
P499-RCS-401C
P499-RCS-404C
P499-VBS-401C
P499-VBS-404C
12 V - 30 V
P499-VCS-401C
Female
P499-VCS-404C
- Page 237 For further information and additional models see Product Installation Guide | Order Code: EPM-019-CAT-EN
Electronic Control Devices
The European Product Catalogue 2007

Description
Plant Sensors
The PS-9101 Differential pressure is designed to

measure the difference between two sensed pressures to
produce 010 V DC proportional output.
The differential pressure, as sensed by the sensing ports,
is applied to both sides of a mass air flow sensor, directed
across the surface of the sensing element.
The output voltage varies in proportion to the differential
temperature of sensing elements, as a consequence of
increasing/decreasing the mass air flow through the inlet
and outlet ports caused by sensed differential pressure.
PS-9101 Differential Pressure Transducers
Features
PS-9101-800x
(IP20)
Model available in 3 differential pressure ranges

Models for DIN Rail mounting
Models with splash proof dust tight case
Fast response (< 50 ms)
PS-9101-850x
(IP54)
Selection Table
Maximum
overload pressure
Operating Range
Enclosure
Supply voltage
Ordering Codes
0750 Pa
IP20
PS-9101-8001
0330 Pa
IP20
PS-9101-8002
0130 Pa
34.5 kPa
0750 Pa
IP20
IP54
15 VDC +/- 10%

24 VAC +10%; -15 %
PS-9101-8003
PS-9101-8501
0330 Pa
IP54
PS-9101-8502
0130 Pa
IP54
PS-9101-8503
Accessories (order separately)

Description
Ordering Codes
Inline Air Filter (required for all models)
A-4000-8001
Romote probe kit
FT-G18A-8001
DIN rail mounting kit
PS-9101-8900
- Page 75 For further information and additional models see Product Installation Guide | Order Code: EPM-019-CAT-EN
Product Bulletin
Issue Date
DPT-2015
08/31/01
DPT-2015 Differential Pressure Transmitter for

VAV Box Applications
The DPT-2015 Differential Pressure Transmitter
senses differential pressure in pressure independent
Variable Air Volume (VAV) applications. It sends an
analog signal that is proportional to velocity pressure to
a VAV controller. The DPT-2015 is available mounted
to an M9104 or M9106 Electric Non-spring Return
Actuator or to the Johnson Controls VAV controller for
reliable damper positioning in closed-loop applications.
The DPT-2015 may also be mounted alone as an
independent pressure transmitter or used for damper
positioning in other VAV systems. (See the
M9104-AGx-2N Electric Non-spring Return Actuators
Product Bulletin [LIT-2681121] or the M9106-Agx-2N0x
Series Electric Non-spring Return Actuators Product
Bulletin [LIT-2681126] and the Variable Air Volume
[VAV] Controller Technical Bulletin [LIT-6363040] for
more information on these products.)
Figure 1: DPT-2015 Differential

Pressure Transmitter

Integral Pressure
Transmitter with Dead
Ended Input Ports
Eliminates an inline filter and maintenance;

prevents sensor contamination
0 to 1.5 in. Water Column

(W.C.) Input Pressure
Range
Satisfies the requirements for virtually all

terminal box applications
0.5 to 4.5 VDC Output
Provides compatibility with a wide variety of

(HVAC) controllers
No Warmup Period
Allows for immediate commissioning after

power up
Capacitive Sensor
Technology
Provides long-term stability and accuracy
4 VDC Output Span
Replaces DPT-2000-2 when used as

recommended

Code No. LIT-216200X
1
Product Overview
The DPT-2015 is connected to the VAV box airflow
pickups. The DPT-2015 measures differential pressure
and generates a proportional voltage signal. The
voltage signal from the DPT-2015 is read by the VAV
controller and converted to airflow in cubic feet per
minute (cfm). Calibration is not required other than
zero calibration, which is performed within the
controller.
Application
DP
O
G UT
N
IN D
D
PT
-2
01
5
(-)
LO
The DPT-2015 is used to measure differential pressure

to determine the air velocity for calculating airflow. The
DPT-2015 is available factory mounted to an M9104 or
M9106 actuator or factory mounted to a
Johnson Controls VAV controller as an AS-VAVDPT.
Figure 2 shows the DPT-2015 field mounted to a
M9104 or M9106 actuator. It may also be mounted
separately as shown in Figure 3.
(-) LO
Airflow
Figure 3: Typical Standalone Installation

The DPT-2015 may be used with the Johnson Controls
VAV controller (as shown in Figure 4) or any other
controller capable of the following:
controller provided or external power supply of

15 VDC for input power to the DPT-2015
25,000 ohm minimum input impedance to accept

input of 0.5 to 4.5 VDC from the output of the
DPT-2015
Note: For best results, select a controller with

auto zero capability.
H
T
G
CCW COM
CW
DPT-2015
Figure 2: DPT-2015 Mounted on an M9104 or

M9106 Actuator
015
T- 2
M9104 VA
1
or
M9106
VAV
Controller
TE1
Figure 4: DPT-2015 Typical Applications
DPT-2015 Differential Pressure Transmitter for VAV Box Applications Product Bulletin
Dimensions
See Figure 5 for transmitter dimensions.
Field repairs must not be made. For a replacement or

an accessory, refer to the Ordering Information
section.
0.60
15.0
0.15 Diameter
3.8
1.25
31.7
1.85 2.20
46.9 55.9
1.25
31.7
Insulated
Male
Spade
Terminals (3)
0.25
6.35
Table 1 or 2.
Table 1: Transmitters
Product Code
Number
0.15
3.8
1.10
27.9
DPT-2015-0
0 to 1.5 in. W.C. (0 to 374 Pa)

differential pressure transmitter
DPT-2015-1
DPT-2015-0 with the DPT-2015-MNT

Mounting Kit
1.00
25.4
Wire Leads (3)
8.0
203.0
1/4 in.
Tubing
6.0
152.4
Description
1/4 in. Barbed

Ports (2)
0.25
6.35
Figure 5: DPT-2015 Dimensions, in. (mm)

Table 2: Products Available
Product Code
Number
Description
CBL-2000-1
20 in. (0.5 m) wiring harness, accepted by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) for plenum
use, is included with the M9104-AGS-2N or M9106-AGX-2N02 and may be ordered separately;
connects the DPT-2015 and actuator to the VAV controller.
CBL-2000-2
20 in. (0.5 m) plenum rated wiring harness connects the DPT-2015 and M9104-AGS-2N or
M9106-AGS-2N02 to the VAV controller.
CBL-2000-3
72 in. (1.8 m) plenum rated wiring harness connects the DPT-2015 and M9104-AGS-2N or
M9106-AGS-2N02 to the VAV controller.
DPT-2015-MNT
Mounting kit for DPT-2015 used to replace the DPT-2000 or retrofit to the EDA-2040 without
mounting bosses (date code prior to 9540).
Technical Data
Product
Power Requirements
Pressure Range
Overpressure Limit
Output Voltage
Accuracy Linearity

15 VDC (14.5 to 17 VDC) unregulated; 15 mA maximum
0 to 1.5 in. W.C. (0 to 374 Pa) maximum
15 in. W.C. (3.74 kPa)
0.5 to 4.5 VDC into load impedance of 25,000 ohms minimum
Linearity:
1.0% full span maximum
Repeatability/Hysteresis: 0.05% full span maximum
Position Effects
Zero Shift:
Span Shift:
0.1 VDC maximum

0.05 VDC maximum
Stability (One Year)
Zero Shift:
Span Shift:
0.5% full span

2% full span
Temperature Effects
Power Supply Effects
Terminals
Zero:
Span:
0.06% of full span per F maximum over 60 to 120F (15.6 to 49.0C) range
1.5% of full span maximum over 60 to 120F (15.6 to 49.0C) range
For power supply changes of 14.5 to 17.1 VDC, referenced to 15.0 VDC
Zero Shift:
0.01 VDC maximum
Span Shift:
+0.02, -0.04 VDC maximum
1/4 in. male spade terminals with 8 in. (203 mm) wire length
6 in. (152 mm) length of silicone tubing with barbed fittings for 1/4 in. (6.35 mm) O.D. tubing
Ambient Operating
Conditions
32 to 140F (0 to 60C)
90% RH maximum, non-condensing
Ambient Storage
Conditions
-22 to 185F (-30 to 85C)

90% RH maximum, non-condensing
Shipping Weight
Agency Compliance
1.00 x 2.71 x 2.5 in. (25.4 x 68.8 x 63.5 mm)

2.5 oz. (0.07 kg)
UL 916 Listed, File E107041, CCN PAZX
CSA C22.2, No. 205 Certified, File LR68965, Class 4812 05
Controls Group
P.O. Box 423
Milwaukee, WI 53201
Printed in U.S.A.
P499 Heavy Duty Pressure Transducer

Product Bulletin
Code No. EPM-001-PB EN Rev. A

Issued 07 2007
The P499 Series is a new global Pressure

Transducer with an excellent price performance
ratio. The P499 exceeds the latest industrial CE/UL
requirements including surge protection, and is over
voltage protected in both positive and reverse
polarity.
The P499 is designed to produce a linear analogue
signal based on the sensed pressure.
The pressure port is machined from a solid piece of
17-4PH stainless steel. There are no O-rings or
welds that are exposed to the pressure media.
This results in a leak proof ,all metal sealed pressure
system which withstand more than 10 million
pressure cycles without failure.
Figure 1: P499 with Female / Male Pressure port

Features
Benefits
Single-piece machined steel pressure

port
Provides a durable assembly, eliminates potential of refrigerant loss due

to O-ring failures
Environmentally Sealed Electronics
Withstands the effects of adverse conditions found in typical equipment

rooms
Reliable, Repeatable Performance and

Long Operating Life
Minimizes service & replacement costs
Available in Several Pressure Ranges
Provides a single line of transmitters for all refrigeration and air

conditioning application needs
Slender Body Design
Space requirements minimal
CE and UL Agency listing
Allow for global applications
P499 Heavy Duty Pressure Transducer Product Bulletin
Application
Repair and replacement
The P499 is intended for use in:

HVAC/R systems
Automotive test stands
Gas compressors
Industrial process control
Pumps & compressors
Hydraulic/pneaumatic systems
Agricultural equipment
Energy & water managemen
P499 Electronic Pressure Transducers are sealed

units, on site repair is not possible. Defective units
should be returned to the factory.
WARNING
P499 Electronic Pressure Transducers
are intended for use in conjunction with
operating controls under normal
operating conditions. Where failure or
malfunction of the P499 Electronic
Pressure Transducers could lead to an
abnormal operating condition that could
cause personal injury or damage to the
equipment or other property, other
devices (limit or safety controls) or
systems (alarm or supervisory
systems) intended to warn of or protect
against failure or malfunction of the
P499 Electronic Pressure Transducers
must be incorporated into and
system.
For replacement please contact your supplier.
Fitting
IMPORTANT: Mount the pressure control
upright. Pressure tap points must be located on
the topside of the refrigerant lines. This reduces
the possibility of oil, liquids, or sediment
accumulating in the pressure connection linear
sensor, which could cause malfunction.
Operation
The applied pressure is converted into an analogue
electrical signal. This is achieved by the physical
deformation of strain gages (Piezo film) which are
bonded with high temperature glass into the
stainless steel diaphragm of the pressure transducer
and wired into a wheat stone bridge configuration.
Pressure applied to the pressure transducer
produces a deflection of the diaphragm which
introduces strain to the gages. The strain produces
an electrical resistance change proportional to the
pressure. The P499 transducer measures pressure
as psig or Gauge pressure. The sensed pressure is
compared to the ambient pressure (average 1013
mbar). Sealed Gauge (bars) type Transducers and
Absolute type Transmitters (bars) can be setup on
request.
CAUTION:
Observe maximum operation pressure
when testing the installation. Exceeding
the maximum over-pressure will
permanently damage the sensor. Avoid
severe pressure pulsation on pressure
connections by positioning transmitter
away from compressor discharge.
When there are no severe pulsation
and/or vibrations the sensor may be
mounted directly to the compressor.
CAUTION:
Avoid severe pressure pulsation on
pressure connections by positioning
transmitter away from compressor
discharge. When there are no severe
pulsation and/or vibrations the sensor
may be mounted directly to the
compressor.
Internal 7/16 - 20 UNF Thread

& flared washer
External 7/16 - 20 UNF Thread
Wiring
2 meters shielded cable
Shielded cable P499 model electrical connections:
P499AxS-xxxC: Red = supply; Black = com.; Bare = GND
P499RxS-xxxC: Red = supply; Black = com.; White = Output; Bare = GND
P499VxS-xxxC: Red = supply; Black = com.; White = Output; Bare = GND
Hirschman form C
Hirschman P499 model electrical connections:
P499AxH-xxxC: Pin1 = supply; Pin 2 = com.
P499RxH-xxxC: Pin1 = supply; Pin 2 = com. Pin 3 = Output
P499VxH-xxxC: Pin1 = supply; Pin 2 = com. Pin 3 = Output
Packard socket
Packard P499 model electrical connections:
P499AxP-xxxC: Pin A = com. Pin B = supply
P499RxP-xxxC: Pin A = com. Pin B = supply; Pin C = Output
P499VxP-xxxC: Pin A = com. Pin B = supply; Pin C = Output
Dimensions
Fig. 1
Female pressure
connector
7/16 - 20 UNF thread
Shielded cable
105C rating
6.4 mm
100 mm
47.5 mm
2m
12 mm
Shielded cable Female
Fig. 2
Hirchman
DIN 43650
Female pressure
connector
12 mm
27 mm
47.5 mm
Hirchman Female
Fig. 3
A
Packard
Socket
Female pressure
connector
21 mm
C
22.2 mm
47.5 mm
Packard Female
12 mm
Ordering Codes
P499-
Pressure Transducer
Pressure ranges
401 = -100 to 800 kPa (-1 to 8 bar)
402 = -100 to 1500 kPa (-1 to 15 bar)
403 = 0 to 1500 kPa (0 to 15 bar)
404 = 0 to 3000 kPa (0 to 30 bar)
405 = 0 to 5000 kPa (0 to 50 bar)
Electrical connection
S = 2M cable
H = Hirschmann
P = Packard
Pressure port
A = 1/8 NPTM
B = 1/4 SAE Male
C = 1/4 SAE Female
Output
Supply
A = 4 - 20 mA
9 - 32 VDC
R = 0.5 - 4.5 VDC
4.75 - 5.25 VDC
V = 0 - 10 VDC
12 - 30 VDC
Products
P499 Series Electronic Pressure Transducer
Pressure Ranges
All units are Gauge type designs (absolute and sealed reference on request)
-100 to 800 kPa (-1 to 8 bar)
0 to 1500 kPa (0 to 15 bar)
-100 to 1500 kPa (-1 to 15 bar)
0 to 3000 kPa (0 to 30 bar)
-100 to 2500 kPa (-1 to 25 bar)
0 to 5000 kPa (0 to 50 bar)
Output signal
4 - 20 mA, 0.5 - 4.5 VDC, 0 - 10 VDC
Overload
2x Upper rated pressure without calibration shift
Burst Pressure
5x rated pressure
Media Compatibility
Fluids compatible with17-4PH stainless steel
Supply Voltages
4 - 20 mA output needs 9 - 32 VDC

0.5 - 4.5 VDC Ratio metric output needs 4.75 - 5.25 VDC
0 - 10 VDC output needs 12 - 30 VDC
Storage Conditions
-40 to 125 C 0 to 100% RH
DIN43650-C, Cable 2M Shielded, Packard (Metri Pack)
Compensated Temperature
-20 to 85 C
-40 to 125 C
Accuracy
0.25% Full Span Best Fit Straight Line
Total error band
1% Ful Span (maximum) over compensated temperature range
Material
17-4PH stainless steel
Protection Class
IP65 for DIN 43650-C versions

IP67 for Cable / Packard versions
Vibration
20 G at 20-200 Hz
Shock
200 G / 11 ms
Agency Listings
United States:
Canada:
Europe:
Australia/New Zealand:
UL Listed, File E29374, CCN NKPZ

UL Listed, File E29374, CCN NKPZ7
CE Mark, EMCDirective 89/336/EEC
C-Tick Mark, Emissions Compliant
specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office. Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from
misapplication or misuse of its products.
Johnson Controls International, Inc.

Headquarters:
Milwaukee, Wisconsin, USA
European Distribution Centre:
Westendhof 3, D-45143 Essen, Germany
Branch Offices
Principal European Cities.
European Electronic Controls Catalogue

Catalogue Section A
Product Bulletin PS-9101
Issue Date 06 2000
Differential pressure transmitter

PS-9101
I ntroduction
The PS-9101 Differential pressure is designed to
measure the difference between two sensed
pressures to produce 010 V DC proportional
output.
The differential pressure, as sensed by the
sensing ports, is applied to both sides of a mass
air flow sensor, directed across the surface of the
sensing element.
The output voltage varies in proportion to the
differential temperature of sensing elements, as a
consequence of increasing/decreasing the mass
air flow through the inlet and outlet ports caused
by sensed differential pressure.
PS-9101-800x
Transmitter (IP20)
PS-9101-850x
Transmitter (IP54)

G Model available in 3 differential pressure
Covers most of HVAC applications
ranges
G Models for Din Rail mounting
Easier installation
G Models with splash proof dust tight case
Electronic base can be mounted in many

environments
G Fast response (< 50 ms)
Can be used in critical applications such as VAV
G MTBF of sensor 20 years
Long lasting reliability

Order Nr. 24.134E
A16
PS-9101
O rdering data
PS-9101-8
O peration
0
1
2
3
Operating range
0...750 Pa
0...330 Pa
0...130 Pa
0
5
Protection Class
IP 20
IP54
Accessories
A-4000-8001
PS-9101-8900
FT-G18A-8001
In line filter
DIN rail mounting kit
Remote mounting probe kit
Typical applications of the PS-9101 include

pressure sensing in ducts, and air flow velocity
sensing for VAV terminal units.
The PS-9101 can be used separately, or as a
part of a digital VAV control system (DC9100/DR-9100). By subtracting the measured
static air pressure from the measured total air
pressure, the PS-9101 senses air velocity
pressure. This value is sent to the DC-9100/DR9100 controller in form of 0 to 10 VDC signal.
The DC/DR-9100 controller interprets the PS9101 signal to determine the position of the VAV
damper motor actuator for the required air flow
Repairs and Replacements

Repairs should not be made in the field. Defective devices should be returned to the factory. For a
replacements, contact the nearest Johnson Controls wholesaler or branch office.
Replace the Inline Filter A-4000-8001 when dark red colour appears on outer.
Mounting instructions
2) Use FT-G18A-8001 remote mounting probe

kits for remote sensing locations. Run plastic
tubing from the high and/or low pressure
connectors to the sensing point. Use tubing
with an inner diameter of at least
Maximum Length A
ZERO
ADJ.
SPAN
ADJ.
4.3 mm (0.170 inch) and an outer diameter of

6.3 mm (1/4 inch).
HIGH PRESS
In line system
Filter
A-4000-8001
FT-G18A-8001
Probe Kit
(+)
FT-G18A-8001
Probe Kit
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE
TRANSMITTER PS-9101-8001
0 - 750 Pa
(-)
LOW PRESS
Maximum
1 2 3 4 5
DUCT
Length A
AIR FLOW
VAV Box Mounting

Make sure no compressed air is applied to either
connector. Do no mount the control where ambient
temperature falls below 0C or exceeds +60C.
If either the low or high pressure input ports
are not used, protect the open port from other
external air velocities or direct impingement
which will produce erroneous signals.
1) For mounting the PS-9101, use the 35 mm
DIN Rail System. Kit PS-9101-8900 can be
used for duct mounting.
A16
3) Use Inline Filter A-4000-8001 on the side of

inlet high supply pressure. Replace In line
filter when dark red color appears on outer
surface.
FLOW
Inline Filter A-4000-8001

4) Factory calibration is with inline system filter
and 2 m lengths of plastic tubing. With the
maximum allowable sum of the two tube
lengths shown in the table below, the nominal
range decreases by 25%.
RANGE
0 130 Pa
0 330 Pa
0 750 Pa
Max Sum of Two Tube

Lengths
10 meters
15 meters
20 meters
PS-9101
W iring diagram
Disconnect the power supply before wiring connections are made to prevent possible electrical shock or
damage to the equipment. Make all wiring connections in accordance with the National Electrical Code
and Local regulations. Make all wiring connection before applying power. Improper wiring may cause
permanent damage. Refer to the installation wiring diagrams for correct hook-up.
P
E
0...10 VDC
0...10 VDC
24 VAC
24 VAC COM
PS-9101 with 24 VAC supply voltage
15VDC
PS-9101 with 15 VDC supply voltage
D imensions
58
51.5
70
PS-9101-8001
103
12 3 4 5
74
125
98
88
82
17
70
PS-9101-800x IP20
50
23
90
120
PS-9101-850x IP54
A16
PS-9101
S pecifications
Supply voltage 15 VDC 10% (Available from controller) or 24 VAC +10%; -15%
Output Signal 0 to 10 VDC linear to differential pressure
Ambient Op. Limits 0 to 60 C, 10 to 90% RH (non condensing)
Pressure 34.5 kPa max
Mounting DIN Rail / wall
Air connection 4 x 6 mm plastic tube
Power consumption 350 mW (24mA at 15VDC)
Output load Min. 5 k Ohms / Max. 2 mA
P Ranges See Ordering data
Repeatability & Hyst. 1%
Linearity 2% from 0 to 500 Pa
5% from 500 to 750 Pa
Adjustment 1 potentiometer for 0 point, 0-25% of range
1 potentiometer for span adjustment, 50% of nominal range
(max 750 Pa)
Output Voltage shift 0-25C
25-55 C
+ 0.08% C
0.08% C
Response Time 50 ms max.

Electrical connection Terminal block for 2.5 mm2 (maximum) section wire
Housing material Polypropylene
Enclosure protection class IP 20, IP54, (IEC 60529)
Weight 0,1 kg
Storage Temp. limits -40 to +70 C
Compliance EMC (89/336 EEC) according to the standard EN 50081-1
and EN 50082-1
specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.
Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products.
Johnson Controls International, Inc.

Headquarters: Milwaukee, WI, USA
European Headquarters: Westendhof 8, 45143 Essen, Germany
European Factories: Lomagna (Italy), Leeuwarden (The Netherlands), Essen (Germany)
Branch Offices: principal European Cities
This document is subject to change without notice
A16
Printed in Europe

Issued September 12, 2008
Facility Explorer
FX Server
Description
The FX Server expands the capabilities of the
FX20/FX40/FX60 Supervisory Controllers.
The FX Server coordinates the integration of
multiple FX20/FX40/FX60s networked
together on a single project. The FX Server
collects and stores large amounts of
information, such as alarms, events, and
histories from one or more FX20/FX40/FX60s.
The FX Server provides server-level functions
such as master scheduling, system-wide
database management, and integration with
enterprise software applications.
The FX Server includes a graphical user
interface and configuration tool you can
access with a Web browser. Multiple users
can concurrently connect to the FX Server.
Security and presentation preferences are
managed through user profiles, logon IDs, and
passwords. Remote access is easily achieved
from an Internet, intranet, or a dial-up
connection.
Refer to the FX Server Product Bulletin

Features
multiple FX20/FX40/FX60s integrated

together via hub, local intranet, or the
Internet
centralized enterprise-wide information
large storage repository for alarms, events,
and histories
ability to run on a third-party server
hardware platform
Web-based user interface
FX Server
Selection Charts
FX Server Ordering Information
Product Code Number Description
LP-FXWS-0
FX Server software on CD-ROM. Allows integration of an unrestricted number of FX Supervisory Controllers (FX20/FX40/FX60s).
Includes FX Workbench and a 1-year software maintenance agreement.
LP-FXWSLTD-0
FX Server software on CD-ROM. Allows integration of up to three FX Supervisory Controllers (FX20/FX40/FX60s). Includes FX
Workbench and a 1-year software maintenance agreement.
Optional FX Server Driver Licenses Ordering Information

Product Code Number
Description
LP-FXWSOBX-0
License file enabling oBix Driver (500 points)
LP-FXWSOBX5-0
License file enabling 500 additional oBix points
LP-FXWSBAC-0
License file enabling BACnet Internet Protocol (IP) Driver (500 points)
LP-FXWSBAC5-0
License file enabling 500 additional BACnet IP points
LP-FXWSOPC-0
License file enabling OLE for Process Controls (OPC) driver (500 points)
LP-FXWSOPC5-0
License file enabling 500 additional OPC points
LP-FXWSMDB-0
License file enabling ModBus TCP driver (500 points)
LP-FXWSMDB5-0
License file enabling 500 additional ModBus Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) points
LP-FXWSSQL-0
License file enabling Microsoft SQL Server DatabaseTM Driver
LP-FXWSDB2-0
License file enabling IBM DB2 Database Driver
LP-FXWSORCL-0
License file enabling Oracle Database Driver
LP-FXWSCSV-0
License file enabling *.xls and *.csv file data to be imported into FX Server
FX Server Upgrade Ordering Information

Product Code Number
Description
LP-FXWS-6
FX Server software upgrade on CD-ROM. Used to upgrade any copy of FX Server within the software maintenance agreement
period.
LP-FXSWMA-0
License file enabling 1 additional year of software maintenance for one copy of FX Server.
LP-FXSWUPG-0
License file enabling a one time software upgrade for one copy of FX Server.
1 of 2
FX Server (Continued)
FX Server
Processor
Intel Pentium 4 processor, 2 GHz or higher
Operating System
Microsoft Windows NT Version 4.0 with Service Pack (SP) 4.0 or later
Microsoft Windows 2000
Microsoft Windows XP Professional
Web Browser
Internet Explorer Web browser Version 5.0 or later

Netscape Navigator Version 4.5 or later
Memory
1 GB minimum
Hard Disk
1 GB minimum, 5 GB recommended
Display
Video card and monitor capable of displaying 1,024 x 768 pixel resolution or greater
Network Support
Ethernet 10/100 MB with RJ-45 connector
Modem
56 KB minimum, full time high speed Internet Service Provider (ISP) connection recommended for remote site access (DSL, T1, cable
modem)
2 of 2

Facility Explorer
FX20/FX60 Supervisory Controllers

Description
The FX20 and FX60 are Web-based
supervisory-class controllers in the Facility
Explorer product family. The FX20/FX60
manages networks of field controllers using
open communication protocols, such as N2,
LONWORKS, and BACnet protocols. The
FX20/FX60 supports a full set of building
automation features specifically designed for
commercial facilities such as scheduling,
alarming, histories, data sharing, energy
management, totalization, and customized
control routines.
The FX20/FX60 includes a graphical system
user interface and configuration tool that you
can access with a Web browser. Remote
access is easily achieved from an Internet,
intranet, or dial-up connection. Multiple users
can concurrently connect to the FX20/FX60.
managed through user profiles, logon IDs,
and passwords.
The FX20 and FX60 are very similar in

physical size and overall capabilities. The
main difference between the controllers is the
superior capacity of the FX60. In addition, the
FX20/FX60 hardware and software design is
modular, so you can add accessories such as
communications cards, input and output
modules, and software options if needed. This
also allows you to select the controller most
appropriate for the size of your facility and
those options best needed to control it.
Refer to the FX20/FX60 Supervisory
Controllers Product Bulletin (LIT-12011406)
for important product application information.
Repair Information
If the FX20 and FX60 fails to operate within its
replacement controller, contact the nearest
FX60 Supervisory Controller
Features
Web-based user interface

adoption of industry standard
communication protocols
embedded configuration tool
modular design
small, compact design
FX Workbench
Selection Charts
FX20/FX60 Ordering Information
LP-FX2011N-0
FX20: includes 128 MB RAM, 64 MB Flash, 2 Ethernet ports, 1 non-isolated RS-485 port, 1 RS-232 port, 1 NiagaraAX Direct Input/
Output (NDIO) port, 2 communication card slots, Niagara driver, oBIX driver, N2 driver, embedded FX Workbench, embedded
Web User Interface (UI)
LP-FX6011N-0
FX60: includes 128 MB RAM, 128 MB Flash, 2 Ethernet ports, 1 non-isolated RS-485 port, 1 RS-232 port, 1 NDIO port, 1 Universal
Serial Bus (USB) port, 2 communication card slots, Niagara driver, oBIX driver, N2 driver, embedded FX Workbench, embedded
Web UI
FX Workbench Ordering Information

LP-FXTSPE-0
FX Tools Supervisor Pro Software on CD-ROM: End-user version. Includes FX Workbench, FX Workbench Pro,
and FX Alarm Portal.
LP-FXTSPE-6
FX Tools Supervisor Pro Software Upgrade on CD-ROM. Used to upgrade any copy of FX Tools Supervisor Pro which is within the
software maintenance agreement period.
LP-FXALMPTL-0
FX Alarm Portal Client Software on CD-ROM. Provides Alarm Portal functions only.
LP-FXSWMA-0
License file enabling one year of software maintenance for one copy of FX Tools Supervisor Pro.
LP-FXSWUPG-0
License file enabling a one-time software upgrade for one copy of FX Tools Supervisor Pro.
Accessories
FX20/FX60 Hardware Accessories Ordering Information
LP-FXNDIO16-0
16 channel input/output module for FX20/FX60: Includes 8 universal inputs, 4 relay outputs, and 4 0-10 V analog outputs, maximum
of 4 per FX20/FX60, or 2 if combined with NDIO34
LP-FXNDIO34-0
34 channel input/output module for FX20/FX60: Includes 16 universal inputs, 10 relay outputs, and 8 0-10 V analog outputs,
maximum of 1 per FX20/FX60. Also provides power to FX20/FX60 using externally connected 24 VAC transformer or 24 VDC power
supply.
LP-FXLONFTT-0
LON communication card for FX20/FX60: 78 kbps, FTT-10A, 2-position removable screw-terminal connector plug
LP-FXRS485-0
Dual port RS-485 communication card for FX20/FX60: electrically isolated, two 3-position removable screw-terminal connector plugs
LP-FXRS232-0
Single port RS-232 communication card for FX20/FX60: 115,200 max baud rate, DB-9M connector
LP-FXMDM-0
56 kbps, auto-dial/auto-answer modem for FX20/FX60: RJ-11 connector, disables onboard RS-232 port, maximum of one per
FX20/FX60
LP-FXPMUS-0
Power module for FX20/FX60: 90-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, U.S. wall adapter
LP-FXPMEU-0
Power module for FX20/FX60: 90-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, European wall adapter
LP-FXPMUK-0
Power module for FX20/FX60: 90-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, U.K. wall adapter
LP-FXPM24-0
Power module for FX20/FX60: 24 VAC/DC, DIN rail mountable
LP-FXPM263-0
Power module for FX20/FX60: 90-263 VAC/DC, 50/60 Hz DIN rail mountable
1 of 3
FX20/FX60 Supervisory Controllers (Continued)

FX20/FX60 Software Accessories Ordering Information)
Product Code Number
Description
LP-FX60EX256-0
License enabling 256 Mb memory expansion for one FX60
LP-FXBACIPC-0
License enabling BACnet Internet Protocol (IP) client (import) driver for one FX20/FX60
LP-FXBACIPS-0
License enabling BACnet IP server (export) driver for one FX20/FX60
LP-FXBACMS-0
License enabling BACnet Master-Slave/Token-Passing (MS/TP) driver for one FX20/FX60
LP-FXLONIP-0
License enabling LONWORKS IP driver for one FX20/FX40/FX60
LP-FXMBUS-0
License enabling M-Bus driver for one FX20/FX40/FX60
LP-FXMDBRTU-0
License enabling MODBUS RTU client (import) driver for one FX20/FX40/FX60
LP-FXMDBRTUS-0
License enabling MODBUS RTU server (export) driver for one FX20/FX40/FX60
LP-FXMDBTCP-0
License enabling MODBUS TCP client (import) driver for one FX20/FX40/FX60
LP-FXMDBTCPS-0
License enabling MODBUS TCP server (export) driver for one FX20/FX40/FX60
LP-FXZWAV-0
License enabling Z-Wave driver for one FX20/FX40/FX60
LP-FXSNMP-0
License enabling Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) driver for one FX20/FX40/FX60
LP-FXSMS-0
License enabling Simple Messaging Service driver for one FX20/FX40/FX60
LP-FXSSL-0
License enabling Secure Socket Layer (SSL) for one FX20/FX40/FX60
LP-FX40MA-0
License enabling one year of annual software maintenance for one FX20/FX40/FX60. Includes new releases and interim
service releases for 1 year from the date of purchase.
LP-FX40UPG-0
License enabling one-time, new release software upgrade for one FX20/FX40/FX60
FX20/FX60 Controller (Part 1 of 2)
Product Codes
LP-FX2011N-0, LP-FX6011N-0
Power Requirements
See Ordering Codes for approved power modules
Environment
Operating Temperature: 0 to 50C (32 to 122F)

Storage Temperature: 0 to 60C (32 to 140F)
Relative Humidity: 5 to 95%, noncondensing
Platform
FX20:
IBM PowerPC 405EP 250 MHz processor
128 MB Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory (SDRAM), 64 Mb Serial Flash
FX60:
IBM PowerPC 440 524 MHz processor
128 MB SDRAM, 128 MB Serial Flash
Optional 256 MB DDR RAM
Battery backup: 5 minutes typical, shutdown begins within 10 seconds
Real-time clock: 3 month backup maximum (via battery)
Operating System
QNX Real Time Operating System (RTOS)

BM J9 Java Virtual Machine (JVM)
Niagara
Communications
Two 10/100 Mb Ethernet ports, RJ-45 connectors

One RS-232 port: 9-pin, D-shell connector
One RS-485 non-isolated port: 3-position, removable, screw-terminal connector plug
See Ordering Codes for optional communication cards.
2 of 3
FX20/FX60 Supervisory Controllers (Continued)

FX20/FX60 Controller (Part 2 of 2)
Chassis
Mounting: DIN rail or screw mount

Cooling: Internal air convection
Dimensions: 6.315 x 4.820 x 2.437 in. (16.04 x 12.24 x 6.19 cm)
Agency Listing
Management Equipment
FCC compliant to CFR 47, part 15, subpart B, class A
Canada - UL Listed, File E107041, CCN PAZX7, under CSA C22.2 No. 205, Signal Equipment
Industry Canada compliant to ICES-003
Europe CE Mark
EMC Standards Applied:
EN 61000-6-4 EMC Emissions Generic (Complies)
EN 61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-1 EMC Immunity (Complies, as documented below)
EN50081-2 Generic Emissions Standard for Residential, Commercial, and Light Industrial Environment
CISPR-11 Limits of Radio Disturbance-Radiated Emissions (Pass Class A)
CISPR-11 Limits of Radio Disturbance-Conducted Emissions (Pass Class A)
IEC 61000-4-2 ESD (Pass Criteria B)
IEC 61000-4-3 Radiated Field Immunity (Pass Criteria A)
IEC 61000-4-4 Electrical Fast Transients Immunity-Signal Ports (Pass Criteria B)
IEC 61000-4-4 Electrical Fast Transients Immunity -AC Power (Pass Criteria B)
IEC 61000-4-5 Surge Immunity (Pass Criteria A)
IEC 61000-4-6 Conducted Immunity (Pass Criteria A)
IEC 61000-4-11 Voltage Dips (Pass Criteria A)
IEC 61000-4-11 Voltage Interrupts (Pass Criteria A)
IEC 61010-10-1: 90 + A1:92 + A2:95 Safety requirement for electrical equipment for measurement, control, and laboratory
use (Pass)
Input Output Modules

Product Codes
LP-FXNDIO34-0: 16 universal inputs, 10 relay outputs, 8 analog outputs

Dimensions
NDIO34: 6.313 x 4.820 x 2.438 in. (16.04 x 12.24 x 6.19 cm)

NDIO16: 3.2 x 4.828 x 2.437 in. (8.2 x 12.24 x 6.19 cm)
Universal Input Types Supported
10k ohm Type 3 thermistors. Thermistor Sensor Range: -23.3 to 115.5C (10 to 240F). Input accuracy is in the
range of 1% of span. Characteristic curve is customizable.
0-10 V; accuracy is 2% of span, without user calibration; uses an external resistor for current input (four provided,
mounted by installer on terminal connections)
4-20 mA current loop; accuracy is 2% of span, without user calibration; self powered or board-powered sensors
accepted
Dry contact: V open circuit, 300- A short-circuit current
Pulsing dry contact at a rate of up to 20 Hz; 50% duty cycle
Digital Outputs
Form A relay contacts suitable for on/off control only; floating control not supported
Max voltage 30 volts AC or DC
1/2 A max current rating
Analog Outputs
0-10 VDC
Minimum load supported per output is 2,500 ohms minimum or 4 mA drain maximum
Processor
Intel Pentium 4, 1 GHz or higher
Operating System
Web Browser
Microsoft Internet Explorer Version 5.0 or later

Netscape Communicator Version 4.5 or later
Memory
512 MB minimum
Hard Disk
Network Support
Ethernet 10/100 Mb with RJ-45 connector
FX Workbench Requirements
3 of 3

Facility Explorer

Description
The FX40 is a Web-based supervisory-class
controller in the Facility Explorer product
family. The FX40 manages networks of field
controllers using open communication
protocols such as N2, LONWORKS, and
BACnet protocols. The FX40 also provides
onboard, input and output points for direct
monitoring of equipment status or analog
sensors and control of auxiliary devices or
alarms.
The FX40 supports a full set of building
automation features and functions specifically
designed for commercial facilities such as
scheduling, alarming, histories, data sharing,
energy management, totalization, and
customized control routines.
The FX40 includes a graphical system user

interface and configuration tool that users can
access with a Web browser. Multiple users
can concurrently connect to the FX40.
managed through user profiles, logon IDs, and
passwords. Remote access is easily achieved
from an Internet, intranet, or a dial-up
connection.
Refer to the FX40 Supervisory Controller
FX40
Features
Web-based User Interface (UI)

adoption of industry standard
communication protocols
embedded configuration tool
onboard inputs and outputs
Repair Information
If the FX40 fails to operate within its
replacement controller, contact the nearest
Selection Chart
FX40 Ordering Information
Product Code Number
Description
LP-FX4020A-0
FX40: includes 128 MB RAM, 32 MB Flash, 1 Ethernet port, 1 RS-485 port, 1 RS-232 port, 1 LONWORKS FT/TP-10 port, 6
universal inputs, 4 binary outputs, N2 driver, LONWORKS driver, BACnet Internet Protocol (IP) client driver, BACnet Master-Slave/
Token-Passing (MS/TP) driver, embedded FX Workbench, embedded Web UI, 1-year software maintenance agreement
LP-FX4021A-0
FX40: includes 128 Mb RAM, 32 Mb Flash, 1 Ethernet port, 1 RS-485 port, 1 RS-232 port, 1 LONWORKS FT/TP-10 port, 6
universal inputs, 4 binary outputs, Niagara driver, N2 driver, LONWORKS driver, BACnet IP client driver, BACnet IP server driver,
BACnet MS/TP driver, embedded FX Workbench, embedded Web UI, 1-year software maintenance agreement
LP-FX4022A-0
FX40: includes 128 Mb RAM, 32 Mb Flash, 1 Ethernet port, 1 RS-485 port, 1 modem, 1 LONWORKS FT/TP-10 port, 6 universal
inputs, 4 binary outputs, N2 driver, LONWORKS driver, BACnet IP client driver, BACnet MS/TP driver, embedded FX Workbench,
embedded Web UI, 1-year software maintenance agreement
LP-FX4023A-0
FX40: includes 128 Mb RAM, 32 Mb Flash, 1 Ethernet port, 1 RS-485 port, 1 modem, 1 LONWORKS FT/TP-10 port, 6 universal
inputs, 4 binary outputs, N2 driver, LONWORKS driver, BACnet IP client driver, BACnet IP server driver, BACnet MS/TP driver,
embedded FX Workbench, embedded Web UI, 1-year software maintenance agreement
FX Workbench Ordering Information

Part Number
Description
LP-FXTSPE-0
FX Tools Supervisor Pro Software on CD-ROM: End-user version. Includes FX Workbench, FX Workbench Pro, and FX Alarm
Portal.
LP-FXTSPE-6
FX Tools Supervisor Pro Software Upgrade on CD-ROM. Used to upgrade any copy of FX Tools Supervisor Pro which is within
the software maintenance agreement period.
LP-FXALMPTL-0
LP-FXSWMA-0
License file enabling 1 year of software maintenance for one copy of FX Tools Supervisor Pro.
LP-FXSWUPG-0
Accessories
FX40 Software Accessories Ordering Information (Part 1 of 2)
Part Number
Description
LP-FX40CN0-0
License enabling Enterprise Connectivity Station Pack (Niagara and BACnet IP server drivers) for one FX40
LP-FXMDBRTU-0
License enabling ModBus Rooftop Unit (RTU) client (import) driver for one FX20/FX40/FX60
LP-FXMDBRTUS-0
License enabling ModBus RTU server (export) driver for one FX20/FX40/FX60
LP-FXMDBTCP-0
License enabling ModBus Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) client (import) driver for one FX20/FX40/FX60
LP-FXMDBTCPS-0
License enabling ModBus TCP server (export) driver for one FX20/FX40/FX60
LP-FXLONIP-0
LP-FXMBUS-0
LP-FXZWAV-0
LP-FXSNMP-0
LP-FXSMS-0
License enabling Simple Messaging Service driver (SMS) for one FX20/FX40/FX60
LP-FXSSL-0
1 of 3
FX40 Supervisory Controller (Continued)

FX40 Software Accessories Ordering Information (Part 2 of 2)
Part Number
Description
LP-FX40MA-0
License enabling 1 year of annual software maintenance for one FX20/FX40/FX60. Includes new releases and interim service
releases for 1 year from the date of purchase.
LP-FX40UPG-0
FX40 Replacement Parts Ordering Information

Part Number
Description
LP-KIT401A-0
Onboard modem
LP-KIT402A-0
Battery, 12 VDC, 1.2 AH
LP-KIT403A-0
FX40 Hardware Accessory Package, includes:

six 499 ohm, 0.6 W resistors
four 6-position Input/Output (I/O) screw terminal connectors
one 3-position RS-485 screw terminal connector
two wire nuts
one LONWORKS 2-position screw terminal connector
LP-KIT407A-0
Battery/ground harness (also includes 6-position power connector)
LP-KIT408A-0
Adapter, RJ-45 to DB-9 null modem, for serial port to connect to Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) device
LP-KIT409A-0
Silver satin patch cable, 4 ft (used between adapter and serial port)
LP-KIT410A-0
LP-KIT411A-0
FX40 Controller (Part 1 of 2)
Product Codes
LP-FX4020A-0, LP-FX4022A-0
Power Requirements
120 VAC, 50/60 Hz

25 VA maximum
Lead wires for hot/neutral (wire nut), stud for ground connection
Environmental
Operating Temperature: 32 to 122F (0 to 50C)

Storage Temperature: 32 to 158F (0 to 70C)
General
Motorola Reduced Instruction Set Computer (RISC) Processor @ 250 MHz

Facility Explorer Control Engine with direct I/O support objects
128 MB RAM, 32 MB flash for database backup
One 10/100 MB Ethernet RJ-45 connector
FCC Class A computing device
Wind River VxWorks Operating System with Jeode Java Virtual Machine
Facility Explorer Software with I/O control objects
Communications
One 10/100 Mb Ethernet portRJ-45 connection

One RJ-45 connector for RS-232 port
One RS-485 port (up to 57,600 baud)
One LONWORKS portFTT-10 with Weidmuller connector
Optional auto-dial/auto-answer 56k modem; RJ-11 connector (uses the RS-232 port when installed)
Inputs/Outputs
Four form C Single-Pole, Double-Throw (SPDT) relay outputs rated for 24 VAC/DC @ 2 ampere resistive
One Light-Emitting Diode (LED) indicator for each relay
Six Universal Inputs for 10k ohm Type III (10k 4A1-International) Thermistor, 4/20 mA current loop, 0 to 10 volt, or dry contact
12-bit A/D converter
Thermistor Sensor Range: 23.3 to 57.2C (10 to 135F). Input accuracy is in the range of 1% of span, characteristic curve is
customizable
0 10 volt or 4/20 mA accuracy is 2% of span, without user calibration. Uses an external resistor for current input (four
provided). Self-powered or board powered sensors accepted.
Dry contacts (on UI) 20 Hz max. frequency (25 ms minimum pulse width) 3 V open circuit, 300 Micro A short-circuit current
20 VDC @ 80 mA to drive 4/20 mA powered sensors.
24 VDC terminal and external resistor can be used if monitoring contacts that require higher voltages or higher current.
All I/O uses screw terminals on 0.2 in. centers
Battery Backup
Provided for all onboard functions including I/O.

Monitored and trickle charged.
Battery maintains processor operation through power failures for a predetermined interval, then writes all data to flash memory,
turns off the processor, and maintains clock for a minimum of 5 years.
2 of 3
FX40 Supervisory Controller (Continued)

FX40 Controller (Part 2 of 2)
Chassis Housed in Metal
Enclosure
Intended for indoor wall mounting only

Dimensions: 11 x 14 x 2.5 in. (27.94 x 35.56 x 6.35 cm)
Weight: Net 4 lb (1.814 kg), gross 5 lb (2.268 kg)
Agency Listing
United States - UL Listed, File E107041, CCN PAZX, under UL 916, Energy Management Equipment
Canada - UL Listed, File E107041, CCN PAZX7, under CSA C22.2 No. 205, Signal Equipment
Processor
Operating System
Microsoft Windows NT Version 4.0 with SP 4.0 or later

Web Browser

Memory
512 MB minimum
Hard Disk
Network Support
FX Workbench Requirements
3 of 3
Product Bulletin
Issue Date
FX20/FX60
December 9, 2008
FX20/FX60 Supervisory Controllers

The FX20 and FX60 are Web-based
supervisory-class controllers in the Facility Explorer
product family. The FX20/FX60 manages networks of
field controllers using open communication protocols,
such as N2, LONWORKS, and BACnet protocols.
The FX20/FX60 supports a full set of building
automation features specifically designed for
commercial facilities such as scheduling, alarming,
histories, data sharing, energy management,
totalization, and customized control routines.
In addition, the FX20/FX60 hardware and software

design is modular, so you can add accessories such
as communications cards, input and output modules,
and software options if needed. This also allows you
to select the controller most appropriate for the size of
your facility and those options best needed to control
it.
The FX20/FX60 includes a graphical system user

interface and configuration tool that you can access
with a Web browser. Remote access is easily
achieved from an Internet, intranet, or dial-up
connection. Multiple users can concurrently connect
to the FX20/FX60. Security and presentation
preferences are managed through user profiles, logon
IDs, and passwords.
The FX20 and FX60 are very similar in physical size
and overall capabilities. The main difference between
the controllers is the superior capacity of the FX60.
Figure 1: FX60 Supervisory Controller
Web-Based User Interface
Provides rich, graphical displays for system

operation and analysis.
Adoption of Industry Standard

Communication Protocols
Allows for the integration of a wide variety of field

controllers. This includes Facility Explorer field
controllers and controllers provided by others
without intermediate gateways or translators.
Embedded Configuration Tool
Requires no proprietary or desktop software to

configure the FX20/FX60. You only need a Web
browser for basic configuration and monitoring.
Modular Design
Allows you to select only those components

needed to meet specific project requirements.
Small, Compact Design
Installs easily.
FX Workbench
Reduces engineering and installation time by

easily and quickly creating the FX20/FX60
database from field controller configurations.

Overview
The FX20/FX60 provides integrated control
supervision and network management services for one
or more local networks of field controllers. The
FX20/FX60 monitors and controls Heating, Ventilating,
and Air Conditioning (HVAC); lighting; and other
electrical systems to:
Supported Networking Protocols

As a default, the FX20/FX60 includes an N2 driver that
enables the integration of a wide variety of N2 field
controllers, including:
Facility Explorer Field Controllers fitted with an N2

Open Communication Card (for example, FX05,
FX06, FX07, FX10, FX14, FX15, FX16, MD20, or
FXVMA)
Metasys Application Specific Controller (ASC)

devices (Air Handling Unit [AHU], Unitary [UNT],
Variable Air Volume [VAV])
Metasys System 91 Devices (DX-9100)
Metasys Variable Air Volume Modular Assembly

(VMA1400)
XTM-105 Extension Modules
The FX20/FX60 is housed in a compact, DIN rail

mount enclosure. The controller capacity and
performance requirements make it ideally suited for:
third-party devices supporting N2 Open protocol

(VND)
supervisory control of small- to large-sized

facilities
Optionally, you can add protocol drivers as needed to

integrate various field devices or have remote access.
The optional drivers include the following:
distributed supervisory control within larger

facilities or between facilities
LONWORKS
direct control of equipment
BACnet Master-Slave/Token-Passing (MS/TP)

and BACnet Internet Protocol (IP)
MODBUS Transmission Control Protocol (TCP),

and Rooftop Unit (RTU)
M-Bus
SNMP
Z-Wave drivers
Embedded communication interfaces include the

following:
Short Message Service (SMS)
2 Ethernet ports: 10/100 Mbps
Optional Input/Output (I/O) Modules
1 RS-485 port: non-isolated
1 RS-232 port
provide system-wide coordination
improve occupant comfort
reduce energy usage
optimize operating efficiencies
The FX20/FX60 organizes system information into

displays, reports, and graphics that users can access
via a Web browser.
Communication Interfaces
The FX20/FX60 supports multiple embedded and
optional communication interfaces. This enables the
FX20/FX60 to integrate many different types of field
controllers, as well as provide different methods of
remote access.
In addition, the FX20/FX60 has two option slots to add

communication cards to expand its networking
capabilities. Optional communication cards include the
following:
LONWORKS: 78 Kbps FTT-10A
Dual port RS-485: electrically isolated
Single port RS-232: up to 115,200 baud rate
Modem: 56 kbps auto-dial/auto-answer (maximum

of one)
FX20/FX60 Supervisory Controllers Product Bulletin
Optional Input/Output (I/O) modules enable the

FX20/FX60 to locally monitor and control devices such
as sensors, actuators, alarm indicators, and energy
meters.
A single multi-pin plug connects the I/O modules to the
FX20/FX60. Removable screw terminals are provided
for all input and output wiring connections.
Two versions of the I/O modules are available:
NDIO34: includes 16 universal inputs, 10 relay

outputs, and 8 analog outputs. Up to one NDIO34
module can be added to an FX20/FX60. This
module also provides power to the attached
FX20/FX60, using an externally supplied 24 VAC
transformer or 24 VDC power supply.
NDIO16: includes 8 universal inputs, 4 relay

outputs, and 4 analog outputs. Up to four
NDIO16s can be added to an FX20/FX60 (or up to
two, if combined with an NDIO34).
Histories
The Histories feature (Figure 3) allows the FX20/FX60
to collect, store, and display pertinent system data for
analysis. This may include control performance
indication, energy consumption, and system
troubleshooting. You can configure the FX20/FX60 to
create a history on any data point in its system
database. Histories are presented either graphically or
in a sortable table, and you can export the data in a
TXT, PDF, or CSV format.
Building Automation Control Features

The FX20/FX60 includes a full set of building
automation control features, including scheduling,
alarming, histories, energy management, totalization,
and custom control logic. You can apply these features
to almost all data points, regardless of their source.
Scheduling
You can configure the FX20/FX60 to automate various
functions within a facility based on a time schedule.
Some examples include:
determining the expected occupancy periods
starting or stopping HVAC equipment
turning lights on and off
You can link any writable point in the FX20/FX60

system database to a schedule. The scheduler
interface (Figure 4) provides a visually intuitive method
for you to configure the daily, weekly, and exception
(holiday) schedules.
Figure 3: Histories
Alarming
The Alarming feature (Figure 4) enables the
FX20/FX60 to initiate, route, and manage alarms and
events according to user-defined criteria. You can
configure the FX20/FX60 to generate alarms on any
data point in its system database. Each alarm record
contains valuable information, including the alarm and
return-to-normal time and date, time duration in current
state, text description, and alarm class.
You can classify alarms so that alarms with similar
characteristics are routed to common recipients. You
can also create multiple alarm classes to provide a
variety of alarm routing options, such as to the
browser-based Alarm Console or to an e-mail address.
Alarm recipients have a variety of options to manage
alarms, including sorting, acknowledging, silencing,
and tagging.
Figure 2: Scheduler
FX20/FX60 Supervisory Controllers Product Bulletin 3

The FX20/FX60s Web-based User Interface (Web UI)
provides system-wide monitoring and controlling
capability via a web browser. The Web UI capability is
embedded in every FX20/FX60. This allows users to
access the system via a Web browser over an
Ethernet Local Area Network (LAN), Internet, or
dial-up modem connection.
Figure 4: Alarm Console

Energy Management
The FX20/FX60 features several energy management
functions, which you can enable and configure,
including:
You can format the Web UI according to specific user

preferences. The presentation of the information can
be as rich or as limited as needed to support a variety
of user types and interface hardware (computer,
Personal Digital Assistant [PDA], or cell phone). When
you design Web UI pages, you can choose from a full
library of symbols including:
HVAC equipment
duct work
coils
piping
electrical demand limiting/load shedding
control devices (for example, dampers or valves)
optimized start/stop
free cooling determination
widgets (for example, buttons, tables, or

hyperlinks)
Totalization
The Totalization feature enables the FX20/FX60 to
accumulate data over a period of time. You can add a
totalization extension to any data point in the
FX20/FX60 system database to summarize runtime, to
accumulate change of state counts, or to summarize
dynamic analog data. Totalized data is presented in a
sortable table, and you can export it in a TXT, PDF, or
CSV file format.
Alternatively, you can include your own customized

graphics (for example, floorplan.jpg).
Customized Control Logic

The FX20/FX60 includes a library of control logic
modules that you can enable, configure, and link
together to create your own customized control
routines. Some examples of the available control logic
modules include the following:
Boolean logic (AND, OR, XOR, NOT)
comparative (greater than, less than, equal, not

equal)
mathematical (add, subtract, multiply, divide,

average, negative)
sequencers
Proportional plus Integral plus Derivative (PID)

control
on/off control
4 FX20/FX60 Supervisory Controllers Product Bulletin
Figure 5: Web-Based User Interface
FX Workbench
FX Workbench is a software application that allows
users to configure the FX20/FX60. FX Workbench is
embedded in every FX20/FX60 and is served up to
Web browsers of authorized users. In addition, you
can purchase FX Workbench as a separate software
application to reside on a computer.
Users can configure the FX20/FX60 online while
directly or remotely connected with FX Workbench.
FX Workbench includes many labor-saving

configuration features, such as:
online discovery of LONWORKS and BACnet

devices and points
online discovery of N2 devices with assisted

importing of N2 points
a check box method to enable and disable points

and create point extensions, such as alarms,
histories, and totalizations
intuitive managers for grouping points, creating

master schedules, and linking points
a library of predefined systems, with associated

graphics, points list, and default features
FX20/FX60
Figure 6: Example of an FX20/FX60 Configuration
Table 1: FX20/FX60 Ordering Information

Part Number
Description
LP-FX2011N-0
FX20: includes 128 MB RAM, 64 MB Flash, 2 Ethernet ports, 1 non-isolated RS-485 port, 1 RS-232
port, 1 NiagaraAX Direct Input/Output (NDIO) port, 2 communication card slots, Niagara driver, oBIX
driver, N2 driver, embedded FX Workbench, embedded Web UI
LP-FX6011N-0
FX60: includes 128 Mb RAM, 128 Mb Flash, 2 Ethernet ports, 1 non-isolated RS-485 port, 1 RS-232
port, 1 NDIO port, 1 Universal Serial Bus (USB) port, 2 communication card slots, Niagara driver,
oBIX driver, N2 driver, embedded FX Workbench, embedded Web UI
Table 2: FX Workbench Ordering Information

Part Number
Description
LP-FXTSPE-0
FX Tools Supervisor Pro Software on CD-ROM: End-user version. Includes FX Workbench,

FX Workbench Pro, and FX Alarm Portal.
LP-FXTSPE-6
FX Tools Supervisor Pro Software Upgrade on CD-ROM. Used to upgrade any copy of FX Tools
Supervisor Pro which is within the software maintenance agreement period.
LP-FXALMPTL-0
LP-FXSWMA-0
LP-FXSWUPG-0
Table 3: FX20/FX60 Hardware Accessories Ordering Information

Part Number
Description
LP-FXNDIO16-0
16 channel input/output module for FX20/FX60: Includes 8 universal inputs, 4 relay outputs, and 4
0-10 V analog outputs, maximum of 4 per FX20/FX60, or 2 if combined with NDIO34
LP-FXNDIO34-0
34 channel input/output module for FX20/FX60: Includes 16 universal inputs, 10 relay outputs, and 8
0-10 V analog outputs, maximum of 1 per FX20/FX60. Also provides power to FX20/FX60 using
externally connected 24 VAC transformer or 24 VDC power supply.
LP-FXLONFTT-0
LON communication card for FX20/FX60: 78 kbps, FTT-10A, 2-position removable screw-terminal
connector plug
LP-FXRS485-0
Dual port RS-485 communication card for FX20/FX60: electrically isolated, two 3-position removable
screw-terminal connector plugs
LP-FXRS232-0
Single port RS-232 communication card for FX20/FX60: 115,200 max baud rate, DB-9M connector
LP-FXMDM-0
56 kbps, auto-dial/auto-answer modem for FX20/FX60: RJ-11 connector, disables onboard RS-232
port, maximum of one per FX20/FX60
LP-FXPMUS-0
Power module for FX20/FX60: 90-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, U.S. wall adapter
LP-FXPMEU-0
Power module for FX20/FX60: 90-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, European wall adapter
LP-FXPMUK-0
Power module for FX20/FX60: 90-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, U.K. wall adapter
LP-FXPM24-0
Power module for FX20/FX60: 24 VAC/DC, DIN rail mountable
LP-FXPM263-0
Power module for FX20/FX60: 90-263 VAC/DC, 50/60 Hz DIN rail mountable
Table 4: FX20/FX60 Software Accessories Ordering Information

Part Number
Description
LP-FX60EX256-0
License enabling 256 Mb memory expansion for one FX60
LP-FXBACIPC-0
License enabling BACnet IP client (import) driver for one FX20/FX60
LP-FXBACIPS-0
License enabling BACnet IP server (export) driver for one FX20/FX60
LP-FXBACMS-0
License enabling BACnet MS/TP driver for one FX20/FX60
LP-FXLONIP-0
LP-FXMBUS-0
LP-FXMDBRTU-0
License enabling MODBUS RTU client (import) driver for one FX20/FX40/FX60
LP-FXMDBRTUS-0
License enabling MODBUS RTU server (export) driver for one FX20/FX40/FX60
LP-FXMDBTCP-0
License enabling MODBUS TCP client (import) driver for one FX20/FX40/FX60
LP-FXMDBTCPS-0
License enabling MODBUS TCP server (export) driver for one FX20/FX40/FX60
LP-FXZWAV-0
LP-FXSNMP-0
LP-FXSMS-0
License enabling Simple Messaging Service driver for one FX20/FX40/FX60
LP-FXSSL-0
LP-FX40MA-0
License enabling one year of annual software maintenance for one FX20/FX40/FX60. Includes new
releases and interim service releases for 1 year from the date of purchase.
LP-FX40UPG-0
Table 5: FX20/FX60 Controller
Product Codes
LP-FX2011N-0, LP-FX6011N-0
Power Requirements
See Ordering Codes for approved power modules
Environment
Operating Temperature: 0 to 50C (32 to 122F)

Storage Temperature: 0 to 60C (32 to 140F)
Platform
FX20:
IBM PowerPC 405EP 250 MHz processor
128 MB Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory (SDRAM), 64 Mb Serial Flash
FX60:
IBM PowerPC 440 524 MHz processor
128 MB SDRAM, 128 MB Serial Flash
Optional 256 Mb DDR RAM
Battery backup: 5 minutes typical, shutdown begins within 10 seconds
Real-time clock: 3 month backup maximum (via battery)
Operating System
QNX Real Time Operating System (RTOS)

IBM J9 Java Virtual Machine (JVM)
Niagara
Continued on next page . . .
Communications (Cont.)
Two 10/100 Mb Ethernet ports, RJ-45 connectors

One RS-232 port : 9-pin, D-shell connector
One RS-485 non-isolated port: 3-position, removable, screw-terminal connector plug
See Ordering Codes for optional communication cards
Chassis
Mounting: DIN rail or screw mount

Dimensions: 6.315 x 4.820 x 2.437 in. (16.04 x 12.24 x 6.19 cm)
Agency Listing
Canada - UL Listed, File E107041, CCN PAZX7, under CSA C22.2 No. 205, Signal
Equipment
Europe CE Mark
EMC Standards Applied:
EN 61000-6-4 EMC Emissions Generic (Complies)
EN 61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-1 EMC Immunity (Complies, as documented below)
EN50081-2 Generic Emissions Standard for Residential, Commercial, and Light
Industrial Environment
CISPR-11 Limits of Radio Disturbance-Radiated Emissions (Pass Class A)
CISPR-11 Limits of Radio Disturbance-Conducted Emissions (Pass Class A)
IEC 61000-4-2 ESD (Pass Criteria B)
IEC 61000-4-3 Radiated Field Immunity (Pass Criteria A)
IEC 61000-4-4 Electrical Fast Transients Immunity-Signal Ports (Pass Criteria B)
IEC 61000-4-4 Electrical Fast Transients Immunity -AC Power (Pass Criteria B)
IEC 61000-4-5 Surge Immunity (Pass Criteria A)
IEC 61000-4-6 Conducted Immunity (Pass Criteria A)
IEC 61000-4-11 Voltage Dips (Pass Criteria A)
IEC 61000-4-11 Voltage Interrupts (Pass Criteria A)
IEC 61010-10-1: 90 + A1:92 + A2:95 Safety requirement for electrical equipment for
measurement, control, and laboratory use (Pass)
Table 6: Input Output Modules

Product Codes

Dimensions
NDIO34: 6.313 x 4.820 x 2.438 in. (16.04 x 12.24 x 6.19 cm)

NDIO16: 3.2 x 4.828 x 2.437 in. (8.2 x 12.24 x 6.19 cm)
Universal Input Types

Supported
10k ohm Type 3 thermistors. Thermistor Sensor Range: -23.3 to 115.5C (-10 to 240F).
Input accuracy is in the range of 1% of span. Characteristic curve is customizable.
0-10 V; accuracy is 2% of span, without user calibration; uses an external resistor for
current input (four provided, mounted by installer on terminal connections)
4-20 mA current loop; accuracy is 2% of span, without user calibration; self-powered or
board-powered sensors accepted
Dry contact: V open circuit, 300- A short-circuit current
Pulsing dry contact at a rate of up to 20 Hz; 50% duty cycle
Digital Outputs
Form A relay contacts suitable for on/off control only; floating control not supported
Max voltage 30 volts AC or DC
1/2 A max current rating
Analog Outputs
0-10 V DC
Minimum load supported per output is 2,500 ohms minimum or 4 mA drain maximum
Table 7: FX Workbench Requirements

Processor
Operating System
Web Browser

Memory
512 MB minimum
Hard Disk
Network Support
specifications, contact a Facility Explorer technical support resource. Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when this equipment is operated in a commercial environment.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction
manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his/her own expense.
Industry Canada (IC) Statement
This Class (A) digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
Cet appareil numrique de la Classe (A) respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada.
Building Efficiency
Johnson Controls is a registered trademarks of Johnson Controls, Inc.
Product Bulletin
Issue Date
FX40
December 8, 2008
The FX40 is a Web-based supervisory-class controller

in the Facility Explorer product family. The FX40
manages networks of field controllers using open
communication protocols such as N2, LONWORKS,
and BACnet protocols. The FX40 also provides
onboard, input and output points for direct monitoring
of equipment status or analog sensors and control of
auxiliary devices or alarms.
The FX40 supports a full set of building automation
features and functions specifically designed for
commercial facilities such as scheduling, alarming,
histories, data sharing, energy management,
totalization, and customized control routines.
The FX40 includes a graphical system user interface
and configuration tool that users can access with a
Web browser. Multiple users can concurrently connect
to the FX40. Security and presentation preferences
are managed through user profiles, logon IDs, and
passwords. Remote access is easily achieved from an
Internet, intranet, or a dial-up connection.
Figure 1: FX40
Provides rich, graphical displays which users

can access via a Web browser to monitor,
operate, and analyze their building control
system.
Adoption of Industry
Allow for the integration of a wide variety of

field controllers. This includes Facility Explorer
field controllers and controllers provided by
others without intermediate gateways or
translators.
Standard Communication
Protocols
Embedded Configuration
Tool
Onboard Inputs and

Outputs

Requires no proprietary or desktop software

to configure the FX40.
Allow direct control of auxiliary devices, which
could reduce the number of field devices.
Overview
Communication Interfaces
The FX40 provides integrated control supervision and

network management services for one or more local
networks of field controllers. The FX40 monitors and
controls Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning
(HVAC); lighting, and other electrical systems to do the
following:
The FX40 includes multiple, embedded

communication interfaces, enabling the FX40 to
integrate many different types of field controllers, as
well as providing different methods of remote access.
The FX40s embedded communication interfaces
include the following:
provide system-wide coordination
1 Ethernet port: 10/100 Mbps
improve occupant comfort
1 RS-485 port
reduce energy usage
1 LONWORKS FTT-10A port
optimize operating efficiencies
1 RS-232 port or modem port
The FX40 organizes system information into displays,

reports, and graphics that users can access via a Web
browser.
Networking Protocols
The FX40 is housed in a durable, sheet metal

enclosure with built-in 120 VAC power supply. The
FX40s capacity and performance requirements make
it ideally suited for the following:
N2: embedded
LONWORKS: embedded
The FX40 supports multiple embedded and optional

networking drivers, including the following:
supervisory control of small- to large-sized

facilities
BACnet Master-Slave/Token-Passing (MS/TP):

embedded
distributed supervisory control within larger

facilities or between facilities
BACnet Internet Protocol (IP) Client (import):

embedded
BACnet IP Server (export): optional
ModBus Rooftop Unit (RTU) Client (import):

optional
ModBus RTU Server (export): optional
ModBus Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)

Client (import): optional
four form C Single-Pole, Double-Throw (SPDT)

relay outputs rated for 24 VAC/DC @ 2 Ampere
resistive each with Light-Emitting Diode (LED)
indication
ModBus TCP Server (export): optional
M-Bus
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
six universal inputs for 10k ohm type III

thermistors, 4-20 mA and 0-10 VDC active inputs,
or dry contact binary inputs
Z-Wave
Short Message Service (SMS)
Onboard Inputs and Outputs (I/Os)

The FX40 features 10 onboard inputs and outputs for
direct control over auxiliary devices such as
temperature and humidity sensors, pressure
transducers, alarm indicators, and energy meters.
The FX40 I/O complement includes:
FX40 Supervisory Controller Product Bulletin
Figure 2: Example of an FX40 Configuration
Building Automation Control

Features
The FX40 includes a full library of building automation
control features, including scheduling, alarming,
histories, energy management, totalizations, and
custom control logic. You can apply these features to
almost all data points regardless of their source.
Scheduling
Histories
The Histories feature (Figure 4) allows the FX40 to
collect, store, and display pertinent system data for
analysis. This may include control performance
indication, energy consumption, and system
troubleshooting. You can configure the FX40 to create
a history on any data point in the FX40 system
database. Histories are presented either graphically or
in a sortable table, and you can export the stored data
in a .txt, .pdf, or .csv format.
You can configure the FX40 to automate various

functions within a facility based on a time schedule.
Some examples include the following:
determining the expected occupancy periods
starting or stopping HVAC equipment
turning lights on and off
You can link any writable point in the FX40 system

database to a schedule. The scheduler interface
(Figure 3) provides a visually intuitive method for you
to configure the daily, weekly, and exception (holiday)
schedules.
Figure 4: Histories
Alarming
The Alarm feature (Figure 5) enables the FX40 to
initiate, route, and manage alarms and events
according to user-defined criteria. You can configure
the FX40 to generate alarms on any data point in the
FX40 system database. Each alarm record contains
valuable information, including the alarm and
return-to-normal time and date, time duration in current
state, text description, and alarm class.
Figure 3: Event Scheduling
You can classify alarms so that alarms with similar

characteristics are routed to common recipients. You
can also create multiple alarm classes to provide a
variety of alarm routing options such as to the
browser-based Alarm Console, e-mail, or both. Alarm
recipients have a variety of options to manage alarms,
including sorting, acknowledging, silencing, and
tagging.

The FX40s Web-based User Interface (Web UI)
provides system-wide monitoring and controlling
capability via a web browser (Figure 6). The Web UI
capability is embedded in every FX40. This allows
users to access the system via a Web browser over an
Ethernet Local Area Network (LAN), Internet, or
dial-up modem connection.
Figure 5: Alarm Console
You can format the Web UI according to specific user

preferences. The presentation of the information can
be as rich or as limited as needed to support a variety
of user types and interface hardware (computer,
Personal Digital Assistant [PDA], or cell phone). When
you design Web UI pages, you can choose from a full
library of symbols including the following:
HVAC equipment
Energy Management
duct work
The FX40 features several energy management

functions, which you can enable and configure,
including:
coils
piping
electrical demand limiting/load shedding
control devices (for example, dampers or valves)
optimized start/stop
free cooling determination
widgets (for example, buttons, tables, or

hyperlinks)
Totalization
Alternatively, you can include your own customized

graphics (for example, floorplan.jpg).
The Totalization feature allows the FX40 to

accumulate data on a point over a period of time. You
can add a totalization extension to any data point in
the FX40 system database to summarize runtime, to
accumulate change of state counts, or to summarize
dynamic analog data. Totalized data is presented in a
sortable table, and you can export it in a .txt, .pdf, or
.csv file format.
Customized Control Logic

The FX40 includes a library of control logic modules
that you can enable, configure, and link together to
create your own customized control routines. Some
examples of the available control logic modules
include the following:
Boolean logic (AND, OR, XOR, NOT)
comparative (greater than, less than, equal, not

equal)
mathematical (add, subtract, multiply, divide,

average, negative) sequencers
Proportional plus Integral plus Derivative (PID)

control
on/off control
Figure 6: Web-Based User Interface
FX Workbench
FX Workbench is a software application that allows
users to configure the FX40. FX Workbench is
embedded in every FX40 and is served up to Web
browsers of authorized users. In addition, you can
purchase FX Workbench as a separate software
application to reside on a computer.
Users can configure the FX40 online while directly or
remotely connected with FX Workbench.
FX Workbench includes many labor-saving
configuration features, such as the following:
online discovery of LONWORKS and BACnet

devices and points
online discovery of N2 devices with assisted

importing of N2 points
a check-box method to enable and disable points

and create point extensions, such as alarms,
histories, and totalizations
intuitive managers for grouping points, creating

master schedules, and linking points
a library of predefined systems, with associated

graphics, points list, and default features
Software Upgrades
Each FX40 includes a 1-year software maintenance
agreement. This agreement allows you to upgrade the
FX40 software with any new or interim service release
for 1 year from the date of purchase. Once the
software maintenance agreement expires, you can
order additional upgrades.
Table 1: FX40 Ordering Information

Part Number
Description
LP-FX4020A-0
FX40: includes 128 MB RAM, 32 MB Flash, 1 Ethernet port, 1 RS-485 port, 1 RS-232 port,
1 LONWORKS FT/TP-10 port, 6 universal inputs, 4 binary outputs, N2 driver, LONWORKS driver,
BACnet IP client driver, BACnet MS/TP driver, embedded FX Workbench, embedded Web UI, 1-year
software maintenance agreement
LP-FX4021A-0
FX40: includes 128 Mb RAM, 32 Mb Flash, 1 Ethernet port, 1 RS-485 port, 1 RS-232 port,
1 LONWORKS FT/TP-10 port, 6 universal inputs, 4 binary outputs, Niagara driver, N2 driver,
LONWORKS driver, BACnet IP client driver, BACnet IP server driver, BACnet MS/TP driver, embedded
FX Workbench, embedded Web UI, 1-year software maintenance agreement
LP-FX4022A-0
FX40: includes 128 Mb RAM, 32 Mb Flash, 1 Ethernet port, 1 RS-485 port, 1 modem, 1 LONWORKS
FT/TP-10 port, 6 universal inputs, 4 binary outputs, N2 driver, LONWORKS driver, BACnet IP client
driver, BACnet MS/TP driver, embedded FX Workbench, embedded Web UI, 1-year software
maintenance agreement
LP-FX4023A-0
FX40: includes 128 Mb RAM, 32 Mb Flash, 1 Ethernet port, 1 RS-485 port, 1 modem, 1 LONWORKS
FT/TP-10 port, 6 universal inputs, 4 binary outputs, N2 driver, LONWORKS driver, BACnet IP client
driver, BACnet IP server driver, BACnet MS/TP driver, embedded FX Workbench, embedded Web
UI, 1-year software maintenance agreement
Table 2: FX Workbench Ordering Information

Part Number
Description
LP-FXTSPE-0
FX Tools Supervisor Pro Software on CD-ROM: End-user version. Includes FX Workbench,

FX Workbench Pro, and FX Alarm Portal.
LP-FXTSPE-6
FX Tools Supervisor Pro Software Upgrade on CD-ROM. Used to upgrade any copy of FX Tools
Supervisor Pro which is within the software maintenance agreement period.
LP-FXALMPTL-0
LP-FXSWMA-0
LP-FXSWUPG-0
Table 3: FX40 Software Accessories Ordering Information

Part Number
Description
LP-FX40CN0-0
License enabling Enterprise Connectivity Station Pack (Niagara and BACnet IP server drivers) for
one FX40
LP-FXMDBRTU-0
License enabling ModBus RTU client (import) driver for one FX20/FX40/FX60
LP-FXMDBRTUS-0
License enabling ModBus RTU server (export) driver for one FX20/FX40/FX60
LP-FXMDBTCP-0
License enabling ModBus TCP client (import) driver for one FX20/FX40/FX60
LP-FXMDBTCPS-0
License enabling ModBus TCP server (export) driver for one FX20/FX40/FX60
LP-FXLONIP-0
LP-FXMBUS-0
LP-FXZWAV-0
LP-FXSNMP-0
LP-FXSMS-0
License enabling Simple Messaging Service driver (SMS) for one FX20/FX40/FX60
LP-FXSSL-0
LP-FX40MA-0
License enabling 1 year of annual software maintenance for one FX20/FX40/FX60. Includes new
releases and interim service releases for 1 year from the date of purchase.
LP-FX40UPG-0
Table 4: FX40 Replacement Parts Ordering Information

Part Number
Description
LP-KIT401A-0
Onboard modem
LP-KIT402A-0
Battery, 12 VDC, 1.2 AH
LP-KIT403A-0
FX40 Hardware Accessory Package, includes:

six 499 ohm, 0.6 W resistors
four 6-position I/O screw terminal connectors
one 3-position RS-485 screw terminal connector
two wire nuts
one LONWORKS 2-position screw terminal connector
LP-KIT407A-0
Battery/ground harness (also includes 6-position power connector)
LP-KIT408A-0
Adapter, RJ-45 to DB-9 null modem, for serial port to connect to Data Terminal Equipment (DTE)
device
LP-KIT409A-0
LP-KIT410A-0
LP-KIT411A-0
Table 5: FX40 Controller (Part 1 of 2)
Product Codes
LP-FX4020A-0, LP-FX4022A-0
Power Requirements
120 VAC, 50/60 Hz

25 VA maximum
Lead wires for hot/neutral (wire nut), stud for ground connection
Environmental
Operating Temperature: 32 to 122F (0 to 50C)

Storage Temperature: 32 to 158F (0 to 70C)
General
Motorola Reduced Instruction Set Computer (RISC) Processor @ 250 MHz

Facility Explorer Control Engine with direct I/O support objects
128 MB RAM, 32 MB flash for database backup
One 10/100 MB Ethernet RJ-45 connector
FCC Class A computing device
Wind River VxWorks Operating System with Jeode Java Virtual Machine
Facility Explorer Software with I/O control objects
Communications
One 10/100 Mb Ethernet portRJ-45 connection

One RJ-45 connector for RS-232 port
One RS-485 port (up to 57,600 baud)
One LONWORKS portFTT-10 with Weidmuller connector
Optional auto-dial/auto-answer 56k modem; RJ-11 connector (uses the RS-232 port when
installed)
Inputs/Outputs
Four form C SPDT relay outputs rated for 24 VAC/DC @ 2 ampere resistive
One LED indicator for each relay
Six Universal Inputs for 10k ohm Type III (10k 4A1-International) Thermistor, 4/20 mA
current loop, 0 to 10 volt, or dry contact
12-bit A/D converter
Thermistor Sensor Range: -10 to 135F (23.3 to 57.2C). Input accuracy is in the range of
1% of span, characteristic curve is customizable
0 10 volt or 4/20 mA accuracy is 2% of span, without user calibration. Uses an external
resistor for current input (four provided). Self-powered or board powered sensors
accepted.
Dry contacts (on UI) 20 Hz max. frequency (25 ms minimum pulse width) 3 V open circuit,
300 micro A short-circuit current
20 VDC @ 80 mA to drive 4/20 mA powered sensors.
24 VDC terminal and external resistor can be used if monitoring contacts that require
higher voltages or higher current.
All I/O uses screw terminals on 0.2 in. centers
Battery Backup
Provided for all onboard functions including I/O.

Monitored and trickle charged.
The battery maintains the processor operation through power failures for a predetermined
interval, then writes all data to flash memory, turns off the processor, and maintains the
clock for a minimum of 5 years.
Table 5: FX40 Controller (Part 2 of 2)

Chassis Housed in Metal
Enclosure
Intended for indoor wall mounting only

Dimensions: 11 x 14 x 2.5 in. (27.94 x 35.56 x 6.35 cm)
Weight: Net 4 lb (1.814 kg), gross 5 lb (2.268 kg)
Agency Listing
United States - UL Listed, File E107041, CCN PAZX, under UL 916, Energy
Canada - UL Listed, File E107041, CCN PAZX7, under CSA C22.2 No. 205, Signal
Equipment
Table 6: FX Workbench Requirements

Processor
Operating System
Web Browser

Netscape Navigator Version 4.5 or later
Memory
512 MB minimum
Hard Disk
Network Support
specifications, contact a Facility Explorer technical support resource. Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement
Industry Canada (IC) Statement
Building Efficiency
Johnson Controls is a registered trademarks of Johnson Controls, Inc.
10

te6001s
whole
1922230
9thcc:2-62
Electric
Sensors and Stats
Rev:
07/18/97
logo:
JCI
left ft:
elec
right ft:
standard
Sect# = 0
seQ# = 54
TE-6001 Series
Hardware Assemblies for TE-6000 Sensors

Description
Applications
TE-6001 hardware
assemblies are used in
conjunction with the
TE-6000 Series
elements in a wide
variety of temperaturesensing applications.
The TE-6001 assemblies used in

conjunction with the TE-6000 sensors
cover a wide range of sensing
applications including:
Selection Chart
Code
Number
Description
TE-6001-1
Duct temperature element holder with handi-box
TE-6001-2
Housing for outside air temperature sensing element
TE-6001-3
Packing nut and fittings for use with WZ-1000 wells in immersion
well applications
dew point
TE-6001-4
Repair Parts
Single/dual element holder for TE-6000 elements in room

temperature sensing applications
outside air
TE-6001-5
Dew point sensor kit
Replace the unit.
room
TE-6001-6
10 adhesive mounting pads for use with T-4100, T-4110
There are also two additional TE-6001

assemblies (TE-6001-961 and
TE-6001-962), which are available for
auxiliary pushbutton and toggle switch
applications.
TE-6001-7
10 clips for use with T-4002/4003 and H-4100/5100
TE-6001-8
Mounting bracket for use with TE-6100 and TE-6300 averaging

sensors
TE-6001-11
Duct temperature and humidity element holder (without the

handi-box)
duct
immersion
TE-6001-961 Momentary pushbutton switch

TE-6001-962 Maintained toggle switch
Accessories (T-4000 Plastic Covers For TE-6001-4)

Code Number
Description
Without setpoint window or thermometer, with JCI logo, silver faceplate
T-4000-2139
T-4000-2140
Horizontal
T-4000-2639
Without setpoint window, with F/C thermometer and JCI logo, silver faceplate
Concealed setpoint, without thermometer, with JCI logo, gold faceplate
T-4000-2640
Concealed setpoint, with thermometer and JCI logo, gold faceplate
T-4000-2138
Horizontal or Vertical
Without setpoint window, thermometer, or JCI logo, with silver faceplate
T-4000-2144
Vertical
Without setpoint window or thermometer, with JCI logo and silver faceplate
TE-6001-1 Description
The TE-6001-1 duct temperature element holder is used with TE-6000 elements
in duct insertion applications. The TE-6001-1 is designed to hold one or two
temperature sensors. A handi-box is supplied with the element holder.
TE-6001-1 Dimensions (in. / mm)

te60011.eps
9-3/16
233
4-3/16
106
2-3/16
55
te60011.tif
The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson
1/3

TE-6001 Series Hardware Assemblies for TE-6000 Sensors (Continued)

The TE-6001-2 is a metal housing used with the TE-6000 temperature element in
applications requiring outside air temperature sensing. A factory-mounted plastic
clip is provided to hold the TE-6000 sensor in place.
te60012.eps
1-5/16
33
te.tif
7/8
22
1-5/16
1-1/4
33
32
4-1/2
114
The TE-6001-3 packing nut, fittings, and handi-box are used

with WZ-1000-2, -4 and -5 immersion wells to house TE-6000
elements in well insertion applications.
te60013.eps
3/4
19
1-3/32
27.5
2-3/16
55
1-1/16
27
17/32
13.5
2-1/8
54
3/4
19
Knockouts For
1/2" Conduit
(Both Sides)
4-3/16
106 1-1/4
32
1-1/4
32
17/32
17/32
13.5
13.5
1-1/16
27
t360013.tif
1-1/4
32
1-1/4
32
1/4
6
Dia. Holes (4)
The TE-6001-4 temperature element holder is used with

TE-6000 sensors in room-sensing applications. The
TE-6001-4 can hold up to two temperature sensors. A
mounting bracket and wallplate adapter are supplied. A
T-4000 cover is required and must be ordered separately.
Refer to the Accessories table.
te60014.eps
1/16 in Allen
Head Screw
(Each Side)
2-3/32 2-3/4
70
53
3.25
83
1-13/16
46
1/8
3
Clearance Dimension. Allow 3-1/2

Each Side For Cover Screw
89
Removal With T-4000 Allen
Head Wrench
4-1/2
114
te60012.tif
2/3

TE-6001 Series Hardware Assemblies for TE-6000 Sensors (Continued)

6001f08.eps
The TE-6001-8 Mounting Bracket is used with the TE-6100
and TE-6300 averaging sensors to maintain the minimum
bend radius recommended for these sensors. It mounts to
duct work with a single sheet metal screw.
The TE-6001-11 duct temperature holder is used te60011.eps

with the TE-6000 sensors. It has a rigid aluminum
support that extends into the duct to hold one or two
2-13/32
TE-6000 temperature sensing elements.
61
1/2
13
9-3/16
233
1-1/2
38
1-1/2
38
te60111.eps
2-13/32
61
1
25
1/2
13
WARNING! pix on this table not really

on graphics holders, but on preceeding paragraph
1-1/2
38
1/2
13
1-1/2
38
te600111.tif
3/4
19
1
25
3/4
19
Installation of TE-6001-1
and -11
3/3
FANs 216, 125, 1628.3

Issue Date
TE-6001
0897
TE-6001 Hardware Assemblies

for TE-6000 Temperature Elements
TE-6001-2
TE-6001 Hardware Assemblies are used with

TE-6000 Temperature Elements in a wide variety of
applications. Hardware and elements are ordered
separately and field assembled, depending on the
application. Refer to TE-6000 Temperature Sensing
Elements Product Bulletin for a description of available
temperature sensors and TE-6100 Series Temperature
Sensors and Completed Sensor/Hardware Assemblies
Product/Technical Bulletin for available factory
assembled units.
TE-6001-3
TE-6001-1
TE-6001-11
TE-6001-6
TE-6001-4
TE-6001-7
Figure 1: TE-6001 Hardware Assemblies

Ease of Mounting
Some assemblies include plastic clips that

TE-6000 temperature elements snap easily into
Standard All Metal
Meets code requirements for metal

electrical boxes
Construction
Identical Replacements for

Many Existing Installations

Part No. 24-4034-34, Rev. C
Code No. LIT-216300
Permits maintenance of consistent installation

appearance
A pplications
TE-6001-1
TE-6001-2
The TE-6001-1 Duct Temperature Element Holder is

used with TE-6000 elements in duct insertion
applications. The TE-6001-1 is designed to hold
one or two temperature sensors. A handi-box is
supplied with the element holder.
The TE-6001-2 is a metal housing used with a

TE-6000 Temperature Element in applications
requiring outside air temperature sensing. A factory
mounted plastic clip is provided to hold the TE-6000
sensor in place.
1 -5/16
33
9-3 /1 6
2 33
7/8
22
4 -3 /16
10 6
1 -1/4
32
2 -3/1 6
55
Figure 2: TE-6001-1 Duct Insertion Element Holder

with Handi-box Dimensions (in./mm)
1 -5/1 6
33
4-1 /2
11 4
Figure 4: TE-6001-2 Dimensions (in./mm)

K no cko ut for
1/2 in. C on du it
(Top a nd B o tto m )
TE-6001-3
13 /1 6
2 0.5
1 -3/32
2 7.5
2 -3/1 6
55
1 -1/16
27
1 7/32
1 3 .5
K no cko uts for

1/2 in. C o nd uit
(B o th S id es)
1
25 .4
1 3/16
20 .5
1/2 1 4 N P T
13
1 -3/8
35
17 /32
13 .5
13 /1 6
2 0.5
1 3/1 6
2 0.5
1 3/16
2 0 .5
2-1 /8
54
The TE-6001-3 Handi-box (includes packing nut and

fittings) is used with WZ-1000-2, -4, and -5
Immersion Wells to house TE-6000 elements in well
insertion applications.
1 -1/1 6
27
4 -3/1 6
106
6-1 /2
16 5
13 /16
20 .5
1/2
13
5-1 /8
13 0
1 /4 H oles (4 )
6
Figure 3: TE-6001-1 and -3 Dimensions (in./mm)
5/8
16
Figure 5: WZ-1000-2 and -4

Dimensions (in./mm)
2 TE-6001 Hardware Assemblies for TE-6000 Temperature Elements Product/Technical Bulletin
7/8
22
Table 1: T-4000 Plastic Covers for

TE-6001-4 Assemblies
2 -5/16
59
4 -11 /1 6
11 9
2 -3/8
60
Product
Code
Number
1 /2 in .
14 NPT
Horizontal
T-4000-2139
without Setpoint Window or

Thermometer, with Johnson Controls
Logo, Silver Faceplate
T-4000-2140
without Setpoint Window, with F/C

Thermometer and Johnson Controls
T-4000-2639
Concealed Setpoint, without

Logo, Gold Faceplate
T-4000-2640
Concealed Setpoint, with

Thermometer and Johnson Controls
Logo, Gold Faceplate
19 /6 4
7 .5
3/8
9.5
Figure 6: WZ-1000-5 Dimensions (in./mm)
TE-6001-4
The TE-6001-4 Temperature Element Holder is used
with TE-6000 sensors in room temperature sensing
applications. The TE-6001-4 can hold up to
two temperature sensors. A mounting bracket and
wallplate adaptor are supplied.
Note:
T-4000-2144
1 /1 6 in.
A lle n-h e ad S crew
(E a ch S ide )
without Setpoint Window,

Thermometer, or Johnson Controls
without Setpoint Window or
TE-6001-5
The TE-6001-5 Dew Point Sensor Kit is used to seal
a TE-6000 1000 ohm sensor inside a Foxboro 2761
Dewcel. The kit consists of a packing nut adaptor,
packing gland, washer, and packing nut.
2 -3/4
70
3 -1 /8
79
C le ara nce : A llo w
3-1 /2 in . (8 9 m m ) ea ch
side fo r cove r scre w
rem o va l w ith
T-4 00 0 A llen w re nch.
4-1 /2
11 4
Horizontal or Vertical
T-4000-2138
Vertical
A T-4000 cover is required and must be

ordered separately. (See Table 1 for
ordering information.)
2-3 /32
53
Description
TE-6001-6
1 -1 3/1 6
46
1/8
3
TE-6001-6 Adhesive Mounting Pads are used to attach

TE-6000 sensors to T-4100 and T-4110 Pneumatic
Room Thermostats. This provides a means of
electronic temperature indication. (See Figure 1.)
TE-6001-7
TE-6001-7 Mounting Clips are used to attach
TE-6000 sensors to single setpoint T-4002 and
T-4003 thermostats, H-4100 humidistats, and
H-5100 humidity transmitters. This provides a
means of electronic temperature indication on
pneumatic room devices. (See Figure 1.)
TE-6001 Hardware Assemblies for TE-6000 Temperature Elements Product/Technical Bulletin 3
TE-6001-8
The TE-6001-8 Mounting Bracket is used with
TE-6100 and TE-6300 averaging sensors to maintain
the minimum bend radius recommended for these
sensors. It mounts to ductwork with a single sheet
metal screw.
3/4
19
1
1 /2 2 5
13
1 /2
13
1
25
1-1 /2
38
1 /2
13
1-1 /2
38
3/4
19
Figure 10: Hole Pattern for Installation

of TE-6001 -1 and -11 (in./mm)
TE-6001-961 and -962
TE-6001-11
The TE-6001-11 Duct Temperature Element Holder
is used with TE-6000 sensors. It has a rigid
aluminum support that extends in the duct to hold
one or two TE-6000 temperature sensing elements.
The TE-6001-961 Momentary Pushbutton Switch is

designed for use with the C210A-1 VAV Controller or
the C260A-1 Heat Pump Controller.
The TE-6001-962 Maintained Toggle Switch is used
with either networked or standalone controllers to
place the zone controller in the occupied mode. The
TE-6001-962 is wired directly to the unoccupied
terminal on the controller.
TE-6001-961 and -962 switches are used with either
the TE-6100-960 or TE-6100-961 room temperature
sensing assemblies, which must be ordered separately.
M ounting
TE-6001-1 and -11
The TE-6001-1 and -11 assemblies should be

attached to ducts with No. 6 sheet metal screws.
Both assemblies have factory mounted plastic clips
that TE-6000 temperature elements easily snap into.
Route element leads through the bracket opening.
TE-6001-2
The TE-6001-2 should be mounted where the effects
of sunlight and radiant heat are minimal. The
housing is threaded to fit 1/2 inch rigid conduit.
Seal-off fittings must be used to prevent
condensation on the element or in the housing.
TE-6001-3
The TE-6001-3 packing nut and fittings are used with
WZ-1000-2 and -5 wells. These wells are factory
filled with thermal compound for maximum
conductivity.
IMPORTANT:
Note:
To prevent condensation of
moisture in the well and failure of
the element, apply plumbers
putty or some other suitable
sealant (such as silicon rubber
sealant) around the packing nut
adaptor as well as the point
where the two sensor leads pass
through the adaptor.
See Figures 11 and 12 for proper positioning

of the TE-6000 sensor.
P a cking N ut
1 /2 in . N P S
S tar N ut
(S cre w tigh t
a ga in st
th rea d relie f
o n a da p tor.)
H an di-b ox
A d ap to r
G rey S p a ce r
T E -6 00 0
Te m pe ra ture
S en sor
S et S crew s
(Tig hte n on to
m a tin g groo ve
in ad ap to r.)
Im m e rsio n W e ll
W Z -10 00 -5
W a sh er
P a ckin g Glan d
TE -6 00 0
S e nsor
P a cking N ut
A da ptor
H a nd i-b ox
S pa nn er N ut
(S crew tig ht ag ainst
thre ad re lief on
p a ckin g nu t a da ptor.)
Figure 12: TE-6001-3 and WZ-1000-5 Assembly

(with TE-6000 Sensor)
TE-6001-4
Mount the TE-6001-4 assembly on a wall where air
is free to circulate around the elements, but away
from nonrepresentative air conditions such as drafts
or heat radiation. Mount the assembly 5 to 6 feet
(1.5 to 1.8 m) above the floor on a standard electrical
wallbox. Two factory mounted plastic clips are
provided to hold the TE-6000 elements. Route
element leads through the bracket opening. (See
Figure 13.)
W e ll A sse m b ly
W Z -10 00 -2 or -4
Figure 11: TE-6001-3 and WZ-1000-2, -4 Assembly

(with TE-6000 Sensor)
N o . 6 -32 x 1 /4 in .
Fla t-h ea d S crew s*
TE -6 0 01 -4 E le m en t
H o lde r w ith
TE -6 00 0 E le m en t
C on du it B ox
M o un tin g B ra cket*
T-4 00 0
C ove r
W a llpla te A d ap to r*
N o. 6-32 x 7/8 in.

P an -h ea d S crew s*
*S up plie d w ith TE -60 01 -4
Figure 13: TE-6001-4 Assembly Mounting Detail
TE-6001-5
To install the TE-6001-5 Dew Point Sensor Kit:
1. Moisten the Dewcel element with lithium chloride

salt upon initial installation or after washing of
the element.
2. Install the Dewcel in the duct, connect to
VQ-5000 power supply, and wait at least
20 minutes for the Dewcel to stabilize.
3. Install the TE-6000 sensor as shown in
Figure 14.
CAUTION: Equipment Damage Hazard.

Do not immediately insert the
TE-6000 sensor into the Dewcel
element. Temperatures in the
Dewcel cavity may initially rise
above the upper ambient
temperature limit of the
TE-6000 sensor, 250F (121C),
as the Dewcel attempts to reach
equilibrium temperature.
TE -6 00 0 -10 0
Tem pe ra ture S en so r
P a ckin g N ut A d ap to r*
P a ckin g G la nd *
W ash er*
D e w cel E lem e nt
P a cking N u t*
*A ll a re pa rt of
TE -60 00 kit.
W h ite L ea ds
of TE -60 00
P o w er S u pp ly
L e ad s
Figure 14: TE-6001-5 Foxboro Dewcel Assembly

TE-6001-6
TE-6001-961 and -962
A TE-6001-6 Adhesive Mounting Pad is used to

attach a TE-6000 sensor to a T-4100 thermostat.
When mounting, make certain that the sensor does
not restrict the setpoint adjustment.
The TE-6001-961 and -962 are furnished with a

No. 6-32 x 1/8 in. pan-head screw for mounting the
switches to the TE-6100-960 or -961. (See
Figure 15 for proper positioning of the TE-6001-961
and -962.) Depressing the pushbutton on the
TE-6001-961 connects blue to white/yellow.
On T-4110 thermostats, affix the sensor on the

mounting plate or on the aspirator cover if an
aspirator is used.
TE-6001-7
The TE-6001-7 Mounting Clips snap onto a
pneumatic controller on the side opposite the dial (on
side opposite test point for H-5100). (See Figure 1.)
Pull the TE-6000 element leads around the side of
the instrument and through the mounting bracket
opening. If a terminal connector is used on the
mounting bracket, route the leads through the slot at
the bottom of the connector or through the unused
hole of the connector if a 3-pipe controller is not
used. If a wallbox is used, the leads may also be run
through a spare hole in the bracket itself.
Pushing the TE-6001-962 toggle switch to the right

(front view) connects white/yellow to blue, and
pushing the switch to the left connects blue to
white/orange.
W iring
!
TE-6001-8
Attach the TE-6001-8 Mounting Bracket to ducts with
a No. 6 sheet metal screw. (See Figure 8.)
Th e T E -6 00 1-96 1 (sh ow n )
o r TE -60 01 -9 62 S w itch K it fo r use
w ith TE -61 00 -96 0 an d -96 1
h as to b e ord e red sep ara te ly.

Check all wiring connections
before applying power to the
system. Short circuited or
improperly connected wires
will result in permanent
damage to the equipment.

regulations.
N o . 6 -3 2 x 1 /4 in .
F la t-h ea d S crew s
C o nd uit B ox
Room
S e nsin g E le m en t
A sse m bly
M ou ntin g B racket
T-4 00 0
C ove r
W a llplate A da pto r
N o . 6 -32 x 7 /8 in .
P a n -he ad S cre w s
Figure 15: TE-6100-960 and -961 Mounting Detail

(with TE-6001-961 Switch)
Table 2: Dewcel to Dew Point

Temperatures
Dewcel
Temperature
F
93
34
99
Resistance
(ohms)
Table 3: Models
TE-6001Dew Point
Temperature
Description
Duct Temperature Element Holder

with Handi-box
Housing for Outside Air Temperature

Sensing Element
Handi-box, Packing Nut, and Fittings

for Use with WZ-1000 Wells
Single/Dual Element Holder for TE-6000

Elements in Room Temperature Sensing
Applications
1069
30
-1
37
1087
35
106
41
1108
40
112
44
1127
45
119
48
1149
50
10
127
53
1174
55
13
Dew Point Sensor Kit
134
57
1196
60
16
141
61
1219
65
18
Ten Adhesive Mounting Pads for Use with

T-4100, T-4110
149
65
1245
70
21
Ten Clips for Use with T-4002/4003 and

H-4100/5100
156
69
1268
75
24
163
73
1291
80
27
Mounting Bracket for Use with TE-6100 and

TE-6300 Averaging Sensors
171
77
1318
85
29
11
179
82
1345
90
32
Duct Temperature Element Holder

(Less Handi-box)
188
87
1375
95
35
961
Momentary Pushbutton Switch
196
91
1403
100
38
962
Maintained Toggle Switch
Specifications
Product
Shipping Weight
TE-6001 Hardware Assemblies for TE-6000 Temperature Elements

TE-6001-1:
TE-6001-2:
TE-6001-3:
TE-6001-4:
TE-6001-5:
TE-6001-6:
TE-6001-7:
TE-6001-8:
TE-6001-11:
TE-6001-961:
TE-6001-962:
1.3 lb (0.590 kg)

0.5 lb (0.227 kg)
1.0 lb (0.454 kg)
0.5 lb (0.227 kg)
0.3 lb (0.136 kg)
0.2 lb (0.091 kg)
0.2 lb (0.091 kg)
0.8 lb (0.363 kg)
0.7 lb (0.318 kg)
0.5 lb (0.227 kg)
0.2 lb (0.091 kg)
Controls Group
P.O. Box 423
Milwaukee, WI 53201
Printed in U.S.A.

TEC26x6(H)-2 Series BACnet MS/TP Networked Thermostats with Two

Outputs, Dehumidification Capability, and Three Speeds of Fan Control
Description
Features
The TEC26x6(H)-2 Series Thermostats are

BACnet Master-Slave/Token-Passing
(MS/TP) networked devices that provide
control of two- or four-pipe fan coils, cabinet
unit heaters, or other equipment using on/off,
floating, or proportional 0 to 10 VDC control
input, three speeds of fan control, and
dehumidification capability. The
technologically advanced
TEC26x6(H)-2 Series Thermostats feature a
Building Automation System (BAS) BACnet
MS/TP communication capability that enables
remote monitoring and programmability for
efficient space temperature control. Specific
models are available to accommodate
commercial and hospitality applications.
The TEC26x6(H)-2 Series Thermostats

feature an intuitive user interface with backlit
display that makes setup and operation quick
and easy. The thermostats also employ a
unique, Proportional-Integral (PI)
time-proportioning algorithm that virtually
eliminates temperature offset associated with
traditional, differential-based thermostats.
Refer to the TEC26x6(H)-2 Series BACnet
MS/TP Networked Thermostats with Two
Outputs, Dehumidification Capability, and
Three Speeds of Fan Control Product Bulletin
BACnet MS/TP communication provides

compatibility with a proven communication
network; BACnet MS/TP is widely accepted
by Heating, Ventilating, and Air
Conditioning (HVAC) control suppliers
integral humidity sensing capability
(dehumidification models) increases
occupancy comfort by providing
dehumidification
backlit Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
offers real-time control status of the
environment in easy-to-read, English plain
text messages with constant backlight that
brightens during user interaction
on/off, floating, or proportional 0 to 10 VDC
control offers additional application
flexibility by providing more advanced
control signals
three speeds of fan control provide easy
FAN speed selection via the interface key,
to meet the application requirements
override interface key (commercial
models) allows easy access for
temporarily overriding the unoccupied
mode
temperature scale selector key (hospitality
models) offers guests the ability to select
a Fahrenheit (F) or Celsius (C)
temperature scale display
simplified setpoint adjustment enables
the user to change the setpoint by simply
pressing the UP/DOWN arrow keys
two configurable binary inputs provide
additional inputs for advanced functions
such as remote night setback, service or
filter alarms, motion detector, and window
status
TEC26x6-2 Series BACnet MS/TP

Networked Thermostat with Two
Outputs, Dehumidification Capability,
and Three Speeds of Fan Control
over 20 configurable parameters enable

the thermostat to adapt to any application,
allowing installer parameter access without
opening the thermostat cover
discharge air sensor monitors unit
efficiency
Repair Information
If the TEC26x6(H)-2 Series Thermostat fails to
operate within its specifications, replace the
unit. For a replacement thermostat, contact
the nearest Johnson Controls
representative.
Selection Chart
Code Number
Control Outputs
Fan Control
Dehumidification
Capability
Application
TEC2616-2
Two On/Off
Three Speeds
No
Commercial Market
TEC2616H-2
Two On/Off
Three Speeds
No
Hospitality Market
Commercial Market
TEC2626-2
Two On/Off or Floating
Three Speeds
No
TEC2626H-2
Three Speeds
No
Hospitality Market
TEC2636-2
Three Speeds
Yes
Commercial Market
Hospitality Market
TEC2636H-2
Three Speeds
Yes
TEC2646-2
Two Proportional 0 to 10 VDC
Three Speeds
No
Commercial Market
TEC2646H-2
Three Speeds
No
Hospitality Market
TEC2656-2
Three Speeds
Yes
Commercial Market
TEC2656H-2
Three Speeds
Yes
Hospitality Market
1 of 3
TEC26x6(H)-2 Series BACnet MS/TP Networked Thermostats with Two Outputs,

Dehumidification Capability, and Three Speeds of Fan Control (Continued)
4-15/16
(125)
Room Temp
70.0F
MODE
FAN
1-1/8
(29)
FIG:dmnsns
3-3/8
(86)
Thermostat Dimensions, in. (mm)
Accessories
Code Number
Description
SEN-600-1
Remote Indoor Air Temperature Sensor
TE-6361M-11
Duct Mount Air Temperature Sensor
SEN-600-4
Remote Indoor Air Temperature Sensor with Occupancy Override and Light-Emitting Diode (LED)
TE-636S-1
Strap-Mount Temperature Sensor
MS-BACEOL-0
R485 End-of-Line Terminator
1. Additional TE-63xx-x Series 10k ohm Johnson Controls Type II Thermistor Sensors are available; refer to the TE-6300 Series Temperature Sensors
Product Bulletin (LIT-216320) for more details.
2 of 3

TEC26x6(H)-2 Series BACnet MS/TP Networked Thermostats with Two Outputs, Dehumidification Capability, and
Three Speeds of Fan Control
Power Requirements
19 to 30 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 2 VA (Terminals 4 and 5) at 24 VAC Nominal,

Class 2 or Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV)
Relay/Triac
Contact Rating
On/Off and Floating Control
30 VAC, 1.0 A Maximum, 15 mA Minimum, 3.0 A In-Rush, Class 2 or SELV
Analog Output Rating
0 to 10 VDC into 2k ohm Resistance (Minimum)
Fan Relay Output Rating

Auxiliary Output Rating
30 VAC, 1.0 A Maximum, 3.0 A In-Rush

Triac Output
Digital Inputs
Voltage-Free Contacts across Terminal Scom to Terminals BI1, BI2, or UI3
Temperature Sensor Type
Local 10k ohm Negative Temperature Coefficient (NTC) Thermistor
Wire Size
18 AWG (1.0 mm Diameter) Maximum, 22 AWG (0.6 mm Diameter) Recommended
MS/TP Network Guidelines

Temperature Range
Accuracy
32 Devices Maximum; 4,000 ft (1,219 m) Maximum Cable Length

Backlit Display
-40.0F/-40.0C to 122.0F/50.0C in 0.5 Increments
Heating Control
40.0F/4.5C to 90.0F/32.0C
Cooling Control
54.0F/12.0C to 100.0F/38.0C
Temperature
0.9F/0.5C at 70.0F/21.0C Typical Calibrated
Humidity
5% RH from 20 to 80% RH at 50 to 90F (10 to 32C)
Minimum Deadband
Ambient Conditions
Compliance
2F/1C between Heating and Cooling

Operating
32 to 122F (0 to 50C); 95% RH Maximum, Noncondensing
Storage
United States
UL Listed, File E27734, CCN XAPX,

Under UL 873, Temperature Indicating and Regulating Equipment
FCC Compliant to CFR 47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class A
Canada
UL Listed, File E27734, CCN XAPX7,

Under CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 24, Temperature Indicating and Regulating Equipment
Industry Canada, ICES-003
Shipping Weight
Europe
Australia and New Zealand

0.75 lb (0.34 kg)
3 of 3

Issued February 5, 2007
TEC2645-2 BACnet MS/TP Networked Thermostat with

Single Proportional Output and One-Speed Fan Control
Description
Features
The TEC2645-2 Thermostat is a BACnet

Master-Slave/Token-Passing (MS/TP)
networked device that provides control of
two-pipe fan coils, cabinet unit heaters, or
other equipment using a proportional
0 to 10 VDC control input and one-speed fan
control. The technologically advanced
TEC2645-2 Thermostat features a Building
Automation System (BAS) BACnet MS/TP
communication capability that enables remote
monitoring and programmability for efficient
space temperature control.
The TEC2645-2 Thermostat features an

intuitive user interface with backlit display that
makes setup and operation quick and easy.
The thermostat also employs a unique,
Proportional-Integral (PI) control algorithm that
virtually eliminates temperature offset
associated with traditional, differential-based
thermostats.
Refer to the TEC2645-2 BACnet MS/TP
Networked Thermostat with Single
Proportional Output and One-Speed Fan
Control Product Bulletin (LIT-12011113) for

network; BACnet MS/TP is widely
accepted by Heating, Ventilating, and Air
environment in easy-to-read, plain text
messages with constant backlight that
proportional 0 to 10 VDC control offers
additional application flexibility by providing
more advanced control signals
override interface key allows easy access
for temporarily overriding the unoccupied
mode
status
TEC2645-2 BACnet MS/TP Networked

Thermostat with Single Proportional
Output and One-Speed Fan Control
Repair Information
If the TEC2645-2 Thermostat fails to operate
within its specifications, refer to the
TEC2645-2 BACnet MS/TP Networked
Thermostat with Single Proportional Output
and One-Speed Fan Control Installation
Instructions (Part No. 24-9890-226) for
troubleshooting details. For a replacement
thermostat, contact the nearest
Selection Chart
TEC2645-2
Applications
Networked BACnet MS/TP, Two-Pipe, Proportional

Control of Two-Pipe Fan Coils, Cabinet Unit Heaters, or Other Equipment Using a
0 to 10 VDC Control Output, and One-Speed Fan Control Proportional 0 to 10 VDC Control Input and One-Speed Fan Control
Thermostat
Accessories
TE-636M-11
SEN-600-4

Remote Indoor Air Temperature Sensor with Occupancy Override and LED
TE-636S-1
MS-BACEOL-0
RS485 End-of-Line Terminator
1. Additional TE-636xx-x Series 10k ohm Johnson Controls Type II Thermistor Sensors are available; refer to the TE-6300 Series Temperature Sensors Product
2. Only the occupancy override function can be accomplished using the SEN-600-4 with the TEC2645-2.
1 of 2
TEC2645-2 BACnet MS/TP Networked Thermostat with Single Proportional Output

and One-Speed Fan Control (Continued)
4-15/16
(125)
Room Temp
70.0F
MODE
FAN
1-1/8
(29)
FIG:dmnsns
3-3/8
(86)
TEC2645-2 BACnet MS/TP Networked Thermostat with Single Proportional Output and One-Speed Fan Control
Power Requirements



Triac Output
Digital Inputs
Wire Size
BACnet Standard
32 Devices Maximum; 4,000 ft Maximum
Resolution
0.2F/0.1C
Accuracy
Temperature Range

Backlit Display
-40.0F/-40.0C to 122.0F/50.0C
Heating Control
40.0F/4.5C to 90.0F/32.0C in 0.5 Increments
Cooling Control
Minimum Deadband
Ambient Conditions
Compliance

Operating
Storage
United States

Canada

Under CSA C22.2 No. 24, Temperature Indicating and Regulating Equipment
Shipping Weight
European Union

0.75 lb (0.34 kg)
2 of 2


Outputs, Dehumidification Capability, and Three Speeds of Fan Control
Description
Features

BACnet Master-Slave/Token-Passing
(MS/TP) networked devices that provide
input, three speeds of fan control, and
dehumidification capability. The
Building Automation System (BAS) BACnet
MS/TP communication capability that enables
remote monitoring and programmability for
efficient space temperature control. Specific
models are available to accommodate

Refer to the TEC26x6(H)-2 Series BACnet
MS/TP Networked Thermostats with Two

network; BACnet MS/TP is widely accepted
by Heating, Ventilating, and Air
dehumidification
control signals
FAN speed selection via the interface key,
to meet the application requirements
override interface key (commercial
models) allows easy access for
temporarily overriding the unoccupied
mode
temperature scale selector key (hospitality
status
TEC26x6-2 Series BACnet MS/TP

Networked Thermostat with Two
Outputs, Dehumidification Capability,

efficiency
Repair Information
representative.
Selection Chart
Code Number
Control Outputs
Fan Control
Dehumidification
Capability
Application
TEC2616-2
Two On/Off
Three Speeds
No
Commercial Market
TEC2616H-2
Two On/Off
Three Speeds
No
Hospitality Market
Commercial Market
TEC2626-2
Three Speeds
No
TEC2626H-2
Three Speeds
No
Hospitality Market
TEC2636-2
Three Speeds
Yes
Commercial Market
Hospitality Market
TEC2636H-2
Three Speeds
Yes
TEC2646-2
Three Speeds
No
Commercial Market
TEC2646H-2
Three Speeds
No
Hospitality Market
TEC2656-2
Three Speeds
Yes
Commercial Market
TEC2656H-2
Three Speeds
Yes
Hospitality Market
1 of 3

4-15/16
(125)
Room Temp
70.0F
MODE
FAN
1-1/8
(29)
FIG:dmnsns
3-3/8
(86)
Accessories
Code Number
Description
SEN-600-1
TE-6361M-11
SEN-600-4
TE-636S-1
MS-BACEOL-0
R485 End-of-Line Terminator
1. Additional TE-63xx-x Series 10k ohm Johnson Controls Type II Thermistor Sensors are available; refer to the TE-6300 Series Temperature Sensors
Product Bulletin (LIT-216320) for more details.
2 of 3

TEC26x6(H)-2 Series BACnet MS/TP Networked Thermostats with Two Outputs, Dehumidification Capability, and
Power Requirements

Relay/Triac
Contact Rating


Triac Output
Digital Inputs
Wire Size

Temperature Range
Accuracy

Backlit Display
Heating Control
40.0F/4.5C to 90.0F/32.0C
Cooling Control
54.0F/12.0C to 100.0F/38.0C
Temperature
Humidity
Minimum Deadband
Ambient Conditions
Compliance

Operating
Storage
United States

Canada

Shipping Weight
Europe

0.75 lb (0.34 kg)
3 of 3
TEC26x6(H)-2 Series BACnet MS/TP Networked Thermostats

with Two Outputs, Dehumidification Capability, and Three
Speeds of Fan Control
Product Bulletin
The TEC26x6(H)-2 Series Thermostats are BACnet
Master-Slave/Token-Passing (MS/TP) networked
devices that provide control of two- or four-pipe fan
coils, cabinet unit heaters, or other equipment using
on/off, floating, or proportional 0 to 10 VDC control
input, three speeds of fan control, and dehumidification
capability. The technologically advanced
TEC26x6(H)-2 Series Thermostats feature a Building
monitoring and programmability for efficient space
temperature control. Specific models are available to
accommodate commercial and hospitality applications.
The TEC26x6(H)-2 Series Thermostats feature an
intuitive user interface with backlit display that makes
setup and operation quick and easy. The thermostats
also employ a unique, Proportional-Integral (PI)
time-proportioning algorithm that virtually eliminates
temperature offset associated with traditional,
differential-based thermostats.
Figure 1: TEC26x6-2 Series

BACnet MS/TP Networked Thermostat with
Two Outputs, Dehumidification Capability, and

Feature
Benefit
BACnet MS/TP Communication
Provides compatibility with a proven communication network;

BACnet MS/TP is widely accepted by Heating, Ventilating, and Air
Integral Humidity Sensing Capability

(Dehumidification Models)
Increases occupancy comfort by providing dehumidification
Backlit Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
Offers real-time control status of the environment in easy-to-read,

English plain text messages with constant backlight that brightens during
user interaction
On/Off, Floating, or Proportional 0 to 10 VDC

Control
Offers additional application flexibility by providing more advanced control

signals
Provide easy FAN speed selection via the interface key, to meet the
application requirements
Override Interface Key

(Commercial Models)
Allows easy access for temporarily overriding the unoccupied mode
Temperature Scale Selector Key

(Hospitality Models)
Offers guests the ability to select a Fahrenheit (F) or Celsius (C)

Simplified Setpoint Adjustment
Enables the user to change the setpoint by simply pressing the

UP/DOWN arrow keys
Two Configurable Binary Inputs
Provide additional inputs for advanced functions such as remote night

setback, service or filter alarms, motion detector, and window status

Outputs, Dehumidification Capability, and Three Speeds of Fan Control Product
Bulletin

Feature
Benefit
Over 20 Configurable Parameters
Enable the thermostat to adapt to any application, allowing installer

parameter access without opening the thermostat cover
Discharge Air Sensor
Monitors unit efficiency
Product Overview
The TEC26x6(H)-2 Series Thermostats are specifically
designed for networked control of common two- or
four-pipe heating and cooling equipment using on/off,
floating, or proportional 0 to 10 VDC control. In addition
to superior temperature control and application
flexibility, the TEC26x6(H)-2 Series features
BACnet MS/TP communication capability, allowing the
user to view operation or make adjustments from a
remote workstation. Plain text menus, backlit display,
and five interface keys make setup and operation quick
and easy.
IMPORTANT: The TEC26x6(H)-2 Series
Thermostats are intended to provide an input to
Where failure or malfunction of the thermostat could
lead to personal injury or property damage to the
failure or malfunction of the thermostat.
Five Easy-to-Use Interface Keys

Allow for easy commissioning of the thermostat,
and eliminate the need for DIP switches.
Six Levels of Keypad Lockout

Provide six levels of keypad lockout that can be
set up through the Installer Configuration Menu.
Accessible Configuration Parameters

Allow local access to all configurable parameters
while limiting unwanted parameter tampering once
the thermostat is set up.
Three Light-Emitting Diodes (LEDs)

Provide fan, heating, and cooling status at a
glance.
Adjustable Temporary Occupancy Time

Adjusts the temporary occupancy time from
0 to 24 hours.
Auxiliary Contact
Provides 24 VAC control for reheat, lighting, and
other auxiliary functions.
Adjustable Heating/Cooling Cycles per Hour

(On/Off Control)
Configurable for the maximum number of heating
and cooling cycles (4 to 8 cycles maximum) in a
1-hour period, balancing temperature control and
equipment cycling.
Nonvolatile Electrically Erasable

Programmable Read-Only Memory (EEPROM)
Prevents loss of adjusted parameters during a
power failure.
Remote Access
Allows the user to read/write and access the
parameters of the thermostat via a supervisory
controller.
Additional Features
The TEC26x6(H)-2 Series Thermostats offer many
other features, including:
Adjustable Heating/Cooling Deadband

Adjusts the minimum heating/cooling deadband
from 2.0F/1.0C to 5.0F/2.5C.
Remote Indoor Sensing

Accommodates remote indoor sensors. Up to
three indoor sensors can be averaged.
TEC26x6(H)-2 Series BACnet MS/TP Networked Thermostats with Two Outputs, Dehumidification
Capability, and Three Speeds of Fan Control Product Bulletin
Table 2: Thermostat Models

Code Number
Control Outputs
Fan Control
Dehumidification
Capability
Application
TEC2616-2
Two On/Off
Three Speeds
No
Commercial Market
TEC2616H-2
Two On/Off
Three Speeds
No
Hospitality Market
TEC2626-2
Three Speeds
No
Commercial Market
TEC2626H-2
Three Speeds
No
Hospitality Market
TEC2636-2
Three Speeds
Yes
Commercial Market
TEC2636H-2
Three Speeds
Yes
Hospitality Market
TEC2646-2
Three Speeds
No
Commercial Market
TEC2646H-2
Three Speeds
No
Hospitality Market
TEC2656-2
Three Speeds
Yes
Commercial Market
TEC2656H-2
Three Speeds
Yes
Hospitality Market

Code Number
Description
SEN-600-1
TE-6361M-11
SEN-600-4
TE-636S-1
MS-BACEOL-0
Additional TE-63xx-x Series 10k ohm Johnson Controls Type II Thermistor Sensors are available; refer to the
TE-6300 Series Temperature Sensors Product Bulletin (LIT-216320) for more details.
Room Temp
70.0F
Backlit, plain text

LCD is easy to read
in any condition.
MODE
FAN
LEDs indicate
system activity.
Five keys on the thermostat

make operation easy and intuitive.
FIG:frnt_vw
1.
Figure 2: Front Cover of Thermostat
4-15/16
(125)
Room Temp
70.0F
MODE
FAN
1-1/8
(29)
FIG:dmnsns
3-3/8
(86)
Figure 3: Thermostat Dimensions, in. (mm)
Thermostat User Interface Keys
The TEC26x6(H)-2 Series Thermostats user interface

consists of five keys on the front cover (as illustrated in
Figure 2). The function of each key is as follows:
Backlit LCD
MODE key toggles among the system modes

available, as defined by selecting the appropriate
operation sequence in the Installer Configuration
Menu (for example Off, Heat, Cool, Auto).
FAN key toggles among the fan modes available,

as defined by selecting the appropriate fan menu
options defined in the Installer Configuration Menu
(for example Low, Med, High, Auto).
UP/DOWN arrow keys change the configuration

parameters and activate a setpoint adjustment.
The TEC26x6(H)-2 Series Thermostats include a

2-line, 8-character backlit display. Low-level
backlighting is present during normal operation, and it
brightens when any user interface key is pressed. The
backlight returns to low level when the thermostat is left
unattended for 45 seconds.
LEDs
Three LEDs are included to indicate the fan status, call
for heat, or call for cooling:
OVERRIDE key (commercial models) overrides

the unoccupied mode to occupied at the local user
interface for the specified TOccTime. (TOccTime is
defined by selecting the appropriate time period in
the Installer Configuration Menu.) The OVERRIDE
key also allows access to the Installer
Configuration Menu. (See the Installer
Configuration Menu section.)
The FAN LED is on when the fan is on.
The HEAT LED is on when heating or reheat is on.
The COOL LED is on when cooling is on.
Note: If one of the binary inputs is configured to

operate as a remote override contact, this
OVERRIDE key is disabled.
Status Display Menu
Installer Configuration Menu
C/F key (hospitality models) changes the

temperature scale to either Celsius or Fahrenheit
and allows access to the Installer Configuration
Menu. (See the Installer Configuration Menu
section.)
Menu Overview
There are two menus available to view and configure
the TEC26x6(H)-2 Series Thermostat:
The following sections outline the functions and

contents of each menu.
Status Display Menu
Pipe No.
The Status Display Menu is displayed during normal

thermostat operation. This menu continuously scrolls
through the following parameters:
Sequence of Operation
Fan Menu
Room Temperature (All Models) and Humidity

(TEC2636-2, TEC2636H-2, TEC2656-2, and
TEC2656H-2 Models)
Dehumidification Network Lockout

System Mode
Dehumidification Setpoint (Dehumidification

Models)
Occupancy Status
(Occupied/Unoccupied/Override)
Dehumidification Hysteresis (Dehumidification

Models)
Applicable Alarms (The backlight lights up as an

alarm condition is displayed.)
Maximum Dehumidification Cooling Output

Unoccupied Heating Setpoint/Unoccupied Cooling

Setpoint
Maximum Heating Setpoint/Minimum Cooling

Setpoint
The Installer Configuration Menu is used to set up the

thermostat for an application-specific operation. To
access the menu, press and hold the center key for
approximately 8 seconds.
Setpoint Type
Temporary Occupancy Time
Door Open Time
The Installer Configuration Menu includes the following

parameters that are accessed by pressing the same
center key:
Heating/Cooling Deadband
Room Air Temperature Calibration
MS/TP Communication Address
BI1 and BI2 Input Configuration
Room Humidity Calibration (Dehumidification

Models)
UI3 Input Configuration to Locally Monitor Supply

Air Temperature or Hot/Cold Water Changeover
Switching
Auxiliary Configuration
Floating Time (Floating Models)
Note: An option is available within the Installer

Configuration Menu to lock out the scrolling display and
show only the Room Temperature parameter.
Cycles per Hour (On/Off Models)
Menu Scroll
Direct/Reverse Acting
Auto Mode
Reheat Time
F and C Temperature Scales (Commercial

Models)
Repair Information
% RH Display (Dehumidification Models)
Six Keypad Lockout Levels
If the TEC26x6(H)-2 Series Thermostat fails to operate

within its specifications, replace the unit. For a
replacement thermostat, contact the nearest
Dehumidification Capability, and Three Speeds of Fan Control
Power Requirements
19 to 30 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 2 VA (Terminals 4 and 5) at 24 VAC Nominal, Class 2 or

Relay/Triac
Contact
Rating
On/Off and
Floating
Control
Analog
Output Rating
Proportional
Control
Auxiliary
Output Rating
Triac Output
Digital Inputs
Wire Size
Temperature
Range
Backlit
Display
Heating
Control
40.0F/4.5C to 90.0F/32.0C
Cooling
Control
54.0F/12.0C to 100.0F/38.0C
Temperature
Humidity
Accuracy
Minimum Deadband
Ambient
Conditions
Operating
Storage
Compliance
United States

Canada

Europe
Australia and
New Zealand
Shipping Weight
0.75 lb (0.34 kg)
United States Emissions Compliance:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These
limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when this equipment is operated in a commercial
environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause
harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his/her own expense.
Canadian Emissions Compliance:
Cet appareil numrique de la Classe (A) respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouiller du Canada.
Controls Group
Milwaukee, WI 53202
Published in U.S.A.
TEC2645-2 BACnet MS/TP Networked Thermostat with

Product Bulletin
Issued February 5, 2007

The TEC2645-2 Thermostat is a BACnet

device that provides control of two-pipe fan coils,
cabinet unit heaters, or other equipment using a
proportional 0 to 10 VDC control input and one-speed
fan control. The technologically advanced
TEC2645-2 Thermostat features a Building Automation
System (BAS) BACnet MS/TP communication
capability that enables remote monitoring and
programmability for efficient space temperature control.
The TEC2645-2 Thermostat features an intuitive user
interface with backlit display that makes setup and
operation quick and easy. The thermostat also employs
a unique, Proportional-Integral (PI) control algorithm
that virtually eliminates temperature offset associated
with traditional, differential-based thermostats.
Figure 1: TEC2645-2 BACnet MS/TP Networked
and One-Speed Fan Control
Features
Benefits

Offers real-time control status of the environment in easy-to-read, plain

text messages with constant backlight that brightens during user
interaction
Proportional 0 to 10 VDC Control

signals

UP/DOWN arrow keys


TEC2645-2 BACnet MS/TP Networked Thermostat with Single Proportional

Output and One-Speed Fan Control Product Bulletin
Product Overview
The TEC2645-2 Thermostat is specifically designed for
networked control of common two-pipe heating and
cooling equipment using a proportional control input. In
addition to superior temperature control and application
flexibility, the TEC2645-2 features BACnet MS/TP
communication capability, allowing the user to view
operation or make adjustments from a remote
workstation. Plain text menus, backlit display, and five
interface keys make setup and operation quick and
easy.
IMPORTANT: The TEC2645-2 Thermostat is
intended to provide an input to equipment under
malfunction of the thermostat could lead to personal
injury or property damage to the controlled
Incorporate and maintain other devices such as




glance.

0 to 24 hours.
Auxiliary Contact

power failure.
Remote Access
controller.
Additional Features
The TEC2645-2 Thermostat offers many other
features, including:

from 2.0F/1.0C to 5.0F/2.5C.

Code Number
Description
Applications
TEC2645-2
Networked BACnet MS/TP, Two-Pipe, Proportional

0 to 10 VDC Control Output, and One-Speed
Fan Control Thermostat
Control of Two-Pipe Fan Coils, Cabinet Unit

Heaters, or Other Equipment Using a
Proportional 0 to 10 VDC Control Input and
One-Speed Fan Control

Code Number
Description
TE-636M-11
SEN-600-42
TE-636S-1
MS-BACEOL-0
1.
2.
Only the occupancy override function can be accomplished using the SEN-600-4 with the TEC2645-2.
TEC2645-2 BACnet MS/TP Networked Thermostat with Single Proportional Output and One-Speed Fan
Control Product Bulletin
Room Temp
70.0F
MODE
LEDs indicate
system activity.
FAN
FIG:frnt_vw
Backlit, plain text

LCD is easy to read
in any condition.

4-15/16
(125)
Room Temp
70.0F
MODE
FAN
1-1/8
(29)
FIG:dmnsns
3-3/8
(86)
Menu Overview
The TEC2645-2 Thermostat user interface consists of

five keys on the front cover (as illustrated in Figure 2).
The function of each key is as follows:

the TEC2645-2 Thermostat:

Status Display Menu

FAN key toggles between ON and AUTO for fan

control. ON energizes the fan all the time and
AUTO operates the fan only on a call for heating or
cooling, for both occupied and unoccupied periods.
Status Display Menu
OVERRIDE key overrides the unoccupied mode to

occupied at the local user interface for the
specified TOccTime. (TOccTime is defined by
selecting the appropriate time period in the Installer
Configuration Menu.) The OVERRIDE key also
allows access to the Installer Configuration Menu.
(See the Installer Configuration Menu section.)
Room Temperature
System Mode
Occupancy Status
Applicable Alarms The backlight lights up as an

alarm condition is displayed.

-
The Installer Configuration Menu is accessed

by pressing and holding the OVERRIDE key
for approximately 8 seconds. Once the Installer
Configuration Menu begins, release and press
the OVERRIDE key to scroll through the
Installer Configuration Menu options.




center key:

Switching
Menu Scroll

Auto Mode
F and C Temperature Scales

Setpoint

Setpoint
The TEC2645-2 Thermostat includes a 2-line,

8-character backlit display. Low-level backlighting is
present during normal operation, and it brightens when
any user interface key is pressed. The backlight returns
to low level when the thermostat is left unattended for
45 seconds.
Light-Emitting Diodes (LEDs)
Setpoint Type
Repair Information
Door Open Time
If the TEC2645-2 Thermostat fails to operate within its

specifications, refer to the TEC2645-2 BACnet
MS/TP Networked Thermostat with Single Proportional
Output and One-Speed Fan Control Installation
Instructions (Part No. 24-9890-226) for troubleshooting
details. For a replacement thermostat, contact the
Reheat Time
TEC2645-2 BACnet MS/TP Networked Thermostat with Single Proportional Output and
One-Speed Fan Control (Part 1 of 2)
Power Requirements

Auxiliary
Output Rating
Triac Output
Digital Inputs
Wire Size
BACnet Standard
32 Devices Maximum; 4,000 ft Maximum
Resolution
0.2F/0.1C
Accuracy
Temperature
Range
Backlit
Display
-40.0F/-40.0C to 122.0F/50.0C
Heating
Control
Cooling
Control
Minimum Deadband
Ambient
Conditions
Operating
Storage
TEC2645-2 BACnet MS/TP Networked Thermostat with Single Proportional Output and
Compliance
United States

Canada

Under CSA C22.2 No. 24, Temperature Indicating and Regulating Equipment
European
Union
Australia and
New Zealand
Shipping Weight
0.75 lb (0.34 kg)
Controls Group
Milwaukee, WI 53202
Published in U.S.A.
TEC26x6(H)-2 Series BACnet MS/TP Networked Thermostats

Product Bulletin
The TEC26x6(H)-2 Series Thermostats are BACnet
devices that provide control of two- or four-pipe fan
coils, cabinet unit heaters, or other equipment using
on/off, floating, or proportional 0 to 10 VDC control
input, three speeds of fan control, and dehumidification
TEC26x6(H)-2 Series Thermostats feature a Building
Figure 1: TEC26x6-2 Series

BACnet MS/TP Networked Thermostat with
Two Outputs, Dehumidification Capability, and

Feature
Benefit



user interaction

Control

signals
Provide easy FAN speed selection via the interface key, to meet the

(Commercial Models)



UP/DOWN arrow keys


Outputs, Dehumidification Capability, and Three Speeds of Fan Control Product
Bulletin

Feature
Benefit

Product Overview
BACnet MS/TP communication capability, allowing the
and easy.




glance.

0 to 24 hours.
Auxiliary Contact

(On/Off Control)
equipment cycling.

power failure.
Remote Access
controller.
Additional Features

from 2.0F/1.0C to 5.0F/2.5C.


Code Number
Control Outputs
Fan Control
Dehumidification
Capability
Application
TEC2616-2
Two On/Off
Three Speeds
No
Commercial Market
TEC2616H-2
Two On/Off
Three Speeds
No
Hospitality Market
TEC2626-2
Three Speeds
No
Commercial Market
TEC2626H-2
Three Speeds
No
Hospitality Market
TEC2636-2
Three Speeds
Yes
Commercial Market
TEC2636H-2
Three Speeds
Yes
Hospitality Market
TEC2646-2
Three Speeds
No
Commercial Market
TEC2646H-2
Three Speeds
No
Hospitality Market
TEC2656-2
Three Speeds
Yes
Commercial Market
TEC2656H-2
Three Speeds
Yes
Hospitality Market

Code Number
Description
SEN-600-1
TE-6361M-11
SEN-600-4
TE-636S-1
MS-BACEOL-0
Room Temp
70.0F
Backlit, plain text

LCD is easy to read
in any condition.
MODE
FAN
LEDs indicate
system activity.

FIG:frnt_vw
1.
4-15/16
(125)
Room Temp
70.0F
MODE
FAN
1-1/8
(29)
FIG:dmnsns
3-3/8
(86)

Backlit LCD




LEDs


Status Display Menu

section.)
Menu Overview

Status Display Menu
Pipe No.

Fan Menu
Room Temperature (All Models) and Humidity

(TEC2636-2, TEC2636H-2, TEC2656-2, and
TEC2656H-2 Models)

System Mode

Models)
Occupancy Status

Models)



Setpoint

Setpoint

Setpoint Type
Door Open Time

center key:

Models)

Switching

Menu Scroll
Auto Mode
Reheat Time

Models)
Repair Information

Power Requirements

Relay/Triac
Contact
Rating
On/Off and
Floating
Control
Analog
Output Rating
Proportional
Control
Auxiliary
Output Rating
Triac Output
Digital Inputs
Wire Size
Temperature
Range
Backlit
Display
Heating
Control
40.0F/4.5C to 90.0F/32.0C
Cooling
Control
54.0F/12.0C to 100.0F/38.0C
Temperature
Humidity
Accuracy
Minimum Deadband
Ambient
Conditions
Operating
Storage
Compliance
United States

Canada

Europe
Australia and
New Zealand
Shipping Weight
0.75 lb (0.34 kg)
Controls Group
Milwaukee, WI 53202
Published in U.S.A.

Issued July 1, 2006
V46 Series
Pressure Actuated Water Regulating Valve

Description
The V46 is a pressure actuated, modulating valve that is suitable
for use either on closed or open systems. Direct acting valves open
on pressure increase. This type of valve is primarily used to
regulate the flow of water or glycol to a water cooled condenser on
a refrigeration system.
Features
no close fitting or sliding parts in water passages

minimizes chatter or water hammer
free movement of all parts provides smooth pressure
modulation
refrigerant adjustment is not affected by water pressure
withstands high hydraulic shock without damage
range spring does not come in contact with cooling water
easy manual flushing, if required
3/8, 1/2, and 3/4 in. valves may be disassembled and
reassembled without detaching from the refrigeration system or
without pumping down
V46AA-1
V46AT-1
Applications
This valve is designed to modulate flow of water or glycol to a water cooled condenser on a refrigeration system.
ice machines
ice cream machines
computer room air conditioning units
refrigeration cases.
Selection Charts
V46 Series Pressure Actuated Water Regulating Valve
Code
Number1
Pipe
Size
(In.)
Inlet and
Outlet
Opening Point
Range psig (kPa)
Pressure Element
Style
Seat Repair
Kit
Replacement
Power Elements
COMMERCIAL TYPE, STANDARD FLOW NON CORROSIVE REFRIGERANTS

V46AA-1C
30 in Capillary; 1/4 in. Flare Nut (Style 45)

3/8 NPT
STT14A-600R
SEP91A-600R and
SEC99AA-36C 2
V46AA-50C
1/4 in. Male Flare Fitting (Style 5)
SEP91A-600R
V46AB-1C

STT15A-602R
SEP91A-602R and
SEC99AA-36C 2
V46AB-25C
SEP91A-602R
V46AC-1C
1/2 NPT
STT16A-601R
SEP91A-601R and
SEC99AA-36C 2
V46AC-26C
SEP91A-601R
V46AD-1C
3/4 NPT
Threaded
STT17A-609R
SEP91A-603R and
SEC99AA-36C 2
SEP91A-603R

STT17A-610R
SEP91A-603R and
SEC99AA-36C 2
STT15A-602R
SEP77A-605R
STT16A-601R
SEP127A-600R
1 NPT
70 to 260 (483 to 1793)
V46AD-13C
V46AE-1C
1 1/4 NPT
V46AE-17C
V46AJ-2C

1/2
V46EK-2C
3/4
V46AL-2C
V46AM-2C
1-1/4
Union
V46AR-1C
SEP91A-603R
STT17A-609R
30 in Capillary; 1/4 in. Flare Nut (Style 45) STT17A-610R
1 1/2
V46AR-10C
SEP107A-602R
SEP91A-603R and
SEC99AA-36C 2
SEP91A-603R
4 Hole
ASME Flange
V46AS-1C
70 to 170 (483 to 1172)
V46AS-2C
V46AT-1C
2 1/2
70 to 170 (483 to 1172)
V46AT-2C
2 1/2
160 to 260 (1103 to 1793)
160 to 260 (1103 to 1793)
1/4 in. Male Flare

Fitting (Style 5)
STT18A-600R
(Note 1)
STT18A-601R
SEP81A-602R
SEP81A-601R
SEP81A-602R
SEP81A-601R
1 of 3
Pressure Actuated Water Regulating Valve (Continued)

V46 Series Pressure Actuated Water Regulating Valve
Code
Number1
Pipe
Size
(In.)
Inlet and
Outlet
Opening Point
Range psig (kPa)
Pressure Element
Style
Seat Repair
Kit
Replacement
Power Elements
COMMERCIAL TYPE, LOW FLOW NON CORROSIVE REFRIGERANTS 3

V46DA-2C
3/8 NPT
Threaded
70 to 260 (483 to 1793)
30 in Capillary; 1/4 in. Flare Nut (Style 45) STT14A-603R
SEP91A-600R and
SEC99AA-36C4
V46AC-8C
3/4 NPT
V46AD-4C
1 NPT
V46AE-4C
1 1/4 NPT
V46AR-2C
1 1/2
V46AS-3C
V46AT-3C
2 1/2
V46BA-2C
3/8 NPT
STT14A-601R
SEP13A-602R
V46BB-2C
1/2 NPT
STT15A-603R
SEP13A-600R
V46BC-2C
3/4 NPT
STT17A-613R
SEP13A-603R
V46BD-2C
1 NPT
V46BE-2C
1 1/4 NPT
V46BS-4C
V46BT-4C
2 1/2
4 Hole
ASME Flange
V46CJ-2C
1/2
Sweat Connector
V46CN-2C
3/4
V46CP-2C
V46CQ-2C
1 1/4
V46BR-2C
1 1/2
4 Hole ASME Flange
V46CR-2C
1 1/2
6 Hole Navy Flange
V46BS-3C
4 Hole ASME Flange
V46CS-3C
COMMERCIAL TYPE AMMONIA

STT16A-601R
Threaded
SEP70A-601R
STT17A-609R
100 to 200 (690 to 1379)
1/4 in. Female NPT (Style 15)
STT17A-610R
4 Hole
ASME Flange
STT18A-600R
STT18A-601R
SEP70A-604R
SEP70A-605R
MARITIME TYPE NON-CORROSIVE REFRIGERANTS
Threaded
70 to 260 (483 to 1793)

30 in. Capillary with Sweat Connection
(Style 34)
STT17A-611R
STT17A-612R
160 to 260 (1103 to 1793)
STT18A-602R
SEP50A-600R
SEP50A-601R
NAVSEA Certified NON-CORROSIVE REFRIGERANTS
4 Hole Navy Flange
V46CS-4C
V46BT-3C
2 1/2
V46CT-3C
2 1/2
V46CT-4C
2 1/2
6 Hole Navy Flange
STT17A-612R
SEP50A-600R
30 in. Capillary with Sweat Connection

(Style 34)
70 to 170 (483 to 1172)
160 to 260 (1103 to 1793)
4 Hole ASME Flange
SEP13A-600R
SEP13A-603R
STT17A-611R
70 to 260 (483 to 1793)
6 Hole Navy Flange
STT15A-603R
STT17A-613R
STT18A-602R
SEP50A-601R
70 to 170 (483 to 1172)

160 to 260 (1103 to 1793)
1. Refer to V46 Series Valve Sizing Information 90% Open Method Catalog Page. Then specify the code number from this chart.
Refer to the Accessories chart on this page for companion flange kit code numbers.
2. Replacement element suppplied with 1/4 in. male SAE connector. Order SEC99AA capillary kit with 2 flare nuts separately, if needed.
3. Low water flow valve - 2.5 GPM max.
4. Replacement element supplied with 1/4 in. male SAE connector. Order SEC99AA capillary kit with 2 flare nuts separately, if needed.
Note 1: Use only on valves specified.

Note 2: Standard capillary length on Style 45 and Style 34 elements is 30 inches.
Accessories (Companion Flanges and Gaskets)

Kit Number
Water Valve Size (in.)
KIT14A-6121
1-1/2
KIT14A-6131
KIT14A-6141
2-1/2
Ring
Gasket (2)
Cast Iron
Flange (2)
Hex
Nut (8)
Machine
Bolt (8)
flange
1. For commercial valves only
Note:
Flange and Gasket Kit
Flange has NPT (National Pipe Thread)
V46 Series Pressure Actuated Water Regulating Valves
Maximum Water Temperature
170F (77C)
Valve Body
Commercial
3/8 to 3/4 in. cast brass, 1 in. and larger cast iron with a special finish
Navy and Maritime
Cast naval bronze with monel interior parts
2 of 3
Pressure Actuated Water Regulating Valve (Continued)

Technical Specifications (Continued)
Pressure Range Specification
Refrigerant
Opening Point Range1 - psig

(kPa)
V46A B, C, D
Maximum Permissible Pressure psig (kPa)

Water
Static
Refrigerant
P Across Valve
Non-Corrosive Refrigerants (R12, R22, R134a, R502, R404a, R507)

All Range Valve
All Range with High Overpressure
3/8 in. Extended All Range
70 to 260 (483 to 1793)
320 (2206)
150 (1034)
60 PST
70 to 300 (483 to 2068)
370 (2551)
440 (3034)
Valves 2 in. or Larger

R12, R134a - 2 and 2-1/2 in. Low Range
R22, R502, R404a, R507 - 2 and 2-1/2 in. High Range
70 to 170 (483 to 1172)

160 to 260 (1103 to 1793)
150 (1034)
60 PST
150 (1034)
60 PST
230 (1586)
320 (2206)
Other Refrigerants
Ammonia R717
100 to 200(690 to 1379)
320 (2206)
1. Direct acting valve ranges indicate the valve opening point.
3 of 3
FANs 125, 121

Product/Technical Bulletin V46
Issue Date 1095
V46 Series Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves
The V46 pressure-actuated modulating valves come in

two types of control action: direct acting or reverse
acting. Direct-acting V46 valves are typically used for
regulating refrigerant head pressure in water-cooled
condensers. Reverse-acting V46N valves are typically
used for bypass service on refrigeration systems and
heat pump applications. Commercial V46 valves may
be used with standard non-corrosive refrigerants.
V46 models are also available for ammonia refrigerant.
For applications where the coolant may be corrosive to
the valve trim, maritime models are available, which
have nickel copper (monel) valve trim.
Figure 1: V46 Pressure-Actuated

Water-Regulating Valve

No Close Fitting or Sliding
Parts in Water Passages
Corrosion Resistant Material
Provides robust control in less than ideal

conditions
Promotes longer valve life
for Parts that Come in Direct

Contact with Water
Accessible Range Spring
Allows easy manual flushing, if required
Take-apart Construction
Interior of valves accessible without removing

valve from refrigeration system or pumping down
Pressure-balanced Design
Valve maintains consistent setpoint against both

gradual and sudden water pressure changes

Part No. 24-8414-4, Rev.
Code No. LIT-125687
The V46 direct-acting models open on an increase in
pressure. Models A, B, and C are typically used for
regulating water-cooled condensers, while the low flow
D model is generally used in ice machines. The
reverse-acting V46N valve model closes on an
increase in pressure and is typically used for bypass
service on refrigeration systems and heat pumps that
control water temperature.
INLET
Commercial V46 valves are available in 3/8 in. through

2-1/2 in. sizes. Commercial all range models
(3/8 through 1-1/2 in.), may be used with standard
non-corrosive refrigerants, or ammonia refrigerant
applications, depending on the model.
V46 series valves also come in models designed for
Navy or maritime salt water applications. These valve
bodies are constructed of bronze, and any metal parts
that come into contact with salt water are constructed
of nickel copper (monel), which withstands the
corrosive action of salt water.
IMPORTANT:
All V46 Series water regulating

valves are designed for use only
as operating devices. Where
system closure, improper flow, or
loss of pressure due to valve
failure can result in personal
injury and/or loss of property, a
separate pressure relief or safety
shutoff valve, as applicable, must
be added by the user.
Figure 3: Threaded Type Reverse-Acting

Valve Cross Section
V alve Sizing
Follow Steps 1 through 3, and use the information
obtained to locate a point on one of the flowcharts
found under V46 Flowcharts that satisfies all three
steps.
1. Determine maximum water flow required using
tables provided by the manufacturer of the
condensing unit, or calculate the flow using the
following formula:
Flow (GPM) =
Note:
500 x (Outlet - Inlet Temperature)
If the outlet water temperature is unknown,

assume it to be 10F below the
condensing temperature.
Example:
INLET
Tons of Refrigeration x 15,000
A 9 ton capacity system has an inlet

water temperature of 65F and an
outlet water temperature of 95F.
The maximum required water flow is:
Flow (GPM) =
9 x 15,000
500 x (95 - 65)
= 9 GPM
2. Determine refrigerant head pressure rise above

the valve opening point.
Figure 2: Threaded Type Direct-Acting

Valve Cross Section
a. Valve closing point (to assure closure under all

conditions) must be the refrigerant pressure
equivalent to the highest ambient air
temperature the equipment will be subjected to
in the off cycle. Read this in psig from a
Saturated Vapor Table for the refrigerant
selected.
2 V46 Series Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves Product/Technical Bulletin
Note:
d. Subtract the valve opening point from the

operating head pressure. This gives the head
pressure rise.
a. Determine minimum water pressure available

from city mains or other sources.
3/8 in. V46DA - Low Flow
Flow (GPM)
3. Determine water pressure drop across the valve.

This is the pressure actually available to force
water through the valve.
The maximum differential water pressure

across a valve is 60 psi.
2.5
60
30
1.5
10
1
0.5
b. From condensing unit manufacturers tables,

read the pressure drop through condenser
corresponding to the required flow.
c.
0
10
To the value found in 3b, add the estimated or

calculated drop through installed piping.
Step 2:
Closing point is pressure of refrigerant

corresponding to 86F = 93 psig
Opening point = 93+7 = 100 psig
Operating head pressure = 125 psig
Head pressure rise = 125-100 = 25 psi
Minimum pressure = 40 psig
Pressure drop through condenser = 15 psi
Combined pressure drop = 15+4 = 19 psi
Pressure drop across valve = 40-19 = 21 psi
60
60
50
40
30
20
14
12
10
8
10
5
2
4
2
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
Head Pressure Rise

Above Opening Point (psi)
1/2 in. V46 - All Range

30
60
Flow (GPM)
27 GPM
50
Example: The required flow for a low-range system is

found to be 27 GPM. Condensing pressure
is 125 psig, and the maximum ambient
temperature is estimated at 86F. City water
pressure is 40 psig and the manufacturers
table gives a pressure drop through the
condenser and the accompanying piping
and valves at 15 psi. Drop through the
installed piping is approximately 4 psi.
Step 1:
40
16
Flow (GPM)
4. Select the proper valve size from the V46

flowcharts by locating a point on a chart that will
satisfy the flow, the head pressure rise above
opening point, and the pressure drop across the
valve.
30
Head Pressure Rise

d. Subtract the total condenser, piping, and static

head (if applicable) pressure drop from the
available water pressure found in 3a. This is
the available pressure drop across the valve.
Step 3:
20
Pressure Drop Across Valve (psi)
From the same table, read the operating head

pressure corresponding to the selected
condensing temperature.
c.
V46 Flowcharts
25
50
20
40
30
15
20
10
10
5
2
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
b. To determine the valve opening point, add

about 7 psig (48 kPa) to the closing point.
Head Pressure Rise

Using a flow of 27 GPM, a head pressure rise of

25 psi, and a pressure drop across the valve of 21 psi,
the only valve that satisfies all three criteria is a
1-1/4 in. valve. See the 1-1/4 in. V46 - All Range chart
on the next page.
V46 Series Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves Product/Technical Bulletin
50
35
40
30
30
25
20
20
10
5
15
10
5
0
30
40
50
60
60
50
10
5
2
40
30
20
10
0
10
Head Pressure Rise

40
30
10
5
2
20
10
0
40
50
60
120
100
20
80
10
60
40
2
20
0
10
Example
Flow (GPM)
60
50
20
40
10
5
2
20
10
0
20
30
40
Head Pressure Rise

30
40
50
60
50
60
2 in. V46 - Low Range

180
60
50
40
30
20
160
140
Flow (GPM)
60
50
40
30
1- 1/4 in. V46 - All Range
10
20
Head Pressure Rise

80
30
60
60
50
40
30
Head Pressure Rise

70
50
140
Flow (GPM)
Flow (GPM)
50
60
50
40
30
20
30
40
2 in. V46 - High Range
1 in. V46 - All Range
20
30
Head Pressure Rise

60
10
20
20
70
120
100
80
10
5
2
60
40
20
0
10
20
30
40
50
Head Pressure Rise

60
10
60
50
40
30
20
80
40
1-1/2 in. V46 - All Range

90
Flow (GPM)
Flow (GPM)
60

45
150
50
40
30
20
100
10
5
2
50
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
60
250
60
50
200
Flow (GPM)
Flow (GPM)
200
2-1/2 in. V46 - Low Range
2-1/2 in. V46 - High Range

250
40
30
150
20
100
10
5
2
50
0
10
Head Pressure Rise

20
30
40
50
60
Head Pressure Rise

D imensions
(D)
(A)
(F)
(C)
(E)
(B)
(G)
Figure 4: Threaded Type Valves
Table 1: Commercial Service V46 Threaded Connection Dimensions

Dimensions in Inches
Valve Size
3/8 in.
2-5/8
6-3/4
3-1/8
1-1/2
1-1/4
13/32
3-7/32
1/2 in.
3-1/8 (3-1/4)*
7-13/32
3-3/8
1-27/32
1-1/2
13/32
3-5/8
3/4 in.
3-3/8 (3-5/8)*
7-7/8
3-7/8
2-1/32
1-3/4
13/32
3-21/32
1 in.
4-1/2 (4-7/8)*
10-3/4
5-1/2
2-25/32
1/2
4-3/4
1-1/4 in.
4-7/8
11-1/8
5-3/4
2-5/8
2-3/8
1/2
4-29/32
*Note: Values in parenthesis are for maritime valves. All other dimensions remain the same.
(A)
(E)
(G)
(D)
(H)
(C)
(F)
(B)
(I)
Figure 5: Flange Type Valves
Table 2: Commercial Service: V46 Flange Connection Dimensions

Valve Size
1-1/2 in.
5-5/16
11-1/8
5-3/4
9/16
1-7/8
2-5/8
1/2
4-29/32
2 in.
6-5/8
13
6-15/32
5/8
2-1/4
3-1/2
1/2
6-1/8
2-1/2 in.
6-3/4
13-1/2
6-3/8
3/4
2-23/32
3-1/2
1-1/32
6-3/32
Flange Specifications
Valve Size
No. of Holes
Hole Size
Bolt Circle
1-1/2 in.
5/8
3-7/8
2 in.
3/4
4-3/4
2-1/2 in.
3/4
5-1/2
Table 3: Maritime Service: ASME Flange Connection Dimensions

Dimensions
Valve Size
1-1/2 in.
5-5/16
10-1/2
5-5/8
9/16
1-7/8
2-5/8
1/2
2 in.
6-3/8
13-1/8
6-1/2
1/2
2-3/4
3-1/2
5/8
2-1/2 in.
6-3/4
13-1/8
6-1/2
11/16
2-3/4
3-1/2
5/8
Maritime Service: ASME Flange Specifications

Valve Size
No. of Holes
Hole Size
Bolt Circle
1-1/2 in.
5/8
3-7/8
2 in.
3/4
4-3/4
2-1/2 in.
3/4
5-1/2
Table 4: Navy BuShips Service: Navy Flange Connection Dimensions

Valve Size
3/4 in.
4-3/16
1 in
5-5/16
7-3/4
7/16
3-13/16
1-1/8
2-1/32
1/2
3-5/16
4-1/2
1/2
4-1/4
1-1/4
2-5/8
1/2
1-1/4 in.
5-5/16
9-11/32
4-11/16
1/2
4-1/2
1-5/8
2-5/8
1/2
4-5/32
1-1/2 in.
5-5/16
10-7/32
5-3/4
1/2
5-1/16
1-7/8
2-5/8
1/2
2 in.
6-3/8
14-1/8
6-13/32
1/2
5-9/16
2-3/4
3-1/2
7/16
7-9/32
2-1/2 in.
6-3/8
14-5/16
6-1/2
1/2
6-1/8
2-3/4
3-1/2
5/8
7-3/16
Navy Flange Specifications

Valve Size
No. of Holes
Hole Size
Bolt Circle
3/4 in.
9/16
2-11/16
1 in
9/16
3-1/8
1-1/4 in.
9/16
3-3/8
1-1/2 in.
9/16
3-15/16
2 in.
9/16
4-7/16
2-1/2 in.
9/16
M ounting
!
A djustment

To prevent damage to the
capillary, avoid sharp bends or
kinks in the capillary. Coil and
secure excess capillary at the
valve end to avoid tube breakage
due to vibration. Because
harmonic vibration can also break
the tube, some slack must be left
in the capillary. Do not permit the
tubing to rub against metal
surfaces where friction can
damage the capillary.
Flush water lines to clear any foreign matter that may

interfere with valve operation. Mount valves vertically
on the inlet side of the condenser with spring housing
up. If it is necessary to keep the condenser flooded
with coolant, the valve can be mounted on the outlet
side. When mounting the valve in a position other than
vertical, follow the instructions of the equipment in
which the valve will be installed. Make refrigerant head
pressure connection to bellows. If additional capillary
tubing is required, use 1/4 in. O.D. tubing or larger.
Valves may be adjusted with standard service valve

wrenches or screwdrivers, see Table 5. All range
valve settings can be changed quickly from low-range
refrigerants such as R134 to high-range refrigerants
such as R22 or vice versa. To raise the valve opening
point, turn the adjusting screw, located at the top of
range spring housing, counterclockwise. See Figure 8.
Turn the adjusting screw clockwise to lower the
opening point. Exact settings can be made using a
pressure gauge in the refrigerant line to determine the
throttling point. Put the system under normal operating
load and adjust to the desired operating pressure. See
Table 14 for pressure range specifications.
Table 5: Range Adjustment Screw

Valve Size (in.)
Range Adjusting Screw
3/8, 1/2, 3/4
1/4 in. square head adjusting screw with

a screwdriver slot
1, 1-1/4, 1-1/2
5/16 in. square head adjusting screw
2, 2-1/2
1/2 in. square head adjusting screw and

a slotted cam
If the compressor operates in high ambient

temperatures, head pressures may remain high
enough during off cycles to prevent the valve from
closing completely. In such instances, the opening
point of the valve should be raised just enough to
cause the valve to close during compressor standby
periods. This will also raise the throttling point.
M anual Flushing
To clear any sediment that might accumulate, valves
may be manually flushed. Insert screwdrivers under
both sides of the valve spring guide and lift upwards to
flush the valve. See Figure 6. Manual flushing does
not affect valve adjustment.
allowing a single valve to be used for

either low or high range refrigerants.
c.
Is a standard open high, or reverse action

close high valve required? See Table 7: Type
Number Selection Matrix.
d. Is a commercial, maritime, or Navy service

valve needed? Maritime and Navy valves
have bronze bodies and monel internal parts.
Range
Spring
Valve Spring
Guide
Insert screwdrivers
underneath the valve
spring guide.
Top
Retainer
3. Companion flange kit by part number, if required.

See section below and Table 6: Companion
Flange Kits.
4. Mounting bracket (3/8 in. and 1/2 in. valve sizes
only) if required, and its position on valve. See
Table 8: Pressure Connection Styles.
Companion Flanges and Gaskets

Figure 6: Manual Flushing
R epair Data
Kits are available, at additional cost, for 1-1/2, 2, and

2-1/2 in. flange connection (ASME specifications)
valves only. Each flange kit contains two ring gaskets,
two cast iron flanges, eight machine bolts, and eight
hex nuts.
Replacement of the sensing element, internal parts,

and the rubber diaphragm can be made. For a
replacement valve or replacement parts kit, contact the
nearest Johnson Controls/PENN distributor. For
replacement part kit numbers, refer to Tables 9
through 13. For replacement kit instructions and
details refer to the following bulletins: V46, V47, V48,
and V49 Sensing Element Replacement and V46, V47,
246, and 247 Repair Parts and Service Instructions.
Ring Gasket for

1-1/2, 2, and
2-1/2 in. Kits (2)
Machine
Bolt (8)
Hex Nut (8)
When ordering water valves, specify the following:
Cast Iron
Flange (2)
Figure 7: Flange Kit
Table 6: Companion Flange Kits
1. Complete product number.
Kit Number
Water Valve Size
2. If product number is not known, answer the

following questions and select a valve using
Tables 9 through 13.
KIT 14A-612
KIT 14A-613
KIT 14A-614
1-1/2 in.
2 in.
2-1/2 in.
a. What is the valve size needed? See Valve

Sizing section.
Product Number Selection
b. What refrigerant will be used in the system?

See Table 14: Pressure Range Specifications.
For applications that call for valves not listed in

Tables 9 through 13, Table 7: Type Number Selection
Matrix can be used to specify a custom valve.
Note:
3/8 in. through 1-1/2 in. valves are

supplied with all range construction,
Example:
To order a direct-acting, commercial valve

with a 1-1/4 in. NPT threaded connection,
specify a V46AE.
For more information, contact Application Engineering

at (414) 274-5535.
Table 7: Type Number Selection Matrix

V46
Open on Rise, Commercial
Open on Rise, Maritime
Open on Rise, Navy
Open on Rise, Commercial Low Flow
Open on Rise, Commercial with

High Pressure Bellows
Open on Rise, Maritime with

Open on Rise, Navy with

Open on Rise, Commercial Low Flow

No-Repair
Open on Fall, Commercial
Open on Fall, Maritime
Open on Fall, Commercial Low Flow with

Table 8: Pressure Connection Styles

Commercial Service: Non-corrosive Refrigerant
Valve
Style No.
Description
45
30 in. (762 mm) copper capillary

with 1/4 in. flare nut and valve
depressor
1-1/2 in. and
5*
1/4 in male flare fitting
Smaller
34*

with 1/4 in. section for sweat or
flare connection
2 in. and
2-1/2 in.
1/4 in. male flare fitting
Commercial Service: Ammonia

1/2 in. to
2-1/2 in.
15
1/4 in. female NPT
Navy and Marine Service

All Sizes
34

with 1/4 in. section for sweat or
flare connection
1 in. NPT Threaded
1-1/4 in. NPT Threaded
1-1/2 in. NPT Threaded
9/1618 Threaded
Capillary Tubing Length
3/8 in. Sweat
1/2 in. Sweat
Standard length is 30 in. on valves 1-1/2 in. and

smaller. Optional 48 in. (1219 mm) capillary can be
furnished at additional cost, when specified.
3/4 in. Sweat
1 in. Sweat
1-1/4 in. Sweat
3/4 in. Flange
1 in. Flange
1-1/4 in. Flange
1-1/2 in. Flange
2 in. Flange
2-1/2 in. Flange
*Optional, quantity orders only.
O ptions
Mounting Bracket
A mounting bracket as illustrated in Figure 8, is
available on 3/8 in. and 1/2 in. valves only when
specified. Desired bracket position must also be
specified.
Other styles of brackets on 3/8 in. and 1/2 in. valves
available on quantity orders. For more information,
contact Application Engineering at (414) 274-5535.
Range Adjusting Screw

(Turn counterclockwise
to raise operation
setpoint.)
Bracket Shown
in Position (1)
HIGHER
INLET
C
9/32 Diameter
Holes (2)
Range Adjusting
Screw
1
Four mounting bracket
positions (1-4) are available.
Dimensions: in. (mm)

Valve Size
3/8
2 (51)
1.25 (32)
1.38 (35)
1/2
2 (52)
1.85 (47)
1.52 (39)
Figure 8: Mounting Bracket for 3/8 in.

and 1/2 in. Valves
11
Table 9: Direct-Acting Commercial Type - Non-corrosive Refrigerants
*
**
Product
Size (in.)
Inlet and
Outlet
Service
Element Shipping
Style
Weight
lb (kg)
Seat Repair
Kit
Replacement Power
Element
V46AA-1
3/8 NPT
Threaded
All Range
45
2.3 (1.0)
STT14A-600R
SEP91A-600R and
SEC37A-601R*
V46DA-2
3/8 NPT
Threaded
Extended
All Range**
45
2.3 (1.0)
STT14A-603R
SEP91A-600R and
SEC37A-601R*
V46AB-1
1/2 NPT
Threaded
All Range
45
3.3 (1.5)
STT15A-602R
SEP91A-602R and
SEC37A-602R*
V46AC-1
3/4 NPT
Threaded
All Range
45
4.3 (2.0)
STT16A-601R
SEP91A-601R and
SEC37A-602R*
V46AD-1
1 NPT
Threaded
All Range
45
9.3 (4.0)
STT17A-609R
SEP91A-603R and
SEC37A-600R*
V46AE-1
1-1/4 NPT
Threaded
All Range
45
10.0 (4.5)
STT17A-610R
SEP91A-603R and
SEC37A-600R*
V46AR-1
1-1/2 NPT
4 Hole
ASME Flange
All Range
45
13.1 (6.0)
STT17A-610R
SEP91A-603R and
SEC37A-600R*
V46AS-1
4 Hole
ASME Flange
Low Range
25.5 (11.6)
STT18A-600R
SEP81A-602R
V46AS-2
4 Hole
ASME Flange
High Range
25.5 (11.6)
STT18A-600R
SEP81A-601R
V46AT-1
2-1/2
4 Hole
ASME Flange
Low Range
29.5 (11.6)
STT18A-601R
SEP81A-602R
V46AT-2
2-1/2
4 Hole
ASME Flange
High Range
29.5 (11.6)
STT18A-601R
SEP81A-601R
Non-stock item, built to order.

Replacement element supplied with 1/4 in. SAE connector. Order SEC37A capillary kit with flare nuts separately, if needed.
Use only on valves specified.
Maximum opening point of 70 to 300 psi (483 to 2068 kPa), maximum permissible refrigerant pressure of 440 psi (3034 kPa).
Table 10: Commercial Type - Ammonia
Product
Size (in.)
Inlet and
Outlet
Service
Element Shipping
Style
Weight
lb (kg)
V46AB-11
1/2 NPT
Threaded
Ammonia
15
V46AC-8
3/4 NPT
Threaded
Ammonia
15
Seat Repair
Kit
Replacement Power
Element
3.2 (1.5)
STT15A-602R
SEP70A-603R
4.2 (1.9)
STT16A-601R
SEP70A-601R
V46AD-4
1 NPT
Threaded
Ammonia
15
7.7 (3.5)
STT17A-609R
SEP70A-604R
V46AE-4
1-1/4 NPT
Threaded
Ammonia
15
9.2 (4.2)
STT17A-610R
SEP70A-604R
V46AR-2
1-1/2
4 Hole
ASME Flange
Ammonia
15
12.3 (5.6)
STT17A-610R
SEP70A-604R
V46AS-3
4 Hole
ASME Flange
Ammonia
15
25.5 (11.6)
STT18A-600R
SEP70A-605R
V46AT-3
2-1/2
4 Hole
ASME Flange
Ammonia
15
29.5 (11.6)
STT18A-601R
SEP70A-605R
Table 11: Reverse Acting Commercial Type - Non-corrosive Refrigerants
Product
Size (in.)
Inlet and
Outlet
Service
Element Shipping
Style
Weight
lb (kg)
Seat Repair
Kit
Replacement Power
Element
V46NA-1
3/8 NPT
Threaded
All Range
45
2.3 (1.0)
STT14A-600R
SEP91A-600R and
SEC37A-601R*
V46NB-1
1/2 NPT
Threaded
All Range
45
3.6 (1.6)
STT15A-602R
SEP91A-602R and
SEC37A-602R*
V46NB-2
1/2 NPT
Threaded
Low Range
45
3.6 (1.6)
STT15A-602R
SEP91A-602R and
SEC37A-602R*
V46NC-1
3/4 NPT
Threaded
All Range
45
4.5 (2.0)
STT16A-601R
SEP91A-601R and
SEC37A-602R*
V46NC-2
3/4 NPT
Threaded
Low Range
45
4.5 (2.0)
STT16A-601R
SEP91A-601R and
SEC37A-602R*
V46ND-1
1 NPT
Threaded
All Range
45
7.5 (3.4)
STT17A-609R
SEP91A-603R and
SEC37A-600R*
V46ND-2
1 NPT
Threaded
Low Range
45
7.5 (3.4)
STT17A-609R
SEP91A-603R and
SEC37A-600R*
V46NE-1
1-1/4 NPT
Threaded
All Range
45
8.8 (4.0)
STT17A-610R
SEP91A-603R and
SEC37A-600R*
V46NE-2
1-1/4 NPT
Threaded
Low Range
45
8.8 (4.0)
STT17A-610R
SEP91A-603R and
SEC37A-600R*

Maximum bellows pressure is 320 psig (2206 kPa). Replacement element supplied with 1/4 in. SAE connector. Order SEC37A
capillary kit with flare nuts separately, if needed. Use only on valves specified.
13
Table 12: Maritime Type - Non-corrosive Refrigerants
Product
Size (in.)
Inlet and
Outlet
Service
Element Shipping
Style
Weight
lb (kg)
Seat Repair
Kit
Replacement Power
Element
V46BA-2
3/8 NPT
Threaded
All Range
34
2.3 (1.0)
STT14A-610R
SEP13A-602R
V46BB-2
1/2 NPT
Threaded
All Range
34
3.3 (1.5)
STT15A-603R
SEP13A-600R
V46BC-2
3/4 NPT
Threaded
V46BD-2
1 NPT
Threaded
All Range
34
4.3 (2.0)
STT17A-613R
SEP13A-603R
All Range
34
9.5 (4.3)
STT17A-611R
SEP50A-600R
V46BE-2
1-1/4 NPT
Threaded
All Range
34
10.3 (4.7)
STT17A-612R
SEP50A-600R
V46BS-4
4 Hole
ASME Flange
High Range
34
25.5 (11.6)
STT18A-602R
SEP50A-601R
V46BT-4
2-1/2
4 Hole
ASME Flange
High Range
34
29.5 (13.4)
STT18A-602R
SEP50A-601R
Element Shipping
Style
Weight
lb (kg)
Seat Repair
Kit
Replacement Power
Element
Table 13: Navy Type - Non-corrosive Refrigerants
Product
Size (in.)
Inlet and
Outlet
Service
V46CJ-2
1/2
Sweat
Connector
All Range
34
3.6 (1.6)
STT15A-603R
SEP13A-600R
V46CN-2
3/4
4 Hole
Navy Flange
All Range
34
7.1 (3.2)
STT17A-613R
SEP13A-603R
V46CP-2
4 Hole
Navy Flange
All Range
34
12.0 (5.4)
STT17A-611R
SEP50A-600R
V46CQ-2
1-1/4
4 Hole
Navy Flange
All Range
34
10.3 (4.7)
STT17A-612R
SEP50A-600R
V46BR-2
1-1/2
4 Hole
ASME Flange
All Range
34
13.5 (6.1)
STT17A-612R
SEP50A-600R
V46CR-2
1-1/2
4 Hole
Navy Flange
All Range
34
13.8 (6.3)
STT17A-612R
SEP50A-600R
V46BS-3
4 Hole
ASME Flange
Low Range
34
25.5 (11.6)
STT18A-602R
SEP50A-601R
V46CS-3
4 Hole
Navy Flange
Low Range
34
24.4 (11.1)
STT18A-602R
SEP50A-601R
V46CS-4
4 Hole
Navy Flange
Low Range
34
24.4 (11.1)
STT18A-602R
SEP50A-601R
V46BT-3
2-1/2
4 Hole
ASME Flange
Low Range
34
29.5 (13.4)
STT18A-602R
SEP50A-601R
V46CT-3
2-1/2
4 Hole
Navy Flange
Low Range
34
25.5 (11.6)
STT18A-602R
SEP50A-601R
V46CT-4
2-1/2
4 Hole
Navy Flange
High Range
34
25.5 (11.6)
STT18A-602R
SEP50A-601R
Table 14: Pressure Range Specifications

Refrigerant
Maximum Opening
Point psig (kPa)*
Modulation Start
Point
psig (kPa)*
Maximum Permissible Pressure psig (kPa)
V46A, B, C, D
V46N
Water
Refrigerant
All Range
R12, R22,
R134a,
R502, R404a,
R507
70 to 260
(483 to 1793)
90 to 280 (621 to 1931)

40 to 100 (276 to 690)**
150 (1034)
320 (2206)
All Range
with High
Overpressure
70 to 260
(483 to 1793)
___________
150 (1034)
370 (2551)
3/8 in.
Extended
All Range
70 to 300
___________
150 (1034)
440 (3034)
(483 to 2068)
2 and 2-1/2 in.

Low Range
70 to 170
(483 to 1172)
100 to 200
(690 to 1379)
150 (1034)
230 (1586)
2 and 2-1/2 in.

High Range
R22, R502,
R404a, R507
160 to 260
(1103 to 1793)
180 to 280
(1241 to 1931)
150 (1034)
320 (2206)
Ammonia
R717
100 to 200
(690 to 1379)
130 to 230
(896 to 1586)
150 (1034)
320 (2206)
R12, R134a
*
**
V46A, B, C direct acting valve ranges indicate the valve opening point,
V46N reverse acting valve ranges indicates the modulation start point.
For heat pump applications (3/8 in. through 1-1/2 in. sizes only).
15
Notes
S pecifications
Product
Body Material
V46 Series Pressure Actuated Valve

Commercial:
3/8, 1/2, or 3/4 in. Sizes Have Cast Brass Bodies, Other Commercial
Types Have Cast Iron Bodies with Rust Resisting Finish
Navy and Maritime: Cast Naval Bronze

Extension Sleeve, Disc,
Stud, Disc Holder Material
Valve Seat Material
Commercial:
Brass; Monel is Available at Additional Cost
Navy and Maritime: Monel

Commercial:
Aluminum Bronze; Monel is Available at Additional Cost
Navy and Maritime: Monel

Valve Disc
Buna-N
Diaphragm
Nylon Reinforced Buna-N
Water Supply Pressure

Water Supply Temperature
Sensing Element

170F (77C) Maximum
Non-corrosive Refrigerants:
Brass and Phosphor Bronze Bellows in Brass Cup
Navy and Maritime:
Monel Bellows in Brass Cup
2 and 2-1/2 in.

High Range Service:
Monel Bellows in Brass Cup
Ammonia Service:
Stainless Steel Bellows in Brass Cup
Pressure Range
See Table 14: Pressure Range Specifications.
Shipping Weight
See Tables 9-13.
Controls Group
P.O. Box 423
Milwaukee, WI 53201
Printed in U.S.A.
17

hx67x3s
1900156
9thcc:na
Rev:
08/23/01
logo:
Hx-67x3 Series
left ft:
Outdoor Relative Humidity Transmitter
right ft:
standard
Sect# = 0
seQ# = 1
outdoor_rh_200K.tif
The RH transmitters provide excellent
reliability, long-term stability, and fast
accurate response to changes in humidity.
Certain models come equipped with a
temperature transmitter.
The humidity sensor is impervious to dust
and most chemicals and is not damaged by
condensation. The weather shield protects
the sensors from solar radiation and
precipitation without affecting performance.
The multiple discs have a unique profile that
permits easy passage of air. The disc
material is especially formulated for high
reflectivity, low thermal conductivity and
maximum weather resistance. This rugged
enclosure will assure a long life, even under
extreme weather conditions.
Description
Johnson Controls Hx-67x3 Series offers
a full line of outdoor relative humidity
(RH) transmitters for measuring and
transmitting RH levels from 0 to 100% .
The sensor and shield function as one unit

for optimal performance. The RH
transmitter can easily be mounted on a roof,
pole, or side of a building utilizing its already
assembled mounting bracket. It requires no
routine maintenance or recalibration.
Features
0 to 100% RH offers a full range of accurate RH
measurement
rugged shield construction protects sensors
from solar radiation and precipitation without
affecting performance
multiplate shield design allows for maximum
airflow for precise RH and temperature readings
excellent long-term stability provides accurate
RH measurement over long periods of time
without degeneration
no routine maintenance or calibration saves on
cost
two wire loop powered connection 4 to 20 mA or
four wire 0 to 10 VDC looped power-output is
easy to install
polymer thin film sensor is not affected by dust,
water vapor, harsh environments or most
chemicals
negligible temperature coefficient means that
temperature changes are immaterial to accurate
RH measurement
three-year warranty
Applications
Specifications
HE-6703, HT-6703, HE-67P3, and HT-67P3 Outdoor Humidity Transmitters
Relative
Humidity
Analog Output HE-67x3: 0 to 10 VDC and 0 to 1 VDC for 0 to 100% RH

HT-67x3: 4 to 20 mA (DC) for 0 to 100% RH
Measuring Range 10 to 90% RH
Accuracy at 68 F (20 C) 3% RH
Temperature Dependance <1.5% RH from 14 to 140F (10 to 60C)
Operating Temperature Range -4 to 140F (-20 to 60C)
Temperature(for HE-67P3
and HT-67P3 models only)
Output Resolution 0.1% RH

Sensor Type Platinum 1000, IEC751, Class B
Analog Output
HE-67P3: 0 to 10 VDC for -40 to 140F (40 to 60C)

HT-67P3: 4 to 20 mA (DC) for -40 to 140F (40 to 60C)
Measuring Range 14 to 140F (-10 to 60C)

Operating Temperature Range -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C)
Accuracy at 77 F (25 C) 0.55F (0.3C)
Linearity Better than 0.1C
Temperature Dependance 0.01C/C
Output Resolution 0.1C
Stability
2% RH over 2 years
Storage Temperature Range
-40 to 140F (-40 to 60C)
Humidity Range
Power Requirements
HE-67x3: 20 to 30 VAC, or 18 to 30 VDC, Class 2

HT-67x3: 18 to 28 VDC, Class 2
Current Consumption
HE-67x3: 10 mA with DC Supply and 23 mA with AC Supply

HT-67x3: 27 mA (DC) Maximum Per Output
Maximum Output
HE-67x3: 13 VDC
HT-67x3: 27 mA (DC) per Output
Load Resistance
HE-67x3: > 20k ohm

HT-67x3: 50 ohms + ((Power Supply Voltage 8)/0.02)
Warm-Up Time
Instantaneous
Housing Material
ABS plastic
Housing Classification
IP65 NEMA 4 Housing
Shipping Weight
4.2 lb (1.9 kg)
Humidity is an important aspect of any climate

control system. The significance of indoor air
quality to our health has become evident. Humans
are best suited to and feel most comfortable at
certain humidities and temperatures; whereas,
excessively high or low humidities or temperatures
cause discomfort. Accurate outdoor humidity
measurement allows the necessary steps to be
taken indoors to ensure a quality building
environment.
The right humidity makes it possible to optimize
energy consumption. In energy management
projects with hundreds of setpoints, it is normal to
have only one outdoor humidity sensor. If that
sensor is not accurate, then energy costs may rise,
and building comfort may suffer. The maintenance
free, accurate, year after year service of our
transmitters will keep energy costs low and building
comfort high. Sensors are compatible with most
energy management systems.
To Order
Specify the code number in the following selection
chart.
Selection Chart
Code Number
Description
Outdoor RH Transmitter 10 VDC

Output
Outdoor RH Transmitter, 4 to
HT-6703-0N0GO
20 mADC Output
HE-6703-0N0GO
Outdoor RH Transmitter with

Temperature Sensor, 10 VDC Output
Outdoor RH Transmitter with
HT-67P3-0N0GO Temperature Sensor, 4 to 20 mADC
Output
HE-67P3-0N0GO
1/1

h367xxs_tri
1900121
9thcc:na
Rev:
021501
logo:
HE-67xx Series
left ft:
TRUERH Humidity Element with Temperature Sensor

hc67x3.tif
Johnson Controls designed the HE-6700

Series humidity transmitter with temperature
sensor to use with most controllers. It works
directly with the VMA1200 and VMA1400
Series controllers. An additional thin-film
nickel or thin-film platinum temperature
sensor adapts the unit for zone enthalpy
control applications. TrueRH products feature
patented circuitry and calibration
improvements.
pic pending
Features
meets National Institute of Standards and
Technology (NIST) traceable calibration
standards for calibration testing, verifying,
and auditing
TrueRH Series HE-67xx
Description
The TrueRH Series HE-67xx humidity
transmitter with temperature sensor offers
dependable technology, ease of installation,
and application flexibility in an attractively
styled wall mount package. The patented
All-Polymer humidity sensor construction
improves resistance to chemical corrosion.
The element measures humidity within either
2% or 3% accuracy, and generates a
voltage signal proportional to 0 to 100%
Relative Humidity (RH).
time response improvement enhances

local temperature control, increases
employee comfort, and reduces energy
consumption
controller configuration switch displays the
controllers current operating mode
he67xxSelection.eps
Selection Chart
67
Humidity
Sensing
0
Humidity
Sensor
Accuracy
2 = 2%
3 = 3%

0 = None
N = 1000 ohm Thin-film Nickel
P = 1000 ohm Thin-film Platinum
0
Package
Color
Indication Type
N = None
B = Liquid Bulb
Thermometer
0 = White
Setpoint Adjustment
and Scale Type
0 = None
1 = Single, Temperature,
Warmer/Cooler
Scaled (65-85F/18-29C)
setpoint adjustment (optional) allows the

user to adjust room comfort and to choose
occupancy features that match the
application and controlled
manual override pushbutton (PB) signals
the controller that the space is occupied in
order to override time-of-day setback
globally scaled unit includes setpoint and
bulb indicator (both optional) with
Fahrenheit and Celsius ranges, 65 to 85F
(19 to 29C)
universal mounting provided: U.S. wallbox
and surface mounting base and all
installation hardware included
To Order
To order a sensor, accessory, or replace an
existing product, contact the nearest Johnson
Controls representative. Specify a code
number from the selection chart. Not all
possible combinations are available.
Accessories
Code Number
Drywall Clip Mounting Kit

(10 per bag)
ACC-INSL-0 (a)
Wallbox Mounting Pad

(10 per bag)
ACC-INSL-1 (a)
Surface Mounting Pad

(10 per bag)
GRD10A-608
Plastic Guard with Baseplate and

Mounting Ring
T-4000-119
Allen-Head Adjustment Tool

(30 per bag)
TE-67L-600
Farenheit Label Replacement Kit
TE-67L-601
Celsius Label Replacement Kit
TE-67D0-601
Example: To order a nickel sensor with a warmer/cooler temperature setpoint, and a

liquid bulb thermometer, specify Product Code Number HE-67N3-1B00W.
Not all models available.
Description
ACC-DWCLIP-0
TE-67MB-600
Note: All models have the manual override PB and a functioning LED display.
Note:
Mounting Base Kit

(b)
TE-67D0-602 (b)
Door Replacement Kit with

Johnson Controls Logo
Door Replacement Kit without a
Logo
(a) These foam pads will help prevent drafts from

entering the unit through the wall, and make installation easier when mounting on an uneven
surface.
(b) Contains 10 original and 10 new style doors.
1/2
right ft:
standard
Sect# = 0
seQ# = 108

HE-67xx Series TrueRH Humidity Element with Temperature Sensor (Continued)

te-6700dim.eps
Side View Surface
Mounted Sensor
Front View
Wallbox
Surface
Wall Mount Sensor Height
Mounted
Height
4-3/4
(121)
3-3/16
(81)
1-11/32
(34)
3-3/16
(81)
9/32
(7)
Side View Wallbox Mounted

Sensor with Phone Jack
11/32
(9)

Sensor withTerminal Block
HE-67xx Dimensions, in. (mm)
Specifications
TrueRH Series HE-67xx Humidity Transmitter with Temperature Sensor
Power Requirements
14 to 30 VDC or 20 to 30 VAC at 50/60 Hz, Class 2
Current Draw
3 mA with no load, 25 mA maximum

Signal 0 to 10 VDC
Humidity
Element
Characteristics
at 77F (25C)
Accuracy
Temperature Coefficient
HE-67x2: 2% RH for 20 to 80% RH at 77F (25C)

4% RH for 10 to 20% and 80 to 90% RH at 77F (25C)
-0.1 to 0.05% RH/C at 5C (41F) to
-0.07 to -0.21% RH/C at 65C (149F)
Temperature Sensor 1,000 ohm thin-film nickel

Nickel Sensor
Temperature Coefficient Approximately 3 ohms per F (5.4 ohms per C)

Reference Resistance 1,000 ohms at 70F (21C)
Accuracy 0.34F at 70F (0.18C at 21C)
Temperature Sensor 1,000 ohm thin-film platinum
Platinum Sensor
Temperature Coefficient Approximately 2 ohms per F (3.9 ohms per C)

Reference Resistance 1,000 ohms at 32F (0C)
Accuracy 0.65F at 70F (0.36C at 21C)
Sensor Response Time (for both temperature sensors) One time constant = 8 2 minutes at 10 feet per minute (fpm) airflow rate
Type Single setpoint
Temperature Setpoint(Depending on
option chosen)
Red/blue visual scale (warmer/cooler)

Scale (Range) Graduated 5F scale (65 to 85F)
Graduated 2C scale (19 to 29C)
Resistance Nominal 1.5k ohm range
18 to 24 AWG wire for 9-position terminal block
Zone Bus Access
6-pin connector with front access for a laptop with HVAC PRO software, a Palm compatible handheld
device with Variable Air Volume Modular Assembly Balancing Tool software, or a Zone Terminal
Manual Override
Integral momentary PB (DIP switch selectable)
LED Display
Red LED indicates three modes of operation (application and controller dependent)
32 to 131F (0 to 55C)
0 to 100% RH, noncondensing; 85F (29C) maximum dew point
-40 to 140F (-40 to 60C)

Mounting Style
Standard base for both surface or standard U.S. wallbox mounting, including hardware
Materials
White plastic case and mounting base
3.2 x 3.2 x 1.4 in. (81 x 81 x 36 mm)
2/2

he67xxs_ts
1900122
9thcc:na
Rev:
021901
logo:
HE-67xx Series
left ft:
TRUERH Humidity Element with Temperature Sensors

TRUERH
TM
he67xx_ts_wl.tif
True 2% Accuracy
he67xx_ts_dp.tif
HE-67xx-0N00P Duct Probe
HE-67xx-0N0BT Wall Mount
Description
Features
The HE-67xx Series Humidity devices house

both a humidity and a temperature sensor in a
wall or duct-mount style. The humidity sensor
is capable of measuring Relative Humidity
(RH) over the entire range of 0 to 100%, and
its All-Polymer construction provides
improved resistance to chemical corrosion.
The TRUERH product line delivers devices
with RH accuracy of either 2% or 3% RH.
TRUERH humidity elements produce
voltage output signals proportional to
measured humidity for humidity indication.
TRUERH circuitry and calibration

techniques for which patent protection is
pending
Temperature sensors are available in thin-film

nickel, thin-film platinum, and silicon. The
elements are powered with 14 to 30 VDC or
20 to 30 VAC and feature a user-selectable
humidity output of 0 to 10 VDC or 0 to 5 VDC.
user-selectable output voltage range allows

choice of standard voltage outputs for use
with systems in service or new systems
All-Polymer humidity sensor patented

sensing element provides accurate and
reliable humidity sensing
National Institute of Standards and
Technology (NIST) traceable calibration is
tested, verified, and audited per NIST
standards
2% RH accurate model includes a NIST
certificate of conformance documents the
devices tracability and accuracy
humidity and temperature sensors in one
unit eliminates the need for separate
sensors and reduces installation costs
Selection Chart - Wall Mount

Code Number
Description
right ft:
standard
Sect# = 0
seQ# = 1
all-plastic material for duct probe improves

thermal performance and complies with
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)
flammability ratings for plenum use;
complies with Blue Angel (Germany) and
TCO'95 (Sweden) environmental
regulations
To Order
Contact the nearest Johnson Controls
representative to order a humidity transmitter,
and specify the code number from the
selection chart. Refer to the Accessories table
for the accessories available for the wall
mount humidity element. (There are none for
the duct probe models.)
Selection Chart - Duct Mount

RH
Accuracy
Code Number
Description
2% 3%
RH
Accuracy
2% 3%
HE-67P2-0N00P
Duct probe humidity element with thin-film

platinum temperature sensor
HE-67S2-0N00P
Duct probe humidity element with silicon

temperature sensor
HE-67N2-0N00P

nickel temperature sensor
HE-67P3-0N00P

Wall mount humidity element with silicon

temperature sensor
HE-67S3-0N00P
Duct probe humidity element with silicon

temperature sensor
Wall mount humidity element with thin-film

HE-67N3-0N00P

HE-67P2-0N0BT

HE-67S2-0N0BT
Wall mount humidity element with silicon

temperature sensor
HE-67N2-0N0BT

HE-67P3-0N0BT

HE-67S3-0N0BT (a)
HE-67N3-0N0BT
(a)
(a) Compatible with System 350 Humidity Controls
Accessories
Code Number
Description
GRD10A-608
Plastic Guard with Baseplate and Mounting Ring
T-4000-119
Allen-head Adjustment Tool (30/bag)
TE-1800-9600
Wall Plate Adaptor Kit required for wallbox mounting
1/2

HE-67xx Series TRUERH Humidity Element with Temperature Sensors (Continued)

he67xx_ts_4p.eps
Specifications
HE-67xx Series TRUERH Humidity Element with Temperature Sensors
2.12
54
Power Requirements
Current Draw
Acceptable Wire Gauge
16 to 24 AWG (18 AWG recommended)

Signal: 0 to 5 VDC or 0 to 10 VD, 1,000 ohm maximum load
3.12
79
1.81
46

Accuracy:
Humidity Element
at 77F (25C)
Temperature Coefficient:
Response Time:
Wall Mount Humidity Element

Within 5% RH of actual in 15 minutes for 10 to 30%, 30 to 90%,

and 40 to 90% RH
Accuracy: 0.34F (0.18C) at 70F (21C)

Thin-film Nickel Reference Resistance: 1000 ohms at 70F (21C)
Resistance Change: Approximately 3 ohms/F (5 ohms/C)
he67xx_ts_5p.eps
Accuracy: 1F (0.6C) at 70F (21C)

Silicon Reference Resistance: 1035 ohms at 77F (25C)
Temperature
Sensors
3.28
83
0.1 to 0.05% RH/C at 5C (41F) to

-0.07 to -0.21% RH/C at 65C (149F)
Accuracy: 0.65F at 70F (0.36C at 21C)

Thin-film Platinum Reference Resistance: 1000 ohms at 32F (0C)
3.25
83
2.02
51
6.25
159
3-position and 2-position screw terminal blocks
32 to 140F (0 to 60C)
0 to 100% RH, 85F (29.4C) maximum dew point
Survival Operating Conditions
-20 to 140F (-29 to 60C)

-40 to 140F (-40 to 60C)

Duct Probe: White plastic cover with dark gray plastic housing and probe
Wall Mount (H x W x D): 1.81 x 2.12 x 3.12 in. (46 x 54 x 79 mm)

Dimensions
Diameter
0.98
25
Wall Mount: Beige plastic cover with metal base and metal foil face plates
Materials
Agency Compliance
Duct Probe (H x W x D):
3.28 x 3.25 x 8.27 in. (83 x 83 x 210 mm)

Probe (L x D): 6.25 x 0.98 in. (159 x 25 mm)
Duct Probe Material: 94-5V flammability rated per UL 94
Duct Probe Humidity Element

2/2
Product Bulletin
Issue Date
11/01/01
PRODUCT BULLETIN
Hx-67x3 Series Outdoor Relative Humidity Transmitter

Johnson Controls Hx-67x3 Series offers a full line of
outdoor Relative Humidity (RH) transmitters for
measuring and transmitting RH levels from 0 to 100%.
The RH transmitters provide excellent reliability,
long-term stability, and fast, accurate response to
changes in humidity. Certain models come equipped
with a temperature transmitter.
The humidity sensor is impervious to dust and most
chemicals, and it is unaffected by condensation. The
unique weather shield protects the sensors from solar
radiation and precipitation without affecting
performance. The multiple discs have a unique profile
that permits easy passage of air. The disc material is
especially formulated for high reflectivity, low thermal
conductivity, and maximum weather resistance. This
rugged enclosure will ensure a long life, even under
extreme weather conditions.
The sensor and shield function as one unit for optimal
performance. The RH transmitter can be easily
mounted on a roof, pole, or side of a building utilizing
its preassembled mounting bracket. It requires no
routine maintenance or recalibration.
Figure 1: Outdoor Relative Humidity Transmitter
0 to 100% RH Measurement
Offers a full range of accurate RH

measurement
Rugged Shield
Protects sensors from solar radiation and

precipitation without affecting performance
while multiple plates allow for maximum
airflow to generate precise measurements
Construction with
Multiple-plate Design
No Routine Maintenance or
Saves on cost
Calibration
Two-wire Current Loop or
Gives a variety of output and power types
Voltage Operation
Polymer, Thin-film Sensor

with Excellent Long-term
Stability
Negligible Temperature
Coefficient
Accurate RH Measurement
Code No. LIT-120181
Omits inaccuracies due to dust, water vapor,

harsh environments, and most chemicals
Generates accurate RH measurements
regardless of changes in temperature
Saves on building energy costs
1
Product Overview
The outdoor RH transmitters incorporate an
advanced-capacitive, thin-film humidity sensor
designed for demanding humidity measurement
applications where high accuracy is important. The
thin polymer film either absorbs or releases water
vapor as the relative humidity of the ambient air rises
or drops. The dielectric properties of the polymer film
depend on the amount of water contained in it: as
the relative humidity changes, the dielectric
properties of the film change, so the capacitance of
the sensor changes. The electronics of the
instrument measure the capacitance of the sensor
and convert it into a humidity reading. The
repeatability, stability, and performance of the
sensors have been proven in many industrial control
processes under extremely harsh conditions.
The shield provides a rugged, weatherproof
enclosure for the transmitter while maintaining
accurate performance. The multiple-plate design
allows for maximum airflow for precise
measurements. The disc material is especially
formulated for high reflectivity, low thermal
conductivity, and maximum weather resistance. This
enclosure will ensure a long life, even under extreme
weather conditions. Additionally, each unit comes
with a 3-year warranty.
Why Measure Relative Humidity?
Humidity is an important aspect of any climate
control system. The significance of indoor air quality
to our health has become evident. Humans are best
suited to and feel most comfortable within a fairly
narrow range of humidity and temperature, whereas
extremes, high or low, cause discomfort.
Accurate outdoor humidity measurement allows the
necessary steps to be taken indoors to ensure a
quality air environment.
Energy Savings
The right humidity level optimizes energy consumption.
In energy management projects with hundreds of
setpoints, it is normal to have only one outdoor humidity
sensor. If that sensor is not accurate, energy costs may
rise, and the building occupants comfort may suffer. The
maintenance-free, accurate, long-lasting performance of
these transmitters will keep energy costs low and
building comfort levels high. These transmitters are
compatible with most energy management systems.
In an economizer application, the enthalpy switchover
cycle uses the outdoor RH reading. It chooses whether
the mixed air system should be using outdoor air for free
cooling, return air by measuring the total heat content, or
enthalpy of each air stream. Thus this application
maximizes energy efficiency within the system.
Optional Features
Temperature Sensors
Models HE-67P3 and HT-67P3 come with a temperature
sensor. Enclosed within the weather shield, these
temperature sensors will give accurate outdoor
measurements in the worst weather conditions. The
sensors measure a wide temperature range from 14 to
140F (-10 to 60C) with a 0.55F (0.3C) accuracy at
77F (25C). They accurately convert the temperature
reading to a corresponding 4 to 20 mA output or 0 to
10 VDC output.
Repair and Replacement

To order a replacement, refer to the Ordering
Contact the nearest Johnson Controls representative to
order a RH transmitter, and specify the desired product
code number from Table 1.
Table 1: Selection Chart

Product Code Number
Description
HE-6703-0N0GO
Outdoor RH Transmitter 0 to 10 VDC Output
HT-6703-0N0GO
Outdoor RH Transmitter, 4 to 20 mA (DC) Output
HE-67P3-0N0GO
Outdoor RH and Temperature Transmitters, 0 to 10 VDC Outputs
HT-67P3-0N0GO
Outdoor RH and Temperature Transmitters, 4 to 20 mA (DC) Outputs
Hx-67x3 Series Outdoor Relative Humidity Transmitter Product Bulletin
Technical Data
HE-6703, HT-6703, HE-67P3, and HT-67P3 Outdoor Humidity
Transmitters
Product
Analog Output
Measuring Range
Relative
Humidity
Accuracy at 68F (20C)

Temperature Dependance
Operating Temperature Range
Output Resolution
Sensor Type
Analog Output
Temperature
(for HE-67P3
and HT-67P3
models only)
10 to 90% RH
3% RH
<1.5% RH from 14 to 140F (-10 to 60C)
-4 to 140F (-20 to 60C)
0.1% RH
Platinum 1000, IEC751, Class B
HE-67P3: 0 to 10 VDC for -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C)
HT-67P3: 4 to 20 mA (DC) for -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C)
Measuring Range
14 to 140F (-10 to 60C)
-40 to 140F (-40 to 60C)
0.55F (0.3C)
Linearity
Better than 0.1C
Temperature Dependance
Output Resolution
Stability
0.01C/C
0.1C
2% RH over 2 years

Humidity Range
General
HE-67x3: 0 to 10 VDC and 0 to 1 VDC for 0 to 100% RH

HT-67x3: 4 to 20 mA (DC) for 0 to 100% RH
-40 to 140F (-40 to 60C)

Power Requirements
HE-67x3: 20 to 30 VAC, or 18 to 30 VDC, Class 2

HT-67x3: 18 to 28 VDC, Class 2
Current Consumption
HE-67x3: 10 mA with DC Supply and 23 mA with AC Supply

HT-67x3: 27 mA (DC) Maximum Per Output
Maximum Output
HE-67x3: 13 VDC
HT-67x3: 27 mA (DC) per Output
Load Resistance
HE-67x3: >20 k ohms

HT-67x3: 50 ohms + [(Power Supply Voltage 8)/0.02]
Warm-up Time
Housing Material
Housing Classification
Shipping Weight
Instantaneous
ABS plastic
IP65 NEMA 4 Housing
4.2 lb (1.9 kg)
Controls Group
P.O. Box 423
Milwaukee, WI 53201
Printed in U.S.A.
Hx-67x3 Series Outdoor Relative Humidity Transmitter Product Bulletin
Product Bulletin HE-67xx

Issue Date September 30, 2002
TRUERH Series
HE-67xx Humidity Transmitter with Temperature Sensor
The TRUERH Series HE-67xx humidity transmitter
with temperature sensor offers dependable
technology, ease of installation, and application
flexibility in an attractively styled wall mount package.
The patented All-Polymer humidity sensor
construction improves resistance to chemical
corrosion. The element measures humidity within
either 2% or 3% accuracy, and generates a voltage
signal proportional to 0 to 100% Relative Humidity (RH).
Johnson Controls designed the HE-6700 Series
humidity transmitter with temperature sensor to use
with most controllers. It works directly with the
VMA1200 and VMA1400 Series controllers. An
additional thin-film nickel or thin-film platinum
temperature sensor adapts the unit for zone enthalpy
control applications. TRUERH products feature
patented circuitry and calibration improvements.
Figure 1: HE-67xx Series Humidity Element
National Institute of Standards Meets NIST standards for calibration testing,

and Technology (NIST)
Traceable Calibration
verifying, and auditing
Time Response Improvement
Improves local temperature control, increases

employee comfort, and reduces energy
consumption
Controller Configuration
Allows the user to adjust room comfort and to

choose occupancy features that match the
application and controller
Switch
Occupancy Light-Emitting
Displays the controllers current operating mode
Diode (LED) Indicator
Setpoint Adjustment
Allows local control of temperature
(Optional)
Manual Override Pushbutton

(PB)
Signals the controller that the space is occupied

in order to override time-of-day setback
Globally Scaled Unit
Includes setpoint and bulb indicator (both

optional) with Fahrenheit and Celsius ranges,
65 to 85F (19 to 29C)
Universal Mounting
Ships with U.S. wallbox and surface mounting

base (all installation hardware included)

Code No. LIT-216255
1
Product Overview
IMPORTANT: The HE-67xx Series humidity
transmitter with temperature sensors are intended to
provide input to equipment under normal operating
conditions. Where failure or malfunction of an
HE-67xx Series humidity transmitter with
temperature sensors could lead to an abnormal
operating condition that could cause personal injury
or damage to the equipment or other property, other
devices (limit or safety controls) or systems (alarm or
failure or malfunction of the HE-67xx Series humidity
transmitter with temperature sensors must be
control system.
The HE-67xx Series is the second generation of
humidity transmitter with temperature sensors for
sensing space humidity and temperature. The
improved response time from this temperature sensor
results in a 70% faster response time, which leads to:
increased comfort and reduced complaints about

ambient temperature (hot/cold)
increased comfort due to temperature overshoot

elimination
increased savings from reduced energy

consumption
Temperature sensing element selection allows the

user to tailor unit operation to specific application
requirements. The easy-to-install HE-67xx comes
factory calibrated; it can recover quickly from
saturation or loss of power. These features result in a
reduction both of the amount of time needed to install
and commission the unit and of the maintenance cost.
Another new feature is the Dual Inline Package (DIP)

switch, which programs the HE-67xx to either:
disable the PB and LED indicator
enable PB with LED indicator
enable PB without LED indicator
When released, the HE-67xx access door swings

down to reveal the Zone Bus connector and the
optional temperature indicator and setpoint
adjustments.
The HE-67xx features a quick-mount design that
saves time and simplifies installation. A mounting base
and screws come with the unit so it can be mounted
directly to drywall (spring clips provided) or a U.S.
wallbox. All wiring connects to terminal blocks.
Dimensions
Side View Surface
Mounted Sensor
Front View
Wallbox
Surface
Wall Mount Sensor Height
Mounted
Height
4-3/4
(121)
3-3/16
(81)
1-11/32
(34)
3-3/16
(81)
9/32
(7)
11/32
(9)
Each unit contains a 1000 ohm nickel or platinum

temperature sensor. An optional warmer/cooler or
graduated scale temperature setpoint adjusts up to
heat or down to cool.
A manual override PB allows the occupant to control
local temperature. By activating this feature, the end
user can signal the controller that the space is
occupied after hours or on weekends.

Sensor with Phone Jack

Sensor withTerminal Block
Figure 2: HE-67xx Dimensions, in. (mm)
An occupancy LED (red) displays the controllers

current operating mode:
On = Occupied
Off = Unoccupied
Flashing = Standby
TRUERH Series HE-67xx Humidity Transmitter with Temperature Sensor Product Bulletin
Repair and Replacement
The HE-67xx units are not field repairable. To order a

replacement, refer to the Ordering Information section.
To order a replacement HE-67xx Series transmitter

with temperature sensor or an accessory, contact the
nearest Johnson Controls representative. Specify the
desired product code number from Figure 3 and
Table 1.
IMPORTANT: The Printed Circuit Board (PCB) is

retained with a tamper-resistant mechanism.
Removal of the PCB from the plastic housing will
void the product warranty.
67
0
Humidity
Sensor
Accuracy
Humidity
Sensing
2 = 2%
3 = 3%
N = None
B = Liquid Bulb
Thermometer
Package
Color
0 = White
Setpoint Adjustment
and Scale Type

0 = None
N = 1000 ohm Thin-Film Nickel
P = 1000 ohm Thin-Film Platinum
Indication Type
0 = None
Warmer/Cooler
Scaled (65-85F/18-29C)
Note: All models have the manual override PB and a functioning LED display.
Example: To order a nickel sensor with a warmer/cooler temperature setpoint, and a
liquid bulb thermometer, specify Product Code Number HE-67N3-1B00W.
Figure 3: Ordering Template

Note:
Not all possible combinations are available.
Product Code Number
Description
ACC-DWCLIP-0
Drywall Clip Mounting Kit (10 per bag)
ACC-INSL-0*
Foam Pad Kit for Wallbox Mounting (10 per package)
ACC-INSL-1*
Foam Pad Kit for Surface Mounting (10 per package)
GRD10A-608
T-4000-119
Allen-Head Adjustment Tool (30 per bag)
TE-67L-600
Fahrenheit Label Replacement Kit
TE-67L-601
Celsius Label Replacement Kit
TE-67MB-600
Mounting Base Kit
TE-67D0-601**
Door Replacement Kit with Johnson Controls Logo
TE-67D0-602**
Door Replacement Kit without Logo
*
**
These foam pads help prevent drafts from entering the unit through the wall and make installation easier when
mounting on an uneven surface.
Contains 10 original style and 10 new style doors.
Product
Power Requirements
Current Draw
Humidity Element
Characteristics
at 77F (25C)
TRUERH Series HE-67xx Humidity Transmitter with Temperature Sensor

Signal:
Accuracy:
HE-67x2:
HE-67x3:
0 to 10 VDC
2% RH for 20 to 80% RH at 77F (25C)
3% RH for 20 to 80% RH at 77F (25C)
-0.1 to 0.05% RH/C at 5C (41F) to
-0.07 to -0.21% RH/C at 65C (149F)
Nickel Sensor
Temperature Sensor:
Reference Resistance:
Accuracy:
1,000 ohm thin-film nickel

Approximately 3 ohms per F (5.4 ohms per C)
1,000 ohms at 70F (21C)
0.34F at 70F (0.18C at 21C)
Platinum Sensor
Temperature Sensor:
Accuracy:
1,000 ohm thin-film platinum

Approximately 2 ohms per F (3.9 ohms per C)
1,000 ohms at 32F (0C)
0.65F at 70F (0.36C at 21C)
Sensor Response Time (for

both temperature sensors):
Temperature Setpoint
Zone Bus Access
Manual Override
LED Display
One-time constant = 8 2 minutes at 10 feet per minute (fpm) airflow rate

(Depending on option chosen)
Type:
Single setpoint
Scale (Range):
Red/blue visual scale (warmer/cooler)
Graduated 5F scale (65 to 85F)
Graduated 2C scale (19 to 29C)
Resistance:
Nominal 1.5 k ohm range
18 to 24 AWG wire for 9-position terminal block
6-pin connector with front access for a laptop with HVAC PRO software, a Palm compatible
handheld device with Variable Air Volume Modular Assembly Balancing Tool software, or a
Zone Terminal
Integral momentary pushbutton (DIP switch selectable)
Red LED indicates three modes of operation (application and controller dependent)
Ambient Operating
Conditions
32 to 131F (0 to 55C)
Ambient Storage
Conditions
-40 to 140F (-40 to 60C)

Mounting Style
Materials
Shipping Weight
Standard base for both surface or standard U.S. wallbox mounting, including hardware
White plastic case and mounting base
3.2 x 3.2 x 1.4 in. (81 x 81 x 36 mm)
1 lb (0.5 kg)
Controls Group
P.O. Box 423
Milwaukee, WI 53201
Published in U.S.A.
FANs 216, 1628.3

Product Bulletin
Issue Date
HE-67xx
0301
TRUERH Series
HE-67xx Humidity Element with Temperature Sensor
The HE-67xx Series Humidity devices house both a

humidity and a temperature sensor in a wall or
duct-mount style. The humidity sensor is capable of
measuring Relative Humidity (RH) over the entire range
of 0 to 100%, and its All-Polymer construction
provides improved resistance to chemical corrosion. The
TRUERH product line delivers devices with
RH accuracy of either 2% or 3% RH.
Figure 1: HE-67xx-0N0BT Wall Mount

Humidity Element
TRUERH humidity elements produce voltage output

signals proportional to measured humidity for humidity
indication.
Temperature sensors are available in thin-film nickel,
thin-film platinum, and silicon. The Elements are
powered with 14 to 30 VDC or 20 to 30 VAC and
feature a user-selectable humidity output of
0 to 10 VDC or 0 to 5 VDC.
Figure 2: HE-67xx-0N00P Duct Probe

Humidity Element

TRUERH
Circuitry and calibration techniques for which

patent protection is pending
All-Polymer Humidity
Patented sensing element provides accurate

and reliable humidity sensing
Sensor
National Institute of
Standards and Technology
(NIST) Traceable Calibration
The 2% RH accurate model
Tested, verified, and audited per

NIST standards
Documents higher precision for 2% models
includes a NIST certificate

of conformance
Humidity and Temperature

Sensors in One Unit
User-selectable Output
Voltage Range
All-Plastic Material for Duct

Probe

Code No. LIT-216245
Eliminates the need for separate sensors

and reduces installation time and cost
Allows choice of standard voltage outputs for
use with systems in service or new systems
Improves thermal performance and complies
with Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)
flammability ratings for plenum use; complies
with Blue Angel (Germany) and TCO'95
(Sweden) environmental regulations
1
P roduct Overview
IMPORTANT:
The HE-67xx Series Humidity

Elements with Temperature Sensor
are designed for use only as
operating controls. Where failure or
malfunction of the HE-67xx could
lead to an abnormal operating
condition that could cause personal
injury or damage to the equipment
or other property, other devices (limit
or safety controls) or systems (alarm
or supervisory) intended to warn of,
malfunction of the HE-67xx must be
incorporated into and maintained as
part of the control system.
Space and duct humidity are also important factors in

overall indoor air quality. The elements allow monitoring
and comparing of humidity levels with those recommended
in ASHRAE Standard 62-1999.
See Figure 3 for the resistance versus temperature
relationship for a nickel, silicon, or platinum
temperature sensor.
1400
1300
1200
Platinum
Nickel
Silicon
1100
Resistance
1000
(Ohms)
900
800
The HE-67xx humidity elements provide independent

humidity and temperature signals for use in a wide
range of sensing applications, and are suitable for use
with most Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning
(HVAC) controllers.
The humidity elements are a durable, cost-effective
solution for humidity sensing. They are easy to install
and factory calibrated to NIST standards. The 2%
models ship with NIST certificates of conformance to
validate Johnson Controls use in demanding HVAC
applications. The elements can operate in areas with
little or no airflow, and recover after loss of power or
saturation.
The patented All-Polymer humidity element is capable
of sensing over the entire range of 0 to 100% RH; its
construction provides resistance to corrosion in typical
HVAC environments. The temperature sensor is
isolated from and operates independently of the
humidity sensor.
700
600
0
-18
20
-7
40
60
80
100
4
16
27
38
Temperature, F/C
120
49
Figure 3: Resistance Versus Temperature
D imensions
See Figure 4 or 5 for humidity element dimensions.
2.12
54
3.12
79
The elements are available with three types of

temperature sensors:
thin-film nickel sensor that provides 1000 ohms of

resistance at 70F (21C).
silicon sensor that provides 1035 ohms of

resistance at 77F (25C).
thin-film platinum sensor that provides 1000 ohms

of resistance at 32F (0C).
1.81
46
Figure 4: Wall Mount Humidity Element

The temperature and humidity information from the

elements can be used to calculate enthalpy, important
in determining an energy-efficient and cost-effective
strategy.
140
60
TRUERH Series HE-67xx Humidity Element with Temperature Sensor Product Bulletin
R epair and Replacement
3.28
83
The wall mount and duct probe humidity elements are

not field repairable. Refer to the Ordering Information
section to order a replacement.
3.25
83
2.02
51
Contact the nearest Johnson Controls representative
to order a humidity element, and specify the desired
product code number from Table 1. Refer to Table 2
for accessories available for the wall mount humidity
elements. (There are none for the duct probe models.)
6.25
159
Diameter
0.98
25
Figure 5: Duct Probe Humidity Element

Table 1: Humidity Elements

RH Accuracy
Product Code Number
Description
HE-67P2-0N0BT
Wall mount humidity element with thin-film platinum temperature sensor
HE-67S2-0N0BT
Wall mount humidity element with silicon temperature sensor
HE-67N2-0N0BT
Wall mount humidity element with thin-film nickel temperature sensor
HE-67P2-0N00P
Duct probe humidity element with thin-film platinum temperature sensor
HE-67S2-0N00P
Duct probe humidity element with silicon temperature sensor
HE-67N2-0N00P
Duct probe humidity element with thin-film nickel temperature sensor
HE-67P3-0N0BT
Wall mount humidity element with thin-film platinum temperature sensor
HE-67S3-0N0BT
Wall mount humidity element with silicon temperature sensor
HE-67N3-0N0BT
Wall mount humidity element with thin-film nickel temperature sensor
HE-67P3-0N00P
Duct probe humidity element with thin-film platinum temperature sensor
HE-67S3-0N00P
Duct probe humidity element with silicon temperature sensor
HE-67N3-0N00P
Duct probe humidity element with thin-film nickel temperature sensor
2%
3%
Table 2: Accessories for the Wall Mount Humidity Elements

Product Code Number
Description
GRD10A-608
T-4000-119
Allen-head Adjustment Tool (30/bag)
TE-1800-9600
Wall Plate Adaptor Kit required for wallbox mounting
TRUERH Series HE-67xx Humidity Element with Temperature Sensor Product Bulletin 3
S pecifications
Product
Power Requirements
Current Draw
Acceptable Wire Gauge
Humidity Element
at 77F (25C)
TRUERH Series HE-67xx Humidity Element with Temperature Sensor

16 to 24 AWG (18 AWG recommended)
Signal:
Accuracy:
0 to 5 VDC or 0 to 10 VDC, 1,000 ohm maximum load

Temperature Coefficient: -0.1 to 0.05% RH/C at 5C (41F) to

-0.07 to -0.21% RH/C at 65C (149F)
Temperature Sensors
Thin-film Nickel
Silicon
Thin-film Platinum
Accuracy:
Resistance Change:
Accuracy:
Resistance Change:
Accuracy:
Resistance Change:
3-position and 2-position screw terminal blocks
32 to 140F (0 to 60C)
Survival Operating Conditions
-20 to 140F (-29 to 60C)

-40 to 140F (-40 to 60C)

Materials
Dimensions
Shipping Weight
Agency Compliance
0.34F (0.18C) at 70F (21C)

1000 ohms at 70F (21C)
Approximately 3 ohms/F (5 ohms/C)
1F (0.6C) at 70F (21C)
1035 ohms at 77F (25C)
0.65F at 70F (0.36C at 21C)
1000 ohms at 32F (0C)
Wall Mount:
Duct Probe:
Beige plastic cover with metal base and metal foil face plates
White plastic cover with dark gray plastic housing and probe
Wall Mount (H x W x D):

Duct Probe (H x W x D):
Probe (L x D):
1.81 x 2.12 x 3.12 in. (46 x 54 x 79 mm)

3.28 x 3.25 x 8.27 in. (83 x 83 x 210 mm)
6.25 x 0.98 in. (159 x 25 mm)
0.6 lb (0.3 kg)

Duct Probe Material:
94-5V flammability rated per UL 94
Controls Group
P.O. Box 423
Milwaukee, WI 53201
TRUERH Series HE-67xx Humidity Element with Temperature Sensor Product Bulletin
Printed in U.S.A.

TEC21x6(H)-2 Series N2 Networked Thermostats with Two Outputs,

Description
Features

N2 networked devices that provide control of
two- or four-pipe fan coils, cabinet unit heaters,
or other equipment using on/off, floating, or
proportional 0 to 10 VDC control input, three
speeds of fan control, and dehumidification
Building Automation System (BAS) N2 Bus
space temperature control. Specific models
are available to accommodate commercial and
hospitality applications.

Refer to the TEC21x6(H)-2 Series

N2 Networked Thermostats with Two Outputs,
Dehumidification Capability, and Three
Speeds of Fan Control Product Bulletin
BAS N2 open communication provides

network; N2 Bus is widely accepted by
(HVAC) control suppliers
dehumidification
control signals
three speeds of fan control provides
easy FAN speed selection via interface
key, to meet the application requirements
override interface key (commercial models)
allows easy access for temporarily
overriding the unoccupied mode
temperature scale selector (hospitality
status
TEC21x6-2 Series N2 Networked

Thermostat with Two Outputs,
Dehumidification Capability, and

efficiency
Repair Information
representative.
Selection Chart
Code Number
Control Outputs
Fan Control
Integral
Application
Humidity Sensor
TEC2116-2
Two On/Off
Three Speeds
No
Commercial Market
TEC2116H-2
Two On/Off
Three Speeds
No
Hospitality Market
Commercial Market
TEC2126-2
Three Speeds
No
TEC2126H-2
Three Speeds
No
Hospitality Market
TEC2136-2
Three Speeds
Yes
Commercial Market
TEC2136H-2
Three Speeds
Yes
Hospitality Market
TEC2146-2
Three Speeds
No
Commercial Market
TEC2146H-2
Three Speeds
No
Hospitality Market
TEC2156-2
Three Speeds
Yes
Commercial Market
TEC2156H-2
Three Speeds
Yes
Hospitality Market
Accessories
Code Number
Description
SEN-600-1
TE-6361P-1
SEN-600-4
TE-636S-1
Strap-On Temperature Sensor
1 of 2
TEC21x6(H)-2 Series N2 Networked Thermostats with Two Outputs, Dehumidification

Capability, and Three Speeds of Fan Control (Continued)
4-15/16
(125)
Room Temp
70.0F
MODE
FAN
1-1/8
(29)
FIG:dmnsns
3-3/8
(86)
TEC21x6(H)-2 Series N2 Networked Thermostats with Two Outputs, Dehumidification Capability, and Three Speeds of Fan Control
Power Requirements
19 to 30 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 2 VA (Terminals 4 and 5) at 24 VAC Normal,

Relay/Triac
Contact Rating
30 VAC, 1.0 A Maximum, 3.0 A In-Rush, Class 2 or SELV


Triac Output
Digital Inputs
Voltage-Free Contacts Across Terminal Scom to Terminals BI1, BI2, or UI3
Wire Size
Temperature Range
Accuracy

Backlit Display
Heating Control
40.0F/4.5C to 90.0F/32.0C
Cooling Control
54.0F/12.0C to 100.0F/38.0C
Temperature
Humidity
Minimum Deadband
Ambient Conditions
Compliance

Operating
Storage
United States

Canada

Shipping Weight
Europe

0.75 lb (0.34 kg)
2 of 2

TEC2145-2 N2 Networked Thermostat with Single Proportional Output

Description
Features
The TEC2145-2 Thermostat is an N2

networked device that provides control of
other equipment using a proportional 0 to
10 VDC control input and one-speed fan
control. The technologically advanced
Automation System (BAS) N2 Bus
space temperature control.

Proportional-Integral (PI) time-proportioning
algorithm that virtually eliminates temperature
offset associated with traditional,
Refer to the TEC2145-2 N2 Networked
and One-Speed Fan Control Product Bulletin

proportional 0 to 10 VDC control offers
override interface key allows for easy
access of temporarily overriding the
unoccupied mode
two binary inputs provide additional
inputs for advanced functions such as
remote night setback, service or filter
alarms, motion detector, and window status
efficiency
TEC2145-2 N2 Networked Thermostat

with Single Proportional Output and
Repair Information
If the TEC2145-2 Thermostat fails to operate
Selection Chart
Applications
TEC2145-2
Control of Two-Pipe Fan Coils, Cabinet Unit Heaters, or Other Equipment Using a
Proportional 0 to 10 VDC Control Input and One-Speed Fan Control
Networked N2 Bus, Two-Pipe, Proportional 0 to 10 VDC

Control Output, and One-Speed Fan Control Thermostat
Accessories
TE-6361P-1
SEN-600-41
Indoor Air Temperature Sensor with Occupancy Override and Light-Emitting Diode (LED)
TE-636S-1
1. Remote indoor air temperature sensing cannot be accomplished using the SEN-600-4 with the TEC2145-2.
1 of 2
TEC2145-2 N2 Networked Thermostat with Single Proportional Output and One-Speed

Fan Control (Continued)
4-15/16
(125)
Room Temp
70.0F
MODE
FAN
1-1/8
(29)
FIG:dmnsns
3-3/8
(86)
TEC2145-2 N2 Networked Thermostat with Single Proportional Output and One-Speed Fan Control
Power Requirements



Triac Output
Digital Inputs
Wire Size
Thermostat Measurement Range
-40.0F/-40.0C to 122.0F/50.0C
Resolution
0.2F/0.1C
Control Accuracy
Control Range

Heating
Cooling
Minimum Deadband
Ambient Conditions
Compliance

Operating
Storage
United States

Canada

Shipping Weight
Europe

0.75 lb (0.34 kg)
2 of 2


Description
Features

N2 networked devices that provide control of
two- or four-pipe fan coils, cabinet unit heaters,
or other equipment using on/off, floating, or
proportional 0 to 10 VDC control input, three
speeds of fan control, and dehumidification
space temperature control. Specific models
are available to accommodate commercial and

Refer to the TEC21x6(H)-2 Series

N2 Networked Thermostats with Two Outputs,
Dehumidification Capability, and Three

dehumidification
control signals
three speeds of fan control provides
easy FAN speed selection via interface
key, to meet the application requirements
override interface key (commercial models)
allows easy access for temporarily
overriding the unoccupied mode
temperature scale selector (hospitality
status
TEC21x6-2 Series N2 Networked

Thermostat with Two Outputs,
Dehumidification Capability, and

efficiency
Repair Information
representative.
Selection Chart
Code Number
Control Outputs
Fan Control
Integral
Application
Humidity Sensor
TEC2116-2
Two On/Off
Three Speeds
No
Commercial Market
TEC2116H-2
Two On/Off
Three Speeds
No
Hospitality Market
Commercial Market
TEC2126-2
Three Speeds
No
TEC2126H-2
Three Speeds
No
Hospitality Market
TEC2136-2
Three Speeds
Yes
Commercial Market
TEC2136H-2
Three Speeds
Yes
Hospitality Market
TEC2146-2
Three Speeds
No
Commercial Market
TEC2146H-2
Three Speeds
No
Hospitality Market
TEC2156-2
Three Speeds
Yes
Commercial Market
TEC2156H-2
Three Speeds
Yes
Hospitality Market
Accessories
Code Number
Description
SEN-600-1
TE-6361P-1
SEN-600-4
TE-636S-1
1 of 2

Capability, and Three Speeds of Fan Control (Continued)
4-15/16
(125)
Room Temp
70.0F
MODE
FAN
1-1/8
(29)
FIG:dmnsns
3-3/8
(86)
TEC21x6(H)-2 Series N2 Networked Thermostats with Two Outputs, Dehumidification Capability, and Three Speeds of Fan Control
Power Requirements

Relay/Triac
Contact Rating


Triac Output
Digital Inputs
Wire Size
Temperature Range
Accuracy

Backlit Display
Heating Control
40.0F/4.5C to 90.0F/32.0C
Cooling Control
54.0F/12.0C to 100.0F/38.0C
Temperature
Humidity
Minimum Deadband
Ambient Conditions
Compliance

Operating
Storage
United States

Canada

Shipping Weight
Europe

0.75 lb (0.34 kg)
2 of 2
TEC21x6(H)-2 Series N2 Networked Thermostats with

Two Outputs, Dehumidification Capability, and Three
Product Bulletin
N2 networked devices that provide control of two- or
four-pipe fan coils, cabinet unit heaters, or other
equipment using on/off, floating, or proportional
0 to 10 VDC control input, three speeds of fan control,
and dehumidification capability. The technologically
advanced TEC21x6(H)-2 Series Thermostats feature a
Figure 1: TEC21x6-2 Series N2 Networked

Thermostat with Two Outputs, Dehumidification
Capability, and Three Speeds of Fan Control

Feature
Benefit
BAS N2 Open Communication
Provides compatibility with a proven communication network; N2 Bus is

widely accepted by Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC)
control suppliers


user interaction

Control

signals
Provides easy FAN speed selection via interface key, to meet the

(Commercial Models)
Temperature Scale Selector



UP/DOWN arrow keys



Dehumidification Capability, and Three Speeds of Fan Control Product Bulletin
Product Overview
BAS N2 Bus communication capability, allowing the
and easy.

and eliminates the need for DIP switches.



glance.

0 to 24 hours.
Auxiliary Contact

(On/Off Control)
equipment cycling.

power failure.
Remote Access
controller.
Additional Features

from 2.0F/1.0C to 4.0F/2.0C.


Code Number
Control Outputs
Fan Control
Integral
Humidity Sensor
Application
TEC2116-2
Two On/Off
Three Speeds
No
Commercial Market
TEC2116H-2
Two On/Off
Three Speeds
No
Hospitality Market
TEC2126-2
Three Speeds
No
Commercial Market
TEC2126H-2
Three Speeds
No
Hospitality Market
TEC2136-2
Three Speeds
Yes
Commercial Market
TEC2136H-2
Three Speeds
Yes
Hospitality Market
TEC2146-2
Three Speeds
No
Commercial Market
TEC2146H-2
Three Speeds
No
Hospitality Market
TEC2156-2
Three Speeds
Yes
Commercial Market
TEC2156H-2
Three Speeds
Yes
Hospitality Market
TEC21x6(H)-2 Series N2 Networked Thermostats with Two Outputs, Dehumidification Capability, and Three

Code Number
Description
SEN-600-1
TE-6361P-1
SEN-600-4
TE-636S-1
Room Temp
70.0F
MODE
LEDs indicate
system activity.
FAN
FIG:frnt_vw
Backlit, plain text

LCD is easy to read
in any condition.

4-15/16
(125)
Room Temp
70.0F
MODE
FAN
1-1/8
(29)
FIG:dmnsns
3-3/8
(86)
Status Display Menu



section.)

Status Display Menu

Room Temperature and Humidity (If Humidity

Display is Enabled)
System Mode
Schedule Status (Occupied/Unoccupied/Override)



center key:
N2 Communication Address
Backlit LCD
Menu Scroll

Auto Mode

Models)
Pipe No.

LEDs
Fan Menu


Models)

Models)
Menu Overview


Setpoint

Setpoint
Setpoint Type
Door Open Time

Models)
Auxiliary Contact
Reheat Time

Switching
Repair Information
Capability, and Three Speeds of Fan Control (Part 1 of 2)
Power Requirements

Relay/Triac
Contact
Rating
On/Off and
Floating
Control
Analog
Output Rating
Proportional
Control
Auxiliary
Output Rating
Triac Output
Digital Inputs
Wire Size
Temperature
Range
Accuracy
Backlit
Display
Heating
Control
40.0F/4.5C to 90.0F/32.0C
Cooling
Control
54.0F/12.0C to 100.0F/38.0C
Temperature
Humidity
Minimum Deadband
Ambient
Conditions
Operating
Storage

Compliance
United States

Canada

Europe
Australia and
New Zealand
Shipping Weight
0.75 lb (0.34 kg)
Controls Group
Milwaukee, WI 53202
Published in U.S.A.
Product Bulletin TEC2145-2

Issue Date July 20, 2006
TEC2145-2 N2 Networked Thermostat with

The TEC2145-2 Thermostat is an N2 networked
device that provides control of two-pipe fan coils,
cabinet unit heaters, or other equipment using a
Automation System (BAS) N2 Bus communication
programmability for efficient space temperature
control.
operation quick and easy. The thermostat also
employs a unique, Proportional-Integral (PI)
Figure 1: TEC2145-2 N2 Networked Thermostat

with Single Proportional Output and

N2 Bus is widely accepted by Heating, Ventilating, and
Air Conditioning (HVAC) control suppliers
Offers real-time control status of the environment in

easy-to-read, English plain text messages with constant
backlight that brightens during user interaction
Offers additional application flexibility by providing more

advanced control signals
Allows for easy access of temporarily overriding the

unoccupied mode

UP/DOWN arrow keys
Two Binary Inputs
Provide additional inputs for advanced functions such as

remote night setback, service or filter alarms, motion detector,
and window status
Enable the thermostat to adapt to any application, allowing

installer parameter access without opening the thermostat
cover

1
Product Overview
The TEC2145-2 Thermostat is specifically designed
for networked control of common two-pipe heating and
cooling equipment using a proportional control input.
In addition to superior temperature control and
application flexibility, the TEC2145-2 features
and five interface keys make setup and operation
quick and easy.
IMPORTANT:
The TEC2145-2 Thermostat is
Additional Features



glance.

0 to 24 hours.
Auxiliary Contact

equipment cycling.

power failure.
Remote Access
controller.


from 2.0F/1.0C to 4.0F/2.0C.

Table 1: Thermostat Model

Code Number
Description
Applications
TEC2145-2
Networked N2 Bus, Two-Pipe, Proportional



Code Number
Description
TE-6361P-1
SEN-600-4*
Indoor Air Temperature Sensor with Occupancy Override and LED
TE-636S-1
Remote indoor air temperature sensing cannot be accomplished using the SEN-600-4 with the TEC2145-2.
Product Bulletin
Room Temp
70.0F
MODE
LEDs indicate
system activity.
FAN
FIG:frnt_vw
Backlit, plain text

LCD is easy to read
in any condition.

Backlit LCD
The TEC2145-2 Thermostat user interface consists

of five keys on the front cover (as illustrated in

45 seconds.

available, as defined by selecting the
appropriate operation sequence in the Installer
Configuration Menu (for example Off, Heat,
Cool, Auto).
AUTO operates the fan only on a call for heating
or cooling, for both occupied and unoccupied
periods.
OVERRIDE key overrides the unoccupied mode
to occupied at the local user interface for the
selecting the appropriate time period in the
Installer Configuration Menu.) The OVERRIDE
LEDs
Note: If one of the binary inputs is configured

to operate as a remote override contact, this

Product Bulletin
Menu Overview
There are two menus available to view and

configure the TEC 2145-2 Thermostat:

Setpoint
Setpoint Type
Status Display Menu
Door Open Time

Status Display Menu

Auxiliary Contact
Reheat Time
Room Temperature
System Mode
UI3 Input Configuration to Locally Monitor Supply Air

Temperature or Hot/Cold Water Changeover
Switching
Schedule Status
Occupied/Unoccupied/Override
Applicable Alarms The backlight lights up as

an alarm condition is displayed.

Configuration Menu to lock out the scrolling display
and show only the Room Temperature parameter.
The Installer Configuration Menu includes the

following parameters that are accessed by pressing
the same OVERRIDE key:
Room Temp
70.0F
MODE
FAN
3-3/8
(86)
1-1/8
(29)
FIG:dmnsns

The Installer Configuration Menu is used to set up
the thermostat for an application-specific operation.
To access the menu, press and hold the OVERRIDE
key for approximately 8 seconds.
4-15/16
(125)
Menu Scroll
Auto Mode
Repair Information
F or C Temperature Scales

specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement
thermostat, contact the nearest Johnson Controls
representative.
Unoccupied Heating Setpoint/Unoccupied

Cooling Setpoint
Product Bulletin
Product
TEC2145-2 N2 Networked Thermostat with Single Proportional Output

Power Requirements

Triac Output
Digital Inputs
Voltage-Free Contacts Across Terminal Scom to Terminals BI1, BI2, or

UI3
Wire Size
18 AWG (1.0 mm Diameter) Maximum, 22 AWG (0.6 mm Diameter)

Recommended
Thermostat
Measurement Range
-40.0F/-40.0C to 122.0F/50.0C
Resolution
0.2F/0.1C
Control Accuracy
Control Range
Heating
Cooling
Minimum Deadband
Ambient Conditions

Operating
Storage
Continued on Next Page . . .
Product Bulletin
Technical Specifications (Cont.)

Compliance
United States

Canada

Under CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 24, Temperature Indicating and
Regulating Equipment
Europe
Australia and
New Zealand
Shipping Weight
0.75 lb (0.34 kg)
Controls Group
P.O. Box 423
Milwaukee, WI 53201
Published in U.S.A.
Product Bulletin
TEC21x6(H)-2 Series N2 Networked Thermostats with

Two Outputs, Dehumidification Capability, and Three
Product Bulletin
N2 networked devices that provide control of two- or
four-pipe fan coils, cabinet unit heaters, or other
0 to 10 VDC control input, three speeds of fan control,
and dehumidification capability. The technologically
advanced TEC21x6(H)-2 Series Thermostats feature a
Figure 1: TEC21x6-2 Series N2 Networked

Thermostat with Two Outputs, Dehumidification
Capability, and Three Speeds of Fan Control

Feature
Benefit
Provides compatibility with a proven communication network; N2 Bus is

widely accepted by Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC)
control suppliers


user interaction

Control

signals
Provides easy FAN speed selection via interface key, to meet the

(Commercial Models)
Temperature Scale Selector



UP/DOWN arrow keys



Product Overview
and easy.




glance.

0 to 24 hours.
Auxiliary Contact

(On/Off Control)
equipment cycling.

power failure.
Remote Access
controller.
Additional Features

from 2.0F/1.0C to 4.0F/2.0C.


Code Number
Control Outputs
Fan Control
Integral
Humidity Sensor
Application
TEC2116-2
Two On/Off
Three Speeds
No
Commercial Market
TEC2116H-2
Two On/Off
Three Speeds
No
Hospitality Market
TEC2126-2
Three Speeds
No
Commercial Market
TEC2126H-2
Three Speeds
No
Hospitality Market
TEC2136-2
Three Speeds
Yes
Commercial Market
TEC2136H-2
Three Speeds
Yes
Hospitality Market
TEC2146-2
Three Speeds
No
Commercial Market
TEC2146H-2
Three Speeds
No
Hospitality Market
TEC2156-2
Three Speeds
Yes
Commercial Market
TEC2156H-2
Three Speeds
Yes
Hospitality Market

Code Number
Description
SEN-600-1
TE-6361P-1
SEN-600-4
TE-636S-1
Room Temp
70.0F
MODE
LEDs indicate
system activity.
FAN
FIG:frnt_vw
Backlit, plain text

LCD is easy to read
in any condition.

4-15/16
(125)
Room Temp
70.0F
MODE
FAN
1-1/8
(29)
FIG:dmnsns
3-3/8
(86)
Status Display Menu



section.)

Status Display Menu

Room Temperature and Humidity (If Humidity

Display is Enabled)
System Mode
Schedule Status (Occupied/Unoccupied/Override)



center key:
Backlit LCD
Menu Scroll

Auto Mode

Models)
Pipe No.

LEDs
Fan Menu


Models)

Models)
Menu Overview


Setpoint

Setpoint
Setpoint Type
Door Open Time

Models)
Auxiliary Contact
Reheat Time

Switching
Repair Information
Power Requirements

Relay/Triac
Contact
Rating
On/Off and
Floating
Control
Analog
Output Rating
Proportional
Control
Auxiliary
Output Rating
Triac Output
Digital Inputs
Wire Size
Temperature
Range
Accuracy
Backlit
Display
Heating
Control
40.0F/4.5C to 90.0F/32.0C
Cooling
Control
54.0F/12.0C to 100.0F/38.0C
Temperature
Humidity
Minimum Deadband
Ambient
Conditions
Operating
Storage

Compliance
United States

Canada

Europe
Australia and
New Zealand
Shipping Weight
0.75 lb (0.34 kg)
Controls Group
Milwaukee, WI 53202
Published in U.S.A.

M9102-AGA-2S, -3S and M9104-xGA-2S, -3S Series
Electric Non-Spring Return Actuators

The M9102 and M9104 Series Actuators are
direct-mount, non-spring return electric
actuators that operate on AC 24 V power.
These synchronous motor-driven actuators
provide floating control (AGA), floating control
with automatic shutoff (IGA), and proportional
control with selectable 0-10 or 2-10 VDC
(GGA). The -2S models are equipped with
plenum cables, and the -3S models are
equipped with terminal blocks.
All models are compact in size and are easily
installed on Variable Air Volume (VAV) boxes,
Variable Volume and Temperature (VVT)
two-position zone applications, or small- to
medium-sized dampers with a round shaft up
to 1/2 in. (13 mm) in diameter or a 3/8 in.
(10 mm) square shaft.
The M9102 Series Electric Non-Spring Return
Actuators provide a running torque of 18 lbin
(2 Nm), and the nominal travel time is
30 seconds at 60 Hz (36 seconds at 50 Hz) for
90 of rotation. The M9104 Series Electric
Non-Spring Return Acuators provide a running
torque of 35 lbin (4 Nm), and the nominal
travel time is 60 seconds at 60 Hz (72 seconds
at 50 Hz) for 90 of rotation.
Refer to the M9102-AGA-2S, -3S and
M9104-xGA-2S, -3S Series Electric
Non-Spring Return Actuators Product Bulletin
Features
two torques available: 18 and 35 lbin

(2 and 4 Nm) offer the most suitable
choice for the specific application
short 30-second travel time available
provides a quick response for two-position
zone applications
35 dBA nominal audible noise rating
meets the audible noise requirements for
open ceiling environments
synchronous drive provides a constant
rotation time that is independent of the load
100,000 cycle rating provides years of
trouble-free service
direct shaft mounting with single-screw
coupler reduces installation time and
provides three-point shaft gripping
magnetic clutch protects the actuator
gear train and the damper from damage
due to excessive torque during a stall
condition
manual gear release simplifies actuator
setup and adjustments in the field
plenum cable or screw terminal electric
connections make wiring quick and easy
floating, floating with timeout, and

proportional 0(2)...10 VDC control inputs
available offer a full range of control
input options
small, compact design allows installation
in tight-fitting locations
Applications
The M9102 and M9104 Series Electric
Non-Spring Return Actuators are designed to
position balancing, control, round, and zone
dampers in Heating, Ventilating, and Air
Conditioning (HVAC) systems. These electric
actuators are also designed to position blades
in a VAV box, or they can be used in VVT
two-position zone applications.
Each actuator mounts directly to the surface in
any convenient orientation using a single
No. 10 self-drilling sheet metal screw (included
with the actuator). No additional linkages or
couplers are required. Electrical connections
on the actuator are clearly labeled to simplify
installation.
M9102/M9104 Series Electric

Non-Spring Return Actuator
Repair Information
If the M9102 or M9104 Series Electric
Non-Spring Return Actuator fails to operate
replacement electric actuator, contact the
1-1/4
(32)
25/32
(20)
Set Screw
Radius
Clearance
1-3/32
(28)
9/16
(14)
5-5/32
(131)
4-3/32
(104)
1-13/32
(36)
3/16
(5)
2-13/16
(71)
2-1/16
(52)
2-1/4
(57)
FIG:act_d im
Description
M9102/M9104 Series Electric Non-Spring Return Actuator

1 of 2
Electric Non-Spring Return Actuators (Continued)

Selection Chart
Code Number
Control Type
Running Torque
Travel Time
M9102-AGA-2S
Floating
18 lbin (2 Nm)
30 Seconds at 60 Hz
48 in. (1.2 m) UL 444 Type CMP Plenum Rated cable

with 19 AWG (0.75 mm2) conductors and .25 in. (6 mm)
ferrule ends
M9102-AGA-3S
Floating
18 lbin (2 Nm)
30 Seconds at 60 Hz
M3 Screw Terminals
M9104-AGA-2S
Floating
35 lbin (4 Nm)
60 Seconds at 60 Hz

ferrule ends
M9104-AGA-3S
Floating
35 lbin (4 Nm)
60 Seconds at 60 Hz
M3 Screw Terminals
M9104-IGA-2S
Floating or On/Off
35 lbin (4 Nm)
60 Seconds at 60 Hz

ferrule ends
M9104-IGA-3S
Floating or On/Off
35 lbin (4 Nm)
60 Seconds at 60 Hz
M3 Screw Terminals
M9104-GGA-2S
Proportional
35 lbin (4 Nm)
60 Seconds at 60 Hz

ferrule ends
M9104-GGA-3S
Proportional
35 lbin (4 Nm)
60 Seconds at 60 Hz
M3 Screw Terminals
Accessories
Code Number
Description
M9102-AGA-2S, -3S and M9104-xGA-2S, -3S Series Electric Non-Spring Return Actuators
Power Requirements
Control Type
Input Signal
Feedback Signal
M910x-AGA-xS
AC 24 V +25%/-20% at 50/60 Hz, 2.1 VA Supply, Class 2, Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV)
M9104-IGA-xS
AC 24 V +25%/-20% at 50/60 Hz, 3.0 VA Supply, Class 2, SELV
M9104-GGA-xS
AC 24 V +25%/-20% at 50/60 Hz, 3.6 VA Supply, Class 2, SELV
M910x-AGA-xS
M9104-IGA-xS
M9104-GGA-xS
M910x-AGA-xS
AC 24 V +25%/-20% at 50/60 Hz, Class 2, SELV without Timeout
M9104-IGA-xS
AC 24 V +25%/-20% at 50/60 Hz, Class 2, SELV with Timeout
M9104-GGA-xS
0(2) to 10 VDC or 0(4) to 20 mA with field-furnished 500 ohm resistor
M9104-GGA-2S
0 to 10 VDC or 2 to 10 VDC for 90 (10 VDC at 1 mA)


Running Torque
Travel Time
200 ohms Nominal

M9102 Series
18 lbin (2 Nm)
M9104 Series
35 lbin (4 Nm)
M9102 Series
M9104 Series
Rotation Range
93 3, CW or CCW
Cycles



M9102-AGA-2S
M9104-xGA-2S
48 in. (1.2 m) UL 444 Type CMP Plenum Rated Cable with 19 AWG (0.75 mm2) conductors and
M9102-AGA-3S,
M9104-xGA-3S
M3 Screw Terminals
Mechanical Connections
Enclosure
Ambient Conditions
Compliance
Up to 1/2 in. (13 mm) Diameter Round Damper Shaft or 3/8 in. (10 mm) Square Damper Shaft
M9102-AGA-2S,
M9104-xGA-2S
NEMA 2, IP42
M9102-AGA-3S,
M9104-xGA-3S
NEMA 1, IP40
Operating
Storage
North America
UL Listed, File E27734, CCN XAPX (United States) and XAPX7 (Canada)
Actuator Housing is Plenum Rated per CSA C22.2 No. 236/UL 1995, Heating and Cooling Equipment
Shipping Weight
European Union
Australia and New

Zealand
C-Tick Mark Australia/NZ Emissions Compliant

1.0 lb (0.5 kg)
2 of 2

m9100s
whole
1922030
9thcc:2-18
Damper Actuators
Electric
Rev:
07/18/97
logo:
JCI
left ft:
elec
right ft:
standard
Sect# = 2
seQ# = 254
M9108, M9116, M9124, and M9132 Series
Electric Non-Spring Return Actuators

M9100blk.tif
5-degree increments. Integral auxiliary
switches are available to indicate end-stop
position or to perform switching functions at
any angle within the selected rotation range.
Position feedback is available through
switches, a potentiometer, or a
0 (2) to 10 VDC signal.
Accessories
Features
positioning return air or exhaust dampers
six torques: 70 to 560 lbin (8 to 64 Nm)

offer the most suitable choice for the
application
Refer to the Accessories chart on Page 3.
Applications
M91xx actuators are designed to position air
dampers and valves in HVAC systems.
positioning blades for variable volume fans

positioning VG1000 Series ball valves and
VG7000 Series globe valves when used
with the M9000-5xx Valve Linkage
four control inputs meet the needs of most

applications
M91xx
Description
Two each of the following models provide

twice the amount of running torque of a
single unit when mounted in tandem:
M9116-GGx or HGx, M9124-AGx, GGx or
HGx, and M9132-AGx or GGx.
output position feedback provides simple

sensing
The M91xx Series includes M9108, M9116,

M9124 and M9132 models. All of these
direct-mount line of electric actuators operate
on 24 VAC or VDC power. The M91xx
actuators are available for use with on-off,
floating, proportional, or resistive controllers.
These bidirectional actuators do not require a
damper linkage, and are easily installed on a
damper with a round shaft up to a 3/4 in.
(20 mm) in diameter or a square shaft up to
5/8 in. (16 mm). They may be direct or remote
mounted to a damper, or mounted to a valve
using one of the M9000-5xx Valve Linkage
Kits.
electronic stall detection ensures higher

reliability by deactivating the actuator
motor when a stall condition is detected
Refer to the manufacturers information to

properly size the damper, valve, and/or
actuator. Spring return actuators, such as
Johnson Controls M9206 and M9216 Series
actuators, are recommended for use with
outdoor air dampers in cold climates.
master/slave operation allows

synchronized control for two actuators
stacked for tandem applications
zero and span adjustment (HGx models)
allows sequential operation of dampers
from a single input signal of
0 (2) to 1 0VDC, 0 (4) to 20 VDC, or
0 (4) to 20 mA
These compact M91xx actuators use a

DC motor with stall detection circuitry that
operates throughout the entire stroke. The
GGx, HGx, and JGx models employ
noise-filtering techniques on the control signal
to eliminate repositioning due to line noise.
jumper-selectable rotation direction and

manual gear release simplify installation,
setup, and field adjustments
A single M91xx model delivers up to 280 lbin

(32 Nm) of torque. Two AGx, GGx, or HGx
models in tandem deliver twice the torque or
560 lbin (64 Nm). The angle of rotation is
mechanically adjustable from 0 to 90 in
Rotation is mechanically limited to 93 by

integral end-stops. The position of the
actuator is visually indicated from 0 to 90 on
the cover.
NPT threaded housing provides easy

connection for electrial fittings
To Order
(See Applications, continued on the

following page.)
Specify the code number from the following selection chart.
Selection Chart
M9132-GGC-2
M9132-AGE-2
M9132-GGA-2
M9132-AGC-2
M9124-JGC-2
M9132-AGA-2
M9124-JGA-2
M9124-HGC-2
M9124-HGA-2
M9124-GGC-2
M9124-GGA-2
M9124-AGE-2
M9124-AGD-2
VDC and mA Input with

Zero and Span
Resistive Input Control

0 to 10 VDC
M9124-AGC-2
Feedback
135 ohm Potentiometer
M9124-AGA-2
M9116-JGC-2
M9116-JGA-2
M9116-HGC-2
M9116-HGA-2
M9116-GGC-2
M9116-GGA-2
M9116-AGE-2
M9116-AGD-2
M9116-AGC-2
M9116-AGA-2
M9108-JGC-2
M9108-JGA-2
Floating Control
Note:
M9108-HGC-2
280 lbin (32 Nm)
On/Off Control
Tandem Operation
M9108-HGA-2
M9108-GGC-2
M9108-GGA-2
210 lbin (24 Nm)
M91xx Series Electric

Non-Spring Return
Actuators
M9108-AGE-2
M9108-AGD-2
140 lbin (16 Nm)
M9108-AGA-2
M9108-AGC-2
70 lbin (8 Nm)
Two actuators with the same torque and control input for tandem operation.
1/3

M9108, M9116, M9124, and M9132 Series Electric Non-Spring Return Actuators
(Continued)
m9100dim.epi
Applications (Continued)
An anti-rotation bracket prevents lateral
movement of the actuator. Pressing the
spring-loaded gear release on the actuator
cover disengages the gear train for manual
repositioning of the coupler.
For more information, refer to the M9108,
M9116, M9124, M9132 Series Electric
Non-spring Return Actuators Product
Bulletin, LIT-2681058 or the M9108,
M9116, M9124, M9132 Series Electric
Non-spring Return Actuators Installation
Instructions, Part No. 34-636-399.
Repair Parts
Replace the unit.
Dimensions, in./mm
Specifications
M91xx Series Electric Non-spring Return Actuators
Power Requirements
M9108- and M9116-AGx: 20 to 30 VAC at 50/60 Hz or 24 VDC 10%; 6.5 VA supply minimum
All Other Models:
20 to 30 VAC at 50/60 Hz or 24 VDC 10%; 7.5 VA supply minimum
Input Signal
AGx:
GGx and HGx:
JGx:
Input Signal
Adjustments
AGx:
Factory Setting, Terminals 1 and 2, CW rotation; Terminals 1 and 3, CCW rotation
GGx and HGx (Voltage Input or Current Input):
Jumper selectable: 0 (2) to 10 VDC, 0 (4) to 20 VDC, or 0 (4) to 20 mA
Adjustable: Zero, 0 to 6 VDC, 0 to 12 VDC, or 0 to 12 mA
Span, 2 to 10 VDC, 4 to 20 VDC, or 4 to 20 mA
Factory Setting:
0 to 10 VDC, 0 to 20 mA, CW rotation with signal increase
GGx, HGx, and JGx: Action is jumper selectable Direct (CW) or Reverse (CCW) with signal increase.
Input Impedance
GGx and HGx:

JGx:
Voltage Input, 205,000 ohms for 0 (2) to 10 V and 410,000 ohms for 0 (4) to 20 V; Current Input, 500 ohms
1.8 Megohms
Feedback Signal
AGD:
AGE:
GGx and HGx:
JGx:
135 ohm feedback potentiometer

1,000 ohm feedback potentiometer
0 to 10 VDC or 2 to 10 VDC for 90 (10 VDC at 1 mA) Corresponds to input signal span selection.
0 to 10 VDC for 90 (10 VDC at 1 mA)
xGC:
24 VAC at 50/60 Hz or 24 VDC

0 (2) to 10 VDC, 0 (4) to 20 VDC, or 0 (4) to 20 mA
Potentiometer value is 100 ohms minimum to 10,000 ohms maximum
Two Single-Pole, Double-Throw (SPDT) switches rated at 24 VAC 1.5 A inductive, 3.0 A resistive, 35 VA maximum per
switch, Class 2
Mechanical Output
(Running Torque)
M9108:
M9116:
M9124:
M9132:
70 lbin (8 Nm) for one unit; not intended for tandem use
140 lbin (16 Nm) for one unit, 280 lbin (32 Nm) for two in tandem (GGx, HGx)
210 lbin (24 Nm) for one unit, 420 lbin (48 Nm) for two in tandem (AGx, GGx, HGx)
280 lbin (32 Nm) for one unit, 560 lbin (64 Nm) for two in tandem (AGx, GGx)
45 dBA at 1 m
Rotation Range
0 to 90 in 5-degree increments, mechanically limited to 93
Rotation Time
M9108:
M9116:
M9124:
M9132:
M9124- and M9132-AGx: 1/4 in. spade terminals with pluggable 3-terminal blocks (See Accessories chart.)
All Other Models:
Screw terminals for 22 to 14 AWG; maximum of two 18, 20, or 22 AWG per terminal
3/8 to 3/4 in. (10 to 20 mm) diameter round shaft or 3/8 to 5/8 in. (10 to 16 mm) square shaft
Enclosure
NEMA 2, IP42
Ambient Conditions
Operating: -4 to 122F (-20 to 50C); 0 to 95% RH, non-condensing

Storage: -40 to 186F (-40 to 86C); 0 to 95% RH, non-condensing
7.09 x 3.94 x 2.54 in. (180 x 100 x 64.5 mm)
Shipping Weight
2.9 lb (1.3 kg)
Agency Compliance

30 seconds at 50% rated load, 25 to 50 seconds for 0 to 70 lbin (0 to 8 Nm)

2/3

M9108, M9116, M9124, and M9132 Series Electric Non-Spring Return Actuators
(Continued)
Accessories
Code Number
DMPR-KR003 (a)
Description
Sleeve Pin Kit for Johnson Controls round dampers with a 5/16 in. (8 mm) diameter shaft
DMPR-KC003 (a) Blade Pin Extension without Bracket for Johnson Controls CD-1300 direct-mount applications
DMPR-KC254
Inside Frame Mounting Kit for damper applications requiring the actuator within the airstream
M9000-103
14 VA Transformer, 120/24 VAC, 60 Hz, Class 2
M9000-104
M9000-105
Pluggable 3-terminal block
M9000-151
Base Mount Linkage Kit for remote inside duct mounting (not intended for M9132 actuators or any tandem application)
M9000-153
Crank Arm Kit for remote mounting (not intended for M9132 actuators or any tandem application)
M9000-154
1 in. Jackshaft Coupler for mounting on a 1 in. diameter damper shaft
M9000-155
Manual Handle for positioning a damper or valve when power is removed from an M91xx actuator
M9000-158
Mounting Kit to tandem mount two M9116 GGx or HGx models; two M9124 AGx, GGx, or HGx; or two M9132 AGx or GGx models on a damper
M9000-160
Replacement anti-rotation bracket for M91xx Series actuators
M9000-200
Commissioning Tool provides a control signal to drive on/off, floating, proportional, or resistive actuators.
M9000-500
Valve Linkage Kit for mounting M9116 actuators to 1/2 to 2 in. VG7000 Series globe valves
M9000-510
Valve Linkage Kit for mounting M9108, M9116, and M9124 actuators to 1/2 through 1-1/4 in. 2-way and 1/2 and 3/4 in. 3-way VG1000 Series
ball valves
M9000-511
Valve Linkage Kit for mounting M9124 actuators to 1-1/2 in. 2-way and 3-way VG1000 Series ball valves, and M9116 and M9124 actua tors to
1 and 1-1/4 in. 3-way VG1000 Series ball valves
3/3
M9102-AGA-2S, -3S and M9104-xGA-2S, -3S Series Electric

Non-Spring Return Actuators
Product Bulletin

The M9102 and M9104 Series Actuators are directmount, non-spring return electric actuators that operate
on AC 24 V power. These synchronous motor-driven
actuators provide floating control (AGA), floating
control with automatic shutoff (IGA), and proportional
control with selectable 0-10 or 2-10 VDC (GGA). The
-2S models are equipped with plenum cables, and the
-3S models are equipped with terminal blocks.
All models are compact in size and are easily installed
on Variable Air Volume (VAV) boxes, Variable Air
Volume and Temperature (VVT) two-position zone
applications, or small- to medium-sized dampers with a
round shaft up to 1/2 in. (13 mm) in diameter or a
3/8 in. (10 mm) square shaft.
Actuators provide a running torque of 18 lbin (2 Nm),
and the nominal travel time is 30 seconds at 60 Hz
Actuators provide a running torque of 35 lbin (4 Nm),
and the nominal travel time is 60 seconds at 60 Hz
Figure 1: M9102/M9104 Series Electric

Non-Spring Return Actuator

Features
Benefits
Two Torques Available: 18 and 35 lbin

(2 and 4 Nm)
Offer the most suitable choice for the specific application
Short 30-Second Travel Time Available
Provides a quick response for two-position zone applications
35 dBA Nominal Audible Noise Rating
Meets the audible noise requirements for open ceiling environments
Synchronous Drive
Provides a constant rotation time that is independent of the load
100,000 Cycle Rating
Provides years of trouble-free service
Direct Shaft Mounting with Single-Screw

Coupler
Reduces installation time and provides three-point shaft gripping
Magnetic Clutch
Protects the actuator gear train and the damper from damage due to
excessive torque during a stall condition
Manual Gear Release
Simplifies actuator setup and adjustments in the field
Plenum Cable or Screw Terminal Electric

Connections
Make wiring quick and easy
Floating, Floating with Timeout, and

Proportional 0(2)...10 VDC Control Inputs
Available
Offer a full range of control input options
Small, Compact Design
Allows installation in tight-fitting locations
M9102-AGA-2S, -3S and M9104-xGA-2S, -3S Series Electric Non-Spring

Return Actuators Product Bulletin
Product Details
The M9102 and M9104 Series Electric Non-Spring
Return Actuators are designed to position balancing,
control, round, and zone dampers in Heating,
Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) systems.
These electric actuators are also designed to position
blades in a VAV box, or they can be used in VVT twoposition zone applications.
Each actuator mounts directly to the surface in any
convenient orientation using a single No. 10 self-drilling
sheet metal screw (included with the actuator). No
additional linkages or couplers are required. Electrical
connections on the actuator are clearly labeled to
simplify installation.
IMPORTANT: Use this M9102 or M9104 Series
Electric Non-Spring Return Actuator only to control
Where failure or malfunction of the electric actuator
against, failure or malfunction of the electric
actuator.
IMPORTANT: Do not install or use this M9102 or
M9104 Series Electric Non-Spring Return Actuator
in or near environments where corrosive substances
or vapors could be present. Exposure of the electric
actuator to corrosive environments may damage the
internal components of the device and will void the
warranty.
IMPORTANT: Before specifying M9102 or M9104

Series Electric Non-Spring Return Actuators for
plenum applications, verify acceptance of exposed
plastic materials in plenum areas with the local
building authority. Building codes for plenum
requirements vary by location. Some local building
authorities accept compliance to UL 1995, Heating
and Cooling Equipment, while others use different
acceptance criteria.
Operation
When combined with a VAV or VVT controller, the
M9102 or M9104 Series Electric Non-Spring Return
Actuator provides reliable, integrated damper control.
AGA Models
An AC 24 V input signal from the controller to the
Clockwise (CW) or Counterclockwise (CCW) terminal
on the electric actuator causes the motor to rotate in
the proper direction, and moves the damper blades
open or closed. When the controller stops sending the
input signal, the electric actuator remains in place.
Note: Use a VAV or VVT controller and/or software
that provides a timeout function at the end of rotation
(stall) to avoid excessive wear or drive time on the
actuator motor.
IGA Models
The IGA models operate in the same fashion as the
AGA models, except the motor automatically shuts off
after a time delay. IGA models can be used with
controllers that apply a constant CW or CCW signal.
GGA Models
The GGA models accept a 0(2)...10 VDC command
signal to position the Output hub. The actuator returns
a 0-10 volt position indication on the Feedback signal.
A selectable switch allows 0-10 VDC or 2-10 VDC
commands and Reverse Acting/Direct Acting (RA/DA)
operation.
M9102-AGA-2S, -3S and M9104-xGA-2S, -3S Series Electric Non-Spring Return Actuators Product Bulletin
Repair Information
If the M9102 or M9104 Series Electric Non-Spring
Return Actuator fails to operate within its specifications,
replace the unit. For a replacement electric actuator,
contact the nearest Johnson Controls representative.
Table 2: Electric Non-Spring Return Actuator Models
Code Number
Control Type
Running Torque
Travel Time
M9102-AGA-2S
Floating
18 lbin (2 Nm)
30 Seconds at
60 Hz
48 in. (1.2 m) UL 444 Type CMP

Plenum Rated cable with 19 AWG
(0.75 mm2) conductors and .25 in.
(6 mm) ferrule ends
M9102-AGA-3S
Floating
18 lbin (2 Nm)
30 Seconds at
60 Hz
M3 Screw Terminals
M9104-AGA-2S
Floating
35 lbin (4 Nm)
60 Seconds at
60 Hz

(6 mm) ferrule ends
M9104-AGA-3S
Floating
35 lbin (4 Nm)
60 Seconds at
60 Hz
M3 Screw Terminals
M9104-IGA-2S
Floating or On/Off
35 lbin (4 Nm)
60 Seconds at
60 Hz

(6 mm) ferrule ends
M9104-IGA-3S
Floating or On/Off
35 lbin (4 Nm)
60 Seconds at
60 Hz
M3 Screw Terminals
M9104-GGA-2S
Proportional
35 lbin (4 Nm)
60 Seconds at
60 Hz

(6 mm) ferrule ends
M9104-GGA-3S
Proportional
35 lbin (4 Nm)
60 Seconds at
60 Hz
M3 Screw Terminals

Code Number
DMPR-KC003
Description
7 in. (178 mm) Blade Pin Extension without Bracket for Johnson Controls Direct-Mount Damper
Applications
DMPR-KR0031
Sleeve Pin Kit for Johnson Controls Round Dampers with a 5/16 in. (8 mm) Diameter Shaft
M9000-200
Commissioning Tool that Provides a Control Signal to Drive 24 V On/Off, Floating, Proportional, and/or
Resistive Electric Actuators
M9104-100
Connector for 3/8 in. (10 mm) flexible metal conduit
1.
Furnished with the damper and may be ordered separately.
Dimensions
25/32
(20)
1-1/4
(32)
Set Screw
Radius
Clearance
1-3/32
(28)
9/16
(14)
5-5/32
(131)
1-13/32
(36)
3/16
(5)
2-13/16
(71)
2-1/16
(52)
2-1/4
(57)
FIG:act_dim
4-3/32
(104)
Figure 2: M9102/M9104 Series Electric Non-Spring Return Actuator Dimensions, in. (mm)
(Part 1 of 2)
Power Requirements
Control Type
Input Signal
Feedback Signal
M910x-AGA-xS
AC 24 V +25%/-20% at 50/60 Hz, 2.1 VA, Class 2, Safety Extra-Low

Voltage (SELV)
M9104-IGA-xS
AC 24 V +25%/-20% at 50/60 Hz, 3.0 VA, Class 2, SELV
M9104-GGA-xS
AC 24 V +25%/-20% at 50/60 Hz, 3.6 VA, Class 2, SELV
M910x-AGA-xS
M9104-IGA-xS
M9104-GGA-xS
M910x-AGA-xS
AC 24 V +25%/-20% at 50/60 Hz, Class 2, SELV without Timeout
M9104-IGA-xS
AC 24 V +25%/-20% at 50/60 Hz, Class 2, SELV with Timeout
M9104-GGA-xS
0(2) to 10 VDC or 0(4) to 20 mA with field-furnished 500 ohm resistor
M9104-GGA-2S
0 to 10 VDC or 2 to 10 VDC for 90 (10 VDC at 1 mA)


Running Torque
Travel Time
200 ohms Nominal

M9102 Series
18 lbin (2 Nm)
M9104 Series
35 lbin (4 Nm)
M9102 Series
M9104 Series
(Part 2 of 2)
Rotation Range
93 3, CW or CCW
Cycles



M9102-AGA-2S
M9104-xGA-2S
48 in. (1.2 m) UL 444 Type CMP Plenum Rated cable with 19 AWG
(0.75 mm2) conductors and .25 in. (6 mm) ferrule ends
M9102-AGA-3S
M9104-xGA-3S
M3 Screw Terminals
Mechanical Connections
Enclosure
Ambient Conditions
Compliance
Up to 1/2 in. (13 mm) Diameter Round Damper Shaft or 3/8 in.
(10 mm) Square Damper Shaft
M9102-AGA-2S
M9104-xGA-2S
NEMA 2, IP42
M9102-AGA-3S
M9104-xGA-3S
NEMA 1, IP40
Operating
Storage
North America
UL Listed, File E27734, CCN XAPX (United States) and XAPX7

(Canada)
Actuator Housing is Plenum Rated per CSA C22.2 No. 236/UL 1995,
Heating and Cooling Equipment
Shipping Weight
European Union
Australia and
New Zealand

1.0 lb (0.5 kg)
Controls Group
Milwaukee, WI 53202

Published in U.S.A.
Product Bulletin
Issue Date
M91xx
08/31/01

Non-spring Return Actuators
The M91xx Series includes M9108, M9116, M9124,
and M9132 models. All of these direct-mount electric
actuators operate on 24 VAC or VDC power. The
M91xx actuators are available for use with on/off,
floating, proportional, or resistive controllers. These
bidirectional actuators do not require a damper
linkage, and are easily installed on a damper with a
round shaft up to 3/4 in. (19 mm) in diameter or a
square shaft up to 5/8 in. (16 mm). They may be direct
or remote mounted to a damper or mounted to a valve
using one of the M9000-5xx Valve Linkage Kits.
A single M91xx model delivers up to 280 lbin (32 Nm)
of torque. Two AGx, GGx, or HGx models in tandem
deliver twice the torque or 560 lbin (64 Nm). The
angle of rotation is mechanically adjustable from
0 to 90 in 5-degree increments. Integral auxiliary
switches are available to indicate end-stop position or
to perform switching functions at any angle within the
selected rotation range. Position feedback is available
through switches, a potentiometer, or a
0 (2) to 10 VDC signal.
Figure 1: M91xx Series Actuator
Six Torques: 70 to 560 lbin

(8 to 64 Nm)
Offer the most suitable choice for the

application
Four Control Inputs

Meet the needs of most applications
Ensures higher reliability by deactivating the

actuator motor when a stall condition is
detected
Master/Slave Operation
Allows synchronized control for two actuators

stacked for tandem applications
Zero and Span Adjustment
Allows sequential operation of dampers from

a single input signal of 0 (2) to 10 VDC,
0 (4) to 20 VDC, or 0 (4) to 20 mA
(HGx Models)
Jumper-selectable Rotation
Direction and Manual Gear
Release
NPT Threaded Housing

Provides simple, closed-loop control with

accurate position sensing
Simplify installation, setup, and field

adjustments
Provides easy connection for electrical fittings
1
Application
Operation
IMPORTANT:
IMPORTANT:
The M91xx Series actuator is
an M91xx actuator could lead to an abnormal
devices (limit or safety controls), or systems (alarm
or supervisory) intended to warn of, or protect
against, failure or malfunction of an M91xx actuator
must be incorporated into and maintained as part of
the control system.
M91xx actuators are designed to position air dampers

and valves in Heating, Ventilating, and
Air Conditioning (HVAC) systems. Applications
include:
positioning return air or exhaust dampers

VG7000 Series globe valves when used with an
M9000-5xx Valve Linkage
M91xx actuators operate on 24 VAC at 50/60 Hz or

24 VDC. These compact actuators use a DC motor
with stall detection circuitry that operates throughout
the entire stroke. The GGx, HGx, and JGx models
employ noise-filtering techniques on the control signal
to eliminate repositioning due to line noise.
Two each of the following models provide twice the

amount of running torque of a single unit when
mounted in tandem: M9116-GGx or HGx; M9124-AGx,
GGx, or HGx; and M9132-AGx or GGx.
Refer to the manufacturers information to properly
size the damper, valve, and/or actuator. Spring return
actuators, such as Johnson Controls M9206 and
M9216 Series, are recommended for use with outdoor
air dampers in cold climates.

end-stops. The position of the actuator is marked from
0 to 90 on the cover. An anti-rotation bracket prevents
lateral movement of the actuator. Pressing the springloaded gear release on the actuator cover disengages
the gear train for manual repositioning of the coupler.
Dimensions
See Figure 2 for actuator dimensions.
3.94
100
90
7.09
180
Shaft
Dimensions
0.37 to 0.63
10 to 16
60 30
30
60
90
4.92
125
1.04
27
1.38
35
0.37 to 0.8
10 to 20
Shaft
Dimensions
5.43
Cover
138
Removal
5.75
146
1.88
48
2.13
54
3.13
79
1.73
44
Conduit Plug Centers
1.38
35
2.54
64.5
1.22
4.88
124
Dimensions
M9108, M9116, M9124, and M9132 Series Electric Non-spring Return Actuators Product Bulletin


Table 1 or 2.
Table 1: Actuators
M91xx Series
Electric Non-spring
Return Actuators
140 lbin
(16 Nm)
210 lbin
(24 Nm)
280 lbin
(32 Nm)
M9108-AGA-2
M9108-AGC-2
M9108-AGD-2
M9108-AGE-2
M9108-GGA-2
M9108-GGC-2
M9108-HGA-2
M9108-HGC-2
M9108-JGA-2
M9108-JGC-2
M9116-AGA-2
M9116-AGC-2
M9116-AGD-2
M9116-AGE-2
M9116-GGA-2
M9116-GGC-2
M9116-HGA-2
M9116-HGC-2
M9116-JGA-2
M9116-JGC-2
M9124-AGA-2
M9124-AGC-2
M9124-AGD-2
M9124-AGE-2
M9124-GGA-2
M9124-GGC-2
M9124-HGA-2
M9124-HGC-2
M9124-JGA-2
M9124-JGC-2
M9132-AGA-2
M9132-AGC-2
M9132-AGE-2
M9132-GGA-2
M9132-GGC-2
70 lbin
(8 Nm)
On/Off Control

Floating Control

VDC and mA Input with

Zero and Span

Feedback

0 to 10 VDC

Tandem Operation
Note: Use two actuators with the same torque and control input for tandem operation.
Product Code
Number
Description
DMPR-KR003*
DMPR-KC003*
DMPR-KC254
M9000-103
M9000-104
M9000-105
M9000-150
Damper Mount Linkage Kit for remote inside duct mounting an M9108, M9116, M9124, or M9216 actuator
to a 3-blade ot larger damper (not intended for a Johnson Controls damper)
M9000-151
Base Mount Linkage Kit for remote inside duct mounting (not intended for M9132 actuators or any tandem
application)
M9000-153
Crank Arm Kit for remote mounting (not intended for M9132 actuators or any tandem application)
M9000-154
1 in. Jackshaft Coupler Kit for mounting on a 1 in. diameter damper shaft
M9000-155
Manual Handle for positioning a damper or valve when power is removed from an M91xx actuator
M9000-158
Mounting Kit to tandem mount two M9116 GGx or HGx; two M9124 AGx, GGx or HGx models; or
two M9132 AGx or GGx models on a damper
M9000-160
Replacement anti-rotation bracket for M91xx Series actuators
M9000-200
M9000-500
M9000-510
Valve Linkage Kit for mounting M9108, M9116, and M9124 actuators to 1/2 through 1-1/4 in. 2-way and
1/2 and 3/4 in. 3-way VG1000 Series ball valves
M9000-511
Valve Linkage Kit for mounting M9124 actuators to 1-1/2 in. 2-way and 3-way VG1000 Series ball valves,
and M9116 and M9124 actuators to 1 and 1-1/4 in. 3-way VG1000 Series ball valves
* Furnished with the damper and may be ordered separately.

Technical Data
Product M91xx Series Electric Non-spring Return Actuators
Power Requirements M9108-, M9116-AGx: 20 to 30 VAC at 50/60 Hz or 24 VDC 10%; 6.5 VA supply, Class 2
All Other Models:
20 to 30 VAC at 50/60 Hz or 24 VDC 10%; 7.5 VA supply, Class 2
Input Signal AGx:
24 VAC at 50/60 Hz or 24 VDC
GGx, HGx: 0 (2) to 10 VDC, 0 (4) to 20 VDC, or 0 (4) to 20 mA
JGx:
Input Signal Adjustments AGx:
Factory Setting, Terminals 1 and 2, CW rotation; Terminals 1 and 3, CCW rotation
GGx, HGx (Voltage Input or Current Input):
Jumper selectable: 0 (2) to 10 VDC, 0 (4) to 20 VDC, or 0 (4) to 20 mA
Adjustable:
Zero, 0 to 6 VDC, 0 to 12 VDC, or 0 to 12 mA
Span, 2 to 10 VDC, 4 to 20 VDC, or 4 to 20 mA
Factory Setting: 0 to 10 VDC, 0 to 20 mA, CW rotation with signal increase
GGx, HGx, and JGx: Action is jumper selectable Direct (CW) or Reverse (CCW) with
signal increase.
Input Impedance GGx, HGx: Voltage Input, 205,000 ohms for 0 (2) to 10 V and 410,000 ohms for 0 (4) to 20 V
Current Input, 500 ohms
JGx:
1.8 Megohms
Feedback Signal AGD:
AGE:
GGx, HGx: 0 to 10 VDC or 2 to 10 VDC for 90 (10 VDC at 1 mA)
Corresponds to input signal span selection.
JGx:
Auxiliary Switch Rating xGC:
Two Single-Pole, Double-Throw (SPDT) switches rated at 24 VAC
1.5 A inductive, 3.0 A resistive; 35 VA maximum per switch, Class 2
Mechanical Output M9108: 70 lbin (8 Nm) for one unit; not intended for tandem use
(Running Torque) M9116: 140 lbin (16 Nm) for one unit, 280 lbin (32 Nm) for two in tandem (GGx, HGx)
M9124: 210 lbin (24 Nm) for one unit, 420 lbin (48 Nm) for two in tandem (AGx, GGx, HGx)
M9132: 280 lbin (32 Nm) for one, 560 lbin (64 Nm) for two in tandem (AGx, GGx)
Audible Noise Rating 45 dBA at 1 m
Rotation Range 0 to 90 in 5-degree increments, mechanically limited to 93
Rotation Time M9108: 30 seconds at 50% rated load, 25 to 50 seconds for 0 to 70 lbin (0 to 8 Nm)
M9116: 80 seconds at 50% rated load, 70 to 115 seconds for 0 to 140 lbin (0 to 16 Nm)
Electrical Connection M9124-, M9132-AGx: 1/4 in. spade terminals with pluggable 3-terminal blocks
All Other Models:
Screw terminals for 22 to 14 AWG; maximum of two 18, 20, or
22 AWG per terminal
Mechanical Connection 3/8 to 3/4 in. (10 to 20 mm) diameter round shaft or 3/8 to 5/8 in. (10 to 16 mm) square shaft
Ambient Conditions Operating:
Storage:
Dimensions (H x W x D) 7.09 x 3.94 x 2.54 in. (180 x 100 x 64.5 mm)
Controls Group
P.O. Box 423
Milwaukee, WI 53201
Printed in U.S.A.
PreliminaryThis information may change.

Product Bulletin
Issue Date August 10, 2007
E-Link a communications gateway for equipment
The Johnson Controls Equipment Link (ELink) is an economical and versatile

communications device that provides a
connection between YORK equipment and
open / standard protocols. It efficiently
manages all the communication protocols
used by YORK equipment exposing the data
in a consistent, organized and defined
fashion. The E-Link is available as a card
(shown in Figure 1) that can be fitted directly
inside the equipments control panel. It can
also be supplied within a line voltage enabled
enclosure. Configuring the required
equipment profile and output protocol is
achieved through a simple switch selection.
Figure 1:

BACnet MS/TP, LON, N2,
and Modbus RTU outputs
Enables equipment connectivity to these

industry standard open network protocols
Quick Starts
The desired output protocol and the

equipment profile are switch selectable,
simplifying the equipment connectivity
commissioning and start-up
Removable connectors
Simplifies installation and speeds up future

service
LonMark compliance
Supports the LonMark 8040 profile,

augmented with JCI specific manufacturer
network variables
Meets the requirements for

a BTL Class 2 device
Increased connectivity with other BTL certified

devices or systems
Third communications port
Can be used for auxiliary monitoring,

diagnostics and control

Part No. xxxxxxxx, Rev.
Code No. LIT-xxxxxx
1
Software Release X.X
Overview
User Reports
The E-link replaces the York MicroGateways. It

consolidates the previously supported equipment
profiles into a single application while enabling a user
to easily select the desired output protocol without the
need to change out the firmware.
There are certain BACnet and Modbus parameters

that may require being field configured to achieve
optimum performance. User reports provide an
efficient and convenient way of making these changes.
Table 1: Orderable Part Numbers
Field Commissioning
Description
Part number
E-Link with serial outputs (BACnet

MS/TP, Modbus RTU and N2)
YK-ELNK100-0
E-Link with LON output
YK-ELNK101-0
YK-ELNK00-0
E-Link with serial outputs in an

enclosure
E-Link with LON output in an
enclosure
YK-ELNK01-0
OptiView / Latitude installation kit
YK-ELNOLK-0
There are two mechanisms that allow a user to

maintain and troubleshoot the E-link in the field.
X-Modem
Updated firmware and/or databases may be restored
to an E-Link using this standard data protocol.
Create a temporary Quick Start setting
Two Quick Start settings have been reserved to allow
a user to make field modifications.
Applications
Port functionality
The E-Link is used to provide Johnson Controls / York

mechanical equipment such as chillers and rooftop
units with BAS networking connectivity. It is designed
with three active serial ports. Port 1 and Port 4 are
used for BAS networking, Port 2 is reserved for
connecting to the equipment; while Port 3 provides
access for auxiliary monitoring and control.
Port 1
To simplify the installation and setup, the E-link comes

preconfigured with a series of chiller and rooftop
profiles that may be chosen by simply selecting the
correct DIP switch settings.
Configuration Method
The E-Link is commissioned using three switches. The
MAC address switch is primarily used to select the
devices network address and for invoking a
troubleshooting mode. Application switch A is used to
select the desired equipment profile, while Application
switch B selects the required output protocol. A
momentary pushbutton activates the selected profile
and output protocol.
Field Diagnostics
Initial Field troubleshooting may be performed visually
by observing the communication ports and Status
LEDS.
This RS-485 serial port is used for connecting the

E-Link to one of the following BAS networking
protocols:
BACnet MS/TP
N2
Modbus RTU
Port 2
Port 2A
This is an RS-485 port that is used for connecting the
E-Link to equipment that uses the York Talk II protocol
or BACnet MS/TP.
Port 2B
This RS-232 port is used for connecting the E-Link to
equipment using the York Talk III protocol.
Port 3
This RS-485 port is used for connecting the E-Link to
one of the following BAS networking protocols:
BACnet MS/TP
Further diagnostics can be done with the use of a

terminal emulation program such as Windows hyper
terminal.
N2
Modbus RTU
User Access
Port 4
A user may gain access to the E-Link by logging on

with an appropriate password. This will then allow the
E-Links application to be viewed.
This TTL port is used to provide a LON based BAS

connection.
Multiple Port Operation

The E-Link supports concurrent access of equipments
data on ports (1 and 3, and 4 and 3).
The Modbus data link layer can be configured using

Quick Starts to support two baud rates (9600 or19.2K)
two parities (N or E) and one and two stop bits.
Data Mapping
BACnet
All the E-Links internal data is expressed in terms of

standard BACnet objects of type AV, BV and MV.
Each object supports a collection of required and
optional properties which are utilized in varying
degrees by the different protocols
A full description of the BACnet services and

capabilities are provided in the PICS/BIBBS document
that may be obtained from your local JCI
representative.
The BACnet data link layer is configured using Quick
Starts to support auto baud, 38.4K and 76.8K.
Integration
In order for the E-Link to be fully integrated into a BAS
system, the mapped output (AV, BV and MSV) objects
along with their associated equipment definitions need
to be known. This detailed information is provided in
the equipment point lists that may be obtained from
your local JCI representative.
N2
Modbus
It supports the following N2 commands:
The following function codes are supported:

Function Code
Description
Read Coil Status
Read Input status
Read Holding registers
Read input register
Force Single coil
Preset single register
15
Force multiple coils
16
Force multiple registers
The E-Link supports the N2 Open protocol and

operates at 9600 baud. From a programming
perspective, the E-Link is considered as a Vendor
Device (VND). The data is presented using the
following data types ADI, ADF and BD objects.
Commands
Synch Time
Poll without/with ACK message
Read internal parameter
Override internal parameter
Override release parameter
Identify device type
The N2 data link layer is configured using the Quick

Starts to support 9600 baud.
Data Integrity
The maximum message size that the E-Link can
process is limited to 256 bytes, allowing 800 coils and
100 registers to be read or set. The E-Links Modbus
data is scaled on a per point basis can be processed
without any modification, may be divided by 10 when
received, or multiplied by 10 when transmitted.
Certain data may be scaled differently by making an
appropriate selection in the User reports.
The communications link between the E-Link and the

equipment is monitored and, if it is compromised, the
data is marked as unreliable.
Document Name
Product
E-Link
Power Requirements
Input voltage
Power consumption
Agency Listings
24 VAC at 50/60 Hz (+/- 15%)

12 VDC (-2% / 50%)
Nominally 12 VA
For the YK-ELNKE00-0 and YK-ELNKE01-0
UL 916/FCC Part 15 Conducted and Radiated
CE (Satisfying all the relevant EMC directives) and IEC950/EN60950 (Safety directive)
Ambient Operating
Conditions
-40 to 85 C; (-40 to 185F) 0 to 95 % RH non condensing
Ambient Storage
Conditions
-40 to 90C; (-40 to 194F) 0 to 95 % RH non condensing
Shipping Weight
Circuit board - 8 oz (226 grams)
Metal enclosure / transformer -
4.5 lbs (2 kg)
Technology
Processor
Memory
Operating System
MCF 5272 Coldfire @ 66 MHZ

4 M of Flash
8 M of SDRAM
eCos
Communications
Port 1
Port 2A
Port 2B
Port 3
Port 4
User Functions
Communication Status
Status LED
MAC address
App switch Group A
App switch Group B
EOL switch
Activation push button
2.5 KV isolated BAS networking port (RS 485 -- BACnet MS/TP, N2, Modbus RTU)
Equipment port (RS 485 -- York Talk II or BACnet MS/TP)
Equipment port (RS 232 -- York Talk III)
Monitoring port (RS 485 -- BACnet MS/TP, N2, Modbus RTU)
BAS networking port (TTL interface LON)
Each of the communication ports has a TX and RX Status LED (Transmitting RED = ON,
Receiving - GREEN = ON)
Flashing LED indicates various type of error codes
A 7-way switch sets network address between 1 and 127
A 6-way switch that is used to configure the required equipment profile.
A 4-way switch that is used to configure the required output protocol.
Each RS 485 port has an EOL network that is switch selectable
This is used to activate the selection chosen on App switch A and App switch B
Controls Group
P.O. Box 423
Milwaukee, WI 53201
Published in U.S.A.

TEC22x6(H)-2 Series LONWORKS Network Thermostats with Two

Outputs, Dehumidification Capability, and Three Speeds of Fan
Control
Description

LONWORKS network devices that provide
input, dehumidification capability, and up to
three speeds of fan control. The
Building Automation System (BAS)
LONWORKS network communication capability
that enables remote monitoring and
programmability for efficient space
temperature control. Specific models are
available to accommodate commercial and
Features
LONWORKS network communication

provides compatibility with a proven
communication network;
LONWORKS network is widely accepted by
(HVAC) control suppliers.
integral humidity sensing capability and
dehumidification capability
dehumidification.

brightens during user interaction.
control signals.
FAN speed selection via the interface key
to meet the application requirements.
(Commercial Models) allows easy
access for temporarily overriding the
unoccupied mode.
(Hospitality Models) offers guests the
ability to select a Fahrenheit (F) or Celsius
(C) temperature scale display.
pressing the UP/DOWN arrow keys.
status.
opening the thermostat cover.
Please refer to the TEC22x6(H)-2 Series
LONWORKS Network Thermostats with Two
information.
This is the graphic frame!
TEC22x6-2 Series LONWORKS

Network Thermostat with
Two Outputs, Dehumidification
Capability, and Three Speeds of
Fan Control
Repair Information
unit. For a replacement TEC22x6(H)-2 Series
Thermostat, contact the nearest
Selection Chart
Code Number
Control Outputs
Fan Control
Dehumidification Capability
Application
TEC2216-2
Two On/Off
Three Speeds
No
Commercial Market
TEC2216H-2
TEC2226-2
Hospitality Market
Commercial Market
TEC2226H-2
Hospitality Market
TEC2236-2
Yes
Commercial Market
No
Commercial Market
TEC2236H-2
TEC2246-2
Hospitality Market
TEC2246H-2
Hospitality Market
TEC2256-2
Yes
TEC2256H-2
Commercial Market
Hospitality Market
1 of 2
TEC22x6(H)-2 Series LONWORKS Network Thermostats with Two Outputs,

Accessories
Code Number
Description
SEN-600-1
TE-6361P-1
8 (203 mm)1 Duct Mount Air Temperature Sensor
SEN-600-4
TE-636S-1
1. Other probe lengths available.
TEC22x6(H)-2 Series LONWORKS Network Thermostats with Two Outputs, Dehumidification Capability, and Three Speeds of
Fan Control
Power Requirements
19 to 30 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 2 VA (Terminals 4 and 5) at 24 VAC Nominal, Class 2 or Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV)
Relay/Triac Contact On/Off and Floating 30 VAC, 1.0 A Maximum, 3.0 A In-Rush
Rating
Control
Analog Output
Rating
Proportional
Control
Auxiliary Output
Rating
Triac Output
Digital Inputs
Wire Size
Unshielded Twisted Pair - 22 AWG (0.6 mm Diameter) Minimum, 18 AWG (1.0 mm Diameter) Recommended
LONWORKS Network Standard
64 Devices Maximum without a Repeater, 127 Devices Maximum with a Repeater;

6,250 ft (1,905 m) Maximum (Bus Topology)
Temperature Range Backlit Display
Heating Control
Accuracy
54.0F/12.0C to 100.0F/38.0C
Temperature
Humidity
Minimum Deadband
Ambient Conditions Operating

Compliance
Shipping Weight
40.0F/4.5C to 90.0F/32.0C
Cooling Control
Storage
United States
UL Listed, File E27734, CCN XAPX, Under UL 873, Temperature Indicating and Regulating Equipment
LONMARK Certification 3.4 (pending)
Canada
UL Listed, File E27734, CCN XAPX7, Under

CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 24, Temperature Indicating and Regulating Equipment
Europe
CE Mark, EMC Directive 89/336/EEC, standards EN 61000-6-3 and EN 61000-6-1
Australia and New

Zealand

0.75 lb (0.34 kg)
The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For application at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the
local Johnson Controls office. Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products.
2 of 2

Issued May 15, 2006
TEC2245-2 LONWORKS Network Thermostat with Single Proportional

Description
Features
The TEC2245-2 Thermostat is a LONWORKS

network device that provides control of
other equipment using a proportional 0 to 10
VDC control input and one-speed fan control.
The technologically advanced
Automation System (BAS) LONWORKS
network communication capability that
enables remote monitoring and
temperature control.

proportional control algorithm that virtually
Refer to the TEC2245-2 LONWORKS Network
LONWORKS Network Communication

Provides compatibility with a proven
Heating, Ventilating, and Air
Offers real-time control status of the
environment in easy-to-read, plain text
messages with constant backlight that
Proportional 0 to 10 VDC Control Offers
Override Interface Key Allows easy
unoccupied mode
Simplified Setpoint Adjustment Enables
Two Configurable Binary Inputs Provide
status
Enable the thermostat to adapt to any
application, allowing installer parameter
access without opening the thermostat
cover
TEC2245-2 LONWORKS Network

Thermostat with Single Proportional
4-15/16
(125)
Room Temp
70.0F
FAN
3-3/8
(86)
1-1/8
(29)
FIG:dmnsns__2245_22x6
MODE
TEC2245 Series Thermostat Dimensions, in. (mm)
1 of 2
TEC2245-2 LONWORKS Network Thermostat with Single Proportional Output and

One-Speed Fan Control (Continued)
Selection Chart
Code Number
Description
TEC2245-2
LONWORKS network, Two-Pipe, Proportional 0 to 10 VDC Control Control of Two-Pipe Fan Coils, Cabinet Unit Heaters, or Other
Output, and One-Speed Fan Control Thermostat
Equipment Using a Proportional 0 to 10 VDC Control Input and
Applications
Accessories
Code Number
Description
SEN-600-3
SEN-600-41
1. Only the occupancy override function can be accomplished using the SEN-600-4 with the TEC2245-2.
TEC2245-2
Power Requirements
Auxiliary Output
Rating
Triac Output
Digital Inputs
Wire Size

Thermostat Measurement Range
-40.0F/-40.0C to 122.0F/50.0C
Sensor Type
Resolution
0.2F/0.1C
Control Accuracy
Control Range

Heating
Cooling
Minimum Deadband

Compliance
Shipping Weight
Storage
United States
Canada

European Union
Australia and New

Zealand

0.75 lb (0.34 kg)
2 of 2

TEC22x6(H)-2 Series LONWORKS Network Thermostats with Two

Outputs, Dehumidification Capability, and Three Speeds of Fan
Control
Description

LONWORKS network devices that provide
input, dehumidification capability, and up to
three speeds of fan control. The
Building Automation System (BAS)
LONWORKS network communication capability
that enables remote monitoring and
temperature control. Specific models are
available to accommodate commercial and
Features
LONWORKS network communication

provides compatibility with a proven
(HVAC) control suppliers.
integral humidity sensing capability and
dehumidification capability
dehumidification.

brightens during user interaction.
control signals.
FAN speed selection via the interface key
to meet the application requirements.
(Commercial Models) allows easy
unoccupied mode.
(Hospitality Models) offers guests the
ability to select a Fahrenheit (F) or Celsius
(C) temperature scale display.
pressing the UP/DOWN arrow keys.
status.
opening the thermostat cover.
Please refer to the TEC22x6(H)-2 Series
LONWORKS Network Thermostats with Two
information.
TEC22x6-2 Series LONWORKS

Network Thermostat with
Two Outputs, Dehumidification
Capability, and Three Speeds of
Fan Control
Repair Information
unit. For a replacement TEC22x6(H)-2 Series
Thermostat, contact the nearest
Selection Chart
Code Number
Control Outputs
Fan Control
Application
TEC2216-2
Two On/Off
Three Speeds
No
Commercial Market
TEC2216H-2
TEC2226-2
Hospitality Market
Commercial Market
TEC2226H-2
Hospitality Market
TEC2236-2
Yes
Commercial Market
No
Commercial Market
TEC2236H-2
TEC2246-2
Hospitality Market
TEC2246H-2
Hospitality Market
TEC2256-2
Yes
TEC2256H-2
Commercial Market
Hospitality Market
1 of 2

Accessories
Code Number
Description
SEN-600-1
TE-6361P-1
8 (203 mm)1 Duct Mount Air Temperature Sensor
SEN-600-4
TE-636S-1
1. Other probe lengths available.
TEC22x6(H)-2 Series LONWORKS Network Thermostats with Two Outputs, Dehumidification Capability, and Three Speeds of
Fan Control
Power Requirements
Relay/Triac Contact On/Off and Floating 30 VAC, 1.0 A Maximum, 3.0 A In-Rush
Rating
Control
Analog Output
Rating
Proportional
Control
Auxiliary Output
Rating
Triac Output
Digital Inputs
Wire Size

Temperature Range Backlit Display
Heating Control
Accuracy
54.0F/12.0C to 100.0F/38.0C
Temperature
Humidity
Minimum Deadband

Compliance
Shipping Weight
40.0F/4.5C to 90.0F/32.0C
Cooling Control
Storage
United States
Canada

Europe
Australia and New

Zealand

0.75 lb (0.34 kg)
The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For application at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the
local Johnson Controls office. Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products.
2 of 2
TEC22x6(H)-2 Series LONWORKS Network Thermostats

Product Bulletin
LONWORKS network devices that provide control of
two- or four-pipe fan coils, cabinet unit heaters, or other
0 to 10 VDC control input, dehumidification capability,
and up to three speeds of fan control. The
technologically advanced TEC22x6(H)-2 Series
Thermostats feature a Building Automation
System (BAS) LONWORKS network communication
Specific models are available to accommodate
Figure 1: TEC22x6-2 Series LONWORKS

Network Thermostat with Two Outputs,
Dehumidification Capability,

Features
Benefits

LONWORKS network is widely accepted by Heating, Ventilating, and Air
Conditioning (HVAC) control suppliers.
Integral Humidity Sensing Capability and

Increases occupancy comfort by providing dehumidification.
Offers real-time control status of the environment in easy-to-read, English

plain text messages with constant backlight that brightens during user
interaction.

Control

signals.
Provide easy FAN speed selection via the interface key to meet the
application requirements.
Override Interface Key (Commercial Models)
Allows easy access for temporarily overriding the unoccupied mode.


temperature scale display.

UP/DOWN arrow keys.

setback, service or filter alarms, motion detector, and window status.

parameter access without opening the thermostat cover.

Product Overview
LONWORKS network communication capability, allowing
the user to view operation or make adjustments from a
and easy.

Allow for easy commissioning of the thermostat



glance.

0 to 24 hours.
Auxiliary Contact

(On/Off Control)
equipment cycling.

power failure.
Remote Access
controller.
Additional Features

from 2.0F/1.0C to 5.0F/2.5C.


Code Number
Control Outputs
Fan Control
Dehumidification
Capability
Application
TEC2216-2
Two On/Off
Three Speeds
No
Commercial Market
TEC2216H-2
TEC2226-2
Hospitality Market
Commercial Market
TEC2226H-2
Hospitality Market
TEC2236-2
Yes
TEC2236H-2
TEC2246-2
Hospitality Market
No
TEC2246H-2
TEC2256-2
TEC2256H-2
Commercial Market
Commercial Market
Hospitality Market
Yes
Commercial Market
Hospitality Market
TEC22x6(H)-2 Series LONWORKS Network Thermostats with Two Outputs, Dehumidification Capability,
and Three Speeds of Fan Control Product Bulletin

Code Number
Description
SEN-600-1
TE-6361P-1
8 in. (203 mm)1 Duct Mount Air Temperature Sensor
SEN-600-4
TE-636S-1
Other probe lengths available.
Room Temp
70.0F
Backlit, plain text

LCD is easy to read
in any condition.
LEDs indicate
system activity.
FIG:frnt_vw_22x6
1.

4-15/16
(125)
3-3/8
(86)
1-1/8
(29)
FIG:dmnsns_22x6
Room Temp
70.0F
Backlit LCD
The TEC22x6(H)-2 Series Thermostat user interface



The OVERRIDE key (commercial models)
overrides the unoccupied mode to occupied at the
local user interface for the specified TOccTime.
(TOccTime is defined by selecting the appropriate
time period in the Installer Configuration Menu.)
OVERRIDE key also allows access to the Installer
OVERRIDE function is disabled.

section.)
LEDs
Menu Overview
Status Display Menu

Status Display Menu

Note: For hospitality models, binary inputs can

override from the unoccupied mode to occupied
mode.
Room Temperature and Humidity (if humidity

display is enabled)
System Mode
Schedule Status Occupied/Unoccupied/Override




Dehumidification - Hysteresis (Dehumidification

Models)


Setpoint

Setpoint
Setpoint Type

center key:
UI3 Input Configuration to Monitor Supply Air

Switching
Door Open Time
Menu Scroll
Auto Mode
% Humidity Display (Dehumidification Models)

Models)
Pipe No.
Control Type (Floating Models)
Direct/Reverse Acting (Proportional Models)
Fan Menu
Reheat Time
Dehumidification Lockout (Dehumidification

Models)
UI3 Display

Models)
Repair Information
replacement TEC22x6(H)-2 Series Thermostat, contact
the nearest Johnson Controls representative.
TEC22x6(H)-2 Series LONWORKS Network Thermostats with Two Outputs, Dehumidification
Power Requirements

Relay/Triac
Contact
Rating
On/Off and
Floating
Control
Analog
Output Rating
Proportional
Control
Auxiliary
Output Rating
Triac Output
Digital Inputs
Wire Size
Unshielded Twisted Pair - 22 AWG (0.6 mm Diameter) Minimum, 18 AWG (1.0 mm

Diameter) Recommended


Temperature
Range
Backlit
Display
Heating
Control
40.0F/4.5C to 90.0F/32.0C
Cooling
Control
54.0F/12.0C to 100.0F/38.0C
Temperature
Humidity
Accuracy
Minimum Deadband
Ambient
Conditions
Operating
Storage
Compliance
United States

Canada

Europe
Australia and
New Zealand
Shipping Weight
0.75 lb (0.34 kg)
Controls Group
Milwaukee, WI 53202
Published in U.S.A.
TEC2245-2 LONWORKS Network Thermostat with Single

Proportional Output and One-Speed Fan Control
Product Bulletin
Issued May 15, 2006
The TEC2245-2 Thermostat is a LONWORKS

network device that provides control of two-pipe fan
coils, cabinet unit heaters, or other equipment using a
TEC2245-2 Thermostat features a Building Automation
operation quick and easy. The thermostat also employs
a unique, proportional control algorithm that virtually
Figure 1: TEC2245-2 LONWORKS Network

Features
Benefits

Offers real-time control status of the environment in easy-to-read, plain

text messages with constant backlight that brightens during user
interaction

signals

UP/DOWN arrow keys


TEC2245-2 LONWORKS Network Thermostat with Single Proportional Output

Product Overview
The TEC2245-2 Thermostat is specifically designed for
networked control of common two-pipe heating and
cooling equipment using a proportional control input. In
addition to superior temperature control and application
flexibility, the TEC2245-2 Thermostat features
and easy.
IMPORTANT: The TEC2245-2 Thermostat is

and eliminate the need for DIP switches
Four Levels of Keypad Lockout

Provide four levels of keypad lockout that can be
set up through the Installer Configuration Menu

the thermostat is set up

glance

0 to 24 hours
Auxiliary Contact
other auxiliary functions

power failure
Remote Access
controller
Additional Features

from 2.0F/1.0C to 5.0F/2.5C

Code Number
Description
Applications
TEC2245-2
LONWORKS network, Two-Pipe, Proportional



Code Number
Description
SEN-600-3
SEN-600-41
1.
Only the occupancy override function can be accomplished using the SEN-600-4 with the TEC2245-2.
TEC2245-2 LONWORKS Network Thermostat with Single Proportional Output and One-Speed Fan Control
Product Bulletin
Room Temp
70.0F
Backlit, plain text

LCD is easy to read
in any condition.
LEDs indicate
system activity.
FAN
FIG:frnt_vw_2245_22x6
MODE

4-15/16
(125)
Room Temp
70.0F
FAN
3-3/8
(86)
1-1/8
(29)
FIG:dmnsns__2245_22x6
MODE
Product Bulletin
Menu Overview
The TEC2245-2 Thermostat user interface consists of

five keys on the front cover (as illustrated in Figure 2).
The function of each key is as follows:

the TEC2245-2 Thermostat:

Status Display Menu


AUTO operates the fan only on a call for heating or
cooling, for both occupied and unoccupied periods.
Status Display Menu
OVERRIDE key activates the override function and

allows access to the Installer Configuration Menu.
(See the Installer Configuration Menu section.)
Room Temperature
System Mode

The OVERRIDE key overrides the unoccupied

mode to occupied at the local user interface for the
selecting the appropriate time period in the Installer
Configuration Menu.)

Backlit LCD
45 seconds.



center key:

Switching

Menu Scroll
Auto Mode
Four Keypad Lockout Levels

Setpoint

Setpoint
LEDs
Product Bulletin
Setpoint Type
Repairs and Replacements
Door Open Time

specifications, refer to the TEC2245-2 LONWORKS
Network Thermostat with Single Proportional Output
and One-Speed Fan Control Installation Instructions
(Part No. 24-9890-390) for troubleshooting details. For
a replacement thermostat, contact the nearest
Reheat Time
Power Requirements

Auxiliary
Output Rating
Triac Output
Digital Inputs
Wire Size


Thermostat Measurement
Range
-40.0F/-40.0C to 122.0F/50.0C
Sensor Type
Resolution
0.2F/0.1C
Control Accuracy
Control
Range
Heating
Cooling
Minimum Deadband
Ambient
Conditions
Operating
Storage
Product Bulletin

Compliance
United States

Canada

European
Union
Australia and
New Zealand
Shipping Weight
0.75 lb (0.34 kg)
Controls Group
Milwaukee, WI 53202
Product Bulletin
Published in U.S.A.
TEC22x6(H)-2 Series LONWORKS Network Thermostats

Product Bulletin
LONWORKS network devices that provide control of
two- or four-pipe fan coils, cabinet unit heaters, or other
0 to 10 VDC control input, dehumidification capability,
and up to three speeds of fan control. The
technologically advanced TEC22x6(H)-2 Series
Thermostats feature a Building Automation
Specific models are available to accommodate
Figure 1: TEC22x6-2 Series LONWORKS

Network Thermostat with Two Outputs,
Dehumidification Capability,

Features
Benefits

Conditioning (HVAC) control suppliers.
Integral Humidity Sensing Capability and

Increases occupancy comfort by providing dehumidification.
Offers real-time control status of the environment in easy-to-read, English

plain text messages with constant backlight that brightens during user
interaction.

Control

signals.
Provide easy FAN speed selection via the interface key to meet the
application requirements.
Override Interface Key (Commercial Models)
Allows easy access for temporarily overriding the unoccupied mode.


temperature scale display.

UP/DOWN arrow keys.

setback, service or filter alarms, motion detector, and window status.

parameter access without opening the thermostat cover.

Product Overview
and easy.




glance.

0 to 24 hours.
Auxiliary Contact

(On/Off Control)
equipment cycling.

power failure.
Remote Access
controller.
Additional Features

from 2.0F/1.0C to 5.0F/2.5C.


Code Number
Control Outputs
Fan Control
Dehumidification
Capability
Application
TEC2216-2
Two On/Off
Three Speeds
No
Commercial Market
TEC2216H-2
TEC2226-2
Hospitality Market
Commercial Market
TEC2226H-2
Hospitality Market
TEC2236-2
Yes
TEC2236H-2
TEC2246-2
Hospitality Market
No
TEC2246H-2
TEC2256-2
TEC2256H-2
Commercial Market
Commercial Market
Hospitality Market
Yes
Commercial Market
Hospitality Market

Code Number
Description
SEN-600-1
TE-6361P-1
8 in. (203 mm)1 Duct Mount Air Temperature Sensor
SEN-600-4
TE-636S-1
Other probe lengths available.
Room Temp
70.0F
Backlit, plain text

LCD is easy to read
in any condition.
LEDs indicate
system activity.
FIG:frnt_vw_22x6
1.

4-15/16
(125)
3-3/8
(86)
1-1/8
(29)
FIG:dmnsns_22x6
Room Temp
70.0F
Backlit LCD
The TEC22x6(H)-2 Series Thermostat user interface



The OVERRIDE key (commercial models)
overrides the unoccupied mode to occupied at the
local user interface for the specified TOccTime.
(TOccTime is defined by selecting the appropriate
time period in the Installer Configuration Menu.)
OVERRIDE key also allows access to the Installer

section.)
LEDs
Menu Overview
Status Display Menu

Status Display Menu

Note: For hospitality models, binary inputs can

override from the unoccupied mode to occupied
mode.
Room Temperature and Humidity (if humidity

display is enabled)
System Mode




Dehumidification - Hysteresis (Dehumidification

Models)


Setpoint

Setpoint
Setpoint Type

center key:

Switching
Door Open Time
Menu Scroll
Auto Mode
% Humidity Display (Dehumidification Models)

Models)
Pipe No.
Control Type (Floating Models)
Direct/Reverse Acting (Proportional Models)
Fan Menu
Reheat Time
Dehumidification Lockout (Dehumidification

Models)
UI3 Display

Models)
Repair Information
replacement TEC22x6(H)-2 Series Thermostat, contact
the nearest Johnson Controls representative.
Power Requirements

Relay/Triac
Contact
Rating
On/Off and
Floating
Control
Analog
Output Rating
Proportional
Control
Auxiliary
Output Rating
Triac Output
Digital Inputs
Wire Size



Temperature
Range
Backlit
Display
Heating
Control
40.0F/4.5C to 90.0F/32.0C
Cooling
Control
54.0F/12.0C to 100.0F/38.0C
Temperature
Humidity
Accuracy
Minimum Deadband
Ambient
Conditions
Operating
Storage
Compliance
United States

Canada

Europe
Australia and
New Zealand
Shipping Weight
0.75 lb (0.34 kg)
Controls Group
Milwaukee, WI 53202
Published in U.S.A.
GLOSSRIO HVAC
A
ABNT (Associao Brasileira de Normas Tcnicas): Comisso que prope normas
para fabricao e teste de aparelhos eletrnicos, inclusive udio e vdeo.
ABRAVA: Associao Brasileira de Refrigerao, Ar Condicionado, Ventilao e
Aquecimento.
Ao galvanizado: Ao revestido por uma camada de zinco, que protege contra a
corroso superficial e melhora o aspecto visual do produto.
Ao: Liga de ferro e carbono (at 1,5%) que pode conter adicionalmente outros
elementos qumicos, visando a melhoria de suas propriedades.
Adiabtica Referente a uma alterao nas condies gasosas, quando nenhum calor
somado ou subtrado, exceto em forma de trabalho.
Anemmetro Instrumento para medio da velocidade do ar em movimento.
Ar Comum Ar pesando 0,7488 libras por p cbico, que o ar a 68F bulbo seco e
50% de umidade relativa a uma presso baromtrica de 29.92 polegadas de mercrio,
ou aproximadamente ar seco a 70F mesma presso.
B
Bivolt: Tenso de entrada de energia tanto na voltagem 110V como na 220V.
Barmetro Instrumento para medir a presso atmosfrica.
Britsh Thermal Uit (BTU) Unidade Trmica Britnica Quantidade de calor
necessria para elevar a temperatura de uma libra de gua de um grau Fahrenheit. ,
tambm, a medida de quantidade de calor retirado no resfriamento de uma libra de
gua de um grau Fahrenheit; e tambm utilizada como medida do efeito refrigerante.
C
Calor de Condensao: o calor que se desprende quando um vapor se condensa
em lquido.
Capacidade: Volume. Quantidade de pessoas, dados, energia, objetos ou substncias
que pode ser armazenada em ou local ou recipiente.
Ciclo reverso: Mecanismo que permite que o condicionador de ar funcione tanto na
temperatura quente como na fria. Nos dias quentes, trabalha exatamente como um ar
condicionado regular, extraindo calor de dentro da casa e o transferindo para o lado de

fora. Nos dias frios, faz o oposto, bombeando energia quente de fora para dentro de sua
casa.
Compressor rotativo: Equipamento que possibilita que os gases sejam comprimidos
por elementos giratrios. Causa menores perdas mecnicas por atrito, realiza a
compresso de modo contnuo e no intermitente, dispensa o uso de vlvulas de
admisso e de descarga, diminuindo dessa forma as perdas e melhorando o rendimento
volumtrico. A economia de energia outro fator relevante.
Compressor: Equipamento utilizado para aumentar a presso de um fluido em estado
gasoso (ar, vapor de gua, hidrognio, entre outros.
Condicionador de Ar Janela ou Parede: Facilmente instalado na parede ou janela do
ambiente a ser climatizado. Geralmente compacto.
Condicionador de Ar Split: Equipamento que possui duas unidades: interna (evapora
o ar) e unidade externa (condensa o ar). As duas unidades so ligadas atravs de duas
tubagens de cobre, uma delas devidamente isolada. Essas unidades podem ser
colocadas em locais variados, devido sua versatilidade e tm a vantagem de fazer
menos rudo que as compactas
Controlador de temperatura: Dispositivo que possibilita que o usurio diminua ou
aumente a temperatura de determinado equipamento. Quando presente, por exemplo,
em um chuveiro eltrico, o controlador de temperatura permite que o indivduo diminua
a temperatura da gua, reduzindo consequentemente o consumo de energia eltrica.
COP (Coeficiente de Energia): a relao entre a potncia calorfica total dissipada
em watts e a potncia eltrica total consumida (W), durante um perodo tpico de
funcionamento.
Corrente eltrica: a velocidade na qual a carga eltrica passa por determinado
equipamento. Essa corrente varia de acordo com a resistncia do equipamento.
Carga Trmica Quantidade de calor que absorvida por um ambiente, proveniente
de fontes de calor externas (diferencial de temperaturas, ar de ventilao, etc.) ou
internas (pessoas, lmpadas, equipamentos, vapor, ar infiltrado, etc.). Pode ser
expresso, dentre outras unidades, em Watts (W), quilocalorias/hora (kcal/h) ou BTU/h
Capacidade do condicionador de ar: Quantidade de calor que um condicionador de ar
deve ser capaz de remover de um ambiente, equivalente ou superior carga trmica do
ambiente.
Condicionador de ar de janela: Equipamento compacto equipado com os
componentes de um ciclo frigorfico, destinado a remover calor de um ambiente (carga
trmica), mantendo sua temperatura controlada. Destina-se basicamente instalao
em janelas ou paredes externas.
CIF: Sigla designativa de Cost Insurance & Freight (Custo, Seguro e Frete), incluso no
preo.
Calor Forma bsica de energia que pode ser parcialmente convertida em outras
formas e na qual todas as outras formas podem ser totalmente convertidas.
Calor Especfico A quantidade de calor necessria para elevar a temperatura de uma
massa definida de material, a uma quantidade definida comparada com a requerida
para elevar a temperatura da mesma massa de gua na mesma quantidade. Pode ser
expressa em : Btu lb/F.
Caloria - O calor por unidade de peso necessrio para elevar a temperatura da gua
em um grau centgrado. Assim, uma grande caloria a quantidade de calor necessria
para elevar a temperatura de uma grama de gua em um grau centgrado.
Calor Latente A quantidade de calor que pode ser acrescentada a uma substncia
durante uma mudana de estado, sem provocar a variao da temperatura..
Calor Latente de Evaporao A quantidade de calor necessria para transformar
uma libra de lquido em vapor sem mudana na temperatura. Reversvel.
Calor Senspivel Calor que eleva a temperatura.
Calor Total O calor total adicionado a um refrigerante acima de um ponto de partida
arbitrrio, para conduzi-lo a um conjunto de condies estabelecidas (geralmente
expresso em Btu/lb). Por exemplo, em um gs superaquecido, o calor combinado
adicionado ao lquido, necessrio para elevar sua temperatura de um ponto inicial
arbitrrio temperatura de evaporao para a evaporao completa, e para elevar a
temperatura temperatura final quando o gs superaquecido.
Capacidade Em uma mquina refrigerante, a capacidade de absorver calor por
unidade de tempo, medidas geralmente em toneladas de refrigerao (TR) ou Btu/h.
Capacidade de Refrigerao A habilidade de um sistema refrigerante ou parte dele
em remover calor. Expressa como a relao entre o calor removido, usualmente
medida em Btu/h, ou toneladas/24 horas.
Capacidade em Toneladas de Refrigerao A refrigerao equivalente fuso de
uma tonelada de gelo por 24 horas. 288.000 Btu/dia, 12.000 Btu/h, ou 200 Btu/minuto.
Carga - Quantidade de refrigerante em um sistema.
Carregamento Colocao em carga.
Cavalo-Fora Unidade de potncia. Trabalho efetuado a razo de 33.000 libras-ps
por minuto ou 550 libras-ps por segundo.
Centgrado Sistema termomtrico no qual o ponto de congelamento da gua
chamado 0 e seu ponto de ebulio 100 presso normal baromtrica.
Centrfugo Dispositivo para separar lquidos de diferentes densidades, pela ao

centrfuga..
Ciclo de Degelo Ciclo que permite que a unidade de esfriamento se degele durante
um perodo de desligamento.
Ciclo de Refrigerao Curso completo de operao de um refrigerante de volta ao
ponto inicial, medido em termos termodinmicos. Tambm usado em geral para
qualquer processo repetido em qualquer sistema.
Conduo Trmica Passagem de calor de um ponto a outro por transmisso de
energia molecular de partcula a partcula atravs de um condutor.
Condutividade Trmica - A capacidade de um material em transmitir calor de um ponto
a outro, geralmente expressa em termos de Btu por hora por p quadrado de matria,
por polegada de espessura e por diferena de temperatura.
Condutor Eltrico Material que vai passar uma corrente eltrica como parte de um
sistema eltrico.
Conexo de Alargamento - Tipo de tubo conector flexvel que envolve o alargamento
do tubo para fornecer uma vedao mecnica.
Congelao Defeito de uma unidade de refrigerao em funcionar normalmente
devido formao de gelo na vlvula de expanso. A vlvula pode ser congelada
aberta ou fechada, causando refrigerao incorreta em qualquer caso.
Contar-Corrente Na troca de calor entre dois fludos, a direo oposta do fluxo, a
poro mais fia de um fludo encontrando a poro mais fria de outro.
Controle - Qualquer dispositivo de regulagem de uma mquina em funcionamento
normal, tanto manual como automtico. Se automtico, est implcita sua reao
temperatura, presso, nvel lquido ou tempo.
Controle de Baixa Presso Disjuntor eltrico, reagente presso, ligado na parte de
baixa presso de um sistema de refrigerao. Geralmente fecha alta presso e abre
baixa.
Controle de Temperatura Disjuntor eltrico reagente temperatura de um elemento
ou bulbo termosttico.
Difusor: Dispositivos de distribuio localizada que permitem uma distribuio

homognea por um determinado espao. Podem ser de vrios tipos: circulares,
quadrados, retangulares e lineares.
Defletor Diviso usada para desviar o fluxo de um fludo.
Degelo Remoo de gelo acumulado na unidade de resfriamento.
Densidade A massa ou peso por unidade de volume.
Descarregador Dispositivo em um compressor para a equalizao das presses do
lado de alta e baixa, quando o compressor pra, e por um curto perodo aps seu
arranque, de modo a diminuir a carga de partida do motor.
Desidratador Dispositivo utilizado para remover umidade do refrigerante.
Deslocamento Real Volume de gs na entrada do compressor realmente
movimentado em um tempo dado.
Deslocamento Terico Volume total deslocado por todos os pistes de um
compressor para cada curso, durante um intervalo definido. Geralmente medido em ps
cbicos por minuto.
Desumidificao Remoo do vapor de gua da atmosfera. Remoo da gua ou
lquido de gneros alimentcios estocados.
Detetor de Vazamentos Dispositivo utilizado para detectar vazamentos em um
sistema de refrigerao.
Diferencial (de um controle) A diferena entre a temperatura ou presso de circuito
ligado e desligado.
E
Evaporao: Passagem de um lquido ao estado de vapor.
Exaustor: Equipamento que remove o ar impuro ou com maus odores de ambientes
fechados. Comumente utilizado em cozinhas.
Expanso Direta Sistema no qual o evaporador est localizado no material ou
espao refrigerado, ou nas passagens de circulao de ar comunicando-se com esse
espao. ENTROPIA Em termodinmica, a base do diagrama de calor, a rea do qual
unidades de calor e a altura, temperatura absoluta.
Equalizador Externo Em uma vlvula de expanso termosttica, um tubo de ligao
da cmara contendo o elemento de evaporao atuado pela presso da vlvula e com a
sada da serpentina do evaporador. Dispositivo para compensar a queda de presso
excessiva atravs da serpentina..
Equivalente em Gelo Derretido A quantidade de calor (144Btu) absorvida por uma

libra de gelo a 32F na liquefao da gua a 32F.
F
Filtro: Dispositivo que impede a passagem de sujeiras ou impurezas para determinado
recipiente ou ambiente. Comum nas mquinas de lavar, mquinas de secar,
condicionadores de ar, entre outros equipamentos.
Filtro de carvo ativado: Equipamento que tem por finalidade a remoo de cloro livre
e de matria orgnica, que causam gosto e cor na gua filtrada.
"Frost Back" (retrocongelamento) A inundao do lquido de um evaporador na
linha de suco, acompanhada na maioria dos casos, pela formao de gelo na linha de
suco.
Fluido Gs ou lquido.
Freon Nome comum do diclorodifluormetano (CCl2F2).
Fahrenheit Sistema termomtrico, no qual 32 significa o ponto de congelamento da
gua, e 212 o ponto de ebulio, sob condies normais de presso.
Fator de Potncia (de uma instalao eltrica) A relao entre os watts e os voltampres em um circuito de corrente alternada.
G
Gs R-22: O gs refrigerante R-22 utilizado normalmente em sistemas de ar
condicionado em residncias e edifcios comerciais. No tem cheiro caracterstico, no
inflamvel nem combustvel sendo a sua temperatura de ebulio em C de -40,6 a
presso normal.
Gs CFC (Clorofluorcarbono): Classe de compostos orgnicos que contm carbono,
cloro e flor. Bastante utilizado em solventes orgnicos, gases para refrigerao e
propelentes em extintores de incndio e aerossis. Ultimamente o uso do CFC tem sido
condenado e abolido, pois uma vez submetido radiao UV, pode destruir as
molculas de Oznio que formam a camada protetora da atmosfera.
GLP (Gs Liquefeito de Petrleo): Tambm conhecido como gs de cozinha, a
mistura de dois hidrocarbonetos existentes no petrleo: o propano e o butano.
GN (Gs Natural): basicamente a mistura de hidrocarbonetos leves. Estando
temperatura ambiente e presso atmosfrica permanece no estado gasoso. um gs
mais leve que o ar, inodoro, incolor e atxico. uma fonte de energia limpa, que pode
ser usado nas indstrias, fazendo a substituio de outros combustveis mais poluentes.
Gs GR ou Gs Nafta: Tambm conhecido com gs de rua, possui menor poder
calorfico, sendo necessria, portanto, maior quantidade desse gs em relao aos
outros para uma mesma quantidade de energia liberada na queima.
Gs Superaquecido Gs cuja temperatura mais elevada que a temperatura de
evaporao presso existente.
Grfico de Conforto Grfico psicomtrico. Estritamente, um grfico, mostrando
temperaturas efetivas.
Grfico de Molier Representao grfica das propriedades trmicas dos fludos, com
calor total e entropia como coordenas.
Grfico Psicromtrico Grfico utilizado para determinar o volume especfico, teor de
calor, ponto de orvalho, umidade relativa, umidade absoluta e temperatura de bulbo
mido e bulbo seco, conhecendo qualquer de dois itens independentes dos
mencionados.
Grau-Dia Unidade baseada na diferena de temperatura e tempo, usada para
especificar a carga nominal de aquecimento no inverno. Em um dia, existem tantos
graus-dia quantos F de diferena na temperatura entre a temperatura mdia do ar
externo, medida num perodo de 24 horas, e a uma temperatura de 65F.
I
INMETRO: Instituto Nacional de Metrologia, Normalizao e Qualidade Industrial.
Isolante Trmico: Material que dificulta a dissipao de calor, como a cortia ou o
poliestireno expandido. Utiliza-se tambm o vcuo como isolante trmico.
Isolamento (de calor) - Uso de material de baixa condutividade de calor.
Interruptor de Alta Presso Dispositivo de controle ligado na parte de alta presso
de um sistema de refrigerao, para desligar a mquina quando a presso se torna
excessiva.
Infiltrao O vazamento de ar em uma edificao ou espao.
Infiltrao de Ar - A entrada de ar atravs de trincas, fendas, portas, janelas ou outras
aberturas, causada pela presso do vento ou pelas diferenas de temperatura.
Inflamabilidade Capacidade de um material em queimar.
L
LCD (Liquid Crystal Display): Monitor de cristal lquido, geralmente muito leve e fino.
Os monitores do tipo LCD possuem tela realmente plana, eliminando as distores de
imagem dos monitores do tipo tubo de raios catdicos, ou CRT (que tm suas telas
curvas). Emitem pouqussima radiao nociva, consomem menos energia e emitem
pouqussima radiao nociva. .
LEED AP (Accredited Professional): Trata-se de um profissional que teve seus
conhecimentos acerca do processo de certificao LEED atestado por um exame. Um
profissional LEED AP possui conhecimento sobre as prticas de construo
sustentvel e os princpios do Sistema de Certificao LEED, podendo facilitar o
processo de certificao atuando como um consultor.
LEED Auditor (Certificador): Empresas terceirizadas que analisam todos os
documentos enviados pelo empreendedor que busca a certificao LEED, referentes
comprovao do cumprimento dos pr-requisitos e crditos constantes no Sistema de
Certificao LEED. A partir de 2009, com a internacionalizao do LEED, a auditoria
ser realizada por cerca de dez multinacionais especializadas em auditoria que ir gerir
este processo a nvel global.
LEED NC (New Construction): LEED para novas construes ou grandes reformas,
elaborado para guiar projetos que se distinguem frente sua alta performance (energia,
gua, qualidade ambiental interna, produtividade, etc). Pode ser usado para prdios
comerciais, residenciais, governamentais, instalaes recreativas, laboratrios e plantas
industriais.
LEED CS (Core & Shell): nesta modalidade certifica-se toda a envoltria do
empreendimento, suas reas comuns e internamente o sistema de ar-condicionado e
elevadores. O LEED CS utilizado por construtores e incorporadores que esto
desenvolvendo o projeto para posterior comercializao de suas salas, garantindo ao
futuro usurio que suas instalaes oferecem todas as condies para a alta
performance do empreendimento.
O LEED CS foi desenvolvido para ser complementado pelo LEED CI (Commercial
Interior), ocorre que o construtor e incorporador destes empreendimentos que sero
futuramente comercializados, no podem se comprometer em relao ao modo que o
futuro usurio ocupar as salas comercializadas.
LEED Pr-certificao: a pr-certificao se faz presente apenas nos projetos
registrados na modalidade LEED CS. Trata-se de um reconhecimento formal que o
empreendedor estabeleceu metas para o desenvolvimento de um empreendimento
certificado LEED CS. Tendo em vista o carter comercial destes empreendimentos,
aps pr-certificado, o empreendedor poder fazer a divulgao visando a pr-venda do
empreendimento ou facilidades de financiamentos.
Concludo o processo de auditoria do empreendimento, tendo o empreendedor
cumprido todas as metas por ele apresentadas, o empreendimento receber a
certificao LEED CS.
LEED CI (Commercial Interior): LEED para interiores comerciais foi desenvolvido
para garantir a alta performance dos interiores, em termos de ambiente saudvel, locais
de trabalho produtivos, baixo custo de manuteno e operao e reduo do impacto
ambiental. O LEED CI oferece aos usurios, arquitetos de interiores e designers, a

possibilidade de criar ambientes sustentveis, independentemente de no poderem
atuar na operao de todo o prdio.
LEED ND (Neighbourhood): o Sistema de certificao LEED ND para Bairro e
Desenvolvimento de Comunidades integra os princpios do crescimento inteligente,
urbanismo e construo sustentvel para a concepo de bairros. A certificao LEED
ND requisita que o desenvolvimento da localizao e concepo do empreendimento
cumpra elevados nveis de responsabilidade ambiental e social.
LEED School: o Sistema de certificao LEED School, reconhece o carter nico da
concepo e construo de escolas. Baseado no Sistema de Certificao LEED NC,
aborda questes como a sala de aula, acstica, planejamento central, preveno contra
mofo e avaliao ambiental do local. Ao abordar a singularidade dos espaos escolares
e as questes de sade infantil, LEED School fornece uma nica e abrangente
ferramenta para as escolas que pretendem construir de forma sustentvel, com
resultados mensurveis.
LEED EB (Existing Building): O Sistema de Certificao LEED EB para edifcios
existentes, ajuda os proprietrios e operadores a medir suas operaes, fazer melhorias
na manuteno em uma escala consistente, com o objetivo de maximizar a eficincia
operacional e minimizar os impactos ambientais. O LEED EB aborda em todo o
edifcio questes de limpeza e manuteno (incluindo uso qumico), programas de
reciclagem, programas de manuteno exterior e atualizao de sistemas, podendo ser
aplicado tanto para edifcios existentes que procuram a certificao LEED EB pela
primeira vez, quanto para projetos previamente certificados no mbito de outros
Sistemas de Certificao LEED como LEED NC, LEED School, LEED CS e
LEED EB (em caso de renovao).
Lado de Alta A parte de um sistema de refrigerao contendo o refrigerante alta
presso. Tambm usado para referir unidade de condensao, consistindo do motor,
compressor, condensador e receptor, montados em uma base nica.
Lado de Baixa A parte de um sistema de refrigerao que normalmente funciona sob
baixa presso, como oposto ao lado de alta. Tambm usado para se referir ao
evaporador.
Linha de Suco Tubulao ou cano que transporta o vapor refrigerante do
evaporador para a admisso do compressor.
Linha de Lquido A tubulao ou encanamento que leva o refrigerante na forma
lquida de um condensador ou receptor de um sistema de refrigerao para um
dispositivo de presso reduzida.
Lquido Anticongelante Substncia adicionada ao refrigerante, para impedir a
formao de cristais de gelo na vlvula de expanso. Os agentes anticongelantes em
geral no impedem a corroso devida umidade. O uso do lquido deve ser uma
medida temporria quando so envolvidas grandes quantidades de gua, a menos que
se use um secativo para reduzir o teor de umidade. Os cristais de gelo podem se formar
quando a umidade est presente abaixo dos limites da corroso e, nesses casos, um
lquido anticongelante no-corrosivo adequado muitas vezes til. Os materiais como o
lcool so corrosivos e se usados, devem permanecer na mquina apenas por tempo
limitado.
M
Manmetro Instrumento para medir a presso ou o nvel do lquido. Tambm um tubo
em forma de U para medir diferenas de presso.
Mquina Centrfuga Compressor empregando fora centrfuga para compresso.
Mquina de Amnia Abreviao para uma mquina de refrigerao utilizando amnia
como refrigerante. Analogamente, mquina Freon, mquina de gs sulfuroso, etc.
Medio Micromtrica - Atualmente, um mcron uma unidade de medida no sistema
mtrico e equivalente a 1/1000 milmetro. H 25,4 milmetros em uma polegada.
Portanto, um mcron igual a 0,00004 polegada. Cem micra so equivalentes a 0,004
polegada ou 29,996 polegadas de vcuo. O vcuo de menos de 29,0 polegadas de
mercrio no satisfatrio para compressores.
Mudana de Estado Mudana de um estado a outro, como do lquido para o slido,
do lquido para gs, etc.
Memoril de Clculo Documento com clculos que permitem servir de base para o
dimensionamento / seleo de equipamentos.
PBE Plano Brasileiro de Etiquetagem (Inmetro).
N
No Condensveis Gases estranhos misturados com um refrigerante e que no
podem ser condensados na forma lquida s temperaturas e presses nas quais o
refrigerante condensa-se.
O
Ozone A forma de O3 do oxignio. Usado em ar condicionado como um eliminador de
odores. Perigoso em altas concentraes.
P
Potncia: Rapidez com a qual certa quantidade de energia transformada.
Representada pelo smbolo W. Presso (P): Fora exercida pela massa de ar por
unidade de superfcie. Corresponde energia por unidade de volume de fludo. Mede-
se em Kg/m2, mas a unidade mais usada em milmetros de coluna de gua (mm.c.a.)

ou Pascal (Pa).
Procel: Programa Nacional e Conservao de Energia Eltrica.
Permanncia Em um evaporador, a capacidade de permanecer frio aps a remoo
de calor do evaporador ter se acabado.
Pirmetro Instrumento para a medio de altas temperaturas.
Ponto de Congelamento Temperatura na qual um lquido se solidifica com a
remoo de calor.
Ponto de Congelao ou de Fluidez (de leos) A temperatura abaixo da qual a
superfcie do leo no vai se alterar quando o recipiente inclinado.
Ponto de Ebulio Temperatura na qual um lquido vaporizado pela adio de
calor, dependendo do refrigerante e da presso absoluta na superfcie do liquido e
vapor.
Ponto de Orvalho (do ar) Temperatura na qual uma amostra especificada de ar, sem
acrscimo ou remoo de umidade, est completamente saturada. A temperatura na
qual o ar, sendo resfriado, fornece umidade ou orvalho.
Posio de superaquecimento da Vlvula de Expanso Termosttica A
depresso da temperatura de evaporao na presso de alimentao da vlvula abaixo
da temperatura do bulbo termosttico.
Potncia A relao do trabalho efetuado, medido em cavalos fora, watts, quilowatts,
etc.
Presso A fora exercida por unidade de rea.
Presso Absoluta A soma, em qualquer tempo, da presso manomtrica e da
presso atmosfrica. Assim, por exemplo, se o manmetro apresentar a leitura de 164,5
libras por polegada quadrada (psi), a presso absoluta ser 164,5 + 14,7, ou 179,2
libras por polegada quadrada.
Presso Atmosfrica Presso exercida pela atmosfera em todas as direes, como
indicado por um barmetro. A presso atmosfrica padro considerado como sendo
14,695 libras por polegada quadrada (geralmente escrita 14,7 psi), que equivalente a
29,92 polegadas de mercrio.
Presso Balanceada A mesma presso em um sistema ou recipiente, que existe fora
do sistema ou recipiente.
Presso Crtica A presso de vapor correspondente temperatura crtica.
Presso de Suco Presso no lado de suco do compressor.

Presso do Cabeote A presso no cabeote do compressor. Presso de descarga.
Presso do Vapor Presso existente na superfcie do lquido e vapor de um
refrigerante. Depende da temperatura.
Presso do Zero Absoluto - A presso existente em um recipiente que est totalmente
vazio. A presso mais baixa possvel. O vcuo perfeito.
Presso Esttica Presso contra as paredes dos tubos, tubulaes ou dutos.
Presso Hidrosttica Presso devida ao lquido em um recipiente que no contm
espao gasoso.
Presso Total Em um fluxo de fludo, a soma da presso esttica e da presso de
velocidade.
Processo a Adiabtico Qualquer processo termodinmico que se verifica em um
sistema fechado, sem adio ou retirada de calor.
Purgagem A ao de retirar o gs refrigerante de um recipiente contendo refrigerante,
geralmente a fim de retirar os no-condensveis.
Purificador de Ar Compartimento no qual o ar forado atravs de um jato de gua
a fim de purifica-lo, umidec-lo ou desumific-lo.
Q
R
Radiao A passagem de calor de um objeto a outro, sem aquecimento do espao
intermedirio. O calor atravessado por movimentos ondulatrios, semelhante luz.
Receptor de Lquido A parte da unidade de condensao que armazena o lquido
refrigerante.
Refrigerante Meio de transmisso de calor em um sistema de refrigerao que
absorve calor por evaporao baixa temperatura e fornece calor pela condensao
alta temperatura.
Rendimento Mecnico A relao entre o trabalho efetuado por uma mquina e o
trabalho feito sobre ela ou a energia usada para esse trabalho.
Rendimento Volumtrico - A relao entre o volume de um gs realmente bombeado

por um compressor ou bomba e o deslocamento terico do compressor.
Resfriador de Ambientes Elemento refrigerante de ambientes. Em ar-condicionado,
um aparelho para condicionar pequenos volumes de ar para o conforto.
Resistncia Eltrica A oposio ao fluxo de corrente eltrica, medida em ohms.
Resistncia Trmica O recproco da condutividade trmica.
Reteno de leo Dispositivo para separar o leo do vapor de alta presso do
compressor. Geralmente contm uma vlvula de bia para retornar o leo ao crter do
compressor.
S
Selo Procel: Prmio anual concedido pelo Programa Nacional e Conservao de
Energia Eltrica aos equipamentos de fabricao nacional com os melhores ndices de
eficincia energtica dentro de sua categoria. Tambm estimula a fabricao e a
comercializao de produtos mais eficientes, contribuindo para o desenvolvimento
tecnolgico e a reduo de impactos ambientais.
Salmoura Qualquer lquido gelado pelo sistema de refrigerao e utilizado para a

transmisso de calor.
Sangrador Tubulao, s vezes ligada a um condensador, para retirar lquido
refrigerante paralelamente ao fluxo principal.
Secador Sinnimo de desidratador.
Sedimentao Produto de decomposio formado em um refrigerante, devido a
impurezas no leo ou devido umidade. Os sedimentos podem ser viscosos ou duros.
Serpentina Qualquer elemento de resfriamento feito de tubo ou tubulao.
Slica-Gel - Material secativo tendo a frmula SiO2.
Sistema de Compresso Sistema de refrigerao no qual o elemento de imposio
da presso operado mecanicamente.
Sistema de Congelamento por Salmoura Sistema em que a salmoura, congelada
por um sistema de refrigerao, circula atravs de tubulao at o ponto em que se
necessita de refrigerao.
Sistema de Refrigerao Automtico Sistema que se regula sozinho para manter

um conjunto de condies definido por meio de controles automticos e vlvulas,
geralmente responsvel pela temperatura ou presso.
Sistema de Unidade Sistema que pode ser removido das dependncias do usurio
sem desligamento das partes contendo refrigerantes, ligaes de gua ou conexes
eltricas fixas
Sistema Indireto de Resfiramento - Veja: Sistema de congelamento por salmoura.
Sistema Inundado - Sistema no qual o refrigerante entra em uma tubulao de uma
vlvula de presso reduzida e no qual o evaporador mantm um nvel do lquido.
Oposto ao evaporador seco.
Slido O estado da matria no qual uma fora pode ser exercida apenas na direo
inferior quando no limitado. Distinto dos fluidos.
Solubilidade - A capacidade de um material entrar em soluo com outro.
Soluo Mistura lquida homognea de dois ou mais materiais.
Soluo Euttica Uma soluo de concentrao tal a possuir ponto de congelamento
constante mais baixa temperatura de congelamento da soluo.
Suamento Condensao de umidade do ar nas superfcies abaixo do ponto de
orvalho.
Suesfriado Esfriado abaixo da temperatura de condensao correspondente
presso atuante.
Sublimao A mudana de um estado slido a vapor, sem o estado lquido
intermedirio.
Superaquecimento O calor contido em um vapor acima de seu teor de calor no ponto
de ebulio presso existente.
T
Termostato: Dispositivo destinado a manter constante a temperatura de um
determinado sistema, atravs de regulao automtica.
Temperatura Nvel ou presso de calor. O estado trmico de um corpo com relao
sua capacidade em retirar calor ou passar calor a outro corpo.
Temperatura Asoluta A temperatura de uma substncia medida acima do zero

absoluto.
Temperatura Ambiente Temperatura do meio circundante de um objeto. Em um
sistema domiciliar ou comercial, tendo um condensador resfriado a ar, a temperatura
do ar que entra nesse condensador.
Temperatura Crtica A temperatura acima da qual um vapor no pode ser liquefeito,
no obstante a presso.
Temperatura de Bulbo Seco A temperatura real do ar, oposta a temperatura do
bulbo mido.
Temperatura do Zero Absoluto A temperatura na qual um corpo no tem calor (459,6F, ou 273C).
Tempo de Funcionamento Geralmente indica porcentagem do tempo de
funcionamento do compressor do refrigerante.
Teor de Calor Veja Calor Total.
Termodinmica A cincia da mecnica do calor.
Termmetro - Dispositivo para indicar a temperatura.
Termopar Dispositivo constitudo de dois condutores eltricos tendo duas junes,
uma a um ponto cuja temperatura deve ser medida, e outra a uma temperatura
conhecida. A temperatura entre as duas junes determinada pelas caractersticas do
material e o potencial eltrico estabelecido.
Termostato Disjuntor atuado pela temperatura.
U
Umidade Absoluta A quantidade de gua definida contida em uma quantidade
definida de ar. Geralmente medida em gramas de gua por libra ou p cbico de ar.
Umidade Rlativa A relao entre a presso de gua-vapor do ar, comparada com a
presso do vapor que ela teria se fosse saturada temperatura do bulbo seco. Muito
prxima da relao entre a quantidade de umidade contida no ar comparada com a que
ele suportaria temperatura existente.
Umidificador Dispositivo para adicionar umidade ao ar.
Umidostato Dispositivo de controle sensvel umidade relativa.
Unidade de Ar Condicionado Pea de equipamento projetada como uma

combinao especfica de tratamento do ar , consistindo de meios de ventilao,
circulao de ar, purificao de ar e transferncia de calor, com meios de controle para
manuteno da temperatura e umidade dentro de limites prescritos.
Unidade de Esfriamento Combinao especfica de tratamento de ar consistindo de
um meio de circulao de ar e resfriamento, dentro de temperaturas-limite prescritas.
Unidade Hermeticamente Vedada Unidade de refrigerao no dispondo de
ligaes mecnicas e no contendo vedao de eixo.
V
Vazo: o volume por unidade de tempo, que se escoa atravs de determinada seo
transversal de um conduto livre (canal, rio ou tubulao com presso atmosfrica) ou de
um conduto forado (tubulao com presso positiva ou negativa). Isto significa que a
vazo a rapidez com a qual um volume escoa. As unidades adotadas para
representar a vazo so: m/s, m/h, l/h ou o l/s.
Vcuo Presso abaixo da atmosfrica, geralmente medida em polegadas de mercrio
abaixo da presso atmosfrica.
Vlvula de Alvio Vlvula projetada para abrir a presses excessivamente elevadas,
para permitir o escapamento do refrigerante.
Vlvula de Bia Vlvula regulada por uma bia imersa em um recipiente de lquido.
Vlvula de Bia do Lado de Alta Vlvula de bia que flutua no lquido de alta
presso. Abre-se com o acrscimo do nvel do lquido.
Vlvula de Bia do Lado de Baixa Vlvula operada pelo lquido de baixa presso.
Abre a um baixo nvel e fecha a um alto.
Vlvula de Expanso Automtica Dispositivo que regula o fluxo de refrigerante da
linha do lquido para o evaporador, a fim de manter uma presso constante do
evaporador.
Vlvula de Expanso Termosttica Dispositivo para regular o fluxo do refrigerante
em um evaporador, de modo a manter uma temperatura de evaporao em uma
relao definida com a temperatura do bulbo termosttico.
Vlvula de Presso Constante Vlvula do tipo borboleta, que reage presso
localizada na linha de suco de um evaporador, para manter uma presso constante
desejada no evaporador, mas elevada que a presso da linha principal de suco.
Vlvula de Temperatura Constante Vlvula do tipo borboleta, que reage
temperatura de um bulbo termosttico. Essa vlvula est situada na linha de suco de
um evaporador, para reduzir o efeito refrigerante na serpentina, para simplesmente

manter a temperatura em um mnimo desejado.
Vlvula sem Gaxeta - Vlvula que utiliza gaxeta para evitar vazamentos em torno da
haste da mesma. Material flexvel geralmente usado para vedar contra vazamentos e
ainda permite o movimento da vlvula.
Vlvula Solenide Vlvula aberta pelo efeito magntico de uma corrente eltrica
atravs de uma bobina solenide.
Vapor Saturado Vapor no superaquecido, mas de qualidade 100%, isto , no
contendo lquido no vaporizado.
Vedao do Eixo Sistema mecnico de partes para evitar vazamento de gs entre
um eixo rotativo e um compartimento de manivela estacionrio.
Velocidade Crtica A velocidade acima da qual o fluxo de fludo turbulento.
Viscosidade A propriedade de um fludo resistir ao fluxo ou mudana de forma.
Volume Especfico O volume de um peso definido de um material. Geralmente,
expresso em termos de ps cbicos por libra. A recproca da densidade.
Z
Zero Absoluto A temperatura na qual o movimento molecular de uma substncia

teoricamente cessa. Essa temperatura igual a 459,6F, e 273,1C. A essa
temperatura, o volume de um gs ideal mantido presso constante torna-se zero.

System 350TM Application Matrix

System
350
Application
Basic
Control
Power
Module
(Transformer)
Stage Modules
(and maximum allowable stages)
Display
Module
Y350R
S350A, S350C, S350P
D350
Temperature A350A/B
or A350E
A99B Series
Up to Nine S350A or S350C Stages (ten total relays)
A350R
Y350R
S350A, S350C, S350P
D350
BKT287
A99B Series
WHA29A
Series
Y350R
S350A, S350C, S350P
D350
BKT287
A99B Series
WHA29A
Series
Up to Four S350A or S350C Stages (four total relays) with Y350R;

Up to Nine Stages (nine total relays) with 24 VAC Transformer
W351
Y350R
D351
S351
TE-6100-961
TE-6000-960
BKT287
HE-67S3-0N0BT
WHA29A
Series
DINRail
Remote
On-Off
with SPDT
relay output
HE-67S3-0N00P Display Cables

BKT287
Up to Five Stages (six total relays) with Y350R;

Up to Nine Stages (ten total relays) with 24 VAC Transformer
W351P
Y350R
S351
DINRail
D351
HE-67S3-0N0BT
Proportional
WHA29A
Series
Remote
with 0-10 VDC

and 0-20 mA output
Pressure
DINRail
Remote
Display Cables
with 0-10 VDC

and 0-20 mA output
Humidity
TE-6100-961
TE-6000-960
ees
ag
ssta
Proportional
DINRail
Remote
Display Cables
Up to Nine S350A or S350C Stages (ten total relays)
A350P
WHA29A
Series
TE-6100-961
TE-6000-960
ees
ag
ssta
with SPST
relay output
Accessories
Remote
Display Cables
ees
ag
ssta
On-Off
with SPDT
relay output
Reset
Input
Devices
HE-67S3-0N00P Display Cables

BKT287
Up to Four S350A/C Stages(four total relays) with Y350R;

P352AB
Y350R
DINRail
D352A
S352A
P499 Series
WHA29A
Series
Remote
Display Cables
On-Off
with SPDT
relay output
BKT287
Up to Five Stages (six total relays) with Y350R;

P352PQ
Y350R
DINRail
D352C
DPT-2640
Proportional
In. W.C.
with 0-10 VDC
and 0-20 mA output
WHA29A
Series
Remote
Display Cables
No Additional Stages
BKT287
DINRail
P352PN
Y350R
S352A
Up to Four S352A Stages(four total relays) with Y350R;

R353
Y350R
BKT287
DINRail
S353
None
with SPDT
relay output
Up to Five Stages Total with Y350R;

Up to Ten Stages Total with 24 VAC Transformer
WHA29A
Series
Remote
Display Cables
with 0-10 VDC

and 0-20 mA output
Sequencingi
P499 Series
ees
ag
ssta
Proportional
0-600 PSI
D352A
0 to 10 VDC
0 to 20 mA
0 to -2 VDC
135 to 10k ohm
slidewire
potentiometer
input
WHA29A
Series
Remote
Display Cables
BKT287
DINRail
1 of 1

CD-W00-00-1
Wall Mount CO2 Transmitter

Description
Johnson Controls offers a Carbon Dioxide

(CO2) transmitter for measuring and
transmitting CO2 levels, ranging from 0 to
2,000 parts per million (ppm), within Heating,
Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) CO2
applications. Specific HVAC CO2 applications
include Demand Control Ventilation (DCV),
fresh air and Indoor Air Quality (IAQ), and
rooftop air handling Economizer controls
systems.
Features
DCV strategies offer potential for 10 to

70% energy savings
Vaisala CARBOCAP single-beam,
dual-wavelength design provides
superior performance compared to other
technologies
CARBOCAP silicon, micro-machined
construction provides reliable CO2
measurement in room environments
offers 5 years of reliable calibration
stable infrared reference compensates

for light-source drift
Applications
This compact wall-mounted device produces
0 to 10 V and 4 to 20 mA signals. It is designed
to work:
in stand-alone mode
as part of any integrated Building
Automation System (BAS)
This new CO2 transmitter is easy to install,
offers a full 3-year warranty, and requires no
maintenance or field calibration.
Repair Information
If the CD-W00-00-1 Wall Mount CO2
Transmitter fails to operate within its
replacement CO2 transmitter, contact the
Refer to the CD-W00-00-1 Wall Mount CO2
Transmitter Product Bulletin (LIT-12011187)
Selection Chart
CD-W00-00-1 Wall Mount CO2 Transmitter
Accessories
Product Code
Number
Description
Product Code
Number
Description
CD-W00-00-1
ACC-DWCLIP-0
Drywall Spring-Clip Mounting Kit
Y65T31-0
Multiple Primary Transformer, 40 VA, 120/208/240 V

Primary, 24 V Class 2 Secondary with Screw
Terminals: Foot Mounting or 4 x 4 in. (100 x 100 mm)
Plate
Measuring Range
0 to 2,000 ppm CO2
[50 ppm + 3.0% of reading] (includes calibration uncertainty, repeatability, and non-linearity). All accuracy
specifications reflect the testing of the transmitter using high-grade certified gases. The transmitter is intended for an
altitude range of 0 to 2,000 ft (0 to 600 m) above sea level without compensation.
Temperature Dependence of Output
-0.35% of reading/C, typical (may vary between individual units)
Long-Term Stability
<5.0% of Full Scale/5 Years
Response Time (0 to 63%)
1 Minute
23 to 113F (-5 to 45C)
-4 to 158F (-20 to 70C)
Humidity Range
0 to 85% RH (noncondensing), 85F (29C) maximum dew point
Transmitter CO2 Output Signal
4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC; Maximum Output Current: 25 mA; Maximum Output Voltage: 12.5 V
Resolution of Analog Outputs
2.5 ppm CO2
Recommended External Load
Current Output: Maximum 500 ohms Load Resistance; Voltage Output: Minimum 1,000 ohms Load Resistance
Power Supply Range
20 to 30 VAC (18 to 30 VDC), Class 2
Power Consumption
<2.0 W Average, excluding current output consumption
Current Consumption
150 mA peak (70 mA average)
Warm-Up Time
<1 Minute; <10 Minutes for Full Specification
4-23/32 x 3-5/32 x 1-7/32 in. (120 x 80 x 31 mm)
Shipping Weight
0.26 lb (117 g)
Compliance
United States
UL Listed, File E27734, CCN XAPX, UL 873, Temperature Indicating and Regulating Equipment, FCC Compliant to
CFR 47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class A
Canada
UL Listed, File E27734, CCN XAPX7, CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 24, Temperature Indicating and Regulating Equipment.
Industry Canada Compliant, ICES-003
Europe
CE Mark, EMC Directive 89/336/EEC, in accordance with EN 61326-1:1997 + Am1:1998 + Am2:2001 + Am3:2003,
Electrical equipment for measurement, control, and laboratory use EMC requirements Minimum requirements
1 of 1

cdwxx000s
1900159
9thcc:na
Rev:
08/23/01
logo:
CD-Wxx-00-0 Series
left ft:

cdwxx_cat1.jpg
Description
Johnson Controls offers a complete line of
carbon dioxide (CO2) modules that measure
and transmit CO2 levels ranging from
0 to 2,000 parts per million [ppm]. This
compact device offers a choice of 0 to 10 V or
0 to 20 mA output signals and features an
optional relay output with or without a digital
display. Johnson Controls CO2 transmitters
are easy to install and to operate.
The silicon-based CARBOCAP sensor
delivers high accuracy and long-term
right ft:
standard
Sect# = 0
seQ# = 1
measurement stability (100 ppm) over a fiveyear period without calibration. The diffusionaspirated, single-beam, dual-wavelength
sensor structure is remarkably simple. It
consists of an infrared (IR) source, a sample
cell, an IR detector, and a tunable interference
filter that enables measurements at two
wavelengths. Reference measurements
made using a tunable interference filter
eliminate the typical weakness of dual-beam
sensors and permits shifting the optical pass
band electronically. This innovative design
provides precise reference readings that
eliminate the typically broad deviation
expected from a traditional CO 2 sensor.
Applications
The new CO2 transmitters are easy to install,
offer a full three-year warranty, and require no
maintenance or field calibration. Use them
in standalone mode
in support of Demand Control Ventilation
(DCV)
with fresh air and Indoor Air Quality (IAQ)
systems
stable infrared reference compensates for

light-source drift.

CO2 transmitters with DCV strategies offer

a potential for 1 0 t o70% energy savings
with rooftop air handling Economizer

controls systems
single-beam, dual-wavelength design

provides superior performance compared
to other technologies
connected to Metasys system or the

AD-DME series
To Order
Specify the code number in the following
selection chart.
CD-Wxx-00-0 Wall Mount CO2 Transmitter

Measuring Range
0 to 2,000 ppm CO2
<(30 ppm CO2 + 2.0% of reading) (includes manufacturing deviation

and drift). All accuracy specifications reflect testing the transmitters
using high-grade, certified gases. Transmitters are intended for an
altitude range of 0 to 1,969 ft (0 to 600m) above sea level without
compensation. To compensate for higher altitudes, see the Johnson
Controls installation instructions for this device.
Non-Linearity
<1.0% of Full Scale
Temperature
Dependence of Output
<0.056% of Full Scale/F (<0.1% of Full Scale/C)
Long-Term Stability
1 Minute
23 to 113F (-5 to 45C)
-4 to 158F (-20 to 70C)
Transmitter
Output
Signal
high thermal stability with negligible airflow

dependence
Features
Specifications
Humidity Range
silicon, micro-machined construction

provides reliable CO2 measurement in duct
environments
Selection Chart
Code Number
Description
CD-WA0-00-0
Transmitter with Analog

Temperature Output
CD-WR0-00-0
Transmitter with Relay
CD-WRD-00-0
Transmitter with Relay and

Display
Accessories
0 to 85% RH (non-condensing)
Code
Number
Description
ACC-CD-S
Relay Setpoint Software Kit; includes

software and interface cable to reset
the On and Off relay setpoints for
CD-WR0-00-0 or CD-WRD-00-0
Y65T31-0
Multiple Primary Transformer, 40 VA,

120/208/230 V Primary, 24 V Class 2
Secondary with Screw Terminals:
Foot Mounting or 4 x4 in.
(101.6 x 101.6 mm) Plate
Jumper Selectable: 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC (Default)

CO2 Maximum Output Current: 25 mA;
Maximum Output Voltage: 12.5 V
Analog Temperature
Linear 0 to 10 VDC for 32 to 122F (0 to 50C)
Module (Optional)
Relay Output (Optional) Maximum 30 V, 0.5 A, Class 2
Resolution of CO2 Output
10 ppm (CD-WRD-00-0 only)
Current Output: Maximum 500 ohms Load Resistance

Voltage Output: Minimum 1,000 ohms Load Resistance
Power Supply Range
Power Consumption
<2.5 W Average, 4.1 VA
ACC-CD-A
Warmup Time
< 5 Minutes for CO2 Measurement

< 30 Minutes for Temperature Measurement
ACC-DWCLIP-0 Drywall Spring-clip Mounting Kit
Housing Material
ABS Plastic
ACC-CD-DR
Replacement Relay and Display

Module for CD-WRD-00-0 Only
3-5/32 x 4-9/32 1-3/8 in. (80 x 108.5 x 35 mm)

UL Listed, CCN XAPX (US) and XAPX7 (Canada);
EMC Directive (CE Mark), 89/336/EEC; FCC and DOC Compliant
ACC-CD-R
Agency Listings
Relay Output Module for

CD-WR0-00-0
Repair Parts
Code Number
Description
Analog Temperature Module for
CD-WA0-00-0 Only
1/2

CD-Wxx-00-0 Series Wall Mount CO2 Transmitter (Continued)

cdwxx_cat 2.eps
cdwxx_cat 3.eps
3.15 (80.00)
1.09
(27.69)
3.15 (80.00)
2.36 (60.00)
1.43
(36.32)
4.27
(108.50)
3.26
(83.00)
Center
Hole
2.36
4.27
(60.00) (108.50)
2.63 (66.70)
UP
Cover Dimensions, in. (mm)

Wall Mount Base Dimensions, in .(mm)
2/2

Product Bulletin
CD-W00-00-1

Supersedes August 22, 2006
Johnson Controls offers a Carbon Dioxide (CO2)

transmitter for measuring and transmitting CO2 levels,
ranging from 0 to 2,000 parts per million (ppm), within
Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) CO2
applications. Specific HVAC CO2 applications include
Demand Control Ventilation (DCV), fresh air and Indoor
Air Quality (IAQ), and rooftop air handling Economizer
controls systems.
This compact wall-mounted device produces 0 to 10 V
and 4 to 20 mA signals. It is designed to work:
in stand-alone mode
as part of any integrated Building Automation

System (BAS)
This new CO2 transmitter is easy to install, offers a full

3-year warranty, and requires no maintenance or field
calibration.
Figure 1: Wall Mount CO2 Transmitter

Features
Benefits
Energy Savings from DCV Strategies
Offer potential for 10 to 70% energy savings.
Vaisala CARBOCAP Single-Beam,

Dual-Wavelength Design
Provides superior performance compared to other technologies.
CARBOCAP Silicon, Micro-machined

Construction
Provides reliable CO2 measurement in room environments.
Calibration Reliability
Offers 5 years of reliable calibration.
Stable Infrared Reference
Compensates for light-source drift.
Product Overview
This CO2 transmitter uses an advanced CO2 sensing
technology. The silicon-based CARBOCAP sensor
provides stability and reliability.
The CARBOCAP sensor operates in accordance with
the single-beam, dual-wavelength method. This
patented sensor has unique reference measurement
capabilities, offering excellent stability over both time
and temperature.
The CO2 transmitter is factory-set to measure

CO2 levels up to 2,000 ppm. It requires a Class 2,
24 VAC/VDC power source and generates an output
signal proportional to the CO2 level detected. One
simple wire to a screw terminal on the Printed Circuit
Board (PCB) selects the analog output signal from the
following options:
0 to 10 V
4 to 20 mA
CD-W00-00-1 Wall Mount CO2 Transmitter Product Bulletin
Calibration
IMPORTANT: The CD-W00-00-1CO2 Transmitter
is intended to provide an input to equipment under
malfunction of the transmitter could lead to personal
Incorporate and maintain other devices, such as
controls, intended to warn of or protect against
failure or malfunction of the transmitter.
The Johnson Controls CD-W00-00-1 CO2
Transmitter is calibrated using certified gases for the
following:
output signal (0 to 10 V) proportional to CO2

concentration (0 to 2,000 ppm)
altitude range of 0 to 2,000 ft (0 to 600 m) above

sea level without compensation
Dust, water vapor, and most chemicals do not affect

the measurement accuracy of the sensor. No special
software compensation patches are necessary, and the
device requires no maintenance.
Versatile Transmitter
The wall mount CO2 transmitter is designed for
standard United States wallbox or surface mounting.
The Johnson Controls CO2 transmitter, when used with
BAS/Economizer controllers (featuring DCV
strategies), can generate energy savings up to:
20 to 40% in office buildings
20 to 60% in restaurants/light retail facilities
10 to 70% in educational/business settings
Repair Information
If the CD-W00-00-1 Wall CO2 Transmitter fails to
replacement CO2 transmitter, contact the nearest
CARBOCAP Technology
Altitude Compensation
Johnson Controls is licensed to integrate the

silicon-based CARBOCAP sensor into HVAC or
Building Automation Systems. Integrating this sensor
delivers several advantages: high accuracy, excellent
stability, negligible temperature dependence, and ease
of installation. Due to the long-term stability,
maintenance costs are reduced.
This device is intended for an altitude range of 0 to

2,000 ft (0 to 600 m) without compensation. To
compensate for higher altitudes, refer to the
CD-W00-00-1 Wall Mount CO2 Transmitter Installation
Instructions (Part No. 24-9601-94) for additional
information.
The structure of the diffusion-aspirated, single-beam

dual-wavelength sensor is remarkably simple. It
consists of an Infrared (IR) source, a sample cell, a
tunable-interference filter, and an IR detector. The
tunable-interference filter enables measurements at
two wavelengths. As a result, references are measured
accurately, without the typically broad tolerances
inherent in dual-beam sensors.
to order a CO2 transmitter. See Table 3 for available
accessories for the wall mount CO2 transmitter.
Table 2: Product Code Number

Product Code Number
Description
CD-W00-00-1
Product Code Number
Description
ACC-DWCLIP-0
Drywall Spring-Clip Mounting Kit
Y65T31-0
Multiple Primary Transformer, 40 VA, 120/208/240 V Primary, 24 V

Class 2 Secondary with Screw Terminals: Foot Mounting or 4 x 4 in.
(100 x 100 mm) Plate
Measuring Range
0 to 2,000 ppm CO2
[50 ppm + 3.0% of reading] (includes calibration uncertainty, repeatability, and

non-linearity). All accuracy specifications reflect the testing of the transmitter using
high-grade certified gases. The transmitter is intended for an altitude range of
0 to 2,000 ft (0 to 600 m) above sea level without compensation.
-0.35% of reading/C, typical (may vary between individual units)
Long-Term Stability
1 Minute
23 to 113F (-5 to 45C)
-4 to 158F (-20 to 70C)
Humidity Range
0 to 85% RH (noncondensing), 85F (29C) maximum dew point
Transmitter CO2 Output Signal
4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC
Maximum Output Current: 25 mA; Maximum Output Voltage: 12.5 V
Resolution of Analog Outputs
2.5 ppm CO2

Power Supply Range
Power Consumption
<2.0 W Average, excluding current output consumption
Current Consumption
150 mA peak (70 mA average)
Warm-Up Time
<1 Minute
<10 Minutes for Full Specification
4-23/32 x 3-5/32 x 1-7/32 in. (120 x 80 x 31 mm)
Shipping Weight
0.26 lb (117 g)
Compliance
United States
UL Listed, File E27734, CCN XAPX, UL 873, Temperature Indicating and

Regulating Equipment, FCC Compliant to CFR 47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class A
Canada
UL Listed, File E27734, CCN XAPX7, CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 24, Temperature
Indicating and Regulating Equipment. Industry Canada Compliant, ICES-003
Europe
CE Mark, EMC Directive 89/336/EEC, in accordance with EN 61326-1:1997 +

Am1:1998 + Am2:2001 + Am3:2003, Electrical equipment for measurement,
control, and laboratory use EMC requirements Minimum requirements
United States Emissions Compliance
Canadian Emissions Compliance
This Class (A) digital apparatus meets all the requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
Building Efficiency

Published in U.S.A.
4
Product Bulletin
Issue Date
CD-Wxx-00-0
0601
CD-Wxx-00-0 Series Wall Mount CO2 Transmitter

Johnson Controls offers a full line of Carbon Dioxide
(CO2) transmitters for measuring and transmitting CO2
levels, ranging from 0 to 2,000 parts per million (ppm),
within Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning
(HVAC) CO2 applications. Specific HVAC CO2
applications include: Demand Control Ventilation
(DCV), fresh air and Indoor Air Quality (IAQ), and
rooftop air handling Economizer controls systems.
These compact, wall-mounted devices output 0 to 10V
(default), 0 to 20 mA, or 4 to 20 mA signals and feature
analog temperature outputs, relay outputs, and/or a
digital display as (optional) features. They are
designed to work:
in standalone mode
connected to Metasys system or the AD-DME

series controllers

System (BAS)
Figure 1: Wall Mount CO2 Transmitter with Display
These new CO2 transmitters are easy to install, offer a

full three year warranty, and require no maintenance or
field calibration.

Energy Savings from DCV
Offers potential for 10 to 70% energy savings
Strategies
Single-beam,
CARBOCAP
Dual-wavelength Design
CARBOCAP Silicon,
Micro-machined
Construction
Provides superior performance compared to

other technologies
Provides reliable CO2 measurement in room
environments
Offers five years of reliable calibration
Stable Infrared Reference
Compensates for light-source drift

Code No. LIT-216527
1
P roduct Overview
C alibration
This transmitter uses a completely new CO2 sensing

Johnson Controls CO2 transmitters are calibrated

using certified gases for the following:

and temperature. The monolithic Fabry-Perot
Interferometer (FPI) chip utilizes the optical,
mechanical, and electronic properties of silicon at the
same time.
The transmitter is factory set to measure CO2 levels up
to 2,000 ppm. It requires a Class 2, 24 VDC/VAC
power source and generates an output signal
proportional to the CO2 level detected. One simple wire
to a screw terminal and a jumper on the Printed Circuit
Board (PCB) combine to select the analog output
signal from the following options:
0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
0 to 10V (default)
IMPORTANT:
The CD-Wxx-00-0 transmitters

are intended to provide input to
device could lead to an abnormal
property, other devices, (limit or
safety controls) or systems
(alarm or supervisory) intended to
warn of, or protect against, failure
or malfunction of the device must
be incorporated into and
maintained as part of the
control system.
output signal (0 to 10V) proportional to CO2

altitude range of 0 to 1,969 ft (0 to 600m) above

relay output trigger point set at 1,000 ppm (in

models featuring the optional relay output)
CARBOCAP Technology
Johnson Controls is licensed to integrate the new
silicon-based CARBOCAP sensor into HVAC or
Building Automation Systems. Integrating this sensor
delivers several advantages: high accuracy, excellent
stability, negligible temperature dependence, and ease
of installation.
The structure of the diffusion-aspirated, single-beam,
software compensation patches are required, and the
device requires no maintenance.
V ersatile Transmitter
Designed for use with a standard U.S. wallbox or
mounting directly to a wallboard surface, the CO2
transmitter generates considerable savings in
installation, operation, and maintenance with no
recalibration costs. Johnson Controls includes a
Drywall Spring-clip Mounting Kit with each unit.
Johnson Controls CO2 transmitters, when used with
strategies), can generate energy savings ranging up to:
CD-Wxx-00-0 Series Wall Mount CO2 Transmitter Product Bulletin
D imensions
O ptional Features
See Figure 2 and Figure 3 for wall mount CO2

transmitter dimensions.
1.09
(27.69)
3.15 (80.00)
1.43
(36.32)
Analog Temperature Module

For applications requiring measurements and outputs
for both CO2 and temperature, order the CD-WA0-00-0
transmitter. This model includes an analog
temperature module that plugs into the main PCB and
has an active temperature output, linear from
0 to 10 VDC for 32 to 122F (0 to 50C).
Relay Module
4.27
(108.50)
Order the CD-WR0-00-0 transmitter for applications

where On/Off ventilation or fan control is required to
provide fresh air. This model includes a relay output
module that plugs into the main PCB offering a 30V,
0.5A Class 2 output with configurable On and Off trip
points. Default On is 1,000 ppm, and default Off is
950 ppm.
Figure 2: Cover Dimensions, in. (mm)
Note:
3.15 (80.00)
To redefine the relay On and Off trip points to

suit the application, use the ACC-CD-S Relay
Setpoint Software.
2.36 (60.00)
Relay and Display Module
3.26
(83.00)
Center
Hole
2.36
4.27
(60.00) (108.50)
For applications where the display of the measured

CO2 level and a relay output and relay On notification
are required, order the CD-WRD-00-0. This module
contains a relay and a digital display. The unit plugs
into the transmitter PCB. The display includes a 4-digit
display and a Light-Emitting Diode, which indicates
when the relay is On.
Note:
2.63 (66.70)

Setpoint Software.
Figure 3: Wall Mount Base Dimensions, in. (mm)
A ltitude Compensation
The CD-Wxx-00-0 Series is not field repairable.
These devices are intended for an altitude range of

0 to 1,969 ft (0 to 600m) without compensation. To
compensate for higher altitudes, see the
Johnson Controls installation instructions for this
device.
To order a replacement, refer to the Ordering

to order a CO2 transmitter, and specify the desired
for replacement parts and Table 3 for accessories for
the wall mount CO2 transmitter.
Table 1: CO2 Wall Mount Transmitters

Product Code Number
Description
CD-WA0-00-0
Transmitter with Analog Temperature Output
CD-WR0-00-0
Transmitter with Relay
CD-WRD-00-0
Transmitter with Relay and Display
Table 2: Replacement Parts for Wall Mount CO2 Transmitters

Product Code Number
Description
ACC-CD-A
Analog Temperature Module for CD-WA0-00-0 Only
ACC-DWCLIP-0
Drywall Spring-clip Mounting Kit
ACC-CD-DR
Replacement Relay and Display Module for CD-WRD-00-0 Only
ACC-CD-R
Relay Output Module for CD-WR0-00-0
Table 3: Accessory for Wall Mount CO2 Transmitters
Product Code Number
Description
ACC-CD-S
Relay Setpoint Software Kit; includes software and interface cable to reset the On
and Off relay setpoints for CD-WR0-00-0 or CD-WRD-00-0
Y65T31-0
Multiple Primary Transformer, 40 VA, 120/208/230V Primary, 24V Class 2

Secondary with Screw Terminals: Foot Mounting or 4 x4 in. (101.6 x 101.6 mm)
Plate
Notes
Notes
Notes
S pecifications
Product CD-Wxx-00-0 Series Wall Mount CO2 Transmitter
Measuring Range 0 to 2,000 ppm CO2
Accuracy at 68F (20C) <[30 ppm CO2 + 2.0% of reading] (includes manufacturing deviation and drift). All accuracy
specifications reflect testing the transmitters using high-grade, certified gases. Transmitters
are intended for an altitude range of 0 to 1,969 ft (0 to 600m) above sea level without
compensation. To compensate for higher altitudes, see the Johnson Controls installation
instructions for this device.
Non-Linearity <1.0% of Full Scale (FS)
Temperature <0.056% of Full Scale/F (<0.1% of Full Scale/C)
Long-Term Stability <5.0% of Full Scale/5 Years
Response Time (0 to 63%) 1 Minute
Operating Temperature 23 to 113F (-5 to 45C)
Range
Storage Temperature -4 to 158F (-20 to 70C)
Humidity Range 0 to 85% RH (non-condensing)
Transmitter Output Signals
CO2 Jumper Selectable: 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC (Default)
Maximum Output Current: 25 mA; Maximum Output Voltage: 12.5V
Analog Temperature Linear 0 to 10 VDC for 32 to 122F (0 to 50C)
Module (Optional)
Relay Output (Optional) Maximum 30V, 0.5A, Class 2
Resolution of CO2 Output 10 ppm (CD-WRD-00-0 only)
Recommended External Current Output:
Load Voltage Output:
Maximum 500 ohms Load Resistance

Minimum 1,000 ohms Load Resistance
Power Supply Range 20 to 30 VAC (18 to 30 VDC), Class 2

Power Consumption <2.5W Average, 4.1 VA
Warmup Time <5 Minutes for CO2 Measurement
<30 Minutes for Temperature Measurement
Housing Material ABS Plastic
Dimensions (H x W x D) 3-5/32 x 4-9/32 1-3/8 in. (80 x 108.5 x 35 mm)
Shipping Weight 3.5 oz (100g)
Agency Listings UL Listed, CCN XAPX (US) and XAPX7 (Canada); EMC Directive (CE Mark), 89/336/EEC;
FCC and DOC Compliant
Controls Group
P.O. Box 423
Milwaukee, WI 53201
Printed in U.S.A.

m9200s
whole
1922035
9thcc:2-20
Damper Actuators
Electric
Rev:
07/18/97
logo:
JCI
left ft:
elec
right ft:
standard
Sect# = 2
seQ# = 255
M9216 Series

M9216blk.tif
Features
Applications
available torques: 140 and 280 lbin (16 and

32 Nm) offer selection most suitable for the
application
M9216 actuators are designed to position air

dampers and valves in HVAC systems.
bidirectional, return-to-normal spring return

allows selectable rotation/spring return
direction simplifying installation
positioning of return air, exhaust, or outdoor

air dampers
extended temperature range meets the

needs of most outdoor air applications

VG7000 Series globe valves when used
with an M9000-5xx Valve Linkage
output position feedback provides simple,

sensing
M9216
electronic stall detection ensures higher

reliability by deactivating the actuator motor
when a stall condition is detected
The M9216 Series direct-mount, spring return

electric actuators operate on 24 VAC or VDC
power and are available for use with on/off,
floating, proportional, or resistive controllers.
These bidirectional actuators do not require a
damper linkage and are easily installed on a
damper with a round shaft up to 3/4 inch
(20 mm) in diameter or a square shaft up to
5/8 inch (16 mm). M9216 actuators may be
direct or remote mounted to a damper, or
mounted to a valve using one of the
M9000-5xx Valve Linkage Kits.
auto stroke calibration (GGx models)

reduces field installation time and cost due
to self adjustment
manual override allows manual positioning

when the actuator is not powered;
simplifies setup and field adjustments
NPT conduit adaptor (included) provides
easy connection for electrical fittings and
armored cable
These actuators use a DC motor with stall

detection circuitry that operates throughout
the entire stroke. The proportional and
resistive actuators employ noise-filtering
techniques on the control signal to eliminate
repositioning due to line noise.
Rotation is mechanically limited to 93 by
integral end-stops. The position of the
actuator is visually indicated from 0 to 90 on
the cover. An anti-rotation bracket prevents
lateral movement of the actuator. The damper
position may be set manually with the manual
override feature in the event of a power
failure.
Repair Parts
For more information, refer to the M9216

Series Electric Spring Return Actuators
Product Bulletin, LIT-2681068 or the M9216
Series Electric Spring Return Actuators
Installation Instructions, Part No. 34-636-461.
Replace the unit.
To Order
Accessories
See the Accessories chart on Page3.
M9216-AGE-2
M9216-BGA-2
M9216-BGC-2
(a)
(a)
(a)
Floating Control
VDC and mA Input with Zero and Span

Feedback
Tandem Operation

0 to 10 VDC
M9216-JGC-2
M9216-AGD-2
(a)
M9216-JGA-2
M9216-AGC-2
On/Off Control
M9216 Series Electric

Spring Return Actuator
140 lbin (16 Nm)
M9216-HGC-2
M9216-AGA-2
Selection Chart
M9216-HGA-2

selection chart.
M9216-GGC-2
A single M9216 model delivers up to 140 lbin

(16 Nm) of torque. Two BGx, GGx, or HGx
models in tandem deliver twice the torque or
280 lbin (32 Nm). The angle of rotation is
mechanically adjustable from 30 to 90.
Integral auxiliary switches are available to
indicate end-stop position or to perform
switching functions at any angle within the
selected rotation range. Position feedback is
available through switches, a potentiometer,
or a 0 (2) to 10 VDC signal.
zero and span adjustment (HGx models)

allows sequential operation of dampers
from a single input signal of 0 (2) to 10 VDC
or 0 (4) to 20 mA
Refer to the manufacturers information to

properly size the damper, valve,
and/or actuator.
M9216-GGA-2
Description
(a) May be used with 2-wire on/off control.

Note:
AGx, HGx, and JGx models have a 25-second delay upon startup.
Use two actuators with the same torque and control input for tandem operation.
1/3

m9200dim.eps
Dimensions, in./mm
Specifications

Power Requirements
Input Signal
Input Signal
Adjustments
Input Impedance
AGx, HGx, and JGx:

BGx:
GGx:
AGx:
BGx:
GGx and HGx:
JGx:
20 to 30 VAC at 50/60 Hz or 24 VDC 10%; 12 VA supply minimum, Class 2

20 to 30 VAC at 50/60 Hz or 24 VDC 10%; 10 VA supply minimum, Class 2
20 to 30 VAC at 50/60 Hz or 24 VDC 10%; 14 VA supply from 32 to 122F
(0 to 50C) or 18 VA supply from -22 to 32F (-30 to 0C), minimum, Class 2
24 VAC at 50/60 Hz or 24 VDC, 4.8 mA (on/off mode, 500 mA maximum)
24 VAC at 50/60 Hz or 24 VDC, 420 mA maximum
AGx Factory Setting:

Terminals 1 and 3, CW rotation; Terminals 1 and 4, CCW rotation
BGx Factory Setting:
Terminals 1 and 2, CW rotation
GGx (Voltage or Current Input):
Switch Selectable:
0 (2) to 10 VDC or 0 (4) to 20 mA
Factory Setting:
HGx (Voltage Input or Current Input):
Jumper Selectable, Fixed:
0 (2) to 10 VDC, or 0 (4) to 20 mA
Adjustable:
Zero, 0 to 6 V (0 to 12 mA); Span, 2 to 10 V (4 to 20 mA)
Factory Setting:
0 to 10 VDC, 0 to 20 mA, CW rotation with signal increase
GGx, HGx, and JGx:
Direction of action is user selectable Direct (CW) or Reverse (CCW) with signal increase.
GGx and HGx: Voltage Input, 200,000 ohms; Current Input, 500 ohms
JGx:
1.8 Megohms
AGD:
AGE:
GGx and HGx: 0 to 10 VDC or 2 to 10 VDC for 90 (10 VDC at 1 mA) Corresponds to input signal span selection and rotation limits.
JGx:
xGC:
Two SPDT(Single-Pole,Double-Throw)switches rated at 24 VAC 1.5 A inductive, 3.0 A resistive, 35 VA maximum per
switch, Class 2
Feedback Signal
Spring Return
Mechanical Output
Running Torque
Factory Setting: CCW; Direction is selectable with the coupler.

BGx, CGx, HGx: 140 lbin (16 Nm) for one unit
All Models:
280 lbin (32 Nm) for two units in tandem
Rotation Range
Adjustable from 30 to 90, CW or CCW, mechanically limited to 93

70 to 130 seconds for 0 to 140 lbin (0 to 16 Nm); 90 seconds nominal at 50% rated load (Powered rotation is faster in the spring return
direction than in the spring winding direction; power failed spring return is less than 15 seconds.)
Rotation Time
Cycles
65,000 full stroke cycles

GGx:
1/4 in. spade terminals with pluggable terminal blocks (See Accessories chart.)
All Other Models: Screw terminals for 22 to 14 AWG (Insert a maximum of two 18, 20, or 22 AWG per terminal.)
M9000-100:
One included with all models; two included with AGD, AGE, and xGC
Mechanical Connection 3/8 to 3/4 in. (10 to 20 mm) diameter round shaft or 3/8 to 5/8 in. (10 to 16 mm) square shaft
Enclosure
NEMA 2, IP42
Operating, GGx:
All Other Models: -4 to 122F (-20 to 50C); 0 to 95% RH, non-condensing
Storage, All Models: -40 to 186F (-40 to 86C); 0 to 95% RH, non-condensing
Dimensions (H x W x D) 9.82 x 4.57 x 3.62 in. (249.4 x 116.0 x 91.9 mm)
Ambient Conditions
Shipping Weight
Agency Compliance
6.4 lb (2.9 kg)

2/3


Accessories
Code Number
Description
DMPR-KR003 (a) Sleeve Pin Kit for Johnson Controls round dampers with a 5/16 in. (8 mm) diameter shaft
DMPR-KC003 (a) Blade Pin Extension without Bracket for Johnson Controls CD-1300 direct-mount applications
DMPR-KC254
M9000-100 (b)
M9000-103
Conduit Adaptor Kit
M9000-104
M9000-105

M9000-106
M9000-151 (c)
M9000-153
(c)
Base Mount Linkage Kit for remote inside duct mounting

Crank Arm Kit for remote mounting
M9000-154
M9000-158

Mounting Kit to tandem mount two each M9216 BGx, GGx, or HGx models on a damper
M9000-160
M9000-200
M9000-500
Valve Linkage Kit for mounting M9216 actuators to 1/2 and 3/4 in. 2-way or 3-way VG1000 Series ball valves, and 1 and 1-1/4 in.
2-way VG1000 Series ball valves
M9000-510
M9000-511
Valve Linkage Kit for field mounting M9216 actuators to 1 and 1-1/4 in. 3-way VG1000 Series ball valves

(b) Furnished with the actuator and may be ordered separately.
(c) Not intended for M9216 tandem applications.
3/3
Product Bulletin M9216

Issue Date 08/31/01

The M9216 Series direct-mount, spring return electric
actuators operate on 24 VAC or VDC power and are
available for use with on/off, floating, proportional, or
resistive controllers. These bidirectional actuators
do not require a damper linkage, and are easily
installed on a damper with a round shaft up to 3/4 in.
(19 mm) in diameter or a square shaft up to 5/8 in.
(16 mm). M9216 actuators may be direct or remote
mounted to a damper, or mounted to a valve using one
of the M9000-5xx Valve Linkage Kits.
A single M9216 model delivers up to 140 lbin (16 Nm)
of torque. Two BGx, GGx, or HGx models in tandem
deliver twice the torque or 280 lbin (32 Nm). The angle
of rotation is mechanically adjustable from 30 to 90.
Integral auxiliary switches are available to indicate
end-stop position or to perform switching functions at
any angle within the selected rotation range. Position
feedback is available through switches, a potentiometer,
or a 0 (2) to 10 VDC signal.
Figure 1: M9216 Series Actuator

Available Torques: 140 and
280 lbin (16 and 32 Nm)
Bidirectional, Return-toNormal Spring Return
Extended Temperature
Range
Offer selection most suitable for the

application
Allows selectable rotation/spring return
direction simplifying installation
Meets the needs of most outdoor air
applications
Provides simple, closed-loop control with

accurate position sensing
Ensures higher reliability by deactivating the

actuator motor when a stall condition is
detected
Auto Stroke Calibration
Reduces field installation time and cost due to

self adjustment
(GGx Models)
Zero and Span Adjustment

(HGx Models)
Allows sequential operation of dampers from a

single input signal of 0 (2) to 10 VDC or 0 (4)
to 20 mA
Manual Override
Allows manual positioning when the actuator

is not powered; simplifies setup and field
adjustments
NPT Conduit Adaptor
Provides easy connection for electrical fittings

and armored cable
(Included)
1
Application
Operation
IMPORTANT:
IMPORTANT:
The M9216 Series actuator is
an M9216 actuator could lead to an abnormal
devices (limit or safety controls) or systems (alarm or
failure or malfunction of an M9216 actuator must be
control system.
M9216 actuators are designed to position air dampers

and valves in Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning
(HVAC) systems. Applications include:
positioning return air, exhaust, or outdoor air

dampers

VG7000 Series globe valves when used with an
M9000-5xx Valve Linkage

24 VDC. They use a DC motor with stall detection
circuitry that operates throughout the entire stroke. The
proportional and resistive actuators employ
noise-filtering techniques on the control signal to
eliminate repositioning due to line noise. Mounting
two each M9216 (BGx, GGx or HGx) models in
tandem provides twice the amount of running torque as
a single unit.
Refer to the manufacturers information to properly size

the damper, valve, and/or actuator.

end-stops. The position of the actuator is visually
indicated from 0 to 90 on the cover. An anti-rotation
bracket prevents lateral movement of the actuator. The
damper position may be set manually with the manual
override feature in the event of a power failure.
Dimensions
See Figure 2 for actuator dimensions.
4.57
116
9.47
241
90
Shaft
Dimensions
0.37 to 0.63
9.4 to 16.0
60
30
30
60
90
6.34
161
0.15
3.8
0.37 to 0.8
9.4 to 20
Shaft
Dimensions
5 mm Hex
Manual Crank
0.35
9
1.97
50
1.83
46.5
3.47
88
2.15
54.6
5.75
146
7.32
Cover 186
Removal
1.88
48
2.13
54
3.13
79
4.88
124
Dimensions
1.52
38.7
Figure 2: Actuator, Anti-rotation Bracket, and Manual Crank Dimensions, in. (mm)
Table 1 or 2.
Table 1: Actuators
M9216 Series
Electric Spring
Return Actuator
140 lbin (16 Nm)
M9216-AGA-2
M9216-AGC-2
M9216-AGD-2
M9216-AGE-2
M9216-BGA-2
M9216-BGC-2
M9216-GGA-2
M9216-GGC-2
M9216-HGA-2
M9216-HGC-2
M9216-JGA-2
M9216-JGC-2

On/Off Control
* * * *

Floating Control

VDC and mA Input

with Zero and Span

Feedback

0 to 10 VDC

Tandem Operation
* May be used with 2-wire on/off control.
Notes: AGx, HGx, and JGx models have a 25-second delay upon
startup.
Use two actuators with the same torque and control input
for tandem operation.
Product Code
Number
Description
DMPR-KR003*
DMPR-KC003*
DMPR-KC254
Inside Frame Mounting Kit for Johnson Controls dampers that require the actuator within the airstream
M9000-100**
Conduit Adaptor Kit
M9000-103
M9000-104
M9000-105
M9000-106
M9000-150
Damper Mount Linkage Kit for remote inside duct mounting an M9108, M9116, M9124, or M9216 actuator
to a 3-blade or larger damper (not intended for a Johnson Controls damper)
M9000-151
Base Mount Linkage Kit for remote inside duct mounting (not intended for M9216 tandem applications)
M9000-153
Crank Arm Kit for remote mounting (not intended for M9216 tandem applications)
M9000-154
M9000-158
Mounting Kit for tandem mounting two each M9216 BGx, GGx, or HGx models on a damper
M9000-160
M9000-200
M9000-500
M9000-510
Valve Linkage Kit for mounting M9216 actuators to 1/2 and 3/4 in. 2-way or 3-way VG1000 Series ball
valves, and 1 and 1-1/4 in. 2-way VG1000 Series ball valves
M9000-511
Valve Linkage Kit for field mounting M9216 actuators to 1 and 1-1/4 in. 3-way VG1000 Series ball valves
* Furnished with the damper and may be ordered separately.

** Furnished with the actuator and may be ordered separately.
Technical Data
Product M9216 Series Electric Spring Return Actuators
Power Requirements AGx, HGx, JGx: 20 to 30 VAC at 50/60 Hz or 24 VDC 10%, 12 VA supply, Class 2
BGx:
20 to 30 VAC at 50/60 Hz or 24 VDC 10%, 10 VA supply, Class 2
GGx:
20 to 30 VAC at 50/60 Hz or 24 VDC 10%, 14 VA supply from 32 to 122F
(0 to 50C) or 18 VA supply from -22 to 32F (-30 to 0C), Class 2
Input Signal AGx:
24 VAC at 50/60 Hz or 24 VDC, 4.8 mA (on/off mode, 500 mA maximum)
BGx:
24 VAC at 50/60 Hz or 24 VDC, 420 mA maximum
GGx, HGx: 0 to 10 VDC or 0 to 20 mA
JGx:
Input Signal Adjustments AGx Factory Setting: Terminals 1 and 3, Clockwise (CW) rotation; Terminals 1 and 4,
Counterclockwise (CCW) rotation
BGx Factory Setting: Terminals 1 and 2, CW rotation
GGx (Voltage or Current Input):
Switch Selectable: 0 (2) to 10 VDC or 0 (4) to 20 mA
Factory Setting: 0 to 10 VDC, CW rotation with signal increase
HGx (Voltage Input or Current Input):
Jumper Selectable, Fixed: 0 (2) to 10 VDC or 0 (4) to 20 mA
Adjustable: Zero, 0 to 6 V (0 to 12 mA); Span, 2 to 10 V (4 to 20 mA)
Factory Setting: 0 to 10 VDC, 0 to 20 mA, CW rotation with signal increase
GGx, HGx, JGx: Direction of action is user selectable Direct (CW) or Reverse (CCW)
with signal increase.
Input Impedance GGx, HGx: Voltage Input, 200,000 ohms; Current Input, 500 ohms
JGx:
1.8 Megohms
Feedback Signal AGD:
AGE:
GGx, HGx: 0 to 10 VDC or 2 to 10 VDC for 90 (10 VDC at 1 mA)
Corresponds to input signal span selection and rotation limits.
JGx:
Auxiliary Switch Rating xGC:
Two SPDT (Single-Pole, Double-Throw) switches rated at 24 VAC,
1.5 A inductive, 3.0 A resistive, 35 VA maximum per switch, Class 2
Spring Return Factory Setting: CCW; Direction is selectable with the coupler.
Mechanical Output All Models:
140 lbin (16 Nm) for one unit
(Running Torque) BGx, GGx, HGx: 280 lbin (32 Nm) for two units in tandem
Rotation Range Adjustable from 30 to 90, CW or CCW, mechanically limited to 93
Rotation Time 70 to 130 seconds for 0 to 140 lbin (0 to 16 Nm); 90 seconds nominal at 50% rated load
(Powered rotation is faster in the spring return direction than in the spring winding direction;
power failed spring return is less than 15 seconds.)
Cycles 65,000 full stroke cycles
Electrical Connection GGx:
1/4 in. spade terminals with pluggable terminal blocks (See Table 2.)
All Other Models: Screw terminals for 22-14 AWG; maximum of two 18, 20, or 22 AWG each
M9000-100:
One included with all models; two included with AGD, AGE, and xGC
Mechanical Connection 3/8 to 3/4 in. (10 to 20 mm) diameter round shaft; 3/8 to 5/8 in. (10 to 16 mm) square shaft
Ambient Conditions Operating, GGx:
All Other Models: -4 to 122F (-20 to 50C); 0 to 95% RH, non-condensing
Storage, All Models: -40 to 186F (-40 to 86C); 0 to 95% RH, non-condensing
Dimensions (H x W x D) 9.82 x 4.57 x 3.62 in. (249.4 x 116.0 x 91.9 mm)
Controls Group
P.O. Box 423
Milwaukee, WI 53201
Printed in U.S.A.
Product Bulletin CD-Pxx-00-0

Issue Date 0601
CD-Pxx-00-0 Series Duct Mount CO2 Transmitter

Johnson Controls offers a full line of Carbon Dioxide
(CO2) transmitters for measuring and transmitting CO2
levels, ranging from 0 to 2,000 parts per million (ppm),
within Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning
(HVAC) applications. Specific HVAC CO2 applications
include: Demand Control Ventilation (DCV), fresh air
and Indoor Air Quality (IAQ), and rooftop air handling
Economizer controls systems.
These compact, duct-mounted devices output
0 to 10V, 0 to 20 mA, or 4 to 20 mA signals and feature
a relay output as an optional feature. They are
designed to work:
in standalone mode
connected to Metasys system or the AD-DME

series controllers

System (BAS)
Figure 1: Duct Mount Transmitter with Conduit

Adaptor and Mounting Flange
The new CO2 transmitters are easy to install, offer a

full three year warranty, and require no maintenance or
field calibration.

Energy Savings from DCV
Offers potential for 10 to 70% energy savings
Strategies
Single-beam,
CARBOCAP
Dual-wavelength Design
CARBOCAP Silicon,
Micro-machined
Construction
Provides superior performance compared to

other technologies
Provides reliable CO2 measurement in duct
environments
Offers five years of reliable calibration
Adjustable Duct Probe
Permits optimal placement of sensing tip in a

duct
Depth
Extended (Optional)
Offers relay output for fan control
Features

Code No. LIT-216525
1
P roduct Overview
This transmitter uses a completely new CO2 sensing
and temperature. The monolithic Fabry-Perot
Interferometer (FPI) chip utilizes the optical,
mechanical, and electronic properties of silicon at the
same time.
The transmitter is factory set to measure CO2 levels up
to 2,000 (ppm). It requires a Class 2, 24 VDC/VAC
power source and generates an output signal
proportional to the CO2 level detected. The
duct-mounted CO2 transmitter series offers:
standard CO2 transmitter
transmitter with relay output
IMPORTANT:
The CD-Pxx-00-0 transmitters

are intended to provide input to
device could lead to an abnormal
safety controls), or systems
(alarm or supervisory) intended to
warn of, or protect against, failure
or malfunction of the device must
be incorporated into and
system.
C alibration
Johnson Controls CO2 transmitters are calibrated
using certified gases for the following:
output signal (0 to 10V) proportional to CO2

altitude range of 0 to 1,969 ft (0 to 600m) above

relay output trigger point set for 1,000 ppm

(in models featuring the optional relay output)
CARBOCAP Technology
Johnson Controls is licensed to integrate the new,
silicon-based CARBOCAP CO2 sensor into HVAC or
Building Automation Systems. This sensor has several
advantages: high accuracy, excellent stability,
negligible temperature dependence, and ease of
installation.
The structure of the diffusion-aspirated, single-beam
software compensation patches are required.
P ackaging Innovation
Johnson Controls offers the industrys first duct-mount
package that is Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
Listed and requires no separate hardware. This
product includes a strain relief/conduit adapter for
connecting to standard 1/2 in. fittings. The
CARBOCAP sensor is not affected by typical airflow
rates encountered in ducts or rooftop air handlers.
The compact design of the device requires only a small
hole in the ventilation duct, which eliminates the
problems associated with leaking gaskets. The
enclosure reduces material and labor costs by offering
an integrated product; no pressurized boxes, pitot
pickups, or tubing and fittings are required.
E nergy Efficiency
Using the CO2 transmitter duct probe results in
considerable savings in installation, operation, and
maintenance costs with no recalibration expenses.
Johnson Controls CO2 transmitters, when used with
strategies), can generate energy savings ranging up to:
CD-Pxx-00-0 Series Duct Mount CO2 Transmitter Product Bulletin
D imensions
O ptional Feature
See Figure 2 and Figure 3 for CO2 transmitter and

mounting flange dimensions.
2.52 (64.00)
3.14 to 5.51 (80.00 to 140.00)
0.59
(15.00)
3.13
(79.38)
Relay Module
For applications where On/Off ventilation or fan control
is required to provide fresh air, order the CD-PR0-00-0
transmitter. This model includes a relay output module
that plugs into the main Printed Circuit Board (PCB)
offering a 30V, 0.5A Class 2 output with configurable
On and Off trip points. Default On is 1,000 ppm, and
default Off is 950 ppm.
Note:
1.50
(38.10)
Figure 2: Transmitter Dimensions, in. (mm)

Setpoint Software.

The device is not field repairable.
1.65 (42)
0.87 (22)
A ltitude Compensation
These devices are intended for an altitude range of
0 to 1,969 ft (0 to 600m) without compensation. To
compensate for higher altitudes, refer to the installation
instructions for this device.
1.65 (42)
Figure 3: Mounting Flange Dimensions, in. (mm)

to order a CO2 transmitter, and specify the desired
for replacement parts and Table 3 for accessories
available for the duct-mount CO2 transmitter.
Table 1: CO2 Transmitters

Product Code Number
Description
CD-P00-00-0
Duct Mount CO2 Transmitter
CD-PR0-00-0
Duct Mount CO2 Transmitter with Relay
Table 2: Replacement Parts for Duct Mount CO2 Transmitters

Product Code Number
Description
ACC-CD-R
Relay Output Module for use in CD-P00-00-0 or CD-PR0-00-0
ACC-CD-CFK1
Conduit Adaptor Kit
Table 3: Accessories for Duct Mount CO2 Transmitters
Product Code Number
Description
ACC-CD-S
Relay Setpoint Software Kit; includes software and interface cable to reset the On
and Off relay setpoints for CD-PR0-00-0
Y65T31-0
Multiple Primary Transformer, 40 VA, 120/208/230V Primary, 24V Class 2

Secondary with Screw Terminals: Foot Mounting or 4 x 4 in. (101.6 x 101.6 mm)
Plate
CD-Pxx-00-0 Series Wall Mount CO 2 Transmitter Product Bulletin
Notes
Notes
CD-Pxx-00-0 Series Duct Mount CO2 Transmitter Product/Technical Bulletin
Notes
S pecifications
Product CD-Pxx-00-0 Series Duct Mount CO2 Transmitter
Measuring Range 0 to 2,000 ppm CO2
Accuracy at 77F (25C) < (30 ppm CO2 + 2.0% of reading) (includes manufacturing deviation and drift). All
accuracy specifications reflect testing the transmitters using high-grade, certified gases.
Transmitters are intended for an altitude range of 0 to 1,969 ft (0 to 600m) above sea level
without compensation. To compensate for higher altitudes, see the Johnson Controls
installation instructions for this device.
Non-Linearity <0.5% of Full Scale
Temperature <0.056% of Full Scale/F (<0.1% of Full Scale/C)
Long-Term Stability <5.0% of Full Scale/5 Years
Response Time (0 to 63%) 1 Minute
Operating Temperature 23 to 113F (-5 to 45C)
Range
Storage Temperature -4 to 158F (-20 to 70C)
Range
Humidity Range 0 to 85% RH (non-condensing)
Transmitter Output Signals
CO2 Jumper Selectable: 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC (Default)
Maximum Output Current: 25 mA; Maximum Output Voltage: 12.5V
Relay Output (Optional) Maximum 30V, 0.5A, Class 2
Recommended External Current Output:
Load Voltage Output:
Maximum 500 ohms Load Resistance

Minimum 1,000 ohms Load Resistance
Power Supply Range 20 to 30 VAC (18 to 30 VDC), Class 2

Power Consumption <2.5W Average, 4.1 VA
Warmup Time <5 Minutes
Air Flow Range 0 to 7,500 ft/minute (0 to 2,286 m/minute)
Duct Probe Material Duct probe meets plenum rating requirements of UL 1995, Heating and Cooling Equipment.
Housing Material ABS Plastic
Dimensions (H x W x D) 3-1/8 x 3-3/16 x 8 in. (80 x 81 x 204 mm)
Shipping Weight 0.3 lb (140g)
Agency Listings UL Listed, CCN XAPX (US) and XAPX7 (Canada); EMC Directive (CE Mark), 89/336/EEC;
FCC and DOC Compliant
or misuse of its products
Controls Group
P.O. Box 423
Milwaukee, WI 53201
CD-Pxx-00-0 Series Duct Mount CO2 Transmitter Product/Technical Bulletin
Printed in U.S.A.
APC-TMS 2000 series electronic thermostat

Installation and Operation Manual
YORK APC-TMS 2100 series electronic thermostat
Model
APC-TMS 2100 * *
***
are used to control fan coil unit (with or without motorized

valve) to maintain the room temperature in residential,
industrial and business premises. Through the keypad
user can freely choose from heating, cooling or fan
modes. The exterior is aesthetic by slim body with large
LCD display.
F without motorized valve

DAwith motorized valve; valve is
off and fan runs at low speed
when
temperature
is
satisfied.
DBwith motorized valve; valve
and fan are off when
temperature is satisfied
T clock function: time switch
Display
l
l
Button
start-stop;
blank
without this function
On / Off
Timer
Mode (M)
Room temperature
Fan speed (
(RT)
Temperature
adjustment (5 6)
Mode
Fan speed (
)
Set point
means
Rremote control function: blank

means without this function
(remote controller is optional)
()
L backlight function: blank

means
without
this
function
Temperature (SET)
Basic Functions
Enhanced Functions (Optional)
. room temperature setting
. Clock function (T)
. room temperature display
. On / off timer (T)
. 3 fan speed changing manually
. Sleep mode (T)
or automatically
.low
room
. infra-red remote control (R)

temperature
. blue backlight (L)
protection
. temperature calibration
Specification
Set point range
: 5 35
Sensor type
: NTC thermistor
Temperature accuracy
: 1
Button
: Touch
Load
: < 200 W
Voltage
: 50HzAC220V 10
Rated power
:<2W
Dimensions
: 86 86 13 mm
Display
: LCD
Fixing screw width
: 60 mm (standard)
Asia Parts Center

No. 1390 Xikang Road, Shanghai 200060, China
Tel: +86 (21) 6276 6509
Fax: +86 (21) 6277 0608
1/1
PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

Mounting
Wiring Diagrams
220V AC 50Hz
220V AC 50Hz
APC-TMS 2100F
N L
APC-TMS 2100DA/DB
N L
Valve
Low
Low
Motor
Med
Med
High
High
Motor
Operation
? On / Off
Press
? Set point:
Press 6 to reduce temperature, press 5 to raise it.
? Cooling mode
to turn on, press again to turn off.
Press M till to display
and flash, confirmed after 5 seconds.
? Heating mode
and flash, confirmed after 5 seconds.
? Fan mode
and flash, confirmed after 5 seconds. In this mode,
the valve closed and the fan motor turns on, the speed of fan is determined by
the selection of fan speed.
? Fan speed
Press
to select the fan speed as
High
Med
Low
Auto. In auto mode, the speed is low when the temperature difference
exceeds 1 . The speed is medium and high when the temperature difference
exceeds 2 and 3 respectively.
Asia Parts Center

Tel: +86 (21) 6276 6509
Fax: +86 (21) 6277 0608
2/2

? Low temperature
Turn off the thermostat, press M and keep over 3 seconds, it will display 00
protection
or 01 , then press 5 or 6 to adjust. 00 means low temperature protection

disable, 01 means its enable. The default is 00. When the thermostat turns
off and the room temperature drops below 5, it will be turned on in heat mode
automatically. Fan motor runs in high speed and motorized valve is opened for
APC-TMS 2100D. For APC-TMS 2100F, fan motor runs in high speed only.
? Temperature
When the temperature turns off, press M or for 3 second. Then, it
calibration
displays XX (RT models do not display), press 5 or 6 to adjust

the temperature to right value. It will be confirmed after 5 seconds or press
to turn off to confirm.
APC-TMS 2100XX-TXX model clock and timer functions:

? Clock function:
Press until hh:mm and mm flash, then press 5 or
6 to adjust
minute; Press until hh:mm and hh flash, then press 5 or 6 to adjust

hour.
? Sleep mode
? Timer on
Press until flash. Press 5 to confirm or press 6 to cancel.

Press until TIMER ON and mm flash, press 5 or 6 to adjust
minute. Press until hh flash, press 5 or 6 to adjust hour.
? Timer off
Press until TIMER OFF and mm flash, press 5 or 6 to adjust

minute. Press until hh flash, press 5 or 6 to adjust hour.
? Timer on
canceling
? Timer off
canceling
Press until TIMER
ON
and mm flash, press 5 or 6 to adjust
minute to 00. Press and hh flash, press 5 or 6 to adjust hour to 00.

Press until TIMER OFF and mm flash, press 5 or 6 to adjust
minute to 00. Press and hh flash, press 5 or 6 to adjust hour to 00.
Asia Parts Center

Tel: +86 (21) 6276 6509
Fax: +86 (21) 6277 0608
3/3

YORK APC-TMS 2000 series electronic thermostat adopts

digital control technology. The exterior is aesthetic by slim body
with large LCD display. Through the keypad user can freely
choose from heating, cooling or fan modes.
Button
Display:
,
Mode (
or
Fan speed ( ,
Room temperature (RT)
Set point temperature (SET)
or
On / Off
Mode
Fan speed
Temperature
)
)
adjustment (5 6)
Model
APC-TMS 2000F
APC-TMS 2000DA
APC-TMS 2000DB
: without motorized valve.

: with motorized valve; valve is off and fan runs at low speed when temperature
is satisfied.
: with motorized valve; valve and fan are off when temperature is satisfied.
Specification
Set point range
: 535
Sensor type
: NTC thermistor
Temperature accuracy
: 1
Button
: Touch
Rated current
: < 200 W
Voltage
: 50HzAC220V 10
Rated power
: < 2W
Dimension
: 86 86 13 mm
Display
: LCD
Fixing Screw Width
: 60 mm (standard)
Operation
? On / Off
Press
? Set point:
Press 6 to reduce temperature, press 5 to raise it.
? Mode
Press
to turn on, press again to turn off.
to change mode as
(cooling),
LCD display.
Asia Parts Center

Tel: +86 (21) 6276 6509
Fax: +86 (21) 6277 0608
4/4
(heating) and
(fan) on

? Fan speed
Press
to select the fan speed as
High
Med Low
Auto. In auto mode, the speed is low when the temperature difference
exceeds 1 . The speed is medium and high when the temperature difference
exceeds 2 and 3 respectively.
? Low temperature
protection
Turn off the thermostat, press
and 5 and keep over 3 seconds, it will
display 00 or 01, then press 5 or 6 to adjust. 00 means low temperature

protection disable. 01 means its enable. The default is 00. When the
thermostat turns off and the room temperature drops below 5, it will be turned
on in heat mode automatically. Fan motor runs in high speed and motorized valve
is opened for APC-TMS 2000D. For APC-TMS 2000F, fan motor runs in high
speed only.
? Temperature
When the temperature turns off, press 5 and 6 for 3 second. Then, it
calibration
displays XX , press 5 or 6 to adjust the temperature to right value. It

will be confirmed after 5 seconds.
Wiring Diagrams
220V AC 50Hz
220V AC 50Hz
APC-TMS 2000F
N L
APC-TMS 2000DA/DB
N L
Valve
Low
Low
Med
Motor
Med
High
High
Mounting
Asia Parts Center

Tel: +86 (21) 6276 6509
Fax: +86 (21) 6277 0608
5/5
Motor
CSD Series Current Devices

Product Bulletin
Issued April 30, 2008
Supersedes June 14, 2007
Application
The Current Switch Device (CSD) Series of digital
output current switches are nonintrusive devices
designed to detect current flowing through a cable or
wire. A cost effective solution for monitoring on and off
status or proof of operation, these units are ideal for
monitoring very small current loads on motors driving
fans, blowers, pumps, heating coils, and lighting.
The CSD models with command relays not only
monitor the current flowing through the cable but also
facilitate the starting and stopping of the motor.
These units also provide a universal solid state output
and do not require a power supply. Completely
self-powered, these units draw their power from current
induced from the cable or line being monitored.
CSD Series Current Devices are available in the
following types:
solid core, setpoint fixed
solid core, setpoint adjustable
solid core with command relay, setpoint adjustable
split core, setpoint fixed
split core, setpoint adjustable
split core with command relay, setpoint fixed
split core with command relay, setpoint adjustable
Figure 1: CSD Current Switch

Features
Benefits
Dual Function
Monitors current and motor start and stop.
100% Solid State Output
Has no moving parts to fail.
Polarity Insensitive Output
Provides easier wiring.
Snap-in Mounting Bracket
Simplifies installation .
Small Size
Fits in tight enclosures.
CSD Series Current Devices Product Bulletin
Product Overview
IMPORTANT: The Current Switch Device (CSD)
Series Current Devices are intended to provide an
input to equipment under normal operating
conditions. Where failure or malfunction of the CSD
devices, such as supervisory or alarm systems or
safety or limit controls, intended to warn of or protect
against failure or malfunction of the CSD.
CSD-SA1E1-1 (solid core with command relay)
Multi-turn potentiometer adjust setpoint for

application
Adjustable setpoint wide range from

1.00 to 135 A
Relay SPST, NO,10 A @ 260 V AC,

5 A @ 30 V DC
Actuation coil 20-30 V AC/DC
Two status LEDs provide visual indication of off

and on status
CSD-CA1G0-1 (split core)
Fixed Setpoint Models

CSD-SF0C0-1 (solid core)
Setpoint fixed at 0.25 A
Current range 0.25 to 200 A
CSD-CF0A0-1 (split core)
CSD-CF0J0-1 (split core)
CSD-CF0J1-1 (split core with command relay)
Multi-turn potentiometers adjust setpoint for

application

and on status

1.25 to 135 A
CSD-CA1G1-1 (split core with command relay)
Multi-turn potentiometers adjust setpoint for

application

1.25 to 135 A
Relay SPST, NO, 10 A @ 260 V AC,

5 A @ 30 V DC
Relay Single Pole, Single Throw (SPST), Normally

Open (NO), 10 A @ 260 V AC, 5 A @ 30 V DC

and on status
Adjustable Setpoint Models:

CSD-SA1E0-1 (solid core)
Multi-turn potentiometer adjust setpoint for

application

1.00 to 135 A
Two status Light-Emitting Diodes (LEDs)

provide visual indication of off and on status
To order a CSD Series current switch, contact the
nearest Johnson Controls representative. Specify the
desired product code number from Table 2.
Table 2: Product Ordering

Code Number
Core Type
Setpoint
Threshold
LED Display
Low Setpoint
(Amperes)
Output Relay
CSD-SF0C0-1
Solid
Fixed
No
0.25
No
CSD-SA1E0-1
Solid
Adjustable
Yes
1.00
No
CSD-SA1E1-1
Solid
Adjustable
Yes
1.00
SPST, NO, 10 A @ 260 V AC,

5 A @ 30 V DC
CSD-CF0A0-1
Clamp/Split
Fixed
No
0.15
No
CSD-CF0J0-1
Clamp/Split
Fixed
No
1.5
No
CSD-CA1G0-1
Clamp/Split
Adjustable
Yes
1.25
No
CSD-CF0J1-1
Clamp/Split
Fixed
No
1.5
SPST, NO, 10 A @ 260 V AC,

5 A @ 30 V DC
CSD-CA1G1-1
Clamp/Split
Adjustable
Yes
1.25
SPST, NO, 10 A @ 260 V AC,

5 A @ 30 V DC
Repair Information
If the CSD Series current switch fails to operate within
its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement
CSD, contact the nearest Johnson Controls
representative.
CSD X
X 1
Core Type
S = Solid
C = Clamp/Split
Output Relay
0 = No Relay
Setpoint
Threshold
A = Adjustable
F = Fixed
1 = SPST, NO, 250 VAC-10A / VDC-5A
Low Setpoint
LED Display
0 = None
A = 0.15A
C = 0.25A
1 = LED
E = 1.00A
G = 1.25A
J = 1.5A
Figure 2: Ordering Template
Solid Core Models
CSD-SF0C0-1
CSD-SA1E0-1
CSD-SA1E1-1
Amperage Range
0.25-200 A
1.00-135 A
1.00-135 A
Switch Setpoint
Fixed
Adjustable
Adjustable
Output Relay
No
No
SPST, NO, 10 A @ 260 V AC,

5 A @ 30 V DC
Actuation Coil
No
No
20-30 V AC/DC
Switch LED Indication
No
Yes
Yes
Relay LED Indication
No
No
Yes
Trip Setpoint Value
0.25 A
1.00 A
1.00-135 A
Current Switching Mode
Under current sensing
Over/Under current sensing
Over/Under current sensing
Sensor Supply Voltage
Induced from power conductor cable.
Wire Size
Status Output
Switch normally open.
Switch Load Capacity
1 A @ 30 V AC/42 V DC max.
Isolation Voltage
600 AC rms
Temperature Range
5 to 140F (-15 to 60C)
Frequency Range
50/60 Hz
Humidity Range
0-95% noncondensing
Dimensions
2.54 x 1.85 x 0.98 in. (65 x 47 x 25 mm)
Aperture (Sensing Hole)

Size
0.71 in. Dia. (18 mm Dia.)
2.54 x 2.56 x 1.56 in.

(65 x 65 x 40 mm)
Compliance
United States
UL Listed, File E310692, CCN NRNT, Under UL 508, Industrial Control Equipment
Canada
UL Listed, File E310692, CCN NRNT7, Under CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 14-M91
Industrial Control Equipment
Europe
CE Mark, Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC and the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC
Shipping Weight
.35 lb (.16 kg)
Split Core Models

CSD-CF0A0-1/
CSD-CF0J0-1
CSD-CA1G0-1
CSD-CF0J1-1
CSD-CA1G1-1
Amperage Range
0.15-200 A/
1.5-200 A
1.25-135 A
1.5-200 A
1.25-135 A
Switch Setpoint
Fixed
Adjustable
Fixed
Adjustable
Output Relay
No
No
SPST, NO, 10 A @ 260

V AC, 5 A @ 30 V DC
SPST, NO, 10 A @
260 V AC, 5 A @ 30 V
DC
Actuation Coil
No
No
20-30 V AC/DC
20-30 V AC/DC
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Trip Setpoint Value
0.15 A/1.5 A
1.25-135 A A
1.5 A
1.25-135 A
Under current
sensing
Over/Under current
sensing
Over/Under current
sensing
Wire Size
Status Output
Switch normally open
1 A @ 30 V AC/42 V DC max.
Isolation Voltage
600 AC rms
Temperature Range
5 to 140F (-15 to 60C)
Frequency Range
50/60 Hz
Humidity Range
0-95% noncondensing
Dimension
2.7 x 2.56 x 1.06 in. (69 x 65 x 27 mm)
Aperture (Sensing Hole)

Size
0.72 x 0.78 in. Dia. (18 x 20 mm Dia.)
2.7 x 2.56 x 1.73 in. (69 x 65 x 44 mm)
Compliance
United States
Canada
Europe
Shipping Weight
.35 lb (.16 kg)
The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For application of conditions beyond these
specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office. Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from
Building Efficiency

Published in U.S.A.
5

Issued April 30, 2008
CSD Series Current Devices

Description
Fixed Setpoint Models
The Current Switch Device (CSD) Series of

digital output current switches are
non-intrusive devices designed to detect
current flowing through a cable or wire. A
cost-effective solution for monitoring on and
off status or proof of operation, these units are
ideal for monitoring very small current loads
on motors driving fans, blowers, pumps,
heating coils, and lighting.
CSD-SF0C0-1 (solid core)
The CSD models with command relays not

only monitor the current flowing through the
cable but also facilitate the start and stopping
of the motor.
These units also provide a universal
solid-state output and do not require a power
supply. Completely self-powered, these units
draw their power from current induced from
the cable or line being monitored.
CSD Series Current Devices are available in
the following types:
solid core, setpoint fixed

solid core, setpoint adjustable
solid core with command relay,
setpoint adjustable
split core, setpoint fixed
split core, setpoint adjustable
split core with command relay,
setpoint fixed
split core with command relay,
setpoint adjustable
Refer to the CSD Series Current Devices
Features
dual function monitors current and motor

start and stop
100% solid-state output has no moving
parts to fail
polarity insensitive output provides
easier wiring
snap-in mounting bracket simplifies
installation
small size fits in tight enclosures

CSD-CF0A0-1 (split core)
CSD-CF0J0-1 (split core)
CSD-CF0J1-1 (split core with command relay)
Relay Single Pole, Single Throw (SPST),

Normally Open (NO), 10 A @ 260 V AC,
5A @ 30 V DC
Adjustable Setpoint Models
CSD-SA1E0-1 (solid core)
Multi-turn potentiometer adjust setpoint

for application
1.0 to 135 A
Two status Light-Emitting Diodes (LEDs)
provide visual indication of off and on
status
CSD-SA1E1-1 (solid core with command
relay)
Multi-turn potentiometer adjust setpoint

for application
1.00 to 135 A
5 A @ 30 V DC
Two Status LEDs provide visual
indication of off and on status
CSD-CA1G0-1 (split core)
CSD Series Current Device

CSD-CA1G1-1 (split core with command
relay)
Multi-turn potentiometers adjust setpoint

for application
1.25 to 135 A
5 A @ 30 V DC
Two status LEDs provide visual
Repair Information
If the CSD Series current device fails to
unit. For a replacement CSD, contact the
Multi-turn potentiometers adjust setpoint

for application
Two status LEDs provide visual
Adjustable setpoint wide range from 1.25
to 135 A
Selection Chart
Code Number
Core Type
Setpoint
Threshold
LED Display
Low Setpoint
(Amperes)
Output Relay
CSD-SF0C0-1
Solid
Fixed
No
0.25
No
CSD-SA1E0-1
Solid
Adjustable
Yes
1.00
No
CSD-SA1E1-1
Solid
Adjustable
Yes
1.00
SPST, NO, 10 A @ 260 V AC, 5 A @ 30 V DC
CSD-CF0A0-1
Clamp/Split
Fixed
No
0.15
No
CSD-CF0J0-1
Clamp/Split
Fixed
No
1.5
No
CSD-CA1G0-1
Clamp/Split
Adjustable
Yes
1.25
No
CSD-CF0J1-1
Clamp/Split
Fixed
No
1.5
SPST, NO, 10 A @ 260 V AC, 5 A @ 30 V DC
CSD-CA1G1-1
Clamp/Split
Adjustable
Yes
1.25
SPST, NO, 10 A @ 260 V AC, 5 A @ 30 V DC
1 of 2
CSD Series Current Devices (Continued)

Solid Core Models
CSD-SF0C0-1
CSD-SA1E0-1
Amperage Range
0.25-200 A
1.00-135 A
CSD-SA1E1-1
1.00-135 A
Switch Setpoint
Fixed
Adjustable
Adjustable
Output Relay
No
No
SPST, NO, 10 A @ 260 V AC, 5 A @ 30 V DC
Actuation Coil
No
No
20-30 V AC/DC
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Trip Setpoint Value
0.25 A
1.00-135 A
1.00-135 A
Over/under current sensing
Wire Size
Status Output
1 A @ 30 V AC/42 V DC max.
Isolation Voltage
600 AC rms
Temperature Range
5 to 140F (-15 to 60C)
Frequency Range
50/60 Hz
Humidity Range
0-95% noncondensing
Dimensions
2.54 x 1.85 x 0.98 in. (65 x 47 x 25 mm)
Aperture (Sensing Hole) Size
0.71 in. Dia. (18 mm Dia.)
2.54 x 2.56 x 1.56 in. (65 x 65 x 40 mm)
Compliance
United States
Canada
Europe
Shipping Weight
.35 lb (.16 kg)
Split Core Models

CSD-CF0A0-1/CSD-CF0J0-1
CSD-CA1G0-1
CSD-CF0J1-1
CSD-CA1G1-1
Amperage Range
0.15-200 A/1.5-200 A
1.25-135 A
1.5-200 A
1.25-135 A
Switch Setpoint
Fixed
Adjustable
Fixed
Adjustable
Output Relay
No
No
SPST, NO 10 A @ 260 V AC,

5 A @ 30 V DC
SPST, NO, 10 A @ 260 V AC,

5 A @ 30 V DC
Actuation Coil
No
No
20-30 V AC/DC
20-30 V AC/DC
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Trip Setpoint Value
0.15 A/1.5 A
1.25-135 A
1.5 A
1.25-135 A
Current Switching Mode Under current sensing

Wire Size
Status Output
1 A @ 30 V AC/42 V DC max.
Isolation Voltage
600 AC rms.
Temperature Range
5 to 140F (-15 to 60C)
Frequency Range
50/60 Hz
Humidity Range
0-95% noncondensing
Dimensions
2.7 x 2.56 x 1.06 in. (69 x 65 x 27)
2.7 x 2.56 x 1.73 in. (69 x 65 x 44 mm)
Aperture (Sensing Hole) 0.72 x 0.78 in. (18 x 20 mm)

Size
Compliance
United States
Canada
UL Listed, File E310692, CCN NRNT7, Under CAN/CSA C22.2 No.14-M91

Europe
Shipping Weight
.35 lb (.16 kg)
2 of 2
Proposta nr. 04804/08

e-mail a.moreira@simplestecnologia.com.br
Empresa: SIMPLES TECNOLOGIA
Departamento: ADM
Tel: 8889 2281
Data: 15/04/08
Ateno: SR. ANTONIO
De: LOURDES PEREIRA Total folhas: 03
Conforme solicitao de V.Sas., seguem preos lquidos e demais condies de fornecimento.
ITEM
01
QTDE
03 P
DISCRIMINAO
V.UNITRIO
CORTINA DE AR
MODELO CAT 2000
MOTOR: 1/6 CV 6 POLOS MONOFSICO.
R$ 1.400,00
CONFORME CATLOGO
Condies Gerais:
IPI: ISENTO
ICMS INCLUSO ( 19% )
Prazo de entrega: 10/15 DIAS
Condies de Pagamento: 50% DE SINAL COM O PEDIDO E SALDO CONTRA ENTREGA
Validade da proposta: 10 DIAS
Frete: FOB NOSSA FABRICA RIO DE JANEIRO
Sem mais para o momento estamos ao inteiro dispor para quaisquer esclarecimentos e/ou negociao que se faa
necessrio.
Atenciosamente,
LOURDES PEREIRA
IR INTERCLIMA REFRIGERAO LTDA

Ar Condicionado . Ventilao . Refrigerao
TEL.: 3837 2200 - 3837 2276
e-mail vendas@interclimarefrigeracao.com.br

cdpxx000s
1900157
9thcc:na
Rev:
08/23/01
logo:
CD-Pxx-00-0 Series
left ft:

cdpxx_cat photo1.jpg
Description
Johnson Controls offers a complete line of
carbon dioxide (CO2) modules that measure
and transmit CO2 levels ranging from 0 to
2,000 parts per million [ppm]. This compact
device offers a choice o f 0to 10 V or
0 to 20 mA output signals and features an
optional relay output with or without a digital
display. Johnson Controls CO2 transmitters
are easy to install and to operate.
right ft:
standard
Sect# = 0
seQ# = 1
The silicon-based CARBOCAP sensor

delivers high accuracy and long-term
measurement stability (100 ppm) over a fiveyear period without calibration. The diffusionaspirated, single-beam, dual-wavelength
sensor structure is remarkably simple. It
consists of an infrared (IR) source, a sample
cell, an IR detector, and a tunable interference
filter that enables measurements at two
wavelengths. Reference measurements
made using a tunable interference filter
eliminate the typical weakness of dual-beam
sensors and permits shifting the optical pass
band electronically. This innovative design
provides precise reference readings that
eliminate the typically broad deviation
expected from a traditional CO2 sensor.
CO2 transmitters with DCV strategies

offer a potential for 10 to 70% energy
savings
single-beam, dual-wavelength design
provides superior performance
compared to other technologies
silicon, micro-machined construction
provides reliable CO2 measurement in
harsh environments
Applications
The new CO2 transmitters are easy to
install, offer a full three-year warranty, and
require no maintenance or field calibration.
Use them
in standalone mode
in support of Demand Control
Ventilation (DCV)
Features
stable infrared reference compensates for
light-source drift
with fresh air and Indoor Air Quality

(IAQ) systems
Specifications
with rooftop air handling Economizer

controls systems
CD-Pxx-00-0 Series Duct Mount CO2 Transmitter

Measuring Range
<(30 ppm CO2 + 2.0% of reading) (includes manufacturing

deviation and drift). All accuracy specifications reflect testing
the transmitters using high-grade, certified gases.
Accuracy at 77F (25C) Transmitters are intended for an altitude range of 0 to 1,969
ft (0 to 600m) above sea level without compensation. To
compensate for higher altitudes, see the Johnson Controls
installation instructions for this device.
Non-Linearity
Long-Term Stability
Response Time
(0 to 63%)
Storage Temperature
Range
connected to Metasys system or the

AD-DME series
0 to 2,000 ppm CO2
<0.5% of Full Scale
To Order
Specify the code number in the following selection chart.
Selection Chart
Code Number
<0.056% of Full Scale/F (<0.1% of Full Scale/C)

1 Minute
Description
CD-P00-00-0
CD-PR0-00-0
Duct Mount CO2 Transmitter with Relay
Accessories
23 to 113F (-5 to 45C)
Code
Number
Description
ACC-CD-S
Relay Setpoint Software Kit; includes software and

interface cable to reset the On and Off relay setpoints
for CD-PR0-00-0
Y65T31-0
Multiple Primary Transformer, 40 VA, 120/208/230 V

Primary, 24 V Class 2 Secondary with Screw
Terminals: Foot Mounting or 4 x 4 in.
(101.6 x 101.6 mm) Plate
-4 to 158F (-20 to 70C)
Humidity Range
0 to 85% RH (non-condensing)
CO2: Jumper Selectable: 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA or
0 to 10 VDC (Default); Maximum Output Current: 25 mA;
Transmitter Output SigMaximum Output Voltage: 12.5 V
nal
Relay Output (Optional): Maximum 30 V, 0.5 A, Class 2

Power Supply Range

Power Consumption

<2.5 W Average, 4.1 VA
Repair Parts
Code Number
Warmup Time
Air Flow Range
<5 Minutes
0 to 7,500 ft/minute (0 to 2,286 m/minute)
Duct Probe Material
Duct probe meets plenum rating requirements of UL 1995,

Heating and Cooling Equipment.
Description
ACC-CD-R
Relay Output Module for use in CD-PR0-00-0
ACC-CD-CFK1
Conduit Adaptor Kit
Housing Material
ABS Plastic
Dimensions (H x W x D) 3-1/8 x 3-3/16 x 8 in. (80 x 81 x 204 mm)
Agency Listings
UL Listed, CCN XAPX (US) and XAPX7 (Canada); EMC

Directive (CE Mark), 89/336/EEC; FCC and DOC Compliant
1/2

CD-Pxx-00-0 Series Duct Mount CO2 Transmitter (Continued)

cdpxx_cat 2.eps
cdpxx_cat 3.eps
2.52 (64.00)
1.65 (42)
0.87 (22)
3.14 to 5.51 (80.00 to 140.00)
0.59
(15.00)
3.13
(79.38)
1.65 (42)
*This dimension is approximate; it varies

1.50
(38.10)
with the number of turns used to tighten

the connector to the case.
Transmitter Dimensions, in. (mm)
Mounting Flange Dimensions, in. (mm)
2/2
ONDE O FUTURO SE FAZ NO PRESENTE
Proposta n: 154-B/11
Rio de Janeiro, 26 de agosto de 2011.
Leader Barra - Loja 027

At: Sr. Fernando Pedroso
e-mail: manutencao@leader.com.br
Prezados,
Com satisfao enviamos nossa melhor proposta-tcnica comercial
para fornecimento de mo-de-obra especializada, materiais
objetivando a correo operacional do Chiller Carrier mod. 30
RBA 150.
Atenciosamente,
Eledilson Nogueira
Oramentista
(21)2580-4944
e-mail:marcello@tecnitest.com.br
WWW.TECNITEST.COM.BR
TECNITEST Ltda
CNPJ:36.240.596/0001-44
Rua Prof Ester de Mello 198 | Benfica

CEP 20930-010 - Rio de Janeiro RJ
tel.: 0xx21 2580-4944

fax: 0xx21 2580-4944
http://www.tecnitest.com.br
tecnitest@tecnitest.com.br
SUMRIO:
ESCOPO TCNICO ...................................................... 3

1.0 OBJETIVO ............................................................ 3
2.0 DESCRIO DOS SERVIOS ........................... 3
3.0 INCIO DOS SERVIOS. ..................................... 5
4.0 PRAZO DE EXECUO ..................................... 5
5.0 GARANTIA DOS SERVIOS ............................... 5
6.0 SERVIOS COMPLEMENTARES CARGO DO
CLIENTE ..................................................................... 5
ESCOPO COMERCIAL ................................................ 6
1.0 PREO ................................................................. 6
2.0 CONDIES DE PAGAMENTO .......................... 6
3.0 VALIDADE ............................................................ 6
TECNITEST Ltda
CNPJ:36.240.596/0001-44

tel.: 0xx21 2580-4944

fax: 0xx21 2580-4944
ESCOPO TCNICO
1.0 ) OBJETIVO
O objetivo desta proposta o fornecimento de materiais e mo-deobra especializada para correo operacional do Chiller Carrier 30
RBA 150TR.
2.0 ) DESCRIO DOS SERVIOS

A - DESCRIO DOS SERVIOS:
Abaixo seguem no conformidades do chiller Carrier 30RBA150226 n
4606B39791:
- Foi verificado que a contatora do compressor B2 est com a base do contato
fixo danificada por aquecimento, foi retirada a contatora do compressor B3 e
instalada para o B2 e realizado teste de funcionamento do mesmo:
Temperatura da descarga 67C temperatura da suco 12,6C amperagem: R:
74A S: 91A T: 86A, nvel de leo OK.
Fornecimento e substituio do jogo de contatos para contatora fabricante
ABB modelo A110-30 bobina 24 volts. Em comparao com a amperagem do
B1 (66, 82, e 76 A) a do B2 est maior . Aps a substituio do jogo de
contatos verificar o funcionamento do mesmo e medir o valor da resistncia de
isolamento aps uma hora em funcionamento. A medio que foi realizada
acusou uma resistncia de 15M, mas havia presena de umidade na rea
dos bornes devido a condensao no compressor.
- Fornecimento e substituio dos jogos de contato das contatoras dos
compressores A2 e B1 que so do mesmo faricante e modelo do B2.
- Fornecimento e substituio da contatora que foi retirada do circuito do B2,
fabricante ABB modelo:A110-30 bobina 24 volts e instal-la para o compressor
B3.
- Fornecimento e substituio do compressor B3 que apresenta curto dos
enrolamentos do motor para a carcaa do mesmo.
Obs.: O mesmo deve ser trocado com urgncia, pode estar contaminando o
circuito B j que o gs e o leo circulam pelo carter do mesmo com a operao
dos compressores B1 e B2.
TECNITEST Ltda
CNPJ:36.240.596/0001-44

tel.: 0xx21 2580-4944

fax: 0xx21 2580-4944
- Fornecimento e substituio da chave de fluxo eltronica (est sem a

mesma) e com "jump" na fiao.
- Reposio com instalao dos fusveis NH tamanho 00gG 125 A para

complementao dos compressores B2 e B3 e deixar pelo menos trs de
reserva no quadro eltrico: no total so 7 fusveis.
-Fornecimento e substituio dos fusveis do comando das placas dos
compressores: so 8 fusveis de vidro tipo joto pequeno de 2,5 A.
- Fornecimento e Instalao da calha de proteo para a fiao de comando e
fora que passa na parte de baixo do chiller. A original est quebrada e a fiao
est em contato direto com gua e sujeira.
- Correo com fornecimento do aterramento da mquina foi medido 90 volts
do painel para o cho que estava com gua.
- Fornecimento e substituio do isolamento do evaporador.
- Correo com tratamento e pintura dos pontos com corroso na base do
chiller.
- Fornecimento e instalao de proteo contra chuva para o quadro eltrico
geral.
- Reposio com instalao das protees acsticas dos compressores.
-Reposio com instalao das porcas de fixao das tampas das caixas de
ligaes dos compressores.
- Correo com fornecimento da operao do controle da vlvula do by pass
da gua gelada.
Transferncia de gs refrigerante 410 A p/ garrafa apropriada;

Retirada das 08 serpentinas danificadas;
Fornecimento e montagem das 08 serpentinas novas;
Soldagem em solda prata das novas serpentinas as linhas de
cobre;
pressurizao dos dois sistemas utilizando nitrognio;
TECNITEST Ltda
CNPJ:36.240.596/0001-44

tel.: 0xx21 2580-4944

fax: 0xx21 2580-4944
Substituio dos elementos filtrantes 4864 HH;

Reposio da carga de leo;
Evacuao dos sistemas utilizando bomba de vcuo;
Complementao da carga de refrigerante 410 A;
Comissionamento;
Teste de funcionamento.
ART-CREA/RJ
3.0 ) INCIO DOS SERVIOS.
O servio ter o seu incio em at 5 ( cinco) dias aps autorizao.
4.0 ) PRAZO DE EXECUO
O prazo para a execuo dos servios ser de at 45 (quarenta e

cinco) dias corridos.
5.0 ) GARANTIA DOS SERVIOS
Os servios executados tero 06 (seis) meses de garantia.
6.0 ) SERVIOS COMPLEMENTARES CARGO DO CLIENTE
Todos os referentes ao local seguro para guarda de nossos materiais

no decorrer dos servios.
Facilidade de transportes de materiais e equipamentos no local.
Fornecimento de ponto eltrico em 220 Vac at 2m da caixa de

acionamento.
TECNITEST Ltda
CNPJ:36.240.596/0001-44

tel.: 0xx21 2580-4944

fax: 0xx21 2580-4944
ESCOPO COMERCIAL
1.0 ) PREO
O nosso preo total incluindo: materiais, mo de obra, transportes e

impostos de R$ 158.960,00 ( Cento e cinqenta e oito mil
novecentos e sessenta reais).
2.0 ) CONDIES DE PAGAMENTO
25% de sinal (O.C.).

40% 28 dias aps a autorizao dos servios(O.C.).
25% 56 dias aps a autorizao dos servios (O.C.).
10% 75 dias aps a autorizao dos servios ( O.C.)
3.0 ) VALIDADE
A validade de nossa proposta at 15 de setembro de 2011.
TECNITEST Ltda
CNPJ:36.240.596/0001-44

tel.: 0xx21 2580-4944

fax: 0xx21 2580-4944
2. CONDICIONADORES DE AR DO TIPO SPLITO

Devero ser fornecidos e instalados unidades condicionadoras de ar do tipo
Splito conforme indicado anteriormente e nos desenhos de projeto, devendo
ser fornecido para tenso de 380V e 220V, sendo composto de:
* Detalhes Construtivos e Operacionais
A unidade ser fornecida com, no mnimo, os itens abaixo relacionados:
=> Unidade evaporadora com gabinete modular composta de 2 mdulos Mdulo
Trocador de Calor + Mdulo Ventilador em perfis extrudados de alumnio
fixados a cantos de material termoplstico formando um conjunto rgido. Seus
painis devero ser de fcil remoo e concebidos em chapa de ao
galvanizada com pintura a p eletrosttica, isolados internamente com
poliestireno expandido, revestido com chapa galvanizada, formando um painel
rgido interno, facilitando a limpeza. Dever contar com bandeja para
recolhimento de condensado em poliestireno de alto impacto ou ao inoxidvel
com perfeito escoamento para o dreno, com tratamento anti-corrosivo e
isolamento trmico na face inferior. Ventilador centrfugo, com rotores de
ps curvadas para frente, de dupla aspirao balanceados esttica e
dinamicamente com baixo nvel de ruido, acionados por motor eltrico,
trifsico, atravs de polias e correias, mancais de rolamento
auto-lubrificantes e auto-ajustveis. A polia do motor dever ser
regulvel.
Devero possuir filtros de ar instalados no gabinete e montados pelo
fabricante antes do evaporador em molduras de fcil remoo e limpeza com
filtragem dupla e independente com classificao ABNT G0 + G3 lavveis.
=> Unidade condensadora composta por:

* Ventiladores do tipo axial de alta potncia e menor rudo em material
termoplstico, resistente a intempries.
* Compressores do tipo Scroll apoiados em calos de borracha,
instalados na unidade condensadora, com vlvulas de servio (na suco e
na descarga), proteo contra sobrecarga eltrica por termistor, rel
trmico, controle de inverso de fases e sobrecarga de presso por
pressostatos.
* Circuitos refrigerantes hermticos em cobre sem costura com registros de
servios com vlvula de tomada de presso, filtro secador, visor de linha
com detector de umidade, vlvula de expanso termosttica,
vlvula solenide, pressostatos de alta e baixa com rearme
automtico, miniaturizados.
* Conexes de tubulaes de refrigerante rosqueadas.
* Operao com refrigerante R 410
* Serpentinas do evaporador e condensador em tubos de cobre sem costura com
dimetro no mnimo de 3/8 de espessura, dotado de aletas corrugadas de
alumnio e com nmero de filas em profundidade especificada pelo
fabricante, de maneira que a capacidade do equipamento seja
adequada especificada. A velocidade mxima do ar na face da serpentina
dever ser de 2,5 m/s.
* Termostatos de controle do(s) compressor(es) no retorno do equipamento.
* Quadro eltrico com elementos de proteo, comando e

lmpadas sinalizadoras.

Fontespesquisa Refrigeracao PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fontespesquisa Refrigeracao PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

APRESENTAO - GEMINI

1. Detalhes construtvos do gabinete.

Detalhes construtivos - GEMINI

Detalhe do perfil estrutural

Detalhes construtivos - GEMINI

Detalhe do canto em nylon

Detalhes construtivos - GEMINI

Uma armao estrutural exclusiva

Detalhes construtivos - GEMINI

Detalhes construtivos - GEMINI

Diferentemente das gaxetas de fechamento, construdas de espuma de clulas

A estrutura do painel em ao laminado permite que o equipamento opere facilmente

Detalhes construtivos - GEMINI

O GEMINI utiliza vedaes com lminas triplas, co-extrudadas que

Detalhes construtivos - GEMINI

Detalhes construtivos - GEMINI

Ventilador centrfugo de dupla aspirao com ps curvadas

Ventilador centrfugo de dupla aspirao com ps curvadas

Ventiladores construdos em chapa de ao com tratamento anti-corrosivo, e

Isolao Vibratria - Gemini

Transferncia de Calor - GEMINI

Transferncia de Calor - GEMINI

Espaamento entre aletas

Transferncia de Calor - GEMINI

Dreno para purga de gua.

Dreno para purga de ar

Transferncia de Calor - GEMINI

Posio do lado de hidrulica - GEMINI

Importante: Sempre tomar como referncia a frente da mquina,

Lado de Hidraulica Esquerdo

Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) - GEMINI

Uma bandeja para recolhimento

Para condicionadores acima

Conexo de dreno dimetro

Mdulos Disponveis - GEMINI

A unidade GEMINI formada por trs mdulos:

Mdulo trocador de calor

Mdulos Disponveis - GEMINI

Mdulos Trocador de Calor - GEMINI

O mdulo trocador de calor composto por:

Mdulos Ventilador - GEMINI

O mdulo ventilao composto por:

Mdulos Caixa de Mistura - GEMINI

As opes do mdulo caixa de mistura so:

Retorno Frontal + Ar externo Superior

Mdulos Caixa de Mistura - GEMINI

Para os mdulos de trocador de calor e caixa de mistura esto disponveis as seguintes

Sequncia de Montagem - GEMINI

Software de Seleo ECLIMA - GEMINI

Software de Seleo ECLIMA - GEMINI

Software de Seleo ECLIMA - GEMINI

Software de Seleo ECLIMA - GEMINI

Serpentina de Aquecimento (Opcional)

As principais caractersticas da linha Gemini so:

2. Nomenclatura do Mdulo de Ventilao

Arranjo x Posio de descarga

Potncia do motor (CV)

Alimentao eltrica (Obs. 1)(Pg.8)

Ventiladores - Opes de Descarga

3. Nomenclatura do Mdulo Trocador de Calor

Nmero de rows x tubos por

Nmero de aletas por polegada / Lado

4. Tabela 1 - Cdigos dos Circuitos